IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
4^
4^
1.0 ^12^ 1^
itt 122
I.I
S I& 120
^
//
'/
FhotogFaphic
^Sdaices
Corporation
1
v
k*^'
5V
<>
23 WIST MAIN STRHT
VtflBSTeR,N.Y. MStO
(716it71-4S03
'^
r
A.
\
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHIVI/ICIVIH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Institute for Historicai IVIicroreproductions / Institut Canadian da microraproductions historiques
Technical and Bibliographic Notaa/Notas tachniquaa at bibllographiquaa
Tha Inatltuta haa attamptad to obtain tha baat
original copy availabia for filming. Faaturaa of thia
copy which may ba bibllographically uniqua,
which may altar any of tha imagaa in tha
raproduction. or which may aignif icantly changa
tha uaual mathpd of filming, ara chackad balow.
D
Colourad covara/
Couvartura da coulaur
I I Covara damagad/
D
Couvartura andommagAe
Covara raatorad and/or laminatad/
Couvartura raataurte at/ou pallicul6a
n Cover titia missing/
La tit
re de couverture manque
r~y Coloured maps/
D
D
D
D
D
D
Cartes gAographiques en couieur
Coloured inic (I.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couieur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrationa en couieur
Bound with other material/
ReilA avac d'autres documenta
Tight binding may cause shadowa or distortion
along interior margin/
La re liure aarrie paut cauaar de I'ombre ou de la
diatortion la long de la marge intirieurn
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II ae paut que certaines pagea blanches ajouttes
lors d'une restauration apparaiaaant dana la taxte,
mala, lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont
paa AtA filmAea.
Additional comments:/
Commentaires supplAmentalres;
L'Institut a microfilmi la mailleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a 4t6 possible de se procurer. Les details
da cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du
point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la mAthode normale de filmage
aont IndiquAs ci-daaaoua.
I I Coloured pagea/
D
Pages de couieur
Pages damaged/
Pages endommagias
Pagea restored and/oi
Pages restaurAea et/ou pelliculAea
Pages discoloured, stained or foxe<
Pages dAcolorAes, tachettes ou piquAas
Pages detached/
Pages dttachtes
Showthrough/
Transparence
Quality of prir
Quality inAgala de I'impreaaion
Includes supplementary materii
Compreiiu du material auppiimantaira
Only edition available/
Seule Edition diaponibia
r~n Pages damaged/
I I Pagea restored and/or laminated/
r~T Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
I I Pages detached/
rry showthrough/
I I Quality of print varies/
I I Includes supplementary material/
|~~| Only edition available/
Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
alips, tissuaa. etc., have been ref limed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pacias totalament ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure,
etc., ont it6 filmtes A nouveau de fa^on A
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
Thaeo
to the
Thelm
posslbl
of the
filming
Orlgini
beginn
the las
aion. o
other fl
first pi
alon. ai
or illus
The las
ahall c<
TINUEI
¥vhlcha
Mapa, I
differei
entirely
beginni
right ai
require
metho<
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
Ce document est film* su taux de reduction indiquA ci-deaaous.
10X 14X 18X 22X
26X
30X
y
12X
16X
20X
24X
28X
32X
lair*
I dAtails
|u«s du
It modifier
ig*r una
a filmaga
Tha copy fllmad har* haa baan raproduead thanka
to tha ganaroalty of:
Library Oiviiion
Provincial AicMvtt of Britiih Columbia
Tha imagaa appaarino Hara ara tha iMat quality
poaalbia eonaMarlno tha condition and lagibillty
of tha original copy and in kaaping with tha
filming contract apaelfleationa.
L'mamplalra f ilm4 f ut raproduit grica i la
g4n4roaltA da:
Library Division
Provincial Archiva* of British Columbia
Laa Imagaa auhrantaa ont 4t* raproduitas avac la
plua grand aoir, compta tanu da la condition at
da la nattatA da I'axamplaira filmA. at an
conformity avac laa conditions du contrat da
filmaga.
iu6es
Original copias in printad papar covara ara fllmad
baglnning with tha front covar and anding on
tha laat paga with a printad or lilustratad impras-
sk>n. or tha back covar whan appropriate. All
othar original copias ara filmed beginning on the
f irat page with a printed or illuatratad impres-
•ion. and anding on the lest paga with a printed
or illustrated impression.
Les eNempiairas origlnaux dont la couvarture an
papier est ImprimAe sont filmte en commen^ent
par la premier plat at en terminent salt par la
darniire page qui comporte une empreinte
d'Impression ou d'illustratlon. solt par la second
plat, salon ie cas. Tous les eutres exemplaires
origlnaux sont filmte en commenpant par la
prami4re paga qui comporte une empreinte
d'Impression ou d'illustration at en terminent per
la darniAre paga qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
The last recorded frame on eech microfiche
shall contain the symbol — ^ (meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or tha symbol ▼ (meaning "END").
whichever applies.
Un des symboles suivants apparattra sur la
darniire imege de cheque microfiche, selon Ie
cas: la symbols — »• signifie "A SUiVRE". Ie
symbols ▼ signifie "FIN".
sire
Meps. pletes. charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too large to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right end top to bottom, as many frames es
required. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:
Les certes. plenches. tableeux. etc., peuvent Atre
filmAs A des taux de reduction diffArents.
Lorsque Ie document est trop grend pour Atre
reproduit en un seul clichA. il est film* A partir
de I'angle supAriaur gauche, de gauche i droite.
et de t ..^ut en bes. en prenant la nombra
d'images nAcessaira. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrent la mAthoda.
by errata
ned to
lant
una peiura.
fa^on A
1
2
3
32X
1
2
3
4
5
6
UNITED STATES
EXPLORING EXPEDITION.
M.u
UNITED STATES
EXPLORING EXPEDITION.
DURING THE YEARS
1838, 1839, 1810, 1811, 1812.
UNDKR TIIK CoMMANr) n i'
CHARLES WILKES, U.S.N.
ETHNOGRAPHY AND PHILOLOGY.
nv
HORATIO HALE,
PHILOLOGIST OF THE EXPEDITION.
i'nn,.u)Rr,i'Hi.\:
LEA AND B L A N C H A R D
1846.
/ ^
CONTENTS,
PAGE
ALPHABET „
ETIIXOGIIAIMIK'AI, PART.
OCEA.NirA 3
TOI.VNKSIA 4
MEl.ANKSIA ^■,
VITI, OH THE KKEJEE GROUP.. 17
MIfllO.NESIA fiS,
TOBI.OR WRD NORTH'S ISLAND 77
BANARE. OH ASCENSION ISLAND HO
MILLE, OR THE MUU'.RAVE ISLANDS 87
TARAWA, OR THE KI.NGSMILL ISLANDS go
HarL'MA, OR GRANVILLE ISLAND. 103
AUSTRALIA lOf,
MIGRATIONS OK- THE OC-EAMC . RIBES. 117
POLYNESIA 1,7
TAHITI 121
NVKUIilVA ,gg
HAWAH Iff
B
47493
yI <; (» n r K N T s.
HAWrroNliA \»
MANliAKKVA 139
IIAI'A HI
TIIK Al STKAl. IKI.ANim Ml
I'ArMirn i«
NKW ZKAI,AN1) »<•
CHATHAM WI.A.M) I«
FAKAAH) I«
VAITll'l' IM
(;k>k.iiai. ii.i.i sniATioNS i«W
.MO.N'I'HS 100
WIXDS ni
.NIIMKIIAIX 17«
MTI \M> III.V^A 174
riKoi'lA IM
TAHAWA 187
SV.V)l'Mim)K MIXKD LANtlUACJES IM
OHIIil.N OK THE HJLVNESIA.NS liM
NORTIIWESTKHN AMEUICA I'J7
PIIILOLOCUAL PART.
COMPAKATIVK tillAMMAK Of THE l-OLV.NKSrAN DIALECW tt*
E8f<AY AT A LEXICON OK THE H)LVNE8IA.N LANGUAGE »91
CNUUSII AND l-OLVNfSIAN VOCAIiULAKV 341
DIALECT OE EAKAAKO AND VAITUPl' 347
GKAMMAKOK THE VITIAN LANGUAGE 305
VITIAN DICTIONAHV 391
VOCABULARY OF THE DIALECT OK TOBI 40
VOCABULARY OK THE DIALECT OK MILLE 431
OUTUNKKOK A GRAMMAR OF THE TARAWAN LANGUAGE 43S
VOCABULARY OF THE TARAWAN LANGUAGE 44S
A0TE8 0N THE LANGUAGE OK ROTUMA 489
THE LANGUAGES OK AUSTHAUA 479
i
I;
C O N T K N T 8.
VII
rtoii
Tin: I.ANOIIAOI'at OK NOKTIIWI'XrKKN AMCHK'A B33
HVNUPHIH AND VOCABUI.AHIlUt tM
TIIK "JAWMtN' OH THADK'tANUUAdK 01' OHIXHIN (136
PATAUONIA Oai
HOUTIICHN AI'HICA M7
C'llAIIT OK OCKANIC MKiHAirONH, TO FACE PAGE I
TITAIA'8 CIIAHT. TO KACE PA(iE |j3
(rniNOtiKAPIIirAL map or GKtXiON. TO FACE PAC;E |tf7
A L V 11 A H i: T.
N rnrmitiK iIm! alphalict whioh win in lie iiwil in tliiii work, Ihi' (iriiiripli' vax* a<li>|ili'd
Ihni rnrh kliii|>l<- aoiinil alioiilil Ix' inviiriiilily ri-|>n'iH'nlr<l liv onr unci lli<- Milium I'liiiriirlrr.
Thi> bnii* uflho nytlrni in tliiit |irnpom><l by Mr. i'ickcriiiK in liit well-known Ktmiy, |inb>
linlircl in ihi- Mrmoini oflhi) Anicriciin Arnilciny of ArlH iinil Scii'iic-i'i, Soini^ nlturnlicmi
hnvi> \tn'U nuide, liul iiirli nn iiri- ii;jn'«'nlili' to llio |irin<'i|iles ihiTP IiikI ilnwii. The liiU
luwin(( are tin' uniy |ie<-uliarili('!i nt'lhc nl|iliaM wliirh ruiiniro cxplnnnlion.
I. Th« vowrU haw the iinini' ){fn<Tal iiounds at in Ihr (icrnmn, Spunixh, nml lliili:iM
lunijuiigra. .1 is Miundiil iin in Julhrr, v like a in jUte, i ns in nuuhnir, n ii<i in luilr, u
aa in ru/f, nr liko oo in coo/. Twii othor charnrlurs, i)U|{)j;f«le(l liy Mr. I'irkcring, have
bii'n loiinil niif.Hsnry — ihc one (.t) Ici rcpn-senl the miund of it in IkiI/, the olhrr (") for
lh<- (kiund oI'k in Iml, Tlieitc dii not, indiHil, (■(iiiipriw all ihediHtini'tionN nrmiunil whirh
hnvo lieen found to exist. The l-'rench ii iind (iermnn « were hi'nril in wttiw of ihi" ilia*
lects. it hiis MWRKil Ix'Nt, however, in order to avoid, a» far n» imasible, llio niiiltipliea>
lion of rlmraolers, to be contented with noting the exiHteiiec of these iiiinur shades uf
•oiind in the lanj{ua^eI in whieh they oceur.
U. The emisonants I), </, /, /<, k, /, m, n, ji, r, s, I, v, u; //> •, l>'>vc tlu ir usual
Kiiglith MiuniU. (i is always hard, as in i!ii, get. (/ (c with a crdilla) has been used
for the sound of s/< in iJiiiU. J is sounded as in Freiieh, or like : in plmirr. IJ is u.sed
for a very harsh guttural, pronounced deep in the throat, which occurs in some of the
Indian languages.
U. Tlic new consonantal characters, which it has been found necessary to introduce,
have been mostly taken from the Gret.'k. Thcia (0),itella (f) are employed to represent
Iho difTerent articulations of hard and son Ih, as heard in the words thigh and thij, — each
being the sounds which these two characters have in modern IJreek. For the latter (0>
a capital letter (^) has been formed mom nearly resembling it than the awkward triangle
of the Uroek alphabet. To represent tho hard guttural, common to the S|ianish and Cicr-
c
ppaMMwJMr' ' ' ^-in^HiiiPp
A LP II A nET.
!
miin (in Ihc former, /, — in the Inllor, c/i), the Orrck rhi (x) nnlurnlly suggrslotl itself; it
hns, however, been somewlmt nitercil, for j^n-nlrr (•onvrnionco in writing, Hnd, oa here
used (/.) nppronchoK to the onlinary j', which had formerly, in Spnnish, Ihc anme Hoiind
OS the_;. For the sort giittund (the Germiin e iK'lween two vowels), the (Jrrt^k namma,
which hns this sound in •In- modern Inngnngr, hns lieen adopted, but with n different
cnpitnl (C). The niisnl ;/i.', iis henrd in the word »*//^'<«ir, is of frequent occurrence in
the Oceanic dialects, nnd is met with ns orten at the beginning, as in the middle of
words. For this element a jicculinr chnracter ({>), compounded of the two Unglish
letters, has been adopted.
The introduction .)f these letters has been rendered necessary by the principle on
which the alphabet is constructed, and could not have lieen avoide<l without great incon-
venience nnd the uscof mnny dincriticnl points. It is possible that characters prefemble,
in some respects, to those sclecte<i, might •« suggested. These, however, have been
tested by use, and found sutficicnt for their purpose. And it should be remembered that
any new characters whatsoever must, nt first, from their very strangeness, have nn
uncouth and somewhat repulsive ap|iearaiioo,
4. The combinations of these chnrncters will be readily understood. Tha sound of ok
in iuitd, is expressed, of course, by an ; that of i in pinr by ai ; that of u in pure by iit,
iic. 7J- stands for the sound of cA in church ; dj for thot o(j and dg in jm/gr. Tf.1 is
a combination of very frequent occurrence in the Indian nnd South-Alricnn languages.
It is not so difficult as it may appear nt tir^' sight, boing merely a tl pronounced in the
side of the mouth, with n strong impulsion of tin, '.reath.
>i. The only diacritical marks employed are the usual signs of quantity, (~) and ( ),
and the acute accent (')• The first two arc used for distinguishing two shades of sound
in each of the vowel i. A is pronounced as in purt, and rt ns in jmt ; c as a in niatf,
nnd f ns in met ,• i as in machine, and i as '\n pin ; o as in the English word i:olp, nnd
() as in the same word in French ; m as oo in ^xjV, and « as in piilt ; S as a in hull, and
A as rt in what, or o in not ; n as ii in murmur, or nearly os the French eu, and ns n
in mutter. These marks are nn-ly applied except to the vowels of accented syllables,^
that is, of those syllables on which the stress of voice falls. Thus, in one of the Austra-
lian dinlects, mugin means blind, nnd tniigin, niusquito; — in both words the accent or
emphasis, is on the last syllable. The unaccented vowels are rarely sufliciently distinct
to require this discrimination. The snmc, moreover, is frequently the ease even with the
emphasized vowel, which sometimes hns a medium sound, neither long nor short,* nnd
sometimes is inditlcrently pronounced with either quantity. In such cases, the oblique
mnrk ( ) is employed to denote the syllable on »hicl' the ircent or emphasis should be
• Tlifw tthiHt>8 in the vowel aoiindi inif^Ilt Ih- ah projn dy licsif'iinti'ii hy tlie ti'fllH hrond anil x/rm/fr,
or oprn mill elmr, nit by tliodo here useil The iiainefl, li'iwevei , are uniiii|H>rttint, provideil tlie dintiiiction
be rijrhtly underHtood.
ALPIIABKT.
XI
lilnccd, n», miisn", Mnti, tiokwo. Someiinips, however, it is used nioiig with the
other innrks, iis in JJiuhiIm; in which the first syllable is cinplmsizud, ami the third is
pronounnul long.
The I'ollowiny is Ihi- niplmliet, in the order which hns been adopted for the vociiliuliirics
contained in this volume. It consists ol' thirty-two letters, which, with llio marks ol'
(]iinntity, express thirty-nine elementary sounds.
m
xtt
A
A
B
D
E
F
G
G
H
I
J
K
X
L
M
N
n
o
p
Q
R
s
T
&
U
u
V
w
Y
z
a
a
b
f
d
6
e
f
9
y
h
i
J
k
/
/
m
n
V
P
fl
r
s
t
d
u
u
V
TV
y
Z
ALPHABET.
as in mart, mat.
as a in hall, what.
as sh in shine.
as the soft th in thy.
as a in fate, and e in met.
always hard, as in go, give.
soft guttural, as in the German Tage.
as in machine, pin.'
as z in glazier.
hard guttural, as ch in the German loch.
nasal ng, as in singing, hanger.
very har.'sh guttural.
the hard or hissing th, as in thin.
as in rule, pull.
as M in burn, but.
■-."^•wr..v^!V.'-Si
.-t (.;«ita.^-t»tt-^ , , f, K,'*4# %-nir.--'
-■ t^'i^fitia^^'a.-, V-Jiv:^'«i(_?^'%^^'''
ifTT
'« \
.y^
Mftlr
i.r;*. M « t « P ' Ji K S ^ A,*,*,.
* P'. . '
^ ::.i><
««;
il'itiii
, •^'S.'-..r
' »♦, ,,. ^ ■ I.,,.,
— -Vh
VAJ( lltKUCKK \ \
I
^ _ I- ?t..-
v\
4 ■ .\
#■
-J. --^
' .•
1 • •
,..»...^..-\ V '■-"ir '"'<•. "
■ IT ILU.«l.r,
I,s;t8.;il). II). II iV l->.
' V 'I .1
1 I 1'
\.> \
UAKgt'KNAN ' • « m-KI-HIVA
Jilhtititit . ^/VfAfAmi
I' . »
..tltUttllil ^•••Tl
■ Hunnii
k::
r/iirr A/n/M \J
llnj -ui (•Unrt*
■^^Hbiriabiifl
i&i
^V
'
ETHNOGRAPHY
Ml mr , ' iii |wi 3ii ffi | » .M* li- i
in1>ili>- i-,r.i itti-,,'.
E T H N Ct R A P H Y.
OCEANIC A.
The term Oceantca is now commonly applied to the land included
in tliat portion of the f^lobe which lies between the coasts of Asia anil
America. Besides the i^reat island or continent of New Holland, it
comprises the extensive insular masses fornini^ wliat is called the
East Indian Archipelago, and the countless smaller clusters scattered
over the surface of the Pacific Ocean. The latest writers, particularly
the French voyagers and geographers, have, with much propriety,
subtlivided this region ii\to five minor departments, distinguished from
one another both l)y their natural features, and by the character of
their inhaliitants. These are Malaisia, Melanesia, Au.stralia, Micro-
nesia, and Polynesia, all of which have been visited and examined, to
a greater or less extent, in the course of our voyage. The first of these
names is applied to tlie islands in the East Indian seas occupied by
the yellow Malay race, — the principal of which are Sumatra, Java,
Borneo, Celebes, the Moluccas, the Sooloo Group, and the Philippine
Islands. The peninsula of Malacca and the island of Formosa are
also inhabited, in great part, by people of this race.
Melanesia comprises that part of Oceanica inhabited by a dark-
skinned race, with woolly or frizzled hair ; it includes New Guinea
and the adjacent islands of Arroo, Mysol, and Waygeoo, to the west.
4 ETII N()(iR A I'll Y.
iiiiil New nritiiiti, Nuw Ireljiiid, tliu Soluinoii Islands, and tlu< New
Ili'briilcs, ti) llio oast. Australid \n uiiothor nainti Ibr New Molluiid,
tlie alH)ri^iiii>s of wliicli are reiiiurkal)le tor prosoiiliii^ the singular
i-(itnl)iiiatiuii of a cornplexioii as dark as tliat of the African nu^roes,
with soft and strait^lit liair, as in the wliite race. Mirnmesia is n term
a|i|)hod to tlie lon^f raiij^e of little groups and strips of eoral rock, wiiich
are scattered over the Pacific to the nortli of the e<inator, and east of
tlie lMiili|)pini's, — the most important of wiiich are the I'elew and
Marian (or Ladrone) Islands, UanalH), the Uailack Ciiain, and the
Kinirsniill (^iroup. t^inally, the name I'olijnesia has l)een lon^ used
to designate the islands in the L'last Pacitic, inhabited i>y liKhl-coloured
trii)es, allied to the Malaisian, and all sjieakinir dialects of one general
language. Tliis being the division which was first and longest under
our observation, will be first described.
I'OLYXKSIA.
The principal grou|>sof Polynesia, with their native names and the
estimated numl«'rs of their inhabitants, are as tollows :
1. The Navigator Islands. This group is situated between 1(59'^
and 173° of west longitude, anil between 13° and l5°of south latitude.
It consists of four large islands, Saimii, Upolu, 'I'utuila, and Manila ;
and four small, Manoiio, Apolima, Orosem/a, and Ofu. Savaii, the
largest and most westerly, is almutone hundred miles in circuit. The
native name for the whole grou|) is Samoa. The po|)ulation is esti-
mated by the missionaries at tifty-si.v thousand si.v hundred, of which
four-fifths belong to the two large islands of Savaii and Upolu.
2. The Friendly Islands. These lie south-.southwest of the pre-
ceding, between the meridians of 173° anil 176° E., and the paral-
lels of l!s° and 22° S. The group consists of three distinct clusters,
that of Tonga, that of Habai, and that of Uafulti Hau. The first
named is the southernmost, and consists of two large islands, Tonya
and Eua, and several small ones. Tonga is the largest island of the
Friendly Group, for which its name is commonly use<l as a general
appellation, the island itself being distinguished by the epithet of /m&m,
or sacred. It is rather more than sixty miles in circuit, and contains
about one hundred and fifty si^uare miles. It is a low, fiat island, of
coral formation, elevated but a few feet above the level of the sea, and
covered with a rich soil of vegetable mould two or three feet deep.
I' O I. ^ N E S I A.
Under proper rultivnlion it would bo capalile of supporting a dciine
population. Kua in a iii^di inland, about half tiic si/.o of 'roiii;a. Tiio
Habai chmter, sixty miles north-nortlicast of Ton^a, consists of a ^roat
number of small coral islands, of wliicli tbe principal are Lifiikn and
s\<imuh(i. There are also two hi^li islands, Ktin and 'I'li/'iiu ; on the
latter of which is a volcnno. Sixty miles further to the north is
Ilafulu Ilau, which ronsists of the larij;e hi;;h island of Vnrnii, and a
number of small coral islands. The population of the whole Friendly
or Ton^ja Group is probably about eij,ditecn thousand, of which nearly
half belon;.? to the island of Ton^n.
3. New Zealand is an extensive insular territory, eight hundred
miles in Icn^rth from northeast to southwest, and avorai^inj^ eighty
miles in width. It isdivi<led into nearly ecpial parts by Cook's Strait,
a channel forty miles wide, — and a similar passage separates, at its
southern end, a smaller division called Stewart's Island. The whole
group is supposed to contain not less than seventy thousand stpiare
miles. The natives have no general name for it, and those given by
Cook for the two principal divisions are only partially applicable.
Te \'(ii Pouiinmn means, "The Water of Jade," and is properly the
name of a lake in the northern island, near which this stone is found.
He ahi no Maui means, "The Oll'spring of Maui," and is sometimes
employed by the natives in allusion to the prevalent belief that their
island was produced by the gwl Maui. The population is supposed
not to exceed one hundred and fifty thousand, of which nearly all are
on the northern island.
4. The Society Islands. This is a group composed of two clusters,
of which the eastern was originally termed the Georgian, and the
western the Society Islands. They are both commonly included, at
present, under the latter name. The eastern cluster comprises Tahiti,
and the smaller islands of Aimeo (of Moorea), Tetuaroa, Tapuaemami,
and Metia. In the western are Htuihitie, Raiatea, Tahaa, and Pora-
pora, all of nearly the same size, besides three or four smaller islands.
The longitude of Tahiti, the island from which the whole group some-
times takes its name, is 149° 30' W., and its latitude 17° 30' S. It is
one hundred and eight miles in circumference, and contains about
eight thousand inhabitants. The population of the whole group is
estimated at eighteen or twenty thousand.
5. The Hervey Islands are situated ten degrees from the Society
Group, in a west-southwest direction,^-or between 155° and 160° of
west longitude, and 19° and 22° of south latitude. They are seven
a
e KTIIN«)<i It A I'll Y.
ill mimlKT. Unrotoiii/ii, the luru«'st niiil iiiont woNtorly. Ik nlH>ut thirty
miloH in circiinili'mici', — Aliii, MiiiHjiiiii, nixl Ailiilnhi, iiro racli ulxmt
twenty; tlu- dIIhts, Mniih, .Mitinni. i\\u\ .U//;//^//, iirr of infonsitltTiildi'
extent. 'I'lic |)<i|)ululi(in of the whole is estimated liy Mr. WilUunm at
fourteen thousand, ol' wliieli alHUit liall'heloii)^ to Karotont^n.
0. Tlie Austral Islands are a ranu;e of small elevated islands, Hcat-
tered aloiiy; tiie southern tropie, nUmt live dei;rees south of 'i'ahiti.
'I'hey nrn — he)Tiniiiiit( from tlie west — Hinidtuni. liiinitii, I'li/iutii,
and Hdininii, — to wiiich lin/in may he added, though it is sitnate<l at
some distanee southeast of the others, and dilVers from them in many
respects. 'I'liey are all of nearly tlio same si/e, varyiii^^ from twelve
to twenty miles in eireumfereneo. The niimher of inhahitants has
l)een greatly reduced of lato years, and does not probahly e.xceed a
thousand.
7. The Ciamhicr Group is a small cluster of hitrh islands, partly
enclosed hy an extensive reef 'I'liey lie east of the Austral Islands,
in latitude ^3° S., and lon^'ilude 133" W. The native name of the
larjff^st is Miiiiijdret'd, which is about twelve miles in circumference:
the next in si/e are Al:eii<i, AhiiiKini. ami I'tiniirari. The popula-
tion is stated at a little more than two thousand.
*^. The Low or Dannerous Archipelago is the name commonly
•^iven to a multitude of small islantls, of coral formation, which cover
the ocean between the Society and ( Jambier liroups — or between 136^
and 150° of west loii^'iludc, and 1 r and t»3" of .south latitude. There
are nearly seventy whose existence and position are ascertained, of
wliicii about a tilth are uninhabited. The most important are Unirua,
or Prince of Wales' Islanil, which is an oval rin^ of small islets,
enclosinjj a lai^oon a hundred and lifty miles in circuit, — Anna, (or
more properly Sguiui,) known as Chain Island, — Makrmu, or Phillips'
Island, — and llau, or Bow Island. The population is siipposeil not
to exceed eight thousand, of which more than half belong to Anaa.
The native name of the whole range is Pukiimotii, or in Tahitian.
Paumotii.
9. The Marquesas lie between 138° and 141° of west longitude,
and between 7° and 11° of south latitude. A channel about sixty
miles in width divides tlu^m into two clusters, each containing three
large islands and .several small ones. In the southeastern cluster, the
principal islands are Hivttoa, Tahitata, and Fatuhica ; in the north-
western, sometimes called the Washington Group, are Xiikiihiva,
Uahuka, an.. Lujhju. Nukuhiva, which is the largest island of the
IM)|, V N KSI .\.
^roiip, hnH n rirrumfcroiicc of ulM)iit sixty milc^. f'dticorninjr tlic
mitiilK'r ol iiiliiilMtiiiits on tlic iNliinilM, tlic most contritiliitory iieroiiiitH
aro ^ivi'ii, — lint it tlot-H not, prolialily, uxfccd twi-iity tliousniul.
10. Tlio Santlwicli Islanils, tln^ most norlliorly uroup ol" I'olynt'Mift,
nru inclndcil between tlu; nieridiitns of ITtl^ luitl KiT' \V , and the
pariillelH of Is" niiil 'i-i° N. 'I'ln; inlialiited islands are ei^lit in iinni-
ber, — llfiirtiii, tbo larijeht and most sonllierly, coveiiny; a ynater
extent than all tbo rest iniited. It is aliont two Immlred and litty
niiles in circuit, nnd contains upwards ol'lliree tliousand live hundred
N(|uare niilcs. Miiiii, (hihii. and I'liiini, are the next in size ; and
'I'tihonlanr, Lanni, Mn/otui, nnd yiiliait, aro coinparalivly uniin-
{Mirtunt. The |M)pulation is about ono hundred thousand, whereot
rather muro than ii third are on the island of Hawaii.
Desides the «{ronps before described, there arc many smaller clus-
ters nnd siuKlo islands which re((uiro to bo mentioned. Five deijrees
due north of the Nnvi^jators are three coral islets, tlio lart^est of wliich
was on no chart until surveyed by our Kxpedition, thoui,'h it iiad
been previously seen by a whaler. It was called by the natives
Faktidfo, and was named by us Howdilch Island ; the others, which
lie west of it, are Xitkuiiono, and (hitafii, known as the Duke of York's
nnd the Duke of Clarence's Islands. The name of the Union Ciroup
was given to the three. Tlie population docs not probably exceed
one thousand.
Ten degrees west of these is a similar group of three coral islets,
which, though previously known, were first surveyed by our vessels.
Their names are Vaitiipu, or Tracy's Island, i\u/>iifil(in, (tr Dcpey-
ster's Island, and Fimufuti, or Kllice's Island. The largest is about ten
miles in circumference. The natives were numerous, but we had no
means of forming any estimate of the entire population.
North of the Friendly Group, in latitude 15° 50' S., longitude 174"^
W., are two small high islands, discovered by Schouten, and named
by him Cocoa and Tmitor's Islands. They are each eight or ten miles
in circumference, and are separated by a channel about a league in
width. The native name is AV«rt, one of them being distinguished
by the epithet tabu, or sacred. Ten degrees farther west is Good
Hope Island, also discovered by Schouten, and called by the natives
yh'.u Foil, or New Niun. At the same distance from this, in a north-
west direction, are the Horn Islands, another discovery of the same
navi;tator. The.se al.so, if our information is correct, are included in
the general appellation of Nina. On the map, the name of Allii Fatti,
8
ET UNOO RA I'll V.
(probably Liia Fatit, the Two Rocks,) is sometimes given to them.
Liite the first meiitioned, they are small in extent, bnt lofty, and sepa-
rated by a narrow channel. The number of inhabitants on these
islands is unknown, but it cannot exceed three or four thousand.
North of the Niua Croup, and west of the Navigators, in \'\° 26'
of s"uth latitude, and about 176° of west lonjijitude, is Uea, or Wallis's
Island, whicii is a compact cluster of tme high and several coral islets.
Tif,()/)iii. in latitude 12° SO' 8., longitude 169° E., is the most
westerly i.-.land now known to be inhabited by people of the Polyne-
sian race. It is seven or eight miles round, with a population of
about live hundred.
Fotniia (or Erronan) and Nina (or I/ntner) are two small hilly
islands, a few miles east of Tanna, one of the New Hebrides.
Though so near to ami constantly communicaling with the dusky
inhabitants of this group, the natives retain the physiognomy and
language of the Polynesian race.
Chatham Island, twelve degrees east of New Zealand, is peopled
by a few hundred natives, who are said to have the customs and
speak the dialect of the New Zealanders.
Savage Island lies about four degrees east of the Friendly Group;
it is small in extent, moderately elevated, and has but a scanty popu-
lation.
Pcnrhyn Island is the name given to a small ring of coral islets in
latitude 9° S., longitude 158° VV., or midway between the Mar-
quesas and Union Groups. The inhabitants were found to be nume-
rous in proportion to the size of the island.
Easter Island, or Vaihu, the most easterly of the Polynesian
islands, is situated in latitude 27° S., longitude 109° 50' W. It is
about thirty miles round, and is supposed to have not far from two
thousand inhabitants.
From the foregoing enumeration it will appear that the entire
population of Polynesia does not reach half a million. There is,
perhaps, no people which, in proportion to its numbers, has been the
subject of so much interest and of such minute investigation. This
may be ascribed in part to the character of the natives, in itself more
pleasing and attractive than that of most savages, but principally it is
due to the peculiai position of the islands which they inhabit, scat-
tered over a vast ocean, which has been, tor the last hundred years,
ploughed by the keels of every maritime power. In the course of
our voyage we visited six out of the ten principal groups, namely, the
I' () I, V N I". S I A. 9
Naviirator, Frioiully, Society, and Sandwich Islands, tiic Low Archi-
pclajfo, and Now Zealand, and sovcral of tlio sniallor islands. Of
most iM" those which wo did not see we obtained iiil'orniation, cither
throuixh inti'lliifent persons wl\o liad resided on them, or through the
natives tliemselves, whom we met at otlier j^roups. This was the
case with reirard to all the islanils named in the preceding? list, except
only Tikopia and Master Island, i'or which we must rely on the
accounts of precedinff navij^ators. A tteneral view of the results of
these observations, as respects the physical and mental characteristics,
and what may be tern>ed the national peculiarities of the Polynesians,
will be useful for the purpose of comparing them with other branches
of the human family, and especially with the other races of Oceanica.
IMI YSICAI, TR.VITS.
As a race, the Polynesians are superior to most others in physical
endowments. They are somewhat above the middle height, averaging
five feet nine or ten inches, and are commonly well formed, with
finely developed limbs and muscles. The women are inferior in this
respect to the other sex, being too short and stout t'or graceful propor-
tion ; yet most of them when young are not without a kind of pretti-
ness, and occasionally one is seen who might be termed handsome.
Their colour varies from a light to a dusky brown, with a slight
tinge of yellow. It is remarkable that the lightest shixdes should be
found nearest the equator, growing darker as we recede from it on
either siilo. The fairest in complexion that we saw were the natives
of Fakaafo, in latitude 9° S. ; next came the people of the Manjuesas,
the Navigator, the Society, and Friendly CI roups, while the natives
of New Zealand and the Sandwich Islanils are a shade deeper in hue
than the rest. The latter (the New Zealanders and Hawaiians) are,
as a body, inferior to the others in stature and beauty of form ; a fact
which will be readily referred to their less abundant food and more
laborious life. Perhaps the same circumstances will account for the
diU'orence of complexion, which may have less direct relation to the
heat of the climate than is c^ominonly su|)posed.
The Polynesians have the hair generally thick, strong, and black,
with a slight tendency to curl, dillering in this respect from the
coarse lank hair of the American Indians. In some cases we have
seen it of a lighter hue, brown or chestnut, but this is not common.
The beard is scanty, and does not usually make its appearance till
a
10
ETHNOGRAPHY.
F t
middle age. They have little hair on their bodies, and take pains
to eradicate it from the armpits and breasts, under a notion of
cleanliness.
Almost as great a variety of physiognomy is observable in Poly-
nesia as among any people of Europe. Perhaps the only general
characteristic, besides the complexion and hair, is the slight spread of
the nostrils at the base, as though the nose had been a little depressed.
The eyes arc black, but neither large nor very bright; we obscrvcid a
few individuals in whom they were set oblicpiely, like those of the
Chinese, but in general their direction is rectilinear. The forehead
varies very much in height and angle of direction, but is usually
well developed. The cheek-bones project slightly, rather more for-
ward than laterally. The nose is commonly short and straight, but
in certain tribes, and in some individuals of all tribes, it is long and
aquiline, — always appearing, however, to be slightly depressed and
widened at the lower part The mouth is commonly the best feature
in the face, the lips being moderately full, and the teeth white, even,
and well set. The chin is short and seldom prominent. The ears
are large, standing out from the head. The whole contour of the
face is oval, and the leatures, though not strongly marked, are often
so regularly disposed as to be truly handsome.
The form of the head is not such as accords with our ideas of
elegance. It is short and broad, the transverse diameter just above
the ears being nearly as great as the longitudinal, from the middle of
the forehead to the occiput. It is, at the same time, rather more
elevated than usual among barbarous races, rising highest at tlie
coronal region. The head is remarkably flat behind, a peculiarity
that is most striking in the women, from its contrast witli the long,
graceful oval, which we are accustomed to admire in the female head.
The foregoing general description is applicable to all the tribes of
Polynesia. But there are certain minor peculiarities which distin-
guish the inhabitants of the diiierent groups from one another, and
which require to be noticed.
The natives of the Samoan and Tongan Islands are a fine-looking
people. They are generally tall and well-pniportioned, with full,
rounded faces and limbs, but without that grossness and la.vity of
fibre common in the Taliitians. Their features, though not always
regular, are generally pleasing; and in j,.i.ticular, the forehead is
remarkable for its ample developeinent, which, with the breadth
between the eyes, gives to the countenance an expression of noble-
P O r, Y N E S T A.
11
ness and dignity. The people of Tonga are perhaps a little darker in
colour, and of rather more hardy make than their northern neigh-
bours, whom they otherwise closely resemble.
Of the New Zealanders, the following description is taken from our
notes made on the spot : — They are a fine race, evidently of the pure
Polynesian stock, but inferior, as might be expected, to the indolent
natives of the tropical islands in the regularity and elegance of their
physiognomy. They have neither the round, swelling muscles, nor
the soft contour of face, which distinguish the Tahitians and Samoans;
but they are strongly formed, with hard, sinewy tiesh, and bold, well-
defined features. In complexion they are a shade darker than the
islanders before mentioned. The forehead is often high, but slopes
backward ; the eyes are rather small, black, and piercing ; the nose,
which is their most distinguishing feature, is frequently aquiline, and
so prominent, that its ridge forms a straight line with the receding
forehead. Altogether, a New Zealander, in complexion, form, and
profile, comes very near a North American Indian.
Some voyagers have believed that they saw in the natives of New
Zealand at least two distinct races of men, of which one approached
the yellow Polynesian, and the other the black Papuan family. The
latter, they say, are distinguished by their shorter stature, darker com-
plexion, and frizzled hair. Our observations did not confirm the
correctness of these statements. It appeared to us that the physical
differences were no greater than are seen in every country between
different classes of people, — between the well-fed, luxurious idler, and
the half-starved, ill-clad labouring man. We saw many stinted forms
and dark complexions among them, but no instance of what could
properly be termed frizzled or woolly hair.
The natives of the Society Islands are a handsome, but effeminate
people. The difference between the higher and tiie lower classes is
particularly remarkable in the taller stature and bulkier forms, fre-
quently overloaded with fat, of the former. The forehead is of good
height, but retreats, and narrows towards the top.
The inhabitants of the Low Archipelago arc a very dark-skinned
race, with harsh, irregular features, sometimes short and thick, and
sometimes aquiline and bold. Their forms usually indicate strength
and activity, and the expression of their countenances is stern and
fierce.
The Marquesans have the reputation of being the iiandsomcst of
the Polynesian tribes; and if we may judge from some individuals of
13
E T n N O G U A P H Y.
both sexes whom we saw at Oahii, this reputation is not undeserved.
Thev were of the middle size, elcsjantly proportioned, with small and
ro!j;idar features. Tiioy laekcd, however, the intellectual expression
given by the expanded and lofty brow of the Samoans.
The Sandwich Islanders resemble the Tahitians, though of darker
hue. The difference, also, between the chiefs and common people, is
still more strongly marked, the former being generally large, and
loaded with flesh, while the latter are commonly rather small and
meagre. The head, in this people, as well as in the other tribes
of Eastern Polynesia, although broad behind, diminishes in width
towards the frontal region, and appears as though compressed at the
temples. But the characteristic which distinguishes the Hawaiians
from all the other islanders of the Pacific, is a slight projection of the
mouth, which produces or is accompanied by a hollowness in the
lower part of the cheek, and a peculiar pouting expression of the lips.
We have not found this trait especially noted by any observer, with
the exception of M. P. E. Botta, (son of the celebrated historian,) who
visited these islands as naturalist on board the ship Le Heros, and has
published his observations in the Annales des Voyages for 1831. He
says, " The mouth is large, and presents in the form of the lips a cha-
racter which would enable me to distinguish a Sandwich Islander
among any people on the earth. The upper lip, instead of being
arched, as with Europeans, seems square. The line which it traces
rises straight up from the corner of the mouth, and then, turning at a
right angle, becomes horizontal. It is, moreover, very near the nose,
which is commonly flat and broad." In the course ot >>\\r voyage we
saw, at most of the Polynesian groups. Sandwich Islanders, who had
left vessels on board of which they had served, and taken up their
residence among the natives, adopting their habits and mode of
dress; — yet we were always able to distinguish them at first sight
from the rest.
The people of the Union Group (Fakaafo, &,c.,) resembled very
closely those of Samoa, except, as has been before remarked, that
they were of a sonicwiiat ligiiter hue, a fact the more remarkable, as
they live on a low flat coral island, only nine degrees from the equator.
They are of good size, well formed, with smooth skins and little beard.
Their hair also, for some reason, seemed to be thinner than usual, and
some of them were partially imld. This circum.stance may serve to
account for the fact that among the articles which they brought ofl"
for sale were several packages of false hair, neatly put up for wearing.
POLYNESIA.
13
At Dcpcyster's Group, ten degrees farther west, are found people
speakiiifr ,hc same language with those of the last-mentioiied islands,
but of very different personal appearance. In colour, they are as
dark as tlio New Zealanders. Their hair is thick and bushy, and in
some slightly frizzled. They differ from all tlie other Polynesians in
having iihundant beards. Their skin also is rough to the touch, as in
the Molaucsiaus. For reasons which will be hereafter given, we
are inclined to believe that some admi.vture from the neigiibouring
negro tribes has given rise to these pccuharities.
ClIARACTEn.*
Tiie trait with which a stranger is first struck, in his intercourse
with the Polynesian islanders, is a general gaiety and good humour,
a desire to please, and a willingness to be amused, which are not only
in themselves attractive, but which gratify us the more when we re-
member tlie cold gravity of the American aborigines, or the sullen-
ness and irritable pride of the natives of Australia. On the other
hand, we find in the natives of the Caroline Archipelago, or at least
of some groups in it, the same degree of good humour, accompanied
by a real gooil nature and kindliness of heart, of which it is too often,
among the Polynesians, but a deceptive indication.
Connected, perhaps, with this is an extreme fickleness in their
passions and purposes, a great susceptibility to new impressions, and
a readiness to adopt new customs and new modes of tiiinking, — in
which last characteristic they differ strikingly from most savage and
many civilized nations.
' Xdtliini: is iiiorc common In the \vritinj,'s of many voyagers tlian such phrases as
Ihc lullowini; :— " These natives, like all siivaiies, are cruel anil treacherous ;" — " The
levity anil lieklcness ol'lhe savage cliiracter ;"— " The tendency to suiierstition, which is
(Innid anions; „11 uncivilized tribes;" — "The parentnl allbctions which warm the most
savage hi^art," \:c. These expressions are evidently loinidcd on a locsc idea that a cer-
tain sameness uC character prevails among harharous races, and especially that some
passion.-i and leelings arc found strongly developed in all. .\ little considersilion will
show that this view must W- erroneous. It is civilization which produces \iniforTiiity.
The yellow and lilack races of the I'acific, iidiahitiug contiguous islands, dillir more
wid<ly from each other than do any two nations of I'AiroiH'. The juiints of resemblance
Mwei 11 the negroes of .\frica and the Indians of .\merica, even under the same lati-
tudes, are very few. In delineating the characters of the ditlerent races of the Pacific,
an attempt will Ik' iiiade, by contrasting them with one another, to show more clearly
the distinguishing characteristics of each.
14
ETHNOGRAPHY.
They are unquostionnbly a people of good intellectual endowments.
Perhaps no savages have ever shown such a capacity and such a dis-
position for improvement. Indeed, it is easy to see tiiat before they
were visited by whites they had attained a grade of civilization nearly
as high as tlieir circumstances would permit. A few thousand people,
crowiled together in a small island, without metals, with no large ani-
njals for labour or transportation, and no neighbours from whom they
can by commerce supply their deticiencics, must find their progress
beyond a certain point barred by iiisurmouutablo obstacles ; and this
point there is gcxxl reason to believe that the Polynesians had nearly
reached long before their intercourse with foreigners commenced.
They are, however, more remarkable for quickness of apprehension,
and the readiness with which they accpiire mechanical arts, than for
their powers of reasoning. A sustaineii application soon wearies
them ; and the levity of their disposition influences their intellectual
efforts, as well as their passions and feelings. Their taste and inge-
nuit}' appear to advantage in the carving of their canoes and weapons,
in tiieir tattooing, and the colouring of their cloths and mats. Their
idols, which are made after an established pattern, and intended merely
to inspire fear, give no proper idea of their abilities in this respect.
Their poetical compositions show that they are not deficient in imagi-
nation. — though, in this respect, they appear, strangely enough, to be
interior to their savage neighbours of the F.eejee Group.
A disposition for enterprise and bold adventure characterizes all the
Polynesian tribes. They are a race of navigators, and often under-
take long voyages in vessels in which our own sailors would hesitate
to cross a harbour. Their insular situation will not alone account
for this disposition. The inhabitants of the Melanesian islands, in
circumstances precisely similar, are remarkable for their unwilling-
ness to wander from their homes. Captain Cook found that the
natives of Erromango, one of the New Hebrides, had apparently no
knowledge of Sandwich Land, the next island to the north, distant
about sixty miles. On the contrary, not only is a constant communi-
cation kept up among the different islands of each group of Polynesia,
but perilous voyages of many days between different groups are fre-
(juent. The natives may be said to be cosmopolites by natural feel-
ing. Accordingly, no sooner do ships make their appearance in the
Pacific than we find the islanders eager to engage on board of them,
for no purpose but to gratify their roving disposition, and their desire
of seeing foreign countries. And it is a remarkable fact, that on most
POLYNESIA.
a
of tlio <f roups, natives of the highesi rank, enjoying all the comforts
and ploiisurL's wiiich arbitrary power could aflbrd, have voluntarily
renouncfd tlieso advantages, for the purpose of visiting distant regions
and int-reasing their knowledge of the world.
The Polynesians are fond of fighting, and di.splay in their wars a
cruel and ferocious disposition. Indifi'erence to human suffering is,
indeed, one of their worst characteristics. It is exhibited not only in
war, but in their ill-treatment of the sick, the weak, and the aged, —
the oppression of their slaves, — and the customs of infanticide and
liuiuan sacrifice. Nor can wo suppose that cannibalism would exist
among any but a sanguinary people.
Another well-known trait in their character is a gross licentious-
ness, — the more remarkable as it contrasts strongly with the opposite
disposition in the different races by whom they are surrounded on all
sides.
The weakness of the domestic affections in these islanders has often
excited the surprise of their visiters, who have observed their ordina-
rily gootl-humoured and social temperament. The conjugal tie is
every where lax. Parents have little authority over their children,
even when young ; and in their old age are generally treated with
neglect, and often left to perish. Parental affection, which we
rarely see wanting in any state of society, is in this race one of the
feelings which e.xert the least influence. In some of the principal
groups, as the Society and Sandsvich Islands, infanticide, public and
systematic, was practised without compunction or excuse, to an extent
almost incredible. In Now Zealand and the Marquesas, though not
so general, it is still frequently committed, and not considered a crime.
At Tonga, a father, when suffering from disease, seldom hesitates to
sacrifice his cliild to appease the anger of the gods. It is not, of
course, to be understood that cases of strong attachment among mem-
bers of a family do not occur, — but they attract attention as exceptions
from the general rule.
A lack of conscientiousness is another unpleasing characteristic of
the Polynesian islanders. Lying, hypocrisy, and theft, are hardly
regarded by them as faults ; and there are very few who will not be
guilty of them on a very trifling temptation, and often on none at all.
In this point, the Australians, stupid and unamiable as they are, have
a great advantage over them, — and so, to a certain degree, have the
American aborigines.
Cupidity is a universal trait in this people. The hope of plunder.
16
ETIl NOO K A P II V.
and of acquiring new possessions, is the motive of most of tlieir wars;
and it Ims invariably been found, that after the natives of any newly
discovered group or island liave recovered from the first emotions of
fear, with wiiich they regarded their unknown visiters, their imme-
diate impulse has been to attack and destroy them for the purpose of
seizing upon their i)roperty.
The Polynesians are not naturally treacherous. This is by no
means from a horror of deception, but aj)parently from a mere ina[)ti-
tude at dissembling. Their wars arc rarely carried on like those of
our Indians, by surprises and ambushments, but by fair fighting in
open fields. If they have sometimes resorted to treachery, in their
attacks upon vessels, it is only when they have learned by experience
the utter iuelTiciency of their ordinary mode of warfare when opposed
to the weapons of the whites. And in almost every case where ships
have been cut off, it is worthy of remark, that those on board have, in
some way or other, either by direct disclosure, or from the bearing
and conduct of the natives, had previous warning of their intention.
They seem nearly incapable of keeping a secret. The perpetrator of
a crime is almost certain to be discovered by his own indiscretion and
inability to keep silent about it ; jjolitical conspiracies are divulged
almost as soon as formed, not through treachery but heedlessness.
When their usual air of frankness and gaiety is suddenly succeeded
by an access of ferocity, we are not to conclude, in most cases, that
the former was assumed to conceal the latter ; each exhibition of feel-
ing is natural to them, and not less so is the rapid transition from one
to the other.
But of all the qualities that distinguish this race, there is none
which exerts a more powerful influence than their superstition,— or,
perhaps, it would be more just to say, their strong religious feeling.
When we compare them with the natives of Australia, who, though
not altogether witiiout the idea of a God, hardly allow this idea to in-
fluence their conduct, we are especially struck with the earnest devo-
tional tendencies of this people, among whom the whole system of
public polity, and the regulation of their daily actions, have reference
to the supposed sanction of a supernatural [)ower; who not only have
a pantheon surpassing, in the number of divinities and the variety of
their attributes, those of India and Greece, but to whom every striking
natural phenomenon, every appearance calculated to inspire wonder
and fear, — nay, often the most minute, harmless, and insignificant
objects, seem invested with supernatural attributes, and worthy of
POLYNESIA.
17
adoration. It is not the mere grossness of idolatry, for many of them
have no images, and those wlio have, look upon them simply as re-
presentations of their deities, but it is a constant, profound, absorbing
sense of the ever-present activity of divine agency, which constitutes
the peculiarity of this element in the moral organization of this
people.
The character here described is that of the Polynesians as a nation.
But there are certain traits by which the inhabitants of the different
groups are distinguished from one another morally as well as physi-
cally. And in most cases it is easy to see that these diversities of
character have their origin cither in some natural peculiarities of the
countries which they inhabit, or in their form of government. The
New Zealanders, the Maniuesans, and the natives of the Paumotu
Group, are remarkable for their ferocious temper and addiction to
war. In the first-named, the great extent of the country, with the
scarcity of food, has caused a separation of the inhabitants into nume-
rous petty tribes, independent of one another; among these, constant
occasions of dissension arise, which inflame to an extraordinary
degree the naturally bloodthirsty and cruel disposition of the race to
which they belong. In the Marquesas, each of the large islands has
a high steep riiige of mountains running through it ; from this ridge,
lateral spurs, hardly less elevated, and almost precipitous, descend to
the seashore, thus formiyg several dee[) valleys, walled in on every
side, except towards the sea, by a natural fortification. The conse-
quence is, the existence, as at New Zealand, of numerous separate
tribes, who are continually at war, and hence the fierce, sanguinary,
and untameable character of the pco[)le. In the Paumotu Archi-
pelago, it is easy to see that each of the fifty or sixty islands which
compose it would be inhabited by a small but independent people,
and that the same result would follow.
Again, — on those groups which are situated nearest the equator,
where the heat which rela.xes the human frame culls into existence,
with little or no aid from human labour, the fruits which serve to
support life, we expect to find the inhabitants a soft, listless, and
indolent race ; while a severer clime and ruder soil are favourable to
industry, foresight, and a hardy temperament. These opposite effects
are manifested in the Samoans, Nukuhivans, and Tahitians, on the
one side, and the Sandwich Islanders and New Zealanders on the
other. In the two physical causes noted in this and the preceding
paragraph, we see the source of the combined ferocity and sensuality
ii 'Viimim^w » » w'. . ,u
■J ! 1«:>1^^^ .
18
ET UN or. RAP II Y.
of the Marqucsans ; traits in whidli they surpass all the other Poly-
nesians, and wliich liavo hitherto rendered every attempt to civilize
them unavailing.
The inllucnce of the political state of the islanders upon their cha-
racter, will be exhibited in treating of the various governments of
Polynesia.
IIELKJION— THK TABU.
It is not intended to give iiere a complete account, or even a general
outline of the institutions and customs of the Oceanic islanders; only
those will be mentioned wiiich seem peculiar to the ditl'orcnt races,
and which serve to distingui-sh them from one another. I'nder this
head must be ranked the institution of the tiihu, whidi seems to be
confined to the Polynesian race, except in those instances where it has
been borrowed from them l)y some of the neighbouring tribes. The
word tdbu, or tapu, is u.sed, like mo.st words of tliis language, either as
a noun, an adjective, or a verb. It may be defined as a law, or restric-
tion, wliich derives its sanction from religion. The latter particular
constitutes the only singularity of the system. Many of the tabus, or
social regulations, arc, no doubt, strange enough, — but not more so
than we find among most savage and many civilized nations. It is
the circumstance that these regulations, so multifarious and min "te,
are observed not merely as laws but as religious ordinances, and t.
their tran.sgression i^3 considered a sin as well as a crime, that tjives to
the institution its remarkable character. We are not altogetiier with-
out examples of similar laws in our own code. Those which relate to
disturbances of the Sabbath, and to the sanctity of the marriage tie,
are instances of the force which human enactmeuts derive from the
precepts of religion. Nor are the Polynesians the only people who
have been governed by sucli regulations. The laws of Muses, ema-
nating from a divine authority, have drawn from tliat source a vitality
which has preserved them in full vigour to this day. Among the
Jews it is tabu to eat certain kinds of meat, or to oiler in sacrifice any
thing that has a blemish, — or to touch certain animals termed un-
clean, &,c. The Mahometan code, tlie work of an earthly lawgiver,
derives from its suppo.sed divine origin a force superior to tliat of any
ordinary laws; — to those who submit to its injunctions it is tabu to
eat pork and drink wine, — or to omit certain ablutions, — or to take
food during a certain month from sunrise to sunset, &c. The institu-
P () I, Y N K H I A.
10
tioiis of Tiyc.urKtis nro nnofhor example, owinp; their nuthority loss to
their own excellence, or to the rank of the le^rislator, tlinn to the
solemn oath hy whicii he enforced their observance, and to the mys-
tery of iiis death. With the Fiacedeinonians it was tabu to use silver
money, to wear certain clothes, to eat certain dishes, ami the like.
These examples may (five us a clue to the probable ori;j[in of the
tabu-system. If the individual to whom the Polynesians owe their
present civil and religions code, for such in fact it is, was one who
claimed to conunuiiicate with divine powers, or to possess superna-
tural attributes, his |)rocepts would have, in the eyes of a i)eo[)lo so
strongly indtued with religious feeling, an authority infuiitely supe-
rior to that which they could derive from any other source. That
such was actually the case, would seem probable from certain pecu-
liarities in the language and cust«ins of the natives. In most of the
groups, the word iiliki, (or ariki, ali'i, ariU, &c.,) is the usual word
for chief In the dialect of New Zealand, however, which has retained
many features of the original Polynesian tongue that have been else-
where lost, the term (niki is a|)[)lied to an individual in a tribe who is
considered to have received, by hereditary descent, a pecidiar rank
and .sanctity, entitling him to certain ob.servances which are rendered
to no others, and making his person inviolate in war. lie has, how-
ever, no authority what.soever over the other freemen of a tribe. In
Lee's vocabulary, xriki is rendered " a representative of God, — a
priest," and wakariki, " making an ariki or priest.'' Thi.s, though
not strictly correct, is perhaps as gooil a translation as could be given.
In Samoan, d/i'i is chief, and lui'ti/i'i, priest; it seems likely that the
latter was originally the same word with the former, and that the par-
ticle I'd has lieen i)refixed for the sake of distinction.
In short, we may suppose that the author of the tabu-code was a
person, who, in the originsil seat of the Polynesian race, united the
power of a ruler and lawgiver to the dignity of a chief-priest, and per-
haps of an inspired being. From the latter circumstance, his laws or
tabus, whether promulgated as divine commands or not, would be
received and obeyed as such, and would retain their force, from this
cause, long after the legislator was forgotten, llis descendants, lind-
ing the duties of their religious office less to their taste than the enjoy-
ments of civil power, miglit, like the Tjastern caliphs, devote them-
selves chielly to the latter, while retaining the name {aliki), and
perhaps much of the homage belonging of right to the former. Such
80
ET II NOti It A \> II V.
BCPms to liiivt' Im'oh nciicriilly tlio cnso. In Now Zortlniid, iiloiio, the
civil mitliority lias Ikhmi lost, and only tlu< rolitrioiis (liu;nity rctaiiu'd.
Ill Samoa, a sciiaralion lias also Ih-imi I'tli'dcd boUvciMi tlio two olliccM,
mid a nmv word t'oniu'd to dcsiiriiato tho Hacerdotal class. In all the
otluT <][roii|)s llicrii is, [(ropcrly spcakin^x. n" iiricslliotKl. 'riicru arc
certain individuals to wlioin llu' naiiif ol' tii/iiiit/n. (or tiiliitijii, tti/iiiyti,
tahuiiit, tiiliiKi, iVc.,) is jriven, who take cliarni' ol llic loinpUis and
inia^ri's, pi-rrorin ri'lijrions ritt^s, conimuniiato with the deities, &o.
Except when enu'a^cd in the exercise of these Iniictions, they are not
regarded as persons of peculiar sanctity, anil enjoy no consideration
whatever lii^yond that which sprinj^s from their personal rank and
wealth, or their inllweiice with the chiefs. 'I'lu) word hy which Ihoy
arc called sij^nilies an artisan, or one who follows a particular profes-
sion ; a house or canoe builder, a carver, a tattooer, a director of funeral
ceremonies, iVc, are all called by this name, as well as a priest. Those
of the latter class must, therefore, be considered merely as persons
appointed by the real priests, — i. e., the i//i/ii, or chiefs, — to j^o throuf^h
the drutlj^eries of their ollice, with which they are unwilling to be
troubled.
But in refusing to exercise the ordinary functions ol the priestly
station, the chiefs have been careful not to renounce the dignity and
immunities connected with it. The extraordinary personal respect
evinced towards them cannot bo accounted for from their civil rank
alone, since it is nearly as profound among those democratic tribes,
who, like the Nukuhivans, pay little regard to their authority, as
under the despotic governments of Tahiti and Hawaii. It is tabu lor
a common man to enter without permissiontlie liou.se of a chief, or to
wear a garment belonging to him, or to stantl in his presence at cer-
tain times, or to do other acts savouring of undue familiarity and dis-
respect. The penalty does, indeed, vary accoriling to the nature of
the government. In the Manpiesas, the otl'ender would be mulcted
of some of his jiroperty, by way of expiation; in Tonga, this would
be accompanied by .severe [ler.sonal chastisement; while under the
iron rule which jirevailed in the Sandwich Islands, death was the
only atonement.
A strong argument in favour of this view of the origin of the tabu,
is found in the fact that on nearly if not (piite all the groups, there
have been, at a very late period, men who have been regarded by the
natives as partaking of the divine nature, — in short, as earthly gods.
I'OI, V NEHI A.
31
At the Nnvipnfor TNlandN two hiicIi iiidividiinlH, fiithor mid son, l)y
nariu", 'l'iiniiif(iiii(/fi, liad, lor many yi^irs, down to tlio period of tlm
first arrival of tlio iniMKioimrios, lii-ld tin; iiilialiitaiitH in alavi!<h awn,
and ruled them at their will, by tlio dread of their NUpernaturnl
power. At the 'roiiy[a [slands, tlioii^li it is not known that any
porsoti is actually worshipped, as elsewhere, there are two high
ehiefs, whose ollicial lilies are, 'I'ltiloiKja and Wnii, and a woman,
called the 'VmiKihu who are believed to \w descended from ^(kIs, and
are treated with reverence on that account by all, not excepting the
king, who regards them as his superiors in rank. In New Zealand
the great warrior-chief, llongi, claimed for himself the title of a god,
and was so called by his followers. At the Society Islands Tamatoa,
the liist heathen king of Ilaiatea, was worshipped as a divinity. At the
Manpiesas there are, on every island, several men, who arc termed
atua, or gotls, who receive the same adoration, and are believed to
possess the same powers as other deities. In the Sandwich Islands,
that the reverence shown to some of the chiefs bordered on religious
worship, is evident from a passage in a speech of John li, (formerly a
priest, !uid now one of the best informed of the native orators,) deli-
vered in 1841, and published in the Polynesian, for May 1, of that
year, in which ho gives an account of some of their ancient supersti-
tions, lie says: "Here is another sort of tabu that I have seen,
namely, that relating to high chiefs, and e-pecially to the king.
They were called gmls by some, because tlii-ir houses were sacred,
and every thing that pertained to their persons." At Depeyster's
Group, the westernmost cluster of Polynesia, we were visited by a
chief, who announced himself as the atua or god of 'he islands, and
was acknowledged as such by the other natives.
This singular feature in tho religious system of the Polynesians,
appearing at so many distant and unconnected points, must have
originated in some ancient custom, or some tenet oi their primitive
creed, coeval, perhaps, with the formation of their present state of
society. There is certainly no improbability in the supposition that
the lawgiver, whose decrees have come down to us in the form of the
tabu system, was a character of this sort, — a king, invested by his
subjects with the attributes of divinity. It is worthy of remark, that
in all the ca> in which we know of living men having been thus
deified, they nwi chiefs of high rank, and not ordinary priests
{Itijinja), or persuius performing the sacerdotal functions.
22
ET 11 N OGR A r II V.
M YTJrOI.On Y.
The religious belief of the Polynesians reminds us of the classical
mythology. There is a small numljer of gods of the first class, com-
monly not more than ten, who have various attributes. One is the
creator of the islands, another the god of war, another of thieving,
another the ruler of the region of departed spirits, &,c. After these
come a multitude of inferior deities, gods of the sea and the winds ;
tutelar divinities of islands, towns, and families, with malignant
sprites haunting the woods, caves, and desert places, whose delight it
is to torment and annoy the human race. Many of the gods are said
to have been men deified after death, or sometimes, perhaps, during
life. The first rulers of a country frccpiently received divine honours.
This 'vns the case with 'Oro at Raiatea, Taugiia at Rarotonga, and
Atea at the Sandwich Islands.
With one, or perhaps two exceptions, tiiere was no deity who was
the object of worship tiiroughout the greater part of Polynesia. The
gods of Samoa were unlike those of New Zealand, nor did the latter
country have the same objects of worship as the Society Islands. The
eastern groups, however, (Tahiti, Rarotonga, Hawaii, &,c.,) had several
of their gods in common. Tane, Tu, Rongo, (Rono or lloo,) were wor-
shipped in most of them, and appear to have been of Tahitian origin.
The exception alluded to, is in the case of Tangaloa, (or Tarawa,
Tanaloa, Taaroa,) who is worshipped in all the islands, except, per-
haps, New Zealand. He is regarded as self existent, and as the creator
of the earth, or at least the islands of the sea, and of the human
race. His usual epithet at Samoa is Tangaloa layi, heavenly Tanga-
loa. At Tahiti and Rarotonga he is termed Taaroa or Tangaroa nut,
great Taaroa. At the little newly discovered island of Fakaafo, the
natives spoke of him with great awe, as " Tangaloa i litnga i tc langi,''
Tangaloa above in the heavens. At Depeyster"s Group the natives
at first refused to pronounce the name, and then said that Tangaloa
was sacred or taini on their island. It seems likely that this was the
original deity of the Polynesians, perhaps, before tliey left their pris-
tine seat in the East Indian Archipelago. In the Tongan traditions,
he is represented as living at liulolu, a kind of terrestrial paradise,
situated far to the northwest, and sending thence his two sons to
people the islands. »
i^
POLYNESIA.
23
Another name, more generally tliffused than common, is that of
Maui or Moui. At the FrieniUy Islands this is the god that supports
the earth, and is the cause of earthquakes. Another name given to
him is Mafuil-e, and by this appellation {MafiWe or Mafu'e,) he is
known at the Navigator Islands as the god of earthquakes ; but the
deity on whom the islands rest is called Ti'iti'i Aiahnrja. At Tahiti
iMaui is, or rather was, another name for Taaroa, and was applied to
him in the capacity of the god of earthquakes. He also, according to
one story, created the sun and the islands of the sea; the latter, by
dragging after him, through the seas, from east to west, an immense
rock, {papa,) from which fragments were broken off' and formed the
islands ; after which he left the great land to the east, where it still
exists.* In the mytliology of New Zealand, Maui holds the same
place, as principal deity and creator of the world, which is given to
Tangaloa elsewhere. The natives often speak of two Mauis, the
elder and the younger, Maui-mua and Maui-potiki, who are sometimes
reprpsented as the gods who created mankind, and sometimes as the
first men. At Hawaii one of the ancient kings is said to have had
four sons, whose names were Maui-mua, Mcui-hope, Maui-tiitii, and
Maui-aUihma. The latter succeeded him on the throne, and the
history .says, that " He went to the sun and chased his beams, be-
cause they flew so rapidly ; also, that he dragged with a hook these
islands from Maui to Taula, towing them after him in a canoe ; and
had those in the canoe landed safe at Hilo, on Hawaii, then all the
islands in the group would have been united in one, but one of the
party looking behind him, the hook broke, and the expected union
failed of its consummation. "f Here is an extraordinary confusion of
the names and traditions of the three last-mentioned groups. Maui-
mua and Maui-hope correspond precisely in meaning to the two
Mauis of New Zealand; Maui-tiitii and Maui-atalana, present, in the
last term of each, the compound name, Tiitii-atalaja, of Samoa (the
j( always becoming m in Hawaiian). Fiuallj, the traditions respect-
ing the last-named Maui are evidently derived from those which pre-
vail in Tahiti. Of the probable origin of this confusion we shall have
occasion to speak hereafter.
'riki or Ti'i is another term of general prevalence, variously ap-
• Sec l''i)vslrr'.s "Olisrrvatioiis mndc during a Voyngc roiiml the World," p. 341 ; also,
lillis'.s l'i)lyiic'sinii licsciirclii's, vol. i. idiiip. v.
f Mo'oololo lluwaii, in llic llawaiiiin SpectnlDf, vol. ii. p. 'JIS.
24
E T II N O G R A I' H V.
plied. Ellis says tiiat the Tahitians considered Tii and Taaroa to be
one and the same being, but that Taaroa dwelt in the region of chaos,
and Tii in the world of light. In other traditions of the same people,
Tii is given as the name of the first man. Tii was also tiie usual
word for idol or image ; perhaps, because the first images that were
made were those of this deity, or of Taaroa, under this form. In
Rurotonga Tiki was the name of the first man, who v.r.o **upposed,
after death, to have received dominion over the region of departed
spirits ; a person who died was said to have "gone to Tiki." Tiki in
Nukuhivan and Tii in Hawaiian signify an image. In the dialect of
New Zealand, hei signifies an ornament suspended from the neck,
and the compound term hei-tiki is applied to the little distorted images
of jade which are thus worn. It has been seen that the reduplicate
form, Tiitii, in Samoan, signifies the god who supports the islands,
like Moui, in Tonga.
It seems probable that the Polynesians originally recognised but
one deity, who had dilferent appellations, according to his different
attributes and oflUces. As the creator of the world, he was termed
Tangaloa ; as the sustainer of the earth, (or, perhaps, originally, as
the preserving power,) he was called Maui, and in the form in which
he revealed himself to man, he had the name of Tiki. The meaning
and application of these names has, however, been much confused,
and undergone various alterations. The inferior divinities, who vary
from one group to another, are generally supposed, by the natives
tiiemselves, to have been merely deified men.
u
COSMOGONY.
Two stories are prevalent among the Samoans with regard to the
creation of the world, or, at least, of their islands. Both attribute the
work to their great god, Tangaloa. According to one account, while
the god was fishing, his hook caught in the rocks at the bottom of the
sea, and in drawing it up, he raised with it the whole group of Samoa.
The other story represents him as forming the land by throwing
down large stones from the skies, from whicii his daughter, Tuli,
(snipe,) made the different islands. She afterwards planted them
with vegetables, one of which was a kind of vine, from whose stem a
god, named ^'gui, tbrmed the first man, by marking out the body and
members of a human being.
In Tonga the first of the.se stories is the one generally received.
POLYNESIA.
8S
They add to the Samoan account that when the god Tangaloa had
raised tlie islands to tlieir present altitude, his hook broke and left
them ill that situation ; otherwise, they would have continued to rise
until tliey formed one great land. The New Zealanders and Tahi-
tians have the same account ot' their islands having been drawn up
by a god while fishing, and both give to this god the name of Maui,
which, as we have before shown, is but another appellation for Tan-
galoa. The Tahitians have, besides, other stories, one of which, — to
the effect, that the islands are fragments broken off from an immense
rock, — has been already given. The word for rock is jjapa, which is
also the name of the wife of Taaroa, and from this source some con-
fusion may have arisen, as some of the traditions relate that the
islands were born of Taaroa and Papa.* The Hawaiians, according
to the Mo'o-olelo, before quoted, have the same story, that the islands
were born of Papa, the wife of Atea, the progenitor of the human race.
The belief, so generally prevalent, of the islands having been raised
by a divinity, from the bottom of the sea, will appear natural enough
if we consider the circumstances and character of the people. The
situation of their islands, mere specks of land, surrounded by what
must have appeared to the inhabitants an interminable ocean, and the
fact that the Polynesians are emphatically a nation of fishermen,
would be sufficient to suggest the idea. When the priests, to whom
the religion and mythology of the race were especially committed,
were called upon to account for the formation of the land which they
inhabited, they would, of course, refer it to their great god Tangaloa,
or -Maui, and no other mode would be so likely to occur to them as
that by which they themselves had frequently drawn up fragments of
coral rock from the bottom of the sea.
The fact that two or more stories are sometimes current on the
same group, shows in what light they are regarded by the natives, —
not as articles of their religious creed, which they are bound to be-
lieve, but merely as traditions handed down from their fathers, which,
though respectable for their antiquity, may, after all, not be true.
Their opinions on this subject, therefore, differ widely from those
which they hold with regard to the existence and power of tlieir gods,
of which none of them entertain a doubt.
Pulyiicsian Kcsearches, vol. i. p. a60, Am. edit.
26
ETH.N OU II A !• II V.
W O II S II 1 P.
If we may judge from what appears in the eastern groups, the
original form of worship of the Polynesians was no less simple than
their theology. In Samoa, Tonga, and New Zealand, their divinities
are regarded as spiritual beings, and approached only by prayers,
invocations, penances, offerings of first fruits, libations, and similar
forms. They have neither temples nor altars, nor, properly speaking,
either idols or sacrifices. In Samoa, indeed, tiiey had a few inani-
mate objects of reverence, which were worshipjied by a small portion
of the population. Mr. Heath says, " A branch of bamboo, set up-
right, with a bunch of cocoa-nut fibres tied at the top, was worshipped
by part of Manono, a sacred stone by another district, and some
families had roughly-carved wooden idols, as representations of de-
ceased chiefs, to whom they paid religious homage.'* In the latter
custom, of preserving the effigies of deified chiefs, we probably see
the origin of the idolatrous worship which prevails in eastern Poly-
nesia. In Tonga they have a few images as in Samoa, but the chief
peculiarity in their system is a certain kind of human sacrifice, which
differs from that of the Tahitians in its mode and object. On the
sickness of a chief, it is usual to strangle an infant belonging to the
same family, — sometimes his own child, — who.se death it is supposed
will be accepted by the gods, in lieu of that of the sick person. In
New Zealand there are no idols of any description, and the only
approach to human sacrifice is the custom of immolating several
slaves at the death of their master; which, liowever, is done rather
out of respect to him, and to provide him with attendants in his
future existence, than for the purpose of appeasing the gods.
In the eastern groups we meet with a wholly different form of
worship, with sensual and shocking rites. In Tahiti and Rarotonga
the word marae, which in the Navigator and Friendly Islands signi-
fies merely the public place or lawn in the centre of a village, is ap-
plied to certain .sacred enclosures of stone, containing two or three
houses, where are deposited the hideous idols which they worship,
and in or before wliich their sacrifices are performed. In the Sand-
wich Islands similar enclosures exist, bi\t with the name of heiau.
In the Marquesas the maae is merely a grove, containing idols, and
• Polynesian, vol. i. No. IS.
1' () I, Y N K S I A.
27
not surrounded by an enclosure. In all these groups human sacri-
fices were coniinon. Tlio individuals selected were men of low rank,
who had made themselves obnoxious to the chiefs or priests, and who
were put to death as much to glut the vengeance of their oppressors
as to propitiate the favour of tiic divinity.
The native superstitions on the subjects of sorcery, inspiration,
omens, apparitions, the worship of animals, and other similar matters,
are not so j)eculiar and distinctive as to require a notice here. Their
ideas, however, with respect to a future state, merit attention. At the
Navigator Islands dilferent opinions prevail. All believe in the
existence of a large island, situated far to the northwest, called Piil6tu,
which is the residence of the gods. Some suppose that while the
souls of common people perish with their bodies, those of the chiefs
are received into this island, which is described as a terrestrial ely-
sium, and become there inferior divinities. Others hold, (accordi ig
to Mr. Heath,) that the spirits of the departed live and work in a dark
subterraneous abode, and are eaten by the gods. A third, and very
common opinion is, that the souls of all wlio die on an island, make
their way to the western extremity, where they plunge into the sea;
but what then becomes of them is not stated. The rock fronj which
they leap, in the island of Upolu, was pointed out to us; the natives
term it " Fatu-asofia" which was rendered tlie "jumping-off stone.''
Some one or other of ti^ese three opinions prevails in every part of
Polynesia. At the Friendly Islands, that which relates to the i.sland
lying to the westward, called by them Buh'itu, is the mo.st common.
In New Zealand the dei)arted spirits are supposed to proceed to the
northern end of the island, where, from a rock, called ReiiKja, they
descend into the sea, and pass through it till they reach the islands of
the Three Kings, a small cluster, about thirty miles from the North
Cape, on which is placed the elysium of the islanders. At the
Society Islands, according to Mr. Ellis, they supposed that the soul,
on leaving the body, was conducted to the^o, or place of night, where
it was eaten by the gods, — not at once, but by degrees, — and after it
had three times undergone this operation, it acquired the rank and
attributes of a divinity. They also believe in the existence of a para-
dise, termed by them Rohutu noanoa, or sweet-scented llohutu, which
was the abode of the gods and of deified spirits. It was situated near
a high mountain, called Tamahani nnauna, glorious Tamahani, on
the northwest side of the island of Ilaiatea. Rohutu may be a cor-
ruption of Purotu. Tlie Rarotongans, says Mr. Williams, " repre-
28
ETIINOGR A I'll Y.
■^1*!
seiitcd their paradise as a very lonsr house, encircled with heantifid
slirubs and llowors, wliich never lost their bloom or fraj^rauce, and
whose inmates enjoyed iinwitlieriii<if beauty and unfading youth."
Tile name ot" tiie presidiny; deity of tiiis abode was Tiki. At the
Sandwich Islands the natives held opinions very nearly the same as
tiiose of the Society Islanders ; the s|)irits of the dead either went to
the jm, or place of nij^ht, and were eaten by the gods, or they de-
scended to the regions below, where Atea and Milu, the first sove-
reigns of Hawaii, had their kingdom. It should be observed, that in
the dialects of all tlie islands, except New Zealand, the words Mow,
koranl, and uestirard, are synonymous. Those accounts, therefore,
which rei>resent the abcxle of spirits as a subterranean hades, and
those which make it a terrestrial paradise, lying to the westward,
have probably a common origin, and owe their dilference to the dif-
ferent acceptations of the same word.
H J
CIVIL POLITY.
A very simple form of society exists in all the Polynesian islands.
There are usually three classes or ranks, — chiefs, landholders, and
common people. In New Zealand, however, the first is wanting,
and in the Sandwich Islands the second. The relative powers of
the three classes also vary at tiie dirterent groups. On this subject it
will be necessary to enter into some particulars.
At the Navigator Islands the government is nominally, and in part
actually in the hands of the whole bo<ly of alii, or chiefs. But tlieir
power is not arbitrary. The householders {(nhifaks) of a district are
the recognised councillors of the chief, and he seldom takes any im-
portant step without consulting them. It i*; not uncommon for a
chief, whose course is displeasing to the people of his district, to be
deposed by the united action of the landholders and the neighbouring
chiefs, and another appointed to his ollice. The common people are,
in general, the relatives and dependants of the tulafaks, and have no
direct influence in the government.
Of chiefs there are three grades, not distinguished by particular
titles, but by the terms which are used in speaking of or to them
Two or three of the highest, whose influence extends over the whole
group, are of the first rank. Their near relatives, and the rulers of
large districts tbrm the second. The third comprises the petty chiefs
of single towns, whose power will vary of course with the number of
POLYNESIA.
29
their people. As an example of the difference of language ahove-
mentioned, the expression "to come" may be adduced. Speaking of
a common man, they would say iia alu mat, he has come; of a
tuUifale, u(i alaln mat ; of a petty chief, tia maliii mat ; of one of the
second class, tta suxii mat ; while for one of the highest rank, it would
be tia a/in viai, and the same expression is also used in speaking of
a god.
There is reason to believe that at some former period a monarchical
government prevailed in this group. The title of tiipn, or sovereign,
is still given to a chief who, in rank, wealth, and influence, is superior
to the rest — but more as a mark of respect, than as conveying any
additional authority. Nor is it now hereditary, whatever it may for-
merly have been. The government is carried on after a regular
system, somewhat like that of a representative republic. The chief
and householders of every town and inferior district meet frequently
in council, (or, as it is called, afotio,) to decide on all matters of public
interest within their limits. The large districts are in like manner
regulated by the governing chief, the petty chiefs, and principal land-
holders ; and any matter affecting the entire group is determined in
a general assembly, or fono, of the high chiefs, each of whom is at-
tended by a tiilufale, who acts as his advi.ser, and usually as his orator.
The decision is not by voting, but by general consent, the discussion
being prolonged until some conclusion, satisfactory to the greater part,
and particularly to the most influential, is arrived at. Their deci-
sions are termed tulafono, or acts of council. One of the principal
prerogatives of the tupti seems to be that of convoking these assem-
blies; though, should he refuse to do so, when circumstances seemed
to recjuire it, they would undoubtedly meet without him.
As might be expected in a government partaking of a republican
form, parties exist in Samoa, which, if not based on such important
principles as tho.se of civilized countries, do not yield to them in vio-
lence. That party which has the ascendency is termed the mal6, or
strong ; the other is the vaivai, or weak — answering nearly to our
"administration" and "oppo-sition." The general government of the
country is, in fact, conducted entirely by the former, though the chiefs
of the latter generally retain their power in their respective districts.
The head-quarters of one party are in the populous di.strict of Aana,
or the eastern coast of the island of Upolu ; those of the other, on the
small island of Manono, which is only divided from this district by a
channel about three miles broad. The two stand to each other very
8
30
E T II N O G R A P II Y.
much in the relation of Athens and Sparta in ancient Greece. The
adherents of both are scattered over every part of the group. The
inhabitants of one town will belong to the Aana party, and those of
the next adjoining to tiiat of Manono. The superiority of one party to
the other depends upon its superior strength ; and this is determined,
not at the polls, but on the field of battle. The last great " struggle
of parties" took place in 1830. Tamalhinga, the chief who has
already been mentioned as pretending to the attributes of a god, he-
longed to Manono, or, at least, to that party. Relying upon his sacred
character, he was guiliy of many acts of oppression and brutality
towards the people of Aana, who, at last, outraged beyond endurance,
rose upon him and put him to death. A general war ensued between
the adherents of Aana and Manono, which, after continuing, with
various fortune, for several months, resulted in the overthrow of the
former; since which time they have been considered the vaioai,
or weak party. The use which the victors made of their newly
acquired power was appalling. The whole district of Aana, more
than thirty miles in length, was ravaged and depopulated. Large
fires were kindled into which the prisoners were thrown — women and
children as well as warriors — and burned to death. The con(|nered
district remained without an inhabitant till 1836, at which time the
other party, having become converts to Christianity, removed the in-
terdict, and allowed the fugitives to re-occupy their lands. It then
became apparent that the form of government under which they live
is not without its advantages. Had the people of Aana been an inde-
pendent tribe, they would probably have been exterminated, as has fre-
quently been the case in New Zealand — or, at the very least, reduced
to slavery. But from the nature of their political relations, it hap-
pened that nearly every person of note among the conquered party
had some kinsman or friend in the ranks of the mal(') ; with the.se they
took refuge after their defeat, and, except those who were captured
and destroyed in the first (lush of victory, very few were put to death.
When we visited these islands, only three years after the return of the
expelled party to their homes, Aana was the most populous district in
the group, and few traces remained of their defeat, except their politi-
cal inferiority.
Another striking advantage of their system of polity is found in the
freedom from taxation, and the general mildness of the government.
The chiefs of the opposition dare not oppress their subjects, for fear
of an appeal to the ?nald j while those of the latter are withheld from
P O L V N E S I A.
31
an arbitrary exercise of their power by the great variety of interests
whidi exists amonjr them, and by tlie fear of rendering some of their
adherents disaffected, and thus strengthening the opposite party.
Accordingly we found nowhere in the Pacific such a general diffusion
of the means of subsistence and enjoyment, or so httle difference in
point of comfort and ease of life lietween tlie higher and lower classes.
In Tonga tlie system of government is, at present, not unlike that
of Samoa. When the islands were visited by Cook, Mumui was
king, and possessed great, though not arbitrary, power. His son and
successor, Tuku Alio, was put to death for his tyranny by one of his
subordinate chieftains, — since which time the political power remains
in the hands of the principal chiefs, thougli the kingly title is still
given to a son of Tuku Alio. This title is Tui-Kana-kabolo, or Lord
of Kana-kabolo, the district in which he is crowned. It is not
directly hereditary, for the person who liolds it can only obtain it by
the suffrages of the chiefs ; but they usually elect some one of the
family to which the last king belonged — either a brother, a son, or a
nephew. The whole i.sland of Tonga is divided into districts, each
of which has a chief, who is nominally appointed by the king; but
this appointment must be made according to certain received usages,
and must, moreover, he confirmed by the whole body of the chiefs.
The official titles of these lordships are sometimes derived from the
name of the district, as, Tui-lklehaki, Lord of Belehaki ; but more fre-
quently they are distinct appellations, of unknown origin, — asT ««/, the
official title of the chief of Iluuma (wlio.se proper name was, in 1840,
Loloa) ; Ata, for the district of Hihifo, Lavaka for that of Bea, &c.
In one view, the government may be considered as a kind of " family
compact," — for the persons holding the offices and titles above-men-
tioned address one another by the names of father, son, uncle, grand-
father, and the like, without any reference to their real relationship.
Thus Taufahau, in 1840, notwithstanding his great power and influ-
ence, as sovereign of Habai and Vavau, was considered as a mere
youth, a " grandson," by the haughty office-bearers of Tonga, and in
a /iY/«a-party was obliged to seat himself at the foot of the ring, among
the common people and chiefs of low rank.
Next to the chiefs are the matabiifes, who are the same class as the
tuhifaks of Samoa. Their power, however, is less, as that of the
chiefs is greater, than in the latter group. The lower orders con.sist
of miias and tuas (meaning literally, those before and those behind).
The former are the relatives of matabuks, who may succeed them in
32
K T II N O li R A V II Y.
their rank and possessions ; the iiitter fire the frrcnt muss of tlio pco|)lo,
who hiive no political ri<;hts. The condition of this class is as much
worse than in the Navigator Islands as the government is stronger and
i)otter organized for the purposes of oppression. It is, however, milder
than that of Tahiti, and infinitely |)referahle to the debasing despotism
which existed in the Sandwidi Islands.
Habai and Vavau, which were formerly tributary to Tongatabii, are
united under an independent government, with the same classes of
chiefs (viki), landholders {matabuk), and common people [muu and
tiia).
New Zealand. — According to the information derived from the
natives, the inhabitants of the north island, which contains nearly all
the population of the group, are divided into one hundred and four
tribes. These tribes are das.sed by them under four general designa-
tions. The Xtjfipii/ii, comprising thirty-tive tribes, possess the north-
ern peninsula, down to the isthmus of Manukao. The population of
this part of tiie island has been very much reduced by ilisease, and
the devastating wars carried on since the intrmluction of tire-arms.
The SgiitinKiru — fourteen tribes — inhabit the coast from the isthmus
to the KastCape, including the Kiver Thames and the Bay of IMcnty.
The Nf/iiti/i(ili/hi(/ii/iii, tlie most numerous of all, including forty-nine
tril)es, |)ossess the whole eastern coast, from the Cape to the entrance
of Cook's Strait. This is the most [)opidous part of New Zealand,
and that which lias been least visited. Finally, the Ngaiiriiiinui,
comprising only nine tribes, are thinly scattered along the shores of
Cook's Strait, and the western coast of the island, as far north as the
isthmus of Manukao. Of most of these tribes the names begin with
\(jiiti, Sijai, or jVyr/, as SyatireiKju, y!<j(iti(ni'(i, IS'fjaifantd, Myutipu.
It seems probable that these are, in fact, clans descended from a com-
mon ancestor, anil that the names stand for nga tumaiti a liciif/ii, &c.,
the children of Rcnyii, Awa, 'i'ama, 'J'ipii. In expressing this opinion
to *he natives from whom our information was obtained, they agreed,
after some discussion among themselves, that it was likely to be cor-
rect. On another occasion, a native whom we cpiestioned as to the
country from which the New Zealanders were derived, declared that
they came from no other place, but belonged to the land, like trees
and stones. He said, moreover, that the first man (tiipuna, ancestor)
was Taivake. This was at the Bay of Islands ; and on referring to
the list of tribes, it appears that that which inhabits the town of Koro-
rareka, on the south side of that buy, is called Ngaitawake ; it was
POLYNESIA,
33
l)roh!il)ly to tliis that the man Ijelon^^od, and liis assertion was true as
regarded the |)articular clan of which he was a mcrnhcr. The names
of some of tiic trihes hcgin with waniiu, meaning " oll'spring :" as the
Witntni-d-Hudtdiiparr, oH'spring of Hviatanpare, at Tokamaru Bay, —
the WiiiKiu-a-Uoiifjolxulii, at Tnranga, or Poverty Hay.
At present, the various triljes or chins are entirely independent of
one another, nor does any peculiar connexion appear to exist hetween
those which constitute the principal divisions, though this may formerly
have been the case, li is possible the arikis once had a civil power
united witii their religious raidt, and that in some cases this authority
may have extended over a large territory, — though we find no positive
indications of such a state of things beyond the general designations
applied to a number of tribes, and the fact that the reverence paid to
the ariki, as a sacred personage, extends frequently beyond the limits
of the tribe to which he belongs.
Not only is every tribe independent of all the others, but every
freeman or rauyatim in a tribe considers hitnself equal in rank to the
rest. The class of chiefs, properly speaking, does not exist. But as,
in every society, there will be some one who, for his superior wisdom,
elociuence, prowess, wealth, or family connexions, will be acknow-
ledged as the head and ilirector, and as the representative of the rest
in their public transactions, we find, in New Zealand, that every tribe
has its rdiigatini rdhi, a title which is sometimes rendered " high
chief," but of which the more exact translation would be "chief
citizen," or " head freeman." The office is not hereditary, though it
will be easily understood that many circumstances will usually com-
bine to retain it in a particular family. Besides the raiujdtiras, the
only class is that of slaves (tdurekareka). These are persons taken
captive in war, or the descendants of such. They are considered to
be the property of their masters, who may dispose of them at will,
and put them to death without interference. This is frequently done,
not merely in anger, but ofteii from pure wantonness, or to indulge
their cannibal propensities. On the other hand, the rdugatiras do all
the fighting, the slaves merely accompanying them in their expedi-
tions, to carry their arms and prepare their food.
The effect of this form of society on the character of the New Zea-
landers reiiuires to bo noted. It has already been said that their
division into numerous tribes, and the continual wars which result
from it, have tended to render them ferocious and bloodthirsty. The
general equality of rank among the freemen, and the absence of a
9
84
KT II N ()(■ II A I' II Y.
!
goveriiiii(j nutlioritv, uivos tluMii « stroiii; soiiso of |)orsonal iiuh'peii-
(liMice ; wliilo tin- Imbit of (lomiiieoriiiix at will (ivit tlu'ir hIiivos is
calciiliiti'd to roiuU-r tlioiii liauij;lity. 'I'lii'so coiiiliitii'd traits arc all
strikiiij^ly appurnit, ami they lu'aiiy ovonoiiu! tlui (iiNpositioii to
fraiikiiesN and ^oud hiiiiiour w liicli is a ircncral cliaractcriHtio of llio
Polynesian race. 'I'iie New Zeaiander approaelies in eliaracter, as
in appearance, to the American Indian, lie is exceedingly proml,
ot'ten sullen, and always (|nick-leinpered. We have seen a common
raiigutini excited to tiiry hy a little teasin;", inti'iided in perfect p;ood
nature, and w hich, nt any other island, would only have called forth
lauffhter and repartee.
In the Society Islamls, the three classes of arii or chiefs, rantira
or landholilers, and nitiiKihiiiif or common people, exist, as at the
Samoan liroup. There is also a head chief, arii ru/ii, who is com-
monly termed the king, but who hears, in fact, the same relation to
the other chiefs, as does the raiKjulira rahi of New Zealand to the
other freemen. His power varies acconling to circumstances, and
depends much upon his personal character. It is never purely arbi-
trary, and is sometimes almost null. Tiie inlluenceof the high chiefs,
as well as that of the landliolders in the government, is always very
great, and the king seldom ventures to take any step in opposition to
their united sentiments. The most remarkable feature in the govern-
ment of this country is the rule which re(|uires not only the king, but
every chief and landholder, immediately on the birth of an heir, to
resign to him his rank and possessions, and retain merely tlie regency
(in case of the king) or the temporary control, until the heir has
attaineil the proper age to assume the management. Mr. Ellis sup-
poses that the object of this regulation is to secure the succession in a
family, and to guard against the confusion and di.ssensions which fre-
((uently follow the death of a chief in the other groups.
At Ilarotonga there are, according to Mr. Williams, four classes;
the ariki or high chiefs, the jniiltiiiipo or governors of districts, the
raiKjutiia or landholders, and the uiKja or tenants. The class of dis-
trict chiefs, however, exists in all the groups, and though forming a
|)eculiar grade of nobility, is not properly to be considered a distinct
class from the other chiefs.
The natives of the Paumotu Archipelago gave us the names of
sixty-two islands belonging to it, of which thirteen, lying chietly on
the southern and southeastern border, were said by them to be unin-
habited. The inhabited islands may be classed, politically, under
1M> I, Y N KHI A.
US
two iliviNiouM, onstcru arid wostorn. 'V\w fornior incliKli^s Ifaii, or
Dow Island, mid idl to tlio I'liHt of it; tlio liiiter, tlioso lyiii^ in tlio wust
ot this isliiiid, tiiirty-iiiiiu in number 'I'lic inliultitants of tlio former
are independent, and still in their siivii^e stiite, Imviiijui little comma-
niciition with one another. TIioho of tlie latter arc under the sway of
iWjdiKi, or AiKiti, commonly called Chain Island. This supremacy is
of modern date, and has been gained by coiKpiest. WIkmi the other
islands were first visited by sliips, they were found inlialnted by a
numerous and warlike population. About the beginning of the
present century, the natives of Ngani'i began to accpiire a superioritj
in arms over the rest. They attacketl one island after another, de-
stroying most o*" llio people, and carrying the remainder captives to
their own island, where they became the slaves of their coiKiuerors.
In this way, thirty-eight of the I'auinolus were comi>lctely depopu-
lated. On the introduction of Christianity, which took place about
twenty-five years ago, through the agency of native 'i'ahilian mis-
NionarieB, many of the captives were allowed to return to their several
islands, — remaining, however, under the dominion of Ngana, which
they consider the metropolis. The number upon each of the subject
islands is very small, while on Chain Island there are said to be three
or four thousand. How it happened that this peoph? should have
originally obtained this superiority in war, cannot easily be explained.
Their island is surpassed in size by several others. It has, however,
a shallow lagoon, abi)unding in fish, which gives them a gootl supply
of food, and the island is said to bo a grove of cocoa-nut trees from
one end to the other. The probability is, that it hud always a some-
what larger population, in proportion to its size, than the others, and
being situated at some distance from the rest of the group, it was less
exposed to sudden attack, and its people were more enterprising. A.s,
moreover, they have always kept up a fretpiont communication with
Tahiti, they were probably supplied with firearms sooner than the
peo|)le of the other islands.
The Chain Islanders acknowledge no king, but have several chiefs,
who owe their iniluenco to various circumstances of birth, valour,
reputed wisdom, &c. The state of society bears a general resem-
blance to that which prevails in New Zealand. The Paumotus are
generally considered as under the Tahitian government, but the sub-
jection is merely nominal. The Society Islanders, in fact, stand in
some dread of their fierce and warlike neighbours.
At the Marquesas there is less distinction of rank than at any other
rtrr
< ill
36
ETHNOGRAPHY.
group. There are certain persons to whom the title of aiki (or, more
commonly, hakaiki) is given, but it procures them no power or
influence beyond wliat they would otherwise possess. All that they
derive from this distinction consists in certain tokens of respect which
are paid to thein, in accordance with the regulations of the tabu-
system. The rest of the people are landiiolders, or their relatives and
tenants. A general feeling of equality and personal independence
prevails, as in New Zealand. There is, however, this difference, that
the slave-class being for the most part wanting, the pride of superi-
ority is not felt. The jNlanjuesans have all the ferocity and all the
free spirit of the New Zeaianders, and are far more sensual and dis-
honest ; but the sullen hauteur which we find in the latter is very
rare among the former. Tliey are, on the contrary, a frank, social,
light-liearted people, very agreeable in a brief intercourse, but with
few good qualities 1o attract on a longer intimacy. Besides the
hakaiki, there is usually, in every tribe, a toa, or chief warrior, whose
business it is to lead, or rather precede them to battle. But even
there his authority extends but little beyond the right of advising, and
every man fights or runs away according to his individual notions of
propriety. In the naval branch of their service the same democratic
principle prevails. Their war-canoes arc large, and composed of a
number of pieces ; each piece frecjuently lias its separate owner,
whose consent must bo ol)tained before the whole can be put together.
In the Sandwich Islands, before the adoption of their present written
constitution, a peculiar form of government prevailed, differing from
the rest in the absence of a mid<lle class of land-proprietors. All the
land in the group was the property of the king, and leased by him to
inferior cliiofs {hatu-aina, literally "landlords"), who underlet it to
the people. As the king, however, though absolute in theory, was
aware that his power depended very much on the co-operation of the
high chiefs, they became, to a certain degree, partakers in his autho-
rity. The power thus lodged in the liands of the king and chiefs was
as despotic as could well be imagined. Any man, from the heads of
districts to the lowest of the people, might, at a word, be stripped of
all his possessions, and driven out a houseless wanderer. The conse-
([ucnce was, a degree of op|)ression to which nothing similar was
known in any other part of Polynesia. It was a grinding tyranny,
by \\»liich every morsel of food, beyond what was necessary lor the
existence of the labourer, was wrung from iiim to support the chiefs
and tlieir numerous attendants in a life of idleness and profusion. In
POLYNESIA.
37
no other group was the difference so striking between the nobles and
the common people. The former were above the middle height, and
of enormous bulk. They became large, fat, and sleek, like prize oxen,
and by the same process of idleness and huge feeding. The latter
were small and thin, with a coarse outline of form and feature. Not
less contrasted were the manners of the two clas.ses. Tlie deportment
of the chiefs was haughty, bold, and commanding; that of their sub-
jects humble, timid, and mean. The chiefs were heartless and cruel
from luxury, and the habit of undisputed sway, and their subjects,
from misery, and the results of long oppression. The former sacri-
ficed human beings by hundreds to atone for a broken tabu, and the
latter murdered their own children to escape the trouble of supporting
them. In short, it was, perhaps, as bad a government as could have
been devised. The root of the evil was undoubtedly the system by
which the title to all the land was vested in the king. According to
the native account, this feature in their polity was the result of a
voluntary renunciation of their rights by the people themselves. In
the " Moo-oleb IlaiVdii" it is stated, that " in the reign of an ancient
king of Hawaii, by name Pui-atalani, his subjects were freciuently
accusing each other, and he was occupied in adjusting their difficul-
ties. At length he became weary of his burden, and said to his
people, ' I am tired of ruling over the land, and will no longer have
the care of it. It will be better for you, my subjects, to look after
your own lands, in a way to suit yourselves ; and I will take care of
my own.' They therefore managed their own affairs, but not long;
for, perceiving that the country did not prosper under this arrange-
ment, they restored it to their former ciiief In this way, perhaps,
the land became the chief's."*
CANNIBALISM.
The Polynesians may, without injustice, be called a race of can-
nibals. In New Zealand, the Ilervey Group, the Gambler Islands,
the Paumotu Archipelago, and the Marquesas, the practice is or
was universal, and is confessed by the natives with no apparent feel-
ing of shame. In the Navigator, friendly. Society, and Sandwich
Islands, though not common, it was, in former days, occasionally
practised, and (what is the most important point) was not regarded
* Hawaiian Sixjctator, vol. ii., p. 438.
10
i:
38
ETHNOGRAPHY.
with any great horror. By some it has been supposed that this
custom originated in the fury of revengetul hostihty ; by others, in
the cravings of Ininger during seasons of famine. But the natives of
New Holland, who are quite as ferocious as the Polynesians, and who
frequently sutier severely from the want of food, are not cannibals.
There is, in the minds of most men, savage as well as civilized, a
certain notion of sanctity attached to the dcuid body of a human being,
— a feeling of dread and repugnance at the idea of touching or dis-
turbing a corpse, — which no effort can altogether vanquish. This
feeling, however, appears hardly to exist among the people of these
islands, as is apparent in several of their customs. It will be sufficient
to mention two. The Polynesians do not, usually, like many savage
tribes, torture their prisoners to death, nor are they wont, as a general
thing, to preserve any part of the body of a slain enemy as a trophy, —
though this is sometimes done. But it is their chief object, and espe-
cial delight, to secure the corpse, tor the purpose of practising upon it
every horrible disfigurement which the imagination can devise. Mr,
Ellis* relates several of the modes in use among them, and remarks
that some are too revolting to be described. No other race of savages
has evinced this disposition to the same e.vtent.
The other custom relates to the disposal of their dead. With most
barbarous tribes, as well as civilized nations, the natural repugnance
to the presence of a corpse is shown in the desire to put it awiiy, as
soon as possible, "out of their sight." The Polynesians have little or
none of this feeling. In .some islands, as Tahiti and Nukuhiva, the
bodies of the dead are (or were) exposed on stages near the ihvellings
of the living; in others, as at the Navigator and Sandwicii Islands,
they are buried either near or in the houses of their friends, and the
skulls, and sometimes other bones, afterwards taken \\\) and preserved
as relics. At New Zealand, the body is placed on the ground in a
sitting or crouching posture, and enclose d within the two halves of a
canoe ; this is set in the midst of their villages, which are often made
unapproachable to a tbreigner by tlie scent of [)Utrefaction.
To a people like this, in whom the salutary awe of death is so com-
pletely e.vtinct, who are naturally of a bhwdtliir.sty disposition, and
whose religious belief has nothing of a moral or (elevating tendency,
there is, evidently, no restraint but that of custom to deter them from
cannibalism. The practice may have commenced in some access of
* I'olynusian Ucscarclics, vui. i., cluip. xi.
POLYNESIA.
39
revenge, or in a season of famine ; but it is now continued purely for
the gratification of a depraved appetite. On this point the testimony
of the natives tliemselves is distinct and positive, and as they are
aware of the abhorrence with which the act is regarded by the whites,
there can he no good reason for disbelieving them.
Of the four Oceanic races, the Polynesians and Melanesians are,
generally speaking, addicted to cannibalism, while among the natives
of Australia and Micronesia it is, so far as we are informed, unknown.
TATTOOING.
The custom of tattooing is not peculiar to the Polynesians, but it
deserves mention, as affording a means of distinsjuishina; the natives
of the different groups from one another. The word tau, or tatau.
from which "tattoo" is derived, is applied to it mi most of the islands;
in New Zealand, however, moko, meaning properly "lizard," or ".ser-
pent," is used, — perhaps in reference to the peculiar curves and
spirals of which their tattooing consists. The mode in which it is
performed is nearly the same everywhere. The colouring matter is a
mixture of soot, or powdered charcoal, with water or oil. This is
struck into the skin by means of a small implement of bone, resem-
bling a piece of line-toothed comb, fixed transversely to the end of a
short handle, after the fashion of an adze. In New Zealand, instead
of a toothed instrument, a sharp chisel is used, which renders the
operation much more painful.
We can hardly doubt that the custom was originally adopted from
a sense of decency. The usual dress of the Navigator Islanders is a
mere apron of leaves, tied around the middle of the body, which it
covers only in front. The tattooing is applied also to the middle of
the body, from near the wui.st behind, down to the knees. In front,
however, the abdomen is free from it, except only a small patch over
the navel. W'lien asked why this spot was tattooed, they replied, that
as it was the part which was connected with the womb before birth,
they were ashamed to leave it uncovered, — showing clearly the feel-
ing which had given origin to the custom. The general effect, at a
little distance, is to give the person the appearance of being dressed
in short, dark-blue drawers.
The Tonga tattoo is tiie same with the Samoan ; for though their
usual dress, which is a wrapper of bark-cloth, entirely conceals it,
nwi
40
ETHNOGRAPHY.
yet in rainy weather, or when at sea, or obliged to wade in the water,
they wear the titi or leaf-apron of the other group.
At New Zealand the climate generally requires the body to be
covered, and the face is therefore the only place on which the tattoo-
ing would be commonly seen. As it is not needed for the purposes
of decency, it is applied merely for ornament. The style which they
prefer consists of numerous sf.iral and curving lines, drawn with great
exactness, care being taken to make the marking of one side of the
face correspond to tliat of the otiier. The breast and thighs are fre-
quently tat'iooed in a similar, though less elaborate manner.
At the Society Islands also, the tattoo serves merely for ornament.
The body, from the waist to the knee, is covered by the ^wrew or
wrapper. It is, therefore, above and below this that the marking is
most elaborately applied. This varies a good deal, at the pleasure of
the person tattooed. Perhaps the most distinctive mark is a number
of parallel curving lines, which spread out on each side of the spine,
as the leaflets of a palm from the stem. Heavy masses of black are
also iin|)rinted on the' thighs and nates, though these are covered by
the dress, — referring us, at once, to the Samoan origin of tlie custom.
The Rarotongans, we were told, cover the body witii che(iuer-work
and cross-lines, somewhat like those of a Guernsey frock.
Tlie people of the Low Archipelago seem to have different fashions.
Some were tattooed like those of Tahiti. Tlie men of Anaa or Chain
Island were thickly covered over the body, but not the face, with
lines crossing one another, similar (according to a note made at the
time) "to the cliecked-shirfs worn by sailors,"— consequently not
unlike tlie mode of Uarotonga. The people of the eastern or inde-
pendent islands (as Clermont Tonnerre, Searle's, and the Disappoint-
ment Islands) had no tattooing or marking of any description.
Tlie Manjuesaiis are tattooed from head to loot, some of the elder
men being completely blackened by the abundance of the adornment.
The most common style is that of broad heavy stripes across, or par-
tially crossing, tiie face and body, with small intervals between them.
But scpiares, circles, and various fantastic figures are also used.
The Sandwich Islanders tattoo comparatively little, and in a per-
fectly arbitrary style. It is common for individuals to have figures
of animals or inanimate objects imprinted on some part of the body,
but tliis is not universal. In former times peivsons frequently had
themselves tattooed as a token of mourning at the death of a friend or
11
POLYNESIA.
41
a chief; and some, by way of evincing their extreme sorrow, applied
it to the tip of the tongue, in which case the operation must have pro-
duced great pain.
The women, at most of the islands, use this ornament very spar-
ingly. The back of the hand is frequently marked so as to resemble
an open-worked glove. Sometimes the feet arc similarly imprinted,
and at New Zealand the lips are so completely covered as to have
the appearance of being painted blue.
MANUFACTURE OF CLOTH.
Many tribes, in various parts of the world, have the art of making
a kind of cloth from the bark of a tree. That which is peculiar in
the Polynesian custom, is merely the mode adopted, which is common
to all the islands e.vcept New Zealand. It consists in peeling off
strips of the bark of the paper-mulberry or of the breadfruit-tree,
which are divested of the outer cuticle, and after being soaked for a
time in water, are laid upon a smooth plank, and beaten out, by
repeated blows of a mallet, to a substance not unlike thick but flexi-
ble paper; sometimes, however, it is so fine as to resemble gauze.
The strips are united by overlaying their edges and beating them
together. The mallet used, called every where ike or it, is a stick
rather more th^in a foot in length, and five or six inches in circum-
ference, — either square, or, in some islands, nearly round, and creased
or channelled with parallel grooves from one end to the other. At
New Zealand, where these trees are not found, and where, moreover,
a better defence from the rigour of the climate is retiuired, the people
braid their mats from the leaves of a flax-plant indigenous to the
country (phormium tenax), and also manufacture from it a ivind of
yarn or thread, of which they weave, by liand, mantles or blankets,
which bear some resemblance to the products of a loom.
CANOES.
The usual form of the Polynesian canoe is well known. Its pecu-
liarities are the outrigger — a slender log of wood lying in the water
parallel to the canoe, to which it is fastened, to prevent it from upset-
ting, — and the triangular sail of matting, broad at top, when it is
drawn up to the mast, and narrowing to a point at the bottom where
it is fastened to the prow. New Zealand again constitutes an excep-
11
48
E T II N O G R A P H y.
tioa, the canoes there having no outriggers, a peculiarity which is
explained by the circumstance that the great size of the trees on this
island enables the natives to make their canoes of sufficient breadth
of beam not to require this contrivance. At the Gambier Group it is
remarkable tliat canoes are unknown ; their place is poorly supplied
by rafts, made of logs and ytolea lashed together, and propelled by
paddles or sails.
At the Friendly Islands, the proper Polynesian canoe is rarely
used. They have instead a kind differing in one very important
respect, namely, in being made to sail with either end foremost.
When a Samoan or Tahitian voyager desires to change his course, or
" tack," he shifts the sail from one side of his vessel to the other, and
that which was before the windward side becomes the leeward. But
a Friendly Islander carries his sail from one end of his canoe to the
other, and that which was before the prow becomes the stern, — the
same side remaining always to windward. The Tonga people say
that they borrowed this model from the Feejee Group, where it is the
only one in use. It is also found throughout the Micronesian Archi-
pelago, and it is doubtful to which of the two western races the
invention is properly to be ascribed. Many of the canoes are very
large, especially the double ones, which are sometimes eighty or
ninety feet long, and capable of carrying two hundred men.
WEAPON s.
The arms principally employed by the Polynesians are the club,
the spear, and the sling. The club is generally made of some hard
wood, and is about four feet long. In New Zealand only, smaller
clubs or maces made of stom- are common. The spear is used either
for thrusting or darting, in the latter of which exorcises the natives
are very expert, though they make use of no artificial means for
increasing the impetus of the ca.sl, like the throwing-stick of the New
Hollanders, or the knotted string of the natives of Mallicollo. It is
remarkiible that on none of the islands of Polynesia is the bow in-
cluded by the people among their weapons of war, though they make
u.se of it in their sports.
K .V V A - D R I N K I N G.
The only other custom 'ipon which we shall touch, as distinctive of
this race, is the use of a beverage termed /cava or 'ava, a name given
V '
MELANESIA.
43
also to the plant from which it is obtained. This plant is known to
botanists as the piper methysticum, and is found on all the high islands
of the Pacific within the tropics. The liquor is an infusion of the
root prepared after u manner any thing but consonant with our ideas
of cleanliness. It is first chewed, several persons being usually
engaged at the same time in this part of the operation. The morsels,
as they are masticated, are placed in a shallow wooden bowl, and
when a sufficient quantity has been thus prepared, water is poured
upon it ; after which the infusion is strained through a mesh of the
fibres which form the husk of the cocoa-nut, and it is then ready for
drinking. The immediate effects are narcotic and stupifying. When
drunk to excess, it is destructive to both the bodily and mental powers.
The individual becomes afflicted with a general weakness and hebe-
tude; the mind is obscured, the flesh gradually wastes away, and, in
this last stage, the skin becomes covered with a white scurf repulsive
both to the sight and the touch. It is not known that any persons
die from this cause alone ; but many are, no doubt, carried off", while
in this weak condition, by diseases from wiiich, under ordinary cir-
cumstances, they would have recovered.
The li(iuor, however, may be drunk in moderation, without pro-
ducing these injurious effects. In Samoa atid Tonga, the " kava-
parties," or assemblies of chiefs for drinking, are occasions of much
state, and many ceremonies are practised in preparing and serving
the drink. In the eastern groups, this formality is dispensed with,
but the beverage is still considered one peculiarly appropriated to the
chiefs, for whom the plant is usually sacred or tabu.
MELANESIA.
The race of Oceanic negroes, either pure, or mi.ved with other
races, occupies the large island of New Guinea, with Arroo, Waygeoo,
Mysol, and the interior of the Moluccas on the west, and New Bri-
tain, New Ireland, the Louisiade, the Solomon Isles, the New He-
brides, and New Caledonia on the east. The western portion of this
region forms a part of the East Indian Archipelago, bordering upon
the large islands inhabited by the Malay race. The result of the
constant and long-continued intercourse here maintained between the
two races, has been to people this portion of Melanesia with a hybrid
44
ETHNOGRAPHY.
variety called Papuas.* They are true mulattoes, of a reddish-brown
complexion, with abundance of twisted and frizzled hair, which has
procured them the epithet of mop-headed. They inhabit not only
Waygeoo, Arroo, and Mysol, but also the eastern extremity, and most
of the northern coast of New Guinea. All the vocabularies which
have been taken of the dialects spoken by this people, show a greater
or less infusion of words of Malay origin, generally much altered and
disfigured.
The southern coast and eastern extremity of New Guinea, and the
islands which lie near it, are inhabited by real negroes. The only
one whom we had an opportunity of seeing, was a native of Erro-
mango, who had been brought by a trading vessel from that island to
Tonga, when quite young, and had forgotten his native language.
His name was Noai, and he called his island (or perhaps his town)
Malekini. He was about five feet high, slender, and long-limbed. He
had close woolly hair, a retreating arched forehead, short and scanty
eyebrows, a small snub nose, thick lips (especially the upper), a
retreating chin, and that projection of the jaws and lower part of the
face, which is one of the distinctive characteristics of the negro race.
His limbs and body were covered with short fine hairs, made conspi-
cuous by their light colour. On his left side were many small round
cicatrices burnt into the skin, which he said was a mode of marking
common among his people. Placed in a crowd of African blacks,
there was nothing about him by which he could have been distin-
guislied from the rest.
There is, however, considerable difference among the various tribes
of Eastern Melanesia, cau.sed perhaps, in part, by physical influences,
and in part by a mixture with their Polynesian neighbours. In
Tanna, an island southeast of Erromango, we find a larger and
stronger race, with a skin not quite so dark. On this island two
languages are spoken, and we were assured, by good authority, that
one of them was like that of Erromango, and the other similar to the
dialect of the Friendly Islands. About five miles distant from the
east coast of Tanna is the small island of Niua, or Immer, inhabited
by a yellow race, of the pure Polynesian stock. This name of Niua
is the same as that given to the group of Coca's, Good Hope, and Horn
Islands, about fourteen degrees to the east-northeast, from whence it is
* See Dr. Pritchnrd's Pliysicol Hi-story of Man, page 22, for an excellent description
of this variciv of the human race.
MELANESIA.
45
possible that the population of the small island was derived. If so,
the Polynesians are, in this case, returning back nearly in the direc-
tion from which they are supposed to have originally proceeded.
The external resemblance which is found between the negroes of
the Pacific and those of Africa, renders the contrast of their charac-
ters more striking. The latter are gay, frank, social, quick of appre-
hension, but deficient in steadiness and resolution, and prone to
sensuality. The Melanesians are, in every respect, the reverse of
this description, — sullen, shy, treacherous, indocile, stubborn, and of
a cold temperament. A constant suspicion, the offspring of a continual
fear of treachery, is displayed, not only in their dealings with stran-
gers, but between members of the same tribe, and even of the same
family. The Polynesians rarely carry arms, except in time of war;
a Fecjeean (the most civilized of the Melanesians) is rarely without
them. A lack of enterprise, or rather a strong aversion to quitting
their homes, is a universal characteristic. Although the Feejee
Group, the New Hebrides, and the Solomon Isles, have been, during
the last forty years, frequently visited by ships, we know of no in-
stance in which a native has voluntarily entered on board one as a
sailor.
We shall only notice here a few of the arts and customs which are
peculiar to the Melanesians, reserving other particulars for the de-
scription of the Feejee Islands.
It is remarkable that the use of the bow, as a weapon of war, should
be confined to this race among the islanders of the Pacific. The
others sometimes employ it in their sports, but never in fighting.
This is one of those facts which seem, at first sight, unaccountable,
and can hardly be explained on the ground of long-established usage
alone.
The manufactory of a kind of pottery is an art common to nearly
all the tribes of this race, and peculiar to them. The material is a
fipe blue clay, which is mixed with sand, and moulded by hand to
the required shape. It is varnished with the juice of a certain nut,
and hardened in the fire. The most common form is that of a large
oval pot or jar, with a small circular mouth. This is set in a slanting
position on a hearth, and used for boiling their food They have also
water-jars and small drinking vessels of the same material.
Tattooing is seldom resorted to by this people, as the darkness of
their skins would render the marking nearly invisible. Instead of it,
they are accustomed to make, on the breast and arms, weals, or raised
12
46
E T II N O O R A I' II Y.
cicatrices, generally produced by burning the parts with a pointed
stick. Sometimes these appear as long unsightly scars, distributed
witiiout regularity ; in others, there are rows of small circular spots,
in which the design of ornament is more apparent. A similar mode
of marking prevails to a much greater extent, among the tribes of
central and southern Africa.
One circumstance, connected with the distribution of this race
among the islands of the Pacific, deserves notice. The Polynesians
are a stronger and bolder people than the blacks (not including the
Feejecans), and greatly their superiors in warfare. Wo find them in
possession of three islands, Fotuna (or Erronan), Niua (or Immer), and
Tikopia, which seem, from their situation, properly to belong to the
Melanesians; and we arc naturally induced to inquire, how it is that
the yellow race, after getting possession of these islands, has advanced
no farther, though other conquests, not more diflTicult, so far as regards
the number and force of the inhabitants, would seem to invite it.
The reason is probably to be found in the fact, that in all (or at
least all the easternmost) of the islands inhabited by blacks, the cli-
mate is fatal to the races whose different organization is marked by a
lighter skin. D'Urville endeavoured in vain to induce some of the
natives of Tikopia to accompany him to Vanikoro, an island only
thirty leagues distant, with which they were well acquainted. They
were afraid that the air would kill them. The experience of that
navigator proved that their fears were but too well founded. Within
three weeks after his arrival at Vanikoro, forty of his men were
attacked by the fever, and several died. In 18;J0, a vessel from the
Sandwich Islands, with nearly two hundred natives on board, visited
Erromango for the purpose of cutting sandal-wood. They remained
there five weeks; and, so rapid and powerful were the etfects of the
poisonous miasmata, that only twenty returned to Oahu.*
It is, no doubt, to this peculiarity of their climate that the Melane-
sians are indebted for the unmolested possession of many of their
islands. Fotuna, Niua, and Tikopia are not affected by the noxious
influences, whatever these may be. They are small, high islands, —
mere mountains rising out of the water, — and thus exposed, in every
part, to the constant and salubrious winds of the tropical seas, — a fact
which may account for this exemption.
* Jarvis'a History of the Sandwich Islands, p. 290.
11
MELANESIA.
47
V I T I, OR THE F B R J F. R CJ R O I! P.
This group is an arcliipelago of islands of various sizes, about one
hundred of which are inhabited. Two of them are so much larger
than the rest, that the natives do not apply to them the term "island"
(rt«M), but call them by that which signifies "land" or "continent"
{vanua). These are Viti-levn (great F'eejee), and Vanua-levu (great
land). They are nearly equal in size, containing each about two thou-
sand five hundred square miles. Viti-lcvu has, however, the greatest
extent of habitable land, and is the seat of the mo.st powerful states,
most of the other islands being more or less subject to it. Next to
these two, in size and im[iortance, though far inferior in both respects,
are Vnna and Kundavu, the former situated to the east of Vanua-levu,
and the latter to the south oi Viti-lcvu. They contain between one
hundred and fifty and two hundred square miles each. The eastern
part of the group con.sists of an extensive chain of small islands, lying
in a direction from north-northwest to south-southeast. The principal
are VaUxi, Oitggfa, Vnldngi, Kambara, Namiiku, MMhe, Lakhnba,
Nainii,' Thithia, Tumilha, Mango, Vani'ia-mbal6ou, Kanathia, Nai-
tomba, Kambia, and Rambe. Most of tliese are surrounded by ex-
tensive reefs. In the interior sea, between this chain and the two
large islands, are several of considerable size, of which the most im-
portant are Koro, Mokungal, Omlau, Moluriki, Mbutiki, Nainaf,
Ngtiit, Modla, Totfiia, and Mati'tkn. Between Viti-levu and Kandavu
are Mbeiigga,Nami'tka,ixnd Vatnlek, the first of which is celebrated in
the mythology and history of the group. Finally, west and north-
west of Viti-levu extends tlie Asaua chain, composed of numerous
islands, the largest of which are Asaua, Naviti, Vitva, Waia, and
Malolo. This Viwa must not be confounded with another and
smaller island of that name olT the east coast of Viti-levu, and the
Namuka near Mbengga must be distinguished from that near La-
kemba.
Concerning the number of inhabitants in the group, the estimates
differ considerably, owing chielly to the diverse accounts as to the
population of the interior. The lowest computation makes about one
hundred and thirty thousand souls, of which the two large islands are
supposed to have forty thousand each, and the remainder to be distri-
buted throughout the smaller islands, nearly in proportion to their
relative sizes. If, however, the interior of the large islands is as
48
ETIINOOR APII V.
densely inhabited tis some suppose, the sum total would be increased
by thirty or forty thousand.
I'M Y sir A I, TH All S.
Tiie Feejeoans are a people of the medium stature, with nearly as
great variety of figure as is found in nations of the Caucasian race.
Tlie cliiefs are usually tall and wcll-forinod, owing probably to the care
taken of their nurture, and to the inlluonct! of blootl. The common
people are somewhat inferior, yet tliere are fewer small and ungainly
figures among them tiian among the lower order of Europeans.
On the other hand, tlio Feejeeans contrast very unfavourably with
their neighbours of the Polynesian stock. They lack the full, rounded
limbs and swelling muscles which give such elegance to the forms of
the Friendly and Navigator Islanders. They arc generally large-
jointed, and the calf is small in proportion to the thigh. The neck is
also too short for due proiwrtion, and the whole figure wants elegance
and softness of outline. Their movements and attitudes are, conse-
quently, less easy and graceful than those of the Polynesians. They
are nevertheless a strong race ; their war-clubs are ponderous, and are
wielded with great power, and they can carry very heavy burdens.
The Feejeean physiognomy dilfers from that of the Polynesians, not
so much in any particular feature, as in a general debasement of the
whole, and a decided appro.xinmtion towards the forms characteristic
of the negro race. The head is usually broad in the occipital region
(which they consider a great beauty), and narrows towards the top
and in front, — the forehead, though often of good height, appearing
compressed at the sides. The eyes are black and set rather deep, but
never obliquely. The nose is not large, and is generally a good deal
flattened ; the nostrils are often larger laterally than forwards, and the
nose is then much depre.s.xed at the upper part between the eyes.
The mouth is wide, and the lips, particularly the upper one, thick.
The chin varies, but is most commonly short and broad. The jaws
are larger, and the lower part of the face far more prominent than in
the Malay race. The cheek-bones, also, project forwards as in the
negro, and not laterally, as in the Mongol variety ; notwithstanding
which, the narrowness of the forehead at the temples gives a greater
width to the face at the malar region than elsewhere. The whole
face is longer and thinner than among the Polynesians.
The hair is neither straight nor woolly, but may be properly desig-
M K I, A N K H I A.
40
nated as fri/./lcd. Wlien allowed to ^tow without iiitcrfcrciico, it
appears in miincrous spiral locks, cii^lit or ten iiielii's in leii>,'tii,
spreadinjr out on all sides of the head. Sometimes these curls arc
seen much lon<;er, falling; down to the middle of the hack. It is,
however, very scjidom allowed to i^row naturally. The younj^ hoys
have it cut very close, and sometimes shavetl to the skin, like the
Tahilian.s. In ^irls, heforo marriajre, it is allowed to fi[row long, and
is coloured white hy washinjj; it with a solution of lime, except a
portion around the crown, which is plastered with a black pi<,'ment.
After marria^'o, it is either cut to the length of one or two inches, or
friz/led out like that of the men ; in hoth cases it is frequently soaked
in colouring liquids, either red or black. The men in general have
their hair dressed so as to form an immenso semi-globular mass,
covering the top, back, and sides of the head. The arrangement of
this cliereliar is performed for the chiefs by professional barbers, and
is a work of great labour. Six hours are sometimes occupied in dress-
ing a head, and the process is rej)eated at intervals of two or three
weeks. It is probably to guard against disarranging this work, that
the piece of bamboo which is placed under the neck in sleeping is
employed, instead of the ordinary pillow. I'or the same purpose, the
natives usually wear, during the day, a sa/a or kerchief of very thin
gauze-like paper-cloth, which is thrown over the hair and tied closely
around the head, so as to have very much the appearance of a turban.
The colour of the Feejeeans is a chocolate-brown, or a hue midway
between the jet-black of the negro, and the brownish yellow of the
Polynesian. There are, however, two shades very distinctly marked,
like the blonde and brunette complexions in the white race, besides
all the intermediate gradations. In one of these shades the brown
predominates, and in tlie other the copper. They do not belong to
distinct castes or classes, but are found indiscriminately among all
ranks and in all tribes. The natives are aware of the distinction, and
call the lighter-coloured people \'iti ndamiiiiihimii, "red Fcejeeans,"
but they do not seem to regard it as any thing which requires or
admits of explanation. These red-skinned natives must not be con-
founded with the Tongu-Viti, or individuals of mixed Tongan and
Feejeean blood, of whom there are many on some parts of the group.
CHAK.VCTIMI.
It is not a little remarkable that though the Feejeeans are an in-
genious, shrewd, quick-witted people, surpassing the Polynesians in
18
50
ETHNOORAIMI V.
tlicir kuowledife of various arts, and having a more regular and arti-
ficial system of government, tliey are yet spoken of by all voyagers
as savages, and uniformly treated as such, w liile the Polynesians are
regarded ratlier as a semi-civilized race. Nor can there be any doubt
that this liistinction, so \inivcrsally and involuntarily made, is a just
one. Yet it is dillicult to perceive, at the lirst view, tlie grounils on
wjiicli it rests. ^\ e shall be told tiiat civilization belongs to the
character more than to the intellect ; but granting this to be correct,
we may still be at a loss to discover in what respect the Feejceans
are inferior to the Polynesians. The portrait which we have had to
draw of the latter is by no means prepossessing. If the Feejeeans are
ferocious in war, without natural alfection, parricides and cannil)als,
there are few of the Polynesian tribes to whom tlie same description
will not apply. Tliat proneness to sensuality, moreover, wliicli is
common among the latter is wanting in the former, and the domestic
lies are more sacred among them.
The truth })erhaps is, tiiat tiie ililferenco in the character, as in the
piiysiognoniy of the two races, lies not so much in any pafticular
trait, as in a general debasement of tlie whole, — a lower graile of
moral feeling, and a greater activity of the evil passions. Tlie Poly-
nesians seem to be cruel, dishonest, and selfish, rather because they
have always been so, and no better path lias ever been opened to
them, than from any violent pmpensity to those vices. The proof of
this is found in the fact that a very brief intercourse with foreigners
has, in most cases, been suilicient to induce them to lay aside their
worst practices, and adopt many of the im|)rovements of I'ivilization.
But the Feejeeans are by nature and inclination a bloodthirsty,
treacherous, and rapacious peojile. Their evil (jualities do not lie
merely on the surface of the character, but have their roots deep in
their moral organizaticm. In Ibrty years of intercourse with tiiesame
class of civilized men to whom the Polynesians were indebted for
their earliest instructions in many valuable arts, they have learned
from them notliinti but the use of lirearms. — and though no visiter
can have tailed to e.vpress his horror at tlie customs of eaniiibalism,
infanticide, and human sacrilice, not the slightest etfect has iil-en pro-
duced upon the natives. The Feejeean may be said to dilfer from
tlie Polynesian as the wolf from the dog; both, when wild, are per-
haps eijually fierce, but the ferocity of the one may be easily subdued,
while that of the other is deep-.seated and uiitameable.
One (juality, however, for which the Feejeeans are eminently distin-
M E L A N E S t A.
61
ffuishetl, and in which they differ widely from the Polynesians, is their
disposition to treachery, and, connected with it, their cai)acity for dis-
simulation. During our intercourse with them, we iiad continually
occasion to observe this trait in their dealings with us and with one
another. They live a life of constant suspicion, no one daring to trust
even the members of his own family. A native never leaves his home
unarmed ; and the people in every town are constantly on the watch
against a sudden invasion from tiio neighbouring tribes, however
apparently peaceful. Their internal history, as related by them-
selves, is full of instances of perfidy and treason. The group is
divided into a number of independent states, connected among them-
selves by peculiar relations, somewhat as in the little republics of
ancient Greece. Among these states constant intrigues and niiichina-
tions are carried on, and that with a degree of shrewdness and craft
that frequently e.xcited our astonishment. All the arts of that baser
species of state policy which we are accustomed to look upon as the
growth of a corrupt civilization, are thoroughly understood and con-
tinually practised by tjiis extraordinary race of savages. To weaken
a rival state by secretly exciting its dependencies to revolt, — to stir
up one class of society against another, in order to take advantage
of their dissensions, — to make an advantageous treaty with a powerful
foe, by sacrificing a weak ally, — to corrupt the fidelity of adiierents,
by bribing them with the anticipated spoil of their own master, — to
gain a battle before it is ibught, by tampering with the leaders of the
opposing force, — all these, and many other tricks of the Machiavelian
school, are perfectly familiar to the s\ibtlc chieftains of Viti. In treat-
ing of the system of government which prevails in the group, we sh;ill
have occasion to show more distinctly the inllucnce which this trait
in the native character has upon their political relations.
1) i:i. KilON.
The Feejeeans, though not perhaps so strongly influenced bv the
devotional sentiment as their eastern neighbours, are vet much atlaciied
to their religiovis observances. Many of these seem to have been Ixir-
rowed from the Polynesians, es[)ecially the tahit, (or, as they term it,
the tamhu,) which has the same force amoi\g them as with tlie others,
though it is not, perliaps, of such \iniver.sal ap[)lication. Much of the
Vitian mythology aj)pears to be also of Tongan derivation.
E T II N O O R A P U V.
According to the universal belief of the natives, the supreme deity,
and governor of their island-world, is a being termed Ndeiigi'i. He is
represented as having the form of a serpent in the head and one side
of the body, while the rest is made of stone, by which he is rendered
immortal. His residence is in a cave, in the mountiiins of Viti-levu,
at a place called Nakauvandra, nearly opposite to Mbua, or Sandal-
wood Bay. Earthipiakcs are supposed to be ])roduced by the gotl
shifting his position, — and one of tlie Ihivibis, or distichs, which the
natives frequently sing in their dances, refers to this belief: —
Viikii'iiki ko Ndeyei,
lacala a vaniia.
Ndengei turns over.
The earth trembles.
The natives say that an earthquake is invariably followed by a season
of fertility ; and they believe that when Ndengei is prevailed upon, by
their prayers, to put an end to a famine, he does so by turning himself
over, and thus causing the earth to shake. Scarcities they suppose to
be produced by tlie malign interference of the inferior deities, who
pray to Ndengei for food, until the trees are stripped of their fruits to
supply them.
No one knows the origin of Ndengei. He was first seen on the
beach at Ra, in the form of a man, dressed in the native girdle of masi,
or piiper-cloth, with long trains of it hanging to the earth, as is the
custom among the chiefs. Not being recognised and worshipped at
that place, he went to Mbcngga, where he was fir.st discovered to be
a god. Rut the land was stony, and he did not like it. He looked
towards Kandavu, but would not dwell there. He then went over
to Rewa, and took up his abode in that district. Soon after this, a
powerful god, by name Wairua, came from Tonga to llcwa, and to
him Ndengei resigned the government of that town, on condition of
always receiving for himself the ciioicest parts of all kiiuls of food
(such as the head of the i)ig and tortoise, &c.) After living awhile in
this situation, Ndengei hud an attack of leprosy, and determined to
remove to Verata, which has ever since been considered impregnable.
Here he resolved to be no more .seen by men, and for this purpose
took the form of a serpent, as before related.
According to one account, the natives hold that Ndengei created
the first man and woman, though of what materials they do not say.
This story, however, is directly opposed to the general belief that the
MELANESIA.
53
god did not make his appearance till after the islands were peopled,
and that he first ruled, in human shape, over some of the towns, — a
story which reminds us of the Cretan Jove.
Thus far the creed of all the islanders is the same. All, likewise,
hold that Ndengei has a son, who stands at the door of his cave to
receive the pra3'ers which are addressed to his father, and to act as
mediator hetween him and the suppliants. But i'..d name given to
this sou varies in every important district. In llewa it is Maittti ; in
Mbau, Komui-NHDiil/ten'then' ; in Ovolau, Ritlxuooiiu ; in Mathuata,
Rathinathina ; in Somusomu, Komai-natarusara ; and in Lakemha
there are supposed to be two, — Tokai-ranihe and Tui-Lahemha. In
fact, except in the circumstance of there being a single supreme ruler
over the whole groi'p, the celestial governnient of the Feejee Islands
appears to be modelled after the terrestrial. Each principal state has
its own presiding deity, who is usually a sou of Ndengei. The infe-
rior districts are ruled and protected by subordinate deities, who are
commonly grandchildren of the god ; while every village has its own
tutelar spirit, who is perhaps a still more distant descendant of the
supreme divinity, though this is not certain. Furthermore, the same
political relations which prevail between the different states, are also
found among their governing deities. Thus, Somusomu, though to a
certain degree independent, owns a kind of inferiority to Mbau, and
may be termed a tributary ally. This the natives ascribe to the fact
that at some former period the great spirit of Somusomu (whose
polysyllabic name need not be repeated) met the great spirit of Mbau
half-way between their resj)ective dominions, fought with him, was
concpiered, and thereui)on proceeded to the mbure, or temple, of his
antajjonist, and made over to him 'le town of Somu.somu. jjivins him
the tama, or salute, as a superior. This tratlition probably refers to
some victory gained in early times by the naval forces of Mbau over
those of Somusomu.
Besides the gods of districts and towns, they have others who are
the deities of particular classes or professions, as Rokoht, the god of
carpenters, Rakacomi, of lishcrmen. They have also mischievous and
malignant spirits, who are supposed to be the cause of the petty evils
which alllict men. On Lakemba, according to Mr. Cargill, there is
an individual known as Mata-kalou, god-seer, whose business it is to
discover and thwart the machinations of these spirits. The office is
held by but one person at a time, and is hererlitary. Tiie natives also
pay divine honours to disembodied souls, particularly those of their
14
04
ETIIIVOa R A PHY.
ancestors; and certain animals, as the shark, land-crab, serpent,
hawk, &c., are considered sacred, and reverenced, not as being
themselves divine, bnt as the property of divinities.
Tliere arc still other deities whose oflices and attributes are con-
nected with tlic native belief respeo1in<r the future state of the soul.
The most important of these is one who a[)proaches to the vulixar idea
of the de . d. lie is called by such as worship iiini, wiio are not mr.ny,
Ratit-mhdti-nilnn, or the one-tootlied lord ; others spesdc of him as the
kdlou kiiiui, devouring god, or hihu t/ui, evil deity ; and in Lakemba
he is commonly termed Saniu-idlo, or destroyer of sovds. ile lias the
form of ii man, wltii wings in ])lace of arms, provided with claws to
snatch his victims, lie has a tooth so large that, as the natives say.
when he is lying in his iiouse it goes over the roof He Hies tlirough
the air, emitting sparks of fire, like a meteor. He is said to roast in a
fire and oat the souls of men who are delivered over to him by tiic
supreme divinity.*
Tile general belief of the Feejeeans seems to be that the soul pa.sses
through two states or conditions of future existence before it under-
goes its final destiny, — annihilation. The first of these is a residence,
for an indelinite period, in some placid njion the earth, (termed tliimhn-
thimbu,) which i.i a kind of terrestrial elysium. Nearly every island
and large district has its own place of souls. From tlience the spirit
descends to the M/mlit, or infernal regions, situated beneath the earth,
where it remains until its e.Ktiuction. In some [)laces it would appear
that the second stage is omitted, and in others it is placed beneath the
sea. It is possible, however, that in these instances our information
was imperfect, a.s we were assured that the natives generally believe
in both the earthly elysium and the subterranean hades.
At Rewa the word lol/iia was given to us as the term for annihila-
tion, or the doom to which the spirit is finally subjected. At^ La-
kemba, according to Mr. Cargilt, Lothia is the name of the soverei.;n
of Mbulu, under whom the .souls undergo this destiny.
The people of Vanua-levu believe that the spirits of the dead repair
to a point of land near Sandal-wood Bay, termed Thombathondja,
from whence they pass down into the sea, where they are received by
the two canoes of Rokona and Kokola. When it is stormy weather,
with thunder, rain, and high winds, the natives say that their canoes
* Tlie iili'ii ol' iliis lu'liig has oviilpiilly Ix'fii giallid by llic l''fi.'j<;oaiis on llio I'olviicsimi
mythology, ill whiili llicri! is iioiliiiig oltliu sort. Sec elsewhere the account givtfii ofthu
evil spirit, us iiiiagiiicd by the Australian aborigines.
MELANESIA.
55
are getting under way. Tlieir destination was not stated ; but it is
presumed to be a "city of sj)irits," which is said to exist beneath the
water, in what is called the Great Channel (Ndaveta-levu), between
Moturiki and Mbau. It is governed by a god called Tui-Ndaveta-
levu. When the natives pass tiirough this channel, they take off
their turbans [sala) in token of reverence, and scrupulously avoid
throwing any filth into the water. Many of their traditions, of which
they have an immense number, refer to this passage.
A very extraordinary jiart of the Vitian creed, is that wliicli gives
not only to the lower animals (or at least to sucli as consort with n:'?n),
but also to inanimate objects, a future existence. Tims they iiave
their thimbathimha id kiili, in viiuhi, ni niii, or elysiums for dogs, pigs,
cocoa-nuts, &c. These are usually on some inaccessible or desert
rock or island. Persons who pass near the places appropriated to the
animals pretend to hear the cries of the ghostly herds ; sometimes
they will say — " There is a great feast in such a place ; — don't you
hear the squeaking of the pigs that arc killed and are coming to the
thimbathimha ?" The paradise of cocoa-nuts for the island of llewa is
at the village of Longla, the chief of which frequently complains that
he cannot sleep at night when there is a feast on the island, for the
noise made by the cracking of the fruit.
One of the most important of the native traditions relates to what is
called the Waltiou levii, or great flood, of which the following account
was given by Veindovi (the chief captured at llewa), and confirmed
from other sources. After the islands had been peopled by the first
man and woman, a great rain came, and the waters began to rise.
Then there came two enormous double canoes, commanded one by
Rokona, the god of carpenters, and the other by his head workman,
llokola. They picked up a number of the people, and kept them on
board until the flood subsided, when they deposited them again on
the islands. One account gave the whole number that were saved as
only eight, and stated that they landed first on the island of Mbengga,
the people of which entertain a high opinion of their own rank and
lineage, as direct descendants of the survivors. Veindovi said that in
former titaes the Feejeeans always kept large canoes laid up in readi-
ness against another flood, and it is only of late that the custom has
been discontinued.*
* This statement (wliicli wo licnrd I'rom others in the same terms) mny induce us to
inquirc'whethcr there niiyht not have Ixjon some occurrence in the acluiil liistory of <he
islands to {iive rise to this tradition; anil the custom liere mentioned. On the 7th of No-
vember, 1837, the Pacific Ocean wa.>) traversed from east to. west by an immense wave,
56
ETHNOGRAPHY.
Another story, which has been, no doubt, derived from their Poly-
nesian neighbours, refers to the existeiico of an island called M/mrMii,
situated somewhere in the ocean, but in what direction they do not
know. It is represented as a terrestrial paradise, in which every
species of fruit is produced without cidtivation. Tliey do not, how-
ever, like the people of Samoa and Tonga, represent this island
{Pii/'ilii) as the abode of their gods, or the place from whence their
islands were peopled.
There is no rcgidar hierarchy in this group. Every town has its
mlx'fe or priest, whose business it is to consult the gods when required,
and to perform various religious ceremonies. In the capital towns
there is usually a mhcte km, or high priest, but it does not appear
that he has any peculiar authority over the rest. Neither is the ollicc
hereditary, or contined to any particular class. When a priest dies,
some individual who possesses more than ordinary shrewdness, and
desires to lead an easy, indolent life, determines to succeed him. He
puts on a heavy, melancholy air, and pretends to dream of an event
whicii is shortly to occur. He tells his dream, and if the event turns
out accordingly, the chiefs and people begin to consider him a priest.
By way of trying him, tiiey bring him a bowl of kava (or anygi'oia)
after the usual form, and desire him to consult the gods about some
business in which they are engaged. If he goes through the cere-
mony to their satisfaction, and the oracle proves correct, he is forth-
with installed in the vacant mhurt.
The usual form of invocation is as follows. When a chief wishes
to supplicate a god for the recovery of a sick friend, or the return of
a canoe, or any desired object, he takes a root of kcnju and a whale's
tooth to the temple, and offers them to the priest. After the kava has
been brewed and drunk, the priest takes the whale's tooth in his hand,
turns it over, gazes steadily at it, and then appears to be seized with a
wliicli, taking its rise with tlie shock of mi I'mlhciuiikc in Chili, wns lull n.s liir as iho
Bdiiiii Islands. At the Samlwii-h Ishiniis, accorilin;^ tu thi; account given by Mr. Jarvis
in his History, p. »!. the water rosi', on tlio east coa.st of Hawaii, twenty Ccet above
high-water mark, inundatcil the low lands, swept uway several villages, and destroyed
many lives. Similar nndulations have been e.\perienccd at these islands on several
occasions. If we suppo.sc (what is no way ini|irol)able) that, at some time within the last
thru' or (olir thousand years, a wave ol' twice this height crossed the ocean, and swept
over the Vitian Islands, it must have suhniergeil the w hole alluvial plain on the east side
of Viti-levu, the most populous part ol' the group. jMultiludes would no doubt be
destroyed. Others would escajM- in their canoi's, and as Mbengga is u mountainous
island, in the neighbourhood of this district, it would naturally be the place of refuge for
man v.
MELANESIA.
57
spasm, accompanied by tremblings and involuntary motions. In this
state of ecstasy he is supposed to be possessed by the deity, and what
he says is looked upon as the direct response of the god to his
prayers.
A priest frequently pretends to receive some communication from
the gods in iiis dreams, and then the people assemble to hear the
message. By this device he obtains a drink of kava, and often a pro-
pitiatory present, if his dreams are ominous of evil.
All the people of a town frequently unite in offering a sacrifice to
their tutelar divinity, to secure his favour and protection, more espe-
cially from sickness. On such occasions the chief convenes his
townsmen, and says to them, " Let us make a feast to the god, that
we may not die." A tamhu is immediately laid upon pigs, turtle,
and some other provisions, to preserve them for the ceremony. On
the day appointed, every man brings his pig or other offering, with a
whale's tooth, if he has one, to the temple. Here the chief advances
and offiers his prayer in behalf of all, while the rest present their
gifts. The priest takes the whale's tooth from the chief, and answers
" Ke ndatou mbtila vakmidua," — We shall all live as one, i.e., without
exception. He then supplicates the divinity to be propitious to the
people, after which they return to their homes, leaving the provisions
to be distributed at the pleasure of the priest.
Human sacrifices are frequently offered by the high chief. They
are generally prisoners taken in war. Sometimes, however, they are
slaves procured by purchase from other tribes. As these, like other
sacrifices, are to be eaten by the priests and people, they are usually
kept for some time, and fed, till they are thought to be in good condi-
tion. The victim is bound hand and foot, and roasted alive on heated
stones, after the usual fashion of cooking. The body is then taken
out, painted as for a festival, and carried to the temple to be presented
to the god, after which it is cut up and distributed to the people.
These horrible offerings are made on many occasions, and frequently
out of vainglory on the pf rt of some chief. At those festivals when
ordinary persons are expected to l)ring a pig, Tanoa, the old king of
Mbau, always presents a human victim. When he launches a new
canoe, ten or more men are slaughtered on the deck, that it may be
soaked with human blood.*
• From tlic Rev. David Cargill's necount.
15
59
E T II N O (J R A I' H V.
O O V E R N M E N T.
From these atrocities wo \villiii<j;ly turn to a ooiisicleratiou of the
system of civil poHty wliicli prevails in these islands. We find here
the same three orders as in most of the Polynesian groups, — those of
chiefs {turaiitjii), landholders (mataniramia), and common |)cople
[ficii .ii). The distinction between these has nothinjf of the rit^idness
of caste, and there are many jjcrsons, such as the chililreu of chiefs
by women of low rank, who cannot properly be included in either of
the three classes. The chiefs are at the head of alfairs, but \\h' real
streuj^^th and influence of a state reside in the mataiiiranna, who are
frequently spoken of as the "true owners of the land," {tatiki ndiiia
ni raiiita.) Of the kai si, some arc slaves, wlio have become so by
the fortune of war, but the greater number arc artisans and labourers,
who work for the chiefs and landholders, and are supported by them.
'I'he f^roiii) is not under a single government, but is divided into
.several states, which, tliough independent, are yet closely connected
by various relations of alliance and policy, some of which arc of a
novel and peculiar naturer The most important of these states are
MlniK, Rewii, Suitasiri, and Verata, on the east side of Viti-levu.
Mba on the western end, Mathuata on the north side of Vanua-levu,
and SumuxDtim on the island of Vuna. They are not properly speak-
ing provinces, but towns, or, as the white men resident on the islands
term them, " chief cities." Each of them has under it dependent
towns and islands, which, in their tuiu, exercise sway over subject
districts and hamlets. From this state of things, a system of politics
has grown up, bearing, as already remarked, a striking similarity, in
many jioints, to tliat .'hich jjrevailed among the Grecian republics.
Mbau, Rewa, and > ai.asiri, are the Sj)arta, Athens, and Thebes of
Viti. They are alternately in close alliance and at war. In the
latter case, the policv v)f each belligerent is to e.vcite the dependencies
of its opponent to rebellion, either by bribery, or by holding out the
prospect of relief from oppression. A similar course is pursued by
each city towards the important districts wliicli are subject to it. If
these grow too powerftd, and begin to aspire to independence, the
governing power .secretl\- foments rebellion among the inferior towns
of the dependent state. Thus Ovolau, which is one of the largest
islands subject to Mbau, is under the government of the chief of
KI G I. A N E H I A.
69
Leinika, the principal town upon it. As this lias an excellent harbour,
it hiis of late been much freciuented by shii)pin;f, anil has become the
residence of many whites who have tiiken \\\y their abode among the
natives. The chiefs of Mi)au imve watched with much uneasiness
the increase of wealth and pov.er which their subordinate has derived
from this source, and, afraid to attack him openly, so long as the re-
quired tribute is regularly paid, are constantly employed in intrigues
with the chiefs of the smaller towns and districts on the island, to
induce them to take up arms against their legitimate ruler, in which
case they would call in the intervention of Mbau, and thus give to the
latter an opportunity of weakening the strength of their too powerful
subject.
A like game is played with Somusomu, which, though itself a
"chief city," owns, as we have before stated, a certain subordination
to Mbau, and is said to be spiritually subject {yguli kalou). The real
cause of its inferior rank is, of course, its inability to cope with the
forces of its spiritual superior. This iuai)ility, however, has been
diminished of late by an unfortunate step on the part of the present
king of Mbau, whose name is Tanoa. About ten years since he
became unpopular with the most powerful chiefs in the capital, and a
rebellion broke out, headed by members of his own family. The
king was compelled to Uee, and took refuge in Somusomu, where he
was received and defended with much loyalty, and thus enabled, in
the end, to overpower the revolted party, and reassume his govern-
ment. In retjuital for this great service, he made over to the chiefs
of Somusomu the cluster of windward islands, of which Lakemba is
the principal, which had previously been subject directly to Mbau.
This great accession of power has so strengthened the government of
Somusomu, that its allegiance to Mbau lias become very precarious.
While we were in the group, a quarrel broke out between Somusomu
and the town of Vuna, which is one of its tributaries. Tanoa instantly
seized the opportunity to join in the contest, taking part with the
rebellious town, in ho|)es of humbling his formidable dependency.
Somusomu thereupon called in the assistance of Mathuata, and the
contest was raging when we left the islands.*
* Ciiplniii Wilkes inlorms mo thiit lie lids sirico rweivod iiilormnlion tlint Tnndii, find-
ini; liis ntk'nipt ni^iiinst Soiiuisomii likely to be iinsiiecessrul, .sudiloiily made pence with
it, luid lell with nil his iiiroe.s on the nlly, 'l\ii-.Mathuiit;i, burned several of his '.owns, and
ravaged a great part of his dominions. This notable piece of generalship will give a good
idea of the character of Feejcean policy.
■^
60
E T H N O (i R A I> II Y.
Besides the relations of actual subjection and spiritual inferiority,
there is 3'ot niiotlier, termed mhati, which is that of i\ dependent ally
to a protectiiifj power, — such, for example, as that which the Confede-
ration of the Rhine held to the French empire, and some of the elates
of India hold to Knjjlaiid. Uakiraki, a populous town and district
on tiie iiortli coast of Viti-levn, is thus mbali to Mbau, — recruitiujf
its forces in time of war, and receiving its protection when attacked.
Another relation between tlie dilVerent governments is that supplied
by the intermarriages of the head chiefs. A chief in one town, wiiose
motlier is a member of the ruling family of another town, is said to be
vusii (literally, nephew) to the latter. Thus Tauoa's mother was the
daughter of a king of Uewa, and he is therefore a oasv to that city.
The influences and privileges which accompany this relation are very
great. A rum has nearly as much power in the state to which his
mother belonged as in his own. In case of war with another power,
he is sure of the assistance of his connexions, not precisely from the
influence of family feeling, but in accordance with a long-established
rule, which renders such iissistance an imperative obligation. More-
over, should hostilities break out between two states, in one of which
is a chief who is iiasu to the other, ho can pass between the two with
perfect safety, and is received in the hostile town with as much
respect and confidence as in time of peace. It is evident that such
a relation, singular as it is, must contribute greatly to lighten the evils
of war among this quarrelsome and sanguinary people.
Another relation, somewhat similar to that of msn, though of less
importance, is that of taii-rii. It has been before stated that nearly
every district and town in Viti has its own guardian divinity. In
some caises, however, it happens that two towns are under the protec-
tion of the same god. A citizen of one is said to be luii-ni to those
of the other, — whicii may be rendered fellow-worshipper. This con-
nexion gives many of the same privileges as that of /'«.««.
A knowledge of the internal divisions of the several states is also
important to a right understanding of the intricacies of Vitian politics.
There are usually in each large town two or more classes, or rather
parties, among the iidiabitants. Thus in Mbau these are the Kai-
vale-levu (literally, people of the great house or palace), who form the
king's party, and are especially attached to his service. The Mhati-
tomhi are the adherents of the family of that name, who formerly
possessed the supreme power, of which they were deprived by the
grandfather of the present king. Tlie Kai-Mbau are the independent
M R I, A N E a I A.
61
chiofN and laiulliolders, wlio are not especially do voted to either
family, and act rather for the j^ooil of the Htate, — or, in other words,
for their own interest, which would be affeoted by either of the hos-
tile families obtuinin;^ the undisputed pre-eminence. Finally, the
lasikdH are a body of lishermen, who were brou(»ht to Mbau from a
small island near Kandavu, in order to keep the capital supplied with
fish. Althouf,'h they have no chiefs amon>{ them, their numbers and
their close union ^'ive them considerable inllueuce. Each of these
IkkUcs has interests which are, in some decree, opposed to those of the
others, and it is by their mutual counteraction that the goveri\ment is
preserved from def][eneratinj? into a despotism. The other states, in
making war upon Mbau, usually seek to tamper with one of these
parties, and the attempt is often successful. Nearly all the principal
towns have these internal divisions.
Owing probably to this state of things, the form of government
approaches nearer to the republican than the monarchical. The
respect \yak\ to the chiefs is great, but it is not servile. A head-chief
will seldom venture to take any step contrary to the wishes of the
great body of landholders,— otherwise he will run the risk of being
deposed, or at least of a disaffection which, in case of a war, may lead
to serious results. It is also tlie j)olicy of the interior chiefs and
matanivanua to divide the supreme [wwer as much as possible.
There is generally an olHcer, who is termed the Vu-ni-iialu (head of
war), who is generalissimo of tlie land and sea forces, and commands
in battle, even though the king be present. This oitice is commonly
conferred on a high chief of a different family from that of the king,
and one whose interests would lead him to oppose any attempt on the
part of the latter to acquire supreme power.
In the organization of labour, and the division of the various occu-
pations, the Feejeeans are much farther advanced than any of the Po-
lynesian tribes. In every large district there are towns inhabited by
people devoted to a particular trade or profession. In one all the
citizens will be warriors {tamalai-iHilu), in another fishermen [tunin-
dau), in another carpenters {matui-sau), &c. They are all considei^ed
to be under the direction of the head-chief, who can, if he pleases,
order the warriors to assist the carpenters, or the latter to fight, and
so of the rest. Besides the principal professions, several others are
practised by individuals. There are physicians {cu-ni-wai), and mid-
wives {mbni-ni-ynne), who are said to possess consitierable skill, and
to understand many of the arts and specifics employed among civilized
16
.. I
69
E T 11 N O <i R A I' II Y.
nations. Hair-ilrcNsers {rii-ni-ii/ii) nro nuniiTous, niul fiiul coiiNtnnt
employment in nrrnn^ing the nmtti-d inasH wiiich oovcrH the lieiwls of
the chief's. Tiio niiiniif'actiire of pottery is u himiness followed only
by women, wlio nre ternunl liii'd haiimlnu.
Hetvveea the (liferent towns belon^ini; to the sumo stnte, iis well na
between the dilVerent states and islands of tht' ^^ronp, ii eonlinuni
trutfic is maintained. Some articles of food can only be produced in
certain districts; other places are famed for particular nuinnfactures.
The interchanjje of these articles creates an active commerce, which,
next to war, is the favourite business of the Feejeeans, who are no
less covetous than bloo<lthirsty. In the pro.serution of this traflic, tho
necessity of a medium of exchansre has been perceived and sup|)!ied,
otVeriiifi another evidence of the advain^e which this people has maile
in civilization. This medium is furnished by tho teeth ot the whale,
and is the chief cau.sc of the hi<,'h factitious value which is j,nven to
them. In former times, tho teeth wore obtained from whales which
were stranded on the numerous reefs in and about tho K""""!'- ^^
present they are procured from whalers, who find in them a idieap
and convenient means of supplying? their ves.sol8 with provisions.
The number lately brouj^ht in has .somewhat lowered their value, but
a siiimde tooth will still purchase a thou.sand yams, and with fdty a
man is considered wealthy. As these teeth (called by tho natives
laniliihi) are coniparatively light, will not lose by attrition, and n»ay
be cut into handsome ornaments, they have many of the advantages
of the precious metals, and arc no doubt as good a substitute as could
be found for them in the islands.
A largo proportion of the commerce of the group is carried on by
the Leouku people, who are said to be of Tongan descent. These
were the original inhabitants of the island of .Mbau, many generations
back. While most of their warriors were absent on a trading voyage
to Lakcmlia, a party from the island of Moturiki made a descent >ipon
Mbau, and having obtained possession of it, expelled tho former occu-
j)ants entirely. The Kai-Levuka are now a sort of " broken clan,'"
living scattered about among the various islands, and employed by
the ciuefs as sailors and traders. They have a chief of their own.
who resides on the island of Lakemba, but he is not looked upon by
the Feejeeans as belongiiii^ to the real aristocracy of the islands.
When a Levuka man visits Mbau he is still treated with the best o(
every thing, as a sort of acknowledgment of his just right to the soil.
This people, also, and those of Kamba, a promontory of Viti-lovu,
M R L A N R 8 I A.
03
nenr Mbaii, aro tlioHO by wliotn tlio coromniiy of inaiiKurntiii^ the
hend-diiel' of tlint town imist bo pcrformi'd. and in i'onMtM|iienco, lie
(loos not take, an niiglil 1)« exjwctod, tho titio of 'I'lii-Mhaii, but is
known an 'Viii-Kamba and 'rni-Levuka.
Tho forc^oinj^ obNcrvatiohH will Huftico to j^ivo a (roncral idoa of the
political organization of tho Foojceans. Wo shall next advert to some
of their most roniarka))le cUNtoms, and espeeially to hucIi as display
the peculiar character of the people. The institution of the tambit,
which has already been noticed, as well as tlm ceremonies connected
with tho drinking of /cami, although among those which first attract
attention, from their frecpient occurrence, aro yet no similar to what
they aro in tho Polynesian islands, (and especially in Samoa and
Tonga,) that a particular account of them is not necessary. Tattoo-
ing (which is called ygla) is another custom to which tho same
observation will apply ; but it is remarkable that whilt!, among the
Polynesians, it is tho men who are chiefly tattooi'd, in these islands,
on the contrary, the women only are subjected to the operation, and
tho men arc, with few exceptions, entirely exempt. The marks are
imprinted in a broad band around the loins and thighs. As they are
almost entirely covered by the ii/iii or cincture, and as tho colour is
hardly perceptible on their dusky skins, it is ditlicult to comprehend
the object of the custom. The tattooers are always females, who
make it a regular profession (le>va vei-ygla), and are paid for their
labour.
The immolation of women at the burial of a chief has been thought
to adbrd an evidence of connexion between these islands and some
Asiatic nations. However this may be, the fact itself is suflicioutly
striking. The reason assigned for the custom by tiie natives is con-
nected with their belief concerning the destiny of the soul. As the
disembodied spirit of the chief is supposed, before it linally descends
to the Mbulu or hades, to dwell for a time in the Ihimhalhimlxi, which
is usually some di.strict or island near his original home, anil to be
there engaged in occupations similar to those which he followed
during life, the natives consider that the wife, in accompanying him
to this residence, is merely doing her duty towards her companion,
who, without her, would be living a lonely and cheerless existence.
The following account of tho ceremonies at the burial of a chief was
received from Mr. Cargill, who had been an eye-witness to them a
few months before our arrival.
When a dying man is near his end, his friends place in his hands
64
ETHNOGRAPHY.
a whale's tooth, which he will need to throw at a tree standing in the
way to the regions of the dead ; and they believe that to hit this tree
is an omen of future happiness. As soon as the breath is departed,
the friends and attendants of the deceased fill the air with cries and
lamentations. The grave-diggers are sent for to wash the body, they
being the only persons who can touch it without being subjected to a
tamhu for several months. When washed, it is laid out on a couch
of mats and cloth, and carefully wiped, after which they proceed to
dress and decorate it as for a festival. The corpse is first anointed
with oil, and then the upper part, including the face, the arms down
to the elbows, the neck and breast, is daubed with a black substance
resembling soot. A white bandage of paper-cloth is wound round
the head, and tied on the temple in a graceful knot. A club is put in
the hand and laid acro,ss the breast, that he may appear as a chief
and warrior in the next world.
The body being thus equipped and laid on a new bier, the friends
of the deceased, and the chiefs of the different tribes or clans in the
town as.semble around it; each tribe presents a whale's tooth, and the
chief or spokesman, holding it in his hand, says : — " This is our
offering to the dead ; we are poor, and cannot find riches." All the
persons present then clap their hands, and the king or a chief of rank
replies, " At mumuiidi'i ni mute,''' (the end of death), — to which the
people respond, " Mana, e mlina .'"' (Amen ! it is true !)
'I'he female friends then approach and ki.ss the corpse ; after which
any one of his wives who wishes to die with him hastens to her
brother or nearest relative, and says, — "I desire to die, that I may
accompany my husband to the land of spirits; love me, and make
haste and strangle me, that I may overtake him." Her friends
apph'.ud her resolution, and aid her to adorn her person to th", best
advantage. She is then seated in the lap of a woman, while another
holds her head and stops her nostrils, that she may not breathe
through tliem. The noose is then put round her neck, and four or
five ^rong men pulling at each end of the cord, her struggles are soon
over. The noose is then tied fast, and remains so until the friends of
her hu.sband present a whale's tooth to her brother, saying — "This is
the untying of the cord ot strangulation." The knot is then slipped,
and the cord ' 'it loose around her neck.
The ifrave-(ii<r<rers now commence their labour. The first earth
taken ui» is called " sacred earth," and laid on one side. When the
grave is completed, the corpse of '.he chief is laid in it, with the
MELANESIA.
65
bodies of two of his wives, one on each side, their right and left
hands respectively being laid upon his breast. All three are then
wrapped up together in numerous rolls of native cloth, and the grave
is filled in upon them. The " sacred earth" is laid upon the top, and
over this a stone (usually a small block of basalt) is set up to mark
the spot.
The custom of voluntary suicide on the part of the old men, which
is among their most e.vtraordinary usages, is also connected with their
superstitions respecting a future life. They believe that persons enter
upon the delights of their elysium with the same faculties, mental
and physical, that they possess at the hour of death, in short, that the
spiritual life commences where the corporetil e.xistence terminates.
With these views, it is natural that they should desire to pass through
this change before their mental and botlily powers are so enfeebled by
age as to deprive them of the capacity for enjoyment. To this motive
must be added the contempt which attaches to physical weakness
among a nation of warriors, and the wrongs and insults which await
those who are- no longer able to protect themselves. When, therefore,
a man finds his strength declining with the advance of age, and feels
that he will soon be unequal to discharge the duties of this life, and
to partake in the pleasures of that which is to come, he calls together
his relations, and tells them that he is now worn out and useless, that
he sees they are all ashamed of him, and that he has determined to
be buried. Thereupon they hold a consultation, and if they think
proper to comply with his recjuest, they fi.^c a time for the ceremony,
which is always preceded by a farewell feast {mbiirua).
When the day arrives, he attends the bancjuet, and then walks to
the spot where he desires to bo buried, and marks out his grave.
When they are digging it, he paints himself, puts on a clean girdle
and turban, and svhen it is ready, is assisted by the workmen into his
last resting-place. His wife, if he has one, is strangled and buried
beside him. His friends and relatives tlien raise loud lamentations,
weeping and cutting themselves as at a funeral, and all go to him in
succession to give him a last kiss. He is then covered up with rolls
of cloth, which are laid loosely over his face, so that he may not be
immediately smothered. Then they tiirow in the earth, which they
stamp down every where, except over his head. He is not buried so
deep but that they can sometimes hear him speak, although they
cannot distinguish the words. They then retire, and are tnmbu for
some time, as usual after a burial. The following night, his son goes
17
66
ETHNOGRAPHY.
n
if.
privately to the grave and lays on it a piece of kava-root, which is
ca)led the vei-tata, or farewell.
This, it should be observed, is not the only occasion when the
natives resort to suicide. Spite in the men, and disappointed love in
the women, frequeutly excite tiiem to destroy their lives. A precipi-
tous rock near the town of Lcvuka, on Ovolau, had the same refuta-
tion with the famed steep of Leucadia, as a last resource of despairing
lovers. The love of life seems to be weaker than common in the
minds of these islanders. A slight disgust, — a momentary offence
taken at the conduct of another person, — often suflice to make them
weary of existence. " It is easier to die tlian to bear this," is an
expression frequently heard, and not seldom followed by the threat-
ened act.
Another singular custom which wc find in these islands, is that of
cutting off one of their fingers, either as a token of mourning at the
loss of a friend, or to propitiate the wrath of a superior. In the former
case, the mutilation is in general less an evidence of grief than of
covetousness ; every one who thus maims himself e.xpects to receive,
ill return, from the friends of the deceased, a considerable present,
which is called rukamamathd >ii iidra, — the drying of blood. For
this reason, parents frequently cut off the little fingers of their
children, much against the will of the latter.
When a cliief is otVended with any among his subjects, and
threatens them with punishment, they sometimes, if he proves inex-
orable to their j)rayers, have recourse to the sii-.gular expedient of
cutting off tlicir little fingers (and sometimes the tliird), which they
stick all together in tiic cleft of a bamboo, and present it to him.
This extraordinary offering usually has tlie desired efTect.
The ceremonies at tlio Inrth of a cliild have little that is remarkable,
though they partake of the peculiarities which characterize most of
their customs. As soon as tlie child is born, a (juantity of protisions
is cooked and distributed among the friends of the family. At tlie
end of four days the friends coinc to kiss t!ie cliild, ai.d a feast (called
rahtmhoiKjirn) is made for them by the parents. At the end of ten
days, another feast {rahiimliniiijitini) is made, and the matter is over.
The child is namiid imnioilialely after birth, eitlier liy the father, or
by the prie.st. If this is not done, the mother becomes disgusted with
it, and strangles it, — .sayinir that it is a /iiniiifik (outcast).
Xaines, which are always signiti( alive, are f"re(iueiitly changed, and
an individual sometimes has several in the course of his life. With
MELANESIA.
67
the ctiiefs, these new names answer for so many titles of nobility.
Tanoa (Afft"a-bo\vl) was the original name of the present king of
Mbau. He afterwards acquired that of Ndrendre-ni-ale, literally, diffi-
cult to throw away, — which was explained from the fact that in one
of his warlike expeditions he slew so many of his enemies that his
people had some dilliculty in disposing of the dead bodies. Ilis third
name was obtained in an attack upon Verata, in which he destroyed
many of their canoes by fire, and was thenceforward known as Viso-
wangga, or canoe-burner. A chief or landholder frc([ucutly receives
his title from the name of his house, as noble families in Europe are
named from their estates. Thus a chief of Mbau, whose pro})er ap-
pellation was Veikoso, having had a house called Ngf/ara-ni-kii/i (lite-
rally, dog's cave), was usually spoken of under the respectable title of
Ko-mai-na-uggara-ni-kuli , — lie of the dog's cave.
The taking of a certain fish or sea-slug, is attended with some sin-
gular rites, and is important as connected witli the diversions of tlic
year, not only in this group, but also in some of the Polynesian
islands. This animal, which is called mhal6lo, is described as some-
what resembling in shape a large centiiiede, being about three inches
long, with a soft and gelatinous body, and innumerable legs. It is
taken only on a single day in the year, usually in the latter part of
November, whep it makes its ai)pearance, at a certain period in ihe
last quarter of the moon, and at the time of "young llood" in the
morning. The fish come out in dense swarms from holes in the
coral, and spread out on the surface of the water. A bushel or more
are sometimes caught from a single hole, by scooping them up as they
ascend. As they will keep but a low days, they unist be eaten with-
out delay, and the day of tlieir appearance is the commencement of a
general feast at tho.se places where fhey are taken. For four days no
warfare is carried on, anil a tambii is laid to [)revent noise or distur-
bance of any kind. No labour must be done, and no person must be
seen outside of his house. In Ovolau, the ceremony begins as soon
as the vi/hi/i'i/o is brought in, by a mataiiirdinia ascending a tree, and
invoking the kalou iii laiigi (spirit of the skies) to be favourable to
them throughout the year, — grant them fine weather, fair winds, &c..
— ending his prayer with the words sit uti ! sa iili ! set oti ! (it is
finished.) Thereupon a tremendous clatter, with drumming and
shouting, is raised by all the people inside of the houses for about half
an hour, and tlien a dead i[uiet ensues for four days, during which
they are feasting on the mbali'ilo. If in any dwelling a noise is made.
68 ETHNOGRAPHY.
as by a child crying, a forfeit (on") is immediately exacted by the
chief, — usually some article of food to be eaten at the council-house.
Besides the appearance of the mbaldlo, the natives have few means
of determining with exactness the progress of time. Indeed, they
pay little attention to this, and we were unable to obtain from several
to whom we applied, the names of the months in their regular series.
The following are those which are given by the missionaries us in
use at Lakemba, but several of them are unknown in other parts of
the groun.
Scsi-ni-iigasau-lailai, . . February, . . (jc-wi-wgoiaM, flower of the reed.)
Scsc-ni-v<:<isau-lcvii, . . Miircli.
Viilni-mlioliiDitiota, . . . April, . . . (mliola, to sliare out, distribute.)
Viilai-kclikcU, .... May, . . . (keli, to di;;.)
Viilai-tremfcre, (mie, . . . {urrc, to till the groiuui.)
Kauakatntiiii'irr, luly.
Kturatiaka-liiiUii, . . . August.
Ktnmvaka-lrru, .... September.
Mlnilolo-Uiiliii, .... Octoljcr.
MIhiIoIo-Icvu Xovciiiber.
Niinga-lailai, .... Docrmlicr, . . (.V««g((, a kind of fish.)
y^un!.'a-/ev>i, .lanuary.
f r
: I
1
ii
The Feejeeans know nothing of astronomy, and have not even
names for the most important constellations. They call the morning
and evening stars volu-siiiija and voki-mhongi , literally, marking-tlay,
and marking-niglit ; but they do not distinguish between the planets
and the fixed stars. Their ignorance on this subject is probably to
be ascribed to the fact that they never undertake voyages beyond the
limits of their group. Though good sailors, they are bad navigators,
in the technical sen.se of the term. In this respect they are far sur-
passed by the Polynesians, though the latter (with the exception of
the Tongans, who have learned the art from the Feejeeans) are inferior
to them ill tlie construction and size of their canoes.
These natives are somewhat remarkable for their industry. The
desire for the actiuisition of properly which is so conspicuous a trait
in their character, induces them to give more attention to the means
b\" whicii tills may be iiccomplished tiian is usual among the careless
and light-hearted Polynesians. They also pay much attention to
cleanliness, being accustomed to bathe frequently, and rub their
bodies with cucoa-iiut oil, u practice which has a beneficial elfect, in
that climate, by cliecking the perspiration wliich would otherwise be
M I C R O N E S I A.
69
excessive and clebilitatintr. Tlio following order of daily avocations
is pretty regularly observed.
When tiioy rise in tiie morning, wliich is commonly before the sun,
the men first repair to the vihitie (town-iiousc or temple) to drink
kavn. 'riiey eitlier wash tlicniselves all over, or at least rinse tiioir
mouths, before they join in the drinking, 'riuiy tlien go to their
plantations of yams and taro, or to any otlier work in wliich they may
be engaged, and remain there until the sun becomes loo hot for com-
fort, when Ihcy return home and take their first meal, called IxdtdUut ;
this is usually abo\it nine or ten o'clock. During the heat of the day
they lounge about, doing liglit jobs, talking or sleeping. Towards
night, if they feel industrious, they return to tiieir plantations. Other-
wise they dress in a clean girdle, wash and oil themselves, powder
their hair witli ashes, and stroll about the village, chatting with their
friends until the dusk of the evening, whicii is the usual time of
retiring.
Sometimes in the afternoon they repair to the r(ira iii melr, public
j)lace for dancing, — and join in a tlance ; or lo the rara iii tiiujija, —
place of games, — which is an oblong level space, two hundred yards
long by ten wide, where they play at the game called tinrifia, — some-
thing between ([uoits and cricket. It is played by two parties, one
against the other. The implement used is a stiff reed, between three
and four feet long, having on its head a heavv knob of iron-wood.
This is darted heatl foremost, iVom one end of the rum towards the
other, the object being to throw it to the greatest possible distance.
It is not siMit all the way through the air, but slides ami bounds along
the ground. 'Y\w game is a very e.vciting one. Several towns some-
times engage in it at once, the vancpushed of one day being bound to
fuul provisions for tlic next. The [jassions of the c(ind)atants are
sometin\es wrongiit up .so liighly tliat ([vuuTols anil bloodshed ensue.
A good player, {ndau-tingcj'i,) enjoys almost as much estimation
thronjjhout the islands as a irreat warrior.
M I C H X K S I A.
This " region of small islands,'' as it is very a])propriately desig-
nated, extends between the meriilians of 13'i^ K, and 17S° \V., and
between the parallels of '21° N. and f)" S. The greatest number lie
in a range between the i)arallels of 5° and 10° X., scattered as con-
18
70
ETHNOr.R A PlI Y.
fnsedly along the ocean as seed strewn in a furrow. There arc about
a hundred groups, if this name may be apphed to the coral rings, or
lagoon islands, which consist of numerous small patches of rock, dis-
posed in a circular or oval form and connected by reefs. Of all the
groups, only si,\ belong to the class of high islands, and these are all
surrounded by extensive reefs. They are the Pelew Islands, the
Ladroncs, Yap, Ilogoleu, Banabe, and Ualau. These, though among
the smallest of their class in the I'acific, are important wlien com-
pared witli the coral clusters, all of which put together would not
probably give t'lrce hundred stpiare miles of dry land. If, however,
the reels and lagoons, from which tlic natives derive a grout part of
their subsistence, be taken into consideration, the estimate will be
greatly enlarged.
The information which we possess concerning most of these
islands is principally derived from the works of former voyagers, par-
ticularly Duperrey, DT'rville, Kotzebue, and Liitke, and we shall
therefore enter into no furtlier particulars respecting them than will
be necessary to illustrate tiie account \\ liich we have to give, from
other sources, of a few of tiie groups. For this purpose tiie situation
of the wliole archipelago must be particularly noted. It ap[)roaclies
within twenty degrees of Japan and Loo Clioo on tlie north, witbin
five (It^grees of the Philippines on tlie west, has New (Juinea and the
other Melanesian islands at the same distance on the south, and the
Polynesians about as far otV to the southeast. It happens, moreover,
that winds are common over this region from alltiiese points. The
soutiieasl trades blow from tiie Navigators to the Kingsmill Islaiuis,
and e.xtcud far north of the eijuator. In the winter the northwest
monsoon comes down tVom the China Sea, frecpiently shifting round
to the southwest, in which direction the most violent hurricanes occur.
At this season of the year large fir-trees, sometimes with their branches
and leaves adhering, are driven from some northern region to the
Kingsmill Islands, — the .southernmost of Micronesia, — while the
.southwest storms bring bamboos in like manner from a tropical clime
to the same place.
These oijservations are important for their bearing on the (juestion
of the probable source or sources of the poi)ulation of these islands.
The subject is one wiiich neither our space nor our materials will
admitof our discussing in full, and it remains for .some future iiupiirer
to trace out, by a comparison of language, physical traits, customs,
and traditions, the origin and migrations of the Micronesian tribes.
MICRONESIA.
71
That tliis may be done, judifiiig by wbat little we have liccn able to
effect for two or three of the islands, we entertain no doubt. And it
is certain that few more important fields now remain open for ethno-
gra|)liical research.
We sometimes speak of the numerous colonies which have pro-
ceeded from Great Britain as being one people, inasmuch as they
have issuctl from a single source ; and in this sense we may apply the
term to the tribes of Polynesia. We also speak of tlie iidiabitants of
the Koman empire — at least alter two or three centuries of concpicst —
as forming one peo[)le, inasmuch as the various nations and tribes to
which they belonged had been cemented and fused together, by the
general ascendency and intermi.vture of one dominant race, — and in
this sense alone the term is applicalile to tlie natives of the Microne-
sian islands. Hence it will be seen that no general description can
be given of the latter, which shall be every where equally correct, and
which \\ ill not retpiire many allowances and exceptions.
'I'lie Micronesians, as a people, do not dilfcr greatly in complexion
from their neighbours of Polynesia. Their colour varies from a light
yellow, in some of the groujjs, particularly the western, to a reddish
brown, which we find more conuaon in the east and southeast. The
features are usually higii and bold, — the nose straight or a(piiline, the
cheek-bones projecting, the chin rounded and prominent. The nose
is commonly widened ai Ihe lower part, as in the Polynesian race, but
this is not a universal trait The hair, which is black, is in some
straight, in others curly. .' i e beard is usually scanty, though among
the darker tribes it is more abundant, and these have often w hiskers
and mustacliios. In stature, the natives more often fall below tliau
exceed the middle height, and they are naturally slender. That
which especially characterizes this people, is the great elevation of
the forehead, and indeed of the whole heail, as compared with its
breadth. This was general in those wliom we saw, and is apparent
in nearly all the portraits of natives which have been given by dilfe-
rent voyagers.
In character, the Micronesians — at least those of them who belong
to the lighter coloured tribes — will compare advantageously with any
other people, whether savage or civilized. Their most pleasing, and,
at the same time, their most striking trait, is a certain natural kindli-
ness and goodness of heart, to which all their visiters, of every
country and character, bear the same testimony. \\ ilson at the
Pelew Islands, Kotzebue at Radack, Dupcrrey and D'Lirville at
m
i
';(
f'
I
M
7a
E T II N O U R A P II Y.
Ualaii, Liitke and Martens at all the western islands, O'Connel! and
every other visiter at Banabe, Paul(lin<f at the Mulj^ravo tlronp, and
our Ex|)edition at Makin, have had occasion to remark the swoctncss
of tenii)er and the absence of any harsh and violent feelin<4s, which
characteri/e the inhabitants. This is especially deservin<r of note,
inasmuch as there is no (|uality more rare, or about the existence of
which scepticism is more justilial)le, than that of real benevolence
among savai;es. In this case, however, tlio stroni^ and decided
testimony of so many witnesses can leave no tloubt that the natives
of the Caroline Islanils are, for the most part, a kind, amiable, and
gentle race.
There are, however, as before remarked, some exceptions to bo
made in any general description of this people. This kindness of
heart is less apparent in the natives of those small isolated coral
islands, where the supply of food is scanty, and where the fretpient
pressure of actual want sometimes produces in the people a hard and
unfeeling disposition. 'J'ho.se tribes, too, among whom a partial
intermixture of the Melanesian race shows itself in the features and
complexion, will also be found to partake, more or less, of the ferocity
natural to that race.
They are also, like the Polynesians, a social and an enterprising
people. A constant communication is kept up among the various
groups and islands. They are excellent navigators, governing their
courses by the stars with great accuracy.
As might be expected, wars are by no means frecpient among
them. Liitke inlbrms us that on Ualau, and all the coral islands to
the west of it, a constant peace [jrevails. On some yf the high
islands, where the po|)ulation is divided into sevcru! tribes, wars
occasionally occur. They are, howe\cr, seldom very destructive,
and in all cases it is esteemed nece.s.sary for a party which is about
to attack another, to send word, by a heraUl, of their intention, in
order tliat tlieir ojjponcnts may be prepared to meet them. This, we
are ass'urcd, is the case in IJanabe, Ilogolen, antl the Pelew Islands.
It is difhcult to say whether parental all'ection is strongly developed
in these natives or not. Some circumstances, which will be hereafter
mentioned, would lead to an unfavourable conclusion. But what is
especially remarkable is the unusual consideration which is awariled
to the female sex. Tiic women, in all tiie groups, do com])aratively
little luboiu", and that only of the lightest kind. Ill treatment of a
wife by her hustjand is almost unknown, — partly from their naturally
MICRONESIA.
73
good (lisi)osition, but chiefly because he would be certain to receive ii
severe punishment either from iier rolntives, or from the other women
of tlie neif^hbourhood. Tiiis fact is curious enough, and it appears to
bo universal. By all accounts, tiiis sex, in the Caroline Islands,
enjoys a perfect ecpiality in pnblic estimation with the other.
They are far from being a licentious people. The modest deport-
ment of the women, and the sacredness of the marriage tie, have
been remarked by all voyag(^rs, who have contrasted it with the
contrary trait, so conspicuous in the natives of Polynesia.
Their respect for rank is remarkable, and the more so as it does not
seem to be founded upon any superstitious observance, like that of
the /(//>//. Not only do the chiefs enjoy an unquestioned supremacy,
but the distinctions between the diflerent clas.ses of po[)ulation, of
which tliere are usually two or more, is maintained'with a rigidness
whicli rennntls one of the in.stitution of ca.ste.
They sei-m to be an honest people. Among themselves, they are
said to be decidedly so. They sometimes, however, steal from ve.ssels,
in which case, it would appear that iho greatness of the tempta-
tion overcomes their better feelings. Their woril, it is said, may
generally ho relied upon.
They are very iiilelligeiit. The same observation has been made
concerning the natives of Polynesia, but a distinction is observable
betwecii the two m this res|u'ct. The latter are (luick in their per-
ceptions, iniiT-nidus. and prompt in acquiring a new art. The Caro-
line islanders, on the other hanil, ere a considerate and reflecting
people, acute in reasoning, and desirous of understanding the meaning
of any uovei appearance.
It will be seen that the character here given is little more than a
catalogue of good (|iialities. Sueli as it is, bowe\t'r, it is an e.xact
stati'meiil of the impressions derived from personal observation, as
well as from the accounts of others. There can be no doubt that
these natives arc a liiiclv endowed race, in whom the moral feelings
and the intellect generally [iredominate over the more violent pas-
sions. That there are occasional exceptions, has been betbre re-
marked, and some of them Mill be hereafter noticed.
The dilference of character in the three Oceanic races is most
clearly displayed m the recf!ption which they have given to their
earliest civilized visitors. With the black tribes, a strong disposition
has generally been evinced to get rid of the strangers as soon as
possible, and to avoid coinmunicution with them. The Polynesian
19
74
KTIINOr. R A 1' M V.
islntulcrs, on the other hand, Imvo almost always received thctn with
a chitnorous wekonio and apjjarent l'rien(isiii|), and tlien made an
attempt to got possession, by I'orce or fraud, of their vessel, or some of
their property. While the natives of Micronesia, though scmetimcs
shy at first, have seldom failed, in the end, to establish and maintain
an intercourse of uninler'-upted friendship and mutual confidence.
The only exceptions, and those not numerous, have been in the cases
before noticed, where hardship and want, or an iiitermi.\ture of foreign
blood, have deteriorated tiieir character.
In treating of the Polynesians, wo have had occasion to remark that
they liad probably attained, before their discovery, to as high a grade
of civilization as the ciicumstances in which they were placed would
permit. The same remark may be made concerning the natives of
Micronesia, but with this difference, that while the former appear to
have risen from a lower condition to their present state, the latter
seem, on the contrary, to have descended from a higher grade which
had been attained in some more favourable situation. As this view
(which is that of Les.sou, and, in part, of Liilke,) is somewhat im-
portant, it is proper to state the considerations on wliich it is fouiuled.
1. Although the Caroline islanders arc not more ingenious or more
enterprising than the Polynesians, and altiiough, on the whole, tiiey
seem to enjoy no more of the comforts of life, yet in many of the arts,
and what may be termed sciences, they are decideilly superior. Those
relating to navigation deserve particular notice. The latter of the
two races, in their voyages, are usually guided by tlie winds, and pay
little attention to the heavenly b(Klies. The Micronesians, on the
other hand, sail altogether by the stars, with which they are well
acfpuiinted. 'J'iiey divide the horizon into twenty-eight points, instead
of the thirty-two of our compasses, giving to each a name. The Po-
lynesians, on the contrary, have no special names even for the four
cardinal points. East and jresl they c.\'[)ress by phrases signifying
sunrise and sunset ; north and soiil/i usually by the names for certain
winds, or by the words ritjlit IkiikI and left. Hut even these e.vprcs-
sions arc rarely used. The canoes of the Caroline islanders are made
to sail with either end foremost, resembling in that resi)ect, those
which are in use at the Feejeo Islands, and which the natives of
Tonga have borrowed from thence. Whether this motlel belongs
properly to the black race or the Micronesian is uncertain ; but from
its universiility among the latter, we should be inclined to ascribe it
to them. Those who inhabit the high islands have also the art of
MICRONESIA.
75
coatin^r the outHido of their canocH with a shining varnish. They
make, bcsidt^s, by burning the coral rock, a fine lime, which is ini.vcd
witii cocoa-nut oil, and used to whitewasii the inside of their canoes
and render them water-tight. Neither of these arts is known to the
Polynesians.
2. Some of their manufactmes evince a skill which seems to l)o tlio
ofispring of civilization. This is particularly the case with their
cinctures, or sushes, which are made of the fd)rous filaments of the
banana plant. They are not braided by hand, like the fine mats of
Polynesia, but woven in a simple loom. The shuttle resembles very
closely in appearance, as in use, that of our weavers. These sashes
have attracted much notice and admiration from foreigners, for the
elegance of their to.xturc, and the beauty and regularity of the colours
which are inwoven. Another of tiieir ornaments deserves notice, not
so much for any skill displayed in its manulacture, as because it
seems to bo universal among the islanders of Micronesia and peculiar
to them. It consists of a string of alternate wooden and shell beads,
if this term may bo applied to them. The " beads" are in the shape
of a sixpence witli a hole through its centre, or more nearly like the
"button-moulds" of our dress-makers. They are made of fragments
of cocoanut-shell and sea-shells, which are broken or cut nearly to the
re(iuired shape, and then filed down together till they are smooth,
even, and e.vactly of equal size. Those of sea-shell are white, and
those of cocoa-nut black. The}' are strung alternately upon a small
cord, and appear like a round tle.xible stick, half an inch in diameter,
marked with alternate white and black rings. They are worn, not
round the neck, but round the waist, and only by the men.*
• Siiico this Hiis wiilti'ii, my attcntiuu 1ms been drawn to a passngo in Cliamisso's
voliiinc, npiiciKlcil to Kotz<'luic's voyiigc round tlip world, (Von> wliitli tlio orif^in, mid
proljjilily tlio real niitinc, of this supposed ornimicnt may be iiili'trcd. In speaking of
the natives of tlie Liidroiie Islands, ho i-eniarks: — "Wo hnvo discovered among their
untii|iiilirs sonii'thing which seems to show n great ndvaiico made in civilization beyond
any of the other islanders of the great ocean. We speak of the invention of money. . . .
Disks of tortoiso-sliell, of the slinpo of button-moulds, but thin as p.iper, and made ex-
tremely smooth by rubbing, are strung close togetlier on a thick cord of cocoa-nut sinnet.
The whole tonus a (lexiblo cylinder of the thickness of a linger, and several feet in
length, 'riiese disk.s were in circulation as a medium of exchange, and only a few of
the chiefs had the right to make and issue them." — Chiimisiin's Wtrkc, Leipzig, 1830,
vol. ii. p. 142. This " money" is evidently the same with the " Ix^ads" of the Kings-
mill Islanders, except that the latter use other shells instead of that of the tortoise. From
various slight circunistinicos uliieh arc now called to mind, it seems likely that these
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0 ^^ Ui
^E la 11,2 |22
Hiotographic
Sciences
Corporation
-'^
' <»
33 WIST MAIN STMIT
WnSTM,N.Y. I4SM
(7l6)t73^S03
^^ ^\ ^r\\
i
76
K TUN (MS « A I'll V.
3. The Caroline islanders tattoo tliemsolves not out of motives of
decency, nor nltdgotlicr tor ornament, liut as a means of distin^uish-
injr tlieir families ami clans, and of retainin(r tlie memory of persons,
olijects, and events. Liitke found on one of the coral islamis a man
wIk) liail murks tattcH>e(i upon iiim tn represent all the islands of the
arciiipehiy;(). At IJanatie. tiie wife lias tattooed upon lier tlie marks
standini; for the names of her imsliand's ancestors. 'I'he natives of
this ijjroup, lookiiif^ over an lOnj^lish book, took it to Ite the white
man's tattoo, hut could not understand the object of the frequent repe-
tition of the same characters, sayinj^ that it was useless.*
4. \\ hile the system of "lovernment in most of the Polynesian
groups is of a very simple character, that of the Caroline islanders is,
on the contrary, unusually complex. Not only is the whole popula-
tion, in many of the islands, divided into distinct classes, which never
notivi'S dill artiially niiploy llic lriiikiiilnrit<liirn, ii.s llicy Irrnu'd llictn, (i>r ii nii'cliiiiii it<
trmlo; they bronchi thciii nil' in ;;ri'.'it ((iiiiiitltics, wuiii' iiidividiiiilH hiiviii); iiiiiiiy liilliomM
lioil nriiiind ihi- wiiisl, iiiid im iirlii'lr i>rir.'iirii' ln'siilcs. It is iioiid in my jmirnal, thai on
llic lirst ilay at Ta|iiite<iiK'a, IkIciii' W" liiiiili'd, innn' than holl' a linslnl nrihc Ix'ads were
ohtaincd. ih\ ini{iiiriMg (il'olhcr.s whu wcri' ninrc (ii;:a;;i'd lliaii niysill' in Ixirti'rin;! uilh
llio natives, I find that llii'ir rri'iijlcciidns ac-iiinl Willi my nwri. Tiny an' dis|His<d In
think that the o|iini<in alx>vo i'\|>n'SN4'd uith n-^^ard In the iisr ol' th(.> artiidcs in ijia'slioii
is rorm-t, and that wi- wen; mistaken at llic tinio in iiii|)|Hi.Hing tlicin to Ix- mcn'ly oriio>
inonls, — ihiMiyh Ihry may havi' Ik'cii wnrii as .sm-h, as snnw f Ihr .Snnlh Aini'rirnn
soldirrs have thrir arcoiilrcnii'iits niNrnd willi silver I'niiis. ,\s the materials dI' which
the disks are made an' vitv eiimiiicm, the value must .'irise rnmi Ihe lalMnir nei'es.snry to
rut and |M>lish them li> their |irii|H'r >ha|ie, »hi<'h, liir the numlor eoiilained in a string,
must Im" very gri'iit.
Hut ihe iiiU'reiioes whieh may Ik' di'diiced iVom the general dilPisinn of this sp<Tie» of
circulaling medium ainiaig llie Canilino islaiulers, arc very iiii|iortant. The most
common Chines' coins, as is well known, havi! a hole through Ihe centn-, an' siriing
upon strings, and disposed ol' hy lengths. In He<i'hey's " Voyage to Ihe I'acilic," p. 31)3,
(.\m. edit.,) s|«'aking ol' ilii' asserlion that llie |«'opIe of I/k( CIhm) have no money, h<!
says, "Our meeting willi this |K'asiinl, however, disclosed Ihe Irulli, as he had a string of
-oi/i (iiniall Chinese money) 8US|H'ndi'd to his girdle, in )!■" innnner adopted hy llio
Chinese-." In a note hi^ adds, " These coins, being of small value, are strung together
in hundn'ds, ami have a knot at each end, so that it is not necessary to count them." I
uni ilisposed lo consider this I'ai't as one of the most important evidences that Ihe Micro-
nesians, or at lea.st the dominant class among them, derive tlioir origin from I'^astem
Asia, and from a civilizetl |H'ople. It has lusn Ihnuglit Ix'st to let ihv remarks in llio
text stand as lirst written, in order to show the im|Nirt<incc which Ihe universal pn^va-
lenrc and |ieculiar chararter of the Nup|HiM(>d orimiiN-nt Icil us to allach to it when its
probable origin and natnn- were iinsus|iectixl.
• O'Connell's .Nurruiive, p. 103.
1
M I C R O N E H I A.
77
intermarry, but tlic rank of the chicfH, unci tlio succession to aiithority,
are regulated according to a very intricate system, wliich lias evi-
dently been the residt of desijin and study. t)f tliis we shall have
occasion to (five s(»me examples,
5. 'I'iie religion of the MiiTonesians carries us at once to Eastern
Asia. It is the worship of the s|)irits of their ancestors. They are
called at the I^adrones, anili, at the Kinjismills, atili, at tlie Mul-
graves, nuit and iiiiis, at llanahe, hnni or itiii, at Falalou, haiio, A:c.
Prol)al)ly the ijuris of Lord North's Island, sit^iiifyiii)^ divinity, is the
same word, as the ciiaiij^e of n to r is universal in these dialects.
They have neither temples, imatfcs, nor sacrifices. Their worship
consists merely in prayiiii^ and perfonninif certain ceremonies, —
amoii'4 others the oH'crin;^ of a j)ortion of their foo<l to the spirits. It
docs not appear that a real tahu-system exists on any of the groups.
Voyagers have found words signifyini; sacred or forbidden, which
they have a.ssimilated with the Polynesian tabu, but they give us no
hint of a cotle of laws and social regulations deriving their validity
from a religious .sanction. There is certainly nothing of the kind in
the Kiiigsmill (iroup.
On the whole, we may venture to say that the semi-civilization of
the Polynesians has been attained by bringing to perfectit)n the rude
arts and institutions natural to the savage state; while that of the
Micronesians has resulted from simplifying, and adapting to more
restricted circumstances, the inventions and usairps of civilization.
\\'e now proceed to notice some of the single grou[)s and islands,
concerning whose inhabitants we have it in our power to give some
information.
I Mil I, It li l.tilil) NO I! Ills I s I. A N n
This island, whicii forms the southwestern extremity of the Micro-
iiesian range, is situated in altout latitude 3° '2' N., and longitude
131° 4' K. It is a small, h)w islet, about three miles in circumfe-
rence, with a population of between three and four hundred souls.
Our information concerning it is derived from an American, by name
Horace Ilolden, who, with eleven companions, after sufl'ering ship-
wreck, reached the island in a boat, iiid was taken captive by the
natives, lie was detained by them two years, from December 0,
1832, to November '27, 1831, when he made his escape and returned
to America, where he published, in a small volume, an interesting
80
1
7S
KTII XCXi It A I'll V.
narrative of his advoiiturcs and sniU'riiiiis, with a (h'scripliini of the
island and its inhal)itants. Appended to the lHH)k is a vocahnlary of
tlic laiiLMiauo, drawn iip witli eare liy tlio lion, .loiin I'iekerinjf ol
Hostoii. wliose name is a sullieient t;naranlee lor its eorreetness.
I met Mr. lloldi-n at Hoston. two years alter his return, and in
Rcveral conversations witii liiui olitaiiied sonic inlorination on points
not noticed in his pulilished narrative, together witii an addition to
the voeahulary ol" a nnniher of wonis wliieh lie was alile, from time to
time, to call to mind. It has seemed to me, therel'ore, that a i)rief
account of the natives of this island would not Im; out of place here,
more esj>ecially as it will serve to prove liie sirikinif similarity of
traits and customs wiiich prevail from one extremity of the Caroline
Islands to the other.
••The complexion of tlie natives," says llolden in his narrative, "is
a liirht coppi-r colour. — mucii li|j[hter than tliat of the Malays or the
I'eiew islanders, which last, however, they resend)le in tiie hreadlh
of their faces, hit;h (•heek-hones, ;iii<l liroad llattened no.ses.""'* Hero
we ol)si>rve, what lias heen l>efore remarked of the i'olynesian trihes,
that the li^jhtest comjile.vioii is founil among those who are neari'st the
ei|ualor.
The natives worshij) a thnty wlmm they term //»/;•/.«, in which we
perhaps see the anili or atiia of tlie lia<lrone and ilaihu^k Islands.!
Accordinif to the native traditinns, a pi'rs(ina;fe, hy name i'iln-ld'il (or
I'eeter Kart), of copper colour like themselves, "came many years
aL'o from the island of Ternate (one of the Moluccas), and t;ave them
their reh'j;ion, and such simple arts as they possessed."! It is proha-
bly to him that we are to attribute some jieculiarities in their modt of
worship, such as their temple, with rude imatn's to represent liie
divinity. " In the centre, suspended Irom the roof, is a sort nf altar,
into which they suppose! their deity comes to hold converse witii the
priest." The temple is called n n i/nris. or spirit-house. In this
word /•(/•( we recou;nise tim l'olynesianyi//f' or y^//*', house, (V'ltian,
rnk,) used here only in this cnnne.vion, — the ordinary word for
dwelling' lieing i/it)i, the i/ii of the other Carolim* Islands. So, too.
• S|K>.ikiiii.' <>t' 111'' I'riiw isliiiuliT'i, lie .siiys: — " 'I'lii'ir ciiiiiiilc.Niciii is n light cdpixT.
I'liiir iiiis<^ uri' siiiiii hIiiiI IIiiI, IhjI imt so ll:il .•!■< lliosi' ol' ilic Arni'uiis, nor hit tlnir lips
>'i lllH-k." \.iri:ili\i', |>. l".
t 'I'll'' ('li!iii;;f 1111111 iiiiis 111 V""*' "imlil I*' .•icrnrilinu' I" ill'' •■iist.ini of the (liulirl,
Thii^ «i liMn- 1)1111) tor iir-i (ll/iii), Mill; man lor umanc, man, iVo,
i .\|i|»iiili\ In Narrulivc, p. Vi;i.
Mli'UOX KSI A.
79
tlic i\ativos wear the Polynesian <„nr(llc of l)ark-clnth, wliicli llirv call
by tlit^ wi'll-kiiowii naiiio of lopn. Tlu'v liavc, too, thi! won! lahii,
si^riiityini,' a .sacrt'ij |ilac('. 'I'licso facts are valiinblo. as, combincil
witli many other indications whicii will lie hereafter n(ite<l, they seem
to show that tiieori'^inal iniialiitantsof the Molnccas(who are distinct
from the intrndinjj Malay con(|iierors) wt-re a race more nearly allied
to the I'olvnesians than the other trilK>s of Malaisia.
"'I'lieir ini|ilenients of war are sjiears and chilis; they have no
Ijows and arrows. Their spears are made of the wo()<l of the cocoa-
nnt tree; the points of them are set with rows of sharks' teeth; and
heiiiLf at the same lime very heavy, and trom ten to twenlv feet lonu,
they art) formidalile \vea|ions." 'I'luse spears armed with sharks'
teeth are I'onnd thronnhont the Mii ionesi;in groups, and may he
termed the national weapon, as the how is of the Mack race; for
thoMirh they were not entirely nnknown to the I'olynesians. they
were yet so rare that we saw hut three or fonr in the course of our
voyaiic and those only at the Naviiiator am! lln; Depeyster (iroup.
'I'he houses of the natives are hndt of small trees and pmIs, and
thatclu'il svith leav(<s. They have two stories, a ^'ronnd lloor and a
loft, which is entered liy a hole or scuttle throu>|h the horizontal jiar-
tilioii. or upper lloor.
For ornament, they .sometimes wear in their ears, which are always
hored, a folde<l leal'; and round their necks a necklace made of the
shell of the cocoa-nut and a small w hile sea-siicll. These last are no
doulit the circular "heads" before de.scrilied, althoiiL'h the iiiikU' of
wearini? them is unusual.
They live principally on cocoa-nuts, witii a few taro roots, which
ihey raise, with 1,'real dilliciilty, in trenches duix in the sand. Their
sn|iply o| fish is small, and only live turtle were taken while Hold
en
as on tlu^ island.
Thes(! constitute the slender me;
if tl
leir
support ; and they are thus barely kv\\i from actual death by famine,
but on the very veri^e of starvation." It is to this state of misery in
which thev are constantly kepi that we must attriliule the cruel dis-
position whicli they inanilcsl. 'I'he unfortunate captives were treated
with u'lvat harshness, and compelled to toil in the severest drudixery,
with barely sutlicient food to support life. In tin'l. some t 'them ilied
of the sull'eriiiLjs thus inllicted. It is remarkable that tiic women
were more^active in this ill-treatment than the men. We shall have
occasion to note a similar fact in the Mulgrave Island.s, at the other
4
80
KTIINOO RAl'H Y.
extremity of this region. The men, on Tohi, perform much of the
(loniostic hiboiir which is olspwliere left to the women.
The hcnhps of tlio dead, except of very young children, are laid in
a cano<', nn<l comnutted to the ocean. The reason of tliis <'ustom
lldldcn did not know. It seems likely, from what will he stated in
another place, that the canoe is intended to convey the deceased to
the hind of spirits, and that yinni'^ children are not sent hecanse they
are esleerncd iiicnpaliie of guiding it.
It should he mcntiuiicd that the relea.sc of the four Americans who
survived (two of whom t,'ot free a short time after their cajjlure) was
voluntary on the part of llic natives, a fact which shows that the heel-
ings of h\imanity were not altogether extinct in their hearts. Indeed,
allht)uuh tlie sufferings of the cajitivcs were very great, it does not
appear that ihcy were worsts relatively to \\\v. condition in which the
natives themselves lived, than they would have been on any other
i.slanil of the Pacilic. Men who were actually dying of starvation,
like the people of 'I'uhi, c(udd not lie expected to exercise that kind-
ness towards others which nature refused to them.
IIAN MU: nit ASi KNSlu.N Isr.ANU, O li Till: SKMAVIM; (ilKH i*.
This island, one of the largest of tlie Carolines, is situated in lati-
tude 7" .\., longitude l")i»'^ !•). Admiral liiitke, though not, properly
speaking, the discoverer, was the fust to make known its existence to
the world, so late as the ye;ir I'^'.J'^. lie did not land, and the only
communication which hi' had with tlie natives was through two or
three canoes which came off to the ship. The men, m appearance
no less than in language, seemeil to him (piite distinct from the other
natives of Micronesia, and he compares them to the Papuans. But
he observes that those whom he saw .seemed to be all of the lower
clas.ses.
Had the Hu.ssian navigator been able to land, he wouhl jirobably
have had an o])portunity of rescuing from captivity seven English
seamen, who had shortly before reached the island in a boat, after
their slii[)wreck on a reef near I alau. One of these, by name James
O'C'oniiell, alter living five years on the island, escaped in November,
I'^'M, and two yciirs alterwards ri'aclied the I'liiled States. He jjub-
lished. at Hoston, an account of his adventures, writien for him by a
gentleman of that city, and containing much valuable information.
i
M I (• U O NISI A.
81
In I'^^l I l)ecamo aciiimmtwl witli liiin, niid snw him fre(|upnlly, for
the |)ur|Hiso of tiikiii!^ down snrh ii vocahuhiry of the liiiiuiiaj^e iis ho
fould furnish, — whirii, notwithstaiKliiij,' his lorii^ ri-sideiicf, iuid iiis
general iiitflli^fi'iHc, was very scanty. Me was one of those wlio
seem to have a iiattiral incapacity fur ac(iuirini^ foreiifn toiiirues;
hut with th(! usages and institutions (tf the ishunh-rs lie a|)|)eared
perfectly famiUar, and was al»lo to render a clear and satisfactory
account, the ^:eneral correctness of whicli has since heeii fully con-
firmed.
In June, 1835. the London whale-ship Corsair was lost on a reef off
Drummond's Island, and one of her hoats, with six men, aiul the sur-
ffeon of the ship, Dr. Smith, reached Ascension, after a passage of
seventeen days, durinjf which they underwent extreme sulfering.
'riic journal of Dr. Smith came into my hands at Oahu; it contains
some inlerestiuff notices.*
At Oahu, I became acipiainted with Mr. G. W. I'linchard, who
had resided ahoiit a year on Banabe, and from him I obtained some
additional inibrmation. At that time wc expected to visit tlu^ island,
and sailed from Oahu with that object ; but contrary winds, and the
delay cau.sed l)y ttie survey of the Kiu<jsmill (J roup, which was found
to be much more extensive anil important than we had anlicijiated,
made it neces.sary to renounce this part of our cruise. The descrip-
tion which follows has been drawn chiefly from the sources above
mentioned.
Concerning the name of the i.sland, there is so great a disrrepancv
in the dilferent accounts, that it is dillicult to arrive at u satisfactory
conclusion. Mr. Punchard ])ronounced it lininhf : OConnell writes
it Botialwe ; Dr. Smith, litniinjlxiij : Liltke, I'oiii/ni/xt : Duperrey,
from the accounts of natives of other islands, I'oii/onjxi : Cantova,
Chamisso, and Liitke, from similar accounts, Faliipit, Faiiope. and
Faounoitpel. liana, — which in the dialects of western Micronesia,
would assume the various forms of Fa/ia, Fara, and Fafa, — seems to
form a part of the names of many groups in this archipelago. Thus
we have Fatia-non or Fala-luu, Fara-lis, Fana-di/,; (little Tana.)
• On n .siil)S<'<|iicnt voyage oCDr. Smilli to .New (icorjjiii, I' llic Solnnioii Ciroiip,
twelve liiiiiilrcd miles I'list.soutlieiist of IJriiiiiiiioiKrs Uliiiul, he laniled on ii sinnll neigli-
iHiiiriiig i.slet, enlled Kililysione, (liy the natives Monclovent-,) mid »h« conducted hy the
eliii'I'to the top III' n inoiiMtiiiii, uliere he louiid the tiuure-head of the Corsair. U had
drilled to the Island, and iKt'n curried hy the natives up the niuuntiiin,
'i\
89
K Til >'(>(! RA l>ll V.
Fold-lep (groat Fnlu), Ace* I urn inrliiied to think timt Haimlie or
Uanolic will coino nearest to the |>ro|H>r native protuinriation.
The Krniip ot' HannlH) consistN nt° the Mingle hi^^h iNland ot° that
name, with many low isletN sitnated on an extensive eoral helt which
surronnds it. The high island was supposed Ity Mr. I'unehard to be
nlM)nt forty miles in lireumlerence, and he estimated the po|)ulation
at fifteen thousand, — though others rciluee it to half this nundtur.
l)'('onnell, however, saw, on one occasion, the warriors of one triluj
collected to the nund)er of fifteen hundred men. As there are five
tribes on the island, this would seem to show that Mr. I'unchard's
estimate is not Iim) high.
The natives are divided into three classes or castes, chiefs, gentry
(or freemen), and slaves, or rather serfs. The first two belong to the
yellow race, proper to this archipelago, and are of the middle sixe,
with light complexions, prominent features, and smixilh skins. The
others are termed by O'Comiell a negro race, and Liitke compares
them to the Papuans ; he says, " 'I'hey have a wide, flat lace, with
broad depressed noses, thick lips, and crisp hair [lea c/teiru.ccr('/)iis)."\
O'Connell, however, says that they have straight hair,| meaning,
perhaps, that it is not woolly, like that of the African negro, lie
adds, further, (the universal characteristic of the Melanesian race,)
that "the skin is rough, and very unpleasant to the touch." Their
colour is nut black, but dark brown; Littke calls it cheHtnut {c/ui-
' It must I*' n llti'Ifil iliii iliriHijiliDiil Micri)nc>»i;i ihc Itltrrs »/, r, iiml /, iin- iisrd
ilil('ri'liitii)!i'iilily, U8 art' ft iind k,j) uiiil />, iiiiil Hdiiii'tiiiics / ,■ llie I (irimc diiiUvt lieccniirN
th in iinutlicr, mid 3 in ii third. Ilcnriii)! iIm-su cIiiiii|j;('.s in mind, Wf lind niinM-r<iii.s ri'-
si-mblancrs nincm^' tlic naiiiis i>rislniids and );ri>ii|i!<. yaiiiii or \iimo \k very i-oinmoii :
«<! havr y<iniii, yniiiii-iik (little .Naiiiii), Ijiiiiiii-rik (ditln), yumii-tiiiik, Xiiiiio.rdtissr,
y<iiiiii-/iiiiiiir, yiiiiio-iiiiiiito, (sdullicrn .Namu), yiiinn-liji-iiilnii (fftfni nurllH'rn .N.-imn),
\i\ ISo thrn' nri' twn islands named /■(»(.«, tttci iianii'd I'liini, — ijiiri' art; Jtii^ar and
liilfiili, I'rh-lrii, (ciiimnoidy called IWrir.) and IVIr-ltifi ; Lii^ii-niir, yiijifi-nr, and
yiiku-nitii ; Uti/ni, Oi/ki, L'lli.rik, and Uilin-nnliii, Mufniir and Miikiii. In slmrt.
Ihert' sc'oin.s to lie linrdly an islanil in we.itorn .Mieronesia, wliicli has not oni' in thr
eastern juirt of the arclii|H'la).'o named aOer it. It should Ih> i>lKi«?rved that the dillirenee
in many ol' the names <:iven almve, priKmils, in part, Irom the dilli'iini luoiles ol' ortho-
({niphy ndopled hy the voya;jers I'mui uhoin they an' taken, — Kotwliue, I)u|(ern-y,
Kicuri, and others. 'I'his ri'semhlanee in mimes is one ot' the clues which must be fol-
lowed ill Iraciii); out the ini);rations liy »hich these islands have been |ieo|iled,
t Kiiuri, OcPBiiie, vol. ii. p. 130.
X .Narrutive, p. l',"*.
M I C R O N K 8 I A.
«*3
laitfiie). There in reason to Ix'licvo tliut these two rarcs are fouml in
conjunction on other groups of Micronesia, {especially the large
elevated cluster of llojifoleu,) while on some, us Nanionlouk, Nu(^uor,
and the southern Kingsniill Islunils, uii amalgamation seems to have
taken place.
The three classes are called, according to O'Connell, Mooujohs
{Miindjuh), Jerijo/is, (Tsherff/Jo) and i\i(/iirts (yaikut). The general
term aroche {arotf), was applied to the lirst two; it may l)e translated
gentleman or Jmtnan. These two classes rarely intermarry with one
another, and never with the third. The distinction of caste is main-
tained with great strictness; even in battle, a person of one class
never attacks one of another, so that, says O'Coimell, " it is like the
encounter of three distinct parties."
All the land in the group is parcelled out into estates, which are
the property of the chiefs and freemen. The serfs are consitlered as
affixed to the soil. These estates are never alienated, and pass only
by succession ; but this succession is not directly hereditary. The
system of descent, lK)th of titles and property, is very intricate and
difficult to understand. Accoriling to the account received from Mr.
Punchard, every chief lias u distinguishing title, besides his own
proper appellation. The highest rank in the two tribes of Matalalin
and C is IsltijMU, who is usually called by foreigners the king ; then
follow, in the line of succession, Watljai, 'Vak, Xotsh, Nanw, and
others still lower. Before a chief can become hhipan he must rise
through all these grades or offices, and, of course, there is only one
in each tribe holding each of these titles. There are other offices or
dignities, the holders of which can never rise to be Lhipaii . but
these, also, have their inferior grades in regular succession. One of
these is Nnnigin, a kind of high priest of the Kiti tribe. The son of
a chief is never a chief; this distinction is derived from a certain class
of women, called // 'n'ttsh (noble women), who, by law, can only
marry common men; their rank determines that of the offi*pring.
This account differs, in some particulars, from that given by O'Con-
nell, but agrees with it in tlio main.*
Besides the divisions of caste and office, there is another of tribes,
of which there are five, — the Maitilaliii, who occupy the east or
• Sv his Nnrmlivo, p. f.'fi. It is riirious that tlirrc nl)Ii' nnd cxiMTicncrd obsorvers,
Ix->8.si)U, D'lrvillc, anil I.Olkc, in dcsMTibing lliu sysU'ni «r rimk and caste wliicli prevails
at Ualau, dillbr so widely Irom one anullier, that their accuunis cannot bo reconciled.
81
F.TII NOO It .\ l> II V.
wiiidwiinl side of the isluiul ; tin- Kifi «>ii the soiilli, iiiid tin' lijikoils,
Sill, and /on the northwest, Mr. IMnudiiird thtnijjlil that tin- tlireo
hist-naincd were not ori^inallv distinct. Tht's** tnltcs an- ntiminally
indojicndcnt, and make war iipoit dtut anotlicr, hnt tlu'v aro still coii-
ni'it<'il toiicthrr. like thi' (u'riinm States ni the middle a^es. hy a
eertain u[eiieral svstein of pohev. with which even their wars do not
interl'ere. A ehiel ol one trilie is recoirnised as suidi i)y the rest, and
takes rank atnon^ tiuMii accordinu;ly. In eas<> of hostilities, the
atlackini; party is lioinid to send word to the other of tin- time and
place tixed upon lor tiie conflict, in order to i{ive opportunity for
pre|)aration. Nothinj^ like compicst is ever attempted. The van-
quished always retain their lands, the victors contenting themselves
with the spoil of their villages. The fruit-trees are never destroyed.
The priests, according to OC'onnell, have consideraiile inlluence.
They are called iiiionDt, and lielon^f to the class of petty chiefs;
indeed, this word is fre(|nently used to sijrnify merely r/iiif. Their
worship is very simple. It consists in prayers and invocations
addressetl to the spirks (/lani or ii/ii) of departed chiefs. They have
neither tein[iles, idols, nor otlerinifs. Certain animals, also, particu-
larly lish, are esteemed sacred anion;^ them, — some, as eels, Ikmiii; so
to the whole people, while others arc merely prohihited to jmrticular
families. OC.'onuell supposes this to proceed from some rude system
of metempsychosis, connected with their ri'liijious helief '*
The dead are wrapped in mats, and i)uried about three feet helow
the surface of the earth. If a male, a paddle from his canoe is liuried
with him; if a female, her spindle or distatV. Over the };rave a cocoa-
nut tree is planted, the fruit of which is .^eldom \( ever disturbed,
and, besides the paddle buried with the body, they sometimes lay one
or more upon the ground near the j^rave.
The well-known drink of the Polynesians, termed hy them kura
or am, prepared from the root of the I'ijxr tnrl/nj.stiriuii, is also in
use here. The mmle of preparation, however, is diirerent and more
cleanly. The root, instead of \m\\\r chewed, is |>ounde(l on a large
stone,* and then mi.ved with water, which is afterwards strained
through a mesh of cocoa-nut fibres. It is served out at their public
fea.sts with great ceremony, the distinctions of rank Iwing carefully
observed.
• 'I'his ohango, it will !»• obsorvcil, is prcfist-ly lliut whicli a rflincd pccipli! would
maku in a(lu|1tlng such a custmn.
M I (• It M v i;s I A
80
Tl
ui niiinos sniliiii,' iilwavs willi llic oiilriu'if'T 1" wiiidwanl, viir-
iiislu'd (III tlir oiilsiilc ami viiilcw allied williiii; tin' \vca|Hiiis ariiit'il
Willi sharks' Icflii, llic slriiiijs ol' circular licads, and tln^ saslu's
wovt'ii ill a Niiii|ilc liioiii, wliicli liavit liccii clscwlicri! tiiciitioiicd as
cliaracicrislic ot' the Micnuicsiiiii race, arc all JMiind licrc, Sd also is
till
meal hat, iiiado ui cociia-iiilt leaves, vvliicli is eniiiiiioii to most
ot tlio islands. 'I'lie natives liavo a variciv oi tlie doi,', tlie llesli of
w
liicli is considereil a delicacv.
'I'll
P
irinciiial vei;!
'lalilt
ircMiuc-
tioiis oC tlie island aro the hread-triiit, cocoa-niil, liaiiana, sii;rar-cani>.
am
.(■ 1 1
tin.
ly
'I' wo other customs, which we learn Irom O'Coiiiiell, deserve to ho
luentioned here. 'I'lie lirsl is that of sendinii messaui's hy means of
leaves of a |iarticiilar tree, the |)oiiils of which are folded inwards in
(lillertMit iikkIcs to express ditrerciit ineamnus. " Inclosed in a plan-
tniii-Kmf, and secured hy twine, one of these primitive letters acconi-
paiiies donations of presents, and demands for tli(Mi).— ilcdarations of
war and promises of siilimissioii, — in short, all the stat»! despatches."
'I'Ik! t)tlier is that of voluntary emiirration, which: he says, " is resorted
to when the pojinlation becomes too denser for comfortahle suhsistence.
When it hecomes certain that sucli a step is necessary, a nuiiiher of
tlie natives, with their wives and children, take to their canoes,
victualled as liherally as the hoats w ill hear, and trust to chniice for a
luirhour or a laiidini;." lie adds that the emiurants are, as may hu
8U|iposed, |iriiicipally of the lower orders.
Another lact connected with this island lias exciteil much attention
and curiosity. It is the existence of extensive ruins upon a low llat
islet, un the south side of liaiialie, near the harliour of Matalalm.
They itrc mostly in the I'orm of enclosuri's, of various extent, some of
them covering more than a hundred sipiare yards, '{"he walls are
nol less than thirty feet in lieiL^ht, and nearly as many in thickness.
'I'hey are built of enormous blocks of utoiie, wliicli seem, from the
description, to bo polyijoiial prisms of basalt. Some of them are
tweiity-five feet long and nearly two feet in diameter, and must
weigh several tons. Metweeu the enclosures are passages which
seem once to have been streets or foot-ways, but which are now filled
with water, so as to admit canoes. The w hole island is overllowed
at high tide, except the jiarts enclosed hy these walls, which keep the
earth from being washed away. Hut in some places the walls tlieiii-
Melves have been undermined by the .sea, and falUm.
The natives can give no account of the origin of these structures,
•Jf-
Htt
KT II N«ni U A I'M V.
!■
attril)uliiiji tln'iii In tlie /itnii, or spirits. 'I'lu' ijciicrul i)|)iiiion of
(ori'ij,'iiors who liiivr swii tlifin swiiis to lie thtit llu-y wi-rr tlio work
ot° iinotlicr riico than that which now oc-iMipifs tliis i;ronp. 'I'licrc is,
howcvfr. no occasion lor iiavni;; recourse to this hvpollicsis. On tho
island of I'alati, liircc Imniircil miles cast ol' Manaho, similar striic-
lurcK are in use at the present tiay. Acconiiiiij to the accounts oC
l.cs.son, 1)1 rvilie, and l.iitke, as ipioted liy Kieiiri. all tlii^ principal
cliiels ol' I alaii. \\ itii jireat part ol the popiilalion. have tli«'ir residence
on a small low islet, called Leilei or liclc, siinaled oil' the eastern
shore of the larm- island, and aJMHit loiir miles in circiiml'crenco.
I'Trvilie says, "in approaching the shores of Leilci, a new sctMio
presented itself to onr eyes, — line houses surrounded i»y lii^h walls,
streets well paved, Aic" . . . And in another place, — "the streets
were iMirdered liy eiiormoiis walls of rock, which prove lliat tliutti!
natives, slight and I'eeiile in appearance, are iievortheless capahle of
undertjoin^ severe lahonr At the end of the street, a wall
still more considerahle than thos«! wliiih we had seen excited my "d-
niiralion. It was not less than twenty feet liiijh l>y ten or twelve in
thicknes.x. and forty or fifty on each side. One cannot well conceive
how these people, without the aid of any machine, can transport
blocks so ponderous as those which enter into thesis constructions,
some of which must \veii;h many thousands (plusienrs inilliers). It
is still more dilliciilt to ima<;ine what can he the utility of these hii^o
masses. All that I could discover was that the residences of the
chiefs were always accompanied by these enormous walls, wliieh
seemed to lie one of the attributes of their dignity, like the ramparts
and trenches which surrounded the castles of the nobility in the
middle a<^es."
[t seems evident that the constructions at I alau and Itanaho are of
the sanu! kind, an<l built for the same purpose. Hut it is also clear
that at tiie time those of the latter were raised, the islet on which they
stand was in a difl'ereiit condition from wliat it now is At |iresent
they are actually in the water; what were once paths, are now pas-
sajres for canoes, and O'Connell says, "where the walls are broken
(low n. the w;iter enters the enclosures." This chant,'e can only have
proceeded from two causes, l-jither the sea must have risen, or the
land have sunk since the walls were erected. That the sea has risen,
or, in other words, that the Itivel of the entire ocean has been altered,
will not bo supposed. IJut that the land, or tho whole group of IJa-
iiabe, and perhaps all the iiuighbouring groups, have undergone a
M I «• KO .\ KS I A.
S7
Mliirlit (li'|irc!*si()ii, is no way im|ir<ili.ililc It if* i-irliiiii, iVoni (ilistirvii-
tioiiH iiiuilc liy till! i{i'(il(i!4iHt, Mr Dutia, tliiit tin* Sandu i<-li (ir<iii|i, on
tliu other Nido of tlio i'licilic, Iiiim lieeii, nt Hoini* runner [JoricMl, lit'ted
Ncvcrul I't'et ii1m)V(> its ori^iniii liciyht, and tlicre is sonm n-ason to
hflievi) that at this tiuio it is ntidi'ri;oin<{ a very Kiadual elevation.*
It is possihle that a eoniiterlialaiuiiiir iiioveinent in the o|i|i(iNitc
ilireetion may he takini; pluet! aiiKini; the ('arolint* Islands, — or, at
least, may have taken place not mniiy centuries ami. From the (U^-
seri|ition ^;ivoii of Leilei, a chunirt! ot luvel of one or two feet would
riMider it uniiiliahitahle, and reduce it, in a short time, to the same
stale as the isle of ruins ut iianahe. W hen the natives say that these
structures wore raised by luiiii or aiiiman (spirits), they may Ih'
merely referring them to the divinities wlmin they worship, — i. e. the
spirits of their ancestors, the actual hii.ioers On iiuntionin^; these
viuwM to Mr. Dana, I am happy to tind that he considers the opinion
liere expressed hif^hly probable, and confirmed by his observations in
other parts of the i'acilic.
.Mil. 1. 1:, OK riiK Mri.iiiivvK isi. an'ii>.
In January of IS24, a part of the crew of the American whale-ship
Globe mutinied, murdered the ofiicers, and sailed for the (/'aroline
Islands. At the .Mulj^rave Group, the i^reater part, including those
who had been the most (guilty, toifether with s(jnie who were innocent,
but were com|)elled to submit to the direction of the others, landed
and remained. They were received, at lirst, with the utmost kind-
ness by the natives, but having rou.sed their hostility by violent
measures and harsh treatment, the whole party was suddenly attacked
and put to death, with the exception of two individuals. These, by
name William Lay, and Cyrus M. Ilussey, were Ijoth mere youths,
i^nd entirely innocent of participation in the mutiny. M'hey had pre-
viously ac(|uired the good-will of the natives by their kind and
prudent conduct towards them, and though detained as captives, and
obliged to labour for their masters, they were not ill-treated. In
December of the following year they were taken off by the (Initcd
States scluwner Dolphin, which was despatched for that purpose,
under the comnuuid of ("aptain John I'crcival.
On their arrival at Oahu, the Kev. xMr. IJingham, missionary at
• Sec llic (jt-ologicol l(e|iort iifllic Bx|ieditioii, by Mr. J. 1). Dana.
I
88
KT II \()<; K A I' II V.
HoiKiIulu, took down u vocaljiilurv ot such words of the iiativo laii-
gnaiii- as tlii'v could rciiicmlicr. 'I'liis is now |iul)lislKHl Cor llic lirsl
time, and it siHMns |iro|)cr to add to it a lew rcniariis respecting tho
isianil and its inhabitants. Our inl'orniation is derived from a lirief
and iin|irrten(iinif narrative, puhhslied liy Lay and llnssey at New
I/ondiMi, in I'^'-Js. and t'nnn llie "Journal of the (^rnise of the United
iStates schooner Dolphin ainoiiij the islands of the I'acilic," hy Lieu-
tenant llirani I'auldinii,* which contains many interesting^ particulars
related in a clear and succinct style.
Mille is tlu' soutlicrnniost of the Katlack (Jhaiii, wliicli consists of
twelve coral islets or clusters, and extends, in a north-northeast direc-
tion, from (^ to I'^i-^of lutrth latitude, and from 10!)° to 17-J° of east
longitude. Mille, which is in latitude (t°, loni^itudc 17"^^, is an oval
ring of small islets, coiuiectcd hy reefs, and -nclosing an inland sea or
lagoon one hundred and l()rty nules in cucumference. 'I'liere are
more than a hundred of these islets, Ijut all of them together do not
j)rohal)ly comprise more than lifleen or twenty .scpiar*; miles. The
population is lietween I'wv and six hundretl. 'l"he people are of a
light complexion, fairer tlian those of the Kingsmill Group, and np-
peared to Mr. Paulding a dillerent race, 'i i.-v are of the middle
staliuv and wfll-foriaed, with hanil.some features. With a few ex-
ceptions, tiiey havi' not the depressed noses and thick lips which are
found an
long the l*olvne.-;i;ni
tribes
Thev are modest and manly iu
tl
leir deportment, and
alk with an air of dignity. Mr. i'aulding
rt'as much iileased with their conduct on the arrival of the vessel.
•r
ley gave us a most kind and hospitable rece|)tion, and freely
oflcred whatever any of \
IS I'xpressed a wish |..i.
Notl
ling was
stolen by them. They behaved in a most orderly niaiiner, looking
round the deck iinpiiriiiirly, or sc>ated themselves and c
itted f
IM!!-
liarly with our people, taking |)aiiis to make themselves understood.
In their look and action they appeai-d 1o be lively and intelligent."
Lay and lliis.sey give the same account of their beliavioiir towards
the mutineers, before their anger was I'xcitetl by the ill conduct of the
latter. IJolli of the cajitives, moreover, speak of the kind treatment
which they ex|>erieiiced from the iialnes. The hardsiiips which
they uuderwenl were only such a.s were shared by their captors.
TIk! island is sterile, yiekling but a scanty sup|)ly of footl even lor its
limiti
)pulati(
Th
u' only vegetable productions (it to eat are
l'iilili>lii(| ,il New V.iik, lpy <!. iV ('. \ II. Can ill, 1H;11.
I
MICRONESIA.
89
those of the cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and pandanus trees. Seasons of
scarcity sometimes occur, dur-ng wliicli the natives suffer severely,
and arc reduced to eating the tender branches of trees to support
life.
There is one high chief who has the supreme power; but in his
decisions on matters of importance he usually conforms to the opinion
of tho whole body of chiefs. Mr. Paulding observes, "They have
ditforcnt grades of rank in their society, from the high chief down to
the farthest removed from royalty."
Their only worship consists in invocations to the Anit, said by Lay
to be the name of their supreme divinity ; but it seems likely that it
is oidy tlie general term for spirit. 'I'hus Lay tells us, in his narra-
tive, that the natives will not take the fruit of tlie cocoa-nut tree which
has been planted near a grave, " for fear of displeasing their god
(atiif)." But Mr. Paulding says (p. 180), "I war walking, back of
the huts, over a level green spot, enclosed by cocoa-nut trees, when
Lugoina came to me in great haste, and witli a disturbed look beck-
oned me to come away, at the same time saying to IIus.sey that I must
not go there; it was a place for the dead ; my presence would disturb
them, and bring spirits round the huts." And again, (p. 175), " If
one of tlicm has wronged another who lias died, he never eats without
throwing away a portion of his food to appease the ghost of the
departed."
When a person dies, the body i." enclo.sed in mats and buried, after
which, says Mr. Paulding, "a little canoe with a sail to it, and laden
with small ])icces of cocoa-nut or otlier food, is taken to the sea-shore,
or the leowaril part of the island, and sent otf, with a fair wind, to
bear far away from the island the spirit of the deceased, that it may
not afterwariis disturb tiie living." We are reminded l)y this of the
manner in wliicli tlie natives of Tobi ilispose of their dead, as before
described, and of the paddles buried with them at lianabe. After the
ceremony of iiitcrnuMil is completed, two cocoa-nut trees are planted,
one at tlie head and the other at the foot of the grave. The fruit of
these is never ejiten by the women, anil not by the men until a con-
siderable time has elapsed after the burial.
Their marriages are conductetl with little ceremony, but the mar-
ried people are usuidly kind anil faithful to one another. Lay never
knew an instance of separation after they had a faniilv. It may here
be noticed, tliat at the mas.sacre of the inntiiicers, to which the natives
were e.vcited chiefly by the hi'.rshness with which .some of the whites
90
|;T II NO(i R A I'll Y.
treated the females whom they liail taken for wives, the women bore
as active a part as the men.
For ornament, they pierce the lohe of tlie ear, and having greatly
distended the i.perturc, wear in it a folded leaf They have a'*'" vhia
Lay calls heads, and Mr. I'anlding shell-necklaces, but neither do-
scribes them particularly.
The canoes have one side Hat or perpendicular, and the other
inclined ; the (lal side is that opposite to the outrigger, and is kept
always to windward, the ("aiioes sailing with either enil foremost.
The houses have two apartments, an ui)per and a lower, which
communicate throuuh a scuttle or hatch. The lower or ground
story is not more than three feet high, ami tin inmates are obliged to
remain in a sitting or reclining posture. In 'he upper story or garret
they keep their movable property, and in wet weather sleep there.
A It A W .\, OH r II K K 1 .\ (J S M I I, I, IS I. A N I) S.
Altliougli it is not certain that the natives have any general ajjpel-
lation for this cliaiu of islands, we have chosen, for several reasons,
to designate it by that given above. It is the name of two islands,
one of which is called simply 'IVirinrti, and the other IVirinrii hi
Mu/:iii, or Tarawa of .Makin. The former is, according to our
survey, the largest i.sland of tiie group, or tliat which has the most
dry land. The natives are numerous, and the high cliief exercises
sway over the three neiudibourimx islands of Miiinnii, Apia, and
MnniLi. It is on this islaml that tlu' inlialntants of the rest of the
group place the elysium of departed spirits, which may be consi-
tlered good evidence that it was the one fu-st settled, and the source
of population to tlie other islands. Finally, Tiirawa is best known to
the i)eople of distant groups. Hoth Kot/.cbue and Liitke heard of it
among the western (.'aroline Islamls. under the names of 'I't/nin anil
Tonifi. and ('<Hik gives it in the list of islamls of which hv received
information at Tonga.
Our knowledge concerning this group is derived in part from
personal examination, made during twenty-four days spent in the
survey, and in j)arl Irom communications of two Hritisb seamen, by
name .loim Ivirby and Kobcrl (irey, whom, at their own retpiest, we
took otr from the islands of Kuria and .Makm. They had (piitted
voluntarily the vessels to which they belongeil, and taken up their
residence among the natives, in which situation the first had re-
M re RON KS I A.
91
mainoci three and the second five years. So sli<rht, liowcver, is the
intercourse between tlie two portions of the group, that they liad
reniauied all the lime in ifjfiiorance of each otlicr's existence. The
information thus obtained from tliree distinct sources, and subjected
to careful compari.son and scrutiny, is evidently as likely to be
correct, as any tiiat lias been <fiven concerning a barbarous people.
The islands which constitute tiie group, are, according to the
native account, seventeen in number, extending from tlic second
degree of south latitude to the fourth of north, and from 173° 20' to
179° of east longitude. Their names, beginning from the north, are
as follows : —
NATIVE NAMK. KNULIUII NAMR. I'OSITION.
Tamirn ni Mnkin, . . (I'liiliscovcreii), .... Ncirlli-iuirllicnst ol' .Makiii.
5"'''"' \ ■ . ■ . I'ill's IslniuU, :tM(; N., l-a° Id' F,.
Junltin, {
Jfltii'iki, .Mnllhcws' Isliin(t, . . . li" .\., I*a^ 15' K.
Apia ('liiirli)llc Islmid, . . . . r 10' .\., 17:1° R
Ttiriiuii, KiKix's Islimd, .... 1" ;!(»' .\., 17:1° Iv
MiiKim, Ilall'.s Isldiid, 1° N., na-' K.
Apuiiiuimi, .... Ilii|i|iir's Islimd, .... 0° •J.'j' .\., lH" E.
Kiina, Wdodlc's l.slimd, . . . . (1° |.")' \., 173'' 'JO' K.
N<mi,iiki, Ilc-iidcrvillc's Islund, . . (1° 10' .\., 17:f M.'j' !•;.
Niiiidiili, Sydcidiiuii's Isliind, . . . d' ,■).-(' S., 171' •.'.■>' K.
TupiitiOiii'i, .... I »iuinin()ii(rs islimd, . . 1° v!0' S., 171" 4.')' Iv
Niikiimiii, Hynm"s Islimd, (!) . . . 1" air S., 177" 40' !■;.
J't'ni, I';ii/.ii Islimd, (!) . . . . -J" S., 176" \).
'J'ti/Kinii, ) .11.,,
., , f ,,. . V I Ninth anil cast ol Driiin-
Oiiiiiili), > . . . . (I lUTrtain), i< i , i
. . . C ( """"' 'i Islimd.
Annul, J
The first-named island is on no chart, and has probably never been
visited. Our information concerning it is derived from the natives of
Makin, who described it as lying aijout two days' sail (for their
canoes) to the northeast, and as inhid)ited by people like tbemsclves,
with whom they had fro(|uent communication. The last five were
not visited by our scjuadron, and their names are given accoriling to
Kirby's account. Nuknnau, he thought, was Byron's Island, and
Peru, Eliza or llurd's Island. As to the rest, he only knew that
they were in the southern part of the group, though he had an idea
that Arurai was sometimes called by foreigners Hope Island. The
charts, at this {loint, are confused, and none of them have so inanv
92
E T H N O O R A I' II Y.
islands as the native accounts would re(|iiiro. Perhaps, one of the
nanips may apply to Ocean Island, situated a lew degrees to the west
of Tapntrouea, and inhahited, as I was assured by the captain of a
whaler, at Oahu, by a similar people.
Tlie group may be subdivided into at least four clusters, between
which there is, at present, little conunuiiicalion, and the inhabitants
of wiiicli, though forming but one people, speaking the same general
language, yet dilfer more or less in their customs and institutions,
and sliglitly in (halcet. The northern is composed of the three
islands of Makiii, (or .l/.7/,/«,) Taritari, and Tarawa ni Makin. The
first two are diviiitd only l)y a strait two miles in width. Taritari is
the largest, having an extensive lagoon; but Makin, though small, is
compact, with a good deal of fertile land, and is considered the metro-
polis. The four islands, Maraki, Apia, Tarawa, and Maiana, form
another cluster, of which Tarawa is the heail. The island of Apa-
mama has connected with it, both locally and jjolitically, the smaller
islands of Xonouki and Kuria. While Nonouti, Ta|)uteouea, Nuku-
nau, and Peru, and, perhaps, the three remaining islands, form a
fourth division, of which Tapuleouca may be considered the chief, —
unless this title should be ilis|)uted by Byron's Islanil, of which we
know only that it is large and populous.
According to the observations of Mr. Dana, the whole group
belongs, physically, to the same cla.ss with Tongatabu — that of coral
islands slightly elevateil above their original level. The elevation,
which is oidy of two or three feet, is not ipiile so great as at 'I'on^a,
but is suilicient to give to the islands a larger surface of ilry land, anil
a greater depth of soil than they would otherwise possess, or than is
pos.sess(Hl, so far as we know, by any of the other coral islands of Mi-
eronesi;i. The rei'fs and shoals, moreover, have tlii'ir extent much
increased, atlbnling harbourage to many varieties and great numbers
of lish, lobsters, turtle, shell-fish, and sea-slugs, from which tiie people
draw a great part of their sustenance. Hesides the fruits of the cocoa-
nut and pandamis, of which they havt; an abiiiidant supply, they have
orchards of bread-tVuit trees and plantations of taro, which alford them
an atrreeable variety. They have also a specii-s of purslain, of which
we made a salad by no means uiipalataiilc, and on Makin they gather
great (juantities of a nutritious berry, which they dry and make into
a kind of sweet cake, considered by them a delicacy.
This abundance of I'ood will account tor the large population of the
group, so much greater than on most coral islands. At Taputeouea
M I C R O N R S I A.
03
(Drurnmoiid's Island), the first wViich we visited, we were astonished
at the nutnhers of tlie natives. Alter careful and repented ol)servn-
tions, made in our visits to the sliore, and i)y tiie oHicers en<;aged in
t!ie survey, tlie estimates varied lietween ten and fifteen thousand.
This, however, was |)n>hal)!y one of the most tliickly inlialiited, the
island appeurini^ like a continuous villairo from oik* end to tlie other.
Kirby had once seen all the warriors of the tlin-e islands of Apamama,
Nonouti.and Kuria collected loirether, in anticipation of an attack from
the southern cluster, lie thouj^ht tiie nundicr was JM-tween si,\ and
seven thousand. Supiiosini; this amount to be sonu'what e.vaii^^e-
rated, we can hardly allow for the entire |)opulation of the three, less
than twenty thousand. Finally, C>rvy estimated the people of '['ari-
tnri and Makin at about i'lvv thousand. We should thus have for six
islands of the i^roup (amcMiu; which two of the largest, 'i'arawa and
Uyrons Island, an? not included) a total of thirty-five thousand. But
allowint^ an averajfc of only live thousand to an islan<l, it would still
•five us, for the whole seventeen, not less than eiirhty-live thousand.*
For a detailuil descri|)tiou of these islands and their inhabitants, the
reader is referred to the <feiieral history of the voyai^e. Here only
those traits will be inentioiu'd which seem es.seiitial tor deterniininii
the position which tiic latter hold anion;.; the dillerent races of the
Pacific. At the first glance it is evident that they are not of the pure
Micronesiaii blood. A dark complexion and curly hair would, apart
from the testimony of lan;|uagc, iiulicate the intermixtun! of a dilfe-
rent race. 'I'liis inlnsion, however, for some reason or other, is much
less a|i|)areiit anionjr the natives of the Makin cluster, who are a shade
lighter in colour, and in other respects physically superior to the
natives of the southern islands. The descriptions which follow are
taken from my notes, the first applying to the people of Ta[)uteouea,
and the second to those of Makin.
"They (the natives of i)rumniond"s Island) are generally of the
• 'I'Iml the iitlicr ishinds (if llic ^'i |i mv as dniscly iiilialitrd as llir six al)>)Vi>-niiii-
ikiiu'd, may Ih' iiiloriod rniiii (lie |l)llii\viiif; <'\idiiirc. (!r. y nlalrd, tli.il .'dxiiit llini'
yenrs licliin' lie lamlcd al .Makin, a parly of almut liliccii liiiiiilnil ii.ilivcs airiM'd llii'ii'
ill I'mxw's Irciiii .\|iia, iVdrn wliii-li island tlu'y li.id Uiii drinii h\ llir warriors ul'r.iniM a.
Licnlcnant I'anldin'; liunid al Ityrnn's Island n lar^^p iiopulaliori. lie says (.louriml, p.
9")), '• Ihu isU'i abrcaiil ol' us wa.s nil nijjht illinninalcd wiih niinicruiis fin'.s, nnd the air
riinj; with l|ii> sliouH ol' luindrcds ..I" people. When llie day ilnwnr'd, llie wlii.lc ,H.'eaii
was wliitcncd willi the lilljc sails iil" nuux's thai were seen eoniinj.' iVipin ivery direelion,
and sonii' iiriliern as I'ar as llie eye eeuld distinfinish .so small an obje<-t. In an honr not
less than a huiidivd of them were alongside, niul our deck wiu» covered with iioople."
24
04
KTII NOO R AIMI Y.
;l
mulclle si/c, well made ami slender. Their colour is a copper-brown,
a simde darker than that of the Tahitiaus. The hair is black, glossy,
and line, with a sliirht tendency to curl. The features are small, but
high and well-marked : the eye large, bright, and black, — the nose
straight or slightly a(|uiline, but always widened at the lower part, —
the mouth ratiicr large, with full lips and small teeth. The cheek-
bones project forward so much as to give the eyes the apjiearance of
being a little siuiken. They have inustachios and beard very black
and line, liketlieir hair, but rather scanty. The usual hi'ighl is about
five feet eight or nine inches, but wo saw many who were considerably
below this standard. There are none of those burly persons among
them which art; so conunon in die Sandwich and Society Islands, and
we did not see one instance of obesity. The women are still smaller,
in proportion, than the men, with slight figures, and small delicate
features. Several among them woulil have been esteemed pretty in
any country."
The dilference which exists between these natives and those of
Makin will be seen by comparing this description with that which
follows : — " Having understood that they were of the same race with
the other islanders, we were (piite unprepared for the extraordinary
sight that was uow [jrcsented. Instead of the slender forms, sharp
features, and steru countenances of the Drummond islanders, we saw
a crowd of stout, hearty figures, and round, jolly faces, which, tliough
dilferent in features, recalled to our minils the bulky chieftains of Ta-
hiti. They were also lighter in complexion than the southern tribes,
and more tattooed.
" One t)f the first who came on board was a perfect mass of fill.
Though of good height, he appeared really short, from his inuuense
girtli. As he walked, the llesh of his cheeks and breasts siiook like a
jelly, llis limbs were of enormous sizt\ but smooth as those of a cliild.
Ilis face was round, with neatly-cut whiskers and nnistachios, and bis
fine hair in idack glossy ringlets fell down on his slioulders. When
he snuled, every I'eature was dilated with joy, and an even row of
small white teeth was dis|)la\ed which a lady might have envied.
There were several others on board of littli! inferior si/e, and a native
in a ( anoe, who was pointed out to us by the white man as the king
of tlie island, was actually so fat that he would not venture to ascend
the ship's side. The greater part of the natives, who did not attain
such an immoderate bulk, were distinguished by finely-moulded
forms iiud hand.some faces. The outline of their features was regular
MICRO N ESIA.
95
and pleasing', tlu)U'j;Ii all hail that spread of tho nostrils wliicli \vc have
ohsorved in tlic soutlierri islanders. Tlie profiles of some were really
heautiful."
'I'liis dilference in looks is accompanied by as <^reat a difTerence in
character. Both arc iii<;hly ini^enious, as is shown in the construction
of their houses and canoes, tho manufacture of their dres.ses and
armour, and by the numerous comforts and conveniences witti which,
under very unfavourable circumstances, they have manai.5ed to sur-
round them.sclves. On the other hand, the natives of the soutliern
islands arc suspicious and irritable, with a certain wildness and fero-
city in their manners, which is in stron;| contrast with the miltl and
kindly disjiosition of tiie people of Makin. 'I'he latter are a remark-
ably soft and gentle race, not without a tinuie of elfeminacy. Of their
humanity, a high idea is given by the statement of (irey, that, during
the five years that he was among them, only one man was put to death.
Cannibalism, moreover, is uidcnown among them, except by tradition;
whereas on the southern islands, though not conmion, it is occasion-
ally practised, and is not regarde>l with any particular horror. Kirby
knew of five men being killed and eaten while he was on Apamama.
It is said, however, that the southern natives, though easily oifended,
are as readily appeased ; their animosity seldom settles into a long-
continued rancour. From this statement wo must except certain
cases arising out of jealousy between married women, who, when
they conceive themselves aggrieved, will sometimes, for months
together, carry about with them a small weapon of sharks' teeth
concealed under their dress, and watch an opportunity of attacking
the object of their jealousy. Desperate fights sometimes take jjlace
between these fierce Amazons before they can bo parted. JJut ex-
cepting such instances, Kirby always found the women more humane
and gentle than the men.
The respect paid to the chiefs varies at the different clusters. At
Drummond's Island we remarked, in the manners of the natives, a
kind of saiicy boldness and rude imlcpendence, which would hardly
have existed among ii peoi)le u.sed to submi.ssion and deference. At
Apamama tho chiefs have probably more respect paid them, and in
Makin, Grey assured us that a strict subordination was maintained,
and that the distinction of classes was strongly marked in the man-
ners as well as the tisages of the inhabitants.
Generosity, hospitality, and attention to the aged and infirm, are
virtues highly esteemed and generally practised among all the natives.
T
9fi
E T H N O (i R A P II V.
Kirby knew of no word for poor man except that for shive. Any
porson wlio bus land, can always call npon his friends to |)rovido him
witii a iiouso, a canoe, and the other necessaries of life; while one
will) lias no land has nothing else, and is, of course, a slave.
The worst stain on the character of this people is a shockinj^ and
cnit'i practice, whicii Kot/ehue found also anioiii^ the people of Ua-
dack, and DTrvillc on the island of Tikopia. It is that of destroying
their nidKiru children, after the second or third, in order to escape the
iiH-ouvenience of a uiiiuerous family. This is the reason a.ssijjncd hy
tlie natives; the general arijiuuieut tiiat the islands would el.se become
too densely peopled for tlieir means of subsistence seems not to occur
to lliem. To the honour of tlie natives of Makin it should be recorded,
that this eustoin does not e.vist ainonu; them.
The women are, for the most part, better treated amonfj them than
anions uncivilized people in j^eueral. All the haril, out-door labour,
is pertbrmed l)y the men. They build the houses and canoes, catch
the lish, collect and brint,' home the I'ruits which serve for lixHl, and
do most til the cultivation. Tin- women aid them to clear and weed
the iinuind, and attend to the domestic iluties which naturally fall to
them. The custom also recpiires that when a man meets a female,
be sliall [lay her the same mark of respect as is rendered to a chief,
bv turiuiiLr aside irom the path to let her pass. This courtesy, how-
ever, (lues not piTvade ail the intercourse of the sexes. A man, if
proviiked, will not hesitate to strike a woman, who seldom fails to
return the blow; sometimes .several of her compaidons will come to
her aid, and the man is perhaps ^Vm] to escape well bruised, and
covered with scratclies.
Connected with tiie suspicious and irritable temper which cliarac-
ten/.es the people of tiie soulliern clusters, is a disposition to sul-
leiiuess and des|)ondeiicy, which sometimes leads them to commit
suicide. Kirby knew five instances, on his own island, of men and
women destroviii'^ themselves, and of several others who attempted
it and were prevented by their friends. These cases of self-murder
arose out of oHence taken at the conduct of some person whom fear or
afrection made them uuwillinir to injure; the mingled s[)ite, mortili-
cation, and <frief [)roduceil a dejection which led at last to an act con-
sidered by them a certain reineily for their sulferings, and j)erhaps a
severe reven;fe upon those who had ill-treated them. We have heard
betbre of a similar trait in the character of the Feejeeans.
The word manda siynilies among them a man thoroughly accom-
M I C R O N E S I A.
97
pliHhcd in all tlieir knowledj^c (ind arts, and versed in every noble
excri-ise : a good dancer, an al)le warrior, one wlio has seen life at
home and ahroiul, and enjoyed its liighest exfitenients and deli^jhts,
— in short, a coniplete man of the world. In their estimation, this is
the proudest eliaracter to which any person can attain, and sucli a
one is fully prepared to enter, at his death, on the highest enjoyments
of their elysium.
u li 1, 1 (; lox.
In the dusters of Apamaina and Tarawa, three kinds of divinities
are worship|)etl. 'I'lie lirst class consists of proper deities, of whom
there are several, such as Tii/inrriki, llirini, lliliiiipiu, Aurit-iie, iVc.
Of these the lirst-named, called also Wi'iiiif/niii, is the greatest, not as
being superior in his attributes to liie ri'st, hut merely from having
the greatest n\iinl)er of worshippers. About two-thirds of the people
pray to him as their tutelary divinity ; the rest do not acknowledge
his authority, but address their prayers to other deities, or to the
spirits of their ancestors, or to certain kinds of tish. which constitute
the other two classes of divinities. Tabueriki is worship|)ed under
the form of a tlat coral stone, of irregular shape, about three teet long
by eighteen inches wide, set up on one end in the open air. It is
tied round with leaves of the cocoa-nut tree, which considerably in-
crease its size and height. These are changed every month, to keep
them always green. The worship |)aid to the god consists in repeat-
ing prayers belore this stone, and laying beside it a portion of the food
prepared by tiie natives for their own use. This is done at their daily
meals, at festivals, and whenever they particularly wish to pro[)itiate
his favour. The first fruits of the season arc always oHered to the
god. Every family of distinction has one of these .stones, which is
considered rather in the light of a family altar than as an idol.
At .Makin, according to Cirey, the names of Tabi/tri/,!, Itiriiii. and
the other deities, are unknown, and the only spirits which the natives
worship are tho.se of their ancestors. When a chief dies, a stone, simi-
lar to those dedicated in the other islantis to Tiifiinri/ii, is set up, and
dressed in the same manner with leaves. The reverence oHered to it
is exactly the same, being a presentation of footl accompanied with
prayers. Hence there can be little doubt that the deities worshipped
in the southern clusters were oidy deilied chiefs, the memory of whose
existence has been lost in the lapse of time. The reverence paid to
25
98
KTII MXi R A I'll V.
cortiiiii kii\(ls of fisli itiny '>nvc it* origin here, as at Danalw, in some
riule idea ol" n iiictfiii psychosis.
The ancestors of chiefs are rrprcseiitcil (so to speak) by tljeir skulls,
which are carefully preserved iiy their (lesceiidaiits. When their
spirits are to he invoked, these skulls are taken down, placed on a
mat, and anointed with cocoa-nut oil; the lirows arc bound with
leaves, and food is set before the (leshless jaws. The ^eneral term
li)r spirit anil divinity is (inli.
.\t Makin there are no priests, and the invocations are usually
niiide by the head of tin- family, or by each indiviibial for himself
On Tarawa and Apamama every family which has a tutelar divinity
has also a priest, whose duty it is to perform the rites of worship, and
whose per(|uisites consist in the I'ihhI otfcred to the <jod, which, after
rcmaininir a short time, is taken away by him and eatoti in his own
house. These priests are called ilmiiijii or tlliuiujn* They do not
constitute a distinct class connected by any l)on(l of union ainonnf
themselves; but any younf^ man of free birth, who is apt at reciting
prayers, may become a priest.
The mode in which the priest receives the oracles of the jjchI is as
follows. On the sandy beach, at the weather side of the island, are
several houses, called bn-ni-inala, or bata ii'a/iti (spirit-houses). They
are of the usual size and shape of dwelling-houses, but the walls are
of coral stone, and they have no loft, or upper division. The door-
way is always in the west end, because the Kohiakaki, or country of
spirits, lies in that direction. In the middle of the house a sort of altar,
or stout pillar of coral stone, is built up to the height of three feet and
a half, having in the centre a hollow about ten or twelve inches in
diameter. To this hollow the [jriest applies his ear, and is supposed
to receive from thence the instructions of his divinity. The building,
it should be observed, is not considered essential, and the ])illar .some-
times stands uncovered on the beach.
'I'he true signification of diiti seems to be ilcr /in! spirit. The usual
expression for soul is tciminu' or tdmrv, meaning properly shadow.
They believe that as soon as a person dies, his spirit or shade ascends
into the air, and is carried about for a time by the winds wliitherso-
* ll was ollcn ini|><i.ssilili', in uiiliii;; iIhhii wdnls iVdin llir |iroiiiiiiriati(>ii <>( Kirliy (uul
firi'V lo ilcliTinini', wIh-ii thrv l»';;aii svilli I, wlnllicr lliis Idler »iis n purl of tlio word,
(ir mcp'ly llic pnTixid article tr. In llii.s ciuse «u nt first sii|i|piiseil tli.il li/niiiaii was a
contruclion of /«• i/niiuit ; it may, Imwcver, U- iiwrcly n corruption of llic Polynesian
word liijiiiifia, — tlie / JHjcoming l> in thi' Tariiwan langnayo.
M k; u<».n ksi a.
90
ever they may chance to blow. At last it is supposed to arrive at llie
Kdiiitilaiki, w sort of elysinin, wlicrit the spirits pass their time in
feastinsr, daneiri^,', and whatever occupations were most a>,'reealiU' to
them in their iMxIily existence. 'I'his elysium is placed l)V the natives
on the island of Tarawa. On this there are several mounds, or rai.sod
areas, of various sizes, the largest \w\\\^ about a mile loiin by half a
mile in breadth.* None of these exccfd twenty-four feet in hei<j;ht
above the surrounding soil, but even so slight an elevation is enough
to make them conspicuous in one of these islands. Kach of these
mounds is supposed to be the site of a Kiiinii/,v/,i or paradise, which
is, of course, invisible to mortal eyes. 'l"he ground is consiikrcd
sacred, and though usually overgrown with trees, no native will ven-
tJirc to cut them down. When a tree falls, it is taken away, and
another )ilanted in its place, if the persons wiio die are ohi and
feeble, their shades are carried to the Kaiiidhiki by the spirits ol
those who have died before them. I'he souls of infants are received
by the shades of their female relatives, and nursed and brought up,
till they are able to take care of them.selves. Only those who are tat-
tooed (being chiefly persons of tree birth) can expect to reach the
KaiHukaki. All others arc intercepted on their way, and devoured
by a monstrous giantess, called liaiiie.
On Makin, this belief respecting the Kninakaki did not |)revail, and
Grey thought (though his knowledge on such points was very limited)
that the natives suppo.sed the s[)irits of the dead to remain near the
places where they resided in life, and sometimes to ap[)ear in dreams
to their friends and relatives.
The funeral ceremonies are among the most remarkable of their
customs. At Apamama, when a man dies, his body is taken to the
maniapa, or council-house of the town, where it is washed and laid
out on a clean mat. Here it remains for eight or ten days, during
which the people express their grief by wailing and singing songs in
praise of the dead, aiul what is rather singular, by dancing. They
esteem it, moreover, a great weakness to shed tears at such times.
Every day, at noon, the bmly is taken out into the sun, and washed
and oiled. When the mourning is ended, the corpse is sewed up in
two mats, and sometimes buried in the house of the nearest relatives,
the head being always turned towards the east, — sometimes stowed
• 'I'lii.i, it imist Ik; rcinenilx^n'd, was ilie Inroriiialioii wliich Kirby received ironi natives
ofApamnma; he hod never visited Tarawa.
100
K TIINCXi R A I'll Y.
awiiy in the l()l\ of tlio bniKliii^. WIipii tho IIchIi Ik iioiirly ffowv, the
skull i!4 tiikcii otf, anil liiivin^' Ih'cii ciirofiilly cluiuiMed, itt |irt>N«>rvt'<l an
oil olijtvt of worsliip.^ir mtlu-r iim n'prt'wiitiiii^ the Hpirit of tin- dc-
ceasi'il, whicli Ims lu'i-oiiic ii divinity.
In the iiortiiorii i-liiMtcr, ii Mtiit slranutT ciiNtoni provaili*, and one
wliit'ii it costs an t'llorl to iK'licvc. Ai'cordiiiif to (Jh'v'm nccoiiiit,
nflcr ill)' first t-ci'ciiioiiics of waiiini;, tlic ImmIv is waslu'd and laid out
upon a lu-w mat, wliicli is spread on a lar({i) ol)loii<r plate, made of
8ev(>ral tortoiso-sliclls sewed together. From two to six persons,
necordinix to llu- si/.e of llie corpse, seal tluMiiselves opposite one
another on the ll(N)r of the house (commonly the dwellin<r of the de-
ceased) niul hold the plate, with tlu^ IknIv of their friend, upon their
knees. \\ lien tired, they are relieved i>y others, ami in this wav tlio
service is kept up for n space of time, varyiny with the rank of the
decea.scd, I'rom four months to two years! All persons, \\hetiier free-
horn or sl;i\i's, recciNc these peculiar honours after death. Diirinj^
the time tiic ciir|)se is thus lyiii;; in state, a fire is kept up day and
liii.dit in the house, and its extinction would he reiriU'ded as a most
unlnckv omen. At the end of the period, the remains are soinetimes
wrapped in mats, and deposited in the loft of the house; hut more
commonly they are huricd in a piece of ground set apart for the pur-
pose, and the i;rave is marked iiy a stone erected at the head, another
at the foot, and a third laid horizontally across these two, 'I'lii) skulLs
of the chiefs are preserved and treated with the same marks of reve-
rence as at the other islands. — 'I'o our impiiry how the people coiikl
afford to spend their time ill tliis preposlerou.s manner, (irey replied
at once, — " One halt' of them have iiothin;;; else to do," — a statement
whicli, from wluit little we saw of the islands and the peo[ile, we could
very well believe.
(io v i: 11 s At i; NT.
From what wc learned, it is likely that the form of iiovernincnt
dill'ers to some e.xteiit on each of the liuir clusters into which the
•fidiip is divided. We have, however, no iletinite inlormatioii e.vcejit
in rctfard to llio.se of Apamama and .Makin. On the l()rmer we find
a svsteni of civil policy similar to that which prevails in Polynesia.
Society is divided into three ranks, chiefs or nobles {ii/a ox naiwiUi),
landholders {katukd), and " immoii people or serfs [kawa). The
immutu are the tree and well-born natives, who possess the i^jreater
M I ( - R () N R H I A.
101
partoftlio lanil, niul nil tlio |H)liticnl niithurity. The hctuU of fnmiliRM
an- riillcd iii'ti, ikiul tlio oldt'Ht ma olii town is tlio |•r^!Ni^lill^ cliicC {mil
n ti n/Hi, lilcrally. I'roiit ot tlio luiul). The kulohi uro |mti«)ii« not
(iriyiiiallv "f iiolilo liirtli, who, cilht-r l>v \\w liivoiir of their i-hief, or
hy ^(mmI rtirtiiiie in wiir, hiive iu'(niire<l luiul, iiiiil with it l'ree<loin, —
Itiit who hnve yet no voire in the puhlic rounril, in which nil inutterK
of ifeiieral iiiipnrl ;ire deterniined. Tiiese nre helrl in ii iar^je Iidhhp
e.idleil llie mniiinp'i,* ol sullifieiit wi/.e to contaiii all the men of the
plne.e. In this, every noble tainily has lis own seat alontr the Hides of
the houst> ; the niiddli* is open to the slaves and /,<itokas, who have no
voice in the conneil. When any alfair renders a meeting necessary,
the oldest or presiding chief sendH ont messengers, who Hiimmon the
|)eople l»y the sonnd of conchs. The assemhiy Iniing convened, tlie
chief proposes the (|uestion, and any noliU^ who chooses to speak rises
and (leliverH his opinion. The discnssions are sonietimc>s very ani-
mated, and violiMit ipiarrels occasionally take place hetwi-en ditferent
Mpeakers, who are with ddlictdty prevented from coming to blows.
Although no regular vote is taken, the sense of the majority is soon
apparent, and determines tlie restdt. In some of the islands and
clusters, certain chiefs hav(^ obtained, by success in war, a superiority
over the rest of the nobles, and made themselves sovereigns of their
respective countries. Kirby hiid understocnl that there was a king on
Taputeouea, but if so, his authority is not unipiestioned, for two par-
ties wi-re at war on the island when we visited it. There is a king
on the group of Apamama, and another on that of Tarawa, both of
whom have acipiired their powisr very lately.
On Makin there is also a sovereign chief, but the system of govern-
ment is, in some respects, ditlerent. There are, according to (Jrey,
three ninks, ii'muitii or royal chiefs, liniiuita or gentry, and rang or
common people. The first-named viere originally of the same class
with the second. About a hundred years ago, Teouki, the graiul-
fatlier of the reigning king, anil a mighty warrior, succeedeil in con-
centrating in his own hands tiie sovereign power, which was before
Uxl^'^ed with the whole Ixuly of the gentry or petty chiefs. His
descendants constitute the inmata, and share among them the supre-
macy, thongii there is one that retains especially the title of head-chief
Besides these, there is a bu-ni-matuuy, or chief judge, as Grey termed
• This word WHS sn written nt the titnc ; we hnvo since thuiighl thai it should |)orliii|)s
be uma-ni-apu, literally, house of the town, or loun-liousr.
36
102
E T 11 N O R A P H V.
him, who seems to be a sort of prime minister, and really has ihe.
direction of the government. As regards tlieir system of descent we
could ieain bnt little. At the time wo were there, the king was a
young man, and his father was still living; though hardly past the
prime of life, and in tlie full vigor of his faculties, he had resigned his
power to his son, — but whether of his own accorti, or in obedience to
some established law, Grey could not inform us.
TATTOOTXr;.
There is nothing peculiar or striking in the tattooing of these
natives. It is mostly in short, ol)li(|ne lines, about an eighth of an
ilich apart. These are arranged in per|HMidicular rows, of which
there are four or five down the back, on each side of the spine ; with
a similar marking in front, beginning just below the collar-bone. The
legs also are imprinted, but not the arms or face. The women are
tattooed in the same manner, but not so much as the men. There
arc professional taltooers, whose prices are so high that slaves cannot,
in general, afford to be thus ornaincnteil, but there is no law against
it. On the dark-skinned race of the so\ithern clusters, the marking
does not show very clearly, and at a little distance would hardly bo
observed ; but on the natives of Makin it is (piite distinct.
uousics, CANOKS, irn\
The dwelling-houses iiave two stories, a ground lloor and a loft, or
garret, sep^iriitixl by a horizontal partition of slender sticks laid upon
joists. iVccording to Kirby, this mode of building was adopli-d in
order to escape the ravages made by the rats, which swarm in the
islands, As the loft is only connected with the ground by the four
corner posts, the lower part of the house being oj)en all arountl, these
animals cannot reach the food, mats, and other articles which are
kept in it. It is curious enough that an animal so insignificant
should thus alfect the architecture of a numerous people. On the
Ai)anuuna cluster, and the islands south of it, the loft is raised but
three or lour feet above the groun 1, and of course the iiunates on the
lower floor must be constantly in a sitting or reclining posture. On
Tarawa, however, the houses were larger, and some had two upper
stories, the second lloor being laid about three feet above, the first.
On Makin, where the supply of timber is abundant, the houses are of
MICRONESIA.
103
still ffrcatcr sizo, and the partition is made of siiflicient lioitjlit to
cnal)lo the poopio to stand uprij^ht iiiiiler it.
The ronncil-houscs iiavo no lofts, and are of great size. That at
the town of Ltiroa, on Tapiiteouea, was a hundreil and twenty feet
lonir, l)y forty-five wide, antl about forty liif^h at tiie ridj;e-i)ole. On
the islands to the nortli they are still larijer, and from the descriptions
of the two siN-inien, as well as from the tii.stant view which we had of
them, must he enormous structures.
Their canoes resend)le very nearly, in model, construction, and
riuf, those of the Feejeeans. They are not llat on one side, like those
of the iMulj^rave islanilers, hut have; the shape of a lon;r and narrow
boat. 'I'he larj^est, which are found at Makin, arc not less than sixty
feet in leii<^th, by si.v in width. They sail very near the wind, and
move with a rapidity which has ac(piired for them the name of
" (lyiuff proas."
The dress, ornaments, and arms of the natives do not differ mate-
rially from those which have been described as proper io the people
on the low islands of this archipelaifo. The delensive armour, how-
ever, intended to protect the body from the formidal)le edi^es of the
sharks-teeth weapons, is probably peculiar to them. It consists of a
jacket and trousers of a very thick, close network, braided of cocoa-
nut sinnet, and u cuirass made likewise of this cord, but woven so
compactly, am! in so many thicknesses, as to form a solid board, half
an inch throujfh, which would torin a tolerable defence even a|j;ainst
the blow of a sword. Its shape is nearly that of the ancient cuirass,
except that a .s(|uare j)i<.'ce rises up behind to protect the head from a
side blow. They have al.so caps or helmets, inu;eniously made of the
skin of the porcui)ine-fish, (-ut oil at the head and then exteniled to
the proper size. It becomes stiff and hard in drying, and the spines
protruiling on every side aid in warding off the blows of the dreaded
weapons.
R O T U M A, I) K ti It .\ N V I I, I. V. I S I, A N O.
This island is situated in 12° 30' of north latitude, and 177° 15' of
east longitude. It is three hundred miles distant from any other
land, and cannot properly be included in either one of the three
ethnographical regions of the Pacific. Its inhabitants more resemble
the Caroline islanders in their appearance and character, but their
customs assimilate them rather to the Polynesians. Their dialect is
104
ETHNOGRAPHY.
a mixture of Polynesian words, very much corrupted, with those of
some other huiguage, unlike any which has been elsewhere found.
They show, also, in some of their usages, and some words of their
language, traces of communication willi their Feejeean neighlwurs to
the south.
During our brief stay at Tongafabu, in April of 1840, several
natives of Rotuma came on board our vessel, and I took that oppor-
tunity to obtain the vocabulary which is given in another place.
The one to wiioin I was principally indebted was an elderly man, by
name. 'Viii-Rotiimd.* a petty chief, who had been two voyages in a
whaler, and had thus ac(|uired some knowledge of Knglisli. With
him was a young chief of high rank, by name. 'Vokmiiiia, to whom
the other seemed to act as guardian. They had left their island
about two years before, with several attendants, in a whale-ship, for
the purpose of visiting tlie Friendly Islands, and seeing something of
the world. Unfortunately, since their arrival, Tui-Uotuma had be-
come blind, and war having broken out on Tonga, between the
Christian and heathen parties, their situation had become uncom-
fortable. The old councillor, in particular, was desirous of getting
away, giving as his rea.son, that the young chief, his companion,
would one day be king, and that theretbre it would not be well for
him to be at Tonga during the civil dis.sensions ; he would, as Tui-
Rotuma expressed it, "see too much fight."
The Uotumans resemble the Polynesians in form and complexion,
but their features have more of the Euro|)ean cast. They have large
noses, wide and prominent cheek-bones, full eyes, and considerable
l)eard. Tliey are tattooed in large ma.sses over the middle of the
body, from tiie navel nearly to the knee ; on the breast and arms they
have light marks, varying .somewhat in shape, but generally like a
row of arrow-heads.
The expression of their countenances, which is mild, intelligent,
and prei)o.s.sessing, corresponds with their character, which is superior
in many respects to that of the Polynesians. Like the Caroline
islanders, they are good-natured, confiding, and hospitable. No
instance, I believe, of any difficulty between them and their foreign
visitors has ever occurred. They are distinguished, moreover, for
their forethought and consideration. Tlieir island, having a popula-
• This name, in tlic Toii^a dinlrct, siwnilies " Ijird of Kcituiiia ;" it Unci, however, no
siiih nieaniiig in tin- langungi- of this islnnil, but was simply an a|)|M'llativc.
MICRONESIA.
100
tion of four or five thousand, with a circuit of only twenty-five miles,
and a hilly surface, does not always produce a sufficient supply of
food for its inhabitants. There are, therefore, many of the poorer
classes who are eager to engage as seamen on board whale-ships,
where they remain until they have accumulated sufficient property,
in tliose articles which are estcemeil valuable among liieir country-
men, to enable them, on tlieir return, to purcliase land and live com-
fortably for the rest of their days. TIk^v make excellent sailors, and
are biglily prized, not only for their intelligence and docility, but also
for their prudence and regular conduct.
Tlifir system of government is peculiar and singular. The island
is divided into twenty-four districts, cacli under a high chief [nijnii-
gntsli(i). Each of these chiefs, in rcguhir rotation, holds, for the space
of twenty months, the sovereignty of the island, during which time
he presides in the councils, and receives tribute from the rest. To-
kanina belonged to this clas.s. Tlie official title of the head chief is
riamhau, but they use also the Vitian word tidii, meaning kiiuj. Ne.xt
to the high chiefs come the councillors or elders (/««/«//»«/ or w/rt/Aw/),
who correspond to the matitbuks of Tonga. The mass of the people
are called lluMnuri {da-muri), answering to the ti'uis, or lower class of
the Friendly Islands.
Of their religion I could obtain but little information. The word
for god is oitii or aitii, which is probably the same with the Samoan
aitu, spirit. Hi faka-oiti;, spir:t-house, is the word for temple, and
hanua on aitu, land of spirits, is their term for heaven, or the resi-
dence of the gods. But wliether these spirits are pro|)er divinities,
my informant, wiiosc knowledge of English was limited to the most
ordinary terms, could not explain. The dress, manufactures, and
arts of these islanders have a general resemblance to tiiose of the
Friendly and Navigator islands. Some of their customs, however,
appear to be of Feejeean origin. Thus, one of the men who came on
board had iiis hair disposed in frizzled masses aroiuid his head ; and
the young girls are said to colour tlieir locks of a dingy white by
washing them with lime-water.
It is remarkable that the Hotumans reckon by periods of six
months, or moons, instead of the full year. Living as tliey do, on a
small island near the equator, at a distance from any e.vtensive land,
tlie changes of temperature must be slight, and the difference of
seasons iiardly perceptible. The westerly winds which blow from
October to April do, no doubt, .serve to distinguish this period of the
37
106 ETHNOGRAPHY.
year; but they cannot materially affect the course of vegetation. At
the Kingsmill Group, situated directly under the equator, the natives
reckon by j)criods often months, a number evidently adopted for con-
venience of counting, and with no reference wiiatever to any natural
seasons. The names of the Ilotuman montlis are —
Oi-pnpa, Mnrcli (nnil September).
l^ijldji, April (iinii October).
liana, M'ly, <S;i'.
Kiwipi, Iiiiio.
I'usiiiiltaii, Inly.
AOapiidija .\iigusl.
AUSTRALIA.
■
r
This land, of which we know not whether the proper designation
be an island or a continent, is known as a region of singularities. Not
the least of these are the combinations of wliat, judging from precon-
ceived ideas, may well he termed ccntrtirielies, in the physical traits,
moral ([ualities, customs, and language of the itborigincs. Thus they
have, at once, tlie liusky hue and elongated visage of the negro, with
the fine, straight hair of the European ; they are excessively super-
stitious and yet almost devoid of religious (or devotional) feelings;
witii the strongest attaciiment to their native district, they can rarely
be brought to spend more than three days in one spot ; and tlio ,di
tlieir idiom abounds in comple.v iiillcctions, like tlioseof the Atnernaii
Indians, it litis less facility of composition than the English. During
our stay in New South Wales, wo liad good ojiportuiiities for ac-
quiring information concerning tliis singular variety of tiic hunititi
species. At Sydney, Hunter's River, tiiid Wellington Vtilley, we
found natives from all parts of tiio colony, from Morcton Bay on the
norlii, to tiie Muruya Uiver on tiie soutli, and from the coast to ;i
distance of three hundred miles into the interior. The result of our
exaiiiiiialion, and of the comjiarison of dialects, w;is a conviction that
all tiie natives of that jiart of New Iloliand were of one stock.
Furtiier comparisons induce us to extend tiiis remark to the entire
continent, though, before coining to any positive conclusion on the
subject, it will be necessary to pos.sess some more accurate knowledge
than we now have, of the dialects spoken in Northern Australia, more
especially of their grainmiUical characteristics.
.J_, -..^. ..:jL». .
AUSTRALIA.
107
The number of the aborigines is very small in proportion to the
extent of territory which tliey occupy. It cannot be rated higher
than two hundred thousand for the whole of Australia. Some esti-
mates reduce it as low as seventy-live thousand. These calculations,
of course, suppose that the unexplored region does not differ mate-
rially, as respects the density of the population, from that which is
known.
PHYSICAL TRAITS.
The natives of Australia arc of the middle height, few of the men
being above six or under five feet. They are slender in make, with
long arms and legs, and when in good condition, their forms are
pretty well proportioned. Usually, however, their wandering life, irre-
gular habits, and bad food keep them extremely meagre, and as this
thinne.ss is accompanied by" a protuberance of the abdomen, it gives
to their figures a distorted and hardly human appearance. The cast
of the face is a medium between the African and the Malay types.
The forehead is narrow, sometimes retreating, but often high and
prominent; the eyes are small, black, and deep-set; tlie nose is much
depressed at the upper part between the eyes, and widened at the
base, but with tliis, it frequently has an aquiline outline. The cheek-
bones are prominent. The nioutii is large, with tiiick lips and strong
well-set teeth. The jaws project, but the chin is frequently retracted.
The head, wliich is very large, with a skull of unusual thickness, is
placed upon a short and small neck. Their colour is a dark cluH-olate
or reddish-black, like that of the Guinea negro, but varying iii shade
so mucii that individuals of pure blood are sometimes as light-
coloured as mulattoes. That which distinguishes them most decidedly
from other dark-skinned races is their hair, which is neitiier woolly,
like that of the Africans and Melancsians, nor frizzled like tiiat of the
Feejeeans, nor coarse, still", and curling, as witli the Malays. It is
long, line, and wavy like that of Europeans. \Vhen neglected, it is
apt, of course, to become busiiy and matted, but when [jropcr care is
taken of it, it appears as we have described. It is .sometimes of a
glossy black, but the most common hue is a deep brown. Most of
the natives have thick beards, and their skins are more hairy than
those of whites.
1^
108
ETHNOGRAPHY.
r H A R A C T E R.
It is doubtful what grade of intellectual capacity is to be assigned
to this people. Several wlio have been taken from the forest when
young, and received instruction, have shown a readiness in acquiring
knowledge and a (piickness of appreiiension which have surj)rised
their teacliers. Most of the natives learn the Kngiish language with
greiit facility, and the children who wen^ inider the instruction of the
missionary at Wellington Valley evinced, in his opinion, a greater
aptitude for music tiian most white children. AVith all this, it must
be saitl, that the imi)ression produced on the mind of a stranger, by
an iiitercovirse \\ith the aborigines, in their natural state, is that t)f
great mental obtuseness, — or, in plain terms, an almo.st brutal stu-
pidity. They never count beyond four, or, in some tribes, three; all
above this numljer is expressed by a term equivalent to many.
Their reasoning powers seem to be very imperfectly developed.
The arguments which are addressed to them by the white settlers,
for the purpose of convincing or persuading them, are often such as
we should use towards a child, or a partial idiot. Their superstitions
evince, for the most part, this same character of silliness. Some are
so absurd as to e.vcite at once laughter and amazement. The
absurdity, it should be remarked, is not the result of an e.Ktravagant
imagination, as with some portion of the Hindoo mythology, but
downright childistiness and imljccility. One in.stance, given on tlie
authority of Mr. Threlkeld, missionary at Lake Maccpiarie, will
probably be sulHcient. In a bay, !it the northwest e.vtremity of that
lake, are many petrilactions of wood, whicii the natives believe to be
fragments of a large rock tiiat formerly fell from heaven and ile.stroyed
a number of people. The author of this catastrophe was an enormous
lizard of celestial origin, who collected the men together, and then
caused the stone to fall. His anger had been excited again.st them
by the impiety which they had evinced in killing vermin (lice), by
roasting them in the (ire. Those who had killed them by cracking
were speared to death by him with a long reeil w hicli he had brought
from the skies. When all the olfenders were destroyed, the lizard
reascended to heaven, where he still remains.
It is evident that the chief interest svhich can be taken in such a
people will arise from the singularities that distinguish them from
the rest of the human race. These singularities are especially
\
■MMI
I
AUSTRALIA.
loe
remarkable in their moral qualities. Althoiifrh living constantly in
what appears to us a most degraded state, and frequently suffering
from actual want, they are nevertheless extravagantly proud. The
complete personal independence to which they are accustomed gives
to their ordinary demeanor an air of hauglitiness and even of inso-
lence. Nothing will induce them to acknowledge any human being
(of their own age) their superior, or show any mark of deference.
At Weliinglon Valley, the missionary, Mr. Watson, was ;he only one
to whom they gave, in speaking, the title of Mr., and that merely
from iiabit acquired in youth ; all others, of whatever rank, they
addressed by their names alone, — as Jack, Tom, Wright, Walker.
This docs not ])roceed from ignorance on their part, as they under-
stand the distinctions of rank among the whites, and are continually
witnesses of the subservience and respect exacted by one class from
the other. They appear to have a sense — or it may almost be termed
an instinct — of independence, which" disposes them on all occasions
to assert their e([uality with the highest. They frequently observe,
on being asked to work, " white fellow works, not black fellow ; l)lack
fellow gentleman." On entering a room, they will not remain stand-
ing, out of respect, but generally seat themselves immediately.
They are not great talkers, and liislike to be much spoken to,
particularly in a tone of raillery. A gentleman told me that he was
once amusing himself by teasing a native, in perfect good humor,
when the man suddenly seized a billet of wood, threw it at him, and
then rushed tor his spear in a state of fury. When he was pacilied,
and made to see that no insult was intended, he begged that they
would not talk to him again in that manner, or he might be unable to
restrain his temper.
They are, in general, silent and reserved, and appear to look uj)on
the whites with a mi.xture of distrust and contempt. To govern
them by threats and violence is impossible. They immediately take
to the " bush," resume their wandering habits, and retaliate by spear-
ing the cattle of tlieir persecutors, and sometimes murdering the men.
'I'hey ii'Mer, iiowever, carry on any .systematic warfare, and their
dread of the whites is so great tiiat large parties of them have been
dispersed liy tiie resistance of a few resolute herdsmen.
Though constantly wandering, they are not great travellers, usu-
ally conlining themselves to a radius of fifty miles from the place
which they consider more peculiarly their residence. If ever they
venture beyond this, as they sometimes do, in company with a party
•J8
r
110
i;t II X ()(i u A r n v.
of whites, tluv iilways betray tlio greatest fear of falling in with any
nidial, or stranijo blacks, who, they take it for frrantod, woulii |)iit
tliein to death immeiliatoly. This extreme timidity is, indeed, one
cause of the lerocity whicli tlio natives sometimes display. If a party
of blacks in the interior, who are unactiuainted with white men, be
approaclied suildenly, and taken by surprise, they are cominoidy
seized with a panic whicli deprives them of reason. Supposing' that
tlu'v are surrounded anil destined to death, they seize tlieir weapons,
and rush forward in frenzy, to sell their lives as dearly as possible.
H i; I, I (i I ON.
The lack of relii^ious feeling in tlie.se natives has already been
mentioned. The missionaries iiave found it impossible, after many
years" labor, to make the siiirjitest impression upon them. They do
not ascril)e this to any attachment, on the part of tlie l)lacks, to their
own creed, if such it may 1)0 called, for they appear to care little
about it. Some of their ceremonies, which partook of a reli;iious
character, have been lately discontinued, but nothint; has been sub-
.-^titutcil ill tiieir place. It is not true, iiowever, as lias been freipiciitly
a.sserteii, tiiat the natives have no idea of a supreme beini^, altliou^h
they do not allow tiiis idea to intluciice their actions. Tiie \V"elliiiu;toii
trilH'. at least, lielieve in liie e.\isteiice of a deity called liuidiiKii, who
Hves on an island beyond the <freat sea to the east. His food is lish,
wliiiii come u|) to him from tin; water, when he calls to tiiein. Some
of tlie natives consider him the maker ot" ail tiiiiiij;s, while otiiers attri-
bute the creation of the world to his son liiminihiii. They say of iiim,
tliat Raiamai spoke, and Uurambiii came into existence. When tiic
missionaries first came to Wellington, the natives usi^d to assemble
once a year, in the month of February, to dance and sing a song in
honor of Haiamai. This song was brought there from a distance by
strange natives, who ueiit about teaching it. Those who refiiseil to
join in the ceremony were supposed to incur tiie disiileasure of the
god. For the last tiirce years the custom has been discontinued. In
the tribe on lluntur"s Uivor, there was a native famous for the compo-
sition of these songs or hymns, which, according to Mr. Threlkeld
were passed from tribe to tribe, to a great distance, until many of tiic
words became at last uiiinteili^iibie to tiiosc who sang them.
Dtininriri/'i/, a brother of Baiamai, lives in the far west. It was
he who lately sent the small-po.v among the natives, for no better
II i
A V s r n A 1, 1 A.
Ill
reason than that he was vexed for want of a tomahawk. But now he
is supposed to liave obtained one, and the disease will come no more.
Tlie linlitmhtil are a sort of anf^els, wlio are said to be of a white
color, and to live on a mountain at a great distance to tlie southeast.
Tiieir foot! is honey, and their employment to do good " like mission-
aries."
It is possible that some of these stories owe their origin to inter-
course with the whites, though tlie great unwillingness which the
natives always evince to adopt any customs or opinions from them
militates against such a sup|)osition. But a being who is, beyond
(jueslion, entirely the creation of Australian imagination, is one who
is called in the Wellington dialect Wundoiicj, though the luUives have
learned from the whites to apply to him the name of devil. He is an
object not of worship, but merely of superstitious dread. They
describe him as going about under the form of a black man of super-
human stature and strength. He prowls at night through the woods
around the encampments of the natives, seeking to entrap some
unwary wanderer, whom he w ill seize upon, and having dragged him
to his fire, will tiiere roast and dcMuir him. They attribute all their
afllictioiis to his malevolence. If they are ill, they say Wantlong has
bitten them. No one can see this being but the nihjartjir, or foiiju-
rors,wlio a.ssert that they can kill him, but that he always returns to
life, lie may, liowever, be frightened away iiy throwing lire at liim
(though this statement seems inconsistent with that respecting his
invisibility), and no native will go out at night without a firebrand, to
protect him from the tleinon.
There is some dillerenco in the accounts given of this character.
By the tribe of Hunter's River he is called Ko'ni or Kotn. Some-
times, when the blacks are asleep, he makes his appearance, seizes
upon one of them and carries him oft". The person .seized endeavors
in vain to cry out, being almost strangled; "at daylight, however,.
Koin disappears, and tiie ma-i linds himself conveyed .safely to his.
own fireside." From this it would appear that tiie demon is here a
sort of personification of the nigiitmare, — a visitation to which the
natives, from tiieir habits of gorging themselves to the utmost when
they obtain a su[)|)ly of food, must be very subject.
At the Muruya River the devil is called Tulugal. He was de-
scribeil to us, by a native, as a black man of great stature, grizzled
witli age, who has very long legs, so that he soon overtakes a man,
but very short arms, which brings the contest nearer an equality.
rr"
\\
t
I
112
KTll NO(i R A I'll V.
This frohlin has a wife who is mucli like iiimsolf, but still more
ffart'd, Itciiii,' of ii i-rnel tiispositioii, with a cannibal Mp|)ctite, cspc-
ciallv lor yoiiii'f cliildrcn. It would liarilly hv wortli while to dwell
upon thi'so superslilions, but that thoy sei'in to characterise so dis-
tinctly llie pco|)I(', at once timid, ferocious, and stui)id, who have
invented tiiem.
'i'iicir opinions witli rcifard to tiie soul vary. Some assert that the
whole man <lics at once, and nolliinir is lel't ot him. Others are of
opinion that his spirit sidl survives, but u|)on this eartii, either as a
wanderiiiLt ^tiost, or in a slate of metem|)sychosis, aninnilinijf a bird or
otiier inferior creatnrt\ lint the most sinifular lielief is one which is
foiuid at both I'ort Stephens and Swan Hivi'r, places separated i)y
the whole breadth of the Australian continent. 'I'his is, that wiiite
people arc merciv blacks wiio iiavc died, |iassed to a distant iM)unlry,
and haviujjt there undc'rirone a transformation, have returneil to liicir
orii^inal homes. When tlie natives see a white man who strongly
resembles one of their deceased friends, they ijivc him \\w name of
the dead person, and considiT him to be actually the same being.
s()( IM. I'OI.ITV.
i
' '■•- \
'l"he Australians have notlnnir which I'an be called a i^ovcrnment.
They have not even any word, In the W Cllintiton diali'cl, sii^nifyinj^
a chief or superior, or any proper terms for the expri'ssions "fw«-
1111111(1." "dlinj," and the like. I']ach tamily, beini; the source of all
its own condbrts and providintf Ibr its own wants, miudit, liut tor the
lovi^ of com[ianionshi|), live apart ;md i.^ola^cd trom tlie rest, without
sacriliciuir any advanta'^'c. Their wars, religious celel)rations, and
festive asscnd)lies are tlie only occasions wiicn i'o-oi)tM"ation is reallv
necessary aiiioiiii tliem, and cm'II tlic.se an^ rei^iilati'd bv diH'erent
priiK ipies frmn those which prevail anions;' otiier savaijes. 'I'hey
have not, ])roperly speakiiiix, any disliiictioii of tribes. Two bodies
of men, speakiiiu tlie same diali'cl, are lrci|uciitlv seen drawn up in
battle ayainst each other; and tlios(! who, in oiii" war, are i'eliow-
ct)inl)atants, may, a few davs afterwards, be in opposite ranks.
They iiave, however, a social system ol their own, reij;iilated by
customs of whose orij^nn tliev can t^ive no account, and to w hich they
conform apparently because they have no idea of anv other mode of
life, or because a different course would be followeil by liu! universal
reprobation of their fellows. Of these customs, svhich partake of the
A r S T H A I, I A.
113
sirii^ularilv iliat tlistiiiguislies every tiling relaliiijj to lliis people, the
riillmviii^ are the most reinarkalilf.
1. 'I'tio i-rrcmoiiv of iriilialiDii. When llie Ixns arrive at theatre
of piih(M-tv (or al)itnt t'oiirteeii), the elders of a triln" prepare to iiiitiato
them into tlio iluties niid privile;fes of manhood. Suddenly, at ni;,'ht,
a dismal cry is heard in the woods, which the hoys are told is the
liri/ii'i eallinLj for them. 'I'herenpon all the mi'n of tiic trihe (or rather
ol' the nei^hhorliood) set oil" for some secluded spot previously lived
u|)on, takin^i with them the youths who ar(^ to nndertio the ceremony.
The exact nature of this is not known, except thai il consists of super-
stitious rites, of dances repre.seiitiiiff the various pursuits iii which
men are en|.fai4ed, of sham-iii,'lits, and trials desiiriu'd to prove the self-
|)ossession, coura>f»\ and endiirama' of the neophytes. It is certain,
however, that there is some variation iii liie details «[' the ceremonv,
in dillerent places; for anionic the coast trihcs, one of these is the
knockinif out of an upper Iront tooth, which is not done at W'el-
liiifj;ton, and farther in the interior. Hut the nature and olijei t of the
institution ajipeur to he every where the same. Its desiirn umpu's-
tionahly is, to imprint upon the mind ol' the vounu; man the rules hy
which his future life is to he reijulated ; and some of these are so
striking', and, under the circumstances, so admiralile. that one is
inclined to aserihe them to some iii^hcr stale of mental cultivation
than now prevails amoiii; the natives. 'Thus, liie youiii; men. from
the time they are initiated till they are married, are forliicMen to
approach or speak to a female. 'I'liey must encamp !il a distance
from them at niifht, and if they see one in the way, must make a lon<5
detour to avoid her. Mr. Watson told me that he had often heen put
to irnnit inconvenience! in travelliiii^ throuu;h the woods with a youii^
man for his <(nide, as such a one could never lie iiuliiced to approach
an encampnu'iit where tlu^re were any women. The moral intent of
this regulation is evident.
Another rule rerpiires the youny; men to pay implicit t)!)e(lience to
their ciders. As there is no distinction of rank amoiiir them, it is
evident that some authority of this kind is recpiired to preserve the
order and harmony of social intercourse,
A third re<fulation restricts the youth to certain articles of diet.
They are m)t allowed to eat lish, or egirs, or the emu, or any of the
finer kinds of opossum and kani^aroo. In short, their fare is required
to be of the coarsest and most meairri! description. As thev grow
older, the restrictions are removed, one after another; hut it is not till
they have passed the period of midtUc ago that they are entirely uu-
IT
114
irrir noo n a r ii v.
rofttrniiiod in the clinicc of food, \\lirtlipr ono piiriinsc of lliis law lie
to iU'ciisluin llu- ymniv; tni'ii Id ii liiinlv iind siiiiplo style of living; iniiy
be doiilili'd ; hut its |iriiiu.' Dliji-ct and its result eerliiiidy are In pn*-
vent llie yoiinii <i"'ii from |iossessin<r themselves, i)y their superior
htrennlh and ability, of all the more desirable arlieles of tood, ami
leaving,' only the refuse In the elders.
'J. The eeremony of marriai,'e, \viii<'ii, amoii;; most nations, is con-
sidered so imporlanl anti interestinu', is, with this people, oiie of the
least regarded. The woman is looked upon as an artiele of properly,
and is sold or j^iven away by her relatives « ithout tim slit(hlesl eon-
sideration o
f her
own pleasure
In some eases, she is hetrotlu'd, or
ratiier [iromised, to her fulurt^ husiiand in tlu^ childhood of both, and
in iliis case, iis soon us they arrive at a proper a^'c, the youu;^ man
claims iini
I re
ceives
her.
ue of them have four or five wives, and
in sucii a ease, they will t'ivc one to a friend who may happen to
be ilesliluto. N'otwithstanduiu; this ajipariMit la.xity, they are very
jealous, and resent any freeilom taken with their wives. Most of
their (luarri'ls relate to women, in some eases, Iho husband wl
10
sus
peels .mother native of seduciim his wife, either kills or sevtToIy
injures one or both of them. Sonielimes the allair is taken up by tho
Ird)!', who intlici punishment alter their own fashion.
'I'i
Ii' manner
of this is another of llu' sinifularilies of their social system.
•i. \\ hen ii native, for any Iransi^ression, incurs tlio displeasure of
his tribe, their custom obliiiiis him to " stau<l pumshmeut," as it is
called:— lliat is, lie sti
nils \M
th a shielil, at a fair distai
ice, w
hil
the
whole trii)e, I'lther simultaneously, or in rapid suceession, cast their
spears at him. 'I'heir expertuess generally eiiaiiles those who are e.\-
jiosed to this trial 1o escape without serious injury, tlioimh instances
occasionallv happen of a latal result.
'I'll
•re IS a certain propriety
even in this extraordinarv |iiiiiislimeiit, as it is very eviih'iit Ih.'it tho
accuracv ami force w ith which the weapons are llirowu will depend
verv much U|ioii the opinion eiilcrtaiiicd of the enormity of the olVenco.
\\ hen the quarrel is bclween lui) persons only, and tin; tribi
di
lines to luterlerc, it is sometimes settled hv a siny;
iilar kind of
(luclio.
T
le |)arties meet III presence i
if their kindred and friends.
who lonii a (
ircic r
iiiiiid llinn as wilmsses ami iim|)ircs.
'I"l
lev s
taiKl
up opposite one another, aimed each with a cliili about \\\o feet lon;^.
The in|iired person has the ni.'lit of slnkiiiif the lirst blow, to receive
wliicii the other is oi)liired to extend his head forward, with the side
turned partially upwards. 'l"he blow is indicted with a Ibrcc coin-
mensurute with the vindictive feelinij of tin- avenu'er. A white iiiaii.
A r H T n A I, I \
no
Willi nn Driliiiiirv cnniiiin, wmilil lie Killed (uitriylit; Imt owiiiij to
If yrciit tliickih'ss ot llii'ir ^kiill.-, iIii.h xlilmii li,i|>|iciis with llic
cirlv now tiikcs hiM liini to ^ttrlkl', miil llio
II
lllltlNCS.
'I'l
II' cim
lli'i
•«'''l
oilier isoliliueil In |il;u't' himself in llie >;iiiii' poslure o\ coiivi'nUMircv
In lliis w.'iy III!' eoiiiliiit is I'oi.tiiiiicil, with ultiriiiile liiilVels, nntil one
ol tlieiil IS >tliniieil, or the e\|ilillloil Is eoiiMilereil siitlshii'tory.
•I. \\ hal are called wars iiiiinnn thein iiimv more properly lie con-
sidered duels (if this wiird may lie so a|i|i|ied) lietween two parties ol'
men. One or more natives ol' a certain part ot tlii^ country, consi-
»ieriiit( themselvux ai.'u'ri<'ved iiy the ads of others in another part,
asseinlile their ni'iuhliors lo ronsiilt w illi them concerning the proper
culirse lo he lilirsiied
'i'l
le i^enerai opinion haviiiir
I'cil declared lor
war, a me.ss(>ngor or amimssador is sent to aniioiiiice their iiitention to
These inimediatelv ii^seinlile their Iricnds and
le o|i|iosile iiarlv
ilesl. Ill
some
iiei;,'lihors, and all prepare lor the approachiiiLj coi
cases, the dav is lixeil hy the messenoiT, in others not; Imt, at all
('\eiits, llii^ time is well • nderslood.
The two armies (nsnallv Iroin liity to two hiiiulred each) m<u;l, and
al'ler a ynat deal of mutual Mtiiperatioii, the combat ootniiienccs.
From their siie^nlar dexterity in avouliie^ or |(arryinif the missiles of
llieir adversaries, llu^ enoaLU'inent nsiiallv conliniies a Ioiil; timu with-
mit any fatal result. W lieu a man is killed (and sometimes liefore) n
cessation lakes place; another scene o(' recrimination, aim e, and ex-
planation ensues, and the all'air 'ommonly terminates. iMI .lostility is
al an end, and the two parties mi.\ amicably to;,'elher, bury the dead,
and join in a '^reneral dance.
T). One caiisi^ of hostility amonn them, both public and privale. is
the absurd idea which lliey enlerlain, that no person dies a natural
death. If a man perishes of disease al a distance from his frii nds, Ins
death is siippo.sed to have been caused by soiiK! sorcerer ot anollier
tribe, whose life miisl be taken lor s;itisfactioii. If. on tlie other h.iiid,
he dies anion.!; his kindred, the iieaiisl relative is held responsible. A
native of the tribe at Hunter's Uivi
who si'rveil me as a <rnide, liatl
not loiifjr before beaten his own mother nearly to death, in revenue lor
the loss of his brother, who died while under lier care. This was
not becau.se he bad any sus|ticions of her conduct, but nierciy in
obedience to the re(|uiremei ^ of ji senseless custom.*
It is slii.l, JKlWl'Vrr, llilil till. Ii
^< uilli wliiili till' Aii-ilniliun Hiuiicn urc Iruutod
l)y llii'ir liii>liiiiiili Miincliini's iiiduci'.s ii in i.i n.|aliiiic j]'- inixiiiu
Willi iIk! liiod uf
tilt
Tlic ciislcini rclirrcd III alu
iiivc iniiv [huMlily li.iM' iinsiii Iriiiii tins ciiu.si', ii
I Ihi
mid
would llmi Ix.' Hut .-u hIidIIv iiiiitiisiui:iL>l
(' !is il limy. 111 lirsi sinlil, ii|i|iinr.
»!
I
"!»*"W>'^»"^w<i<»<i>t«"«>SEr~:^ac-ww"
IIG
KT 11 N 0(J II A 1' II Y.
Tlie fdrc^'oiniT (losi'ri|)ti(iii will siillice to !j;ivo ;i rreneral idea of the
cliarai'tcr and customs of tliis aiiiu;iilar rac(!. l''or otlior details rela-
tive to their lial)its and nsa;fes, \\u' reader is referred to tlie j^eneral
liistory of tlic voya<j;o. Wc must, however, add some remarks eon-
ceriiiiiif a few of their weapons, which deserve notice lor their peou-
harity. 'I'iio lirsl is the spear or lance, which, in its shape and use,
resiMnbles that of the I'oivncsians. IJiit it is thrown by means of an
implement called a inimnunt, which is a straii;ht stick, three feet in
leiiij;tli, terminatiiiir at one end in an upturned socket, into which the
blunt end of the spear is fitted, the spear itself lieinjr laid flat upon
the iraiunnia. Moth are then trrasped in one hand by the native,
near the other end of the stick, or about three feet from the end of the
spear, and when the latter is discharired, the stick is retained in tho
hand, and acts as a lever to increase its velocity.
'I'ho ho'>vii'ranii, or, as it is called at \\ ellin^'ton, tho hargmi, is per-
iia|)s the most curious implement ever employed in warfare. It i.s
shapcil somewhat like a saitre, bcinif a (lat stick, three feet lonij; and
from one to two inches in breadth, which is curved or crooked at
the middle, so as to form a very obtuse aufrle. Any one who saw it
for the first time would naturidly set it down for a clumsy kind of
wooden sword. It is, however, a missile, and, in the haiuls of a
native, forms a tolerably ellicient weapon, wiiit-h is used not only in
war, but in taking birds and other small animals. It is i^ras|)eil at
one end by the ri<^ht hand, and thrown either upwards into the air, or
ol)liquely downwarils, so as to strike the earth at sonii' distance from
tlie thrower. In the former case, it flics with a rotary motion, as its
.shape would lead us to e.xpcct. After ascendin<^ In a yreat distance
throuiili the air, in the direction lirsl <^iven to it. it suddenly re-
turns in an elliptical orbit, to a spot not far from the starling point.
Though the curve thus described is oiu; which ini;,dit umpiestionably
be determined by inatiiematical calculation, we must sujipose that it
was accident which lirsl taiiglil the use of this extraordinary weapon.
When thrown towards the ground, tiie ela.sticity given by its curved
shape ciiuses it to rt'boti.ul and lly forwards; it continues in this
direction, touchinif the earlli in a succession of rapid leajis, like a ball
fireil en ricochet, until it strikes the object at which it is thrown.
MIGRATIONS OF THE OCEANIC TRIBES.
POLYNESIA.
As \\w cxiiiniiiation of \\h\ nistdins ami idioms of llu' Polynesian
tribes li-iives no room to doubt tbiit tliey form, in fact, but a sIiiltIc
nation, and as tlio similarity of tlieir dialects warrants tlic su|)positiMn
that no great lenirtli of time has elapsed since their dispersion, we are
naturally led to incjuirc whether it may not be possible, by the com-
parison of their idioms and traditions, and by other indications, to
determine, with at least some deifree of probauility, the or-ginal point
from which their separation took place, and the manner in which it
was elfected. By this point is not meant the primitive seat of their
race in the Malaisian Archipclairo, thouLjh we may hereufler venture
a conjecture with regard to this, but merely the island or group in the
Pacific which was the first inhabited, and which bore to the rest the
relation of the mother-country to its colonies.
The first result of ;i careful investigation is to produce the convic-
tion that the progress of emigration was from west to east, and not
in the contrary direction. This conclusion may he deduced merely
from an e.vaniination of the comparative grammar and vocabulary of
the various dialects. We see in those of the western groups many
forms which are entirely wanting in the eastern tongues; others,
which are complete in the former, are iound in the latter defective,
and perverted from what seems evidently their original meaning. The
reader is referred to H 40, 41, 54, f)5, of the Grammar, with respect
es])ecially to the desiderative and reciprocal forms of the verb, the i)as-
sive voice, and the plural of the possessive and tlemonstrative pronouns.
Other comparisons serve to confirm this general deduction. We
find in the west a comparatively simple mythology and spiritual
worship, which, in the east, is perverteil to a debasing and cruel
idolatry. The fashion of tattooing, whicli, in Samoa and Tonga, is
ao
mm
; 1
i.
118
ET II .\ OG R A I' II V.
intended to answer tlie purposes of decency, has degenerated elsc-
wliere into a mode oi" ornament. Other facts, of a similar nature,
niiirht be mentioned, l)ut it will hardly be thought necessary. One
circumstance, liowevcr, must be noted, which becomes apparent in
this investigation. 'I'lie peo[)le of the Tonga or Friendly Group,
though lielonsiing to the Polynesian iamily, form a class apart from
the rest. This is seen in their lani;uaire, which differs strikii.^;,!" in
several points, from the others, especially in the article, the pronouns,
anil the passive voice of the verb. Several of their customs are, more-
over, peculiar, such as that of infant sacrifice, of cutting off a finger
to appease the gods, their fashion of canoe-making, &c. It is evident
that these islanders have re(;eived modifications in their language and
usages from a source which lias not alfectcil the rest. W't> shall, for
the present, leave this group out of the ipiestion, in our discussion,
and recur to it herjafter.
Before [jroceeding fartlier, it will be necessary to examine the only
argument of importance whicii has been urged against the migration
of the eastern isitinders from the west. This is the supposed preva-
lence of easterly winds witiiiu the tropics. Against this, many
voyagers have adduced facts serving to .show that the.se winds are by
no means constant, ami tliat they are freciuently interrupted l»y others
from the contrary direction ; and somi- have suggested the connexion
of these last with the northwest monsoon of the China and Malayan
Seas.* The observations made <luring our cruise have served to
confirm this opinion, and put beyond a doubt the fact that during the
winter months of our hemisphere, westerly and northwesterly winds
prevail in the Pacihc as far east as the limit of the Paumotn Archi-
[lelago, and perhaps still farther. For those observations the reader
is referred to the general history of the voyage. We will only men-
tion here, as a single instance, that in the month of Fei)ruary, 181(1,
we were, for twenty days, kept wind-bound at the Navigator Islands
by constant and strong winds from the northwest. A canoe driven
off from that group at this time, would, in all probability, have
lirought up on some one of the Society or Ilervey Islands. It is at
this season, and with this wind, moreover, that the most violent gales
are experienced. At such times tlic heavens are, for days togelher.
* S('c Dillnn's Voyngr., vol. ii. |i. 1"J4 : Kiilzcliiio's Vhviil'o to ilic Smilli l^i'ns (l-'.iij.'.
inins.), vol. ii, p. Vi'i ; Iti-irliiiy's Vuyiijic, p. I(i4. .\U.i ('. W. Uoilhclcl. in Sillini/mV
Aiiierican .lournal of .SciLiico, for October. IHtiJ, p. 311'J.
OCEANIC MIGRATIONS.
119
obscured by clouds, whicli deprive the ishmd-voyager of his only
means of dotennininif even the direction in which he is driven.
Mr. Ellis, whose writinjrs form tlie most valuable contribution to
tlie stock of knowledire which we possess concerning the South Sea
Isliiuils, observes tliat every native voyage of whicli we have any
account, has invariably been from east to west.* This, tliough it
e.vi)resses what is generally true, is not perfectly correct. The greater
number of such voyages are, no doubt, in that direction, because the
easterly winds blow for three-fourths of the year, and it is chielly at
tliis season that the natives put to sea in their canoes. But not to
speak of instances of less importance, we have the remarkable case of
Kadu, a native of Ilea, in the Caroline Archii)elago, who was found
by Kotzebue, in 1817, on the island of Aur, one of the lladack Chain,
to which he had been driven in a canoe with three companions, — a
distance of nearly lifteen hundred miles due east. Beechey, in like
manner, found on Barrow Island, in the Paumotu Archipelago, some
natives of Chain Island, who had been drifted by the westerly winds
si.K hundred miles to the eastward. Though the distance is not so
great in this, as in the former instance, the fact is hardly less impor-
tant, from the circumstance that the occurrence took place near the
eastern limits of I'olynesia.
On our arrival at the Navigator Islands, we there first s;iw tlie
newly published work of the Rev. Joim \\'illiams, entitled, '• A Nar-
rative of Missionary Enterprise in the South Sea Islands." Of the
mass of information which it contiiins, I was especially struck with
that relatii;g to the i)eopling of Karotonga, tiie inhabitants t)f \\ iiich
consider themselves to be descended, in part, from emigrants from
tlie Navigator Grou[). At another of the Ilervey Islands, Aitntiiki,
the inliaijitants believe that their ancestor asceiuled I'rom a region
beneath, termed, Acailxi.\ This account called to mind a similar
tradition of the Mar(|uesans, who gave to the lower region the name
of llacailii.X It was impossible not to be reminded, at the same
time, of the Hatvui'i of the Sandwich Islands. All these terms are
the precise Ibrnis which the name of the largest of the Navigator
Islands {fiavdi'i) would assume in the dill'erenl dialects. It seemed
* I'lilyiii'si.'iii l!csi'iu-clii> (Am. cilit.), vol. i. p. liiS.
t .Mi-i>i')ii;irv Diili'rpi'iM', p. ."i7.
|; Strvv:ii-!'> \ciyiigc to lliu .Suulli J^cas, vol. i. p. -yi-i
"PW
120
ETHNOGRAPHY.
:
111
probable, tlierefore, tliat by foliowing this clue, the diflerent tribes of
Polynesia might all be referred back to their original seat. On com-
municating the.se views to Mr. Williams, (but a few weeks before his
lamented death,) he informed me tiiat he had long entertained the
opinion that the Samoan Islands were the source of population to the
otlier groups of Polynesia. His intimate acquaintance with the lan-
guage and traditions of tliree of the principal groups, and his general
information on this subject, gave particular weight to his opinion.
During the remainder of the voyage this investigation was pursued,
and the results were found to accord perfectly with the view liere
expressed. In the writings of former voyagers many statements
were found incidentally confirming tiie conclusion thus formed, and
the more valuable as they were made with no reference whatever to
such a supposition.
Before proceeding farther, a word of e.vplanation becomes neces-
sary, with regard to the name of the island above-mentioned.
Throughout Polynesia, with the exception of .Samoa, all the prin-
cipal groups are known to tlie people of the other groups by the
name of their largest island, used in a general sense, as we commonly
say England for tlie whole group of British Islands. Thus the
Sandwich Islands are termed Hanaii, — tlie Marcpiesas, Nnlmhiva, —
the Society Islands, Tahiti, — the Gambier Group, Ma/igareva, and
the Friendly Islands, Tonga. The Navigators, only, have a distinct
name for their group. This word, Samoa, signifies in Malay all; it
probably had originally the same signification in this dialect, and was
applied to the group, as we use the word " Union," in speaking of the
United States. In process of time it lost its general meaning, as an
adjective, and became a mere appellative. At present, the only term
for all, in this idiom, is uma, which means, properly, finished, com-
plete. Before, however, the name Samoa came into general use, — or
while it retained its primary sense of all, — some other means of
designating the group must have been necessary, particularly for
natives of other islands. It is reasonable to suppose that the same
mode was adopted here as elsewhere, and that the name of the prin-
cipal island was used for this purpose.
By referring to the table of dialectical changes, given in the Com-
parative Grammar, \ 2, it will be perceived that this name would,
as has been already intimated, undergo certain alterations in the
various idioms. The following are the regular forms as they may
be deduced from the table :
OCEANIC JI I G 11 A T I O .\ S. 121
1. Orii;iiinl r(irrii, Siiriii/ci.
'■1, Siiiiiiiaii illnk'Ot, Sifiii'L
.'). 'I'liliiliiiii, Jhivai'i.
4. Snmlwii'li Isliiiiil, lliinni'i.
5. Kiii(>l()n;;im mid Mniij;nri.'vnii, Afdi/.i.
0. Nukuliiv.in, Ilaiaihi.
7. \i« Zi'uliind, Hull (tiki.
It will be found that this is, so to speak, tlie key-word, wliich
unlocks the mystery of the Polynesian migrations.
T A II I 1' I, c) It T II i: s () (• 1 1: r v i s i, a x n s.
As our attention was not drawn to this subject of investigation
(that which connects the Polynesians with Savaii) until after we left
this group, we are unable here to add any thing to what has been
given by others. Fortunately, this is amply sufficient for our pur-
pose, and, as already remarked, has the great advantage of having
been obtained and published without the possibility of a reference to
any hypothesis like that now advanced.
Mr. Ellis, in his Polynesian Researches (vol. ii. p. 234, American
edition) says; — " Opon is the most remarkable place in Raiatea; of
its earth, according to some of their traditions, the first pair were
made by Tii or Taaroa, and on its soil they fi.ved their abode. Here
0;o held his court. It was called Hawaii ; and as distant colonies
are said to have proceeded from it, it was probably the place at which
some of the first inhabitants of the South Sea Islands arrived." As
there is no iv in the Tahitian langiiage (at least in the usual orthogra-
phy), it is here eviilently written instead of a v. In another part of the
same work, (vol. i., p. 105,) the author, in treating of the origin of the
Society islanders, inclines to refer them to the Sandwich Islaiids, his
principal reason being that "in some of their [the Tahitian] tradi-
tions Ilaivaii is mentioned as the ancient name of Opoa and Oro, who
is by some described as both god and man, as having two bodies or
forms, or being a kind of connecting link between gods and men, is
described as the first king of Ilawiiii or Opoa in Raiatea." - The
Tahitian v is fre(|ueiilly sounded like /r, and Mr. Ellis here evidently
chooses the latter element in order to show more clearly the resem-
blance or rather identity of the name with tlic Ilaivaii of the Sand-
wich Islands. He was not, at that time, aware of the e.^ci-stence of a
Savaii in the west; had he been so, we may conclude that the reason
31
133
ETII XOO R A PH Y.
which led him to derive the Society Islanders from the nortiicrn
group, would have induced liiin to refer both the Ilawaiis to tiiat
source.
Cook, in the history of his first voyage (vol. il'.., p. G9), comparing
the New Zealauders with the South Sea (i. e. Society) islanders,
observes that "tiie^v have both a tradition that their ancestors, at a
very remote period of time, came from another country ; and, accord-
ing to the tradition of both, the name of that country is Ileawije."
There is no j in either the New Zealand or Tahitian language. It
may be a mistake, made in printing or copying, for </, the hard sound
of which is frecjuently given by the Polynesians to their k ; in this
case Hean'igi- would be the English orthography for the New Zealand
word Hau'iiiki*
But the most important testimony is that furnished by a chart
drawn by Titpaia (or Ti/jMii/(t), the native who accompanied Captain
Cook in his first voyage, — and i)ublishcd by J. R. Forster, in his " Ob-
servations made during a Voyage round the World.'' It contains the
names of all the islands known to Tupaia, either from having visited
them, or by tradition. The extent of information displayed in it is
sur|)rising. We find every important group of Polynesia, except the
Sandwich Islands and New Zealand, laid down, though not accu-
rately, yet with a certain attention to bearings and distances, which
enables us to identify them. What gives its cliief value to the chart,
is the fact that, at the time it was drawn, more than half the islands
which it contains were unknown to FJuropeans, and of tiiose which
had been discovered the native names of very few were ascer-
tained. Much confusion has been made in the chart by a mistake of
those for wiiom Tupaia drew it. Knowing that toeriu in Tahitian
signified the north (or northwest) wind, and toa tlie south, they con-
cluded naturally that apatoerau and apatoa were names applied to the
corresponding points of the compass; whereas apatoerau signifies, in
fact, the point towards which the north wind blows, — i. e. tlie south,
and apatfxi, for the same reason, the north. By not understanding
this, they have, so far as these two points are concerned, reversed the
* Tin- //, 111 the iK'^rinniiijr ,,|";i word, in llic diiili'cls of .\i,'W Zcnlanil and Tidiili, wliiii
It takes (lie pl;if(' of tlio Suinoan s, lius ii pocidinr liissiiii; sound, which some hiivc^ rcpif.
sciited by s/i, others by rh, others liy /ir, or /t\ or simply c. Thus the word Iwnifi, from
the Samoan so/igi, meaning to salute by pix'.saing noses, has l)een s|)ellecl by dilliTent
writers, slioii^i, ilnjiifii, hroiigi, h'oitgi, and congi. This is evidently llie orifjin ol" tlie
//( in till; worii Ilrnwijr.
I^»-
O C i: A .\ I (• M I (i 11 A T I O .N S.
123
cliart completely, and it is, in laet, printed upside down. B<it not
content witli this, it is apparent tliat tiiese iriMitlcnien ((-"aptain Cook,
Mr. Banks, and Lientenanl Piekerscrill, wlioin Forster mentioned ns
liavin^; obtained the eliarl) overlooked Tnpaia while he was drawing,
and siiiTirosted corrections, whicli his idea of their superior knowledge
induced him to receive atrninst his own convictions. This is clear,
from the fact that all the groups and i.slauds with which the Hnglish
were not ac(piainted are laid down rightly, according to the real
moaning of (ijxitom/ii and tipiitoa, hut wrong acconling to the mean-
ing which tho.se gentlemen ascrihed to the words; while the islands
wliose position tiiey knew (the Manpiesas and Paumotns) arc placed
exactly as they should he, according to this mistaken meaning, but
altogether out of the proper hearings when these are rightly under-
stc.id. This, of cour.se, makes great confusion, which can only be
rectified when its origin is perceived.*
• A Cdpy of this cliarl is given on Ihi! op|X)silc \m<n; rcdiiccil lo liiill' the origirmi size.
The only iilli'i'iilinri niiidc in il is llic ciniission nl" the l')iij;lisli imincs assigned liv Korslcr
to some iifllie islands, uliicli are generally ernmecais. Thus he sn|ip(i.ses O-d/inti (ii'ia),
pro|HMly Chain Islanil, lo Ihj Ihe IVinre of Wales' Island, «hili' l{<iiriki, to whirh the
Intler name nally helimgs, is set down (iir CarlslinlV; llillr-piilln, one ol" the lliti or
Feejee Cinnip, is marked Snvnge Island, iVc. It will lie sec>n that while the north and
south point.s huvc been reversed, the east and west are eorrectly given. OjMl'Xjrrau is
liir o ii/uilorrHit, meaning .south, and Op'itiri (iir o djitilim, north. TiitahaieUi. (pro|ierly
tatahiiitd) is "morning," and Olir.'Va'ilirii should W' ii lii/i o tc rit, "the rising ol" the
sun." Tiniili is lor the Intler part ol' the phrase te nitiiri rait i tc iri a tai, lilerally,
"the sinking (of the son) lo the level ol' the se;i." 'Dxitrra is for /<« o ^' /•«, sunset.
7V/VJ Ijiuiilli'ii (/(■ III r urnlin) means, " Ihe sun is at lUHin." Of the seventy-nine
names given on Ihe chart, forly-nine (supposing those in which the term llitte occurs to
l)elong to Ihe Iv'cjec Oroup) can Ik' iileiitilied. .\s lo Ihe remainder, the uncerluinty
prohnlily proccn-ds, in most cases, from ndslakes on Ihe part either of Tupaia (who gave
the names and hicalities merely I'rom tradition) or of those to whom he communicated Ihe
inli>rmation, or, fmally, of Forster hims<>lf, who made out the chart from two copies, dif-
fering from one another in some res|H'cts, and selected the names from liiiir separate lists.
Of these he remarks, — " some of the names were strangely s\\c\\, as tliere never were
two pers(ms, in Ihe last and former voyages, who s|)elt the same name in the same
manner," One conse(|uence of this discrepancy in Ihe original charts anil list:* has l)een
thai, in making his selectiiuis, I'orster has, in some cases, given the same island twice.
Thus we have llailunuii and Hrrvanii, both for Ixiiiiiivai ; liiniiitnrrii and liimalema
both for HiiiiiUiira ; Ailrilin and ^^'nlll■l■m, Isith probably li)r Atiii ( Wimreen for O-AHii,
tlie r and / iinving been conl'oun<l<'d in copying, as we see in TT7/((/ci'rt for I'liiirava, one
of the I'aumotus). Notwithstanding these errors of a kind unavoidable in such n per-
formnnci', Ihe chart is a most valuable one, as proving, In'yond a doubt, the extensive
knowledge possessed by the Tahitinns of liie otiier Polynesian groups.
124
K T H N O (J R A 1' II V.
Tlie westernmost cffoup on tliis oliart consists of cij^ht isliiruls, with
compound namos, all bcy^innin^' or cudini; with hittc, — as llitti-polto,
Te-ciDi'iroo-liitte. Sec. Hid is \\\o form which the Samoan won! Fid
(Fit'jci) would talic in Taliitian. One of tlicso islands, Ohilcroa,
answcrin;^ to Viti-/rrit, has bciMi removed from its proper place, as
M'ill bo shown hereafter, hy llie same sort of "correction" as was
applied to the Manpiesas and I'lmmotu Cirnups.
To the east of tiiis row of islets is another, still larfjier, with the
names Wre/ui, Uofoonut, Ifeiimti, Oopnrrm, Wouiroii, ToDtomrrr, and
Oiiir/iffi. These are evidently ieo (Wallis's Island), liotiiiiid, Snmiii,
I'polii, 'Viituila, and Viha (one of the Ilabai cluster). The lirst and
last, from the similarity of names, seem to have become confused
together, and Vavan is laid down out of its place, — but there is
reason to believe that it was formerly considered as beloniring
politically to the Navigator Group, to which it approaches nearest
of any of the Friendly Islands. It should be observed that on many
of the principal islands Tupaia made brief descriptive observations,
which are given by Forster. Ueaoai is laid down five or six times the
size of any other island, and Tupaia slated that it was larger than
Tahiti, — adding this remarkable observation, — "it is the father of all
the islands."
Combining these various traditions, we shall probably be thought
justified in sup|)osing that the first settlers of the Society Islands
came originally from the Samoan Group, and landed or established
themselves first at the place now called Opoa, on Haiatea, which they
named Ilarati, after the principal island of their native country.
'Oro (or more properly Koro) may have been their chief at the time
of the migration. Concerning the probable period at which this
occurred, we shall olfer some considerations in another place.
Additional evidence that the earliest Taliitian traditions are of
Samoan origin may be derived from the work of Mr. Moerenhout
(formerly American consul at Tahiti), entitled, " Voi/iiijcs rii/.c I/es dti
Grand Orfan," in which we find an ancient mythological ode, —
obtained from an old Taliitian priest, — which the author justly
esteems of much importance. Its value is perhaps even greater
than he supposed. It relates the creation of the world and of the
inferior deities, as accomjilished by Taaroa. The first part informs
us that Taaroa existed from the beginning, and that he formed the
world from his own sub.stance. It concludes as follows :
OC K A N \r SI I ti a A T I ON s.
13ft
MR. M. » IIRTIIOIIRAI'IIV.
TitiiriMi It jiiiiiri
Jiinnii Jitiimu liod'ii ;
lnKt'ii HfJtli ftttt^
ei JUKI no TiiniiKt,
It minri rii liiKiiid.
NATIVK <lKTIICl(IH\rilV.
'I'liiiiixi Ir piiaii
TRA>n|,\TI(>.N.
'ranniii llio Hisc
/iiiiiiii JhiiKi I Inn II a ; |pri«lii(c(l llii' ImikI lliiwiiii;
lliiiiiin iilii run,
I'i pun nil Tnniiin,
Iri niinri rn Jiiiint,
I liiwiiii ^I'l'iil mill siiri'i'il,
IIS II slii'll (Ixiilx ) lor 'rmiriiii,
wliiMT(iilril(Mr vivilii'il) llii'ttiirld.
'I'liaf, l)y himii, Mr. MocrcnliniU mciins tci spell (in llin Frcricli
ortliojrrapliy) huivaii, is I'vidnit from tlie tact tliiil on jiaifi! r)")"^, of
this volume, lio rf(|iiot>'s tlio passii;re which we liave {.fivcn alxivo,
anil spells this word iiIkiH, and on puift^ '-2'21, of the second volume, he
remarks thai ()//«/7 is the name of the largest of the Sandwich
Islands [Ihiwmi). Mr. Mocrenhont renders ohaii i>y universe, and it
is likely enoiijfh that this may he the ineaninu now attached to it hy
the Tahitian priests. 'I'he second part of the ode continues the work
of creation, and ends with the line "/pan fenoim no lioti/r (or, i- jxtu
J'cHiKi no Itdirfiii), — (inislied is the land of Hawaii. The third part
relates the oriifin of the jijods who were horn of Taaroa and his wives,
after the creation of oliii/i, and ends with " t('i moiia iri tr utoiKi Roo
iirari nti i iroto /'pou fininii oiijiarou," which should, perhaps, he '■'tei
vuKt iri tr atiid lion a rare ii(t ei rotopii Jiinaii Uporu," — the ifod Uoo
remained in front, and seeinij that which was within, jjroduced
Uporu. This version is ol)scure and may not he altoLfcthcr correct;
but fiiuiiii oii/mroii, like /(///^/// /'iiioiifi hoaii, can hardly he mistaken.
Upolit is the second of the Samoan Islands, nearly e(|ual in size and
importance to Savaii. There can he little douht that this is an
ancient Polynesian mythos, relatin^f to the supi)osed orijfin of the
Navi^iator Islands, and that it was hroui^ht from thence hy the first
emiifrauts to Tahiti, where it has [)robahly underifone only such
alterations as the gratlual change in the language rendered nece.s.sary.
NL'KI IIIVA, ()|{ Tin: M AUglKSAS I S I, A N S.
That which lirst strikes us in this groui), i.s the number of dia-
lectical dillerences in the language as spoken at the various islands,
and even between diirerent districts of the same island. Mr. Alex-
ander says,* "On the island of Nukuhiva, the iiihahitaiits of the 'ieii
and 'I'liipi districts may he as readily distinguished as a Scotchman
and a Yankee, while a Tahuatan may be tlistinguished from them
• Huwailun Sjicctator, <iuv .lammry, Ha-*, |i. 17.
|){g KT II \()(i II A I' II V.
botli. The Tnipi, like tho iiilmbitiints of Iho Horvey and Friciully
IslamlH, list's tlie deep miltural nij {})) for wliieli the 'I'eii uses k, niid
tho Tahiiatan, hke tlio llawiiiiaii, uses n. To dlu.struto thiH a few
examples will siillico : —
TKII. TAII-r. rAIII VIA,
hiikiiikii, , . . Imiiiiipi, . . . Iiiikiiiiiu, . . . I'litlli-.
Iiiikd, .... /i(iii/;ii /iiiiiii, .... «(irk.
matttki, , . . niiiliinf!!, , . . iini/iiiii, .... ttiiiil.
iiimk'i, .... iiimiii:!!, . . . iiiixiiii II mill."
Hy a short V(ical)iilary of tlie laiiijiiaL'e of l-'uluhini, ol)taiii('(l from
SI native at Taiiiti, it appears that the /' is in use in tliat island, and
prol)al)!y in the rest of the southern ehistcr, instead of the k which
prevails in the northern,* as —
F.\I'IIIIV\, .MKIIIIVA.
Jiijd, Ii'ili'i, inoiilli,
Jiiit, hiiu sl.ir.
filii Iiilii, scviri.
lull, hull, Iiiw.
'I'hore is also a wide diirerenet^ in tlie mode of ennnieration at tho
two clusters, hoth in the words used ami the value adi.vetl to them,
for which sec the (irainmar, '(31.
There is no other jirou[) of Polynesia in which variations to this
extent prevail, an<l it is impossihle to iicconiit for them satisfactorily
merely from the division of tho people into nninorous tribes. This
cause should operate mucli more stroiiiily in \ew Zeidand than at
the .Mar(|uesas Ishuids, yet tlie same laniruai^e and pron\inciation
prevail, Jis we were assured by tho missionaries, with so»;ie trillinj^
exceptions, from C'ooU's Strait to the North Cape. The most natural
solution is that the two clusters in tho Maniucsau (iroup, received
their population orii,'inall3- from ditferent sources, and that tho de-
scendants of the first colonist.s, iuteriniii<^ling in various pro[)ortions,
have formed several tribes, which, thou<fli bearin;^ a general resem-
blance to one another, do not constitute a homogeneous whole, a.s in
the other groups of J'olynesia. The ditrorent counties of England
and provinces of France are examples of the same etfect pro<luced by
a similar cause. It has been found, moreover, that much of the social
polity and many of the customs which prevail in the southern cluster
of the Marquesas, are unlike those of the northern.
* This obscrvalioii has liccn since confirmed from Mr. Crook's MS, grammar.
OC K A N IC M I (i It A T I O.N S.
I -J?
y
Tlio trailitions of tho iintivcs coiilirtn tlio opinion hi-rn c'X[)ri'xsc'(l.
Mr. Stuwiirt, in his intcrcsliiii,' "Visit to \\w Soiitli Sens," (vol. i. p.
27.'J,) fiivcs lis till' liclicC of llio .Miinnicsims (•oncoriiinLf the oriijiu of
tlirir islaiiils. As this iiccoimt is derived from Mr. Crook, it iioloiij^s
in nil proU.'ihihly, to tiie |)eop|(! of the southern ehistcr. 'I'hcy Ix^lieve
" tliat the hind coinposiny; their isiiiiids wiis oik'c iocnteil in llnniihi.
or the re^fions lielow, — the phiee of (U'parled spirits, — and lliat tiiey
rose t'roin tiieneii tliroii:,di tlie ell'orlsufa ^"m1 heneatii them."*
On the otiuT hand, Captain I'orter, in liis Voyaue to lliti I'aeifu'.
(vol. li. p. 20), iid'orms ns tlial the natives of Nid<uhiva liave tiic
tnitlition that "the first selth-rs ettme from \'itnii), iiii island under-
neatli Nidinidva."
The lan|,riiai^e, so far as our materials eiialile ns to jmltie, shows
traces of ii doid)le origin, such as miyht lie inferred from this tradi-
tion. Tho ^roat mass of ^t is 'I'ahitian, as may he seen in the
(Jomparative N'oeaindary. Theri! iire, however, several peenliarities
in whieh it ditl'ers from Ihi.;, and approaches that of the Friendly
(iroup to which Vnrmi l)elon;,rs. One ot tht^ most striluiiLj is tiie
omission of the /• (or raliier /) which is universal in the M;ir(|iiesan.
and freipicnt in the 'I'ongan, uikI which is uiduiuwii in the other
dialect.s, as —
MAIlm Il.SAN.
TliMl AN.
IMil.YNKSI.W.
tm^
'/",
. . ({/(I, ,
til lot.'iki
itito iir I'/t'fif ,
Olio, ,
, . lintOy .
. Ill lir.ir.
iiiiiiiiiiii,
ItlOOtlfl,
nm/iiiiiii^
. Ii,-lil.
iii/.i, . . .
. <il.l, . .
. . lilU.i, . . .
. rllicl'.
(i/.iiii, Ici'ini,
tiK'ltHy
. lohlDI, . .
, Irrr.
iiiii, . . .
, rtitly . .
. lino, . . .
. Iiiriiicrii'
There are also several wortis in the Nukuhivuii which seem to he
of Ton^jan oriifin, its —
MAlim KSAN.
Tt.NtiAN.
TAUITIAS.
ohiiiiii, , .
. ohilllil, .
. . til lit; . . .
, . Iiiisl>anil,
o/h, . . .
offt.
. . iirolm, . .
, . love.
IdlllKl, . .
. tilll'tll,
. . lllllVlC, . .
, liiiva-lxml.
hiiijio, , ,
. ItiltlK),
. iihii, . . ,
, . unlive cloth,
liiliiimi, . .
. tii/inm, .
, . tlllllKI, . ,
, . nrtisnn.
oiiultiiu, . . ,
onif/ii/iif ,
. . a/iiirii, , ,
. Ii-ii.
tiktiu, (\uk.)
. /</,a«, .
. . liikdu, . ,
. twenty.
• In Mr. Crook's Mnrqnesim Diclionnry wv. liiid llie lollowinj^ (lefinillon : '^ Ifavdiki
or Ilafiiii, iIm; ref^lons Ih'Iow, the invisible world ; liipii luiviiii, to plunge into eternily ;
ua vi'ite havaii, lie is iib.solulily ilenil," &c. The onii.ssion ol'llie k in these expressions
shows that they are to he relerred to the southern or Tahualan cluster.
129
E T n N O O R A P H Y.
Tlio natives of the Frieiully Islniuls, ns we have hefore renmrkeJ,
have several peculiar customs, which they have derived, apparently,
from their Feejeeaii neii^lihors. Some of tlie most remarkahle of
these are found also at Nukuliiva. 'L'luis the Feejeeans, who take
ji;reat pains in dressinir their hair in a fri/zlcd mass resemhliiiu; a huge
bushy wiir, are aeeustonied, in order to preserve lliis from injury, to
wt-ar a kinii of turlian, or head-wrapper, of very line while paper-
cloth. 'I'lie Toiitia |)eo|ile, wlio have no such reason for tiie custom,
hav(i yet adopted it merely for ornanieiit, and we fuid it also amon;j;
tiie Mar(piesaiis. 'I'lie description which I'orter irives of the tnrl)ans
worn l)y the latter, miu;lit stand, wonl for word, (except oidv tlic
name,) for a description of the same artii'le -t the l-'cejee (iroup.
Aiiain, the Feeiecans set a singnhu- value u|)on the teetii of the whale,
which are used hy them for ornaments, and also as a kind of circu-
latinuf medium. In tiic Friendly Islands they are eipially prized, hut
only as ornaments, — and the same is the case at the Manpiesas. The
statement of (Japtain I'orter, that a ship mis^hl he stocked with pro-
visions at this yronp (or a lew of these teeth is ecpially true, at this
day, of the Feejee Isliuids. Nothing like this has ever hcen known
at cither 'Tahiti or Samoa.
0\\ tlie wliol(>, it seems prol)al)le that the northern portion of the
Miu'ipicsan (ironp was lirst settled l)v emigrants tVom \ avau, and the
soutliern hv otiiers I'rom 'I'aliiti, and that tlii'ir ilescendants havt> vince
graduallv intermingled. The Tahitians may iiave hi-en the most
numerous, and |)erliaps received additions from time to time, from
their parent countrv, whn-ii is only seven hundred miles distant, —
which uouhl aci'ount lor tlieir huigu;iL;c having liccome, in a great
mrasurc. |ircdominant. It is to these, also, that the tradition with
regard to llavaiki is prol)ai)l\' to hv referred.
'I'hc story of the Niikiihivans, as ('ommodore I'orter rei-eived it
from tlic cliicf (lattanewa {Knifiiinii). was to the elfcct that Oiifaia,
with his wife Aii'iiioiiiin, came from \ avail ciyhty-eigiit generations
hack, (reckoned in the family of (iattaiicwa himself,) and hrought wilii
them iprcad-fniit and sugar-cane, and a great variety of other plants.
The\ had forty cliildreii, who were ail named after tlie plants which
thcv Icid brought with them, with the exception of the lirst son, who
was called I'o, or night.* They si'ttled in the valley of Tieuhoy
* 'riicrc !•<, |H'ili.i|is, ;i iin--liikc line. 'I'Iuki' ili\ iiiili'.'s. In olliir nriiii|is, nf uliosc
<ii'ij;iii till' iiiilivi'.s riiii ii'wr iiii iicioiml, iiri' s|Mikiii nl" li\ llirin lis /i(III(Iii-/ki, — " l«ini of
iii::lil." //'(//i((( liii» Ijulli nil iirliviMiiiil II iiiisslvc ini'niiiiig, iiiid i.s used liir "In tiring
■?l ' v|
\i
OCEANIC .MIGRATIONS.
120
(Tatohae), but soon becoming very populous, they went off to the
other parts of the island. Captain Porter, by an oversiglit unusual
with him, is led to give only fifteen or sixteen years to a generation.
He says (p. 49, note), "it must be observed that a man is here a
grandfather at the age of fifty, and sometimes much less, and hence
tiiree generations exist within tliat period." Now it is not uncommon
for men in any country to l)e grandfathers at fifty, but this makes only
two generations of twonty-five years eacli. Moreover, in such a com-
putation, we are not to consider only the age at which tiie first
children arc born, l)ut that of the whole nimiber. On this point
some observations will be oll'ered in treating of tlie Sandwich Islands.
Allowing, lor the |)resent, the ordinary estimate of thirty years to a
generation, it will give us two thou.sand six hundred and forty years
since the arrival of Oataia from \'avau.
It seems probable, however, that the first part of the royal genea-
logical list iif Nuknhiva will be found, like that of Hawaii, to be
merely mythological ; in whidi case, the foregoing computation will
recjuire a corresponding correction, and the time elapsed since the
.settlement of the island will be considerably diminished.
w A w .\ 1 1, () li r II i; s A .\ I) w i c ii i s i, a .\ i> s.
No one who has carefully compared the languages and customs of
the two groups, has ever doubted that the natives of the Samlwich
Islands were ilerived, eitlier directly or indirectly, from the Society
Group. The traiiilions of the natives seem, at tirst sight, to confirm
this beLef, for they generally state that the original settlers were from
Tahiti (mai taliili). We tind. however, on further in(|uiry, that lakiti,
in this language, mvxms /biritjn, (i/iroud. In the Hawaiian Vocabu-
lary of Mr. Andrews, it is rendered "a foreign country;" and it is
uncertain U' the natives had, when they were first visited by whites,
any knowledge of a particular islaiul called by this name; while
Niikiiliii'd ami Fdlii/iira, two of the .Manjue.sas Islands, are mentioned
in their traditionar\ songs, as among the places visited by voyagers
from Hawaii in former days.* Nevertheless, the word 'I'ahiti may,
as Mr. Ellis suggests, have been originally used with reference to
this island. \Ve shall have occasion to remark, in the terms Aoaiki
I'orlli," as well as "to Ix- Imh-ii." I'Hptaiii I'ortor, hi'aring the plirnsc Imimu-jx) applied
to Outaia aiul his cDiisort would naturally translate the word in its active sense.
* See Ellis's Tonr round llawiiii, pp. 'JH7, and HI a.
33
lyo
ETHNOGRAPHY.
15
and Tonga, similar instances of the changes in meaning, from a
limited and relative, to a general and absolute sense, which proper
names undergo at the second remove. In this manner, it seems pro-
bable that the meaning given in Hawaiian to the word Tahiti, may
have arisen. The Marquesans have been shown to be derived, in
part, at lea.st, from the island of that name, and they have always
retained a knowledge of its exi.stcnce. If, before they had been very
long settled in the .Mar(|uesan Group, tiiey sent forth a colony to the
Sandwich Islands, the members of this colony would, at starting,
have the knowledge or tradition of no less tiian tiiree different places
which they might term the mother-country, liamely, Savaii (or
Havaih), Tahiti, and Nukiihiva. We ma}' suppose that, in j)rocess
of time, the first and most distant was wholly forgotten; the second,
only retained as a general name for foreign country, and the third,
remembered more distinctly, though not perhaps as the source from
vhence they were derived.
That when the first settlers reached the Sandwich Islands, they
retained a knowledjje of the original seat of their race in tiie Navi-
gator Grou|), see.ns almost certain, from the fact that they gave to
the largest island of their new country the name of the largest of the
Samoan Islands, to whicii it bears, in shape and general ap[)e:irance,
a striking resemblance. Moreover, to the north point of this island
they gave the name of Upv/a, tlie second island of the Samoan Group,
and a small rocky islet near Xiihaii was called Lehua, being that form
which Lefuka, the name of one of tiie islands in the Friendly Group,
would take in the Hawaiian language.
Tiiese names may serve as a clue to the manner in which tiie
migration to this group took j)lace. It is, prima facie, evident, that
this could hardly have been by a canoe driven oil' to the iiortliward,
as it was crossing from one of llie .Marquesas Islands to another.
The tlistance is nearly two thousand miles, and a canoe would not
accompiisii it in less than twenty days, with a constant.,' fair wind;
but a southerly wind, for that K'ligth of time, is, in tiiat region, some-
thing une.vampled. On tliis sup|)osition, miireover, they would, of
course, be without provisions sullicicnt for sucii a voyage; and, in
that case, it is inconceivable that dogs and |)igs shoiUd have been
kept alive till their arrival. Yet their traditions distinctly state that
these animals have been on the islands since they were first inhabited.
This is confirmed by the fai't that they are of that peculiar breed
proper to the South Sea Islands. But if we suppose that a party of
OCEANIC MIGRATIONS.
131
Marquesans, mostly of Tahitian descent, with some few of Vavaiian
origin, had set out in one or more large canoes, well provided with
necessaries for a long voyage, to revisit the countries of their ances-
tors, — the Navigator and Friendly Groups, — we see at once how the
involuntary emigration might have taken place. Proceeding with
the regular southeast trades, till they had arrived nearly at their
destination, they were struck (we may suppose) by a northwesterly
gale, such as has been before described. To {)revent being driven
directly back, the natural proceeding would be to haul up as close to
the wind as possible, which would give them a course nearly north-
by-vvest. If the gale continued several days, witli cloudy weather,
they would lose their reckoning entirely, and would then, in accord-
ance with tiie usual custom of the islanders, proceed onward in the
same direction, till they reached the land.* And if, as we have
supposed, they were then in search of the island and group of Savaii,
it was natural enough that they should give to their new h' me, which
resembled it in many respects, the same name.
Respecting the time when this migration took place we can form at
least a plausible conjecture. The Hawaiians have a ^nealogy of their
kings from the first Tahitian colonists down to the reigning sovereign.
It comprises sixty-seven generations, whose names are given in full,
in the Moo-olelo, a native history, before referred to. It might be
doubted whetiier the natives could remember with accuracy so far
back; but this doubt would cease on hearing one of them recite the
genealogy in question. As given in the History, it stands as follows
(beginning with the second king, the son of Watea and lloohotuta-
lani) :
IIISIIANU.
O JIu/m,
O llitiitiia/f),
WIKK.
Jliii'.iiiiiuwii/i/ac,
J Ill/ill lie,
lltlUllllll,
CHILD.
O Wtiui.
O Iliiianulo.
O Nanalehiti, &c.
But in the native recitation, as we have heard it, the words tone,
* One re.isiin of the j^rcnt ilUtnncc ti> wliiili these cliiincc-voyngps of the nntivcs
pxtend, is foutiil ill llie viigiio a.ssiirnnce wliicli lliey have, tiiat the ocean is covoivd with
islands in every direction. Aceorihiijjly, when they arc driven out to sea, and have lost
the hearing of their own island, they do not erase their ed'orts in despair, or contimie to
Iwat u|) and down without an ohject, — hut, selecting some cour.se, they sot their sail and
steer holdly onward, husUinding their provisions as long as possihlc, in the hope of at
length striking upon some unknown land. Mr. Williams gives several instances of long
voyages made in this way by canoes running before the trade-wind.
I
183
ETHNOGRAPHY.
husband, wahine, wife, and tamaiti, child, are introduced after each
name in the respective columns ; thus —
O Jhilixi le t(ini; O llhiamaiioiitiiiic ta iva/iine, O Wiiia (e tamaiti.
O H'aia If tunc, O lluhune to, u-uhine, O Jlinamilo le tamaiti, iVc.
This, it will be seen, makes of it a species of verse, with, in fact, a
greater approach to rhytlim than most of the native poems. Accord-
ingly, the recitation is made in a kind of cliant, to a regular tune, and
any person who can retain in his memory a song of a hundred lines
can liave no difhculty in remembering this genealogy. There is no
reason why it shoidd not have been known to liundreds, — in fact to
tile whole priesthood of Hawaii, — and any lapse of memory in one
woultl be corrected by the rest. The same ol)servations will apply to
the genealogies preserved in the other groujjs of Polynesia.
It is to be ob.served that this is not, properly s|)eaking, a li.st of
kings, but merely of generations. In tiiose cases, wiiicii frequently
happened, where two or more brothers succeeded one another on the
throne, tiieir names are given in the column of children. Thus Liloa,
the eleventh in aihrect line l)efore Tameiiameha, had two sons, llatau
and Umi, of whom the first succeeded him, but was depo.sed for his
tyranny, and the kingdom transferred to Umi. Both tiie.se names,
witli those of their respective mothers, are given in tlie genealogy,
but the former only among tiie children. For the same rea.sou
Ti/rnldo ami 'ralatiiopiiii, who immediately preceded Tameiiameha,
are not given, because the line of descent is not traced through them,
but through the younger brother of the latter, Tcoua ;* and his name
is tiierefoiv in the list, though he did not actually reign. 'I'hese ex-
jilanatioiis are neces.sary, becau.se tlie nuiiiber of years to be allowed
to a generation will be at least double that which we should assign to
a reign. Among a people like the llawaiiaiis, constantly engaged in
wars, in which the chiefs are expected to take an active part, the ave-
rage duration of a reign can hardly be estimated at more than fifteen
years, — while there; is no reason for assigning to a generation a shorter
period than that at which it is commonly rated, — about thirty years.
The people do, indeed, marry younger tiian in more nortiiern regions;
but this consideration is coiinterbalancetl by the fact, which appears
from the genealogical table, that, in many instances, the pedigree has
' Tl<is is a nniiii' which is j;iv(ii licri' in phici' ol the unwichly .appcMatioii of Talani-
tupiKijiailu/aninid, whiili ii|i[)(nrs in ihi' grnculngy.
\
OCEANIC JI 1 G R A T I O N S.
133
been reckoned, not through the eldest, but through a younger sou.
Allowing, tlierefore, thirty years to a generation, and supposing the
list to be a correct one, we should have, for the time which has
elapsed since the settlement of the Sandwich Islands, about two thou-
sand years (67 x 30= 2010).
But though there is no doubt of the ability of the natives to pre-
serve a genealogy of this length, several circumstances incline us to
(juestion its entire correctness, and to douitt whether the first twenty-
three names lie not entirely supposititious. In the first place, the name
of the king at the head of the list is OWatea, which is precisely the
same in pronunciation with the Outaia of the Marquesans (ante, p.
128), the ortliograpiiy only being different. The name of his wile is
PajM, of whom it is said "she was the mother of these islands."' This
is the same name, and the same tradition that the Tahitians apply to
the wife of their great deity, Taaroa. It is further related by the
Hawaiians that Walea and Papa had a deformed child, whom they
buried, ;uid from it sprung the taro-plant ; the stalk of this plant was
called lia/o'i, and this name was given to their son and heir who suc-
ceeded them. This fable is evidently derived from the Nukuhivan
story that the children of Oataia were named after the various plants
which he had brought with him from Vavau. Thus we have, in the
commencement of the Hawaiian history, a singular mixture of Mar-
ipiesan and Tahitian traditions. The twenty-second king was Atalana,
being the name of the god who supports the island of Savaii (ante, p.
23). He had four chiklren, all of wiiom were named Maui, with
some epithet appropriated, in other groups, to a deity. The youngest,
Mdiii-dtdhnui succeeded him, and to him are attriijuted the same
deeds that the Tahitians relate of tiieir great deity Maui, — another
name or manifestation of Taaroa. He was succeeded by Nanamaoa.
from whom the real history of the islands seems to commence.
The probability is that the Sandwich Islands were first peopled by
emigrants from the Manjuesas, of the mi.xcd race which is there
found. When, after a time, the inhabitants had become numerous,
and some family was raised to the supreme power, it became an
object to trace the pedigree of the sovereign as far back as possible.
After ascending as far as their recollections would carry them, — per-
haps to one of the first settlers, — till they reached an ancestor whose
paternity was unknown, they made him, according to the usual
fashion in such cases, the son of a god, Maui. This god was repre-
sented as the son of another deity, Atalana, and not satisfied with this,
34
134
E T 11 N () r. R A V II Y.
t i'
they added on as many names as they could recollect of the genealogy
of the Marquesan kings, mixed with Tahitian deities and personified
([nalities. Tiius the first name is, as al)ovc stated, the Niikuhivan
Wdteti ; the fourth is Hinanah, a word which means (feshe in all the
dialects except the Hawaiian ; the tentli is Manatii, which means
memory in the Samoan and Tongau languages ; the eleventh is
Td/iito, or ancient ; the twelfth and thirteenth are Luamm and 7VV,
two of tiie principal deities of Tahiti, helonging to the class which
they term lia/iaii-j)o, " born of night." Moreover, the wives of the
first five kings are said not to have been different persons, " but oidy
different names of I'apa, as her soid inhabited sundry bmlies by
transmigration," which suthciently shows that this part of the gene-
alogy was looked upon as merely mythological.
If this opinion be thought correct, it will be necessary to deduct
twenty-two generations from the list (one of the twenty-three kings
having been the brother of the preceding,) which will leave for the
whole number forty-five. Mnltii)lying this by thirty, we have thir-
teen hundred and fifty years from the commencement of the Hawaiian
records (and perhaps from the settlement of the country, though that
is uncertain), to the accession of Tamehameha, — or, reckoning to the
Mresent date, about fourteen centuries.
With the aid derived from Mr. Crook's manuscripts we are enabled
to determine what evidence is afTordod by tiie language of the two
groups that the Hawaiians are of .Marcjuesan origin. The most
striking similarity is that of the numerals, which will be elsewhere
displayed. In its alphabet, the Taliuatan idiom agrees in most points
with the Hawaiian, and especially in using the n instead of the
regular Polynesian y (or ng), which the Tahitian omits altogether.
Thus we have —
ri-
t !
(ILVNKSIAN.
T.\IIITI.\N-.
T.tin-ATAN.
HAWAIIAN,
saijif .
. /("/, . .
. hotii, . .
. fio/ii, . .
to stilulr.
;;!(/(/, . .
. till/, . .
. tiittu, . ,
. tiiitii, . .
lips, Ix'uk iil'a l)ird.
nuiuya, .
. mniia, .
. iiiiiiimi, ,
. viuii/ia, .
inouiitiiiu.
iijoa, . .
, iai, . .
. i/i'xi, . .
. iiiiMi, . .
IWllllO.
pi' 1)0,
. pun, . .
. puna, . .
. pillKl, , .
ooriil.
jj<ij)a/hja.
. ptipitria,
. piipuina, .
. papcditia.
check.
kupeija, .
. 'iijmi, .
. 'ii])ena, .
. 'u]>e/iti,
net.
In the original draft of his grammar, Mr. Crook gave two forms of
the indefinite and definite articles, a and ta, e and te. The first two
are used before nouns commencing with a consonant, or the vowels
• «*
OCEANIC MIGRATIONS.
135
e and i, — and the last two before the vowels a, o, and u, as a hoe, a
paddle, a ima, a hand ; e atu, a bouito (fish), e upoko, a head ; and in
the jame manner, ta hoe, the paddle, te atu, the bonito, &c. Thirty
years later (in 1829), on a second visit to Nukuhiva, he corrected this
draft in many particulars, and among others, changed the a and ta,
in all cases, to e and te, as in the Tahitian. It is, however, not un-
likely that the first orthography was correct for the southern cluster
of the Marquesas, and if so, we have the origin of the tsvo articles in
Hawaiian, ta and te, — the former being the most common, and the
latter used chiefly before nouns beginning with t, a, and o.
The Tahitian uses for demonstrative pronouns tdua-riei, and taiia-
ra, as taua va'a tiei, this canoe ; tana taata ra, tiiat man. The
Hawaiian omits the ta, and has simply ua-nei and ua-la, as ua iva'a
nei, ua tauata la. The Nukuhivan has, according to Mr. Crook, hua-
nei and hua-na ; as, hua vu'a nei, hua anata ua. But it seems
probable that the h here is superfluous. Mr. Crook spells the name
of the island Uahuka, " Huahuga ;" ohihape, the name of a fish, he
spells " hui-ZvOppe." However this may be, the similarity between
this and the Hawaiian form is evident.
The Manjuesan and Hawaiian are the only dialects which use the
preposition ?«« before the locative adverbs, as —
r.viiu.vr.tN.
II.\WAIIAX.
TAHITIAN.
mti-mim, .
. nui-miui, .
. Ici III till, .
. iK'liiru.
nid-iiiiii.
. iiiii-mitii, .
fci. nitifi, .
. bi'liind.
nui.iiitti,
. md-liiiKi, .
. tvi llill.
. (ll)OVO.
ma-Uii, . .
. iiKi.tiii, . .
. ii-tiii, , .
, by till" son,
scn-wai'd
As a plural sign, to denote a company or party, the Tahitian has
pue ; the Nukuhivan (or Tahuatan) changes it lo poe, like the Ha-
waiian. The first, to express " the party of artisans," would have " te
pue tahua;" the second tapoetuhuna ; and the third, ta poe tahuna.
The prohibitive sigh is, in Tahitian, eiaha (formerly aua), as eiaha
oe e amu, eat thou not. The Tahuatan uses, instead of this, moi, fol-
lowed by the conjunction ia, that; as, moi ia kai oe, beware that thou
eat not. The Hawaiian abbreviates this to mai, as viai ai oe, eat not
thou.
On the other hand, it will be seen, by referring to the Grammar,
that in many respects the Nukuhivan, as might be expected, differs
from the Hawaiian and resembles the Tahitian ; and in a few parti-
136
ETIINOO RA 1" II V.
I
culnrs (such as the omission of the r and the use of the k), it is unlike
botli.*
H.VR(n'(tN(i A, OR Tin; IIKIIVKY ISLANDS.
The tradition driven by Mr. Williams as prevalent in Aitutaki, one
of tiio islands of this t,'roiip, has already been noticed. Beiiif^ desirous
of kn(nvin;f wiiether the same aceount was current in Rarotoiif^a, I
questioned, on the subject, a very intelligent native of that island
whom I met at Upolu, whither he had accompanied the missionaries
as an assistant. lie intormed me that the Raroton^ans, like the
natives of Aitutaki, considered Acaiki to be the country beneath, iVom
wliicii the tirst man, Mumuki, ascended, to look lor food ; and that
Aaitipi, in the district of Aroroiigi, was the place where he came up.
But whereabouts this lower country was, or how the ascent was
accomplished, he could not explain. It has been observed, in another
place, that, with all the islanders of the Pacific, wlio live between the
tropics, the .same word means leeward, irextward, and helow. A similar
use of the words up and doirn, with reference to opposite points of the
compass, is common to most, if not all languaires. The trade-winds,
at the Hervey Islands, blow usually from the southeast, and 8avaii,
which lies to the northwest, is tiierefore as lu^arly as j)ossible " below"
them. It is easy to .see that an e.\[)ression which had, at first, a meta-
pliorical meaning, came, in process of timt;, to be taken literally.
But the most valuable and detailed account which we possess of
the peopling of any i.sland in the South Seas, is that given by Mr.
Wiliiiims, at jjage Ifi') of his vohime. The chief incidents are as
follows: Karika, a chief of an island to the westward, calletl Mitnnka,
first discovered Rarotonga, and finding it uninhabited, took [)osse.ssion
of it. Again putting to sea, he encountered Tangiia, a Tahitian chief,
who was fleeing from the pursuit of an enemy. As Karika was [)re-
paring to attack him, Tangiia made submission, and acknowledged
himself the vassal of the other. They settled the land together, the
former on tiie north (and west) side of tlie island, and the latter on
* l'"iir till' ci|i|Mirliinily nl' I'diisulliiij; the .Mar(|ii('saii (iriiiniiiiir niiil \ iK'iiliulary of Mr,
t'riiMk, I am iiulrbtod to llic Kuv. ('. S. .Stcwurl, iil llw; I'liitid .Siaifs Navy, Id wliuiii they
wore prcjifiilcd by tliu author. 'J'lii! iK-rniission to muko llii.s use of Iii.s iniimi.srri|)t.>i was
pri'vioiisly acconlc-d by .Mr. ("rook, whom «<• hail tlic plcasiirc of nn'cting at Sydney, in
.New .Siuih NVali.'s.
r:.--f:
i.
I
OCEANIC MIGRATIONS.
187
the east, — these being, it will be remarked, the sides facing towards
their respective countries. To this day the people of the former divi-
sion are called Ngati-Karika, and those of the latter Ngati or Nya-
Tangiia. We have seen in New Zealand (ante, p. 32), a similar use
of this prefix, ngati, to express a clan descended from a common
ancestor.
It is said farther, that " the superior chieftainship is still vested in
the Karika family ; for although \\\(i Ngati-Karika have been hraten
many times, indeed generally, by the descendants of Tangiia, yetithe
conquerors agree in allowing them the sujiremacy which tiiey have
possessed from time immemorial." In confirmation of this account,
it is stated that the Tahitians have traditions respecting Tangiia, his
birth-place, family, &c., and that ho was a great traveller. It also
appears (p. 47), that in former times, the intercourse between Raro-
tonga and the Society Group was very fretiuent, or, as the natives
express it, that the islands were joined together. Mr. Williams sup-
poses that Manuka is the same as Manu'a, one of the Navigator
Islands, which there seems no reason to doubt.
On the chart of Tupaia, Rarotua (the Tahitian pronunciation of
Rarotonga) is laid down to the soutiiwest of Tahiti, amid several
other islands, the names of wliich cannot bo identified, but which are
probably intended for the rest of the group. Most of the South Sea
Islands have two names, as loreteu and Raiatea, Aimco and Muorea,
Sala/aii and Saimii, and some of those given by Tupaia, being derived
from tradition, may be at present out of use. Adeeha, however, wliich
is laid down .somewhat farther to the east, was probab'y intended for
Atiu.
The signification of the word Rarotonga deserves notice. Raro
means below, and iience leeward and n'estn-ard ; tonga means south,
and from its position must be here an adjective. We may therefore
render it the " southern leeward country," or the " southwestern
land," wliich expresses very well its position relative to Tahiti.
It is proper to inquire wiiether the language of the llarotongaiis
offers any evidence to confirm this duplex origin of the people. What
first strikes us, in looking over tiie vocabulary, is the peculiarity of
the alphabet. It has the k and ng (or ij), the former of which is
wanting in both the Samoan and Tahitian, and the latter in the Tahi-
tian alone. But there is every reason to believe that the rejection of
these two consonants from those languages is a matter of compara-
tively late occurrence. On the other hand, the Rarotongan lacks the
35
139
KTII N()(iHA I'll V.
/nnd tlic h, of which the former is found in the Samonn, nnd both in
the Tahitian. With these exceptions, however, wliich atTect neither
the substance nor the form of the lan<i;uairt', but only its pronuncia-
tion, the Harotonijau is ahnost pure Taliitiim. Were the li and y
dropped from liiu former, and the /' and 1; inserted in tlieir projier
places, tiie lan^ua<res would be so nearly alike, that a translation of
any work I'mni one into the other would probably be unnecessary.
The iiaroton^an has, however, a few peculiarities, in which it
(lilVers from the 'i'ahitian ; and in tiiese it fi;enerally atfrees with the
Samoan. 'i'lins the latter uses tlie nominative siifu 'o fre(pieu11y and
the former rarely ; in this res|)ect the i{aroton<fan accords with the
Samoau. 'The Samoan has two adverbs of a peculiar character,
which are atlixed to verbs to exjiress facility or dilliculty, ixs fui-yo/ie,
ea.sy to lio. /'di-ytita, hard to do. '["lie llarotonijan lias the same, as
)(ivf-yui(', easy to do ; ratr-ytttd, hard to do. These are not in the
Tahitian. There arc also .several words which the liarotoiii^an seems
to have derivcil from the Samoan, a.s —
.■SA>IO.\N.
B.\Rl>T(i.VUAN.
TAIIITIA.N.
Ji/i, . . .
. . (/•/, . . .
. . IlKllli, . .
Ut (•lMM)sr.
Ji/oi, . .
nai^
iiHiii,
. . Ill mix.
liliiii, , .
. riiini,. . .
. . Ilillli, . .
. Ill |iiiiir mil
'(' I'i, . .
. . hi) (ti, . . .
. . '(I rni, . .
. hIiu !
mmiKni^
(tLiUininm^
. . /if a, . .
. . Ml 111'.
Jlt\llut'(l^
fttftlVil,
. . o'll, . . .
. lilllLT.
IIKDIIlill, .
tiltuinl^
JUtl'ofltj
. . Imiidsonic.
miniulii/n, .
iiiont/'fi, .
/llttth'Ut,
. . I.IW.
With re<>ard to some of these it will be observed that the ilarotonifan
ditlers from the Samoau not accordiiijf to the usual dialectical ciiauf^es,
but irre;,nilarlv ; and this is what frequently hap[iens where wortis of
one lantruajfc are adopted into another from oral communication, — as
we ob.serve in the Norman French portion of our own tonj,'ue. But
as the 'I'ahitian is itself an oll'sprinir of the Hamoaii, it may be
thouirht tiiattho liarotongan words given above are merely old and
obsolete Tahitian. In tliat case, we should probably liiid them in the
Hawaiian, which is, like the liarotongan, of Tahitian derivation. As
we do not, the presumption is that they arc some of the words which
the descendants of Taiigiia have learned from those of Karika.
Mr. Williams inlbrms us (p. 109), that the pre.sent high chief,
Makea, is the twentv-ninth in descent from Karika. This would
o c K A N k; M I (i n a T I O N 8.
139
give, nccordiiifr to our computation ('20 x 30 = H70), nearly nine hun-
dred years since the wotllement of the llervoy Islands.
M A N (i \ u !•; V A, «) It T ri i: n a m It 1 1; it i s i, a n n s.
In the manuscript vocnl)uIary of tlio Maiij^arovan dialiict, wiiicli I
owe to till! kindness of M. Mai^rret, fdrmerly missionary to tiiis j^Toup,
is found the follmvinf^ di^finilion : " Ar/iiAi, — lias, en l)as ; /:o ntnyn
fciiei, ko (ir/ii/ii tciut, — <;t'ci est lo haut, cela est le has." From tiiis it
would apjusar that vl/y»'/.7, which, in the llcrvey Islands, is used to
sijTiiil'y the rejfion l)eneatli, has conu! to diMiotc, iii tlu; (iamhier (Jrou[),
simply li(lon\ or Ihdt ir/iirli is hiloir. I'lxamplcs of jsimiiar chanires
are not uncommon in the other dialects. At tlu; Navi^'ator {frou|),
the wind which hlows from tiie direction of the Tonifa Islands (i. e.
from the south) is called tiie 'loiir/n wind. At the Ilervey and So-
ciety Islands, this siunc word {tonga and , in) is used as the ;^eneral
term lor .south wind.
A frciu'alo<fy of the kiiiffs of Manijarina, drawn U[) hy a native
pupil of M. Maiifret, with a kw of the trailitions respect iiijj; them,
ofl'ers some points of coiisiderahle interest. The iiumlier of kings
whose names are jfiven is twenty-.seven. The first was 'J'ldtiitiitjiiiiit,
a name which means " Lord of the Sea." From him, the history
says, "all the inhahitants of the land are deseendcd. He had no
father, or perhaps he was a foreii^iicr." I'rom him tlie line continues
unhroken till the ninth kiuff, Aiuta ; he was ^succeede(l hy his son-in-
law, 'rorontjd, the name of who.se father is not known. He was not.
it ajjpears, ackiiowlcdtfed hy many of the chiefs, and a civil war
ensued. One of the principal reliels, named Vinn, was worsted, and,
it is said, " took refuse on the sea, and lied to a foreiirn land."
Afterwarils Toronga was killed hy another chief who eniieavourcd
to ohtain his liody in order to eat it; but the son of the murdered
king secreted his father's corpse and buried it. The names of the
son and grandson of Toronga are given, hut their reigns must have
been very short, — perhaps merely nominal, — for one of the chief com-
batants in tlie civil war succeeded finally in gaiidiig the sujircme
power. His name was A'«/, the thirteenth on the list, aiul from him
the reigning sovereign derives his authority. His principal opponent,
TcijMii, lied to a foreign land, or abroad. After this follows an account
of the numerous dissensions which took place in tlie different reigns,
and the annalLst remarks, " formerly they fought much ; formerly
140
KTIINOO RA I'ti Y.
they ate each other." The tweiity-Kocoml kiii>?, Tenunigiii, wnH do-
|k)8imI, and ohlij^cd Id flee abroad. 'I'ho UHiirper 'I'litioit Mucceedod,
but "his rei^ii wiin sliort ; he was roiu|iiered Nuddeidy." His
inline, it slioidd he remarked, does not appear in the lint, — whieh
Nhows, will) several otiier eircuniHtaiices, that it is, in I'at-t. a ^ene-
al()^;y, and not a coinpU'te eniiineralion of all who have held tlu! sove-
reign power. The present king, Mapittrni, is the I'ourteenth in a
diri'ft line Ironi Kan, who gained the snpreinaey alter the death ol'
'i'oronga, tlu^ .son-in-law of .Anna, the I'ighlh in dcseiMit from 'I'eatu-
nioana. 'i'he son and grandson of 'I'orongii may he omitted, ni whieh
ease it will appear that twcnly-lhe generations, or scm'ii hnndrt'd and
fifty years, hiivi- I'lapsed since the arrival of the (irst culonisls. 'There-
fore if we suppose, as all the eireumstauees indieate, that they eame
from IJarotonua. they must have left tiiat island al)out four genera-
tions, or one hundri'd and twenty years, alter it was settled. 'I'his
would aeeount for some of the peculiarities in the dialect of Manga-
revii. The only points ol'any importance in which it dillers from the
Harotongan are, lirsl, in the use of latjn instead of inja, to lorm the
partiei|)ial noun, as ti ojtr nn/i/, lor /c o/w (nja, the act of finishing;
and secondly, in the use of man as a |)lural prefix. In both of these
points it resembles the 'I'aliitian. Now if the Uarotongan emigrants
win settled in .Mangareva came, as is most proi)able, from that side
of itaroloiiga which faces towards the latter group, ^i. e., the eastern
side,) they were of the i\</iiti-'l'(int/ii>i, or Tahitiaii party, and may, a*
that time, havi; preserved some pecidiarities of their original tongue
wliicii were afterwards lost, in Harotoiiga, on a more complete iiiter-
nii.vture with the Sijali-Kfiiihn, or iSamoaii party.
In the foregoing traditions, the e.vistence of cannibalism, at a very
early period, will be noticed, as also the custom, with conipiered
chiefs, of betaking themselves to the open sea to escai)u the ven-
geance of their tidversarics, It was in this manner that 'Viinoe, or
Crescent Island, a coral islet which lies abo\it thirty miles to the
soutlu-ast of the (iaml)i(!r (Jroup, was peopled between sixty and
seventy years ago, .V defeated party, lleeiiig from Mangareva, were
drifted to this island, and remained there, w ith their descendants, till
the arrival of the Catholic missionaries, who, hearing of their situation,
sent for them and restored them to th(!ir original homes. This well-
authenticated fact shows the manner in which most of the South Sea
Islands have probably receivcsd their first inhabitants. What makes
it more valuable, as an illu-stratioii, is the cireuiustancu that the
()(■ K.\ N !<• .M l(i U A no \M.
141
conrso of tlio emiy;riiiits herd was directly CDiitrnry to that of the
traili'-wiiids. 'rriic, tlio (listaiico In not Kreut; lint it nuist lio ri'nu'm-
beroti that tlio voyaijo was inailu on raits, tho only nu'ans of IranH-
porlation possessed hy lliii Mantiarevans, — l)earinj> aliont tin; same
relation, as rei,'ards safely and speed, to a canoe, as tho latter does to
a steani-sliip.
If A !■ A.
This island, in onr •^eiwral snnunary, was included in the Austral
Group, thoii)^h not, ]ierhaps, with strict |)ropriety, as it in situated
four decrees apart Ironi llio rest, and a dill'erent dialect is spoken on
it. It lii^s lifteen d('^'^ccs southeast of tin- llervey Islands, froni which
it prohalily ditrived its popidation. I obtained at Tahiti, from a native
of Hapa, a brief vocalndary of the lan^'uaiie spoken there, which
turns out to be, with a few verbal <'xceplious. pure Itarotonjifan, and
this in its minute peculiarilies. Tho llarotonj,'an, for example, uses
nifi for the directivi^ pMiticU* sii^nifvini; motion towards a person,
where the other tlialccls have mtii : the Uapan has the same. The
particle ku is used before verbs in the same manner by both, &c.
TUi: ATS THAI. I SI V \ US— II I M A T A K A, 11 I II I Tl , Tl I' I' A I,
A N l> HA IV AVAL
These islands lie south of tlie Society (J roup, and west of Karo-
tonifa, and are nearly eipiidistanl from bulb. The probability is that
they were settled from both directions, and at a very late day. Tho
evidence in favor of this view is the following;. Tupuai is situated
between Hurutu and llaivavai, anil about eij^lity miles from each.
Mr. Ellis (Polynesian Researches, p. SHI) says: "Tupuai is stated,
in the introduction to the Voyajfc of the Dull', to have been at that
time but recently peo|>led by some natives of an island to the west-
ward, probably llimatara, who, when sailinif to a spot they were
accustomed to visit, were driven by stront; and unfavorable winils
on Tupuai. A few years after this, a canoe sailin<j from Uaiatea to
Tahiti, conveying u chief who was ancestor to Idia, Pomare's mother,
was drifted on this island, and the chief admitted to the supreme
authority." Mr. Ellis adds — " The subseijuent visits of missionaries,
with tho residence of native teachers amonjf the people, have fur-
nished additional evidence, that the present Tupuaian population is
but of modern origin, compared with that inhabiting the island of
M
142
KTII N 0(i U A I' II V.
Raivavai on tlio cast, or Ilurutu and Rimatara on the west." But
tliat an island twelvo miles in circuit, and of considerable elevation,
could have remained long undiscovered in the midst of an inhabited
group, is quite inconceivable. We should be compelled, for this
reason only, to sup|)ose that the other islands, also, had not been very
long peopled.
The evidence from their language confirms this opinion. Mr.
Williams (Missionary Enterprises, p. 449) says: "The Austral
islanders, including Ilurutu, Raivavai, Tupuai, and Rimatara, have
a [dialectical] distinction of tlieir own, but have been taught to use
the Tahiliau Scriptures, which they read fluently, and understanii as
well as if written in their own tongue.* The peculiarity of this
dialect ai)pears in the rejection [from the Tahitian] of the /' and A,
without supplying any substitutes ; and trifling as this may appear,
the dillereiice of sound it occasions is amazing." Now this peculiarity
is precisely what would be caused by the union of some emigrants
from Rarotonga, who would not be able to pronounce those letters,
with others from Tahiti. This will appear clearly from the following
examples, extracted from th^ same author (p. 451) : —
IlOUS*'.
(;oiiil.
uninaii.
iiiiiii.
.■loth.
to ItC'IitA't".
spiiil.
Tiililliiiii :
./'"■'',
ItKtlld'i,
Vttliint;
I'liilii,
'llllll,
Jll'llldO,
riiniit.
Itiii'iiliHii^tin
(in;
iiicUtdi,
I'iihir,
fdlin/il,
kiikdii.
tikiirui/o'!
I'lirnm
.Vnstial :
iin;
ififtt/'t^ij
mini;
titllllty
\,„,
(I'ltiim,
iiiniii.
It will 1)0 observed that, by striking out from the Taiiitian lino oft
words all tlii^ Idlers which are not CDiitained in the Rafotongan, we
obtain the words of the Austral dialect. The same rcsull will follow
nearly, if \v(> strike out from the Rarotongan the letters which are
not contained in the Tahitian. 'I'hcre will still, howi^Ver, be a slight
ditTerence in some of the words, as in those for "good," "cloth," and
"spirit." The Austral dialect, it ap|)ears from this, has oniv six con-
sonants, >ii, N, J), r. I, and v, a smaller nund)cr, proi)al)iy, than is Ibund
in any other tongue. The guttural catch, marked by the inverted
comma, should, however, be added, as constituting a distinct tilement.
The island of Ilurutu is laid down twice on Tnpaias chart, once
under its proper name (Ururutu), and in its proper |)lace, according
to the real bearings (see p. <>), and again under the mistaken name
of Ohitiroa (Cireat Feejee), and in the mistaken position which
Tupaia's English friends induced him to assign to it. The error
• Tliis cvi.'ii llic Itiimlungans could not do. Sw; Williniiis, |>. 10;).
o (• i; A .\ I (; -M I <; ii a r i o \ s.
143
origitiateil in tlie following manner. Tupaia accompanied Cook in
his voyage IVom Taliili to New Zealanii, in tlie course of wiiich
Ilurutii was discovered. As tliey wore approacliing it, Tupaia in-
formed them, says Parkinson, " thnt. it was an island called 0/ieile-
roah, being one of the cluster ot nine which bore tlie title of Oheite
added to them." The mistake of the Tahitian geographer proi)ably
arose from being informed by his friends, wiio could only have com-
municated with him, at that time, in his own language, that this
island lay from Tahiti nearly in the direction of Apatoa, which they
sup|)oscd to mean south, when it really signifn". north, or northrresl.
As he could not doubt their assurance, he would probably take no
pains to verify the fact by further inquiries, — and he might feel that
any hesitation in giving the name of the island would throw some
doubts ujran the accuracy of the geographical knowledge on which
he had prided himself However this may be, the circumstance of
the island being laid down in another place, under its own name, in
company with llimatara, llaivavai, and tiie Ilervey Islands, shows
clearly enough thaj. he was mistaken, and that he never discovered
the island to be really that which he knew by its proper appellation
O llurutu.
On the whole, if we admit that llarotonga was peopled not quite
nine hunched years ago, and Tupuai only about a century before its
discovery, we cannot suppose that more than two or three centuries
have elapsed since the other Austral islantls received their first inha-
bitants.
1' At. Ml) 11, on r n i; i. ow a uc ii 1 1- 1: i, a c; o.
Vd'itiiiolit is the Tahitian pronunciation of Valai-mot)!, which is the
proiKU' native ap[)ellatioM of the archipelago. This very term m:\y
serve as a good e.xemplitlcation of the composition of the dialect. Its
meaning seems to be. " cloud of islands," for /w/.-» signities, in this
language (but in no other of Polynesia), d cloud, and hiotii signities
here, as in Tahitian, (in islnml. Like this compound name', the
whole language is constituted of two elements, — the one similar to
the Tahitian, tiie otlu^r peculiar, and unlike any that we lind else-
where. The words which come under tin; latter description are not
only numerous, but they are such as are usually original in a lan-
guage, and very rarely introduced from abroad, — s\ich as man,
woman, fire, water, gooci, bad, and the like. They seem to form
144
ET II NO(i R A 1> II Y.
a part of some primitive tongue, which has been corrnpted and par-
tially destroyed by an infusion of Tahitian. This intermixture must
have talten place some time ago, — at least before the settlement of the
Austral Islands, — for the form in which the Tahitian words exist is
that which they liad before the disuse of the k and ng, which has
made so great an alteration in the Innguage. Many of the Tahitian
words, moreover, are perverted and disfigured as they would be in
the pronunciation of foreigners (see Grammar, i 1). The gram-
matical construction, however, so far as we are able to determine it,
coincides with the Tahitian; as we find in the Vitian, tliougli the
mass of words is peculiar, the grammar is chiefly Polynesian.
From what source this foreign element which is here apparent was
derived, cannot now be determined. A comparison of the peculiar
words in the Paumotuan with the corresponding terms in various
other languages of Oceanica has led to no satisfactory result.
Perhaps, when the idioms of Melanesia are better known, the
attempt may be renewed with more success.* Future inquirers,
also, among the natives of the archipchigo, may possibly obtain some
clue to their origin ; for it seems certain that their migration cannot
be referred to a very early peritxl. If they inhabited the coral islands
before the arrival of the Polynesian colonists at Tahiti and Nukuhiva,
how did it happen tliat, being not oidy the best warriors, but the most
skilful navigators of that part of the ocean, ttity did not at once seize
upon these and the otlier high i.slands which are planletl on the out-
skirts of the Paumotus on every side, and which contrast so strongly,
in their beauty and fertility, with tlio.se bare and dismal abodes '
Had they once been in po.ssession of any of these larger islands, the
half-starved crews of a few wandering Samoan canoes could never
have succeeded in expelling them.
Another evidence that their migration to their present seat is not of
old date is the fact that they have not yet completed the settlement
?
• Mr. M<x>n'nlu)Ul, «h<iso (ipiM^rlunitios tiir nc-(|iiiriri;.; u kii(p»l('Jj;c o!" Ilie customs of
llicse isiuniirrs have btt-ii |)cciiliarly good, stales (Vnynges, vol. i., p. 1.5!() that their
large (loiil)lc' ciinoi's are made tu sail with either end (lireiiiost, and that in taeking they
merely sliilt the sail and rudder from one end to the oilier. In this re.s|K et they diller
from the [iro|H'r I'dlynesians, am! reseirdile the Keejeians and Caroline islanders. The
fact is ai-so important, as showing that their melhoil of can(K>-htiilding was not horrowed
from the Tah'iians, and that their i.neeslors had thus a mean.^ of transportation such as
would enable diem to reach these islands (nnn a great distance, without the necessity of
stiippiog at inlermeiliale poin's.
OCEANIC AI I G R A T I ') N S.
145
of their country. All the westernmost isltnds, as far east as Hun, or
Bow Island, are inhabited, and before the late devastating wars of
NganA, their population was tolerably numerous. As we advance
towards the east and southeast, we find islands on which there are no
inhabitants; and these gradually increase in number, until at length
the eight nearest to the Gambler Group are all in that condition.
Searlc's Island, when discovered by Wilson in 1797, was deserted,
though he found some traces to show that it iiad been visiiod.
Thirty years later, Beechey found there a scanty population, as did
we in 1839. They could not have exceeded a hundred in number,
and of course were in no condition, as yet, to send out colonists to
the vacant islands south of tliem.
The following list of Paumotuan words, with the corresponding
terms in Polynesian, is given to confirm what has been said of the
difference of the two lanuruatres.
I"\U.irOTl'.\N.
I'OLYNKSIAX.
kciiji,
ivi,
bone.
pakii.
no.
cloud.
ruki*
jmitii.
dark.
iji/ikc,
kuli,
dog.
ncki.
(ifi.
fi re.
P'irii,
ikii.
fish.
nmmiui/i,
Idnidliinr,
girl.
uiiK,
Mfi, iiKiitiiki,
good.
tnreii,
lasi, iiiii.
great.
pom,
id 11, iipoko.
head.
korerekii, .
ili, riki.
little.
hdkoi.
tunc.
man (vir).
kdinike* .
miisiiiii, miihuna,
nioiin.
loilr.
till or iis<i.
rain.
tiikiiniri, ,
liii, moii/iit, ,
sea.
piko,
mftr,
to sleep.
niiniiK,
(iklo.
tongue.
molioki.
Idkiiii, ,
tree.
ko?iio.
v<'i.
water.
rnliaki,
DUildtji, .
wind.
eriic,
tdjiiw, .
woman.
I'tiri^
ttisi.
one.
ill-, .
Ilia,
two.
yt-'i.
tolii.
three.
opr, .
■ f",
four.
■ these words linve
l)oen lately introiliieeil into thi
■ Tahitian. See the Com
[mrntive Grammar, ^ f*l.
37
1
146
ETHNOGRAPHY.
PAUMOTUAN.
F0LVNF.8IAN.
pfXa,
Umii,
five.
hene.
Olio,
six.
hito,
. Jilu,
seven.
hnwti.
viilu.
eight.
nipa.
iva.
nine.
horiliori, .
J'ulu,
ten.
penu.
lau.
hundred
NEW ZEALAND.
:i
J*
:1
In our remarks on Tahiti, we have had occasion to quote the tradi-
tion given by Cook as prevalent among the New Zealanders, — namely,
that their ancestors came, like those of the Tahitians, from a country
called Heawije. During our stay at the Bay of Islands, the opportu-
nity was improved of making inquiries of the natives on this subject,
and the replies obtained were more satisfactory than we had antici-
pated. The old men stated, as the traditionary belief, that the iirst
maori (natives) came from Hawaiki, a country to the east. The
principal men who arrived were Rongokako, Tanetuturi, Tanepepeke,
Taneivitika, Taneweka, Ta\;tervaiura, Tanenuiarangi , Kopaia, and
Koriuiupoko. The names of the canoes were Tahi-nui (or Tai-nut),
Tearawa, Horouta, and Takittimu. The first places at which they
established themselves were Karvia, on the west coast, Maketit, near
the East Cape, Turanga or Poverty Bay, and Ahuriri, near the eastern
entrance of Cook's Strait.
The natives have also an account of the arrival of a party from the
same place, Hawaiki, at a very late date, by which the kumam, or
sweet potato, was first introduced into the islands. 'I'iiis party
arrived in the time of Teraraku, the great grandfather of Pomare, the
present chief of the Bay of Islands, or about a hundred years ago.
Tiie name of the chief who arrived was Pant, with his sister Ilinu-
kakirirangi. By one account they were in a single canoe, made of a
number of pieces lashed together, whioli is the mode of building in
the Navigator Islands. But another native, of wliom we made the
inquiry, said that they iiad several canoes, and gave the same names
that we had already received for tho.se belonging to the first emigrants.
There was evidently some contusion in this, and it seemed, at first,
not improbable tliat the latter account was the correct one, and that
the first tradition was too particular and detailed to apply to the
OCEANIC MIGRATIONS.
147
earliest settlers in the country. Farther inquiries, however, did not
support this view. It has been seen that the name of one of the
leaders was Rongokako, and one of the places first settled wa.s Tu-
ranga, or Poverty Bay. On referring to our list of tribes, we found
that that which occupies this bay is termed Wanau-a-Rongokata,
"offspring of Rongokata." This name is probably the same as that
given above. In taking down at one time, several hundred appella-
tives, (the names of the tribes, their localities and their principal
chiefs,) it was impossible to avoid .some mistakes in spelling, espe-
cially as the pronunciation of the natives frequently misleads, the k
being sounded like /, the r like d, and the final vowels slurred over.
But this ancestor of one of the largest tribes in New Zealand could cer-
tainly not have been a foreigner who arrived in the country only three
generations back, when it was fully peopled. This circumstance,
together with the fact that Cook, who visited New Zealand only forty
or fifty years after the coming of the party with the kumaras, and
when the memory of it was still recent, heard the same account of the
origin of the New Zealanders, seems to make it certain that the tradi-
tion, as first given, is substantially correct.
It will be observed that the natives speak of Hawaiki as lying to
the east. This may be explained by the manner in which the migra-
tion probably took place. A fleet of canoes, of the large kind used in
war, as is shown by tlie fact of their having names, set sail (we may
suppose) from Savaii to Tonga, between which places a constant
communication has been kept up from the earliest times. Before
they reached their destination, a gale in the direction of the southeast
trades struck them, and obliged them, in order not to be driven
towards the Feejce Islands, to lie up to the southwest. In this way
they were carried into the zone of westerly winds south of the tropics,
and finally brought to New Zealand. It will be observed that this is
precisely the manner in which we have been led to suppose that the
first emigrants reached the Sandwich Islands, in the opposite direc-
tion (ante, p. 130). The last bearing which they could have had of
their native country, before they lost their reckoning entirely, must
have been when Ihey were driven off to the westward, and it is there-
fore not surprising tliat they should consider it as lying to the east.
Kotzebuc informs us that Kadu, the native of Ulca, whom he found
living on one of the Radack Chain, fifteen hundred miles east of Ulea,
supposed himself to be to the west of that island, because he was first
driven off in that direction.
148
E T II N O (i R A 1' II V.
As to tlie time whicli has elapsed since tlieir arrival, our conclu-
sions, beinif ioriiicil on frroiinds of a va<rnc and general character,
must bo n)erely approximative. The Now Zealand dialect dilFers
quite as widely from the !!^amoan, as does tlio Tahitian, althouLdi tlie
points ol ilitrerence are not identical, ivich idiom has pursued its
peculiar course in departinij from the coniinon type ; but the distance
wiiich both have attained is nearly tiie same, .ludoinif from this fact
alone, we mit;ht be induced to suppose that the emigrations by which
New Zealand and Taiiiti were peoiiled, took place about the same
time.
Now, as reirards the latter islanil, we have seen that all the irroups
of eastern Polynesia (llarotonga, Nukuhiva, Hawaii, <Scc.) have de-
rived from it, either entirt>ly or in great pa;t, their ])opulation, lan-
guage, customs, and mythology. \N'e observe, moreover, that one
general stamp pervades them all, in these respects, and that they
ditfer very strikingly, in many points, from the natives of the western
grouj) (iSamoa and Tonga). It seems certain, therefore, that between
the time of the settlement of Taliiti l)y Samoan emigrants, and the
sending forth of the colonies wiiich peopled the surrounding groups,
suflicient time must have elapsed for llu; language to have undergone
considerable alteration, and for tlieir religious belief, tabu-system, and
much of their social polity to have taken a new antl peculiar form.
If the Uarotongans have been established nine centuries in their
present abode, and tlie llawaiians fourteen, it seems impossible, on
any calculation of probabilities, to allow less than three thousand
years to the Tahitian people.
( M AT M .\ M 1 S t. .\ N l>.
Our information concerning this island, was derived from an Eng-
lish sailor, at the IJay of Isiantls. He said tliat he had lived for some
time upon it, and found the natives similar to 'he New Zealanders,
but loss civili/ed. Thtjy had tiie tradition that their ancestors were
from the East Cape of New Zealand, and were driven in their canoes
out to sea by a northwest gale. In this condition they fell in with
Chatham Island, and established them.sehcs upon it. This took
place, as near as our informant could learn, about ninety years ago.
It is probalile that this account is in the main correct, with the excep-
tion of the time, which tliey could hardly have iiatl the means of
computiiiir with nuudi accuracy. These original inliabitaiits of Chat-
OCEANIC M I {} RATIONS.
149
ham Island must not be confounded with the New Zcalanders who
have lately l)o«ui carried thittier by tra(liii<j; vessels, and who are now
probably in possession of a jf reat portion of tlie island.
!■• A K A A r <), () R r i\ i: r n i (» .n (j it o r r.
As the conclnsions with regard to the origin of tlie natives of this
group, and those of Vaitupn, are based upon the facts stated in my
journal, it has been thought best to give them in full, as written at the
time ; and as these two groups are probably the only ones in which
the Polynesian race is now lo be seen in its |)rimitive state, these
extracts miiy be otherwise interesting, more especially as showing the
grade of civilization which has been attained by such small and
isolated communities, under the peculiar disadvantages arising from
the nature of the islands which they inhabit.
"Monday, January 25, 1841. At daylight we were in sight of a
low island which is laid down in this position, with the name of the
Duke of York's Island. It was so called by Admiral Byron, who
discovered it in the year 17G5, on his way to the Ladrones. As we
approached, its appearance brought to mind another of Lord Byron's
discoveries, the largest Disappointment Island, to which it bore a
strong resemblance. It was an oblong ring of small coral islets, linked
together l)y reefs, and surrounding a lagoon. Most of the i.slands
were well wootled, and one in particular was covered with a dense
forest of cocoa-nut trees. From this circumstance, and from the
small number of birds about the ship, we were dispo.sed to believe
that the island might prove to be inhabited, notwithstanding the
contrary statement of its discoverer. \Ve were not, therefore, sur-
prised, when a column of smoke, ascending from one of the islets,
gave evidence of the presence of natives.
" The vessels took their stations for surveying, and we were slowly
standing along the island, when three canoes put off towards the ship.
The mizzen-topsail was backed, to allow them to come up with us,
which they did in a style that again reminded us of the Disa[)point-
ment Islands;* for they broke out into an uproarious song or cantila-
* I'^vlracl friim joiiriml Ht the I)isnp|K)intiii('nt Isliinds : "On tlirowini; a sninll pre«pnt
intooiKMjfllic raiiiM's which wns al<)nj;siilo, iho j>ivcr was rcwanlcil by a .sonj^ (irf;ratilinle,
which two (>r the natives initiuilialcly commenced. Il was a monoldncHia hut not iinmc-
IihIIous chant, and reminded us iil" the tones of the ("nthidic service." Soiiio natives on
shore nrterwnrds <'vinccd tlieir gratitude in the same manner.
as
150
ETHNOOR A I'll Y.
tioii, which they kept up, with some intervals of shouting and clamor,
until they left the ship.
"The canoes were all double, and of course had no outriggers
They were made of pieces of wood lashed together, like those of
Samoa, and were ornamented with a few shells of tlie white ovula,
commonly used for this purpose throughout tiie Friendly Group.*
Tiie blades of their paddles were not oval, as in Tonga and Feejee,
but oblong and slender, like those of the Navigator islanders.
" There were eight or ten men in eacti canoe, and as they drew near,
their color and features proclaimed that they belonged to the Poly-
nesian race. There was little in either to distinguish them from the
people of Samoa and Tonga. They wore the maro, or girdle, made
of braided matting, like tiiat of the Paumotu islanders. Around tlieir
heads, covering the forehead, they had narrow strips of the same
matting tied, and one, who appeared to be a personage of note, had
stuck in it several of the long red feathers from the tail of the tropic
bird. Many of them had shades or eye-screens of thick braid, lied
on the forehead, very similar to those used by weak-sighted people
amonsr us. Their hair was cut an inch or two lon<j all over the liead.
Some of them wore shells, and pieces of sponge suspended by a
string to the neck, aud one had a large blue bead worn in a similar
manner, — showing that they had already had intercourse with
foreigners. Indeed, their manners left no doubt on this point.
Before they reached the ship they held up rolls of matting, making
signs of a wish to barter. In one canoe, the head man unrolled his
wares, and spread them out to our view, with the dexterity of a
practised auctioneer. All this time they were chanti.'g their noisy
song, without intermission.
"They came alongside very readily, but no inducements could pre-
vail upon them to venture on board. Our interpreter was a Samoan
native, whom we shipped at Oahu; )u'. though it was soon evident
that their language was allied to his own, it was still so different tiiat
he found himself frequently at a los.i.f Their refusal to come on
* The tiTiii Friendly Islniids wns nt tlinl time iisnl hy lis, as it had l)ceii liy mnnv
voyngiTa, to drsiyiinle tlio whole iirchipeliif^o ol" 'I'oiifin, Sainon, Niun, I'eii, A:c. h has
since liecn thoiijjht hest to rcstrii't it tr) the tirst-nnmed groii|i.
•f Tlie chief dilFeo'iu'c is the use lit I't(kiiafi> of the k, which the Sninoan dialect omits.
We have frequently ohserved that a very slij;ht ch;itig(! of Jir.lect is sudleient to confuse,
at lir.st, a native of one of these isl.inds ; while n fon'if^ner, who has a j;eneral smatlerins;
of one dialect, can usually accommodate liim-sclf without dilhcully to such alterations.
il,
OCEANIC M Hi U A T I O N a
151
board wns canscil by a sinf^iilar apprehension that the ship would rise
and bear them to the skies, from wliich they averred that we had de-
scended. One of them, who had an ulcerated arm, had tlie courage,
at last, to climb up to the gangway, and offer it to be cured, but he
could not be prevailed upon to advance farther.
" A brisk trade was, in the mean time, carried on through the ports
for various articles of their manufacture. Besides matting, they had
nets, fish-'nooks of bone, miniature canoes three or four feet long,
wooden boxes, paddles, &,c., but no articles of food. A few of them,
in their eagerness to trall'io, climbed ui) the sides of the sliip. While
matters were in this state, a signal-gun was fired for the schooner.
For a second they appeared stupified, and then such a hubbub arose
as threw all their previous clamor into the shade. Those who were
clinging to the ship leaped directly into the water, and scrambled to
their canoes. All then seized their paddles and started for the land
with the haste of desperation.
" In a few minutes the boats were in readiness to go ashore, and we
pusheil off towards the nearest islet. The entrance through which
the canoes had disappeared into the lagoon was some distance further
on ; but when we arrived at the shore, the natives were already on the
beach prepared to receive us. They had recovered from their terror,
and greeted us with every sign of friendship. We landed with some
difficulty on a slu^lf of coral (such as surrounds most of these low
islands) on which a slight surf was breaking. Before we reached
the dry beach we were met by ten or twelve islanders, who testified
by various signs their pleasure at our visit.
" Their deportment evinced a singular union of confiding warmth
and respectful fear. Some were shy, and retreated as we approached ;
others, more bold, put their arms round our necks, and urged us to
accompany them to their village. None of them, however, could
remain quiet, and their agitation was evinced frequently in their
peculiar motle, — by singing. Several times, while asking an islander
the names of objects in his language, after telling me three or four,
he would burst out into a song, which nothing could induce him to
stop. This, though ludicrous enough, was very annoying. At other
times they woulil speak for several minutes with surprising volubility,
(juite regardless of its effect ujjou us; or they would breakout into
hearty laughter without the least apparent cause. Their principal
object appeared to be to trade, and tliey were continually repeating
the word kajiloii, which, at first, we supposed to be the name of some
1A9
ETHNOQB A I'll Y.
': t
nrticlo tlint they pnrticulnrly dosired. Unt ns every tluiifj seemed to
be indili'iTciitlv kd/i/ou, we at hist ('(nicludetl that it was a freiiernl
dcsijjiiation lor pri)|K'rty or inercliaiidisf.
" At'tor riMiiaiiiiiiif an lioiir on tlie Immu-Ii, we complit'd witli tlieir
iiivitalioii to visit llieir villai,'e. Tliis was on tlie imiiT. or la^nioii side
of the islet. It was cotiiposeii of twenty or tiiirty lio\ises, about as
larjfo as those of the Sandwieh ishmders, of oliloni,' shape, witli eaves
slopinjf nearly to the f>ronnd. 'I'hc heiiflit of the ridi^e-poie was from
ten to fifteen feet, and it projected at each end about a foot beyond
the walls of the house, being eovered over the whole length with
thatch. This thatch was of pandaiuis-loaves, laid on so loosely that a
considerable thickness was necessary to exclude the rain. 'l"he inside
of the houses was very clean, but we saw no furniture in any. It had
probably been removed on our coming on shore. In one part of the
town was a small open s|)ace streweil with sand and pebbles, which
they called the mulai'. When I asked for the fale iitiin (house of tied)
they appeared to understand me, and pointed to some place at a
distance.
" The most curious structures in the village were three small quays
or piers of coral stone, five feet wide and two or three in height, built
out into the lagoon, to the distance of about ten feet. On the end of
each was a small house, standing partly on |iiles over the water. We
could not letirn if they were intcniled for iamling-places, though this
purpose seemed hardly probable. On going to them, wv saw the
three canoes that had visited the ship lying off aluiut pistol-shot dis-
tance in the lagoon, fdlcil with women and children. The natives
hail evidently adopted ihis as the best modi? of placing their treasures
beyond our reach, in case we should prove hostile.
" We saw no arms among the peo[ile, nor in any of their houses, —
neither were any scars visible upon their naked boilies ; so that we
have some grounds for believing that this sim|)le people are, as yet,
strangers to the miseries of war. When we asked for their chief,
some pointed to an old, portly man, who appeared to have the most
consideration among them; but others declared that there was none
present, and that the great chief {alila) lived on an island in a south-
east direction, but whether they meant merely an islet on the other
side of the lagoon, or a more distant island, we could not lietermine.
" Our impre.s.sion was that we saw the entire population of the island.
Those who came off to the ship, twenty in niimber, were all whom
we saw on shore, and it seemed likely that had there been others on
OC K A N K; M l(i It a t I on m.
\M
(lifTerorit piirts of tlio island, tlioy would have inado their iippcaraiice
beforti wo It'ft. 'i'lii-y wito so licaltliy and well-conditioned, that wo
must suppose thenfi to bo woU supplied with the articles of food on
wiiieli they suhsist. These are prohalily nolhint; more than fish and
cocoa-nuts; ut least, wo sasv no odihle fruits but those lust, and no
fowls or hogs. Three young pigs which we had on board were left
here, and the natives readily took charge of them, but did not evince
that surprise which might have been expected at the sight of an
unknown animal.
"The name of their island was Oaltifu (or perhaps, Atafu); that of
the island where the high chief was said to reside was t'akaajo. I
could not learn that they know of any country but their own. They
re|)oated after mo the names /?»««« Samoa, fa nun 'Vongalahn, faniia
Viti, and asked in what direction they lay, and if we came from thorn.
Their decideil belief, however, was that we came from above, in the
sky, and were divinities. This they rep(!ated to us froiiuenlly, and
we could not convince them to the contrary. Indeed it is natural to
suppose that their constant singing arose merely from a desire to
propitiatt! our favor, according to their simple mode of worship.
\Vhen a number of us hud collected in the iiiatai', the two oldest men
seated themselves on a mat, and taking each two short slicks, began
drumming on sinothcr larger one which lay on the ground before
them, at tlio same time chanting a song, or pc^rhaps a hymn. Another
wrapped a niiit about his middle, and went through the motions of a
dance, which had ii resemblance! to those of New Zc.land.
" As we were about to ((uit llie j)lace, a hatchet which had been
brought on shore was missing, and was supposed to be stolen. As
soon as this was made known, a tremendous excitement ensued. Tlie
old chief started up and made a s[)eech, delivered with amazing volu-
bility and strength of utterance, while his features worked with
fearful agitation. We could guess at the purport of his argument
from what followed, for his peoiile separated in all directions, and
pre»ntly afterwards the missing article was retiu'ned.
"The natives accompanied us in a body to the landing-place, and
saw us safely into the boat. As they stood around, we had an oppor-
tunity ofob.serving with attention their physiognomy and proportions.
They were a well-formed race, of a yellow-copper complexion, with
features varying considerably in stamp, but all of the proper Po-
lynesian type, particularly as seen in the F'riendly Islands, with
whose inhabitants they might readily be confounded. Their tattooing.
lAt
KTIINOO II A I'll V.
however, was distinct niul poniliar, sliowiiiK that tlicy huvo l)oeu a
st'paratf lril«' loii^j oiiduj^li to have alloreil thi-ir iMistoms coiisidcralily
ill thin rt'H|HH't. The priiicipal mark wiw a Kort of' triangle, with the
apex (Itiwiiwards, iinpriiiteil on each hauiu'h. A doiihle row of hues,
with little crosses between, was drawn down ol)li(|uely upon (laeli
clicek, and others of tlio same kind, be^'iniiinvT in the Nmall of thu
I'ack, eaine nuind to the l)reast. 'I'his part ol" the Ixidy was stamped
also witli many trian^nhir spots, of wliich the hirj^est were ahont an
incli lony; and soniu of them had, l)esi<les, rn(U! li^nres, representin)j[
tortoises, imprinted on tlie Ijreast and sides. 'The arms down to the
elbow were tattooed in tlie same manner with rows of small triannles."
I)uriiijf»the three following? days we were enifnged in workini; past
the Duke of ('larenees Island, also discovered by Byron, and lying
to the southeast of the preceiling. No inhabitants were seen upon
it, though we afterwards learned that it was well peopled.
" Friday, January '29. 'I'he night was cloudy, and so dark that
objects were discovered with ditliculty at a little distance from the
ship. About two o'clock the noise of surf was distinguished, and
shortly after land was seen about a mile olF. We lay to till morning,
and then proceeded to examine what might be fairly called our
discovery, — for, though we afterwards learned that it had been visited
by a whaler, no information had been given to the public by whi(;h it
could be placed on a chart. It was a coral island, larger than any of
those we had seen since we left Oahu, — (lerhaps twelve miles in cir-
cumterence. Its form was that of a bow, or rather a hollnw crescent,
the interior being occupied l)y a lagoon. Alwut half the circnmlercMice
was composed of coral reef, over which the sea beat ; the rest was
made up of a dozen or more detached islets, varying from a mile to a
few rods in lengt+i. The laud appeared to be higher than is usual on
these low islands, being elevated, in some parts, as much as twenty
feet above the sea. Many of liie islets were covered with groves of
cocoa-nut trees.
" We were not long in doubt as to its being inhabited. About«un-
rise a lleet of eighteen canoes, carrying t()ur or five persons each, put
otFfrom one of the islets, antl paddled out to sea. Their object seemed
to be lisiiing, and we were much surjirised to observi; that our presence
appeared to produce no excitement among them. They pursued their
occupation w ithout taking the least notice of us. This, however, may
have been merely a ru.se to gain an opportunity of (piietly observing
us. The canoes, like those we saw at Oatafu, were made of several
or K A N IC M l(J K AT I ON8.
1 M
picti's ol wood, j()iii(!il totrotlicr liy lanhiii^H of Hiimot, niul resoiiildiid
III (ivi-ry rt's[i('iM tliosc of Siiimou.
"Ah tlu! iiiitivt'H nIiowoU no diNpoNitioii to corrio iiiMir im, two Imnts
were sent to o|i('ii u foiiiiiiiiiiicatioii willi tlicin. At first tlicy were
sliy, aiitl kept asvay, until solium ot our Samlwii'li i.slaixli'rs strippi'd
olf tlifir frocks, to display tlicir dusky skins, and liaili-d llioiii in
lliiwaiian. 'I'licy tlu'ii approai-licd, and entered into a trade, ox-
clian^ini,' itieir mats and carved l)oxes, whicli must have cost tliein
weeks of laltor, for a tew lisii-liooks or otlier trifles. When the l)oats
pulled towards tlii^ ship, they li)llowed, and on eomiiii,' near hej^an
their son^, at the same time holding up mats and paddh^s, and
shoutin<,' ' hijiliiii, liimiitdu,' — truth; Jish-liniiks. They svere dressed
exactly like the natives of Oatafii, and reseml)led tliem in personal
appearance. Their fine forms and manly looks were suhjects of
^eiitTtd lulmirution, and tlioir hearty laut,diter, when any thiiii,' struck
them as ludicrous, gave an im|tressioii of their ;,foo<l nature, which
was, perliajts, deceptive, 'i'lu^y were very, eaj^t^r tor tradiii;^, but
could nut be induced to venture on boaril.
" l'r(?parations wert! immediately made for laiidinir, and we pushed
otr in three boats towards a knoll at the southwest point of the island.
Four or live of the canoes aciiompanied us. As we drew near, we
found a surf i)reakini; on tiie reef, so heavy that wo hesitattnl to enter.
By way of enconraginj^ us, the natives jr^t their canoes upon one of
the heaviest rollers, and paddlinif with (freal energy, rotlo safely in to
the lu^ach. Finding that no better landing-place was to be had, we
followed their example, and met with as good success.
"The islet was pretty high, and covered with a grovo of cocoa-nut
trees, but there were no houses on it, and the natives gave us to
understand that their village was towartls the southern end of the
island, some distance oil'. In answer to our iiKjuiries, it appeared
that the name of the island was Fakaafo, the same as that which the
natives of Oatafu mentioned as the residence of their king. The
name of the Duke of Clarence's Island, which we passed yesterday,
was found to be Niikunono. The natives spoke of their own island
under the title of I'uiiua loa, or the 'great land,' thus showing that
they were not ac(iuainted with any larger. They aj)peared, indeed,
to know the names of Viti, Tongatabu, and Samoa, but not the
ilirection in which they lay. The two other islands of their group
were the only ones with which they had any intercourse.
" Their chief, who.se name was Toupe, was said to be at the village.
156
ETHNOGRAPHY.
The principal person present was an old man, whom they called
TaufaiiKjn. They said that he was a priest, and was fakatajm
(sacred), or yrt/irt* o r/fAo/o (like agod). Tliis word debolo surprised
us, being nearly tlie form of the Sandwich Island term for devil ; hut
our UKiuiries could elicit nothing more from them than that ' O
Debolo' was an ancient god {atua tajito). The name of the god of
the island was Tu-To/,rlau, or Tiii-Tokefau, and his residence was in
the si<ies. Tlie great deity of Polynesia was also mentioned by them,
with the customary addition, ' 'Vangaloa i lunga i te laiigi,' Tangaloa
above in the heavens. Wc were supposed to have come from the
same place, and they could not be convinced that we were not deities,
but men only [tangata lava).
" Notwithstanding this impression, their thievish disposition mani-
fested itself very strongly. Several trifling articles were pilfered,
and if any thing was dropped by accident, or suffered to be out of
sight for a moment, one of the natives instantly covered it with his
foot, or witii the branch of a tree.
" At length they began to move towards their canoes, siiying that
they were luingry, and must go to the town. We therefore returned
to our ship, and remained on board until the following day, when we
again started, at about noon, for the islet on which the town is situated.
W'hcii we came near, a crowd of natives appeared on the beach
awaiting our a|)proach. We landed with some dilliculty from the
surf, and walked towards them. Behind a little pile of cocoa-nuts
and mats were seated about twenty old men, and tlie rest of iiie crowd
(above a hundred in number) stood in the rear-ground, all singing,
shouting, and gesticulating, in a state of the highest excitement.
As we came up, tliey spread inat.s for us, and insisted U[)on our sitting
down, at the same time giving us to understand that the articles
collected tliere were a present to us. Their chief, who was seated
foremost, was an elderly man, with a grave and sickly look, — his legs
much swollen with the elephantiasis. He was very pale, and trem-
bled v.ith fear and agitation, which could not bo quieted until the
captain sat down y him and succeeded in assuring him of our
peaceful intentions; and even then he continued to repeat tremulously
the words ' nofo kilalo ; maluku an,' sit down ; I am afraid, — with
others which we could not understand. Their evident desire was
that we should take the presents ai. 1 depart, for they frequently
pointed to the sun, which was now past the meridian, and said 'wa
/JO,' — it is night. When we ex[)ressed a wish to go into the town,
J ■■*
O C K A N I C M I (! R A T I O N S.
157
■i wm *
they opposed it, sayinif ' e sa,' it is sacred or prohibited. After u
time, however, when they had become accustomed to our presence,
we took tlio liberty of turuin<r our steps in that direction, and they
accoinpunied us. The entire islet was covered with cocoa-nut trees,
under the sliade of which the houses were scattered, a Tew yards from
one anotlier. 'I'hey were very numerous, the village being quite a
large one, but we had no opportunity of counting them. They were
similar in construction to those of Oatafu, but larger and better built.
" Near the centre of the town was a large building, which they called
the nidkir, and declared to be the house of their god, Tui-Tokekiu.
They wore very unwilling that we should enter it, but yielded at last
to our representations, and accompanied us in, though with evident
reluctance. The house was oblong, about forty feet by thirty, and at
the ridge-pole about twenty feet in height. The roof, which curved
inward somewhat like that of a Ciiincse [)agoda, descended at the
eaves to witliin three feet of the ground, below which the house was
open all around. The circumference was supported by many short
stancliions, small and roughly hewn, ])lac('d a few feet apart; but the
ridge-jiole rested ujjon throe enormous posts, of which the largest was
about three feet in diameter. M'he roof was loosely thatched with
cocoa-nut leaves, not disposed with that neatness for which the
Samoans are distinguisliod. Around the inside of the eaves, a row
of mother-of-pearl shells was suspended, and a few of the posts were
bound round with sinnet, which were the only attempts at ornament
that we obseivod. In the centre of the house, about the largest post,
were piled confusedly together a dozen massive benches, or large
stools, two feet high, as many l)road, and about three feet long; they
were of clumsy make, very thick and heavy, each one being appa-
rently carved from a single block. The natives called them 'seats
of the god,' and we suppos,>d that they might be for tiie elders of the
village, when they meet in council, or for religious celebration.
" At the foot of this pile of benches lay a piece of timber, which was
recognised as the windlass of a vessel. It was about four feet long
by one in diameter, and was much worn, as though it had been ex-
posed to the action of the waves. When we asked from whence it
came, they ro|)lietl, from the sea; and in answer to farther iiuiuiries,
related that a few years ago (three or four), a vessel was lost in the
surf, that two men got ashore, one of whom was nameil Fakaaukamea,
(the other's name we omitted to write,) and that both have since died.
On examining further it appeared that the windlass was not the only
10
^jTU-r : ^li:.i kAi,'.^^i^:^ ^.:
loS
E Til NOG R A I'll Y.
relic of tii? wreck. Three cross-beains, aliout twenty feet loii}?, and
six inches thicK, wliich were fastened to the centre-posts ten feet from
the trround, liad cvideii'ly been cnt and planed by rejjf>ilar tools, and
we found, on in(iuiring, that they were also from the vessel. As the
names of the two sur'ivors had both a Polynesian character, it oc-
curred to us that ihey might possibly have been Sandwich islanders,
and from tl'.om the natives may have obtained the word dchali) which
so much |)u/.zled us. The Ilawaiians, being Christians, wovdd natu-
rally apply the word to the native gods as a term of contempt, and
the islanders, not understanihng of course its precise force, might,
adopt it as synonymous witii their word utiia, deity.
"Leaning against the largest post of the house were several spears
or clubs, all much worn and battered, which the natives .said were
Iikewi.se from the sea; they have probably drifted here IVom Samoa
or the Fetgee Group. It is remarkable that they were the oidy arms
that we saw on the island, and that the natives appeared to have no
specific name for these, calling them simjjly Inkaii tana, ' wood of
war.'
"The.sc were the ' nly articles of c()nse(iuenco within the nici/ue ; but
in front of it w;'.s an object which attracted our attention from its
slia|)e, and from the fact, which wo soon learned, of its being the god
himself, — the great 'Vui-'rokelau. Whatever may have been inside
was ,so thickly covered that it appeared like a jjillar of matting, ten
feet high and as many in circumference. The natives seemed so
unwilling to have us examine it closely, that we did not choose to
indulge our curiosity at the expense of their feelings.
■'At a little distance from the mdlac was a well about tbiirteen feet
deep, neatly walled up. and surrounded by a high fence. There were
not more than thirtv inchas of water in it, and from the care which
was evidently taken of the j)lace, it is probable that the pure! element
is an article of much rarity and value among them. Beyond this,
along the shore of the lagoon, was a row of canoe-houses, [lerhaps
fifty in number. The (kinoes themselves were in tiic centre of the
lagoon filled with women and children. All. however, had not
availed themselves of this refuge, for ni some of the houses were
fouiul children and a few women, some of the \(iunger ones being
remarkably pretty. The old (pieen, herself, was discovered hidden
uiid(!r a mat, and betrayed greal terror on lieing exposed to view.
"In one part of the village we found two tiniins, one of them being
a mere trough or hollow log, like those of the Kriendly Islands. The
m
(OCEANIC M I(i R i» T I O N S.
159
m
other was a cylindrical frame set upright on the ground, with a piece
of shark's skin siretchcd tightly over the top. Its shape reminded us
of tiio West India tomtom, and it was beaten, like our drums, with
two sticks. As soon as its .sound was hearil, a few of the natives
commenced a dance, ai)parcntly to divert us, for they laughed heartily
at the same time. The motions of the dance were similar to tiiose
we had seen at the other islands, hut, like their singing, more varied
and pleasing.
" The natives appeared to be still anxious for our departure, and
kept urging us to our boats, pointing to the sun with the words iia po
(it is night), and fre(|uently repeating Jiaiihi, Jiuitia hirn, which we
interpreted ' very nuich tired.' At the same time they continued to
bring us articles for trade, which they e.x(;hangetl for any tritlc we
chose to offer them, preferring, however, knives and fish-hooks. Many
of their manufactures gave evidence of considerable ingenuity. The
principal were mats, boxes, lish-hocrhs, tiles, saws, drills, and orna-
ments for the per.son. The mats were of two kinds, for beds and for
clothing; the former were three or four feet stjuare, coarse, and
braided of cocoa-nut and pandanus-lcaves. The maros, or girdles,
were from six to eighteen inches wide, some of them very fine in
texture, with fringes on the sides and ends. Tlieir lengtli varied from
a few feet to five or six yards. The cinctures worn by the women
were a singular fabric. They consisted of a great number of long
leaves (probably pandanus) tied at one end to a cord, and then slit
into fine strands. The leaves were dry, and appeared to be kept well
oiled, ])robably to render them llexible. Th(>y were so many, and .so
closely packed, that the dress, when rolled up, formed an enormous
bundle of straw, of a weight which, one would have thought, must
have rendered it exceedingly inconvenient.
"The boxes were cylindrical, in the shape of small buckets, neatly
hollowed from a solid piece, and of different ca[)acities, from a gill to a
half-gallon. They were used by the natives in their canoes, to hold
their fishing-tackle and other light articles that they wished to pre-
serve from the wet. 'I'he lids were made to lit tight with a rim, like
those of our snulf-boxes. The fisli-hooks were of bone, shark's teeth,
and shell, many of them as small as our trout-hooks, and made with
remarkable neatness. The files and saws were of shark's skin,
stretched on sticks, — its roughness being sufficient to wear down the
.soft woo'l and bont> to which it is applied. The construction of their
drills was (juite ingenious, but coukl hardly be understood without a
ixi
■tx-
160
KTHNOG R A !■ II Y.
drawing. Tlicir ornamenfs wcro necklaces of bone and shell, ear-
rings of tlie same, and, what was pcc\diar, false curls tied on a string
to he bound around the head. I'erhaps this ornament owes its origin
to the circumstance tliat these natives have thinner hair than those of
other islands, and appear to he inclined \o haklness. This, and the
curling of their hair, may result from tlieir being so much exposed,
while hshing, to alternations of sun and rain.
" The CMly edible fnnts which the island produces are those of the
cocoa-nut and tlie pandanus; and the fact that the hard and dis-
tasteful nuts of the latter are eaten, may lead us to believe that the
natives are sometimes sufferers from want of food. The rest of their
sustenance is drawn from the sea, on which we may suppose that they
s^jeiul a good part of their time. Their tine athletic forms and hearty
looks certainly did not give an idea of famine; and it would be an
interesting subject of inquiry to discover the causes which prevent the
population from increasing so as to press too closely upon the means
of subsistence.
"Judging from what we saw, we are inclined to rate the inhabitants
at between five and six hundred. The nund)er of men who met us
on the heuch was not far i'roni one hundred and lifty, which, by fair
estimate, would give the aiwve total. This little spot of ground may
therefore be considered, in proportion to its extent, veiy well peopled,
as till' whole superlicies of dry land in all the islets cannot exceed two
s(iuure miles. We are, moreover, inclined to believe that the natives
w iioin we saw at the first island (Oatafu) belonged properly to this,
ami were merely temporary residents at the other. This impression
proceeds partly from their own declaration that they had no chief
w itli them, and partly 'rom the circumstance that they had none but
doidile canoes, which are best adapted fur a sea-voyage. The .scanti-
ness of their numbers would also favor this supposition, and from it
we ma;, luidtTstand how the occasional absence! of the people, on
tiieir rett.rn to Fakaafo, might have cansetl the island to be reported
as uniniiabited.
" At length, after a stay of about three hours, it was determined to
gratify the increasing impatience of tlie natives to be rid of us. We
thereupon moved towards the boats, which were moored just outside
the coral shelf, in the surf A^; this was at times pretty heavy, we
were oliliged to wait for a lull, and watch our opportunity to spring
on board. The natives who accomi)aiiie(l us were assiduous in ren-
dering assistance, which was not perfectly disinterested, for they took
O (; K A N I C .M I fi R A T I O N S.
161
the opportunity of our confusion to run away witli a cutlass and some
other articles bclon<,nn<; to the men. These tliefts, committed in tlie
most l)arefaced and audacious style, <rave evidence of what might be
anticipated from them if unrestrained by fear.
" In pidling off, wo had an opportunity of ohservinp; the large piers
or moles of coral stone, eight or ten feet high, and from twenty to
thirty long, extending out into the shallow water on the reef Almost
the whole of the islet was walled uj) in this manner, but for what
object we could not form a satisfactory opinion."
\
VAl'iri'l', OR THE DKI'K YSTi; li ISLANDS.
" March 14, 1841. A little before noon, land was announced, and
by two o'clock we were close to an extensive ring of low wooded
islets, situated on a coral reef surrounding a lagoon, about twenty-five
miles in circuit. When we arrived within a league of the largest
islet, two canoes were jierceived paddling towards us. Our anticipa-
tions were highly excited, for we expected here to make our first
acquaintance with the jieculiar race which inhabits the Caroline
Islands, and which was to be the sul)ject of our examination during
the rest of this cruise.
" Only one of the canoes came to the ship. It was about twenty
feet long, made of a single log hollowed o\it, but the sides were raised
by two narrow planks fastened on to the keel with lashings of sinnet.
The outrigger and paddles did not differ materially from those we
had seen in other islands. 'I'liere were five men in the canoe, and
they came alongside with a confidence winch showed that they were
acciuainted with ships. Thev refused, however, to come on board,
but held up cocoa-nuts, mats, rolls of sinnet, and other articles,
making signs of a wish to trade. On our asking them, in Samoan,
the name of their islanil, though with little expectation of being un-
derstood, they replit;d iinmediatelv Fi/m/f'itti. Farther ipiestioning
soon made it evident that they spoke a Polynesian dialect, and George,
our 8amoan native (who had become accustomed to the slinht chantte
of idiom at Fakaato), easily conversed with them.
" In person these natives were interior to those of Samoa. They
were of middle size, with skins of as deep a brown as those of the
Hawaii. ;ns. The features were also more like those of the latter
people than any other, but they had all a greater luxuriance of beard
than we have . een elsewhere, except at the Feejcc Islands. Their
11
162
ETHN Oil R AV II V.
liair, also, was thick, bushy, and taiiirled. They wore it pretty long,
and one of thcni had it par.ed in five Uirsre tufts about his head.
"Their chitliin|f consisted of a strip of fine matting worn as a maro,
and a coarser piece tied about the hips. The former was braided of
tlie pandanus-leuf It was about ten feet long by eight inclies in
width, being much narrower than those worn at Fakaafo. It had,
however, a tiiick fringe on eacii side, wliich increased its breadth,
and made it more serviceable as a covering. There were also slips
of pandanus-leaf, a foot long, colored red, attached to the girdle by
way of ornament, and having much the appearance of ribbons.
" The natives liad two or three rolls of coarse linnet, which they sold
us, with a few large wooden shark-hooks. From their equipment we
presumed that they iiad set out with the intention of fishing, before
tiiey perceived our ship. Besides these, the only articles they pos-
sessed were their weapons, and the fact tiiat tliey would not leave
their homes unarmed gives reason to suppose that they were on bad
terms with some of their fellow-islanders. They had with tliem only
.spears and knives. The former were merely poles of cocoa-nut wood
sharpened :it one end. The knives were also of wood, in the shape of
a short sabre ; along each side was a row of .small shark's-teeth, fas-
tened on with thread and gum. From the ap[)earance of the weapon,
we should suppose it might lie very formidable among a naked people
like these ; Init it is rather fitted to inflict ragged and dangerous
gashes, than for destroying life.
"One of the men declared himself to be a chief, and was treated as
such by his comi)anions. On Ijeing asked how many houses there
were on shore, he answered immediately fifty (e lima ynfi/lii). This
probably referred only to his own village, for the circumstance of
their being sometimes at war makes it likely that the inhabitants do
not live, like the peaceful natives of Fakaafo, united in one town.
" When they had been alongside about half an hour, we left them,
and stood on to meet the schooner, which had pas.sed to the other side
of the island. By nightfall we came up with her, and both vessels
proceeded on their course lor Depeysfer's Island,* situated about fifty
miles to the northwest. After being delayed three days by baffling
winds, we ut length reached it, on the morning of the 18th, having,
* Tlif-' inline of Dcpi'vslpr was i^ivi'ii In Ihi.-: island {XiikiifrtnK) by llio iliscdvi'icr.
We liavc I Mciidcil ii lo ilic whole t'''<'"I'i "' vvI'lL'ti VuUitjiii, suiuoliim's caliud Tracy's
Island, is till' ]irinci|ial.
i
O f K A N I C JI I r. R A T I O N S.
1G3
r
at tlie same time another island in sight to the northeast. We steered
towards tlie former, wliidi, on approaching, proved to be very similar
in size and character to Eilice's Cluster. When we were within two
miles of the northeastern shore, some canoes put off towards us.
They had sails of the usual triangular shape, set with the a[)cx down-
wards. When they were near the sliip, we judged from the features
and tattooing of the crews that they would prove to be of the same
stock with the people of the last-visited island, — a conjecture which
was soon verified by their speech, and by the information which they
gave us in answer to our questions.
" In color they were as dark as New Zealanders. They were mostly
of the middle size, and tolerably well sliaped, but we observed none
of those models of manly beauty that are seen among the Samoans.
Their most striking peculiarities were in the hair and skin. The
former was thick and bushy; it was worn in various fashions, some
of which reminded us of the Feejeeans. One individual had it
twisted in a great number of small ringlets, which hung about his
head in mop-like profusion. Others had it done up in a few large
locks, eight inches long, not unlike so many lb.\-tails. Tiie.se were
either worn loosely, or tied up in a bunch together, on the crown of
the head ; and though the natural color of their hair was black,
these locks, probably by means of .some dye, had been brought to a
reddish-brown hue, which heightenfi the resemblance above-noted.
The skin was, in all, remarkably coarse .isid rough to the touch, but
many had it disligured in a singular faoi ,.1. In some it was covered
with a scurf, as though the whole cuticle were peeling off; in others,
where the process seemed farther advanced, the scurf had disappeareil,
and left the skin marked with circular and waving lines, like an
intricate embroidcTy. In tho.se individuals who were thus atl'ected, —
perhaps one-fifth of all the natives we saw — tiie skin was of a much
lighter color than in the others, with a jieculiar, livid hut;. The
natives called the atfection lafii, tlie name which the Samoans apply
to the circular marks whicli tiiey burn in the skin.
" It is ditlicult to understand why these natives should be so well
supplied with beanl, beyond what we have seen in any other tribe of
the Polynesian race. Kven the natives of Fakaafo, to whom they
appear to be most nearly allied, are as ill-furnished, in this respect, as
the Samoans, We should be temjjtcd to suppose that some mi.vture of
races had taken place, l)ut lor the fact that their language, so far as
we liad an opportunity forjudging, was pure Polynesian.
KVt
KTII .\ ()(i It A I'll V.
" At 011(1 time it wiis nmioniicod tlint a wliito man was in a canoe
coiuiiiL!' towards tlio sliip. On iioiiip; at't, wo saw liiin, dressed in the
native style, but better covered than tlie rest, sitting; in the stern of
liis canoe, and Lra/iiii» iiuietly at tlie sliip, with no ap[)earanco of
exciti'iiKMit. \\ hen we called to him, he answered in the native
tonLrne, and linally came near, and climbed up the side of the sliip.
We then saw that he was an albino, but that our mistake was liy no
means s(ir[)risiii|^. His color wr.s a ruddy blonde, his hair of a tlaxen
white, his eyes light blue, and evidently very weak, since, besides
beini^ screened by a lar<fe shaile, they were constantly half-closed.
His skill was also (juite tender, which oblij,'ed him to wear the
additional mat over his shoulders, and, in spite of this precaution, it
was spotted with larij;e brown speckles. We learned that he had
children who were dark, like the other natives, and that his parents
were the same.
" In the tattooing of the natives there was considerable variety, at
least in the parts of the body to which it was applied. All had the
arms tattooed more or less. The sides, from the arm-pits to the
waist, were also marked, yoine had lines across the back, and on
the abtiomen, ami, in many, the loins and thighs were tattooed nearly
down to the knee. The markings were either in straight lines, or in
zigzai>-, or in curved figures about an inch or two long, which the
natives told lis were intended to represent |)igeons [lupe).
" For dress, the men wore three kinds of mats, all braided from slips
of tile paudaiius-leaf 'I'lie first was the maru (or nuilo) which has
been already described. The second was a ginllc of thick fringe,
iVoiii six iiiciies to ii foot in breadth, tied about tlie loins, so as
partially to cnnceal liie maro. This they called ((thai. Tlie third
kind were mats three or four feet wide, and live or six lonti, which
w ere wrajiped alxnit the body, so as to cover it from the waist to the
ancle. The mats were dyed, on the outside, in red, yellow, and black
colors, dis|)o.seii in stpiares, diamonds, and other figures, so as to have
a very pretty eflVct. They appeared to be reserved for state occasions,
as the only person who wore one was the old chief, hut many were
brought off for .sale.
"Theiroriianients were not very iiuiiurous. They all had the lower
rim of the ear pierced, and the aperture distended to the size of an
inch in diameter. Around the rim thus separated, they had half a
dozen little rings of tortoise-shell, so neatly made that it was (liflicult
to dist-ern the point of juncture where the ring was opened when
• »
M.
O (• i: A N I C .M I (i II A T I () X S.
IfiO
taken f'nim the oar. Some had iiint he r-ol- pearl and other shells
suspended from the neck, and every one had a cocoa-nut leaflet also
tied around the neck, which we snpposed miLfJit be a si'^ii of amity ;
for in a|)])roachin^ the ship, they seemed anxious to keep it in view.
" Amonjf our \isiters in the canoes «as one woman, who refused to
come on hoard. She was of the medium si/e, with a rather jiretty
face, and a pleasiu'^ e.vprtwsion of countenance. She wore a very
long and thick cincture, made of slips of pandanus-leaf fastened to a
cord. It miglit he called a (jirdle of frintfe two feet in width; and its
appearance was that of a dense mass of slrasv tied about the body,
coverinif it from the breast to the knees. The native name for this
dress was JaK. W hat cliielly surpri.seil ns was, to observe that she
was tattooed, like the men, on her artns and sides. In this respect,
also, these people differ from the other Polynesian tribes, among
whom the women are tattooed very slightly, if at all.
" Our first (juestiou to the natives was about the name of their island,
which we found to be .\ii/i'i>f'c/oii. They were well ac(piaintetl with
EUice's Cluster [Fiiiitifiiti); indeed, one of them dedareil himself to
be the son of a chief on that ishuid. The island to the nf)rtheast was
also known to them, and called Vaitupu.* \\'e asked them if these
were all tlu^ lands with which tiiey were aef|uaiiiteil, when, to our
surprise, thev pointed to the east, and ^.aid that beyond \'aitupu there
were three islands, (hiinfu, yui^imtnto. ami FdhiKifo. I incjuired if
this was all, and they aOded. nitli some hesitation, the nauie of
O rotten (Jit, the smallest of il**- Navi<ialors; hut thev knew of no other
island ot tliis irrou[», uor even of the ncneral term Samoa. t 'J'hey
appearixi ti' reiogni.^c the words I'niKidtiiliK and llaji'/i, and liieir
ac(|Uaniiilain— with Rotuina was nIiouh in an accidental iiiauiier.
Some iKinanns were han^Misj!' at the stern of tlu- ship, which on<' of
them l)egL:ed for, calling thein ///// o Ruhiinu, bananas of Kotuiua.
• This iiiimr wn.s orijiitmlly sjiclh li by us 0(iiti/j»i, uliii'li was probnMy ii misnikc (i>r
'O (,ri- /.u) M'./ihir :!i.' ■■• .mil c- luiiii; intcnli.in;;c':iliii' in lliis, ;>s in nil llic iilliir I'uly-
iK'siun iliiilrcls. W'l' (wanl llii' iiaim- {iiMiiniiiii'iil mily uiici', and Tlmt in llir midst of
nmrli ni)iso mid ruMrnsinii. Dillun, w lin heard iil' this island at llcilinun, « I'ili-s ihc name
Vi///i<M>/io, and CiKik givi's, in the list of islands rcrcMvcil lioni Ihi' nativis cp|' 'I'diiga, uno
callrd \'i//iK,/ifjii, Vfh\rh i.s undunlili'dly the sanii'. t'hi' niiiru' mrans " gniwin;; water,"
and has, porhaps, , ler'-nep Id the viells or pits nf fresh water, which are su important im
tlie.se i-orid islets.
t It (till licit (lo.-iir til lis til use tiic' iiuine Sdviiih (I'n'- Saitiin. which thev would
perhap^ have recngnised.
42
Km
KTllNOti KA I'M V.
At Fakaiifo wo were told of an ishiiul oxislinir smnewliero, called
Viikdjiiihi : — llifse |)oo|)l(' rcrci^nised the name at once, and assured
1110 lliat it was an island well iidialiited.* This was the only tiunu-
mentioned Ity them wliicli we were not able to identity.
'• \Ve asked who was the ^od of the island, and where ho lived
They told ns that his name was I'uilniji'. iinii that ho resided on
shore. '\\^^ asked if Tiii-'t'o/tt/(iii also ii\('d tiiere, and they replied
immediately in the n("j;ative, sayinjj that he was the jrod of Fakaafo.
\\ hen the name of 'I'iin(/(i/iiii, the yreat divinity of Polynesia, was
prononnccd, they apjieared to i)e holh sni(irised and annoyed ; at
last, one of lin'in said (hat Tannaloa was a ;^od liihii to their eonntry,
and refused to speak further altont him.
"They informed us that ten vessels had visited their island, and
added that a ship of iriiri people had liitely spent some davs ahont
the island in fisliinu;. As the term iriiri is tiiat a[)|)lii'd by the New
Zealanders to tlie French (from their word of aHirmationi), we
thought it jjrohahle that the ease nii^dit ho tht! same for these islands.
It is known that French whaliny;-ves.sels re.sort chietly to this part of
the Pacific for their carijoes.
"Tlie only eatables which the natives had with them were cocoa-
nuts, and the fruits of tlie pandanus. Uut they assured ns that laro
{Arum escu/cntiim) <frow on shore, and also a much larger root, called
puldhii (probably Arum mnrnirltiziim). Later in the day, a root of
titro was broiight oil to us, proving tlio correctness of their assertion;
otherwise we might rea.sonably have doubted whether a plant, which
reipiires, aliove all others, a ricii nuiddy soil and fresh water, could
be produced on one of tlie.se low rocky islets. Vams and bananas
they knew by name, but had none ; of pigs, they said there was
abundance on the island of V'aitupu, — liut they had no knowledge of
fowls.
" As we sailed by one of tiie isl(>ts, a considerable town was .seen
on shore, situated on an open space between the trees and the
* 'J'liirc i-i an isliiml dl'tliis iiimic in llic I'liuiiiulii iir(lii|iclai;i>. It is liiirilly priilxiliie,
lujwi'vi'r, tli.'it il (Mil Ih' iI Ill' ri'lcrnd i...
t This iiukIi; (il'di'sii^jiiatidii, lliiii|i;li il may a|i|M'ar wliiinsical at lirsl, is yet that wliicli
was ailiiplcci, ill roriiicr liiiii's, liy llit- I'Vcmli lliiiiisilvrs, as H|i|icar.s In tlii! a|ip<llaliiiiis
iif Lioiguc lit- tiiii and I^inuiii- i/'it i.'iviii in tlu' iidrlliiin ami sdiillicrn ilivisions nf llu ir
eonntry, and marking; tlic ilillirrncc ol' dialic i IkIwci'ii llicin. It is ncii very Hatlcrini' to
iiiir national pridr In know that ihc ■\iiiciiraiis, as wrll as ihi' l')n;;lish, arc dislin^nisli<;d,
in sdiih; of Ihc i.slaii(ls, by .'i name derived I'ruin their most coininoii iinpreealion.
OCR A N H; M I(i IIATIONH.
107
beach. As well ns covilil bo jud'jod from n. distfiiit view, tlio lioiisos
were lapj;<', l)iit of rude (•(Histnictidii. The iialivrs rrt'(|ii(!n1ly |ioiiitpd
on slioro, and ur^ed us to accompany thcni to their vilhi^'i!. As an
opening was seen into tlie la^'oon, an olTicer was sent in a boat to
examine it. On bis return, be was accompanied l)y an old chief,
wlio intro(bioed himself, in phiin terms, as tiie iy(«/ of tlie ishmd. lie
was a hirge, stout man, apparently about fifty, with good, prominent
features, and sliort liair nicely l)rusbed and oiled. Ilis le^s were
mucli swollen with the elephantiasis. Hesides the maro and girtlle.
he wore a large coloroti mat around his waist. Ilis body was
anointed with co(H)a-nut oil, and his whole appearance sliowed that
be had come on a visit of slate, lie iid'ormed us that his proper name
was I'fiiliatia, but that lie was also the veritable Foiltipe, the great
deity uf the island. After n>mainiiig a few minutes, and receiving
some presents, he pointeil to the sun, and explained that ho must take
his leave, in order to arrive at the island before night. He also urged
us to accompany him, but finding us not disposed to ac(^e|)t the
invitation, he put oil in his caiioc, and was followed, at little intervals,
by the rest of thn nativiis. Many of us were struck with the extra-
ordinary likeiu'ss which this personage bore to the head chief of
Fakaafo; it was so plain, that, taken in connexion with other circum-
stances, the opinion of a family relatimiship between the two sove-
reigns seems not unreasonable.
" Wo cannot be expected to form any very near estimate of the num-
ber of inhabitants on the island. We presume it to be pretty densely
peopleil. The village which wo passed was cpiite large, and houses
were observed on most of the islets. Perhaps forty canoes visited the
ship during the day, having about two hundred persons on board, all
of whom, with one exception, were grown men ; so that we are justi-
fied ill assigning at least a thousand inhabitants to the island.
" The resemblance, or more jiroperly, the identity of the dialect of
these natives with tliat of the I'nion islanders, leaves little room to
doubt that one was derivetl from the other ; and the fact that the
people of Fakaafo had no knowledge of these islands, while on the
contrary their own groui) is well known to those of V'aitupu, seems to
indicate that the former was the source of population to the latter.
At the same time, it is not unlikely that the Union islanders them-
selves may have been a colony from Oroseiigti, in the Samoan
Group."
To the foregoing, which was written immediately after leaving the
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
//
{/
^A^
1.0 V^ I2£
■tt liU ■2.2
1.1 I.""'"
^>
Sciences
Corporation
23 WIST MAIN STRHT
MltSTIR,N.Y. MSM
(716) •73-4503
les
KT II N tXi It A I'll V.
ishinds, iiotliiiijf iiood l)o ndilcd licro willi ro^nrd to llio ori<i;iii of the
nativos. lint some ovidtHico lias since bi'cii found, showinii tliat the
sn|)|iositioii wliicli ultrilintfd tlio darker complexion and more aluni-
daiit heard of tlie natives of Naitupu to a mixture witli the Mehuiesiaii
trihes in their vicinity, was well-founded. Quiros, who visited the
island of 'raumaco in the year 1 (>!(». toi.k from them a slave, a native
of the island ol ('/itiiiifiiiiii, which lies tour days' sail from Taumaeo,
and carried him to Lima. From him, when lie had learned to con-
verse in Spanish. C^uiros obtained much information concernin;^ the
islands in the neighborhood of Taumaeo. Amon;j; others he heard of
(ii/iii/topo, un island which Pedro said was larijer than Chicayana.
He described it as ly in<r two days" sail from the latter island, and three
from Taumaeo. The women there wore a veil of blue or iilack called
Jhdjm. A larife vessel from ( i iirn/to/tf), with more than lifty persons
in it, sailini;; to an island called Mcrtiijrdijhi to <ret tortoise-shell, of
which they make ear-rintjs, and other ornaments, was driven out of
its course and carried backward and forward till all but ten died.
These arrived at 'I'aumaco. They were white, rxcept one ir/io tras of
a iliirh- co/or. Likew ise, in his own island ol Chicayana, I'edro had
seen arrive from thence a V(!ssel of two hulls (i. e. a double canoe)
full of people white and handsome.*
There can be no doubt that (SiKiijIopo is Vuilupii (or Ko M aitiipu).
Besides the similarity of n;une, we have the fad of the men wearinir
ear-rini;s of tortoise-she" (a very unusual ornament in Polynesia), and
of the women beini; dressed in a veil having; tlie nam(! ot /w/w, which
is, no doubt, the Vn\\i friiiLMMif pandanns-leaves called /iw, which they
wear at this day. The circumstance of the dark-colored man beiiijf
in the canoe with the nine white (i e. ligiit-colored) people, shows
that the natives of X'aitupn had then blacks liviiij; anion;;; them. It
is very probable that they were slaves obtained in their wars « ith the
lu'iifhl)orinLr islands, and if sf>, thev would jirobably be introduced by
few at a lime, and might thu;; produce no I'hange in the dialect of the
group, while, by intermarr: '^e with the natives, they might never-
theless L'ive rise to some peculiarities in tluMr jihysical characteristics,
as well as their customs. 'l''ie iiaiiu^ of Miraijidijla. the island to
which they were sailing, may be a mistake in co|)ying or iirinting
from Quiros's manuscript. We heard the natives of Funafuti speak
frecjuently of a place called yiiku-rainii, or Miikii-lailai, which we at
• Itiirrii'v"^ \iiyiij!os, vol. ii. p. 20H.
OCEANIC M I C. R A T I O N S.
169
one time took to be an islet in their cluster, and at another, in that of
Nukufetau, — but it may have been a small island, which we did not
see, at a little distance from both.
U t: \ E K A L I M, I' S T R A T 1 O N S.
Besides the particular facts with respect to each group, which we
have adduced in support of our opinions concerning the migrations
of the natives, there are othisrs of a more general character, which
may serve to illustrate and confirm these conclusions. Those which
we .shall notice here are the names of the months, those of the prin-
cipal winds, and the numerals.
MONTHS.
The following are the names of the months in the three most im-
portant groups of Polynesia :
SAMOAN.
TAIIITIAN.
HAWAIIAN
.
Fu'iuifu, . .
. l'\l'(l-ll/lll, . .
. Malii/ii,
Ffbrunry.
Lo
^ J'ii'iri, )
i Tiiiioii, J
. Dtr/o, .
March.
Aiinmiu, . .
AllMHIIIi, . .
Tintiiin,
April.
iMimami,
. jtpiinjMi, . ,
. SlIIKI, .
.Mny.
I'liMo-miw, ,
P/iioro-miin, .
. Wi/o, .
June,
r<tlolo-miili, .
. Piinirn-tiiiiri, .
. lliti, .
July.
Muhfd, . .
1 Mill- ill/ill, i
■ t Ihiioii, S
. TiKiomi,
August.
iMtiinyii, . ,
Iliuiii, , . .
. Ifiiiiiiu-ehfle,
September.
Tiiiimiifu.mwi,
lima, . . .
. TinmiliDT
mna.
Octol)er.
Tdiimnjti.niiiii,
. Tirri, . . .
Tiinuilioe
llOJJf,
November.
Uliirii'ii-mixi,
. niiii, . . .
. I/iiii,
,
December.
Uliivii'ti-muli,
. Aviirihii, . .
. WeMiu,
. .
January.
The Samoans and Hawaiians have only twelve months iu their
year; the Tahitians reckon thirteen. Mr. Ellis, however, (Polyne-
sian Researches, vol. i. p. 79), informs us that their calculations were
not very exact, and that they omitted or added the additional month,
according as the length of the year seemed to require. In general,
very little attention is paid by the South Sea islanders to the division
of time, and as we draw nearer to the equator, this little diminishes.
Thus at Rotuma they have a year of six months, and when this is
completed they begin to number over again ; while at the Kingsmill
43
170
KTHNOC II A P II Y.
Islands, which lie exactly under the line, the months had no name,
but were merely numbered first, second, third, and so on up to ten,
when they recommenced, — thus losing every distinction qf seasons or
years.
A com|)arison ol' the forejjoinjj; lists will show that the Tahitians
derived tlieir names lor the moitths from the Samoans, and the Ha-
waiians from the 'I'iihitians. Aj'ii, in Samoa, means " |)erspiration,'"
•,\\u\ J'aa-iifii must therefore mean "causing to perspire," a name suffi-
ciently applicable to their February, which answers to our August.
In the Sandwich Islands, however, whether because the meaning in
that hemisphere was no longer suitable, or for some other reastm, it
was changed to Mtitnlii, or the Pleiades, by whose rising the natives
of Polynesia determine the commencement of their year. Between
Fii'Ki/iii and Annunii, .Mr. Ellis gives two names, I'ipiri and Taaoa.
but it would appear that the latter is the intercalary month, which
is in.serted or omitted at pleasure. Forster, in his list, makes it
answer to August, which accords with the Hawaiian 'i'aaoitu. — no
iloubt the same word.
I'(i/i)/(), in Samoan, is the name of a kind of sea-worm which makes
its appearance in shoals in the reefs, at a certain period of the year,
and is esteemed a great delicacy by the natives. This worm is not
known at the Society Islands, but the name is stdl retained, with no
meaning whatever attached toil, — a strilving evidcuice of the deriva-
tion of the Tahitians from Samoa.* The word Miiriaha in Tahitian
is an alteration of Miirihn, which was in use when Forster was at
Tahiti : this has been caused by the custom of tf pi, for whidi see
the Comparative (irammar, \ 81. In the Hawaiian we observe u
number of corruptions. Wihhu is evidently the same as the Tahitian
Aranliu ; 'J'amu/toe is probably from the Samoan 'JaiotKiJci, and |)os-
• Tlicrf' is siniH' cilisnirily with n^s|x>ri tn llic iiw ol' this icrm in Siiiiniiin. 'I'lw two
moiitlis c'njliil I'lilulii-fiiiKi .-umI J'lilijii-muli, iiTf .liiiii' iiiiil .Inly, bill tlii' (ininiiil ili«'s not
make iN a|i|>i':ii'iiiiri' lill OiIhIkt aini .\ii\iiiiI«t. In tlic I'njcf l.slaiiils, whin' il i.s also
liiiiiiiJ, iIk' lii.^t-iianiod iniinth-^ an' called MluiliJii-liiilni ami ,W/«'/'V«./ri», or, lillli' and
ureal Mliilijo. It seems prolialile thai at a liiriner ihtukI the name I'liliJo was a|i|ilii>(l
in Samoan to tlicst- innnlhs, and that lor some iihknown reason, |M'rha|is coniiroted with
their sii|)i-rstitions, the trrni was shirted to another part ol'the \e;ir, and its |ilarc" Kii|i|ilied
hy liiiiiiKiJii, whiili means In rut, in the lanniia^i"' a|i|iro|)rialid to chiefs. This must
ha\e liiili|Mned Ix'liire the de|iarliiie of the 'rahiliaii c-olonisls. l-'nr a (h'seri|ilioii of the
Mlnild/o, anil tlie ccrenionifs wliieh lake |iliu'o on its apjiearance ut the l-Wjci' i liaiidH,
sec (Mige 07.
O C K A N I C M Hi II A T I O N a
171
sibly Ihin (or Ilutm) for Utiiraa. 'I'Iiosp chiinge.s are of a kind
unusual in tho Polynesian dialeils, anil are an I'vidcnce of what
many circMinistances woultl lead us to suspect, — that the lirst settlers
of Hawaii were people of low rank, and iniptjrfeetly versed in those
branches of knowledge which are usually left, in these islands, to the
chiefs and priests.
w I X » s.
We have already had occfision to speak of the term tonga as ap-
plied in tho Sainoan, New Zealand,* l{arotongan, Tahitian (/w/), and
Hawaiian (tona), to the south wind. It must, of course, have been
derived from the first-named group, which is the only one that lies to
the north of the island ('I'onga) from which the wind is named.
Another word which recjuires to bo noticed is tokeinu, (in Samoan.
to'eliiu, in Rarotongan, lokirou, in Tahitian, to'erait, in Nukuhivan,
tokodii, and in Hawaiian tdolaii.) In Samoan and Tongan this word
signifies the east or southeast trades ; in Tahitian and Rarotongan it
is the northwest monsoon; in Nukuhivan it is the north wind ; and
in Hawaiian it is the name given to the north or northeast side of an
island, opposite to tona, or the southwest. The secret of the.se changes
of meaning is probably tu be found in the concluding syllable A/m.
wbicb is presumed to be tlie same with the Malaisian woril hint,
meaning sea. Throughout the .'ountries occupied by this race, we
find this term a|)plied,to the wind, or the point of the compass, in the
direction of the open sea. Thus in Malay, /aiff, by itself, is use<l for
the northwest wind,t that being the wind which, at the peninsula of
Malacca, blows from the open sea, or across the Bay of Bengal
Timor in Malay, signifies east, and liiiior-hiiit, northeast, — the wind
from this direction coming down the China Sea. In the island of
Celebes it is curious that the liugis, who live on the east side, have
for the word east aha, and the Macassars, who iidiabit the west coa.st,
have a similar v;ord, /'/««, for the west J In the Philippines, ha/as
signifies northeast wind, and balac-laol . northwest, v — that being the
wind from the North Pacilic.» In all these cases, the proper transla-
* hi I'nili'ssnr Ih'c's V(nriitniliiry, tnngn is i^ivoii, by iiiisliiki', lu llif \v(ird lor I'JisI-
wiiiil.
t Uii'ir/.i, Oconnii', vol. i. p. »;).
X ('ni»riird's Inclmii .\rtliiiH'ln)»o, vol. ii. p. 127.
ij liiiiiiU>l(it un the Knwi, vul. ii. p. 25U.
17-2
KTII X«)«i RAP II Y.
tion would evidently ho "swft-wiiid," and litis is, no doubt, tlio truo
mcnninu: nf tohluu. At tlio Xiivijriitor and Tonfra Ulands, the open
wii hfs to the east; at Taliiti, it is to the nortliwcst ; at the Mar-
(luosus to the north, and at the Sandwicli Islands, the natives had
traditions of the existtMxe of islands to the southeast, south, and south-
west ; they therefore jfave the nanie of limltiu to the opposite portion
of the hori/on. The first part of the word, lukr or Iw, in most of the
Polynesian dialeets, sii^nities ailil or ihilliiKj. In New Zealand hau-
tokr, " cold air," is iriiitcr. 'I'ltlit-luii may therefore be rendered
"ecH)lness from the sea," an expression which applie8 very well to
this wind at all the islands.
MuldiKjai seems to be the proper name for the trade-wind. This
is its signitieation in Uaroton^an. Man^arevan, Tahitian, and Ha-
waiian. In the first two it becomes tiKiningiii, and in the last ma-
ItiiKii. The Tahitian had formerly iminiui, which has Iteen changed
to mtmiumu by a sin>j;ular principle, for which see the Grammar,
i 81. In Sainoaii and Tonyan this word is not used, its place being
sujjplied by lokeUni. In New Zealand, where there are no trades, it
is still applied to the wind from the cast.
N V M E R \ I. s.
A peculiarity of some of the numerals in the eastern dialects of
Polynesia supplies us with a stroni^ contirmalion of the views ex-
pressed respecting the emigration of the Ilawaiians from Tahiti, by
way of Nukuliiva. Hy reU-rring to the Grammar, ^ HI, it will Ik)
seen that several of the higher numbers, such as Irkiiu, r<ni, maun,
whiih properly signify, ten, liuni/iril, t/ioitsaiu/, have ac<|uired, in the
Tahitian, Uarotongaii, and Maugarevan, tiie meaning of tnrnti/, two
huiulritl, till) thuusiind. The probable origin of this cliangt? is there
explained, and need not be repeated here. In Hawaiian all these
words are again doubled, and stand for Jortij. four huuilred, andy««r
thniisiniil. Tiinii" is the unit of this (piaternary system, and may be
rendered one t/itadnip/r, using this term in a corresponding sense to
roi/pff. At the Manpiesas th«.'re are dill'erent methods for the two
clusters which compose tii;»t grou|). In tlie southern or Tahuatan
cluster, in counting large objects they begin with ta/ii, one, and thence
proceed to otio/iini, ten. taktiii, twenty; an, two humired, \c. For
small object.-:, as fish and mc I kinds of fruit, they In^gin with Initna,
a couple, whence tiikau, ten couples, ««, one hundred couples, &.C., —
OCEANIC M I a R A T r O N S.
178
Iwing in fact the same as the formor, with the omission of otwhuu.
For Itrcadfruit they reckon l)y pmin (knots), of four each, in wliiclj
case takaii stands for leu poiias (i. e. forty, as in Hawaiian) ; an should
properly l)e one hundred poiias, l)ut for some unknown reason they
have inserted a term tauaii for this number, and use an to express
him tfntnus, i. e. eight hundred jxmas ; mono is ten nus or eif/ht thou-
sand /mnas. From this it will l)e seen how far they have departed
from the original decimal system. In the northern or Nukuhivan
cluster, in counting all objects, large or small, except breadfruit, they
begin with tahi, one, anil proceed to onnhnii, ten, — takau, (or, accord-
ing to some, tiliuu,) twenty, taufa (or tohii), forty, au, four hundred,
mano, four thousand, &c. For breadfruit, they use the pona, or
"knot," and reckon tuufA, ten knots, au, one hundred knots, &c.
The Hawaiian system has evidently l)een formed by combining both
of the Marquesan methods. It takes the tauna or pair of the Tahu-
atari, doubles its value, and makes it the basis of enumeration, like
the pona used for breadfruit. Ta\iu (for takau), signifies ten tauna,
or forty, and is used in counting fish, while tanahti, answering to
taufn, is used for the same number in counting other objects, and
al)ove this, all the numbers are the same as in Nukuhivan.
The Nukuhivan numerals also afford some evidence of their deriva-
tion from the 'I'ongan. The word tor ten, onohuu, is the form which
the Tongan ouf/ofu/u would take in this dialect. Tikau, used at
Nukuhiva instead of the Tahur.tan takau, is probably a corruption
of the Tongan tekau. Langsdorf, who was at Nukuhiva with Kru-
senstern. in 1804, gives for ten, oiKjofuhi, — for twenty, itua-fulu, — for
thirty, toln-onfjofulu, — for one hundred, tehau, — and for one thousand,
afei. These are so near the Tongan ♦erms that, but for the acknow-
ledged accuracy of that writer, we might suspect them to have been
derived from a native of the Friendly Islands, and inserted in the
Maniue.san vocabulary by mistake. The use of the / is also a
remarkable circumstance, for though the Nukuhivans sometimes
employ this sound (or that of r), yet liangs<lorf gives no other example
of it in his list of words. It is possii)le that Cabri, the French sailor,
from whom he derived much of his information, had previously been
at Tonga, and accpiired tlie numerals of that dialect; and finding
them so nearly like those of the Nukuhivan as to be readily under-
stood there, had not taken the trouble to change them.
44
I^ff
mmm
174
ETHNOGRAPHY.
V I T I AND TON (i A.
i I
From the <lpRcription which has been given of the natives of the
Feejee Group, it is evident that they cannot properly be ranked witli
either of the two neiirlihorinj^ raees, ahhon^rh they approach nearest
to tliat which inliabits the ishuids to tlie west of them. In color, they
are neither yellow nor black, but a medium between the two, a sort
of reddish brown. Their hair is neither w(K>lly nor straight, but long
and fri/./led. In form and feature they hold the same undecided
position, and however it may be in reality, in appearance they canni't
be better described tlian as a midattotrilie, such as would be produced
by a union of Mt'iariesiuiis and I'olynesians.
In character, they seem to have inherited tiie intellect, (piick,
apprehensive, and ingeniou.s, of tlie latter, with the ferocity, sus-
picion, and dissimulation of tlu; former; and tiiey have one advantagt;
over bt)th, in uniting the arts proper to eacii. Like the blacks, they
use the bow in war, and manufacture pottery ; whil(! they understand
and [iractise tiie I'olym-sian mctluMis of making paper-cloth, culti-
vating l(iro, preparing /iwii, tattooing, &c.
'I'lu- composition of tlie language not only supports the opinion of
their hybrid origin, but can in no other way be explained. Four
fifths of the words are unlike those of any other idioin witii which
we an; acciuaiiited.* TIk^ other lifth, with most of the grammatical
peculiarities, are Polynesian. Hut of tlie.se words, many are so altered,
according to certain rules, that no native of Polynesia could pro-
nounce tliem. Thus the p is almost always changed to the double
consonant m/i, as —
UTIAN. lM)I.VM:.'iI.»N.
mhi, pa,
mbiUulit, jMi/ii/n,
tamlm Iiijiii,
lumhu tiipii,
mliurn'lii, jii//i,ln, .
The / frecjuently becomes ml, as —
linri'.
II kind ol'si-a-Wdrm.
Mucit'd,
1(1 nri)W.
Klv^<iutn.
niltilo, /'//", . . ... nriim.
niliiliijii, Iiilim', tlif car.
nilnnilonu, .... Iittnnu, xtruiglit.
mliinii /««!/, wl.
• It must he rt'mrmlKTril llml wu liave no graiiiiiiar or c.xten.sive vut-abulary of any
proper Mclancsian langua);i.'.
Il
OCKANIC M Kilt ATI ON H.
170
The k fwinctimes becomes ijg, uh —
VITIAN. rill.rXKIIIAN.
iriiiijfii fiikii, riiiio!,
t)Hrlf, krir •iirlli, rliiy.
p/fiiiigii, kiikiiy ... Ill KriiM|i, Imld.
The r (or /) is soinelinics clmnijcil to ndr ([iropcrly nr) ; as
iitiilrii "/'(, iiwiikf,
iiilniru, Irjii, iiNJiiti.
tii/riiii, /«(/, U'uf.
Besides the words so nitcrcd, a fsir greater numlier of Polynesian
terms arc found in tlie \'iti:m |icrftMtly |iiiro, and many of these are
such as sijfnity the commonest olijects ; whih; ttiey are straiii^ely
intermixed with otiier words not found in any hinj^naire of tin; Mahty
family. Thus the word Wn f'titlur is Polynesian, and that for .vw/ is
not; ei/e, ear, land, wuhr, liousr, to n/cip, tit i/ic, are all expressed by
terms of Polynesian origin ; while toat/i, longiu; seu,Jire, cloth, to eat,
to ijn, are from some other source.
That the inhabitants of this n;ron|) are a race of mi.xed origin, was
a conclusion to which we arrived while, on tlu^ spot. It was not,
liowever, till some time after our return, while engaged in examining
and comparing the dialects autl traditions of the Oceanic tribes, that
an opinion was formed as to the manner in which the intermixture
may have taken place. As tliis opinion is a novel one, and may, at
first sight, seem improbai)le, it will be proper to state, in their order,
the observations which led to its adoption.
1. In drawing up the Comparative Cirammar of the Polynesian
dialects, it was impossible not to be struck with the numerous
instances in which the Tongan departed from the rules which govern
the lest, to agree with the \ itian. Some of these have been nottid
in the Grammar, H Hi ^^- A few of the most striking may l)e
mentioned here. The Polynesian dialects, in general, have several
sullixes, terminating mostly in ina and ia, which are joined to verbs
to form the pa.ssive. The Vitian has the sanu; particles, but used for
a ditferent purpose, vi/. : to mark the transitive state of a verb. The
Tongan, in this, agrees for the most part with the latter. Again, the
regular Polynesian article is te (or in Samoan /c, w hich is probably a
modern form). That the Tongan once had this article is apparent
from the fact that it is still foiuid jointMl to some of the numerals, as
lekunii, ten (applied to fathoms), j)l. ijukumi, tens; teau, hundred,
!P*
I
BE
170
R T II N O (i R A I' II Y.
pi. yetm, hiin<irecl8. In the ^fiicriil Hpccoli, however, lliis nrtii-le i*
no Idii^rtT iisj'd, its pliioo Ihmiijj Hupplii'd by tlio X'itiiin ti. As rc^iirdti
pronunciation, in the ciiMtcrn or Lukomhii diulect of tho Vitian, the /
before i in pronounred like tf (eh), t)r like li in Chiislian. It in the
same in 'I'onnaii, but in no otiior ol'tht' Polynesian tonmies. Finally,
there is a lar>;o elass ol' words in which the \ itian uses tiie soil th (W)
or the .«, and the Tonjjan, which wants these letters, has in their place
an /«, while the Sainoan and all the Polynesian dialects have nuthiiig
whatever ; as.
VITIAN.
rilNIIAM,
HAllllAN, KTI'.
fake, .
. . h.tir, .
. . (ikr, ii'f, . ,
ii|iwiir(N.
*'tV<), . .
. . hip, . .
. . if", . . .
. (liiwnwiinU.
Vttit,
. . pin, . .
. . >., . . .
. Iiiiw ninny f
ftimii.
. , htimit, .
. lima, , . ,
. (iiitrinniT.
vote, , .
. . Julir, . .
. . Jim; . . .
, piKldlu.
U(ll, . .
. . ulia, . .
. . Ull, . . .
, rain.
t'likini, .
. . luikiiii, ,
. iikau, ii'iiii, .
. nrf.
unite.
, niii/ir.
. . miir, ,
. Ici Nlccp,
sain, . .
. . liiiJii, .
. . ii/ii, .
. plllll.
mi, . .
. . Iiiii, .
. . ivi, . . .
. bono.
These in.stance8 of resemblance, affecting whole classes of words,
and important graminatical characteristics, cannot be explained on
the supposition of an ordinary intercourse, such as is at present main-
tained between the two gro\ips. Nothing l)ut an intimate cotinexion,
and some intermixture, would have availed to pnxluce .>«uch an effect.
2. In bringing together the materials for the Polynesian Lexicon,
the meaning of the words Jiti (or rid*) and tomja became apparent.
The first means properly to rise, ajipiied to the sun. The second is
the noun formed by adding the sutli.v ya, to the verb to, which signi-
fies to set, as the sun. The first is found in the dialect of Fakaafo as
/iti, in Nukuhivan as Jiti or hiti, in T.diitian and Hawaiian it is hili,
in Harotongan ili, and in New Zealand triti, — in all with the same
meaning. 'I'he .secoml (to) occurs with the sense of /o .vt/, in Tahi-
tian, Harotongan, Paumotuan, and New Zealand ; and in other
dialects it has, though not the same, somewhat similar meanings. In
Taiiitian, (which omits the y,] the sulHx ya Iwcomes a, and thus we
have, in the tran.slation of the New Testament, Matt. xxv. 27, " ?nai
te hitia o le ra i le looa o te ra," " from the east to the west," — literally,
• Tlic I'liljno.sinn / becomes invariably r in llie Viliun language.
nc K A N IC M KiU ATr O.NS.
177
from llic rising of the niiii In the si'ttiiii; of tlit? kiiii, [ah orinilv ail mri-
ilintim)* It ii|»p('itrN, howovrr, tliiit in tlio first fX|irfssioii (liitiii)
tilt' Miidiix (t is not iifccHsiiry, — for in Matt viii. II, we liiiv*? " uitii Iv
hiti I) h' III >■ ff tiHifi o Ir in," " frciii tlu' oust and tiio wost," — litorally,
from tlit^ lisi- of tlio snn, ific. It slionlil ho ohsorvivi tliat the doiihlo
o in twill is written hy the missionaries to iiistinu;\iish it from Ion,
sontli, hut the pronunciation of botli is the same, and, in propriety,
tile Npeilin<^ slionld he alike. Hestorin^ therefore the latter phrase to
wliut It would he in Sumoiin, or in the original foriii. wv shall havH
"mat le Kin » le la e te TOiJA o te la." Hut tiie addition "« Ir la" in
not necessary to the Hense. In Hawaiian hiliiia alone is tlie regular
term for vast.
We have, therefore, to ncconiit for two facts, each of them suflTi-
ciently stranj^e; first, that two (fronjis, situated four hundred miles
apart, an<l inhahited hy dith'rent races, should hear names which arc
plainly correlative; and secondly, that these names should he the
exact opposite to what their meaiiinur would seem to recpiire, — the
'l'on(/ii, or western country, lyiiif^ to the east, and the I'lli, or uasteru
land, to the west.
'I. A remarkahle inylholotrical tradition, niven hy Mariner, as pre-
valent in tlie Tonjiii Isiand.s, though its real purport appears to have
heiMi forgotten in the la|)se of time, atfords a cine to tiie origin and
explanation of these |ihenoinena. It is, in substance, its follows : —
Tangaloa and his two sons dwelt in /Wo/w> (or, more correctly, liiilnlii).
He commanded them, saying, " (io and take with you your wives, and
dwell in the world at Tonga; iliriilr llir laiiil into Iwo porlions, iiiiil
ihall sviMiiiUhj friini larli nllur." They de|iarte(l accordingly. The
name of the eldest was 'I'li/ii'i {Tnlmii); that of the youngest Vaka-
akiiu iili, who was an exceedingly wise young man, and first formed
axes and invented hejuis and cloth and looking-glas.ses. The other
acted ditVerently, heing very indolent, .sauntering about and sleejiing,
and envying the works of his younger brother. His evil disjiosition
led him, at last, to waylay his brother and kill him. Thereujion
Tangaloa came from Uulotu with great anger, and after rebuking the
murderer for his crime, called together the family of his younger son,
and directed them to launch their canoes, and sail to the east (ki
tokelau, toward the trade-wind), to the great land there, and dwell
• " From Nunriw until siinsel.
All ciirlli nlmll liciir Ihy rmiir."
Mtutiii/iii/'s "Projiliecy uj C'opys.'
45
ITS
KT II .\ i)(i II A I'll V.
tli('r(<. '* ^'llll hIiiiII Ii«> wliiti', iiM your iiiiinl Im itinmI; yixi nIiiiII iiIho lie
wiMC, iiiakiiiu; iixcm iukI nil kiiidx nf valiiiililc iIiiiium, uikI liir;{o ciiiiin'n.
Ill llic 1111:111 tunc, I will tell the wind to Mow iViini voitr hiiiil to
'I'lini,'!!. Ml tliat yoii sliull loini' liitluT to trade. Init your rldi-r lirotluT
mIiiiII not u*' to yon with hii* Imd raiKH's." To tin* «-ldcr lirv)lli«!r lio
Hind, — " ^ (III nIiiiII Im> lilack. mm your iiiiiid im liad. and you hIiuII Im
dfstitute ; lew itckhI tliin:(!t hIiuII you liuvt<, nor sliall you i^o to your
hrollu'r's laud to Irailt' "*
'riic natives told this story to aeeoimt fur the diHeri'iice in color
mid civili/.atioii, lietweeii tlu'inselves and their l')uro|ieau visitors,
coiisideriiiir thciiiselvos to bt* the deseendants ol the elder hrother,
uiid the latter ol (he \i>iinL;er. ManiM-r was iiiuoh struek with its
siiiLTularity, and siisjiecteil that it was ot tiuNleni iiianuracture, and a
corrupted toriii ol the seriptiiral account of Cam and Ahel, learned
i'roni some of their fureiiju visitors; hut he says "the oldest men
atHrined their positivo helief that it was an ancient traditionary
record, mid IIkiI it irii.i fniniihil in fnil/i." There is rertaiiilv no
intelliLnhlc reason why they should have attem|iled to <l<>ceivc hiiii
on the point of its antii|Uity, or Imcii themselves deceind. Hut }( it
wore really an ancient story, it «'oulil not have referred iiriijinnllif to
the whites, however it may he applied to them at present. 'I'lie
proiiahility is, as before oliscrved, that it is an ancient mythos, undi^r
which tiie early history of the islanders is veiled, though, in thu
passuije of ci'iituries, the real parts have Im-cii for<{otl»'ii, and the story
has received, of late, a new ap|ilicatiou. The orij^inal scene is
probulily on the Feejee liroup. A party ol Milaiu'sians, nr I'jipiianw,
(the elder brother) arrive lirst at this t;roup. and settle principally on
the extensive alluvial plain which stretches aloui^ the eastern coast
of Viti-lirit. Afterwards a second conijj.iny of emi^'runts, of the
Polynesian race, perhaps from some island in the Kast Indies, called
Jiu/ofii, make their appearance, an<l liiidinu the western coast (a
inoiiiitaiiiDUs and comparatively sterile region) unoccupied, establish
themselvus upon it. The two thus divide the land between them,
and are known to one another as eastern peojile and western people,
• .Si-i' " All Ai'cimnt urtlic Nativi's ol' tlir 'ri>n).'ii I'-liiiiils, c-iiiii|iilr(l liy J. Martin, M. U.,
Irnin til iiiiiiiiiiii'iiliiMis III' W'llliiini M.iriiirr." ( ^l||•.talll(■'^i .Misii'llmiy, vnl. ii. ji, 11^
ami A|>|x'iiili.\, p. 4(1, wlirri' il is j>ivt'ii in lln- ••ii^iiial I'liiigiiii,
li'iili'-'tiMriiliiriiilMiiaiii^ill
or KA.N If M Mi It ATM».\ H.
17!»
or r»V/ ami Tnm/ii* AHi-r ni'mtiiI ucucriiliiniM, tlir Mucks (or Viti),
jfiiliMis III till' iiicrt-iiMML' \\('<iltli iiinl |i(i\vfr ol tlicir Ii'ms liarliaroii!*
iH'inlilMirn, risr n|i<iii, ami partly by tri'iiclii-ry, partly l»y mipcrior
iniiiilicrs, snriTrd in oM'rpowi'riiii,' llwin. 'I'Imim' of tlir 'riMii.'n wlio
uro not made prJNnm'rM, laiiin'li tlirir raiiui'M, and lirtakr IIu'iiihi'Ivi'm to
m*a, altor tlio nMiial cnstonror vampiiNlii'd trilics. In iIiih way tlicy
rcacii tlio islands of the Friendly (ironp, vvliidi rcfcivc t'nini lliciii
till- iianio o|''l"t)ni{a,lln' larucsl (llic •• yriMt land") licin^ ilistinyiiislit'd
by tlio t'pitlu't tdfm, or sacri'il 'I'lic tradi'-wind blows directly from
this uHMip towanls \'iti, and llic iialucs nf ilic latter urniip never visit
tlu" Friendly Islands, exeepi in 'rniiu;a ea;ii>es, by w liieli alone tlie
intc'reoiirsu liotween the Iwo^is iii:iititain*Hl. 'I'lio eonseipifiices of
tliis eoiirse ofovents would be as loliows :
I. Dnriii;^ tlie residence ol llie two races on tlie same uroiip, the
clone connexion wliicli would iiecessarily exist between llieni conid
not tail to liave some intliierice on tlie laniriiu^e ot uneli ; ot' wliicli wo
see the truces in the 'roii;,'au dialect.
'2. It is not to be supposed tliat nil, or even tlie irreater part of the
ToiiLfa people would be able to make their escape. Tliose who
remained would be reduced to captivity, iuid the women would
iHJCome the wives of the compn!rors. The result would be u people
of mixed race and l:in:;uaLre, in both ol which the Melanesiaii element
would predominate. Such are the Feejeeans at tliis day.
;i. The words luti (or ////) and fo/n/ti would no loiiiri-r be a|iplicable
as ri'i^ards their siiiiiilicaLion of inst and nrst. One of two results
would nece.ssarily follow. Hither the words would cease to be
employed to distiimuish the two tribes, or they would lose their
proper and <iri<^iiial meaiiiiiLT, aiul become mere a|ipellatives. The
latter, as mijflit be expecti'd, has occurred. The two words are
unknown in the \'ilian and 'I'oiiL^aii laii^ua<res, (>xce|it as the names
of the tfroiips.t
•t. The Samoan people are so near tht! others, anil maintain so con-
stant u communication w ith them, that tii(> .same result must necessa-
rily follow in their dialect, as we lind to 1h! liu^ case. /'/// and 'I'oiiya
are used in it only as proper names. Hut it is de-servinj^ of remark,
• So ill llic lOiifjlisli l|r|iliir('liy, ^^^(A iiikI Wrssivx, .Nnrlolk ami .SiiiHilk. it is unrlliy
III' nMii.'irk llial, iil llir pri'si'iii iliiy, llir wrnli'm i-iiiikI ii|' \'ili.|i'vii iii Itiinwii liv tlir ^I'licrnl
iiiiiiii' 111' y^', 11 wiiril wliicli |ini|M'rly iiu'iiiis /•/»«/, iiml liciirc (likr llir I'lilyiieHiuii liiio)
Uruiiiil mill uistiranl.
] Till' wiiril .\(irmiiH is ii striking exum;ilo ol'u similar I'liiuigi! iirini'iiniiig.
I
.,
180
E T il N O (i R A I' II V.
tliiit in nearly, if not (iiiiti", nil tlio diiilects derived from the Sitnioaii,
as hefore slated, these words exist ; oonseiiueiitly the |)eople speakinjjr
those dialects, (the 'rahitiaiis. New Zealaiulers, Nukiihivaiis, &.e.,)
must have eniiu;rated before the words beeame obsolete in Samoan, —
eoiisei|iieiitly before tiie 'I'on^aiis had been loiiy settled in the group
vvhiih they now oeeupy.
5. But, on the other hand, it has been several times remarked, that
tdUfia in Sanioan sio;nities, at present, the south (or 'I'omja) wind, —
and tlie vord lias tiie same meauini; in the Tahitian, New Zealand,
Rarotonifan, &c. Consequently, the emitjration by whieh tlicse
islands were people«l must have taken plaee after the Friendly
Islands were occupieil by the Toni^a people.*
In the last two para;j[rapiis are jfiven the reasons for supposing that
Tidiiti (and perhaps Nukidiiva and New Zealand) were peo|)led
shortly after the (light of die Tonga people from Viti and tlieir settle-
ment in their present seat. This deiluction calls 'o mind the infor-
mation which we received from the missionaries at the iSamoaii
Islamls, that, on .some of the hills in the interior, were e.vtensive walls,
bearing the marks of great antiquity. The traditionary account
which the natives gave of them was that they were fortilications
erected during a war between their ancestors and the 'i'onga people.
It certainly is noi unlikely that this war resulted from the settlement
of the latter in the I'Viendly Islands, 'i'hese islands are at no great
distance iVoni tSamoa, and may ha\e been shortly hefore coloni/ed
from thence, and considered as ile|tendencies. A fleet of large canoes,
such as are used by the 'I'onga and \'iti people, sudilenly arrives,
bringing an army of fugitive, but i)rave and experienced warriors,
des|)i'rate troiii their recent losses. The iSamoan colonists, sur|)rised
and unused to war, are coiupiered w ithout dilliculty. Some of them
seek refuge in tiie mother coiintrv, and the natural coiiseipience
ensues, — a furious contest between tiie tSamoans and the intruders in
the Friendly Islands. The latter, though probably inferior in num-
bers, would l)e (as they still are) far better navigators and more skilful
warriors than their northern neighbors. 'I'hey would naturally be
the assailants, and might, at first, commit great ravages, and perhajis,
partially con(|uer some of the hostiU? islands. Many of the van({uished
* 'I'liii.s \vi' I'liii nri-oijiil liir iIk' siii;;iilar < iri'iiiiistiino' lliiil Ian in Tiihilinii, iiiiil toijii in
|{iiniliiii;.'uii sliiinld siiinily Ixilli south mid insl. In Ihr lutlcr st list-, il i.s llir imuil of
/«, and means |iri>|i«'rly siiiisrl ,• in llic liirincr, il is Ironi llic island of 7l>»^'a, und is
drrivcd IruMi tlir l^aniiian uwol'lhi' Irrin.
() (• i; A \ 1 (' M I «i R A T I O N 8.
191
pcoplo, as iisnnl in shcIi cases, wnulil take to tlu'ir canoes, ami spread
tli»^ {Siimoaii rare and lanuua^e (ucr llie dislaiit islands of the I'acific.
W th.! 'roiiira lii^jiitives, as tlins snppose<l, I'onnd \\\v islands in
which they tot)k rernij;e already parliidly s(\ltled, and reduced the
inhabitants to suhjcctioii, it would account tor the fact that the dis-
tinction of classes or I'astc is maintained with nnu'h more ri^or anionfj
them than on any of tlie other ;;roups of Polynesia. Besidt^s the three
classes of /7^/. iiKildhitlf. and tinm, (or cliiefs, conncillcs, and common
|)eople.) all of whom arc tree, and ca|)ahlc of hol(iin<4 land and otlice,
there is a fourth class, called liia, who arc serfs, atlixed to the soil,
and incapahle of risinir ahove their actual position.
Aniither peculiarity in the social sy.slem of the Friendly islanders
may be explained in accordance with the views liere e.\pressetl con-
cerniuir their early mii>rations. There is on this <^roup a chief called
'rni-/iiiif/(i, who is esteemed divine, and believed to he descendeil Irom
a fjoil of ilulotn. lie takes .ank l)etorc all the other chiefs, the kins'
not exce|)lcd, and receives from them peculiar marks of reverence,
tlioui;h his actual authority is less than that of niiuiy others. 'J'lii-
T(i/ii/ii means " L<inl of Tonjfa." 'i'he word fiii (lord) • • seldom used
alone, but ^rencrally with the name of a place followiiii^ it. This
place, so far as our information extends, is never a ii;rou|) or lari^e
island, but always some depi-ndent islet or district. 'I'hus there is no
Ttti-Vili. 'I'iii-\(iniii, 'I'lii-I /Hi/it, but we hav(> 'Vm-Sdrchrlv. 'I'lii-
HiUiiuki. 'Viii-AdiKi, — these bcin^ districts on the larger islands. We
may suppose that while Toiijfa was merely a district of \ iti-levu, its
chief wodtl be tern\»>d 'I'lii-'I'Dinid, — and he woultl most probably be
a (K'scendant of the leader under whom the lirst en\i;j;rants came from
Bulotu. In the <rreat chauijes which wou'd naturally be produced
by their expulsion and llight to tht> Friendly Islands, some other
chief milfhl sei/.e the supreme power, leaving; to the disjiosses.sed
.sovereiy;u his title, raidx, and the respect which he wt)uld derive from
his sup|iosed descent.
A fact which fjives pri>bability to this supposition is the custom
which exists of straniflinjjt the wife of 'I'ui-Ton^a, at the burial of the
latter. 'I'his is. as has been stated, the regular custom amonji; the
Feejeeans at the burial of a chief, anil the wife considers it disjrracetul
to survive her husband. If, while the Tontfa people lived on the
Feejee Ciroup, their heaii-chief was accustomeil, Irom motives of
policy, to seek the allianc*^ of hi.s dusky neiirhbors, it wovild account
for the custom being intrinlucod into his family ; and, once introduced,
46
X8S
E T n N O G R A P II y.
I I
i
a sentiment of reverence for his high rank and attributes w c'j''l ""*
allow it to be discontinued.
But if the Tonga people once resided on the Feejee Islands, we
should expect to find some evidence of the fact at tbc latter group, in
the names of places and the traditions of 'lie people. And in this we
are not disappointed. Whether the Vitians have any recollection of
the war of the two races, such as the Tongans retain enibotlied in
their mythology, is not known. The views which are now advanced
did not occur to us until after our return, and, of course, no in(iuiries
were made on the subject while wo were at the islands. But many
facts were noted bearing incidentally upon it, and among them the
following may be cited, as strongly confirmatory of these opinions.
1. On the west coast of Viti-levu, exactly at the place where our
hypothesis supposes the Tougans to have first established themselves
on that island, is a large district called Vci-Tmuja, which means " /o
Tonga," or perhaps, originidly, to irestivard. We did not visit it, nor
learn any thing concerning its inhabitants. Nearly opposite to this,
on the east coast of the same island is a bay called Viti-levu, which
may, in like manner, have been the pristine seat of the Melanesian
emigrants, from which the name has finally been extended to the
whole island.
2. We have spoken in another place of the clan or tribe called
Lei^iikd. the original inhabitants of the island of Mbau, who are dis-
tinguisliod from the other Vitians by their enterprise and intelligence,
and carry on mcst of the trade between the dillerent islands. They
are distinctly stated by the natives to be of Tongan descent, tiiough
in appearance they do not ditfer from the other islanders. The prin-
cipal town on the island of Ovolau is also called Leruka, and the
people are e([ually remarkable for their intelligence anil good dispo-
sition. It does not appear that there is, at present, any connexion
between them and the tribe mentioned above ; but the identity of
name and similarity of character woulil lead us to sus|)ect thai such a
connexion may have formerly existed. Another name which is
equally diHu.sed in \'iti is Mannt/at. This is the name of an island
in the western part of the group, .south of Viti-levu, of another in the
eastern part, near Lakenii)a, and of a di.strict tipon tiie last-named
island, to which the sjiirits of the dead are supposeil to repair before
they descend to their iinal residence in the Mbulu or Hades. Both
these names are found in the Tonga Group, where they are applied
to the two largest islands of the Ilabai Cluster [Lefuka and Nainuka),
OCEANIC MIGRATIONS.
1S3
which are, politically, next in importance to Tongatabu. The mere
similarity, or rather identity, of names is, of itself, suflSciently re-
markable, and when coupled with the assertion of the Feejeeans that
the Levuka people are of Tongan derivation, will be admitted to need
some explanation. If we suppose that these appellations were those
of two principal divisions of the Toiiffa (or western people) when they
resided on Viti, we can understand that the fugitives would be likely
to preserve the same names in their new homes, while those of tliem
who remained in Viti, subject to their dusky eonijuerors, would natu-
rally keep together as mudi as possiijle, and in this way their mixed
progeny might retain .somewhat more of Tongan blood, and with it
more of the bold, enterprising character of their ancestors, than
the other natives. England offers us, in the province of Cornwall, an
example of a people, who, though they have forgotten their original
tongue, and are much interndngled with their Sa.xon conijuerors,
retain yet many of the pecu! aritics of the Celtic character.
These are not the only instances of similarity in names between
the two groups. Mango, Fotiia ( Votnii), and Fiim ( Viiru), whicii are
the names of islands in Tonga, are also found in Viti. The ruling
family of Tonga, whose name is Tiibou, have a tradition, as one of the
members of it informed us, that this name was originally derived
from Tumboii, the principal town on the island of Lakeniba.
3. The mythological history oi jSdeugei, the principal deity of Viti,
appears to refer to events in the early history of the two races. The
word Ndengei is supposed by some to be a corruption of the first part
of the name Tatiga-loa (great 'Vaiiga), the chief divinity of Polynesia.
He is represented as making his appearance after the islands were
j)eopled. He was first seen on the west coast of \'iti-levu, dressed in
the malo, — a girdle worn after a peculiar fashion. From thence he
came to Mbengga, and from Mbengga to llewa. After remaining
there for a time, he removed to Verata, formerly the principal town
on the island, leaving Rewa under the government of a Tongan
divinity, callerl Wainta. Now as none of the black tribes, except
the Vitians, wear the 7iialo, which .seems to be peculiar to the Poly-
nesians, it is natural to sn|)pose that the former (the Viti) derived
this fa.shion of dress from the latter. Hence this mythos may be
explained as follows. After the Vitians had settled upon and par-
tially populated Viti-levu, another people appeared at lla, on the
western coast, wearing the ma/o, and having for a divinity Tanga-ha.
From Ila they advanced to Mbengga, and from Mbengga to llewa,
184
ETHNOGRAPHY.
L.i
r
in .search of a lietter land (for it is expressly stated that the gtHl would
not (Iwfll at MluMiiftfa befmise the ground was stony). Durinjj their
rcsidenco at Ucwa, tin* intercoiir.so between them and the Viti, wiiose
head-iiiiarters were at Verata, was naturally much greater than before ;
and it resulted in the latter ado|)tin<; the religion and garb, iw well as
many of the customs of their more civilized neighlwrs, — a fact typi-
fied in the removal of Ndengei to Verata, leaving Uewa under the
ehiirm' of the Tongan deity Wainiii. There is no such gotl as this
in tlie Tongan pantheon, and no such word in their vocabulary ; but
in tlie dialect of .New Zealand, trtiin/a signifies a spirit, and is aj)-
plied to all divinities. Such may have formerly been its meaning in
ToiKjan.
Tiiat the Tonga people really advanced from Ra to Mbengga and
Rewa. is indicated by .several facts. The western island of Namuka,
of wiiich we have before spoken, is situated within the same reef as
Mbengga, and is |)olitically, as well as by situation, in close conne.\ion
with it. .Vbout three miles west of Rewa is an e.xtensive and fertile
tract of land, enclosed between two arms of the Xy'ai/evu, or great
river, and known as the island or district of Tonga.
The adoption by the Vitians of the religion and some of the arts
of their Polynesian coinitrymen, probably preceded the war in which
tiie latter were vaM(]Mished and partially e.xpellcd from the group.
Of course, the amalgamation of the victors and the comiuered people
would greatly contribute to the civilization of the former, and to their
improvement as a race.
It lias been intinnited, however, that the black settlers on the Feejee
(iroiip were not, probably, of the pure Melanesian or negro nicf-, but
Papuans, — that is, having some mi.vture of Malay bliKnl, as is .seen in
the inhabitants of the north coast of New Guinea, 'i'his opinion is
founded partly on the fact that the negro tribes rarely have canoes
titted for a long voyage ; and partly on the presence, in the \'itian
language, of several words of Malaisian origin, which are either
not found at all in the Polynesian, or, if found, are in a dillbrent
shape, as —
I
VITI.»>.
/iiko,
rata, .
rulti,
kurukuru,
ttilra, . .
.MAI.AI8I.%N. I'OI.VXKIIH.X.
/i(kii, '//", hiule, . . . til yo.
mill, ii/iki, .... I'liit'l".
truliiii, hii/iiii, .... miisina, malamn, riinoii.
yiij^ur, gni!;iu^, {\iu\\.) JaluttJi,, . . ihiimltT.
i/anih, (.Mill.) r<i/i, (Uali.) lalo blood.
O C E A .\ 1 (• .M I (! R A T I O N S.
185
VITr>N.
tll/nni, ,
rti/i,
Vdlll, .
lOSII,
kut'o. ,
MAl.tlHIAN.
til/ill, (lllljiis)
fjiili, (.lav.) .
Ixilds, (.luv.)
iingiiio,*
i-<h.vm:sia.\.
I'l/ft, lit, . . .
. siij!iir-riine
Jii/.ti/iiii,
. Id Imilr.
Jilidi. . . .
. ri'taliatiiiii.
/'''/, . . . .
. viiicr.
viikii, iijx),
. town.
Tlie last two arc perhaps accidental ooiiicidcnccs, for the Malaisian
words are of Sanscrit origin, and tiieir introduction into the Javanese
is supposed to 1)C comparatively modern, tiiough, on this point, wo
have no certainty. f
To the above list may be addid the afiixed possessive pronouns,
which, in the singular, at least, are plainly of Malaisian origin.
It may be thought that if the Vitian has tiius derived some of its
words directly from the .Malaisian, it may owe to the same source all
those which we have considered to be of Polynesian origin. But a
little reflection will show that this supposition is altogether impro-
bable. The A'itian agrees with the Polynesian, not only in many
words that are not found in any proper Malaisian dialect with
which we are accpiainted, but also iu many minute grammatical
peculiarities. We may mention, for example, the use of the nomi-
native particle ko (Comparative Grammar, '; 17), of the causative and
reflective forms (v 54), of the passive or transitive suffixes () riG). and
of the relative particle (j GO), none of which are known to exist in
any language of the Indian Archipelago. The argument, moreover,
from the composition of the language, is otlercd merely to prove that
the Vitians are of mixed descent, while the opinion expressed as to
the probable mode in which this mingling of races has been efTeeted,
rests upon the peculiar evidence derived from the native traditions
and customs, and the relative meaning or similarity in the names of
places and tribes.
The supposition of the existence of people of distinct races, lijie the
Viti and Tonga, in the same group, is countenanced by facts observed
at a short distance frrtm the Feejee Islands. We have already spoken
of the island of Tiinna in the New Hebrides, which has, about five
miles from its coast, two islets inhabited by Polynesians, whose
* The words horc given in the various Ktalaisinn ilinlools are taken iVoni the Conipa-
mtive Vix-nbuhiry in L'rawrord's Indian Archi|M'la};o, vol. ii.
t If the Vilian word fosn \<c really from the .lavaneso /»«<(, it will then Ix; derived from
the Sanscrit Utas/ui, which is also the original of the Latin ro.r, and the tlnglisli voice.
47
186
KTII NOORA J'll Y.
InnjTunj^o is spoken by the dusky natives of Tannn, alon}? with their
own. Sliould tlio latter con(|iier the islets in (|uestion, and compel
the iniiabitants to coalesee w itli them, tlie result would probably lie
a progeny of mixed race and language, like the Feejeoans. Again.
Qniros, who discovered the island of Tanniako, north of the New
Hebrides, found it " inhabited by |)eople of dilVerent kinds. Some
were of a light copper color, with long hair, some were mulattoes,
and some black, with short, frizzled hair."* It is evident, more-
over, that if on any group we might expect to find a peo|)le of mixed
lineage, it would bo on that which lies midway between the two races
of pure blood.
T I K O I' I A.
A similarity of names, together with some dialectical peculiarities,
has led to what may 1x3 considered at least a plausible conjecture with
regard to the origin of the [jopulation of this islet, removed so far
beyond the usual limits of the Polynesian race. An island in the
windward chain of the Feejee Group is called Tikombia, a name
which, according to the usual permutation of letters, is identical with
Tikopia. In the " Philology of the Voyage of the Astrolabe," vol.
ii. p. 101, we have a vocabulary of two hundred and fitly words of
the language spoken by this people. From this, it appears that their
dialect approaches nearer to the Tongan than to any other, but yet
differs from it in several points of some importance. The similarity
appears very clearly in the numerals, as —
TIKOI'IAN. TliNO.\N.
tiisit^ ttiha^
siva, Iiini,
Ifttii, tniit,
un genu, . . . wi i/riiii,
torn i/eitii, . . . tola ijrnu.
SAMO.tN, KTr.
. Iiisi, Itihi, . . . onr.
iiii, iiiiK'.
. n/dii, mv luiiulrcil.
. Iwt 1(114, .... two huiulrcd.
. UJii yd/iiu, . . . tliRH! Imnilrcd,
The Tikopian difTers from the Tongan in using the s where the
latter has li, as in the words for viic and nine given alwve, and in
employing the definite article le, which has become obsolete in the
Tongan.
But it is remarkable that in this brief vocabulary .several words
* Burni.'j's History ofVoynges, vul. ii. p. aoo.
:
\
O C E A N I C MI (i II A T I U .V S.
1S7
are louiul which are not Polyiiosiiiii, and which seem to be of
Vitian origin, an unri, to give (Vit. xo/i); yttstiii, arrow (Vil. yasmi, a
reed, hence, an arrow); mtind, to speak (Vit. tlie same); tinniia,
mother (Vit. tiiiana, liis mother); J'liruii, a strani^er (\ it. viirti, a
visitor — viilayi, a stranger).
These pccuharities may bo accounted for, by suppositig that tlie
ancestors of the Tikopians ])clonged to the Polynesian people who
formerly inhabited a part of tiie Feejee (ironp. They may have been
established in the above-mentioned island of Tikombia. On tlieir
conqnest and expulsion from that group, instead of accompanying the
rest of the fugitives to the Friendly Islands, they may have been
separated from them by some accident, and carried by the southeast
trades to the island which they now occupy. Of course, their
dialect, which was originally the same as tlie Tongan, would, in
time, become different from it, chictly by not underginng the euphonic
alterations to which the latter has been subjected.
It should be observed that tonga, in Tikopia, signities enst, which
may be accounted for from the fact tiuit the natives are aware of the
existence of the Tonga Islands, and their position relative to their
own country. They informed Dillon* that, in the days of their
ancestors, their island was invaded by a fleet of live largo canoes
from Tongatabu, the crews of wliich committed great ravages.
T A R A W A.
Our inquiries into the migrations of the Microuesian tribes have
been confined to the groups of Tarawa and Banabe, the latter being
noticeil only so far as it is connected with the former. The account
whicli Kirby (the British seaman of whom some account is given on
p. 1)0) heard from the people of Apamama concerning the first set-
tlement of the Kingsinill Islands is .so plain and une.xaggerated in its
details, that it has the air of an hi.storical narrative. They assert that
tho lirst colonists arrived, in two canoes, from Jhi/iiji, an island lying
far to the south westward, whence they were obliged to betake them-
selves to sea, as the only means of escaping death fruin their con-
querors in a civil war. They drifteil u|)on tlie.se islands, and had
just commenced their settlement, when two other canoes arriveil from
a land to the southeast, called Amui. The new-comers were lighter
•i\
* Voyage fur llio Discnvory of La I't-roiisi', vol. ii. p. IVi.
18S
ETIINO(iH.\ I'll Y.
in color and hnncisonipr thnn tlioir prodocpssors, and spoke a different
lanuua;^''. For soiiu' tinjo the two parties lived tojiether in harmony;
but alter two or tliree generations the warriors of tlic Hanep party,
indiic'iu'ed In tlie beauty of the Anioi females, rose \ipon and killed
the iiiiii. and took the womkmi for wives. From this source ull tlio
inliai)itaiits of the Kin^smill (iroup are descended.
Tlie tradition states further that tlie natives of Amoi broujrbt with
them the breadfruit, and those of IJaiiep the taro ; l>ut the cocoa-nut
and pandanus were found upon the islands.
If we are to consider this account as an historical fact, every cir-
cumstance points to the iXavitjator Islands, (!Saini>a,) as the source of
the Anwi people. The Tarawan lanjjua^c has no .«, nor any substi-
tute for that letter; and the chanuje from Anion io Amoi (or rather,
perhaps, Amoe) is not so jrreat as proper names fre(iuently undergo
in the pronunciation of fnreisjners. linnip is probably Mie same as
BniKi/iv : for the direction which Kirby assiifncd to it wa.s found to be
a mistake. At Makin the natives knew of the same island, and de-
scribed it as lying to the northwest.
The evidence of language confirms this tradition, so far as the
means of c()m|)arison e.xist. For the Samoan these arc ample, and
the resemblance of many of its words to the corres|)onding terms in
the Tarawan dialect is evident oi; the most cursory inspection. The
following are a few instances. It must be recollected that the Ta-
rawan has neither /", /, s, nor r. The first it sometimes omits, and
sometimes sii[)plies by /> ,• the / is changed to ;• or // ; the ,v is dropped
entirely, and the /• is changed to ;/•. The concluding vowel was fre-
quently omitted by the interpreters, though it probably is not by the
natives. W here the k has been dropped by the Samoan from a word
in which it originally existed, the Tarawan sometimes inserts, and
sometimes omits it.
■i.\MO.kX.
TAH.WVAN.
iiino.
(into.
lornrryon the back.
l"i(, .
Uiii,
til tnke.
}>ii. .
l»i.
the cuiich-shcli.
I'liii,
liiiii.
to cry.
pill,
pou.
|H>St.
'ifi. .
i.(.
liro.
fii/im;
tiiiir,
womnn.
lyifii,
t)A (l. 0. tJIDl) ,
fnthom.
Jiinuii,
ln'niiii, .
country.
hil"j!tlii, .
buruburu,
fur.
O i: K A N I C M I G II A 'I' IONS.
1S9
■AMOAN,
TARAU'AN.
iyii, .
llill,
till 11)11,
tiirinii, tiiniiin,
miiliiln.
miiriiiii.
!■</<, .
iiiii,
11 H, .
I'ili,
Ill in.
"■III,
tnttttt^
III Ot,
iiU; .
III.
mil' III Hi (lor
niiikiiltli ),
itiiiiiii, .
'/';«(«/ (Tor /ii/Hoi/),
kiiiiini, ,
'« (I'lir /./(■),
/.((■.
Tf (lor iki).
.
ikc.
l'U|(.
c'nr,
soiK
llMlt.
lornrry in iIh' iirniri.
tU .
to liri'iik, l>ri>ki'ii.
liv.'r.
eM.
ml.
niiit.
malli't.
This list nii(,'lit be lenj^tlirnod to two or tlirce limnlrcd words, hut
the proccciiiiii will be siidicient to show the chanties which ihc Su-
nionii words uiulergo when adopted into the Taruwan.
For the dialect of Hanalw, the other supposed constituent of tiiis
tongue, our means of comparison are much more limited. About a
hundreil words, obtained from O'Coiuiell and Mr. Punciiard (see p.
'^0), both of whom had a very imperfect knowled^^e of the langua<^e,
are all that we possess wliich can be relied on. These wortls are,
no doubt, somewhat altered in thciir pronunciation from the proper
sound. Tliis is especially the case where a d or / occur, which are
frecpiently chanifed l)y them to i/J or c/i (/(•). This was an alteration
very often made by Grey and Kirby, at the Kin<,fsmill Islands, but
the knowledire ac(piired durinsf our int"rcourse with the natives
enabled us to tletecl it.
It hajipens tiiat mo.st of the words which we havi^ in the laniruai^o
of Banabe, are such as, in the 'i'arawan, have been derived from its
Samoan i)arent. Tlu-re are, however, a few e.vceptions. In the Ta-
rawan, vn'i sij^nilies /hint or J'l/ri', and is used for c/iirf] in which case
it is commonly connected with djiii (pronounced by Ivirby ajj), mean-
ing land, island, town, — as, mo-n le a/xi, "chief or front of the land."
Both the inler|)reters pronounced this nii'i/if^'tip (or mrmtshnp). In
lianabeun the word for high cliief, according to O'Connell, is infuiil-
jab, which is probably the same, in com[)osition as in meaning, with
the Tarawan term. Land, or country, in Banai)ean, is iljah ; in
Tarawan it is te npa, pronounced by Ivirby /<v//>. I'lie pronoun / in
Tarawan is yai, but in drey's pronunciation always iiai : in the
dialect of Banabe it is also iiai, according to Mr. I'uncharil. An old
cocoa-nut is called liy the natives of Taputeouea, penu : Kirby pro-
48
i
190
ETHNOGRAPHY.
iiouiuTil it pni, and Mr. Puiiclinrd tho same for the Dnnnltoan. To
think is in Taruwaii )iiiiiii, in Daimboaii, nim. In the latter lanjjuage,
acoonliiiR to O'Coimell, edinmit Hif^iiilies i\ j)ric8t, but is rre*|uently
useil lor a rliief of llie lowe; order. In Makin, where there are no
priests, the tinnuit are tlie (gentry or petty cliiefs.
'I'hese examples will probably be siillicient to show that the evi-
dence of language favors the opinion of the twofold origin of iiiin
people. How far this evidtMice is supported by thai derived from
their customs and character, will sutticiently appear from the descrip-
tion given of them elsewhere.
The fact that a chance commuincation between tho Kingsmill
Group and Ascension Island has taken place very lately, though in
the ojiposite direction to that here supposed, was learned from M.
Maigret, French missionary at the Sandwich Islands, to whom we
are inilebted for muih valuable information. During his stay at
Banabe. in 1837, he saw a man who had been drifted thither in a
canoe from an island called Mnruki, and who informed M. Maigret,
among other things, that his people were accustomed to make a sweet
drink called taknniir, unlike any thing to be found at Ascension.
Mtinihi is one of the Tarawan group, and their kdiace (with the
article, te kiirave,) is a beverage made of the sweet juice drawn from
the spalhe of the cocoa-nut tree.
But an examination of tho Tarawan vocabulary has led to other
conclusions not less unexpected than curious. A great number of
words in this dialect are found to have an evident adinity to the cor-
responding terms in the \'ilian, — tho dilference being oidy such as
would be produced by the dillerent pronunciation of the two lan-
guages. Thus the t' of the Vitian is changed in the Tarawan to r ;
the c to H- (or it is omitted) ; the / to ;• or // ; and tho compound let-
ters 7>ib, 11(1, nilr, are reduced to the simple elements b ox p, d or /, and
/•, or el.se omitted entirely, thus —
ITIAN.
TAB.\«AN.
8.\M<>.tX.
Iii'i,
tari.
tri, .
lirotlior.
lU'd,
lira, .
iiirnl.
imiiit'.
t'tiimi,
riiinii.
lllllll,
oiilrij;);i'r.
Uflt'il,
Orii, .
iiiaiii,
low.|i(k'.
rial.
ifii, .
. Jfi, .
Iiiiw iiiiiiiy
villi.
viriini,
iininniiKi, .
raiiiUiw.
Off I, .
It unit,
^itn'ini,
tn .swim.
liiko.
niiko.
iilii, sail, .
to i^ii.ciiriie
Ink a.
nuk, .
lllllll.
surf.
O C K A N I C M I U II A T U) N a
101
vrriAN.
TAKAW tM.
V'lli,
iiinki,
fttitiiu.
to riY-koii.
klHI,
kiiiiki,
Jvinu,
let |iiiicli.
kllHU,
kiiiiii,
'ni, .
Id i-nl.
k'li, .
kiiiii,
— .
nntivc.
/«. .
ri>, .
miilu.
(|iiii't.
tciikti,
t/V/^(l,
ii'ii, .
riM)t,
k(iri.
kttri\
mill.
lo i4crn|>i'.
liikii.
htkii.
tW/ll,
lu Kliiy, n-Hide,
tiiiiu'm,
kiui-niitiuii.
iiiianiifi, .
yodltTiluy.
llJOy ICI (il»l,
r.i, .
oik; .
raiiiiiii'.
iiiiiiiiari, lliiii.
miiiiidr.
viiinii,
wi'iik, lifldf.
timu.
II mu,
nil, .
Iliy.
Mil, .
till, ,
Ii; .
Ciitiin" purticlo
ni, .
III, .
n,
ciC.
nilmi.
Imi, .
lllfll.
viTy.
m/io,
. bo, . .
i/l)il,/rtlli, .
to liiicl, mcc't.
iiiUiiji,
llOl), .
jx; .
lli^lll.
ItlllllKI,
tllpll.
lusi, .
|l|llC'l'.
mliiilii.
hiiliirii.
jKiii/i,
iliirk.
?nliii.
till, .
JH-Iir/,),
\\\Uv.
ndiiiiK/iii, .
tiii/iii,
miiiii,
|irrsinlly.
mliiiiii,
tOIIIII,
III ill,
to Niick.
mloku.
liikii, .
Jinjii,
top.
luiuku.
Ilk II, ,
tun, .
liiick.
nilra.
nirii.
Iitin, .
blnO.I.
aiDii/rr,
iiiirii.
j)iil>iilii.
to shine.
Tills list could be greatly cxtoiided, hut the fDro^oiiicf will be
suflicii'iit to show that the Vitisui aiul I'arawau have derivcil uiany
of their words from u common source, iitid that this source is not the
Polynesian. \Vc have no means of determining if these words are
found in the lanj^uayc of Banabe, but it certaiidy is not improbable.
Wc have seen, in the description \r\\c\\ of the natives of tliat island,
that they are of two classes, dilferin}^ so much in color and features
as to make a dilTerence of origin hi<|;hly probable. Tiic one, which
includes all the chiefs and free natives, is evidently of the yellow
Microiu'sian race ; the other is ascribed, both liy Admiral Liitke and
O'Connell, to the Papuan or Melanesian. At present thej- speak one
languajfe, which is, perhaps, fornuxl by a fusion of their original
idioms. In this case, a part of the Hanabean tonirue would have a
cognsite origin with the greater part of the Vitiiin. The words of
Melunesiaa origin, in the former tongue, would be brought by the
IM
KT II MHi K.\ I'll V.
emiKiTintH to tlio Kiiijjsmill riroiip, iiiid tlioro, (N'rlmpH, unil('r(»o somo
fartluT iilttTiitioii liy a inixtiirr willi the Siummii.
If will Ik* ri'iiu'iiil)i'ro(l lliiit O'Coiiiu'll, in N|)onkin(f of llio voluntary
omi^'ratioim which take place IVciii Haiialx' (ante, |). Nft), ohsorvps
that those wiio coni|>oso them are nioMlly ol the lower elaMses, (i. e. iho
Si(juitx, of I'npiian origin.) Kroni tiie suinrior inimbom of the latter,
it would prohahly lio the same with a I'liiiitive war-party. In this
way we may account for the hrowmsh complexion, midway between
tho yellow of the Polynesian, and the dusky hue of the Fecjeean,
which distinguishes the natives of most of the Kini^smill Islands. It
is evident, moreover, that in such an emigration, the strict suhordina-
tion between the higher castes of chiefs and gentry, and their nume-
rous serfs, wonlil not Ix; easily maintain»"tl. 'I'he former would bo
com|)elled, eith(>r to unite and become confounded with the latter, a
measure abhorrent to all their prejudiceH,— or to separate from them
entirely. The latter course is certainly that which they would l»c
likely to pursue, if it were possible; tind we may thus account for
one cluster of the Kini^smill islands (that of Makin) bein^ inhabited
by people t>f a li^fhter hut; than the rest, with many cnsloms and
traits of character distinu'uishiutr them from the southern natives, and
assiinilatinjf them to the proper Micronesian race.
It will be observed that some of the words <riven above, as common
to the \'itian and Tarawau, are of Malaisian orij^in, (thou;,'h distinct
from the Polynesian,) — as, tari. younyer brother ; iv(t, name ; ninii,
thy, \.c. This is readily accounted for from the mixed nature o|' (ho
P;ipuan laiij^ua^c, as elscwheri- di'scribed (p. 1*'!.) In this way, also,
are explained some i,'rainniatical peculiarities, such as the allixeil
pcssessive pronouns common to both, and evidently from the same
source ; as,
VITIAN.
>tiillil,
IdtHlhl)!!!,
tdtnaiHii,
tdiiiiimi.
T»H\» A\.
hllllil,
ttiiiian,
III Ilium II,
tiiiiiiiiiii, .
liillirr.
my liillnr.
Iliy liilliiT.
Iiis liillior.
Of the time which has rlap.spd siiu'c the islands were peopled, we
have no means of forming a [uisitivc judgment. But from the dis-
tinctness with which the native account of this event is detaileil, with
tlie paucity of other traditions, and from viirious concurring circum-
stances, .. seems probable that the arrival of the iirst colonists took
()(• K A N II' Ml ti It A T I O N H.
io:»
pliiro at a coiiipiirativfly iiuxlorii ihtumI, not rnon-. prrhnps, than fivi-
or NIX leiilnrics n^o. 'I'lu' natives say llial, a ti-w generations back,
the iiuinher of peoph) was nmeli U'sm than at prexent, wars wero Iuhh
Ireipieiit, and the eonimnnieation l)et\v»;eii the iHhinils whh (roe ami
Nufe Tilt' ^raiKh'atlier of the present kiii^ of Apainaina, more than
II hniiilreil yearn a^^o, vJNited uvery island ol'tlie ^roiip, tor the purpose
olHeeinj; wliat lie considered the world. At present, Iroin the hostility
which prevails hetweeii tlio dillerent dusters, such nn uiidertakin{|{
would \h' iiiipossihle. We huvu elsewhere (p \'H)) ntutud our reasonH
for belioviiiK that the name Saniim, for the Navit^utor CJroup, from
which amui is prohahly derived, is of late adoption.
One word of the 'rarnwan lanj^uatje, c///, may be noticed as an
evidence of the communication which exists amoii'.^ the tribes of the
Pacific. The Feejee Clroup, Kotnina, \ aitupii, and the Kinj^smill
Group, are situated nearly in a line from north to south, with inter-
vals of aitout five dej^rees between them. 'I'liey are inhabited liv
ditl'erent races, having distinct laii^;uaL'es and customs. At N'aitiipu.
the nativ(>s called some liaiianas which we had on board (a fruit that
docs not j,'row on their island )y//// n Hiituma, or bananas of llotuma,
showinj,' that they had intercourse with the latter island, 'riiey also
called an iron a.ve toki fill, i. e. I'eejee axe, and we may presume that
they first acipiired a knowledge of iron at Uotuma, to whidi island it
had been brought from Viti. From Vaitupu the metal was probably
carried, in like manner, to the Kinijsinill Islands, where the word fih
became biti, and was used no longer as an epithet, but as a comnKui
noun.*
SYNOPSIS OI' MIXICI) LANOfACfES.
Tlie table and formulte which follow are to be considered merely
as expressing, in a succinct form, the conclusions with respect to the
composition of some of the Oceanic languages which have been stated
in the course of this essav as the result of our investigations.
* S«"<' what IS said (pagfs 1U0, 13U,) coiiccrniiiy Iho ehuiiji"' iii meaning which proper
niinnos undergo at lh«; ikiohi/ ranuvt.
49
104
KT II N Oli K A V II Y.
I
/'
:i' I'olviiesinn liniiii-li,
A. Mnlnv moo.
II. Molanosinn rnoo. ('. Micronosian race.
_/^
n Mnltiijiiaii hranoli.
I
k /
Pii|>im (It+u )
A-
Viti(H+"+ii )
ltniml).>(('+U + ii )
./
_/
'rnrawa (C-f H+a'+a")
In this table the Micronesian race is regarded as j)erfectly distinct
from the otliers, wliich is not altogether correct; as it is no where to
he found (as far as our information e.vtends) in a pure state, hut
always with a greater or less mixture of the .Malay. Moreover, it
must he l)orne in mind, that tiie view here given of the composition
of the Banabean tongue rests, in part, on a mere a.ssumption, which,
though probable, is not to be regartled as proved.
() I! I (i I .\ <» K i II i: r (( I, V N i: s i .v n s.
That the I'olynesians belong to the saiTie race as that which peo-
ples tlie Ivist Indian Islamis is, at present, universally adinitled. If
any doubt had remained on this jMunt, the labors of Win. \'on Hum-
boldt and Professor Huschinan. would have been siilhcient to set it at
rest. Having traced all the principal triiics of Polynesia back to the
8amoan and 'Tongaii (iroups. it lu^\t becomes a cpiestion of interest,
how far the intormation which we now po.sscss will enable us to
verify the sup;)osed einit;ration of the first settlers in these groups
Irom some point in the Malaisiaii .Vrcliiprlago I'rom the almost
total Ignorance in which we yet remain of the dialects spoken in the
eastern part of this archipelago, our means of forming a judgment are
OC K A N 1 (■ Ml (I K A r I O \ S
1«5
vory limited. Ntnortlu'lcss \\v may vciitiirf to olVcr a conj urc,
liascd iipim sticli nil amount of (•viiii'iicc as si-cms to briny; it at least
williiii the l)oiiiuis ol proliahility.
I. The natives of 'i'onjfii and Samoa, as has been betoro slated,
refer the oriij[in of their race to a lar^e island, situated to the north-
west, ealled l)y the former lii.lotii, by the latter I'lilnlti and Vurnlii
As the / and ;• are used indilVerently in tlieso dialects, it would be
doubtful which was the proper suelliny; ; hut the Feejeeans. who dis-
tin^uisli i)etwei'u these two elements, have borrowed this and many
other traditions from iheir eastism neighbors, and call the island in
ipiestion Mhitrntu. Hence we may conclude that liitroln or Viirntu
is the correct form. Now the easternmost island inhabited by the
yellow Malaisian race, in the Kast Indian Archipelajro, is that called
on our maps Ihniro m Hooro. It lies west ofCeram, which is occu-
pied in the interior by Papuans, and on the coast by Malays. .Apart,
therefore, from any resemblance of name, if wc derive the Polynesians
from that onc^ of the Malaisian Islai.ds which lies nearest to them, \\v
should refer them to the above-mentioned lioi/ro.
"2. M. de llienzi informs us (Oceanit% vol. iii. p. ;184,) that he met.
in the Hast Indies, a iJoujrhis captain, w iio had visiliid the Solomon
Islands. The IJugis are a tribe of ("elebcs, of the .sanu^ race and the
same de^rec of civilization with the natives ()f Houro. The Solomon
[slands are at nearly two-thirds of the distance from CAjlebes and
Bouro to Samoa.
;j. We have had occasion before to cite the description i^iven by
Quiros, of Taumaco, whose inhabitants are "ol'dillerent kinds, yellow,
black, and mulattoes." One item of information which he has re-
cordeil respcclinir the island is very important. He sa\s tin- prisoner
wh<M!i lie took from thence iidbrined him tiiat there w.is oi' Taumaco
a mai\ " who had brouglit from a larij;e co\intry nanu'd Pouro, some
arrows pointed w ilh a metal as while as silvi-r."'* This man «as a
native of Taumaco and a yreat pilot. I'ouro was described as a lar^c
country, very popidous, — the inhabitants of a dark color, and warlike
Taumaco, according' to the position assigned to it by Qmids, as well
as the information obtained by Dillon, lii's five or six dcLjrecs east ol
the Solomon Isles, and of course, st) much nearer to Samoa, ll seems
most likely, that the native j)ilot here mentioned had not been himsell
to the Mast Indies, but that he had visited the Solomon Isles, and
there obtained the arrows tipped with metal which had been l)rouylit
* liiiriu'v'.s lli.sliiiy ol' Voyiigi'S, vol. ii. |). IMS.
196
ET IINOG RA 1' II V.
by traders from Bouro. These places miffht easily have become con-
founded in the mind of the captive, who was not himself a native of
Taumaco, but a slave brought thither from another island. On this
supposition, the statement that the natives of Pouro (or rather of the
place visited by the Taumaco pilot) were of a dark color, would apply
to the Solomon Islands. However this may be, the arrows must have
been obtained in some way from the East Indies, and they were
ascribed by the natives to an island bearing a name very similar to
one which exists there.
As to the meaning of the terminal syllable tu, in the Polynesian
Purotii (if, adopting this hypothesis, we consider it an affix,) we are,
of course, left to conjecture. Judging from analogy, as in the cases
of Tonga-tabu, Nina-tabu, it may iiave the force of " sacred" or
"divine;"' for it must be recollected that the natives of Samoa and
Tonga look upon this island not only as the country of their progeni-
tors, but also as the residence of their gods. The syllable tu is per-
haps that which is found in the Samoan aitu, spirit, and the otiia,
atiia, etna, which, in the different Polynesian dialects, signify divinity.
Tuan is the word for " lortl'" in Malay, and himtu for " spirit" in
Malay, Javanese, and Bugis.
1
to
to
'.*■
»>
"'(*•
Tiihhiih 1
IllkWII
fc'fWW
9^m^
KiliMiah.t
Hhf
&mmm
r«itiiiiii s.'iii.h
Mlt-w
(__ _-o
SiihnpliM
H.-.I
MHB
W;h|I.'1||hi
flhtr
m^mam
T'liiiiiik
t*iirf/*
«qnM»
h;tlii)iii\tt
fin '-14
i«2nf.'?,-*
l.iknit
Nn-wH
49EJIUtir!3
1 iiMi.niii
ii>.n.,ti,t
-—--J
K'ni.v()c.i;.\i'iii('.\i. XAi-
jiJovyjiia-/>Ji:iJ»iij-riJOj'-/>j£VJiJiiia
IIT H IIAI.r.
»
»
«>
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
In the long and narrow section of this continent included between
the Rocky Mountains and the Pacific, and extending from the country
of the Esquimaux on the north to the Californian peninsula on the
south, there are found, perhaps, a greater number of tribes speaking
distinct languages than in any other territory of the same size in the
world. Not only do these tribes differ in their idioms, but also in
personal appearance, character, and usages. For convenience of
description, however, they may be arraiiged under four classes or
divisions, each of which includes a number of tribes resembling one
another in certain general traits.
1. The Northwest dimsion. The tribes of this class inhabit the
coast between the peninsula of Alaska, in latitude 60°, and Queen
Charlotte's Sound, in latitude 52°. This part of the country was not
visited by us, and the information obtained concerning it was derived
chiefly from individuals of the Hudson's Bay Company. They
described the natives as resembling the white race in some of their
physical characteristics. They are fair in complexion, sometimes
with ruddy cheeks; and, what is very unusual among the aborigines
of America, they have thick beards, which appear early in life. In
other respects, their physiognomy is Indian, — a broad face, with wide
cheek-bones, the opening of the eye long and narrow, and the fore-
head low.
From the accounts received concerning them, they would appear
to be rather an ingenious people. They obtain copper from the
mountains which border the coast, and make of it pipe-bowls, gun-
charges, and other similar articles. Of a very fine and hard slate
they make cups, plates, pipes, little images, and various ornaments,
wrought with surprising elegance and taste. Their clothing, houses,
and canoes, display like ingenuity, and are well atlapted to their cli-
mate and mode of life. On the other hand, they are said to be filthy
in their habits, and of a cruel and treacherous disposition.
50
198
ETHNOGRAPHY.
2. The North-Oregon dirhion- All the tribes nortii of the Colum-
bia, except those of the first section, and some of the WulUnvallas,
belong to this division, as well as three or four to the south of that
river. It includes the 'rahkaU-Uiiikivd family (the Carriers, Qua-
liojjuas, Tlatskauies, and Unii^uas), \\\v'VnihaiU-SeliKh family (Shoush-
wap.s Flathcads, Chikoilish, Cowelits, and Killamuks), with the
ChiiKxih.i, the Ya/iones (or southern Kilianiuks) and, in part, the
Ca/apiii/(i.s. The Noulkas, and other tribes of Vancouver's Island,
also belonsjt to it.
The people of this division are amon<f tiie ugliest of their race.
They are below the middle size, with squat, clumsy forms, very broad
faces, low foreheads, lank black hair, wide nioutiis, and a coarse rouijh
skin, of a tanned, or dingy copper complexion. This description
applies more particularly to the tribes of the coast. Those of the
interior (tiie Carriers, Shousiiwaps, and Selish,) are of a better cast,
beint; ;renerally of the middle heigiit, with features of a less exagge-
rated harshness. In the coast-tribes, the opening of the eye has very
fre(|nentlv the ol)li(iue direction proper to the Mongol physiognomy ;
but in the others tiiis peculiarity is less common.
The intellectual and moral characteristics of these natives are not
more pleasing than tlie physical. They are of moderate intelligence,
coarse and dirty in their iiabits, indolent, deceitful, and pa.ssionate.
They are rather superstitious than religious, are greatly addicted to
gaml)linjj:. and grossly libidinous. All these disagreeable ipialities
are most conspicuous in the tribes near the mouth of the Columbia,
and become less marked as we advance into the interior, and towards
tlie north. It is also at the same point (the mouth of the Columbia)
that the custom of comi)ressing the head prevails to the greatest
extent. The Chinooksarethe most distinguished for their attachment
to this singular usage, and from them it appears to have spread
on every side, to the Chikailish on the north, tlie U'allawallas and
Nez-perces on the east, and tiie Killamuks and Calapnyas on the
south ; tiie degree of distortion diminishing as we recede from the
centre.
It is not a little singular that all the tribes of this division (e.vcept
the Calapuyas, who seem to hold a middle position,) s[)eak languages
which, thougli of distinct families, are ail remarkable for the extreme
harshness of their pronunciation, while those of the division which
follows, are, on the contrary, unusually soft and harmonious.
3. The South-Oreyon division. To this belong the Sahaptin family
^ M
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
199
Nez-pcrcos and Wallawiillas), tlie Wuitlnlpu (Cayuse and Molele),
tlie Slioshnni (Snakes, Boiiiiaks, &c.), tlie f.iitiinmi, the Shasties, the
Pulailix, and probaljly olliur tribes towards the south and east. They
approach, both in appearance anil in character, the Indians cast of
the Rocky Mountains, thoui,di still inferior tp them in many respects.
They are of the middle height, slender, with long faces and bold
features, thin lips, wide cheek-bones, smooth skins, and the usual
tawny complexion of the American tribes. They are cold, taciturn,
high-tempered, warlike, fond of hunting and of all exercises rerpiiring
boldness and activity. To one ascending the Columbia, the contrast
presented by the natives above and below the Great Falls (the Chi-
nooks and Wallawallas) is very striking. No two nations of Europe
differ more widely in looks and character than do these neighboring
subdivisions of the American race.
4. 'I'he Califoniiun division. The natives of this class are chiefly
distinguished by their dark color. Those of Northern or Upper Cali-
fornia are a shade browner than the Oregon Indians, while some
tribes in the peninsula are said to be nearly black. In other res[)ects
they have the physiognomy of their race, broad faces, a low forehead,
and lank, coarse hair. They are the lowest in intellect of all the
North American tribes, approaching to the stupidity of the Austra-
hans. They are dull, indolent, phlegmatic, timid, and of a gentle,
submissive temper. The e.\[)erimcnt, which was successfully tried,
of collecting them, like a herd of cattle, into large enclosures called
missions, and there setting them to work, would probably never have
been undertaken with the Indians of Oregon, — and, if undertaken,
would assuredly have failed.
GENERAL O H S E R V .\ T IONS.
The Indians west of the Rocky Mountains seem to be, on the
whole, inferior to those east of that chain. In stature, streno;th, and
activity, they are much below them. Their social organization is
more imperfect. The two classes of chiefs, those who preside in time
of peace, and those who direct the operations of war, — the ceremony
of initiation for the young men, — the distinction of clans or totems,
— and the various important festivals which e.xist among the eastern
tribes, are unknown to those of Oregon. Their conceptions on reli-
gious subjects are of a lower cast. It is doubtful if they have any
200
ETII N «)(i H A I' II V.
idea of a supremo beinp. The word for qml was one of those origi-
nally selected for the vocabulary, but it was found impossible, with
the assistance of the missionaries, and of interpreters well skilled in
the principal languages, to obtain a proper synonym for this term in
a single dialect of Oregon. Their chief divinity is called the wolf,
and seems, from their descriptions, to be a sort of compound being,
half beast and half deity.
In comijaring the various races with which we have come in con-
tact, it is impossible not to be siruck with a certain similarity of
character between the American aborigines in general, but more
especially the natives of Oregon, and the Australians, — the latter
appearing like an exaggerated and caricatured likeness of the former.
The Indian is proud and reserved; the Australian sullen and haughty.
The former is, at once, cautious and fierce ; the latter is cowardly and
cruel. The one is passionate and prompt to resent an injury ; the
other is roused to fury by the slightest imagined insult. The super-
stition of the Indian is absurd ami irrational; that of the Australian
is stupid and ridiculous. The Indian, who acknowledges a chief, yet
renders him such deference only as he thinks proper ; the Australian
owns no superior, and has not even a name tor such an office. It
might be a point of some interest to determine how far this similarity,
in many respects, between two races otherwise so distinct, has arisen
from a similarity in their position and circumstances.
The mode of life of the Oregon Indiuns, especially those of the
interior, is so peculiar that it is difficult to determine how it should
be characterized. They have no fi.xed habitations, \ yet they are
not, properly speaking, a wandering people. Nearly every month in
the year they change their place of residence, — but the same month
of every year finds them regularly in the same place. The circum-
stances which have given rise to this course of life are the following :
1. The territory of Oregon abounds, btiyond e.xample, in esculent
roots, of various kinds, which, without cultivation, grow in sufficient
quantities to support a considerable population. More than twenty
species, most of them palatable, and obtainable, generally, with
little labor, are found in diffi^rent parts of this territory. At cer-
tain seasons, the natives subsist almost entirely upon them. As
the diffi;rent species come to maturity at ditTerent times, the people
remove from one root-ground to another, according to the time when
experience has taught them to look for a new crop.
N (t rrr II w k s r i; it .\ a m k k i c a.
801
•2. ScviTal kinds of fruits ;itui ix-rrics iirc fonnil, at <'('rtaiu seasons,
in yroat ahumlancc. and dIUt anotlipr cnust! lor a temporary cliaiige
of place.
3. At a particular pericxl of the year, the Nnliiioii nncend the river
to deposit ttu'ir spawn, and tlieii the Indians asscrnlile in u;ri'at
numbers on the banks of the streams, for the ()urpose of takiii),' them
Two months afterwards, tlie fish appear ajrain, lloatinu; in an ex-
hausted condition down ttie current, and though liy no means so
ajireeable for food, are yet taken in lar;,'e (piantities, principally for
winter stores. These two seasons of lisliin;^ are the occasion of two
removals.
4. The tribes of the interior depend, in part, for their clothing, on
the buffalo skins which they obtain, either by barter or by hunting.
And for both these purposes it is necessary for them to visit the region
near the foot of the l{ocky Mountains, frequented by that animal.
This, however, does not, except with some of the Shoshonees, give
rise to a general removal of the trilje, i)ut merely an cxpeilition of the
principal men, their families being left, in the mean time, encamped
in some place of safety.
The tribes near the coast remove less freipiently than those of the
interior. Some of them spend the summer on the sea-shore, and the
winter in a siieltered nook on the banks of an inland stream. Others
do not change their place of residence at all ; but at the approach of
summer, they take down the heavy planks of which their winter
habitiitions are made, bury them in the ground, where they will be
outoftlie way of injury, and having put up a temporary dwelling of
bark, brushwood, and matting, feel no apprehensions at leaving it for
two or three weeks at a time, to lish, hunt, collect roots, and gather
fruit.
To these general descriptions it will be proper to add a more
particular account of those tribes, of whose idioms we have been able
to obtain vocabularies. We shall take them in the order in which
they stand in the Synopsis.
1. T 11 E T A II K A L 1 . V M K W A F A M I L Y.
A. TAHKALl OR CARRIERS.
The country of the Tahkali (orTacuUies) includes the region north
of the Oregon Territory, termed by the English New Caledonia. It
51
:H
•20'2
KT M N 0»i K A I' II V.
fxtfiids rnuii litlitiiiie .VJ' 'MY, wlurf it iMirdors on the coiiiitry i>f tlic
Slioiisliiijis, to liilitiitlc r>iV , inoluilmt,' Siuiiison's Uivi-r. • On llu> tnist
art' till- IJockv Mountains, sc|iaratiii^ tlu'iii I'roin tlio Siciiiii, unci on
tlio west the riii'm'il chain winch runs parallel witli tlu> coast. 'I'lic
country is well watered with nnmcrons streams and lakes, most of
wliicli discliar^re themselves into l''ra/i'r's Hivcr. Our inl'ormation
with respect to this people is derived from a u;entleman comiectod
with the llndson's Hay Company, who resided several years ainont(
them in cliar^,'o of u fort; it will he tonnd to a^ree t;i!nerally with
tlio account jfiven hy llarinon, who occui)ietl the same situation
hctwcen the years IMM) and I'^lt).
The Tahkali are divided into eleven clans, or minor tribes, whose
names are — begimiiiit,' at the south — as follows: (I) the 'Dn'itiii or
Td/koli/i : {'2) the 'l'silk6tin or Cfiiirotiii : (H) the S(tski',lin ; (J) the
'r/ut/iiitiii ; (.'■)) the Tsiilsm'ilin ; {(<) the Stilniuitin : ^7) tht; SlshdiiH-
till : C^) the Sdllittiitin : (9) the Sikozliniitiii ; (10) the 'Valshiniilin .
and (11) the linhim Indians. 'I"he iiumher of persons in these clans
varies from fifty to three hundred. All speak the same laiigua^,'e,
with some slight dialectical variations. The Sikiuii (or Secunnie)
nation has a language radically the same, hut with greater dillerence
oi dialect, passing gradually into that of the Heaver and Chippewyan
Indians.
The Taidvali. though a branch of the m-eat Chi|)pe\vyan (or Atha-
pascan)! stock, have several |)eculiarities in their customs and cha-
racter which distinguish thein from other members of this family.
Ill personal aiipearaiice they resemble the tribes on the l'|)[)er
Columbia, though, on the whole, a better-looking race. They are
rather tall, witli a tendency to grossness in their features and figures,
particularly among tlie women. They are somewhat lighter in coin-
ple.vion than the triijcs of the south.
Like all Indians who live principally upon fish, and who do not
' I'or llic (Xiii't liniils 1)1' till- liiriliirics ik'cii|iiic1 Iiv tlif <Ii111tciiI triU'.-i, llic rcailiT is
rcrcrrcd In IIk; ai-corniiiiiiyin;; l';tliiu);;ra|iliiriil .Map, which has liccn con.structoil, with
iniK'h cuH' anil hilmr, from iiirDniialiou iloriMil, in most I'asrs, iVnni ihi' iiativci thcni-
Sf^lvcs, mill ffiiiHrmiMl by riiis.Mioiiarii s, hiuilrrs, oH'iciTs of Ihi' lliiilsiurs lUiy Coinpaiiy,
.iiul iilhiT.s who hail hail ;;imm1 n)i|inrtiiMilirs llir ai-i|iiiriii'_' kiiiiwh il;.'i' mi thin siihjcct.
'I'lii' liiiiiiiilanrs ari' iisirilly (li'trriiiiinil liy the pliysiral ruiiliirinalioii ol'lho roimlry, ami
arc well iuiiUtsIihiiI ainmii,' ihr iialivis, a riniiiiislaiiri' which lias riiahlrd us li> lay
llii-in down, llir thi' niosl part, with ininiilriir-s ami prt'i'isinii.
+ See Mr. llallalin's "Synopsis (ifllw Indiuii TrilK's,'" p. 10.
N (» II T II \V K S T K It N A M K It I C A.
908
ac(|uire tlio lialilts of activity proper to llic lnmlinn trilmH, they ure
exccssivclv iiulolfiit iiiul lillliv, and, us it iiatiiriil conriiiiiitiuit, Imse
niitlMt'pruvcd in I'lianictcr. They aro liiiul ol' unt'tiioiis Mihstiwict's,
and driiili iinmciiso (iimiilitios of oil, wliii'li they ohtniii from fish iinil
wild animals. Thoy also licsmoar tln-ir iMKiics with tjrfaso and
colored earths. They like their meat putrid, ami often lease it until
its stench is, to any hut themselves, insupportahle. Salmon roes ure
Hometiines i)urie(l in the earth and left for two or three inontiis to
putrefy, in which state they are esteemed a delii'acy.
The natives are prone to sensuality, and chastity amoin( the women
is unknown. At the same lime, they seem to i>e almost devoid of
natural alfection. Children are considered hy them a hurden, and
they often use means to destroy thorn heforo hirth. Their relijrious
ideas are very ^ross and coid'used. It is not ki uvn that thtiy have
any distinct ideas of a goil, or of the existence of tlie soul. They have
priests or "doctors," whose art consists in certain mummeries, in-
tended for incantations. When a corpse is hiirned, which is the
ordinary mode of disposinif of the dead, tlie priest, with many gesti-
culations and contortions, pretends to receive in his closed hands,
somethiiiij, — perhaps tlu! life of the deceased, — which he communi-
cates to some livin^f person hy throwint^ his hands towards him, and
nt the same time blowing upon him. This person then takes the
rank of the deceaseii, and assumes his name in addition to his own.
Of course, the priest always unil'i'staiids to whom this succession is
properly due.
If the deceased had a wife, she is all hut huriied alive with the
corpse, heiiifj compelled to lie upon it while the lire is liniiled, and
remain thus till the heat hecomes hcyond endurance. In I'ormer
times, when she attempted to hreak u\\n\ . she was pushed back into
the llaines hy tiic relations of her hrshand. and tiiiis olten severciv
injured. When the corpse is consumed, she collects the asiies and
deposits them in a little basket, which s! ■ always carries about with
her. At the same time, she I'fcoinrs tiie servant and drudifc of the
relations of her late lui.sband. \.ho exact of h.-r the severest lai)()r, and
treat her with every indiirnity. This lasts for two or three years, at
the end of which time a feast is made by all the kindred, and a l)road
post, liltcen or twenty feel hiiih, is sit up, and covered on the sides
wit 1 1 rude tiaubs, repre.sentiii^r tigures of men and animals of various
kit On the to[) is a box in which the ashes of the dead are |)laccd.
and allowed to remain until the post decays. After this ceremony,
11
> .
•20\
\:t II .\ ()»; II A I' II Y.
tlic widow is ivlensoil from lior state of servitude, and alloweil \o
marry again.
'I'lio Carriers arc not a warlike people, thousjh they sometimes have
quarrels with their neighhors, particidarly the trihes of the roast.
Hut these are ns\ially appeased without much dillieulty.
The Sikani, though speaking a language of the same family, dider
widely from the 'I'ahkali. in their eharaeter and customs. They live
a wandering life, and subsist hy the ehase. Tliey are a brave, hardy,
and aetive people, cleanly in their persons and habits, and, in general,
agreeing nearly with the usual idea of an American Indian. They
bury their dead, and have none of the customs of the Tahkali with
respect to them.
n. a. TL.VTSK.VX.M.
b. KWAMIIOQUA.
These are two small isolated bands, neither of them comprising
more than a hundred individuals, who roam in the mountains on each
side of the Columbia, near its month, the former on the north, and
the latter on the south side. They are separated from the river, and
from one another, by the Chinooks. ^I'hey build no permanent
habitations, but wander in the woods, subsisting on game, berries, and
roots. As might be e.xpei^ted, they are somewhat more i)old and
hardy than the tril)es on the river and coast, and, at the same time,
more wild and savage.
C. I'MKW.V, OH IMrmAS.
The Imhivd inhabit the upper i)art of the river of that name,
having the Kalapuya on the north, the Lntuami (I'lamets), on the
east, and the ISainstkla between them and the sea. They are sup-
posed to number, at present, not more than four hundred, having
been greatly reduced by disease. 'I'hey live in houses of boards and
mats, and derive their subsistence, in great part, (Vom the river.
Two, whom I saw, dill'ered but little from the Kalapuya, except that
they had not the heail flattened. One of them had reached the
Columbia through the Tlatskanai country, and it appeared that a
connexion of some kind existed between the two tribes.
2. It. K I r I' .\ .\ !I .\, O W C () I 'I' .\ ,N I K S, O U F L A T - H O W S.
This is a small tribe of about four hundred people, who wander in
I
\
N O |{ I' II W K S T K U N A M K K I C A.
SOS
the rniiiiccl and iiionntainous tract oiicloscd lu'tweeii the two nortlicrn
forks of tlu' Coluinl)ia. The Fhit-bow River and Ijake also bchnijj;
to tliem. They are great liiinters, and furnish large quantities of
peltry to the Ihidson's Bay Company, la former days, they wore
constantly at war with their neighbors, the Jllackfoot tribes, by
whose incursions they suffered severely. In appearance, character,
and customs, they resemble more tlic Indians east of the Rocky
Mountains than those of Lower Oregon.
:t. "1" S I 11 A I M - S !•; L I S II F A M I L V.
K. .slIl'SIlWArUMSIl, OK SIllTSllWArS, OR AlNAllS.
The Shushwaps possess the country bordering on the lower part of
F'razer's River, and its branches. From the vocabulary given by
Mackenzie of the dialect spoken at Friendly Village, on Salmon
River, in latitude 50° HO', and about ninety miles from the sea, it
appears that tiie natives of that village belong to this tribe. Beyond
them, according to Mackenzie, a dilTerent language is spoken, —
probably t!;rit of the llailtsa Indians, of whom some mention will be
made hereafter.
The name of Atiiah is given to this people by the Tahkali, in
whose language it means stniiK/cr or forrigiwr. The Shushwaps
differ so little from their southern neighbors, the Salish, as to render
a particular description unnecessary. By a census taken a few years
since, the nund)er of men in the tribe was ascertained to bo about
four hundred. The whole niunber of souls at present may be rated
at twelve hundred.
K. SELISU, SALISll. OR FI.ATllIiADS.
llow the name of p'lathead came to be ap|)lied to this people cannot
well be conjectured, as the distortion to which the word refers is not
practised among them. They inhabit the country about the upper
part of the Columbia and its tributary streams, the Flathead, Spokan,
and Okanagan Rivers. The name includes several independent tribes
or biuuls, of which the most important are the Salisii proper, the
Kullespelm, the Soayalpi, the Tsakaitsitlin. and the Okinakan. The
number of souls is reckoned, in all, at about three thousand.
The Salish appear to hold, in many respects, an intcrinediate place
206
E Til NOG R A PU V.
I
■ r
.■ti I
between the tribes of the coast, and those to the south and east. In
stature and proportion they are superior to the Ciiinooks and Chikai-
lish, but interior to the 8ahaptin. Tlieir features are not so regular
nor tlieir skins so clear as those of the latter, while they fall far short
of tlie grossuess of the former. In bodily strength they are inferior to
the whites.
A description of the habits of this tribe will give a good idea of the
life of systematic wandering peculiar to the natives of Oregon. They
derive their subsistence from roots, fish, berries, game, and a kind of
moss or lichen which they find on trees. At the opening of the year,
as soon as the snow disappears, (in March and April), they begin to
search for the pohpoh, a bulbous root, shaped somewhat like a small
onion, and of a peculiarly dry and spicy taste. This lasts them till
May, when it is exchanged for the spatlam, or " bitter root," which is
a slender, white root, not unlike vermicelli ; when boiled, it dissolves
like arrow-root, and forms a jelly of a bitter but not disagreeable
flavor. Some time in June, the itivlta or camass comes in .season,
and is found at certain well-known "grounds" in great quantities. In
shape it resembles the pohpoh, and when baked for a day or two in
the iiround, has a consistency and taste not uidike those of a boiled
chestnut. It supplies them for two or three months, and while it is
most abundant — in June and July — the salmon make their appear-
ance, and are taken in great numbers, mostly in weirs. This, with
these people, is the season when they are in the best condition,
having a plentiful supply of their two prime articles of food. During
this period, the men usually remain at the fishing-station, and the
women at the camass-ground, but parties are continually passing from
one to the other. August, during which the sui)plies from both these
source.- commonly fail, is the month lor berries, of which they some-
times collect enough both for immediate subsistence, and to dry for
winter. The service-berry and the choke-cherry are the principal
fruits of this kind which they .seek. In iSeptember, the "exhausted
salmon, ' or those which, having deposited their roes, are now about
to perish, are found in considerable numbers, and though greatly
reduced both in fatness and flavor, are yet their chief dependence,
when dried, for winter consumption. Should they be scarce, a
famine would be likely to ensue. At this season, also, they obtain
the mcsiiui, an inferior root, resembling somewhat, in appearance, a
parsnip. When baked, it turns perfectly black, and has a peculiar
taste, unlike that of any of our common roots. This lasts them
I
N O R T H W K S T E U N A M E R I C A.
207
through October, after which they must depend principally upon
their stores of dried food, and the game (deer, bears, badgers, squir-
rels, and wild-fowl of various kinds,) which they may have the good
fortune to take. Should both these sources fail, they have recourse
to the moss before-mentioned, which, though abundant, contains
barely sufficient nutriment to sustain life. Such is their want of
forethought and prudence, both in laying up and in consuming their
provisions, that there are very few who do not suffer severely from
hunger before the opening of spring. Indeed, like their hor.ses, they
regularly fatten up in the season of plenty, and grow lean and weak
before the expiration of winter.
As the different root-grounds and fishing-stations are at some
distance from one another, they are obliged to remove from one to
the other in succession, carrying with them, on their horses, all their
property. This is easily done, as their articles of furniture are few
and light, and their houses consist merely of rush-mats and skins,
stretched upon poles. In winter they seek out some sheltered spot,
which will supply their horses with food, and they then make their
dwellings more comfortable, by covering the mats with earth.
The Salish can hardly be said to have any regular form of govern-
ment. They live in bands of two or three hundred, chielly for the
sake of mutual support and protection. In former times there was
much fighting among these tribes, but they still looked upon one
another as portions of the same people. At present, by the infiuence
of the Hudson's Bay Company, these quarrels have been sup])ressed.
Intermarriages between tiiese bands are frecjuent, and in such cases
the husband commonly joins the band to which his wife belongs.
This proceeds, perhaps, from the circumstance that the woman does
the most for the support of the family, and will be better able to
perform her duties (of gathering roots, fruit, &c.,) in those places to
which she is accustomed. In fact, although the women are required
to do much hard labor, they are by no means treated as slaves, but,
on the contrary, have much consideration and authority. The stores
of food which they collect are regarded as, in a manner, their own,
and a husband will seldom take any of them without asking permis-
sion. The men, moreover, have to perform all the arduous labors of
the fishery and the chase.
They evince strong domestic feelings, and are very affectionate
towards their children and near relatives. Unlike the Sahaptin, and
some other tribes, they take particular care of the aged and infirm,
i 1
208
E T II N () (! R A I' II Y.
wlio tisvially faro the host of all. Tliero is, however, one custom
amonif tlieui, which seems to evince an oi)posite disposition. When
a man dies, leaving young children who are not ahle to defend them-
selves, his relations come in and .seize \ipon the most valuable
property, and particularly the horses, without regard to the rights of
the children. The natives acknowledge the inhumanity of the prac-
tice, and only defend it as an ancient custom received from their
fathers.
In every band there is usually one who, by certain advantages of
wealth, valor, and intelligence, acipiires a superiority over the rest,
and is termed the chief But his authority is derived rather from his
personal influence than from any law, and is exerted more in the
way of persuasion than of direct command. But if he is a man of
shrewdne.ss and of a determined character, he sometimes enjoys
considerable power. The punishment of delinquents is, of course,
regulated rather by circumstances than by any fixed code. Notorious
criminals are .sometimes punished by expulsion from the tribe or band
to whicii they belong.
They hail formerly, it is thought, a vague idea of a Supreme Being,
but tliey never addressed to him any worship. Their only religious
ceremonies were certain mummeries, performed under the direction
of the medicine-men, for the [)urpose of averting any evil with which
they might be threatenetl, or of obtaining some desired object, as an
abundant supply of food, victory in war, and the like. One of these
ceremonies, called by them SuhhisIi, deserves notice, lor the strangeness
of the idea on which it is founded. They regard the spirit of a man
as distinct from tlie living principle, and hold that it may be .separated
for a short time from the body without causing death, or without the
individual being conscious of the loss. It is necessary, however, in
order to prevent fatal consequences, that the lost spirit should be found
and restored as quickly as possible The conjuror or medicine-man
learns, in a dream, the name of the per.son who has suffered this loss.
Generally, there are several at the same time in this condition. He
then informs the unhappy individuals, who immediately employ him
to recover their wandering .souls. During the next night they go
about the village, from one lodge to another, singing and dancing.
Towards morning they enter a .separate lodge, which is closed up, so
as to be perfectly liark. A small hole is then made in the roof, through
which the conjuror, with a bunch of feathers, brushes in the spirits,
in the shape of small bit.s of bone, and similar substances, which he
N f) U T II VV E S T K II N A M K R I C A.
209
receives on a piece of matting. A fire is then li^lited, and the con-
juror proceeds to select out from the spirits such as belong to persons
already deceased, of which there are usually several ; and should one
of them be assitrned by mistake to a living person, he would instantly
die. He next selects the particular spirit belonging to each person,
and causing all the men to sit down before him, he takes the spirit of
one (i. e. the splinter of bone, shell, or wood, representing it), and
placing it on tiie owner's head, pats it, with many contortions and
invocations, till it descends into the heart, and resumes its proper
place. When all are thus restored, the whole party unite in making
a contribution of food, out of which a public feast is given, and the
remainder becomes the perquisite of the conjuror.
Like the Sahaptin, the Salish have many childish traditions con-
nected with the most remarkable natural features of the country, in
which the prairie-wolf generally bears a conspicuous part. What
could have induced them to confer the honors of divinity upon this
animal cannot be imagined. They do not, however, regard the wolf
as an object of worship, but merely suppose that in former times it
was endowed with preternatural powers, which it e.verted after a very
whimsical and capricious fashion. Thus, on one occasion, being
desirous of a wife (a common circumstance with him), the Wolf, or
the divinity so called, visited a tribe on the Spokan River, and
demanded a young woman in marriage. His request being granted,
he promised that thereafter the salmon should be abundant with
them, and he created the rapids, whicii give them facilities for taking
the fish. Proceeding farther up, he made of each tribe on his way
the same request, attended with a like result. At length he arrived
at the territory of the Skitsuish ( Cmir d'alene) ; they refused to
comply with his demand, and he therefore called into existence the
great Falls of the Spokan, which prevent the fish from ascending to
their country. This is a fair sample of their traditions.
G. SKITSUISH, OR C(EUR d'aLENE INDIANS.
We saw, at Fort Colville, the chief of this tribe, whose name was
Stalaam. He told us that his tribe could raise ninety men, and the
whole number of souls in it may therefore be estimated at between
three and four hundred. They live about the lake which takes its
name from them, and lead a more settled life than the other tribes of
this region. As the salmon cannot ascend to their lake, on account of
53
t
t !
!i
210
KTHNOORAPII Y.
the Falls of the Spokan, anil as these natives seldom go to hunt the
buffalo, their principal subsistence is derived from roots, game, and
the smaller kinds of fish. Some of them have lately begun to raise
potatoes, and it seems likely that the arts of cultivation will, before
long, be common among ihcm. Being out of the usual track of
traders and trappers, their character has been less affected by inter-
course with the whites, than is the case with the tribes on the great
rivers. They speak a dialect of the Salish, and resemble in appear-
ance the other natives belonging to this stock.
The origin of the appellation by which tiiis tribe is known to the
whites deserves to be noticed, as an example of the odd circumstances
to which these nicknames are sometimes due. The first who visited
the tribe were Canadian traders, one of whom, it appears, was of a
close, niggardly temper. The natives soon remarked this, and the
chief at length gave his sentiments upon it, Indian fashion, observing
that the white man had the " heart of an awl," meaning, a contracted,
illiberal disposition — the term anl being used by them as we some-
times employ the word jrin, to denote a very trilling object. The
expression was rendered by the interpreter literally, " tin caiir
(Tah'iie," and greatly amused the trader's companions, who thence-
forth spoke of the chief who used it, as " the ccaur (Tulene chief," a
soubriquet which came in time to be applied to the whole tribe. It
was, perhaps, by some similar ''hicus a iio/t lucoido' process, that the
very inapplicable names of Ti'tes-phUtes and iVer-^jera's chanced to be
given to the Salish and Sahaptin, of whom the first never flatten the
head, and the latter rarely, if ever, have the nose perforated.
H. PISKWAUS OR PISCOUS.
This name properly belontr^ to the tribe who live on the small
river which falls into the Columbia on the west side, about forty
miles below Fort Okanagan. But it is here extended to all the tribes
as far down as the " Priest's Rapids," who speak the same dialect
with the first-named. This whole region is very, poor in roots and
game, and the natives who waniler over it are looked upon by the
other Indians as a miserable, beggarly people. They have, besides,
the reputation of being great thieves, which our experience went to
confirm.
It would appear, from the following list of their months, obtained
from the chief of one of their bands, that their habits are much the
N O R 'I" 11 \V E S T E II N A M E R I C A.
211
same with those of their neighbors, the Salish, — for the names of
many of the months have reference to some of their most important
usages. The name of the cliief was Sdkatatl-kiiiisam, or the Half-
Sun (commonly called Le grand Jiiine homme), and that of his clan
the Sinakaidusish, who live on the eastern hank of the Columbia,
opposite the Piskwaus. The chief from whom the Salish names
were obtained was called Silim-hmitl-mil/ikahk, or the Master-Raven,
but he is better known to the whites by the appellation of Cornelius.
His tribe is the Tsakait.sitli/i, on the lower part of the Spokan River.
It will be observed that one of the chiefs made only twelve names,
while the other reckoned thirteen. Both had some difficulty in call-
ing to mind all the names. In several, the Piskwaus chief is one
moon ahead of the other, which may arise from mistake, or possibly
from some slight difference of seasons at the two places.
riSKU'AL'8. SKLISII.
Sz/irusiis, . . Siisliktvii, . . . .
Skiniianiiiii, . S<jifi/suji,r.M,
Skiipn/skiltin, . S/.i/iiiamnn, n certain herb,
Shdsiilkii, . fikfijxilni, .snow gone,
KiifsusiiiiitdH, . Spiil/iim, l)itler-root, .
S/Siini, . . S/agamdtiiis, going to root-groun<l,
Kii pii katuyflin, . Itxu-n, ciuniis.s-root, .
Sildmji, . . Sddiilxlktiti^ hot,
1\tj>o mill III, . Sitiiiii]), gathering l)erries, .
I'dii/uilx/iX''"' • .SX(/«f,s, "exliausted salmon,"
akuui, . . Skiidi, dry, ....
Kiitiii-i/\/iiteii, hoiise-lmikling.
Siisttku-n , . Kcipndkualn, snow, .
Dcceinlier and January,
.lannnry and February,
l-'ebniary, &c.
March.
April.
May.
.lune.
'.Inly.
August.
Septeniter.
OctiilK'r.
Noveiid)cr and December.
I. SKWALE OR NISQUALI.Y.
K. KAWELITSK OR COWELITS.
J. TSIH.VILISH OR ClllKAlLISlI.
L. NS1ETSH\WIIS OR KII.I.AMUKS.
Of these four tribes, belonging to the family which we have termed
Tsihaili-Selish, the first iidiabits the shores of Puget's Sound, the
second the middle of the penitisula which lies west of this sound and
north of the Columbia, tlie third is settled on the banks of a small
stream known as the Cowelits, wliich falls into the Columbia south of
Puget's Sound, and the fourth is apart from the others, on the sea-
coast, south of the Cohnnbia. They differ considerably in dialect,
but little in appearance and habits, in which they resemble the
Cliinooks and other nciurhborinc tribes. Their estimated numbers
212
ETIINOGR A I' II Y.
are (or rather were in 1H40) for the Skwale, (500, the TMihailisli, 2000,
the Kawolitsk, UOO, iiiul \\w Nsictsliawiis, 700. Atiioii^ tlic 'I'siliui-
lish are iiiclwcleil tlio Ivwaiiiiitl iuul the Kweiiaiwitl (corruptiHl by
tho whites to Queen llytlie), who live near the coast, tliirty or forty
miles soutli of Cape Flattery, and wlio have each a peculiar dialect.
J. s A II .\ I'T I .\.
M. SAHAPTIN OR NEZ-PERCES.
The Sahaptin* possess the country on each side of Lewis or Snake
River, from the Peloose to tlie Wapticacoes, — about a hundred miles,
— toifether with the tributary streams, extending, on the east, to the
foot of the Rocky Mountains. They are supposed, by the mission-
aries, to number about two thousand souls. In character and appear-
ance, they resemble more the Indians of the Mis.souri than their
neighbors the Salish. They have many horses, and are good
hunters, being accustomed to make long excursions, in summer, to
the Rocky Mountains, for the purpose of killing buffalo. They
formerly had blooiiy wars with the Shoshonees, Crows, Blackfoot
Indians, and other trii)es, whose hunting-grounds were in the same
region ; but of late these (piarrols have become less frequent.
The Sahaptin are the tribe who, several years ago, despatched a
deputation to the United States, to rc(iuest that teachers might be
sent to instruct them in the arts and k-eligion of the whites. Their
good dispositions have been much eulogized by travellers, and there
seems to be no reason to doubt that they are superior to the other
tribes of this territory, in intellect and in moral qualities. There are,
however, certain traits in their character, that have hitherto neutral-
ized, in a great measure, the zealous and well-directed efforts which
have been made for their improvement. The first of these is a feeling
of personal independence, amounting to lawlessness, which springs
naturally from their habits of life, and which renders it almost impos-
sible to reconcile them to any regular discipline or system of labor,
even though they are perfectly convinced that it would be for their
advantage. Another trait of a similar kind, originating probably
in the same cause, is a certain fickleness of temper, which makes
• There is some doubt ouicerning the projier orthogmpliy, as well as the meaning, of
this term, which was received from on interpreter. Tlii' missionorie.s ulwuys spoke ol"
the tribe by the common niime of Nvz-2>ercis.
N () U T It VV y. S T K II N A .M K 11 I C A.
aiu
them liable to chiin'j;o tlieir opinions and policy with every passing
impulse. These (Icfects, thougli not inconsistent with many good
qualities, are yet exactly of the kind most difficult to overcome.
Until the Indians can be brought to reside in fixed habitations, it
is evident that there will bo little opportunity for any permanent
improvement. And this can never take place until some other mode
shall be adopted by them for procuring their clotliing, than that to
which they have been heretofore accustomed, namely, the chase, and
particularly that of the buffalo. Cultivation, though it may supply
them with fmxl, only solves half the difficulty. It will be necessary,
if they are to depend on their own resources, that they should be
taught to raise sheep, and manufacture the wool ; but to do this will
require a steadiness of application altogether alien to their natural
disposition.
N. WALAWAT.A.
WAI.LAWALLAS, PELOO.SE.S, YAKE.MAS, Kl.IKATATS, ETC.
The territory bordering on the Columbia for some distance above
and below the junction of Lewis River, is in the possession of several
independent bands of Indians, who all speak one language, though
with some difference of dialect. The Wallawallas, properly so
called, are on a small stream which falls into the Columbia near Fort
Nez-perces. The Yakemas (ladkenia) are on a large stream nearly
opposite. The I'eloose tribe has a stream called after it, which
empties into Lewis River; and the Klikatats (T/.lokatat) wander in
the wooded country about Mount St. Helens. These, with other
minor bands, are supposed, by the missionaries, to number in all,
twenty-two hundred souls.
They resemble the Sahaptin, to whom they are allied by language,
but are of a less hardy and active temperament. This proceeds, no
doubt, from their mode of life, which is very similar to that of the
Salish. Their principal fo(Kl is the salmon, which they take chiefly
in the months of August and September. At this season they
assenible in great numbers about the Falls of the Columbia, which
form the most important fishing station of Oregon. At this time,
also, tlu7 trade with the Chinooks, who visit the Falls for the same
purpose.
The Sahaptin and Wallawallas compress the head, but not so
much as the tribes near the coast. It merely serves with them to
54
314
ETIINOaa API! Y.
mnko tlio forehead more retrcatiiiir, which, with the n(niiline nose
common to tliese natives, gives to tliem, occusionally, a pliysiof^nomy
similar to that represented in tlie hieroglyphicnl paintings of Central
America.
5. w A 1 1 r. A T P ir.
O. t'AILI-OUX, OK lAVl'SE.
The Wniihifpu inhabit the country south of the Sahaptin and
Wallawalla. Their head-(iuarters are on tlie upi)er part of the Walla-
walla River, where they live in close connexion with a band of Nez-
perces, whose language they usually speak in preference to their
own, which lias nearly fallen into disuse. They are a small tribe,
not numbering five hundred souls, but they are nevertheless looked
upon with respect by the tribes around them, as being good warriors,
and, what is more, as having much wealth. As their country affords
extensive pasturage, they arc able to keep large droves of horses, one
of their chiefs having as many as two thousand. They arc much of
the time on horseback, and make long excursions to the east and
south. In former times, they waged war with the Shoshonees and
Lutuamis, but of late years these hostilities have been suspended.
I'. MOI.KI.li.
The residence of the Mokle is (or was) in the broken and wooded
country about Mounts Hood and Vanco\iver. They were tiever very
numerous, and have suffered much of late from various diseases, par-
ticularly the ague-fever. In 1841 they numbered but twenty indi-
viduals; several deaths took place while we were in the country, and
the tribe is probably, at present, nearly or quite extinct.
ti. T SHIN i; K.
«. WATI.AT.A, OR I'l'l'lCIl ( IIINOOK.
This name {Wut/.luhi) properly belongs to the Indians at the
Cascades, al)out one hundred and fifty miles from the mouth of the
Columi)ia ; but for want of a general appellation, it has been extended
to all the tribes speaking dialects of a common language, from Mul-
tnoma Island, to the Falls of the Columbia, including also tliose on
the lower part of the Willammet. At the period of the visit of Lewis
>
N O R T l» \V f; H T r. K N A M K K I C A.
215
and Cliirk, this was tlic most doiiscOy pdimlatcd piirt of tlio whole
Cohiinliiau iT)j[i()ii, ami it so contiinuHl until tlie fatal year IS'23,
when tlio a^uo-fovi^r, iK'tbro unknown west of the Itoeky Mountains,
broke out, and carried ofl" four-tilths of the population in a single
summer. Whole villages were swept away, leaving not a single
inhabitant. The living could not bury iho dead, and the traders
were obliged to undertake this olfiec, to [jrevenl a new |)estilenco from
completing the desolation of the country. The region below the
Cascades, which is as far as the influence of the tide is felt, suffered
most from this scourge. The population, which before was estimated
at upwards of ten thousand, does not now exceed five hundred. Be-
tween the Cascades and the Dalles, the sickness was less destructive.
There still remain five or six villages, with a population of seven or
eight hundred.
They were formerly considered by the whites as among the " orst
of the Oregon Indians, and were known as a rpiarrelsome, thievish,
and treacherous people Their situation, on the line of communica-
tion between the interior and the coast, gave them great facilities for
trafficking with the natives of each for tli<! productions peculiar to the
other, and pretty much on tlieir own terms. Hence it happened that
they superadded to the turbulence and ferocity natural to their race,
the cupidity and trickiness of a nation of traders. They levied tribute,
by force or fraud, on all who passed through their country, and tra-
vellers were generally glad to be ^uit of tlicm for a few thefts. The
great reduction of their numbers by the epidemic has somewhat
tameil their evil propensities, and the labors of the missionaries have
not been without a good effect.
R. LOWER CHINOOK.
Twenty years ago there were, below the Multnoma Island, some
five or six thousand people, speaking the same, or nearly the same
language. The principal tribes or bands were the Wakalkmn (known
as the Wahkyekum), the Katlamat (Cathlamet), the 'I'shinuk (Chi-
nook), and the Tlatsap (Clatsop). They arc now reduced to a tenth
of their former numbers, and the remnant will probably soon dis-
apiiear.
This people may be considered the type of what we have called
the North-Oregon division, being that in which all the peculiarities
of this class are most conspicuous. Many of the characteristics of the
•no
¥.T II N uti K A I' II V.
IVtoiitjol race appear in tlii-ir forms aiul loatiires. Tlioy nrc .short and
Mipiarc-rraincil. w illi hroad laci's, llal noses, and ev't's tiiriuHl oliliipicly
upward at tho outer lonuT. Tlie resemlilaiu'o is ucridoiitally lieiylit-
«iie<i liy llie coiiieal cap wliieli lliev wear, similar to that of tlie ( 'lii-
iiese, and whiidi they have prohahly adopted as u ileleiice aj^aiiisl tlie
lieavy and t'reipient rains.
It is amoii^ tliis peopU>, also, that tlie eompressioii of the skull Ih
(tarried to the greatest extent. 'I"he ehdd, s(M»n after birth, is laid
upon an ohlon)^ pieco of wood, .sometimes ii little hollowed like a
trou^li, whieli serves for a cradle. A small pad or eushion, stutl'ed
with moss, is then placed upon its forehead, and fastened ti^jjlitly, at
each Hide, to the hoard, so that the infant is unai)le to move its head.
In this wr.y, partly hy actual compression, and partly hy preventin^r
the {growth of tho skull except towards tiie sides, the desired delormity
m |)riMluce(l. A profde which presents a straijrht line from tho crown
of tho liead to the t<ip of tho no.se is considered hy them tiie acme of
beauty. The appearance of the (diild when just reloa.sed from this
confinement is truly hideous. The transvcrso diameter of the head
alK>ve the ears, is then nearly twice as threat as the lonifituilinal, from
tho forehead to the occiput. The eyes, which are naturally ileep-aet,
become protrudinj,', and appear as if squeezed |)artially out of the
head. In after years the skull, as it increa.ses, returns, in some det^ree,
to its natural shape, and tlu- delormity, thouijh always sulliciently
remarkable, is less shocking? than at first. Tho children of slaves are
not considered lA suHicieut importance to undergo Ibis operation, and-
their heads, therefore, retain their natural form. If the alteration of
shape priHluced any important ellect on the intellectual or moral
characteristics of the peojile, it would be perce|)tible in the ilitrerence
lictsveen the slaves and tho frooinen, — which is found, however, to be
very slij^ht, ai. \ only such as would naturally arise from the distinc-
tion of cla.sscs. The slaves, who are mostly tie.scendaiits of prisoners
taken in war, are of a tamer and less (piarrelsonie disposition than
their masters, whose natural |)ride and arrogance is increased by the
habit of domineering over tluMn.
'I'he Chinooks are less ingenious than the natives of the Northwest
("oast, but are far superior to those of Calitoruia. They mak(' houses
of wide and tliick planks, whicli they chip with much labor from the
large pines with which their country al)ouiKls. A .single trunk makes
one, or, at the nmst, two planks. Tins hou.ses are of an oblong shape,
with two lows of bunks or .sleeping-places on each side, one above
N I » U T II W K S r i: H N A M K |{ I (' A.
'in
the other, like IhtIIim in ii Nliip. TlitMr cuikhis, wliieh iiro nuule ot
hollowed trees, are Moinetiiiies of yfretit Ni/.e. They are ol' eley;iiiit
slia|H!, loh^r, rmrrosv, ami Hharp, and are li^'ht oiiou^h to live in a
roiif^h Nea, wliere a lioat woidd he Hwainpoil; h\it they re(|iiire con-
stant watehCnInesN, to miard ajjainst their upsetting?. The hahits of
the Cliinooks, like tliose of the northern eoasl-tri lies, show a people
aeeiistoined to derive their suhsistencc from the sea, and averse to
wanderin^r upon land. They ditl'er widely, in this respect, from the
Californiuns, who suhsist u|ion ucoriis and the seeds of plants, build
temporary huts of hrushwood mid straw, and are constantly on the
move from place to place.
7. K A I- A I' I' V A.
The Kalaptiija (or Callapr-oyalm) pos.scss the valley of the Willam-
mct* above the Falls, — the most tortile district of Oregon. It is
included between the two ridges, known as the coast range and the
California Chain, and is watered by numerous tributaries of the main
stream. The natives were formerly numerous, but have been reduced
by sickness to about five hundred. This rapid diminution will render
nugatory the efforts of the Ameri'-an missionaries to improve their
condition, in which, from the habits and character of tlie natives,
there would otherwise have been some reason to hope for success.
The Kidapuya, like the lUnkwa. hold a position intermediate between
'the wild wandering tribes of the interior, aud the debased, filthy, and
(juarrelsome natives of the coast. They are more regular and quiet
than the former, aud more cleanly, honest, and moral, than the latter.
They shift their quarters at certain seasons for the purpose of pro-
curing fotMj ; but could their wants be otherwise supplied, they might
easily be induced, as some of them have already been, to adopt a
fixed residence. The progress of disease, however, and the influx of
foreign popidation will soon supersede the necessity of any further
lalwrs for their benefit.
I
• As this word has Ukti written nnil pronounced by foreigners in viirioii.s ways, it may
be well to note that tlie true orlhogra|iby, according to the native pronunciation, would br
Wii/dmt, in two syllables, with the accent on the la.Ht.
55
-S.ii^i':;idji'j^!Siii2::i^'i. .
218
ETHNOGRAPHY.
S.T. lAKON, OK YAKONES, OK SOtlTIIEKN KlLLAMl'KS.
A small tribe, numbering six or seven hundred, who live on the
coast, south of the Usietshawus, from whom they differ merely in
language.
Ih
I
9. T. LUTUAMl, OK T L A M A T L, OK CLAMET INDIANS.
The first of these names is the proper designation of the people in
their own language. The second is that by which they are known
to the Chinooks, and through them, to the whites. They live on the
head waters of the river and about the lake, which have both received
from foreigners the name of Clamet. They are a warlike tribe, and
fre(]uently attack the trading-parties which pass through their country,
on the way to California. They seem to be engaged in constant
hostilities with their neighbors, the Shasties and Palaiks, one object
of which is to obtain slaves, whom they sell to the Waiilatpu, and
the Indians of the Willammet.
10. V. .SASTE, OK SUA STY.
II. W. r A L A I I! .\l II, OK I'ALAIKS.
These two tribes live, the former to the southwest, and the latter to
the southeast, of the Lutuami. Little is known of them, except that
they lead a wandering, savage life, and subsist on game and fruit.
They are dreaded by the traders, who expect to be attacked in
passing through tlieir country. Their numbers, however, as well
as ihose of the Lutiiami, have been of late greatly diminished by
disease, and all three tribes together are supposed not to comprise
more than twelve hundred individuals. The women of the Saste,
and perhaps of the other tril)cs, are tattooed in lines from the mouth
to the chin. In Northern California the same fashion exists, amon"
the tribes of the interior.
Vi. S II O S II O N !•: E S, OK SNAKE INDIANS.
X. SIIOSIIONI. V. WIIIINASHT.
By the accounts which we received, this is a very widely extended
people. The SkosM/ii and I'dnasht (Bonnaks) of the Columbia, the
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
219
Yntas and Sampkhes beyond the Salt Lake, tlie Comanches of Texas,
and some other tribes along the northern frontier of Mexico, are said
to speak dialects of a common language. It will be seen, also, that
the vocabulary of the idiom spoken by the Netela Indians on the const
of California, in latitude 34^, shows evident traces of connexion with
the Shos!u')ni.
The country of the Shoshonees proper is south of Lewis or Snake
River, and cast of the Salt Lake. There is, however, one detached
band, known as the Wihinaslit, or Western Snakes, near Fort Boirie,
separated from the main body by the tribe of Bonnaks. The Sho-
shonees are generally at war with the Satsikaa, or Blackfoot Indians,
and the Upsaroka, or Crows. The usual war-ground of the three
nations, is the country around the head waters of the Snake, Green,
and Platte Rivers. Some of tlie Shoshonees have horses and fire-
arms, and derive their subsistence from the chase and from fish.
Others, to the north, have no horses, are armed only with bows, and
live on acorns and roots; tliese the hunters call Diggers, and consider
the most miserable of the Indians.
i:». Z. S A T S 1 K A A, O U R L A (J K F O O T INDIAN S.
This is a well-known confederacy of five tribes, occupying an
extensive territory in and near the Rocky Mountains, between the
head-waters of the Missouri, the Saskatchawan, and the Columbia.
The names of the tribes are (1) the Satsikna {Sutsi/:na), or Blackfeet
proper; (2) ihv Kriia (in the singular Kf/ie/iiiii), ov Blood Indians;
Qi) tlio Piekan {Vielwii), or Pagan Indians; (1) the yJ/,v/«^/, or Fall
Iniiians, sometimes called Grox Ventres of the Prairie; and (")) the
Sarsi (Svrsi), or Sussees. The name of the coufeileracy, as given to
me, was Siks/ci'/.iKnia/i, but it is doubtful whether this word is not
derived from the Cree or Knisteneau language. Of the five tribes,
the first three speak one idiom ; the fourth have a language of tiieir
own, of which we possess no vocabulary (except the very scanty one
given by Umfreville), and the fifth speak a dialect of the Chippe-
wyan (Athapascan), allied to the Tahkali. Tiie union of the tribes
is a matter of late date, within the memory of persons now living.
The Atsina are the same with the Arrapaluu^s, and formerly lived in
the plains, but have been driven into the mountains by their enemies,
and forced to ally themselves to the Blackfeet. They must not be
220
KTH NO (J R A I'll Y.
confounded with the " Gros Ventres of the Missouri," — properly
Minetari, who speak the Crow lani^uage.
A few years since, the number and warlike spirit of the Blackfoot
tribes made them the terror of all the western Indians, on l)oth sides
of tiie mountiuns. They were reckoned at not less than thirty thou-
sand souls, and it was not uncommon to hear of tliirty or forty war-
parties out at once, against the Flathead (Salish), the Upsarokas (or
Crows), the Shoshonees, and the nortiiern Crees. But in the year
J836, the small-pox carried off two-thirds of their whole number, and
at present they count not more than fifteen hundred tents, or about
ten thousand people. Their enemies are now recovering their spirit,
and retaliating upon the weakened tribes the ravages which they
formerly committed.
NORTHERN T R 1 B K S.
N O O r K A.
A vocabulary is given of the language spoken at Newittee, a port
much frequented by fur-traders, at tiie northern extremity of Van-
couver's Island. It proves to be closely allied to the language of
Nootka, of which we have about a iiundred words given in Jevvilt's
narrative of his captivity among that people. Nootka is about a
hundred miles southeast of Newittee. By Jewitt's account, it appears
that the same language is spoken to the southwest, through the whole
length of the island, and also by " the Kla-iz-zarts, a numerous and
powerful tribe, living nearly three hundred miles to the south."
These are probably the Classets, who reside on the south side of the
Straits of Fuca, near Cape Flattery. All that we could learn of
them, and of their eastern neighbors, the CAalkms (T/lalam) was
that they spoke a language different from those of the Chickailish
and Nis(jually tribes. We might, perliaps, on this evidence, add to
the synopsis and map the Nootka Familij, comprising the tribes of
Vancouver's Island, and those along the south side of Fuca's Strait.
S U K W A M K S, S U N A H U .M E S, II A I L T S ETC.
A Canadian trapper, who had travelled i)y land from Fort Nisqually
to the month of Frazer's River, gave me the names of the tribes that
he encountered on his way. They were, — proceeding from the south.
I
^
N () R r II W !■; S 'I" E R N A M E H I C A.
SSI
— the Siikwdmes, Sunahiimes, Tshikdtstat, Puinle, and tlie KawHshin,
which last are upon Frazer's River. He said that there appeared to
be a great diversity of dialect among them, a statement which was
afterwards confirmed from other sources. But of their affinities with
one another, and with the surrounding tribes, we could obtain no
information. From this point, nothing is known of the tribes on the
coast, until we arrive at Milbank Sound, in latitude 52°. A brief
vocabulary of the language spoken by the Hailtsa Indians in this
sound is given, as furnished by a gentleman connected with the
Hudson's Bay Company. This is probably the tribe which Mac-
kenzie met after leaving Friendly Village, on Salmon River, at which
point he remarked that a different language commenced.
'
sou T H E U N T R I n E S.
The statements which were rf^eived from Indians and trappers
concerning the tribes south of the Jakon and Umkwa were, in general,
consistent as regarded their names and positions, but differed much
with respect to the number and affinity of their languages. Imme-
diately south of the Jakon are the Saitistkla, upon a small stream
which falls into the sea just south of the Umqua River. Next to
these are the Ktltwdtshat, at the mouth of the Umqua, and higher up,
on the same river, the TsalH. South of the Kiliwatshat are the
Kdus or Kwokwnns, on a small river called by their name, between
the Umqua and the Clamet. On the lower part of the Clamet River
are the Totutiine, known by the unfavorable soubriquet of the Rogue
or Rascal Indians. Beyond these, the population is very scanty,
until we arrive at the valley of the Sacramento, all the tribes of which
are included by the traders under the general name of Kinkla, which
is probably, like Tlnmatl, a term of Chinook origin. According to
one account, the Saiustkla, Kiliwatshat, Tsalel, and Kaus, speak one
language ; according to another, two ; and a third informant gave to
each tribe a peculiar idiom. This will serve, as one instance out of
many, to show ttie impossibility of arriving at any certainty concern-
ing the athnities of different tribes, without an actual comparison of
vocabularies.
The next point at which we have any distinct information about
the natives is on tlie plains of the Sacramento, about two hundred and
fifty miles from the mouth of that river, where it was first seen by
the exploring party from the squadron, on their way from the Co-
50
222
ETHNOG R A V U Y.
lunibia to San Francisco. This was about sixty miles south of the
Shasly country. Mr. Dana, to whom I owe tlie vocabulary which is
given of this languajre, observes, in his note to me: "The natives
seen on reaching the Sacramento plains, resemble the Shasty Indians
in their regular features. They have thick black hair descending low
on the forehead, and hanging down to the shoulders. The faces of
the men were colored with black and red paint, fancifully laid on in
triangles and zigzag lines. The women were tattooed below the
mouth. They were a mirthful race, always disposed to jest and
laugh. They appeared to have had but little intercourse with fo-
reigners. Their only arms were bows and arrows, — and in trading
they preferred mere trinkets, such as beads and buttons, to the blan-
kets, knives, and similar articles which were in request among the
northern Indians."
Still farther south, about one hundred miles above the mouth of the
Sacramento, Mr. Dana obtained vocabularies of the dialects of four
tribes, — the Puzhune, Sekamne, T.iamak, and Talatui. He says of
them : — "These Indians have the usual broad face and flattened nose
of the coast tribes. The mouth is very large, and the nose broad and
depressed. They are filtliy in their habits and stupid in look, like
the Chiuooks. Throughout the Sacramento plains the Indians live
mostly on a kind of breati or cake made of acorns. The acorns, after
the shell is removed, are spread out and dried in the sun, then
pounded with a stone pestle to a fine powder, and afterwards kneaded
into a loaf about two inches thick, and baked. It has a black color,
and a consistency like that of cheese, but a little softer; the taste,
though not very pleasing, is not positively disagreeable."
Five vocabularies are given of idioms spoken by the natives of
California, who were formerly under the control of the Spanish mis-
sions. The first of these was taken at San Rafael, on the north side
of the bay of San Francisco, in about latitude 38° 10'. The second
is of La Soledad, near the coa.st, in latitude 36°. The third of San
Miguel, about fifty miles to the southeast of the last-mentioned. The
fourth of San Gabriel (the KiJ), in latitude 34° ; and the fifth of San
,Iuan Capestrano, (the Netela,) twenty miles further down the coast.
The " missions" are large s(piare enclosures, surrouniied by high
walls of adobes or unburnt bricks. Around the inside are cells, which
.served as dormitories to the natives. The latter were collected at
first, partly by persuasion and partly by tbrce, into these missions,
and employed there in agriculture and various simple arts, in which
t
I
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
823
i.
they were instructed by the priests, and the artisans who were at-
tached to the establishments. There was also, to each mission, a
guard of soldiers, who had the double duty of protecting the inmates
from the attacks of hostile Indians, and preventing the converts from
escaping. When the debased character, limited intelligence, and
wandering habits of the Californian aborigines are considered, it
would certainly seem that this plan, of confinement under constant
superintendence, was the only one which could have been adopted
for their improvement, with any chance of success. It nevertheless
failed. The natives did, indeed, acquire some knowledge of civilized
arts, and even of letters, but the great change in their habits, and the
mode of life so alien to their natural disposition, had a fatal effect
upon their constitutions. Many more died than were born, and it
was necessary frecjuently to recruit their numbers by fresh captures,
or by purchasing slaves of the tribes in the interior. Within the last
ten years, most of tiie missions have been broken up, partly in conse-
quence of the political changes which have taken place in the country.
Of the inmates, some fled and rejoined their savage brethren, but the
greater number linger about the towns, subsisting on charity, or by
laboring for the Mexican settlers.
These five languages are only a few oP those which are spoken in
Upper California. It is a remarkable fact that while the interior of
the country west of the Rocky Mountains is occupied by a few ex-
tensive families (Tahkali, Selish, Sahaptin, and Shoshoni), the whole
coast, from the neighborhood of Behring's Strait to Cape St. Lucas,
is lined with a multitude of small tribes, speaking distinct idioms. A
few of these, as the Tsihailish, Kwalhio(iua, and Nsietshawas are
allied to the families of the interior, but tiie greater number are en-
tirely unconnected, both with these, and with one another.
In general it has been remarked that where popular report has
represented a barbarous population as speaking a multitude of dissi-
milar languages, subsequent researches have greatly diminished their
number. Instances of this might be noted particularly in Australia
and in the territory east of the Rocky Mountains. In Oregon, how-
ever, the contrary has occurred, and the variety of idioms has been
found to be much greater than was anticipated. Probably, as has
been before remarked, no other part of the world offers an example of
so many tribes, witii distinct languages, crowded together within a
space so limited.
If we might suppose that the hordes, which, at different periods,
: ^,.
224
KT II NOU K A I' II V.
overran the Mexican plateau, had made their way through this terri-
tory, wo miirht conclude that tlie numerous small tribes there found
were the scattered remnants of these wandering nations, left along
their line of march, as they advanced from the frozen regions of the
north into the southern plains. This conjecture ac(|uires some weight
from two facts, which, though of a dissimilar character, both bear
upon this point. The first is, that such a progress is now going on,
particularly in the interior plains, where, according to the testimony
of the most respectable traders and hunters, all the tribes are slowly
proceeding towards the south. The Shoshonees formerly inhabited
the country of the Blackfeet, and there are old men among the former
who are better acquainted with the defiles and secret passes of that
country than the Blackfeet themselves. At the same period, the
territory east of the Salt Lake, now occupied by the Shoshonees,
was in the possession of the Bonnacks, who have been thrust by
them partially into the southwestern desert. The Shyennes, the
Kaiawas, and the Comanches, were mentioned as another instance of
the same kind. This movement is easily explained as resulting from
the superior energy and prowess of the northern tribes, together with
the general desire of attaining a more fertile country and genial
climate.
The other circumstance alluded to is the singular manner in which
tribes speaking allied languages, are dispersed over this territory, in a
direction from north to south. Taking, for example, the Selish family,
we have the Shoushwaps on Frazer's River, and at Friendly Village,
in latitude 53° 30' ; the Flatheads and Pisiiuous on the Upper Colum-
bia; the Nisqually about Puget's Sound ; the Cowelits and Chikailish
beyond these ; and a single tribe, the Nsietshawas or Killamuks, quite
separate from the rest, south of the Columbia, below 45°. A yet more
striking instance is found in what we have termed the Tahkali-Umqua
family. The Tahkali, or Carriers, are closely allied to the Chippe-
wyans,* who are spread over the whole northern portion of the
American continent, from Hudson's Bay to the vicinity of Behring's
Strait. On comparing together the vocabularies of the Oregon tribes,
* These must not Ijc confounded with the ('hi|){)cways, or Ojibwaig, who belong to a
diflbreni .slock. Mr. Gallatin, in hi.s i;reut work, the "Synopsis ol" thn Indian Tribes,"
has assigned to the (.'hip|>cwyaris and Carriers the general name ofAthupascas, derived
from the original designation of a lake and district in the central part of the country which
they occupy. The Tahkali-Umquft must therelbru I/ regardc^d as u subdivision of the
.\lhnpascnn family.
f
6
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
996
it became apparent that the languages spoken by the Kwalhioqun, a
small band who live in the wooded country north of the Columbia,
the Tlatskanai, a similar tribe south of that river, and the Umquas,
in latitude 43° N., must all be referred to the same widely-extended
family.
The hypothesis which is offered in explanation of these facts, rilust,
of course, be considered as a mere speculation, until it shall be con-
firmed by the discovery of a resemblance between the languages of
Oregon (or some one of them) and those of Mexico. The latter are
known to be numerous, and about twenty have been reduced to
writing by the Catholic missionaries. Of the grammars and dic-
tionaries' which they have composed, several have been printed, but
the greater number are still in manuscript. Many of the latter are
preserved in Europe, either in public libraries, or in private collec-
tions. Our own materials for comparison are limited to a few pub-
lished works, in six of the principal idioms, between which and the
languages of Oregon, no similarity is apparent. This result, however,
need not discourage any one from pursuing the investigation with
regard to the remaining tongues, especially those spoken in the north
of Mexico. It is to be hoped that future inquirers, with better oppor-
tunities, and more extensive materials, may be able to arrive at some
definite conclusion on this point, which must be considered as one
of the most interesting questions connected with the history of the
aboriginal races on this continent.
57
I
PHILOLOGY
PHILOLOGY.
POLYNESIAN GRAMMAR.
A COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF THE POLYNESIAN DIALECTS.
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.
It has seemed advisable, for several reasons, to throw the mate-
rials which have been collected for the purpose of elucidating the
structure of the Polynesian dialects into the form of a Comparative
Grammar. By this mode, the various idioms are brought together in
such a way that the points of resemblance and of distinction among
them all are perceived at once. The changes, also, which the general
language undergoes, in passing from one group to another, are thus
made apparent, and the principles which govern these changes, being
once discerned, will prove, it is believed, of no little importance to
the science of philology. It happens, moreover, in many cases, that
what is doubtful and obscure in one dialect, is elucidated by a com-
parison with others, — tlie mere ju.xtaposition being often sufficient for
this purpose. Fkiidly, by this form, as the repetition of the same
rules and explanations for different dialects is avoided, the whole is
brought into a much smaller space than would otherwise be possible,
with greater convenience of reference, and no loss of clearness.
The materials Which have been used in drawing up the Grammar
and Lexicon consist (in addition to the collections which our oppor-
tunities enabled us to make) of the translations made by the mission-
aries in seven of the principal dialects, namely, the Samoan, Tongan,
56
■^IWIW
2.10
Pit 1 1,<) I, on V.
Now Zealand, Karotongnn, Mnn^arovaii, Tahitian, and Hawaiian — of
manu8crij)t (grammars and vocabularies, furniNlicd to un also by the
missionaries in some of tbe islands — and of printed workn of the same
kind, relating? to four of tbe dialects. Of the MSS., the most irniior-
tajit are a brief jjraininar of tbe Sainoan by Mr. Heath, missionary at
tbe Naviirator Islands, and a vocabulary of the language from Mr.
Mills, of the same group; — the first part of a grammar of the Tongan
(as tiir as tbe pronouns) from Mr. Ilalwne of Tongatabu, a vocabulary
of tbe Nukubivan from Mr. Armstrong of Honolulu,* and one of the
Mangarevan dialect from M. Maigret, formerly missionary nt the
Gambler lsland,s, pud now resident at Oahu. Of printed works, the
only ones wbicb have been of much service are the Grammar of the
Tahitian, published in 19*23, by the missionaries at the Society Group,
tbe invaluable Hawaiian vocabulary of Mr. Lorrin Andrews, and the
notes on tbe peculiarities of this language, by the same gentleman,
in the Hawaiian Spectator, for October, 1838. These publications,
however, have i)een rather consulted than copied, the rules and
examples given in the following pages having been drawn almost
entirely either from manuscript notes, or from the translations. Mar-
tin's Vocabulary of tbe Tongan, and Lee's of the New Zealand
dialect have been used in preparing tbe Lexicon. All that is given
concerning the lang\iagesof Fakaafo and the Paumotu Group rests on
the authority of tbe writer, as likewise the remarks upon the pronun-
ciation of tbe various dialects. A familiarity with the general struc-
ture of the Polynesian speech, and with the minuter peculiarities of
some of the dialects, which was acquired during three years spent
among tbe islands, and devoted chiefly to this study, has much
facilitated tbe work t)f compiling the Grammar, and may, perhaps, be
considered as, in some degree, a guaranty for its general correctness.
* hi Ihn first draft of thu Grammar, this voonbiiliiry, with one obtained at Tahiti, Crom
n iiiilivr (iCraliiiata, and Ihr article, by Iho Kcv, William 1'. Alexander, in the Hawaiian
Siicciiiliir (cir .laiiiiary, I'^MH, enlilled tlu! " .Mari|ii(siun and Hawaiian DiaU^ot.s Com-
pared," liirnisbed all Iho inliirniation which wc |H>ssc.ssed relative U> the Nukuhivan
dialect. .More ample nmlerialM liir jjiviiii; a complete accoimt of that idiom hove since
been obtained in the MSS. of Mr. Crook, refern'd to on page 136 of this volume, and in
the " lAltres siir Us Iks Miin/iiises, par le I'. .Mothius G * * *" (Gracia !), published
at I'aris, in 1843.
GRAMMAR
OF THE POLYNESIAN DIALECTS.
O U T II O G R A P H Y.
5 i. The elementary sounds proper to the Polynesian languages
are fifteen in number, namely, the vowels a, e, i, o, u, and ten conso-
nants, y; k, /, vt, n, y,p, .V, t, V.
The only dialect, so far ns is known, in which all these letters are found is that
spoken in the two groups of Fnknafo and Voitii|)U. In the other dialects, some of these
letters ure dropped entirely, and others changed.
In Snmonii, the k is dropped, its place being merely indicated by a hiatus or catching
of the breath, as ali'i for lUiki, 'd'ano for kiikano.
In 'riitigaii, the k is retained, but the s is changed to h, as luihake for sasake, alio for
aso. The t in this dialect, where it precedes i, has a sound not unlike the English ch, or
like li in Ckristian ; the missionaries have represented this sound by a _;', as jiito for
tinu (pron. chinn).
'I'he .New Zealand dialect changes the s to h, the / to r, the v to w, and the/, before a
and e to if, beforn o and u to /i, and liollire i commonly to w, but sometimes to h ; as
heke for sckc, ivaka for viikn, tvarv for fale, vetCt for fitii, hoc for foe, huri for fuli, witi
for _/?<«, and hia for fia. If two f's occur in the same word, preceding an a or an e, the
first/is usually changed to iv, and the second to h ; as ica/ia for Jii/u, iceltc fiir J'efe.
The dialects of Karotonga and Mangareva lose both tlic/and the « entirely, and have
r instead o( I ; as are for fale, ae (i)r sue.
The Paumotuan has the same elements ns the New Zealand, except that the/ is some-
times heard in place of the w. Many of its words assume |)cculiar forms unlike those of
any otlier dialect ; as mateu for matoit, tnauiia for maua. The k is sometimes intro-
duced in words where it does not pro|wrly belong, as reko for reo, voice j kakicenei for
akuenei, soon.
The Tahitian dispenses with both k and ; ; the s is changed to h ,• the / before a and
232
P H I I,0 LOG V.
f is rommonly, Ihoiigli not always, rrtnincd ; l)etbrc i, o, mill u, it is replaced by h ; the
r also is used inslcnd of/; as <iri'i lor a/iki, rat for lii)ji,/a'a or ha'a for ^(Art, AoK
for foil.
Ill Hawaiian, /'and s am changed to h, y becomes «, v is used for v (ihongh the sound
is |)ro|H^rly internKMliate betwei-n the two), and the k is dropped, as in Samoaii niid
Tahitian ; as hnle I'lir/ulc, lani for Itiyi, wci'a for vaka.
The Nnkuhivnn varies in dilTerent islands, and even in different districts of the same
island. In Tahiiata and the other sonthcrn islands, the / is retained, the y liecomes «,
and the k is fa-qucntly oniilted. In Nukiihiva and the rest of the northern cluster, the
/is changed to //, the k is retained (except at the Ix'ginning of words, when it is omitted
or pronounced, at the pleasure of the speaker), and the y licconies /-, except with the
people of one district (the Taipis), who give it its true sound. In all the islands, the I
(or r) is omitte<l, or, at least, is very rarely used. Thus wc have, in Tahuata, fili, fiie
(for hae), htina (for hatja), and /iiivai'i (for Stivaiki) ; in Niikuhiva, hiti, hie, hnkii (or
with the Taipis luiija), and luivaiki.
) 2. The following table will show the number of consonantal
elements in each dialect, and the permutations which they undergo
in passing from one to another. The hiatus caused by the omission
of tiie /i is represented by an inverted comma. An omission of a
letter which does not cause a hiatus, or sensible break in the pronun-
ciation, is denoted by a dash.
F
F
F 1
V; 11
—
—
Wot F; H
F; 11
H
For//
K
»
A-
K
A-
A'
K
'
1
A'
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
R
L
R
M
M
M
M
M
HI
M
M
M
M
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
n
II
n
n
n
n
n
—
y
n or A' or .V
p
r
For B
p
r
p
p
P
p
P
s
s
11
H
—
—
11
11
11
H
T
T
T ■
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
V
V
V
w
V
V
For IV
V
w
V
) 3. Besides the regular permutations above-noted, there are others
which occasionally take place between different dialects.
F is occasionally commuted to i' or u- ; as fusi, Sam., a place, becomes in Tahitian
ViiJti, and in Hawaiian wiihi ; and sometimes to/),- as Joe, Tonga, /wr, N. Z., a ball.
The / is .s<inietiines changed to n; as nimii, Tong., (or /i ma, live; nini, Haw., and
nit. Tall., for liiji, to pour ; niinii, Sam., for li'i/i'i, or Uktliki, siiiall.
The Tongan fretpietitly drops the / altogether, as akau for liikau, tree ; ryu for lepa,
turmeric ; aiki for tiJiki, chief.
The Tongan has sometimes an h where the other Polynesian dialects have no corre-
P O I, V N E S I A N G R A M SI A R.
233
spoiuliiif; olompiil ; in siioli ciiaos, the Viti.m liiis oflrii n i"', mid the Rotumnn nil s ; ns
mo/ii; 'rong., mrx't; KM,, ?nose, Rot., miie, .Sum., et cct., to sleep.
A'nnil t are sometimcH inlcrclinnged ; ns tula. Haw,, kiiru, Rar., to drop; wiki, \.
7.,, U'iti, Haw., quickly.
\ 4. The vowels uiuiergo but few changes, and those chiefly in
consequence oFtlie permutations of the consonants.
The syllnlilp./c, wli<;;i it commonc?s a word, and is unaccented, is changed in Hawaiian
to ho ; usfrtd, star, Ixu'omes hotii ; fcnu/i, country, hnntui.
The omission of tli(! k and / produces some changes, lor which no determinate rule
can bo given ; ns mai\i, Tah.. banana, lor nicika ; mcnc, Nuk., sacred place, lor marae.
'Vhen a vowel is repeated in Samoan, with an s botwren (as nsa, esc, isi, &c.), or in
Toiigan with nn h, the other dialects frequently drop the interposed consonant, and
contract the two vowels into one ; as 'usa, Sam., kulia, Tong., burning, becomes in Man-
garcvan ki, and in Hawaiian 'rf ; 'cse or kclic, other, becomes in N. Z. ke, Tah., 't,-
viusu, to whi8|>cr, becomes mil, &c.
The causative prcfi.x, which in Toiigan is fuka, in Samoan_/'(V;, in Tnhitian J\Ca and
}uCa, becomes in Hawaiian h(Ca or lm\t, most commonly the latter.
The diphthong ia in Tongan frequently becomes ic, and uii is changed to uo ; as Jie,
to desire, for Ji<i ; Itio, a pit, for Imi. In this dialect, also, when a word is doubled, nn
alteration frequently tnkes pince in the vowel of the first part ; aafdofoUi for Jbldfola.
i 5. No Polynesian dialect makes any distinction between the
sounds of b and j), d and /, g and k, I and ;•, or v and w. The /, more-
over, is freijuently sounded like d, and the / like k.
The missionaries have, in general, iiinde use of the mutes k,p, nnd t, instead of the
corresponding sonants. In the Tongnn, however, the l> is employed, nnd in Tnhitian
and Rarotongan the letters h and d were at first occosionally used ; ns medua for metua,
rolo/iu lor rolopii, &c. ; nt present, we Ix'lievc, the missionaries have decided upon
employing only the p and t.
The sound of/ is rarely heard in the New Zealand pronunciation, nnd that of r in the
Tongan ; in all the other dialects both these sounds are used indiscriminately. The
missionaries have adopted the / in Samonn and Hawaiian, nnd the r in Tnhitian and
Rarotongan. In Vitiaii and Rotuman I and r are distinct sounds.
The sound of t' is most usual in Samoan, Tongan, Rarotongan, and Tnhitian, — that of
ir in the New Zealand, Pniimotunn, and Hawaiian.
In all the dialects the / (or r) is frt^quently so pronounced as to have, to the enr of a
stranger, a sound very similar to d ; FaleiiUli, the nnme of a town in Samoa, is gene-
rally soumled Faleaiiili ; riri in New Zealand is pronounced didi ; raro in Tahitian
has the sound of darn ; and HUo, the name of n district in Hawaii, is usually pronounced
m/o.
The confusiim in the pronunciation of ^ and t is not uncommon, oven in those lan-
guages in which both the sounds are met with as distinct elements. In Fakaafo <diti
was heanl for ii/iki, and in New Zealand and I'aumotu arili. In Hawaiian, the natives
50
(J
•^
pt
234
PHILOLOGY.
ninkc 110 disliiiolion l)otwccn the t nnil k, and tlic niissionnrios Imve ndoptcd tlio latter,
tlioufili im|)ro|n'rly (as the flcmcnt is really tlu' Polynesian I), in the written langnngc.
In Kaknalb, Paiiniotu, and Tahiti, wo occasionally heard the /changed to a sound like
that 1)1" irli in what ; as ir/iiiic for farr, oirliaiiha Cor i>/d/ii, \c. This may serve to
show llic process hy which Inith the ir and the h have Ix'cn substituted, in some of the
dialects, (or llie /,• as in New Zealand, iviilni t'or/n/u, Arc.
At Fakaafo, we also lVe(|uently heard the s pronounced like a strongly aspirated /(,
as h'(i lor sa, sacred. A similar sound is scmietiines given to the h in New Zealand and
Tahiti, as in /loiji or hoi (in Sanioan so}ji), to salute hy pressing noses, which some have
supposed to be pronounced shoiji, shoi. In tact, the Samoan s is a dental letter, ap-
proaching, in the pronunciati<in of some natives, very nearly to the sound of ,s/«.
In Samoan the n was occasionally eoiifoundi'd wiili the ij, particularly where both
occuri'ed in the same word ; thus we heard nuuioiji, iiunjoyi, and maijoni; maniitdtji
and tiKniulinji, \-c.
In Fakaafo the word iijiJa was sometimes heard as ikCii; in Nukuhivan, os has been
already stated, among some of the tribes, this change of ij to k is constantly made.
^ 6. In all the Polyne.sian dialects every syllable must terminate
in a vowel ; and two consonants are never heard without a vowel
between them.
This rule ailmits of no exception whatsoever, and it is chiefly to this peculiarity that
the soilness of these languages is to be attributed. The longest syllables have only
three letters — a consonant and a diphthong — and many syllables consist of a single vowel.
J 7. Most of the radical words in the Polynesian are dissyllables.
The simple prepositions, the articles, and a very few other words, arc monosyllables.
Words of Ihrco or more syllables are usually derivatives or compounds.
Ij 8. The accent is commonly laid on the penultimate syllable; in
some instances, however, it is found on the antepenultimate, and in
some on the final syllable. These cases have generally been noted in
the vocabularies.
When a syllable is postfixed to a word, the accent is usually shiflcd forward ; as itc,
to know, in the passive, iciu; toe, to remain, toegu, Kar., toiiia, I law., and toea, Tah.,
remainder.
Sometimes a dilferencu of meaning is indicated by a change of accent ; as nuuidva,
Sam., the belly, and mdnciva, to breathe ; nuiraimi, Rar., the moon, and mdramti, light.
In Hawaiian, tatidtti, man, makes in the plural, na tanala, men.
V 9. The following examples will show the changes which words
undergo in passing from one dialect to another.
POLYNESIAN GRAMMAR.
235
FAK.
foe
JiU
toga
sinu
vai
lama,
ika
laiji
soiji
sakii
vaka
folc
f'lf"-
kupciju
aliki
Jaiiiiii
ttijuija
fnc
Jiti
loija
sinu
vai
lama
tV{
laiji
soiji
sa\i
va'a
faU
fafa
'iijioja
Jininjalo
aWi
faniia
luJUija
T- NO.
foe
fui
toija
hina
vai
lama
ika
hniji
liaka
vaka
falc.
N. Z. * FAU. RAR. a. MAN.
hoe
reiti
totja
ilia
iiai
rama
ika
raid
hoiji
tiaka
uaka
ware
ivaha
kiijieija kupetja
Jinaijalo hiiiaijaro inanaro
eiki nriki ariki
fimua ueniia ciiua
tufiiija tuhuija tauya
oe
Hi
ioija
hina
vni
rama
ika
raiji
oiji
aka
vaka
are
vaa
kiijicna
TAIL HAW. Nt'K.
hoc hoc hoc
hili hiti fui or hiti
ioa tona toija or toka or lona
hina hina hina
vai tvai vai
rama lama ama
i\' i'a ika
rat lani aiji or aki or ani
hoi honi huki, >Scc.
ha^a ha'a haka
va''a tva'a vaka
fare hale fac or hoe
vaha icaha fafa or halia
''ujiea 'apena kuprka, &c.
himniro hinanalo hinaktm
ariH ali'i aiki
hciiiia humui hvnwi^ iVc.
tahkaiV) tahima titlmka, tuhuna
ETYMOLOGY.
^ 10. The dialects of Polynesia have, properly speaking, no gram-
matical inflections. The only changes which words undergo are by
affixed particles, or by the reduplication of one or more of their
syllables.
Particli'S, both affixed nnd separate, play a great part in all these idioms. They may
be divided into three classes, — particles which (piulily nouns, verbal particles, and con-
junctives. In the former are included the articles, certain demonstratives, the signs of
case and of nunibcr,^-of the first of which we i)rocecd to speak.
T H i; A IITI C L K.
tj 11. There are, in most of the dialects, two articles, one of which
is definite, and at the same time singular, and the other indefinite,
and prefi.xed either to the singular or the plural.
In the dialect of Faknafo the definite article is tc, and the indefinite se or he {s and h
being used indiscriminately) ; as ua lelci tc tama, good is the boy; sc nuita, an eye ; he
iufitija koe f art thou a priest ?
In Samiian, the articles are le and se; le tapata, the man ; sc taijata, a man.
In Tongnn, there appear to Ik; but two articles, a and lie. The former is used before
pro|>er names and pronouns, and becomes ae (probably for a he) before common nouns ;
as. Ilea toki lea a Jesu, and then Jesus said; a liano tehina, his brother; bea tie ttiku ki
236
PHILOLOGY.
1,
iii <ic Idiititii, niul lio plnccd thoro ihr mnn. This ac, when joined with nnotiicr pnrticle,
ns a, of, mi>, iiiiil, iVc, Ixjcomos simply r, ns, lie yaiie ac Mrsin, the works of tho Mes-
siah ; ke Ho nc Met moc Aovi, to know jjood niul evil. lie properly answers to sc in
Snnioaii, but it has also the meaning of the dclinitc article in Knglish, as in one of tho
examples given above.
'rimt on article tc once existed in this dialect we may infer from its (ircscnce in some
of the nuMiorals, as Icknu., one score — mi iin-kdu, two score ; te-kumi, n measure often
fathoms [line dizaine), — tola iju-kiimi, twenty fathoms ; iciiii, a hundred,— ;/« genu, four
hundred, to-.
[The missionaries moke two definite articles, a andr, "the former used l)efore the
nominative when the verb is neuter or intransitive, and the latter where it is active or
transitive." This, however, is an error, the result of another error, namely, the failure
to distinguish between the active and possive states of the verb. The e is merely, as in
all the other Polynesia<i dialects, the pre|K)sition hij (Latin a or a/)) before the ablative.
The sentence licii tahiuikii akinnutnlu c lie Otiia, and God blessed them, means properly,
and they were blessed by God. Much confusion has arisen from this source, in the
missidimry translations into this language.]
In llie diolect of New Zealand the orticlcs are te and lie; in those of Tahiti, Rarotonga,
Mangoreva, and Nukuhiva, //• ond e.
The Hawaiian has for its indefinite article he; for the definite,a double form, te and ta.
The former is used before all nouns commencing with t, ond before many commencing
with (' and o; some olso which begin with p have te for their article. Other nouns, with
some few exceptions, hove to. No noun takes both, unless with some change of mean-
ing, which makes it o ditlerent word, as tii iiho, sticks for thatching, te alio, tho breath.
The only other dialect in which Ui is found os an article is that spoken in the small
island of Vino or Inmier, one of the New Hebrides, but inhabited by a Polynesian tribe.
In a brief vocabulary, obtained by the Rev. J. Williams, (on his last cruise, just Iteforo
li.s nuirder at that group,) this article occurs several times, ns ta kiini, the breadfruit ;
tn one, the earth ; tii faiiuii, the country.
In New Zealand, n is frecjuently used before pro|)er names and |)ronouns ; as iitio ka
kite a Jcsii, when .lesus saw ; akoe, thou ; aia, he.
In Rarotoiigan, the a also occurs, though not so frequently as in New Zealand j as
nnmiiti alii ru a Jesu, Jesus went before; aiii, he.
It is |)crha|)s to this article that we must refer the a, which, in all the dialects, comes
Ix'twecn the prepositions At and i, and tlie projwr name or pronoun following; as kia
Piu, to I'ea ; kia ia, to him.
In .Mongarevon, a preceding a noun, with an adverb of place after it, is UFcd as a
demonstrative ; it is perhaps this some article; — nokii a tanuiriki ara, that c'lild {the child
t/irri) is mine ; ii mea nci, this thing (the thing here).
[It six-nis likely that the Polynesian had originally thret; articles, namely, te for the
singular, ija for the plural, and sc indefinite. The first has lxH!n changed in .Snmoan to
/(', in Tongan it is replaced by tho particle a, eonnecteil with the indefinite he, and in
Hawaiian it becomes generally ta. These changes are (icrhaps the result of a desire for
euphony, for as te was not only an article, but a relative pronoun, and a sign of tho
futun; tense, its fre(|uenl re|X!tition, particularly in public s[H>aking, was likely to be
olli-nsive to the fastidious audiences of Samoa, Tonga, and Hawaii, in all of which great
P O I. Y N E S t A N G R A M M A R.
'237
nltcnlinn is pniil by \hv liij;li.>r rldsscs to I'l;? nrls nf orntury. In Tahiti, the nttcn)pt to
avoiil tliis rcpoliiioii has led nu'rely to the l('iiij;lh(niiig nf thn rchitivc, wliidi is pro-
noiiiiccil Iri. 'J'hat Ir is properly an article of iiiiily, there pan Ik; no doubt. It never
precedes a iionii in the plural, unless where this lias n colleotivn sense; thus, tc tanald,
in Hawaiian, may mean either "the man," or "mankind," or the " party of men,"
(spoken of before ;) but in tiic latter case it would usually liavo some collective particle
nfter it, as tii man taiKttii, or to poc ttuiatii. It is, perhaps, connected with the numeral
tahi, one, wliicli in Uoluniun becomes til, and in Tarawan Ir. — As regards the <i, in the
Tongan, New Xealand, ami Karolongan dialects, it would ixnhaps Ik.' more proper .0
consider it not an article, but rather a particle similar to the nominative sign /o (vide
§ 17), and used when that cannot be employed, viz. : before the nominative, when it is
in the middle of a sentence, and before the accusative generally.]
) 12. Besides the two articles above-mentioned, all the dialects
have other words which may bo included, though with less propriety,
in the same class. They arc mostly such as are commonly termed
in English indefinite pronouns.
In tijamoan these are sn, some one; 7usi, some (pi.); siiin, some (partitive); isi,
other; setasi, one, some one ; Ictasi, a. certain one, another; ctasi, some, several, other;
as s(i linjiitii, some man ; nisi lininlii, some men ; siiia rai, some water ; Ictasi alii, a
certain chief; ctttsi ii/ii, certain chiefs.
In Tongan, lui, some one, any one ; foe, a single one ; >ii/ii, some (pi.) ; ettiha, certain,
other; as liii tnijatn, some man ; J'lic itiii, i\ single cocoa-nut ; ki he matatahi elaha, to
the other side.
Ill the New Zealand dialect, titii/ii, some one, a certain one, another, — pi., ctiihi; ua/ti
or tcifdiii, some (partitive).
In l{arolongan, liliii, some one, another, — pi. clai; triai pac, some, a portion of.
In Maiigarevan, Uii, one, other ; ma, some, — as ma vai, some water (but used rather
in the sense •■'" ^'ve me some water").
In I'aimiotuaii, r liumai tc wahi kniiiu' nnku, bring here some water for me.
In Tahitian, /(' htx\ some one, a single one ; ttahi, one, other, — \i\.ri'tahi; ma or maa,
some, a iiortion of; as tvlim' ri, an apple; ria/ii ea, another road; maa jnijie, some
water ; maa malai, some w iiid. iSoineliines this last has another article before it, as
liomai elahi a If/ioc maa pajH', give me some water.
[We have also maa henna, a piece of ground, a field, — in Rarotongan maija enua.
Maa and maija mean also f<x)d. The origin is probably from the Tongan ma, to chew ;
hence, a mouthful, a morsel. Thus in Tonga they say, ynai ma kava, give me some kava,
or a morsel tif kava. In I^iiglish we say, in like inamier, a little bit, a mere morsel.]
In Hawaiian, wo have Uilii or lilalii, and irahi ; as tahi or tetahi tanata, a certain
man; nahi laau, some iIiuIxt; tr in/hi ttij)a, some cloth.
In Nukidiivan,/r/(i/i(, some one, a certain one, as titahi iiiii, a cocoa-nut ; io?ia, some
one, as Itmii a, some day.
fin the liiregoing list, /(•/(///(', r/.v/zi, &n., are from the numeral one ; /or , Tong., Aoe,
Tab., means properly a mass, lump, or tmll (vide vocab. vc-rb. toe) ; icahi is from fasi,
Sam., to divide, and means a division, a portion : pac is [«rhaps a corruption of the same
word.]
60
23S
P H I 1. O l,0(i V.
Til t; sr US TV \t i v k.
i 13. Till' <jroii(ler is clistini.niislietl citlior by the iisc of entirely
dilJ'cront words, as tomd, Sam., t'atlior, find, inotliir; or, more gene-
rally, by tlie use ol words signifying male and female.
iSani. liipi' liDir, ix cnck |iigeoii
Tun;;. In/ixi liuii\ a ilrukc
\. Z. tiipiiiKi fiuic, II graiul lilt her
\. Z. koi'iirr/ic lixiriuni, n iiialc lx.'nst
Knr. iiiitiiiiliinc, a liilhcr
'("ah. huiiiM tune, a son-in-law
Tall. piiiKi oiti, a boar
Haw. Liin tunc, a. lio-goat
Niik. iiKiii iiIkiiiii, a cock
Niik. })ii(ik(i tixi, a ling
/iijxj't'/itic, a lien pigpoii
tii/ini/ii/im; a duck
tiipiiiiii ir<i/ii/ic, a grnntlmotlicr
hdrarrlif itW(i,a fi'inalc boast
iiiihid-viiinr, a niollicr
liiDKxi vii/iinc, a (laugliter-iii-Iaw
jiiiiiu iihd, a sow
k(io itiihiiic, a sli(;.goat
moil viihinv, a lien
]>iiiil,ii tijii, a sow
^ 14. The plural is frequently left witliout any mark to distin-
guish it from the singular. In this case, the plurality must be
inferred from the general course of the conversation or narrative.
When it becomes necessary to mark the distinction, there are several
modes of doing it; — 1st, in some of the dialects, by an indefinite or
demonstrative or [)ossessive pronoun prefi.xed, as )iisi tmjuta, Sam.,
some men; omt toi, liis axes; era tvare, N. Z., those houses; '2dly, in
most of the dialects, by the form of the adjective, as raaii raiti, Tah.,
large tree, pi. raaii rarahi, large trees; 3tlly, by .some numeral or
adjective signifying number. These three methods will be further
illustrated hereafter. Finally, the most general manner of denoting
the plural is by means of particles, most of which have a collective
sense, prefixed to the noun.
Ill I'akaalii wu heard iii, knu, and tiii used liir this |Hir[Nw; as >ii no, clouds; kiiii
j>u, .shells : /(■ tiiifdlr, the houses.
In Saiiioaii the plural signs arc «i, an, iiiou, liti, ijulu, titii, ijii. Ai is also u.scd lor
some, as )ii a oiiloit, some I'or you ; but it morc ollen has u general signilicalion, na e le
u/n liii-ii III Idijiilti, men shall not li-e. 'i'his panicle dcK's not admit an article ln'fore it.
Nai is used in ihe same way lor a small numlier, as iiai in dun, two fishes. An is
useil for a class or collictioii : moil and Ini lor a multitude; tjnlu lor women and
ebildrc'ii ; lOu is only used beiiire words sigiiilyilig country, isl.and, district, and the I'kn, as
ti: lUu nun, the towns. Ihi is found onl_\ in the numerals, as srfula, ten, selaii, lu.ndi-ed :
loll/ f/a/n/u, thirty; I'liii ijii /mi, three hundred. It should bo ob.served that the words
nil, niou, Ini, ijiilii, iifii, are considered to be in the singular, and would take a singular
pronoun ; as /n/iii mini injr/u, his angels (properly, bis coiii|iony of angels) : iniii iiihIo
would signify, his angels, in a general seli.se.
.1
1' ( ) I, \ N K S I A N (J 11 A M .M A It.
239
In 'I'ciiifiHii we Imvc no'i, iin/ii, /:iiii, liiim, Jiiiiii, fitij'iii, iitii. Oijo is used only in the
ilu:il, anil in liict sii|)|ilii.s the |ilii<-<' cil' llii' woril Iwii, lliiiiij;li il prcvtMli's the noun, while
till.' niiniiTiil MiMild rolliivv; iis /.«■ oijh (//,■<(«, the mo Ii'its. Iliilii is tin: niiist i»i'iicrnl
plunil sijjii, US /,7*' iKiliidkdiiy Ihi; irccs. It is (|nrsliipniiMi' wlicllicr this U? di^rivcd from
thu phu'iil ai'ticli! nn, wliicli wu I'lnd Iktci only in cLTtiiin nunitTiils, us imkiimi, ijii/mu,
pc<tu, till! plurals ol' /il.iiini, lihiiii, and tcau (v. anti! § 11). Kdii has the same moaning
as «/( in SiiMiDim, as bx' /,iiii fiifiimi, ihe wurknu'n (i. e. ii parly cmpjoyt'd tc)i;othnr). It
dues nut always nial<c the wiird to which it is |ircli.\i-'d plural, hut sometimes retains its
independent siiinillc alinn of <'ompany, hand, — as /.«• /can viihd, the erew of a vessel.
Tiiivi has a similar liirci^ I'aiyi means a (lock or herd, and is iis('d only of the lower
animals as km' fni/a /iw.da, a herd of swine ; koc Jaijii mitit, a (lock of (i)wls. Fiiijui
applies only to hirds, as kiic Jiiifiii lu/ie, a (light of pigi.'ons. Otii is the sumo with alu
in SanKjan, as koi: ulu inolit, the islands. Note. Tumiilii, child, makes liimaiki in the
plural, atid Ultiiui, younyer brother, Xma futo prefi.xed to it; us, ko huku Jhto tehi/ia, my
youn;^er hrolhers.
N(.w Zealand. This dialeet has hut one plund sign, ;w, which never takes un article
UMIire il, as ki yd Inlui o yii tiitini, to the sif^ns of tlu^ times. Kaii is used in some
compounds, as Ic kiiiniintiKi, X\v\ ancestors, the ancients.
'I'lie Uurotongan lias pukr, ijn, (iroijii, an, iii, and di. Puke is only for a small
niindjer, nnd chielly in iIk' ilual, as Id ididi jutkc kiqieijd, their (two) nets; >)(i is ulso
for a limited nnmher, and is commoidy used with a numeral, as ya tulnii (iriiiic, five
talents; it never has the article heliire it. Amyd and dii are collectives in fre(|uent use,
— td rdldii iiriiyd kiijii'yd, their (several) nets ; Ic aroyii dyr/o, the angels ; tc rciiii an
tidiliid, those things. Ui is a collective applied to persons, us tc id itriki, the princes ;
tv III liiiiija viiniii, the chief priests. Ai occurs only with words expressive of relation-
ship, as tdkii di tmhiii, >iiy parents; lokii ui hiiii/ir, my sisters. We find iirotjii used
also independenlly, as, liiai iiriiyd, some; /c dioya i la, those who killed.
'I'he only plural particle ccailaiui'd in our Maiii,'arevan vocabulary is mini, us a mini
tayiild lid, alt men ; hut others, no doubt, exi>t in the laiiiiuage.
The Tahitian has iki, mini. Inn, pnc, and hiii. Sii denotes, in general, a small
plurality, two or three, as iiu miliiii, the parents, fiither and mother ; nil tiiata, the men,
a small number; hut il muy denote a great numlxT, when it is unccrt.'iin. Mini is an
unlimiteil plural, us iinif tdiitii, men; mini mrtiiii, parents, in genernl. Tun denotes a
small indelinile plurality, as iiiln ira tun liintii lii, hut lew men, two or three. Pnc and
/(('(' arc^ colb.rlives, as pni' iiiii, the royal family, or principal chiefs; ])iic rniitira, the
body of subordinate chiefs ; hiii nrii and hni rdiitini have nearly the same meaning ;
hul Ji lie hinfn seems an exception, us being mtn-e limited; hni lioii is a general word for
friends, [The loroi;oing is extracted from the Tahitian (irummar of the Knglish mis-
sionariis; on referring, however, to the translations, by the same authors, we find the
pnc anil nil used very much as jnikr and iid in Karotongan, as tnojiili jmi: liiuln, two
men ; nn lii/ciii crinni, live lalenls. Il should lie observeil that mi is never preceded by
the article, while all the rest admit of this construction.]
In Hawaiian, the plural signs are mi, mini, jioc, pur, unil pnn, JSii is the most
common, and expresstM a plural indefinitely large ; as, na nuinn o tti k-uii, the birds of
the air. Mnn does not apply generally to a great number, rarely more than ten. 7'or
restricts the noun to a particular company or set of |iersons or things spoken of, as ta
240
I'll I I.O I.O(i Y.
poc Iciti sijjiiifios oillipr the children (bri'oro mcntidncil), or cliildrpn, ns cnnlrniliRtiii-
Ri«
islicd fruiii adults.
\(ir nnci jiiiii nn" tiscti very imicl
jHir,
but more srldcuii ; In
pir iiiiKi J/iiiniii mi .siuiiilii s tin- };riiii|i of llawiiiiiin i^lniids. AW, iis in llic Talii-
ti.'ili, (lillrrs (Voin llic olliiT |iiirliclrs in not takinii nn iirticlc U'liirr it.
rill y»*'. y<i is used as in flawaiian, ns
III Niiliiiliivan, wi' liiiil nn, /<
III, iitiiii or iiiiiii, a
)iii kiiiuilii iiiiiliii, yuod nii'ii ,' liiii is a jji'iirral rollirlivi' sij^ii, as /,</ iinii If Inn hut nir Ic
Inn Inn', hr\W'
iilnlin.-li(
mid 111
Kill
[ill
iiltor
ui
mnn IS a|i|>lit'u to a small
rciuliTcd liy .Mr. tVimk a pair, as r iiinn knhni, n pair ol' car-rings; jhx signifies a com-
pany, as Ir juH' Inliinin, llic artisans,
['I'lic partii'le ijn, as lKli>ri' riiDarknl, appears to Ix- the proper plural article or prefix
of the iVilynesian dialects. All the other words were originally collective nouns. Kiin
(or 'an) seems to mean properly a parcel, or hunch. It is probably the root of llie
Tongnn tckaii, n score. Knn-nji means, according to Mariner, a parcel of yams, twenty
in number. Pnkc or pn'c is a lienp, or hillock. Mnn has perhaps the same meaning,
and may Ik- the root of the word mnntjtt, moimlaiii ; indeed, the .Mangarevan has inoii,
signifying hill. Tniin is from In, to stand, and means any thing whicli stands, and
hence any thing piled up — a heap, n innund. I'nijni, /mi, ni, are from the ISamoon
/mi (or more commonly /»»//('.<() to bind in a bundle, — hence, n sheaf or bundle of any
thing, /'or, in Hawaiian, seems to lie from tlie Tongnn /«•, a mass, lump, or ball, — from
which the Tahilian makes both its article le/nic (ante § Iv!) and the word y)w, pearl. I'oc,
in New Zealand, means a ball, I'n'n, Haw., means a small round hill, a protuliemncc ;
hnopn'ii is to heap up. [Vide Pnkn in Le.x.J In colloquial I'lnglish, the words knot, lot,
bunch, are not unfri'<|Uenlly used in a similar manner ; and in some parts of our country,
the Word heap is commimly eniployeil by the uneducated with this sense. In Mexico, n
like meaning is given by the lower classes to the word niiii/ni/ni (machine); as mm
tiidijninn i/e miilns, de cmhrs, a great imml)er of mules, carriages, &c. This was
explained from the tact tlint the only machinery of conseiiuenco used in (hat country
bi'ing in the corn-iiiills, the name oC iiidi/niini has Ih^coiiu' appropriated to them, — and ns
they usually contain a large store of corn and meal, the word has undergone a further
dcvialiiin, and is employed to signify a great ipiantity or mass of any thing — and hence,
a great nuiuUr. This example may serve to show the dilViculty of tracing to their origin
nil the particles employed in the I'olynesin > dialects, without a thorough knowledge of
the habits and miHles of thinking of the natives.]
i IT), A plural of a peculiar kind is formed in the dialects of New
Zealand, Tahiti, .^nd Hawaii, by the particle ma appended to a proper
noun, or to a wo-d si<rnifyini; a rational beitiir. It gives the meaning
of company or associates connected witii the person.
In New Zealand, Ji'-iiji mn, is Hongi and his company, or those with him. In the
vocative, ii ?«(//•« ma! () friends! or rather, O friend, and those with you! So c hoa
mil ! friends !
In Taliitiai), Mnsr mn, Moses and those with him ; I'nofiii mil, I'aofai and his party.
In Hawaiian, 7i(H/V('/«/(/( w«/, Tnuitiaoiili and his associates; I'lkmn, liiv goddess
Pele and her attendant divinities. In this dialect, it is not used in the vocative,
^ If). The distinctions of case are determined either by the collo-
cations of the words, or by tiie use of particles. In all the dialects,
i
"^n-
1' () I, V N K S I A N (1 R A M M A R.
241
if the substantives come toj^cther, with no particle to mnrk the rela-
tion between them, the hitter ni the two is considered to be in the
genitive.
Apii-liimi, Sntn., |mlin tiC hnnd ; fule nianu, Tonj;., bird-cngo (liousf^ of bird) ; Itiu
Uninld, N. '/.., a iimii's scpidclirf ; ItJui-Uii, Tuli., border of Iho sea, sca>coast ; Uthiina
I'c/i; lliiw., priest of I'ele,
The Itiirotiiiignn is peculiar in lengthening the finni vowel of the preceding word, as,
riiii mi, well of water; kolii/d kaiija, divisiun of land. This, however, a|i|)cars to lake
place only with the vowel ii.
i 17. The Polynesian languaj^es have a peculiar particle to mark
the nominative, or rather the airent, in a sentence. This particle is
ko, or, in Samoan, Tahitian, and Hawiiiian, Vi. Its use varies some-
what ill the dirterent dialects, but its general object appears to be to
mark the governing noun. In all, it is used to reply to the questions
" who or what is it?" " who did it ?" and the like.
In Snmoan its iiso is very frequent. When prefi.xcd to common nouns in the singular,
or collective plural, it usually has the article after it, as, o Ic tinjiitti, the man ; o le tiipu-
Itiyti iimiildvii, all the generations; in the ordinary plural, however, it immediately pre-
cedes the noun, as, o ttimii «iH((, the young children. With proper names and pronouns
it has no article, as, o Vnviisii, Vava.sa ; o oiitoii, ye. It dixjs not always pri'cede the
nominative, but only when this is at the begiiming of the sentence, or in apposition to a
preceding noun ; as, o liniii. lane, o Josrjii, o Ic tdijtita iipii-lrlei, her husband, Joseph
[U'ingJ a just man. It is also used independently of a substantive, as, o e luj'txii idle (lu,
wh(X'ver shall reject me; use, who.s(K'ver.
In Tougan, in is used before proper names, and sonu^ of the pronouns, and koc (for
ko he) U'Core common nouns. This parti<de never occurs in the middle of a sentence,
except when in apposition to a preci'ding noun, or preceded by the preposition koeuhi ;
as, koeuhi kixni, tecauso of me (or rather koe iihi kmiu, I being the cause).
In the other dialects this particle is used less frequently than in the two preceding.
The Ibllowing are the principal cases in which it is found: — (1) Ik-fore proper names,
when at the l)eginning of a sentence or in apposition, as, o Petcro oe, Tah., thou art
Peter ; Uma tune ko Josepha, Kar., her husband Joseph. (2) Before most of the per-
sonal, demonstrative, and interrogative pronouns in like circumstances ; ko kotai te
maranid, Rar., ye are the light; te moii ra, koia te npega o teianei dO, Rar., the harvest,
that is the end of this world ; ko tehea o koiilou, N. Z., which of you ? o udi lu tu mca
o oiitoii. Haw., who is there of you f (3) Before common nouns, at the beginning of a
sentence^ when it is desired to emphasize them, it is generally followed by the singular
article, Ic, or by the plural particle ija or na. As the propriety of rendering an expres-
sion emphatic will ap|>ear dillerently to dillerent minds, there is, in all the dialects, some
uncertainty about its use. In three chapters of Matthew (the .^th, 0th, and 7th) the
Samoan uses this particle fifty-six times, the New %aland forty-nine, the Rarotongan
forty-six, the Hawaiian forty-three, and the Tahitian twenty-six. The latter, in general,
makes a more sparing use of it than the others. In the verse " all tilings whatsoever ye
01
24S
I'M I !,(> I. or. Y.
m
f
would thai others should do unto you," Sic, the Sanionn hns "o mm niiui," t\w Now
Zcnlnnd, " ko >)ii mm kii/iid," the Tiiliiliuii, " Ir iiniii mm Imi" the |{iiri)liiri|{nii, " If mi
men kiilixi" iiiid tlii" lliiwiiiiaii, " n mi mm n /uiii," Hire llii' Itiinitonnnu coincidi's
with the 'I'liliiliim, bill in most casi's it njirci'S with the oilier iliiilcrls. In llir Nnilriiro
" 'WiwswiVT siiiill Ik) aii^iry," lln' Siiiiionii has " i> /r fininln," Ilir New Zealaiiil and llio
Rnrotoiiijan, " kn Iv Imjiiln" tlir llavMiiiaii, "otumra," aiul the Taliilian, sim|ily, " tc
tiKlltl."
This particle is also prclixrd to adverbs iiseij siilislanlively, or without n vorli; as in
tho sentence " within they iire raveiiini; wolves," (i.e. as to the inside) — in Iho Sanioan it
is tittniiii, in New Zealand, ko mtn, in Taliilian, o riito. So ko mini, liar., Iieliire j ko
rririi, N. '/.,, then; ko riiijn tviiri,ki> nvniki (inn, Maii^., this is nl)ove (or the ii|i|ier), that
is below.
[It is curious that in Iho Australian dialect spoken by the tril)e on Hunter's Kiver,
(which belongs to an entirely dillercnl class of lannua};e» from the I'lilynesian) this same
particle ko is used lor precisely the same purpose, — namely, that of marking the active,
or what Mr. Tlirelkeld terms the a^ent form of the noun, which i" jjenerally the uomiiin-
live, thoufjh in some cases it rather answers to the ablative. The particle, however,
dillcrs from that in the I'olynesian, in beinj; postlixeil to the noun. Kure is man, and
koreko is the same word wlien used us the nominative to a verb, or in answer to the
question " who did it ?" It thus corres|)onils precisely to ko tr tinjnlu. This tiwt is
mentioned merely as an interesting eoincidence, and not as indicating any coimexion
between the two languages.]
i 18. The genitive is formed by the propositions a and o, both of
which si<rnify of. There is a sliorht shade of dillVrenco between these
two prepositions, wliicli it is difficult for a fori>i<;;ner to compreiiend,
though the natives are careful to observe it, and never substitute one
for the other.
The proper meaning of a seems to be nf, in the sense of hlonping to, while o is more
general and indelinite. The chief didiculty lies in determining what is to lie regarded as
properly in the possession of a person. The Polynesians seem to consider that the child
Mongs to the liilher, but not the father to the child ; that the husband and wili; are each
other's property, but brothers and sisters not. A man's body or his limbs are not consi-
dered as in his possession, — perhaps Ix'cause they rather form a part of him. So the
house in which a man lives, and the clothing which he wear;^ are not spoken of as his
pro|)erty (but rather as things which he uses), but* his food is. So a man's speech is
considered as lielonging to him, but not his life. The almve distinctions pervade all the
dialects, with some exceptions only in respect to words expressing relationship. In other
classes of words the usage varies. The o, however, is the most common particle, .Vs
the a is properly used in the sense of Monf;ing to, it can only come beliire a noun signi-
fying a living being ; n is used b<'fore all other nouns ; thus, " the canoe of (or belong-
ing tt)) Filunin," will bo, te vaka a Piltaga; but " the canix; of the ship," or "the ship's
lioal," te vaka o le folau.
\ 19. A peculiar form of the genitive is made by reversing the
i
%
I' () I, V N K S I A N (J R A M M A R.
243
v«t;!
.m
iiHunl order, and placin(^ the noun in the ^unitivo lieCoro tho nomina-
tive; in this case, tho o or « wliicli |)recedi'M tho gonilive coalesces
with tlus article which precedes tlie nominative.
Tliiis iiiHlPiiil cif /(■ /((/<• A' (//(/, till' SiimimiiH siiy /ii Ir iilii /iilr (/o lor /(• i>) ; in New
Zi'iiliiliil, liir /(' kiipii II If tagiitii. 111'! H|)pt;cli of the iiiiin, wo Imvo /// tr liiijiilu kiipii / in
Tnhilimi, (or te mnitiii n If itinii J''iiirisr<i, lUr ri),'hlc(>iisnr>sH of the I'linrisci'M, it is, In te
vuiii I'/iiirisiu miiiliii ; in lliiwiiiiiin, te piie iiiiiii n Jiiiiriiii tiri, the iitliinils of lliiwuii
lirrc, Im'coiiii'm, /m lliwiiii iiri piu- iiiiiii. In Tungiui tlii.s construction is niily fuund in
tti)' |>r<iniiun8, wlioru it will lj<' hrreiiOiT noticcil.
i 20. In the dialects of Now Zealand and Eastern Polynesia
(Tahiti, Uarotonga, Hawaii, &c.,) the same distinction is made be-
tween na and no, meanini^ 'iftf'tr, cuncernhuj, as between a and o.
As, hr tc/ihine na U alii. Haw,, a wilij for thu king ; he fide no te alii,a house for the
kioK.
In New Zealand, a similar distinction appears to exist between ma and (mo, as tettthi
mta mo te mutiuUnne, sumething for the lather ; kai ma rittou, food for thcin.
ij 21. The dative is formed by prefixiii<.f ki (Tong., N. Z., liar.,
Mang., Nuk.,-) or 'i (Sam., Tah., Haw.,) to the noun. Before proper
names and pronouns this becomes kia or '/«.
Ki lie iniinii, Tong., ki Ic numii, N. Z., Kiir., .N'lik., 'J /« niiinii, Sam., '( te manu,
Tqh„ 't III manu. Haw., mean "to tho bird," Kia Nnmn, nr 'm Xiimii, means "to
Noma."
In iSunioan and Tongan, a particle of euphony, Ic, is in.sorted between the preposition
and the pronoun ; as kia, te ait, Tong., 'in te an, Sam., to mc. In the other dialects it is
not found.
In Hawaiian the '/</, whicli should precede pro|icr names and pronouns, is sometimes
changed to 'f'o, as /ir/i: mni la in 'io'ii tici, ho came to me here ('(o'» tor 'ia ii'ii).
I) 22. The accusative generally, though not always, has the particle
i before it. This particle must not be confounded with the ki of the
dative, as it has often been in those languages which drop the k.
Before proper names and pronouns it becomes ia.
In Samoan, tn/ii i le aji, light the fire, is the usual form of expression, though tafu k
afi is sometimes heard.
In Tongan, this use of the i is less common than in the other dialects, but it is occa-
sionally met with, ns he kuoii tamate i ae tai/ata, I have slain a man.
In New Zealand, its use is not constant, and it ap|K'ars to be employed cliielly where
precision is requiri'd ; e ho atii i te iitii kia Jliha, to give tribute to Cusar; ya tamariki
o ratoii i put II i ija jmioj)iti, the children of those who killed the prophets.
In T.ihitiun, linrotongan, Hawaiian, and Nukuhivan, i is constantly employed as the
prefix of the accusative.
^ 2:3. / is also, in all the dialects, a sign of the ablative, with the
meaning of ?« (place) and fry (cause, instrument, &c.)
Ml
I'll I l.o l.oo V.
J It III), Sam., in Irnvrn ; i he rkn liuii, Ttiii;;., iil my nimiiitt; i iiln, iilii(|„ on
iihiirc ; r mnlr riiliiii i te hikr, lliir., Ilirj xlinll dii' liy lln' nwnril ; iiii mute litlim i In
mill, Haw., Iliry died by Bickiir»s.
y i.\|iri'sM('N llii' alilcillvi.' Ill' raiisc, manner, and meanN, aDcr an arlivc vcrli, ax '' Itial
oraj;ifi(v allrr a |ias«ivi.'. This disiiiiiliim in always ncrii|ailiiiis|y ulmcrvcd.
i 24. The Ni<;n of tlio ablative after a passive verb ih e, answerin^r
to tlie I.atiii II i>r ah.
DtltiiiKi e le jtenijiltrtn, Sam., .spokon liy llif proplirl ; leu aki r hr tiigiiln, Tong,,
ipokcn by a man ; u i Uiiniiilia in r le hiifu, N, /„ and ho wn« niocki'd by the pooplu ;
r. niii/iiiiiiiiii Ill/nil e le Aliiii, Haw., we an' (in'scrvcd by (i(>d,
) 'it'). E is also tlie sii{ii of the vocative case, answering to o in
English, but in more freiiuent use.
K lull iilii, Sam., (1 my Inril ! /•."/>■/>'/»•, Tnng., O woman! K Iliiimona, N. Z., O
Simon ! K le Dinuiiiiia, Tab., (> Lord I
Tbu SaiMoan, |{aruloM){aii, and lliiwallan, siimctimc!* place Ihix parlieb' aHer Ibe noun,
lu/ui/eaii e! O master ! — and sometime.s \»i[\\ U'l'on' and allrr, a* f Id miitim nlii e! O
our Lord ! K le ulii e! liar., C) Lord ! F, le ntiia e! Ilaw., (> UihI !
Many, il' nut all, of ibe lanniiaj,'c\s, bave words wliirh an> used only in Ihc vocative,
like the iMijilisb sir; u», mJe, Sam., sir! I'liiiu, Sam., woman ; ida, 'Von^., vi general
word to call attention ; mum, .\. '/.., sir ; i>ii, N. '/.., lather.
i
T II E A I) J K I' r I V K.
i 86. The adjective follows the noun which it iiualifies.
bhle tele, Sam., leore rulii, .\. X., Iiule niii, Haw., larj^e bouse.
In Ton^'an only, a lew i'\i eptions are (.(iven, wbicb anr probably rather apparent than
real ; Ibey are ///, great, fiinmii, cbier, or most excellent, and /mi at fur, single; — -Ju ukaii,
a large tree |or, as we miglit say, " a lump ol'a tree"). I'lnjuiii is probably I'rom /«(;«,
meaning lnj>, wilb the V'ilian pri|K)siii(in tii afTi.xed ; _/« may \k from the Vilian t'«, a
trunk, stock, foundation ; Jiir is, properly, a round ma.ss or ball.
I) 27. In most of the dialects the adjective is frequently made
plural by the reduplication of one of its syllables, and sometimes of
the whole word.
Sam. luau tele, large tree ; pi. Inau telele, large trees.
Sam. miiiiijii maiiiUinju, high mountain ; pi. maiij/a muiiliiliiffa.
Tong. tiiluii lulii, great whale ; |)l. tiifuA luluhi.
Tong. muliuki, sick ; pi. muhumuhiiki, sick (|)ersons).
N. Z. ikii /fii, good fish ; pi. iku jiu/x'i.
Rar. ikti nieiluki, giKid lisli ; pi. iku memeituki.
Rar. nuiki, sick ; pi. mukniitiki, sick (|xTs<ai»).
Pau. crirc leiru, good woman ; pi. erirc wiriiwiru.
Tah. tU4ita miiiliii, gmxl man ; pi. taatii nuiiUUai.
I' O 1. V N K H I A N (i U A ,M M A K.
840
rah. rniiii ni/ii, liirun Irii' ; pi. ni"ii nini/ii,
'VWn I iiliiirily iliNs iihI ixi'.i in ihi' lliiwniiiin.
hi Siiiiiiiaii, l>y II Niii){iiliir cxci'iilluii, ih/i, nihuII, lins I'nr itn pliirni, ili.
I) QS. Tlio coinpariMori of adjtsctivcH is ottiictcd by various circum-
locution.s; for, "lliis is creator tlum that," they say, "this is great
ahovo tliat," or " hcvoiul tliat," or "this exceeds that in greatness,"
or simply, "tiiis is <,'ri'!it to that."
Mom. (' ti/n tiiici I Ivlii, lliis ii jjrpiil to lliiit.
Hnm. e si/i Imtn leki i Ion, IiIh ({(Kidnrsii excrpdji mine.
Snm. n'aii ilili, iii lilr in, I iiiii siiiiill, liul lie is urciit.
Sum. tdildi iinr, nimiii Ix'yiiiid, fiir nimhiit, iiiiirc rnidily,
Tong, Kill) liiri lithi III' /nun/" la lie si/ii, n niiiii is grenlly good to a sheep, — i. e. s
liinii is miH'li Inllrr tliaii a slin'|i.
Tong. /((//( ill Silomiiiic, ^rral ti> .'"iiilimmii.
Tong. Iiilii Itnke i — , grrat al*)vc ; Inlii inje hi — , grrnt Ix'yond.
N. Z. hr liinnlti riihi iike in Ifotini, a ninn great above John.
N. Z. knlin n/ii in in, strong beyond him,
N, Z. /cm n/ii, iiiiirc, — i. r. Iliat iK^ymid ; rriiiin n/ii, five more.
Rar. r miiiiln nin i /c iiro, b(> is great to (greater than) the temple.
liar, kino iiinii/n iin n/ii /r ii/x-iin n /nun Inijn/n in, i /li miin/injnna, bad, great,
lieyond (much worse) (is) the end of that man to the beginning,
Toh. (' mid Tnlii/i i Mumrn, Tahiti is great to .MiK)rea.
Tah, r nilii n/ii lierrtmir, Uritain is great Ix'yond (still greater),
Tuh. f rnlii mil 'lit Aiiiiricn, America is very gri'at beyond (much larger).
Tah. e men mniliii nr, a thing good alnivi' (or belter, but in u small dcgiec).
Tall, nil linn /rir i Ir mnnin, this exceeds in length.
[These examples are taken Irom llic Tahilian Grammar.]
Haw. polo at, short aliove (lor shorter).
Haw. e oi ntii to nit/oii nini/ni i lo Inloii, your goodness exceeds theirs.
Nuk. mcitiii, good ; iiiei/ni n/ii, lieller.
Nuk. {' ittit, inland ; t iiln ntn, farther inland.
Nuk. o te ointiii mm nko i If litina ke n te Etua (G.), man [is] greater than (very
great to) the other works of God,
) 29. The superlative is formed by means of adverbs which have
the sense of very, exceedingly, or by a repetition of the adjective, as
in Italian. It is unnecessary to give examples.
NUlUERALa
i 30. The following are the numerals in the Polynesian dialects :
it will be seen that a great similarity pervades them all, with tiie ex-
02
•"ffm.^
346
I' II I I, O I, O (i v.
ception of the Paumotuan, wliicli differs in this respect, as in much
of its vocabulary, from the rest.
A few of llic Tahitiaii numerals nro also pwiiliar ; these have lx!cii sulistitiiteil for the
conimoii words (wliich ore not altogether obsolete) by a custom termed te jii, for which
see § 81.
ONE.
TWO.
THREE.
KOUR.
FIVE,
Fuk.
tusi
liin, lia
tola
/"■
lima
Sam.
tiisi
Ilia
to/ii
fa
liiiia
Tong.
tului
na
tolu
/«
nimii
N. Z.
tilhi
ma
torn
wa
riiiia
Rar.
Uii
rua
torn,
a
rima
Mang
tai
rua
torn
a
riiiia
Pau.
niri
ite
yrti
ojyc
ycka
Tah.
tii/ii
run, pUi
torn
ha, maha
rima,pac
Haw.
UM
Ilia
tola
ha, taiina
lima
Nuk.
tahi
na
tou
ha otfii
ima
SIX,
SEVEN.
EKiMT.
NINE.
TEN.
Fak.
ono
Jit 11
vain
iva
filn, yofiilu
Sam.
OHO
JUu
valu
iva
sefnln, ijafnln
Tong.
otto
pu
vain
hiva
hoijnfulu
N. Z.
ono
wilit
worn
itva
yiihnrn
Rar.
ono
itu
varii
iva
yiiiirii
Mang.
ono
itu
varn
iva
yaurii
Pau.
hcnc
hi to
hiuin
nipa
horihnri
Tah.
ono, fine
hitii
varn, van
iva
ahuru
Haw.
ono
hitii
vain
iu'ii
himi
Nuk.
ono
hilii,filu
I'll It
iva
onohiiii
TEN I'AIR.
TWENTV.
THIRTY.
rORTT.
rirrv.
Fak.
Ilia Ijllf'ulll
talii luifiiln
Ja ynfiilu
lima ijafnlii
Sam.
lllll fiilu
tolu nnfiitu.
fa ijiifit/u
lima i/iifnln
Tong.
ickati
uofiilit
tolu ii'i/iuu
fa yifiilu
71 ima ijiifiilu
N. Z.
tektiii
rua ijuhuru
torn ijahuru
wa ijahuru
rima iiahurii
Rar.
Mung.
takiiii
liikdu ma
ijauru
rua tiikau
rua tiikau ma
fiaurit
Puu.
tti'MH (?)
Tah.
ta'iiH
la'an ma
nh.irii
rua la\iu
run ta'aii ma
iihiirii
Haw.
iuiUiiJiio
tiiiiatolu
tanitlii'i, ta'aii
Uniiiha mc ta
mm.
Nu?i.
lektiii
tikiiu ma
OHo/lUU
tuhd, taiijd
tolia >na
imohuii
'f,K 'fi
POLYNESIAN (i R A M .\I A l(.
247
ch
the
licli
I'ltlii
(III
(hi
'hlu
lint
mc Ui
ONK IIUNUKKU.
TWO IIUNUIIKI).
FOL'K lir.M)
Fnk.
lull
Sain.
lull, seliiu
lull lull
fii ijidaii
Tong.
an, ttnu
ua ijiuii
fa tjeaii
N. Z.
ran
ruti nut
wa rail
Rar.
rail
Mang,
rima takcnt
run
run rail
Pau.
IKtIll
Tah.
rima ta'itu
ran
run rail
Haw. liiiUanahd me limn taiuilia Ian
ta iiva/alna
Nuk. ua tolia ma ima tohd an
tckau
ONK rilfll'SAM) AMJ urWAIlO.^.
/.///, a lari!C iiu.;:'uT, illdi'lillilo
«/(•, 1000 j luiiiio, lO.OC'l: ilu,
100,000
iiji; 1000; mniin, 10,000; kilu,
100,000
maiii), 1000; liiii, 10,000
maiio, -Zmu ; tini, •,'0,000
7iiam>, -JOOO ; Kin, 20,000 ; tini,
a gi'ciit iiimiiIht
mil no, 1000 (.')
minio, -JOOO ; mamj/ini, •J0,000 ;
rrhn, '-'OO.OOO ; in, ;i,000,000
nia/iij, 4000 j lini. 40,000 ; Ichii.,
40(t,000
minio, 4000 ; lini, 40,000 ; t.u/d,
400,000 ; jio/ii, 4,000,000
Tho word aft; which in Snninan and Tungiin signilius a llunisand, is wanting in thf
other dialects ; they have adapted, instead of it, iiiani), wliich, in lli<' Iwd (iirnier, signifies
ten thousand. Kiln, Tong., U/n, Sam., a liundred thousand, is probably the same word
with ill in Taliilian, which signifies a million, and kin, which, in Maugarevan, stands for
twenty thousand, and wlii<di we heard used at Fakaufo fijr a great but indefinite number,
(c kin tc till fate , the houses are very many.)
In Sanioan, the natives appeared to make, in the tens and hundreds, a dill'erence
between the dual and the plural. Sifiiln was ten ; Inn fnhi or Inn sifnln, twenty; and
tolit iinfiln, thirty. So selnn was the word for one Inindreil ; Ina Ian or Ina scltin, two
hundred ; to/n ijalan, throe huiulred. The missionaries, however, employ Ina ijafulii
and Ina tjalan, and it is likely that tho usage of the natives may vary.
^31. Iia the Ttihitian, Rarotoiigan, and Maiiifarevan, the words
rail antl mano, which should properly .signify hundred and thousand,
are doubled in value, and stand for two huiidrt>d and two thousand ;
while in Hawaiian and \ukuhivan they arc tpiadruplcd, and stand
for four hundred and four thousand. Tiie missionaries, in order to
induce the natives to return to the more convenient decimal enume-
ration, have been obliefed to introduce into these dialects the English
words hundred and thousand {/iiincri and tauscnii).
The origin of these singular variations is probably To be fi)und in the fact I lat most of
the objects which the natives h ve occasion to eiuuMcrale, being articles of f lod, and of
small size (such as yams, cocoa-nuts, fish, and the like), can be most conve.iiently and
expeditiously counted in pairs. Tliis mode is therefore universally adopted. 'I'aking one
in each hand, the native, as he throws them into tlie storeliouse, or on to the heap, counts
one; for two pairs, ho says lico; lor ten pairs simply Irn, and so on. Uence each
iuiml)er has a twofold value, one lor objects counleil singly, and one (or those reckoned
in pairs. Tlio first emigrants lo Tahiti hud naturally but little occasion lo employ the
r
EC
sasrakc^r;;.
248
I' II I !,(> I, OU Y.
p.i
former or orii;inal viiliio, liavin^, of course, tew mcn.ciinoes, or other liirj;c olyects wliieli
rctinired lo Im- cipinteil. We enii easily perceive, Iherelbre, liow, in process of time, the
primary nieaiiini; ol' the words miylit 1h^ wholly forgotten, and the secondary bi^ used in
coimliiij,' units as well as pairs. And if, aCti-r this nsaj.;e had Ix'icime fixed, a second
emigration took place I'rom Taliili to Nid<uhiva or Hawaii, we can, in the same manner,
account liir the second duplication.
The word Ldii (ir tchtii appears to he that which was originally used to signify ten
pair, as dislin<;uislicd from full' or ijii/iilii, the regular word for ten. This seems to he
its use in Toiiijan and New Zealand, in .Mangarevan /iiKaii, and in Tahilian Id'iiii, are
the ordinary terms for twenty, and firm the hasis of the higher enumeration, — thirty
being twenty and ten, forty twice twenty, ii huiulred five times twenty, iVc. In Hawaiian
ten is ««(/, the same ns the Tongan /,.v;h/, which means ten fathoms; twenty is iwa-
taliiti, a word compounded of iiri', nine, and /iin, two, — though why it shoulil have this
meaning cannot well be understood ; thirty is taiKitolii; forty is cxpn^sscd both by lu^ait
(for lii/:(iii, u corruption of trkmi), and by t<niiilia, Ix-ing the word ha, four, with n prefi.x
of unknown origin. This word, tiuiiilia, is, in this lunguage, the basis of enumeration
(uidess we apply that term to Iiiidki, w hich is a collective word for four, in which case
tamilia wuuld stand lor ten tiiioiii); llDy is lini<i/id nir ta iimi, forty and ten; a hun-
dred is two forties and twentj ; two hundred is four foriics ; and so on up to four hundred,
which is Inn.
At the Marfpiesas, Ixilh systems of lujmpralion, the binary and the quaternary, are in
use, the former in the siiulhern or 'I'almatan cluster, and the latter in the northern or
Nuhuliivan, but in both with some peculiarities. In counting large objects, which recpiire
to Ik' UMudH'red singly, as men, catKH/s, jiigs, \-c., tin; 'I'ahuatans liegin with liilii, one,
and continue up t(i oiiiJiiiii, ten, hikiiii, twenty, »//, two hundred, iiiiino, two tliousniid,
tiiii, twenty thousand, ti'Jii, twti hundred thousand, po/ii, two million. With snuill
objects, as fish and most kinds of fruil, they commence with Imuui, a pair, and, omitting
oiKihiiii, proceed lo /iiLdii, ten pair, "//, a hundred pair, iVc, showing evidently the
maimer in which the binary system was formed from the si-uple decimal Kor bread-
fruit, thev have a pe<Miliar moile, conmieucing w'wh jxjmi, a word wliich properly siguilies
R knot ; and as they are accustiuned lo tie up these fruit in knots of li)ur, the word has
come lo denote that nundKT ; tiikiiii is then ten jmiia (i. e. forty), and <iii should pro|MTly
k' one hundred ponii, — hut for .some unknown reason the word Iniitiu has been intro-
duced to denote that nntutK'r, and itii is used to signifj' two tiuiini, i. e. eight hundred ;
mnnn is ten ««, or eight thousand, iVc. 'J'be Nukubivans, in coimting all articles hut
breadfruit, begin with tiiliiy oni' (the word tniiiid, pair, not Ix'ing used), and proceed to
onoliuii, ten, Ickdii or lihaii (liir liikiiii), IwvDty.ltkiiii »iii oiiohuii, thirty, aller which a
new word is inlroduced for forty, which Mr. Crnok writes tditju or tiiii/ui, and Mr. Alex-
ander and .M. (iracia, /«//«. Fifty is tniilin (^tx ,'< Ini) »ia imoliuu ; one huTidrcd is m«
tniilin inn tiknii ; two hundred is iiiiii Iniilin ; fiur hundred is uu ; four thou.sand, iniino,
&c. For breadfiiiit they use the wcird /««»(, a knot of four, when liiiihit signifies ten
p(,nii (thus reluming to the decimal system), nil is one hundred /iniin, niniin one thou-
Ranil. Sometimes the Nukubivans, to pri-venl mistakes, employ the word ihi (large) atler
the numeral, to show that it is usi d in llie (|',ialeruary sense, and not according lo the
Tahuatan system, ns nii nil, four hundred, iiiiiiin ml, four thousand.
The missionaries have introduced into these language's th(! ordinary decimal sy.stem.
1> O I- Y N E S I A N OR A M M A H.
249
In tlic Tnliilinn and llnniton^nn thcv discniil llic tii'im iiiid tiiUnu iilt()f,'clli('r, usinjr only
nliiirii or iidiirn for Ion, (iiid Ibrniin^ the lii^licr niiiiil)('rs rcj;uliirly (riia iiliiini, titrii
nliiini, iVc.) lip hi Iiiiiirri, Innidrcd. In HaMaiiiin, they [irciccrd iVom /iinn/id, (iirty, to
hniiiliiiiii, lilty, liiHit'ini), sixty, nnd so on to the sanir word liiiiirri.
In llio Nuw Zealand Lirammar of I'rolbssor Lcc, and in the missionary Irnnslntions
into that dialect, tekau is used for ten in nil the nutnhers nhovc nineteen ; for Iwcntj',
they 1,'ive run tcknu^ — liir thirty, tnni tckn)i, \-c. Yet it is certain that these terms mean
rcs|)ectivrly twenty pairs, thirty pairs, and so on; or, at least, this is llii'ir proper and
original signiliealion, although some of the natives, under the instruction of the mission-
aries, niay now nave adopted tlieir mode of computation. 'I'lie origin of tlie inistako pro-
bably was the fact that the natives rnr ly have occasion to use the higher muiihers, except
in counting fish and potatoes, — nnd ihesc are always counted in pairs, A person hearing
a native sny for one pair, tiihi, mei ning simply one, — for two pairs, rim, meaning two,
and so on, would naturally supposi that trknii, used for ten [inirs, meant simply ten.
In the I'aumotuan we can ohser.e the process !)y which th(^ reduplication of the Tahi-
tian and Unrotongan was probahl/ etlcclcd. In this language there is a double set of
numerals, one for counting single objects, and the other for pairs. They are respectively
as follows :
ran, one
itc, two
tjiii, three
0}h; ((.ur
)ienc, five
yckii si.\
liilo, seven
linn «, eight
nij) I, nine
lior.lwri, ten
tikni/r, one pair
tcriiCiijK, two pairs
minliinr, three pairs
tiiipikii, four pairs
hnriliori, live pairs
system.
For twenty the term g'veii (as we inidiTstoixl it) was ilr Inkan. W'o supposed then that
these natives followed he same mode of coiiipiitation as that given in thi" Xew Zealand
grannnar, of the incrrcctncss of which \\v were not then awure. It seems likely that
we made here precisely the same mistake as the compiler of that grammar, 'ind that
Inknii does in lact IM-Iong to the second, or duplicate set of numerals, and means therefore
ten pairs. It would then be just the double oi'/iorihori. when the latter is used for live
pairs. It is easy to seo how Inkiui might, by a careless usage, be transferred hy the
natives lo the hrst set of numerals, and Ik' taken for tin' double of horiliori when the
lai;"r is I'sed for ten : in which case tnknii would mean simply twenty.
The '',.ciii..;:ian word for huiulred, ix')iii,mcn\\s also the head: we are reminded of
the Samoaii /»A^ ten, wnu \' me!>!is likewise hair, — nnd hnin, which signifies both live
and baud. The notion of connecting the names of numl)ers with parts of the body would
naturally arise from the habit of counting on the lingers.
It should tx' observed that the natives, in most of the groujis, commonly pn^lix to the
numi'rals the particles kn or n, and c, which are probably the verbal particles of allinna-
tion and present time (viili' ^^ .")() and '^'i). The first (kn or a) is commonly used when
the numeral precedes the noun, as kn lorn tja irnkn, N. 'A., there are three cnnoi's ; a
63
250
I'll I r,o I, or, Y.
h
If ' '
tahi raai', Tall., one tree ; the second both l)ct(iri' nnd a(ier, tvdkii Honi, \hTCc canoes ;
niia ihi, Nuk., two clicslnuts. In llnwiiiian lim is mmnionly nsed in the pliicc of these
particles belbro tahi. In repenting the nunies ol" tlie lirst nine numerals, ka or u is
nsnnlly onMixcil to the first, and e to the others, iis kaldlii or nlahi, eliiu, vtolii, &c.
\ 32. Somo of tlio terms for the higher numbers are only used in
counting particular articles.
For four, the llnwaiinns hiive two terms, lia and hr.uia; for forty, they have laiiiihd,
itUo, nnd Ui'aii. The first of these (laiiulia) is the i;eiieral term ; into is used in counting
pieces lA' Idjxi* (native cloth), and la'tiii in counting fish.
It has been before observed [§ 14) that kim. the root of the Tongnn lekait, probably
signified originally a parcel r)r bunch. 'Man would mean, llierefore, one parcel, which
they consider to be twenty, though this is evidently an arbitrary application, — precisely
as with the English scon; which means proiHjrly nny numlxT scored down. The natives
of Tonga employ it only in counting yams and fish. They have also a similar collec-
tive term, le/iihi, for hundred (though Mariner does not state its exact application) ; it is
prolmbly the word /;///(, a sheaf, or bundle, (from the tinmoan /«ii, to bind,) with the
article tc prefixed.
The word tckiniii, pi. ijnknmi, is used in Tongan for ten, in counting qfa, or fathoms,
— the common measun' of lenglh. In New Zealand kiiiiii signifies simply ten fathoms,
as does iiini in Tahitian. In Hawaiian i/nii is the usual word for ten, nnd (iiinkiilu
(from yafiilu) signifies n period of ten days. In tlie Mnngarevun vocabulary kioni is
given as a word for ten, but with no explanation of its use.
In .Nukuhivan, jxmd, fi)ur, and tdiidii, four hundred, arc used only in counting bread-
fruit.
V 33. The lower numbers are connected with the higher by the
conjunction ma, meaning and.
In Samonn, srfiilu ma tasi, eleven ; Idn ijdfiili/ ma tdsi, twenty-one ; in Tongan,
Iwyqfiilii ma iia, twelve ; in New Zealand, ijahiint ma tdrn, thirteen ; in Rarotongan,
paiiru ma a, fourteen ; in Nukuhivan, onokiiii ma ima, fiflecn, &c.
In Tongan, ma before dfe becomes mo, as mano mo ufe, eleven thousand.
In llnwuiinn, the word titma, which is rendered in the vocabulary "a number, com-
pany, flock," is introduced l>efbre the conjunction, as itmi tiima-ma-talii, eleven; tanahd
Inma-md-liia, Ibrty-two. It is only used, however, in connecting units with tens ; for
larger numters, mc, the usual term for witli in that dialect, is emiiloyed, followed by the
singular article (tc or id), or the plural sign (na)\ thus, fitly is tanahd me ta iimi, (forty
with the tea) ; sixty is Uinahd mc ta iwdtaliia ; seventy is tanahd me te tanatola (forty
with the thirty) — or, sometimes, tatinhd mc tia ami ctoln, forty with three tens.
In the .Mnngarevan vocabulary, the word tiima is given with the signification of unity
alter ten (aniti ajtris la dizaine), but there is no example to show its use.
\ 34. The ordinal numbers are formed by prefixing the article to
the cardinal, — and if the word be iti the nominative, or independent
of other words, the particle hi also.
• In Nukuhivan, hiatv \a liic iianu' oftiie ]ia|)tT-MlullHTry trcf, nt' wfiit-li tin- /rt;w is maiif-'.
POLYNESIAN ti It A M M A R.
251
m.
'O /e liKi, Sum., the second ; hr torn or kae tarn, Toiig., tlio third ; ko Ic va, N. Z.,
tlio fourth i n tc rima, Tnh., the tillh, &c.
i 35. The first time, the second time, &c., are expressed in most
of the dialect.s by tu, or some similar prefi.\.
In Samoan, atu lita, the second time ; ii/u lo/ii, llic third time ; in Tongnn, (no )ta,
tlio tolii ; in Now Zenlnnd, liiuriia, tiiutoni ; in Rarotongan, tit-nui, tii-torii ; in Ha-
waiian, tiia-hid, tna-tohi.
In the latter dialect this form is olso used in counting generations: tnpiuia is ancestor;
tupioKi tiKi/ii/i, grandfather; tii]>iniii limtiilii, great grandfather, &c.
In the New Zealand diaii'ct the prefix Inn serves likewise to express the partitives, —
as, tuuliitiy third part ; tiui-ijii/iUrn, tenth part or lithe. In Hawaiian, hajxi is used for
this purpose, as, hapahta, half; ItiijmiCdhi, an eighth.
) 36. The particle tah, or ta'i, is used in many of the dialects to
express a meaning similar to the English hij twos, by threes, &c. ; it
is also employed in the sense of twofold, threefold.
In Samoan, l(Cilii<i, by pairs, or each two, or twofold ; lii'ihiii, a liundred fold ; in
New Zealand, tnlcirun, tukiraii have the same meanings ; ihey are sometimes used in a
reduplicate form, as tatakiraii, a. hundred fold, or by hundreds. In Rarotongan, Uikirua,
takitoni ; in Tahilian, Uiiriin, tdilnrii, fic.
In Mangarevan, this is corrupted to tiki, as tikirun, tikitorit, meaning two to each,
three to each (in distribution).
In Tongan, it is ta-tiio, as ta-tuo-filii , seven-fold.
In Hawaiian, t<iilalti signifies unfrequcnt, scarce, — i. c. by ones.
In '^\m\ff\XK\a.n, jyiirim, jiiitDiii, 2>iia, ani\ in \\ayia\\an,]ntliiii, 2Mtolti, puhd, cxyiieas
double, treble, fourfold. In Hawaiian, these words also mean by twos, by threes, &c.
i 37. In numbering persons, toka or toko (to'a or to'o) is prefixed
to the numerals, and also to adjectives expressing number.
In Samoan, ii/i<i si/o to'asr/n/it m<i to'ulud, his twelve disciples ; lii'dfid, how many
(l)ersons) \ tti'dlelr, a great many.
In Tongan, tioiio tisdijxii tokd-hoijoj'iiln ma titkatui, his twelve disciples; tokdfilia.
how many 1 tokaldhi, many.
In New /culand, tokorini yn i>idtdj>o, two blind men.
In Rarotongan, tokonta ptikv taijald mdinpo, two blind men ; tokoia, how many?
In Tahitian, im iir tunpili <■ tooloni, two or three witnesses.
In Hawaiian, it becomes by reduplication tnto'Oyafi to/oWiW*;, five (persons) ; toto'olua,
how many ?
In Nukuhivan, tnkotahi (or more commonly tootdhi), tokoiia, Inkotmi, tokohid.
In the Samoan and Tongan this particle is used more frcfiucntly than in the other
dialects ; in these last i! is rather eni])loyed to express the number of |x?rsons in a com-
pany, than for general enumeration.
V 38. In Samoan, in numbering certain objects, they make use of
words analogous to the English term head, in the phrase, "five head
of cattle."
P
■r^
358
V II I I, () LO(i Y.
;
f
Tlio wcirils whicli Mr. Honlli jjivos ns exnniplos nre /m/, ijitoii, nuita, and fun. Imu
(one moniiiiii; (iCwliicli is /cdl) U used in oomilin^ lisli, us /tin iiifiif'ii/ii o in, ton lislios ;
/nil /nil ijiifii/ii, twenty. IIiiiki (pcrhnps stuno, ns yiiod means stony) is usod for cocoa-
ntits and yams, ns iin /iiiin ijiioit iiiii, tlicro nro fivo cocoa-nuts. Miiln (cycj is for tido
yoriim escii/ciiliim), — ns niiilit-iin/ii/ii n tii/n, ton turo-roots. Pun (frnit) is for bread-
fruit, n* Jiin-iinfii/ii n %i/ii, ten lircid-fruils.
\V(> jvnow (>rii(illiinj; siinilnr in tho ollior dialects, except tlint tiiin, body, is sometimes
used in Tnhitian niid Uamloiignii in cniinieratiiig persons, ns tnnla linn n/uirii, ten men.
In Uarotnngnn, also, ;vi«, and in Tnbiliiin nii^ are used liefore the word for ten in general
enumeration, as mii-iiniini in idi, Knr., and nii-nliiirii in iii, Tab., ten [arc] those
gencniiions. This niii may be a corruption of the Samian /nii, ns thi- counting of fish
is by far the most common occnsion I'or numbering among these islanders, and the prefi.x
which was at first appropriated to this might, in time, come to have a general application.
In Nuliuliivan, ]>ii is used in counting esculent roots, as afn/ii jm ti, eiin jio ti, one
root ofli, two roots of//,- po vn/iic signifies a billet of wood for fuel.
P R O X () r N s.
J 39. The pronouns of all the dialects, with the exception of the
Tongan, are nearly identical. All have three numbers, singular,
dual, and plural. The first person of both the dual and the plural
has two forms, to which the terms exclusive and inclusive have been
applied. The first excludes the person addressed, — or, should the
conversation be of two parties or companies of persons, this pronoun
applies only to that to which the speaker belongs, and excludes the
other; as "we here are good," meaning that you who are spoken to
are not; or, "we [Samoans] are honest," meaning that the people of
Feejec, concerning whom the conversation has been, are not. The
other, or inclusive form, comprehends both parties.
Most of the Samoan pronouns have abbreviated Ibrms, which arc used only in the
nominative, preceding the verb. These are given in the following list immediately after
the full Ibrms : —
HINOtlLAR.
nil, o'li, '«, I
'oe, V, thou
ui, he
iiiniin, mil, me (e.vc.)
>iiiiii, ta, we (inc.)
'u/iui, /itii, ye
/tiua, /<i, they
PLURAL.
nutloii, we (exc.)
tiilou, we (inc.)
\>utou, toil, ye
tntoti, they
Oit, I, is generally followed by Ir, in the pn'seiit tense, as on le siivali, or au savali, I
walk, 'f/is only used with the preterite particle nil, as iiiCii fiti, I said.
All these pronouns, when in the nominative liefore a v<'rb, or used in answer to the
question — who is it? — arc preceded by the particle of agency '«. Ja frequently has this
particle, also, when following the verb.
1' (1 I, Y N K H I A N (i R A M .M A R.
363
The pronouns in tlio dtml iind plurnl, witli tli(^ exception iiColiKi nnd ''niiloii, take an 'i
bclbro llieni whenever tliey are iiseil us noiniiintives nfler the verb, or when preceded hy
the prepositions in, icic, <; am\ by the adverb jxi-ii, like; a.s »o o iiKii V /(ilou, tliey
camo ; n/ii iatc '/ Intnii, fjo to lliem ; jiri-n i maun, hke ns two. Wometiincs this 'i is
retained alter the nominative particle «, as o '* laloii, they.
The pronouns lieard at Fakaalb were the same as in tlio Samoan, except that in the
second person they usually snid ki)C, koliin, and koiiloii ; but tlio k was sometimes
dropped. Ki iikiIoii was heard in the nominative, — e ltd ki malim iloa, we do not know.
In Ton^an the pronouns ilillcr considerably from those of the other dialects. Like
tlie Samoan, lliey liave a lull and an abbreviated htm, — or, to speak more correctly, as
respects the dual and plural, a simple nnd a eonipound form. The simple or brief pro-
nouns are only used in tlic nominative, before the verb.
SI.Nfit'I.An.
ail, 71, kii, 1.
knc, ke, thou
iti, lie, lie
DUAL.
mtiiKi, via, we, (exc.)
ttiiiii, III, we, (inc.)
iiioiKi, iiio, ye
vuiia, nil, they
ri.UHAU
maiitolii, mail, we, (exc.)
luiiliJii, tun, we, (inc.)
moiilolii, moil, ye
hiiiiIdIii, iiiiii, they
U is always joined to the sign of the tense which precedes, as, }ici/ alii, I went ; ten
alii, I will go ; kiiiiu tiikii, I delivered. In the present tense it is usually followed by tc,
as, kiioii Iv ojii, I love. Kii is used only aller the preterite sign iiA, as iiaku viaiiavuhe,
I feared.
The compound dual and plural forms [iiiiinii, miiiilo/n, iVc.) have the particle ki before
them in all eases except when used as possessive pronouns. Their complete forms ns
personal pronouns are, therefore, kiiiniiiii, kimniitiilii, in'. All the pronouns of the full
forms, when used as nominatives l)efore the verb, take the prefix ko, — as ko an, ko koe,
kn ill, ko kimii''i, ko kiliwn, &;e. AH except <((/, when used as nominatives after the
verb, or as aceuf"!!' I's without n preposition iH'fore them, take the prolix a, — as akoe,
aiii, akimiiiia L v . ''^ 11], An may have, in reality, the same prefix, but if so it
coalesces with the initial vowel.
Kiln (according to .Mariner) is a pronoun of the first |wrson, used only in familiar
c>/nversation, and rather a vulgarism.
[The iia and tdii which are affixed to the dual nnd plural are properly the numerals
two and three. It is probable that in the other dialects these same numerals are found in
a contracted form.]
The pronouns in the New Zealand dialect arc —
SINGULAR.
hiiu
koe
DUAL.
maiia
tuna
korna
rami
PI.l'RAI..
viatmi
tatoii
koiitoii
raloit
All the pronouns, when in the nominative Ix'fort^ the verb, take the prefixed particle ko ;
when ill the noiiiinalive after the verb the singular pronouns luiii, koe, and in, take the
particle a ; the rest have no prefix.
(it
254
PH I I, O I, Y.
Ill Knroloni;iiii unci Mnngurovoii, tlio pronouns nrc Ihr same as in New /onland, willi
the t'Xci'|(ti(in of the lirsl, wliicli is dii. Ttm missintmrics iilso write kiiloii, in ItnroUm^nn,
instead dI' koiilnii. la in the nominative iilk'r ii mtI) becomes iiia ; the rest n'mnin
unchanged. Kii is iist-d in the neeiisative oC the first |X!rsun singular, aller the preposi-
tions kill and (>/, as kiakii, to me ; iiikii, mo.
The I'ninnotimn varies considerably from the n'st, some of the words having a |)ecu-
iiar form, us —
8INUl'I.AR.
au
koe
DUAU
ri.t'RAL.
maiinn or maiia
milieu
tttuija or tuiM
Illicit
korua
kulllOH
riiiia
lUtCIl
The Tahitian pronouns are —
■oc
'oia
mui.u,
taiKt
'orua
raua
matou
titloii
'outoii
riiloii
Vail hos in the dative '(«'(/, in the accusative iiCii ; 'oiii is used in the nominative both
before and aller thv. verb ; wh<ui used in the sense of tlial (demons.) or |)reccded by the
preposition r, by, it becomes ia ,■ in the dative it has Uaiiii, in the accusative iii/ia.
The Tahitian has a phiral indefinite jironoun of the third person, rcia. It is used in
si)eakiiig of persons in their presence, and may Ix' either dual or plural. It is probably
the same with tlic New Zealand demonstrative pronoun era, those, with the particle n
before it ; so, also, irfiilii, some, for n lUilii, and ("(/, 7, for n iiii.
The Hawaiian pronouns are like the Tahitian, except in the llrsjt and third persons
singular, where it has au and ia, and in the change of ;• to /, making 'olua, Inua, and
latoit. The missionaries, also, generally write mriiu for '« iiii, but the pronunciation is
the same. An becomes in the dative ';'«'«, and in the accusative ia'ii. In is regular,
and makes ia iii.
The pronouns in Nukuhivan arc —
au
maua
miitou
Ian a
laloii
kijc or 'oe
kniia or 'una
koutou or 'oulou
ill
HUH
atou
In the pronouns of the second person, the initial k may be: pronounced or omitted at
the pleasure of the speaker ; the latter usage is the most common. The demonstratives
tenei and /ca are frequently substituted for the pronoun of the third |>erson singular.
I
1> () .s .s E IS s I \ F. 1' K o N o i; N s.
^ 40. The origifial form of the possessive pronouns seems to have
been the personal, with the prepositions o and a prefi.\e(J. We may
f ,
!• O L Y N K H I A N (J R A M M A R.
255
coiijccturo tliat there was once a personal pronoun na, of the first
person,— as we find iie still existing in the Tongan ; and perhaps a
pronoun ku of the first person.
The Samonn pronnuns of the first nnd second persons singular and thi: second plural
have two I'nrnis, ii full and a contracted. The pronouns which are joined witli singular
nouns dillbr lioni ihoso which are joined with plurals in havin(r the I, of the article le,
prefixed to them, ns :—
KINCiiri.AR.
Full roriii. Conlrictcd.
laa^i, ImCu UCii, lii'ii
lii'iie, Mtx: li'iii. Ion
ham, lima
la Million, In ^oiitoa Idiitoii, /diitnii.
Pl.l'RAL.
Full form. Contracted.
tia'ii, nCu (Cii, o'li, my
«'«', o\ie all, Oil, tliy
iinii, ijHii, his
a 'oiilDii, 'uiitciit diitoii, Oiitoii, your
The remaining forms of the dual and plural are simply the personal pronouns with the
particles /ii. In, it, o, prefixed, — as In maim, la maim, a maim, o maim, &c.
The indefinite article sc, when it comes l)eforc these pronouns, coalesces with them,
taking the place of the /; as c le ui somifalc, he has no house (for >■ h ai sc falc u ia,
there is not a house k'longing to hirn) ; c le ai sa matuu mra c ai, we tiave nothing
to eat.
_ It will be -jbservcd that the |)ronouns beginning with / are an example of the pecu-
liarity pointed nut in § 17 ; lini'ii tdiiia, my son, is for Ic lama a an; h matim faiiim,
our country, is instead of Ir faiiua o malou. This formation is common to all the
dialects.
The diflercnct' between latCu and ImCii, hum and loiia, &c., is the same as ;hat be-
tween (/ iumI I). [^. § 18.]
Mil, nspMDng with or for, is also compounded with the possessive pronouns, as iiioii
uau, with ihv brothers; iiiona Inn/a, for its evil.
At Fakasilii, the following possessive pronouns were heard, — lal^ii, lukr (sing.), iiiai
(pi.), my ; mukii, for me ; ton (sing.), on (pi.), thy ; /o nmtoii, our ; to outon, o outoii, your.
The Tongan makes no distinction lictwccn pronoiuis joined with singular nouns, and
those joined with plurals. It has, however, several classes of pronouns. Those which
precede the noun are as follows : —
BlNUL'tAR.
eki(, hoku
hoo, ho
enc, hono
DUAL.
cma, homa
eta, hota
hoo mo, homo
Ilia, hoiia
PLURAL.
email, human,
etau, hotait
lull) moil, homoii
eilaii, hoiiau
The.se foriris diller like those in a and o of the Samoan.
The pronouns whif h li)llow the noun are a akii, o akii, mine or of me ; a an, o on,
thine; a ia, o in, — a •ma, o oii'i, his; a mana, o mana; a mantoln, o maiiloln, &c.
These are also used when preceded by the indefinite article Im, and the preposition ma
9M
l>lt I I, OI,(M? V.
or iiiii; ns //'/ mtiiii kiti, soitin oCtlicir CcmmI (or some food ofllicirs); ha (imnii liJo, Home
of your oil ; ma nkii, for tiie ; ma iiiiiiiiitiilu, for yonrsolvi'S, or for your own ; mo onaii-
tiilii, for llioir own.
Tin- /( in //"/■//, //'I, iVc, is prolinhly from the nrtiolf //r ,• this nrliclr nlso frr(|iiontly
prtvi'ilcs tlir> oilirr cliiMs, as liv ciir Jiir, his inolliur ; /«■ t/iiin liiiii, tliiir coming, (li>r lie
hull II mill, llio coiiiinf; of llirm.)
In the ilii\l«'cl of New Zciiliind tin- |)os9C8;<ivo pronounH iiro dilK-rcnt for singular and
plund nouriH, Thry nrr —
HINIMUH.
Iiikii, liikit
tail, Inn
til nil, lllllll,
la maiia, In miiiiii
ta maioii, In maliiii
I'l.mAi..
akii, iikii, my
ail, nil, Ihy
ana, niiii, his
a miiiiii, n maiiii, our (duni)
a maloii, o miUim, our (pluriil)
nnd so for the remainder of llip dim! nnd plural.
Miikii, ninkii, — man, mim, — maun, mnna, — ma •ininia, mo niauti, iVc, mcnn of or
for me, At., nnd nre frequently used with the sense of for me, for thee, iVc, nnd licnco
simply mine, thine. Nakii, iinku — nan, iioii — nana, iioini — >ui maiia, no maun, &c.,
ore nlso used to signify for, of, or hy me, thco, &c.
It should l)e observed thnt the si-eond (or plurni) cinss of pronouns is used nfter the
nejjntive Innr, w lielher the noun be in Ihe singular or not ; — as, ka lioic una liiahia, it
wns not his wish, or, he had no desire. In some cnses, moreover, this class is used for
the ordinary giMiitive of the personal pronoun uOer a noun, singidnr as well as plural,
as. If, alma nna c ::nho ana, Ihe appearaiiee of him who sut, >Vc.
The Knrotongan has two classes of pronouns, resembling those of the New Zealand in
soutui, but dilfering somewliKt in use ; they ar
I 1
IsT ei.ASR.
tiikii, Inkil'
tniin, loan
tana. Ion a
la mana, lo maiia, &c.
3l> CI.ASfl.
iikii, iikii
aa.ii, ixM
ana, ona
a mana, o maun, &e.
The first class, unlike the New Zealand, nre used with both singular and plural noims.
The second cliissjire used priiioipally in the two liillowing cases: — (1) with numerals,
as riinni aan nrr, five arc tliy houses ; (U) after the negative karc, os, karc ona are, he
has no house or housjs. They weix", no doubt, originally plural forms.
There is a class of obbrevioled pronouns, in the singidar, which ditTer from the pre-
ceding in not regarding the dillerencc of a and o; they arc lAkii, my (pronounced short);
to, thy, nnd tana, his. They seem to Ix' used liir the purpose of discriminating between
ditli'rent meanings of a word ; loku racriia is, my soul ; tikii Vaeriia (said by the
Supremo RiMiig), my Spirit.
Nakii, tiokn, — mum, noon, — iiana, nona, — na mana, 910 mana, &c., mean of, for or
by me, thee, him, us two, — and, also, simply mine, thine, &ic.
In Mangarevan, the possessive pronouns, as given in the vocabulary, are, takn, toku, my ;
Pol, V N r, SI A N (IRA M MA U.
','57
liiknr, lohiir, lliy j liiiid, lotui, hiii ; In Maim, to maiiti, our, iVe. Also, iinhn, iiiikii, —
mikiH', iiiikin', — nana, iiiiiin, tiC, with tho miiiho niPniiiiiK!i. [tcHiilrs iIicmc, tini/oi i"
Hivoii lis iiii|ilyiiif,' IkiiIi /(«• ;/»■, (lis iiiitkii Irtiii iiini , >um\v\\\m^ Wtt iwo,) nnt\ J fiim iiir
(lie iiKiii /iiiii). Mil is iiImi II iiiiirl< of tlic gniiitivc, anil exprt'sscN iiiorr |iiir(iiMiiMrly
iios.srHsioil.
Ill I'niimotii, we liriiril lor nil/, liikii niid "/•(/, — liir lli>i, lukm', iiiikin-, — Inn iiiid Ion, —
nil iind nil ; — niiil for his, Iniin. It scciiicil timl nn iiiiil nil wcro iHcd us in N'l'W /onlniui,
— Inn iiiiikiii WHS your (iitlicr ; "" ninkni, your piirriils, l'iitlnr and niotlifr.
The Tahiliiin has ihri'o clnsw^s, siiiiiliir to those of tho Itarotoniran ; —
/(/ //, Inn
llt^nf, Inoc
liiiin, Iniiii
Id iiiiiini. In miiiin, lirc.
nn II, lion
inline, nn'nf
nniin, nnnn
(I n, n II, my
a'lK, n'nr, thy
nitn, nun, his
It has also the abhrcviated forms lii'ii, my, — In, thy, — and tiUiii, his, — called by the
missinimries neutnil, as they apply to all nouns iii<liscriminntcly.
The Tahilians (nfcording to the (irnininar) soinctiiiies substitute the first person siiijiu-
lar for the sr<on(l, saying Inn, Inn, iinii, nun, \'c., liir Inui', lniK\ nnin', mine. It appears
to 1)0 a conipliinentary form, like the Riifjlish //'////■ {ux lliij. (May it not rather k; the
Uarotoiigan lnnn,lniiii,i<-! the Inn, Inn, tt\' New Zialand, I'auinotu, ami Hawaii, which
may have Ik'cii the usual form in the Tahitian, though it has now lieeonie nearly obsolete?
The reason for substituting the present form, Iiiik:, linn-, was probably the great similarity
l)C.tween /<('/', /«'(/, my, and Inn, Inn, thy j this would be morc likely to create confusion
in the Tahitian than in the llawaiiaii, as the guttural break (marked by the inverted
comma) is much less perceptible in the firiuer than in the latter.J
The Hawaiian has the three classes of possessives :—
UCu, li^ii
tun. Ion
tiiiin, Inna
III niiinii. In niiinn, &c.
11(1 II, no II
tiiin, nnn
niinn, tnma
n n, o n
nil, nn
iiini, nun
The third class (those commencing with o mid n) ore not used precisely as in Rnro.
tongan and Tahitian ; lliey have more prniicrly the meaning of the genitive, — of me, of
thee, \-c. ; as, in ninn niclii n'n, these words of me, or of mine; Iclalii hnic n'n, one
house of thine, or one of thy houses. They are used after prepositions which require to
be followed by o, as imnn nun, iK'fore him ; ninlnnn ami, above him ; so, ma li'ii tiei,
by or through me, by my means or agency ; mil onn In, by or through him, his agency,
influence, or means i nun o tiitnii In, t'rom us. It should lie observed that when these
pronouns are precedid by mn or mni, lliey arc usually lollowed by the particles In
(there), or /"' (here). il/», when prefixed to a noun, has a ililferent meaning from that
which it bi'ars w hen joined with these pronouns ; it signifies then, n^st in, or motion
towards a place ; as, nin In hnlr, at the house ; nn linin nia ma lliln, he sailed to Ililo —
but '«' Ililn, is the more common form, (Andrews.)
The pronouns of the third lonn are also used after the negative fJc, as, anie niia inn,
he has no sin ; nnic mi nliia f, thou shall have no olher gods.
* 'i
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
1.1
lU 1^ 122
140
lift
6"
FhotogFaphic
^Sciences
Corporation
;\
\
23 WIST MAIN STMIT
WmSTIR.N.Y. MSM
(7t«) •7U-4S43
9mmmm
\
'25S
P II I l.o I, 0(i V.
Til 1(1, to ill, is n liirm soimliiiics siilisliliilcd liir llir nmrc connnon Innn, hiiiii.
Till' Ihiwaiiiiii liiiN iilsii llic iiriilral |ir<iiiiiiiiis /(('/', my, and /", tliy ; [•|ii. /dmr, ||U.'|
UM'il witliiMil D'^'aril to the ili.sliiiotii)ii k'twcon a iiml o.
Till" Niikiiliivan |K>»ws.sivi' |iri>ni>iiiis aro liirnicil liy |ir<'li\iii;; In, In, /in, iin. In llio |)or-
soiial, as III ml. III nil, ml im, ii'i im, lil *<»' "r III kin\ lil in. In tit, lit nttlliil, iVc, Tlu'
soODiul [KTSuii lias likrw isi' the loniis Innn, Imiii, iiiinii, itittii. 'I'lli.'ro an: also two pro-
nouns, til (or |K.'rlia|is //''"), my, and In, thy, which aru prulNilily neutral forms,
111. M O.N ST II ATI \ i;s
Ml- Tilt' ticmoiistrative proiuuins arc formed, for the most part,
by prefixiiifT the article to ndverbs of pltice.
In faiiinaii —
leiiii, this ;
li nil, Mial :
Iria and leu, thai ;
|ll. /"'/, these
|>l. /'", lllosu
pi. Ill and la r, thosn
As liiiri liinnlii, this man ; mi untn lininlii, all llirso men, iVc. IjIh sroms In dcslgnnlf
a greater disianci' than /nui.na « /ma In i/nln, tUut man then- : 'J li/it nni, lo yonder
village. /(/, llioiigli haviiiu the lorm ol" the |iri)iiouii hi; is used in llii! plural, as in iiri
ii/m, these words ; in iiitn, those things. I have met with no example of In i; which is
given liy Mr. llcalh.
In l''akaali>, liii'i nw\ linn weif iisi'd llir this and Ihnt,
In Toiigaii, the deiiionstratives are heiii, this or these, and hiitn, that or those. Tlioy
lake llie particles /■« and '/ U-I'oru iheui, according lo their place in the sentence, — in
which case llii'y dro|p the //, and bi'coine Icm iin iid m iin. They are Irecjuenlly divided,
the article he pn-oediiig the noun, and the particle iii and na following it ; os, he hnlii ni,
this place (the place her<') ; he lamtn nii, that man (the man there).
The \ew /Zealand dcmouslralives arc —
Ifnei, this ;
li ml, that ;
tern, that ;
pi. rtiei, these
pi. emi, thase
pi, (/•'/, those
Titiii and /'•/•'/ diller, in that the (iirmr'r is us<.d in 8|»'akiiig of things in sight, or to
which the attenlion of the parlies is directed, and tern of things at a distance. 'IV/ici is
I'mtiuintly divided, as te iwi nci, this |X'ople.
I'niiii, that, pi. nun, those, — arc used not in jiointiiig out ohjects, Init in r<;ferring tir
iheni ; as n i niiiri ihn i nun rn, an<l aller liiose davs (of which we have liecn s|H'aking).
In Uarolongan the <lcinonstrative pronouns are leiti or cic, — leinini or rieiiei, this or
these ; le rcirn, that or those; Iniia net or nun iiei, this or these; iniin rn or nun rn,
that or those. 'Diia and tern, teiinmi ami li mm, all mean ihnl, but tliey nrv seldom
usetl, and the distinction between Ihem is not apparent. They are sometimes employed
at the beginning of a sentence, with the meaning of " therefon-," "on tlia*. account," —
and they serve also as an earnest mode of address, — as leiinnn jiikiknne! thou hy|«K;rile I
*,
iM) I, ^■ .\ i:s 1 A .N ci i{ A M \i A rt.
25'J
liic niid (//«; (lilliT iVurii /(/" and luiin iniicli iis tin- v\\\>* of |Mwsc.ssiv(; proiioims Ih>
fsiniiiii); wjlli (' mill » ilillir I'l'inn llii' nllii'is ; iluit In, tin y iirr iisi'd uilli iiiiiiirrnls, nr with
IIki |iliiriil |iailirlr.s /<»/,( anil «", anil allcr ihi' nrjialivi' /,((/<,• as ^^'/ cc" y'/.r tniinlii
III, niK' of lliDsi' (wo iiirli. ii /■('<; lii'iii i piiLr /,ii/,i , \vf air Iwu swiirils (or two urv
Ihcw^ sworiU).
Ill Miiiignrcvnn, « — »i'i, iIiIh, niiil c — /i</ or <' — »/(», llmt ; an u imit wt, tliis lliiiig;
I', mill nil, that tliiii){ ; a luiiiiiriki urn, lliiil cliild. 'l\iii'i mid ^'/i" and Inn am also
U!n;i\, nn /in I II im Inn i ki) iivnilJ li nil, t\t\a is alxivi', that is Intlow ; ;»», Ic iilniiki li in
hiknii, riilr fnii'iilf viiiil tli' In ^mi'i tin mi,
III 'I'aliitiaii, /»/' or (vc, /<•/'/"( or ((V/»7, niraii this or llii>r. 7i (t, acrordiiifs to llir
missinnary i^ramiiiar, " si-nns to niiswiT rxarlly to thi' l'"rciicli ixci, this, mid liiiini to
cvlni-ii, iilli-ii, this lure, closu at hand."
Tnnn rii nnd iinara,\\mX or those; the diUbrciice hctwetii iIh'si' two, uiul Ijotwii'ii
trie mill lir is tlie same as in IJai'iitoiigan.
'Dim and tern Utxh iniiin lliai, as in N'rw Zialaiid ; Inin means " that tiling mar
yon," or near Iho [htsom addrcssid, liiil at a distanri' iVoiii Ihi' s|MaUi'ri tern iiiians " that
yolidrr," at a dislaiici; Ironi hotli. 7!' nirn, that llirri', is also nsid.
In is ollcn used as a drinonslralivi', but «illi ralhrr an induriniti' scnso, — nin in, that
is it. It is l'rei|nrnlly inlrodncid liy llii' nalivrs whiiv no similar word would Ijo nscd in
Eii);lish.
Ill Hawaiian tlio ilomonstralivrs am Icin or rin and ;»/",thisi /'/", /",lhnt; nn—
tici, this, and "" — /", that. Tin' last two an; used in nlirring to ohji rts whirh have
rornicil till! snhji'pt of coiivorsation, as /"/ /mi n'n nn Innnln In, that man (Iwloi'iMnin-
tioned) has rcliirncd. Em is synonymous with ;cin, but is most coinmnnly rm|iloyiil nt
the lH'j;inniiij4 ol'n sontcnro, to cxpn'ss " this is," or " thrsc arc."
Till' Xukiihivan has Iriiri or liieini, this, tinn, that (nonr or by yon), and ^vi or Irm.
that (yondrr or ImaoiiiI yon). The mi and nn arc ficiiurnlly posHixoil to tlio noun, ns
If line iiei, this ivdaliasli ; Ir iimi ini, that i;irl ; nn nnf nn, llioso f;irls. //;/(' is used
like nil in Hawaiian, ns Inia vn'ii mi, this very cmioi', linn kiiiiiiln nn, that very man.
I NTKIlKOd .\TI\i:s
i 42. Tlic interrogative pronouns are seen in the simplest form in
the Samoan ; but tiiey arc nearly the same in all the dialects.
In Fakanlii, those which were hoard wi're ni, who ! os kii ni kne, who art thou \ i ni.
whom .' and o, what / whirh look the arlirli- bofoii- it, as sr rf, kn Ic rf, whnt I Pr si a.
like what, or how ! Ai, who, is usiil in this, ns in all the diulei-ls, in asking the name
of any [jerson or lliiiij; ; as hxii Inn innn, what is thy name f Ko ni to onion Inn nu.
whnt is (the name oQ thy eoimtry '.
In Saniomi, iii, who t as 'n ni, w ho '. (noiii.) ; o ni, a ni, of w l.oni .' '«( le ni, to whom '
A, what f ns c d, sc rt, '« /»• rf, ni rf, whnt 1 Ace., i sc li, i ni rf, ns c va'iivii'ai i ni rt, to
see what '. Fin, which ? as '« Ir fin, which f (oC two or severnl) juifrn ? juifrn f which,
tins or that ? Fin, how many ? as rjinjiili, how mniiy houses ! 'Ih'njia ni tnynln, how
many arc tho men \
'2flO
l> II I 1,1) I. (Hi V.
111
III Tiiii)(!iii, />"/, who ' tnki'ii iIh' |>nrtii'li-!t /" nml ", iici nnliii); In IIh |i|iiit in tin' wii.
((lice ; ff-l\., " Ion iiiiil n Imi, H Iiiim' ? //</, u Iml ' it |iri'i'rili il liv llir lirlicii' lir, nx kurliil
(num.), wluil '■ ki hr tin. In whni f J lir liii, by wlinl f /■'//»;, Ikiw miiny f n«, r filui Jitlr,
liMtt ninny liiMi")'!! ' tnkntihn, Imw iiiiiiiy (|iiT«iin») '
III Ni'u />'.iliiiiil, iIh' IntiTrii^alivi' |in>iii'iiiii iin- t'"', ului, >i/ir,i, nml lini. Wni lakes
till' x.iiiif |Kiriiilit mill |iri ixniiidiii iis till' ipniiHiiiii-i ;— « (/•,//, wlio? in (/'>//, wlium f
null III, Intiii nr l>\ ulioiii ' Alri \vf hi in llir luiiiiiniilivi-, iiiiil li in llic uliliijiii' <'iim-!> ;
n» hrnliii, wlinl ? im li tilin, liir wliiil ' / /(' iilni, wliiit (iiri'.) f Tilirn in wliirli \ kii trlirii
'I in liik'iniii, HJiirli iiI'iIm' two ? Jim in liow tiiiiny '. Il liikis III)* |in lix lokii tiir imtmiiih.
Ill Knriiloii^nn, ni. wliof mi, wlinl .' '"", »liir|i I in, Imw niiiliy f Ku in, who F id
III, whom ' Klin, whiil F «" '> mi, lor wiml ' /.d /<(ii i min iki tnijnhi Inkuiiiii mi, which
odlii-w iwo imii ! fiik'iiii, liow iiiiiiiy |Nr*>n« f
III MiinL'iinviiii, tlh- iiilirrofinlivrs iirc tin- siiiiic iim in lh<' Itiirolonifnn, rxrr|il ^xd,
which ' — II lonii which wc Irivc nol limnil iii llic hitter, llmiifih it iiiiiy exist.
Ill I'niimoliinn, ko irni, who F r iihii, whnt ?
In 'I'uhilian, viii,ti/iii, Iriliin, anil /"". Vni hnn o viii, who? In vni, tit mi, mi riii, mi
rni, iif whom ' whow F 'in mi, to whom? in viii, whom F Alui hn« r nlin, mi le nliii,
I h iihn, iVr, 'lYilirn, which F an inlnii li ninilui, which i» the Im'kI 7 (literiilly, which
IS th<- (JikmI ') i^ hill Inn, how ninny hoiisiM F Imiliin Innin, Imw iimiiy men F
III lliiwniiiin. I'd/, nlin, hm, nml Inn. Wni liiis 'u vnt, who F n irni, n imi, ol'whom F
III nni. III fill, whow F mi wni, iin iini, lor wlioiii F 'in imi, lo whom F in irai, whom F
\c. Aim linn hrnkii, wimt F n It nlin, n Ir nlin, ol' whnt F mi Ir nlin, mi le nlin, lor
wliiit • iVc. llin hn§ 'o Inn, which F n hm nn<l n lirn, of which F '/ lirn, to which F Ac.
///'/ ha!< r hill mill n hill, how many (ihinuM) ' miil Inlo nliin, how many |Mrwin» F
III Niiktihivnn, kn m or '>/ m, who F tn m. In m, mi ni, no ni, ol' of liir whom F iim
III, iVoiii whom ' III III, lo wlioni F \c., nlin, whul F lilnn, which F iin Ii Inn Inn, which
gourd ' Jlin, how many F
I N D E K I .M T K I' II (I .V O I \ S.
i 48. Mo.st (if the words wliich would fall under tliis head (answer-
ing to some, other, many, and the like) have been already i^iveii, in
treatini^ of the article [v. 'y 11] The followinff are a few wiiich may
i)e here noticed.
Snmoan. .Yijii, some; mi, other, its num., 'n mi, another or other!! : ficii., ii i»i, o i.ii,
111" another, of others, A:c. Jjc ni sr or /'• ni ni, nol any, none (iVom fi , not, in, there,
mill the article), us r Ir ni se men e ni, then.> is not any thing to ent ; r Ir ni tit Inyitn,
there arc no men. fma, unudtivn, nil, every (frtiin umii, done, linislieil) ; as ia mat
iiiiin, all llie^' lhiii;is ; 'n Initnlii umnlnrn, nil men i 'o Imni nmnlnvn, every In-e. Sr,
the articli', is used in all indi liiiite sense, which can hardly Im' nnilereil in l')nt;lish, an
'o III rn fr lihfili, \\\\i> \s Hitnw one (or, who is it| thai cIiinim's F /(Mi, as tilnsi fnsi
nun ititi, niiy little thiiii; (or rather, any littli! jHirtion ofa thin^).
Tungan. Mihi, some, nny, other; /»//, or ///// lie, nil (in niimlM'r), every one ; kotmi.
or kotoa U, all, the whole, evirv ! '"' Iminln knlini lie, every inmi, or nil the men.
I' O I, V N K S I A N C K A M M A K.
201
Nrw /I'liliinil. M'lifii, Irirahi, some; Irrii <i/ii, tr/iilii iitu, nnothi'r ; rrn iilii, etiiln
«/w, ollirm ; us iru atii kiiii/<i, olhcr towns ; kiitmi, all, us f/.n mm kniixt, ull those
things.
Itunitongnn. Trlnhi aro)))i, some (|>rrsons) ; Mnhi /kit, siimr, n pnrt ; ctiii-kf, ntlinrs ;
nuitfiiiiiii, a grnit niuiiy, " / /'ni ijiii i lertt jci'." is given I'or " in divurs |ilnct's." KatiKt,
ull, — Ir nil mm kiitmi, ull tilings.
Taliitiun. lUnlii jHir, sdinc ; fiiiiii, sonM', — ns /r;«« in, some lish ; Inqfiiiiii man rim-
risen, sonir of (he I'haristTs. Alixi, all ; Innn tiinii mm ntiHi, ull tlmsc things.
Iluwuiiun. Wnhi, suinc; liiii, another, ustnl only afhtr u |irL'|H)siti(in, us u hni, n hat,
oronothrr ; to hni. In Imi, another's j Un hai, to another, ic. A pan, or a jmn liia, all
(rroni jxiii, (lone, riiiisliiil) ; ns in man mni n jnii, nil those things.
In Nukuhivun, tclnln, lUilii, some, others ; InOihi ntn, inoro; iitua, all.
•i ,
l( K I, A T I X K H.
ii 44. The Polynesian dialects have, properly speaking, no relative
pronouns. Their place is supplied by words Iwlonging to other parts
of speech, or they are left to be understood from the con.struction of
the sentence.
Pnknuro. 2^ i-aku n Pilmifn, — Ir vnka nhi, the cunoi: of I'ilinjfn, the cnnoe [which
is] going.
Snnionn. O Ir, sing, and o r, pi., — in ohiique cnseH simply Ir and r, arc used as rela-
tives, or to snpply the pln<-e oI'sik li ; ns, ir JiinJrUiin o Ir mil, hiesscd is he tlint comes,
or, the oiinic-r ; Innjxm i liimujiilii n r nil- nin, ten virgins who took ; aloj'n ntii i r frtiiii
mni, love them tlint eurse. Li-iia, pi. rmi, ntt- use<l in a similar manner, as, u Iriin jirpelo
ill te ill, who U-tmyed him ; ma ma miilimnli, and thou who tollowc<lst ; [but perhaps
the nn should rather !«■ considered the sign ol'tlie past tense ; we have not Ibnnd Irna or
nui in till' prc'sent.) Sn is termed hy Mr. Heath, in one place, a relative of past time,
and in another, a sign of tense ; it is used ns I'ollows: — Ir iijxi sa 'c ftii tiiai, the word
which thou didsl s|H>nk ; 'o Inlnii sn mni, they who were sick. A'k, the pro|M'r sign of
|viRt time, is ollen so pinced ns to indii'nte that u n'Inlive is to lie understood ; as, 'o Ingnlii
nn miiliniiili mni, the ns-n who followed; Irtin na ra/"-</i«, he who was s|ioken of.
Mil is given ns huving a similar meaning with tn, hut we have founil no example of it,
lk>sides these, the |N-rs<iiial pronouns, (larticularly in the oblique cases, an> used where a
rt'lulive would Is- employed in Knglish. O Ir, or simply o, is used for " whosoever ;" as
') r fnnilnn nu, whuaucver shoil confi'ss inc(or it i*, perhaps, a plural,— whatever persons
shall, iVc.)
In Tongnn, the n-lntive is I'ilher expn-ssed hy the personal pronouns, or left to be
inferri'ii ; knrni koin r Jnknhii nn, he who shall confess me ; Ir mini mini nin Ir mon Irn
nki, ye shull nt-eivc- tlint which ye shnll s|K'nk ; knr fili nr nr-lnliii in, the enemy who
sowed it ; nr linjnln nil nr iinolii, the ninn whom he hud iiinde.
New /enlund. Kn kiir rn nn nin r linrrr mni, nrl thou he thni should come f 7)
Inniiln hm mm trnlii, n iiinii who bus no plai-e (lit. not of hii i n pluce). Koin rn liiiri
c korri'ilin, this is In- tliut was s|Hiken of.
In Uurotongan, iri mid ko In, and in Tahitian, In and '" lei, arc used as relatives :
00
202
I' II 1 l,<) l,0(i V.
itifV sorm til Ix' iiiproly llii' nrlirlo Ir Imnlhrncil l>y mipliimis, nml nnswrr thorrforp lo
the ^<Ilml»lH '" /> ,' r iid Iniin ii In hiiihiu, hlissril is lii> |iir blcswdiU'ss \n |iis| who ti'iim,
\c. i tiiiii tinidlii 1,0 hi iikiitii, ii cirliiin mnil who built j le ta^Uii tri aire ini mini, llio
moil wliii ■.vciil liflbn-.
Ill lliiuniinn, le i§ usml in Ihc snmc mnnncr, (ih jnmiiiltii Ititoii tr >i, hli-xsml nrc they
thnt iiKiiirn. This le ilix's imt iHromi" /'/ U'Coro nny consdiiniil, mid is Ihrri'forn In tip
cuiisidcn'il as ilislinrt from the iirliilr, lli(iii<<li it niny olii'<> hnvn Ikvii tlir Miiiir. In ollirr
riisp!! the rolalivc must ln' uiidcrstmi'l rriim llu- ninslriictinn. Mr. Aiidn-ws n'lnnrks, —
" from tlio mode of tliinkiii^ nmimi; the islanders, it is rvidcnt that tlicy linvt- no niorr
use fur llir rclalivo prinioiiii, lliaii llicy liavi- for tin' vrrli In tx ."
In Nukuhivaii, Ic is uwd for a rrlalivc. n», n kiic It i kniilni in ((i.), it is tliou who art
saluted ; Ir piii la .fan i luikiiile nitii, the proyer wliicli Jpsus laii);lit. Ilul commonly
the relative is understood, ns tut Ic puna r iiliu i If cjx) (C.), it is the pig that roots in Ihc
earth.
In all the dialects there exists a relative particle ai, unknown to any of the Kuro|>enn
lanpmges, which freciuently supplies the place of the relative pronoun, It will be men-
tioned in treating of the verb.
V 45. The reflective and emphatic pronouns sr!/ and otrn have, in
some of the dialects, no correspond i no; terms ; in others they are e.\-
pre.ssed by some emphatic word appended to the personal and posses-
sive pronouns.
The .Samoan and Tongan have nothing lo .supply the place ofthe.se terms : " he killed
himself," is simply, " he killed him ;" " against himself," is merely, " ngninst him ;"
" thine own eye," is, " thy eye," \c.
The New Zealand dialect em|iloys nun, a woni used in various senses, such as, olso,
indeed, then, truly, \-c. ; r vnkunra in in nnu, to save himself; t ton kanolii ano, in
thine own eye; r knraijn nnu kin rutoii ami, calling to one another.
In Uarotongan, orai (|)erhaps from rai, great, mucli) is the common word ; its proper
menning seems to b<; very, in the sense of — '■ this rcnj thing ;" it freipiently has the
particle iia, " merely," pn'fixed to it ; — kia taton urni, lo ourselves ; ko JJnvitIa orai,
David himself; tonu unurni imknii, his own heart, lo is sometimes used, like i/io in
Tahiliaii, as, loiinio a/i, his own stature.
In Tahitian, ilin, which pro|)erly means down, or ilnivmiaril, is alTixed to the personal
and posses.sive prmiouns, — as, i rolo ia i.uloii-iho, within yourselves ; Inu iho ninta,
thine own eye; nnna iho i liamatii, he made it himself.
In Hawaiian, iho is used in a similar maimer ; as, tnii iho mntn, thine own eye.
In Nukuhivan, according to M. (iarcia, " I strike myself," would be simply " I strike
mo,'"— f ])rhi net ait ia nu, — as in Samoaii,
r II i: V K H II.
I) 46. The accidents of tense, mood, voice, nvimber, and person,
are in f^eneral denoted by particles allixed to the verb. The oidy
inflection which it undergoes, consists in the reduplication of the
I' tt r. V N K S I A .\ (i II A M M A R.
963
wholo word, or a part of it, to cxpross cither pliirulity, or a repetition
of the action.
Ill Siinixin. Ilir nMlnplicalion, rutin! or imrtini, nl" ihi' vrrli is coinmoTi (or Ixilli iIipsi'
pllr|Xl^M•s ; ns rnuii Jr/r, In linr, »o liiiVf, in the |iliiriil, ii<i J'i''/'' i tutnu, llirv wi're
nlraiil ; ("rum hi<«-, lo slc<'|>, H/mHor, In sl(i'|i Idfjcihcr. '/'/;/<', In ilivirli', Ims (ijr its fro-
<Hiciiliitivc iHjiiliiJti, to uliiin' out ; tula, to M|H'nk, lins lululnld, to talk.
Ill 'l'(iiii;nn, Iroin «'//«, to ilwrll, ki ninii nnm/o, Id im ilwi'll toytlior ; trie, lo Iromlile,
frf-q., Metetr, to tn'mblc miirh.
Ill Nrw /I'liliiiicl, it is iloiil)llul whrtlicr the ro(lii|ilirntioii is over used I'ur tin' |iiir|iosf
nf rxjiD-ssin); jiliinilily, or llio iloiii^ iiiiy lliiiij^ in <'om|iiiiiy ; lull it oDcii ocriirs with u
frf'quciitntivf or iiitciisilivc tiirc-c ; — kiii, to cut, nmkps kiikni, to cnt inucli, or <il\i'n ; inii,
to drink, has iiiiii; /iiicrr, lo go, makes liiirircir, to walk, (;o al)oul.
In l(arotoii);aii, tiic ilu|ili<'ation st'rnis lo cxpri'ss cither n duality (when two do n thing
together) or the ri'petilion of an action ; Iroiii lur, to eome, arrive, r tn/iir ulii ra rmiii,
and they two arrived ; rke, lo descend, ixkc, to descend togi^tlier ; kali, to bite, kulikuli,
lo hite often, or much, lo champ.
In Tahitinn, the same ol)s«'rvalion applies as in the? Ilarolongan ; — torfo, to sleep,
taoijto, U) sleep together (two persons); hori), tn run, lioliDm, u> run together; jxiii, to
descend, jtnpoii, to descend togethi'r. Aniiilni, to split, timiihdmiihti, lo split repeatedly ;
hiiti, lo pull or pluck, hiililiiiti, to pluck n?|KMitrdly, as the leathers of n Ibwl ; hoc, to
padille, lio/inr, lo paddle n'|K'atedly ; jxiraii, to s|ieiik, pararaii, to 8|ii-ak together (two
persons), — jHinijUiruii, to talk, converse.
In Hawaiian, this roriii occurs only in the s(>ns<> of a iVeipientative or inlcnsitive. /.c/c,
to jump, to (ly, to de|iart, makes /<M); lo jump l'rii|uently, and Iclrltic, to forsake re-
peatedly (ns a man his wife) ; liili, to vibrate, rock, tiilUiili, to shake or tremble, us the
hands or head ; Imce, to take, lawrUiwr, to handle; Imli, to turn over or aUul, hiiliiili,
to search. Mr. Andrews gives ns derivatives from the riKit laue, th<! forms, /lUiitec,
Imcnrc, fiiireliiuv, und lnlaUni-c ; few verbs, however, have more than two of these, and
the meaning of ench form is not constant, but varies in ilitfen'Ml worils.
In Nukuhivnn, the re<hiplication has the snmc force as in Hawaiian, aa pehi, to strike,
pcjiehi and pehijirhi, to strike hard and often,
^ 47. The mcst striking peculiarity of the Polynesian dialects, as
respects the verb, is the fact that the distinctions of time, which in
other languages are considered of so much impoi lance, are in these
but little regarded, — while the chief attention is paid to the accidents
of place By far the greater number of the particles which accom-
pany the verb are devoted to the latter purpose.
f) 4S The numerous verbal particles may be cla-ssified as follows:
— (1) particles of aflirmation, ("i) of tense, (I)) of mood, (4) of form,
(5) of voice, — (6) directives, (7) locatives, and (8) relative.
I) 49. As almost every verb in llu'so dialects may be, also, with no
change of form, a noun or an adjective, scime mode of distinguishing
between the dilleront acceptations becomes necessary. The term
sot
I> II I I. <) l.ou V.
i
partirlex of a/firmation, or artit'e particles, has been applied to certain
prefixeH which arc used for tliis purpoMc, ami which bear the name
relation to the verb that ko does to the noun [v. ^ 17]. Of these hta
is the most important. This particle has been considered by some a
sijjn of past or (jresent time; by others, an auxiliary verb. It is u.sed,
however, with all the tenses, though not so often with the future,
whicii lias a verbal particle of its own, as with the others; and the
only case in wiiich it appears to have a nieanin}r apart from the word
to which it is joined, is when it precedes what is pro[ierly a noun or
atljcctivc, — in which case, as it gives to them a verbal sense, it may
often be translated by the substantive verb.
In Fnknnfi), kiia tnate, dcnd ; kun jto, it is night ; kua leUi te tanm, the boy is gnod.
In Snmunii, it becomes 'iia, ns, '«.i matrlaiii't ia, ho (listed, or, was fasting ; '/«» 'c
Hut t(i / dust thou know ! 'u/t Irlii inir nii, it is agreeable to me.
In Tongnn, it is kmi or kuo ; lira kiiu an a Finaii, and Finau cnine, or was come ;
kua to ar la, the sun is set ; kua tctei in, it is [or it was] good. When preceded by o,
and, (which is frequently used wlH>re it would not lie employed in English), it Ijecomcs
nku, — as, oku mau ilo ia, wu know him ; oku ou kole kiale kof, I beg of the*.
In New Zealand, the use of kua is less common than in the other dialects, its place
bring supplied by ka ; it is, however, not unlrc<|Uent, as, kua kilt nuUou, wc have seen ;
kiia nuite ratuu, they are dead.
In the other dialects, kua (or 'ua) is used as in the Samonn. In Mangarevan and
Nukuhivan, the final a is sometimes dnip|HMl, — as, ku'' ava Maijareva i te ua, Man-
gnreva is lost in thu mist ; ku' Uinu ia (Mnng.), he is buried. IP hanau ia (Nuk.), he
was born. This liap|K'ns in Tahilinn and Hawaiian, but apparently not so oDen.
i 50. Besides kuu, dilferent words are used in some of the dia-
lects, apparently for a similar purpose, though with various shades of
meaning.
In Samoan, olao, or, as the missionaries write it, o Ino, is a very common prefix to the
verb, at the Is'ginning of a sentence. Mr, Ileath thinks that it may bt* consi(K'red a sub-
stantive verb. It Nivms to give a meaning similar to that of the pn'sent participle in
English, combined with the ditferent tenses of llie verb to lie ; — n Ivi aai taijata, the
|)eople are eating ; o Im tu Ic iiiutau i poijai, the axe is lying at the root ; o loo manalu
ia i lea men, he was thinking of those things ; o loo iatr nu, I have (" there is to me,"
rst milii ; ua iate an, would express the same meaning). This may lie the word lo'o
(for loko), to come, iisisl in the s<'nse of lo hronu; like hoko in Tongan, which has both
these meanings ; the o would then be the conjunction aiul prefixed, but listed rather inde-
finitely, as in the Tongun oku. In the New Zealand translations, orcAo is often prefixed
to verltal nouns, to signify the commencement or first doing of an action ; thus we find,
te oriikditaiynjii n te iw, the liiuiulallon of the world, from haya, to make ; luit/aija, a
making or cn^ation ; i Ir orokomeatu ija , at the Is'ginning, from mra, to do; viailaija, a
doing, — hence this word will nvNin, at the first doing, or the beginning of doing; so, Ir
onikouoltoaija o It laijala ki If uc/iua, the first dwelling of men on the earth, from uo/w,
to dwell.
I'd I. V \ KS I .\ N <i l( A M M A K.
'ir,r}
In Ni'W Zr;iliinil, <« is a mtImiI |ir< li\ in very lVic|iiinl ihi', wliicli npiwnrs ciniiiiinnly
to tiikc iIh^ |i|iicr itf kiiii, — lid, (( k(i kill- in, iiinl lit' »iiw ; kn iviikniciikiii kiii'/mi, y<' "Imll
be jll(l^l■d ; titto ka liw a Jrsii, wUvn Ji'IIIh wiih cdihc ; ktt mm ulit ahiin kin k'Hiioii, I
.sny unto ycm, Ku \* niso prclixril td inlji-ctiv.'s nnd !» lulvcrbs iiscil indi'iiriidcnlly, n»,
kii /Hii. hixhI, iir, it is ;,'()(id ; kd hori; no, nr, it is iiol.
In till' (liidirt III' I'mniioHi, IhiiIi ku iind kmi wcri? used, as I'ollows : — r liiiki kite kii
liii^i, truly yiiu ari" dead ; kauri' mn/ii kiin //(«», not iiidrfd ilrad.
4 T)!. 'I'lio iiiilffuiitc nrticle se, he, or c, is trtMnioiitly used to supply
tlio place of llu! siibsttiiitive verl).
Hi' matii, Kak., it i.s an eye ; In: tiijiiijii kiic, art tliou a priest ! lie jmiho, N. Z., it is
true i he rn/ii lo rnloii jxmri, yrrni is their sorrow. He uinio. Haw., it is true ; he niii
Ic tihdjMii, urcat is tlir lidd.
In Karoliiii^an, Tahitlan, nnd somotimcs in New Zonland, this article seems to be
lengthened to hii or a (as It in lei, ^11), and may Ih- translated either lo If, ox fur, or
lit; — kin ho ntn umn oraijn hei iilii, N. /., to j^ive his lil(\/o/- a rnnsom,— or ns, or to lie
a ransom ; so in llaruton^nn ei iitii, and in Tahilian ci hmi, willi the .same meaning. In
Niikuliivaii, e Jill nii i le jiiiii kiikii ei jiiikit ana no le knioi, I am going for the koku-
l)erries, as (or to Is') an adoriunent Ibr the danee.
In Tongaii, he is I'nquenlly u.seil at the Ix'ginning ol' sentences, with the sense of for
(adv.) ; as, Ac okii noim, (iir it is |iro|ier i he ke le loinihin, for tlioii shalt Ik' justilied. It
is probable that the e which is frei|Ueiitly found in |{ariiloiii{an and Tahilian at the liegin-
ning of phrases is not always n sign of tense, but rather Ihe article used in one of the
aliove senses.
!■ A U T IC I, K. .s (IK TF. NSK.
^ 52. Tlie particles of tense ahvay.s precede the verb; they are all
used with some detfree of iiideliiiiteiiess, and are fre(pietitly iiiter-
chiiiii^'cd for one another. The use of a [larlicular particle appears to
depend rather upon its position in the sentence thtin upon its intrinsic
meaning.
In Samonn, e is used as a sign of present and future time; e vnai niii, he sees ; e tn/n
Icayii iiini Iniiiiln in le oiitnii, men sliall revile you ; iil'ni In-loii n Jiii, if we siiall say.
7J' is used with a similar meaning, but only alb'r a pronoun, — as, on le J'ni ntn, I say;
afni miilon le J'ni, if we shall say. A (accoriling to .Mr. Heath) is sometiiiies used as a
sign of the immediate future ; but, in general, we can only distinguish by the coni' xt if
the sentence is intended to \yc in the present or in Ihe fulure, Nn is the usual sign of tlic
past tense, as, nn'u Jhi, 1 said ; nn in tnnfi, he bad seized ; na rniifnni i mnlon, we
have stM'n ; na union 6, ye went. At the iK'ginning of a clause or sentence, however,
this is usually prece<led by t) (pri)l«ilily Ihe conjunction and), — as, mni snii ai /en o Jesn,
Icsiis cam" : in the iiiiddle of a sentence, preceded by a nniin. it serves, in a manner, (or
a relative pninouii |v. § li\, ua, o /e Jnn /en nil In/in, that was Ihe seed (whicb] was
received ; in ibis case, when nn is followed by le, it is to be translated " by whom," or
" by which;" as, nno e Inijnin /aru, nu le taliii le Jinayilo, but tlic men only by whom
67
'HW
V II I I.O I.Oti V
f
ii iliiiic till' will, iVi'. |cir, iiiil\ iIm' iiK'ri hIhi iI<> iIh' nill.| (hui iiiiiv tri'<|ii>'iitly \f rcii-
(lirnl /III », ir/iin, tlml. Sti ix ikimI in ii siinilar nmtiiKr hiiIi mi jiii' iIh' i'\iiiii|i|i', ^ 1 1 |.
Ill Tiiii^iiii. ' I" ii'«il If ill SiiiiHxiii : I'll I fill" "' I'lifitu kiil"i '•, mill nil iiiiii nliiill
lintr. 7! \* iist'il Milli iIm' |ir><ii>>iiii<, Iml, liy ii ?>iiii.'iiliir c|i<u r<'|>iiiii'y, mIiiIi' hi Siiiiiiuiii it
lolliiwfl, ill 'riiii^iiii il |iriiT(liM llir |iriiiiiiiiii ; ill Siiiiiiiiiii, '< tr Im, in 'I'l '111:1111, /r kr lui,
lIuHi "liiilt (1(1 ; il,iii II iiiiii iiiii-tiiiiiii>e, iIkj ('iiniict kill ; w, 'if '//", I will )!«, Ilic pro-
iKiiin '/ iM'iiijj iiirixcil Id the |Nirli('lt', iYrt (or iih the iniii-<i((nnn<-K linvc ii|m-Ii it, hiki), tun;
iind hi; nn^ »inn« «( \mM lime. The lirnl h im-d willi the iirciionns: »irl mini iiiiiiniilii.
He siiw ; iiiikii n/ii, I Hiiil, »Vc. Xii is used \»li(ii md lMI((»ed l>> 11 |(n>n<iini, ii« iim
hull III' fiJiii '» I'lnnlii, llii I'^iiii (.r Miiii eiiiiie ; inir 1 m nr l'iii'itii,\\\rTi- v»iii a iii.'in tlieri'.
It preeedes tlie iii'^iiti\(' ikiii, uliicli i^ lluii mhiii times liill<iHe(l liy />', liilt ikiI with 11
riiluix' Ni^iiiliciilioii, US iiiir ihni Ir mmi iilii, we linxe iKd Ixiiclied. .V» is (■oiiiiiniiily iincd
with the pronouns, like mi, Iroiii which il miiiis to dillir only in lieint: le— < eiiiphiilic :
neii tiin'iitii, I hnve lieiird ; «c m <//// or m nln m, he Wdil : it is iilwi nst'd wilh the con-
jiiiiciion (il'piisi time 1,11.
Ill New /c'llaii I, <■ is the -iyn (•!' present and riiliirc time, and 1 ol' past ; — kn im miilnjHi
I kill' IIIIII, the lililld see; i<(;i( liikii jmiiiiiin, iii\ servant will live; I Inn II nnitiiii, \\t-
Weill. \\'lieli a verh, ill the iiidu-ali\e, has no particle ol' tense, it is ^jeiM-rally in lh<
preterite.
In Itaroloii^'an, r is a sipi ol' iIk I'utiire, and not iinrreipu iilly ol' the present : knrr 1
/nipiiiii Iriiinri iiki, this (reneration shall not pass ; r iirrr mi, I yo. V- is n si;;n ol' the
prpsent, and ol'llie iniperllct ; in the first case, the verh is liillowcd hy the hs-ative par-
ticle III I (here), and in th. s( coiid li\ ni (there), as li ki/r mi mi, I know ; /( /»») rii
mil, he was sillillj;. / is the sij;ll ol' the past. It is, however, -ollK limes us( il ill lh(
present, parliculiirly aller the ncjiative, as kurr tnntmi 1 kiti; we do not kimw. When iic
particle pnvedes the verh, it is usually in the preterile.
Ill Manjrar 'Van, » is ilie si^jn ol' the present and I'utiire ; in the rormer cnse (nrcordins;
to the vis-aliiilary) il has umi aller the verh, and in the latter iii : — i iiii nun Ir iiuilani.
the wind is Mowing. / marks the prelerile ; iiller a iiej;ntivc it li(.V((inos n, as kiikurr iin
li kill. I did not see.
Ill Tahitian, tin- piirticjes and their use arc precisely the same ns in llaroloii:;aii, — and
the same may Ije said of the I'aiimotuan, so far as can Is- judged from the s|iec'iiiiens
which we have of that lnn(;iia};e.
Ill llavvaiiaii, < indicates the future, and I'reipiently , also, the pre.sent ; li is the pnijicr
si^nofthe present, liul in the sulijiiiietive iiiis'd il denotes llie I'uture also; 1 is the pre-
tpritc pa
rticle
Verh, sii.;iiilies frr> iiiit.\, lnjnn/i'im/, and lorms
thus, with the preterite, a sort of plu|Hrfect, and with the liitun'.
id I'uture, — fi
/iiur r nil, I took previously, or I had taken; 1 /aur r nii, I shall lake U'l'tirelinnd, or
shall have taken.
In N'ukiihivan, r is the i>\jin nf tlie present and the I'utiire. In the loniier rase, to dis-
lin^uish Ihc tense, the parlich mi is usually postli.ved to the verh ; as r kile mi mi, I •
■>(•(', Tlio sense of liitiirity is (iciierally made apparent hy the form of the sentence, as
miOirii ( liir III liiliiii, which way shall we go? E lina jxijxn r fill mm iii miiiui, lo-
morrow we two will c^onie. 1 ia the preterite particU', ns mi ce t koiui ton Uilui, you have
taken away my place.
r O I. V N K « I A N «i K A M M A H
S67
\ lll'HI.K.S ll» Miioii
k A3. Tlie HulijitiH'tivr, cuiKlitiiiiiiil, potiMitinl, impcrntive, ami m-
riiiiliv(> iidmnIs, lire (listiiitriiislifil Iriiiii llic iinliralivc, iiMiially liy
t'linjiiiutiDiiH or otiii-r iiurtulcN pn lixnl to llu^ Milt.
Ill SiiiiMmn, tin- Hiilijunrlivc i* ili'iinl<il dy llii' |>iirlii'li'N I'l/ iitiil dui, — iix m in li lulu,
tlinl ill)' '•iiMiii! iiii^'lit l«' riiHilliil ; II 'i liilii mil luin, if llmii mj^IiimI In Ix' iHrliii (nr, lliiit
tliiiii In- |»rl'-<l). \N illi lli<- iH'^jiilivi', il i« iiiiii, — lit iiiiii I /iilriii li lin , ihal iIhv sIi>iiiIiI
li'il n liirii. 'I'll'' iM.iiililitMiiil, Willi 1/ iir c/i/H, i<( ('\|iri'<«ril li\ n, n/fii, I'liin {-\nniu-i ),
i'l, !'• /"'• mill ]"i; nx >/ ' iln nun if, il' llimi uiil Iniu iIum ii ; nlm it > nlii, il' llmii
||iM-Nl ; III r iMiiHiilK IV, irilmii wilt ; in Jni onlmi iiii n/nmn, wlini \v liu ymir iiliim; /M-
V Ir Ii4n I iii, il'lhim ilmin' il ; /on Jai ulii niiliin, il" >r kIiiiH Miiy ; /«( «■ niniii, il" it In-
truly thoii. J^i/ in I'xiin-xM'il liy nri, — an iiri nlin J'ui nnliiii, lent ye Ini hilliii. Cnii, at
rn\\*it I'OtilJr, l>y iiinlni, ii»tiiill\ iMIuwril liy niin, ur hi/,^ii< r niii/iii inli in iin full,
Im" run liniik (or, il i- jHwsil.lf llir Iiiiii U< liniik). 'i'lii' iiii|iiTiilivr rillirr liiii Im |iiirtirlc;
Its siiii mm, 1 iiiiK' ImR', — nr liikis in :il1ir it, iiml •ouiirliiius aUn mn U Ibri' il : li iiiir in '
go nwiiy ! mil Iiii/d hi i hi.' lake lluit ! I'riiliiliilii<ii >■* r,\|ir<'KKril liy iinn, willi />, li, ur
f nrtfr it, — an ii"'« li Jiir, du iml Irar ; una 'r Ir Inuln, ilii not tliou Hwnir ; nun lim limn
r Hon, kl mil thy liniiil kimw. IV'wnri' in ri'inlrri'il liy in, — »» in niilnu tin Jni i- union,
licwnn' Ii'kI yi' ilo (nr, list Ix' ilmii' liy y<>ii). Tin' iiiliiiiilvi' Iiiim >' lu'lim' it, — iin nn nn >nii
r fiirnii, I am i-i>iiii' In ili'«trn\, — lull il is rri'i|iiciill) i'X|irrsH<'(l liy lln' Hiilijiiiiclivi' Willi in.
Ill 'I'nii'^iiii, iIh' sii|ijiim'ti\i' li I'Xjiri -w'll hy A(, — an l.in nln, lliiit I may j;n ; Kr innii
Jnknl'iiii, lli.il wi' limy ilrstrnx. In the ncpilivr liy /.c nun nn, iis /,r nun nri iinii Ininliii
in, lliul lliry slnmlil lint iiiiiki' liini known. // is piKliri'il l>y kn and luilnin, — as, In kn
urjiii ac githi ftmr, liir il'lhr wnrkK liinl Ihtu ilmir; hnlmn h iiniii niitn in, il' y will
rw<"ivi' it ; irlifii is i'\|ir<'Ns<'il hy kn, whii'li is i^incrall) n jhiiIi il alVr tin' |>i'niiniiii, — as
ka iHini kit ilii in, wIhii si- sli'ill liiiil liiiii. hn rrri|ui iill\ lias n lu'lnri' il, — as nkn hln
in nl.iji, wlini it is will with lliir. I^sl is lilin nri :—hlin mi nnii nininnin, Icsl llii y
slmiilil SIS'. 'I'lii' iiii|i<'ralivi' iillur has im |iarli('li', — lis, nniu nln, pi ye! linn Linir nn,
nmw 111 iiR' ! — or liikis the siijii n(' thr siilijiinclivi', — as, l.i- inon luilii. In- yi' wise. Tlw
|inihiliitivi' »ii;n is nnn nri, — as nnn nil iiioii nln, jjii yi' iinl. Tin' iiilinilivc lias kr, — ii«
tiaku liiiu kt Jnkniln, I hnvt mo to wt nl vnriiiiirc, (this kc niiHWtTs, nut to Ilii- >Sunioiiii
r, hut lo till' 'iri, llic si;;ii of the siihjlin('tivi'.|
III New /•'alanil, km ami inn nri' sijiiis ol' thr Niihjiliiitivr, — jis, kin Innrr nln nn, that
I nmv j;o; inn knr kn linin, lliat tlioii slimilil.st nuiii'i in Iho nr^ativi', — km knnn
rntini i hnki, that tlii'y slmulil imi nturn. Mi rxpn'ssrs a sort nl riiliiri' njilativi', — nn
luirrv III, he slioiihl (»<>, or must (jn; inrnkr iiiiiy Ih' ri'iiilrri'il " is to U-," a*, inrnkr liikiiii
tr In imln, thi' iii:in in lo b>' (or iniisl simrtly Ih') tlolivrri'il ii|i. Inn is aUit triini, — as.
ina nrnmin knulon, wIm'H yi' arc iktsis'iiIiiI. For ij there arc no p.\|iii'SHions i'xn'|il ki
If mm, n,r Ir nnn, (hy ll«' tiling, with llm ihinj;,) nr siin|ily ki h. ami «/< ti ; — as, l,i It
mm < linrrr mat in, il'lii' shall I'nim'; kl li liinliin lilnlii Iniinin, il'aiiN man wish. (/iiH,
itT jianUi; is nlni, I'nilowi'il hy llir arlicli', — as, < nlm in linn Ir kilr, I inn sic (the s«s'.
iii^ is (Hissihlc fur iiH'). Tin- iiii|icralivc cniiiinniily has im |iurlii'lc : il is sniiiciiincs I'ul-
lowcd hy rii,—a», linrre fii koiitun, go ye, — and Honieliim'M pret'cdod hy mi; — iw, mr
Innrr, j>o ! Knnn, knniikn, nnn, iiniikn, and kri, nil sijinily do not ; — knnn or nnn
•.»0H
l> II I I.O I.IMi V.
Isi'iiliMi r mnliikii, li'iir ye ii<il : kri niitliiliit kf, li'iir llimi mil. Km \* iim'iI liir llir inri-
nihvi' iHirlirlr, — III), I hiirrr nui/mi km klli, wr wriil In Mi' ; Xi />' hlr, l<i til)' Mt'jii|f,
iniuhl iiUo Ik' ii<m'iI.
In Itiiniiiiiipiii, Un JH iIh- xiilijiini'tivn pnrlicli',— nn, kin tun tilu mnliin, llmt wr nuiy
tfii : II |H iiIhii iiM'd t<>r il iiiiil irlirii, — IIS, km iikiilD/xi null 1,'ir, IT llimi uili liill ilnwn ;
km till- nun nn r<i, »Ih'II I riimi-. In (Zi'iirriii, 1/ lit llol i'\|in'i4ii<'i|, liiil Ilir ('nnililiiin in
Icll III Im' inli'mij frtiin iIh' ooniilnii'tliin; — c litninh knr mi tr niiiu ra, il'lhiMi Ihi iIh^ 8011
111' (iiHJ (j. I', ilioii iK'ini;, iVr.) Xiriift in iruil nnlv »itli piml tiini', — n», iianiiii kniiloii
I kilr, \< v)' liml kiioHii, /xi/ ia urn, wlijiji ih |iIiii'i'iI iiIIit tlir vitIi, iiiiiI kii «r kti le
U'liiri' il, — n- k'l li innipnm nni rnlon, Ii'hI lln'v 1111111. Am im iiIwi iiwil llir frtl. I.'iin
IK cjijiniuKil liy II rliiiii-iN |i('n|i|irii!>i« 1 knn 1 likn in km' 1 Ir nkndiUin, tlioii I'linal mil
wliilcii (lit, il it nut n^'lil, nr nlliiuiil, liir tliii' In wliili'ii). 'I'lir iiii|K'riilivi' in iliiKitnl liy
kii, — UN, ka nnr kn kiiiii, )j<i iwvk ! kit In Inlnii tnin, Irt ii.h kill liiiii, Kn iilwi ('X|ir<'itiH'it
lutiin." n<Tii<i<iiy, n«, mnounui It kn varr, ninny "liiijl Im ilcccivtil (nr iniiny nn- limy who
iihiill, iVi',) ; t kn knvrn kininn, iiml hIiiiII Im> lirniitftil lii'liin>, 'I'lii- liirliiililiiiu iii'j^nlivi*
IM niirnkn,—nii,nlirnkn r »i>//iiM'<, lliiiik iinl, — iiihI iimn' rim'ly liy III"' I'liliilian nnn,—
nn, riiin • /./«(.< .(/«, (Ill n'lt cnt'T. Tin' |)rii|«>r inriiiilivi' sign ia 1, liul in (.'XjirciM |mr|hi«<'
or ili'MUii till' Hiilijuiii'livr |iiirtii'li' ^iii Ik iiwiI,
III Mmi^iin'\iin, iliii'ii in il {|iriiliiilily lor llir pri'lcritr mily, iiki' i/Ait't in Tnliitinn);
/"ki i» /'.«/, — n», iki inn kne, li'tl llmii liill ; inn is nnn/il llmt [pliil J Dim i/iii), niiswcr-
111)1 |M'rlin|ia tn mf in .New X<'iilniiil i kn i» tin- aign nl' llir iiii|i<'riiliv<>, — iix, tiilou kn oro i
le Inkno, Irl us ji" In niid ; il |irii|i(rly Hiiiliilii'it "t/ii'i/ if n ittvoir, iiiiiritniiiiT, /inuiliitili,
t\-i„ jHir nipjiDrl it rntliiiH ilu iiiU." 'I'lii' iiii|H'nilivi' Iiiih Hiinu'liinrn c Ixiliiri! il, — liiil
rrri|iiintly il h williniit niiy "i^in In di'iiiiiiiiilt' it,
III I'linniniimii, ^(1 si'i'iiis In la' iim'iI lit in MiinKiircviin : kn /mi it inn i, ntnv \vrv.'.
inlnii kn Ininnki, lit iia li^lit, nr, ur uill ti|i|it.
In 'riiliiliiin, !<■ iiiiiu't-ri* to km in Uiirnlnnijiiii, nii (t'nr Inn) to /(Xi;,niiil nhin to nnnint.
A is llitr prclix of iIh* iiiipi.-niiivc, iiml r ><( ilii- inlinitivc : m, n, nnd » /'', nrc lined lor /ist,
lis.! i/z-d 'I ;»</;(•, take ciri' li'sl [ynii| dir ; n If Imrrc /'il/i/H, lent lliry I'liiiic, /unha in
till' |irnliiliilin'.' pnrliric : 1 inliii 1 liniii, (jn nnl.
Ill I lauiiiiiiii, I aiisui'r> In in in 'I'aliitiaii, as n si;;ii nl' llic Niilijiiiii'livi', iiiciiiiin;; l/inl,
and marks ali«i llii' iiiiidiliniial, Willi iIk; wnsc of 1/ and u/nn, — as, 1 itr r« , thai tlinii
niayi'sl kimw ; 1 iVrrj iiiiii < iin Iniinta, lo be sisn liy mrii ! i piilc outiiii, whi'li yc pray;
; inn Inn iimlii, il'lliim' ryi- l«' evil. Inn sijiiiilics il, — ns, inn onlnii r lini/r, il" vi' I'omo,
O is lisl, a» nuti ni niitnii o iimie, cut not, li'sl |yi'| dir ; |tliis is |H'rliaps the Sainn:in o,
ini'aniii)i nr ; " cat imi, nr ynii ilii-."| Cnn is cxJiriH-i'd liy liili, In arrin' lit, willi n onn.
slriirlinii siniil.'ir In lliai nl' tlic Nrw Xialiiiid nlii 1, — as, In/i mi i liin /kit IniniUii li lieln-
lii/ii, iIh'm' rliildnii iiri' aliii- in rend (lit. it has cniiii' In Ihrsc cliiMrrii tn nnd). I'nno,
right, gissl, i<> iisid III ihr saiiii' way In «'.\pn.'ss ought, should, <Vi', (Tlic li niV-r llirtie
Words ni'vcr bi'<'onio!i /// ; yet, fmin the nnnlogy of tliii other dinleclH, wr enn hiirilly
doiilil that it was iiri'.iinnlly the artirle, — i, e, llir rrnilinf> has coiiK! to the rhildren. Wo
may siippnsi' that when (he In was iiilriHliiced il was only einplnyeil in lliom' rnm-n in
wliiili till- artirle prisrdrd what was rliarly a nniiii ; when it was used us a relative
|v. ^ ll|,nr, as III the present lase, Uliire a snrt nl' iiiliiiiiiNe nr gerund, il was iiol
rhaii;.'ril.| /.' is the usual prefix cif the im|M'ralive, — na, r hnnui ik, \ii\t: thou; U'lore
Humc verbs il is n'pliirisl by o or ««, — us, n luir «', go thon ; on hoi oiun, do ye Iwo
I'M I. V \ KS I A N (i K A M \[ \ l(
•>^
rrtiirn. !\fiii it llir pmliilnlivr imrliclf, — iih, m</i /»/' (»', U" llmii imt, Mni nl«i «iuiii.
(Mf iilriMxl, iilmiil, iiriir til, — !>•', mill nnih n", I iiiii miirly il' ml. nr iiImhiI In iln', /.' i<
IIk' iiiliiillivc |iiirli<'li', liiil r, nt'lln' Niilijiiiirlivr, i)i iiTil will II iiliji'i'l iir |iiir|i<i«<> ix iiitrnilnl,
m ill llii' Ni'i'iml <'\nni|ilr itiviii iilmvi*.
Ill Nllllllllivilll, >'< IN II ai^ll III' llic Klllljllllrlivi',— IIH, III Dlllill Hlllhlll, tllllt W)' llT OVIT*
cnini'; il ii|i|H'iirx In In' iil-tii iHiil liir llii' lliiril |»tkii|| nl' llir iiii|ii rnliM', — ii<<, in liiiiiiij,iu
hill III (»' /iiiKi/,1111, III ili\ will l«' iliiiir. A K llir ii'-iiiil iiii|ii'niiivi' (iiirli'li ,— iiN, n /i#» .'
Uii. Aii'i 14 till' |ir<iliiliilivi' tuiii ill llii' Niikiiliiviiii rlii'ili'r, — iii, hiki m- hifi, ilu imt riiiii<<;
ill Tiiliiiiilii, il K imii iir (niT'inliiiu In tlic I'niirli iiiiH-iniiiin''") iiiimi, — «», mui m km w
((',), (III not <>nl I timoi >«' r Iuihii (<!.)• <!■■ »"( innki ! 'I'Im' inliiiilivi! luirlirli' in r,— ni, r
mm r vin i li- ikn, n tliinu to H|H'ar IihIi. 'I'Iic ciiiiilitinniil \* imiiiilly Irll to la- iinitrritiiiKl
frmii 111!' liirin nl'lli'' wiitriiri', — ns, v piki iir tiiiniiin Iir viikii nil, r ninh iir, iT ymi rliinli
ll|> tliix ship ynii »ill l«' killiil ; i", limU'ViT, is "niiirlillli-i iwil liir //, — ii", in iiiiiLn unit
ill, il' Iir sliii<>, //.«/ is oi, — UN, III I'll, Irst yiiii liill, nr, li>r li'iir III' tiilliiig. Mm \» iimiI
fbr iiImiiiI, In, nr iKiir in, ixiicllv as mni in lliinniiiiii.
I" \ 11 I'M' I. KM (ir KiHt M
\ M. \\y jiiiiiiiit: rcrtniii |iarlifles to tlii' vcrli, Imtli n« iirpfixes and
BuflixGH, the I'lilyiu'Miaii dialuctH ^ivo to tin* orii^iiial iiu'aiiiii|r of tlie
Wfird, nilditioiial sliaiU-s of siL;nilii'atiiiii, anal(i<;inis to some of llie
Ik'liri'w coiijniiatioiis. 'I'licsn derivatives we have termed Forms,
They nro causative, desiiierativt-, reeiproeal, and potential. Tlicv
receive all the si^is oC tense and inowl like tlio single verb.
Ill Siiiiinaii, llir caiisatin' liirm is maiii- liy pn Hxiiit? Jn'ii In ill"' vcrti; nt J':i'iio/ii, m
save' In nm',— I, 1'. In riiiisi' In li»r, I'rniii fVir, In livci J /ii'iu/k. In hIhiw, call!*' In kliiiW,
frniii i/n, In IdiiiW. Ihsiri' In i\pr<s'<ii| \i\ /in, pri lixiil, — as "" /in-iiiii, I w i^-h In ijrinlt ;
fianilii in, 111' ttixlii's In yn. Tin' riripnH'al liiriii, «liirli iilin rxpriswn Ihf ilmiifj nl'aiiy
lliinjj liy a iiiiinlKT nl" imthihin in cnnipaiiy, is niailf liy /< pn lixiil, ami n'i, In'i, ini'i, fi,
li, anil iiHj HuHixiHl to llii' vcrli; — as Ir.jiiiilnii-ii'i, lo Irailr lum'tlirr, nr willi nnr aimllHT,
—Jh-sn/ii-tii'i, 111 niii li)|{i'llirr, — Ji-ilit-ytii, lo lialti one iinntlicr ; Jr-oso-Ji, In li-ap li>)(rtlivr ;
fi-iiii-si. In sniiii Inyi'llirr,— /(-.'I*/**!//), In lii'lp nrir aiinllirr. A'i niiil nut, whiii Ibl-
Inw'iiijj a vrrli riiilin^ in ", i-nali'sci' willi il, a.s in llii' last rvainpli', ami in ti-niinii'i, lo
qiiarirl, iVniii iiiisn. In liiar ill-will,— /<. /<(/(/(, In sprak in imiiiril, rrniii /(//<., to s|i«ak.
'I'liis Haini! liinii is iisnl tn rxpri'ss irrr^iilar imitiiin, liark ami Inrili, up ami ilnuii, alMiul,
iiC, — uit/r.ii/ii.ii'i, In walk iiImiiiI, up ami i\iiwu,—^H ■/n/ii-ii'iiiii (passivr), 'nst aUmt, a*
n vcssrl. '
III 'rnnnan, /iikn is tlir caiisalivi' profix,— ns Jiikiinioiii, tn savr, trnni inniii, to live :
fiiknliilii. In iliniinisli, I'min tiilii, small. Tlir ili'siilcralivi' parlirli' is Jia, or, as it is
niiiri' rniiimnnly prniinliiiri'il, /c, — as mmi Jul n/ii, wn wish tn fio ; in) imii fir fmiinn,
tlii'V wisliril III liiar. 'I'lu' nripriical liirni (wliirli lias tlic sanii' tnranin^s as in Samniin)
is niailr by /'■ prclixril, anil aki, Juki, laki^niii, sull'ixril, — na Jr-filii-aki, to wroHllo
logrihrr,— /i'-z/o'/rt//, lo look upon ono aiiotlirr,— /(•.«/(«/iiwi, to urct't ono another, IVom
fjii. In saliito ; — iVnni tnii, to riiinn upon. In roach to, \('.,»c hn\v frtiiu/nki, to jnin with
nlio aiinlhrr,— /i'/.';/'7(//(/i(/./, lo incrl a [HTson, — mid Ji-jiikiijiiiiii/nki, io im-vl with one
08
270
P H I I, O L O G Y.
nnotlwT. i''rf, or, ns the inissionnricN write il, Jim, is iho pntniliai prefix, — ns «<«• ikai
/(■ turn I'a-iiit/ii, tlicy cmild mil dwell ; knhiii r Jiuiluii r hi. tdiiiiti', il'ii nmil run number,
(or, if it mil Im' iiumlx'nil liy ii iiiiiii.) Tliis liiriii cxisls only in the 'roii)j(iii.
Ill Ni'W /ealniid, the eaiisiilive prefix is vidil, — ns K (/^(/l';(/, In mive ; uiihiikili, to
cniise to know, llin is used in a li'W eiises, ns a desidcrnlive sifjii, ns hin-iiiii, to wish
to drink, to W. tliirsly; //((/./,(((, to wish l<> ent, to Is- hiinjiry ; hut it is not n (^■iiernl
prelix. lliitliia si^nilies to desire, bnt it is used ns nn iiulepeiiilenl verli. 'J'he reci-
|iriH-nl I'orm does not exist in this, or in nny ol' the Enstern dialects, which hnve only ihc
eniisniive.
Ill l{nroliin<;an mid Mnn^^nrevnn, the e.-nisntive siun is iika, in I'aniiiotiKin fiiLu or
li(tk(i, in Trihilinii fii'a or //«'(/, ill Hawniinii Sdinetiiiies Ini'ii, hut more commonly /lo'o,
and in Nukuhivaii il assiiines the li>iir l(>rms lAjiika, /nikii, Jo'ii, and kn'ii.
In most, if not all, of these dialects, tii is nlso i'ni|iloyed ns a eniisntive prefix : — it is
prohahly the same with the verb In, to strike; ns nk-ikn, |{nr., low, loakiiiikn, to ahnsc
(to strike diiwn); //, eiilaiii^led, /(///, to enlaniile. In 'l";iliilian, ^n//rt, to cleans,', from
//m, cliiiii (to distiii;;uish il perhaps iVom //f/f(/'(n, ashaiiieil). In Hawaiian, ^(/i//f//, to
anoint, from /liiiii, uininieiit : In/ii/ii, to eiitan^jle, Vom //////, entaii^'led (|ierhiips to dis-
tinguish it from liitJiilii, to covet another's pro|H"rty). In Niikuhivan, la/iiii, to upset,
from hiii, to turn over ; lajiii, to stii'k on, from /)(/, to adhere.
PA liTICI.KS OK VOICK.
ij ar). The Polynesian ilifilecl.s makt a very Croiiueiit use of tlie
passive form of the verb. In many cases it i;- "mjiloycd where tlie
Eno;iisli would have the active ; and there are, in all the diidei'ts.
verbs wliich, tiiough active in form, are only used in a passive
acceptation.
The lasl.nieiitioned class of verbs dill'er, however, from the rejiular passives, in taking
aHer 'hem th<' alilntive .vitli i, iiisteail of that with c, (v. ^^ 'S.i, 24), as raiikii i Ic Itii/dla,
Rnr., oblaini'd liy the man ; jxtii i tr tJn, Haw., destmved by fire.
^ 50. The passive particles are numerous in tliu ditferent dialects,
but nearly all terminate in a. Tiiey are all sutli.ves.
In !Sninoan, these particles are a, iti, Jia, luu, tin, and inn, — ns iijiiifi, to cover,
/^M/i'/, covered ; tnnfi,\o hinder, pa.ss. /w*//./" ,• si/n,U> see (cereiiionial) s/Az/iV;,- i/a,
to hnte, itiiniii ; si'i, to lit) up, si'itin; nvr, lo give, niv-i/in. Of these particles the (irst
two and the last are by far the must I'onimoii. The passive particle may lie separated
from the verb by an adverb, but, in this case, the particle thus separated always is, or
liecomes iiiii, — as ijnnnln ntna inn a nittoit nijnsn/n, yoiir ."ins will nlso be forgiNcii, —
where the ndverb niim, " also," conies Is'twix'n the verb and the iHiiticle.
In the Tongnii, we nre led in doubt by an evident mi.stake on the part of the mi-ssion-
aries, who have regarded the ablative particle r, nieaiiiiig ////, as an article of the nomi-
native [v. f) II], and have thus, ui many ca.-ics, iransliirmed n passive into an n<'tive
verb. In numerous instnnces, in the versions of the .Scriptures, the verb is liilloweil by a
particle (, which iip|)ears to have [lerplexed the translators, — as they have printed it not
I' <) I, Y N K S I A X (i 11 A M .M A II.
271
as n purl of the word, imr yet wlidlly sc'|mrnle, Iml iihti'Iv divided (Voiii it l)y ii very lliin
" (-IHici'," — lis ill iIk,' scnli'iicc, / //(' Ixiikiii Imlimtir l;ii(i fiiiniiii ilir ijalii Ji'finr, iiinciii}; nil
the mill [«li(i| liiivc Ix Til JKirii nl' woiiicn, Arc-. ; licrf tlic inissicjiinrics coiisidi'i' the c
Im'Ioi'c Id' as a si^rii nl' tin' iKJininallvi', ami translile, " anxiiii; all wIidiii wuineli have
Iwriie ;" it is, however, iiii(|iiesti()nal)ly the |ire|Mi.sitiiiii A;/, mid llie i wliicli IoIIohs 7(///</«
Is a jmrtielc ol' the passive ; the proper reiideriii),', therel'ore, is, " aiiioiij;, all brought
forth liy women." This mistake has aris<Mi parity Iroiii the cireiimstaiice that the only
other Oci'anic dialer! wilh which the missionaries at this group were iu-c|uaiiiled was the
Vitian, whii'h has no proper passive, and which "iiiploys several particles as aOixes to
the verli to denote its Iransilivi^ stall', — and partly iVom Ihe IJict that llie Toiigan apjiears
to 1h- in reality undecided on this point, or rather, to employ the same const ruL'lion to
express llie two relalioiis, easily ccinl'ounded, ol' an active verh to its objective, and a
passive to its nominative. 'I'liiis, in the phrase, hilmii r kuhiili c Hflnni a Sctuni, " if
Satun cast out Satan," c fiinin is evidently in the ablative, and kiibiili (pro[K'rly kabiitiii)
in the passive, rrnm /.((/w, — and the sentence reads " ii' Nilan \yc, cast out by .^alan ;"
yet a I'ew lines alter we have Ihe same li)rm used apparenlly in an active sense, — kiihiiii
ten kiiliiiti III Willi lrfr>/n, " if I cast out devils," whriT ihi' n of tiu is the nominative pro-
noun J. This is the Vitian construction, as \v\\. be seen by referring to the grammar of
that language. In some cases, however, the passive acceptation has bo'U so clear that
Ihe translators eoiild not remain in doubt, — as lie Ic ke tmuiliiii i Iiik> lett, lie tc kc lialuiii
i limileii, for thou shall be justified by thy words, and llioii siialt Ik; condemned by thy
words ; the preposition '»/ is here rendered i (ai'cording to the general rule in tl' .' ly-
ncsiaii), and not r, — Ihe ablative Ix'iiig not thai of Ihe agent, but that of Ihe means or
instrument. The particles thus far observed in the Tongiui aiv / (llir in), in, Ida, ki (for
kill), Ii (lor lilt), and na (|K'rhaps for inn) — as c nko/iiikiiin ukiiiiiiitolu c lie Oliiii,
"they shall Ik- taught by God" (from nkiiiiaki, to leai'h).
In Ihe New Zealand dialect the partiides are more numerous than in the rest, and in
this point its grammalical system appears to Ik- more complete and regular than thai of
the ollK'rs. It is to Ix' observed that no! only is the passive, as such, used much more
frccpiently than in Knglish, but in the iui|>eri'.live of transitive verbs, the passive I'orm is
generally employed where i! must Ix; renderi'il into Knglish by the active, — and this is
also sometimes the case in other mtKids. Ki le men c wnkiiniiiliniinliii nun knc r Inn
knilnlii ninliiii, if Ihy right eye ollend thee, — lit., if thou be oU'ended by thy right eye ;
mnlinin-lin ijn rriinrrijn, observe the lilies. One remarkable peculiarity of this dialect
is that instead of tin: passive sign iM'ing separated from the verb by an adverb, as in ihe
other dialects, Ixith Ihe verb and the adverb have the atlix, — that of the latter lieing
always tiii, — ns ka tiikit-n mtirie-tia Ion ponnijn, thy servant is let go in pence (tiikii, to
let go ; marie, peacefully) ; korrro-tia kino-tin, evil spiken of. The passive suflixes
arc (/, in, liin, kin, min, >)in, rin, tin, tin, ijii, inn, and kinn ; as tonii-n, seni, — iinti-in,
broken, — Imjo-liin, taken, — infi-kin, loosi d, — nni-tiiin, I'olloweil, — inikntn-iin, placed,
— tiiiimiiii-lin, Ix'trolbed, — Inliu-nn, biirnl, — irnimi.iin, li'd, — liiin-inn, called, — lini-kinn,
cut do'Aii. The're appears to Ih' no certain rule by which we can determine what is the
affix of n particular verb; on this |Kiin! usaj.e is ihe only guide. It would seem, how-
ever, tlint certain lerminalions are liest adapted, according lo the euphony of the lan-
guage, to particular allixes. \'erbs I'liding in ne, nkr, it, rii, iri, oi, nli, iii, mi, nil,
ukii, urn, iitn, have usually n; those which terminale in nki and titi, have ollen in;
272
I'll I I, O l.()(i Y.
mnny in ";;«, dim, i>ii, iikii, rhr, hnvo hiii; tliosn wliirh toriiiinnto in in, niid in a nnd 6
ncrcnicd linvi" m'ncrnlly X/«; ninny in tiiiii, itiii, itni, nnd tiro, haw win; most tlint
nnd in di ' ivp ijio ; riii is only (!iiind with vrrbs ending in « nnd o; tin is tin; most
common of nil, nnd is joiiii'd with nny tcrniiniilion ; mnny vcrlis rnding in <il>i, iki, nnd
tiiii, liiko tin; llioso in /)(" firncTiilly mi; llii' l!'W cnsos in which we hnve fonnd inn nnd
kiiiii Imvi- brrn with verbs en(hn;; in n. In some words ihi" usage seems to vnry ; we
find hoth J/vf<r//(i-/,((/ |Miitt. xiii. i>7| nnd inikdlii-iiin (Malt. xi. (i| lor " oIliMiiled ;" so
also, Hiihiipiilit-id nnd uiikiipiitn-iiiii, " made to n|)|ienr." Words sonnded nlike with
different nrrcptntions, will hnvc ditFerent aflixes, — as kata-iiin, Innglicd at ; ktiliikatu-\ji(i
sroreheil.
In Unrolongnn, the |iassiv(> particles are n, in, kin, nnd mm, — as nic-ii, loosened,^
nron-in, loved, — njm-kin, seized, — Innii-i/iin, buried. The last two are, however, rare.
Sometimes a tin is inserti'd Ix'lween the verb anil the particle in, which may Im- the
remains of nn old passivi' Ibrm, — as nko, to buy, — pnss. nko-in or okotiii-in (in .New Zen-
hind, liiiko, to buy, mnkes in the pnssive lioktmn); tiitnki-iii or tiitnkitiii-in, rewarded (in
\. Z. tiilnki makes tiilnkiiin) ; so kiii, to cnt, pass, knitjnin (N. Z. kui mnkes kniijit).
The passive particle may lie se|iarated from the verb by nn adverb, — ns rnio-iiinric-in,
laid up rarefully.
In .Mnngnrcvnn, the usual passive particle is in, ns nkiivnnikn-in, revealed, made
known, — cnusative passive Irom rnrnkn, to know.
In Tahitian, the only suffix of the pnssive is /(/((; it may be separated from the verb
by nn ndverb, — as /iiijHii.i'./iin, tnken away ; hniiiniii-itin-hin, treated ill.
In llaHniInn, the sullixes are n, in, liin, nnd lin, — ns liJir-n, lieard, — Invr-in, tnken,
niihiili.liin, driven away, — tnii-liii, hung up. The last two particles, hovvevcir, are em-
ployed in but very lew instances. Tniilin is probably used to distinguish the word Inn,
in the meaning of /') linn^, frmn Inn, iiieaniug In jinl, or set down, pass. Inn. in. We
hnve, |M'rliaps, another passive siilVix in jii/i-tin, crowded close, from ]ti/i, to join or
ndlien' to.
The N'ukuhivan has fiir sullixes of the passive (/, in, hin, and tin ; ns hiinnii, to bring
forth, Iniiinii-n, Imrii ; knohn, to sidute, kniilni-in, saluted ; nin, to inspire, iirii-liin,
inspired ; hnnlnpii, to sanctify, hnnlnini.tin, snnclilied.
It is remarkable that soiiii> of the active verbs of the Ivistern dinleets sec-m to be ilerived
from the passive forms of N'ew Zealand, — as :
jturi, X. Z., to take, pnss. piirilin
nkiri, " to thr<iw, " nkirilia
kini, " to pinch, " kiniliu
tnrnki, " to overthrow, " Ininkiiin
linrn, " to swallow, " hoiiiiiiin
piilili, I law., to take up
kirili, Mang., to throw
'inili, Ilnw., to pini'h
lii/nitin. Haw., to overthrow
lioriimi. Tab., to swallow
Tliis would seem to iudic.-ite that these passive forms once existed in the Intlcr dialects,
thoui;h ihey are now obsolete ns such.
>i 57. The verbal nouns being closely connected in this language
with tiie passive Ibrtns, it will be most convenient to treat of them in
this place. They are formed by joining to the verb crrtain suffixes
which usually terminate in ya.
P O I, Y N E S I A N O R A M M A R.
273
As Iho fiirrtialion of these nouns, like that of the pnssivt! voice, is most clenrly nnd
fully (lispliiyed in the New Xenland dinlcct, it seems advisnbli^ to depart from fiur usual
order, and draw our first examples from this tongue. The general rule is that the par-
ticle of the noun depends u|)On that of the passive, ii, ui, rui, ««, and j)(« being changed
into >)ii, iind hia, kin, miti, ria, nnd lin becoming respectively luii/ii, lunjii, maija, rai/a,
and tiiiKt, as —
ACTIVE.
piitii, to kill
Willi, to break
tiihit, to burn
kiii, to cat
piii, to favor
l<i;/i, to lament
waktiini, to judge
aril, to pursue
tn (trans.), to stand on
kotero, to sjicak
PAHaiVE.
JMlllKl
V'litiia
tiihiimi
kiiiij<i
jMiiijiii
liiijihia
wakiiwdkiii
(iriimia
luria (stood upon)
korrroliii.
NOUN.
pntiigtt, a killing
waliijii, fracture
tahmjii, a burning
kaii/ii, a meal
jMiiijii, favor, kindness
tatjiliaijii, latnentation
trakiitcakdija, judgment
uruminja, pursuit
tiiroiia, a stand, foundation
korer'tlttga, a speaking
It is prolmbli^ that the passive sull'ixes inn and ki/Ki arc changed to j)«, but the ex-
amples are so few and doubtful that no positive conclusion has been arrived at ; thus,
wakiij>iiUt-inti, made to ap|)car, or shown, has witkiijtiiluijii, a showing forth, — but then
this verb has also another form of the passive, nakiiputnia, from which the noun may
be derived. 'I'lie sutlixes ijii and hitjit are tho«! which are generally used where a noun
is to Ih' I'ormed from a word which is not a verb, — as from niii, great, we have yiiiitju,
greatness; from y»»ri, dark, ;»;»/■//"«'(, darkness; from «(/;/if, peacefully, «(«r(W«j)rt,
ix-acefulncss. Someliines a slight irn'gularily may be observed, — as iriikapiiiiki, to
testify, which should properly have iiiikii}miikii)ii, has viikiipiiakiiijii, testimony. When
the verb of which the noun is to Ix; liirmcd is (pialilied by an adverb, this adverb, also,
receives a nominal su(li\, which is always <«y«; thus w« /onii is to live continually,
from which we have oriniii li»iii-l<iijii, eternal lite; tii-kaii, to 1)0 naked (lit, to stand
merely), has tinjn kiiiiliiijii, nakedness. Here it will lie observed that tii has a ditlercnt
sullix {nil) from that which it has above {niiia), and with a ditlcrent meaning. This is
not an uncommon case; — wiiiiitii, to bring forth, passive iriinaua, has witiiiiutjii (reg,),
olfspriiig, and xriivniilinja (irreg.), birth ; iiko, to teach, pass, iikimii, has iikoija (reg.),
discipji', and nkorinjn (irn-g.), instruction. No certain rule can lie given for these eases,
except that when th<' rj'gular derivative of a verb has ac(|uircd by custom a meaning
ditfercnt from that which it should properly possess (as tciimiiiiju should properly signify
birth, tiiriii)!!, standing, nknijii, teaeliing), another noun may I)e formed to express such
prop<T mianing, by allixing to the verb the pai'ticle which will ll)rm the most euphonious
combination. It will bt> seen that the Kastern dialects (Itarotongan, Tahilian, &c.) have
generalised this exceptional rule into a regular system, and thence derived two classes of
verbal uoims.
In Samoan, the usual sulTix is ii«, which sometimes becomes iii/a, — as Inmnja, inter-
ment or sepulchre, — tiifn-iiyn, <livision, — tjatiitja or yiila-iiija, end, from tjalii, to termi-
note. There are, however, some exceptions, which seem to indicate that a more com-
09
274
1> tl I I. O L U G V.
picx syslrm rcarmblinK (he New iConlanil rurincrly r.xiiitrd ; — 111)111, to );mw, inakc*
lupu-<it))i, )>n>K'th, mill lH/tii/<ijfii, grnrrntiun (in N. 'A. iiiika fiijiiirtujd) ; lii-yi is a
atnndini;, niiil lu-Uit/ii, n xtnnd, riiuiidnlion.
In Tnnttan, pa nnil «prt ape llie n'guhir hiiITixcii, and sorm to U' uwtl indiiriTcntly, —
as kavr, to carry, intr^i, a biirth<-n ; hii/r, lo novrrii, luik-iiiiii, a kin);iloni, — takitilo, to
ahow, Jakaihijii, a »\f,n, indication ; tanii, to liury, liiiiu-iiijti, n s('|iidi'lirp. Hut lunit
Dignities also to plniit, and wc liave lor the Hixth lunar nionlh, luiiiimiitjii, \\w planting
month (Mariner), evidently IrDin the obsolete passive fnniiiiiin. Tii signilic.s liolh to
stand and lo rut : in the toniH'r sense it has liir its noun liuif/ii or tinjii, any thing
standing ; in the latter, it mokes in the passive tiilin, and its noun is tutaijtf, a piece or
slice of any thing.
In all the l-^isiern dialtvts lhert< are two panicles ilistinct in their use and purport. In
Rarotongnn, these are p« and (inn, — the laltiT of which is usH to express the action
signified by the verb, while the former has refen'nce rather lo the result of the action;
the one ;nay lie termed the noun of the active voice, and the other that of the passive.
Thus ininiiu-<i>)ti is birth, and wnnuiitxi iitl'spring ; i/j>r-iii/<i, an ending, apriiii, end;
j>i4tit-<i)xi, a collivting, /(»^/j»(i, a crowd; riiir-iiini, n doing, r(a'c«<i, a deed. Smie of
the jmssives which terminate in kiit and iiii'i have their nouns formed from them, — os
oft//, to seize, pass. (V/«/;V(, whence f)/>iikiii<i, xrv/Mw; tiinii,U'i bury, \msii, tiiniiiiiia, —
laniimni)ti, burial, sepulchre. 7?;, to kill, has irregularly tniijtt, slaughter. Tlie active
sullix, iinii, may be separated from the verb by an adverb, — as kiti-iikiioii-aii<i, a seeing
again, or a itMlisoovery ; this particle may also receive the passive sullix in, thus giving
it a signilicatiiiii like that expressed by the English lirinn with the |mst |iarticiple, — thus,
U kite-iiiin signilies the knowing, — le kite-iiii<(-iii, tlie In-iiig known ; tr r<irr-kimi-iii)ti is
the ill-lreatiug, or ill-treatment which one inllicts ; tc ruve-kiHo-uga-iii is the lieing ilU
treated, or ill-treatment which one endures.
In Mangarevan, tlie two sutfixes are >tn and rnttii ; as nuiteijti, death, nuite-raita, tlie
act of ilying; mtjrpii, bed, niDc-rn^i, tlic act of sleeping.
In Tahitian, the stilfixes are 11 (fiir g<i) and rini (for riii)<i); as fdnnna, offspring,
/amiH-nui, birth ; hojien, end, hojie-riui, completion, ending; tiihiiii, portion. Iiihn-rnn,
apportionment. Insteail of nut, litui (for hiiijfi) is sometimes found, — as tniluui (tnni-
lut^t, N. '/..). lamentation, ftloluut, crying. The |>assive particle may lie affixed, as in
Karotongan ; as te vnhavdha-riia-hia, the Ixjing abused ; tc nrnlai-rnii-hiti, the lieing led.
In Hawaiian, the jiarticles are «« (for ifii) and nun (liird/j/i); as (oenn, remainder,
toe-ana, a remaining; uUina, burthen, iita-ann, a conveying. The former, however, is
U8«>d only in certain words, while the latter is universal ; it may Is; separated from the
verb by an adverb, — os Ui oiitoii Ininn-mnilni-nna, your well-doing, or your gfusl dee«U.
Ana is used also like tlie present participle in Knglish, to form a kind of present tense, —
as e lam nnn an, I am taking; it follows the sign of the passive, — as laitc-in-nna. being
taken. Some wonls seem to show that olhi'r liirms once existed, — as tomoliann, the
west, Irom lomo, to enter, to sink into (i. e. the going down of the sun — uccnleiis);
tu/fina, a place where many things stand, — as a village, garden, &n\ (Irom tii, to stand).
At the Manpiesiis, the regular sullix nn Isvonies, in the soiilhern islands, nn, and in
the northern ka; as /f/j or /liti, to go inland, /?/f>i« and hilikn, nn inland journey ; /««,
to sleep, nioena and morka, a bed. The latter suffix, kn, freiiuenlly lakes a vowel-
sound, I or r, licforc it, for euphony, as to)/, to arrive, Uiuika, an arrival. M. Uurcia
POLYNESIAN GRAMMAR.
976
gives also tilt nnd Ihm, an roriiinlivfs, but no cxampU-s of llieir use. lie mcniiuns ulso
th«! pnrticle ami, an licinj; ummI to dHtiiiKuish the pri^'iil luiisc, but it is uncerlniD
whether wc are to consider it a noniiniil suffix (from aijit), or a locative pnrticle.
DIRECTIVE PARTICLES.
I) 58. Tlie verbal directives are words which are postfixed to
verbs, to signify the direction in which the action is supposed to
proceed, — either with respect to its place of origin, or to the place of
the speaker.
Thepe parlii-les are most accurately distin);uished in tlie Tongan. They are five in
numlier, nuii, lUu, aijr, hake, and hifo. Mai signifies motion or action towards the
speaker, — atii, motion towards the (ktsoii addressed, — atje, towards a third |K^rson,—
luike, u|)wards, and hifo, downwards ; tula mat kitUe an, tell nic ; ten Uda tUu kialc koe,
I will tell you ; tola aijc kiatc ia, tell him ; alii hake, go up ; alii hifo, come down.
Th<! Snmoan has also tive particles, but employs th(Mn somewhat dillerently from the
Tongan. Mai indicates motion or action towards the s|)enker,— «/«, from ihc s|K;aker,
— ane, motion aside, — «'c and ijh, upwards and downwards ; examples of uiie are, «/«
atie e lau ane i ai, go and tell him ; iVr jxijxii aiic i tatoii le tujatafa o lona ofu, that
they might touch the border of his garment.
In New Zealand, then; a.-e but four |>articlcs, nuii, atu, ake, and iJh, — atie not being
found. These four are used as in the Samoan.
In Rarotongan, the din-clives are mni, atu, ake, and w. Ake, besides its meaning of
upwards, seems also to take the place of ane in Samoan ; at least, it is used in many
cases where the former meaning will not apply j as riri ake ra totia pii iaia, his master
was angry with him ; kite ake ra aiti i te reira, he knew that. The directives are
used with great frec|Uency in this and the following diidects, and in many oases, to ap-
pearance, arbitrarily, where no motion or direction of the net can well bi- uiiderstisid.
In Mangarevan, the particles are the same as in Rarotongan ; ake, besides its ordi-
nary meaning, is used to signify that an act is now in progress towards completion, — as
c moro ake ana, it is drying ; e rat ake ana, it is becoming large. They also say,
nora koe ake tiei, whence come you f
In Tahitian, Hawaiian, and Nukuhivan, the directives arc mai, atu, ae, and iho; ae
signifies direction either upwards or aside, according to the context.
LOCATIVE PARTICLES.
\ 59. While the last-mentioned particles show the direction in
which the action is supposed to move, there is another class which
indicate the locality or vicinity in which it is considered to take
place, — whether near the speaker, or at a distance. Their use, how-
ever, is not always clearly defined, and it is generally impossible to
render them into English. Some of the dialects employ them much
more frequently than others.
976
1' H I I, O L O O Y.
In Snnionn, vri (hrrr), w« (lluTi"), nn* in common iiw,— as iiii fiii iitii nri mte milou,
I snj unto yim ; Jninitii i on sim mi, Im'IiuIiI lliy disfiplrs ; Ir ilrmniii i o onion iitalti e
tiili iiii, Ific ili'vils H'lioni your cliililrrn ciist out. A'o, it would scrm, gcnrmlly di'miloa
a imiiit near tlir |MTson N|>ok('M to. Iai is Homi'linics iiM'd iillcr nil iiii|xTiitivc, a* in
New /cnlnnd ; .Mr. Ilrnlh, liowcvrr, coiisidors it n coiitrnclion of tlio rnipliiitic ndvi'rb
luvti, — lis Inn mini In in, just j;o slriiinlil liirwiird !
In tlic Tollman, I lind no |>arti<'l('H i'in|il<iyrd imriscly in this nianncr. It dillera in
llii.>< n's|xvl, as in many ollirrs, iVum its .sisiir diali'cts.
In .\i-w Zi'ulaiid, mi (lirrc) and niin (ilicri') arc llw particli's most fnH|Ucntly used,^
as c mm ntii nri nlniii kin konliiii, I ."ay unto you ; nrii nun rniiii in in, llipy tiillowcd
him. Un is used alUr the iiupcnitivc, and in snme iiistanct'S niler other moods, when a
siipiiosiiion is iiilcndcd ; it may also have some roferpnce lo place at a little distance
from llio s|K.'akor; nrii nini rn in linn, liillow me! kin rile knloii no iiuo,\\\\ nil be
Ailtillcd ; knn mini rn kniitiiii, yr liavc lii'ard.
In Uarotoiij^an, the i..c/.?:"v particles are mi, rn, tin, anil iimi. Xri and rn am Imth
in frecpH'iit use, the liirmer signil'yiii}! Iirrr, and the latter there ; and as an action which
is present in place i.s usually so in lime, and as one which is distant is m(ir«! likely lo
be p.Tt, Ihest! two have come to be also connected with tens<\ — the former lieing used
with the pn'scnt, and the latter generally, though not always, with the past [v. § 5a],
i\« (yonder) as signifying a greater distance in .spac<^ than rn, signilies also a greater
distance in time ; te tnnt.in mi nii, I say (here) ; le tnntiin rn nn, I was .saying (then') ;
i liiiiliin nn mi, I .said (yonder). This dislinclioii, however, is not always maintained
with strictness, Rn is used freipienlly as an emphalic word, without reference to place
or time, and may Ik? translated liiit, indi'cd, only ; le lunliin iitii nri ru nn kin koiiloii,
but I sny unto you. Ann is sometimes used, though it is diilicult tu sny with what pre-
cise ineiining ; knn riro iiini iinn n Klin, Klias has come ; kn momono nnn i tnan koke,
put up thy sword.
In Mangarevan, nri, urn, nn, and nnn arc" the locative particles. Nri, nrn, and nn,
seem lo 1h' used much as nri, rn, and nn, in Uarotougan. Am, according to the vcwa-
bulary, iiidi>'ates distance Ih>||i of place and lime. Ann is given with several meanings :
(l)ns a particle of present tinn-, — as r pure nnn ^w, thou prnyest ; ('i) as meaning
peril I ps ; — mikn nnn rn, — nn Irlnijiiln ki' nnn rn, it is |H-rlinps mine, — |M'rliaps the other
man's; and (M) as used in answering a (|uestion, as e nliijn tni Ir Unnj/ekn, is Kua|H:ka
a reel'(lireaker of the sea) ? r knnltni nnn in, [no;] it is a |H>int of land.
The Taliitian uses nri, rn, anil nn, precisely as the Uarotougan.
In Hawaiian, nei indicates present place and time ; In, a distance in place, and some-
times, though not always, in time.
In .Nukuhivan, nei and nn are u.sed as nei and In in Hawaiian.
It will Ik- SL'cn that the use of nri ri'inaius nearly or quite the same in all, while na,
in (rn), nnn, and nrn are somewhat variously usi-d in the dilferent dialects, though, in
general, they may all be considered corii'liitives of nri.
HKLATIVK I'ARTICLK.
^ 60. Tliis name has been given to a particle which in many
cases supplies the place of the relative pronouns in English, though
>
I' (> I. Y N K 8 I A N n R A M M A n.
277
frequently it cannot well be translated. It usually refers to some
word in the first part of tlie sentence, expressive of time, place, cause,
means, manner, &c. In most of the dialects this particle is at, — in
Uarnton^ran ei.
Jii<l<;in); from iIk- Sniiionn and Tongnti, tlie prf)|HT iii<>iitiin){ ofni is titerr, ntnl in those
Innnunm-Ji it fr<M|iiPntly 1ms prciKisilioris U'loir it. It tlit'ri iiiiswcrs very well to the
i'ji<;lisli rx|in'8.sic>ns " iIhti'IVoiii," " llicrctil"," " tlii'ri'iii," used ("(ir"!!!' il," " of them,"
" of liiin," " fniin il," " in il," &c. It nmy iilso Ik- coniiinrcd willi llii; Krciicli y. O h
till c I lit II oiitoii mi, lit. Ilir pliirc is tlii'rc tliy wrallli, i. i-. tlm pliK'c wlicri'in lliy wrnllli
is ; Irliisi mi i ui I'lhiii i/iiiin, llid one wlicn'unld were fivc! tiilenis, i, c. ho who hnd five
talents ; Jiii iilii i ui, sny unto him or them, or say thereunto.
In Tongan, iii evidently signifies tlirre, n» lifii iir liikii ki ui, and he placed there ; but
it is freipienlly used ns a relative, — as o lin iitii niiii /ir Ixilii okii ke In ui, and look away
from the pinec thou slandest there (when; thou slandesi); iir i/ii/ii mm iiku iiio/iDiniio
III, the things ye listen ther«;to (for, the things which ye liear) ; kiiluii ia e fd-Mic at,
who is he wheri'hy it can U; said (tcir, who is it lliat can say).
In New /enhind, iiu jxi i niriiju ui, Iho towns wherein was done ; tc nuitr e niiii ui
koiitoii, the death which ye n-ceive ; i iiiriijuliii kiitoutiii tciiri kiii rile ui, and all this
was done thai might Ix' lidlilled Ihercliy, <Vc.
In Uaroloiigaii, Ir iiirii i riivii ri le tuijiitu, the things whereby Ibe man is defiled ; e
iiere iilii ru km- ki It: juif iiito, r liliii iitii ri, but go thou to the shore of the lake, i.nd
throw therein.
In the .Mangarevan, the missionaries have perhaps mistaken Ibe ofiice of this particle.
In tlie vo<-abulary ui is said to lie used alter u verb (having r bclbre it) as a future particle,
and at the end of a phrase as interrognlive. No examples are given.
In I'aumoliiaii, kurui kukiirnri luiiu r knrn ui, by and by, to-day, we two will then
fight : here iii refers to the adverl)S of lime, kiiria kiikiiriici, but il is easy to sec how it
might bi- mistaken, as in .Maiigan'van, for a I'uUire particle. I'jili'i liiii uiirure. r irii
viui ui kur kiuku, what is thy disire for which thou art hostile to me .' — here ui rell-rs to
vururr, but il might readily Ik; taken for an interrogative.
In Tahitian, Hawaiian, and Xukubivnn, its use; is the same as in the examples already
given; il does not, however, take a pn'|x)silion iK'liire it, as in SanuMii and Tongan. In
most of Ibe diaU-ols, when this particle follows a word terminating in ", it freijuently
coalesces with il ; as, Ir tuiiulii iiinliitiiiiu i hiiuiiiu^i r le iiliiii. Haw., the first man who
was made by GikI : here liiiuiiiu is the passive of liiinii, to make, and the '/ (for ui)
relers to lunulu, and supplies the place of the ndative trho.
A » V V. It II S.
J 61. It should be observed, however, that any adjective may
become an adverb, by being used after the verb. The same words
mean good and well, — bad and badly, — weak and feebly, &,c. Cer-
tain classes of adverbs, however, deserve particular notice.
70
279
P II I I, O L O O V.
J 62. In Samoaii and Tonj»an the causative particIeyrtAo orya'o is
frequently used to form adverbs.
Snmoiin,— ^«V/i;('A'4/, with ono accord ,• fii'd-vavmi, without end (vnvaii is (hr Imoit,
nneifiit).
'l"<iii'.;nn,— /((/i-aAwX/, Imcliwards (kt-viki, n (.Tul)) ; fitkiitoii, liriivcly (toil, bruve, a
wnrri(ir).
This iisiigi' is less romiiioii in the olhor dialrets, liiit is not t'lilircly unknown.
When prclixfil to namrs ol' countries, this pnrlicle, in these two dinlects, ineiins — iiftor
the llishion ol', — iis, Jli'a-l^njn, fuka-Fili, Tongn-fashion, Feejoe-fashion, (d Id mode tic
Thiigd.)
In Mnn^nrevnn, n is used in llic snme way ; ns, rac a Ma ijiirevii ., to jump as in iManga-
reva ; also with conunon nouns, — as, tin- n juilii, to move like a ship.
^ 03. The ncEratives vary much in tlie different dialects, and have
several peculiarities deserving of attention.
In I'akaafo, se (or he) wu.s used for not, — as, e si ki nuitoit Hon, we do not know ; c ae
III 111 mil, not any cocoa-nuts. Ai-ii/n, Uii-iilii, ktii-tiUi, wcro all used for no ; the (ila
is prohably an expletive.
In Sninoan, /'■ is the nefjative particle used Ixith with verbs and adjectives, — as, Vo« tc
le siio, ye shall not enter; /<■ sii/d, nut jiuilty, guiltless; with ni, it becomes />■ iii, not,
none, — e /iiii sr tiin<itii,ihvre is not a single man. E Ic iii is the coninion e.\i)re8sion
lor no, in answer to a ijuestion.
In Tongan, ikni is the general word for no and not ; fni is used before nouns in the
sense of the English suflix less, — as, Uii-dhi, houseless, — tiii-hiilii, sinless. Titki means,
not yet.
In New Zealand, thi^ words fir not are korr, hon, kiliiii, arui te. Kmr is commonly
used ill the present and future, preceded by c ; Itniv has generally kii l)efore it, and is used
for the ordinary negative, no ! or, it is not ! Kiluii is only used with the preterite. Te
is used with any tense, and is prefixed to adjectives, imrticiples, &c., — as, li.nidiiidc, not
hurt ; te-alui, not able. Korr is also used in the sense of the linglish less, or without, —
as, /«/;V(./,wc, sinless, — niiid-kuir, w'lthuul |irii|M.'rty, poor. Eliiirn signilies, it is not;
kid nil, not yet.
In Uaroldiiuan, the negatives are knir and kiire ; the liiriner is usuallv liuind in the
|Mist and present, f )llowcd by the preterite particle i ; the latter in the present and future.
Korv is also poslfixod to verbs in the sense of the English nn-, and to nouns in the sensi'
of less, — ns, ori'i-korc-id, iinwaslicd, fnim orei, to wash ; iirn-korc, sinless.
In Mungamvaii, korc is the usual ncLmtive, and is added to nouns as in \ew Zealand
and Knrolungaii, — as, jmre-koir, wilhimt a hat. '1\- is used as in \ew Zealand, — as.
tr-nnniii, nut powerful, — li-innlii, not bniken.
The Tahitian has many negatives, and distinguishes them into classes according to the
lime or tense with which they are connected ; unrc, iiiiiui, dinii, nijxi, ititd, are used only
with the past ; e crc, c orr, e rte, are used w ith the present ; and r ore, ciiiiii, ri/in, viln,
with the future. The dillen'iiee between these various negatives is not very clear, except
that dijMi seems to include un iileu of doubt or contingency, — us, " [lerhaps not." Orr
ji^t, V* ^
POLYNESIAN <J R A M M A H.
279
is used nfter nmins nnil vorbK liko kore. in Kiirutoiignii, — us, hnni-ore, guiltlc!i!i, — horoi-
ore-hill, uiiwnslicd.
In llnwiiiinn, iiiJe iind iile ; Iho forninr is the (^cnoml nfytilivoj iImj IntliT is llin HUtl'ix,
and may bo nddrd Ici nliixr' nny adjective, coniiiion noun, or verb in this InngiiaK''.
The Nnkuliivan, besides iikue (or u'lie) and /.'*■, bas also uiimn, no, used as a strong
negation.
i 04. A certain class of adverbs, expressing the relations of place,
are treated as nouns, (except that thoy do not take the article,) and
have a preposition both before and after them ; they then correspond
in meaning with tlio Fitiglish prepositions, above, below, before,
beiiind, within, without, &c.
Samoan : — i Moiiii o k /olfMi, within the field (in the midst of) ; t liiijti o le sami, upon
the sen.
Toiigan : — i UUo i he aUi, below the firmament ; * iJinja i lir <Un, above the firmament.
New Zealand: — t wiwgii/iiii o >ju tcttrc, between the houses ; i iiiiia i /r jxt, Ix^forc the
town.
In Itanittingan, those of thes4< adverbs which end in it liave n sullixrd lo them, and
take l)esides another |)re|K)sili()n, — as, ki riit/ii (adv.) ulxjve, on high, — ki niijiio i Iv arc,
upt)ii the house ; ki mini, in front, — ki miiiio iu Jrsii, before Jesus.
In Tahitian, toi frequently precedes them, — as, tei mln i li' tiiri; within the houso. In
Hawaiian, «/(/, ns iiinliit't o Ir Ini/t; within the bouse. This i)iii is also employed in
Nukuhivan, as well as {'. In this dialect the adverb is liillowed by /li or /ir, as inn una
hi iiiiDiiu, upon the U'd ; i miu hi fur, over the house ; i otii hi hiiv (( '), within the cala-
bash ; i i)to he iiiii ((J), in heaven.
\ (>5. Nearly all the intorroirative adverbs are formed from fea,
which seems to mean properly which. [\. \ 42.]
With the pre|)ositions, /('(I refers to place, — as, i fm, Sam., where ! (i. e. at which
place ?), — Hiui Jhii, whence \ &c. Willi jie, like, it relers to nianner, — as, ]Kfiii,fiiiijH/iii.
like what, — i. e. how ? — the answer to which is, jieiiri, j)rnii, jnhi, like this, like that, i. e.
thus, so. With the signs of the tenses Jin bas reference to lime, as, n/cu, when ! (fut.),
vtifni, when \ (post.) These, or similar words, are liiund in all the dialects. In Tongan.
fen bi'coines /(• ; in Kinoloiigan and .Mangnrevan, en ; and in the other dialects, hcu ; Jin,
however, is sometimes used in Tahitian and Nukuhivan.
ij 06. All the dialects (except perhaps the Toncjan) have particles,
whose office is to give an interrogative meaning to the sentence, like
the ue and rtum of the Latin.
In Sanioan, this particle is en, — as, /la 'c i/ati. en, dost thou know ? 'o ni ea te linjntit,
wlio is the man ?
The New Zealand dialect bas commonly in/iei or ravei ; the Uarotongan, aiiin ; the
Mangua-van, ai (!); the Tahitian and Hawaiian, unci; and the Nukuhivan, ienei.
280
P H 1 L O L O (i Y.
p R K r () H I T I u N a
I) r>7. Most of the prepositions have been nlrcndy given in the
remarks on the declension of nouns. The following list contains
nearly all which are found in the several dialects.
SiiniiHin : a, of; r, liy ; V/, in, nt ; t, in, liy ; '/, lo, into; ma, with, for, on acrount of;
mill, iVoiil (|iliicr) ; //<//, tVcini ; ii, of.
Ton^nn : n, iif ; iiki, with (inst.), by moans of; r, hy ; i, in, at, hy ; ki, lo, into ; mit,
for ; mri, from ; mo, wiili ; o, of.
Now Xoiiliiiul : II, r, ki, i, o, us in Tongnn ; kri, at, with, in ; tini, mo, for ; »<>ii, I'rom ;
we, with ; mi, no, of, from, by.
Ill linrotongan : ii, r, ki, i, o, m above ; ri, at, in ; tri, in ; kio, with, c/ie: ; mii, with ;
ytui, from ; mi, no, of, for.
In Manfinrrvnn, bcsiilos the first livo of the Karotongan, rki, with, by means of; in,
with, rlir:- ; mil, for, froiii ; »ii\ with ; mo, of, liir, from ; nil, no, of, from.
In 'riihilinn the sanK" ns in llnroton^itn, oxcopt '* tor ki, mai for met, ond 'lo for kio.
In flawniian, a, e, i, 'i, », as in Sninonn ; 'io, to, with ; mti, ut, in, — by, by means of;
»i((i, from ; mr, with ; im, no, of, for.
In NukuhiviiM, (/, r, ki (or V), i, ", as in the (iireguing ; 'io, to, with ; mn, at, in ; niei,
from ; mr, with ; nn, mi, of, for.
i i
CO.N J r X» T I O.N s.
4 68. The conditional conjunctions if, that, le.st, &c., have already
been mentioned in treating of the verb. As for the rest, the Poly-
nesian makes but sparing use of them. It seems, however, to have
had originally two conjunctions signifyiiiff "«'A — the one uniting
nouns and the other verbs ; the former was probably ma, and related
to the preposition iril/i ; the latter was a vowel.
In .*<iunonii, n is nm/ iiiid or, but only with vitIjs ; mn, iril/i, means also ('/i(/,.an(l is
iisod with nouns, adjoolivos, nnd nuincrals.
Ill 'ronyiin, o is used as in Samoaii ; mo is the other connective, e.xcept with the
numerals, with whii'h mu is used. Ufa, which |iro|ierly means also, is oltcn used to con-
nect sentences and claii.ses of a sentence.
Ill .New Zealand, (( is used for coiiiioctinf; verbs and clauses of u sentence, »«« with
niiiiurals, and /«r (h/V/i) with nouns. The latter, liowever, is mrely used ; to expri^ss
" the fathi'r and the mother," they say, " the lather the mother ;" " the house of I'cter
and John," is " the house of I'cter of .lohii."
In Rarotonpin, e is the {jenomi connective with l)0th nouns and verbs ; tna, honevcr,
is used with the numerals, and sometiiiios with nouns, — as,/e viinc ma U Uinutriki, the
woniiin and [or with] the children.
In .Mangarevan, me signifies both iciUi and iiiidi e seems to be used as the general
connective.
!1
P O I. Y N K H I A N O R A M M A R.
381
In Tnhitiiin, r ia lh<' (P'IictiiI wiinl ti>r nnil ; mn In only iimciI with llii- niinirrnlii.
In llaMiiiiiin, n I'dnni-i'ln ktIw, </ nir iiiiiinH, ///" niiiiirriiU, ninl iHTiisicumlly pnipiT
nnnii'a. Mr |ir<i|ii'rly "innilii's inl/i.
In Nukiiliivnn, >- t'oniiccU vitIm, uml mr (wild) nuiins t »/>/ in iihi'iI with tlir Miiincrnis,
I N T K l{ J KCT I (t N a.
I) fi9. The interjections are not very nuniprouH. Tlio only one
which merits notice is aiir, wliich seems to he pociihikr to the Poly-
nesian, and is lound in nil the diiilucts. It is used to express ^riet' in
all its shades, from a slight CeeliiiR of re^ret or sympathy, to the
wildest and most clamorous lainenlulion. It is constantly heard in
their wailing for the dead ; and as each vowel can be drawn out to a
great length, with a variety of tones and moilulations, it has often a
singularly dismal and even painful elfect upon the listeners The
word is also used l)oth as a noun, nicaning nonoH; rigrit, si/nipathij,
ami as a verb, siguitying to yiienfor, to luimiit.
S \ S T A X.
', 70. Most of the rules of construction have been anticipated in
the jircceding sections. From the lack of inllcctions in these dialects,
these rules are necessarily few and sim|)le. The following are the
most important which ren»ain to be noticeil.
V 71 Almo.st all the words in these idioms, which are the names
of things, (|ualities, or actions, may be used at pleasure, either as
nouns, adjectives, verbs, or adverbs, their acceptation being deter-
mined by the context and the accom|)auyiug particles.
In Snniimn, »<' Imvc, (or exnnipl'.', f'li/iif'ii/ii, n fonthcr, — iin fiiliifiiltt lin iiiiihk, llinl
liirrt is IriilhiTi'd : mimii, nm*m\\U<,—i<" iiiiniii /<l(i/e /ici. Ill i.'i lionsc is inlcsloil Willi
iniisiiiiitiK s (lit. is inusiniilo<Hl) ; so /«/, ani, — iiu linn, is iinlnl; jxi, iiii;lil, — ///( jmnni, it
iji niiihliil, — liir iiii:hl is ciime. Alii viivr, go (|iiii-kly ; mi vnir mni Ir tniin, let war
h.xslon liiilnT. lliiliir, lo work; liiijala iiii/iic, n laboriny innii. 'I\iiiiit(t injiiS(il<i,n
sinliil Minn : liiloii c iiniisii/<i, llicy w hn sin ; ii oiiloii iiijiisiila, your sins.
In Toiiiian, i finli, tvrniiiu ; lieu ilinfi ni, and il was cvt'iiiiij;. jMniiiiin, far oil'; liiiiiin
iii'iiiiiii), dislaiil •ounlry ; l,r iiiiiiiinii in, that il may bi" liir. Jjifii kilir, anotlior ri'liyion ;
til until Int'i, a ndijiinns man: tin Intii, I will pray.
In -New X(-alaiul, rnknn, a Irco, — kn inkniitin, lit. it is tn-i'd, i. c, it lias l)eoonii' a
irco. Tnkiriia, douMi', — tnktriialiii, doiildnl.
In Taliiiian, ninhnnn, day, — "(( niiiliiiniiliin, il is daycd, i. p. day lias appean'd.
In llw Hawaiian, an <'xain|"li' givfii liy Mr. Andrews shows in n strong light this
71
9SS
I'll
, <) !.(>«• V.
IH'i'iiliiirily <>r III)' I'lilyiii'iainii Ihii^jik-h : il' n ix'rxiii i'< n'Inliiiu tliiil lir liiicl cm mhih' iiorn-
mull, lUiiwtil liiiifH'll 111 liiiii' ildiM' nil ncl, he vtiiulil miy "oiinii ti/ii hi Inn mi," " I j.i'ij
III him," liir " I tiilil liiiii tluil il wiix I ;" llx' |iri>li<iiiii oiruii in iim'iI dh a vrrli, wliirli in
ili'iiolnl liy tli<- ilinrllvi' iinil jiirnlivi' imnirlm iilii In, \vtt' IrniiNlnli'il " lo liiiii ;" /ii«
iiHiiii't |iri>|»Tly '//*", liiil i« ciniiliiynl iiOi'ii im ii mrn' wnrd ol' iilliriniilion, liki! imlitil,
VI I ill/. AiiiillH'r iXMiiiiili' \* "iiiiiii III mill /miHi/i ii n niilnii '" '• »||>i liiix ii NlrawJiiil
anioii^ you '" ulnri' im/i^ili-ir, <>!rii» liiil, i" iimiI im ii mirl ol' i'iiiii|hiiiiii| \rrljiil iiiljLt:-
tnc, — who in iht' tliiiu'-hiiliitt ihtmhi aiiioii^ you t
V 7'-!. WluMi tlii< iiiuniimtive to \\ vcrli in a pronoiiii, it rr*M|U(Mitly
pri'i't'ili's tilt* vi-rli; wlicii it is u iimiii, il more foiiiiiiDiily CoIIowh. In
the luttor case tlie uhiiuI tmlor of tlio wonU is — lirNt, \\w w\i,\\ of tlie
tciiMc, or uHirinativf purtu-jo (or, in ils plucc, soini' coiijunctii/ii, or
coniuTtiiiti ailvorl), or inti-rro^jativo) ; — secondly, tlio vorb; — tlunlly,
thi- qualilviiiK ailverb; — fourthly, tliu verlml tliroctive; — fifthly, the
locative parlifii' ; — sixthly, th»> rclalivo p.irliflo; — w^vonthly, the
iioiniiiativt', with or wilhmit tlif artu-li; holore it. It hIiouIiI be
olwerved, however, that the relative and lociitivo pnrticleH nro rarely
used loi»etlu'r.
71 //(//;" riMi iiiiii lilt II iitiiii, Maw., (ioil is very 'iii(iry ; mi Jul ntii in /limi Inijutti,
•Snni., 'I (i-rt.iiii inaii Haid lh<T<'ii|ioii,
'/ T-i. By a |ieculi.ir construction, these laiifjua^es freipiently use
an obiiipie case in the |)lace of the nominative.
^uiiuxui : /:•' '( liiloii r fast iili tnir />/, iiiiil tlicy >liall kill hiiii (tlii'irM il Nliall Im' Io kill
him). A' 1 llrrnlii mi ia limfi Jiniiir, IIitinI hiitl wi'/cij .Idlm (llcriHrx it wn< to wize
.lohii). /v iiioiii II Ion II fill iilii lilt nil iiili' iiiiliiii, virily I say niiln you, — hero all llml
lolliiHa Inn i" I'liiisiiU'it'd as n iiiiiiii with ulili'li Ion a^'n rs, ami iIk' s<'iilriii'<' iiii^iht Ik
n'liilrpil " truf is my saying' I" .M'ii ;" lli'' ri|«'lilicii' cpl'iiic nn, fur I, in llic latlir [part ol'
lilt' iHnilciir't' is iiirri'ly li>i' ('in|iliaKis, anil iiiijjhl lie ilis|i<Misi'il with,
Tonjjan ; ko ckn Inln moont ntn kUili kiiiiiinlolii, verily I say unto you (my Inic
s|¥Mkiiiir unto you is, \r,) In this lan^uajic, however, the ronslruction iloes not pre-
vail 111 the same cxtenl as in the others.
New Zealanil ; iiinnn iiim nnnlirni r mm, he shall tell his anj^els (of him it shall be
to tell Ills aiifjels). Mnn r kornpiko, lliou shall wors|ii|i (lit. thine to worsliip). Mnmi
iiltiin I iiiikiiorii, he healed iheiii. Ilinhii In koiilon r In miii)irr, why stand y idle f
(when'liire is your standing idle '.) A i n, rnlon c luifte ntn nun, and when they went
(and at their goiii);).
Knpilon;.'an : int rntnii r Uijui iiiiii kui limiiniielii, and they shall call him limanucl
(theirs It shall he to call, iVe.) A'" Iniin e Uijm nin ko Jisn, thou shall call him
lesus (iliine to nail him Jesus). /:,' mum i Inkii mm itikn, and lliou gavcst mo (thine it
wa.s to give me).
Tahitinn : nn Ilrrmlii hut i injui' in .loniir, for Herod hod bound John; niimi r Innnmu
I Inn net liui/n, he shall t'e 'd my pe<i|ile.
Hawaiian : n« te afiiu „ uliJui imu i to U ao, God so loved the world \(totcuo is here
POL YNKHI AN «1H A M M A H
'ib'd
nil rlli|iliciil liiriii iiri'X|in'Mi>i<>ii Icir tr milt u Ir «», nr ti> If no mm, tin' iliiii^i iil'ih)! worltl
|v, ^ 71 I ; lliJH iiiiilianioii iiCii wiiril wlii<'li will In' iiiiiliTntiHKl IVdiii III iittriii'linii i> mit
uiiciiiniiiiiii ill iIh'm' Iiiii^iiiiuix). Ax an iiiniaiiii' nl' -iinkiii^ n'Miiililiiiini in liiniix ln'twti'ii
Iwii wiili'ly W'lHiriiti'il iliiili'i'N, wc tinil lliiil in Siinimiii, ■■ ttliiil I Irll you," la IriiiiHlnliil
«(('» mill I Im iilii in'r niihiii (lil. my |||IIIK>I In lill In yon), iinil in I liiwiiiiiin, " mIiiiI I
hnvi' I'liininiiiiiliiil yoii, ' i* '"'" ""« i kniiuliii nln in itiilmi (my lliiiiKH l<i Imvi' I'oiii-
niiiiiili'il yiiii).
Nukiiliiviili : mi I'' iiiKin < nliii i Ir ijm, tlic |iii; pkiIh in \\w rnrlh ; r kni Uiiiii, I I'lit.
\ 74. In nioMt nt the diiiloctH tliniltiiil niitl pliinil pronniiiix iicrturm
the nffirc of coiijiinc'tioiis in coiiiiectiiif; proper nuin(!8 uiid wiirilx nji;-
llityin^ piTwiiiN.
In Niiw /i-iiluiiil, Piurha rnini Kit Ihiiii, I'lmns niul Zaro (lit. Pliarc* tlwy Iwo Zora).
Itiirii fiiliiii kii iiiiii Ifiiiii, .luiliili iinil liit liri'llin'ii.
In KnrolDn^iiii, Ahar niiin kn I'Jni, Mum's anil Kliaii.
In Mnii);an'Viiii, I'rhrn iniiu kn I'mi/n, I'rliT ami I'aiil.
Ill lliiwiiiiaii, Ail'imii liiiia n I'.vn, Aclain ami lln'.
ir yiMi uliMTVP to a native, " I am ({Miii({ to tin- town," inNlonil of naying, " I will ^c
Willi yi>n," ho inertly wiys "tuiin," " wi; Iwo," i. e. we will jjo togetlHT.
Til K Kd It M .\T KIN <• V Willi lis.
i) 75. Words lire vi^ry (roquriitly formed l»y tlic du|iliciitioii ol
8in^;U' words. No mMicral rule, however, can lie ^iveii on tliis ]ioint
There arc iiiaiiy wonls whieli are never douliled,— otiiers which are
never found except in this form. Sometimes a noun by hein^ doubled
bceomes an adjective; but frequently tlie duplication, whether of
nouns, verbs, or adjectives, j^ives oidy au iiiteiisitive or fremientalive
force [v. H 27. 1(1]. iSonietimes the doubled word has an en'irely
diircretit meaning from the single.
Kxampleii of lhc«e eases an-, — /n/n, Tniinn, oil, — lnliJnln, oily ; jxtkn, Rar., »lolH, —
pokii/xikii, .ftony, I'ilnjiln, Sam., strong {Jil", — no meaning). Lugo, Sum., a lly, —
liiffiiltitji), to lean ii|)on, i/»rf«, Toiig,, wiw, litiliibiilii, romiil.
i) 76. A sort of adjective with a pa.ssive sense is formed from many
verbs by prefixing ma.
Samoan: sue, tn tear, — miimr, torn; sun, to H|)ill, — niiisiia, spilt; lii/n, to lixise,
nuitiil'i, loosed, iriM'd.
Toii(;an : _/"/(!, to strip, |Hfl, — miiji/l,i, strip|X'd oil' (as hark) ; ye/i, to break, innt'ctt,
lirokeii.
New Zealand: riiji, to |H)ur ont, spill, — iiinrhji, spilt; rrre, to go, depart, nuirerr.
<;o:,e.
liarotoiigan : veli; to lfHis<', to o|)en, — iiiiivitr, o|Hi|ied ; tjnm, to hide, maijnro, hidden.
Taliitiuii: lu'ii, to o|)cii, — mulaii, ofieiied ; tarn, to loose, iiuitarii, luosetl.
291
I'H I LO I, OCi V.
niiwniiiin ; h>l<i,\o uprrml, — miiluJti , »\\tcski\ out, oxtondod ; iiini, to spill, — nMiiini,
nil ovrrtlowliii;.
In Sanionii this pnrtlcio is usod very frcipirnlly, in llnwniinn rnrrly. In Knmtoiignn
It IS ioiiiolimcs clmniji'd to ija, iind in llnwiiiiun to /ki, — iis, ar, Knr., line, lliiw.. In tear, —
tiiiiir, Ihir. , iiiiliiii; Haw., torn. This prclix ma serves to (iinn soino nouns (or rather
ndjeetives whieli are used as nouns,) — as siini, Sam., white, — itKisiiiii, the moon (i.e. the
while ohjeet) ; /iiiiiii, a torch, to }{ive lijihl as a torch, — innlaiiui, Sam., light, hrighlnoss, —
and in Hawaiian, the miMtn.
^ 77. Tliorc are, in tlio (lid'orent dialects, various affixes which
are joined to v\Frds, .sometimes to alter their meanings, or as intcisi-
tive particles, but often with no perceptible Ibrce.
Sanioan: Inn, — a:', ill i/<i, lo twist, — ^/»«(//«, to jostle ; lai, to jiuide, direrl, — taiitdi,
to pilot or steer ; tn/n, to tell, — Iniitdln, to s|X'ak to; rrii and liiwili, \m\\\ niianiuf^ to
tempt. Tdiiliii, — as jHi and /iiiiliiij,(i, Initli nieaniiijj to strike — the latter, |)crliaps, to
strike frecpieiitly ; ttiiii, lo weep, and Iniijiiiliijfi, to lament (said ol' several) ; </*/, iia'i, Jii'i
are cK-ensionally postl'ixed to verbs, — ns lii/o, to throw, — hifiHii, to throw away ; no and
ao(i''i to tench ; no and nn/ii'i, to colled.
Tongan : /nii. — as, n/o and tniinio, to paddle. Aki, /nki, iinki, ixiki, tnki, used ns
sufli.ves, apparently conveying the idea that the act denoted hy the verb passes liom the
agent to a distance, or over a consiileraliU- extent, or lo a number of ix'ople, — as, //, to
throw,— //(M/, to throw aw,"j ; tiiln. to divide, — tdfnki, to shari' out, distribute; nko, to
teach, — nkdiinki, to preach ; ln/oiii mid tolomiki, lo throw stones, &c.
New Jienland : ]>ii, — as, iirrn, hot, — ■jmurrn, Itikewarm ; one nnd oin-jiii, sand ( jiii
as n separate word means earnestly, strongly, intently) ; piilnlii, ol'one .source or origin ;
piitiiki, till' trunk ol'a tree; pii-tnilni, a buridli' of the grass called Initiii. [This pii may
1)0 connected with thi' Tongan yi', Viti, rii ; v. ^ '.'(i.| Kii, — as, nkiri and kokiri, to
throw ; jiihii and kii/iiko, curved.
Hariilongan : Inn, — as, ninin, strong,— /id' hwao, lo strive; turn, lo help, — tnntnrny
to minister to. Pn, — as, rnlo and nitnjin, within, inside; pii.ninniin, lukewarm, from
mnniin, warm.
Ilawii"",:: : nn, (perhaps from the collective particle kmi or \iii ; v. ^ 14) signilii's, in
soaie coiMpoiinds, a t'tilU'ction, — as, nnlnitnin, a [MMiple, nation (from Iniintn, man) •
niiinin, a cluster of caiux's ; nnninliin, a class of ancient gods; but it freipieiitly has no
delinile meaning, — as. niint and nnniint, lo carry ; — iiii/ii and nninilii, to repent. O, ns
iiiilo anil Diiiilit, lo twist; jiili, lo slick, Ix' I'lose, — iipiti, to I'ontracI as in the cramp.
V'l. — as, iiiniini, giKvd, — jHiiiiniIni, t'orlimale, happy ; nni, bad, — jk)I)iii, alilicted ; pililia,
crowded I'lose, narrow, — jxipililin, distressing, dillicull.
y 78. In .some of tiie dialects the words emtij and lUflkult are
joined in a peculiar manner to ttie verb, so as lo form in pronuncia-
tion but one word.
In Sanioan, these words are «.''',<''"*>'. ""d w^/, ilillicull : they are suflixed lo the
verb and pronounced ivilli it, — as A//. wVi'i, easy to Ao, Jni-\inUi,\\i\n\ to do; sno-ijiilir,
easy to eiiier. sno-ijnlA, dillicull lo enter.
In Tongan, ii<ifun. easy, and ]inUi, hard, — as, thi-po/un, ensy to do ; fdi-iintii, hard
to do.
I' () I, V N K S I A N O R A M M A R.
285
In Unrolonjiiin, iriii' mul nnfc, — n», intr-i/nir, ciisy to do, — roir-iidld, linrd to ilo;
nkiiu-ijoif, easy lo cnlrr, — nhnCi-ii'ihi, Imrd to ciilrr.
hi Miiii){iin'viin, tin? vocnlmlary nivcs /nin/n, rcpriiiiiindcd, oorrcctod, — prnlmMy the
pasNivo ol" jkiri/, to onrrret, — and itiiniijiilii, incorri^ililc, — I. c. dilUcult to corrpt'l.
Ill tho other dialects, this toiiii stvins jiot to exist. In 'raliitian, dillinilt is laidlii, —
the latter part of whieli may |M>»sibly lie eoiineoted with i))itii.
i 70. Ill compmind words tlio Polyiiositin diU'ers fioni tlio En<»lish
in pliiciiiff tl»o ifDveriicil or iiiiulifyiiio; svurd last: iiistojid of sea-coast,
it has coast-sea ; instoad of kiiid-licarted, beart-kitid ; instead of swift-
sailinij;, sail-swift, \c.
Snmoaii : lait-n/ii, hair (lit. loliiij^e ol" the head); sili-iilii, scissors (hair-ciitters, cr
rather, head-cutters). Tiia-sivi, the back-lxnie, iiieans, therefore, not as in l'"n);lish, the
IxMie of the Imck, hut the " hack of the Ixmes" — i. e. ot' the skeleton.
Tonjia') : Miimivii-lii, lear (iillle-hnalh) ; /<'/c-/»»((X7/, pij,'-sty ; tiifiiint-tii-vmka, a
mason (lit. artisan eiitlinj; sloiie, — or a stone-cutter).
New Zealand: ni<i/<i-iiiiii, the horizon (cdjje of the heavens); tii-kaii, naked (lit.
standing merely, or without addition).
|{arotonj;aM : niitii-jui, dinir (lit. month ol"the wall); iinnjn-iini, many (f;reat bit).
.Maiigarevan : nuilc-kiii, hunj;er (wanting; foot!) ; rimii-niit, united lalKir of many
|)Oople in a work (lit. two hnndn'd hands).
Tahitiaii : tdhii-lai, .sea-coast; ]tiiji{ii-/in<in, scrilies (writers of words).
Hawaiian: /((////-(//««, landholder (lit. lord ol" land — landlonl); lutn-muiUii, kind (lit.
good-heart, or good ilisposiiion ; IhId is not I'ouiul separately with this sense in tho Ha-
waiian, hut it exists in the Samoan) ; linii-iilni, to lament, from liiiii, to cry, and iihii,
grief; iii-tnnntn, man-eater.
Nukuhivan : vai-hifi; river (running water) ; jkijiiiii-iiinn, hen-coop (enclosure of
fowls).
Most of the proper names of the isl.uidcrs are compound words, fre(|uciitly with whim-
sical sigii|t"ieations, — as, 7''(-H;</-/i-/<n» (sea-and-sky) n chief at the Navigator islands;
PoitKiii (niglit of c<iughing) formerly king of Tahiti; Tdii-i-lr-iin.iiti (sus|H'nded in the
blue heavens), name of the present king of the Sandwich islands. The grandfather of
this king had the name of Tii-liiin-tiijiii-d-piii-iii.liini-niii, which sei'ins to mean, " lh>:
sky increasing, and striking the great heaven."
I, A N (J r A a V. tl F (■ K R K M O N V.
\ 80. The Samoaiis are a remarkably ceremonious people, and very
attentive to the foritis of politeness. This peculiarity appears in their
languajre, which abounds in terms of salutation and compliment.
Besides alofa, or lalvfa, (love,) which is common to most of the Poly-
nesian islands, they have particuhir expressions according to the time
of day :
I'd iisii nidi, — is ihc morning sululation;
Ud Idind nidi, — at noon;
Ua a/d/d iiidi, — in the evening.
7V>
PHILOLOGY.
Uti mtii ! is the address to n person entering a house; and when ho tukcs leave, they say
"c alii «•/" do you go? The words expressing thankfulness, ^fM/f/ff* and fiuimanu,
arc used on receiving ony pa-sent, and usually accompanied by the motion of raising the
article to the head. A native will not do any act, or s|>cak any word which might be
considered rude or unbecoming, without first saying, vacanc ! which may be rendered
" excuse me !" or " by your leave !"
But it is in addressing their chiefs that the Samoans arc particularly careful to mani-
(l^st their res|)ect by their language. There are many terms in the conunon idiom, which
it is considered improper to employ in s|icaking to or of u |)erson of rank, and their place
is supplied by other words of the same signification, which arc never used but on such
occasions. Sometimes there are distinct words for the diflcrent grades of cliicfs, and
those who are careful to speak the language correctly will never address a high chief with
the terms appropriated to those of lower rank. Thus the salutation to a common man,
on entering a house, is, as above stated, ua mai, you have come j to a tida-fak, or house-
holder, it is ua alula mai ;
to a low chief,
to a high chief,
to the sovereign.
iia nialiu mai ;
ua susu mai ;
ua afio mai.
Afio, meaning to come or go (like «/») is u.sed also in s|)eaking of a deity ! uo maliu,
gone, is used (iir all ranks to signify tlrml. In the speaking of the canoe of nn inferior
chief, thi-y would say — ua silafia ra le van 1 is the canoe in sight? — of a high chief, it
would lie, .la Utuhi^ia ea Ic vaa f 'J}>/d and to'it both mean to sleep, the latter of a high
chief, the former for one of low rank ; — they arc also used for a parting sclutation in the
evening, — lofd ina soi/ua, sleep, that you may live I Tausami signifies to eat, applied
to a landholder, — tuumqfa to an inl'erior chief, and tautc to a superior. It is probable
that the ilitlercnt words for sickness and dreaming in the following list, also appertain to
dilVerent ranks.
arm
to come, go
son
daughter
belly
head
to bathe
wife
dream
fii(;e, eye
sick
hair
to dream ; vision
in good health
llOUSC
to come, to go ; dead
CEKEMOSIAU
COMMON.
Alio
lima
Afio; iilala
alii
Ah
tama
Alo/iifine
ajiifinc
Alo
maiidva
Ao; litiji
vlii
luuimiilu
'au'aii
Fiilcliia
avd
Fnlepo
mili
Fn/ntja
Vllltll
Fiiatiifa; yasnjase
tiiii'i
Laii-ao; UiH-la^i
liiu-iiht
LVii
mili
MiUiifitiifi
miiliio
Mim/a
fide
Miiliii
ulii ; oli
POLYNESIAN GRAMMAR.
287
CEREMONIAL.
COMMON.
Mdleifita
(da
I'idi/piiliisi
maH
U(i jmduyia
mat
ua (iMa mni
Sisita ; passive,
silcijid
mutamaUi, ilua
Ua mitlia tnai
ita 1ISH vuii
Soga
tauliia
Soisoi
ata
Siisil
stiu, idit
SoifiKi
ola
Siiafa
ijfoti
Tdiiid
Jitse oil
7}t'tiMo
sasu'c
'Jhisd
ita
Ib'u; tofd
moe
Taiisftmi
'ai
Ttiumafa
«
Tiiiite
((
TiiuUi, pass.
taultiyia
viataviata, ilai
Tulei
Uiiatfti'i
to awake
sick
evening salutation
to see
morning salutation
servant
to laugh
to come
to live
name
to kill
to disperse
anger
to sleep
to cat
to see
to speak
The dialect of Tonga has also several words of ceremony, but not so many as the
Samoan. Some of these have synonyma, whicli arc especially used in addressing the
" divine chief" Tiiitoiiga. The following list was obtained from two high chiefs of
Tonga, Tidiou TaiiUd and Tuboii LiUU;e, whom we met at the lAjejce islands. It will
be seen that several of them are the same as the corresponding terms in Samoan.
CEREMONIAL.
TUITOSOA.
COMMON.
alio
taka
ua
to awake
alo
foha
son
Joftnja
Itnji
ma/a
face
hiKifa
hiijoa
name
Ho
taitmafa
kai
to cat
mdinuta
tiika
tio
to see
mea
hacic
halt, all!
to come, go
moiii
Iclci
well, not sick
ofai
h(da
tiuite
dead
tojitatji
biUiihi
mahaki
sick
toka
lojd
moe
to sleep
III the other dialects of Polynesia there is nothing of this description. The Tahitiaii
has, indeed, some expressions which arc used with a peculiar, metaphorical meaning,
when applied to the sovereign. " His houses were called the aoriii, the clouds of licaven ;
aniia tiia, the rainbow, was the name of the canoe in which ho voyaged ; his voice was
' thunder ;' the glare of torches in his dwelling was denominated ligliliiing, &c. When
he passed from one district to another on the shoulders of his bearers, they always used
■ i
289
PHILOLOGY.
the word miilixtii, siunifvinji; to fly."* This lif^'urnlivc stylo of sjionking is not the same
with the ocrenmninl tlialcct of Snmon and Tonga, though both may Imve originnted in
the same Ceding.
It is, however, a point of interest to inquire whether there are any traces in the dialects
of 1-^stern Polynesia, fmni which we may infer that the lanj^uage of dcleren<'e was in
use pri'vious to the departure of the Tahilian and other colonists. A careful examination
shows till! existence of many indications of this sort. The word fri/'()ij<i, in Samoan,
signilics the face of a chief; in Tahitiau, it would liecome liolirxi, and this is the word by
which till- term imaj;c has hern rendered in Matt. xxii. ~0: iioiiii ti /ii>ti(xi,&!.c., — "whose
image and su|>erscription is this?" Li'a is ihc Samoim word of ceremony l<>r to i/rmm,
— a visi')ii ; in Hawaiian, it means to Ihinh, ^xtiidrr. Soisoi is to laiigli; in Hawaiian,
lioihni means jilmsal, gratifud, ji»ltiil. Soi/a, sijiiiifying the servant of n chief, is (x-r-
haps the origin of the word //mw, which in .New Zealand tneans the lower class of jieople,
and injd, which, in llarolongnn, signifies a tenant. Ttiiiiiiiijii, in Samoan, is to rat,
said of a common chief; in Tongan, it is applied to Tiiiloiiud, to whom divine honors
are rendered ; in Hawaiian, taiimnhd is a sticiijicc (i. e. the food or eating of a go<l.)
From these examples it appears that though the language of ceremony is not used as such
in the dialects derived from the Samoan (a fact which may bo readily accounted for
from the gri'at e(|ualily which would prevail among the colonists and their immediate
descendants), yet several of the words have been retained with the same or similar
meanings in the ordinary language.
CEREMONIAL NEOLOGY.
f) 91. The Tahitians, besides the metaphorical expressions already
noticed, have another and a more singular mode of displaying their
reverence towards their king, by a custom which they term te pi.
They cease to employ, in tlie common language, those words which
form a pnrt or the whole of the sovereign's name, or that of iie of his
near relatives, and invent new terms to supply their place. As all
names in Polynesian are significant, and as a chief usually has
several, it will be seen that this custom must produce a considerable
change in the language. This change, however, is only temporary,
as at tlie death of the king or chief the new word is dropped, and the
original term resumed. Vancouver observes (Voyage, vol. i. p. 135)
that at the accession of Otu, which took place between the visit of
Cook and his own, no less than forty or fifty of the most common
words, whicii occur in conversation, had been entirely changed. It
is perliaps to be regretted tliat the missionaries, in their translations,
have employed many of the new terms, which would otherwise have
had only a temporary currency, and thus made them permanent.
* Ellis*! Polynesian Researchca, vol. iii. p, 37.
POLYNESIAN GRAMMAR.
289
Some further explanations with regard to the extent and character of these alterations
will not be out of place.
1. It is not necessary that all the simple words which go to make up a compound
name should be changed. The alteration of one is esic<;mod siiflicicnt. Thus in
Po-marc, signifying " the night of coughing," only the first word,/)0, has Xven dropped,
mi being used in its place. So in Ai-nuitn (eye-eater), the name of the present (juccn,
the (ti has Ijeen altered to anw, iind the miUa retained. In 'li-arii-na-va/ta-roa (the
chief with the large mouth) rou alone has been changed to rnanro,
a. But this idteratinn affects not only the words themselves, but syllables of similar
sound in other words. Thus the name of one of the kings being Tii, not only was this
word, which means to sland, changed to tin, but in the word Jitii, star, the last syllabic,
though having no connexion, except in sound, with the word tu, underwent the some
alteration — star being nnwfctiii; I iii, to strike, liccame tiiii; and tup<ijxiii,a corpse,
tiiijHiptiu. So hn^ (iiur, having been changed to mnliti, the word aha, split, has been
altered to amiiha, and nnirihd, the name of a month, to miiridhii. When the word ai
was changed to amii, mtiraai, the name of a certain wind (in Karotongan, marayai)
Itecnme mura-amii.
3. The mode of alteration, or the manner of forming new terms, seems to be arbitrary.
In many cases, the substitutes are made by changing or dropping some letter or
letters of the original word, — as hojxii for hapiii, to carry in the arms ; etie for hono, to
mend ; (iit for tan, fit ; hio for /io, to look ; ra for am, path ; ran for varu, eight ; veu
for vera, hot, iVc. In other cases, the word substituted is one which had before a meaning
nearly related to that of the term disused, — as tia, straight, upright, is used instead of t«,
to stand ; jiae, part, division, instead oCrima, five; piti, together, has replaced ma, two,
&c. In some cases, the; meaning or origin of the new word is unknown, and it may be
n mere invention, — ;is o/'ai (or rthatii, stone; jxijir, for unj, water; ]>olie for ?nate, dead,
iSiC. Some have Iren adopted from the neighboring Paumotuan, as riii, night, from
ruki, dark ; /f«c, six, from henr ; arar, moon, from katcake.
It is evident that but fiir the rule l)y which the old terms arc revived on the death of
the person in whose name they entered, the language might, in a few centuries, have
been completely changed, not indeed in its grammar, but in its vocabulary. Of the
ten simple numerids, live are ditlerent from what they were in the time of Cook, — as :
ORIGINAL FORM.
PRF.SKNT FtlHM.
tahi
faJii
one
Tua
pili
two
tarn
torn
three
ha
viaha
f"our
nma
jxie
five
OHO
Jene
SIX
hitu
hitu
seven
ram
van
eight
ira
iva
nme
ahiiru
ahum
73
ten
ESSAY
A LEXICON OF THE POLYNESIAN LANGUAGE.
As in the precediiif^ Grammar an attempt has been made to deduce,
from a comparison of the various dialects, the general princi[)lus of the
primitive language to which they owe their origin, it has seemed
proper to complete, as far as possible, the view of that language, by
bringing together, from the 'iitlerent vocabularies, those words which,
from the fact of their existence in several dialects, may reasonably be
supposed to have formed a part of the original Polynesian idiom. It
is evident, from the n.iture of things, that such a collection caiuiol lie
complete, and that it must be liable to errors. Some words may be
found in two or three dialects, — as, for example, in those of Eastern
Polynesia, — which never formed a part of tlie primitive tongue, i)ut
have come into use since the separation of the Tahitians from the
original stock. On the other hand, each dialect has, no doubt, pre-
served some words of the parent language, which have been lost in all
the others, and which we have, therefore, no means of distinguishing
from such as are the peculiar property of the dialect. Our materials,
moreover, for such a work, though probably mt)re ample than any
that have been before collected, are yet very imperfect. When com-
plete dictionaries of all the dialects shall have been formed, no doubt
the number of words common to all, or to the great .'r number, will be
materially increased. It is believed, however, that this Lexicon con-
tains the mass of those vocables which constituted the jirimitivc wealth
of the Polynesian speech. It comprises the terms for all the most
common objects, ([ualities, anil acts, and would probably furnish a
r
292
PHI I,() LO(J V.
i
sufficient vocal)ulary for the purposes of ordinary intercourse among
a scnii-l)!irl)arous [»oople.
The plan of tlie Lexicon will be readily understootl on inspection.
Tlu^ primitive or radical form of the word (or that which is considered
to he such) is first ^iven in large type, and then the variations in form
and meaning which occur in the dilferent dialects are added, together
with the most important derivatives. Some difficulty has been found,
occasionally, in the determination and arrangement of the latter, and
it is not likely that in all cases the disposition which has been adopted
will be found to be correct. Some words may have been referred to
a common source, which are really from ililferent roots, and, in other
cases, the thread of connexion uniting apparently distinct terms may
not have been perceived. In many instances, it will be seen that the
primitive form of the word is not found in our vocabularies, but has
been ilcduced from a comparison of the variations. In such cases,
a note of interrogation is affixed, which must not be understood, in
general, as implying a doubt of the correctness of the deduced form,
but merely an uncertainty with respect to its actual existence. Thus,
for example, we have in Samoan .sfV, meaning "to lift up," and in
Tongan ftiki ; the former dialect has no k, and the latter no s ; hence
there can be no doubt that the original form of the word was siki,
v\hicli is, accordingly, given in the vocabulary. The dialect of
Fakaafo, and probably al.so that of Niua, have all the elements, and a
full vocabulary of one of them would therefore be extremely desirable,
as it would probably present us with most of the words of the Polyne-
sian language in their primitive completeness. Thus, in Samoan, saa,
and in Nukuhivan, haka, signify "to dance;" the ground-form must
therefore be saka, which is accordingly found among the words
obtained by us at Fakaafo. The brief vocabulary given by Schouten
of the language of Cocos Island [Nina-tahu), the first ever published
of any Oceanic dialect, affords us, in the word for " beads," or rather
"necklace" [casoa), the original form of the Samoan asoa, and the
Tongan kahoa. In some few ca.ses, however, the radical form is
really doubtful, tlie variations not being such as to give a clue to the
word from which they are derived. Thus holio/m, which, in the dia-
lects of New Zealand, Tahiti, and Hawaii, signifies " deep," may be
a corruption of xosoiiu, or oi fufonu, either of which would, in those
dialects, assume that Ibrm.
In some instances, words of the Vitian, Ilotuman, and Tarawan dia-
lects (all of which are partly of Polynesian origin) have been intro-
P O L Y N E H I A N L K X I C O N.
203
duced by way of illustration; but it did not entor into the plan of the
work to make any reference to other lanfjunges of the Malay family.
Had this been done, many terms which are liere given as primitives,
would have been referred to still simpler roots. Thus there is little
doubt that the words mahnlii, sick, viatnkii, fear, atul atun, god, are
derived from the Malay sakit, laknt, and tiihan. In the Lexicon,
however, the Polynesian is regarded as a primitive speech, and the
simplest form in which any word occurs in it is considered the
ground-form. Thus, in our own tongue, the root of tlic word lUsrern-
menl is not properly the Latin ccrno, but the Huglish disarii.
Less attention has been paid to the particles, numerals, and pro-
nouns, than to words of otiier das.ses, as the former have been already
given in the Comparative Grammar, and their nature and connexion
more fully elucidated than would here be possible. It will be sulFi-
cient, therefore, to refer, in each case, to the sections of the Grammar,
in which these explanations will be found.
The abbreviations employed in the Lexicon are such as will be
easily understood. Fuk., Haw., Mang., Nuk., N.Z., Pan., liar., S(nn.,
Tah., Tahii., Tar., Toiig., signify, respectively, the dialects of Fakaatb,
Hawaii, Mangareva, Nukidiiva, New Zealand, Paumotu, llarotonga,
Samoa, Tahiti, Tahuata, Tarawa, and Tonga. L'biq. (for ubicpie)
means " throughout Polynesia," or, in all the dialects, (of course, with
the regular permutation of letters, as given in the Grammar, ij 9.) Sa?n.
et cat. (Samoa et ca'tera) signifies "the Samoan and the rest of the
dialects." Pron., adv., prep., part., stand for pronoun, adverb, prepo-
sition, particle. The mark (qu. .') indicates that the origin, or mean-
ing, of a word is doubtful.
74
r L V N K 8 I A X L K \ I (' N.
r-
Ai Tiili. Knr. Miin;;., n |mrticli> pn lixi'cl lo
riouiH anil |>riiiiiitins. ((iniiii, ^ II.)
A, |irc|),, dl'. ((irarii. § I".)
A, N.Z. Haw., cdiij., and. ((train. ^ •1'^.)
.1, jiion., what .' ((irani. ^ rJ.)
A, \.'/,. Tall. Iliiw., an i'.\|ir<'r<siiin to dc-
iiiiti' prill rai'trd linir, I'lHilinnanci' ol"
an iicliun, tVr.
A, Snni. Tiin;j., a loiii'c.
Kiiii-n, Tuni;., <;/«/, 'I'lili., an cncliwiirr.
Afn, Sam. Tonn., ifi/v;, N. Z., ("'(/rrf, Vili,
n liurrioaiii', a stnrni; iiniiini, 'I'ali.,
lo Im' dIslnrlH'd hy a stnrin, as Ihr sea ;
innmicii. Haw., a mist, spray.
AjC, .Sam. Toiig., n lliiuisand. ((iram.
^ 30.)
Aji, .sJam. Ton«., iilii, N.Z. Haw. Nnk.,
Ill, Har. Mnnj; , niiiihi, Tali., Iiri\
Aftafi, Sam., rjiiiji. Ton;;., iihinlii, .\. Z.
Tuh. Haw. Nnk., nini, Mat. Man;;.,
evcnin;;, (p<'rliaps sn callril from 'he
cusliiin ol'liiihlini; fires al lliat lime.)
AjO, Xiim, Toiig., iihit, .\.Z. Haw. Nnk.,
cord, Ittino.
At, pron., who? (Gram. § -12.)
Al or ei, relative particle. (Gram. ^00.)
At (?), iii-iila, kiii-iilii, liii-iilii, l-'ak., no ;
I'Af/i, Fnk., ikai, liii, Tonj;., kihiii,
N. Z., not ; iiilii, ainia, niiiii, iiipii,
Tah., iiir, iiiiini, Nnk., no, imt.
Altit, Sam. Hot., miiilii, I'aii.. n spirit.
/lA'rt, Ton;!. Unr. Mang, Niik., f'd, Snin.
Tall. Haw., trakii, Viti, Tar., not of
a jilunt,
Aki, Toni;., eki, Mang., prep., with,(in.st.),
by means of.
I Aki, liar., slill, fair, na llie weatlirr; </'i(j'i.
Haw., fair, elear.
.iko, 'V>ii\-^. Uar.. <('(), Sam. Tall. Maw., lo
leaeli, iiislriii-l ; d/.n, .Niik., to adinil a
^H'rson into a elass or society.
Akil iU, ii'i'< Sam. Tall., needle, pin;
iikii, .Niik. ,(/'«, Tall. Iliiw., till' snord-
lisli, j.'ar-lisli, vVe.
Aid, Sam. Haw., iini, 'I'ali liar. Mang.,
((((, Tong. Nuk., awake, wnlcliful.
Auil, Haw.,'/n'(, N.Z. Mang., toobstrurt,
liiiiiler, op|)os<'.
Alllld, Sam., to come, used only in s|M'ak-
ing of a chief; ahiliii. Haw., lo eon.se.
crate, to n-nder sncred by ooming in
contact with some .sacn'il object.
Ale (ipi. f), liilf, Sam. Tikop., to congb ;
Inn-, .\. '/,., to groan.
Miilr, (law., nuire, N.Z. Tah., mariiiat,
Nnk., to raise phlegm, c.x|)ectorntc,
cough.
lliiiin; N.Z. Tab., iiavarr, Rar., siiittte,
phlegm ; (ipi. siiu-nlr, liquid ofci igh-
ing
AMo, Sam. Ilnw., rlelo, Tong., arrro, Tnh.
Uar. .Mang. ; rm, Nnk.. tongue.
Allki. I-'ak., ((//■/, Sam. Haw., tiriki, Rar.
Pan., iiri'i. Tail., riki, Tong., anki
and iikiiiiki, .Mang., tiik< and luikniki,
•Nnk., a chief, noble; ariki, .N. Z., n
chief distinguished from other chiefs
by n |K'cnliar sacrediiess of character;
I'liii/i'i, Sam., a high priest.
Alo, Sam. 'I'oiig., to paddle, to fan; Haw.,
to swim, to make the motion of swim-
ming.
Alo, Sam., the inside ; also, in sjienking of
a chief, the belly; Haw., the front,
face, breast, belly ; (iro, N. Z. Tah.
I \
POI, YNEStAN I, EX ICO \.
',>9r>
Itor. Mniig., no, Tong. Nuk., Iliu triint,
liiiT, |iri'iu'ii()',
Alu, Sinn. Tkiijj., iki (nr i|ii. <iii >), Nuk.,
to g(i; ii/o, Tung., til liiiiit; urn, N. /.
Tiih. Knr., niiin/n, llnw., to I'ullow,
|itiiNiie; iilnu, ti/i/, llnw,, to oiiniliiiiu
I'lir miiliiiil a«»istiiiK-(', lo lii'lj).
AlH, llnw., to H'liix, Im' Iikmc, liiin;; ilnwii ;
iininni, llnw., tanrnurii, 'I'lili., Iihisi',
Hinck.
Ariiiiru, N. /., ii siniill liiiii(l-ni'l.
Atnn, llnw., aiiKtnui, Sum., grievoil,
Amo, iihiq., to ciirry on ilio slioulilcr;
Ixiict', II biinlrii so I'lirriril.
Amu. timiKiiiiii, N.Z. llnw., til ri'vilf,
iibii*,-.
Ana, ubi<|., n cnvc, ilcii.
AflO, Tall., ilcKolali-; anonno, llaw., mili-
tary, still, rrlircd.
Ano. lUr., to wish, til Id! willing; <inoi,
llnw., lo dcsirr, to cuvi't.
AllOlji (.'), iiniini, llaw., diiui. Tali., lo
ini.x, mingle.
Ami, Unr. .Mniig. .Niik. Tab. llnw., cold.
Anu, Sam. Tong., to spit; anuanu, Nuk.,
spitlU-.
Anuanua, ubii)., rainliow.
Anilfe, Snin., iiniihe, eniihe, llaw., eniie,
.Miing. ; niife (prob. tiniiji), Nuk., a
ontcrpillar.
Aya, Sam. Uar. Mnng. ; ha>xi, N. 7..,
hakti, liana, Nuk., hnna, llnw., work,
Intior, to do, to make ; nija, N. /., to
bi'gin. Ayn, Tong., habit, custom,
knack ; a>j<i, Snm. Tong., yatjn, Viti,
dis|K>sitioii, temper of the mind ; hnijn,
.\. 7.., stutp, condition.
•^y(^ (0, (ipnn^, Tong., n corpse ; heaha,
henna, Nuk., the corpse of a huiiinn
victim oirercd to the gixis ; hctina,
llnw., the IhhIv of n person slain in
battle ; n^njti, N. /., n human skull.
Agaga, Sam., a spirit.
Age, Tong., "iir, Sam., ne, Tab. llnw..
yonder, nsido (I! ram. ^ oh).
Ayi, Hnr. Maiig., (//»vn/r, llnw,, a gentle
lin TZe, lo blow Hol'lly.
il/(//(i))/', Sniii. Tung. N./. Knr. Mnng.,
nnitti/,i, or iiiniiiiii, Nuk., tinifint,
llaw., iniiliii, Tab,, f"v', Vili, wiiiil.
Al), ubiij,, iliiN light, as ibsliiigiiisln d I'mni
jii>, iii^bt ; lii'iici', ll rrnlnl wiirlil.
as iljstliigiiislii'il I'ruiii Ibi'aiii'iriit iii^ibt,
iiriliaiis; also, a rlnuil. [The urigiiinl
imiuiiiig wns prolinbly the sky or
vlsllilr lirniaini'Mi, iVoin uliirli, by
iippiisiie Iniiisilicins, the two senses uf
" liiilil" anil " cloud" were derived.)
Aoiiiiili, .Nuk,, till' sun.
Airiilrii, N /, I'aii, llaw., (dvi^v', Tnh.
Kar. .Mnng. Nuk,, nomi (i. e. no-nlfii.
broad day) ; mitin und <ii>tfii, Nuk,,
daylight.
AwiiLr, \. Z,, tiiuikc, Mang., the day
niter to-iiiorrow (i. e. tin-nke, the dny
iH'yiiml).
Ana, Tall. Uar. llnw., to Imrk, howl.
Apt, Sam., nhi, Tong., a residence, lodg-
ing-plnce.
Ahi, Tong., Iinapiiju, IJur., property,
possessions.
AplClpt, Sam., narrow, strait ; ahidht.
Tong., crowded, ns n rond.
Ase, Snm. Viti, a/ii; Tab., jiiitilie, Nuk..
ilialii, llaw., sandal-wiKid.
Asiosio, Sum., ]>mthioliio, Tah. Haw., n
whirlwind.
AsO, Sam., <i/to, Tong., n day.
Tiaho, N, Z., to give light.
AsO, Snm., alio, Tnh. llnw,, the small
rods or ratters on which the thatch of
n house is fastened.
Alio, N. Z., the web of a woof of cloth.
AsO (?), alio, Tnh. llnw. Nuk,, ao, Rar.,
breath ; hence, patience, endurance ;
lOionlio, Tnh., sutfering, distress.
t :
. t
3on
Pill I,OI, (»(1 Y.
il
i I
If.
A.ill, Saiii.,"/ii',Ti>ii^.,'//'-f/Ai, Knr. Ilnw.
Niik., (iii-itiiiilii, Tiili., Hiiiok)',
I'/ni, miihii, lliiw., tuiiliii, 'I'lili., Ktonni,
v]i|Mir (v. kiisii).
A.ill, Slim., to liiilc wiitrr, til illp lint, to
iMriirl; iiii, Maii^.,lo |MHir nut wiilrri
iiliii, Niik., Ill lranN|iIiinl.
Atu, iilil(|., II similiiw, rclli'ctiiiii, iiMii);i';
Tiih., n cliiiiil.
I'li'iiiild, Slim., /</A(/(//(/ mill liudtii, NiiK.,
iikiiiilii, iMinin.,^V*//(i,Ton(i.,ii mirnir. '•■
Ala, N. Z., tii/ii II h (i/i;, or ln/iilii, Sinn.,
tiii,ihi(ilii,'Vi\\\. Iliiw.,llir iliiuii iil'iliiy.
AlaiiKii, ,Saiii,, II spirit (i. ■'. ii nliiiilr); j
lliiu., »isi', Nkilliil ; ii/iiitiii, N. /.,
kiiiil, grarious,
AliiJi'i, ,Sim., n win (i. i\ lillli- linage) ;
iiliiriki, .Maiig., eldest son ; ulni, Tiir.,
Hiin.
Atf'l, Tiinf!., iiliDita, Mani!., wiile, HpacioiiD.
Aldtii, Ilnw,, clear, plain, ilinliecl. i
Ate, iiliii|., the liver.
Aft, ."^am., til nmk(- n sihitIi ; Ilnw., lo
lallle, slaniliT, lie (v. kiitr).
Ato, Tung., Ill riiut', ti) lliiitcli ; Haw,, the
art of thatching.
AtU, .Slim. Vili, (ilii. Ton;;., n colleelive
parlirle prefi.veil to wiirils si^jnilyiiiK
eiiiiiilry, islaiiil, lown, \e. ((iiain. §
U).
Atll, lil)i<|., away, ynmler, — pnrtiele siij.
nilXin); ilireelimi from llie speaker,
ami likewise in liiniiint; the eiiinparn-
tive degree (Gram. §^ 'J'^, Uli).
Atll, .Sam. Tong. Tah. Haw. .\iik., the
biinito fish.
Atll'l, Sam. Tah. Knr. Haw. Niik., otmi,
Tung., eliin, .Maiig., a ginl, divinity.
All, pron., 1 (Gram. § .39).
All, Siim. Tung., lo nrrivo at, reneh.
All, Sam. Knr. Tah. Haw., the gall of
nnimnls.
Alie, int., alas ! woe ! also, to bewail,
sympathise, &c, (Gram. <j 60).
Avil, iiliii|., a ehaniiel, rnvi', ereek, har-
iKir; mill, .N. '/,., a river.
K
/•/", prep., Iiy (Gram. § !i4),
/'<", part., sign nl'llie viiealive. (Gram. ^ M.)
J'l, pail., sign III' ihe preMent and luliire
(Gnmi. ^ ."•■J).
/'/', Kar., Maiig. Tah. N'lik., emij., and
((irniii. ^ (IM).
I'Uo, Slim., i/i) mill elm, 'I'ling., yilii, Maw.,
li'lid, iifli-nsive,
LilO (?), kiiriv, uiriiiri), Kar., ini, 'Vat.,
vrhvrliui, VitI, yellow ; veru, N. Z.,
red; iiiilo, Tong., brown, yellow, —
iiiiloiiirlii, tawny; — Sam., red; mile-
iiirlr. Haw., yellow.
EllflciKl (ipi. 0. i^am., brown ; Haw., red-
hiil.
Evaeril, Smn, Tmig,, to walk about.
r li, Tung., /ill, N.Z, Haw., n, Mnng., /mi,
Nuk., to breathe strongly, a strong ex-
piriitiiiii oCthe breiilh.
F('l, .Sam. Tong,. tin, ,\. Z., n, Kar., /iii.
Haw. Nuk., /lit, iiiii/iii, Tah., lour.
h (I (.'), nuifd, Tung., nii/iii, vn/in. Haw.,
1)1111, Knr., iimii/iii (liir ii/ici), Tnh.,
split, elert, divided (ipi. parted in
ll.iir M.
I'ltlii, Tab. Nuk., lo split, erark, break
to piices, — a lissure ; jw/iii. Haw., to
burst, to break forth suddenly.
'ISfii, .Sam., perpendicular, steep (i. e.
split oil').
Mi>tii-ii/i<inii, Haw., split; ra/ianu, Nuk.,
half, or part.
Fae, Tung., tciicii, N. Z., mother.
Faja, Sam. Tong., iia/iii, N. Z. Haw.,
va/ui. Tall., to carry on ihu back.
li^
I'or, Y \ i;SI A N I.KX ICON,
297
Ftlfn, Niil<., vnhii, S.'A. Iliiw., luihii.
Till),, run, Itiir, Mnii^., Ilic iiioiilli ;
itiinihii, Tiili., iiiiiiiihii, lliiw., a
rnriiilli, ii|H'iilri|{ In a vt'ssrl ; kiiuiiliii,
N. '/.., II (Jill"'.
J/iiiiliihilid/iii, Tiili., Iiniiiriiliiiiriiliii,
Hum,, iiliiiniiii-ini, liar., U> ili's|iJHr,
intuit, ninlrniii (niiikr iiKiiillit iil >).
/' ojii, 'ViiUK., Iiti/id, lliiw., Hiihiiiiii, N.Z.,
III till iilKiiit, III iniivi' Itir Imiiil over n
tliiii)( ; Jiijii, Tiili,, to try, to ti'iii|il,
'' '{/'i i\'iil(., Ill ■•liillir, rliilliiiin, — II liiin-
illr wriipt ill rliith or li'iivra ; inilii.
Haw., ir/i/,Tali., vai, Wnr., to wrnp ii|i,
Hwntlii', ciivi'luiH', — II wra|i|K'r, shriilh,
Fa/lP, Sam., Jrjir, I'lHit?., iniliif, N. Z.
Haw., rnliii; Tah. Nuk., tvi/c, Kiir.,
I'lirl, liriwiKiil.
r njllic, J^iiiii., /i/itir, Tiinji., wiihiiie,
N. Z. I'liii. Haw., ?v(/i/)/c. Tall. Nuk.,
vainr, Uar., .Miiiii;., iii/ic. Tar., wo-
liwiii, li'iiialr.
t (ijo, Sam., i'v///H, \. Z. Haw., valw,
Tah. Nuk,, tv/o, liar. .Mnng., without,
oiitsjilr.
rat, .Sam. Tonn., to iln, to uiiikr; ni,
.Miiiif;., to n'fiiilalf, iliiirt, jjovitii.
Miijiii, Sam., iilui, N. '/,., pos-siblc, loasi.
iili', iiblc.
I'liifiiiliiki, Toiijf., to imitnto, mimio, ilo
nrooriiin); In; Jiiit'ni, Sam., Jiiila,
.Nuk., to m(M-k,tli'ri(li', almsi' ; limtlini-
lidi. Haw., to Iraw, vex, |irovok<! ;
Uiiihin, Hnu., niai, Mnng,, to follow,
chase, |iiir.siii'.
I'itiiiifd, Sam., plnyfiil, jrsling: Ton);.,
coiiiprlition, rivalry; /uiimi. Haw.,
orurl, lianl-hiartoil.
Fat, Tah. Nuk., hdiea (!), Hnw., ray.
tish, skato.
/' nka, Jii'd, ii-dkd, hdkd, lid'd, lion, the
rausativi' pri'lix. (Ornin. § 54.)
Faki (0. ./''■''> ^>'« 'o speak, toll ; /(((,
Nuk., /idi, 'I Miiw., dki. Uar.,
to It'll, confess.
75
Fll/ti {!),/d'i, Sam., to pull il..wn, to di?.
ulniy, — III extricate j Iraki, kmrnki,
.N. Z., to pluck, hn'nk otl', pull up;
lidi. Tall., to lirenk olf; Imi, uhui.
Haw., to jerk, pull mil, break olf, or
in piices, — III ileliver from Imiiilnxc ;
Jd/iii, jMi/di, Nuk., dki, Uar., to pluck,
to ){iilhi'r, as fruit.
I' ilkl ( f), fit'i, Horn., fi'i, Tah., the plan-
tain.
r lull, lidi, lidrit, iVc, uliii]., the pnnilanus
olIorilliHsilllllN,
Fulnlil, Sam. Tong., Iiilele, Hnw., to
lean upon.
I'dKird, Tiih., nriird, Uar , to bi-ot
upon, as the wiiiil, to strike n^'ain.sl,
/' nil', Ihrr, Jur, iniir, hide, hare, nrr,
uliii|., house,
Faliki, 'J'onjt., imriki, N, Z„ arikiriki,
Unr., hdlii. Haw., to spreiiil on the
^niiinil, to spread a m.il, to make a
til Kir.
I'ani, Tah., oriki, Uar., to receive,
holil, contain, — a vessel tor holding
liiliiiil.i, n iHillle.
Fallllu ( !), Iidriiiii, .N. Z. Tiih., dnirii,
Uar. .Miiii ' . hdliihi. Haw., a loud
noise, the miriii); of the wind, tlic
noise of siirt', <icc.
F(tna, Sam. Ton)i.. to shoot ; dii/nnn,
Sam., Ihiw and arrows : Jii/id, Tah.,
dnii, Uar., a 'ow Initd, Nuk., to
iM-nd.
Piimi, Hnw. N ik., n bow, — to sluiot
with a Ixiw ; N. /, Wnw. Nuk., n
fillip "lib the fingi
Fanil (!). Irtiiii.'i'an,!, Torn;., Iiawd/ia-
uiind, flaw., to whi~|ier; funayd,
Toni;., a table, a ficliiious tale; ton.
lunjd, Haw., n prophecy, to preach;
Vdiuina, Nuk.. ;i religious ceremony,
to sinj; hymns.
FllHli, Sam. Toil);., ni/itl, Viti, dura.
Tar., n mast of a vessel, liana. Haw.,
the middle post of a house.
;
1 !•
298
I' H I L O L O G Y.
i
{
FanU, Niik., wnrm in ntlnction or niijji'r,
nrdcnt ; imi/iimi, S«mi. Tniif;., inn-
liana, N. Z. Tiili. Maw., mrliaiKi,
Niik., vtaana, Itnr. Mung., hulianu,
llnw., wnrin, hut.
Jl'ina, Pan., miihunii, Tali., the sun.
Ilnnahiinii, Tah., luuiii/uino, I law. Xiik.,
bright, s|ileiuliil,
r (IIHllI, ivanaii, liuiiau, aiuiii, ul)i<i„ to
iK'ar, bring forth, — born.
Fann, Fak. Tah. \uk., la/wo, N. 'A., to
go, prooii'd, sail (as n ship).
Ihiho, Sum., by stages ; haniiii (qu.
Iiaiiii .'), Haw., stairs, .stcgis up an
ascent.
r a/Ilia, Sam. Tong., ueniKi, N. 'A.,frniia,
Toll. Nuk., henna, I'aii,, tnna, Uar.
''n'vr ■ honini. Haw., earth, land,
country. i
r aijd (.'), fiijiiijii, Snni. Tong., irnwii, •
S. 'A., haai, ha/imii, Tah., »;/«(, Uar.
Mang., hanai. Haw., J'liiini, hakai,
Nuk., to feed, nourish.
Faiiu, Tong., n/miia, Haw., mimi, Tah.,
a brood, lloi'k, laniily.
0/iiW', Sam,, uicdiid, .\. /., tnaija, Uar.,
'</(/«, Tall., pniianii, Haw., nest ol" a
bird ; hno-jtiinnna. Haw., to brood
over; pnnana, Nuk., to lie in wnit, —
an ambush.
f^a^a (>.), Jit (qu. Jiia.'), Tah., vni.a,
Haw., to ap|icar, come in sight ; mtilu-
faijd, Sam. Tong., shore, bench (i.
e. the front or edge apiKiiring to a
voyager).
Fayo ('), fa/aijo, Tong., to whisper, —
fai^ofhifo, to blow tin; nose, also a (lute
blown by the nose ; mtijo, N. A., a
groan ; hano, Haw., the asthma.
Fao, J'ajan, Sam., to collect things, and
put them in order; fan, fajno, Tong.,
fao, Nuk., hao, luUian, Haw., ao,
Mang., to put in, to fill up, to load.
I' tlO, I'ak., a spike, a nail ; Tong., a [K-g ;
hao, Tall., a nail, chisel ; hao. Haw.,
iron, a horn,
r do, Sam. Tong. Nuk., hao, Tah. Haw.,
riO, Uar., to take things with violence,
to plunder,
Faxt, and fa/asi, Snm., to open, to bn^ak
o[)en ; riU'i, Viti, to cut ; fiihi, Tong.,
wahi, vinnihi, N. A. Haw., valii,
vaviihi, Tah. Nuk., rami, Uar., to
divide, rend apart, break open ; Jiisi,
Sam., a fraiiinent, portion ; fiihi,
Tong., a class or division of men ;
u-ahi, N.A. Haw., vahi, Tah., a part,
(Hirtion.
Fast, Sam., ]Hhi, jxj>rhi, Nuk., prjwhi.
Haw., to strike, Iteat, kill.
Pchi, Tah. Haw., pet, Uar., to pelt with
stones.
r (ltd, S'ma,/at(ila/fi, Tong., Tikopia, the
breast, chest.
Fdtd, Sam. Tong. Nuk. Tah., irata, N. A.,
atii, Uar. Mang., a shelf, seallold, table,
altar, «5kC. ; hala. Haw., a ladder.
r dtt, Sam. Tall. Nuk,, /f/«, Tong., irali.
.N. A., hiiti. Haw., a/i, Uar. .Mang., to
lireak ; /ali, Tah., tmti, N. /., all,
Uar., to break and (lee, as an army ;
/((//', Sam., ati, Mang., to break, as
waves.
Tr(/^V;j,'f(, N. A., aliya, Mang., hatimi.
Haw., a (Vagment, piece.
Fdtll, Sam. Tong. Tah. .\iik., to folil or
roll up; /<//», Tab., /('(///, Haw., to
lie (ealliers i>n a plume or (ly-brush ;
ic(i/ii, N. A., to weave by hand, to
work on a mat.
i'rt/M, Sam. Niua, Fak., a .stone; Sam.,
seed, the heart ; Tong., the stomach (!) ;
lintn, N. A., hail, howatii, slcme ; alii,
Mang., seed ; hatii. Haw., a hard lump
of any thing, the tongue of a bell ;
poliatii. Haw., poatu, Uar. Mang.,
vatu, Viti, a stone.
Faln-lilili, Sam. Tong., fatnlii, Nuk..
(Uiiliii, Mang., ii:(UUiri, N. A., patiri.
POLYNESIAN I, K X I C O N.
299
Tall., Iiiiili, Haw., tliiindiT ((|U. lliiin-
ilcr-lxill, sIdhv Ihrinrn /).
r Cllll, Tiih., hiitii, lliiw., iilii, Uiir,, lord,
Minster.
r (XU, Sam. Tiini;. Niik., Iliu hibiscus lijin- 1
cells, II tree Irnm \vlios<' Imrk llie
mitives make their twine; hence, to
li<', to tiinil ; itii, .Mnng., to hind ; Jim,
Tdiig. Fiik., iVdntlel, wreiilli for the
heiid, cnp; Tiih., cup, helmet.
Vail, Viti, the hibiscus, — nlso, the cinc-
ture worn by the women, which is
mndo from its hark ; Jiii', Kiik., pmi,
Haw., the cincture worn by the women.
FaU {>),f}iiif<iii, Tah. Niik., unclean, liiul,
bad ; hmimiti, I law., unclean, ini|uii'e,
to defile.
Fe, Jhi, lira, ivc, iihi<|., w liich ? wliero ?
when? ((!rnm. ^§ \'i, ti.'j.)
Fefe, Sam., Villi (qii. w/ir .'), N. Z.,
Iioht; Haw., al'raid, fearful.
Fefe, Sam., a disease |irodiicing swelled
limbs, a kind of elephantiasis ; Nuk.,
elephantiasis, — an ulcer, boil ; iirur,
N. Z., Iic/ir, Haw,, an ulcer, a boil.
Feke, Ton;;. Nuk., /cV, Sam., /cV, Haw.,
the squid.
FeU(]), fer, Nuk., to strangle; liel<\ jxi-
liclf. Haw., a noose; urrrirrre, N. '/..,
to hani;, suspend.
Fetl'f, Sam. Ton;;. Nuk., iir/u, N. '/.., rlii,
Kar. Mani;., Iii/ii, helui, Tah., lulii,
hctika, I'liu., liiUii, Haw., n star.
Fici, Sam. Tonj;. Fak., hia. Haw., to
wish, want, desire; yli((/irt, Sam., de-
sire ;//(■/(«, Toiig., pleasui-e, joy, pride;
hiiliie. Haw., neat, (jood, lively; ieir,
Rar., neat, eU'gant. (Oram. § 51.)
Fl/j, Sam. Tong., ii-iri, N. Z., iri, U;ir.,
to choose.
Fill, Sam., an enemy, or rather an oppo-
nent at a game, an adversary whom
one selects to contend with.
Fili, Sam., Jii, Tong., faiijii, Nul ., Jiri,
Tail., )(■//■(', N. '/.., Iiili, Wnw., to plait,
to braid, (."^ee Vili.)
Ofili, Tab., oii'li, I law., to roll up, twist.
VililKllii ('.), iririiiiihi, .\. '/,., iiiiiiiki,
Uar., Iiiliiiiii, Haw., to lean upon, —
hence, to trust in.
I' llO, Sam. Tong., twine, thn'ad ; Jio, Nuk..
//(/(), Haw., I/O, Kar., to twist, — thread,
twine.
I'l/iloi, Sam., iioi, Kar., itiiili, ivili.
Haw., to mix, mingle.
[It is dest^rviiig of remark that fili, Jilu.
tiii/o, mini), and X'ili, although, accord-
ing to the principles of I'olynesiaii
etymology they must Ih' considered
distinct words, yet show, lM>th in .sound
and iiii'aiiiug, a ik'gree of resemblance
which cannot Ix- considered accidiMilal.
The same may lie remarked with re-
gard to other words, such ns Jiisi and
viisf, fell' and sele, fisi and fose, kapii
and siijio, kiirr and lave, knie and soli,
kikiu and iiS'i, I'lilii and miilii, iirkr.
]»ki; srki; and trl,r, jxka and lika,
Iriiio and stiiio. It and ti, hia and
piia, &c. This resemblance must be
nscrilM'd to the natural tendency, in
all languages, to ri'present similar ideas
by similar sounds.]
Fiudljnh, ii:\m. 'i'oiig,, lii>iai),irn, N. Z..
iiKiiKirii, Kar. Mang., Iiimmrn, Tah..
Iiiiiaiiaii, liintikdo, Nuk., will, desire.
Fio (!), icin, N. Z., vivio, Mang., hiohin,
I'au., to whistle; liin. Haw., eructa-
tion, — hiiiliio, " to draw in tho breath
as if eating a hot potato."
FisU{]),Jih<i,'VMV^.,viui,\\\\, Jill, hia, ia,
Sam. et cut., how many ! how much '.
FiSl, Sam., (///, Haw. Nuk., to pe<.d.
/'V.s'/ (!), ,/('/(/, Jihifilii, Tong., to entangle,
entwine ; iil (coiitracte<l from nihi,
(Jram. ^ l), ifiir'i., N. '/.., rushes; also,
to lie enlangi'd in rushes; /i/'i. Tab.,
ii, Kar. Mang., entangling, ensnaring;
hilii. Haw., the running, branching.
i
it
■r
300
PHILOLOGY.
niul nitwining of vinos, — hia, hiliia,
ciitanyU'il ; Jiji, Niik., a net of cocon-
nut fibres.
jf}{///?, Tnh., tatriiii, N. Z., tail, Rnr.,
liihihi, Ilnw., to oiisimrc.
Fita/ita, Snm., ilaitu, Hnw., etaeta, Tnh.,
strong, liiirily, vulinnt ; — itoilo, 'J'lih.,
iirdcnt, bold, rngor, strong.
Fiti, Niik. I'lik., iriti, N. Z., «<«, Rar.
Mnng., /(///, Tr.h. (law., to ris«, as the
sun, to appear, come.
FiliiJii (?), itiiju, Rar., hiiia, Tnh.,
hifiiia. Haw., Ilic rising of the sun, —
hence, the east.
JPUi, Sam. Tong., the Viti or Fecjec
Islands, i. c. the Eastern Land. (V. p.
170.)
Fti'ajili, Sam., to deceive, deny (act the
Feejee) ; faktifiti, Tong., to apologize.
PUi, Sam. Tong., to fillip, snap with ihe
fingers.
Majitijili, Sam., restless ; nuihitihUi,
Haw., to spatter, fiap; maliili. Haw.,
to vibrate, liop, jump; nuiuili, N. Z.,
to hop, jump; hiili, Rnr.; oliili, Tah.,
to pull up, or out.
Filu, seven (Oram. § 30).
Fill, Fak. Tong. Tab., satiate, tired M-ith,
sick of; fill, Sam., vexed.
'' {]), fixiki, Tong., /«('(', Sam., hmiwi.
Haw., lioiiMi, Tah., oroya, Rnr., ore,
.Mang., to give.
Hu, N. Z. Tah. Haw., to bring, convey,
give, — homiii, bring here, or give me;
hixitii, \. Z., oatu, Rnr., give him.
to, fnfo, Sam., to doctor, to cure; holioii-
roijo, N. Z., to make ]ience (see luijo).
Foa, Sam. Tong., to burst, split open,
be broken ; ai. Haw., to burst forth,
as a swollen stream; to split, as a
board or log.
Foe, Tong., n ball, n lump, — one, whole ;
hoe, Tab., single, only, one, — teline, a,
an, one (indef. art.. Gram. § I'-i) ; j)oe,
N. Z., a ball ; jme, Hnw. Nuk.,a com-
pany, collection, cluster, sign of plural
(Oram. § 14); poepoe, Haw., round,
globular; Rar., mass, substance, size.
/'«', Tah. Rar. Mnng., a pearl.
Foki, Fak. Tciiig., fi)'i, Snm., hoki, N. Z.
Pan., /(o'i, Tnh. Hnw.,oAj, Rnr. Afnng.,
to return, — (adv.), again, nist), indeed.
f OIU, fo/o/ii, Sam. Tong., honi, lio/umi,
N. Z. Tnh., hotii, hohiila, Hnw., ho/iott,
Nuk., to spread out, unfold.
Folau, Snm. Tong., volan, Viti, jmraii,
Tnr., to voyage, — a vessel of any
kind, a fleet ; faraii, Tah., hiilaii.
Haw., a canoe-house, a shed under
which canoes are kept.
Fou), Sam. Tong., Wo, N. Z., Iioromi,
Tab., on, ornpii, Mang., to swallow.
r ono, Sam. Tong., a council, public as-
sembly.
Fo/lO, Snm., Iiotio, N. Z. Haw., oiio, Rar.,
to mend, ns n garment or net ; Jbno,
Tong., to inlay carved work.
Fomi, Snm. Tong., honii, Tah. Haw.
Nuk., oiiii, Mang., n tortoise.
T Oya, or fin)a, Snm., top, surfncc, top-
knot of linir, flower of a pinnt ; fin)ii,
Tong., surface, top, summit ; Jh/oijii,
Sam. Tong., head, face, fcnturcs, used
only in speaking of a chief; hohoa.
Tab., image, likeness.
Fose (!), /«//c,Tong., I'W'f, Viti, Aosc, Rot.,
Ji)c, lioe, or, Snm., et cn't., a paddlo, —
to paddle, row.
Fose (?), fn/ie, Toiig., roc'V, Viti, ftore,
Tnh., Iio/e, Hnw., to peel, strip.
Fotil, Tong., h(ita. Haw., to press.
I' otu (J), fotii-maimva, Tong., the right
auricle of the heart ; hotii te matiava,
Nuk., to draw the breath ; hotii. Haw.,
asthma (sec ntamiva and/atu.)
Foil, linii, ou, ubiq., new, recent, — again,
anew.
Fu, Tong., hu, N. Z., to pull up.
Fidi, Sam. Tong., huti, N. Z. Tah.
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
301
How, Niik., 7</i, Rar. Maiig., to pull,
draw u|), pluck.
Fu (?), fufu, Tong., vitni, Vit., hiina,
N. Z., Tiili. Hiiw., iind, Rnr. Mang.,
Iiiilo, ronccnl (.we ««).
r It, Tong., great, whole, entirely,— /««,
nil, every, universnlly, wholly, — kiia,
Tiih., «rt, Kar., earnestly, strongly,
entirely ; fua, Sntn., merely, only,
without cause, without success ; ])u,
Uar., earnestly, strongly, — authority,
source of power, master; pii, N. Z.
Nuk., strongly, absolutely, es|)ecially,
merely, only; Tah., whole, alto-
gether ; Haw., togetlier.
Fua, Sam. Tong., hua, N. Z. Ilaw., mi,
Rnr., hiirro, Tah., vuu, Viti, iiu (or
)/((), Tar., fruit.
Hua, N.Z. Haw., to s|)rout, grow, l)ear
fruit ; fud, Sam. Tong., iiai, Mang.,
to begin.
Fua, Tong., the shape ; hiuthiia, N. Z.,
likeness, similitude, — iiliiia, looks, np-
|K'arnnce, — iiiikii-ahua, to pretend,
ft^gn ; aiuhiia, Ilnw., to lie a hypo-
crite.
t ua, Sam., hua. Haw., envious, jealous.
t Ue (!), fiirfue, Sam., a species of wild
vine ; hue, N. Z. Nuk. Haw., pohuc,
Tah., the gourd, convolvulus Hnizili-
cnsis.
Fuke {'.),fu>, Sam., hukc, N. Z., to lake
food out of an oven ; liuf. Haw., to
unload a ship.
T Ufa, fufula, Sam. Tong., huhua, Nuk.,
to swell, swollen.
r ull, hurt, hull, uri, hid, ubi(|., to turn
or roll over, — upset.
Fulu (?), J'ufulu, Sam. Tong., vuluvulu,
V'iti, pulu. Haw., to wash ; pupu (qu.
puptiu /), Nuk., to rinse.
Fulu (\), fulufulu, huruhuru, hultthulu,
uruuTU, huuhuu, ubiq., the short hair
of the bmly, fur, feathers.
76
Fulu, ten (Gram. ^ 30).
/' USt, fusifusi, Sam., to bind, to tie, as a
bundle or sheaf; hui, N. Z., to gather,
— huihui, N. Z., hui. Haw., to unite,
assemble ; huilahi. Haw., girded,
l)eltcd.
l^uifui, Tong., a flo<;k of birds ; huihui,
Ilaw., a bunch, applied tu vegetables;
hui. Tab., ui, Rar., a company, class,
sign of plural (Gram. § 14); lahiii.
Haw., rahui, N. Z., a company, a
collection of [)eople ; kiiliui, N. Z., n
flock, a hero ; Nuk., a bunch of fruit.
FuSU, Sam., fuhu. Haw., Ix>xing; a pugi-
listic contest ; huhu. Maw., angry.
Futa, Tong., to boast, vaunt,~-/emufuta,
to strive together, contend ; muJuUi,
Sam., mtJtuta, Tah., to rise up; ma-
huta. Haw., to flee away.
Futt, Tong. Fak. Tikopia, vutuU, Viti,
banana.
1' Uyo (?), vupo, Viti, a child-in-law, — vet-
ruijoui, the relation of child and parent-
in-law.
Iluijoni, N. Z., Nuk., ngoai, Rar., hooai.
Tab., huiioai. Haw., a parent-in-law.
Uundoya, N. Z., unnija, Kar., hutioa,
Tah., hunona. Haw., Nuk., a child-
in-law.
H
By referring to the Grammar it will be
seen that the letter h is not one of the ori-
ginal elenienl.s of the Polynesian speech,
but is a variation either of s or f. A few
words, however, must be given under this
initial, until further investigations shall de-
termine to which of these radical letters
(s or/) they properly belong.
Hererei, Pau., erri, Mang., eei, Nuk.,
cocoa-nut.
Hohonu, N. Z. Tab. Haw. Nuk., oonu,
Uar. Mang., deep.
302
PHILOLOGY.
L» ■ I
Hoko, \. Z. Niik., hon, Tnh., oko, Knr. 1
.Mnng., tu buy and sell, to trade.
Holua, Haw., to pliilc down hill on n
sledge : home. Tali., to swim in the
surl", to flojit.
Hope, \. '/.. Tnh. Haw. Niik., ojh; Uar.
Mang., end, exireniily, hinder part.
HcupO, Niik., riujio, Mang., the heart ;
/lOiijM, Haw., the thorax, the region
ol" the heart, — palpitation of the heart.
Huhu, N. '/,., till, Kar., a moth ; hii/iii,
Nuk., an insect of the bee kind.
Hukahuka, N. Z., to last, endure; uka,
Mang., firm.
Hume Pau., a girdle ; mnlo. Haw., to
bind round the loins as a girdle.
Htimu, \uk., to bind tight ; Haw., to sew
cloth, to fasten together.
Hupo, Haw., hitj)fliHjx; Tall., savage,
barbiirous, ignorant.
HulU, a species of tree, — at Tah. and
Nuk., the Barringtonia speciosa ; at
N. Z., the Phjilocladus trichoma-
noidcs.
I
/, a particle prefixed to the accusative case
(Gram. § 22).
/, part, sign of past time (Gram. § 52).
/, prep, in, by (Gram. § 23).
la, pron., he, she, it, &c. (Gram. § 39).
Ifi, Sam., Tong., to blow with the mouth.
Iji, Sam. Tong. ilti, Nuk., a species of
chcsnut (see lata).
Ika, i'fl, ubiq., fish.
Ike, Nuk., Mang., »V, Sam. Haw., ikcike,
Tar., mallet used in beating out bark-
cloth ; ike, N. Z., to bruise bark.
Da, Tong., ini, N. Z., ia, Nuk., iliia.
Haw., a mole, mark on the skin.
Ih, Sam., iri, Vili, ii, Tong., a fan (see
lalii).
Ilo, Sam. Tall., to know, perceive, see.
Ftikdiln, Tong., fa'iii/o, Sam., to show,
announce, U'loken ; hooiiiilo. Haw.,
to predict evil.
Faktiil(»i»a, Tong., fit'ailinigu, Sam.,
iikaiio, Kar., akairoiiga, Mag., htxii-
Iniia, liuiloiiu. Haw., a sign, token.
mark, trace; uakaiio, N.Z., to carve
(i. o. to murk).
Ilo, Maw., iri). Tab., io, Nuk., a maggot.
Ina, if, lliat; sign of conditional and sub-
junctive moods (Gram. § 53).
IlUl, ubiq., to drink.
lyoa, .Sam. N. Z. Rar., hima, Tong.,
ikni, iiioa, Nuk., inoa. Haw., ioa,
Tab., name.
Io, Sam. Tong. Fak., yes ; 1 law., true, R'al.
IpH, Sain. Nuk. Tong., a cup; Tah.
Mang. Haw., a calabash, a cup.
Istl, ihii, ill, \\hu\., the nose.
Ita, Sam. Tong., niaita, makilii. Hat.,
anger, angry.
Iti, ilili, Sam., ili, ti, Tong., iti, Tah.
Haw. Nuk., gili, Rar., small; itiiti,
Mang., child, infant.
Teiti, Haw. Mang., a child ; toili, Nuk.,
a boy.
Kiiiti, N. Z., oili, Rar., haiti. Haw.,
narrow.
K
Ka, V(, verbal particle. (Gram. §§50,53.)
Kafa, \ifii, kiilui, 'aha, kaa, ubiq., (ex-
cept N. Z.,) sinnet, or cord braided
from the husk of the cocoa-nut ; 'aha.
Haw., a prayer supposed to be strong
in holding the kingdom together, as
sinnet is strong in binding; kaha,
Nuk., a charm or spell, N. Z., strength,
power, — strong.
Kafika{l.), kaldka, Nuk., ahia, Tah.,
oliia. Haw., native apple, — (cugcnia
Malaccensis.)
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
303
Kafu, Niun, knfii, Tori};., 'nfii, Snni.,
kiihii, N. '/.. I'mi. Niik., lam, Riir.
Miiiig., '(//;», Tiih. I law., rlolliiiifi, —
III clollic ; l,<ifii. Toil};., licd-fiiv<Tiiig.
Kahi, iiihihi (<|ii. ?), N. /., uihiihi,
Nuk., tukdi, IJar. Mali};., to«/(/, Tali.,
trilii, littlii, Itr/ii, I law., to tread, Irani-
plc, staiii|i willi llie loot.
liat, \ii, ubii|., to oat.
Pid-Ktii, Toiig. , /iV(-«i, Sam., hiti-lcui,
N. Z., desire to eat, liiiiiger; liia-iii.
Tail., thirst.
Kuiiid, N. Z. Mang., '"ij)«, Sam., ainti,
Haw., A«iW((, kiiikit, Nuk., kdiiniya.
Toll};., liiod, a meal.
Kaiija, Sam., iiiijd, Toiig., laiiiily, kin-
di'(^d (i. G. lliose who eat tog<'lher);
hence, kditjd, N. Z., a home, re.si.
deiice, town; kdifjd, Mang., kiiikd,
kdiiid, Nuk. ,«(«((, Haw., laiid,(:ounlry.
Kdi, \. Z. V'iti, u native, inhahilant, per-
son in general ; kdkdi, Toiig. people ;
'(/'«(', Sam., town, village.
Kaisrl (>), kdilm, Tong., kein, Kar. Pau.,
eitt, Tuh., td/uic, N. Z., to steal.
Kaka (?), <«/, Tah. Haw., to insult, defy ;
VKikiikii, Nuk., allronting, vexatious,
annoying.
Ka/ii, N. Z. Uar. Mang. Nuk., Wi, Tah.
Haw., the neck, — properly the na|>e of
the neck.
Kala {>), kakdla, Tong., kdkdrd, N. Z.
Mang., kakaa, Nuk., iila,ddla, Huw.,
fragrant.
Kala (?), kara, Pnu., ara, Tah., a/«. Haw.,
a pebble, a smooth, round stone; krd,
Nuk., a stone, or stone pestle.
Kalae.a{i.), kmwa, Nuk., araea, Tah.,
d/dra, Haw., red ochre.
Kalajau, Niua, dldjiui, Sam., fau. Rot.,
the check.
Ralaya, Tong., to cry out, to shout;
'dlaijti, Sam., karam, N. Z., to call,
to summon ; kdraga, Kar., to call, to
numc.
Kale (?), kdrc, Kar. Mang., «yf, Tah., ale.
Haw., wave, hillnw, undulation of wa-
ter ; ktirc, N. '/.., kackdc, Niik., reflec-
tion of light from running water,
glancing, flashing.
Kah (!), Id''dli, Sam., the spatlio or sprout
of the cocoa-nut ; hakdri, Vixu. , lui'dri,
'J'ali., dkdri, Kar., the cocoa-nut ; ha-
kdii, \. '/.., a feast, — al.>(o, biids'-eggs.
r(K's offish, .seed, &C.
halt, 'i'ong. Vili, dli, Sam., a wooden pil-
low.
KallOt (?), karioi, Pau., to sing and dance ;
arioi, Tab., a class or society of per-
sons who passed their time in festivitiDS
and the practice of debauchery, under
the .sanction of religion; kdiui, Nuk.,
a p<'culiar class of people, under cer-
tain restrictions from the tabu; karioi.
Mang., iniinoilcst.
Kalo, Tong., to turn aside or parry a
weapon ; hilokdhi, to shake, as the
head; «/o, Tah. Haw., to dodge, to
elude the stroke of a weapon, to move
out of the way ; ahxilo, Haw., to turn
this way and that, as in fear.
Kamo, Tong., kdkaiiio, N. Z,, dmo, Haw.,
to wink.
Kakdiiio, Tikop., a flash of lightning.
Kamo, Mong. Nuk., to steal.
Kanae, Tong. N. Z., anac, Sam. Haw.,
a s|)ecies of mullet,
Katiapa, N. Z. Kar., anapa, Tah. Haw.,
kddjHiapa, Nuk., to flash, to shine
forth.
Kano, Tong., 'diio, Sam., the inmost sub-
stance of a thing, the kernel, flesh :
'aim. Haw., meaning, signification,
moral quality, character, likeness;
kdkdiio, N. Z. Nuk., kdnohino, Mang.,
anoaim. Haw., seed, kernels.
Kdno o he mata, Tong., boll of the eye ;
kanuhi, N. Z., the eye ; rniohi. Haw.,
ball of the eye.
Kaya, N. Z., to swear, to curse ; anaana,
304
PHILOLOGY.
: '.'\
: '.n
How., sorcery, a prnycr to procure
the death of a |)erson.
Kao, Unr., no. Haw., to sprout, to put
lorlli leaves.
Kaon, Riir., tun, Tah., to crow as a cock
(S<X! tiod).
Kaokao, N. Z. Uar. Pnu. Nuk., <in<m,
Ilnw., the Hide of the IkhIv ; notio,
Sam., the arm-pit.
Kapa (?), hip(il;ii2Hi, Tong., to flap the
wings ; apnnpa, Sam., fins ; Haw.,
changeable, unsettled.
Kapakau, 'I'ong., '(ipn''tiii, Sam., pdknii,
N. '/,.,pfaH, \Ks\t., pfhcu, eheii. Haw.,
keheii, Nuk., wings (see jxirirau).
Piikaii, N\i\s.., imkiiukau, N. Z., a child's
kite.
Kape, Rar. Afang., to paddle, row ; api,
Haw., to flap, shako, — gills of a fish.
Kape, or k(il)f, Tong., to curse, revile ;
nj>e, Tuh., to assail, insult ; kiipe,
N. Z., to sin, to transgress a law.
Kape, Nuk., Uar., k(il>c, Tong., <ij>e, Sam.
Tuh. Haw., arum coslatum.
KapU, Mang., to enclose, contain, — a cup,
vase ; kapii, Uar., apit. Haw., a cup;
kfipiik'ipK, Nuk., to take up water
with a cup.
Apu-lima, Snm.,(ipii-rim<i, Haw., kapn
nil riga, N. Z., the palm or hollow of
the hand.
Kasa []), \i'nsn, Sam., kuknha, Tong.,
kd, kaka, N. Z., kd, Mang. Nuk., a,
aa. Haw., hot, burning, fiery.
KaSO (?), kaho, Tong., kakaho, N. Z.,
kakno, Mang., aelio, Tah., ahuawa.
Haw., a reed or rush.
Kasoa, Niua, asoa, Sam., kahoa, Tong.,
a necklace, beads, &c.
Kata, \Uu, ubiq., to laugh.
Katl, Uar. V'iti, ati. Haw., to bite ; fUi,
Sum. Tah., to bite through, to go
entirely through ; kati, N, Z,, sulTi-
ciently, enough.
Kato, Tong. Viti, ato, Sam., bag, basket.
Katoa, Fak. N. Z., Rar., Pan., tUoa,
Tah., kntai, Tong., all, the whole;
oini. Haw., a whole,— distinct, sepa-
rate.
Ktiton, Tong., atoatoti. Haw., to as-
semble.
Kail, Fak. Tong., 'aM, Sam. Rar., a col-
lective particle, a plural sign (Gram.
§14).
Tekaii, Tong. N^. '/.., Irktiii, taktiii, Nuk.,
takiiii, Uar. Mang., ta'ai/, Tah., a
score ; UCaii, Haw., two score (Gram.
k 31)-
Kail, Tong., kakaii, Nuk. ; au, Sam.
Haw., stem of a plant.
'Alt, Sam. Haw., kiikiiit, N. Z., handle,
helve (of an a.xe, chisel, ice.)
Knit -nut II, Tong., kau-iire, N. Z., kau-
inui, Nuk., ttii-limii. Haw., the stick
which is rubbed on a piece of wood to
produce fire.
Kiiit-tmtc, Nuk., aii-mitf, Haw., kau-
urti, N. Z., the piece of wood on
which the friction is made.
Kail, 'ail, ubiq., to swim, pass through
water, wade.
Kiiiikiiit, Tong., nutiii. Haw., to bathe,
wash.
Kau, Fak., 'nil, Sam., to give, bring to.
'All, Sum., to send, direct, command ;
/mil, Sam., fckuii, Tong., to send a
message, to oriler.
Kaiia, kaiiuka, N. Z., ana, Sam. Nuk.,
«//«,Tong., aiiau, Tah., anraka, Rar.,
desist ! forlxmr I do not ! (Gram. § 53);
mill. Haw., to forbid, refuse.
Kaiiae, Mang., kauvae, Rar., auvae,
Snm., koiiae, Tong. N. Z., auwae.
Haw., kouvne, Nuk., the lower jaw,
the chin, the lower part of the cheek.
Kauvae, Wat., to reprove, rebuke (qu. to
jaw ?)
Kava, Tong. Rar. Nuk., 'ava, Sam. Tah.
< :i
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
;}05
llnw., the piper mdhysticuin ; also
the l)evcriige mnde from its root.
Kuvd, iN. Z., the pi|)cr rxcclsum.
Kuim, N. '/.., kiwii, Knr. Miing. Niik.,
'(i\iva. Sum., mciuiwa, Hiiw., sour,
bitter, pungent.
Kakiivii, Tong., kahiira, N. Z., sweat.
Kava, Tong., fwa, Sam., l)oaril.
Kavake (?), kmi-ukc, I'nu., mac. Tali.,
the ni(Min.
Kave, Tong. Nuk., kdtcc, N. Z., ntr,
Sam., au-c. Haw., to carry, take.
Karekave, Tong., to swing ; kave, Mang.,
tit'iire, Tab., ta'aut; Haw., to sus-
pend, hang up.
Ke, Tong., V, Sam., thou, — used only as
a nominative to a verb in certain cases
(Gram. § 39).
Ke, Tong., to quarrel, dispute, wrangle;
ee, Sam., ir. Tab. Haw. Nuk., to
insult, provoke, pick a quarrel.
Kea, Nuk., en. Haw., tortoise-shell.
Kefll, Tong., fla.\en ; keliii, Nuk., brown
(applied to hair); elm. Haw., red or
sandy-haired.
Kei, N.Z., ei, Sam. Rar., prep., at, with, in.
Kek (>), kelckclc, Tong., eleele, Sam.,
earth, soil, dirt ; kiica, Tong., elia,
Sam., dirty, stained with earth.
Kerekcrr, Kar., creere. Tab., e/ee/c. Haw.,
keekee, Nuk., black, brown, dark-
colored.
Kelt, 'fli, keri, 'eri, kei, ubiq., to dig.
Kemt, Mang., to depart, disappear ; emi.
Haw., to retire, subside, ebb.
Kese (?), '«(•, Sam., kehe, Tong., ke, N. Z.
Rar. Mang. Nuk., c. Tab. Haw., dif-
ferent, other, — strange, foreign.
Keta (?), ketnkcta, Rar., eta or rtiteta.
Haw., foul, gross, filthy.
Kcle, Rar. Mang., ^ete, Sam. Haw., a
basket.
Kete, Tong. Viti, the stomach, the belly.
77
Ketl'l, Nuk., to jump, to jerk, to e.xcavato
with a sudden motion ; kctii, Tong.,
lame, to hobble ; ctii. Haw., to root, as
a pig ; kelii, N.Z., to displace a corpse;
ketii, Mang., to seek, search for.
Ketl, Nuk., Rar., keiikeu, Mang., ciieii.
Haw., to move, agitato, excite.
Ell, Sam., to remove, as a mote from
the eye.
Kcii, Nuk., eii. Haw., mischievous.
Ki, 'i, ubiq., to, towards (Gram. § 21).
A7, N. Z. Rnr., t. Tab., full.
Ki, Mang., t, Haw., to speak ; ki, N. Z,
Rar., to answer.
Ki, Tong., to whistle, chirp, squeak, —
as birds, rats, &c.
Kia, 'id, kc, conj., if, that, — sign of con-
ditional and subjunctive moods (Gram.
^ §53).
Kte, Tong. Viti, 'ie, Sam., mat ; kie,
Mang., ie, Tar., sail of a canoe (com-
monly made of mats).
A7A'0, N. Z. Mang. Nuk., to. Haw., flesh,
meat.
Kilt, Fak. Tong., kiri, N. Z. Rar., iri.
Tab., Hi, Haw., kii, Nuk., skin, bark,
rind, — also, a lile or rasp (originally
made of shark's skin).
Kilikili (?), jV"'//, Sam. Haw., kirikiri,
N. Z. Tar., gravel, pebbles.
Kiln, Tong., 'ilu, Sam., a hundred thou-
sand ; kill, Mang,, twenty thousand ;
Fak., a large, but indefinite number ;
ill. Tab., a million (Gram. § 30).
Kinit, Rar., imi. Tab. Haw. Nuk., kiimi,
Tong., to seek, search.
Kimoa, Tong. Tar., imoa, Sam., rat.
mouse.
Ktnaki, N. Z., inaki, Mong., inai, Nuk.,
victuals added at a meal, as a relish
to the principal dish.
Kini, N. Z. Viti, kiniki. Tar., iviti.
Haw., to pinch.
Kino, N. Z. Rar. Mang. Nuk., two. Tab,
306
P 1111. O L O Ci Y.
Hiiw., /.//■«, Pan,, liad; j«oi//«, Sum.,
nluiinlniililc, lintdul.
Iiioinn, Shiii. 'I'uh., iiiiiimi, Haw., In
ilctrsi, hale.
Kiole (I), kiorc, N.Z. Mang. I'au., 'ialr,
Sam. IIiiw., nil, mnusc.
Kisi (I.), isi, Sam., other, ilillbrcnl ; kikihi,
Tong., to opposf, clash, contradict.
Kite, Tonj;., to view at n distanco, to per-
ceive, discern ; kil<; N. X. Uar. .Mang.
Nuk., iti; Tall., I hiw., to see, to know.
AO, V), ubiii., a particle desinnatiiii; the
nominative case (liraiii. ^ 17).
Ao, the root of the pronoun of the second
|)erson singular, dual and plural. Tor
lUI the diiducts but the Tongan (Uram.
Kg, N. Z. Rar. Nuk., 6, Tah. Maw., a
sharp stick used in cultivating the
ground ; hence, to dig, plant.
A'', \.Z. Rar. .Mang., u, Tah. Haw., there,
that place.
Koakoa, N. Z. Mang. Nuk., moti, Tah.
Maw., joy, joyful.
Knje, 'o/c, kohe, knr, ^olir, ubiq. (except
N. Z.) the bamboo.
Ko/c, Tikop., kolir, N. Z. Nuk., a knife
(origimlly of bamboo).
O/te, Tah. arrow.
Ao/? (?), ofi, Sam , to have space to enter ;
ko/ii, N. Z., tu put in, to gather into ;
koi, Mang., old, Haw., to collect,
gather up.
Koi, Rar. Nuk., oi. Haw., sharp, a point.
Koka, Tong., V«, Sam., noa, Tah., a
tree (ficus prolixa) from whose bark a
brown dye is obtained for staining
cloth; oil, Haw., " a species of woo<l
resembling mahogany ;" knka, Nuk.,
black or blue (applied to cloth).
Koke, Itar., w, Tah., a sword (?).
Koki, N. Z. Mang. Nuk., oi. How., pin-
koki, Rar., pirioi, Tah., lame, to limp.
Koko (!), ckoko, Rar., to doubt, to hesi-
tate; o'li'i). Haw., to shrink, to Iw
cautious, parsimonious; kuko, N. Z,,
lean.
hole, Tong., '(j/c, .Sam., to In-g.
Koklo (?), kiiirrn, N. Z. Rar., orrro, Tah.,
olelo. Haw., to s|H'ak ; s|)eech, lan-
guage ((|U. from uliln, tongue .').
Koll (.'), nli, it/ii)/i, Sam. Haw., joy, de-
light, pleasurable excitement; koikii
and koiiKi, Nuk., amusement, diver-
sion, li'slivily.
Tiioriiin, Rar., to stir up, excite ; oriori.
Tall., to vivify, create.
KolO, Tong. Viti, a fortress, a li'iiced
town; ii/o, Sam., a place of refuge;
kiiio, Rar., an enclosure, wall.
K.0I0U, Tong., V«(, Sam., riches, pro-
|H'rty ; olud. Haw., a gill made to a
child sixHi aller its birth ; oroii, Tah.,
a least, a festival.
Komu, N. Z., ointt. Tall., a small udzc
or dibble.
Komo, N. Z. 'J'ah., to put in, as to a
Itasket or sheath ; kokomo, Mang., to
shut up, stop up, a stopple, cork ;
koiiiv, Nuk., a wocden cover for a
gourd; omo, Haw., a cover for a
basket.
Koua, Tong., 'o«rt, Sam., intoxicated,
poisoned ; koiut, Rar. Mang. Nuk.,
ona. Haw., intoxicated.
Komi, Tong., ona, Sam., unaoua. Haw..
bitter, unpalatable.
Makona, Tong. N .Z. Rar. Nuk., nut-
ona, Sam. Haw., un\ Tar., full, sati-
ated with food.
Kopelu (?), ojkIu, Haw., opcru, Tah,,
kojKu, Nuk., the mackerel (scomber
scomber).
Kcpu, N. Z. Rar. Nuk., op«, Tah. Haw.,
the belly, abdomen.
KOSU (!), kohii, T(mg. N.Z. Nuk., olix.
Haw., koii, Rar., log, vapor, steam.
Kota, N. Z., a shell to scrape with, a
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
307
plnno iron; otiiDia, I law., siiw-diist,
tilings, (In.'jjs, crumbs; oliiit/d, Tomj;.,
N. Z. Tiili., rulihiili, refuse ; kutit,
Vili, tlic (Iri'gs (if jiiiva.
Kote, Toiig., to rlmtlcr, — giblK-rish ; ote,
Sum., to srnlil; Haw., talliativc.
Kotl, 'o/i,, uliiq., to cut.
Kotllkll, N. Z. Mang., oliiii. Tali., nm.
tiikii, Nul<., iiiutiiii, Sam., a heron,
crune.
Otiiti, Haw., to sit in n meditating pos-
ture, with head reclined.
Ku, Tong., 'm, Sam., I, — used only as
nominative to a verh, — also the root
of the lirst possessive pronoun in all
the dialects (Gram. §§ 39, -lO).
Klia, \ia, a verbal particle (Gram. § 49).
Kujane, Nuk., kimnr, Mang., uhtini;
Haw., n spirit.
Ktli, N. Z. Mang. Nuk., mother.
Kllhu (qu. ?), N. '/,., to put in, nii.x in ; kil,
Kar. Mang., to saturate, to fill with.
Kufcinn, Mang., hiccough ; iiiiia, llaw.,
to snap, crack as a whip.
Kuku, Tong., '«'», Sam., to hold fast, to
grasp ; ki/kii, N. Z.i any thing that
holds fast, as a vice, pincers, tongs.
Kuku, Tong. N. Z., '«'«, Sam. Haw.,
the muscle (shell-fish).
Kuku, Vili, the nails, to hold by the
nails ; Tong., to grasp, a handful (see
mntikuku).
Kuku, Nuk., a green dove; kukiipa,
N. Z. Pau., uupii. Tab., pigeon, dove.
Kula, Viti, ktilokula, Tong., kura, N. Z.
Mang., '«/■«, Tah., %ila. Haw., kua,
Nuk., red.
Kuh (?), kura, N. Z. Mang., via. Haw.,
lobster, crayfish.
Kuli, Tong., 'h/j, Sam., ktiri, Rar. Mang.,
nri, Tah., a dog.
Kulu, Niua, kuru, Rur. Pan., uru, Tah.,
utu. Haw., the breadfruit.
Kumala, Tong., 'umulu, Sam., kunuim.
N. Z. Mang., kuniiui or kimutwd,
Nuk., umiiin, Tah., ;«(/«, Haw., the
sweet potato (convolvulus batatus).
Knme, .N. Z. Mang., 7(mf, Tah. Haw., to
pull, draw out, lenglhim.
Kutnete, 'umclc, ubiq,, a 1k)wI, wooden
trencher.
Kumt, \.Z. Mnng., kukuini, .\uk., iiini,
Tah. Haw., to s(|U('cz(', to extend by
pressure, to clioke, strangle.
Kumi, 'long., ten, used only in numbering
liillioms ; kumi, N. Z. Nuk., umi,
Tah., ten liilhoms ; kumi, Mang.,
iimi. Haw., ten (Gram. § 32).
Kumi, Viti, kumikumi, Mung. Pan. Nuk.,
umiiimi,'Vn\\. Haw., the beard; ku-
mikumi, Tong., the chin.
Kuokuo, Mang. Pau., wmo, Tah. Nuk..
white.
Klipa, N. Z., to belch; v^;iO, Haw., to
devour with greediness.
KupnyjO, 'ujM'ijit, 'ujienu, ^upea, ubiq., u
seine, net.
Kupu, N. Z., '«7)», Sam., word, lan-
guage ; ujm, Tah., an invocation to
the gods ; kupu, Nuk., to curse, to
blaspheme.
KutU, 'ulu, ubiq., louse, — vermin.
Utu-rcre, Tah; musquito; iitu-lele. Haw.,
flea.
La, the root of the pronouns of the third
person, dual and plural, in all the
dialects but the Tongan (Gram. § 39).
■Lu, ra, a, ubiq., the sun, a day.
La, Sam. Tong., ra, N. Z. Rar., a, Nuk.
a sail.
Ld, or laid, Sam. Haw., rara, Tah. Mang..
branch of a tree.
Rara, N. Z., a rib ; alapa, Tong., a
limb, a haunch (qu. branch ?).
808
i> in I. oLO(i V.
Liia, I law., Ilia, Tnh., aiicred (pcrlinp«
more oorri'dly lil iiikI rA, — s«! nii).
ItOe, rar, nr, ul)i(|., livrclii'iiil.
Luf'd, /ii/n/ii/ii, Ti)ii>;., Hal ; sii/ii/n/nlii,
Siiin., /ii/iii, pii/ii/iii/ii/ii', I law., jxiii-
fuuihii, Niik., jHirAm, Har., jMirahn-
nihil, 'I'lih., rumlmriinilKi, Vili, lirond,
wiilo.
Im/ui, Haw., lo cxtcml, sprcail out, — to
publish, circulatp j iii/iii, N. /., lo
Bhow.
Laja, Sam. 'rung., spots liuriit in llie
skill ; Fak., a ciitaiieoiiM tliscaso, ring-
worm.
Lahlli (qii. ?), Haw., ruhiii, N.Z. Tali.,
aiiui, Nuk., to prevent, prohibit, re-
strict.
Lailai (?), mimi, N.Z. Tab., lahUnlii,
Haw,, thin.
LuKdH, Fak., Mail, Sain. Haw., iikaii,
Tong., rakiiii, N. Z. Rar. Mang.,
rrtflM, Tnli,, akiiii or kaiiii, Nuk.,
A."nf«, V'iti, tree, wo<hI ((|ii. (Voin kiiii,
stalk, stem ?).
La/i'U {>.), rakiiriikii, N. Z. Mang., »y/'«.
Tab., lo scrntcb, scrape; /iin. Haw.,
to feel after a thing.
IMlO (?), laliiu. Haw., sahihiii, Sam., pu-
ram, Tah., scattered j jHirarii, Nuk.,
broken to pieces.
Lalt, Haw., rari. Tab., wet.
Law, raro, ao, ubiq., below.
Maiitiinio, Sam. Tong., moraro, Rar.,
low, not high.
Lama, Sam., oww, Nuk., the candle-nut
(aleuriles tr aba), hence, ubiq., a torch
or candle.
Maliimiilama, Sam. Haw., maramara-
ma, Tah., maamaamii, Nuk., fitd-
ramn, N. Z. Rar. Mang., mama (for
maxima), Tong., ri/miirama, Viti,
light, lustre.
Malama, Haw., marama, N. Z. Tah.
Rar. Mang., maama, Nuk., the moon.
l^niiiiliima, Sam., to watch, »py ; wkj-
/(("/((, Haw., lo obsorvP, ri'gard, obey,
take care of.
Lnntll, Sam. Tung., to chew, craunch ;
liiimii. Haw., iiiiiii, N. Z. Mang., to
eat Iragmenis, lo eat what is lell oftcr
a meal ; iiiiiu. Tab., to eat,
IMim, Sam., iit/iiinii, Viti, ran'. Tar.,
/iiiiiii, .N. '/,., Iresh water.
Ann, Tiiiig., u lake.
liiiiiii, .\. Z., a mixture, as grnvy.
Laya, lulnfjn, Simi. Tong., raijii, riiiiipii,
N. Z. Mang. I'au., /•»«/, ranm, Tuh.,
iiliiiiii. Haw., to weave, braid,
Laya (I), iiriiii. Tab., akil, ana, Nuk,,
light, not heavy; faint. Haw., to flool,
swim on the water.
Layatila (?), ragtUiru, N.Z. Rar. Mang.,
raii/ira. Tab., |X'tty chief, freeman ;
Iniiiilila, Wuv., conqueror.
Layi, rmji, laiii, tai, aki or ani, ubiq.,
the sky, heaven.
Ilinji-marir, Rar., fair weather; N.Z,,
mild, gentle, g(Mid-natured,
Layo, Sam. Tong. Viti, rujii, Rar. Pan.,
run. Tab., »7((r«, N. '/.., nalo. Haw.,
mil), .Nuk., a fly ; luioiian. Tab., a
gnat.
Layona, Sam., raijmia, N, Z,, to under-
stand, perceive.
Laoa, Sam., Aocn, Haw., to lie choked.
Lapakail ('), rajiakau, Rar., riiptuin.
Tab., tajkiaii. Haw., ajHiiiu, Nuk.,
medicine, to physic.
£.«/>// (f), wy)^, N. Z., to scnrch, look
lor; liipiiUipii, Haw,, to collect to-
gether, to pick up, as small slicks for
fuel,
Lapiivak, Sam., a mistake, slip of the
tongue: lapuwate. Haw., foolish,
worthless.
Lasi, »am.,lalii, Tong., rnhi, N. Z. Tah.,
rai, Rar. Mang., great, large.
RaveriUii, Tah,, ruverai, Rar., many.
!
POLYNESIAN I. R X I (' <) N.
:J0<)
Jjdtn, Sam. 'run;;. Kiiw., ruin, S. '/..,
Iiiiiic, (liiiiic.Hliriiti'il ; /(ixii, \'ili, (|iii('t,
COIItl'lllt'll.
Iiata (I), Tittn, a kind nl' Irrr,— nt Tnli.,
tiiscnrpus I'cliili.s ; at N. X.. mclnisi.
(Icros roliiiNtn.
ijdU, Id, Slim,, lini, loll, Timij;,, ran, N. '/..
Uitr. Mnn;;., I'aii. ; run, run, Tiili.,
Inn, lliiw., an, nil, Niik., iiilraii,
mini, Vlli, Iciil', ti'liagc.
Liiii-iilii, Sam., Idii-iiIii, 'I'oiil;., riiiirii,
Uar., riiiini. Tali., rmimt, .Man;,'.,
Iiinolin, Wnw., iiiinlin, Niik., mlrn-iii-
iilii, Vili, hnir (irihc lioail.
Lini-nmUi, Sam. Tong., pyclasli.
Imu, Tong., mirfncp, nn-n, — lau-lnhi,
broati ; liiiiliiii, Sam., a plain, a tiililc ;
riinriiii, N. Z., a plain; liiiilii. Haw.,
brimil, — liiumanui, level gurface.
L(IH, Tiiii^., to It'll, (lismiirso, reckon;
liiiiiin. Slim., s|)occh, wrmon ; liiiinn, '
Haw., rricnilly, Kix'lal, iiitimnU*. I
Pariiii, Tab. .Manj;., jiriiii, Nnk., to 1
8|M'ak ; jki/iiH, I law., to lie, tell (also,
hixxl, — lian-jiiiliiii, to iK'triilh : jnirii-
jxtriin, N. '/.., to rummand.
Lail, Tong., Jrlii II, Sam,, to pinch.
Lau, Sam., nil, Tong., run, N. 'A., mlrnn, ,
Vili, a biindn'il; WM,Tah. Kar. Aliing., '
««, Tabu., two hundred; Inn, llaw.,«(/, !
Niik., four hundred. (Gram. ^ 01.) |
Land (.'), niiikii, Uar., Iixiit, Haw., »(w;«, ,
Tab., koiikii, N'lik., rittea, Viti, lo
have, |H>ssess, obtain ; riiwii, N. ■'/,., !
possessions. |
Lava, Sam., enough, indeed, c.vceedingly; ;
ri/iv/, Kar., /«iv/. Haw,, enough; riiiva, I
N. Z., a remainder, — to the utmost, — i
e.xceedingly ; Iciii, Tong., thereupon,
indeed.
Lat'O (>.), /ii''nr(ir(i, Satn., tiirava, Uar., a
lienm in a house, a rafter; kiitiva,
Nuk., a round log serving as a beam
along the front of a house.
78
Ldllilkdi ('), iiii'iihii, Uar., riiniiii,'\'i\\\.,
Iiiviiiii, Haw., nrnikii or iivnin, Nuk.,
lo catch IIhIi, — a lishcruiaii.
Lave, Haw., nivi\ Tall. Kar., rniir, I'au.,
niT, Tong. Nuk., to take, to lake
away.
J-iivnii, Sam,, to protect ; run-. Tab.
Kar., lo do.
Le, ric, Sam,, kore, linrr, N. Z., knrv, knrr,
Kar., oir, nr. Tab., olc. Haw., koe,
Nuk., no, not. ((iram. ^ li:).)
iifjll or rfn, Sam., rfn, Tong., rrlm, N. '/..
Tah.,/f/', Kar.,/(7i", llaw.,ry(//, .Nuk.,
ashes.
I'inlin, N. '/.„ (luHl, — lo lly as dust ;
jnirlin. Tab. Haw. Nuk., piirn, Kar.,
scattered, blown niHHit like dust.
Helm, Tab., two hundred thousand ; Mm,
Haw., four hundred ihousand. (Gram.
Ll'i (>.), rri, Viti, lilii, Sam. Tong. Fok.,
good.
Leka (.'), rrka, N. Z., rckanka, Kar.
Mang., rciiren, 'l"ah,, Iciitrii, Haw.,
rcki, Viti, pleasant, delightful, joyful ;
eku, Nuk., melodious, pleasing to the
ear.
Ttinhkiilekd, Tong., poca, Nuk., hand-
some (a|)plicd only lo men); tunlinlrn.
Sum., a young man ; tnnirknirka,
N. '/,., a captive, a slav<'.
Lek, Sam. Haw., rcre, N. Z. Tah. Rar.
I'au., lo lly ; Mc, Tong., lo rim.
Lrliii, Sam. Tong., lo drift away; rrrcn,
N. '/.., to depart.
ITclrlei, Tong., to run together, or in com-
pany ; Jiirrrri, 'J'ah., lo meet.
Wiikiirerr, N. Z., ([uickly, immediately ;
nkarerr, Mang., thereupon, straight-
way.
Marrrc, N. Z. Mang., to perish, to pass
away.
Kiirere, N. Z. Kar., elelv, I law., a mes-
senger.
Letno, Sam., lo drown ; miilcmo, Sam.,
\
310
V II I l,<) !,()(! Y.
jMrrinn, Mnni;., ilniwnnl ; jhi/ciiio,
lliiw., Ill Kink iiilK llir wilier; piiiiiiii),
Tnli,, jui mil, N'uk., »li|>|Hry.
Lemii, '('"111,'. Viii, lliiw., ilir l)iiiiiM-ki
rtiiiii, \. Z. Kar., llic skirt ol" a gar-
lllrllt.
Leifd. Sam., mil, Tung., nua, Unr. Vili,
/run, I law., /m. Tall., inn iillil (A((,
\iik.. Iiirmci-ii', — yi'll.iw puiiil.
Jli ii'i, \. '/,„ till' scrri'lioiis Ml' the cjc, —
rrwinmi, a Nrllnu lily.
Leo, .Sam. Tdim., to wak-li, j-iiard.
Leo, Sam. Tung. Iluw., ini, S. '/.. 'I'ali.
Knr., voice.
Leu, Tcin^., lo »|K'ak ; nko, I'aii., Ian-
giia^.-.
ijepr, Wiww, ijxijif, Niik., Ilio I'liiiil) of a
riK'k. ;
Lejm, I law., ;•'/»), .\. /. Tall. I'aii. ,«■/»(, '
Nuk., I'arlli. ilirl.
Li I'll, Sam., mnclily, slngnant; Tcing., n
LeU({\\i. .'),7""'»'",Tali., kiirtii, Uar. I'aii.,
kiieu, Nuk., cincliirc, dn-ss of tlio
women.
LeiI'd, Haw., siisjirndcil, iM'ndiiluus, — llio
u|i|)or rcgicin of Ihc nir, — n flag,
slrcnmiT; /(tk, Tali. Mang., tlic over,
hanging firinnmcnl, — .Mang., a Hag, a
trni ; reini, N. '/,., die cyilid ; ri'ii,
Niik., lo droop, to hang down, — a
(lag, — the red flesh hanging from a
fowrs neck, &c.
Lctfit, Sam., reva, Tah., era, ,\iik., a
trt*;, the galaxa spnrla.
Lt, Tong., lo tosa, throw, — Uli, to fling
with liiree, — /iaki, to ca.sl nway, alxin-
don ; ti//e or tulci, .Sam., to throw, lo
drive, — //'«'/, lo root up; In', Haw., lo
rise up, lo lift up, — hno-lri, lo cast
away, reject ; nkiri, N. 7,., to throw,
dan ; kirili, .Mnng., to turn, shako,
throw ; kiriti, Kar., irili, 'I'ah., to lill
up, to draw out; kokiri, N. Z., fo
spring up i Dili, I law., lo am'end. (Stf
aJNo (iti.)
hi, Haw., til hang' liy llie neck, to slraiigle,
— lilr, lo gird, liiiid aUiut ; ri, Uar.
Mang., to lie, liind ; siih, Sam., tied,
made liiHt : /((//, Haw., Inii, .Mang.,
til tie nil.
Ilia, .Sam,, a dream, a vision, — used in
speaking iif a chief; Haw., to pmider,
medilate.
IjUI, TiMig. Il:iw., ill, Nuk., a nil, — the
egg of an insect.
Liu (!), //"//((, 'I'ling., rilinriliii, N. '/.„
liiiii, M.'iiig., disagnialile, hateful ;
liiilin, \'ili, limlisli, alisurd.
Likil ('.), rikiirikii, N. 'A. Uar., nnrin.
Tall., almiiiiiialile,
Llliit (.'), liliii, Sam., giddiness, fear fnim
U'ing on a height; tin, Haw., shaking
or trenililing thriiiigh fear; rikii.
Mang., Ill wake with a start.
Iiiki (<), nki, .\. Z. Uar. .Mang., ikt,
Tung., ikiiki, Nuk., ///, Haw., lii.
Tall., iiiiiiii, Sam., little, small.
Lii/ii, Haw., riirii, Tnli., lillle, piece-
meal, liy hits.
Ltll, lii, ii, uhiii., anger, angry.
I'li'ii-li/i, .Sam., lo rebuke ; lui'o-lili, I law.,
lo ipiestiun with [lertness, to assume
airs.
Lllo, Sam., u secret ; Tong., to hide, con-
ceal ; riro, N. Z. Uar. Mang. Tah.,
lilo. Haw., io, Nuk., to pass from one
state lo another, lo pass away, — gone.
Ii»l.
LltlKl, Sam. Haw., rimti, Uar. Mang.
I'uu., imii, Nuk., nimn, Tong., tiiju.
Viti, riijii, N. '/.., hand, linger.
Liiiiii, rimn, iina, iiinia, five (Urain.
§30).
Limil, rimii, imii, uhiq., sca-wccd, s<'a-
moss, sponge.
Ltno, Haw., rino, N. Z., a rope, cord.
t
. h
P O I. V N K H I A N I, K X t C () N.
311
lillfl, Sam. 'I'oiin., ///)/, liiiiii, \,'/„ lliir,,
t/'", Niik., iiiiii, lliiw,, tin, 'I'lili., Ii'
IMiiir mil.
I\lii/iiii, iiiiiriiit, miiiiiiii, iiimiii, |i(iiiri'cl
Dill, lllllil^ll'll, Njllll.
Jjltl', Haw., li/r, N. '/.., iiri/r, lliir., like.
Lito, I law., ii/ii, N. '/,., a liiiil.
Jjllt, 'I'liiiy., ;•/(/, MaiiL,'., /r//'", .Sam., fiiriii.
Tail., mill, llai'.,tip lurii niiiiiil ; //////,
Tiinj,'., Ill cliaii;;''.
Nliiiii, I law., lo wliriil, turn iis a lup ;
niii, Nnk., a t<i|),
Uliifin, Sam., lo runic. In pi, — unni',
(Itail (used in H|Hiikinj; dl' ii iliii'l');
tllin'ii'. Haw., Ill alli'liil In, iiii'lilio
liiwarih, In' liivoralilt; ; iiiniiiiiiii,
,, , . •
iMaiiL;., I'liiMlir.
Liii, 'rmii;., /■('/, N. X., tlir liulil ol" a
ciinm- (i. 0. the |'mit wliirli liiriis), —
////, Haw., (■/■/(, N. Z. Tall., i», Niik.
1(1 Irak, liili^i'-walcr.
Lo, Tun;,'., rit, 'I'ali. •Man;?., o, Nuk., /"(',
Sam., mi. Pan., an ant.
Im, Haw., "a small liliu'k insect."
Lfl or h'l (i|ii. l),/iio-iiiii/iiu, Sam., /(«///(«'',
Haw., niiirw, Mun;j;., uvahi/ic, Nuk.,
iin iilil woman.
Itiiuii, Tall., olil (applied to persons).
Rii/iiriilii, Tall., n\(c, — liiriihe, foclilo ;
riirii/ii, N.7,., olil, fcclilo with ii;;o ;
/iilii, I law., oppresscii, wcarioil, heavy.
lailcn.
Piilimi, Sniii., Iiiiliihi, Tong., sick, ap-
plied to chicl's.
L(ilii, Haw., slow, tardy, Ceeble ; n>hi,
Tah., loi, Kar., toil, labor, fecblcnea.s
from labor.
Lo or toil (!), Inlnii, \'iti, to stoop, bow
down (applied to women) in mourn-
in;{ ; tiilou, Fak., Haw., /«/o/«, Tong.,
to sirtop, liond, l)ow down,
Tiiioru, N. Z., to lie weak, inlirin j titrori.
Tab., to stumble. Tall down.
Loliii, Tong., a crook, a hooked stick ;
loii, Haw., a hook.
liOil, rmi, mi, iiliii|., lung, — also, much,
very, exceedingly.
Im-milt(l, Sam. Tung., rni-miila, N. Z.
Itar. Tall., tears.
lill/iO (!), /ii'ii, Sam., rii/,11. Tar., to come,
111 liap|ien, lieiiiiiie; rnhmi, Itiir., riKi-
hill, 'I'ali., Imiliiii, I law., itkiJiia, Nuk.,
allecli'd liy, reailied, uvercunie by.
Koko, N. '/,., Ill liiid.
Loll, Haw., imi, \. '/,., til iiirn oyer,
iiiiliilil, cliange.
Loll, Haw., m//. Tall,, holulliiiria, bicho
da mar.
liOlo, Sam., the kernel ol' the uld cocoa.
mil; the oil expressed Iruiii it, — liiliilo,
lilt ; liJii, Tung., uil, iiily ; liili). Haw.,
riiro, N. Z., on, Nuk., the brain, — mar-
row ; iKi, Nuk., llie con,' of breadrniil,
sap.
hilit, Maiig., til have the taste ol", to
savur 111'.
Vitkiiliitii, \"\li, /ii/(ii,'l\tnn., fii/ij/o. Haw.,
Iiiiiiro, .Mang., a pudding in which
cocoa-nut oil is an ingredient ; roroi,
N. '/.., a kind of pudding.
IjOnil, litli)iiii,'\\m^„U\ press; lonii, Sam.
ihiw., rumi, N. Z. Rar., onii, Nuk., to
rub or pniss » ith the hand, to shampoo.
Loyl (?), riii. Tab., aki, uui, Nuk., loijii.
Viti, Ix-'d, couch.
Loyo, Sam., niin, Tong., a sound, report,
news; lono. Haw., n report, news,
fame.
lut'ii/iijio, iSani., Jiiniiijo, Tong., roijo,
tcakiiroijo, N. Z., roix>, iikarum, Uar.
Mang., loim, hnoloiio. Haw., fmirao.
Tab., oh), ono, Nuk., ««, Tar., to lieor.
Loyo, /o/«yo,Tong.,(|uiot, peaceful; holiuii-
roijo, N. Z., to make peace. (S(«7o.)
Loto, Tong. Haw., rolo, N.Z. Tab. Uar.,
olo, Nuk., the middle, cenlr<>, within.
Liito, Sam. Tong., the mind, heart, dis-
position. In other dialects it has this
sense in compound words, as luto-
312
P H I L O L O G Y.
maiUii, Ilnw., godcMionrtcd ; rnto-riri,
Riir., iII-li'iii|H'rril, nngry-mimleil.
Lnio, Slim. Tong. F{iir. Tnh. Haw., a
liikf, jioiul.
Lntixi, Sam. 'Pong., nn enclosure. (See d.)
IdMo, Snm. Toiig., dtn-p.
LotU, Si\m. Tiiiig., prnyer, religion.
Lli, /ii/ii, Miiw., /•(/, ;•«/•«, nii, N. Z., ////»,
Snm. Tong., i/ciir, Tiili., to sliiike
(act.), to scatter, to sow.
naliihi, Tong., to shake, to quake.
narncnie, Uar., earthqiiake.
nuiiiiir, Tong. N. 7.., txioioi, Snm.,
naite, miiieiie, iirue, Ilnw., <iiiei/r,
iieur, T«h., «/«(, N.Z. Mnng., to slinke,
tn'mble, (|Unko.
Lidf, Haw., or/'z-r, Tnh., to vibrnte, rock,
change nboiit.
NiiJii/ii, Ilaw., tidiiii, \uk., liendnclio ;
miiiiiiii, Tah., pangs, sorrows.
Lll(t, rud, ltd, ubiq., two (Grnm. § 30) ;
ritarmi, N. Z., lew.
Koliiti, 'oliKi, koriiii, oniii, lioiia, yc two
(Cram. § .Mil).
T}iii-/ii//i(i, S;im., tiiiddk\ hnif.
Tiiliiii o JM, Snm., luiiti-h), Tong., turn-
riijm, Kar., niichiight.
Lud, run, iKi, ubi(|., a pit, nn excavation.
IdUn, Tong., tid, Ntik., lii/iKi, Vili, riinki,
N./C. .Miing., /««/, Haw., to vomit.
Luki (?), riiki, Pan., dark; mi, Tnh.,
night.
Luhl (0, nikii, \.Z. Mnng., lini. Haw.,
to dive.
Lulu, rum, N. '/.., close, hidden ; Mang.,
a shelter; lulu, Ilnw., a. calm spot
under a lee, to lie quietly at anchor.
Piiruru, Tnh. Unr., n veil.
Lulu, Sam. Tong. Vili, owl (cpi. secret
bird .')•
Lwga, Sam., iiluyit, Tong., rutja, N. '/..
Rar., luiui. Haw., uua, uka, Nuk.,
nbove, up ; maiiahnja, Sam. Tong.,
high.
Lupe, Sam. Tong. Fak., pigeon.
LuiU, rutu, N.Z. Tah. Mnng., to strike,
pound, JK'at ns a drum ; lutu, Hnw.,
to destroy, overthrow, kill.
M
3/(7, nbiq., prep., with, nt, in, by, — conj.,
and,— C4illcctive |)article, &c. (Gram.
§§ 15, 67, OS, ::».)
Ala, the root ot" the pronouns of the first
|H?rson,dual and plural. (Gram. § 39.)
Mn, Sam. Tong. Viti, Tar., «(;^»»/d, N.Z.,
iiktimri, Mang., /i((rt/Hfl, Tali., ashamed,
bash III I.
Af(i, Tong. N.Z., mdma, Sum., maeniar.
Haw., pnlc, clear, white, pure.
Ma, nuie, Ilnw., tmie, Sam. Kar., maehe.
Tab., to fade, wither.
Faka-turi, Tong., Jii'd-iniinid, Sam.,
wtika-mn, N. 'A., Uimd, Tah. Rar.,
hoo-niaemae. Haw., to cleanse.
M(l, uKiimi, Tong., mania, Sam. Tong.
Nuk., to chew, — a mo ithl'iil.
Mana, Tong. Uar. Ming., matia, Nuk.,
a niouthrul, a morsel ; tiuui, Tah.,
flKXl.
Miitjii, Kar., maa, Tnh., n piece, portion
ofnny thing (i. e. a bit, morsel); hence,
vunjii, Kar., uiaii, Tnh., ma, I'ong.,
some, n portion of. (Gram. § I'J.)
Ma, Tong. Nuk., uiasi, ."^am., malii, Tah.,
mamlrni, Vili, n kind ol' lixxl made ol'
vegetables buried in the ground and
lell to lerment.
Miilii, Tong., sour, tart.
Maea, Snm. Tong. Fak. Tar., makei,
I'nu., a rope.
Mafa (.'), mama/a, Snm. Tong., taimaha,
N. 'A., teiiiiim or tciiui, Rar., teialui.
Tall., taumulia, Ilnw., heavy.
Mafatua, Snm. Tong. Tikop., to sneeze.
Maju, Snm., to heal, ns a sore, — musty ;
mahu. Tab. Nuk., patient, meek;
■■
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
813
Nb
^
Haw., silent, indisposed to conversa-
tion.
Mafuna, Snm., rough ; muhtina. Haw.,
the scaly np|M;arancc oflhc skin caused
by drinking kava.
Mahaya ((ju. ?), N. Z., maapa, Rnr.,
mahaka, Nuk., vuUuie, Tul\., mcilioe,
Hiiw., twins.
Mai, hither, — direclivc particle implying
motion towards the 8i)eiikcr; also, miii
or mci, prep., trom. (Gram. §^ 58, 07.)
Mai (?), mci, Tong. Mang. Nuk. Tar.,
iiiiiiorc. Tall. Alang. I'au., aeiore.
Haw., the breadfruit.
Mai, N. Z., a s|)ecies of pine, whose
cones are eaten by the natives.
Maile, Tong. Haw., tmiirr, Tab., meie,
Nuk., a vine similar to the laurel.
Maka, Tong., »/«'«, Sam., a .stone ;
viiikii-la, Tong., mitkti, Nuk., »««'(',
Tub. Haw., a sling, — to sling; miika,
N. Z., to throw.
Makalili (?), ma\ilUu, Sam. Haw., maka-
riri, N. Z. Uar. Pan., makaii, Nuk.,
mariri. Tar., cold.
Makaive, N. Z., a hair; matiue. Haw., a
small substance, a bit of string, and
the like.
Maku, N. Z. Uar., w/a'i/. Haw., wet,
moist.
Makiikii, N. Z., ma'u'ii, Haw., moist,
fresh, cool.
Mala, Haw., mara, N. Z., a garden, a
small pieee of cultivated ground.
Mahie, Sam. Tong., a public s(]uare in a
town; miiitic, N. Z., a couil-yurd ;
Tab., a sacred enclosure, a temple ;
mate, Nuk., a sacred spot, usually
in a grove, dedicated to a divinity ;
manic, Mnng., an olTering of coral —
((i/ffdiitlv tie (Otail).
Mala, Tong., misfortune ; mnlaiit, Tong.,
Sam., unfortunate, wretched.
Maramara, Tab. Mang., bitter.
79
Malfllu, Sam. Tong., charcoal.
A/afeya, Sam., a travelling party, — a party
of chiefs making a tour; Tong., a pub-
lic S|H'cch, — to preach.
Mtirtiijd, Uar., mama. Tab., to bear,
carry.
Malayat (?), nmranai, Kar. Mang., ma-
raai or manunnii. Tab., llie south-
east or trade-wind ; malunni. Haw.,
the northeast or trade-wind ; imirag-
ai, N. Z., the east wind.
Malie, marie, ubi(i., gently, softly, nicely,
—calm, quiet, gentle (see ni).
Mahh, Sam., to fall spontaneously, as
fruit; liaw., stinted, withered, applied
to fruit.
Mdlo, nutro, tiiao, nbiq., the girdle worn
by the men around the loins.
Maro, N. Z., tnuo, Nuk., a fathom, —
i. e. the length of a ii.a/o.
Main, Sam., bard, firm, solid, — hence,
the strong or riding party, the govern-
ment ; also, the tutelar divinity of a
town ; maru, Uar. Mang., bard, —
hence, tmilo. Haw., maro. Tab. Kar.,
mao, Nuk., nioro, Mang., maruke,
N. Z., dry, bard and dry, as land.
JlTijro, Tub., to strive, quarrel.
iV/((/(i, Tong., well done! welcome! ma-
mi, Mang., welcome!
Malosi, Sam., malolii, Tong., strong.
Mulolo, Sam. Tong., rested, refreshed,
recovered from sickness; lioo-ma/o/o,
Haw., to rest; maroro, Uar. Tar.,
strong.
MaMo, Sam. Tong. Haw., maroro, Mang.,
;««(w, Nuk., w((;'(im,Tah., the flying-
fish.
Mnlu, iibiq., shade, protection (sec lulu).
Main, Haw., mom, Mang., secret, bid-
den.
Mala, nuUiilii, Sam., molii, Tong., maru,
Uar. Tah., morn, Mang., noliinolu.
Haw., mariiru. Tar., maliimu, Viti,
sofl, plastic, pliable.
314
PHILOLOGY.
f t
:\ i
Mam, N.Z., broken fine; morua, Mang.,
going to ruin.
Manniiaru, Knr, Tnh., bruised, mnshcd,
beaten, concincrfd.
M^ma, iiblq., light, not heavy.
Mama, Tong. Sam. Viti, n ring.
Mama, Snm. Tong., to leaU ; hamanui,
'I'lih. Haw., opened, agape.
Mamahi (qu. f), Tong., mamuc, N. Z.
Kar. Mang. Nuk., pain, ache.
Mamao, Fak. Sam. Tong. Kar. Haw.,
far, distant.
Mauiart, Mnng., hkhikh, Nuk., egg,
spawn.
Matia, ubiq., power, — powerful.
Mdiia, Tong., Tikop., thunder.
Manaia, Snm., nidiien, Kar., moimti,
Nuk., hanAsnrcc ; fa'a-iiKiiiaia, Sam.,
aka-mani<i, Tong., to adorn.
Manako, Sam. Tong., to desire; wi«-
nako, N. Z. Kar., iiianao, Tab. Haw.,
niakiw, iitiilcw, Nuk., to hope, remem-
ber, think, consider.
Manata, Rar.,annoying,oirending; Haw.,
disheartening, discouraging.
Manattl, Sam. Tong., to remember, con-
sider; mii/ialinja, N. Z., a memorial,
keepsake.
Maildva. Snm., the holly ; Nuk., the in-
side ; Mang., the belly, soul, mind,
conscience; manau-u, Haw., (in com-
pounds,) heart, disposition, as mamaa-
Icii, charitable, kind-hrartod.
3/(7//flf(7,.Sam.,/«(/?(«r«. Nuk., the breath;
jndWKiij, Tong.,7«(/«aftf, Kar., ma/id-
wa, N. Z., breath, animal spirits, cou-
rage ; mumiwu, Maw., a spirit, appa-
rition, — a time, season, space.
Mama, Haw., iminianui, Sam., the teeth
on un edge, — the st'usation felt in
fding a saw.
Mano, Sam. Tong., 10,000; N. Z., 1,000,
Tuh. Kar. .Mang. Taliu., 2 00; Haw.
Nuk., 4000 (Gram. § 30).
Manoyi, Sam. Rnr., monni, Tah., fra-
grant.
Mann, ubiq., a bird.
Maniifili (qu. wandering bird ?), ot«««-
«•;>/, N. Z., mtiiniiri, Kar., nuitiihini,
Tab., iiuililiiiii. Haw., manildi, Nuk.,
a stranger, visiter, guest.
Manu, Sam. Tong., pain about the face;
manna, Sam., a wound.
Mann, niaiiiiiu, Sam., mounia, Tong.,
happy, fortunate, pros|)erous.
Mnuumnnn, Sam. Tong., covetous.
Maya, minuiminjd, Sam. Tong., matia,
viananiana. Haw. Tabu., makn, ma-
kamaka, Nuk., amaa. Tab., — a
branch, the barb of a hook, &c.,
branching, forked.
Maija (?), fiikamatju, Tong., Jh'amaya,
Sam., to open wide, as the mouth ;
maijai, N. Z., the mouth.
MayaiO, Sam., vuma/o, Haw., fresh,
swet;, as water ; mayaro, Mang., mild,
aflable.
Maye.lO, Sam., itchy, itching; tnimeo,
Haw., an itching, pricking pain, — the
taste of pt^pper; also, niciico. Haw.,
to tingle, itch ; meijco, Mang., bitter,
stinging ; maijco, Mang., bitterness,
chagrin, mortification ; mancniico,
Nuk., titillation, sensation of iK'ing
tickled.
Mango, Sam., dry ; tai-maijoa, Mang.,
low tide (dry sea).
MayO, maHo, muko, maO, ubi(|., a shark.
j\iaO, Haw., to fade, as o decaying plant,
to corrupt; maoa, N. Z. Tuh., to
ripen, to be completed — rip<! ; mo-
molio, N. Z., to ripen.
Ma&lll, inabi, Sam., moont, Tong., true ;
mao/i. Haw., maoi, Nuk., true, real,
— indigenous, native ; maori, N. Z.,
niaui, Mang., indigenous, native ; ma-
ori, Mang., civilized.
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
316
Maori, Tiih., mart, Rar., really, indeed,
merely, only.
Mapu, Sam. Nuk., malm, Tong., to
wliistle ; miipiica, Sam., to sigh.
Masa (?), malia, Tong., viafa, Viti,
empty ; mamasa, Sam., mama)ui,
Tong., low water, shnllow.
Malta, Tall., (iiiici, appeased, satisfied,
comforted ; Haw., to rest from labor,
hoo-maha, — to lie satistied.
Masaki (l), mahald, Tong., mala, Rar.,
Mang., nuCi, Sain. Tali. Haw., sick.
Maki, Nuk., a sore.
MuKinuiki, Nuk., nuCiiiuCi, Tali., to
desire, long for (i. e. be sick for).
Masi (7), main, N. Z., to work; mahi.
Haw., ijaohi, taiihi, Tong., to culti-
vate, till the soil.
Masoa, Sam., ma/iod, Tong., arrow. root
(tacca pinnalifida).
Masui (?), waluii, Tong., mahue and
matte, N. Z., to lenvi;, to abandon,
flee from ; tnaiic. Tali., to fly.
McitO, ubiq., face, eye, front, edge.
Matiimata, Sam., maiiuitii, Tong., to see.
Mata-2)0 (night-eyed), N. Z. Mang. Tah.
Haw. Nuk., mata-ivi (bone-eyed),
Sam., blind.
Mata-riki (little eyes), N. Z. Mang.,
mata-rii, Tah., maia-lii. Haw., nuUa-
iki, Nuk., the F'leiades.
Mala-hili, Tah. Haw., muta-ili, Rar., a
year (the rising of the Pleiades, which
marks the commencement of the yi'ar).
Ktnnata, Tong., amata, Sam., tiiiiiila,
N. Z., hainiiittii, Tah., aknmatii,
Mang., //wwH((/'/, Haw., to In-gin.
Mata-ainana (qu. ?), Haw. Nuk., the
common |)cople, the lower classes.
Matuku, miita^ii, ubiq., afraid.
Matau, ubi(i., fish-hook.
Mate, ubiq., to die, to be hurt, ill, sick.
Mute, malcmale N. Z. Mang., Haw.
Nuk., to wish, desire, long lor (i. e. to
be dying for).
Mate, Sam., to suppose, explain ; Tong.,
to conjecture.
Matikuku and motiao, N. Z., matikao
and maikno, I'au., maikiikii, Mang.,
Nuk., »«rti7iV(o,Tikop., mai'ii'it, maiao,
Tah. Haw., finger-nail (see kiikii).
Matolu, Tong. Haw., matorii, N. Z.
Mang., tiiatoii, Nuk., thick.
Matll, Haw. Pan., to run off, to flee.
Man, ubi([., fast, firm, fixed, constant ; to
obtain, hold fast, adhere, remain fixed.
Mail or iiinii (f), moH, Mang., a hill,
mound ; hence, man or moii, a col-
lective particle (Gram. § 14).
Mainjd or moinjn, manna or niouna,
iiiaiia or iiinua, ubiq., mountain.
Mau (!), m.iitmiii, Sam. Tong. N. Z.,
iiioiimnii, Rar., spoiled, wasted, de-
stroyed ; maiiiia. Haw., maiia, Tah.,
to waste.
Mllllle, Haw., moitri, Mang., timid, fearful.
Muilll, Sam., the moon ; Haw., the first
day of the new moon ; maiira, Mang.,
a season, time.
Maunu, N. Z. Haw., moitnu, Mang., a
bait for fishing.
]\ie, with (.sec Ilia); hence, me, N. Z.,
Tall. Mang. Nuk., tnci, Rar., mai.
Haw., like.
Me, N. Z., wei, Nuk., mai. Haw..
almost, near, about to (Gram. § 53).
Mea, ubiq., thing.
Men, Haw., to do, to act; N. Z., to do,
to say, to think.
Meika, Mang. Nuk., mei, Pau., maia,
Tah. Haw., the banana.
Meituki, Rar. Mang., meitaki and meitai,
Nuk., maitai, Tah. Haw., good.
Melie (?), merie, Mang., w/c/r, Nuk., com-
mon, free, not tabu (perhaps from
malie).
Mill, Sam. Tong., to rub, stroke, smooth
down.
316
PHILOLOGY.
MilimUi, Haw., minmiri, Mang., to
examine, as a curiosity.
Mtlo, Sam. ilnw., mio, Tong., niiro, N. Z.,
to twist, make twine ; komirimiri,
Mang., to twist ; milo, Tong., a top,
to spin round. (See fill, Jilo, vilo.)
Miro, Tah., mio, Nuk., a tree, tlie
thcspecia populnea ; miro, N. Z., the
podocarpus lerruginea.
Mtmt, ubiq., mitjere.
Minamina, N. Z., to long for any thing ;
Haw., to grie\e for the loss of any
thing.
MtSt, Sam., w/«7j», Tah. Haw., mii, Rar.,
to regr.it, to grieve ; niihi, N. Z., to
sigh, to moan ; mii, Mang., to be
oUcnded, bear ill-will.
Mill, Sam. Tong., mi. Tar., to dream.
Mltl, Tah. Afang., the sea, — salt water.
Miti, Tong., to suck ; Nuk., to lick; Haw.,
to eat pot with the fingers ; mitimiti.
Haw., to nibble.
Mon, ubiq., domestic fowl, hen.
Moa, Tah. Kar., sacred ; Nuk., an atten-
dant on the ttiuas or priests.
Moake, Mang., moae. Haw., the east wind,
the trades.
MoanU, ubiq., the sea, ocean (never used,
like Uii and miti, for "«n// water")
Mohuka (qu. ?), Tong., moiikii, Nuk.,
mau'ii, Sam. Haw., gra.ss.
Moke, Mniig., hidden, or lost; mo'e. Tab.,
to be last or forgotten (not to Ix; con-
founded with moe, from mose),
Mnko, wo'o, ubiq., lizard, reptile.
Aliiko, N. Z., the tattooing, probably from
ils spiral and curving figures.
Mokomoko, Tong., cold (as the skin of a
reptile), — momoko, a disease altenilcd
with chills ond wasring of the (lesh ;
vioko, Nuk., lean, — momijo, benumb-
ed, — a cough.
Mokopuna, N.Z., tno'opuna. Haw. Nuk.,
a grandson ; makupuna, Mang., a
nephew.
Mole, Tong., smooth; molemole. Flaw.,
Inld.
MoH, Sam., mori, N.Z. Rar. Mang. Tah.,
oil for burning, a lamp.
MontO, Nuk., momac, Tong., petty,
small, — a scrap, crumb ; momoino,
Sam., bruised, mashed.
Momoa, Tah., to promise, betroth; Haw.,
to give libt!rally.
Momona, N.Z. Tah. Haw. Nuk., lus-
cious, succulent, pleasant to the taste.
Mose, Rot., mofe, Viti, niofic, Tong., rnne,
Sam. et cirt., to lie down, to sl^.-ep.
Molieija, mocya, iiiuemi, niockti, nwea,
ubiq., a sleeping-mat, bed.
Moenaku, N. Z., irimoc, moemoed, Rar.,
tiioerika, Mang., moeiihane. Haw., to
dream.
Fie-mnlie, Tong.,Jia-mne, Sam., hia-moe,
N. Z., to wish to sle<'p; hia-moe. Haw.,
to sleep, — deep, sound sleep; Nuk., a
nap, a fourth part or watch of the
night.
Moto, Tong. N.Z. Mang. Rar. Tah. Haw.,
to lx)X, strike with the fist.
Motu, ubiq., to cut, cut ofli separate; se-
parated, cut off.
Motif, ubi(|., a division, a st^parate dis-
trict, n small island se|>aratc from the
main lun<l.
Mil, Snm. Tah., a noise, noisy.
Mufl, uliiq., front, before.
Mtlka, Tong., a sprout, shoot, blade of
grass, — the bud of the plantain or
Ixuiana ; muka, N. Z., flux ; tnuko,
Nuk., the bud of the breadfruit; 7nu'a,
Snm., a young cocoa-nut.
Muli, Sam. Haw., muri, N.Z. Rar. Mang.
Tah., mui, Tong. Nuk., allcr, behind.
Taii-muli, Sam. Tong., the stern of a
vess(d.
Mulu (?), mulumulu, Sam., to rub, to
f '
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
817
clenn ; mum, N. Z., to rub, wipo out,
obliterate, wasb nwuy.
Musu (?), or mii{l), musumusu, Sam., to
whisper, — listless, wenrlcil, unwilling;
omuhii, Nuk., mumiihii, mitmu. Haw.,
omuiiiu. Tab., to wliisper.
Kniimiimv, Rnr., iJuimii, Tab. Ilnw.
Nuk., amiiamu, N. Z., to wbispcr, to
murmur logetber, to gruml)lc; miii-
mid, Sam., to grumble, to be dissatis-
fied.
Mumii, N. Z., mamii. Tab., niamu,
mumn, Mang., miimule. Haw., taci-
turn, stupid, sullen.
Mutii, Mnng. Nuk., miUcki, Rar., silent.
Ml/rare, Rar., dumb.
Mutle, Snm. Tong. Mang. Nuk., tictic,
N. Z., grass.
A7j<<M, Tong. Haw. N. Z., to cut off, cut
short, terminate.
N
Na, prep., of, for, by (Gram. ^§ 20, 00).
N(l, there, then, that — sign of distanro in
place aud time (Gram. ^§ 41, 52, 50).
L(i, rti, ana, and aiu ap|)ear to be
variations of Ibis particle.
Na (!), nc, Tong., he (used as nominative
to a verb), — nana, they (dual) ; nan-
tolii, thi y (plural).
Ne, no, Tong., na, Sam. ct csct., the
root of the |)ossessive pronoun of the
third jwrson singular (Gram. ^§ 30,
40).
Na, Sam. Tong. Tab. Haw., quieted, ap-
|>oased, ns a child ; faka-nn, Tong., to
bush, make (]uiot.
Na, niihd, Sam., haka-iia,fand, Nuk.,
to coucoal (i. e. to hush up).
Na ! X. Z. Uar., noha ! Tab., lo ! Ixihold !
NinA, Tab. Miuiu;. Haw., to look at,
observe, U'IidIiI.
Na, Sam., nakv, N. Z., nac. Haw., but,
80
only J anake, N.Z. Mang., awof. Tab.,
only, merely, alone.
Na, Tab. Rar., lirst, beforehand.
Nafa, Sam. Tong. Nina, a drum.
Naku ( >), tuiiituiu, Sam., to desire, obey,
regard ; nniinou, Tah., to desire,
covet ; nomino. Haw., to reflect, to
think of with approbation (see ma-
niiko).
Namil, Sam. Tong., odor, scent ; namu-
iiamit. Tab., foid-scented.
Namu, Sam. Tong. N. Z. Tab., a mus-
(|uito,
Nanu, Sam., namu. Haw., to speak un-
intelligibly, to speak in a foreign
tongue.
Namu, N. Z., to grumble, to murmur ;
nanu, Mang., to curse.
iVfl.se, Sam., nahe, Tah., fern.
NatU, Tong,, to kneel ; Nuk., to mix up
puddings, to wash clothes ; Mang., to
dip, soak.
Nave (!), navenave. Tab. Mang. Nuk.,
pleasant, delightful, joyful.
Nea, RaT.,neafiea, Haw., lonely, desolate.
Net, ni, here, now, this, — sign of present
place and time (Gram. §§ 41, 52,
50), — hence and, presently, ana-nei,
now, to-day.
Neke (or neki), N. Z. Rar. Mang., ne'e
(or Mc'(), Tab. Haw., to move, to move
along, — to remove (act. anJ neut.)
Ne'i, Sam., lest.
Neva, Sam., ptxjr, destitute; neice, Haw.,
to sutler from want ; neneva. Tab.,
fcxilisb, insane.
Nt, Sam. Fak., some, — a collective par-
ticle (tiram. § 1 1).
Nisi, Sam., nilii, Tong., some; lihi.
Haw., a portion, lot (Gram. § 12).
i'i or /(', — (a number of words having
a general connexion in sense, ap-
|K.'ar to 1k^ derived from this rotjt),
— niania, mania, manie. Haw., ma-
818
PHILOLOGY.
nia, Tah. Mang. Nuk., manium,
Sam., marino, N. Z. Rar., smooth,
calm, as the sea ; manino, Sam.,
clear, pure, as water ; nuinino, Niik.,
clear, serene, calm ; maninmiino,
Haw., the abating of fierce winds ;
maim, Haw., to bo as.suagcd, grow
calm ; marirc, N. Z., calm, peaceful
(sec also m(Uie).
Nljl (?), manifi, Sam. Tong., thin, nar-
row ; nihinihi. Haw., diflicult, atrnight,
— a narrow ridge.
Nifo, tii/io, nio, ubiq., tooth.
Nino, Toh. Nuk., to twist.
NtU, ubiq., cocoa-nut.
No, prep., of, for, from (Gram. §§ 20, 09).
No (?), none, Sam., to borrow ; noi, nonoi,
Hnw. Nuk., faka-noi, Tong., inoi,
N. Z. Rar., to beg, to entreat.
Noa, N. Z. Tah. Ror., common, free, not
restricted.
Nofo, iiolio, noo, ubiq., to sit, to dwell.
(In 'Vi\\\\\\ta\, jiaruhi has liecn of late
substituted for ndio).
Nofixi, Fak. Tong., ttootjn, Mang., moAo,
Hnw., n sent.
Nohinohi (qu. 1), N. Z., vohioi. Haw.,
little ; ii(vc, Mang., a dwarf.
NoflO, Fnk. Sam. Tong. Tab., noni. Haw.
Nuk., the morinda citrifolia.
Nut, N. Z. Rar. Haw. Nuk., great, Inigc.
Nuku, Mang., place, spot ; nu^u, Sam.,
town, district ; nuku, Rnr., nu'tt, Tah.,
army ; nuku, Viti, sand, a sand-bank.
(In Nukuhiva, Nuku-nono, &c., it
seems to mean island or country.)
n
Ua, na, ubiq., the plural article prefixed
to nouns (Gram. § 14).
HaeyjUt, Sam., to sigh ; imcmic, Hnw.,
the asthma, ditlicult breathing ; kaikai.
nainai, Nuk. (qu. naenae?), exhaust-
ed, 8|H!nl, — referring to a person's
(mtience or breath.
Unfa, Sam. Tong., jid. Tar., «p<i, Mang.,
ana, anana. Haw., a fathom.
Hahek (qu. ?), a)iele, Tah., ya^/aere, Rar.,
nahrk. Haw., wild grass, herbage,
underwood.
rJai, Tong., we. Haw., to gnosh the teeth.
Hakau, Tong. N. Z. Rnr., the bowels,
the viscera, — supposed by the natives
to bo the seat of the mental operations,
— hence used for the heart or mind.
iJako, Tong. N. Z., jirt'o, Sam., kahua,
naJiua, Nuk., tonahua. Haw., fat, lard.
Halafu (?), para/iu, N.Z., soot; nanaliu,
Itinahu, Haw., charcoal.
IJaie, Tong., right, becoming, proper;
yari, Rar., goo<l, pleasant, agrceoble.
rialo, Snm. Tong., paro, N.Z. Rnr., mj/b,
Hnw., am, Tnh., hid, forgotten, lost;
also, matj<ilo, mngaro, maaro, with the
snmo meanings.
IVaka-i/aro, N. Z., to hide, cover, over-
whelm.
IJalu, Sam., i/aru, N. Z., nalu. Haw.,
surf, billow.
riaiie, Viti, n brother or sister; tua-^nc,
Sam., tuijane, N. Z. Rar., tunane,
Nuk., taitiiiutne, Ilnw., elder brother
(of a sister, — see tua).
riano, Tong., tiono, Haw., red-faced,
flushed.
llaya, N. Z., noise, uproar; ttana. Haw.,
to bark, growl.
Uao, Sam., the gum, the grinders; pau,-
Tdug. N. Z. Hnw., to chew, to champ
with the teeth; auau, Tnh., to gnash
the teeth.
Kahu, tumaJiu, Nuk., tuihu, luinnhu,
Hnw., to bite; kithu, ntiJtii, \uk., to
scold, rebuke.
IJaoi, Sam., tuuinao, Hnw., to steal.
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
319
rJaosi, Sam., paohi, Tong., to make. (See
mati.)
IJase, Sam., weak, — ^ano-pase, lean ; wa-
hinahi. Haw., soft and thin.
IJata, Sam. Tong., a snake; garara,
N. Z., a reptile of any kind, a snake,
a large kind of lizard ; kakd, nana,
Nuk. (qu. kakati for j/agala?), the
large house-lizard.
Uata, Sam. Tong. Uar., difficult, hard
(Gram. § 78); Uiiata, Tah., with diffi.
culty.
Ilati, N.Z. Rar., ati, Tah., a member of
a tribe, — as IlcUi-Maru, one of the
Maru trilie; nati-Karika, one of the
Karika tribe; aii-Jtidd, Tah., a Jew.
(The original n.caning was, perhaps,
a descendant of Maru, Karika, &c.)
Uatil, N. Z., to scratch, scrape; nafu.
Haw,, to seek, search, look nllcr (i. e.
to leel about with the hands).
rjaua, Tong., a kind of disease, a cutane-
ous eruption; jwmo, N. Z., netce.
Haw., to sutler from illness, be in
pain.
J7efe (?), 5K-«, N. Z., lazy ; pert, Rar.,
iielc. Haw., poor, destitute.
Matjeic, N. Z., idle, slow ; macre, Tah.,
careful, doubtful, hesitating.
IJepuyeptl, Mang., tender, soft, yielding
to the tou6h ; nepunepu. Haw., full in
flesh, plump.
Uofle, Sam., j/oie, Rar., yo/wi, Tong.,
easy, facile (correlative to patd, —
Gram. § 78).
Ilolo(l.), yoijolo, Sam., a rushing, bubbling
noise ; ijoyoro, N. Z., a noise like
snoring, — to snore; noiioo. Haw., to
snore. (See yulu.)
rJoto, Ham., to sink; N. Z., to make
deep, to sink, as a well.
Hu (!), yunu, Sam., waha-yu, N. Z.,
dumb; nunii, Haw., taciturn, unsocial.
iJlllu (?), tagiilii, Tong., to snore; pitpuni.
Rar., nuru, Tah., to groan, growl,
roar; puguni, Pau., to grunt, — puru-
pitru, a hog; nunulu. Haw,, to growl,
grunt.
Nil and mmu. Haw., to groan; mapupu,
Rar., thunder.
IJutU, Fak. Sam. Tong., mouth of any
animal, beak of a bird ; putii, N. Z.
Pau., ?/<«, Tah., nutu, Nuk., lip, beak
of a bird; nutu. Haw., snout, beak.
O, prep., of. (Gram. § 17.)
O, Sam. Tong., conj., and. (Gram. § 68.)
O, Sam. Tong., to go (used only in the
plural); o, Tah. Uar., to enter; faa-6,
Tah., aka-u, Rar., ho-u, Haw., to cause
to enter.
0, Haw., to extend, reach out the hand ;
a/, Sam., to reach ; oo, ta-oo, Rar., to
receive.
Oja, Tong., owa, oha, N. Z., kaolia,
iiohn, o/iii, Nuk., a/njh, Sam., amha,
N.Z. Tab., aroa, Uar. Mnng., a/ulia,
Haw., love, good-will, esteem, com-
passion.
OJi, Sam., to hove space to enter; Tong.,
near, — to approach; aid, N. Z., oi,
Haw., to approach, draw near. (Sec
kqfi.)
Ofo, Sam. Tong., olw, N. Z., ho-ohiioc.
Haw., to wonder.
Ohana, Tong., a husband or wife, u
spouse ; aJuina, valuiiia, Nuk., a hus-
band.
Oku, Nuk., (Ml, Haw., a rafter.
Oktokl, N. Z., oioi. Haw., rest, repose.
Oko, Along., hard, firm, solid ; Nuk.,
strong, [Kiwcrful, — large, full-grown,
ri|)e ; oo, Haw., ripe, mature, — oolea,
strong, hard.
320
P H I L O L O G V.
Ola, Snm. Haw., ora, N.Z. Tah. Uar.
Mnng., to live.
Owl, Tong. Tah., to draw out, hriiig
out.
Omo, Tah. I law. Nuk., to suck.
One, ubiq., 8and.
Ono, six (Gram. % 30).
Ono (?), ononnn, Sam., tPinptwi; oiioii,
onoimnii. Maw., to entice, sodure;
iDiixmo, Tah., earnest, solicitous.
Opa, Uar,, to wrap up, to swathe; Haw.,
to squeeze, press.
Opata, i law., a ravine on the side of n
iiiountnin ; Nuk., a precipice.
Oso, Sam., to leap ; olio, N. Z., to leap,
start up, — excited, moved.
Oso, Sam., olio, Tong., o. Haw., provi-
sion for travelling.
Ota, Sam. Tong. Uar. Mang., mati, N. Z.
Mhw., raw, uncooked.
M(Ua, Haw., green (or raw) as wood
not y<!l seasoned ; mala, Unr. Mang.,
miilomato, N. Z., nuionuin. Haw.,
green, as grass ; nmtd, Tong., a club
made of a young tree.
Oti, Sam. Tong. N. Z. Mang. Haw.,
ended, done.
Oto, Tah. Mang., to mourn, lament.
Pa, Sam. Mang. Haw. Nuk an enclo-
sure, a tence, wall ; N. Z., a fortified
town ; pa eniui, Uar., a country.
Patii, N. Z. Rar. Tah. Haw., a wall.
Pa, \. Z. Mang. Haw., to touch, to strike
gently ; ptipu, Uar., to beat (sixpaki,
pati, patii).
Pa, N. Z. Tikop., father.
Pa, Sam., X. Z. Uar. Haw., barren, child-
less.
Pd, Sam., ])(ipa, N. Z., to burst.
Pa, Sam., barb of a hook ; Tong., a fish-
hook of shell.
1 ae, Tah. Rar. Mang., acparnte, apart,
aside; a side, border, division, part,
portion ; Tah., a collective particle
((jiram. § 14).
7}iji<ie, Rar. Haw., tipae, Tah., to put
aside, to turn aside, to pervert ; waiia-
pit; N. Z., to accuse.
NiijMif, tttpae, Nuk., nijxie, Tah., by the
side, adjacent ; rajHicaii, Tah., outside
(|)erhaps from fiisi).
Pahi (qu. ?), Tah. I'au., pai, Rar. Mang.,
a ship.
Pahn (qu. T), N. Z. Tah. Haw, Nuk,, a
drum.
Pai, N. Z., good ; paia, Sam., sacred ;
Tah., a priest.
Paka, Tikop., jmi\i, Sam., a crab ; paka,
Mang., pa^a, Tah., shell, crust, enve-
lope.
Paka, N. Z., any thing dried by the sun ;
pikiipiikn, Nuk., the crust of twikcd
fruit.
Pakiiinka, Rar., paajiaa, Haw., burned,
scorched, baked hard.
Pakart, Uar., jxuiri, Tah., wise.
Pakeke, N. Z., hard, solid,— hard, diffi-
cult to do ; jHikcke, Mang., to disobey ;
jxicc. Haw., to misunderstand.
Paki or Uiki, Tong., to strike against,
impinge; jxi'i, Sam., to touch, strike
lightly ; jHijHiki, N. Z. Ror. Mang.
Nuk., jMii, jkipai, Tah. Haw., to
strike with the palm of the hand, to
slap ; paptiki, Nuk., jmijiai, Tah.,
Haw., to Iwat or chastise.
Pajmki, Pau., jiajxii, Tah., jMi, Haw.,
to imprint, mark, write.
Puiiia, pajMiina, Tab. How., the noise
of clapping, breaking, rattling, tick-
ing, &.C.
Pakisi (?), paki, N. Z., fair weather;
jmihi. Haw., clear, unclouded, fair.
Pala, jHira,ixia, ubiq., an ulcer, sore, —
POLYNESIAN I, E X F C O N.
asi
piirulrnt mnltcr, — putrid, — foul, Hlimy,
Hrrnsy.
Ptiitt/iu, Haw,, decayed; jniruU, Miui^.,
worn out.
Palale, Ilnw., jximre, N. Z., to cxtrt
one's sell" with haste und disorder, —
tumult, confusion ; jmrari, Tah., bro-
ken in pieces.
Palaoa, llnw., ixinimi, N. Z. Miing.,
pmiai, Nuk., tht; H|M!rni-whule, — tooth
of the whale, ivory.
Palast, Sam., scattered about; pdrnhi,
Tah., jKtrai, Mang., to sit, remain,
dwell.
Pale, Tang. Haw., jxirr, N. Z., to ward
off, parry, turn aside.
Pule, Sam. Fuk. Ilaw., jmrr, N. Z. Rnr.
Mang., jxtc, Nuk., hat, Ininnet, veil,
head-dress (any thing to keep olT the
sun).
Pariran, N. Z., jirrcmii, Tah., wing of
a bird; jtelcleti. Haw,, u sliort, wide
canoe (sec ktipa).
Pah, \\a.y/.,]xiri, N. Z. Tah., a precipice,
— also a stronghold.
Pan (?), jMiri, N. Z., to flow, as the sea ;
Mang., to gush out, to pass out,
PaloiO, Sam., mlxiMo, Vili, name of a
sen-worm which np|M'ars on the reef
at a certHin season of the year ; hence,
piiMo, Sam., nihiMo, Vili, paroro,
Tah. Kar., name given to two of the
niDUllis (ante, p. 08).
Palll, Sam., to tlissolve ; Tong., to mix
with water; Iluw., to lick, lap water.
Paliiptilii, \Uiw,,jHiriij>uni, Tab., jMirii-
ka/iii, Unr,, soft, weak ; pnnipiini,
Uar. Tab., bruised, wounded, hurt.
/ anakt, Uur., to repair, substitute new
for old ; paruii. Haw., to redeem, give
a substitute, — piiiai, to repair, mend.
/ ant, Sam. Tong. N. Z., to besmear,
plaster; apani. Tab., mopa/ii, Kar.,
81
jnjxini. Haw., to 8tt)p up, close up,
cover over.
Paiii, Nuk., cocoa-nut oil for anointing
the head.
/ aye, liar. I'au., jHir, Tab., jxirjHir, Haw.
Nuk., that which supports or sustains
any thing, — a prop, stool, stand, &c.
Pagu, Mang., pakii, jxiiiu, Nuk., /»/«o.
paiio. Haw,, black.
Pao, Tub. Uar. Haw., to dig or hew out.
i rtO, Tab., 7«w, Haw., fast, firm, fixed;
iMa./xu), Tab., to make_ fast, to fix, to
ap|Hiint, to keep, to comprehend ; lion.
pao. Haw., to establish, fix ; lii/xio,
Tab., a sign, evidence, confirmation,
1 apa, iibirj., any thing flat and solid, as a
plank, table, rock.
PiijMijMipa, Mang., flat, level.
Pupa, Haw., a row, a rank, a file ; yxi-
/Hiija, Mung., a line.
i apn, Tab. Mang. Pau., pnpalaiji, Sam.
Tong., foreign, foreigner (applied to
the whites).
PajHi-aiii, Nuk,, " a part of the sky ; —
also, a term applied by them to iron"
(i. e. liirt'ign substance).
Papalhja (?), jmpanr/u, N. Z. Ror.,
papaliiKi, Haw., piijxiriii, Tab., pa-
jHiiiia, Nuk., the cheek.
Papaku, N. Z„ low; p'lpait. Tab. Haw.
Nuk., shallow.
Papll, Tab. Haw,, a plain, a level piece
of ground ([icrbaps a corruption of
ptiixi).
1 ata, Tong,, coarse-grained, — one pata,
gravel (i, e. coarse sand) ; pata. Haw,,
rain falling in large drops.
Patt, Sam. Tong., to clop the hands
logelber ; Haw., to smite with the
palm of the band (see/(rt, paki).
Patiti, Tah. Uar., to fasten; Haw., hard,
firm, compact, obstinate.
Pain, N. Z. Uar. Mang. Tab. Nuk., to
strike, to lieat (see pa and tu).
322
PHILOLOGY.
Pail, Snm., to ccnso ; N. Z. Tnh. Miitif;.
Haw., jmii, Rar., dniic, riidnl, piisl
nwny.
Pun, Hnw., coniplt'to ; liriicc, nil, the
whole.
Pml, Snin.,to full ; /w//,Tiili., to ilrsrcriil.
Pf, Snm., if, wlu'ii, as ; Ik\ Toiig., when,
nlso, only i '(/«% Ton;;., ^r, /*•</, \. Z.,
pea, Vnk., jhilid, llnw., |H"rlm|)s.
iVi, Snm., like ; y«', N. 'A. ct cut., likn
(iisfd only in roni|x>nn(l Irrnis, ns,
penei, like this, thus, — /x'/«, like that,
— iwftaf liko which, how? vVc.)
Pt, Sam., p/o, Mnng. Haw., extinguished,
extinct.
Peka, Tikop. N. Z., Wi;, Tong., ;»•'«,
Sam., a bat.
Peha, Mnng., iipe/,11, N. Z., n cross, n
slick laid crossways j j>ck<i>j<i, N, Z.,
n corner, or crossing of the stre<!t.
Pekiijifhi, lUr., jifii/if<i, Tah., ollindcd,
hurt, perplexed, atllicled (i.c.rronsid).
lloitjieii, llnw., to punish, to accuse
maliciously.
I'ljwka, Hnr., Uijica, Tnh., n yoke, —
also, Rnr. 'J'ah. Haw., to .seize, confine
as n criminal.
Pehe, N. Z. Rnr., to remove, move oil';
]>ec, Tah., to follow, — iifrj>ef, to hasten ;
/)«?, Haw,, to run nnd hide.
Pelt, Snm., Mr, Tong., iika-jtfrcjHrr,
Rnr., here, Fuk., a favorite, — lieloved.
Pelr/ir/f, Snm., apcre, Tnh., to cherish,
minister to.
Pelll, Hnw., ])fni, Tnh., pcu, Nuk., to
double, fold up.
Penil, Pnu.. the hend; Tah.. a stone
pestle.
Pfpe, Sam. Tong. Tnh. Nuk., a butterfly.
Pej>c, N. Z., trembling, llulleruig ; .Mnng.,
frngile, triable; Haw., soil, pliable,
broken fine, rotten; Tah. Nuk., rotten,
bad.
Pfti, Nuk., to trt'nd, to trample on ; jieti-
lirii, Tong., pigs' feci, trotters.
' ', \. Z., the young of on animni ; npi,
Tnh., Ao/Ho, Nuk., (tpio, Hnw., young.
P f, Mang. Nuk., y»(Vi<i, Hnw., kupi, Nuk.,
fiill.
Pin, Tah. Rnr. llnw. Nuk., nrrow-rool
(tni'ca pitnmtifidn).
Pihe ((|u. 0. N. Z., n funeral odo; Haw.,
lamentation, wniling,
Pihr, Tnh. Nuk., n song.
Pi/ti, S. Z., hiki, Tong., pii, "finm., to
ndliert', stick, cling to ; hence, piki,
N. Z. Rnr. Mang. Nuk., pii, Tnh.
Haw., to climb, nscend.
/ th'O, jii'o, ubiq., to bend, curvc,^curvcd,
bent.
I ihlH, Hnw., piiiii, Nuk., jiiro, N. Z.,
Mang., fetid, foul-scented ; pirtni.
N. Z. Rnr. Mnng., putrid, spoilt.
Plli, Hnw., ;»>», Rar. .Mnng. Tnh., to nd-
here, stick to, stny with ; pili, Fnk..
iienr, adjoining; piri, N. Z., close,
near, crowded.
Pipiii, Tnh., /«, Haw., .stingy, parsimo-
nious (i. e. close).
Piri/id, Rnr., to compress, stifle; pi/ilia,
Hnw., crowded, close, straightened,
diiricult.
1\ijii/i, Haw., tapiri, Tah., tdpii, Nuk..
to besmear, anoint, stick on,
0]>iJi, Haw., the cramp; pipii, Nuk,,
contraction of the limbs,
Pili, Sam,, }>ili, Tong., bif. Tar., n lizard,
Pipi. ubi(|., the cockle (shell-fish).
I isi, Snm., to fnll ; bihi, Tong., to splash.
/ ISI, Sain., Inhia, Tong., contagions,
PitO- ubi(]., end, extremity of n cord, stick,
&c., — hence, the navel ; Haw., the
crown of the head ; hito, Tong., full.
brimful, — i. e., reaching to the top.
Po, Sam. Tar., jmirii, Tah., to strike with
the hand; jioko, Nuk., to strike one
arm with the other hand open ; jifiekn.
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
898
Nuk., to hit will) ii hIoiic or ihot ;
jMrii, llnw., to kill and rob.
Poi, /n/ini, Tonn. Tiih. Miiii;^. Nuk., n
piiste or jelly iiinili! of Irriiicntcd vc^r.
Inblrs {iim or miisi), niixiMJ with thi'
juice of the rocoa-iiut, or of the ilrii-
cirna root. {Slv jxiki.)
Poka (!), boka, Tong., yjwi, llaw., to cnii-
Imle.
Pokai, N.Z. Nuk., to fiild, roll up; jxMii,
llnw., to riK'irrli-, go round,
Poki, N./. Knr. Mung., ym'j, Tiih. Ilaw.,
riivcri'd.
JIi/)oki, N. Z., Iiijutki, llnr,, litpoi, Tnh.,
p(ii, Haw., to cover.
Poki, Nuk., p<)U, Unw., a pnsle or pud.
diii^ made of the tiilo or nrinr. root,
bilked, mashed, and mixed, (at Nuku-
hiva,) with cwoa-nul juice, or (at
Hawaii), with water. (Soc /mi.)
Poko (.'), jxikii, N. Z., (ijnM), Tah., a pit;
jDikiiinkii, Mang., deep, dii;; out.
Ttijnn, llnw., to sink, as into water;
lapoko, N. Z., to enter, — also, a bag.
Poko (I), jw'o, llaw., iipoko (qu. for iilii-
jmko .'), Unr. Mang. Nuk., iijioo, Tah.,
the head.
Ulii-Utkn, Ton);., ulii-jw'o, Sam., ijaro-
kttviikit, Viti, the skull.
Poko-iiri, N. Z., ;wo-/(irj,Tah., /JOo-/iHC»,
llnw., tlie shoulder.
Poko-tllU, Tikop., llie knee.
Pum, Tnh., to proclaim ; Mang., to call
U|H)n, demand.
Pola, Sam., Ma, Tong., jxxi, Nuk.,
thatch of cocoa-nut leaves.
Polo (]), poloiCi, Sam., jK>roi, Tah., to
charge, command ; pormtki, Uar., to
command, commission, to take leave
of; pirojMmMiki, N.Z., to take leave of.
Polo [I), jxJq/'eii, Sam., <tiiimro, Tah.,
iiiipm, Nuk., [)ep|)cr.
Pololi, Haw., jxiiori, Tah., pooi, Nuk.,
Pona, Sam. N.Z. liar. Nuk., a knot;
Haw., the pnrtN of n HU);nr-cnne bo-
twirn the joints ; /xiHtijxmii, N. Z.,
joint ; /ntiu, Nuk., a bunch or knot of
four bread-fruits tied together.
Pono, N.Z. llnw., right, just, giKxl.
Poyi (f), ni/miji, Vili, /««, Tar., jn, Sam.
Tcing. et cirt., night (used nisn liir day,
in enuuieraling, — as, lasi /m, one day :
JK> fill, how many days ?)
Ihiiiii, Sam., benighted, — /lonisii, dnrk,
A'//'<J, I law., to set or disapjx'ar, as the
sun.
Jtiiiii/niiji, Tong,, mfiopiiiiliotfi, Viti, jn-
■/K>i)i, Uar., jMiiii/Kiiii, Haw., jnijioi.
'I'nh., morning, — hence,
Ji'ti}iljoiii,'l\>nf!..,ni/K>ijiMljo)ii,\[\\, /njioi,
Nuk., ii/m/io, Uar. Mang. Haw., to.
morrow ; iijmjio, \uk., some time
hence.
I'diiH, Sam, llaw., Imiiti, Tong., jmiri,
N.Z. Miing., iKiiri, Uar. Tah.,y)Op/f«/e,
llaw., dark.
Pixin, Snm., fog, mist (qu, dny-dark-
ne«s) ; jHta, jwan, N, Z., smoke,
Poyi (0, jxmi. Haw., jnjnki, Nuk., to
Ix'sinear, daub with a coloring matter.
Poifl, Uar., ]Hii(i, Tnh., hungry.
Popo, Snm., an old cocoa-nut ; hilio, Tong..
rotten, mouldy; /m/w. Haw., a mass
of matter of a globular form, — rotten,
decayed, ns vegetables ; yOT/w;, Nuk..
dust, especially from decayed wood, —
a fungus.
Potiki, N. Z., imlii, Haw., the younge.si
member of a family; jiotii. Tab., ii
girl.
Polo, Snm., /x>/o, Tong., wise, shrewd.
cunning; tiijioto, N. Z., suspicious.
Polo, N.Z. Uar. Mang. Tab. Hnw. Nuk..
short,
Dntdxito, Tong., round ; ]iotoj>oto, Snm..
clo.se tog(!ther, assembled.
Poll, ubic],, post,
Pu, N, Z., a bundle, bunch, — a trilx-.
324
P II I L O L O (J Y.
IhiiiiI, — /'«/'«. to liind in a hunilltt ;
piipii, Kiir. Tnli. Iln<\., n liiinrh, knot,
biuullr, — II hiinil, ('oin|)nny ; lliiw,, n
huncli, iiM orgrujin i)r Icnvi-M. (Sec /«.)
"m, t^iim. 'I'lih. Iliiw.,n Cdni-li, ii lriiiii|H't,
n iiiiiHki'l ; N. /., n rvliiicliT, iniiski'l,
flutn (i, I', niiy tliiii); lo lilow tlir(>ii);li).
Puhi, N. Z. 'i'lili. Iliiw. Nuk., hiihi,
Tcinn., /<//«, Man;!., I" blow, lo ptill', —
hpnci*, to tire II iMiiMkct, wliidi the iiii-
tivc.i lit lirsl Hiipiiotivd lo In; doiio by
blowing into it.
Pit, Mnn|{., thick ; pii, N. '/•., ii jirpgnnnt
womiin.
Jiiilii, liiihiiUi, Tong., viife, viiviift, Vili,
jtii/iii/ii, Nuk., jiiir, Mnng,, to swell,
Nwollen ; piita, Sam., Hwolirn, Inrgc.
Pnf/)iie, llnw., largo, plump; biihurii.
Tut., Inrgp.
Plia, llnw., to np|)rnr nt a ilistanre, ri.sc
up ns .smoke ; jiiia, Nuk., loam.
Pua, N. Z., bmi, Tonj,'., a species ot'plimt
Itciiring n lnr;!e (lower ; jum, Uar.
Mnng. llnw. Nuk., n llower (see /»</).
Puakn, N. Z. Uar. Nuk., /jwihi, Ton^..
jiim'ii, Sniii. Tall, llnw., viitikii, Vili,
swine, n hog.
Punkii, .Maiig., n U-ast, animal, — e.xcla-
miitinn of displeasure; hiuikiika. Tar.,
bad, vile.
PuOkI, Uar. Nuk., piiti'i, Sam., to vomit ;
jmtii, Tab. Haw., lo How out, pour
forth ; n-tikii.pmtki, N. Z., to cause lo
apix-ar, to uller.
Pulli (,pi. .'), N. Z. Tah. Haw. Nuk., piii,
.\lang., an eel.
I like, Tikop., Iiuke, Tong., /jmV, Snm., to
Iny hold of, .seize; puc, llnw., to
u.ssail, attack, — to gain what is an-
other's.
Puke, N. Z. Uar., viike, Vili, pii'e, Sam.
Tab., n hill, mounii, heap ; jiiie. Haw.,
to " weed out and hill up,ns potatoes."
I'ltke, Uar., pur, 'I'ah., a coUectivo
particle (Cirnin. § 14).
Ptlkll itt/m'ii, Nuk.,7>MM, Tnh,, any imall
glohiilnr atilMlnnce, a iN-rry, n joint,
knob, bull ; pioi. Haw., n protube-
rance, biiiicb, heap, — lump, a lot,
(Hirtion, — a collective sign ((iram,
§ 11); mhiikii, Vili, a knot; jniku,
N, Z., the aloninch, — Ihu blwk of b
ship.
Uiikii/iiikii, Tong., pinipiiii, Sam., /««-
/mil. Haw., Nipiab, short and thick,
I'ukiipiikii, Uar., rough, i. e. covered
with knobs.
I'likiitrtwirrir, N. '/,., pukiwaevtie, Rar.,
puuviie, Nuk., the ankle.
I'.iii.Uiiiu, Haw., the wrist-joint.
I'ii/xi-jiiikH, Mang.,puk'ot ltuk\ Tar.,
the buttoeka,
PtlUl, Wavi., piira, N. '/.,, a small particle
of any thing, n inoto.
i llle, Sam., lo dwrjK>, ap|ioint, govern ;
tiiliii/i, Vili, to appoint a king ; bii/e,
Tong., lo order, regulate, govern, take
council ; mbiire, Vili, a house for
public meetings and councils, and also
liir worship; jiii/r. Haw., jmrr, Uar,
Tab., to pray, to worship, — religion,
I Ule, .Sniii., /<«/(', Tong., mhiitr, \\\\, piie,
Nuk., a spotted shell, a s|K>cies of
oviila.
Puhpitle, Sam., hiilrbule, Tong., pure-
pure, N. Z. Tab., spoiled, variegated.
I'lipiire, Tab., a le|M'r ; jiiijiulc. Haw.,
insane, — a lunatic.
Piile-hhiia, Haw., pur-ehua, Nuk., a
butlerlly.
/ Ult (}), puri, N. Z. (passive pitrUia),
piitili. Haw., lo take up, to clasp,
/ liltiku or puluu ((|u. ?), piirokit, Mang.,
lo enveloiie, wrap \i\i ; piiloii , Haw.,
bii/oii, 'i'ong., piioii, Nuk., lo cover
th<! head, lo veil, — a covering for the
head ; pit/oii, Sam., buloijn, Tong., a
hat, bonnet, covering for the head ;
puhii, Fnk., a jacket.
PuwtU, Sum., bulolu, Tong., tnburbtu.
P O I, V N K H I A N I, K X 1 C () N.
886
Viti, nil iiliiiiil ili'Hcrilii'il nn n lurri'N.
(riiil |)nrniliiM>, Niiiiiilnl luwnrilM llin
linrthwcKl, 1111(1 xiipiioNccI to ini thu
iiImiiI<! ill' (livinilirH J /iiirutu or jKinitii,
Tall. Itiir, Miiii)(,, iKnilii, \uk., tint',
Imiiilioiiic, cxciiiiMitc, [MTlift (i. o. hen.
vi'iily. |iiiriuliiuiii'nl).
RtJiutii, 'I'lili., icrrcntrml |inrmliM>, rniiii-
try ofumilM.
Pitlll, Sniii., /iii/ii, Tiiiij;., piiii, Niik., iIip
lllltll Wllii'll CIIVclolM'H thr <"<)Cllll.|llll,—
iiw'd liir liiiiiliiiK, i-aulkiii).', i,Vc.
Piilii/iii/ii, Slim., hiitiibiilii, Toii((., tci
wrnp lip uliiHoly, to cover the bfxlyi
mliiihiy Vili, to coviT, lo liiiry ; puni,
N. /., to hold Inst, — n cork or sto|i|irr
fiir n iMvttlc.
Biilii, Toil);., jjiim, pitch, or any adhesive
snlMlnncc ; /nipiini. Tub., slimy, mi-
hosivo,
I IUKI, Suiii., hiinii, Tong., to jump, spring
up, Hy ; /iiinii. Mini);., to gush up, —
n spriiii;, I'oiinlaiii ; pinui, N. /., n
spriii); ; I luw., n well, pit, — /miKi-triii,
n spniij,', — iiKi/iiiiiii, to iKiil up, as
water out of Iho sen.
PitHt, Slim., lo eiiflosc, ns n net ; pinii,
Tiih. I law. .\nk., I'ini, Uar., to );o
rniinil, surround, eiicloso — l<i dose up,
finish, eoniplrle ; /iiini, N. /., close,
clo-sed up ; Mnii<!., finished, — piotitfii,
n senl (i. e, that which closes up);
tn-lmni, Tong., to shut, — n Ixilt or
bar; viitii, Vili, to shut up, to con-
ceal ; piipuiii, Nuk., to conceal ; y/i/-
iiijiimi, llnw., to di'ceivo.
Pliniill, Sam., hiinoii, 'long,, to incline,
bow down, siu)p (sec iO, tiilOii).
Pitnua, Nuk, Mang. Rnr., the young of
any nnininl.
Pliyo, Smii. Mang., pida or jmitn, Nuk.,
jiiind, Ihiw., /iiiu, Tab., coral stone.
Piitjii, N. Z., pumice, — also, nn anchor,
(which, where coral is found, is usually
n fragment of that stone.)
82
Pupil, Sum., rocky const, arched wny ;
llaw., roughly, heavily, — liitr pn/m,
to drag a log or eaiUM' through hriish
among ns'ks ; /nijiii-miiii, Nuk., rough.
/ M.Vrt, Slim., Iiitlui, Tong., /miinktt, N, '/.,,
pilin, Tnh., /nVj, Uar„ n Ikix, chest.
/ Ulu, N./. Miiiig. llaw. Nuk., to ri«<» up,
come in sight, ap|H'ar, enter, — nn i>n-
trance, nn a|»'rture ; put<i, Tnh., n
Wound.
IT/iiitit, Tah. llnw., n door. (.Sec yiH.)
P'lti; N./. Unr„nbng.
I'lltu, piihi/mtii, N.Z. Rnr. Mnng. Tnh.
Nuk., close, thick together, — to nsscm-
hie ; Jh'n-piitit, Sum., akn-piitiipiilii,
Knr., luM-piiliipiilii, Tnh., &c., to col.
lect, gather logi'lher, convene.
Pimerewere (ipi. ?), .N. '/.., pmmur/e.
vr/i; llnw., jmiiiivievrr, .Nuk., n s|>e-
cies of apiiler.
(There sei'ins to In- n thrcnd of connexion
running through most of the words lie-
ginning with pii ; the primary iilea
seems to Ik- In incrcnsr, either in size
or numlicr, — whi'iice, to swell, enlarge,
risi' up, (low out, — to lie joined together,
nssembled, formed into n bundle— or
into n heap — or into n solid sub-
stnnce, — to be united, tied up, wrnpped
round, &c. dec.]
Sa, Snm., //«, Tong., some one. (Gmm.
§ la.)
Sa, Snm. Fnk., sacred ; (t'd, Viti, bad, (|U.
siiccr, accursed ? See /««.)
Sae, hae,ae, ubiq., to tear, rend; — N.Z.
Tab. llnw. Nuk. liar. Mnng., wild,
furious, contentious.
Masne, Snm., nuihae, Tah., yiuie, Rar.,
nahiie. Haw., torn.
SaKa, Fak., srt'rt, Sam., haka, N.Z, Nuk.,
luCa, Haw., a dance.
i
Iv
..
326
PHILOLOGY.
Saka (7), }uM, Hnw., Iiatifuui, Tah., aka-
Ilka, Rnr., low, short.
Sakaii (?), fakaii, Viti, fuiknii, Tong.,
li'aH, Sam. Tah., a reef of rocks.
Akin/, N. Z., the sea-coust ; aiiit-tu,
Nuk., rocks, or, a rocky shore.
Sake (]), fake, Vili, hake, Tong., akc,
N. Z. Uar. Mnng., itf, Sam. Tah.
Haw. Nuk., up, upwards, over, be-
yond. (Gram. §^ 38, 58.)
S<i'sae, Sam., hiihake, Tong., eastward,
windward (i. e. up).
Knke, N. Z. Rnr., ac, Tah., to ascend, to
mount; ae. Haw., to i)ass over, step
over, embark.
Sala, hula, hftra, ara, luia, ubiq., sin,
transgression, guilt.
Sala, Sam. Viti, ha/a, Tong., a/a, Haw.,
lira, N.Z. T»h., ara, Rar. Mang.,*;,
Nuk., path, road.
Sala (>), siirasara, \'iti, araara, Tah.,
ara, Alang., mahara, N. Z., to Uxik at,
observe, see ; maarii ! Rar., Iwhold !
mehara. Tub., to consider, call to
mind; haJiiwi, halalo. Haw., to scruti-
nize, look earnestly.
Sale, Fak., haelc, Tong., haere, N. Z. Tah.,
acre, Rar., are, t-re, Mnng., helc, luirle
(plural), Haw., hce, Nuk., to come or
go, to move, proceed.
Salo ( !), mosalosain, Sam., mahaln, Tong.,
haohim. Haw., to doubt ; fc-masido-
salo, Snm., to reason together.
Maluilo, Haw., mUiarn, N. Z., numrn,
Mang., malian, kanahao, Nuk., to
wonder, admire.
Salll, .Sam., to strip, tear oil"; halu. Haw.,
hani. Tab., to conliscnio property, to
plunder.
Sama, Rot., famn, Viti, riima, Tnr.,
lumiii, Tong., aitui, Sam. et cn't., an
outrigger to a canoe.
Sao, Snin., to enter; luio, N.Z. Haw., to
put in, enclose ; au (qu. ao ?), Nuk.,
to enter.
Sao, Sam., straight, correct ; saosaoa, Viti,
Imaliaoa, Tong., just, perfect.
Sapai, Sam., ajmi, Rar. Mang., hapai or
hojm. Tab., to carry or support with
the arms; /utjxii, N.Z. Haw., to lif^
up, to elevate.
Sapo, Sam., halio, Tong.,o^w, Haw. Nuk.,
to catch, as a ball.
Sapu (?), /mjm, N. Z. Tah., ajm, Rar.,
pregnant.
Sasa, Sam., haluiii, 1 law., to beat, scourge.
Saif, Sam., /wM, N. Z., wind, dew ; haii.
Haw., land-wind of night, dew ; hahaii,
Tong., luiu, Tah. Nuk., au, Rar.,
dew.
Sail, Sam., /irtK, Tong., a king ; )mu, Tah.,
n(^, Rar. .Mang., kingdom, govern-
ment, reign ; huv. Tab., to surpass,
excel.
Saii-rei, Viti, (qu. good government?),
/w«,-Talv., ail, Rar., |)eace.
Sail, Sam. Fak., /i(fo, Tong., ao, Rnr..
«/«', N. Z., to come.
Sana, Snm., A«t'a, Hnw., wicked, sinful ;
rva, .Mang., to forbid (qu. forbidden ?).
Sauya, Sam., awpa, Rar., hauna. Haw,,
hiiua. Tall., ofl'ensive odor.
Faa-saii ga , Sam., to act mischievously ;
hoo-huinia-cle. Haw., to cause dis-
turbance, sedition.
Savill, Sam., havUi, Tong., a strong
brcc/e.
Se, Snm. Fak., /«-, Tong. N.Z. Hnw.,?,
Tub. Rar. Nuk., the indufuiito article,
— ul.so a verbal particle (Oram. §§ 11,
51).
>Se, Viti, sesr, Sam., hv, kelic, Tong. N. Z.,
ce, Mang., to err, mistake, wander.
>SW (f), hci, N. Z. Nuk., an ornament for
the neck ; I'au., a |H'nrl.
Seke (?), AcV, Sam., hekc, Tong. N. Z., to
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
327
slide, to slip ; lice, Tnli. Haw., to slip,
glide, mqlt nwny, flee; eke, Mang., to
give way, to go to ruin ; lieke, N. Z.,
eke, Unr., to descend ; heke, Nuk., to
retreat, ebb, as the sea.
Seke (?), hchi, Tong., eke, N. Z., ee, Tab.
Haw., to embark, to mount, as a borse ;
liekaheka, Tong., to sit Ujion.
Sela (t), liela, Tong., fatigue, breathless,
short of breath ; hem, N. Z., gaping'
(((U. gasping?) ; era, Mang., a pause.
Sele, Sam. Viti, Itclr, Tong., hclehek. Haw.,
to rut, to cut in two.
Mdlielc, Maw., to divide, to cut oH" a
portion for one ; maltere. Tab., to
portion out, to give over, to grant.
Sele (?), lulc, Tong. Haw., a snare, noose ;
Iwre, N. Z., to tic, bind ; ere, Rar., to
hang with a noose (sec fete).
Sclu, Sam., sent, Viti, he!ii, Tung., heru,
N. Z., a comb ; helu. Haw., to paw or
scratch the earth.
Sema (?), /tema, Tong. Haw., emu, Mang.,
left, sinister.
Hemn, Tab., to tempt. Hcnuihema,
Haw., want, need, necessity.
Semo (!), Iwmo, N. Z., to slip away, to
sink down ; Haw., to get loose, to
move away, to loose, to set soil ; Nuk.,
to loose, — also, to catch or overtake ;
emo, Mang., unstable, not fixed ; ma-
hemo, Tah., slipped otf, past away.
Sell, Sam., to stir about ; hen, Tong., to
ward off, to ovoid ; hen, Toh., eii,
Rar., to open a Aoot; hen. How., the
first shooting of beard in boys. [The
primary meaning seems to 1«, " to
push out" or " away."]
St(l (?), Jhusiasia, Som., h<i<i/ieo, Haw.,
proud, lofty, houghty.
Stapo, Sam., hiiilm, Tong., hiajio, Nuk.,
native cloth dyed brown ; also, Nuk.,
the (icus prolixa, from whose berries
the dye is obtained (which is probably
the original meaning ; sec kokii).
Sifo (?), fivo, Viti, hifo, Tong., ij'o, Som.,
iho, N. Z. Tah. Haw. Nuk., to, Rar.,
Mang., down, downward (Gram. § 58).
Sis'Jb, Sam., hihifo, Tong., leeward,
westword (i. e. down ; see sake).
Iho, Tah. How., to, Rar., a particle of
emphasis, used to form the rt-fleclive
or emphatic pronouns, myself, thyself,
&c., and frequently oflixcd to other
words (Gram. § 45).
Siki (?), hiki, Tong., N. Z., sVi, Sam.,
/((■*', Tab., to raise, lift up; hit. Haw.,
ikiiki, Mang., to hold in the arms, as
a child ; iki, Rar., to select, choose,
draw out.
SifiO (!), hiko, Tong., to lake up, collect ;
Nuk., to snatch or take owny ; iko,
Mong., to take owuy, carry oil'.
Slkll (?), si'ii, i'lt, Sam., hikii, ikii, Tong.,
ikii, Rar. Mang., hiii. How., ikn,
Tong., Vk, Sam., end, — to finish.
Sili, Sain., to exceed, to go beyond ; hili,
Tong., to leave oft", or finish, to be
completed, — to put or place upon, — to
lodge or be fi.xed, as o body thrown
into a tree ; iri, N. Z., to hang from,
to rest upon ; iri. Tab., to rest upon,
— a scat, a table ; Hi, Haw., to strike
or strand, as a ship; to lodge, stick
fast ; akairiya, Mang., a lodging-
place, dwelling, nest.
TJairi, Rar., to creep, to crawl ; nahili.
How., slow, lagging behind.
Hairi, Rar., (//((//, Tab., if", suppose, —
used only of past time ; (i. o. " that
being siij>jx)sv(l," — siijijiositiis — laid
down).
Itihia, Haw., oflt'nded (i. e. sh eked);
iria, Tab., angry, irritable ; iriea,
Rar., sorrowful.
Siua, Sam., /(/«<;, Tong. N. Z. Haw, ina,
.Mang., white or gray, applied lo hair.
Sinu, Fak., sinasina, Sam., hiiichina
i
PHILOLOGY.
Tong., mainaina. Tar., white, clear,
fair.
Miisitia, Snm., nuihina, Tong. Tah.
Haw. Nuk., itmina, Mnng., the moon.
Sina (?), /una, Tong., molUna, Tah.,
moiiic, Mang., a gourd, a bottle.
Sinn, Tikop., cocoa-nut oil ; hititi, N. Z.
Tah. Haw., inu, Rar., ointment;
tahitm, Tah. Haw., taiww, Rar., to
anoint ; hinu, Nuk., ink, tincture from
the candle-nut.
Hiniihinu, Tah. Haw., iiiuinii, Rar.,
anointed, sleek and shining, — hence,
bright, splendid.
Siya (?), kiijti, Tong., N.Z., ipa, Mang.,
hika, hina, Nuk., hinxi. Haw., hia,
Tah., to fall ; higa, Pau., dead (i. e.
fallen).
Sisi, Sam., hi, hihi, N. Z., to draw up,
pull up ; hi, Nuk., to fish with rod
and line; hiu. Haw., to pull.
Hi (qu. ?), Haw. Nuk., to purge.
StSl, Tong., At, Haw., to hiss.
Siva, Tikop. Rot., Civa, Viti, hiva, Tong.,
iva, ilea, Sam. et crot., nine (Gram.
§30).
Stva, .'^am. Fak., hiva, Tong. Tah., song
and cinncc, festivity.
Stva ('.), hiva, Nuk., o neighboring val-
ley or town, — yonder ; iva, Mang., o
foreign country.
Sivt or ivi, Sam., ivi, Tah. Rar. Mang.
Nuk., iwi, N. Z. Tah., fiiii, Tong.,
sui, Viti, bone.
Ivi, N. Z. Mang., a family, clan, (as
in Scripture, " bone of my bone.")
Soa, Tikop., hoa, N. Z. Tah. Haw. Nuk.,
a friend, companion, mate.
Fc-sodsodni, Sam., mutual assistance;
hixi, N. Z., to help.
Ilahna, Tong., a pair, a couple.
Soma ! Sam,, Iwnui ! Tah., Friends !
(used only in the vocative).
Soifua, Sam. (ceremonial), — to live, to
be in good health ; hoihoifua, Tong.,
handsome.
Soisoi, Sam., (cerem.,) to laugh ; Itoihoi,
Haw., pleased, gratified, joyful.
Soka (I), eoka, Viti, hoka, Tong. Pau.
Nuk., to pierce, thrust in ; )u>ka,
N. Z. Mang., a sharp-pointed instru-
ment.
SoKO (7), so^o, Sam., to spread over, to
flow over, to join, to come; Iwko,
Tong., to flow as the tide, to come;
Itoko, Nuk., to sail, as a ship.
Solt (1), Mi, Tong., ori, Mang., to ask,
to beg (see koli).
Solo, Sam., to sprciad over, to run over,
as an eruption, a liquid; sola, Sam.,
hola, Tong., fiolo, Haw., /loro, N. Z.
Tah., oro, Rar. Mang., to run, to
flee.
Solo, Viti, holo, Tong., to rub, wipe;
Iwo, Nuk., to chafe the limbs ; Iwloi,
Tong., to chafe, to wipe ; fio/oi, Haw.,
Iioroi, N. Z. Tuh., orei, Mang., Iwoi,
Nuk., to wash, to wipe.
Holtolo, Tong., horolioro, N. Z., oro,
Mang., to grind, sharpen.
Soya, Sam., a chief's servont ; hui/a,
N. Z., the common people, lower
class ; Uj/a, Rar., laborers, tenants.
Soye (?), fioge, Tong., oije, Sam. Mang.
Rar., okc, one, Nuk., oe, Tah., tvi.
Haw., famine, scarcity of foo<l.
SoTjt, Imyi, limii, }im, ubiq., to salute by
pressing noses.
Sopo, Sam., to pass over ; hoibo, Tong., to
jump, bound.
Sopu (?), hopu, N. Z. Haw., opu, Mang.,
to catch, seize ; hapu, Nuk., to hug.
Sou (?), sousoii, Sam., spray ; Iwuhoii,
N. Z., }u)u. Haw., to wet, moisten ;
Iwn, Haw., ou, Mang., perspiration.
Su, susu, Sam., wet ; sil, Viti, the water
in which food has been boiled, — soup ;
hu, Tong., to boil or stew ; hii. Haw.,
'IS
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
329
to ferment, boil over, ooze out, —
leaven.
Sua, Sam., hiKi, Tong., a general term
for li(|uids.
Suafu, Sam., huafa, Tong., a name
(cerem.) ; kua, N. Z., to name.
Suai (?), hiiid, Tong., huca, Tab., to
pour out ; hiini. Haw., to take out of
an oven or reservoir.,
Sui (?), hm, Tong. N. Z. Haw., to mi.\
together, to mingle, to join.
Suka (?), huka, N. Z., hua. Haw., froth,
foam.
Sufce (?), jw'e, Sam., to search; fine.
Haw., to look slyly, to steal.
Sukt (.'), hni, Tab., uki, Kar., to pierce,
prick ; suisuui, Sam., rough (i. e.
prickly).
Suku (?), httku, Tong. Nuk., to dive;
(qu. ukii from luku, q. v. ?).
Suit, Sam. Tong., a sprout from the root
of a tree, — a sapling, — hence, Sam.,
an heir ; hiiri, N. Z., posterity ; huli.
Haw., taro-tops for planting.
Sum, Sam., to give light, to shine, as
a torch or tlic moon ; hi/rii, N. Z.,
light, lustre, glory ; Tab., outward
appearance (German, scliciii).
Sulu (!), fiirit, Viti, liu (or hiiii, for hulii)
Tong., ulii, Sam., wii, Kar. Mang.,
Hit, Nuk., to enter ; im-tahi, N. Z.,
to join with (i. e. to enter as one, or
united).
Uriilnii,'Ttth., wihia, Nuk., vlida. Haw.,
inspired, possessed by a god.
SuHuki (?), suwd, Sam., to pierce
through ; humtki, Tong., to stick a
skewer or pin in any thing.
Suya ('.), himhiia, Tah., vkauka, Rar.,
broken into fragments, ground to pow-
der. — crumbs, fragments ; hii/ia, hii-
ttiihiina, Haw., small particles of any
thing, — dust, crumbs, tine rain ; huna-
hiiiui, Xuk., little.
83
Susu, Sam., sHsi/, sitfit, Viti, huhii,Tong.,
u, N. Z. Tab. Mang. Haw. Nuk.,
breast, pap, udder.
Ta, the root of the pronoun of the first
person dual and plural, including the
person addressed (Gram. § 39).
Ta, Sam. Tong. Uar. Nuk., tairi, Tab.,
to strike; In, Rar., also, to kill.
Thta, Sam. Tong. N. Z. Haw., to strike
repeatedly, knock, beat.
T\i, Tong. Viti, to hew, fell, cut down.
Ta, Sam. Tong. N. Z., to mork the
body, to tattoo ; ta, Mang., tola, Rar.,
to mark, paint, write.
Ta, used instead oCfaka as u causative
prefix (Gram. § 54).
Tae, ubiq., excrement.
Tne, Tab. Rar. Mang., to arrive, to
come to.
Tae, Sam., " an endearing address ;" tat,
N. Z., an alfectionatc word for mother.
Ta/a, Sam., taha, N.Z. Tab. Haw., bor-
der, edge, brink ; taJia, Nuk., taa,
Mang., place, spot.
Tiijxi, Rar. Haw., shore, border, side of
a field ; taiiilia, Viti, tapa, Tar., place,
spot.
Tafa, Tong., tava, Viti, to cut, make an
incision; txiha. Haw., to mark, scratch,
write.
Tafa (?), tnfao, Sam., to walk about for
pleasure; tului, Nuk., to go or walk;
Haw., to go away, to set out to go.
1 aje, lahe, tae, ubiq., to flow, as water.
Vai-tafc, vai-tahc, &c., running water, a
stream, river.
Tajl, Sam., tahc. Haw., to shave ; tahi,
Nuk., to wound slightly (i. e. to graze).
TiJitaJi,Ton^., tavitavi,\\l\, tahi, N.Z.,
tahili, Haw., to brush, sweep ; tuhii,
Nuk., a fan. (See i/i.)
330
PHILOLOGY.
,
Tajiti (?), taiciti, N. Z., fur, distant;
tahiti, Ilnw., a Ibrcign country. ((Jii.
hence the name given by the first colo-
nists from Samoa to tlic island of
Tahiti, — " the /ar, or foreign laiul" ?)
TaJitO, Sam., tau-ilo, N. Z., tahito, Tnli.
Ilnw., tailo, Uar. Mang., old, ancient.
Tajola, Sam. Fi.ri., /o/bn, Tong., tohora,
N. Z. Tah. Haw., a whale; tuhod,
Nuk., n porpoise.
Tafu, Sam. Tong., luliit, Tah. Haw., tau,
Rar., tdhima, N. Z., to light, to kindle,
as a tire.
Taliii, N. Z., a husband ; Haw., a guar-
dian, keeper, nurse.
Tahua (qu. !), Tah. Haw. Nuk., an open,
clear space, a public square.
Tal, Sam. Fak., a collective particle.
(Gram. § 14.) I
I (U, Tong., te, N. Z. Mang., not, a nega- i
live prefi.xed to adjectives. (Gram.
§ 63.) i
I aka, Tong., to go round, lo stand round j
about, to turn round, — lo trundle, roll i
along on the ground, — a top, the wheel
of a carriage, &c. ; N. Z., to move
round, to change round, as the wind,
to fall ; t<i\i, Tah. Haw., to roll over, j
to roll down, to fall, lo move off, de-
part ; Haw., a top ; ta'd-Mo, Sam., to
disperse (ccniii.); taa-hele, Ilnw,, to
go round; putuka, ^lang., jxitakdtiil.d,
N. Z., round, to go round ; jwroliihi,
N. /., round, annular ; takako, Uar.,
to encompass.
Hon-Uia, Hnw., to roll off, to remove;
hmitiui, Tah., iikaUika, Rar., to sepa-
rate, put asunder.
Tdkai, l-'nk. Tong. N. Z., tiuii, Tah.
Haw., to bind round, to gird; Sam., to
roll up.
Tafcao, .Mnng. Nuk., to spunk, tell,—
word, iulbrmalion ; Uiao, Haw., a le-
gend, story.
Takapau, Tong. N. Z., ta\ipau, Snm., n
floor-mat, a sleeping-mat.
Taki, Fak. Tong. Mang., tiCi, Snm. Tnh.
Hnw., to convey, bring along, lead,
direct, pilot ; tnki, Nuk., to take out.
Fctitki, Tong., fetiii, Sam., tiitiiki, N. Z.
Mang., to meet ; tutaki, Rar., to pay,
reward.
FakdJiUii (?), Tong., fii\ifelai, Sam.,
ifiikiiiriidi, N. Z., to thank.
Mdldkitdki, N. Z., miitni/di or nwini,
to look on ns a s|X!ctator, to examine,
inspect.
Takoto, lokuto, Tong., tdotn, Sam., to lie
down, repose; lakuto, N. '/.., to lie
down, — to lay down, put down ; tokoto,
Jiang., to put down, lay down,^-cease,
terminate ; Uvtto, Tab., lo sleep, re-
pose.
Tala, Tong., to speak, tell, bid; tdia,
Sam., convcrsntion, news, — t<iutdlu,
to talk ; told. Haw., tna, Nuk., to pro-
claim, ns a crier, lo call, to summon ;
tdldJi, Mang., to call.
Tula, Sam. I law., tara, N. Z. Tab., to
loose, untie, set free.
Matnla, tinifdra, loosed, freed.
lata, Tong., tdrd, Tnh. Rnr. Mang., fan,
Nuk., thorn ; tdin, N. '/.., the upright
poles of a fence; Itui, Nuk., a needle,
n lish-S|)ear ; tdrd, Tnr., n spear.
Td2dt<i/ii.,tdrat(ira,td(itud, rough, thorny,
prickly.
Hnotdld, Haw., iiui, Nuk., lo sharpen.
Tdld, Ilnw., totdra, Tnli. Rnr., tolaa,
Nuk., the sea-urchin, echinus ; totdla,
Haw., spines of the echinus.
lalafa, Fak.Tikop. Niun,Vnitupu, beard.
Talai, Haw., tdrai, Tah. .Mang., taai,
Nuk., to carve, hew, shape.
lah, tari, ubiq., to wait, tnrry.
lall, Sam. Tong., lo receive; tdri, Rar.
.Mang., to carry, to bring ; tdi, Nuk.,
to lay hold of.
I
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
331
Tahya, Sam. FaU., tcliija, Tong., tiiriga,
N. Z. Uar., tcriyu, Mang., taria, Tnh.,
the car.
Taw, taro, tao, iibiq., nrum esculcntum.
Talll (]), larutuni, N. Z., grass, weeds ;
Uiliiha, Haw., sea-grass, rushes.
Tama, ubiq., a child.
Tanuilii, Sam. Ilaw., tiimariki, N. Z.,
tumarii, Tuh., tamittl, Tong., tanuiiti,
N.Z. llnw. Niik., a child, a Imy.
Tamnhinc, N.Z. Tah., Uiimiinc, Unr.,
tailumahitie, Ilaw. Nuk., a girl, n
daughter.
Tama, Sam. Fnk., Uimdi, Tong., toTna,
Viti, Tar., father.
Tamaka, Uar., taman, Tah. Haw., shoes.
Tamaki, Kur. Pnu., ^»»(«', Tuh., to quar-
rel with, oppose, to light, — war.
Tane, Sam. N.Z. Tah. Uar. Mang. Ilaw.,
a man (vir), a male, a husband.
7\i>tr, Tong., marriage,— ^/(f/.7j-^(;(c, to
sit after the fashion of men.
Tan^a, Sam. Tong. Nuk., a Iwwl used to
contain the infusion otkiiva.
Tanu, ubic]., to bury, — and hence, to
plant.
Tayn, Sam. Tong. Viti, a bag.
Tayata, Sam. Tong. N. Z. Rar. Mang.,
Uintitd, Haw., taatu, Tah., anala,k<\-
iwta and iinana, Nuk., a man {homu),
mankind.
Tayi, laiii, tai, ubiq., to cry, to make a
noise, to resound.
TaiJO, Snm. N. Z., to touch, take in the
hand.
Tao, Som. Nuk., Mm, Tong., UOw, Haw.,
tail, N. Z. Mang., to bake, roast.
lao or ^(«, ubiq., a spear, lance, javelin,
Taofi, Sam. Tong. Nuk., taohi, tolii.
Haw., foi, Uar., ^;/i<', N. Z., to liold
fast, keep, restrain.
Taokete, Tong., elder brother or sister ;
taokrtc, N. Z., tohetc, Mang. Nuk.,
brother or sister-in-law.
Tapa, Tong. Haw., native cloth, made of
the bark of a tree.
Tajm, N. Z. Tah., the thigh.
'lapa, N. Z., to order, command; Uijm,
Haw. Uar., tojn. Tab., to call, to
name ; tntapa, Nuk., to adoi)t, to pro-
claim or assume a name.
lapu, Uihii, ubiq., sacred, and hence, tor-
bidden.
Tiipiii, Sam., to make sacred ; tahiii.
Tar., to refrain, keep from ; hibiiaki,
Tong., to bless.
Taptl ((|u. ?), tajnt-lima, Sam., wrist :
tapii-rnr, Sam., ancle ; liipuvtii or ta-
piini, Tah. Nuk., tajnnvai or liijiiiai.
I law., the f(X)t, sole of foot, footmark,
track.
last, Sam., tasa, Tikop., liiha, Tong.,
tii/ii, N. Z. Tah. Haw. Nuk., lai,
Uor. Mang., one, — also, an indrfmite
pronoun, some one, other, &c. (Gram.
§S^ 13, iiO).
Fd'aliisi, Sam., fiikatuha, Tonj;., ho(i-
ftihi, Ha\>., to unite, combine, — to-
golhor, united as one.
Hi(tiisi, Sam., ijiil<ihi, N. Z., ijatai,
Mang., together.
Tasi (»), Uifi, Viti, tnii, Tar., tri, Sam..
tchi/ia, Tong., teimi, N. Z. Mang.
Nuk., taitaina. Haw., younger bro-
ther of a sister, or sister of a brother.
Tata, N. Z. Nuk., vaitatn, Uar., fatata.
'Ya.\\.,iilalii, Mang., liiUi,Sa.'m., near.
Tata, Haw. Nuk., to wash clothes; Tah.
Nuk., to bale out water.
Tatua (qu. ?), Tah. Uar. Haw., to gird
or bind on, as a belt or cincture.
I an, ubiq., a season, a year.
Tail, Fnk. Sam. Tong., tiitau, Tah. Uar.
Haw., tattooing, marking on the skin.
1 ail, Sam. Tong., to ])rcss, scjueeze,
wring out.
333
PHILOLOGY.
Tau, Tong. Tah. Haw., to hang, to over-
hang, to impend ; taut'iu, Tong. Nuk.,
suspended, hung up.
1 (lit, .Mang. Nuk., to carry on the back.
lail, Tong. Mang., to reach, to extend
to ; Nuk., to arrive at, come on shore ;
N. Z., to meet: Sam. N. Z. Haw.
Nuk., to rest upon, light upon ; Sam.
Tah., to fall upon.
Tau, Tong., to fit, to suit, — fit, suitable j
/iitdu, Sam., tau, Rar., taufitii, Mang.,
tau {ati or tin), Tah., (it, proper,
right ; matau. Haw., ready, preparej ;
N.Z. Mang., expert, dextrous, shrewd.
Miitaii, Sam. Tong. N. Z., kalau, Rar.,
atau, Tah. Haw., right (hand), dexter.
T\m, Rar., talau, Sam. Tong., like,
equal ; fa'atatau, Sam., to compare.
Tail, Tong. Tar., enough.
Fakatau, Tong., f<Catau, Sam., to ex-
change, trade ; nkiUaii, Rar., to cove-
nant ; wakataii, N. Z., to meet.
Taui, Sam., a reward.
Faitau, Sam., tatau, N. Z. Rar. Tah.
Nuk., to count, reckon.
Tau, Tah. Nuk., a collective particle
(Gram. § 14).
Tainia, Nuk., a pair, couple ; Haw.,
four, a quadruple.
10,11, Tong,, taua, Sam. ct ctrt., war, —
to fight.
Mataua, Sam., envious, revengeful ; hoo-
mataiia. Haw., to vex, harass.
Tauhipu, Rar., tau'upu, Sam. Tah.,
the waist, loins.
TaUM, .Sam. Tong., an anchor, a cable ;
taiila, Httw., taura, Tah. Rar., taua,
Nuk., a cable, rope.
Tau/apn, Tong., taitniya, N. Z., an an-
chorage, a landing-place.
Taula, Sam., taura, Tah., taua, Nuk., a
priest ; taula. Haw., a prophet.
Taulaki (!), UmUii, Haw., ttiuaki, Nuk.,
to put in the sun to dry.
Tatimafa, Sam., to eat (said of a chief) ;
taumaha, Tah. Haw., a sacrifice or
otfcring to a god.
lautHCl, Sam., tauiia. Haw., n servant.
laust, Sam., to nurso; toi//ii, Tong., to
attend, cherish, minister to.
Tavatava, Nuk., tawatawa, N. Z. Haw.,
a species offish (the albriore?).
Tavake, Nuk., tava''e, Sam., toac (qu.
tawacf), Haw., the tropic bird ; hence,
white, fair, as that bird, — applied in
Nukuhiva to " natives with white
skins," — perhaps albinocs.
le, Fak. el cret. (/c,Sam., te or ta. Haw.),
the definite article (Gram. §§11, 44).
Tea, Tong. Tah. Rar. Mang. Nuk. Haw.,
white, fair, pale ; N. Z., clear, open.
Tclea, Sam., leprosy; — ua-tfa,a shower
in sunshine (i. e. a fair rain).
Atc/i, N. Z. Tah. Rar. Haw., wide, spa-
cious, clear, open.
Tefe, Tong., tehe, Tah. Nuk., to circum-
cise ; ttilie, Haw., to cut or slit longi-
tudinally ; tetelie, Nuk., to extract
splinters of bone.
Teka, Nuk., tea, Tah., Haw., a cross, a
cross-piece.
Ti'ka, Tong., to string a bow ; tea, Tah.,
archery.
Tia, Sam., to separate ; Haw., to hinder,
stand in the way of (i. c. to cross).
Tcke, Tong., te'e, Sam., to push, thrust,
drive away.
Tek (.'), tere, N. Z. Tah. Rar. Mang. Pau.,
ietepek. Haw., tei, Tong. Nuk., to
move, glide, sail as a ship.
Hoo-tele, Way/., foa-terc, Tah., Itaa-tee,
Nuk., a pilot, steersman.
Tele, S^m., great, large j teletele, Haw.,
fat, /lump, rotund.
Tepau, Mnng. Nuk. Haw., tapau, Tah.,
any thing readily fusible by heat, —
gum, wax, lead, &c.
Tete, Sam. Nuk., tele, tetenii, Tong.,
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
333
tetere, N. 7.., riitetetele, Rar., luiutele,
lliiw,, to tremble, shiver.
Datete, Snm., to be troubled ; natcle,
How., to shnke, wave, rntllc.
ly'tc, N. Z. Haw., to strive, struggle,
quarrel.
Teu, Sam. Tong., to prepare, arrange,
adorn; truleii, Sam. Tong., prepared,
adorned, neat, elegant ; tcoleo. Tab.,
proud.
TV, ubiq., a plant, the dracicna tcrniinnlis
(N. X., the draciena australis). Titi,
Sam. Tong., a cincture made from its
leaves.
It, Tong., to toss, to throw ; tiaki,'Tong.,
/jrt'tjSam., to throw away, reject, aban-
don ; ti. Haw., to shoot, fire a gun.
Tiri, titiri. Tab. Rar. .Mang.,<j/ij, Nuk.,
to throw ; kujxya tilt, Toiig,, a cnst-
mg-net.
Tiaki, N.Z. Rar. Mang. Nuk., ^V,'/, Tab.
Haw., to watch, wait for, guard.
itja, Sam. Tong. Fak.Tikop., muthcr-fil-
pearl shell ; tifa, Nuk., a cover or lid
to close any thing.
life {?), tihc. Tab. Nuk. Haw., to sneeze.
Tilai, N. Z. Rar. Mang. Tab., straight,
upright, just ; lia. Tab. (used lor Ui),
to stand up ; tin. Haw., pillar, post,
mast of 11 ship.
Tiketike, N. Z., tietic. Haw., teitei. Tab.
Bar. Mang., high ; tidic, Sam., to sit
on an elevated scat.
Tiki, N. Z. Rar. Mang., tii, Toh. Haw.,
to go for, to go to seek.
I tkl, ti'i, name of a god of whom images
wore very conmion ; hence, N. Z.
Rar. Nuk. Tub. Haw., image.
Ttia, Sam., tira. Tab. Mang. Pau., tin,
Nuk. (till. Haw,— see /iiu), the mast
of a vessel ; tiltt, Tong., sprit of a
cnnoc; tiru, N. Z„ the back fin of n
fisti, — tirntii, the rope which fastens
the sail to the bow-sprit.
84
Tilo, Sam., to peep ; tio, Tong., tiro,
N. Z., hio. Tab., to look ; tiroi, Rar.,
to lo<ik at ; tiohi, Nuk., to see, look,
watch ; tilo. Haw., to judge, — also,
a star-gazer, astrologer, observer of
signs, — till, to spy.
Tinrf, Sam., titiii, Viti, Tar., mother.
Tiiia-iiiiiini, Tong., a sow when she has
had a litter ; titiiuia, Haw., a ben.
Tina, titina, Sam. N. Z., to sipieeze,
press, crush ; fitina. Haw., to urge,
press, hasten.
Tinei, Sam. N.Z., timd, Rar. Tab. Haw.
Nuk., to extinguish, quench.
Tint, Viti, fen ; N. Z., ten thousand ;
Tab., twenty thousand ; Haw., forty
thousand ; hence, a great number
indefinitely, thousands (Gram. § 30).
Tino, Sam. Tong. Tab. Rar. Haw., ti-
7111)1(1, N. Z., body, trunk, substance,
person.
Tino, Sam. N. Z., appearance, form,
looks.
Tinoi, Sam., tiiu/hi. Haw., origin, be-
ginning.
liyj^, Sam. Fak., pain, ache ; tina. Haw.,
sin, error.
Tipi, Mang. Pau. Tab. Nuk., matipi,
Rar., a knife, — to cut, to slash ; titn,
Tong., a club, to strike with a club.
Lipi, N. '/.., miilipi. Haw., an axe, —
sharp, trenchant.
i O, Tong., loto, Sam., to plant.
To, Haw., to beget, to proceed from, as
a child from a parent ; Sam. N. Z.
Tab., pregnant.
To, Tong., to sink, to fall ; Tab. Rar.
Pau. N. Z. (also toe>ic and torciji,
N. Z.), to set, as the sun ; toi/i. Haw.,
to set, to go down, :>« the moon.
Ihi, N. Z., to be dippd, immersed ;
Tong., to hide, conceal one's self.
7b, Rar., to light upon ; topa, Tab.
Nuk., to fall, to let fall.
Tbj/ii, N. Z., Pau., toa (or tooa), Tah.,
334
P in I, () L O fi Y.
sniisol ; linicc, ihc west ; liciicc, Tongn,
the wcslcrn coimlry (sec p. 123).
'J}>ngii, Sniii., tli(; winil iVdm Tongn, i. r.
Ilio siiulli wind; tnijii, N. Z. IJiir.,
toiKi, I law., loii, Tall., tlio south (or
sdiitliwcsi) wiiiil.
Ajxitoi/d, liar., iipiitiiii. Tall., tlio point
towards which the sonlli wind blows, —
i. c, the iKirlh.
10, Sam., to or /«, Tong., taiitaa (cpi.
lu/i'i), Maiig. Haw,, to open.
10, Toni.!. Kar. Mnii};. Tah. Haw. Xiik.,
to/ii, Warn., inlocii, Vili, llio sngar-cniie.
10(1, iihi(|., bravo, a warrior.
Tan, .Nnk., tho male of beasts; Sam., u
male fowl, (•ock.
Tiki, .Sain. Tong. Tali. I law. Niik., tho
iron-wood tree (casiiarinu), ol' whicli
war-clubs arc usually mndc.
1 00, flaw., tiw, N. Z., a mistake.
lOe, ul)ii|., (o remain, to U; over.
1}xt)ii, tiDiiii, ttxii, rest, remainder.
iojl, .Sain.Tniig., lo break small, to mince.
lojl, .Sam., to appoint ; tot, Mang., to dis-
tribute, sham out.
lOJO, .Sam., to taste, try; loho, Haw., to
chouse, select, determine, guess; toho,
Xuk., toliii, Tub., to prophesy.
1 oka, Viti, to lie, to be placed ; Tong., tn'n,
Sam., to get aground, as a vessel, re-
main li\ed, — also, !Sam., to bo hard, to
congeal, — to sleep (cerciii.)
Tbka, N. '/.. Kar. .Mang., j>u-tm, T.'li.
Haw., a rock, a coral reef.
lokv, Tong., a salt-water eel ; toke, IS Z.
Nuk., toV, Haw., a worm.
ToA'f (.'), toketokc, Har., tortm-, Tah. Haw.,
mutoki:, N. Z., cold, chilling; haulokc,
X. Z., winter.
1 oktalll, Tong., tiiknliiii, Viti, to'c/au,
Sam., the east or trade-wind; toktrai/,
Rar., tmrnii. Tab., the northwest or
north wind ; tokorau, Afang., tokixtii,
N'uk., Ilie north wind; t(J'ol(tu, Haw.,
the north side of an island. (Pro|)crly,
Ihn sai-iriml ; sec page 171.)
Apiilokrriiii, liar., njhtincMii, Tali., the
point towards which the north wind
blows — i. e. the south.
I okl, ubii]., an adze, an axo.
lokl, Tong., lately, newly; toil, How.,
fresh, green, nourishing.
loko, lo'n, Mbi(|., a settiiig-|)ole, a polo for
pushing a eanot!.
Tokiitnko, liiohi'n, a. slolT.
lolt, .Sam. Tong., to gather, to pluck.
lolo, 1(1111, ubi(i., to creep, crawl, — to
creep, spread, as a vine, or as t'lro.
loloa, .Sam. Tong. Haw., a duck; loroa,
X. '/,., an olbalross.
I oht, iiini, lull, ubi(|., the number three.
JotHI, Haw., to prc.ss down, to bear
down ; Nuk., to cover witli earth, to
bury.
To/no, Sam., to fall through ; X. Z. Tah.
iJar. -Mang. Haw. Nuk., to enter, to
pass in, sink into.
lOHil, 'IVing., a disease similar to the
iliiivs, attenilcd with pustules ; Mang.,
a cutaneous disease ; X. '/,., a wart.
10)10. X. Z., to command, order; Haw.,
to lead olong, persuade, direct.
1 07111, Haw., ioliiiiu, Sam., the centre,
the middle ; tonu, Sam. Tong., ndo-
nilomi, Viti, right, correct, precise.
exact ; tonii, X. Z., exactly, accu-
rately.
Tnya or Uxiijii, Sam., tiuDja, N. Z. Pau.,
tiimi, Tab., property, [Kissessions.
loyajltl, to [ilan, contrive; tonnhiti.
Haw., tho head-man of a district (i. c.
the director) ; totjoili, Mang., noble.
loyi, Viti, to select, award, appoint; trmi.
Haw., to try, make proof of.
Tutniji, Sam. Tong., payment, reward ;
/i'fcyi, Tong., to pay.
lost, Sam., tuhid. Haw., to stroke, to rub
gently with tho hand.
P O L Y N K S I A N L K X I C O N.
335
Toso, Snm., tohn, Tong., ^J, N. 7,. Tnli.,
M, Nuk., to pull, drug; toi, IIuw., to
urge, drive, itisist.
TotO, i,bi(|., blno.1.
1 U, iilii(|., to Htiind. (See tikn.)
Fdka-h'i, Tong., fmi-tii, Sam., jkUA,
Tall. Rar., to erect, build. (Seeywj.)
Tiiapft, tiij/a, Sum. Tong. N. Z., tiny
thing timt stands, ns a lioap, row,
&c., — hence, Tong., a collective par-
ticle. (Gram. § 14.)
Tiirtuja, N. Z., a stand, support, stand-
ing-place; tidaita. Haw., a place of
many things together, as a village, a
garden.
Til, Uar., ap|)carnncc, looks, character,
kind.
Tu, tutu, Tong., to cut, to cut off; tii<i,
N.Z. (law., to cut, cut down.
Til, N.Z. Mang., to beat, .strike; Haw.,
to hit, strike against ; Nuk., to strike
with a sjioar or shot.
Tutu, Tab. Haw. Mang. Nuk., to pound.
Tiiki, Tong. N. Z. Nuk., tii'i, Sam.
Haw., to lieat, pound, strike; jxitii/:i,
N. Z., to knock. {Hcc }iatii.)
Tiikia, Tong. Har. Nuk., tiiiti, Haw.,
tiiiia (for liiia). Tab., to strike against,
(as the foot,)— to stumble.
Akntiikia, Wnt. ,ftuituUa, Tab., to touch.
1 lia, ubi(]., back.
Tim-sivi, Sam., the back-bone, — a chain
of mountains; liia-hiwi, Haw., the
summit of a mountain, mountainous
country.
Tua, Viti, a grandfather; tu, Tar., an
aged [lerson.
Matiia, Sam. Tong. N. Z. Haw., jiictiia,
Rar. Tah. Nuk., motiia, IMang., Ildl-
grown, mature, elderly ; N. Z. Tah.
liar. Mang. Haw. Nuk., a parent or
uncle {viiiliia-tane, a father, iHutiia-
li'nw, t\ mother).
Mutiia, N. Z., first, beforehand.
Ulu-miUii '. .Sam., eldest son; otomedua,
Tah. Kill-., master, elder.
Tiiiikit, Viti, tiiii'ii, Sam., timkaiia,
N. Z. Uar. I'au. Nuk., tiiiuuiii, Tah.,
tiiitiiiiami, Haw., a brotlier's elder
brother, or sister's elder sister.
Tiiaijaiie (sec ijmiv), elder brother, with
respect to a sistt^r.
Tmijiijiiif, Sum. Tong., tiinliiiii; N. Z.
Tah. Nuk., tiiainr, Uar., taitiiuhiiir,
Haw., elder sister, with respect to a
brother.
Timi, Sam., a long time ; Tong., slow.
'lufa, Sam. Tong. Nuk., tiimi, N. Z.,
tului. Tab., lita, Uar., to divide, dis-
tribute, share out, give out.
T'inva i tc hiiarc, N. Z., tuha i te hitnn.
Tab., tiitiia i tc unmrv, Rar., tuha.
Haw. Nuk., to spit (see ale).
Tiiiiija, Uar., a half (i. o. a division);
tua-lalii, N. Z., first, first purl, — tua-
yiilwru, tenth part, tithe.
Tllflhja, Fak. Sam. Tong., M//»j,fy, N.Z.,
t(iiiiiii,\\uv.,lnhiiii,'i\\\\.,tuliiia, Haw.,
tiihiika, tiihiina, and tahuuii, Nuk.,
one who follows any art or profession,
— more espcciidly one who performs
sacred rites, a priest.
rut, Sam. Tong. N. Z., to prick, pierce.
— hence, ubiq., to sew.
IlU, Sam. Tong. Fuk. Viti, lord, chief
(prefixed to the name of a place, as
tiii-Aiina, liU-Leviiku, lord of Aanu.
Levuka).
Tui{i.),tiiitiii, Tons., tii/iii, Tah. Haw.,
candle-nut (aleurites).
Tuke (?), tiikctiike, N. Z., tuctuc. Haw.,
ii'itiikc, Uar., tukc-rima, Tikop., the
elbow.
Tukf-mata, N. Z., tue- nidtii, Unw., ihc
eyebrow.
Tuke-vae, Nuk., tiiclitc-tvairni; Haw.,
the heel.
Tllki, Rar., luf, Tah. Haw., to spread, as
a report, be published.
336
I' II I I. O LOO Y.
7 llku, ln\i, iibiq., to put, put down, Irnvc,
vie 111, let u,o.
Tll/d, Sam. Tong. Viti, Imlil.
'I'nlilld (!), tiiniki, N. Z. Uiir. Miin(j.,
Iiiliii, llnw ,////'((!, Till)., tu civcrthriiw,
I'llSl (lllWIl.
/ nil, liiri, liii, iibiq., dcnl', — sliiimrd or
(Iwirrru'd by noise.
rtlli, Snin. Tong., to run n\\cr, purmio;
liiliii, llnw., "n younij, biindsonic
pcrsiiu di'sircd nnd soiiylil nltor, a
iK'auty."
Tub, Sam. Ilaw., <»/, Tong, Niik., ndiiru,
Viti, tdii, N. 'A. ct cn't., th< knue.
'Dxiliili, Sam., titliiliii. Ton;;., tiiliiru,
N. '/.., tiiliili. Haw., tiitiiri, Uar., /»»
te luri, Tah., to kneel.
Tulu, Tong. Haw., <;//•», N. 7.. Viti,
kiiriikurii, Unr., to ilrop, as water.
i 1111/ (?). ^);/», Mnng., to support, sustain;
/Mr;/, liar., taiilnrii, 'lab., to belp,
assist ; tiilulu. Haw., to set up on
end, ca-ct.
Turn, Pau., tiinitiint, liar., tiiliihi,
Flaw., tiitiiu, N'uk., a prop, u |K)st
wbicb sustains tlic r(M)rof a bouse.
Tiiriitiini, }i{an^., a slic'k, rlub; liiliiii,
Nuk., a tree of touj;b pliable W(md, —
a boop made of tbis wood ; tiitn/ii,
I law., the circle of tbe visible borizou.
TlinVl, .^am., full, — tinauluinii, top, ex-
tremity ; tiimn-ake, N. '/.., tbe erown
of tbe bead, tbe up|K'r part of tbe trunk
of n tree, — liimiitiiiiiii, lower part of
trunk, stump; <wwm. Tab. Kar. Mang.
\uk. Haw., trunk of tree, stump, —
hence, Ijeginning, iMisis, foundation,
producing cause.
Tuna, Sam. N. Z., rubina, Viti, an eel.
Tunit, Sam. Tong. Rar. Tab. Haw. \uk.,
to roast.
Tliya, \. Z., iKnn, Haw., a sore.
Twgl, X. Z. Viti, tutiij/i, Rar., tutuni.
tiini. Haw., tiilui, Tnh., to light, to
kindle, burn.
TinjOU, N. Z. Rar., Iiiwm, Hnw., to
li'.'ckon, make signs,
Tii/xipiikll, \. Z. Nuk., liijxtjKiu, Toh.
Haw., n corpw.
I UJJe, N. Z., n snare Cor birds; Haw., to
fasten with a fetter, to tie the wrist.
i UJM'le, I law., to bruise, as fruit, to sollen ;
tii/K-rr, Mang., a knilb for scraping
breadfruit, to scm|)c.
1 lipil, tiihii, ubi(i., to spring up, sprout,
grow.
Tiiji'iijii, Sam. N. Z., tii/niaijii, Tong.,
origin, source, ancestry.
Tii/iii/iiiKi, Sam., w<ik<i-tiij>iimt/n, N.Z.,
a getieration,
Ti/jiii>ia, \. Z. Rar. Haw. Nuk.,/«»i/»«,
«//)«, Viti, grand-parent, ancestor.
Tiijiii, Sam., presiding chief, beod of
tbe governtnent ; tiijiiKi, Mang., high
priest ; Haw., sorcerer, wizard.
TllKI, Sam., tofr, Viti, to/ii, Tong., tnhi,
tiiliitiilii, N. Z., to make marks, to
write.
Ndiisi, nifiii'i, Viti, tii>ii, Nuk., to point
with the finger; tiilii, Haw., to point
out, jiiilge, conjecture, — l/i/iilii/ii, to
point out, show, designate, make signs
with tbe hand.
Tute, Tab. Rar. Haw. Nuk., to thrust
awny, put aside, e.xpel.
Tlltit, Sam. Tong. Nuk. Viti, to kindle,
to burn.
I lltll, Sam. Tong,, to shake (act).
[The riKit tu oppeors to hove three dis.
tinct significoliona, — viz.: — (1) to strike
or cut, (2) to stand, and (3) to burn. From
the first of these may be derived tutu, to
pound, tiii, to pierce, tiiki, to beat, tiisi, to
mark, tulu (Sam.), to cut ofT, ond tufa, to
divide, together with the tu which is the
prcfi.x of the partitive numbers (Gram.
§ 35) ; from the second come tiiku, to put,
POLYNESIAN LEXICON.
n37
fiilii, III erect, Hiistnin, ti'jm, to sprinj? u\>
or griiw. Ilium, trunk, sicm, \c. j mid iVuin
the tliiril, '(/'" anil /««'> •" kiiiillc, liiuii, to
roust, mill liitiii, cmiille-mit,]
u
U, Snm. Toiii;. [|mss. ii-tin], iili, Tikop.,
to liile ; nil, Tnnn., to bite, peck, stinfi ;
uliiili, Iliiw., to vex, provoke, minoy.
U, N. Z., to eomo together, to join, to
cleovo to; Tali., to strike ngiiiiist,
shix-k.
Ua, Snni. Tikop. Fok. Nino, the nock.
Ua, Viti, uaua, N. Z. M:nig. Tah. Nuk.,
a vein.
Ua, Haw., hiia, Niik., tniiii, una, N. Z.
Tah. Unr., this, that (Grain. § 41).
Uaua, N. '/,., tough, — harsh, slern ; iiitit.
Maw., tough, — III! nil, proud, vain.
Ufa, Tah., mill, N. Z., «/«(, Haw., jnifii,
Nuk., the thigh.
Ufa, Tah. Nuk., ««'a, N. Z., female of
beasts.
UJl, iilii, iii, ul)i(|., yam.
Ufi, Sam. Tong. Nuk., ulii. Haw., to
cover over, to vi'il, — a lid, covering.
Uji, Nuk., |K>arl oyster (see li/a) ; kn/a-
ti/iii/i (covered jiebble), I'au., jicarl.
Ulliki (ipi. ?), Tong., small, — the young
of any animal ; iWi, Sam., the last or
younger; »'(', Haw., young, strong;
uiikii-iiki, N. Z., to strengthen (sec
Ul, Tong., to call, name, summon ; filiiii,
Tong., iii, liiii, N. Z., ni, ciii, Mang.,
lit, Kar. Tah. Haw., to ask, inipiire.
Ui (qn. !), maid, N. Z. .Nuk., kaiii, Uar.,
iiiii. Tall., Ii'fl, sinister (sec tan).
Uilo, iiiia, nhi(|., lightning.
Uki, Kar., ?(/, Tall., a generation.
Uku (\), j'lUi-iCii, Sam., to look sad;
85
(!, Hliw., to grieve, — iiliii, grief, liiiiien-
tiilion.
via, Sam. Tong., Iinln, Haw., Iiiiiii,'['h\\.,
Ufa, Kar., a kind of dance.
Wa (.'), iilo, Tong., nra, .Mang., tiu, Nuk.,
miira, Kar., auruiini, Tor., iiiiilrc,
Viti, blii/c, llame.
(///, iilinli, Snm. Tong. Fak., bliiek ; (//i.
Haw., ('/■/, Tall., "(', .Niik., bliu'.
Ulll, Sum. Tong. Viti, the hi'ad.
Uliiiiki, Tong., iiliin'i, Sam., the first,
headmost.
UliKjii, Tong., iiliiijii, Sam., >iriii)ii, N.Z.
Itiir. I'au., iilunii. Haw., iiriia, Tah.,
a pillow.
Uma, Tong., the shoulder; nma, .\. Z.
Tail., iiiiKiiima, Uar. Haw. .Nuk.,
kiiiniiii, I'au., till' heart.
Unidtd, Tung. Tikiip., rainbow.
Lmcd, Tong. .Sam., clay, earth, dust;
Viti, rust.
Vmoti, Tong. Haw., a stopple, cork,
bung.
Linil, uliiip, an oven, or |)it for roasting,
U)l(l, Sam., mill, Tong., itiidhi. Haw..
scales of a fish; nun, Haw., nun,
Tong., shell of a tortoise.
Villi, N. /., iiniihi. Haw., niiiii, Uar., to
draw out, as n sword from its sheath ;
uiiiilii, Nuk., to stri|) olf clothes.
Uljd, N. Z, .Mang., akautja, Uar., una.
Haw., to .send.
Usd, Uot., nui, Viti, nha, Tong., ini,
Sam. et eiet., rain.
Ltd, ubiip, ashore, on land, inland.
Vte, Nuk., aide. Tall., iraiitr. Haw., the
paper-nuillxrry tree, (monis papy-
ri liTa.^
UtO, Tong., the bruin, — the cocna-nul,
when it is about germinating ; Sam., a
name for tin? head, in irony ; Viti, the
breadfruit, — the heart; Tar., the cocoa-
nut.
mim
mtlm
wm
338
I'lll 1,01,00 V.
I'lll, S,'/.. Tiili. Ildw., piiyiiiciil, price;
In pll\, liMlird.
I'/W, Sam. Mniii.'., In dr.iw wnlcr j iiliihi,
lliu\.,l(i polll' Into, III lill II vcnsi'l willl
liny tliiiil.
I II, Sum., ifii, .N. '/.. I law., spiu'o, ili^.
Iniipo bcl«('('ii two plnci'ii, 8|>hoo nC
liiiio; viilii}, 'J'niig., space Ix'twii'ii twn
places.
Viivii, Sam. Maiig., rent, split, npciicil
widf.
\ U, Mang., to talk, coiiverac ; tm, Haw,,
gossip, private cotivcrsntiiui, — to say
to oiii''s si'ir, to ri'lli'cl, — u-dlii, a say-
ing, iiiiy thing said; vn, Uar,, to
Wonder.
ll'(/i/.»'ri, .\. Z., iik<i-rii, i{ar., /kui-viI,
Tall,, to judge,
Vae, Sam. Tong, Nnk., iinir, iv/mc. Tali.
.Mang. Kar., trdtiw; lliiw., iiiitiruc,
N.'/.. Tan., the leg, foot.
I fll, irtii, uhii|., water.
I (11, Tall. Iliir. Niik., to lie, to ho in a
certain place, to 1h' laid up; viiinnjii,
liar., tiiiiiiii, Tah., that which is
stored, or laiil up ; hence, inii, Tali.,
laiiwiii. Haw., pro|H'rty, riches.
Frt/7/0(.pi. .'), Tah., iviii/io, N'.Z. Haw.,
Viiio, Uar., to lay down, put down,
leave, Ibrsiike.
\ aifili, Sam. Tong., weak, dehilitnted,
vuiiipii-ihed.
y aka, Tong. Itnr. Nuk., vtt'd, Sam. Tnh.,
Uiika, \. '/,., U(i\i, Haw., Udtj^d, Viti,
iru. Tar., a canoe ; vuk", Mang., a
rnl).
\ (ikdl, Tong., Vd'ai, Snin., to sec, ob-
serve, take heed, he careful.
Vaku, Tong., iv(», Tah., j(V(MU'rt«, Haw.,
to scratch.
Vilhkau (f), ra/ti'iiii, Snm„ runtknii,
liar., irii/iiiiii. Haw,, to call, cry out,
Nhont.
\ (tlf, Sam. Tong., loolish, crazy, stupid,
ignorant; tniirirurr, ^,'/,,, null irnlr,
Haw., lorgetlnl ; vitrcvarv, ,Mung., initi-
taking, ignorant.
ViiiKilii f(i/ir<ili; Sam., tmiuiriki Viirr-
Vdiv, .Mang., iiil'ant.
lliiiiviiri; Tall., /n/iiirii/i; Haw., to de-
ceive.
]|'(//c, Viti, Haw., merely, only, simply.
Wtrt; N, 7,., a common man, n man ot'
low rank (i. o. simple, opposed to
gentle).
Vii/iii, Sam., stupid, ignorant ; iiiiiii,
Tah. Uar., stiipified, overcome hy
sleep; iiii/cii, Haw., to indulge in
ease, be <piiet.
voll, .Sam. Tong., to paint. In daub; iiiili,
Haw., to grind to powder, to mince
tine, to mix ; tvi//. Tab., paste, mud ;
villi, Haw., I/V7/7, Tall., tine, soU, like
paste; viii, Niik,, geiille, tame.
Jhiwari, N. Z., giiviiiivuri, .Mang., soft ;
7itiiriiliuiili, Haw., kiiviiii'iii, .\uk.,
weak, li'clile.
Vain, iMirbl. (Cram. \ ill).)
Willi, Sam., viiiii, Tub. .Mang., vtiiiruu,
Tong., vail, mvaii, Nnk., to scrape.
\ (10, I'nk. Sam. Tong. Haw., a thicket,
wilderness, uninliubited place.
Vao (?), u'lW, Haw., vacao, IVfnng., to
reconcile, make friends,
t USd, Sam,, rnha, Tong., the sea.
\ line, \iti, nilic or tv/c," Tong., vavae,
Sam., rue, Mang., to divide, separate.
Wise, \iti, riihc, Tong., a division, por-
tion ; viiseija, .Sam., a cla.ss.
Viieijii, Sam., a division, separation ;
riieijii, l{ar. Mang., u-nnja, N. Z.,
ifucmi, viiwacnii. Haw., vavwka or
viiviii'/iii, Nuk., Ilio middle, lietween.
Viitiia, Haw., a field, farm, (i. e. a place
divided off.)
I' O I. V N K MIAN I, H X I C () N.
330
'
H'fA«<rAf,lV.>5„loilivido,i(i«pQrBtciIlnw.,
Id o|i<'M, ux|ilain, (Sit fusi iiriil j«ir.)
VrtVdO, ,Sam. Nnk., uawn, llmv,,li>sli<)iit.
Vai>e, iraiir, iil)if|., ([uick, — to Imilcn,
' t'l Niik., i'i'iili|ic(lis HT, N, /., ciitor|iillnr.
Vekdf Uiir,, vm, 'rah., n mo'tscnfrcr,
horald; ttro, I law., a procurer.
rc«l,*Sam. Ton^., tirla, I law., urrniirrii,
N. '/.., vtrdirni, liar., vidveo,, Niik.
Tall., hot, burnt.
Vcr/i, Man;.;., firp, coiiflagraliun, burning
of thu griiSH on tho hilla.
Vele, Sam., vcre, Mnng., vaerr, Tali. Uar.,
rai/i; Haw., to wicil, to cIcMir n fioM.
Vl'lo, Sam. Tong., vrm, Mang., n lance,
to throw a lance ; vtn, Niik., to spear;
jHihrlo, Haw., to throw a lance.
Vtruveri), Mang., a flame oCfire; tn/n.
ivi/o, lhiw.,n streamer, or comet; vera,
Tab., a tcm|)c»l, a hurricane.
Vrro, Tah., vm, Niik., hiatvern, N. Z.,
tail of an animal.
VetC, Ham. Tong., to despoil, plunder,
carry off; vctr, Tong. Mang. Nuk.,
iviir, N. Z., to unloow, to undo; wrlr,
Haw., to crack or ojien, an the joints
ol'n floor.
Veitneii, Mang., tiruweii. Haw., gnm.
' ', Sam. Tong. Tah. Nuk., tho Urazilian
plum, Hpondia.s dulcis.
Vikt, fi/Ji'iki, Mang.,uiti,wilitciti, I law.,
cpiick, — to hasten.
Vtll, viri, iviri, wili, vii, ubiq., to twist,
to turn, wind, bore. (Sec Jih, Jiln,
milo, iiino.)
Vii, Nuk., round, to turn round, — also,
to liill. (See liihi.)
Vtni, Tikop., to whistle; vivini, Sam., to
crow.
^
4b
■•
AN
ENGLISH AND POLYNESIAN
VOCABULARY.
For greater convenience in using the preceding Lexicon, especially
for philological purposes, it has been thought advisable to append an
English-Polynesian vocabulary, drawn up in as concise a form as
would be ci>nsistent with utility. With this view, repetition has been
avoided as far as possible, and some Polynesian terms of little import-
ance have not been inserted at all. It should be observed that the
Polynesian words are given always in the radical or ground-form,
under which, by referring to the Lexicon, the exact term corre-
sponding to the English word will be found, and its precise meaning
ascertained.
4i
86
»
• I
POLYNESIAN VOCABULARY.
A, an (art.) se,foc, tasi.
Abandon, masui, li, ti, vaihn.
Abominable, kino, lika, lin.
Above, Itiya.
Abstract, take away, siko, taki.
Accuse, 2^c/:, peka.
Adhere, adhesive, mau, piki, pili, pitlit,
Ailjacont, jiae, pili (see near).
Aihnire, salo (see Avondcr).
Adorn, mnnaia, ten.
Adiilt, tiia.
Adze, I'iki.
Alter, tiiu/i.
Again, foil, foki.
Vlns, <u>c.
All, /«, kdton, pnii.
Almost, »ic.
A\so, foki,j>e.
Ahav, fata.
Always, n.
Anibiish.^hyn.
Ancestry, forefathers, ti/])ii.
Anchor, anchorage, taiilu, puijti.
Ancient, lajilu.
And, a, c, o, via.
Anger, angry, ila, Hli,fitsii, misi, sili.
Ancle, piiki', iapii.
Announce, publish, i/o, tiiki.
Anmiyini.', nuniata, pcka (see ve.\).
Aiiciliil, jyaui, pili, sinii.
Answer, ki.
Ant, If).
Aperture, pitta, fafa.
\\>\Kar, Ji I i, fa gi I, jmta.
Appearance, looks,y//«, mlii, tinn, tn.
Apiieaso, pacify, na.
Appoint, poo, pule, tnfi.
Ardent, eager, fatui,Jita,
Arm, lima.
Arm-pit, kaokao (see side).
Army, mtkii.
Arrive, uu, tae, tan.
Arrow, kofe,fana.
Arrow.root, masoa, pia.
Artisan, tiifinja.
Arum costatum, kapc.
" esculentum, talo.
As, me, jie.
Ascend, kake, piki, li.
Ashes, le/'it.
Asliore, uta.
Aside, {iijc, 2>ac.
Ask, sn/i, kole, iii.
Assail, kiqir, puke.
Assemble, putii, poto,fim, katoa.
As\\\mn,fai)o,fotii, ijaeyae.
At, i, ki. Ilia, kei.
Awake, ala.
Away, iitii.
A.\e, tijii, loki.
B
nack, liKi.
I!ack-l)onc, lua.
Unci, kiw).
Hag, kali), piitc, tiniii.
Bait, miiiiiiu.
Hake, roast, tao, titnu.
H'lld, iiKili; tula.
Uale (wairr), tatd.
Hall,>«', piiku.
»
POLYNESIAN VOCABULARY.
343
Bamboo, kofe.
Banm\BL,fiiti, mciln.
Barb of liook, i/i/tga, pa.
Bark of tree, }fi/i.
Bark, to, cioa, jjaya.
Barren, cl\jldless, 2>a,
Basket, /Htc.
Bat, j)c/m.
Bathe, kaii.
Be, kiia, sc, vai.
Beach, yJjya, »uit(i.
Beak, ffutu.
Beam of wood, l<ivn.
Bear, maltiya (see carry).
Bear, bring forth, _/«?;a«.
Beard, ktimi, talafa.
Beast, jniaka.
Beat, fasi, lulu, pa, jxiki, 2>atu, sasa,
ta, tu.
Beat against, as wind, _/«/<;/«.
Beaten, conquered, nudu, vaivai.
Beckon, luijnn.
Become, Ulo, loko.
Bed, loiji, muse.
Before, mun.
Beg, hole, no, soli.
Beget, to,fanau.
Begin, aijii,fiiii, niata.
Beginning, commencement, tmo, tumti.
Behind, muU.
Behold ! na, sola, vakai.
Belch, _/?o, kujM.
Belly, iiimutva, kopu, kcte, ah.
Below, lulo.
Bond, piko,fana,
Besniciir, pa)n, pili, potji, vuli,
Betrolli, liiii, iiiomoa.
Between, tonii, vase.
Beyond, atu, sake.
Bilge-water, liii.
Bind, /.'(«,/«s«, humii, It, lakai (sec tie).
Bird, iimnu.
Bite, u, k(iti,yao.
Bitter, mala, kavi', knna, niaijeso.
Black, idi, kcle, pagu.
Blind, mata.
Blood tola.
Blow, as wind, ayi,
" with the mouth, 2/?, yj«.
" the nose, fayo.
Blue, iili.
Board, plank, papa.
Tioast, futa.
Body, tino.
Bog, poko.
Boil, su.
Bold,y(te, tofi.
Bone, siri,
Bonito (fish), a/u.
Border, pac, InJ'a, knm.
Bore, vili,
Mmn, fanau.
Borrow, ?(o.
B(Jttle, si>ia,faliki.
Bow (weapon), _/«««.
Bow down, lo, puHou, 2nko,
Bowels, ijakau,
Fiowl, kionetc, tatioa.
Box, chest, pusa.
Box, cufr,/«s", molo.
Boy, lama, iti.
Braid, yW, laija.
Brain, Mo, ulo.
Branch, la, maija.
Brave, loa.
Breadfruit tree, kulu, mai,
\itc;\\\, fail, Juki, f<uii.
Breast, chest, /«/«, uma,
" pap, susu,
Hn.'Mtli, aso, manava.
Breathe, /rt,/()i«.
Breathless, selu.
Breeze, aiji, siii<ili.
Bright, /(■(««, sinu,
Jiring, /j, kail, lali (see carry).
Broad, /(;/(";, lau, tea.
Broken to pieces, laUi, malu, si/ka.
Brood, /(n;((.
Brother, ijunr, tusi, tua, taoke/e.
Brown, eh.
Bruised, mtdu, palu.
Brush, tiiji.
Bud, /i/o, miika.
Build, (u.
344
P H I I, O L O G Y.
Bunch, /«st, 7W, ]>uku.
Biiiulle. /((/J, jm.
Burn, ^((»v/, tin)i, tutu, vchi.
l\urM, fiiyfxi, jHi.
Bury, t/iuu, luiiii.
ButtcrMy, /*'/'<', pule.
Bullock, Icmu, jiuku.
By, r, i, dki, dm.
Cable, taula.
Cnlabiish, i/iu, fue, sinri.
Call, k(iln)j<i, va/iikiiu, liiht, lajxi, ui.
Calm, ui, uiulic (st-c quiet).
Caniile-nul (nlcurilos), Uimit, tin.
Canoe, /;V((«, nikd.
Cap, lint, \\p:\d-(irfss,fau,jxik,j)u/ijku.
Carry, amo,fafa, tau, sajxii, knvc, tali, uia-
l(ij)ii.
Carve, talai, i'o.
Castrate, jxjka.
Catcli, S(i/>'>, sriiio, sopu.
Calerpillar, auu/r, vi:
Causative particle, rukii, tn.
Cnutious, careful, koko, tjrl<:
Cave, (luit.
(\^nse, ]niit, tdkoto.
Centre, loin, touu.
Centipede, If.
(,'lialt', rub, soli), hmi.
Champ, liu/iu, ijiui.
Change, lilo, liu, lu, loli, Itil.u.
Changeable, kajxi.
Channel, dfii.
Character, nature, kauo, tu.
Charcoal, malalu, ijiitafu.
Chatter, babble, tile, kote.
Cheek, kultifau, jxipaligd.
Cherisli, jirle, tausi.
Chew, laniv, mn, puo.
Chief, aliki, lui, hnjntiln, lujm, tnr/afti.
Chilli, liDUii, ili.
C'liil(l-in-law,/»yo.
Chin, kiiuae, kuuii.
Chirp, /,(.
Chisel, /(to.
Choke, kuiui, Inoa (aeo strangle).
Choose, ^/i, siki, tqfo.
Circnmeisc, tcfr.
Clasp, pull, sopu.
C\ass, /iisi,tusi, vase.
Clay, uniea, kele.
Cleanse, 7na,
Cl(>ar, ma, sina, ui, ata, tea.
VWmh, piki, kake.
Close together, 2>oto, putu, j/ili.
Close up (to), ])aui, puni (sec shut).
Cloth, hifu, tapa, siajm.
Clothing, kiij'u,jaji.
Cloud, ao, ata.
Coast, sakau, mahi,fa))a.
Cockle, pipi.
Cock's-comb, le]K.
Cocoa-mit, tiiu, kaii, hererei. popo, uU).
Cold, auu, makalili, take, moko.
Collect, _/(«?, lajm, siko.
Collection, cluster,ybe,y}/«.
Comb, selu.
Come, sail, lokn, j'iti, sale, tae, ofi, snko,
(ilala, liu.
Command, kau, lau, jtoln, tajia, lono.
Comnn)!), free, not restricted, melie, noa.
Companion, sou.
Company, /oe,/«j!i, malaita, pu.
Conceal,///, >ia, piiui.
Conch, /UI.
Confess, ////,;, liUa.
Congeal, harden, tiJca.
CoiKpieror, laijiitila.
Contagious, jiisi.
Cimta'm, faliki, kapu.
Contradict, Am.
Contrive, toniiajiti.
Corix], juiijii, loka.
C<ird, liui), kdfii.
Corner, jxka.
Corpse, aija, tufxijidku.
Correct, exact, tau, totiu, pono.
Cough, die, moko.
Coimcil, /«W".
CoiiiUry, ./«««", kdi.
Couple, pair, sua, liiu.
*_,
POLYNESIAN VOCAnUI, ARY.
345
Covcnnnt, borgnin, tati.
Cover, liji, knmo, jmki, ]>nlii.
Covotous, titan II.
Criil), ■pakd.
Cramp, jiili.
Criino, kotiiku.
Crente, «;;«, kidi.
Creep, lolo, sili.
Crook, Id.
Cross, jicka, tckii.
Crow, kuoa, viiii.
Crown (iriicnd, linnu, pita.
Crumb, kotn, sinja.
Crust, paka.
Cry, tayi, olo.
Cup, ipii, knpti.
Curse, kaga, kajtc, knpit, tianii.
Cut, koli, scl<\ niulu, miitit, tii, tipi, tafa.
D
Dance, iila, sakd, sirn, kalini.
Dark, liiki, i>o})i.
Ddiigbtcr, tdina.
Diiwii, (ilii.
Day, iiso, la.
Dayligbt, ao.
Dead, tiiale, siija, lilt.
Deaf, tidi.
Deceive, viilr,Jiti, piitii, Ian.
Deep, loin, hohnnu, jioko.
Deliver, /('(/> t (see loose).
Depart, kcmi, Ick, setno, taka (see go).
Descend, jHW, tn, seke.
Desire, Jia, nuinako, Jinapulo, ano, maki,
mati'.
Desist, knita.
Desolate, ntio, nea, rao.
Despise,////*;.
Despoil, /jo, salii, vetc.
Destroy, _/«^(, liitii, man.
Dew, sail.
Die, iiKitc (see dead),
Dillerenl, kesi\ kisi, kaUxi,
Ditiii'ult, ttiitd, pakck(\ itiji, pili.
D'5, ke/i, ko, kiiii, poo.
87
Dip up or out, (isH, kapu.
Dirt, dirty, kcle, lcpo,faii.
Disobey, jiakckc.
Disposition, <t>ja, loto, manava, yakait.
Dispute, ke, kisi, lamaki.
Distribute, tufa, toji, scle.
District, motii, ttiikii.
Disturb, kcii, satiga.
Dive, liiku, siikii.
Divide,/^, _/««;', tufa, vasr, sole.
Do, inia, iiica, liive.
Dng, kiili.
Done, nli, pan.
Doubt, salo, koko.
Dove, kuku.
Down, sifo.
Drag, tiisn.
Draw, kiimc, li, onii, iiki, sisi, nmi, via.
Dream, iiiiti, mosc, lia.
Dregs, kol<i.
DriU, Me.
Drink, i/ia.
1 )rive, li, tekr, tute.
Drop, tula.
Drown, Irnio.
Drum, tufa, pahu.
Dry, nuUo, mayo.
Duck, toha.
Dumb, masu, pa.
Dust, hfii, kota, jiopo, siiija.
Dwell, wfn, jialasi, sili.
Dye, tincture, sina.
E
Ear, taliya.
VMnws\\y,fu,fana,fita.
V.a.x\\\,fanaa, kele, lepo, iimea.
EarllKjuakc, la.
ISastcrn, sake.
Easy, gofie, mulie.
Eat, k'li, lama, taumafa.
libb, kriai, sekc.
Echinus, ■sea-urchin, tala.
Edge, mat<i, lath.
Eel, ji.ihi, toko, tuna.
846
PHILOLOGY.
"
Egg, manuiri, knH.
Eighl, viilii.
VAhaw, liikf.
Elcpliniilinsis, /f'/e,
Embark, siikc, sike.
Empty, mctSH.
Encloiio, encompass, kaj>u, jiokai, 7)K?ii,
taka.
Enclosiirp, d, loto, koloy jia, mala.
End, extremity, hojx', jiito, sikii.
Eiuleil, (Vi, jHiu.
Ei\cmy,Jili.
Eiiougli, /(/m, kati, tuu.
Ensnare, y/si, ulc,fch.
Enter, «, sao, siilu, tomo, oji, pitta, jKiko.
Entirely,/", i>im.
Envelop, A"//?, putoku, ])ii/u,
Envioiis,/«(f, ^(K.
Erect, til, tu/ii.
Evening, afiaji.
Exnmine, maia, taki, niiti, sola.
Exce<>(lini;ly. lavn, loa.
Exchiini;e, tun, lioko,
Exritc, kt'n, kdi, oso.
Explain, i/o, mate, vase.
Ex<|uisito, ])ii/(>tu.
Ivxtenil, /a/a, kiiini, o, tail.
Extinguish, tiiiei.
I")ye, tiiata, kiiiio.
Hye-brow, tiikc.
Eye-lasli, /an.
Eye-lid, /cva.
Face, a/o, mat'i.
Fade, ma, inao.
Fair (weather), akt, /apt, pakisi.
Fall, sitja, pau, pisi, to, tun, taJ;a, vili,
tiia/i/i, tumo.
Fame, /<iiio.
Family, kui, sivi,/aga.
Famine, soi/c.
Fan, i/i, tafi, a/o.
Far, maiiHW, tafiti.
Fasten, piw, man, ptUiti, tnjie, /lumn.
Fat, gako.
Father, tanta, tiia.
Faiher-in-law,/«j)o.
Fathom, nnfu, mido, klimi.
Favorite, /k/c.
Fear, ai'raU\, fife, mataku, niau/e.
Feather, /«/«.
Feed, /ill/a.
h\'v\ (act.), fa/a.
Fell, cat down, tii, tu,
F^>nce, n, jhi.
Ferment, sii.
Fern, nasf.
Festivity, ko/i, siva, kalioi.
Fetid, jii/an, namii, elo.
Vow, iti, /na.
Fielil, a, mala, vase.
Fiery, kiisii, ii/u.
Fight, tan, tainaki.
File, ki/i.
Fill, knsn.
Fillip, fima, fiti.
F'in, kiiiia, ti/a.
Find, /i>ki).
Fire, aji.
Firm, man, ma/», /inkci, oka, ]>atiti, pao.
Firmament, /rva.
First, //((, Ina, ii/ii.
Fish, i/ai.
Fish (v.), /avnkai, sisi.
Fish-hiHjk, nuitan, pa.
Fit, tun.
F'ive, /ima.
Fixed, man, ])uo, tokn.
Flag, streamer, /cva, vc/o.
Flame, u/ii, vc/o.
Flap (v.), kiipii.
Flash, kaiKijiu, kanw.
Flat, /iifii, piiixi.
Flea, kntn.
l''lee, Jhlu, niutn, soke, solo.
Fleet, Jii/au.
Flesh, kano, ki/co.
l-'loal, /(//;'(, lio/na.
l'"lock, Idija, fnsi.
Flow, l(ij'(, pali, ptia.
F'low(_T, fdtja, pua.
Flusheil, ruddy, pano.
POLYNESIAN VOCABULARY.
347
Flute, fa^,
Fliittpring, jvi>c.
Fly (s.), Idijo.
Fly (v.), Mr, miisiii, ])una.
Flying-fish, maloto.
Fouiii, Sitka, jma.
Fog, kosu, Ji/iji, (ifd.
Fold, fiUti, jiflii, jmkai,
F'ollow, (till, fii, luli.
Food, kai, ma.
Foolish, vule, 7ieva, lajm.
Foot, vac, tapn.
F'or, 110, tia, mo, ma.
Forbid, forbidden, eva, sa, lakui, tapu.
FVrehend, /ae.
F'oreign, jiajM, kesc, siva, tajili.
Foremost, miia, idu.
Forget, yah, moke,
F^ortress, hilo, pa, jxili.
Foul, filthy, fait, keta, jiala.
Foundation, tumii.
Founlnin, pima.
Four, Jit, tail.
Fragment, fast, fiiti, sitka.
Frngriint, kola, maiiogi.
Freeman, linjntila.
Fresl\ (water), nuiyalo, lanu.
F"riend, sua.
From, mat, tin.
F'ront, all), mata, mita.
Fruit, fita.
Fuel, fa/ic.
Full, ki, pile, titihii, kona.
Fur, fttltt.
Furious, sac.
G
Gall, an,
Gnrdrn, ma?a.
Generation, liqnt, tiki.
Gcntl(^, malic, layi.
Get, laita, man.
Giddiness, lika.
Gird, Idkai, tatiia, fitsi, li.
Girdle, malo, hitmc.
Girl, tama, jioliki.
Give, fo, kau, scle, monioa.
Glide, sekc, haliia.
Globular, /«■, jioto.
Gnash, tjai, ijau.
(io, a/it, sale, o,fano, liti, Uil:a, liifa, tiki.
God, alita.
Gone, lilo, liti.
Good, hi, pat, tiieitaki.
Gourd, /«c, si?ia.
Govern, y^jj, pit/e, taki.
Govi^rnmcnt, malo, sau.
Grandparent, tiijiii.
Grasp, ktikit.
Grass, iitnhiikit, miitie, yahcle, tain, veiivcti.
Gravel, kili, pata.
Gray, sinn.
Great, fit, last, ntii, tele, oko, pn.
Green, ota.
Grieve, miita, misi, nkn, ama.
Groan, ale, faiyt, gulu.
Gmw, fita, tiipn.
Growl, tjaga, ijila.
Grumble, mnsn, naiiu.
Guard, Iro, tiaki.
Guess, tofo, litsi, mate.
Gum, resin, tcpau, jiulu.
Gum (of the jnw), yao.
Gush, 2>a/h putia, 2>na.
H
Mail, AV)?.
Hair, fi/lii, Ian, makaioe.
Half, Jh, bill, ttia.
Ilanil, liiua.
Handle, helve, kan.
riandsonie, manaiii, Irka, viilotn, soifita.
I lang, feic, li, scle, Ian, leva.
Ihippen, lokn.
Happy, matin.
Harbor, ava.
Hard, mah, oko. pakcke, jmtiti.
Hasten, vavr, viki, jwkc.
Halrlul, kino, lin.
Ha\e, Uina, man.
34S
I'll I LO I, OU Y.
I ■
lie, ill, mi.
Head, ulu, jioko, uto, penu.
Hiiul-neh, /it.
Ilcnl, mii/ii.
Ilctip, /)ii/;r, til.
Hear, /ow.
Ilcnrt, iiakiiii, /utii, /lOiijui, lulu.
IIwivi'ii, linji.
Menvv, tiiafa.
Urol, tiikc.
Help, sna, tiilu, alu,
Hcrf, nci.
Hositnte, knko, pcli,
Ilow, tii/iii, piio.
Iliccmigl), kiikina.
Hido, liiddon, fii, mi, lih, lo, pnlti, lulu,
miilii, viokr.
Hi{;li, /inm, tikclikc.
Hill, iiiiiu, puke.
Hiiiilcr, iilai, Uwfi,
Hiss, sisi.
Hit, im, til.
Hither, iiiai.
Hot;, piiuka.
Hold ((if ship), liu.
Hold (v.), kiiku, tiuiu, jmlu, taqfi, kapu.
HimU, III, iiiatau.
Hoop, tlllll.
Hope, mimiiko.
Horizon, tlllll.
Horn, fii".
Hoi, knsa, fana, vela.
House, fall'.
How, ]>e.
HoM many, Jisa.
Hundred, lau.
Huni;ry, kai, pddi, popi.
Hurrieane, ii/'d, vclo.
Hurl, piiJii, mate.
Husband, tane, o/iana, tafu.
Hush, /"/.
Hy|>ocrite, fun.
i
I, iiu, kii.
If, ilia, km, pe, sili.
lynorniit, vu/e, hiipo.
Image, ntii, tiki.
Im'Unlc, fiti.
Iinmodost, kiilioi,
111, (, kii, mil.
lndceil,7''/><, liivii, maoni.
Infant, iti, vale.
Inland, utii.
Inlay, fnno.
Insect, kimio, sokii, sno.
Inside, iilo, loto, manava.
Inspire, siilii.
Insult, iirovokc, kaka, kajK, ke
Intoxicated, kotia.
Invocation, hqni, jmle.
Ileh, maijrso.
Ivory, piiliioa.
Jaw, kauae.
.lerk, kctii.
Join, f.oko, mill, it.
Joint, jmiia, pitkii.
Joy, joyful, yi(;, koakoa, koli, leka, soisoi.
Judge, ra, tilo.
Jump, nsn, sojio, piina,Jiti, kctu.
Just, jtono, sao, tika, tonii.
K
Kernel, kann. Mo.
Kill, /rt«, to.
Kind, iitn, liu.
Kindle, tafu, titi)i, tutu.
Kindred, kai.
King, suit, tupu, aliki.
Kite (plaything), kaj>a.
Knead, mitu.
Knee, tuli, poko.
Kneel, tuli.
Knife, /.'//(■, tipi,
Knol), piiku.
Knock, la, tu.
P0LYNK8IAN VOCABULARY.
349
Knot, j)ona.
Know, i/o, kite.
LmUpT,fat(i.
Lnke, Into, lanii,
Liimo, limp, koki, hrtu,
Liirnont, olo, pike,
Lnnco, tan, velo.
Lniigiiiigi', kiipu, leo, olclo.
Laugh, kiit<t, sni.sui.
I.ny or put dovn, takoto, vaiho, tiikii.
Ln/.y, tjele.
Lpa<l (s.), tfjxiK.
Lend (v.), laki, tono.
Leaf, Idii.
Loak, mama, I in.
Lean (ad.), ijiise, koko, vioko.
Lean upon, JiiJiila, filiimki.
Leave, tiikii, vailio, iiuisiii.
Leeward, lain, sifo.
Led (hand), scniu, id.
Leg, vor.
Leper, leprosy, y«'/f, ten.
Lest, nei.
Lick, villi, pain.
Lid, liji, tijii.
Lie, repoNo (v.), mitse, tiikotn. viti.
Lift, sii/)i'i, mki, li.
Light, lustre, liiniii, no, sitln.
Light, not heavy, mamti, Itnju.
Light-hain>d, krfit.
Lightning, iiihi, knmn.
Like, j>f, me, tan, lite.
Lip, ijiitii.
Liquid, sua.
Little, iti, iiki, iiiiiki, auhi, tiiomo.
Live, ola, soifiui.
Liver, ate.
Lizo'd, nw^;n, pili, ijafa.
Load (v), fiio.
Lohsti-r, kiila.
Lodge, .-(tny, siti.
Loins, taukiipii.
Long, Ina, tiia.
Look (v.), sa/a, tia, liln, taki, lajtn, lakai.
Loose, taJii, vrte, senio, a/ii.
l/oav, lost, liio, mnkr, ijalo.
Louse, kati/,
Lr)vp, ofa.
Low, la/o, saka.
I,ow-wnti'r, masii, iiiako.
hump, fa!ii,fije, jmpo.
Luscious, 7iinmoiia,
M
Mad, vale, iiera, pule.
Maggot, ilo.
Make, am. fai, tjtwsi, kali.
Male, taiie, ttxi,
Malh'l, ike.
Man, tane, taijata.
.Many, lasi, tele, tiui.
Mark, iln, piiki, ta, tafii, titsi.
Marrow, tola.
Must.Jhnd, tila.
Master, /(/, tiia,fatu.
Mat, kiv, tiikajxiu.
Mature, full-grown, tua, oko.
Meal, repast, kai.
Medicine, lapakaii.
.Meditate, Ha, niniiako, sala, va.
Meet, /('/'■, taki, tail.
Mend, /o«o, piiiaki.
Mi'ssenger, lele, nka.
.Middle, Into, lua, tniiit, vitir.
Mild, laiji, vali, viayaJ/).
Million, kiJii.
Mince, tnfi, vali.
Mind, lain, mauava, t/akaii.
.Mirror, ata.
Mischievous, kra, samja.
Mistake, liijiii, tna, se,
.Misunderstand jxikike.
Mix, mingle, nun, /ilo, siii, pain, rali. ki/sii.
MiTck, fai.
-Mole on llie skin, ila.
Moon, lama, fina, tnauii, kavakc.
Morning, jm/i.
Mote, paid, siiya.
88
:)so
Miiih, xikii.
Miillirr, ////(/, hill. Jut, k>ii, ttn ,
Miiiiiiil, iiiiin, piikr,
.Mciiiiitiiiii, mail, tun.
Moiiso, kimixt, kiiJe.
.Mciiiili, /((/(/, fiiilii, iiiiiijii.
.Miiullil'iil, iiiiiraci, )iiii.
iMdVc, iiiki; /nkr, lih ,
.Mullet, kiiiiiir.
Muriiuir, iimsu, nuiiii.
Muscle (slicll), kiikii.
Musket, /III,
Musquild, kulii, iiiimii.
N
Nail, s\)'Ac,fno.
Nail 1)1' lin;^(r, kiiku, mutikukii.
Name, iiimi, siiiifii, liijut,
NaiK' of neck, kiiki.
Narrow, njii, ili, nijx.
Native, miumi, kiii, yiUi.
Navel, y>iVo.
Near, Uitn, jiili, oji, jxte.
Neat, /iV(, Irii.
Neck, lilt, kiiki.
Necklace, kiisixt.
Nwille, akii, lii/ii.
Nephew, moknpiina.
^cat, fiDjii, si/i.
Net, kiij>r!)ii, iilu.
New, foil.
News, logo, laJii.
Night, 7WJ1J, luki.
Nine, siva.
Nit, lia.
No, (li. If.
'So\sr',faliilii, mii,paki, i/aya, ijolo.
Noon, no.
Noose, yffr, sflc.
North, to, toktlau.
Nose, isii.
Not, ai, le, tni.
Now, nci.
Nurse, tuHsi, tiifit.
I'll I 1,0 I.O(i Y.
O
Olx'y, liDiiii.
Oihii', kii/iicii.
Odor, iiiiiiiii, siiiiifi,
or, (/, n, till, iin.
Oil, lull), jMiiii, siiiii, moii.
Old, III, tint, tiijitit.
One, tiisi, jin:
ih\\\ , Jim , I'll , mnoiii. Hit, vide.
< >|MMi, /r;.s/, 7111111111, iiiagu, to, Vit, vase, seu.
( 'li^jiii, lino, tlljllt.
Ornaiuent, .sii.
Other, krsr, kisi, t<isi.
Outside, /«/«, jHu:
Oven, iimii.
Overthrow, overtuni, tulaki,fuli,
(.)w\,/,i/ii.
I'aildle.yo.w, (tlo, kiipa.
Pain, liija, munii, mnnuihi, hi.
I'ainI, iiili (see l)estnear).
I'al< , mil, till, tavake.
Palm ol'lianil, kupu.
Paiidanus, /((/«.
Pap, siisii.
Paradise, piilolu.
Parent, tnii.
PaP'nl-in-law,y/(»)0.
Parry, /"'//, kiUo.
Parsinmnions, jii/i.
Part, portion, /((,/(««, jxie, vase, ma, ni.
Past, lilo, jiaii, scmo.
I'ath, sii/ii.
Patience, patient, iiso, niitfit.
I'ay, tiifti, iitii, tun, hiiko, luki.
Pence, pacific, snii, loijo,Jb.
Pearl, /(y, ////, set.
Pearl-shell, tijii.
I'chhie, kiiUi.
\\'c\,Jisi,Ji)se.
Pw'p, siikc, tilo.
Pcg,Jho.
I' t» I, V N E M I A N V (» A II 1/ I, A (l V.
351
Pfll with Htiiwrs, jiiai.
I'c'<i|ili', kill, iiiiitii, soi/ii, nth.
l'('|i|K'r, jHi/ii.
l'r|)|M'r-|)liiiil, kiini.
I'lTli'd, tiio, jiii/ijtii,ii>iiu,
I'i'ilia|is, fH\
I'lTMiii, kill, liti)<itii, tiim.
I'crvLTl, Jim:
I'i'Nilr, /run,
I'ieriT, mikii, siiki, siinuki, till.
Pij^ciiu, liijif, kiikii.
I'illow, kii/i, iilii.
I'ilnl, iiiki, Ick.
I'iii, iikii.
Pinch, kiiii. Inn,
I'il, hill, jHikit.
Pili'li, piilii.
Pity, nfii, iiue.
Plncr, til, llllkll, lllfll.
Plain (s.), /nil, juijiii,
Pliiil, /(/(, /ni/ii.
Plant (v.), kn, Innii, to.
Plantain, Juki.
PluHsant, /rkii, niwn, j/tik.
Plciiulcs, miUd.
Pluck, tu/i, Juki, fiiti.
Plnni|i, i/i/iii, tile.
Plunder, Jui>> siilii, vetr.
Plural particles, ittii, foe, fast, kail, ma,
mail. III, ijii, puke, puku, Uii, tau.
Point at, liisi.
Poison, komi.
Pole, toko.
Poor, tiriii, ijrie.
Porpoise, tiifolA.
Post, i>oii, tiilii, /ami, tika.
Posterity, siili.
Potato (sweet), kionaja.
Pour, liyi, iisii, utii, suai.
Prayer, lolii, piili:
Precipice, piili, ojuita.
Pref,'naiit, pii, sapn, to.
Prepare, trii.
Press, squeeze, JhUi, loiiii, opa, tau, tina,
tomi.
Prick, tiii, suki.
Priest, tuiila, tiifinjii, tiipu, aliki.
I'riK'iaiin, /xiId, lulu.
PrnjH'r, inili'. Inn.
Property, Initn, njii, knloa, vui.
Prophecy, loj'o. Ho, faiia.
Proud, j/«, ten, iia.
IVovision, omi.
Provoke, /,(', n, jukn.
Pndiliii;;, loin.
i'iMi;;ent, knvn, iiinijiao.
Punish, jKkii.
Push, tikr.
Put, liikii, vnilio.
Putri<l, pnia, pilau.
Q
(Quarrel, kr, main, lamaki, tetc,
(luick, viki, vave, Mr.
C^uiet, main, na, masa, loffo, lulu.
R
Italler, lara, ««), oka.
Rain, iisn.
UaiidK)W, niiiiit, iimata.
Itaise, siki, sisi, sajmi.
Rat, kiiiioa, kinlc.
Raw, otn.
Reach, o, tau.
Ready, tan, ten.
Rehuke, lili, kaiuie, yao.
Reckon, Ian, tan.
Reconcile, rao.
Red, kula, do.
Redeem, jxmaki.
I{eed, knso.
Ret'f (of rocks), sakau, toka.
Reflection, image, ala.
Reject, //, li.
Relish to food, kinaki.
Remainder, toe, lara.
Renieniher, vianalii, maiiako.
Remove, nekc, jieke, taka, keu.
Reptile, piUa, moko.
|{esidencc, api, kui, silt.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
I
1.0 £Kili£
■tt Bi ■2.2
S! y& 12.0
I.I
^
^
V
Photographic
Sdmces
Corporalion
as WIST MAIN STRUT
WISSTIR.N.Y. MStO
(71«)a7a-4S03
4^
SS3
I'HI I, O LOGY.
Resmind, taiji.
Rent, repose, ma/6, iiuim, okioki,
KosI upon, siii, (an.
Itrtiirn, t'oki.
Revolve, taka.
RiK l,t.
RiL'lil, jmiin, stio, lonii, \/iiU; Inn.
Ri^lit linnil, Inii.
Ring, nuima.
Rip<', mao, oko.
Rise, /iti, li, fiita, piitii.
Riwir, gii/ii.
Roast, liinK, tito.
Rock, jMipa, toka.
R..11, takn.
Roll up, fiUii,Ji/i, pokni.
Root, aka.
Rope, maea, Uiiila, /inn.
Rotten, jhi/ii, jx>{iii, j>rj)c.
Roujjii, tiiiiji/iiii, piipii, siiki, tain.
Round, for, jxiln, taka.
Row, ran)', /mijki, lit.
Ruh, i;;i//, mntii, solo, lomi.
Kulihisli, kola.
Run, SI Jo, Me.
Rusli (Jn)iciis),Jisi, ktuo.
Siictrd, sii, liui, tabu, moa, ]nti.
Sacrifice, Unininfa.
Sail (».), kir, la.
Sail (v.), jii'io, soko, tele, foUiu.
Salute, miji.
Sand, line.
Sandalwood, aic.
Sap, liilo.
Satiitc, konii, Jill, masa,
Savnu"', »»«', //«y«.
Savor, liJo.
Scatrojil, sta>j;iiig, fata.
Scale ol'tish, una.
Scale (lish ),/««.
Scalier, In, /a/a, /efa, palasi.
Sco'V', kiin.
Scrap, inoiiiu, nuikawe, supa.
.Scrape, lakn, yatn, vain.
Scratch, se/n, rakn, /akn, ijnln.
Scull (s.), ai/a, jnko.
So, tai, tiioaiia, mill, rasa.
Search, swk, kiiiii, /apn, snkc, ijnln, liki,
kiln.
Season, Inn, )iiiiw,fii, iiianli.
Si-a-weed, limn.
See, till, kill', miilti, vakai.
Sifd, kano, fntii.
Seize, pnke, so/in, jirkii.
Senil, kiin, iii)ii,
Si'parale, tiioln, jme, taka, ruse.
Servant, saga, tantua.
Set, piigi, to.
Seven, Jitn.
Sew, Int.
Shade, ata, mtilu.
Shake, ///, /(', tiitn, trie, kiilo.
.Shallow, innsii, pnjuikn.
Shnnie, ashamed, ma.
Sha|H', fiKt,
•Shark, minjo.
Sharp, koi, lipi.
.Shar|)en, solo, tain.
Shave, la/i.
.Sheath, Jiiji.
Shed, j'olan.
Shell", Jala.
Shell, jmka, niia.
Shelter, In/n, ma/u.
Shine, suln, kanajHi,
.Ship, /lalii, Jiilan,
Sho<', lainaka.
Slirxil, Jiuia, pn, li.
.Short, /xV", saka.
.Shoidder, nmii, jnko.
Shout, kiilaija, vnlakuu, vavao.
.Show, ill), Lijii, iHsi.
Shrewd, ala, Ian.
Shut, kiiiiio, /kiiii, pnni.
.Sick, inaliaki, la, male, ijana, Jin.
i^ide, kiiokai), jxif,
Sijjli, inapn, n,isi, yae.
Sign, i7«, jMio.
Silent, niiijn, mnsn.
.Sin, siila, suiai, kajir, liiii.
I» O I, Y N K 8 I A X V () C A 11 V I. A R Y.
353
Sinn, sii'ii, kiilini.
Sink, ijiili), jiokii, srkr, .vmn, lo, tomo.
Siiiiict, /.(i/ii.
SiHirr, tdol^rlCy Uisi, liiii, pone.
Sit, ««/«, jKiUui, tekc, kittiikii.
Six, OHO.
Skill, ki/i.
Sky, linii, levii.
Sliu'k, iilii.
Slii|i, jMiki, jxili, ]x>.
Sliivi', Mil.
Sleep, ninse^ tiikoto, tokii, voir.
Siiii);, miikti.
Slip, jcAr, srnin, /emit.
Slow, j/f/p, »*/«, lo, tun,
Siniiko, iisii, jxitji.
Snake, ivilu, moko,
Snww!, mii/iitiiii, li/r.
SiKire, i/olii, tjulii,
SlIOIll, IJHtll.
So, jir.
Soak, until.
SoU, iiiiilii, >jrj>ii, jmi/h, pejie, tali.
Soil, krir.
Solo of t(K)l, liipii.
Solid, pnjMi, tiui/i'i, hiikii.
Solitary, into.
SonM', ma, ni.
Some line, */, Insi.
Son, tiimii, tun.
Soii'in-law, Jinjo,
Song, iiva, jiiJie.
Soot, iHi/nfii.
SorceriT, sorcery, tiijiii, kni/n.
Sore, tiiixi, Jeji; mnsnki.
Sound, /uijii, lagi, j'uliilu.
Soup, sii.
South, tokelau, to.
Sow, ///.
Space, VII.
Spade, ki>.
S\KaV.,Jiiki,liH, kii/e/o,ki,/au, takitu, talu,
iilr.
Spear, tii/n, tiio, relo.
S|>it'rli, iiliilitijn, liiii}ftl, kolelo.
Spill, liiii.
Spirit, iiitii, niHi, ntn, ku/une, nuinava.
80
Spit, n/e, iiiiu, liifii.
Splash, /»/a;.
Split, /(/, /mi. III.
S|i<iil, mini.
ii\Hinn<', limu.
Sjiotled, jiiile.
S|H)U**, ItflllUll.
Spray, tita, son.
Spri'ad, /«/(/, /ii/n, tiiko, tolo,faliki, tiiki,
Spriii^^ lip, //, pinin.
Sprit, tilii.
Sprout, //<, kito, miikii, siili, tiipu,
S<pial>, i>iikii, juilo.
Sipiarr, public place, mii/a, ttthna.
S<piid, AXc.
S<piit'^>-, kiinir, o/xi, liui, limi.
Still), .vikii (sc«' picrcp).
Stall", liiko.
Stajinanl, /»7».
Stair, A/"".
Siaiid, //', tikii.
Star, Ittii.
Steal, kiiiM, piioi. Hike, kamo.
Steam, nsii, kosii.
Stem, stalk, kiiii.
Stern of veswH, muii.
Stick (v.). piki, pili, puni.
Stir, *•(/, krii,
Sliiniacli, kite, fntii.
i^Ump, Jii/ii, kiilii, miikn.
Stopple, koiiio, piilii, iiHloti,
Storm, iitti, iclo.
Story, tnle, Inknn, fiimi.
Straijilit, */>, tonii, tikn.
Stniiifie, krsi (•«•«• foreign).
Slninulo,/'/^, kiimi.
Slri'nm, Intr.
Strike, /(/«/, /«/»/, nioto, jtn, pnki, ptUii, jxi,
fit. III, II.
Strike, a» a ship, si/i, tokn.
Strip, luifii, mill.
Strive, mn/u, ttte.
Stroke (v.), /mK
StT\n)\i, fitii, ok'K knjii, iiiiUu.
Stuinlile, lo, til.
Stun, tiili.
Stupid, vole.
S54
Siilwlnncc, /'V, kunn, lino.
Slick, Diili, oino.
Siignr-rnnc, lo.
Siiilnblf, lull.
Sun, '(«, Id, /(tint.
Sunset, In.
Support, III, jnijf, liitii.
Surf, t)<iJii.
SurfacT, liiiKt, lull.
Surpass, .«///, niiii,
SurriMind, /w/k, /xikai, Uika.
Suspicious, /Ktio, Jim.
Swnllnw, /(V«.
Sweat, mil, kiivit.
Sweep, t,i/i.
Swell, /.vA/, Jill.
Swim, I.IIII, iilo.
Sword, /.'</,/•.
Swortl-lisli, nkii.
V im, o I, o o V.
Tnhle. /<;^/, lau.
'I'licilum, iiiiisii, ijii.
Tiiil, sikii, till).
Take, kin-r, lavr, lnH, t'lm, titki, fiike,
piili, liiko.
'I'nik. Iiilii, VII, koir (see g|)cak).
'riune, Itilii, iiiali.
Tiisle, tiflo,
TiitliioinL!, marking, moko, la, lau.
Teaili, iiko.
Tear (s.), loi.
Tear (v.), sue.
Tempt, sriiiii.
Ten, /»/», kiiiiii.
Tliank, liiki.
TImt (pr.), nil.
That (coiij.), kill, ina.
Tha'.cli, (ito, jxilu.
The, If.
Then, mi.
There, ki). nil,
Tlicreu|Hin, liivii, lele.
They, /(/, nu.
Thick, niiitalii, pii,
Thicki't, run, ijiilieic,
'VUigU, lii/m, iifii.
Thill, liiiliii, niji, ijii$r.
'I'hiiij!, inrii.
Think, nmniiko, mea (see meditate).
Thirst, kai.
This, nri.
Thorn, liil't.
Thou, ko, ke.
Thoiisniiil, iilr, niiino, lini,
'I'lireail. /(/«.
Thn'c, liilii.
Throw, li, li, veto, inaka,
Thiiniler,_/((/M, maim, ijiilu.
Tickle, nifiiitwo.
'Vir. Jim, li, srie (see hind).
'I'ill, iimki.
Time, niiiiiiivii, mniili, vii.
To, /./, mil.
To-day, mi.
Together, /", limi.
'I"o-iiiorrow, III), jmiji.
Tongue, iili'In.
Tooth, nijii, i)iin,
'l"op, summit, /(/v'(, jiiln, tiimii.
Top (playlhiiin), ///', inilo, taka.
Torcli, lama, snlii.
Tortoise, /«««.
Tortoise. shell, kill, una.
Touch, /HI, juiki, taijo, lit.
Tough, //(/.
'J'owii, /■(/(', kitio, nnkii, jxi.
Track (s.). Ill Jilt.
Trade, /((", lioko.
Trample, trend, knhi, jieli.
'i'h-e, liikiiH.
Trcmlile, III, Mr, jirjK, lika.
TrilK\ jiii, ivi.
'I'riie, miiiini, io.
Trumpet, pii.
Trunk, liimii, lino.
Trust ill, filiimki.
Try , prove, /<//(/, lifo, logi.
Turmeric, Irijn.
Turn, /(//, liili, rili.
Turn aside, jxi/e, jme.
POLYNESIAN VOCABULARY.
355
TwiiH', o/?), filn, kiilU.
'l\\»l, Ji/i,Ji/ii, viilo, tiino, vUi,
Two, lua.
V
{'U'or, frfr, pii/ti, liiyii.
riiilrrstiiiiil, linjnna, ]Hio (soo know).
I'iiUpIcI, /fV(/, li)/i.
Uiirortiiiinle, mtilii.
VmU; I'lisi, f'hsi.
I'lllolicl, /«/,7.
t'lislicalh, iinii.
L'|>, Mike, liiiju.
N't'il, piilokii, jHilr, lulu.
Voiii, »«.
Vermin, kiilii.
Very, luni, /(xi,/i/.
Vex, vi'Xiilious,y«(, u, tail, kaka,fiii.
Visitor, iiKinii,
Voii'c, Ipf).
Vomit, lua, jma.
w
Wnil, (lUf, pilte, 0(0, tayi.
Wnist, ttiuku/iu.
Wail, lull, titiki.
Walk, tdfd, rvii.
VVnll, i>a.
Wniulfr, sr.
Waiii. lufil, sona (see poor).
War, t'tu, lumuki.
VVaril "(V, jxili, siu.
VVnrm, /itiiii, vela.
Warriiir, litti,
WnrI, limn.
\\as\i, fiilii, solo, lulu.
Wntc'li (v.), lama, leo, tiaki, vnkai.
Water, vai, lunii, tai, mili.
W'hvi', kiilr, ijalii.
Wax, lijHiu.
We, mil, la.
Weak, riiiviti, vali,paJii, lo, yase.
Wcnry, niiisii, li>,Jiii,
\\\»\l\ Jlllll, luijH,
Wird, iilr.
NN'clcoiiM", miili).
Well (s.), li/iit, lua, puna.
West, to, sijij, lalo.
Wet, .111, lull, mitku, sou.
Wlialo, liifula, palaoa.
Wlinl, d.
When,/;-.
Where,/;.
Whicli.yr.
\VW\>'\X'T,Jilllll, tuusu.
Wliistle,ylr'«, iiiiipii.
White, lai, kiinkiio, ma, sitia, tavake.
Wholi', fijt. I'll. kiiliKi.
Wiilc, liifa, Ilia, lea.
W'ili; Jii/im; iikana.
Wild, 4»r.
\\ .Iderness, vuo.
U ill, /iiiiiijiilo (see desire).
Wind, iiiji, sun, sarin, tokclaH, to, malapat,
liioiikr,
Wiiidwaril, siikr, hinc.
Wing, /,(//»(, jHtririiH.
Wink, kiimi).
Winter, lokr.
Wi|H-, si)li>, miilu.
Wise, (//(/, /Hikiiii, polo, lull.
Willi, «)(/, me, iiki, kci.
Withered, iiiii, mulili.
U'iihin, liilo, limu.
Without (adv.), /(//o.
Woman, fujinr.
\\ Under, ofo, siiln, vil.
Wood, likau.fiijie.
Word, kiipu, kiJtlo, takau, Liu.
Work, iiiia, miisi.
X'' iirm, lnl.r.
Worship, lolu. pule.
Worthless, liijui.
Wound, jiiita, maiiu.
360
PII I I.O l,(>(i Y.
Wrnp, /rt//, ojKt, piilokii, piilii.
Wrist, tnpii.
Write, jxiki, Ui, tafii, liisi.
Yam, iiji.
Year, irnUa, tan.
Yellow, eh, /epd,
Yo8, to.
Yield, tiiku.
Yoke, /lekii.
Yoniler, age, lUu, siva.
Yoii, ko.
\ounii, i>i, iihiki, leku, pitnua.
Ymmm'st ehiltl, /lotiki.
'
DIALECT
OF FAKAAFO AND VAITUPU.
A FULL account of these two clusters and of their inhabitants is
given in the first part of this volume, p. 149 to IfiO. It is there re-
marked that the dialect was found to be nearly or quite identical at
the two places. The only difference of importance was in the greater
distinctness of pronunciation at Vaitupu, where the natives sounded
the consonants (particularly the /"and s) more strongly and shaiply
than is usual with the Polynesians. At Fakaafc, on the other hand,
the utterance of the people was very indistinct. The f frequently
became a sound like the wh in where, and sometimes, particularly
before o and n, a simple h. The s, likewise, was often sounded like
a strongly aspirated h. I' and 7V were used indifferently ; and in some
instances, k seemed to bo sounded like t. With these exceptions, the
resemblance of dialect is so close, that it has seemed superfluous to
give separate vocabularies for the iv.o clusters, the words obtained
at Ijoth being for the most part exactly alike. The grammatical
notes which follow, refer, therefore, to this common dialect, having
been deduced from the sentences which were written down on the
spot, as heard from the natives. All the phrases given by way of
example were thus obtained. Of course, the circumstance that this
dialect was found to be a purely Polynesian idiom, clo.sely resembling
the Samoan, gave a facility and certainty to the dcterminatior of its
grammatical characteristics, which would otherwise have been unat-
tainable.
J>0
DIALECT
OF l-AKAAFO AND VAITUPU.
;
O II T II O C. 11 A 1' II Y.
The numl)or of clomrntnry sottniU in this dinli'cl is, in strict acoiirnoy, tint tlfleen,
viz. : the live vowels, niiil ten consipiiiints, — k, I, ni, «. ]>, s, t, v, ij. TliP h, howi'vcr, will
be (Hionaionully employed inttend ul' llic s, whrrv it wns so pronounced by tlie niitives of
Fnknnfii, iind in one or two inslnnoes the iv « ill lie employed insteiid nf v.
It i» one peculinrity of this clinleel timt llie X- at the lx>ginniiig of ninny words is ofien
driip|)ed, apparently nl the mere pleasure cif the s|ieaker. Thus the natives said indille-
rently ko or 'o, ki or '/', kiia or 'i/n, Aic. 'I'lio first nrlhogriiphy would no dnulit lie the
corrci't one j liul it has seemed bettor, in all cases, to give the wo;ds exactly ns they were
heard and written at the time.
T II i: A U T I (■ I, K.
71 is the dcfmito article in the singidar numlier, — as, »'i Uhi ic lnm<i, good is the man.
Sr (or hr) was used before nonns, but whether ns an indelinile article or ns a particle
of airirnmtion is doubtful : — .«■ mnUi, an eye, or ii is an eye; si ulii, hair, or it is linir.
Til K Sf II ST. A NT I V i:.
The plural of nouns is determined either by the context or by particles prefixed.
Those which were heard were ni, kim, and Ini, — ns, ni no, clouds ; r sc m ni iifi, there
are no yams ; kan ]>u, shells ; c kin ti tui fiilr, the houses are many.
The cases are generally determined by particles niid prepusiiions. A"') (or ''<) is the
sign of (he nominative, — ns, < nliin ta/ifi) o 'Pjxj/n, T}pijii is nil nncient giNJ. It is used
U'forc pronouns, as ko tin, I ; kn ni, who ! nnd in nnswiT to n (jiiestinn, — as, who is it ?
Ans. Ko Ic Tiii/itiijd, it is T'lii/iiiijd ; ko Tniijie, it is 'I'aiipe ; w hat is it ! Aiis. Ko li
III, the sun. It is not, however, always employed, — us, c su Ic papa nei, this rock is
sncred.
FAKAAPO AND VAITUI'U.
8fi0
Oi'ii. 71' x'likn II rUiinjii, thr cnnnc of Pilmiia j niii o tc a/iki, cocoa-nuts of the chief;
nuuii ki vuiIdii, rn|H^ iMilonj^iiig to ii8,
Dat. FUi-iUii ki Niikii/iti/iii, I wish to go to Nuku-lailai ; 'in miUou, to ua ; pi/i ki
Fitkiiofi), iifiur to Knkiiafo.
Ace. Omiu lie niii, givo mo n cocon-nut.
Abl. V(iku mai TmgiUalni, ship from Tongatobu ; t liii/a i te lapi, above in the sky.
T II K ADJECTIVE.
The odjcctivc usually follows iho noun which it fjualifics, — ns, e lama li/ri, ho is a
good mnn ; but whon it is nccompnnicil by n vorbnl or nlfirinntivo |mrliclc, it may pro-
c(!(lo, — ns, j/(t Mri tr tama, goi«l is the mnn. In this cnso, the n(lji?clivc is, in fact, con-
gidfrod ns n verb.
The sumo word niny lie (■illior n sulistnntivc or an adjective nrcording to its construc-
tion, — as, fafine, woman, — mala fafinc, foinalc dress ; laiia, war, — /akait tnua, wor-
club.
The prefix fiika was heard boforo some adjectives, — as, Jiikn-atiia, godlike, divine ;
fdka-Mci, good.
NUMERAL -S.
Tasi (Initi)
one
Ilia or ua
two
lolii
three
fa
Tour
lima
five
OH'l
six
flu
seven
Vtllll
eight
ti-a
nine
aiia/iilii or (I
tjllliultl
ten
Ilia ijnt'iiln or ua ijahulu
Iwrnly
liJu iiiifulii
thirty
toll! lau
three hundred
Kiu wns used indcfinitnly for a prrnt numl)cr — " thousands."
TMu was sometimes prelixed in enumerating, as toku-oiw, six (qu. |X!rsons ?)
• P KONor NS.
The following nrc nil that were licnrd : —
I'KUSON AL
Isl pors. sing., An, ko an ot'oau
ail, i ail
dual, Mima, via
taua, la
I
me
we two (exclusive)
we two (inclusive)
»•
300 PIIILOLOUY.
plural, m/i/oM wo (cxc.)
I'ltitii »!• (inc.)
8d pcr». «inp., Knr, 'ir, kn knr ihou
(liinl, Wwii nr Vw>i yi' two
|>luml, kimton or 'milon yi*
• 3*1 |icri. iiiig., y<i hi-
I'DMUF.HSIN K
1st prn. xiiiR., (ikii, Inkii, tokii, mukii my
plurni. It) nititim our
'iid |icrs. *iiig., oil, lull tliy
t plural, M oulou, to outoii your
•
* ilftU'M menus prohabiy /or mr, ns wo hcnnl kn/Uoii miikii, projwrly (or mcrchnndisc)
for riM!.
INTKRROO ATI\ K
Ko III or 'o iii who * •
t iii whom T
Ko le a, ir A (he a) what ^
/V y A {jie /if il) how, like whni f
Ao ai is used of imthohs, nml niso i^ asking the iiniiH* of niiy thing ! as, ko at o oii'on
fiiniin, whnt is (the nnmc of) your country?
DKMONHTRATI VR.
'Unci. ihi.H. Tniti, timl.
As, ko tii /eiiri, ulio is tliis! r /r/ci le luma mi, (rood is lhi'< mnii ; r ri/iri/i leiin tiiai,
thnt ihiiii! is n drill.
No nlixivc pronoun wiis heard, th<' ooiistruclion of the scntcnrc np|mrfnlly rt'iidiriiig
it nnnii-issary, — as, tr tiiku u I'lhinjii, — tv vuku ulii, the cnnoc of I'ilinj/a, thu canuo
[which is] go'ng.
Til K V K II It.
The varintions of time, moo<l, A:c., in the verb, nrc denoted hy particles. The follow-
ing aK those which v>v heard.
il is us«l n.s an atrirmative sign, nml getirrnlly in the present or future tense, M, — C
fiiki miiloii, we return, or we sliall return. It is also iMuployed to expn^ss the substantive
verb, as r «<« onion, ye are sacri-d ; r iko Ir muLir, yonder is (he teiiii)le.
Sf (or /" ) was use<l in a similar manner, as, sr tii/nija, he is a priest ; Ac n/ita sn kne,
thou art a sncn>d gml. It may, however, in these instances, !« iiK-rely the iiidefinito
article.
A'c is a sign of the present or fntiins as, aii kr iiln ki iita, I am going on shore.
Kiiii (or '««), is an atlirmalive particle, as, — '«« jm, it is night ; kim mu/i; it is dead j
/"( /c/ri Ic liwia, the man is go<Kl. Il was sometimes pronounced liia.
I
■«
..
"«»
FAKAAPO AND VAITUPU.
3fil
Pika \n a rniiMlivp pn-'fin, n»,—/iika-tnii. Id ninkc cxi-hnii|{r, Id Irmlc. 'I'liU pnrtu-lo
ii nliMi I'liiiiloyiMl Id liirm iuIjitIIvi-ii,
/" ((ir '() Mi^mn ill (Hin iimlniii'c I" bo ii«pd nii the |>nMivc suffix, nii,—m<Uakii i te mm
]>iilii-ii, nt'rnitl dI'iIh' lliiii); blown (n eigiir).
liii|K'riiliv<' : liiUiii u, k'l ui gD ; c p/pi Uiiin, Id u« two Mlute ; kt aumai ko/mi, do
you two cornc.
A D V K K n H.
Miii, hilhrr, towards mr, as, — tau tiuii, como hero ; e pUi mai CkUtifu, Oalnfu is
neor bore.
Atii, nwny, from ino, os, — ttiki iitii, take away.
Aki (f), nwny, on, siiir iiki, ^d nwny, or go mil.
Nri, bom: — r sr ai ni iijl ki nri, lliorr nru no ynms lierc.
Ko, yonder ;— « i ko If miitur, yondi-r in Ibo iiiolnp.
Ki liign, nl«>vi', up; ki /<//«, U-lnw, down.
Miimiiii, fnr ; manuin Uiva Siimtm, vi'ry ftir is Samoa. Pi/i, near.
E tf, — r X ni, — ai-iiJa, tai-<ila, — ikai, kelt, — no, none, not.
/", — r, ycH.
iV.jr A, how F Pi-nei, thus, Hkc this; petui, like that. TH-/ea, where? iiuu-fra,
whcniM; ?
Nti iinil la were rrc(|iienlly iisnl nl the end of a sentenec, bui with no dislinrt meaning
thni could lie iicrcrivcd. Tliey nro probably locnlive particles, nn, — sele alii In, go nwny ;
r. iiiiki kiie mil nrt thou n I'bieff "lyjxi, o lokii Innid mt, 'Vc.\ta, my fatlier lliere.
I" R K POS 1 T ION8.
Ki or 'i, to.
/, in, nl, nmong.
O, <i, to. III, of, lielnnging to.
Xo, of, from.
JWrti, from, us vaka mai 1hng'il4iliii, ship from Tongatabu,
Mil, lor, as tnnkii, for inc (iilso probably irith).
C O N J It N i- T I O N S.
Mil, and (or with), as, — Oatnfii ma Niikiiiionu, Oatafu and Nukunono.
Kii, and, or but, ns,^-e taf/nla an, ka e si iiM-i, I am a man and not a chief
Bl
V C A H r L A |{ V.
In tho following list, the wohIn wliicli with lionrd l)otli at Fnknnfo
mill VHitupii are li'I'l uiiiimrknd. TIiomc wliich were heard only at
one of tl»' uroiips are marked with /•'. or V., r<'s|K'ctivt'ly. It \h pri)-
bable, however, that most of the latter are, in point of fact, common to
both places, and that our failure to note them was merely in conwe-
(|uence of the very brief intercourse which we had with tho natives
at each group.
AIhivc, ki /in)<i, I /(/j/fi,
A ('mill, iniitakii.
All, /,<//<»/.
Allc'ic'lil, liifiln.
Anil, HI", hn.
A|i|>r(>(ioli, /'*/*' mai (we come).
Arm, lima.
Arrivi', fiti (or /iiV;), nuii.
Ariismi, liijiimi, liilimjii (I'.); liijiigti (V.)
Arum, tall).
Away, (I//', iiki.
Am; l(,ki, uJiifiti (V.)
Ilnrk, Inn.
Had, kino.
nnnnim,7"'i o Liilumii (V.)
Bo (is), r, mi;, jr.
Itcnrl, kiiinikuiiii (I"".) ; tu/iil'n (V.)
Il<'<l, iniifijii.
Ifc'lly, iiiiiHiivii.
ft'low, ki liiln.
Bird, Hiiinii.
Blnek, iiliiili.
Blow, |piill", jtulii, |)nss. puhiii.
Box, iMirkrt, liilinna.
floy, Unini. ttiniaiti.
Briiid, liiliiijti.
Breast, ".
Bring, i<ii/ mni, \iu max.
Brolhcr (ipi. younger I), laimi.
Bullrrlly, /"r/"".
Caiiillr-mit (iilnirilea), IniiKi,
('iiiii«', ftikii.
('n|i, wniiili, lii'ud-dreiw,yri(/,
I'Wuf, ii/iki.
( 'liild, liima.
Cliiii, lower jaw, kniiiir.
Cineliin' worn liy men, mnlo.
" " liy H(iiiien,yo;/,
t'loiid, nil.
t'ocoii-nni, iiiii. ,
Come here, sail iiini. miln mni, f'l/r vuii, nlii
111111,1111 mni. |'riien'«re|ir<il)iil)lysome
aliaile.t of ditlerenee in llio ineaiiinn of
lliew' Iprin.i, wliieh we did not [icrceivc.)
Crane, mntukn.
Cituiilry, Jii/iHii { jhiKii).
("np, ipii, liiiinii.
Cut, to, «/»«■/(■ (V.)
itaiK-e, siikii, sivit (or liakii, hiva).
Dt>!H-rt, tiniiilml)ileil, vito.
Die, (jiiicl, iiiiitr.
Ilirt, earth, kric, kilrkrir.
Diseased skin, Injn (ijii. lirrprs .').
Divine, )im\\\\n; Jiikii-iU ml.
Drink, iiiii.
llruin, jHihii (V.)
Kar, Ill/if/a.
Enr-ring, kiuaijii (V.)
(■•AK A AKO AND V A I T U I' U.
.1B3
Fiiirlli, hilr,J(iinui.
Hal, km.
KikIiI, ViUii.
Uli'|>liMiitiiiiiia(yif//.
E)l', IIKllil.
I''.)r-liriiw, liiii-miilii.
l',\i:\\i\, /il/njlllll'lll<ll(l.
■''.yi'-'iliiiil)'. I'lU-mtUu.
Fur, 11111111)11).
Fatlior, lama.
Fi'W, mrii.ili.
Fitly, /iiiiit-yi/ii/u.
FiiT, iiji.
Fill), i^'i.
Finli-hiHik, tiuiUiu, tamiUau (F.) ; jMiopao
(V.)
Five, /i»i/J.
Flowrr, i>iin.
Fmilisli, mlcviile, ptij/itva/e.
F»Mit, nif ,
Forliiilili'ii, HI, labu,
Fcnliracl, tiif.
Fon'igiicr, /Kijxilai/i,
Four, /(/.
French, triiri.
Fmnil, .1IMI (lioti).
Frirndly, pKnl-nnlurcd, gtipn-lelri.
From, >in, iiiiii, ma.
Friiil, /"((.
Fiir,7"//'////«.
(iiinlrl, ilrill, vilivili.
Uirilli', Itikin, iiui/o.
Give mi'j kiiii niiti, tii nun.
Go, ii/ii, (i (|ilii.), ttt/o,/uno (hano), sale.
Goil, (iliiit,
(iiKiil, /i/ri.
Gn'iil, /iixi, Ina.
Grow, liipii.
Hair, iilii,Juliifulu.
Hand, linui.
He, 1(1.
Hoiivon, liigi.
FliTO, iiri.
Hillirr, niiii.
I \o\i, /iiiiik<i.
Hoi, HiiildtKifnna.
HollSl', /((//■.
How, iKsrii.
Hiiiiclri'il, /iiu.
HiinKry, to bu, Jid-kni.
I, nil.
iHlniiil, miilii.
Juckt'l, /iii/iiii.
K\»n, Nlillllr liy prr'Wling Down, <»{(<•
Kniti', iiijii, srUsrIr,
Know, iliHi.
Lnnil, /(i/<i»i, iMijMi,
Lnnt {>), 11%.
Ii<^ail, ilin-cl, taki.
I,l'lll', lull.
!,«■«, !•(«•, ritviu', ivawut,
Like, /«■.
I,i|), liiii-ijiilii.
liOVC, llllllll.
Mnii, lA>)iiiii, idinu.
Miiiiy, kill.
Mark (V.), iiisi.
Mat, ^jV ,• tiir n beil, iimeija.
MiKin, iiiiisiHii.
Morijida, ^iVult of,) mmo.
Motlii.T, iiiiiliiH-Jii/ine.
Month, ijiitii.
My, 'ikii, Inkii, loku.
Nail (of iron), /(/o.
Namr, iifim, (ikoii).
Near, //i7i.
Ni'ck, nil.
NiM, kii/n'ijit, Iteii.
Ni'W,_/<;h.
Ni){hl, /"(.
Nine, (t'n.
No, si, tii, lai, ikai.
Nose, isH.
Not, «• if", (■ sf (/(, Ar/(!,
Now, to-dny, inci.
Of, rt, », ta, to, no.
Old, miitiiii, tiifilo.
Only (.'),./'* orybi.
Our, lo mntoii.
Paddle, /w'.
I'nin, '(j;ii.
I'aiulanus,yr(/a,
I'ulh, tila.
Payment, tail.
364
PIIILO I,OG Y.
I'earl-shcll, ti/,i.
IV'rhaps, jirii.
Person, tiiio, ttimti,
I'igPOIl, /lljlf.
Pripsi, luj'i/pti.
Pro|¥Tty ( ?). kaJUou.
Pull \if,fiiti.
(^uipl, nuilie.
Rniii, »<i.
R.m1, kiila.
Remain, ncfo.
\\c\»Tn,fi)ki, (liof:i).
Rivk, ]><ij>a,
Ro|>c, nuiea, taula.
Sacred, jd, (Ad), taj)ii,fit/ia-ttipn.
Sand, onronr.
Sea, hii, moana.
Seot, mifoa.
Seven, Jitii.
Shade, nuilu.
Shark, mai/6.
Shell (conch), pu.
iihip,/oliiit, tviX'n.
Shore, iita.
Sinnct, ka/a.
Sit, nnfi).
Six, ono.
Sleep, moe, vulevak.
Small, fVi.
Snipe, luU.
So, thus, jienei, pena.
Sen, tanta.
Song, Jim.
Spear, sua.
Stoae,/atH.
Sun, /a.
Surf, JK//M.
Tnkc, nvr, ttiki.
Tattooing (s.), tau ,• to tattoo, ta-tnii ; a
tnttixwr, ti^uga Ui-tau.
Ti'n,fii/u.
The, le.
There, t ko, tui.
Thing, wifd.
'i'liis, linri.
Thou, kiie, 'oe.
Thy, oil, toil.
To, ki, 'i.
Tongue, iilelo.
Tooth, ni/o.
Tortoise, /oMM.
Trade, /«/:«<««.
Tree, Uikau,
Very, lava.
War, tana.
We, nui, ta, maiia, tami, malmi, tntoii.
Weary, tired o(,Jiu,Jian.
Well (ndv.),/iAu/f/«.
Whale, tiifola.
What, (i, «c-(i, ko tt li.
V'f—nee, mai-Jva.
Where, teifva.
White, una.
W'ho, ai, ko ai.
Wish,Aa.
Woman,y(//{«c.
Yam, ufi.
Ye, kiJiia, koulou.
Year, ^j«.
Yes, to, f .
Your, o outou, to oulou.
. L— 1 i,i .r
A GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY
VI T IAN LANGUAGE.
The materials which have served for the construction of the
grammar and dictionary which follow are (1st), an abstract of a
grammar of the Lakemba dialect, by the Rev. David Cargill, late
missionary to the islands; (2d), a brief grammar ci the dialect of
Somusomu, by Mr. Hunt, the missionary residing in that town; (3),
a dictionary of the Vitian language, drawn up by Mr. Cargill, in the
dialect of Lakemba, and revised by Mr. Hunt (at the request of Cap-
tain Wilkes, by whose care the copy which we possess was procured),
for that uf Somusomu ; (4lh), the translations, by the missionaries, of
portions of the three first gospels, into the dialect of Lakemba, with a
brief catechism in that of Somusomu ; and (5th), a large collection
of words and sentences, taken down from the [ironunciation of the
natives, while we wore at the group, — principally at Ovolau, Rewa,
Mbua, and Mathuata.
Althougli some errors and omissions will, perhaps, be apparent on
a more thorough acquaintance with tlie language, it is, nevertheless,
believed that the account of it here given will be found sufficient for
all purposes of philological comparison. On some accounts, the
addition to the dictionary of an ICnglish-Vitian part would have been
desirable, but the limits of our publication do not admit of this ex-
tension.
i
'Ji
GRAMMAR
OF THE VITIAN LANGUAGE.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
Tub Vitinii language has twonty-ono of the elements contained in our general alphabet.
Those nrc a, b, il, f, e, g, h, i, k, /, m, n, g, o, j>, r, s, t, ii, v, ?c, »/. '" 'lie ilinlect of
Lakcmlto, Ihc^' is added, to express the sound of/ b».'forc i, which is nearly that of /ji/», —
or such as is heard in the English words Cliristiiin, tjiirstidii.
Three of the consonants are never used except in coniliination with nasal sounds. The
/) is always preceded by m, the J by >i, and the g by y, — us in the words tiimfiti, ni/on-
doiiii, wayga. The r is used bolli by itself, and prt-cedeil by n. In the latter case, the
sound of d is generally, though not always, inserted between the n nnd r, merely, it
would seem, liir euphony, — as in n/lrtiu for 7irai(, nuiinlrni for nuinnii, though the
latter is sometimes heard. When the missionaries first U^gan to reduce the language to
writing, they analysed lhes(! nasal combinations, as we have done, nnd wrote them w/,
nil, iigg, ndr. They found, however, that the natives would not recognise the elements
thus separated, and in spelling always united lh<'m in the same syllable. They therefore
determined to alter their system, and write the combined sounds as simple letters, — giving
to d the sound of nd, to /) that of vdi^ and to g that of pg. Th<? only exception is the
itdr, which they write dr, not having a character by which to denote it. It must not Ik'
inferred from this, that the simple sounds /), d, and g, uneombined with «, are never
heard ; for the surd elements p, t, nnd k, are frequently sortened in pronunciation to their
corresponding sonants, — or rather, the natives make no dislinction between the two
classes of letters. So in the combinations nd nnd pg, the last elements are frequently
heard as t and k, — as Kantarii (or Kundiiiu (written by the missionaries Kiul<ivu),
irnijkii for wapgii (trng/i). We do not reci)lltM;t to have heard tid) sotmded as tiiji.
For the sake of uniformity, and to facilitate the comparison of the dilleront Oceanic
languages, it has be<'n thought best to return, in this, to the original orthography of the
missionaries, and to write these combineil sounds in full. For the same reason, the cha-
racter I*" has been substituted for the c, which is used by them to express the soft ICnglish
t/t, as heard in Ihif, this; and the letter ij is used io place of the simple g, for tlic nasal
sound of tig in /utng.
V I T I A N GRAMMAR.
367
The five vowels hnvc the rrgiilor sounds, os in the Polynesian dialects ; and, as in
tiiosc, every sylhilde ends with a vowel. Such words ns tum'iii, ni'i/i/ltt, icinjgn, Uiiulra,
form no exri'ption to this rule, as the nasals r/i, n, y, ?ul, really belong to lh(! last syllable.
In the missioiinry orthography this is made n|>parr;nt Cot the first three combinations, the
above words being written taliii, matin, uiign, and tiulrn.
The vowel at the end of a word is fri'(|uently so indistin>'t as to lie hardly perreptible.
Thus most foreigners pronounce the words nukr, dance, lavii, oven, Mttturiki, the name
of an island, as though they were written mik, lit; and Mii/iirik.
The / and r arc distinct letters, and not interchanged as in the Polynesian dialects.
The V is one of the most remarkable elementary s<junds in the language, on account of
the wide range of its variations. Like the Spanish />, it is pronounced by closing the lips
together, and according to tlie greater or less force of pronunciation, it is lieard as a i'.
/, p, or It, and occasionally even as m. Thus the word vaniui, country, is sounded
iKvpiently fanua, Ixiiniii, and jxtnini ; /evii, great, is commonly pronounced nearly ns
/(•// ; f<ivti, what, ns aij»i ; and the name Vtli Icvii has bei'ii written by dilferent persons
Feclcv /)!>, linlcc lib, and, utterly corrupted, Mrln/nji. At the beginning of words, it is
more ollen hoard as /, and in the middle as /i or ]>. In some (J^w words, the sound
of y) is so distinct that the niissii laries were induced, at first, to write it with this lijlter;
but they find it impossible to keep up the distinction, and at present the sounds of j>,/, r,
and /(, (not preceded by m.) wherever thi'y occur, are expressc'd by the same letter, v.
The y anil ic arc used instead of ( and i< when they begin a syllable, — as, ynrn for
itii'ti, triiliiru for iiiilnvii.
The ni!ceiil is usually on the iienulliiiiate, ami when a syllable is sufli.xed to a word,
the accent is shilled liirward, — as, fd/e, hous<', ftileiin', thy house. Some words have
the accent on the last syllabic, as ygiigga, brave. These, which arc not numerous, are
noted in the vocabulary.
The consonants of the \'itian niphaliet may lie arranged, according to their classes, as
follows :
Labials
r
m
nib
w
Dentals
t
n
ml
f
Giitliirals
k
V
VS
V
Li>|uids
1
r
ntlr
sO)
D I A L E C T I( A L D I F F E U E X C E S.
Whether the variations in the language ns spoken at ditlercnl parts of the group are
sufficiently important to constitute what may be pro|XTly termed dialects, is doubtful.
The principal points of dillerence of which we obtained information were the following.
1. In the windward chain of islands, the chief of which is Lnkcm/xi, many Polynesian
words are employed which are not known elsewhere, and which are probably derived
from the Toiigan. Thus in V'iti-levu, the word for " l/iing" is kn ; but in Lakcmlia it is
iiipi'ii, evidently from the Polynesian turn. In oilier parts of the group, ?nr('ii means an
cnriinf. Ill Lakeiiiba, also, the t (as already remarketl) is pronounced like t7j, when it
precedes i. This is likewise a peculiarity of the Tougan.
2. In Vanua-kvu and Smiiisumu a dialect is s|>oken, distinguished principally by the
368
PHILOLOGY.
omission ol'llic lolU-r k, its pliioo \tc\nji indiciited hy ii slij^hl RUtturnI cnlch, — ns, traVi for
Udhi, iitiUi liir iiiikii. Al Miitliiiiita, in mlilitioii (n this, the < is tr<'<|iirnlly iImiiihmI, —
ns, 'iimii'a liir taiiKila. This iiniiiimciiilioii, liowcvrr, is roiisidorcd Ihully by llii; niitivrs
tlicmsclvL'S. In sonic words which iiro rlscwhrrc pronnnncrd with the douhio consixiant
ml, the nnlivcs of Vnnun-levu employ the simple clement /, as, viinili, bnnann, is pro-
nounced i';*^'; iiiliini, knee, turn ,• lu/dlnii, we, /iiloii. There nre niso vcrhni dillerenccs,
such as ti^i>/i, lor //.<(, fish ; liut these nrv Cvw in number, nt leiist I'or words of common
O'viirrence, It is snid by the niissioiiarics llint in words niid locutions of n more recon-
dite cast, such, for instance, as those expressing; the o|K'rations of the mind, and particu-
larly in compound terms, the <lillerence is much greater. Indeed, they fear that they
shall be obliged to make distinct versions of the Uibic lor the two stations,
3. On the eastern side of Viti-levu, and particularly in llttrii, the language is said by
the natives to lie 8|H)kcn in its greatest purity. 'I'here are, however, some slight verbal
diU'en-nces even between the neighlKiuriiig towns of Mbau and llewa. The dialect of the
adjoining islands, Oto/iiii, Knrn, Ngaii, &c., is very nearly the same. That of Kanifiivii
is said to vary somewhat more.
4. On the western side of Viti-levu, we were informed by the white men resident on
the island, that the ditl!^rcncc of dialect was so great as to render the language nearly
unintelligible, al first, to natives of other parts. The inhabitants have very little inter-
course, either for conmiercial or hostile pur|H>ses, with other sections of the group, and
arc considei-ed the most barbarous of the Feejeeans. I saw but one individual from this
quarter, and in a brief vocabulary of common words obtained from him, found but a
small proportion that were |H'ciiliar.
The ilialecticid v.iiiaiions, Imth of words and construction, are noted in the grammar
and dicliiinary. Hut it should Ix" observed that even where a word or form of expression
is peculiar to one section of the gmup, it will commonly be luiderslood by the natives of
most othera.
E T Y M O L O G Y.
THE ART If I.E.
Thc^re is but one word in Vitian whi<-h can, with strict propriety, be callud an article.
This is II or iiii, which answers generally to the Knglish llic, iho'.igh it may sometimes
Ik.' niidcreil by the indeliuile article. It is usimI only In-fore common nouns. Sii is a
euphonic variation, which is employed, at Lakemlm, after a pre|Kisition, and after the
conjiiiictioii kii,iinil, (or more properly villi) ; — as, c liiiuku a niutaii ka iia A///-6, good
are the axe and the pot. At Kewa, however, the ii is only employed at the beginning of
a sentence, and the na in all other cases.
It is a peculiarity of the Vitian language that certain words arc always preceded,
except when they Ix-gin n sentence, by the letter i, which has no meaning, and se<'ins to
be used merely lor euphony. Although, in jMiint of fact, it Ix^longs to the word which
follows it, it is nevertheless allixeil, in pronunciation, to that which prei-edes. In such
cases tin- article a becomes ai, as, vulu, war, iii ralu, the war; j/ava, spade, omiii piiva,
thy spade, &c.
V I T I A N ('. R A M M A R.
369
The indcfinile nrticlo is sometimes cxprrssod by the numeral one (tidiia), foilowcil by
>ui, — OS, koiitii rait'ii. iiiliia na u-injgn, I st.'c a emiix'.
Ko (in Sonuisonm 'o), is iiicliKled by the missionaries amonfi the articles. It is, how.
ever, properly, n sign ol' the noini:ialive, imd is employed only wilb pro|)er names, with
n lew nouns signifying relntionsliip, and with sfime of the pronouns, as, —
Ko Tiiiinn, name of the king of .Mbau.
Ko Tiii-^iikiiii, title of the king of Somusomu.
AV) Mliiiii, SandolwoiMl Bay.
Ko liimiingii, my fother ; Ko tinamti, my mother.
Hut in the two last eases (In'fore common nouns of relationship), the use of ko may tie
nn inaccuracy, os, though common, it is not universal.
Ko is used beliiri; the interrogative pronoun t'li, who? — and, as koi, it is prcfi.\cd to
the iiersonal pronouns in the singidar, and in the third person dual and plural.
T II K S r n S T A N T I V E.
The geniler is rarely distinguished. When necessary, laiiane, man or male, nnd Incn,
woman or Ibniale, may be used for this purpose, — os,
yone taga?ir, son ;
vuahi tng<tni; boar ;
pone Incn, daughter.
viiaka letca, sow.
The number is olso gcnerolly left to bo gathered from the subject of conversation, or
from the context. There are, however, st'veral modes of designating the plural, which
arc occasionally employed. The particle hi/a is prefixed to nouns for this purpose, — as,
a loya viilr,\\w houses; but though it iK'curs frecniently in the translations of the mis-
sionories, it is rarely heard in conversation. Yalii (or rather atii with the euphonic t
prefixed) is sometimes employed before nouns signifying country or island, — os, ai atii
vanitii, the lands.
The pronouns koi run and koi ni, they, dual ond plurol, ore sometimes employed to
denote those numliers ; as, koi ran na kiii Nandi, the two Nan<li people (lit. they the
two Nandi |M"ople) ; sn ii'ci koi ni na /nva, where are they the women ? Hy nn anomaly,
ra is sometimes used in the vocative, for " ye," — os, sa lako tui tamandatou, ra j/one,
here comes our father, child rtm.
Vet, which is prefixed to verbs to denote rcciprocol action, has, when joined with nouns,
a collective signification, — as, iionilra ride, their house, iiondra rei-rale, their houses,
their village; rn-kaii (11.), a clump of trees; rei-iitn, a grove of bread-fruit trees, &c.
Sometimes a collective noun is employed to express number, — as, a 'ntiiit^imit tamata,
(s.), the company of men.
For many articles and objects which the natives have fre<iuent occasion to count, they
have words which of themselves express ten, or a multi|>le of ten, — as.
undiiiindii, ten canoes ; koro,
}n/x>ln, one hundred canoes ; setiivo,
mliuni, ten cocoo-nuts ; so/c,
93
one hundred cocoo-nuts;
one thousand cocoa-nuts ;
ten bread-fruits ;
iil
J
370
PHILOLOGY.
pjiolo, icii pieces of sugar-cane j
m/>i, ten lurtli's ;
mlH)/a, ten lishc's ;
rum, ten pigs ;
riilo, Icii wImicB'-tecth ;
Sdi'rt, ten |v)ls.
The COSTS of nouns are di'tcrminei! liy particles and prepositions. Those prefixed to
pro|)er imn\es are, I'or the mast part, dillerent from those used with common nouns, — as,
K<> Tiiiion, Tanoa (nom.)
t Tiium, ofT.
vri or kirei 7}iiina, to or for T.
mewei 'I'moii, for T.
kitii i Tuiiod, with, from, in, by, T.
mai 7\ino<i, from T.
a tiinoa, the bowl ;
ni tttiimi, of the bowl ;
ki nil tanoa, to the bowl ;
rci mi tanixi, to or for the bowl ;
i >ia UiiiiKi, in, at, by, the bowl {
mil mi tiinoa, from the bowl.
/ is used tefore proper names in the accusative, — as, sa sarmara koiaii i Vtnon, I see
Tanoa. a I^ „!.,.) used occasionally as a sign of the vocative, ns, — / Srni, O Seru.
It will lie obscned that the article na is used after all the pre|)ositions except ni ; ni
na taiion woiilil be improper.
In the Somusoniu grammar, ri is given os a particle of euphony which is frequently
affixed to nouns, without altering the sense; it causes the accent to be shifted forward one
syllable, as, — d irdjtgfi, and ii iiaijgari, the can<K'. [Perhaps the latter form may have
a demonstrative force, as, — tiuU canoe, or the canoe before s|)okcn of.]
if
Til K A DJ ECTI VK.
Adjectives follow the substantive which they qualify, as,— /«» levu, great king ; ma-
ranui vinaka, good lady.
Comparison is expressed by various circumlocutions, as : —
lent fiikc or Iri-ii ixini, " great alxivc" or " beyond," for greater ;
lai/iii somhii or Imlai livn, " small lx;Iow," for less ;
ko S(i viiku rei kemluru, thou art wise of us two ;
sa kaiikdiiii koiaii kini i ko, I am strong to thee (stronger than) ;
a malaii vindku pgoii, a nuittiii ("d pgou, this is a good axe, that is a bad one (for,
this is liotter than that) ;
sa Itila ko Viti, sn leva na tnimtln i America, empty is Viti, many are the men of
America: (i. e. America is more populous than Viti).
The supi'rlutive degree is also expressed in many ways : —
(1) by prefixing an adverb, — as, ran tern, very great ;
(2) by postfixing an adverb, as, viiuika Ittivi or vincXa sara, very good ;
(3) sfHnetinics two adverbs are employed, as, vinaka lairi-sara, very exceedingly good ;
(4) the adverb is sometimes <louble(l, as, tent siirasara, very, very great;
(5) sometimes the adjective is re|>eated, as, riiiaka, vinaka, vinaka ;
(6) certain strong expressions are employed, us levu vakairere, great to make afraid,
feorfully great.
VITIAN GRAMMAR.
371
lulua
tnlu
two.
three.
four.
NUMERALS.
liiii ka iiilua
tini k(i nia
run snijiivulu
tnlu saijtivulu
cloven,
twelve, &c.
twenty,
thirty, &c.
lima
five.
ntlrau
hiiniireil.
mto
six.
riia nil rail or rua a ndrau
two hundred.
villi
seven.
lolii mini 11
throe hundred
u-nlit
eight.
vnilolii
thousand.
{iva
nine.
rua wiilnlii or nm a umlolu
two thousand.
tini
ten.
It is schlom that the natives require a numeral al)ovc a thousand, since fur those
articles which they [lossess in largo quantities, they have the collective terms mentioned
on page 173. Thus for " ten thousunil co<;oa-nuts," they would say, a koro e undiilu,
or a laiiMii lui korn, — i. c. a thousand tens of cocoa-nuts.
Numerals, when joined with a substantive, commonly have the particle r before them, —
as, viile e nno, six houses ; and if the objects numbered be rational beings, Ivwc is also
employed, as, tiimtUa c Icice lulu, three men.
Once, twice, thrice, &c., arc expressed by vaka prelixod to the numerals, — as, vaka-
ndiia, nika-rua, viika-Utlu ; the same form miiy serve to express the ordinal numlx;rs,
though these, in general, an^ not distinguished from the cardinal.
liy ttcos, 1)1/ threes, &c., are expressed by the particle ija (each, every), prefixed to the
numeral, with lewe preceding, if it refer to persons, — as, leice pa rua, two by two.
THE PRONOUN.
The pronouns are numerous and complex, fiesides the ordinary singular and plural
forms, they have a dual in uU three persons, a dual and plural of the first person, which
excludes the person addressed, a limited plural, applied only to a small numlier, two
classes of possessive pronouns, separate and alfixed, and finally a set of posscssivcs
appropriated especially to articles of food and drink. Many of the pronouns, moreover,
vary in the difTerent ilialects.
All the personal pronouns have particles prefixed to them. These are koi, ke, and kei.
The first of these is, for the most part, employed only in the nominative when it follows
the verb, or is used independently, in answer to a question. This rule, however, is not
always observed, and does not apply to the pronoun of the third person singular, koi
koiii. Kc, also, is sometimes omitted when the pronoun precedes the verb in the nomi-
native case.
The pronoun au, of the first person, is thus varied : —
81N(i. IhT UUAL. IrT rLl'RAL.
Koi all, I ke nihtrii, thou and 1 kc n/la, ye and I (limited)
i au, me, or of me. t kc mluru, us two, or of us. i kc tula, us, or of us, &c.
I
•.m
V II I i.o I. no V,
MINU. llT IM'AI..
in nil, l(> iiic iri kr iiiliini. Id lis IHO Jn pi.iii«i..
1,1111 i nil, rrom or tiy iiic kiiii kr mlnni, rmm us two ke titlitloii, yi' and I (iin-
liniiti'il)
Ull UIAL. Hll rlUKAI..
kit mil, lie 1111(1 I kri Inn, tlicy iinil I (liinilt'il)
i icj run, us IHii, or of us, \i'. Iru n.riiAi.
kri niiimi, tliuy and I (un-
limilctl)
III \\v> illalcolH of Lnkciiilm and Mima, tin; ml in all the alxivc |ininoun8 Wonios /, as
kc turn, ki la, ke liilou; in llmt of Sonmsoiiiii, llic k is uniiltrd, as, 'ni on, V mlnrit,
'li Inn.
hi sionir dislrii't- of Vaniia U'vu, ki m and km riikn are used instead uf kri run; rii is
cni|iliiyed as tlii: nominative to the verli, and mn or oruka as tlie iKissessivc prnnoun.
Kri lultilon is soriietinios contracted to Ion, particularly with the iin|>erulive, — us, In
lou, let us stand loi^etlior, or stand firm.
The |ironoiin ol'the si'cond |icrson is ko, and is varied as rollows : —
ilSO.
Kni kii, thou
t kn, ttiw, or of thee
rri kn, to tlie<!
kini i ku, from or by thee
Dt;AU
ke minii/riin, ye two
I kr iiiioidraii, you two, &c.
IffT ri.eRAi-
kr miinihn, yo
i kr miunhii, you, &c.
2ll Pl.l'RAL.
munii, ye
i mntiii, yon
The second plural, miinii, has pro|K'rly the same signification with the first; but it is
also used in the singular, as a res|K'ctl'ul form of address, like " you" in Knulish. In
the latter case, it is freipiently contracted to ««, os, nii Ira, you go (addressed to a |K"rs(in
of rank), liir ko Inkn, tliou giK'st. Mninlrnu and mniiiliin arc oHen contracted to mlrnii
and iiilnn, particularly in the imperative, as, m/on liikn, go ye.
The Sdinusomu dialect has 'ot '« liir koi kn, iVc.
The pronouns of the third [KTson, in the dialect of Lakcmba, ore as follows :
UNO.
Koi koia, he, she, or it
t koi koia, him, of him, &c.
in kni koia
or vri run
kiui kui koia, by him.
to him
DUAL.
koi run, they two
i ran, Iheiu
vri ran, to them
kitii i ran, from, hy them.
ri.L'RAL,
koi ra, they
t ra, them
vet rn, to them
kini i ra, by them.
Instead of j koi koin, him, wc heard at Ovolau and other places ui appended to the
verb, as, an inlnniimin, I love him (lor 7itli>mi>hi ia). This form docs not <K"<Mir in the
translations of the missionaries.
The people of Mbua say, instead of koi koia, kn kra, or simply Art. At Somusomti,
the common tiirm is 'oi \a or 'ni \i for the nominalivi", and Va for the accusative, after
a verb. At Mbua, also, ratou is used for " they," as well as ra, the distinction being
perhaps the same as that between the limited and unlimited plurals of the first |icrson.
V I T I A N «i R A M M A II.
373
liiHtrnil iifrM run, llicy two, llic Sdiniiwiiiiii Kruiiiiimr givrs Vj ran, wliii'li is llir snmc
lu tlu! (Iiiiil ol'lhu first iH.Titoii. How the )listiiu;tli)ii bctwcfii tlinii is iiiiuli' in iiul Htiili'il.
PUHHF.8HIV1: i>i(()Noi;ns.
Those which prcredi' mmns nn; ns rullowi*: —
pgoii, my
fiiiiH, thy
oiia, his
wvmlaru, our (of thee and mo)
iiiiruii, (iiir (of him and me)
omiiiiilriiii, your
onilrau, their
rn'RAi..
vriii/n, iiiir (liniilnd inrliisivo)
veiiitiitiin, imr (iiiiliiiiiti'il inc.)
wriluii, (iiir (limited c.xc.)
vriiiiaini, our (iirdiiuilrd I'Xc.)
nmu nihil, your
iiDiiinu, your (or thy)
iiiiiliii, Ihi'ir
oni/iiUoii, their.
These pronouns nrc iisimlly preceded by tlie nrlicle n, ns, a ij^oii rnlr, my house ;
a imiii viDjgii, Ihy emus'.
At MIdiii, niiiliini, itni/ii, niid imiliilmi lire used iiisteml of urniliirii, tivnifii, nnd
irrnilaloii , mid onf;tiiH li>r y^'HK. At Kewii, nil llie possessive prdiiiniiis ei)niiiieiice with
n; iif:nu becomes nongii , ntn 11 mid nil llie others wliirb Ix'gin willi « hiive « prefixed
(ns, iiiwiii, tiDiiii, nominiitriiii), Iliose which U'nin with in chunge this lo no (ns
nimdiirii, tnmilii), mid those which Ix'giii with ifci chmige the »'• to v (ns nciraii,
■nriloii).
When the |K)ss»'ssive pronouns nre used with substnntives signifying articles of food,
they HssiiMic n dillereiit form, llfiiiii iH'coines ijfiilii, whicli, at I.nkeiiilin, is used with
nniiies lifilh of enlnbles nnd drinkables, ns, <i ijumi iiri, my yam, a iiiiiin yiiufiona
(or II iigiiiii iii),ui>iiii), my kuva. Ilul at Soinusoinii, ijgiiii is used with eatables only,
nnd for drinknbles iiieijfinu is employed ; at llewa it is mrij^ii, nnd at Mbiia, ineijjtiau.
For till' second |H'rson knnii nnd viimit nre employed, the first for eatables, mid the
M'cond Iiir drinkables. For the third |H'rson these pronouns are kniii and miiiii ; for
the dual, kfiiiliini and mi'iiiliirii, kciniii nnd miiruii, and so on tliroiigh all the persons
nnd iiumlx'rs.
Cocon-nuls mid siignr-canc are commonly included in the class of drinknbles, ns they
nre prized chiefly (or their milk and juice.
These pronouns, it should Ih' n'liinrked, nre used only when food is set before o person
for immediate consumption. When it is merely nnmed as nn article Ixilonging to him,
those of the other class are employed, as, kiniii niiikii, your |H)ition of pork to eat;
omii viiiikii, your pig.
There ari' certain substantives which reipiire tlie possessive pronouns to follow ihem.
In this case mniiy of the Inlter undergo coniraclions, mid are united with the substmilivc
so ns to form but one word. llf;oii is contrncled to pjun, nnd those pronouns which
begin with o or irr lose these initial syllables. Those which commence with vri Inke
the form of the genitive cnse |M'rs(jnal, ns, / kri tun, i kei miimi. 'J'hus : —
04
374
P II I L O L O U Y.
Sing.
Dual.
F'lu.
»8'>
my,
mu.
thy
mi.
hi*
Hi/iint,
iHir
1 kriruii,
iHir
niiinilrnii
yimr
wiriiii,
tlirir
will.
our
i kriloii.
iMir
muHiloii,
your
tulra.
tlK'ir
Tiiimi, fallior.
us II tiimiiiuii.
(I liimiiiiiii,
II tiimdiin,
n tiiiiiiiiii/tini.
my fatluT
thy "
his "
ihtj fiitlirr iif tlif-c nnil mc.
II tniiiai kririui, llii> thilicr nl'liini niiil mo
II liinuimiimlriiii, " " ydii two
II linnuniliaii, " " tlicin Iwo
(I tamdnilii, " " yim niiil mo
u liimai kiiliiii, " " lliom iinil mo
II tiitiiiiiiiiim/uii, your I'lilhor
(/ tiimamlrii, their liithor
Tho nouns which ivqiiire Ihoso nfTixrs aro the names of iho (hlli'rcnl ports ol'lho hody,
with words si^nilyin;; soul mid iniiiil, and the liiimcs of some of the nearest liiniily rela-
tions. In general the (Hiisession iiiipliod by thorn U|i|H'ars to lie mure iiilimutc than that
denoted by the separate pronouns.
K K L A T n K 8.
There are no projior relative pronouns in the languajje, nor does this drfirieney eniisr
any olisciirity in the construction of a sentence; as, lor example, sii Irvii nii Uoro iiiiii
Viti-ln-ii m ijgiili ki M/mii, ninny are the towns on Viti-levii [which] are subject to
Mlwu. The verlml particles r and kri and the n'lative particle ki-iiii serve, as will U'
shown hcri'aller, to previ'iit any ambiguity in the connexion of dillerent clauses of n
sentence.
1 N T K R H O (i A Tl V K 1' K O .\ O U ,\ H.
These are three in ntimU-r, viz : — tii, who ? e'licii, what ' and riW;, how many .'
is declinid like pro|H'r names, and t'uni like common nouns, as: —
M
ko ffi, who ?
t fW, whom or whoso
tr« f'ri, to whom
kini M, from or by whom
a i'livii, what?
ni i'lini, of what
ki nil i'lii-ii, to what
i till ('lira, ill, by what
Fn incpiiring the proper name of any (H'rson, place, or thinj;, kn fei is always used, —
as, ko (fi II yiit'anu (or, ui iiuitiii) .' What is his name '. Kn M a ijnfii iii raiiiia i ci '!
What is the name of this country \
fit always pni'edes the noun to which it relates; ("iivii may lie used either licfore or
.ifter, — as, a (uvn ii mnn.iiiiunii i li' or, n iiianiimuiiii t'livn i li? what animal is this '
Vitu is usually preceded by i, as, c rit'ii iia tnieti- (II.), how many priests \
U K M O .N S T II A T I \' K S,
The demonstrative pronoun in most common use is iji'jm, meaning this or that. It
receives some nlFixes, which do not apparently alter its moaning, — us, tigorr, ijginja
V rrr A N isra m m ak.
:i7ft
fffifJoi, iic. Ki, vri, mil, miii, iiri' iiIhu criiiilnyitl nil ili'iiHUiNtrntivrx. TlK'y lire ilNiiiilly
|iri'('cili'il l)y llir iiiMili or nilji-clivr In which lh<'y n-liT, ami Hunii'tiiiK'H hnvc iin i inter-
piiM'il iR'lwirii,— lit, hi <ri Ml tamntii ijgim f who in ihiH iiinii \ li rimikii i ri kit r fA
X pgoir, Ihii) In ^niMl ami IhnI iN ImhI.
1" II K V K K II.
The vi'rh hnn, |in)|n'rly Niwiikiim, n'l in(1<vtloris, All ihi- iicriilcnlii of li'iiw, inimil, vVr.,
nr<! I'xpn-HM'il hy luirliclcH pri'lixril or Hiitrixcil. Th<! only fxccplion in ihi! rMviisional
du|>li('iilion of ihr vcrh, or ii |uirt ot' it, to 4'X|in'!4H iVi'iiiicnry oC iiclioii, — an, nivii, lo kill,
in ivi-riiriifiii, Ihi-y iin- killing i>n<- nnoihi'r.
Till' jHirlirli's iiM'il with thi' vrrh inny hit iliviiloil iiitii (I) nlTirnmtivi- or nrlivi.' imrliclcs,
(v!) |iiirlirli'M of liiiw, (S) oC modi', (I) iif Corm, (."i) triiiisiiivit allixuM, ((I) iliri'ctivc pnrti-
cli's, mill (7), Ihr rrliilivf piirlicli'.
Till' piirlirirs iirnirirnialion nn- Ihom- whirh nm prrfixi'il lo a woril lo show Ihiil it is to
Ur lakrii ill II vitIhiI ni'Iim-, iiiiiI whirh lliiis supply, in ninny riiHi'S, thi' plno' ol' ihr stih-
stiintivr vcrh. A \nT\!,r pro|Hirlion orilic wonls in the Vitiiin liiii);iiii)i;i', dm in the I'olyni'-
Niiin, may Ik' uhciI cither as nouns, ailjcotivi's, or vrrlis, anil the pn'cis<> acccptatiun in
which they are cniploycil must Im' ili'terniineil hy the particles which accompany them.
'I'he principal nllirmntivu panicle is mi, which is pn'lixeil to virhs in all tenses. When
joini'il with worils which an' properly adjeclives or nouns, it may, in ({eneral, hi' translated
by some tense of the verli In V,— as, sn Inkn iiini nn tdiiiniiiliiliiii, our lather is coiniii); :
an Inkn i Ornlnii imiinii kn Sirii, Seru went (or was p>iii)!) lo Ovolau yisterdav; sn ii'ci
lilt Ininiilii, where is the man \ an visti likn, it is hnrninn (n'niains hiirninn) > *' '''*" ^■'■'*'
it is all hurnt i sn Icvuli-vu nn turnpii, ninny an' the chiel's.
ja is nnnlher particle I'mpienlly used. It is ollen prdixed to a virli at the iM'jiinnin;;
ol'a sentence or clause, when the noiiiinalive, instead of preceding the verli, llillows it, —
n«, I' Inkn kni koin, he (jim'S ; n Inkn iiini <i Inmnin, the man is comini;; c rrrrkiln kiiniiti-
ihii, lilesscil are ye. ]■', is also prelixed to the pioiiouns of the third person dual and
plural, when Ihey precede the vcrh, — as, r rn Inkn, they i,'o,
' >Somi'tinies the nominative comes U'liire the verli, with c lietwei'ii them, in which case
this particle supplies the place of the n'lntivc pronoun, — as, koi ra e fnkii <'d, those that
do evil ; kni knin r kiu'ii'i, ho who is called ; kni knia i i In'fnni, he w ho is in heaven.
E is only used in the present and I'ulun" tensi's ; in the latter case it olteii priicdes the
I'uturi' sifjii nn, — as, r nn Inkn mm kni knin, he will rome.
Kn is used like e, hut only in the past tense, — as, nn lemlxi ktCii t'nknvn, the fjarland
[which I I was making;; koi knia kn lakn, he who went. It must not \»'. confounded with
the coiijimclion kn, and, which is of iVeipient oi'curri'nce.
I'AHTICI.KS (IK TK.VSK.
It has already U'ln explained that ( and kn, to a certain deffrcr, inilicate time; but
there nre also two parlii'ies which have pirulinrly this iilhce. 'I'hese arc nn for llic future,
nnd a (in the third |M'rson, Av/) for the preterite, — as, nn nn vnkniinilc, I will kill ; nn a
vnknmnir, I have killed.
These panicles, however, arc frci|iieiilly omitted, when the lime of the nclion is other-
wisi; indicated, either by the coiilext, or liy certain adverbs, llgai expresses an action
?
It
370
l> II 1 1. (> I. oo V.
jiiHl ('i)m|il<'li'il, na Iff v^ni inkuriitii, w« linvr ju>l Intii rrcoiicilril ; m n/im mtilr a
hirriffiii /inn, my iliiii^litiT ia jiial ili'iicl, (tfi, ilonc, tiniiilM-il, ja iiacil nlli-r n vcrli Id
I'.nprraH n kiiiil iil'iiri'lrril)', na mi <•/ iiiiir iifi, I hnvr aiiliK, iiiii ili)iir aiiijtiiiK ; ii vitii uti.
It la liiiriit. hill liiiN a aiiiiiliir liiD'c. 7'//ii, In n'miiiii, fi\\rn ii iiH'aiiilix aiiiiilnr In llmt
nl'ilii' pri'Nfiil |iiirlirl|ili' ill I'IiiijIhIi, — iia nil mi iiilii likii, I inn wriliii|ii <" viut liki), it ia
liuriiiiig, Hiiiii uiiil no nn' acinirliinis iim'iI in llii' Kiniii- wiiy,
rAUTM'I.KN OK MOOD
Till' aitjn 111' the aiilijimi'tivi' ami inrniitivc in ;//», wliirh may lir n'mhTt-*! " Ihnl," " in
oriliT that," "til," iVi-. ; it w<ni« tci la iinotril with Ific |in'|Niailiiin mri, lor, an in the
('.\ani|il('M kii tiikiirn </ lamulti n K ihni mil I'lirni.' (io<l iiiailc man li.r wliat I aiis. Mr
kiln kii kill II Kii/iiii, lliiit Ik' iiil;{lit knnw (iial.
Tilt' ('iiii)liiiiiiial, with //, is ■ .\|)ri'aM'il in thr (iriHcnl nnil riilim' liy ki-rnkn, ami in iIm;
pant liy kr |in'tiX('il In ihr vcrh. In the ihah'rt iil' Sdinuxoinu V, V/(, iiiiil 'enn nm uat'd
lor i/i liul Ihr iliatinction la'twrrn them ia not pxploitii'ij, LrM ia i')ipn'i'a<'il liy mlaka,
— na, nilakn lulu koi koin, Irat ho fall. Hut tVi'ipii'nlly ihiTonililiniial la not ili^itlnKnlNhcd
hy any ai^n, — iia sn Inkii Hint koi koin, nil sn rnkninnliin (II.), had ho ciiiim', I hail (or
wniilil havr) klllril him.
The iinprrallvi' hua iiir (or, nl Somiiaomu, mitui or mo) la'fon- it, or it ia without a
parlirlr, — as ;«»• Inko kuiko (or iiiniii In'o 'oi 'o, or mo 'no), or almply tnko, nn. In the
dual and pliinil, it has thi* alilm'vlntrd pronoiina mlraii mid nilo" hcliin' It, — aa mlriiii
lako, ((o ye two. The ini|H'rntivi' of rorbiddlng ia formed by kiJciin wilh ni I'olhiwin;;,—
as, kiiJdiii ni liiko, dn not go.
. PARTICLES Of KOHM.
Vnkn ia ttip raiiaative prolix, as mnlr, to div, Vdk'iiiin/i; to kill j mhuin, to live, vnka-
mliiiln, to save, lociiri'. Hut this prolix Is alao used to tiiriii advorba, and inual I'roipiontly
la.' rondorod "like," or " aOor the manner of," — ua, rnknt'A, badly; vakaiivi, how f
vnkn- Vili, I'oi'jit'.rashion.
Vri prefixed tu n verb, with i, cV, ki, ni, vi, ti, Inki, innki, taki, yaki, siiilixnl, ex>
pr»'.ssos roeipriHml action, — as ivi.i'«^«!(, lo help one another, i'roin i'«Xr, to help; vri-
lniii< i, to svnipnlhi.s*", woop to;>rthor, Ironi Initi, to woi^p ; vri-kiliiki, to know one
aiioiliiT, Ironi kiln, lo know ; rri-t'nnimoki, to onior one within anothiT, as the links of
a chain, from iiiiii,Ui enter, vVo. The sullixoa, howovor, an^ oHon omlltod, — as rvi-rui'ii,
to strike cine another, to Ihix, rri-voli, to Irndo together, iVe. This form with vei has also,
at times, the signiticatlon of united action, liirining a sort of plural, — as, iri-knniittvi, to
run togollier, ni-lonuitii, to live or ait together.
The Nuftixos which the verbs in this form receive, an; usually the same which they
have' when they precede, as transilivos, a pronoun or pro|)er name, as will bo hereafter
explained. This, however, is not always the ca.se. Ki/it, to know, has for its transitive
sullix (, and liir its reeiprocal ki.
With ynki fiillowing the verb, the prf.'fix vei often loses its reciprocal sense, and ex.
presses r^erely short, quick, iiitijrruptod motion, like that denoted by the phrases " to
and fro, " up and down," " altout," and the like. Thus, vri-rait'i means, to see one
another, and iTi-rnii/nki, to look alxiut, this way and that ; vei-tnko-yaki, to go to and
fro, go about ; vei-siki-ynki, to lift about.
i t
V I T I A N (i K A M M A K.
377
Th<< nviprnonl nllixi-ii artf nliH> iim-iI Io (iiriii tlx' iilwlrni't iiniiiiv <>( r('lnti»niilii|>, nx,
giinr, briillirr iir HJNlrr ; iii-ijiiniin, tlir rt'liilinn iMlwit n Imilliir iiml nlNlrr: ii'Uti,
■|Miii'« , liiialHiiiil iir will'; rn-iiiiti nr iri-wiihiiu \\\r iiiiiiniiiniiiiil rrliilmii. Vn.itinn
•igiillK'H u miiiriifiir, I'rum Itint, In cniiH' iiriir; iiml rii-liirnii, nil liiir, rnilii (urn, Ici
mii'iMTil,
Ihnlrc it i'X|ircM>Mil Ipy tin, iit rin-kiiiii, to wiiih to I'lil i iin.iiiiHf, to wish to »Uf[>, to
In' iilii'iiy i nil viit tiikn, I wi«h to go,
yiliiii iii^iiitii'H tViinicnt or rimtoinnry onion, — nt iiiluii-/iJi>, to liiMt fminniily, to Ik;
Unlit to lilsl ; ililtlil-l.ilH", t'l I'llt llllll-ll, to llC! II glutton.
T K A N M I T I V i: A » K I X K H
Vrrlw, wlirn till')' liiivc n Irnnsilivi- MiitiiifK'ntioii, iimmlly tiiku ri'rtiiiii iiIIKi'm wliioli
(li'iinlf tliJK Ntntr, iinil tliiii MliulliPrtlicy nro or nn* not iniinnliiiti'ly followril liy ii iiniiii in
thf olijrrtivi'. 'I'lic'w iiHixcs ari' a, t'n, kii, niti, nu, f/ii, rn, la, ru, yii, Inkiiin, rnkinn,
liikinii, Viikinii, niid unkinii. Tin' Inst livr (KTniiir, in tli"' (liiilfcl ol' lU'wii, tnkit, ntkii,
Inkii, rnkii, iiiiil i/tdn. All tlicHc iillixi's, wlicn Collouril iiiiiniiliiitcly liy n |iroiioiin or
pro|K'r nniiir, witli the nlijfctivf ><i^n / lu'l'oru it, low tln'ir liiiiil </, ami liiki' tlii» i in it«
plncT.
I'I'Ih' iiiiHiiionarii'H iil l<nkrnil>n at I'lrst cnnsiilrrcd that tlic I'liinl u wn.t rlinngpil to i,
unil llio I of till' oliji'clivi' nlMi ri'tniiiiil ; they tlK'n'tiirL' wmtv an ruUi ikn, or ini raifii
X", |iir"I luv IliiT." Iliil nt llfWH nml SnniiiHonm tlii'y Imvc oiiiitlril niic of llicfM!
vowi'In. Sn liir MS niir i'\|H'ririi<'i' went, only one is Hoiiiiili'd ; inili'eil, thi! |ironniiii in tlif
iicciisalivc apiMiirs l'ni|iiiiilly to Im' alliju'd to tlic verb, — as nii niii'lko, I sco tliff ; kiikini
ni lesiikiiiii, do not iir iiii', \Vc smnrliiiK's heard the « rrlaincil. as, nu rnir'n ikn. Tho
omissinn ol'lh<' rinal vowil in \'iliaii, Ix-lorc aiintluT vowrl, is liy no means niK'ninnmii ;
/nkn, to p), when I'olinwed by i, generally becomes /iik\ as, nil sa Ink' i Ovninii, I am
goin){ tn Ovnliiii.|
Rxninplcs of transitive iiHixes are, —
■ Kiri.l VKIIt.
tiilrrr. In elennsv
siimlii, to drive
ffsii, to tic
fllljll, tn llll^
Ininn, tn lovo
tarn, to ask
viikiitii, to erect
*(/((, In trample
soro, to worship
tn, to I'ell, cut down
knfi, to ent
tiimliii. In I'onsecrnlo
riir, to Wound
tiiki, tn draw water
io/f, to swathe
Tii«s»iTivK num.
tulirea
S(iiii/ii('a
irsiiku
t'liminia
loiiiiiiia
tnroija
vnkntiira
sihittl
snrOvii
taya
kntUdkinii
tani/inrnkina
viirlnkina
tnkiviikina
soleijdkiiM
05
379
PHILOLOGY.
It docs not nppcnr that there is any difrercncc of incaiiing (with one oxccpliun) in these
siillixcs, nor is there any mode of determlninf; the proper siilVix of nny parliculnr verb,
except from usage. iSonietiincs a word which has two or more acccplnliuiis, lakes a
diiTereiit siilfix for each, — as, tun, Uiura, to talii', luii, Iciiii'd, to jjalhcr or pluck, liiu,
tiiiiiii, to cleave to. So roijo, roijor'ii, to liear, and roiiofdktmi, to |)rcach. Hut fre(|iu'iilly tho
some sutH.t is joined to verbs whicli, though sounded alike, are evidently dillerent words ;
//'«, to steal, and /id, to in(|uire, both make haul. Moit'over, the same word sometimes
takes two or mon> nlfixcs with no change of nieaiiiiig ; thus, iiilxiso, to cut, has mdostika ,
iiil/osnfii/kiHii, awii iiilmsordkiiia.
The exception mentioned aUive is in the case of Vdkiiid, or ra'iiKi, which is said (in
the Somusomu grammar) to have sometimes the meaning of acting or doing far, or on
account 0/ another, as, au sorovd'hui ea, I pray for him, an /o/oi<i'in(i Cd, 1 fust for him,
ail la'ova'ina, I go for him, or on his account. It will be observed that, in this case,
the sutBx does not change its tinal vowel lx!lbre the pronoun. It has not, however,
always this meaning, as t/atovtikina, which means " to omit the k in s|)eaking" (like the
l)eople of Soniusoniii).
These transitive sulVixes seem to lie the same as those that in the Polynesian serve as
signs of the passive, [^^ee Comp. Oram. ^ 56.] What makes this almost certain ii the
fact that in those cases where the \'itian verb is of Polynesian origin, its transitive suflix
usually correspoiiils with the passive sulVix of the same verb in Polynesian, — nt least, as
we lind it in the dialect of New Zealand, which has ri'lained this part of the language
more complete than the other dialects. Sometimes the Samoan and Tongun also coincide,
as will be i>cen in the following examples :
VITIAN VE»«.
TRASSITIVK.
TO1.TNK9UN.
PASSIV*.
rakdlii, to erect
vakdtura
vakatii (IV. Z.)
icdkdlnriii,
vakatuiiibii, to cause to grow
Vdkn/iimbiim
utikdtKjiu (N . y
.)
u-dkdinpnria
i-akumdte, to kill
vakantdtca
irnkuMdfe (.\.>
:•)
tidknmalea
itki, to lill up
sikita
/liki (N. Z. and
[also si'i, Sam.
Tong.)
Itikilia
si'iliii]
kini, to pinch
kinitii
kini (N. Z.)
kiiiilia
vafu, to strike
vafiika
JX!/U (N.Z.), to
knock
2tiitnki<i
ttmhiiimhi, fo cover
umhiiimbia
iifiiifi (Sam.)
iilinlia
keh, til dig
kclia
km (\.Z.)
knid,
nnu, to drink
nniimii.
inn (N'.Z.)
innniia
TIIK I'AS.SIVK.
There is, in the Vitian, no especial formation to express the passive voice. When the
passive in lOmilish is lollowed by an ablative of llii' agent, this, in Vitian, would Ix'come
the nnuiinalive, — us, " ye shall Ik' hatcil by all men," is renden'(l, r na i'ati keninnilnii 11
lugd liimtitii vnk/Mmlna,a\\ men sliall hate you. In other cases, the Ibrm is tlie same
as in the active, t|- ; subject being put in the objective alk'r the verb, and some nominative
equivalent to the French oti b«^ing apparently uiiderstiKnl, — as, ka na kafivi koikoid, and
he shall be called, lit [|)eopleJ shall call him ; e nil mhiiiti ra ki Kiena, and they shall
V I T I A N GRAMMAR.
379
be cast into Gilioiina — " [an] Its jrttrrtt" fee. In llifse examples Ihe close tvlnlion
which exists iK'twcen the passive ami transitive Ibrms Dt'tlie verb is evident.
DIRECTIVE PARTICLES.
In the Polynesian dialerts, frequent use is made of particles expressing the direction of
the action, whether towards or from the si)oaker, upward or downwar<l, and the like. In
the Vitian, similar words ;ire in use, thouyh not to the same extent. ]\l(ii signifies motion
towards the s|ieaker, and may frei|ui'ntly lie rendered hither ; tiiii or i/uni denotes motion
from the spi-aker, — as, awai/, (iff, forth, &c. ; fdkv signifies ujiicarits, and <'iv'>, iloicn-
icanU. Liiko-tmii, cimxc hither; /<ik\iiii, go nway ; tn <fVUc, stand up; tiikn fti'o, to
put down; tiikii-fiani, to send li)rth; — an tiikiU'i kcmiimlou yaui, I send you forth;
tuktit'd-mui, give it here; viri-ani, throw nway.
RELATIVE PARTICLE.
Ki-na, in the middle or towards the close of a .sentence, refers to some noun, pronoim,
adverb, or other word preceding it, expressive of time, place, cause, manner, instrument,
and the like ; it thus fre(|uently supplies the place of a relative pronoun ; as, a tikina
vakoniliiayd ki> hiko ki ?ui, every place irhcrc thou g(K'st (ki iiti referring to tikiiiu,
place). I na sii/ii e iiuite ki na a yaijomlra, on the day vhen their bodies die, (where
ki na re(»,TS to sitjti.) A Cava ko raii'a ki >ia it iiin/iimiihi, why dost thou behold Ihe
mote? — here ki na refers to fdva, what, — i. e., what is it (or which thou beholdest, &;c.
The following paradigms are intended merely to show the mode in which the particles
of tense, mood, iVc, are applied, when it is thought necessary to employ them; but it
must not lie f )rgotten that their use is by no means ''onstant, and that, in strictness,
a conjugation of regular verbal forms is not consistent with the genius of the Vitian
language.
PARADIGM OK AN INTRANSITIVE VERB.
Infinitive, rtie lnko, to go.
kcnnitifhu hiko, ye go
> Itiko, they go
INDICATIVE MOOD,
PRESFNT TKNBK.
Sill(»ul(ir.
an hiko, 1 go
ko lako, thou g<x"St
e lako koikoia, he goes
Pual.
krndarn liikn, thou and I go
kciran hikii, he and I go
kcniiiuilraii lako, ye two go
t run lako, they two go
Plural.
kenilu 1
I I . i uikit, ve and 1 go
kcnihitou S
keiloii 1
, . > Itiko, Ihev and 1 go
keiiit'inti S
e ni
c ratou
INDEFINITE.
ml sa lako, I am going, or am gone
ko sa /(lb), thou art going, <SlC.
sa lako koikoia, he is, iVc.
rBErr.BiTE.
ail II lako, 1 went, or have gone
ko a lako, thou wentest
ka hiko koikoia, he went
Fl'TrBE.
an na lako, I shall go
/■() na lako, thou wilt go
I' na lako koikoia, he will go
380
PHILOLOGY.
CONDITIONAL.
keraha mi hiko, it" I go
(conlracteil to kevuka'ii lako)
kn'itka kn lako, i\' thou g<x>st
kcviika c Uiko koikoia, if ho goes
PRKTERITE.
ke nil sa lako, if I Imd gone
(contrnetcd to kc'ii sa lako)
or, kc s<i lako koiaii
ke sa lako koiko, if thou hndst gone
kc sa Itiko koikoia, if he had gone
n'TURI.
keviika an tia lako, if I shall go
kcraka ko na lako, if thou shall go
kevaka e na lako koikoia, if he shall go
SUHJl'MtTIVE.
tiie ail lako, that I may go
(contracted to tiieUi lako)
me ko lako, that thou mayest go
mr lako koikoia, that he may go
PRKTERITE.
men sa lako, or
Men a lako, that I might go
t'UTl'RE.
men na lako, that I may go
IMPERATIVE.
liiko
lako koiko
me ko lako \. go thou !
mo I
viau
t ko lako I
mi lako J
tiu lako, go you (rcspectfid)
DUAL.
mliaii lako \
mc kemiiiiilrau lako > do ye two go
lako keiniuiiltan )
PLURAL.
iiiloii lako \
me ke miiinlou lako > go ye.
maiii lako kemiiiiiloii )
CAUSATIVE FORM.
III!'. — me vakalako, to cause to go
ail vakalako, I cause to go
ail a lakalako, I caused to go
an na vakalako, 1 shall cause to go
kevakan vakalako, if I cause to go
men vakalako, that I may cause to go
vakalako koiko ! do thou cause to go
FREQUENTATIVE FORM.
me vcilakoyaki, to go about, up and down
au veilakoyaki, I go almut
au a veilakoyaki, I went about, &c.
DE8IPERATIVE FORM,
me via-lako, to wish to go
U8ITATIVE FORM,
me ndau-lako, to be wont to go.
PARADIGM OK A TRANSITIVE VERB.
me loma, to love.
TRANSITIVE FORM.
loinana, to love some object.
an loman a ijoiie, I love the child
an loniniii Seen, I love Seru
an limiani ko, I love thee
an lomani koikoia (L.)'
an lomani kea (Mb.)
an lomani ^ra (.'^ain.)
an toniania (It.)
ko lomani an, thou lovest me
■ I love him
ko lomani ko, thou lovest thyself
ko lonuini koikoin, &c., thou lovest him
e lomani an koikoia, ho loves me
c lomani ko koikoia, he loves thee
e lomani koikoia koikoia
or, e Ionian ia koikoia
' ..'am lomani koikoia, we two love him
e ran lonuini ko, they two love thee, &c, &c.
he loves him
VITIAN GRAMMAR.
881
cAUMTivi Fom. keiidiiru veilomani, we two love one an-
me val;ahniana, to cause to love other
ail vukidomani ko i koikniii, I cause thee lifuUilou vcilonuiiti, we all love one an-
to love him
e ra vakidonuini an i ki), they cause me to
love thee, &c. &:c.
KECintoCAL KOHM.
me veilomani, to love one another
other
DESIDKR \Tlve FORM.
VIC lia-lonui/ia, to wish to love
ail via-lomani ko, I wish to love thee
UaiTATlVE FORM.
Vie 7iil(iii-lomaiui, to Ik; wont to love.
The rcinaiiiini; parts ofsiicoch lio not r(v|iiiro a |iarliinilar notice. All the |)r<'|iosilions,
and most of the conjuti<'li<ins have Ixi'ti already ;;iveii in tniitin^ of the cases of nouns,
and tin; niiKuls of v(;rbs. The formation of adverlis with vnka has also been adverted to.
We therefore procird to s|K>ak of some other iiecidiarilies of this language; and first
of the
F () K M A T I O N OF W O R P S.
The duplication of simple words is common in the Vitian, though not according to any
particular svstcm or rule. In a verb it freiinently expresses re|H'lition of an action
(ante, p. 37.">) ; wiih ailjeclives and adverbs it is a miKle of forming the snpi'riative
(see p. H70). Sometimes adjectives arc Dinned by the duplication of other words, as,
from sninliii, down, we liiive yiniliiisomhii, steep ; Irom /«/, dirt, Intloii, black, dirty.
Hut more commonly nouns are thus formed from verbs, as from kait, to carry, is
derived kiiiiknii,i\ burden; from jsoto, to worship, so/-aso/-«, n religious rite; kamhn, io
climb, ktiiii/xikawlHi, a ladder. \'ery oHen the reduplicated form dillers in no respect
from the simple word, and seems to lx> pn'ferred meri'ly from simie idea of euphony.
A kind of verbal adjective, with a passive meaning, is formed from inany verbs by
prefixing la, as, rof'e to (lay, tnvm'r. Hayed, having Ihe skin strip|Hd oil"; lease, to sepa-
rate, Unease, separated, divorced ; sere, to untie, tasere, untied, loose. This particle is
sometimes fimiid between the causative pri'fix vakti and the verb, as, ki/a, to know, viika-
triki/a,ln make known, to testify; villi, to learn, rakatnviiJi, to teach, i. e. to make
Itanieil.
Compounds are not imeommon in the Vitian. The words which compose them are
arranged in the same order as when separate, — that is, the ailjective follows the noun,
and the noun the verb, — substanlivi's are separated by a pre|)<)sition, ice, as, malalailai,
sharp-pointed, from nuitii, eye or point, and tailai, small ; molanivuiiiia, a councillor
(eye of the land); ndiivii-vakatmii, (lute (noi.se-making !>amboo). Substantives, how-
ever, are lre(|uently u»ed as luljectives, in which : ase no preposition is required, as,
fikarahi, stone-blin<l, from tika, a disi'ase ol"the eyes, and valii, a stone; tiiruiidrdmlxi.
Idea, issue of blood, from tii/ii, to drop, ndid, blood, and mlialavii, long.
The adjectives rtiwiiraira, easy, and ndrendre, ditHcult, are trcquently su(rixed to
verbs to fonn com|iounds, as, vala-ratcaraxea, easy to do, vala-ndrendre, hard to do ;
taliii-rinearatea, easy to command, or, rather, to be commnndeil, — hence used (or obe-
dient ; lalai-iidrendic, ilisolK'dient, ungovernable.
!)0
382
r U I L O L O G Y.
CONSTRUCTION.
As the Vitinn 1ms no inflections, tlic only rules of syntax wliioli npply to it arc such as
relate to the urrnngenient of words in a sentence. Many of these rules have been already
given. The following is a general summary of the most important.
The adjective liillows the noun which it qualifies.
The nominative, if it \>c a pronoun preceded by ko or koi, usually follows the verb;
other pronouns conunonly pn^cede.
If the nominative be n noun, it generally follows the verb; and if the verb have a pro-
noun for its object, then the nominative conies alter 'he object, as Sd i'aiidra a sir)(i, the
sun rises ; S(i lako inai ua kai M/ntii (U.), the Mliua people are coming; sa Imiituii an
ko Scrii, Seru loves me.
Adverbs gi'nernlly follow the verb, as iithomn }i(lolr <i siijn, the sun sets tiH> soon; ku
/III iiikiisiiriisiivn/iikiiiit saiu koikoiti, and be will thoroughly cleanse.
The negatives precede the verb, as, sa seijii tii kiln knidii, I do not know , e iia Utwa
mbii/a II tiimatii, maa shall not live; tawumboko, no end, endless; era tut £au mute
(Sam.), they shall not die.
The same word is fre(|uently noun, verb, adjective, or adverb, according to the con-
struction of the st^ntence ; thus iiibiilii means lit!', to live, alive, living ; iiri is wrong, to
err, error, erroneously, &c. 'I'lie verii, if transitive, is usually <listingiiished by its sulhx,
and the noun by its article or pre|Hisition.
Sometimes a verb, or a part of a sentence, is treated as a noun, and takes a possessive
pronoun lx.'fore it, instead of a nominative, as, i na mm tiiicii in/xjki rii, l)ecause he could
not find them, lit. for his not finding them ; caka na iici/oii vukniiilonihniitiiki rii (U.),
as we lorgive them, lit. like our forgiving them.
The natives of Viti, like those of Samoa and Tonga, in speaking of or to their chiefs,
employ certain terms distinct from those in ordinary use. They are principally the
names of the parts of the b<xly, and of some of the most common acts, — ns, to eat, s|H'ak,
sit, sl(x>p, and the like. By a singular coincidence of iili'in with many Ruropean lan-
guages, the plural pronoun mnnii or kei/iinin, you, is u-cd as a respectful mode of
address to a single [Hi-rson ; in which case it is frecpiently contracted to int. Vim, him,
is also generally used as a term of ceremony, instead of the ol)lii|ue cases of knikniti.
The following list, given by Mr. C'argill, comprises most of the words of this description :
I
CEREMONIAL.
COMMON.
eiiia
eika
c'likii, temlienikida
liya
kuliiiisawbiila
kuli
ku, uiikolo
lako
loiiianikoro
vale
mbiilc
mute
niilainila
mliai'a
mliikiiiiivesi
nilakii
nilrulambu
iilitiiuUiia
oviuvi
tittuvi
ophthalmia
hand or arm
skin
to go
house
death ; to die
disease, sickness
the back
the first-born
a cloak
*
VITIAN GRAMMAR.
383
cinmioNiAi.
seraii
scran
tauri
tiivi
titvo
tokau'ide
tiinitura
Viikutamlmna
ixihattitambu
vakatnka
vanua-i-€ake
wave
u-iri
ifiriwiri
COMMON,
sarnsara
viala
kana
ijone
viofc
mb-irisi
ava {yavti)
vosa
vosa
a£a
iilti
kelc
tiko
tikoliko
ENOLiail.
to sec
eye, face
to eat
o son or liaiightor
sleep ; to sleep
anger; angry
the loot or leg
to speak
a word
name
head
the abdoraen
to sit
a scat
P R O S O I) Y.
The Fecjceans pay more allerition to poetical composition than any of their Polynesian
neighbours. Nearly all their dances arc accompanied by songs, in a kind oC recitative,
to which the motions of the dancers arc made to correspond. The song and dance a|)pear
to be looked upon as inseparable, and any important celebration or festival is usually
signalized by the production of a mrkr, or dance, of which both the movements and the
words are newly composed. There are persons, both male and female, who devote them-
selves to this species of composition, some of whom acquire a great reputation. They
frequently obtain a high price for their productions, twenty tnmbiia (the native currency
of whale's teeth) being sometimes given for a single song and dance. As a person with
forty or fifty of these teeth is considered wealthy, and for eight or ten a ship may be
supplied with provisions for a cruise, it is evident that the Feejeeans alTix no slight
value to the works of their com|Kisers.
Fiideed a poet of Viti has a far more dillicult task than those of most countries. Me
must not only possess a good knowledge of music, as it is understood by his countrymen,
and be acquainted with the principles on which their dances are regulated, but in the
composition of his song he has to adapt it both to the tunc and the dance, — and he must
do this while fettered by a complicated system of rhythm and rhyme peculiar, so far as
we know, to his language.
The most common measure in their songs consists of three dactyles and a trochee ;•
but in the place of any of the dactyles a spondee may be used. Thus the line
• Tliis incasurc is one not wholly unknown to English ballnd lili'raturc ; it is tliat adopted liy Scott, in
tlic wcU-known lines —
" Wliiire shall the Irtvcr rest, whom the fates sever
From his true niiiidcn's breast, p.-irtcd for ever ?" &c.
884
PHILOLOGY.
dM tlka I mdi lid | tdmhu Id | gdni
consists of a dactyle, a spondee, a dactylc, and a Iroclice. And in the line
ndriiulri | Jld i | tik6 md \ lud
wc linvo two spuiidcrs, a dactylo, nnd a trochee.
Ono vnriiilion, however, is iierinitled, which is not consonant with our ideas of metrical
hnrinnny ; — when a nulu|ilicaled word like S(i/i'»i/ii, cWvii'rtv/, is intriKJuccd into a line,
it is considered ns Cdiiliiiiiiiif; only lis iiuiiiy s\ llaliles as the simple word. It is piissihie
that, ill siiii;ing, such words are iiol doiiMeil, hut of this the natives from whom we received
the songs gave no hitimnlion while reciting iheiii. Thus the line
SalusMii III vutii mnkfrivaki
has two syllables too many, which are evidently contained in the first word ; if these are
omitted, the line consists of a dactyle, a s|K>ndee, a dactyle, and a trm^hw. This rule
holds in every case, so fur as we have observed, where a double word occurs.
In some instances a l!K)t of lour short syllables occurs, instead of a dactyle, as, —
if(i villi I viifii rd \ lamii rnivd | tdkd
It should bo observed that the wonls in their singing, or rather chanting, arc divided
according to the tune, without any reference to the sense, — a pause not unfre(|uently
occurring in the middlr! of a word.
But the obwrvance of metre, which, in the I^ialin tongue, constitutes nearly all the
mechani<al part of verse.making, is the least ditlicully in the Vitian. There is, in addi-
tion to this, a piHMiliar manner of rhyming, which must require, in the com|)Oser, a great
coniriand of words, as well as skill in disposing them. The rule is os follows : — those
vowels which are contained in the last two syllables of the first line of a stanza, must be
found, in the same order, in the last two syllables of every succeeding line: — and the
greater the number of lines which are thus made to conform, the belter is the (wetry
este<>ined. Some of the stanzas in the poems which we took down have six, others nine
lines. It is evident that this s|K^cics of rhyme, or rather consonance, could only be suc-
ce.ssfiilly cultivated in a language distinguished, like the Vitian, for the predominance of
vowel sounds.
In the following cxampl", !ho two terminal vowels are n — a:
Ru mrxr kn>o i m/mre M/iatua,
All iiiiilra culii ni Cdiiih- tia villa.
Oi)i;ii iiiasi till liik' i miimliiva,
Rukunilii a i'nii tiiru ki tiimlia ;
A mil (ot'oko iiu iak' i riimhuna,
Rfikuiiihi a fait turu ki tuniba.
V I T I A N G R A M .M A R.
385
This song, ns well as tlinse whirli fiillow, wns nlitainoil from a chief of Mbim, or San-
dalwood Hny, nt which plarc a iliiilnct prevails (hOiTing holh from that of Ovolau, whuro
oiir interpreter ri'sidiil, and from tliosc of Laki'inl)a and Somiisomu, of whi(di we had
vcM'ahidarii's ; in some eases, tlierefore, a didieully was experieiii'ed in arrivini; at the
exact interpretation, — a dilhculty increased liy thi^ elliptical form of expression, and the
poetical license in the use of words to which the native hards havo recourse in order to
meet the exactions of their coniplicati^d metrical system. The following is the meaning
of the al)ove, as near as we could ohtain it :
We two were sleeping in the council-house of Mhatua;
I awake suddinly as the moon is rising.
My girdU' I am going to cut in two.
TIk^ dew is falling heavily without;
All our things I am going to put in a chest,
[For] the dew is falling heavily without.
The mhinc is the largo house which is f;>nnd in every town, and which serves for
conneil-honse, temple, and house of reception fiir strangers. Two arc represented in the
.song as sleeping in a house of this kind, called MIkiIiiu, having left the articles which
they had hronght with them (prohahly the dresses, paints, Arc., provided (iir the dance) on
the outside. One of them awakes at the rising (d" the moon, and finds that the night is
cleor, and that a heavy dew is jailing; he divides his girillc or cincture of native cloth to
give half of it to his c(jmpanion (which the natives fre(|uently do, as the girdle is long and
wrapped round the hody in several folds), and proceeils to put their properly where it will
not be injured hy the uioistMre. There is nothing poetical in the verse, which was pro-
bably composed to suit the rhyme, — the liist line chancing to terminate in ii — a, the poet
went on to .string together as many words of this termination as he could recollect.
MiDuliiva, whi(di properly signifies to rut or ^mh, as a stick or a finger, is used, fi)r the
consonance, instead of knsiiva, whiidi means to rlip, or cut with scissors or a shell.
Ritkiiiiihi is not in the vocabulary, but we lind laiiiiihi ii. /aiji, meaning, a heavv fall of
rain ; riiLiimhi a ('nn we suppose to mean (at least, in this dialect), a heavy fall of dew.
Titiu is to drop, to drizzle. Riimbii means a chest or box, but by taking the suHix iia
it becomes a verb, — as in English we say " to box up." Koto means to put, to place,
and, OS a neuter, to /ir, to /if ji/iicnl ; — but it is used after another verb to express con-
tinuance of the action or condition, answering to the participial forms iii English — I nm
sleeping, we were lying, tVc. ; ti/,o, lohn, and »", are used in a similar manner. Ni
before tiuniie is probably used I'or iii tuiit'a, or some suidi adverb, meaning iclien, as, or
the like.
The following song is similar to the preceding, but its two rhyming vowels are « — i :
All liko mni tm Tiimhii-tayani,
A mil mrke kii fnk' i liinimaki,
A tmi kiilii kii tiiiji tiikiiri,
Aiiiliii i'lilii tiko, kdii pg'ii taiji
hull inlxiii t'uni a sc ni kiiiiilravi
Sii/iisa/ii ni viii'ii iiiakcrer.iki.
07
< A
386
PHILOLOGY.
Which may be rendereil as follows :
I was lying in the Tambu-tnjmni,
We were going lo Icnrn a dnnco,
A red cook crowed in the coiirt-ynrd,
I awoke suddenly and went lo crying ;
1 am going to string the (lowers of the kundravi,
For a necklace in the harmonious dance.
This is evidently intended for a dance of females. A woman represents herself as
sleeping in a house called 'i'liii/iii-tiii/nni, on the night Ijefore a festival ; she awakes at
the crowing of a cock, and recollerling that the morning is to bo devoted to Icorning a
dance, she falls to crying at fuiding that it is already late, — her tears being probably duo,
in some measure, to the circumstance that tinji (to weep) is needed by the poet for the
jingle of the verse. She then proce«.'ds to prepare ;lie necklace of (lowers which is worn in
the dance. Tuntmaki is the only word, the meaning of which is uncertain ; it is possible
that a mistake was made in Inking it down, as there is a syllable too much in the line; it
may correspond, in the Mbua dialect, lo the Lakeinba word saiimo/ci, to return, or cause
to return, which may Ix! used for icjmit, rrliiiirsr,tc(ill to mind. Tiko is used nearly like
Uotn in the preceding song, — " I nwoke suddenly, and remained so." Tigni and mlxiu
ImjIIi seem properly to mean to I'j, and are Ijulh used as auxiliaries, o/r//, to enter, or
|)ass through, is here used as a transitive verb, meaning to insert, as (lowers in a garland.
Tiikiiri (atOvolau S(n)j;ati) is the name given to the space around the outside of a house.
KiiH is a contraction for k<i (in, " and I." ViitK is the Jigtire of a dance. Makcrevuki
means " in good accord, — wi'll arranged."
The song which follows was also nblained at Sandalwood Bay, and is valuable not
only as a gix)d specimen of native composition, but as containing many allusions to their
|)eculiar customs :
Ni nvii limn tu/ti intm/iiln) )ui i\'va,
S(i uiiji Inka ni iii'ii i licwa ,•
Mil hired no a sinii ka pgerii,
Me ra fiiru siiliisalu niii a/uira.
^iirii sinii ka iimlirti ii hinUi,
Ra niMii ma, kaii luni/nnii.
Ma kcrid ko yanili, kaii srrra ;
Andi, kii liirata na urn IiiiiIhi,
Kiiii viriani ki na hm Irka.
Till fakarn va Irnilui kaii fnkava,
il/"" ra nc Ivvii niai a ntarania ;
Ta /ak' i i'lirii ki na I'ninaira.
Euniirn tika ko Tinai-'ani-lamlxi ;
A onilti nii'kc ka sii/i viikaciiva f
Ka'o ni vo'iui m ?iuii hila.
Viiraviiia na vaniia samara.
•
.
'
■■
•
•
V I T I A N GRAMMAR.
387
'I
Ra villi viifii, ra tiiiiiu ratfiitnka,
NilroiHU iiilnle sign ki MiU'iia'u.
Whicii may be rcnderptl, —
In the town of Krwn blows slronglj the south wind.
It blows stondily from the |Hilnt of Kowa ;
This sinu-flowers will \)c slmki'ii down and scattered,
So that thr women may string gnrliinds ;
String th<! sinii, and add to it the lemba,
When they arc finished, I will put it on.
The queen l>ej.'s for it, and I untie it ;
Queen, you take away this our garland,
I throw it aside on the little couch.
Let us take tliii garlands that I have been making,
That the Indies may make a great stir in coming :
liOt us go to th(! Thungiawn.
The motlier of 'J'luingi-lamba is vexed ;
"Whcrol'ore has our song Ix^en given away t
The bosket ol' Ices is empty ;
This world is a wretched ploce.
They are learning the dance ; tlicy will not succeed ;
The sun sets too early in Malhnata."
The first verse describes the preparation for a dance, by making garlands, anil the
idea with whicli it commences is certainly a poetical one. 'l"ho south wind, blowmp
from the |H)inl or cape at the mouth of the river of Kewa, shakes down the (lowers, so
that the women can make garlands. The latter part of the verse, concerning the
" queen" and the " little couch," is probably introduced to fill out the stanza with the
necessary rhymes. In the next verse, the " ladies" go to the house or inlmrr called
Thinigiincii, to practise their ilanee. They find their mstrnctress, the composer of the
song, annoyed at the small amount of compensation which she has received ; alter
expressing her displeasure, shi^ dechires that they will not succeed in learning the dance,
for when the women of .Malliuata attempt it, the night arrives too soon for them. Some
of the words re(iuire more particular annotations.
Avii or i/aviiy a place wliere houses stand, u town; this name is given to the platlbrms
of stone on which the houses are erected.
Tidti-nilromlro, applied to wind, signifies to blow briskly ; tala-mlroiidro na t'aiji, a
fine breeze is blowing.
Seva, the south wind ; £cvafcva was the word given, but as fcvn is found in the voca-
bulary, and is required in scanning, wo have adopted it instead of the reduplicate li>rm.
7}ikii, to lie, to be placed, used here as an auxiliary, like liko and koln.
U('ii, propiM-ly a nose, but used liir a point or headland ; the river of Kewa, whicli is
the largest in Vili, falls into the sea a lew miles l«:|.iw ilie town, u«d has a tongue of
land projecting on the south side of the mouth, Ibrming its liarlwr.
388
PHI I, o I. o(i Y.
Aid is n unrlictp pfriilinr In llii' Mhim ilinlii-l ; it ilrK>s not nrriir in oilhrr of Iho grnm-
mnrs, or in llir V(KNil)iiliiry. and the inlcriirclrr wiim i;^ni)r(inl ofilii mi'iinint;. As the line
hns n nyllnlilc lixi inticli for llir nictn', il is ixMsililc that this partii'lc may have \kv\\ an
niMiiiiiii niaili' to the s<in^ hy the natives iif Mhiia, f'rnin whom wo rri'i'ivcd it, Il is
oviclcnt that these rnmpiiKltioiis, in imssin^ l'i\)ni ime district to nnolhi'r, nni8t be liable In
Ik' corrupti'd hy the chaiijics (il'diali'<'t.
Mil, similar in incanini; and nsc lo liLn, /n/:ii, and koto.
Sim/, a tree l«virin^ iH'aiilil'nl white llnwers, whieli urow in diistprs,
il/iwK (•■»/•», Ac, " that they may slriiij,' (iarlands — the women." The acnienco is
prohaldy thrown into this li)rni lor the sake ol'the rhyme.
Aliwti is Ireipiently used liir Ictid^m the llewa dialret ; like most nouns U'ginning
with II, it is prireded hy an /, which is joined to whatever word comes lielbre it, — in this
case, to the article ml, Throiij^hoiit these songs n and tin an; nned iridill'erenlly l)otli in
the nominative and the accusative ; prolmhly ihi.' choice is regulateil liy the harmony ul'
the vers<'.
IadiIki, a Irre iK-nring n yellow llower ; here the word is useil for the flower nione,
and aDerwards, hy metonymy, (or the whole garland.
Mlnild is 111 divide ; ml'ilii-iiiii, divided in two. Two garlands ap|)enr to have hcca
braiili'd on one string, and when (Inishi'd, they are divided ; ni mlmhi-rua should there-
lore 1k" rendered "they Ixiiig severed in two."
ToiiOh is an ornanuni liir the lieail or neck ; with na it becomes n trnnsitive verb, and
signilii's to make ofany thing an ornament.
AVr< , lo beg ; she supposes that the (|uecn will be struck with the btmuly of her gar-
land, and ask lor it.
I/nyi, till' dais or elevated place lor sleeping, which occupies one end ol'the house; the
epiiliet likn is evidently introduced liir the rhynii;; she represents herscll'as Ix'ing annoyed
that the ipieen should Ix'g liir the garland, and as throwing it a^ide in displeasure.
llii r'(i/,iini, ii:c.,—<'<il,(i signilies both to //;Ar and lit iiia/:r ; at Dvolaii the meaning
ol'the line Would have been expressed hy " kfi run e'ukii nil Irmlm ii/ii 'ilfifii." In
kiiii (contracted for hii iiii) Ihe kn may Im! either the conjunction iitiil, or, 'vhot is more
priiliable, the preterite particle sup|dying the place ol' n relative pronoun.
Xi; noise, bustle; the meaning seems to Ix", — let us dress ourselves in nil our finery,
to make a great stir or "sensation," as we enter Ihe circle of dances.
TliiiiiiiiiiHii : every houw; in Viti has its nami>, and the occupant freiiuently receives an
appellalion I'rom it, — as the lairds of Scotland an' called by the names of their estates.
The house of David Whippy, our interpreter, was called WiiiigU'runiin, — i. e., "Ship;"
and he w.ns freijuenlly spoken of as Kn-iiiiii-uii-Winifiii-vmiiia, " He of the Ship."
Ti/iii-i-ciiiii-/iimlxi, mother of Thangi-lamba ; a woman is frequently known, in these
islands, by the appellation of the mother of her eldest son, — and a man by that of father
of his eldest daughter. We are reminded of the Arabic Ahii-Iiikr, Father of Bekr, &c.
Kii'o for kntn, basket; iiiiia for roliin, which is a .Mbua word, having prol>nbly the
same meaning as ynii in Kewa, i. e., property, goods. Here it n'fers to the articles given
in return for leaching Ihe song and dance. The omission of Ihe / is a peculiarity of Ihe
dialect of Malhuata, ond as Tinai-cajiilamba is reprcFcnted ns speaking, she was probably
from that place, and had come to Kewa lo dispose of a new composition.
Sii nfti lata, " is here empty."
V I T I A N GRAMMAR.
3S9
1^
Nilolf, tno Rorly, bnfnro ilH time; in male ndult, ho diod an untimely death.
A fimlii, or wiir-son){, eniislats UBually of two linoH, L'X|iro8Rivo of Homo sciilimrnt of
dcfiancoi which thuy nIiouI forth as they approach the enemy. The moutitnineerH of
Ovolnti, who HoiiK'limcs nttncked the towns upon the const, were wont, before they
descended I'rom the heights, tu tount the |>cop|e below them with the words—
That is,
Keitoii (imbidmhi toka i tualuii,
Ntlrentlre pi i tiko mtUita,
Wn nre sinfjing our wnr-sonj{ on the ridge,
Hard indeed is it (for you) to sit pnticnily;
i. e., it is linrd for you to be rom|)elled to hcor our insults without being able to return
them.
Another distich dcclnrcs the cnac with which the assailants will break through the
hostile fortress ; —
Niiiiiii nihil i viiini vine.
An na lukia, an Itiserc,
" Your fence is of the mem vino,
I will kick it, I will bleak it o|)cn."
The (bllowiiig is frequently sung n.s they approach the shore in their canoes:
XiliijiniHiji, — kciiii) miiri maiiilii,
Kcnm c likn i vii iii lanu.
%
Which wns rendered by the inter|>rclor, —
Take your choice now, — something for you to cot comos after,
Something for you lies at the foot of the mast.
This refers to the custom of tying their prisoners to the mnsts of their cnnocs, in which
mo<lo they bring home those who are reserved lor their cnnnilinl feasts. They tell their
enemies that they have something ready for thcni to ent when they are token captive.
Kemii is the possessive pronoun lliij in the form which applies only to articles of food.
98
I
A VITIAxN DICTIONARY.
Fnost what hns been snid in the introduction to the Cirnniniiir, it
will 1)0 seon that this dictionary is (hio principally to the lal)ors ol"
the Uev. Mr. ('ari,'ili, missionary to Laluniiha, and tiiat it wasoriifii.ally
drawn up in tho dialect of that island. The additions made to it are
tho.so hy the Uev. Mr. Hunt for the dialect ni' Somiisotini (marked S.),
and tho.so which we have introduced for tiie dialects of Knni (K ).
Oriiliiii (().). Mulhiiiitd (M.), Mhna (Mh.), and Un (l{a). it shoukl
also be romemitered that tho dialect of Somusomu omits the /• in all
cases, and that of Matluiata ifonerally tho t, — thouirh tlie latter [k'CU-
liarity is julmitted by tiie natives to be a fault in pronunciation.
Several changes have also been made from Mr. Carj^ill's dictionary
in the order of arranijement, as we ' as in the orthography, for reasons
indicated in the j^ranuniir. 'riiesi altiualions are not presented in the
li^ht of improvements, and, in fact, if considered with reference to the
\'itian lanifuaj^e alone, they nii^^ht justly bear an opposite desit^natiou.
]Jut the pro|)riety of conforming, in I 'us art of the [)ri'seut work, to
the general system ado|)ted for the whole, will be readily admitted.
And the changes winch have been lluis made necessary are not such
as to render it ddlicult for any one, with i little [jractico, to use tiic
present dictionary and gramm ir, in connc.Kion with the translations
of the missionaries.
Most (if the verbs have their transitive particles ap|iendt'd to them :
five of these are given in an abbreviated form, viz.: lal,\, rah-., tak..
rail., and i/a/c. In the dialect of Lakeioba these all terminate in /,//i'i.
as, I'lLiiia, rdhinn. I've.; in that of Uewa. in La, as lalat, riil:ii. 'I'he
di t of Somusomu omits the I:, but otherwise agrees with tiuit of
Lakciul)a, as, laiiia, niiiKi.
V I T I A N 1) I C T I N A 11 Y.
A'
Ai, with.
Ar'", immi.' (sen f/dfn).
A"nn/K>li, lo liiirst.
AUuci (K.)> '*' """ (*'''" /ncii).
Aiii/i, (|iu'cn (st'O yandi, nim/i).
Aiiiiuiiit, the ,>o|i|)er-plniit ; piix-r mclliys-
lioiim (sif^ i/ii i/uii/iti).
Asi, to bow lielbrc a rhicf in token of
respect.
Atii, to ilo, to net,
Atinnata (K.), ninn (sec tamdia).
All. I.
All, flew (see Can).
Ann, or im fm, do not !
il(/</ snti, or icrt iiiis'iti, desist.
Aninln , lo shine, ns (hime, to burn ; sii
aiindrr, sn ynvn snrn, it is l)iirned, it
is entirely destroved.
f(i -la, to hate.
fn, evil, bad ; Ixidness, vileness.
^dt'a, odd nuinl«>rs (itM)ve ten, twenty, &c.
(iir'nn (S.), lo work.
cnl.ii -III, to lake up, do, mnke.
• Miwil «if the wnrdH which pr(i(M'rIy rdinmrncp
witli <i x^ill Ik* loiind unfit r y, hh ytijii Inr iiiil, yarn
for rtrw, Ac Tili'* y in intTrly llir ciiplinnir i,
whicii in Vitiiin it* trciinrnily prrhxcil to ninny
worilf, hut not :tr>-orflintr to iiny kni^wn ttynlcni,
ami with no iipjmnnt obji'i-t licyoncJ vane of* pro.
nunciation.
("(/.(/, hand or arm (used only of chiefs).
&daf'(i (Un.), Imd.
rnknn, a rei'f.
o(/,T, upwards, above, over.
<%//.(' -fii, lo dij;, or raise up.
(nknmhii, to hurst.
^iiln, any thing empty, ns n bottle, box, &c.
cii/nirai, a |)ool,
CnliniH, to burst.
f(//o -IV;, to pour in ; to sup.
raniii, the outrigger of a cniioc.
cnmln; to go up ; fniiiltc i'n/.r, to rise, as
the mixHi.
tV(Hi/w, lo olFer, present.
ciimlKk'iimlii), an olVering.
famtinm (K.), a flag, a banner.
FamliDn, outside.
^anilrii, to rise, ascend, spring, grow.
ciinn -inn, to carry, letch, take ; i'nun mat,
bring hither.
^iiijn, n span, to span.
&IIJII-IA (S.), ginger.
^U}jgn,a colli ribulion, — an article of Iraflic,
contributed by an individual, when
I his trilx- is exchanging pro|H'rty with
I anolhcr.
ciiiignrii, hard, as the kernel of an old
' cocoa-nut.
ciitji, wind ; fat/i a vunii ! (n phrase used
I ns an exclamation), wind is its foun-
dation.
cniji -iia, to lie blown by the wind.
^niji) (U.), the shrub from which turmeric
is derived,— t'HrcKWrt.
^ara -In nnd 'tuk., to clear the grass from
I a road, to mnke a path.
II. I I
VFTIAN DICTIONARY.
393
Sarafarti, to despoil a ix-rsoii of his pro.
pcrty.
Sarifiiri, ot)Cilionl : the noise of a forge,
i^iiii, a cockroaoli.
<r«« (S. ami l{.), no, not.
&M t'uufdit, (())., lund-lircczc, dew.
^iiiim/KMi, aUsuiit, not lirro.
Huiira voit (O.), a younj; man.
nirii, what.
oivii, a limit, boundary ; I" lend.
^(ivti, a storm of wind, a hurricane.
&ivaiu, a rustling noise.
Saviilfi, to eradieatc.
feai'iii, pale, pallid, corpse-like.
Fd'Clerii (L.), a plain.
cri'fj/i^ii, peace, case, cpiietness.
rWi'ico, li)od of one kinil only, ns yam
without (ish, and vice versa.
Tfi, who.
Femlic -Id, to cut.
Gemini i>t i'l'fii •nil;., to sliakc olF.
rc!j/;(i, erect ; to lil\ up.
^ojgii, iiitii'h ; to lirenthe, to snnlf.
^eijgii (U.), tiirhear, desist: (a word of
proliiliition like una).
^cijgM'tijpii, the pit of the stomach.
^eriffunili, breathless, — the asthma,
revr, to ap|)ear.
^crri'rie, eaves of a house.
^ciii -tiiii, to (Minr.
fen, fciit'cu -til, to carve, to probe,
fovi, the south wind.
feivii, to sit.
fciraf'ruM, a seat.
fjrt, to run.
?«'*/« (K.), rent, torn ; an aperture, breach,
rent.
fikd, a disease of the eyes.
Sikavatii, blind, — from fika and vatii,
stone.
Sila -ta, to shine.
fi/i, to cut.
fimlxi, to Ik; blown by the wind, to ascend.
fimlif (S.), the hip.
fimlii, to dance because of having slain nn
enemy ; n war-song.
fimhii'ivihi (O.), to sing a war-song.
00
"/«<;, a lamp, a light.
~i>i<ji -I'll, to place upon or alxjve.
riixiii, rude, irrev(!rent.
Ciii, afloat; -va, to float.
Ciiit'iii, to steam.
<"/i'", a sbell-lish, an oyster.
Civi 'Ui, to cut otr, to pare.
civo, ilownwards.
ciriK'ifiii/d, to sound.
rivii, nine.
t'iiiii •siiifiinilii, ninety.
CO, grass.
^oi\'}, lieep.
cia'W.'u, to prepare; all (sec fyAo and c^o/iO-
i'okn).
'iikn. (11.), to dart, shoot, throw a spenr.
r'/kiirakr, to dig de<'p; an inner lence.
""/.(', up|K^r branch of a tree.
I'likid, to gather together, take up.
foko -ra, to prepare.
fokni'nkn, all.
^iikiii'oki), l>ead.
Citkin-(i/ii, to assemble, to unite, to Ix-
friends.
(W(;. -til, to carry on the shoulder.
i^itmlHi -III, ;o throw water upon, to dash as
water.
Moulin), to make a noise by clappinc the
liands together.
roiiiln) -III, to cover.
^oiii/Hxa, covetous.
^oiiiIk) -Ifvii, a coward.
fiiiii, floor of a house.
Cinii/uu-n, an ambush, from fo, tii, and
/iiwii, a net.
fo>)tifiii/iint, thorny.
aiiiaiiii, a barb.
fori -ta, to bind ; the sinnct that fastens
the thatch of a house.
I'lirifori, rigging of a canoe.
fiini, to singe.
foiii'ouvi, grateful.
fnvr, an oyster.
I^iivi, a gil>.
fori -a, to cut or break olFn branch.
fovH -ta, to (loek.
fiit'u, a disease of the eyes (used of chiefs).
394
PHILOLOGY.
liike -td, to dig.
?ulti, o fork, a |)olo for setting a canoe.
^umbiii'iitnbii, €imba£imba, liudcs, place
of soiila.
!u>ulni, anger ; angry.
^iiijii -ma, to hug, embrace.
^uru, to enter, to pass, to go in and out ;
(R.), to string flowers on a garland.
iitriifitni, a coat or trowsers, — Eurojican
clothing.
cina, to stoop, bend down, look down.
Siivai, bending down.
E
E, verbal particle (sec Grammar).
E, particle used with numerals.
Ea, if.
£fV, to hitch about, to part gently.
Ei, here. (It is always preceded by a
preposition.)
Ei, yes.
Ema, yes, il is.
Ena, if.
Eo£ira, a mound.
Eomba, innumerable.
Evi -ta, to kill.
Evu, dust.
I
/, in, with, on, upon, by, of, to.
la, iawe, to, yes.
Ika, a fish.
Ikai (Ra.), no, not.
Ike, mallet for beating cloth.
Ikei, this.
Hi or u-ili, to number, read.
IloHo, gloss, glossy.
lya, straight, — or, not much bent.
Iri, iriiri, a fan ; to fan.
Iro, to peep, look slyly.
Isaisa, a word of disapprobation.
Ivi, the name of a tree, the large chestnut.
[In Somusomu, and in many parts of
Vaiiua-lcvii, the /.■ is never pronounced, its
place Iwing supplied by a slight catching of
the breath, as in the Samoan and Hawaiian.]
Ka, sign of the past tense of verbs ; some-
ii.. ?s used with the present.
K<i, and ; with.
Kd, thing, — also, n contraction for kakana,
llxxl, — as, a kenilru kd, their food.
Ka€a, a crack.
Kafi-va, to call, name.
Kafo, to despise.
Kafn, a tree, stick, wood. (See kau.)
Kdi, with.
Kai or kai/a, to tell, say.
Kai, a native of any place, — as, kai-La-
kemlm, a Lakemba man.
Kai, kni-mbia, kai-mlina, kai-vivi, kai-
vatulra, kai-tn, names of diflerent spe-
cies of shell-fish.
Kniktii (Ra), strong.
Kaikainaki-ruwarawa, obedience.
Kailii-vak, a shout, to shout.
Kdkii, a parrot.
Kakavilie, adhesive,
Kakana, food.
Kakasa, not slippery.
Kake, an outer wrapper or cover.
Kakii, to scratch.
Kakua, a word of prohibition, as, forbear !
do not ! (Sec aiia.)
Kida, the declension of the sun.
Katavo, a rat.
Kalnu'a -Ca, to step over.
Kali, a pillow.
Kali -a, to separate, to wean ; to ransom.
Kato, to whistle.
Kalokalo, a star.
Kaloii, a god, divinity, spirit.
Kalomjaia, a blessing.
Kama (O.), hot, to burn.
Kam/xi 'In, to climb.
KamUikatnha, a ladder.
Kambalu, bent.
Ul ' J f J i JL
V I T I A N DICTIONARY.
395
Kam/xisii, torn.
Kaiiih' -la, to iidhcre,
KiDiilirli, to l)ri'!ik, crack, injure.
Kiimhi/iinisii, spri'iul out.
Kambiikiiinbu, mist, misty.
Kambiila (R.), tortoise.
Kamhirctki, to sow.
KnmikamU'<i, sweet, delicious,
Kcimomo, broken.
Kumiiiiiiija, riches, treasure.
Kami, kii/iia, to eat.
Kii/uikanu, to cat ; food.
KdnamlHikiita, a. cannibal.
Kuniiivdmbu, to fast through the day, and
cat only at night.
Kancii/avaviila, a temple.
Kantiu, to run.
KandafUa, to escape, as fishes through the
meshes of a net.
KiDuhivi, to run to bring a |)erson or thing.
Kimr/c, an unri|)c cocoa-nut.
Kamlresu, torn.
KandiktDuU, delicious.
Kaniliijii, rotten.
Kani-mbula, a ransom.
Kanikiiitia, a stone.
I'anusi, saliva; to spit.
Kao, thoughtful, intelligent; to think.
Kara, a long pole by which canoes are
pro|>cllcd; -va, to propel a canoe.
Karakaraiva, green, blue.
Kari -a, to scrape.
Kara, prickly heat.
Kanika, fern.
Karusa, destroyed.
Kdsa, aground, to run aground.
Kasii, branches of the piper methysticum.
Kasana, a. handle.
Kasari, stem of a bunch of cocoa-nuts.
Kasii, crack.
Kasokaso, a species of yam.
KiUiiktita, warm; warmth; fever.
Katakaland, centipede.
Katalait (O.), lirst meal, breakfast.
Kata/oma, to drown.
Katambii, to belch.
Kalumbulit, to give a signal by winking.
KaUisnmi, to chirp.
Kali -a, and lak., to bite.
Kali -viik., to make a vigorous effort.
Katia, to choke ; to burn.
Kato, a basket, box.
Katii, a fathom ; -ma,Xo measure by fathoms.
Kdluiiiba, a d<x)r.
Katiivu, to tear, destroy, burst.
Kail -la, to take, bring.
Kail, (O.), n tree, stick, wood.
Kaiifaviu'avii, a tribute.
Kail kail, a burden.
Kaiikaii mate, to take an oath.
Kaiikaiiica, strength, strong.
Ktiiildii, forest.
Kaiisiisii, a female who has Just been con-
fined.
Kava, a roll of sinnet.
Kant, dust.
Kdviidi, to curse, to utter malignant wishes
or orders ; curses.
Kaica, offspring, posterity.
Kauai, a nmt resembling the potato.
Katrakdtca, a bridge.
Kaicakawa, a. kind of fish.
KawakawaketuiifdUoh, the name of a
month answering nearly to July.
Kaicakatagdve, same as the preceding.
Kawawakdlailai (?), August.
Kawiiwakdlai/ai (qu. levu ?) September.
Kaivamboka, kawai/ali, destruction, extinc-
tion.
Kai/a, to say.
Kayakaija, a saying.
Kayavi, afternoon, evening.
Ac, if (used with the past tense),
AV, kei, particles prefixed to some of the
pronouns.
Krimami, keilou, we. (See Grammar.)
Keiraii, we two.
Kclckele, an anchor, anchorage.
Kelitii, to heap up, to pile.
Keli -a, to dig ; a ditch.
Kciiiii, thy (used of eatables only. See
Grammar.)
Kemiiiiiloii, ye.
Kemiindrau, ye two.
396
PHILOLOGY.
Kemitnu, yc ; (to chiefs), thou.
Keiia, his, hers, its (used like kemii).
Keiuhi, hrli't, kcHdatOi', hctiiluii, wo. (Sec
Ciiainni.ir.)
Kriiiliirii, hitiini^ kriu, we two.
Kenilm, h iiihalmi, their ([lUirnl o( Kcnii).
Kciiilrnii, (irthcm two (dual o( koiii).
Kcnilni, to snore.
Km; to bubl)le, as boilingwntcr or breakers.
Kire -«, to lieij;, iui|ili)re.
Kcrrkcie, to l)eg ; a petition.
AVs«, to prepare native cloth, to statrsj/ or
color it.
Krsakcsa, the board on which the cloth is
stain ped.
Kvsii, the back part of the head.
K<tc (().), a bni;.
Kcvckcve, a present, gift, religious ollering ;
nikkevi kciv, a\nAisc built ovora grave.
Kivou, to go down.
Kcnikrfii, a spear.
A7, to.
Kie, a mat.
Kikila, teased, perplexed.
Kikisi), to limp.
Ki/ii, to know.
Ki/i, ki/iki/i, becoming.
Ki/i, kiri, to rub with the hand.
Kiiiild, to order.
Kiiidiitdla, to 1)0 astonished.
Ki/ii/iiiiic'ii, to break, as day.
Ki/ii, from, by, in possession of, witli.
Kiiii -tti, to pinch, to rattle.
Kiiiofa, to seize by the throat.
Kiri -mi, to hold under the arm.
Kisi, a removal, to remove.
Kiso, lame, lameness ; to limp.
Kitnki/iii, to persevere.
Kiiii, to, tow.irds.
Kii'i, to turn the head, to glance at ; a
look, glance.
Ko, thou.
A'o, a prefix to proper names in the nomi-
native.
Kofo, covetous.
Abe, a prefix to some pronouns (sec Gram-
mar).
Koikoia, he, she, it ; therefore.
Kinriika (Mb.), they two.
Kokom, koiokoro, a wound.
Kokosi, sport, play ; to play.
Ko/(i -til, ti' cut or sever with a siring.
Ko/i, a dog.
Knndii, to eat fish raw.
Ki»i(/idii, to bark, to squeal.
Konnkont), cross, peevish.
Knrn, refuse, leavings,
Knra or knt<i, a preparation of old cocoa-nut.
Kori), a hundred cocoa-nuts.
Hum, a. city, fortress, fortified town.
Kt)So •V(i, to cut, to clip.
Kusoiir/6/<i, to circumcise.
Kotii, the dregs of the tiijgomi (piper met.)
Koli -/(ik., to cut.
Kuto -ra, to place, lay ; to lie, remain,
Kove -«, to snatch, take by force.
Kdvu, clothing ; to clothe,
Kua, to-day,
Kua, n word of prohibition (sec kdkfia).
Ki/e/io, to shake any thing.
Kid, blind.
KiiiUi, the cuttle-fish, sepia,
Kuku, nail ; kiikii-iii-liya, nail of the
finger; kiiku-iii-ydVd, nail of the toe.
Kuku, to hold by the nails,
Kiikiina, to commit suicide.
Ki/kiirii, to drop.
Kukut<iknulrmi, the thumb.
Kukutakaisiiu, the little finger.
Kuld, to circumcise,
Kiilti, kulakulttta, red,
Kuli, skin, bark of tree,
Kiihiiolu, a kind of dove.
Kumliila, to take hold of, cleave to.
Kitnil/Oii, smoke.
Kumhii, the end of n house,
Kiimhti, confusion,
Kiimlmkutnhu, to rise,
Kumtiukiimlm-iii-liya, elbow,
Kii mbukumhu-ni-yava, heel.
Kitmi, beard.
Kii m iniondie^ bea rd less.
Kumuiii, to collect, to gather.
Kuna -ta, to strangle.
i'
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
397
Kmidni, to grunt.
Kuiie, to conceive, l)eget.
Knra, a tree used in dyeing red.
Kurati, reddish.
Kiirc, to slmkc.
Kiirekiirc, to wng the head, to shake.
Kuritju, a yam.
Knro, an earthen pot.
Ktini, kuriikiini, thunder.
Kunikurdii, fliglitiness j Highly, restless.
Kusa, to hasten.
Kiitii, a louse.
Kara, a disordered stomach.
Kiivu, smoke, spray, steam.
Kiivui, to smoke any thing.
Lafa, sail.
Lailtii, little.
Liiiro, land-crab.
Lfiivd, to dash, throw away.
Ldivi, very.
Laka (S.), blind of one eye.
Lakdlukd, inenning, signification.
Ltiko, to go, to proceed ; tako mai, to
come.
Lokbva, to go for, to go to bring any thing.
Lakovataiidnil'tku, to go backward, to
backslide.
Laid, uninhabited, empty.
Lali^, to appear.
Laltiija, capacious.
Ld/iiijii, the outer fence of a house.
Lalakdi, basket or mat on which food is
placed ; hence, a table.
Lali, native drum formed of the hollowed
trunk of a tree.
La/i/ii/im/ii, to strike the thigh with the
hand.
Lambari, storm, strong wind.
Lamlxi -ta, to kill treacherously, to murder.
LainMatnhe-tii-lhja, a sinew of the hand.
Lanr/(ini, to throw.
Lanile, to bo astonished ; astonishment.
Lamli, to choose.
100
iMnrlilamlia, durable.
Laga (O.), go on, keep on, proceed with ;
luya nn ineke, go on with the dancing.
Lapnla))a -tiik., to reprove, admonish.
LtigiUd, to raise.
Ldij^ntagsia, hilmjga, not compact.
Liiijgirc, gravel.
lAiijf'uiijgui, a fit, distemper.
L(iiji, sky, heaven ; rain.
Ldyi/iiJii, to prosier, succeed.
Im^o, a fly.
Ltisa, to be easy, feel at ease.
L(ise, lime, coral.
Lasrldsea, hard, as wood.
Liisika, to appear in siglit.
Lasii (R.), a lie, falsehood; to lie.
Ldlia, concealed.
Ltilia-tiitii, to blow aga'nst ; to shade,
Liitilatia, io encompass.
Ldit-tii, to pierce with a spear.
iMiifoka, pierced.
Ldiikana, eatable.
Laiiltiu, the place of a wound.
Laiita, to injure.
Laittdki, to hurt by a blow with the hand.
Lduvafa, hurt from a blow.
Ltiixi, any article of food eaten with an-
other, as yam with fish, and vice
versa.
Lai-e, larc/ave-ta, to raise.
JUire, /nice, a feather.
Linr-tn-matc, a ceremony performed alter
the death of any one, — as building a
canoe, making a feast, and the like.
Ldvi, to bring fire.
Lavo, money.
Ldvitsuyii, to go tlirough.
Liiiiii, a fishing-net ; an ambush.
Ltiiidki -till, to betray.
LMcalawa, a company of travellers.
Latviilaiia, a spider.
iMUaiidim, a bird worshipped as a god.
Lea, to go (ceremonial).
Lea, a particle of interrogation (ceremonial).
(See lu.)
Lxa -ta, to extract.
Lefa, lost.
**■»<*
398
PHILOLOGY.
-
Lckii, an age, generation.
Leka, lekaleka, short ; brevity ; a dwarf.
Lekiii, almost, nearly.
Lckiitii, land not under cultivation, wood-
land.
Lck, a lascivious dance.
Le/roii, great.
Lctcmi, to see, consider.
LcmUi, a tree bearing a flower which is
worn ns an ornament.
Lciint, the buttocks.
Leijga, to turn back, turn away.
Lent, a brncelet of shell.
Lcsii, to return.
Lria, blind of one eye.
LevaCi, indignant.
Lcriita (M.), ignorant of; not to know.
Ia'IV, to start, to dodge, to flinch.
Lcvii, groat.
Lend, woman, female.
Lend, to see, consider.
Leiiasiisiiv&ki, a betrothed Icmale, a bride.
Leire, a. particle used in numbering persons.
Lewe, flesh.
Leire, the contents of a box ; the inhabi-
tants of a town, country, &c., — as, u
lewe ni Skui/joii, the people of iSiim-
boH ; a leirr ni viiravitra, the inhabi-
tants of the earth.
Leue-kvii, many.
Lciic-lai/ui, few.
Leyareijii, a l)etrothcd female.
Lia -ia, to steal ; to inquire.
Lialia, fiKjlish, absurd; folly.
LiCa, to stir alwut.
Likii, the cincture or dress of women.
Lilili, to swing.
Limn, five.
LiiiKi-saijaviiln, fifly.
Linili, to break or burst ; a thunderclap.
Lit/ii, the arm, hand, finger.
Lipa, narrow.
lAjjarma/dii, having a finger cut ofT.
Liseija, to knock with the lingers.
Lisi, a black pigment ; black native cloth.
Liu, to phii'k out.
Liva, a flash, — lightning ; to flash.
Livi -a, to pour; to swing.
Liiia, to blow, as wind.
IjO, Ido, an ant.
Lo, (|uietly, secretly, suddenly.
1m(I, a cloud ; dirt.
Lnalod, black, dirty.
Loti-iii-niala, the eye-ball.
iMkii, heavy breakers on a reef.
Lokd (S.), an egg.
Litkiltiki, lame, unable to walk.
lj)kitiiij(tm\ a felling axe.
Ijtknioko, a child's pillow.
Lnkomikoiiii, harmless, righteous.
L/iku, lokiivi -Sa, to appoint a time.
IjAo, to fust ; 'Vak., to fast through love
f<)r on absent person.
Lolo, to flow as the tide.
ImIo, a preparation of the pulp of the cocoa-
nut used as a seasoning for puddings.
I^ldkii, to (lie at llie death of another.
Lolnio, a store-house.
Jji/omti, love, affection, kindness, mercy.
Lo/oii, to stoop, Ixiw down (used only of a
woman who has lost her husband).
Ix)m<i, the mind, the centre, the inside;
i lotiia, within.
Lomiiasa (.'), to attend, listen ; to be stable.
Lomukdo, having a thoughtful, intelligent
mind.
Lomahma-ni-mlio>ji, midnight.
Loma-ni-korn, a chief's house.
Loih/ki -ka, to wring, to milk.
Lombi -a, to fold.
Loiiilio, to squeeze out, to express.
ImiiiIxjIohiIio, soil, as moistened sand.
Lomo, to dip.
L^mui'i, a. flood ; a painted face.
homnii, to dip, to inundate.
IjDtno-ni-liivii, sunk.
Loija, a Ix'dslead, a mat, — the elevated dais
on which tlicy sleep ; a piece of ground
on which any thing is planted ; a loga
uvi, a yam bed ; a loija mbili, a bed
of the arum.
i.oi)«, a sign of the plural.
Loijga, n club.
Lopgi, the inner part of a houie.
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
399
Loua, to pour out, to empty.
Lovo, loroyd, a fiirnncc, n nnlivo oven.
Lin'oiia (S.), to bury.
Lovuii, a pit, n liole (illpd with wnter.
Lu or li, n pnrtido of iiiterrogntion, — as,
(I fava Id ? what ia it ? or a cava li.
Lud, a pit.
Lalua, to vntnil (qu. lulua ?)
Liikii, tlio mucus of the nose.
Litkii, to sciut'ozo.
Liilii, nil owl.
Lii/iilii, to drop, ns the seeds of a plant.
Liima, shame ; ashamed.
Ltiiiii, a soo-wet^l.
Liimuliimii, to anoint.
Lilt II, to fall, drop.
LiitiiHiIrd, an abortion.
Liiva -ta, to strip, take ofT.
Lmui/iii'ii, old sinnel, mat.
Luraliivtiki, to exclmngc,
Liiviii/iimlif, naked.
Liivr, a child, a boy or girl.
Liivr, n kind of pii>con.
Liivr ■<(, to breed, lo increase.
LuiTiiii/nli, or liive-tii-iUi; fatherless; an
outcast.
Luvii, to sink.
M
Ma, this, here.
Ma, to {*• ignorant of.
Ma, to give.
Md, ashamed.
MiKiica (.S.), old.
Ma(tt, empty.
Mat'idii, expanded, intelligent, open, clear.
Mucima, space l)etwecn, interstice.
Miit'e, soli ; the husk of fruit.
MaMr, finished.
Maccndru, hiccough.
Mafii, sullicieiit ; not hungry, full ; abun-
dance, fullness.
ilf«j, from ; hither.
Miii (for solia-mai), give me, give here.
Makalii'ata, bright ; brightness.
Miikari, clear (as water), lucid; clearness.
IMiikaiKi, old.
Make, a noise, lo make o noise.
Makcrev&ki (U.), harmonious, well.ar-
rnnged.
Miiko, lo anoint or smear the body.
Makiimhii, a grandchild.
Makiifii, well done, |)erformed with energy.
Makiitii, lo desire to do any thing properly.
Mtilii, uWnU) thing, a hair; 7nala ni iilii,
hair of Ihe head.
Ma/di, lo scorch, scorched.
Maluku mlrii, speaking in a low tone.
Ma/ama/ii, a mote, chip, — shavings.
Maliniialnuii, early in the morning.
Malanilot'i, a letter (from mala, ni, and
tiki, to write).
Malaija, a fan made of sinnet; the tail of a
P'K-
Mahnja, lo preach.
Malcka, palatable, pleasing to the taste.
Mnliiiinii, a smile ; lo smile.
Mall), native cloth colored.
MiiIdIo, (lying-fish.
i1/(//iOT, until ; shortly, presently; gently.
Malitvialii, shade, shady.
Malumahhjii, weakness, lowliness ; weak,
defeated.
Maliiitiii, sort, elastic.
Malinjii, a club.
Mama, lo chew ; to steam.
MaiiHi, light, not heavy.
Mania, a ring.
Jifamiu'ii, dry, empty.
Mdiiiiiloki, a joint.
Mamafiiifa, trade-winds.
Mamaidii, happy ; happiness.
Mamari, thin; thinness.
Mainatiui, old.
Mai/ii, a species of banana.
Mamhii, the breast, bosom, chest.
Mamhiilua, a full-grown |)crson.
Maim, a miracle.
Maiiii, a salt-wnter crab.
Mandii, i manila, iM'fore, in front; formerly.
Manila, manilamanila -na and -tak., to
precede, go before, go forward.
r i
; f
5 1
400
PHILOLOGY.
MAndende, spread, open.
Mamha! (cxclain.) good ! well done!
il/nWra, old, worn (ns n garment), wilhcreil.
Manilrui, u kind of food innde of vegclobles
buried in the earth and left to ferment.
Manr/ni/r, a sacrifice ; -tak., to sacrifice.
Miliii/iia, shyness, shame ; ashamed.
Miiiiid (S.), to think.
MiDiiimo/iu, a fowl ; an animal of any
kind.
Mtimiitinnii, a streamer, n pennant.
Miniifa (Ml).), no, not.
MiDjiidi, the dry leaves with which the
niaiiilrai is covered in the pit.
MaijiiiUDji, sinnet braided from the fibres
of the cocoa-nut husk.
Miitjiti, cooked food, provisions for a feast.
Mar)0, to wither (said of yams) ; dry,
withered.
3Tiiopi), wise.
Mara, burying-place, grave.
Mara -ta, to seize, attack (said of a disease).
Maraiiia, a lady, a female chief.
Mardii, happy.
Mardvii, calm, still, no wind.
Maromaro, fearless.
Manii, leprosy, leprous.
3Tnsn, restless, on account of heat.
Mnsaldi, corrupt, putrid.
Miisd/o, envy, envious.
Masi, native cloth ; the tree of whose bark
it is made (morus papyrifera).
Mdiiti, to rub.
Masima, salt.
MasumasH, prayer, to pray.
Mala, eye, face, presence ; point, edge.
MalaCia (S.), blind.
Matai, a workman, artisan, carpenter.
MaJaiiii, first.
]\Ialainivtui, first fruits.
Malaka, day-break.
Matakii, fatigued, troubled.
Matakui, blindness, blind.
MalalaUai, having a small point.
Matiddii, pretty, neat, rich.
Malalaji, a wedge.
Miduleua, lascivious.
Mtitamafdka, dawn, break of day.
Malandioko, blind.
Malanifmie, a pearl.
Ma/nnikiUoii, red.
MataiiikoCo, covetous.
Mataniknro, gate of a fortress.
Mataiiisiifii, a nipple.
Mata/iiraiiua, a councillor, a messenger, a
herold.
MaUuiiiiai, a spring of water,
Malaijnali, a fiimily.
Matasela, blind, blindness.
Matasrie, a snare.
Matasoso, covetousness.
Matiitiri, to sound.
Matnta, to become strong (said of the
wind).
Matalta, poverty, misery j poor, indigent.
Mataii, right, dexter.
Mutaii, an axe.
Molaundiitii, a gouge, a chisel.
Matavd, cut.
Mataviiki, a disease.
Miitaviira, n landing-pluco.
Mate, dead, to die ; death ; sickness.
Matini, intoxicated.
Mali, \o ebb.
Matia, shallow water.
Matin, to fall in, as the earth into a well
or pit.
Matua, old ; strongly, vigorously.
Mail, firm, constant.
Muiimaii, fatigue, trouble.
Maiimi, mountain.
Mam, convalescent.
Martxi, to '•ut, injure.
Mavoiita, to break.
Mavuike, earthquake ; name of the wife of
the god Ndcijei.
Mbd, a branch ; -tia (S.), to branch.
M/m, a fence.
M/>d, to quarrel.
M/)d -tuk., to deny.
M/xifa, disease, sickness ; sick.
MlxiCa, a bait ; -na, to bait, entice, cheat.
Mlmimlxiia, a maggot.
Mbaketva, the pilot-fish.
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
401
Mliaki, pcrhnps.
Mlxikold, tiilmkola, the corpse of an enemy
sluiii in war ; used, also, as a conteinj)-
tuouH epithet.
Mlutln, the male tortoise.
MlHilumlxUa, hair-pricjier.
MtxildVd, inlHiliuiihilavu, long ; length.
M/xi/iiirii, a coarse, strong mat.
Mluiliiva, \'itian name of separnio stale (?).
MIxiU; (IcHlli ; to die (crrcnionial).
MIxi/r, a spear.
M/xi/i-u, to knciid, to rnb.
]\I India, foolish.
MUi/dIo, name of a certain sen-worm.
MUiloln-litiliii, n. month nearly corrcs|)ond-
ing to our (VtoUr.
MIxi/olo-lcvii, iNoveiiibcr.
MIxilii, the cheek.
MIxiiiilxi/dvii, lung (see M/xi/iivu).
Al/idiii/iiiiiDitiiii, (piarrelsonie.
jMlxiiiiliiini, to pillage, cut.
MIxmi .11, to press down.
Mlxii/i, l()rs(H)th.
MlHiiavi, the uninhabited part of the sea-
shore.
Mlxiri-iii-savii, a precipice.
M/xisfiiKi, a branch.
Mlxisiiiiilxisinja, branchy.
MlxisiDjUyix crossway (from inhusu)jn,i,of,
and i'a, four).
Mlxisii, to break, tear.
Mlxisnmlxisdka, broken, torn.
Mlxilnmlxtld, cold.
Mlniti, tiiolli ; edge.
MUtti (U.), an inferior ally, a dependent
town.
M/x(tikiili/i, a precipice.
Mlxiliniikii, an ornament made of the
teeth of fish.
MIxitinimaijiiiunji, a. plait of sinnet.
Mlxitiiiiiiai, verge or Ijank of a river or
well.
MIxitin iinikolo, wayside.
M/xiit, the name of a tree.
AI/xiii, very.
Mlxiiisnio (().), to ask pardon.
Mbawa, a banana.
101
Mhea (S.), Imbo.
Mliiiimliianiiiiala (S.), eye-bull,
Al/xri, irreverent, irn.'verence.
IMIx'kn, perhaps,
Mlicleinlx'leidiiiliaka (R.), lips,
MUli, to grow, as leaves.
MMo, a crane (bird).
IMIiciiaiuliena, a marriage.
M/x'iiit, rubbish, the refuse of food.
M/nra, slow, slowly.
jMU-iai, almost.
JMUrr, the foot or leg.
HJIiCiC, impudent, wicked, [lerversc, un-
willing.
Mlxiv, priest.
Mljtto (Uu.), house.
JMIx-ua, ten bunches of bananas.
M/x'iraiii/icirii, a cloud.
M/ii, ten tortoises.
MhitUa, loathsome; name of a disease.
M/iiiiii, a wave.
MliUi, (lesh.
J\l/iik(), a disease.
Mliild, to throw.
JMhili -nil, to drive or push.
jMliiliijiiii, loose, as earth that has Ijeen
(lug.
Mhiln, a dish, a cup.
Mhimlii, heavy; heaviness.
Mliiiii -«, to heap up, to pile.
I\l/iiii, to spring.
i\lliit(i -hik., to throw down, to dash.
M/iilii •ink., to throw down when fatigued.
JWiili, a !)ed of arum-roots.
Mldtii, bainlmo.
M/iitiuiUmji, bamboo flute.
J\l/iiii -til, to throw away, abandon.
m/iij, a sore or boil.
31/iu, fdires of the cocoa-nut husk.
ilfto -kd, to know, to tind, meet with.
JMIjokitla {see m/xiko/a).
MlK)la, a hundred canoes.
Mtxild (or vihiild) ten fishes.
MU>ln, to cut, divide, draw apart.
MMd, leaf of a cocoa-nut tree plaited for
thatching.
MMc, to challenge.
\'t
\\\
408
P H I I, O L () O V.
Mfm/n -JK/, lo throw stnnrs or sticks.
MUJoiiiIkiIii, till' lop (>(' tlio small house in
II cniioc.
Mhmih) -ka, to sqiio'zc.
MUwitiDlii, rot), ruddy (snid of the sky, or
n IHTsiin's skill).
MI>o}iihiilii, a sln\ <■ ; slavery.
Minimi, smi'll, odor.
J\l/i>iii, night ; inim/'Otji, lust night.
miK/ijiiiilioiji, Miorninj;; to-morrow.
ISllioijk'dhii, to extinguish.
MlK>i)i(tiKinii, to Ik' JKiiightod.
M/ion.ii, linger, angry.
lil/ii/ifidi, unkind, ill-natured.
Al/'/ri/i, inalignnnt wishes or orders.
J\l/i'ji'), to paint ; paint ; (Kipper.
M/ioro, to refuse ; not lo give.
Mliorn.$nki)i(i, to break small {?).
MIkisc, to eonsult ; a consultation.
M/msi, a law.
M/nis'/ -kd, lo nil), to knead.
M/aiso -Ink. and -rak., lo rub, to break
small.
Mliola, to ap|K)rtion.
Mfiotn, to pursue.
M/niic, to n'pair an old canoe.
Mlioln, a Ix'ast ; a frog.
MlK>lii-)ii-liivit, native oven.
j\I/>o/oiiii, lx)ll<ini of a pot.
Mliolurata, crown of the head.
MIm, a young C(K?oii-nul.
Mlif, (R.), a grandfather.
M/iiKi, an uninhabited place.
Mfiutivd, short-sighted, da/zlcd.
M/mr'i, wet ; moisture.
Mliut'ii, the loins.
MInii, tail.
Mhiiia, to come to land ; to knot.
Mfiiiikiti, a variety of the hog.
Mliitkii, lire; firewood, fuel; -na, to add
fuel to a fire.
M/itiki/e, (iregnant ; pregnancy.
M/iukitr-vatii, dropsy.
Mhiikii, two cocoa-nuts.
Mliiikii, m/ii'ikui, a knot ; to knot.
Mhukiilamlxi, to kill treacherously.
Mbitla, life, to live.
Mlmliise, cold food.
Mliiili .11, to appoint a king.
M/m/iii, to heap up ; lo make n peace.
MIihUihIiiiU, a least made for a king at his
inauguration.
ISUiiili, the ovula-sliell (or m/iitli).
Mliiilii -Id, lo bury.
MIiiiIiiiiiIiiiIk, lo bury ; thai which covers
or buries any thing.
Mhiiliiinliiilii, n poace-oirering ; to present
a peiice-otl'ering.
Mhiilinnhiihi, a species of banana; also, a
small shark,
IWtiiiiiliii, lo devour with cogerness.
Mhiiiiiliii/iii, or ni hum/ill /I III, an oath; to
make oath.
Mbiimhiila, scorched.
M/)ii7ir/i, a bunann.
Mliniimi, itihininiiihiino, perspiration ; lo
[H-rspire.
Mhiire, ten clubs.
Mliiire, a temple, a council-house, public
house of reception.
Mhiiri, an ant-hill.
Mhiirinjo, a black cockroach.
Mhitni, ten cocoa-nuts.
I\I/>iisa (S.), fire. (See mlmka.)
Mliiisii, a plain ; an uninhabited place,
{mhiia.)
MliiisiDiiliiisana, same as aliovc.
Mhiisi, fetid.
IMIiiilii, sufiiciently iKiiled or cooked.
Ulliiitiialai (().), roasting a man whole.
Mliiitaiiihiitii, food and pro|ierty given as
compensation to the carpenter who is
building a canoe.
Mhiitumliiila, the thigh.
MhiilunihuUio (S.), a thief; lo steal.
jMhiilii, the centre, midst.
Mhiitu, mhiitomliiifO, dark ; darkness.
Mhiitii, a marriage ceremony in which
properly is exchanged by the friends
of the bride and bridegroom.
Mliiitu -ka, to stamp.
Mi, lo; that, so that (sign of the subjunc-
tive).
Mia, bitter (used only of yams.)
1
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
403
Mm, to liikr cnri" of rhililri'ii.
Mit(t (L.), II ihirin, nlliiir; (U.), an ciiemy.
Mikr, xoiijr mill (laiioi'.
Mili\ tlic liiiil |iiirl (pI'ii (jikmI lliiiij^.
Mrlriiif/iili), liriiwii; liri)«iiinjss.
J\I)/im, t(i sirvf.
Miiic (Mil.), Innijiip.
Mum, thy (oI'drinkalilpN).
Mriniiuihii, your (pliiriil iil' nii mil).
Miiiiiinilrnii, ymir (diml n\' iiiemu).
Minn, his (like iiintiii).
Miiiiltii, minihiiii, ilirir (|)lurnl and dual).
Mfuri, llir (used liclbrc |irii|KT names and
intcrrogiitivn prniKnins),
Ml, miiiKf'ro.
Mil;iiiiikiii, swill ; swilliipsa.
Milii, to .scratch.
Milaiiiilii, (liscasod (coroni.)
MiMi), healthy, oily, shining with oil.
Alini -ka, to s(|ui'ir/c.
Mini, to sow seed.
Mill, to rain.
Miiiinin, to drizzle.
MiMi, the lip or end oCany thing.
Mmild, a variety of the yum.
Mix'r, to sleep ; sleep.
Mik'rhitu, to sleep soundly.
Miiirmnfe, a lied, bedstead.
Mot'eiiiofe-yiitiili, sleep.
Mokii (K.), necklace of shells.
Moko, a liiuird.
Mnkoiiioko, neckliand of a chief.
Mukii .ta ((!.), to kill.
Molt, a shaddiK'k, a lemon.
Moiiio, to break a co<:oa-nut.
Momoijgiliijgi/i, round, roundness.
Mumlre -la, to tease.
Moiioka, to scjiieeze, shrivel.
Monomutio, to mend.
Mnijfie, to Ix- restless, to kick, to struggle.
Moijficmoijiie, restless.
Moijiiimoijgi/i, round or oval.
Moijgiiiiiuygoiia, same as above.
Moiigo, to lie down, — (a word of anger).
Mosamosd, ravenous.
Molo, s|K!ar.
Motic -ka, to beat, punish.
Mii/ii ■Ink,, to boat, moke havoc.
Miili'ikili, a worm.
MdiiiiiiiiiIii, niiUnmoto, n ball j round.
Moiiit, ih(! brain.
Mil, thy (affixed to nouns).
Miiiiiiiiiiiii/ti, prow of a cnnoe.
Miiaiiiiiiii, stern of a caiioc.
Miimiinit, talkative.
Miniihe, n gentle breeze; to blow gently.
Miiiiilii -kit, to cut (as a stick or linger).
Miiiia or miiiiin, to speak ; u word, Ian-
giiage.
Mini, lieliind, to follow.
Miirinuiri, to follow.
Mum, watery (used of the orum n ol).
MiisH -ka, to cut, break.
Miisii, mouth.
Miisiimiisu, sullen, sulky.
N
Nil, sign of the future.
Sii, art., the (same as a).
A'li, a word used by children to their mother-
Kiiifii, when.
Ntikita, to expect, to do any thing one's
self(?).
Namakit, to chew.
Numn, the spoce between the reef and the
shore.
Niimii, musquito.
Nana, purulent matter.
N'tiKMi (Mb.) yesterday.
Niisiiira, to knock with the fingers.
Nali, tiaimti, to watch, to be vigilant.
Naiva, to (loat.
iVf/ (rrt//«, ««/irtjm(/a, to attend , to remember.
Nail, a word used by children to their
grandmother.
Nuii-tuilai (O.), aunt by the mother's side.
Nilji, e.Ncrements.
NiliUi, to nurse.
NildfoniMcvii, a coward ; cowardly.
Ndai, a lie; -na, to lie.
Nrlaimhiri, a snare, a trap ; to ensnare.
Ndaindai, false.
404
Pll 1 1. (> I, Oil y.
Sdiiimliii, nn uninhnlHird plnco. '
Xddiiiiliii (\\h.), lo.iliiy i (H.) liyo-nnil-byo,
prpirnily.
Niliikti, lest.
^iluk<ti, II Ixiw,
Hdtikili, In liill |)nmlrii(c.
yddkijii, III ii|ii'ii lliu mouth ; to gapo,
)l(;il|lC.
Siliikii, till' Iwick.
X'/ii/iiina, to giijH', ngii|>c.
Niliilinjii, to o|K'ii.
Si/ii/f, II rii|K'.
Sitii/i, tell iMllllr.rwIirs.
Xihilnjd, the car.
Ai/ii/iijiitit/i, ticiil'.
NiUtlii, iiruiii I'siMik'iitiim.
A(/<t/i)iiio, 8unk, ilrowiifil.
Ai/dm/itiiolii, iiimlile to wolk,
A</(iiii(/i, Id liijnt.
i\'t/iiiiiii, nice.
Ai/aniu, iiiliiiiiiiiKliimii, red.
AiltiHtln^ soil,
Kiltiitdiivui, (li.-iiilx'tlii'iit, lazy.
Adiioiin, wooden dish.
Ai/tiiimjd, to look steiidily.
Adiiiii, a loiioii lor thi^ eyes.
Add i/i/iidd iiii, II hiilllu.
Addid, iidd/iddi'ii, sli|)|iery.
Addii, II (lisli,
Addro, to prohibit, prevent j prohiliition.
Adiiid, a rusliiiin sound.
Adiiii/d, sort (used only ol" fixid).
Adiiliivd, u eowiird, cowardly.
Adaiu lo have aliilily to do, or to Ix) in tho
hiihit ol'duiiii; any thing.
Adaii, n parly of workmen.
iVf/(i// .//(I, to coimnit Ibrnicatiun or adul-
tery.
Admit II tjd, lascivious.
Addit/iud, tidduldijuiie, to commit adul-
tery.
Allured, liable to injury.
Adciiildto, a virgin.
Adiiunddu(ii, i>erishable.
Addiisiini, a famine.
Adauve, a female cousin.
Adduvere, to tempt ; temptation.
Adiiiiirrr, alien,
Aditi'r, to (low.
AdiitTd, comiuered.
Addtrtii (().), passage, chnnnol, atrnit.
AdiiiDiidi, Mr, idleness.
Addiiii, the conch-sliell.
A'/"ii//, a pit or well.
Adiiini, name of ii tree, and its Truit.
Adiiiidi, uiiiiiarrled.
Adr, the heart of a In-e.
•V'A', excrement (of inferior animals).
Adi'i, firm, hard, solid,
Adi/d, the summit or top of any thing.
Adnidi; lo delay i a long time ; constant.
Ad'iidr, u crab.
Adiiidi .ill, to sprt'iid.
Aili'iT .11, to wash, cleanse.
Adiint ■id, to inlect.
Adid, a handle,
Adiiiii, true.
Adiiia -III, to Ix'licvo,
Adiiji, to ch(M)se,
AdiMi, to dart.
iV/ii/, iidului, lo flow.
Adtii, ten land-crahs.
iV/'(/, name of a tree,
Adiiiddildi, the month of April.
Adid-li-ru, \\w month of May.
Adiikii, the lop of a house.
Adokiii, to reverence.
AdoKiii, to mi.x.
j.,'iM:o, n stick used as a spado; to dig
with a slick.
Adiili- (Mb.), curly, untimely, too soon.
Adii/i), a float or stick for swimming upon,
Adiimi, to sip, to suck.
Adiiiiio, the voice ; the neck.
Adniiio -lid, to desire, to wish.
Adiiiii/ii, to stretch out the hand.
Ai/o/idiiiiii, correct, upright,
Adijiiiiiidi/ija, absurd, absurdity.
Adiiijo, the mangrove tree.
Adiiid, entrails. ^
Adoii, ye.
Adod, udodndoii, bold, courageous.
Adnri -«, to break or cut bread, yams, &c.
Adovu, sugar-cane.
V I T I A N D I C 1' t O N A R V.
405
Xi/iij/ii, tlir lirnrl of n IriT.
jNiliii, llii'ir ^iilUxi'd Id iiiiutiN).
KilrA, IiIcmhI.
yi/iil, n IrnC,
yihtikii (Ml).), till; iiioiith.
•A7//(/A(/(, riiti|i(ii(',troul)U'i liilitjiii'il, troul)lr(l,
i'iilinkiiiiiiiiliinii), ccivutiiiis, ill-imturcd,
Xihdkiiii, riibU'd nil'.
Xi/iii/it, iiriii.
Ai/iiili •<!, to oriiali, |in^8ii duwn, mnku oven.
Ai/iiimiisil, oriisluMl, liriiiMiHl.
yihiiiiKKi, li> throw down,
Niliiiiin -III, to hi|i, lick.
I\'i/irliii/i<l, rncnms, tcj iiionatruotu.
Ai/niiii/i(ti'ii<it, poor.
Ntlraiiiii/ii (M.), Imir.
Xitriini), n liike.
Ailniiiii, insidi' of tin.' inoiitli,
iVi/iiiini, swcni.
AdiAliiinliu (sncrcd blood), the lirat-born
of II chii'l'.
Nilialoii, their (n siidix).
Nilrau, of tin 111 two (sutlix).
Aclniii, hiiMiInd,
Xi/riiii, hiliiiitnilidii, tt lenf.
Ni/i(iiiiii/i(iiik(i, the surluco ofwnter.
Nilruvii, iishe.s.
AtliiiiiiiiilniviKi, (Inst, ashes; |)(H)r.
Ndre, firtii.
Adie -Id, to pull, stretch.
Adrrkr, hold or cidiiii of i\ vcuol ; inside of
ii ciinoe ; hole in the earth in which
food is cooked.
Atliikiii, not (|uite full.
A(/ie/v ((X), frog.
Adrili, blunt.
Adiiiiilic, diU'icidt ; dillieulty.
Adiiiidrc, lnughter; -rnk., to laugh, to
deride.
Aifirijd, the heart of a tree.
Ai/iTsu/id/Tsii, to teiir ; torn.
Adieic, to pineh.
Adreii, ri|K', riiieness.
Adfiue, to carry on the back.
Adri, pushed.
Adri, holothuria, bicho da mar.
Adrika, cold.
103
Adrimui, to relniund.
Adiiiidri, to swell, swr'lling.
Ai/iiiji •III, to drive ; erooki'ii.
Adrini, n thief j to steal.
Adriii, a bud.
Sdiiikd, raw.
i\di<ikiiiidii)kii, green, as wood.
Admiiiitiidiumim, ri'il, yellow.
Aiiroitm, to deseend, as the sun ; 1» tiiint,
Adriinilru, to (low,
Adiiiiidro/iiiii, a raiiilKjw,
Adiini (.S.), lo run.
Ailrtifini or iidrintliiii, a banner.
Admto, slow.
A/niii, a doMbie-enno"' ; twins.
Adni/uii, name of u disease.
Adniimi, foolish.
Aitiinju •!/it, to strip olf the Imrk of a tree.
Adniiiii -t'li, to sing in a low tone of voice.
Ai/iiidniiiii, c'orrupt, fetid (said offish).
Ad/imiii, to tear.
AdiKi, one.
Ailiiii (S.), a bone,
AdiiiiiLikiiliiko, to separate.
Ailiiiiisi -III, to .scatter.
Adiiiii/iiiiiiii, to ransom.
Ailut'i, ikIiih, tt finger, to point with the
finger.
Adiii, a club.
Ai/iikii, dirty.
Adii/riii/ir/rvic'i, awkward.
Ailidciiii, the Ixittoiu of a ladder.
Adii/i, deaf.
Adii/ii, t(!ased out of patience.
Aditm/iK, to |K'ep slyly,
Adiimii 'kd, to push up.
Adiimi, an eel.
Adiiiiilii, ft corner.
Adiindii, deaf.
Adinjii, a hole in n tree.
Adii\ja, to moan.
Adiiijit (Mb.), one.
Adinjundinjua, black, dirty color.
A(/nri, to sit.
Adiiru, till,' knee, elbow; a post.
Adiiriiiidi/ni, arm.
Aduvii, bamboo eane.
406
PHILOLOGY.
Nthivii, a vine with whose bark fish arc
intoxicated.
Xei, this.
yene -to, to punish ; to be angry ; vexed.
?ti, a particle which precedes adverbs of
time.
yikua, to-day.
Ximti, a scoop for baling water; -ta, to
bnlc.
Xi nibo^imlioiji, to-morrow.
Xl/ii/ti, to tremble, tremor.
Xinora, to peep.
Xilu, to obtain fire by friction.
Xiit, cocon-nut.
Xiuidla, a whistle.
Xo -("a, to put, or place ; to remain, be
fixed in a place.
Xoka, to anchor ; tiokunoka, an anchor.
Xoya, to place.
Xotoiioto, idle, disobedient.
Xovo, to skulk about for food.
Xovo-tii-yara, a footstool.
Xi), you or thou (see kcmunu).
Xiiilet'ii (O.), to forget.
Xiiiniii, easy, quiet.
Xiikii, sand ; gunpowder.
Xiniibii, deep, an abyss.
Xiinuiiiiimu, worship.
XiiitO, to dip, plunge (as the head in water).
XuHuma (O.), to think of, think about,
remember.
XiDjm, the name of a fish.
Xuj/s'i/i'ildi, December, nwjgalcvu, Janu-
ary.
B
Pa, only.
/7rt, a wild duck.
Uacaiyt'-ii, the rigging of a canoe.
na('<nj(Uii, entrails.
Hai, indolent.
Ddltdii, durable.
nuluiytid, capacious, roomy.
Jlakiyilc, side of the head.
llidu, dumb, dumbness, silence.
nant/e, gayanr/e, to walk about, to stroll.
IhiHt/i, uncle.
IlaiuUna, uncle by mother's side.
niai/tro, the string of the tongue.
I1d))(i, bitter, bitterness.
IJaiiiir/a, to look steadily.
llinir, ount ; also, a sister or brother.
Ham, hunger, desire ; -va, to hunger, lust
for.
lldsau, a reed, an arrow ; shot.
Thisuesiie, a whirlwind.
Hata, sharp.
Uata, a word used in addressing a heathen
deity.
Hata, a snake.
Hato -vuk., to omit the letter k in sjxiaking,
as in the dialect of Somusomu.
Until, a thick glazed sort of native cloth.
natiimhiri, l)ed-curtain.
rhiHue, work (a Tonga word).
Uavinjnvii, a coward.
TJtijrh; to sing (used of one only).
ni'leijek, loose (said of the teeth).
Dgd, provision for a journey or any work.
Hgn, hard.
Hgd, the shell of a shell-fish.
Tlgn/oija, to make a vigorous effort.
Tlgai, ijgci, lately, just now, then.
rigaku, a crab.
Dgakito, a valley.
ngii/iil<i, an empty shell.
Ugali, subject ; a tributary slate.
Pgnlitjgnli, cotton.
ngnliijgalia, dirty.
llga/iso, coal.
Ilgalo, to swim.
Hg'Diii -ta, to hold between the legs; to
crush.
rtgnmu, scissors, nip|)ers ; -tii, to cut.
riganiin/iilu, a slii'll, nut-shell.
Hgdtjga, ImiMiicss, audacity ; bold, brave,
victorious.
rignifgn, thinness.
Hginigi: -ra, to seek, look for.
r)ga>jg(0(j, finger; ijgaygnln ni avn, toe;
>)g(n)palo-levu, thumb ; ygatjgiUo-sau
little linger.
M'
( tfi
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
407
Bfiiira, a hole, hollow, cave, den.
rigiirii -va, (o serve.
Ugarandonu, opposite.
Illiiimmai, to front, face.
Ili;(irunii(fu, nostril.
Ugariilci, iHjtweoii the legs.
nganiva, to think about.
ngdravidomai, to sit silent.
Ugasi, to crawl.
Hgasi, old.
IJgitsi -ral;., to prune, strip olT.
Hgdta, enclosed.
Hgiito, an armlet, bracelet, ornament for
the wrist.
rigiitu (Rn.), firo.
llgatu, lower part of the abdomen and
upper part of the thigh.
Ilgatn -hik., to cultivate the ground.
Tigdii, iny or mine (used of food only).
Ilgdva, a. spade.
llgin<i, a land-cnib.
Ugai'oka, or ijgavokavoht, a scull.
ngciim, fire; ti kindle.
Ilgei (O.), mother.
ngC(r{\Ui.),a\\.
TJgi/f, earth, soil.
T}gfki)ge/eifa, filthincss.
ngi/i>, limping,
Hgem (Mb.), to fall and be scattered about,
as leaves.
Ugei-e (O.), ancle.
Ilgctrtjsete ni lit/a, palm of the hand.
Tigilojgele ni avti, sole of the foot.
Ugfit, a (.'oiub; -Ui, to comb.
llgcva, to scrape up earth.
rtgid -ta, to totloo,
Ugiiiiva, a kind offish.
llgihiiso, charcoal.
rJgiAnsotjgiiwn, hot cinders.
Hgi/i -a, ti) rub with the hand.
ngimaijgimn (S,), all.
I7gii)gi, cotton ; to roll.
rigi>)go, narrow.
llgiii, to ring, to drum, to knock.
U git II, shallow water.
ligiini, a (lint.
ngi), this.
NgO (Ra.), a pig.
Hgo/i, fish ; to fish.
Ilgnluii, a shout ; to shout.
ligom/idaii, a fisherman.
Hgori, that.
TIgori) .yii, to exclaim ; exclamation.
Ilgorn, to take away.
Tigoit, my, mine.
ngii, my, mine (sutTix).
llgua -Oi, to wi|ie,
rtgitaygiia, a towel,
Ilgumi, to clinch.
Tigiimu, red |)aint.
Ilgiwiinjgumii, a shell,
Hginjgit -va, to hold in the hand.
Hgiiri-ni-lasinca, the ancle.
rigi/rit -til, to cat any thing unrijic.
llgusa, to wipe.
Hi, the bristle of a hog; a kind of grass.
Til, to shout.
Hole, to turn the head,
//oj)0, a black cockroach,
IJoiiit, a word of commendation,
none, a child, a son or daughter.
IloiiCdkird, virginity.
IJono, a young cocoa-nut.
Uti, earnest, energetic,
Ih'niuitiui, earnest, vigorous.
Uimdit, or yutii -va, to cut off.
Ihinii (S.), to drink, (Sec mm).
J.Hisii, the mouth.
o
<), a cloud.
O, an interjection of surprise.
Odia, to read, count.
Ofo, covetous.
Ot'oia, to enclose in a net.
O'ta (S.), he, she, or it.
Oi, is it ?
Oik .' alas !
Okd, lo read, reckon.
0/,o, okooko, to kindle o fire, to burn.
0!d, to spring u[), as a breeze.
Ok, to squeal.
il
408
PHILOLOGY.
Olo, to tie up, cover.
Oh (O.), soul, spirit, shadow. (See alo.)
O/oni, tied up, bundled up,
Oinlxt (L.), to full prostrate; (S.), to full
from nn eminence.
Omhe (Mb.), to cover, fold over. (See
unibe.)
Omim, to clap the hands.
Oiiia, lomo, tJ clip.
Omu, ominuloii, oiuimdran, o»iiini(, oiin,
ondra, onilraii, possessive pronouns.
(See Grammar.)
One, to mend a net.
Ono, six.
Onostipavu/ii , sixty.
Gija, oijdoya, engaged, occupied ; envploy-
ment, occupation.
Ojjo (S.), to fall prostrate.
Qj/go, to clasp the hand out of respect.
Ogo/ia, troublo<l, adlictcd.
Owi, a word of respect used to a chief.
Ora, to choke, sulTocate.
Oio, to bind ; a girdle, zone.
Oro, orovata, a bundle,
Orooro, a bandage, cord.
Oroni, soft (applied to sand).
Ose, lamentation.
Oif, to adopt.
Oso, to bark.
Oso, osooso, narrow.
Oil, done, fuiishod.
Oto, to lie upon.
Ouiiilieva, to kindle, shine. (See aundrc.)
Ova, to swim.
Ovea, to take by force.
Oviovi, cloak, blanket, any covering (or
the shoulders (cercm.)
Ovo, lamentation ; to lament.
R
Ra, they.
Ri, down, below. ■
Rai -fa, to behold, look, beware; a look.
Raisaia, blind.
RiiM, to spread out to dry.
lltikoruko, reverence.
Ramarania, light.
lidmlia, broad ; breadth.
Ramhaildi (qu. ramlxdailai?) narrow.
Ramlndcvu, broad, wide.
R(iml>a-7ii-vava [jtapii] a board.
Raiiibasamlia, flatness.
R<nid>c -til, to kick with the toe.
R(im/m, a sling.
RiiDiliosiu, deceit.
Rumbiiya, to cover over.
Raniiisu, split.
Raiidi, miiandi, queen.
RinjiidSd, dryness.
Rdrd, n plain, a level space; a public
square ; the deck of a oanoc.
Rdrd, to warm one's self at the fire.
Ramlcvu, a meeting for singing.
Rdrdlcvu, a plain.
Ranimii, light.
Rtisd, greatness.
Raloii, they.
Ratii, a respectful appellation, used in the
vocative singular, equivalent to " sir,"
or " my lord ;" it is sometimes placed
before the names of chiels, as, Ratu
Sent, Lord Seru.
Riiu, they two.
Ran, the thatch of a house.
Ran -ta, to fit.
Runku, watery (said of yams).
Rami, a kind of yam.
Ravamva (S.), a stick used as a substitute
for a spado.
Ravcndi, crack ; broken, cracked.
Raioija, to boil.
Ravu, to kill.
Ravuiav:/, to kill ; a murderer.
Rawa, to possess, obtain.
Raxvaraua, easy.
Raicdiaka (Mb.), to succeed in doing any
thing.
Re or ri, a particle suffixed to words,— n
sort of enclitic.
Reki, rrnki, joy ; to rejoice.
Rcmoremo, to blink.
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
409
Rcpge, disabled, unable to walk.
Regu -fa, to kiss, — salute by pressing
noses.
Rere, to fear ; fear.
Rerekita, happiness.
Rerega, turmeric, curcuma.
Rerevaka?uiai, dissimulation.
Reva, to lie to (as a vessel).
Rcva, short.
Rewaifukc, high.
Ri, hunger, desire ; hungry, lustful.
Rika, to leap, to dance.
Rikarika, a dance.
RikoH, to shudder.
Rinr/eii, to be astonished.
Rimlorindo, to dance.
Rid, rapid.
Riri, to boil.
Riri, a kitchen.
Riiiiith), to dauco.
Ririva, perplexity.
Rise, lamentation ; to mourn.
Rito, restless.
Riva, foolish.
Rivau, to wink.
Rmro(i (Ml).), to-morrow.
Roiioi, to fan.
Roka, color.
Rom/x), full, occupied ; -ta, to fdl.
Rixjelc, a. flag, banner.
Rotjgo •!'(, to hug in the arms; to carry;
a mat used as a cradle.
RoijO -i'<i, to hoar ; report, rumor.
Rom, near, to approach.
Romii, in close succession.
Rom, a race ; running a race.
Roni, a sprout.
Rita, two.
RiKi. ■siiniinilii, twenty.
Riiiiiii, (o brusli away flies.
Riikd, ildiie ; destroyed.
Riikii, iiiuler; the early part of morn-
in;;.
Ri(ki(nikit, to put clay on the head.
RumliK (11.), a box, chest; -na, to put in
a l)i>x.
Rum, a calm.
103
Ritaa, a curse.
Ruve, a pigeon.
s
Sa, a verbal particle (see Grammar).
Sd, one of two who work together.
Sd, a rafter.
Stika, Sir (a ceremonial address).
Sakatifima, a link.
Sdkrsnkc, desire of admiration.
Sdkilia, to search.
Siikii -ta, to anoint the head.
Siiku, to knock, hit, strike.
tyila, way, road.
Siihi -ta, to cover.
Siihi, a covering for the head, a turban of
native cloth.
Sdhcii, an act of reverence.
Sttlia, the mouth of a harbor.
fyiliisa/ii, necklace, neckband, garland of
(lowers.
Saiiiaka, to rub with the hands.
Satnaki, to heap up ; to sweep ; to prune.
Sfimtisiiiminiki, to anoint.
S<i»i/ic, crooked.
S(im/d -Ca, to drive ; -lak., to punish.
Siniiila, having a defect in the speech.
S(ima ■la and -lak., to knock down, to
kill ; a massacre.
Sinjn, the ancle, the leg.
Sdijusaija, to Ix'g.
Stnjga, canoes (used only in the pturol).
Stijjgd, a drinking-vcssel of clay.
Siiggdli (O.), the open space about a
house.
Sdggotiiiuita, to assemble, call together.
Siio, saosiio -fa, to count yams or taro.
i)tiiisao<i, perfect.
Stini -vii, to lo<ik for, to look out for.
Stirasara, to sec.
Siira, siirasara, very.
Said, a male pig.
Saratii, noise in the bowels.
Surcsare, a rib.
Sari, lizard.
410
PHILOLOGY.
».
Saro, tho broast-bone.
Sdsd, ten mats.
Sdsd, brown.
S<ii/, on ornament.
Sail, reward, payment ; -ma, to pay, re-
ward.
&iu, a king.
Sail -fa, to clasp the fingers of one hand
on the pahii of the other.
Siiukii, near tho fire-place.
Saumaiulti, to wish.
Saumaki, to return ; to cause to return.
S<iii»in»iii, to chow.
SiiioiifHisinjii, crossways.
Smint/xJiii, morning.
Sou -iioiw (K.), abi)rtion.
Suit -lei, Sdu -Ik (M.), peace, tranquillity.
Saiimm (Mb.), miserable, vexatious, un-
lucky.
Stnimii, a mode of incantation.
Saiisiiu, exclamation of surprise,
Siii/saii, to clap.
&V/// -til, plenty, abundance, pence.
Safii, a temple ; a gravestone of basalt.
Snvasafii, white, clean.
Save, young.
S<iio -III, to draw, as a rope.
Sin-i/, a spout of water; a waterfall.
Siiriilii, a i;>re-tooth,
SdiiaiKi, the sea.
S(ii/a, alone.
Sf, a clap of thunder.
Se, or.
5c, a flower ; the gills of a fish ; breakers.
Se, to wander.
Scanuii, to come (?).
Seasea, to rend.
Seavo (R.), train of native cloth worn by
the chiefs.
Seavii, to [K-rish, be lost.
SeiiiKi (K.), to rend, to divide.
Sclaro, a thousand cocoa-nuts.
&^', white (used only of the hair).
Sek, se/esele, a knife ; to cut with a knife.
Sekkoti, scissors.
Scksi'likii, white.
Sckta, sword.
Senia, tho left hand,
Semasema, to join.
Sendic, a large wooden dish in which oil
is made.
Seija, no, not.
Seija -mfxiit ■snra, by no means.
Seijata, to wish, to desire, to try.
Si'ijgu, full (?).
Scrtiii, face, eyes (cerem.)
Scmu -iiu, to see (cerem.) *
Sere -vii, to sing.
Sere -ka, to untie and take off.
Sere, brenst.
iSf';», a comb ; -ta, to comb.
Seseijn, desire, misery.
SfslniyiiSiiiilnilai, February.
ScSctihjiisdn/eni, March.
Seseiea, Ibolishness.
Seta, fiill.
Setavi'inviio, brimfuU.
Sen ■to, to scrape, scratch (like n hen).
Sen •ra, to stir alx)Ut.
Scie, disapprobation.
Si-fii, a religious offering ; the first of the
yams.
Seviia, to dash as waves.
Seviisevii, a pi-csent liir persons just arrived
from other islands.
Srriisevii, to clean.
Seietiri'ita, n flower without fruit.
Seiiaseiea, small.
Sei/dfii, to go astray.
Si, to lie ignorant of.
Sk'i, to whistle.
Sika, part of a net.
Sikefi, a kind of tree.
Siki -la, to \\(t.
Sikisiki, a head-aclie.
Siko, sikosiko, a spy.
Siknsikoti, gray-lieadcd.
Si/a, a species of wild corn (?).
Si/a -ta, to trample, to crush.
Sila (().), the sheet of a sail.
iS'(//, to bathe, wash ; to circumcise.
Sinn, a bottje.
SiniinJot'c, a chain.
Smusinu, gravy.
." ■ ^.
K
&3i£^
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
411
'Jn
Siijii, tho sun, dny; -wa, to bask in the
sun, to sun one's self.
Sif/asiija, clear, open country.
Siij/isijidii, white.
Siii, wrong ; an error.
Siriji'i, tlint which is eaten after drinking,
Sisi, the two holes in the cocoa-nut.
Sisia, to piny, sport.
Sisivii -Ink., to revenge, to vie with.
Si/i, a plant.
Sill. -1(1, to extinguish.
Sill, lo make a point.
•SVi'o, to (lebas(\
Siua, a fish-hook ; -Utk., to catch fish witli
a hook.
Sn, soil, an assembly.
Soa-lfi'n or sole.rii, a festive party, a great
assemljingo, usually for (easting.
S(Xita (K.), a grindstone; |)uniice-ston(. .
SoCo, the buttocks, the hips.
Sold, a pointed stake set in the ground to
entrap an enemy.
Snkid, to pluck fniit.
S^ko, to sail ; a voyage.
Sul.i, a. stranger.
&/c, a bonnet, head-dress.
Sole -na and -ynk., to wrap up a corpse.
Soica, a btmdle.
Soli'sole, to wrestle.
Soli -a, to give, bestow.
Sulo, to rub, wipe.
So/oyii, a spouse.
Soliire, a taro-bcd.
Som/ic -til, to cleave to,
So-inlifimmlienii, a wedding-party.
Soiiiliosoinlio, exclamation of surprise.
Soiiihii, down ; -tii, to fall down.
Sontliusoiiihu, steep.
Somi •£a, to drink.
Somia, to retaliate.
Somiiii, to sniiir.
Somiiii, absorlxMl, disapi>eared. .
Somu, clay and sand mixed for pottery.
Soiiii, wonder.
Soiiilrcya, to gnash or grate tlie teeth.
Sotjgi, to crouch down, to hide.
Sotjgo, soijgovata, to assemble.
Soijgosotjgo, rubbish,
.Sojio, to shut.
Sore, seed ; a kind of beads made of the
seed of a plant.
Soicti, tho fence of a house.
Soio -ni, to worship, pray.
Noio •ink., to pray for.
Susd, impatient.
.SoAu, an assembly ; ■va, to assemble.
Sosmmi, in tho room or stead of.
Sosoi-i, a very young cocoa-nut.
Soli (II.), much, exceedingly.
Son, steam.
Soiisoii, scorched,
S<jrii, a basket.
Sova -ra, to pour.
Siwasoeii-ni-mlicin, a dunghill.
Soee ■tak., to knock off the head with a
club.
Soviisoni, a club.
Sii (M.), soup, water in which food has
been boiled.
Sua, one of the sticks (?) by which a canoe
is propelled.
Sim -ka, to husk a cocoa-nut.
Siiiiki, to hoe.
Siiaijga, a plantain.
Simsiiii, wet.
SiiiisiMuale, or suesiiile, malicious.
Simrale -tiik., to deceive.
Sii('ii or siisii, the heart.
Sue (O.), the stone in a fire-place on which
the pot i" placed.
Siii, a bone, a needle of bone.
Siiisiiia, rough, sharp.
Stika, to dismiss.
Siika-kimiiri, to go backward.
Siiki -ta, to paint or daub the body, to
anoint.
Siili, taro.
Siilisidi, young banana-tree.
Siilii, a garment.
Siilii -la, to take out of a box.
Snmhii, pelvis of a female.
Siimiiia, to sdicnthe, put in a hole.
Siinisiiiii, gravy.
SinjgH ■t(i, to snatch.
■ 1 1
-i
5' t|
I
i:
418
PHILOLOGY.
i »
Sunt, to sneeze.
Siisa, lo betroth.
Susi, to cut.
Susii, a pit in which fish arc taken.
Siisiitin, to adopt.
Di, tiiki, lo cut with an axe.
l\i -yii, to fell (qu. same as above .').
Th, or tula, we.
Tai^dke, lo look up.
Tafdijgv, lo hurt llie foot.
TaCiini, lo root up.
Tni'eir, lo turn over.
Tai'i, younger brother or sister.
Tai'ori, to singe.
Tiiia, to pour.
Tiiikimt (O.), (inijer-nails.
Tailitsa, rcslloss, uneasy.
Tliknli, the sen.
Takitit, to separate.
2\ikiiri ( Mb.), the open space about a house.
7'aki, not.
Taki -rak., to draw water.
Tdkornso, l(njuiikoso, lo intercept ; persecute.
Tiikii, lorldisi'-shcll.
IhLU'ii, goods returned for -something re-
ceived.
Ttiini, lo order, command.
Taliii -71(1 re III I re, disobedient, ungovernable.
Jiiliii ■ratriiriiini, r>lx'dienl.
Tii/a ■iii/ro/i(/ro (.Mb.), lo blow briskly, as
wind.
Tii/iii/i/x), slack.
Taliiiioa, telling stories.
Tidasiyn, upland ground.
Tiililiilii, a messenger, a servant.
Title, iiguin.
Tale, lo return ; to refuse.
Tali, li> pinil, lo braid.
Tallin, to carry go(Hls.
Talitio, to forget, forgetfulness.
Ta/iri, split.
Tiilyi, razor.
Talotii, to [Kjur into a dish.
Tiila, whilst.
7JjOT«, father.
Tuna -IxiUai (O.), uncle by fother's side.
T-ma (K.), salute from an inferior to n
su|)crior.
Tinuilr, exclamation of surprise.
Tamata, a man {homo), a (M;rson, man or
woman.
Timhi, a present before a feast.
Tiiiilxi, a place.
Tamlm, arm, from the shoulder to the
elbow.
Tiimbakau, mat made of the cocoa-nut leaf.
Tamliamhiili, a necklace of ovula-sholls.
TamhaUimata, a generation.
Timlmi/amliake, a season of the year.
Tiinlie -It, to hold in the palm or hollow of
the hand.
Timbevatida, collar-bone.
Tiim/toiji, concealed, secret.
7((;;//i«, sacred, prohibited; -rai'., to con-
secrate, lo prohibit.
Tamhiiii, a whale's tooth.
TimliiDiiayiiiKnji, an adze.
Tanibit -vili, a broad-axe.
Tambii -vo/aii, lo wait for a favorable wind.
Tiimii (Mb.), no, not.
Taiiiiisii, lo cut down.
Tiiiiileiiile, spread.
TiDiihIa, o|)enod. •
Taiiiira, dream.
Tamlni (.M.), ring.
Taiii, (liHerenl.
Tiniii, a bag.
Taiiiiloa, llio smell of a dead body.
Tiijoiie, n mule.
Taijaiii, lo put into.
Taitsiaiia, precipitation, haste.
Tinjuiri, sounding.
Tatji, to rry, weep.
Taiji/aiji, In swallow ; the windpipe (?).
Tarn, lo lake up, lo build.
Tiira, lawfid ; -vu, to come next, to suc-
ceed.
Tarnnilie, to strike the foot.
Tiralara, lo manufacture, work upon, build.
Tiro -j/a, to ask.
•r
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
413
i»
«r
Tbsere, loose.
2hsi, rotten (used of cooon-nuts).
lltsivori, to simvc the head.
Thiovti, split.
Thta, to hack, to cut.
'I}itu, a mallet used in pottery,
3!(<rf, Imrdcr, horn.
Tbtdka, rcvcngfliil ; to revenge, retaliate.
l\il<i/<iri, to warm one's self.
Talfiiiia, ijuick.
Ihlitra, the cover ol'a book.
Hill, a. part ol'a eanoc.
Tim -fa, to place.
Viit -fii, to gather fruit.
3}(« •)•«, to cleave to.
3!{« -/■a, to catch, take.
2iw/ exclamation of surprise.
Tliiifii, drawn forth.
7}iii)iil>iiil(iiii, to rain heavily.
'Ihitki, a keeper, proprietor.
Tiiiiiuh»iii, early in the morning,
Tiiiniii (O.), a swinging shelf.
Tiiinji'iiijga, strength, vigor.
TuHii, to eat or drink ; food (ccrem.)
Tiiiil<iii, to agree; agreement.
Ihiiliuiviitd, like.
Tallinn II (ilili, to swing.
Tail -IK (U.), (K^rsons who have the same
god.
Thiiuakc -iia, to take.
Tint, to cut, niake an incision.
Tti'iia (l{.), a hottlc.
Tiiii/r, a brother-in-law.
Tiiraiitiairn, a large a.xe.
7!ji'c, son or daughter of a chiof.
Tiiri, a task, a piece of work, an under-
taking.
Tivi -a, to strike on the cheek.
Ta filar i, a broom ; to s wee i.
7\ivn, latavo, to sleep (cercin.)
Thriit'i, /loyed, skinned.
Thvofa, that part of the beach which is dry
at low-water.
lavufii, to ragc! aj the aves.
7}iviiki, to turti alxiiit.
Tbviilit, to strike the ttx)t.
Jiivitlii (R.), a whale.
104
7htfa, a negative particle having the same
force as the Knglish un- ; it is placed
almost at will belorc adjectives and
verbs.
Tiiira, inhabited.
Tiiciifa, the firmament.
Tatrnfiiica, everlasting, without end.
Tail like, a flag.
Tiiiiakina, to arrange a sail so as to catch
the wind, to brace in.
Taiiamiiudii, constantly.
Taiiiisr, (livorceil.
Tiii'fii/iii/a, useless.
Tiii/ii, to cut, to hack (see la).
Tiii/iina, to spread.
7ii, to plant.
'Pi, a kind of club.
'l\iliikivu, to go or come down, to descend.
'JVinoso, the (lower of tlie banana.
Tikrrii, to begin ; Ix'ginning.
'/!'/./, not.
Il/r, razor ; -a, to shave.
'IVinlKiiiiiiisii, lip.
Tinhnikii/a, mouth (cerem.)
1)mo, calf of tlie leg.
'IVre -1111, to touch.
Vli; to stretch out, extend (as branches).
'Ihir, to circumcise.
'JH'ii ■/•«, to spread out.
7^ very young yam.
Tika, to roll.
Tiki, a place, a part.
Tiko, to sit, to remain, to be fixed, to
dwell.
Tikoliko, a seat.
'niiililii, to knock.
Tilii -ma, to swallow.
7'i/uii, a word spoken by way of apology
for standing up in another's presence.
TiliJlih, the windpipe ((|U. gullet .').
7'im/>i, a (lash ; to blow a conch.
Tiiiira, the large intestines.
Tina, a mother.
Timira, dysentery.
'l\)iatinii, timinitu, a sow.
7\iii, ten.
Tini -a, to conclude.
414
PHILOLOGY.
Tiiiiii, n button.
'Vinitini, tlic conclusion.
'liija (O.), (lew.
'Jil/fini, iinmc of a place in Mbulu or
Iliidos.
Tiiiiid, to shmil ; (0.), nnmc of a game.
Ihi, to lircnk, ns iiii egg.
Titi, to liiing down, be pendent.
Titombii, deep,
Tt/oko, wnlking-slick, stnlF.
Tilolo, tlie pn|)cr-inulbcrry, when stripped
of its bark.
Tivd, to turn aside.
'Jhii, n fowl.
'Jhri, to write.
'Mil, to lie, to be placed, fixed in any
pliu'n.
Tokd/'iii, east wind.
'Inkolinitulii, tlie north wind; the north.
TiikiiliiUii, a seat.
Tiikotiikii, i\ priest.
Tukiiljikn-iii-iKmr, aller-birth.
Tiikiitiiii, mountain, barren hill.
Tnkiiuiili; anger, angry.
Ibkinji/d, to stand where the fresh water
unites with the salt to w.itch for fish.
Ihki , to remove, to quit a place.
Tnki, to ii ck.
Thko, Ixloved, favorite.
Thla, hollow.
7Wo, till' waist.
7hloi/iiiki, to push.
Tbldiia, the trunk of a tree.
Tdld, three.
IhldsdijdVd/d, thirty.
T}»n(i -nil, to increase; to sit, to dwell.
Thinhd (O.), a bay of the sea.
'DjuiIj' , a long lull of hair, worn as an
oriiaiiiciit ; any ornament; -tia, to
adorn one's self with any thing.
Tbrnlf) -kit, to catch, seize.
'Ihm/ji)-ni-viii, a well.
Ibni, to slo'p.
Tbiiid, to endure.
Thnitdiii, a ceremony |)erformed at a fune-
ral, or at the consecration of a temple.
'Ihnoka, to wound.
Ihtjga, a sow.
'Ihijgtde, to carry on the shoulder.
Ihggi, to fall.
'Jhijiii, a whcj'l.
'J}>io, to approach, advance.
'Jhrot/itiii, to move about.
Tdso, to move by jerks.
'iUiiku (().), to fight for.
1})to, pain, painfiil.
lUoii, to paste with arrow-root, or the
fruit of the ton tree.
'Ihtii/o, sailing swirtly.
7Iw, the name of a tree.
Ihvii, a dish.
'J'dVd, habit, nature.
TJyro, to try.
Ihi-dtovo, an elFort, a trial.
7!w», the back.
7h>/a -Jia, to print.
'J'l'i/uvd, brackish.
Til, the upright part of a tree.
'IVi, to stand.
I'h, word used by children to their father.
Td/i, word used by children to their grand-
lather.
Tddi, to delay.
Tddku, an elder brother or sister.
Tiuttiid, the top of a mountain.
3'///, tditdi, to sow (qu. sew ?).
Tdi, king, chief, lord.
7V/<(l{.),adog.
'Tditdi, salt.
Tukd, a gnuid father, — a very oged person.
Tukci, to accuse.
Tdkii -fa, to put ; to give.
Tukdfavii, to put the whole of any thing
into one dish.
Tikdiia, to tell, to speak of.
'Tdkddilravu, to daub the head with ashes.
'Tdkdidhd, a. speech.
'Tdla, bnld.
'Tdli; ear-wax.
'Td/ewi, to push.
'Tdli iji, to pr(!S8.
Tdletjii, to moan,
'Tdli, dull.
Tdli, to make.
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
416
Tumlia, to Ily ; fliRhl.
Tiimlxi, outsido, exterior; i tumlia, without.
Tiimlid, iiind-criil).
TiwiIk' -/•«, to lend hy tho linnd.
Tiaiihii, to spriri}; up, to sprout, grow; n
sprout.
I'limhii, n ;{rnndm()tli('r.
Tumliiiho, mnrk on tho skin occasioned by
liiirnin;?.
Tiimhiiiiinniir, niidwifo; nflor-birth.
Tiimliiild, to stinid still.
Tiiiiiliiiliiiiiliii, to liallio (cercm.)
Tuiiiiii/iiii, II fislicrninn ; to fish.
TiijKii'ii, palo, sickly. looking.
Titiji -vii, to kindle.
Tii/ii, to crrct, to pinco,
Tiii-iniii, cliirC.
Tiiniliini, Coot or ion (('frem.)
Turn, to drop, to trickle.
Tu/ii, vnlley.
Turuhii, n stone which has been worn by
tho dnshing of the waves.
Tumliirr, elbow.
Tust/e.iiihiia, the small entrails.
Tutu, a border.
Tuh'i, a stand, foundation.
Tiitur, thin, thinness.
Tittuitihulu, to stand still.
Tutiimu, liips.
Tutiiii, a cloak, blanket, bod-clothes.
Turn, inlura, a tree (Voni which a poison
is obtained for intoxicatiiiij; tish.
Tiiviilatjgafai/gii, to Im; in conl'usion.
T^ivatufd, tho stones which surround the
earth on which a house is erected.
Tuvi, tutuvi, to cover with Ijed-clothcs.
Tuvu, fresh water springing up in the sand
below the salt-water mark.
Tuvuki, to turn about.
u
O, an exclamation of surprise.
Ua, a wave ; to flow, as the tide.
Ua, u vein.
Uafa, low water.
Uiiiiilnnn, high water.
ITiiuit, muscniar, strong.
IJui, to break, as an egg.
11(11, rain.
U'i, to resemble.
Utiwni, ufuwai, a frith, a creek.
Ut'u, tho nose ; a promontory.
Uf^u -iHi, to (Irnw out, unshenth.
Urn (().), a fish-weir, a wall for enclosing
lisb.
Ui (Mb.), a noise; to make a noise, stir,
bustle.
Vhu (.M.), nail of finger.
U/ii, tho short missile club ; -tn, to throw.
Vic -a, to stir niKint.
Uli, a steering-paddle ; to steer.
Uli, n dog,
lUi), a Mingitot.
Ul(xi, maggoty.
Ulii, the head.
Ulu -fa, to give away Iho dress with which
n person is clothed.
Ubnjani, chief, principal (from ulu, head,
>)'(, only, and tii, of).
Uhnmite (U.), wig.
Vlumutim, the first-lwrn.
Uliiiiaimiiri, the tail.
Umlic, also.
Uiuhi, the cheek,
Unilii .11, to cover; bed-curtain.
U/u/iiiiiiilii, to cover.
Umeii, rust, rusty.
Uiidohi, a thousand.
Unilrc -VII, to shine, to burn j shining,
burning.
Vnilreyiini, burned, destroyed.
Uniliiunibi, ten canoes.
Uiiii .mo, to drink.
Uifd, a shell-lish, land-crab.
Uj/ifc -tu, to be in motion, as water.
Ura, a shrimp, a lobster.
Uiriirr, to rock.
U)u, grease, fat.
Ifru -i'li, to strike or lower a sail.
Uiii, to land.
Us<i, a cargo ; -na, to convey a cargo.
Usiiiui, food of one kind only.
r
416
P H I L O L O a Y.
Usii •la, In match.
Usiiniaki -«/i, to Hhontho, put in n hole.
Vto, n brencHriiil liw ; llii; fruit iil'llio trc-e.
Uto, till- hoiirl ; the iMick-lmiic (f).
Utoiiii (S.), tlio hi'iirt of a lrc<!.
(Jill -mi, to join, uiiitu one tiling to another.
U/ii, h> come to land,
Uii, a ynm. j
Ut'ii, tlip yonnn leaf of n iMinium Irro. j
Urn ■('(!, lo blow, snnnil (us ii IruniicM),
pnir.
Uviiiivii, to inllntc.
Frf, four.
VaCi, vriciraf'i, to cut.
Vdt'ii, cyc-briiw.
Vtitii .kn anil Ink., lo box, cuif, strike with
(be fist.
r«((v/iic(/,exlraorillnary ; wise, intelligent.
Vaka, acconlini; to, os, liki^ (particle pro-
lixcd to nouns and adjctctives to form
lulverbs).
Vnkii, causative prclix (sec Grammar),
Vakiiniitliui, all, every one,
ViikiKd, biully ; -;m, to make bad; to
blame.
VakiU'iiCa, m\(\ numlx-rs nlx)ve 10, tJO, &lc.
Yakut iiki, deceit, deceitful ; accident.
Viiktit'avu, why ? for what \
Vaktii'ivn, a. custom of spitting and express-
ing a wish after drinking aiji^una,
Viikai'iKi) -litk., to dce|)en ; deep.
Vakiui)<'itlc, to try ; trial.
VdkrU'ix'oifiriuiri, an eddy ; to turn round,
Viikue'iiko, to prepare,
Vukauiai, or vukai/ai'a (O,), to give a
name.
VakaU'iinU'iirii, a garment with sleeves or
legs.
VakaiUisa, to tame, make (piiet or cosy ;
comfortable, contented.
Vakaiiii/ui, to s|)eak falsely.
Vakaimlimi, really.
Vakairiri, lo alarm, alarming ; very, ex-
ceedingly, i. e. terribly.
Viikiiixuktisaka, to reverrnco.
Viikditiimrra, very, exceedingly.
Vdknivii, how.
Viikiikiiisi,\\Vv a |)crsonof low rank, slavish.
Vukiikiiloiigatn -tiik., U^ bless.
Viikiiknsiiii, to despise ; act arrogantly.
Viikukdliikntii -tak., to warm,
Viikdkdiikdiia -tdk., to strengthen.
Vdkdkila -ijd, to inform.
Vdkdkoiioko/io, impudent.
I'dkdkiiriinit'ii, to sow, plant.
yakdldildi -Ink., lo lessc'ii.
Vdkii/diif'i, lo starve.
Vdkc/iitil/Kx'd, to ileceivr,
Viikiiltikdid, declining, not erect,
Vdkdliild -tdk., to reveal ; stand aside.
Vdkd/dtr/dVC, lo liU up,
Vdkdlrkiiliku, lo sliiirleu,
Viikdicvii, lo Hugment,
]'(//•((/<■»•(/»(((///« ■^//.■,,io(U'privcorvirginity.
Vdkdkiili, to ransom ; lo separate.
Viikitlidlid, foolish ; ■Ink., to make foolish.
Viikdliwaliird -tdk., lo cool.
VdkiUo or fikii/i; elderly (!).
Vdkiilodlod -tdk.. Ill blacken.
i'dk'i/ofo, a preparation of cocoa-nut and
laro; a sort of pudding.
Vdkdiolomd, lovely, causing love.
Vdkd/onid/umd, hollow ; silent.
Vdkiilimifx'd, lo di.'liige.
Vdkd/injd/dijii -tdk., to make even.
Vtikdlniind, lo make a noise ; noisy.
Vdkdmd, ashamed ; -Idk., to shame, abash.
VakdmiUii -tdk., to empty.
Vdkdindi'dld -tdk., to explain.
VdknmdkaJivdtu -Uik., to brighten.
Vakdtiidkdd -tak., to make clean.
I'dKiimn/di -tdk., to cause to wither.
Vdkdiiidliimdhnjii -tak., to weaken.
Vdkamdmat'it, lo dry.
1 'ukiniidiiiaka, ashamed.
Vdkdnuimusii, lo pray for, to advocate.
Vakanidiiumanii, having streamers at the
sail of a canoe.
Vakd/iidsi, to clothe; the ceremony of put-
ting ihc girdle on to the son of a chief
for the first time.
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
417
Vakamata ■nn, to erecl.
Vakitniiitiiliiii, nxciilli-iit.
VaknvMlalen, to impovurisih, rurse.
Vaktimtite -a, to kill,
Vakamatiimaliid, economical,
Viiktimiiii -til, to (hslcn.
Vuktimai/dii -tak,, to tnnrry,
VakiimiiijAii .ttik,, to JihIhc
Viikfim/Kit'ii, to enlist; to lie sick,
ViikiDHlmt'ii, to Imit.
Viikamhile (O.), to cut down, fell,
VakaiiihuiiUif crosswisr.
Viikiitiiliiiiilii, to iHHirvc; liiitli,
Vitkuiiihiko -tiik., to extinguish.
Vaknmliombiilii, to enslave.
Viiknm/iorisi, to irrilnlo ; niigry.
Vtikdiii/xirmi, to make close, bring together;
close, near.
Vakdmliiilii, to iK'g (i)0(l.
Vakamlmla -Id, to save ; a savior,
Viikaiii/iii/o -/itk., to darken ; to be blind ;
to faint.
Vdktinirtoinrltt, a (orerunner, o herald; to
go IjcIIm'i', to niiiioiiiice.
VakuDiiriifd, to sow or plant,
Vnkiinukc .rti, to cause to sleep ; soporific.
Vdkdiiii/rimiiri -d, to imitate,
Vdkdmiisiimiisii, sullen,
Vdkdmniiili, silent, taciturn.
VakiiiiAiiilakii, to backslide.
Vdkdiidiifldkiivuli, to turn the Imck.
Vakdiidiitdy to consult.
Vakdrii/iimiiiif/dmii, to redden.
Vakdiiildiiniaki -mi, to ccuse desire; quiet-
ness, satisfaction,
Vdkdnikre, to clean, sharpen.
Vdkdihlind, to verify, to fulfil,
Vakdni/r»tio, branchless, as a tree ; to cut
otr the branches of a free, to hew,
Vdkdtiilmno -Hd, to cause to desire,
Vdkd>ii/niiit)»i/)iila, causing to desire life ;
exquisitely, exceedingly.
Vdkdndoiii/oHii, to make straight ; to par-
don ; rightly, correctly,
VdkdVi/onunrhHii, to put in order, to fulfil,
Vakantlrainiikdfii, the custom of putting
the leaf of a tree secretly into n per-
105
son's food, in the expectation that lomo
evil spirit will, in consequence, cause
his death,
Vdkam/rakdi -Idk., to vox,
Vdkandranu •ma, to sweeten.
Vdkaniiri -td, to (hsten ; a button,
Vukdiidrrkcd, not full,
Vnkdwlrekeitdrrke, ileep, as a dish,
Ydkdiulrcii .tak., to ripen,
Viikamlmmii ■Ca, to cause to sink.
Vtibiiiilromii -yii, to disappear.
Ydkdiiiliid, mire,
Viikdiiiliila, to pacify,
Ydkdiidldijdid, to make commodious,
Vdkdijfiami -td, to press.
Ydkdijiinygn -Idk., to embolden.
Viikaijf'dra, to bore n bole,
Vukdijgdtra ■t'd, to cause to burn,
Vakinjijeii, to empty,
Vdka>i;irle)jfiektta -Idk, to defile,
Vdkdiigiiigi -i'd, to roll.
Vakd iignijiioloii ■tak,, to cause to shout.
Vakdtigiimi -ii, to clinch,
Vdkanro, to gird.
Vdkdosnoso, to make narrow,
Vdkaoti, to finish.
VdkdraU'a, to look at, attend to.
Vdkarairai -Ink., to disclose.
VdkarirA -tak., to put the deck on a
canoe.
Vakiirduna, to provide.
Vdkardvi, to cause to trust ; confidence,
trust,
Vakarnje -fa, to lie, to rest,
Vakdmjc .tti, to take care, to hoard up.
Vdkarerekita, to make happy.
Vakamca -tak., to elevate, to hoist (a sail).
Vakarnviiird ■tak., to lower.
Vdkarikdtid, a word of respect, spoken of
a father or mother (1),
Vakariri, -tak., to hurry,
Vakaririi, to divide,
Vakariririvi -tak., to square, to make
square,
Vakaroroo (S,), to honor,
Vakaroijo (O.), to listen.
Vakaroyoro)jo ■tak., to report, publish.
418
Pill I,(»I,Ofl V.
Viikariiii, twice.
Viikitniiii/itiii (S,), to ilraw ii ciirlniii.
Vdhiiriiiiilietirn, to liiinn up.
('(ikiiriiiiilniinDi/iii, Mili'iit.
\'(ik'inini,ni\ iiin)in'lln,Hunslia(lR; to shade,
III !<lllrl(l.
Vitkuriisii -Ink., to ciimc
ViikiiiA -tiik,, to niiikc iniiiiircst.
I'dkastilii, to warn, ii)i|iriso orilangcr.
Viikiisiiliisiilu -Ink., lo pcrsooutc.
I'lkiisitli, lo How.
Viikiisnviiiiii, to iip|irls(',
Vukmf^ lo cause to stay.
Vtihisrstii , to hiss.
Vdkdsiiiivu -/Ilk., lo fill.
Viiktisttdi, lo ilericio, make fi>olish.
VakiniiKi/ffii, (liiHicr, noou-inenl.
Vdkiisiijiisiijim -Ink., to whiten.
Vdkdsisi/<i, ahoniinahle, cruel.
Vdkdso/okdkd/id, one who cnts without
workinj,'.
Vdkdsnmhii, lo come to land.
Vdk<isori>, to hroiKl.
Vttkdsiidsiia, II jest, lo joke.
V<ikd.sii{'u .m/i, lo bring forth.
Vdkiisiilii -md, lo clothe.
Vakiila, to make.
Vdkdlakdkand, to eat without working.
Vdkalnktd, to disclose.
VakiUdkckciii, meet.
VdkdlAkit'iit'iUii, to deny.
VakdtakiUiijd, to mark, to testify.
Vdkdtiiinliuva, to order, command (cerom.)
Vakdtaniurid, to imitate.
KaAv/u^u -?/«, to intercept, balk.
Vakdta}jn, to remember.
FaA(/«iSo<o, to cruise.
Vakiitdra, lo make lawful.
VakaldriUdra, to make it lawful to leave
the i)lacc where a chief has been eat-
ing, by removing what may remain of
his Ibod.
Vakdtatakdtjdh, to bo revengeful.
VakdtdUilo, to cast lots.
Vakdtn/dind, to hasten ; quickly.
Vakdldldiiihii, commandment.
VakuUmi, to put awoy.
Vdkdiaiikdt&lakiiiam&i, to lie nbrensl, oi
I wo cnnocM.
ViikdldiitdiiVdld, lo make I'fpml, to com-
pare.
VdkdididVd, to place ono leg abovo an-
other.
Vdkiiidvdvii/i, to instruct.
Viikiitdird •ml, lo watch, a watchman,
Viikditkiiiiluiili, to kneel.
Vdkdirrr -ya, lo touch,
Vdkd/Cd -fd, to instruct.
Vdkdtikd, lo place, cause to sit.
VdkdUjidiid, to deny.
Vdkiifukd, name (cereni.)
Vdkdtokd, to plac(^
VdkdIokdWdJe, lo irritate.
Vdkdiiikolokoi, Iwloved.
Vdkiilolu, thrice.
Vdkdlovdlo -fd, to try ; an elTort.
Vdkdtit -ra, to place erect; the upright
|H>sls in the fence of a house.
Viikdhiludlua, cloudy.
Viikdliimlnt -ra, to raise up, prepare, ar-
range.
Vdkdtumhiiniii, a mode of divination by
spinning a cocoa-nut.
Vdkdtit/ii/na, a porch, or shade.
Vdkdiurdijd, lordly, chief-like,
Vdkdtusa, to explain.
Vakdtulii -tak., to allot.
Vdkdiif'iufi -rt, to imitate.
Vdkdii/i, to steer.
Vdkd)i7ulie, to burn, lo cause to burn.
Vdkdumriimcd, to cause to rust.
VdkdutatUd, to think ; cogitation.
Vdkd vdkdCeCipi , a resting-place.
Vdkdfdle, to deny.
VakdfdSdkdSdkd, to stride.
Vakdvrivdkaesini, to cost mutual re-
proaches.
Vdkdve/evc/e, l)eloved.
Vdkdirrerere -a, lo entangle.
Vdk<ivevi -tak., to weaken.
Vdkdrrvefe, to tempt.
Vdkdvikivikia -tak., to oppress with a
heavy load.
Vakdvinuka, well ; to thank.
VITI AN DICTIONARY.
419
Viikiiviriitn, to (■ncirrlc.
Vdhiiro, Ici cniisr' to ri'iimin,
Viikaiiii'ii, Id Inm.
Vnkiivotiilo, Id pill III) Ixmrd.
VaknroniivniiH, In briiist).
Viik<ivol(i, III (illoi.
Viihd'iiii •Ink,,, to rrni'W.
ViikiiviKilii, to |Miiir out.
V(ikiinikiii/(t/i), (lit, ciiiiHinn ''i" spirit to
tiyi) ^^rriitly, rxcccclinyly, very.
Viikdvuli .id, lo instruct.
Vukai'iini, secrijt, Nocrt'tly j •a, to hido.
Viikufiiyii .Ink., lo lill,
Vukdviiniviiru, iilUr tlio innnnor of the
worlil.
VitknrtUa, to persevere; cnpnblo of en-
diiriiii,' lalior.
ViikiitcA ■/ilk., to iiicrcnsc.
Vdkiiwiii, to doride ; to weep.
Vnk(iwiileii(i/e, useless,
I'ikiiini/iike, lo wrinkle.
Vitkdimvil .fa, to erect, rnisn up.
Viikmvdvugga, to look nfler ennoes.
Vakiiireleiiclcd, to drown Iho voice.
Viikai/tifa -nil, to niiino.
Vakiii/iWo -ra, to cause to happen,
V)ikiii/ukei/<ike, to improve in health.
Viikin/iilo, Bpiriliml, having ii soul.
ViikdiiAloijiuiduiui, lo make upright.
Viik(ii/(imo£e, to leel (.').
Viikiiijumu, to desire.
Vakil i/iin(lr<i -va, to awnkcn.
Viikui/iiga, to render useful.
VakuiiiiydnuUuimUinju -ttik., to make hum-
hie.
Viikiii/injiisiri -Ink., to cause to sin.
Vukiii^iiliiniMiiiirMii, to go in great num-
b<,'rs to any ])orson.
Viikiiiiiiwa (S.), far olf.
Vdkilukeld -ttik., to tease.
Vdkirc (for vakakire), to cause to boil or
bubble.
Vtiknki)to, goods ; the name of a stick (?).
Vakvfa, when.
yakiiviikitvu, to cause to smoke or burn
dimly.
Valu ■til, to do, make.
Vii/ii [jiiUii], rotten J rottennosi,
\'ll/ft (().), to light.
Viildliiid, m'Xiial inleri'oiirse,
Vdliiiiii \i,iil(itid\, to Ix'iray.
Vdliiiiilridiln', dilliciill, hard to do,
Viiliiidiiii, easy.
Viiliinild, a<'iiipni mciining, signification.
ViildCdIii, the leinplos of the head,
Vdli; a house.
Viileiikii, a. storehouse,
Vdlu, war.
Vd/ii [jidlii], to rub.
Vdiid, a mast.
Vdmi, to shoot.
Viuii/d, a maid-servant or slave.
ViDif/ii, thick (of fluids), congealed, a.« oil
hy cold.
Vdtti/iiijii, the sound of any thing falling, or
ol'slariipilig.
Vdniid, a land, territory, country.
Vin/ii or viujuiu, to feed ; one who feeds.
Vat)riiilrtjrniliii, lo shake together, to beot
with the fingers.
Vmjgmjgdt'i, to insult, deride.
Vnijfidtii, to surround ; to sharpen.
Vdijgntn, to corrupt.
Vdi/Diiii, to arouse.
Viigiit^iijiifiiii, a frown.
Vorii (K.), deaf.
Viiri, the scale of a fish; a part of o canoe.
Valid, the pulp of a cocoa-nut.
Vim, a file ; covetous,
Varitro, a file, a saw.
Vdsamliiritiiina, to ensnare, entrap.
Viixii, nephew or niece.
Vdtii, bedstead ; shelf; the top of a house
or canoe.
Villa, all together.
Villi, to talk much.
Viitii, stone.
Viitidixi, innuinerablc.
Vim, the hibiscus.
Vail ■t'a, to seize, catch, bind.
Vail, very.
VaiiviiH (S.), cotton.
Viiva, a footstool, a shoe.
Vava, to carry on the back.
420
PHILOLOGY.
Vava [papa], a board.
Vavdhia [p<ipakua], thick ; thickness.
Vavala [jHipaial, foolishness.
VavuJayi [pajm/at/i], white man, foreigner.
Viii'a/ii, the fence of a ho'jsc.
Vavdtio [fufiitio], elastic, thot can be
stretched.
Vavtita, likeness ; like.
Vai'i, to ronst, cook in the eorth.
V(iyu, a poisonous fowl.
Vedtu, a s|)ecics of slicll-fish.
Vei, where.
Vci, to, of, from.
Vei, n prcllx denoting reciprocal action,
Veifn, to hnte one another.
VeUdi, the commerce of the sexes.
VcUartivi, n word used in inquiring the
relationship of two |)crsons ; — " how
are they reliiled ?"
VeiCu (S.), grassy or swampy land.
VeUuriniuiki, to enter one within another,
as the links of a chain.
Veilrivi, to fear one another.
X^eikiii, to curse one another.
Veikiil;iin(iV(iki, to whisper together.
ViikdiiiUiri, to run together.
Veikiildkiitii, mutual warmth or anger.
Vrikdii (O.), a clump of trees, a wood.
Veitiikoi/dki, to go to and fro.
VeiJeva, vrileuai/dki, to take care of one
another.
VeilonuiHi, to love one another.
Vcinidsd/o, to envy one another.
Veinidi/dki, the centre ; half.
Vcimhn, to quarrel, brawl.
VeimUkdm/iikai, to lie one above another.
Veim/ji/ii/dki, to push one another about.
VeimlKtrisi, mutual anger.
Veini/iii, mutual deceit.
Vcitii/diir'i, the commerce of the sexes.
Vcinilruiiilriiijdki, to come and go.
Veiiidfiigyti, to hate.
Veitjaneni, Ira'ernily ; the relation between
brother and sister.
Veirdui, to be face to (ace.
Veiniii/dki, to look about,
Veiniru, to kill one another.
Veisi, to work together.
Vcisdu, an exchange ; to barter.
Veisdldi, to carry on a stick on the shoulder
between two persons.
Veisdmu, to cudgel or beat one another.
Veisikii/dki, to lift about.
Vcisiiifirii/dki, to miss one another,
Vcisivi, to vie with one another,
Veisoteso/e, to wrestle.
Vritdijii'i, to cry with one another.
Vritdtd, to meet.
Veitdldtmndhf, to race.
Veildii, a, friend ; courtsliip,
Vcildui, repentance.
VcitdVdh'iii, a male cousin-german.
Vcildi/dki, maki' liiisle.
Vritdiiitini, to dwell or sit together,
VfUnroi, one who succeeds or comes next
to another.
Vcinit'd, to fight, box, spar,
Vciidkiirdk^i, to be face to face, to take
care of one another,
Veifdkdrivdi, to mock, deride one -an-
other.
Vewdle (O.), a hamlet, group of houses.
Veiviiidkali, mutual desire.
Vriiolckdi/dki, to be near.
Veiio/i, to trade together, to barter.
Veiimdki, to converse.
Vriviint, to diish as waves, to be in motion.
Vcinikii, to assist.
Veirinjoni, the relation between father-in-
law and son-in-law.
Veiti-d, to wait.
Vcmiili, to jest.
Veiu-dti, rcitnUiiii, the relation of husband
iiml wife, matrimony.
Viid'ckdiii, relationship, kindred.
Veii/tii'uri, to come together,
Vcfi; to knock with a stick.
Vrkii, excrement ; to void.
V^fke [pcAr], to dip.
Veld [jielti], slime.
Vi/eku, a chisel.
Velovilo, a boat.
Vi/ote/od, yellow.
Vein [pelii], to bend.
i ;
i 1 ^
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
421
Velulu [jKltilii]., wrinkled.
Venu [_/&««], to blow iho nose.
Verdi, verdit, almost, nearly.
Fere, temptation ; entangled.
Vereloa, a root which serves for soap,
Veria, a chain.
Vcsd, an anklet, a lo<; band.
Veso [prso], to pierce.
Vesii, the middle finger.
Veve [j'cjie], weak, infirm,
Vcvrku, snd ; sadness.
Via, to desire ; desirous.
Vid -hina, to wish to eat ; hungry.
Via -moic, sleepy.
Vifa, how many.
Vifmifo, the navel.
Vikeii [pikiu], crooked, crookedness.
VikivikUi, pain occasioned by carrying a
heavy weight.
Vili -ka, to count, to read.
ViliCio, awkward.
Vilo' fa, to prepare medicine.
Viloicai, a physician.
Vinaka, good, goodness; -ta, to like, desire.
Vinokinilai, a hypocrite.
Viri -tak., to cast, throw.
Viiikoio, a halo round the moon ; a fenced
town.
Viro -mai, to return.
Visa, to burn.
Visitki, to bind.
Vita, to strike.
Villi, seven.
Vitu -sayavulii, seventy.
Vivi -tja, to fold, roll up,
Vo, remainder.
Vofe, paddle.
Vofi, to skin, flay.
Vofota, patient ; to endure, to be patient.
Vokiiukifi [jmkipokifi], round.
Vo/a, to mark, print ; a line, print, book.
Vo/au, to sail, to voyage.
Vo/eka, near, close, nearness,
Vo/i, to trade, barter.
Vonih, to ascend, embark,
Voni/re, grasshopper.
Vono, a law ; -ta, to legislate,
106
Vono [pono], to seize,
Vonogo, withered,
Voraki •na, to endure, endurance; must,
shall.
Voro [pord], paint; ■«, to paint.
Voroka, to break.
Vorolaki, to break to pieces,
Vosa -tak., a word, language ; to speak,
Vota, a portion ; to apportion.
Votanc [jmtanc], to mend.
Volii, lo ap|)ear, come in sight (as land).
Volii [2M"]i 1 place.
Voiiia (Mb.), property, riches.
Von, new.
Vovo, dillicult.
Vovo []>o}Ki\, rotten ; rottenness.
Vii (K.), daughter-in-law.
Ft!, root, bottom, basis, foundation, source,
Vila, him or her (cerem.)
Vila, fruit.
Viiaira, west wind.
ViHika, pig.
Viiiilikit, the west wind, the west.
Viiiuia or vuaya, grandchild.
Viiiiiiikit'u, a pill.
Viiatii, grown large.
Viifi, wet, low ground.
Viic -ta, to lift up.
Viie -tak., to wound.
Viifc, to swell ; a swelling.
Viii, wet.
Viiifi, leprosy.
Viii'ii (Mb.), the figure of a dance,
Viikii, to fly.
Vukiiviika, leprosy.
Vukai/ah, to astonish.
Vuke [puke] -tia, lo throw up earth about
the root of a tree; to prepare the
mounds in which yams are planted.
Vuke -a, to change ; to assist,
Vukeviike, a mound.
Vuki -i'a, to turn upside down.
Vukiviiki, to turn, roll over.
Vu(u, wise, expert ; an artisan, a mechanic.
Vukuniwai, a physician, surgeon.
Vula, the moon, a month.
Vultiimbotambota, April,
^
i
422
PHILOLOGY.
Vulaikckkde, May,
Vuldimayomaijo, May.
Vitlaiircrcwere, June.
Vulavula, white.
Vulaiji, a stranger.
Vu/e [pule], to reign, govern.
Viilivuli -fd, to learn.
Villi [pidi], a loaf of bread.
Vu/o, cord, thread.
Vulo, a whale's tooth.
Vulono, a hatchet.
VitJoii [pu/oii], a covering for the face.
Vuluviilu, to wash.
Vti/uvu/ii-iii-mata, eyebrow.
Vuluvulu-kani-mata, the eyelash.
Vutiaii, to admonish ; warning ; a law.
Viiuitua, without branches.
Vitni, secret ; to shut, conceal.
Vunikau (O.), a tree.
Vufiika/ou, a physician.
Vuni/atji (O.), white man, foreigner.
Vunitamha, shoulder.
Vuniirsia, an enemy.
Vunitvai, medicine ; a physician.
Viiiioka, to rub.
Vunuvunit, white (used only of the hair).
Vupgii, lull.
Viirii, visiter.
Viirtnn/xiramba, having a broad basis.
Vuraveilevuyaki, midway ; to pay an equi-
valent for what one receives.
Vurarura, the world.
Vuri, to break out, to spring up (as water).
Vuru ■fa, to crumble.
Vusa, rottenness.
Vuse, a crack.
Vusi, to suspend.
Vuso, spray, steam ; to foam.
Vitsona, the end of a thing.
VuUi, to disobey.
Villi, fair, white.
VhlI, hair, fur.
Villi -a, to pluck.
Vutivuti, bristles of a pig.
Vittoviilo, a sponge.
Viilii, a groan ; to groan.
Vutu£etjuCeijii, the pulse.
Vitliiiin, to repose.
Viitiiniyiiu, sick.
Viiliivittiia, hairy.
Viivtilc, neighbor.
Viivu, muddy; a bladder.
ViivuCe, a swelling.
Vuviika, to fly (as dust).
w
W'li -ta, to fasten or tie; a fastening, a band.
Wd, a swelling.
Wd, wawa, a vine.
Wiifa, to beat upon.
IVuSaki, to wait.
%Va£(nvaCct, firmament.
Tr«t, water; medicine.
Wiiindranu, fresh water.
Wiiisaia, thin, watery.
Wailiii, salt water, sea.
Wiika (R.), root.
Wakavitndi, roots of ajtgona.
Wakia, foolish.
Wakia, to rub.
Wakolo, road.
Wakolo, to go (cerem.)
Wakiduga, hatred, malice,
Wakuiio, not quite full.
IVafe, really, only, merely.
Widcte (U.), tlie papaya tree.
Widid, to anoint.
Widdi, suspended ; -frt, to brandish.
Wiiliifidi, oil ; to anoint,
Wdokii, an egg.
Widii, eight.
XVidiiki, a wrinkle.
IJW«i'«, a land flood, an inundation.
IVdiii, flattery ; -a, to flatter.
Waygii, a canoe.
Wdygaivaygd, a rib.
Wdygi, play, sport.
Winjf-oijgo, to shrivel,
Wdtfgola, dry, withered,
Wdra (H.), no, not.
Warowaio, a tree with the leaves of which
VITIAN DICTIONARY.
423
thoso who have been touching dead
bodies wash themselves.
Warumisa, warm with the sun.
Wiisc, to divide ; a division, portion.
Wiisit •ta, to pinch.
Wuti, a husband or wife, — spouse,
Wuti -rak., to snatch, seize.
Wait, a club.
Wa uti, do not ! desist ! (See aua, kakua.)
Wavata, bound together.
Wave, belly (ccrem.)
Wuvini, encircling.
Wavu£uke, standing still, erect.
Wawn, to fasten.
Wawa, entrails.
Wdu'd, to wait.
Weimami, weiraUfivcitou, our (see Gram-
mar).
Weko (O.), brother.
Well, to drivel.
Wore 'Ca, to till the ground.
Wercicere, a plantation, garden ; a house.
Welti, veUirii, wctatou, our (see Grammar).
Wete -a, to injure, destroy.
Wi, name of a tree and the fruit which it
bears (probably the Spondios dulcis).
Will -<fa, to gather.
Wiri, to sit, dwell (cerem.)
Wiri, majesty.
Wiriu'iri, seat of a chief, throne.
Wo ! exc. of astonishment.
Ya€a, a name.
Yafo, to happen, to become ; to extend.
Yakavi, evening.
Yala •nil, to terminate, to bound.
Yalariia, to divide.
Yalayala, boundary.
Yali, to go astray, to stir about.
Yalo -va, to nod, to beckon.
Yalo, spirit, soul, mind.
Yalo£i, bad tcm|)er, bud disposition.
• St'c iindiT i4 for ft note respecting the words
which begin with Uiia letu-r.
YaJdoloma, kind-hearted, affectionate.
Ytdovaijone, childish.
Yaloyalorua, careless, indifferent, of two
minds.
Yamba, a mat.
YamUike, a year.
Yamtn, nakedness ; naked.
Yai,.^, the tongue.
Yanie-ui-mbiika, a flame of fire.
Yamesamila, the palate.
Yamcyamica, sweet, delicious.
Yamo -£(1, to feel.
Yana -ka, to spread ; -vak,, to level.
Yaiiili, queen.
Yamlra, awake ; to watch, be vigilant.
Yandrc, forehead.
Yandua (S.), every body.
Yania, durable.
Yani, away, off, yonder.
Yaiii, to flatter ; flattery (see wani).
Yaniiijanu, an island.
Yaya, use ; useful ; to do, to act.
Yai/iinialupu, humble, unassuming.
Yayamiondonu, upright, just.
Yagasiri, sinful, wickedness.
Yayavi/iaka, meekness, goodness.
Yapga, to creep.
Yapo, the body.
Yaijoi^d, rough ; sick.
Yar/ovimika, smooth, handsome, in good
condition.
Yara, to drag ; to hoist a sail.
Yarapi, arms and ammunition.
Yare, to decline, as the sun.
Yarega, to adopt.
Yarer.'ana, to yawn.
Yasa, the sides of a house,
Yasa -va, to seek ; a search.
Yasc, sandalwood,
Yatayala, the sky about the setting sun.
Yiite, the liver.
Yaii ! a contemptuous address, — fp' ow I
Ydu, household furniture, property, riches.
Yiiuin, moist.
Yaiiyau, shade ; dew.
Yava, foot, leg.
Yava, barrenness of a woman.
—J
424
PHILOLOGY.
4
Yavala, to be in motion, to shaice.
Yavasambe, a bandy leg.
Yavi -a, draw.
Yavi -ta, to punish.
Yavi, afternoon. (See kayavi, yakavi.)
Yavo, the reed on which the thatch of a
house is fastened.
Yavu, exhausted, destroyed.
Yavu, the ground on which a house is
erected ; a collection of houses.
Yav^a, a tribe, clan, genealogy.
Yawa, distance ; fiir.
Yauiai, a flag, a banner.
Yawai£ake, high.
Ydyi, an ornament.
Ye ! int. ho I
A VOCABULARY
DIALECT OF TOBI, Oil LORD NORTH'S ISLAND.
Of Horace Holden, to whom we are indebted for the following
vocabulary, some account is given on pago 78.* Besides the list of
separate words, many sentences were written down, for the purpose
of elucidating the grammatical structure of the language. It was,
however, soon evident that this was expecting too much. The
situation in which the captive soamen were placed, was such as to
deprive them of all desire of acquiring a better knowledge of the
language of their inhuman masters, tlian was absolutely necessary
for the purpose of communicating with them. And even had the
desire not been wanting, their opportunities, while constantly engaged
in harassing labors, were very unfavorable. They were therefore
contented with learning the most common words, which they strung
together so as to be intelligible, but with little or no regard to the
proper idiom of the language. Thus they had no knowledge of the
affixed possessive pronouns, although, from the fact that nearly all the
words expressive of relationship (as wutimum, father, migcrufn, mother,
bfjiom, brother, mlmjvm, sister), and the names of the parts of the
botly (as, mitgemum, head, petgim, foot, kCtsiim, baard, tgtm, hair)
terminate, as given by Holden, in m, which, in the other languages
of this division, expresses the pronoun thy, we can hardly doubt that
• -Mr. Ildlik'ii is now ciignged in business nt the Sanilwicli Islands, wlicre he is much
estecnieil for his probity and intelligence.
107
..-k-m !
426
PHILOLOGY.
this class of affixes really exists in the dialect of Tobi. Notwith-
standing these deficiencies, the vocabulary is valuable, as showing
beyond a doubt that this little community is a branch of the ethno-
graphical family which extends from Eap to the Kingsmill Group ;
and it is not improbable that by means of it, the very subdivision of
this family to which tiie natives of Tobi belong, will hereafter be
discovered, and their origin thus determined.
Most of the words which follow are identical with those given by
Mr. Pickering, in his Appendix to Holden's Narrative. Where any
difference exists, it has been noted.
T 013 1 AN VOCABULAllY.
Absent (out of sic,'lit), yut&men.
Air (the o|)en air) glituni. War a gOtum,
out of doors.
And, m/i,
Awny, mora.
Back, liikidik.
Backward (or hithcrward ?), toj-j (sec
come).
Bad, ItJinA or tama.
BamlxMj, jiA
Beard, kuxtnn.
Belly, mii^itim.
Bird, kdnrm (or rather sea-gull).
Black, vaizeris or uaharis.
Bono, ^ji/.
Box, W I'fyii;.
Boy, icemrci/j a mare.
Brass, moldhdili.
Breast (also milk), tut.
Brother, hijiitm.
Byc-and-l)ye, tnpdi. Vui tnt (see wait).
Canoe, prdo.
Carry, Wdhogi or uohugi.
Chilli, /riA).
Cloth, elotlics, HjiC.
Cloud, knt^o.
Cocon-nut, kardjia.
" very "oung, t^o.
" partially riiw, siib.
Cold, mrikrdzm.
Come, taitil; hitlt.
Come back, /)iU(;i, bltu.
Convei-se, to, titinvp.
Cord, string, kril (kr'U, P.)
Cry, to, titg.
Dance, to, kokSin.
Dark, klimwaizdris (see black).
Day, yaro (see suu).
Dead, puruk, mali.
Dig, kHI^iip.
Dirty, iihit.
Drink, llmi [lima, P.)
Kat, mCika.
l''ar, yutdii. Very far, yatdil vc.
Father, vntimtim.
Finger (or hand), kaimuk.
Fire, yi\f.
Fisli, ik(t.
Fish, to, vizivig a ika,
P'ish-liook, kiiiiortka (or kaii ivor ika).
Fishing-net, i^i/n).
Fish-line, ydo.
Fly (s.), /„!/.
Food, I'lkrihn.
Foot (or leg), jtetgviii.
Girdle (of men), vclivct,
" (of women), vctiveti.
(tirl, vcrcircilj d vaivi.
Give, ^vaipto, or kripto; It.
Go, /i;V«. Go away, mora-hitu.
God, ydris.
Good, yisay; mapla.
Grass, imrc.
flair, tpm.
Hand, kdiiittrk.
Hatchet, UijHti.
Head, DHlrcmvm.
Here, atia; (atUli, P.)
House, yim.
Hungry, md,
I, iiatj.
In, ?(•(>/•.
428
P H I L O L O C. Y.
!
f
S(
Iron, piii}vl; pigu.
Iron-hoop, tsipa.
Kill, mite.
Kind (see good), mapia.
Knife, wnsc.
Large, yenup.
Laugh, mtnii,
Leni', trila.
Lie, repose, to, rilu.
Lightning, rijik.
Liznrd, jiild.
Man) (imtire.
Many, 2>'pi-
Milk, till. (See breast.)
Mofjn, mCikom.
Mother, mii^erum.
Musqiiilo, liim.
Name; what is your name? vframtia gu?
What is the name ol'thalt metdinen a
meiia 1
Near, yiipatilo.
Night (or to-night), niho.
No, til ; tat.
Old, adult, maziii. Very old, mnzui a ve.
Paddle, vitc/.
Pregnant, yisii,
Rnin, tit.
Rat, ki't^irt^i; {Ulmium, P.)
Red, i/eijiir/a.
Reef, /•(li/.
Rope, t(i/i.
SacKii, ifitnp; tahii ; (the latter word intro-
ducid by /"i/r/ Ktit, Sec page 78.)
Sand, ])i.
Sea, salt water, tut.
See, tniagi.
Set, as the sun, nu^rilio (qu. mora i i<>,
away in tho nigut ?),
Shark, jto.
Ship, nitue.
Short, yamot.
Sick, makdkes.
Sister, miaj/um.
Sit, matitu.
Sleep, OTrtse (or mumaiidi. P.)
Small, piit^ik ; jxit^igit^i. Very small,
])at(igit(;igi ; (qu. 7Ja-<;iA«VjiAi ot pa-
likitiki ? In tho dialect of Binabe,
tikitik is small.)
Star, oij'.
Stay, remain, miimutUli,
Stone, rds.
Strong, yakailit.
Sun, yiiro.
Talk, ?i//j, titiuvp.
That, mi'na.
There, etisnai.
Thou, ^'f>.
Throw, kni^ivdra.
'i'liunder, ijejia (pa. P.)
To-morrow, waraziira.
To-night, iiilm.
Tortoise, vari.
Understand, g^rra.
Very, kUio ; ve.
Wait, tnjHii.
Wiirni, iriihtttf.
Wash, bathe, icatiiti.
Water, fresh, tdru.
" salt, tat.
U'ave, ran.
Whale, kas.
What ; (see name.)
While, /ii't^ihrit^.
Why, Imi.
Wind, //((p.
Wood, liimi'itp.
Woman, iv(il7', vaiivi.
Yam, kuri.
Yellow, artij/.
Yes, ltd.
Yesterday, riilo.
Sa or za is a very common verbal particle, used with all the tenses ; as, gir za yvtiinun,
thou wcrt absent or away; nay sa bitu, I will come; gtt a 7iinj sa muka, thou and I eat;
gu za midgi ptpi a prao, dost thou see many canoes ? These sentences, however, as
has been before remarked, can hardly be relied upon as showing the real idiom of the
language.
DIALECT OF TOBI.
429
N U M K U A L 8.
There are three classes of numerals, — the first of a general nature, the second npprti-
printed to counting cocoa-nuts, and the third used only for fish. They are as follows :
<itNIRAL.
FOa COCOA-NUTS.
rOR FI8II,
yut
su
iimul
one
Mill (fiulu,
P.)
gluii (guo, p.)
gtvimul
two
'/"
sunt
srimiil
three
ira>i
Villi
vuniul
four
i/nntm (nim, P.)
limi)
iiimiil
five
ytiivor
warn
irrirrmiil
six
//rtVIJ-
vijit
vijiemiil
seven
i/awii
wariu
ifiiremnl
eight
yatu
tia
liuemul
nine
yasik
mk
seki'ima sii
sckama glim
seka nut sirru
seka ma vau, &c.
giitk (giiu-ik. P.)
sunk
vank
Hmek
wUnk
vijik
U'urik
tiiiik {tiuii-ik, P.)
snhiin or sahuij
Sik
ten
eleven
twelve
thirteen
fourteen
twenty
thirty
forty
fifty
sixty
seventy
eighty
ninety
hundred
!i
108
1
VOCABULARY
DIALECT OF MTLLK, ONE OF THE RADACK ISLANDS.
Wk nrn indohlnd Cor this viioiilMiliiry, ns hits Ihtii clscwliorr stated (p. **?), lo llif
Hi'V. H. Hingliimi, wlio obliiiiitd llio iiinlciiuls liir it iVdin lli<.' two soiimrei, Lny mid
Hussoy, shortly ntliT tlicir rosciio from ciiiitivity. [lis cxiicrioiice in writing llic Poly-
ncsiiin idioms, and liis aniinicy in such mnttcrH, Icnvo no room to doulil tlial llio voi.'abn-
inry is as coinpli-tc as, nndcr tin; ciriMnnslancos, it conld liav(^ Iuhmi niadi'. lie remarks
conccniinfj; it, that " it is vory imiicrlcct ;" hul tho diliricncios arc such as nuisl properly
1)0 rclorrcd to ii limited knowlodt,.^ of the lan},'iiaij;e on the part of the two men, wlio
could have nccpiircd little more than u smattering; of tlie most common idioms, with such
words as were needed in the daily intercourse with the natives.
The orthoj^raphy adopted by Mr. Itingham is so similar lo that employed in this
volume, that hut I'W alterations woulil l)0 iii'cessary to make it entirely thi> sumi'. Soim
of these, such as the change of aiv to ti, of ii to n, and ol' / to (/;', wc have thoui;lil proper
to make. Ihit the double consonants etnployi'd by Mr. 15. to give a short sound to the
preceding vowel, ns in M/in for /n/iii, have been retained, as also the use of the /( and /
in sonic instances liir tho purpose of lengthening n syllable, — as moiiiarii, for mitimiii.
amani, for umiiii, ptih-o, tor jmo, &c. The combinntion r/i, which frecpiently occurs at
the end of a word, seems to Ih; rather intended to express a vague and obscure vowel
sound, than that of the consonants which com]>ose it. Of th(^ pronominal allix an/i or
«(;7/, Mr. ningham remarks that " its sound would be tolerably well cxiiressed by the
English pronoun their, by rejecting the I and removing the /( to the end ol' the word, —
thus, cii/i." I5ut in the ordinary (thougli incorrect) pronunciation of the word l/iiir, tin
(• is not heard, the sound being nearly that which would be written, with our alphaU't.
^'iii, — and it is probably some such sound ns eti wliich is liere meant to lie represented.
The possessive proniiuns given by Mr. Ii. are /, i/-ar, or, it-tiili, I ; /.ire, Ihou or
you ; id, he, she, or it ; ilntro, we. It is evident that the real word liir ynii (plural) as
well ns for llinj was unknown to his informants.
4H',»
Pil 1 1, oi,n(i Y.
The |ioiiito»«ivp or iiiflixcil |irnnoun« nrc ■nrh, my ; •i'»i, ifiy nr you j •<■», hi*, hor, ita ;
•erro, our ; -ilii/i or -iiirli, Ihcir. The Iblluwing exiiniplt's ol' llicir iiao ore givpii !
Im-iirh
my liciusc
J)/im-iiih*
my fiither
ill! •(lilt
tliy and your fioiiso
iljim-iim
thy "
im^ii
llJM liouw
i/jim-r/i
his "
iiii-irri)
our house
i//iiU'i'n'(t
our "
im-iii i/i
their houHC
i//iin-iti'i'h
Ihi'ir "
tiii-rn-inn >
whoso houio 7
lUhi'iirh *
my mother
I)j(i/iiri,
n younger hrolher or sister
ilfin-'iin
thy "
itjdtiirli
my brother (or sister)
i/Jiii-cn
his "
iljiili'i in
thy (or your) brother,
vVe.
(Ijiti-i iri)
our "
iljiiliii.
his
iljiH'iit'rli
llieir "
iljiiliirn.
our
f/jatiitrli,
their
[It is [irohnble thot the sulTix of the srcond person siiigulnr is properly, as in Tarnwnn,
limit, anil that oC the plural, itiiii ; the concluding vowels of both l)cing omitted, there
wdiild be no distiiietion liclweeii ihein.]
Ill or tail siynilies this or tliiil, as, i min ik in, n ^o<id fish this. Mrniiiu is also given
for //lis. Ailtin or ailniii f who or what .' as, aitaiii nuiiiiiiu ! what i.s this \ MirutOuiii,
what ? what is it >.
The tollowing vm'abulary is principally from that of Mr. Ilingham, A U-w words
have Ix-en addi'd from those givc^n in the narrative of the two seamen; these hove the
English orthography, which they enipluvi added in parentheses.
Adze (iron) mill.
Ankle, kiiiliiiiiiii.
Arm, hand, Inin.
Asleep, mriljiiill, nici/iiili.
Awake, mil.
Axe, i/Jiimi/i/.
Back, cUif!ii/i.
Bad, niitia.
Bad, jiailjU.
Basket, yip.
Beautiful, excellent, emman.
Belly, uiiin.
Bird, piih-o or piio.
Blanket, k.ld (oiwi/).
Bottle, bucket, &c., bfikkah.
Boy, son, loJrik.
Breadfruit, miili.
Brother, elder, '//(/( (see sister).
" younger, iljutiiii.
Build, ri.
Bury, kufi/iiiiii (cdI/i/Ikxjiii/).
Cunnon, Inikr.
Cnnoe, Ixwit, ship, ii'in or waJi.
Curve, hew, iljikiiljik (Jick-e-jick).
Cask, tiibiinh.
Chief, tainiiH (tammtum), vroit.
Chin, iljimiiiinitfin, i/Jimmiiilgii/, iljim-
miimjirh (i|U. r/jimmi, father, >ii, of,
t/iii, teeth).
Cloud (or squall), kOrrH.
Cocoa-nut, young, iii.
" ripe, iraini.
' In the lilt of words appended to the Narrative of l.uy and lluwiey, " my father," is written gimmah
(Engliah orthug.) and ** my motlier" ginnah.
DIALECT or M I M, E.
4M
Cnrna-niit iihcll, paka.
Colli, ]ii(iii.
C'onw, initio (in/to).
Curd, lino, ri)|i<', kokuiil.
('(Hint, III, liiiniii/m/i (hiinnettini).
Cut, to, Imi' (/Kunriti/).
Diirk, iiiarok.
DiiiighiiT, ^irl. liilrik, neiiji,
Diiy, run,
Dciiil, imiiii/, niimmit.
Di({, Loliikuli (iiili.r.cmili).
Divo, to, ilulnk (iliiutuck.)
DifsM, 1/1 (riic).
Drink, irnik.
UrDWiicd, iiiiilloit (iiiiilloiif:),
Eiir, l.ijliilliiiiii, /.n/i/liiiirh.
I'liirlli, liirl, iliist, nirraii.
Ent, miigiih.
Ekh, /'■/'.
Eiiixigli, Drill.
Kxccllrnt, niiinan.
I'lyi', iniililiirli.
Full, hiiiihk.
Fiislcn, i/ji/iij.
FnthtT, '/Jim or tljinia.
Fi^ht, lairiiiiii, tiiriiniii.
p'injjcr, i/jii/i!)iirt, ifjiiiilleii.
Fire, kiiljiiik (kiil-jn-ick).
Fish, ik.
Food, kiikk.in or kukkoii.
Foot or li'^, mil.
Foremost, lorwrird, amarn.
Fuel (or wckhI !), kHni (connij).
Girl, liilrik, ncilji.
Go, rt/(//, puilmn, irailnm (ti'ijlum),
God, spirit, «»|7.
Good, nimi or riiiiii ; emman.
Grass, iiiljiict {oojitoct).
Grave (s.), /»7'.
Iliind, /mil.
IlHndsiimc, tiilio.
He, slic, it, ia.
Head, /iinrllm.
Himsr, im.
Ilusbnnd, Mliii.
I, », «>-«/•.
Kill, »<JJ«ii (iiiniiiii/).
KiiiCc, timlrik.
Know, ihlliih.
Lund, umiii, iiinf.
Llirgo, ('//(/;.
1,1'nvi'H, IrllilKil {/irlli//nil).
Lie down, to, /hi/ih (Imh-lia)).
Li){lil, niiirriiiii or murium.
Linlilninn, i/iirrnni.
Live, to, iiiiiiiiirh.
Mini, mail', iiinmurn.
Maul, kiiiljii,
MiKin, nlliit).
Mother, iljiniia,
Mniilh, Iniiiii or iKi/iren,
Mii>i|iiito, tiiknti^iiji,
Mnski'l, /unit.
Nail (i>r (liiger), oufiiik.
Nail (iron), inrrri.
Ni)ihl, //(/« or /'«{).
Nose, /yl'liirt, li.lten.
Oar, pailille, ki/iliel,
(^il, /liiii/ii/r/i.
Oiilri^'t^er to eanoi', Ai/'kj.
Paddle, /iiiiiii (aiiniirii, see onr).
I' laniis, hop {liiiji).
Powder, lioltiir]).
Itnin, lit.
Uise, \!f'{ up, ih'iirikltk,
Kiipe, ^(» (/oic).
Uiin, tilliirlil.
Sail (s.), hiiiljiltii, uuiljiiltih.
Sand, /xjX'.
Saw (s.), i/irri/xiii.
Sera|H', f;iiliik.
Sit, /<(/(■ (/"//'/)•
Sew, .''(7''/7 (thillhil).
Shark, li.ikka.
Sinu;, «/(/.
Sister, elder, djtn.
" yonnyer, iljiitan (see brother).
Skilliil, dexterous, luljcllii, ailjclh.
Sky, All; (/'"',i')-
Sleep, to, iiiiiiliirti (iiuuldurah),
Ski'py, niiltigi.
Small, iiiiiiij.
Smoke, liaiU.
Son, hoy, lot/rik.
100
434
PHILOLOGY.
Star, etljii (e/eir).
Steal, miihldrh.
Slecr, kiliftiliet [kibhetebet, sec oar).
Stone, rukkah.
Strong, mmljodjau {ma-jo-jmr).
Snn, tU.
Sunrise, tiikiii ill [titckiii el).
Sunset, iliilsk at [iloolock iil).
Swill, migiitii:iit.
Teeth, niii or tjin.
This, or that, in or iaii ; mciiiiiu.
Thou, kite.
Thread, (nli.
Thunder, i/ani.
Walk, pailam or paialam.
Water, fresh, reiniin.
" salt, ISjet.
We, deno.
Well (s.), aibvt.
Whale, rat.
What is it.' miriitOani.
Who, what .' aita/i? ditanil
Wife, till or rim.
Wind, liTito (giUto).
Woman, kiirnih.
\Vork, (lerrililil.
Yesterday, iiii- (iiuKii/).
NUMERALS.
Djiittn
one
(Ijiltlmi
one hundred
RiKth
two
ruliltiii
two hundred
Til,,
three
tiliUnii
three hundred
Emit/
four
all/mi
four hundred
Ldik'tit
five
lililiui
five hundred
Dildjiiio
si.\
ilcrraliin or
ilcrrali-hiii
one thousand
Villi j ill ji mi: iljuiin
seven
Ailjinn
eight
Aililili mc ilJKini
nine
Vjiiijol or (Ititjol
ten
A comparison of this vocabulary witli that of the Radack language, given in the
A|)|x-ndi.v to Kotzebue's first Voyage, leaves no room for doubt that the natives of Mille,
though differing in some of their customs from the inhabitants of the northern islands, are
yet of the same stock, and speak the same tongue. The diirerence in the orthography of
the words is no greater than would naturally arise from the different circumstances under
which the two were made.
:'l
..
OUTLINES OF A GRAMMAR
TAR A WAN LANGUAGE.
W'k have elsowherp [pngo 90] stated the reasons wliicli linvc induced us lo apply the
ii.iiMi' "I' Tarawa to tlic group callrd by the I'lnglish tlio Kingsmill Islands, and by tlio
I'Vcinh, L'Arohipel (iillHTt. The sources from which the malcrials liave licen derived
liir lh<' graniniiir anil vocidiulary which follow are, firstly, a collecliuii of aliout four
h\inilriil words made during the brief intercourse whi<'h we had with the natives; and,
sei-ipiidly, the information obtained from two seamen, Kirby imil Grey, tin.' one Irish and
the niher Scotch, who were taken by us from the islands of Kuriu and Makin, on which
ihe\ had U'en resident, the former three and the latter live years. I'nibrtunately, we
had no 0|i|iortuuily of couununicafiug with the natives, after taking these men on l)oard,
and innlil not, tliereliire, make use of their intervention, to ac(|uire a more thoiou;;h know-
ledf><' of the language than they themselves wr-re able to furnish. Their chief delicieney
was ur [.ronunciation, in which their c^rrors were such as are usually made by uneducaleil
men, win I attempt to learn a language after reacliing middle age. The articulations tti
whiili such persons have never iH'lore Iktu accustomed can with dilliculty b<> acquired,
anil the nicer shades of sound are usually neglected.
On the other hainl, in the wonts obtaini'd by us directly from the natives, the laiigungi
In 111}; entirely strange, with no common medium of cominunication, some mistakes, as a
matter of course, were made in the meanings of words. These were alh-rvards corrected
by ilie iwo interjireters. The proiiuncialien, however, of these words was irohahly deter-
inined with considerable e .actnoss. The following list of vocables, (jive i as they were
iiblauicd by us I'rom the natives, and from each of the interpreters, will exhibit the prin-
cipal discrepancies Im'Iwccu the three, and will show the allowances which uiiist Ih' made
for iiiis|ironuiiciatii)n in the words given solely on the aiilhorily of the two seamen.
NAIIVF.
tnniiild
p<>/H>i
miimii/i
KIKRV. aREV.
miitiik miak
jwjiin, Inlm Mm
iiuiiKDji, mtidij [iiKi' tiiji, burning wi»id]
above, to windward
Arum osculentnm
ashes
436
PHILOLOGY.
aku
iigu
dgiia
back
paicne
baien
[tiiguau, bOra]
basket
biiai
biiai
biiai
beard
man
man
amfn
bird
atiii
tiliii
aile
boy
biri
dfri
tiiiin (his)
brother
Utriii
dirii
tiirti
my brother
tanmu or tarim
i/frfm
thy brother
Ilia
lien
Ufa
chief
natiu (my)
niiljii (r.iy)
/ii'u/Jin (his)
child
vki
II gi
uki
cluw, nail
vaiji
tiag
net
cloud
miiimotu, moimotu
moimot
[«/]
cocoa-nut
pod
liiii
tibin [te pi •li]
old cocoa-nut
til pa
tap
cuirass, armor
rfioiii
riiia
riiia
diUKre
yiiiga
pain
kiiina
dny
mate
mat
met
dead
hniipii, karep^
kaiiip
dra^'on-fly
?ii)iia, pima
vimii
vima
to drink
moi
mo
moi
to drink
tiiiiija, tihiipa
tdnxgia
tdtitgam
ear
kaiia
kaiia
kana
to eat
mata
mata
me tan
"ye
tamiim (thv)
ttniitm (ihy)
ttimaiia (his)
Cat her
6
ilo [!'• ()]
to
fence
ai
te [te ai]
tai
fire
ati
at
firoplncc
ika
'?
iga
fish
vintn
miy
■tiap
ny
aniardkc
amiirak
limarak
food
rniiiiui, raoioi
roir
Toiri
good
utciite
tiitiit [le utciite]
dwtiid
grass
tamiiroa
tamiiro
teniaro
handsome
tciiii.
dim or tua
diia
he
atit
edit
vadii
head
Lata, lima
/)ft, iii/ia
Uimii
house
mariiijHi, inaniapa
mump
miiniap
council-house
piii
nai
ipiii
I
apa, lieuiia
ap, liinu
t^iiji \tc apa]
island, country
fogo
VV-
notiDii
itch
P"
ba
ban
leaf
uai
wti
ven
leg
rill
nf
rin
lip
uDuine
11 man
man
man
i
TARAWA.
437
NATIVK.
KfRBV.
atiwt.
kie
/,'ie
e*
ITlftt
kamiiimui, kamoimoi
kamaimai
Uikamoi
molasses
makaiga
jiM/.aina
mahaiiia
moon
ara
era
ara
name
roroa
aroro
ton
nock
akfa
akea, aki
akea, idk
no
/xiiri
/mil-
boinim
nose
lumn
riima
riima
outrigger
k» iiai
fniiiiti
tiikapr
pntli
kitiuki
tikimo [Ic kimo(i\
tikimo
nit
tuiiri
tiiiir
tiiri
sea, salt water
?i(wiia
iiaoria
e/iorio
see it
titmimc
tmiirir
shadow
« lie
diifiie
[liikalaka]
to sing
tiknhka.
ihkiiilik
tikiiliki
to sit
kiiiawa
kuiitvii.
kitrima
sky
main
malu
[krrii, <j:ini'\
to sleep
Uino, tan
tim
tiiiin
soil, sand
piioloH
hiritii
liiritii
stomach, belly (my)
alijiii, iilip
aiib
tiili;ip
stone
iiuii
taaig
Uii
Sim
kdfkan
kaijknn
kiujkinj
sweet, palatable.
noiiu
IIOIIIl
luma
to swim
Kijgoe, t)g(>c
iiijfie, iygc
ivei
thou
nine
neriiii
tongue
laijiliiiji
tatjitinji
eta-g
to weep
ok mi
dgua
lisiia
whale
tcra
tim
tigara
what ?
pa
ya
ana
where !
iintiii
aiitai
anda
who?
'I'lie chief ditrerences which will he remarked are (1), the change in the vowels from
n l)rcin<l to a slender sound, us < itiii and inh for «/<//, iteri' (or liiri, S:c. ; (2), the frequent
omission of the coneludiiig vowel, as, iiaij for «f(;.t, unit for mute, ijoii for ijoijn; (.S), the
coalescence of the article te with the nouns, as, tai, fire, for te at, liittil, grass, for te
iitciitc; (4), tlie shifting of the accent, which is usually thrown back, as amiirak and
dmariik (nr aiiiiiriike, tikimo Cor te kimiiii ; (.5), the change of consonants of the same
class, as, /' anil /), t and //, v ami ir, ij and ii, k, ,i', and /., — and somelinirs those of ilif-
ferent classes, as /', /', and </. Some discrepancies in the lists must be referred to a
dilli'ri nee of dialect between Miikiii and the southern islands, as likani, what, for tera ;
krrii, sleep, for nuiln.
The grammatical characleristies have been deduced in part from the sentences written
down from the pronunciation of the natives, but chielly from the communications of
Kirliy. lie was a man of consideriible intelligence, had married the daughter of the
principal chief of Kiiria, and had the best opportunities for acquiring c knowledge of the
110
438
PHILOLOGY.
Ianguni;c. His nrqunintancc with its idioms was more extensive thnn might bo inferred
from his (icrcclivo prnniiiieiation. Many deficirncios, however, still remain to bo supplied
in the follmviri!; grammatical sketch, and some errors will possibly iiave to bo corrected
on further invesligiition.
O R T II O C 11 A I' II Y.
The following remarks upon the snimds fif the lan^irigc were written immediately afier
leaving 'I'.ipiitcoiiea (Dr-iimniond's I,), and lKll)re we look on hoard the two sailors : —
" The arlii'idnlions are very dilfK'idl to calcli, owini; to the gullnr.il and indislincl jiro-
nuneialioM; heneo arose, at (irst, many siiimilar n)isi;diis jji writing them, such as the
use of I and even h instead of i' .■ /' for ii and vice veisn ; il liir }\ iVc. They had no f.
It, J, i, or V. 'i'he /, whii-h was once or twice written, was picipi'riy an /■ ; /) and '' are
the same sound; as are t and il, k and f. The « is eonniinn, and in a li'W instances llie
sorter nasal sound of the I'Vench laiigiiaue was heard. There are several comhinalinns
of consonants, as nl, »s, iiii\ iir, \e. .Most ol'the wonis teruiin.ate in vowels, and where
till' contrary appears, the consonant is pronounced with a sort of prolonged utleraia'e, as
though there were a vowel suppressed : which we presume to havi' been really the case.
Diphthongs are nmuerous, and being pronounced with great (pliekne^s, their orlhogr.iphy
is som<'limes doubtful, — as, ui or tii, ixi or ok, iw or iii.
" The accent is ollen placed on thi' antepenult, — rarely on the l;ist syllable. \\ hen a
possessivi' pronoun is allixed to a noun, the accent is shilled liirward one syllahli'. as
ii]ici, country, tijiniiiii, thy country."
In the pronunciation of Grey and Kirby thi' .sounds /. /, r, .< und r were bi'ard. but
they seenieil, in all eases, to \»' corniplions of other elements, as, /,, I, and ir. If the
language shoidil, heri'.ilii'r, be studied on the spot by a I'oinpelent person, the lunnber ot'
consonant sounds will probably lie reduced to eight, viz.: — /., m, ii, ij. /i, r, t, ir, being
(with the exception of the ij) the same elements as are found in the Hawaiian.
ET V MOLOi; V.
Properly speaking there ar<> no indecliuns in the laiigii.'iL'i'. The accidents of case,
numbiT, tense, mood, \-c., are denoted either by independent words, or by alli\ed [larli-
cles. 'l"he panicles, however, sometimes coalesce with the word to which they belong,
in such a manner as to have the appearance of inlleclions.
■I' II i; A Ii 'lie I, i:.
The arlii'le is tr, which seems to 1m' merely the word for nm: Il is used, however,
befori! nouns in the plural as well as in the singular, — though, possibly, in the li>rme:r
ease, they in.Ty have a eollccllve signification, and Ik' regarded as singular. It t.ikes
the place of both our arli(des, as : —
Tia kii/iii ft: lii, I eat the fruit.
Antai /latwarai n' te tajxi, don't stab me with the knili".
TARAWA.
439
ii iKiitrarnk //' Ir tiijxi, sinbbcd witli n kiiifo.
Iriliiiiu Ic iiiiiiiiilii, till" men (lisliki' liim.
Tia liomi ti' ii'imi, 1 iiikIimsIuiuI iIh" swimming.
It Is possible thill nnothi'r iirliric, ii or c, really exists in the lnngim;;e, nlllii)u;;h it was
not p-rooiveil by the inler|>reters. On iii(|iiiiinj; of a native the wonl for iiicii, he gave
both te iKiniKlii. ami a ixniuilii ; in other eases, a similar parlii'le seemed to be used, but
our o|i|)orluuilles did not enable us lu determine its iwuct im|iort.
T II i; s I' n s T A \ T I V i:.
'Pile gender is disliiigiiished, when neeessaiy, by the words (iiitniir, man or male, and
iiiii'C, wuiiian or ll'male. When Ihe snbsttmlive signilies an irralioiia! ereiiture, these
wonls are ji|i|ieiided iintiirdialely to it ; as //to' ////iti///'^ a eoi'k ; ///n^ i//i/if\ a h'-ii. When
it is a term used only of persons, the parliele /// is inserted, as, (ifni //i ////tit//i\ a Mian-
ehild ; t//t/i i/i «/;«e, a girl (perhaps, a ehild i///it)//i: men, \e.); til >/i »/»"/"■, an old
man t hi /li niiiir, an old woman.
Case is denoted l>\' prejiositions prefixerl to tli'- siihstanli\t'. The most common .'iri'
///, of, lor, from, aiiioii^', by ; i, to, al, in ; /,(//, \" : /ii and n/i/i/i/. from, aiiioiit;, about.
lx.'longiiig lo; t/ia, wilb, by. It should !«• observcil, however, ihal //;, /', ami n/u .are the
only prepositions wliiidi euii inmiediiilely precede ihe noun. The others uiust have the
tirst of these («t ux «') alh'r tliein, as, itki iii /'(«', nail of linger; / Kii/in, in Kurin;
ma Ir ihn, with the lish. W'itin kai/i tc tiiiiir, carry it lo llx' woman. Jiii// ti/iniii.
from thy inoiher.
'I'he panicle /;/ frcrpientlv loses its Vowel, as in the iiist.'iiices just given, and is ilien
suffixed lo the preceding wcud, whether noun, verb, or preposiiioii, as, i/iii/n/iji// Ir m,
ashes of the lire; id Iki/i tiitni, 1 tun done with lidling. liy tlf inlerpreters, a vowel
;' or (' «as iVeiiuenlly inserted beliire the ", as, ko In/link in a/il/, thou art great among
spirits. This, bowi'vcr, w is probably only the final letter of ihe preceding word omilled
in their usual prouuncialioii {l/iil>i/k for ImUik/), and reinserled when it iR'c.-ime necessary
in oriler to separate two consonauls ; Ihe foregoing phrase >liould therefore properly be,
ko hiih^iki //* find.
We could discover no iiioile ol' dislinguisliiiig the iiugular iVoui the plural, except by
prefixing llie words //ti/ili tind IniilKlr (many), as may be seen in Ihe v.icabulary. It is
possible that other modes may exist, hn', if so, they are si'ldom used. In general tlic
number of the thing or things spid\cii of is to lie understood from the context, or from
circumstances.
T II F. A I) J i; V. T I V i;.
The same word is ollen used, with no idiange of form, as substantive, adjective, and
verb; Ihiis, «/«/// means '•life," "alive," and "to live." The exact meaning is deter-
mined by the eolloealion. 'I'he adjective iinmcdialely succeeds the noun which it ipiali-
(ies, — as, ii//iit//r /t///ii, good man. When an adjei-live precedes a iiomi, it takes a verbal
signification, or, at least, the substantive vc-b is to be understood between them, — as.
I
i
h
f If
f
440
PHILOLOGY.
amiiKiu le buok, the war is long. In like manner the adjective liccomcs a verb by taking
the prononiinnl prefixes, — as, lia andnnii, I ntn tail ; ko Imbaki, thou art great.
The degrees of comparison are expressed by the prepositions kai and ni, which are
placed arter the odjeclive, oiid are tiien to h: rendered Ihan and amonf;, — as, Tin ananuii
e kdiiii, I am taller than thou (lit. tall to thee). Aiitai anunttu e nir, who is the tollest
of us (lit. who is tall among us) I
N U M !■; R A L S.
The natives ol'Taputeouea furnished us with several sets or classes of numerals, which
are probably used in cnuntini; objects of ditl'erent kinds ; but on this point we had no
moans of ol)lainin)i iVoni them any oxplanalion. The interpreters, also, although they
were aware of the exislence of these several classes of words, and believed lliem to have
distinct applications, yet were unable to give any precise information respecting them, and
were accustomed to use them indillerently. They thought, however, that those which
terminated in iiuuiii were used in reckoning i/ioiifhs or iiiooi/s, and those in ^)oi) for t/ai/s,
(or rather iii^'/ils.) It is possible that those which end in ua are used in counting ^xiiVs,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/e
ua
teiii
a
/limii
Olio
iti
odnii, uanii
run
10 trgaun, fe/iiiina
teai
Una
tnnniia
tejH)gi/a
ua
xiua
uiimatia
udjnij or ual>0}j
ti/ia
teiiua
truimtuia
tenijiog
(1
li ua
iiinana
llJIOff
iiinwa
imdua
imamana
iinajiotj, &c.
onca
oiidua
onomaiia
ilia
itiua
ilitiiinui
oumi
(Mt/iua
uiuiiiuana
ua{\)
niiiuu
iinmana (?)
tegauii
trhutiui
Idjuuaii
The higher numbers are as Ibllows :
20
ualmi
30
triiibui
40
aliiii
50
nimnhui
60
ouolmi
70
iti/iui
eo
nnnliui [thi
90
ruiihui
100
te yd
200
mi ijd
300
teni ijii, &c
lil/ui .'I
1 ,000 c rrpu or rcpii
2,000 ua rrpu
3,000 t'ni/ipn (for ton roiu)
4,000 « rrpu, &c.
10,000 U- kiul
20,000 ua kuri
30,000 Uiii, kuri, &c.
One of the natives, in counting his fingers, used what s("emed to be ordinal ninnbers,
formed by prefixing ka and sullixing ija, — as, ka iiriya (!), second ; ka tiiiaiija, third ;
ka aiija, Iburth ; ka ?iimdiija, fifth.
TARAWA.
441
P K O N o r N s.
The personal pronouns, when used soparatoly mid independently of other words, are
as fullows :
tjai, I
pffiy fir injgi)c, thou
teua, he
Wirt, she
ynnd, we
Hti^iuiii or •! 1)1x11 III i , yc
i'ii/cii/,i, llicy (inii.sc.)
ii(i/c'i/.i, Ihcy (leni.)
There are three li'miniiie prommns of the third person singular. Sia is used in
speukingof a person who is absent; iiiiii or /((/////, when she is present; nnd^dwor
niyire in like nianuer, but with a respeelliil .sijiMiliciitiou. Kirby rendered it "that lady."
The personal pronouns, when |irelixed as noiriiualives to a verb, have n dillerent Ibrm.
They nre tia {or in), \ or we; /.o, ihou ; e (or in), ho or they; ijkam, ye ;— as, lia
wmriii, I .see it ; Ld nanriti, thou seesi it ; r nawia Una or nin, he or she sees it ; lia
nuorin ijairii, wo see it ; ijImhi naiirin, ye sec; it ; <■ naoria tcukaki or iiiiLuld, they see it.
It will be remarked that in the first and third persons plural, the separate pronouns are
appended to the verb, in order to distinguish thcni I'roui the sinj;ular. l<i is useil in the
first person instead of /if/ belbre the preterite partiele /ifi/f, probably Ibr eu|)bony— as,
tui in lit, 1 sew it ; ia liiui iiri'i, [ have sewed it. It is used also liir the third person,
as, ill iiiaiiiii nil liipii rti, my knili- is lost to me.
The pronouns have still another Ibrni when alHxed to verbs in the objective case.
They are iii, me ; ho (or ifj) thee ; ia, him, her, it, or them ; ura (ar or '/), us ; and
kami (or -ami), you; as, kupf, to tie; kiipiai, tie me; kiijiiho (or ktijicL-o), tie thee;
kapcia tcua or iiiu or u-akaki, &c., tie him, lier, or them ; kupiani, tie us ; kapikiimi,
tie you.
The possessive pronouns have also two liirms, separate and affixed. The former,
which precede the noun, are as follows :
au, my
am' ((|U. amu?), thy
anil, he
f(/«, our
iiiiii, your
ana, irakaki (?), their
As, f<« Affm, my relation or kinsman; aw' kaia, \\\\ ; iiiia kara, his; ara kuia,o\ir
relation ; ami kiini, \ our ; ana kara irakaki, iiukiki, their, &c. The latter Ibrm is,
however, doubtful.
The possessive pronouns, when postti.xed to nouns, are nearly the same with the sepa-
rate elass, merely dropping the initial vowel. They are ii, my ; //i' or nut, thy ; na,
his; ra, our; mi, your; ia (/), their. The last is doubtful, and may have rather a
dcmonslralive meaning. The fillowing examples will show the manner in which these
pronouns are united with a substantive.
ini, canoe
unit, mv eanoe
tiima, father
tamuii, my father
111
k
!
442 PII 1 1, oi.OG V.
irkiii\ thy raiKM"
irdiiii, his c'liniK!
triirii, (iiir ciiiioc
ifdiiii, yiMir ciiiiix;
vaid, llicir wiiioc (.'), .ir those cniim's
liiiniiiii, tliy liitlirr
tiimiiiiii, his liilhiT
tiiiiiitni, cMir DilhiT
liiiiiih/ii, yiiur I.iiIkt
tamuiii, Ihiir (!) liilhcr
What (hstiiiclioii, if any, p.\isls in the niipliciilion ciriht'sr iwn cliissi-s of prnnoiiiiH, wo
conic! not li'arii. In sonii' rasrs ihi'V serin to Ix' nscd imhlliiinlly, as, mi Imhi and
ImiIiiii, my hoiisi'. 'I'lic siillixccl |ir(iiii>iiiis an' always ii^cii willi llic |>rr|>(isili(ins, instead
oftlie ohjei'live fcirni cil'ihe pM'sunal, wliicli would seem to lie uiiisl eorreel. 'I'lliis ill (or
niii) of or willi ini' ; rum, of iheo ; rum, of or anKin;{ us; ruiiii, of you ; in llie third
person a dillerent I'orm is used, heinjj the preposition »' {«i), and tin; personal pronoun,
as, rim trim, iiin, viihiiki, mikiiLi, of hiui, her, them.
The demoMstralive pronouns are li>rineil hy means of tlio adverbs iii, here, imd iiri,
lliere, poslli.xed to the nnun, with the artic le If precediui;, — as, tv Inilii iii (or If I'lilai),
this house ; Ir IhiIii iiri (or le htihiri), that luiuse. lain wiis used hy Kirhy as a plural
form, as, aiiliiia liijiiiui iiiin? whose knives are those ! It ma) he douhted wlielher this
is correct.
'l"ho interrogative pronouns are iiiildi, \\\\o\ Inn, iir trrui, whiil I iiiiirii, iiiiii/ni, or
anu/riii, what ! what for? era or irii, how many ! iiii, which ( Aiiliii, wlien it pri'cedos
n vcrh, usually takes in after it, to distinuuish it from ihi' prohihitive particle niitni, "do
not," us, iiiitiii ill i/iriijii, who U'ats him ! iiiilui i/irinin, do not U'at him. Tor exam-
ples oftlie other iulerro<;ativcs, see tlie vocahulary.
There are no relative pronoun. , their olHce Iwiiij,' sup|>lied hy the construction of the
sentence, as, e im te Inpn Im iiiniin rrii, where is the knil'e [tliatj yon received [it| from
me \ III till le hnta l;o hntiia, is the house linished [which] you were hiiildiiiir [it J '
T H E V I] It B.
There nre several particles which serve to distinguish the tenses and moods of the
verb, hut they arc fre(|uently omitted when the sense is clear without them.
The present has no particular sign, unless the « or c which was freipiently heard at
the begimiinf; of a sentence may he looked iijion as such. Rut it s. cms to l«' in most
cases an expletive, or at least ii mere sign nf a verbal signilii'ation, as it is used with the
|iasl and future tenses as well as with the present. This same part' de, « or ^, occurs
continually in the sentences as given by the interpreters, in places where no mr'aniiii,'
whutever can be nliixed to it. It si'oms to lie ollen introduced for euphony alone, and
wc arc inclined to believe that in many cases it was miTcly a misproniuieiation of the
terminal vowel, which, ns has Iwen hellire iulim.-ited, is usually very lightly prnnounced
by the natives, and was freipienlly suppressed altei;ether hy the liireigners. 'J'hus the
phrase, c riik r te niiiiil e miniii, a man comes aller thee, shcjuld piol'ably he, r rokn ti
(Himiitii miiiniii.
Till (which iiiu-.t not he cojiliiunded w ilh thr> pronominal pn fix Im. I), means to
fiiiiuli, or to hr ihiie wilh any tiling; with iIm' particle ii allixed, it lieenmes linn, ami is
then used as a sii/n <if past time, fir compleled action; as, «■</(/, sew it ; in tiii/i in in,
I have sewed it, or am done wilh sewing it.
T A K A \V A.
443
Na in iho sif!n of the I'litiirn. Tia /iii inin, I will sew il.
Kniiu is iisid wliiTc in I'^iifili^li wo should ciniilny the wonis " uniiig to," or " iihoiit to.'
7'ia /xiiiiii in ill, I am jioiii^' l<i sew it. limiii nil Ir iinli, \hr I'lii'idi's will soon rise,
hiiiiiii, f;(iiiiii, Iniiii-fidiiiii, ir, iiro |iri'ri.\i'(l to vcrlis to llirm the cojidilional ni'Hid, in
which c'lisc ihi'V liilic till' |ilac(! oI'iIk^ pri'ciMlin;; |jarlirli's, — us, hiiinii. /,ii jmni, tin /.niiiii-
fcf"!), il' ihoii strike nil', I will kill ihee ; li<iiii-i:iiiiiii l.o jhkii ijI^hii, Un m<i(i-, il' Ihnn liad.st
strni'k Mil' then, tlion wrrt di'ad.
/»!/, thai, in onlei' to, (l(!sij;nnl('s the siihinnitivr' or inliriitivi' nioml, as, (y/.in;/ humil-
1111)1111 lint Kiiiiuilriii, yc aro di'i'rivinj; ni" that yo may kill ino (or in oriirr to kill).
Nil iji/m/,0 11/ inn Kiiliiiii^n, I am coniini; to oil Ihoi'. Allrr /.') Ihi/i parlii'lc Ijcrumi'S iia,
ns, nini, Ln iin nm, roino that llmil niayrsl drink. Inn is nsed in asking' |ii'rinissiun, as,
inn niiiin, may I ilriidv !
I\ii, prrlixi'd to a vcrh, !;ivcs it a caiisativi' sense, ns, niiilc, to die; hnmalr, to eansc
to die, to kill ; IhiIhi, to Tail, ImIkiLii, to ranse to Call, to throw down.
'J'lie relki'live and reiiprocal forms lire inajo hy simply alllxini,' to the verh the
ohjeelive proiiiiims of the same person with thi.' nimiinnlive, as, tia ,',nniii/ciii, I kill
niysrll'; /,r) /,n/iii;n, thou ties! ihysill". llhini in/,iii::nnii rnimi, ye love one another
anioni; ynnrselves (iln; preposition rn U'lng nenssary lo ilistini;insh the rociprotal I'rom
the relleclive).
The imperative is the verb in its simplest Corm, as, nit/,n, no I iniu, sew it !
The passive partieiph; is formed hy siilhxijii; «/.■ or 7,- (perhaps r//,/) to the vcrh, as,
kiirn/iii, le hide; l^nriipnl; (or hnrnpaiik), hidden; y«), lo strike, y/iw/,-, struck.
'I"he liilliiwin;,' paradii;m will show the manner in wliiih these pnrtii'les, and the pro-
nominal allixi's, arc united to the verb.
nnla, to tall.
/in htda n"i, I fall
ko Imkn. ihoii (hllesi
e IniLn trim, hi' Dills
till link'! miira, we fall
^kniii /"tkn, ye fall
e Ixikn niikaki, they fall
in. linn Inikii, 1 have lidlen
kotinn Imkii, ihon hast fallen
(■ tiitn linkn Inni, he has lidlen
la Inn Imkn iiniiii, we have Ihllen
jfkuni linn Ixikii, ye have fallen
r linn Itnka wnknki, I hey have lidlen
till nr liikn. 1 shall liill
ki) nn liiikn, llioii will fall
r nn iiiil.n Imn. he will f'lll, iVe.
tin knnn I'likn. I am .:hoiil In fall
kii knnn Iml^n, llimi art ■\\v:[\\ lo liill
F kaiiii Uika li-iin, he is i;ii|;ii; lo lull, ilVic
knniii Iin Imkn, if 1 fall
kanui kn Imkn, if thou tall, vVc.
inn Imkn niii, that 1 may fall
inn Imkn iniitiv, or /
ko nil Imkn, S
inn Imkn lean, that he iiiiiv fall.
that thou niavcst fall
hinliikn, to cause to liill, to throw down.
tin k'llinknni (iir kiilmkiii) 1 cause myself
to liill
Iia kiiliiikn^i), 1 cause thee lo full
//(' kn/iii/niin, 1 cause him to (all
till kniiiiknnin, I cause us to fall
till kalinhniinnii, 1 cause you In fall
till kn/inkniii irnknki, 1 cause them to fall
/,() k'l/Hiknni, llioii causesi me to lidl
/.() kiilnknun, thou c;niscsl thyself, iVc.
(■ knimknni Imn, lie causes me to Ihll
f knlmkn^i) Imn, he causes ihce to fall
li'i kninj.iini ijniiii, we cause me to lidl
//(' knl'iikii'm iinirn, we cause ihee to full
444
PHI LOl.OO Y.
j)k(tiii hilxikiitii, yo cause me to fnll ko iia kiiliitkaara, thou wilt cniiso us, &c.
gkiim ku/xikug(tmi, yo cnuav youiwlvcs to tin kiiiid knlKikuuo, I am going to cnuao
lull thee to fall, iScc.
id hiui kdliuktifin, I have caused th«' to Ihll
k» tiiin kahikmii, thou linst ciuiscl luo, &c. Kii/iikiik, causod to foil, thrown down.
fia mi kii/'tkuiii, I will cauao him to lull e kalmkiik te tajnt, the knifo is thrown down
The prtvciling rcumrks nnd cxiimplcs arc sulTicicut to givo n general knowledge of
the most striking grnnunnticnl clmracteristiesof the Tarnwan langimge. Concerning the
reniuiuing purls of speech, and the rules of conslrucliun, nothing furtlier need b<; udiled
here. The voealnilnry, which Ims U'en made as coinplele as possilile, will furnish many
mslunces of idiorus peculiar lo llii>i tongue ; hut it has seemed U'st not to iillempi, on
every point, niinnle explaualimis, whii h, eonsiileriiig the deli'ctiveness of our materials,
would have liecu likely often lo Icail into error. What has l)cen here giviu will |w nulli-
cient to cnahio the student of comparative philology lo determine tli(> relations of this
toM!;uo to others, and to assign to it its prop<T place in the family lo which it belongs.
^. )
.
I
A VOCABULARY
I
T A R A VV A N LANGUAGE.
Note. — Tho words marked with an asterisk are those which were
obtained directly from the natives, and of which the orthography is
therefore more hkely to be correct than that of tiie rest of the vocabu-
Uiry, furnished by the two interpreters. The words arc, in general,
given as they were written down, though, in some cases, where the
alteration produced by the incorrect pronunciation of the interpreters
was evident, the word has been restored to what was plainly the cor-
rect form. When the two men ditfered from one another, or when,
from the indi-stinctness of the pronunciation, a difficulty was expe-
rienced in determining the exact pronunciation of a word, the varia-
tions have been given in brackets,— sometimes with the initial of the
interjireter attached to it, wlien there is a possibility that the discre
pancy may indicate a difference of dialect.
113
s^.
A^<
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
//
// >>.^
lis < ^^^
1.0 Sfut m
"Hi 122
1.1
: us 12.0
t^i
1.4
1.6
<^
p^
K^'
^.^'
j^'
/}
Y m
op.
HiotograiJiJc
Sciences
Corparation
^.
» WIST MAM STMIT
WIU1<t,N.Y. USW
(71«) t72-4M»3
>^^
T A R A W A N V C A B U L A 11 Y.
A, n I'uphoiiic ])nrtic|p of frotjiipiit occur-
rpiico In the liingiiagc, ns s|iok<>ii l)y
the inlcr|m>tprs. It inny Ik:, in siiim-
cnsps, nn article (see the Grammar).
*A, lour.
Aai [t'iKii, G., t'uaik, K.], the sun (see
/(Hit).
Abii, end, I'Xlreinity, lop. E kakapii fahun
nil ii/ii, the end of my needle is sliar|i.
Ko taiiiotiim i tuliiin li- ni, climb lo
Itie lop of the tri"e.
*Ahiiiiiimi, shoulder (see aija).
* AliiiniU:i [nhiin, G.], finger (see /*(*).
*Ahiiiiiwai, Imit or toe (se<' «■«»).
*Af!u or (i/i/'i b<u'k (sei' f;nf:ii, k<i/:nmi).
*Ai [i\, fire.
*Ai [cj, here ; this. E rniiri (niiiiriii),
te Ai ai, e Imtikakii tc ki <iri, the mat
here is good, the mat there is )>ad.
Antiiiu •mil iiif »lio.n canoe is this !
Ai, me (an alfix). Aiiti,: jxHii, don't
strike mo,
* Aid, jes.
*Aiai, this, these.
*Aiari, that, those.
*Aiine or iitiii\ woman, P'male, E ImVuir
te tiiitie, many are the women, li'iiii
te nil) iiiiiii', egg of the hen (lemalc
fowl).
Atiiik (or iiriok or nii^ok), to lie rricn<lly ;
(rii'iidship. 'ham aiiokf are ye
friends !
I *Aio, there.
Aiiiri ((!.), like (see era).
. Akiulil^ (G. (|U. kiitili.'), knife of shell.
Akiii (see kiii).
•vU<(/, no, not. h'o iikeii tain, thou dost
I not know (siv //'/).
I *Aki, not. Aki nakii mat, not coming.
Aki<leria (G.), deep; far off.
Am, thy (pr<'fi.\).
Amnii, month. Emman aman, how
many months?
*Amiiiiikr [iiimirnk], fiKjd, victuals.
Amila, iiiiiilrii, aiiiraf what is it f what
for ?
Ami, your (plural).
' Amo, to carry on the shoulder ; slick (or
carrying a burden on the shoulders of
two men.
Ann, his.
* Ann, Ix^low (opiMised to eln\.
Ann, to take, receive, get, bring, take hold
of. .1/((/' niiiiin, coiiii' and take it. E
ijn Ir Inpn ko nmiin rni? where is
the knile yon got from me '. Anokon
mm iinlun //■ ruh in te nt tii tieniak,
go and bring for mc; sonic clay
from the niullet.|Hmd. Mni nun te
mniii en, come and take hold of this
rope.
Ann/,niii ((!.), slave.
*Aniiiinii, long, tall ; a long time ; to last
long. 7V(j nnniinii ma iiiisine, I am
as tall as you. Anannit tuiijfin ijni
I nikiii, I have wailed for you long
TARAWA.
447
horp. Aniinau te huo/, the wiir is
*Aiir [uiirne or liniiii^, <*<»ig, to sing,
•.i;/m, must iiC vessel.
Am run ((«.), laro-pit (scm- ;•««).
Alio, inside (see nanaii).
Aiitiii, (Id not, lorlxinr, desist. Antiii
i/iriifh; dnii't beiil us. J iilai kiitiiijni,
don't make nii! cry. Aiiliii knmn-
riikr^o, diin'l hurt yoursell" {svc tai,
tiii/iii).
*Ant<ii [uiii/ii, (!.), wliii f Aiittii iiniii
iijMtiiii f who is the rhiel" oC your
liiiid ? Aniiii ill ilirhikiiiiii ! who Ih'mIs
you.' Ao iri nia 'iilni? you eaiiic!
with whom ? A/i/iii la kaniiuakrfio!
who hurt you ?
*.\nli [mil, K., Cf«^;, fi)r te iititi, G.],
spirit, (jfMl. K /mrxi 'Ihhiierik in ciil !
how is Tahui'rik nmon<; spirits or
divinities f
Aniiii [iiitiii], ink Hir taltonini;.
Aniiiiii, K., ««/o or »//»/i, (i., whoso?
Aiilhiii tiijm ai? whoso knife is this \
Aiilit iron III .' whose ennoe is this ?
Ap, wind, li Imiliele te iitj, there is niueh
wind.
Ayii, shoulder. Hin'iiwi, h<jne of the
shoulder, seapula.
Apiirii, axe.
Aori ! seo ! brhold ! (sec tiaori),
*AjKi \iij), K., a/m, (!.], land, country,
earth. Antiii moil iipiiiiii f who is
iIh' eliiel' of your land .' Inn te up
[/ii// A,"/'], on the earth, litiil c tr
ii/>, the land is hi^h.
AjMiiii [ilKiiii, ti.], linished, complete ; all,
every Ihinji, entirely. A/Miiii in
kiiniik, all eaten (si^e /«/«/, kii/xuii).
'Ajuijxi/, /, <,'reat (.see ImlHiki).
'Ajiii, hasket.
*A/iiiji, Imjx made ornialtin;;.
Ajmn (•!.), it is, it was. Ajmn iiani, it is
your eanni'. Ajx>n tiiiinii, it was his
lirolher.
'AjH}, lish-line.
Am, our. Am mni, our lirc-pliice.
Am, very. Am Imhnni, iirii bahak, very
lar;;e, very jjrrnt.
Am, current in it»' sea. Iiii te urn f is
there a lurn-nl ?
*Ara, name. Antui nruni ' what is thy
name !
Amiiiii, lon-i<;n rope.
Ariiiii, thread.
Ari, tlii're, yonder: that. ?>• m art
i»</m«/, that low tree. Anitko iiri, ^o
j yuich'r.
Ari, the day al)er. Siiialiii o iiri o iiri,
to-morrow and the day alliT and the
day al'ter.
'Ari, eyehrow.
Aria (( ;.), calm.
I *.\tiii [.y/.;;]. child.
I Aliii [eiliii^, ri;;hl, dexter.
Aim, who (see nntiii).
Al, liver. Ill kiiinii:: ii knin i In mo ntitii,
his wound is jireat, n'aching to his
liver.
*Alii, a ^t.'iy to a mast, a M|>o.
Ali, child ; iitinii, his child ; ntim. our
child (se.' iit-ii).
Ali, fire-place; stone usi'd in makins; a
(iri'-pl:ici'.
Ali, ihatcli. Alin uiiitin, thitch ot" thv
house.
*Ali/)ii [iilili, K., t'iit;iji, Ii.], a stone.
I Alia, hold it (see iriti).
* Alii ["/»], head. Titiiliukan te <//». lop
ol'tlle llc'lld.
* Atiinijxii, wrist.
All, my. All kum, my relaliun.
*.]iiii, liiur.
Aiiiitii (Ii.), many.
Ati/iOf)<i, Iridacna (sliell-lish).
Aiiileriii ((i.), evil spirit, devil.
Aiirii,iiiiriuiiirii, s\\mm'i. j;lowing, blazing ;
H'd hot.
Aiili I""';], a louse; the (lonMipine llsh.
I'linin I'liiiti, cap ninile of the skin of
the porcupine tish.
Aiili,\\v I'leiadcs; al.so winter (m-koncd
I'roin the ap|)enmncc of this constel'
hition).
448
I'll I I.OI.Od Y.
1
Auti4i or iiwljio (O.). '" <li(J- ■^''" '""
auiljiti le muiiiop, cuna' unci dig llio
well.
Ainriirn (0.)i •''» •» ''" !
B
/f(i, oil ; rcM'im-nut oil.
Bit, rock. A' innitrii le Im If iiimntuni,
llu- pcrittiiiklr slicks to llic rcK k.
*]i<i, II Iciil' of n IriH'. Iiiiiii, cocoii-mit
It'll r.
7J(/, tliiindi'r. A" inni u- /«/ i/r/.' do you
hear llic lliiiiider llicri' \
Bn-iii-iiiata, tc'iii|p|r, lioiisc ol'»|iirils.
Biilmki, yri'iil, liiri;<'. In IhiIkiI; a kniii,
my wound is (jrcnl. Dukor <■ /.» Im.
Inik ill urn, truly tlimi iirt iiri'iil iiiiiiiii<;
rliirl's. K /iii/nik 'I'lipiiltiiiiiii^'Y. (\\\v
i.xland) is liirf,'r. (Sii- n/Mijin/ki, knlm-
Ixik.)
*Biii or jMii, arm, liaiid, '1\ miihikii iii
kiii, \vnf,\\\ o( arm (a infasiirc). On
<• Ihiiii, my tuiiid is liill.
*B(ii I'm, /k, y« ], u ll)i'\i;, any lliilifj,
Konii'tliiDi;; an instriiiiii'i'l, iin|ilriii('iit;
a on'atiiri', a liviiiy liiiiii;. /■,' /mkc If
hit, that thing is thrown down. 'IV
Ihii III kiimik, soiiu'thiii^ to lir cnlon.
tiiii III liiitiii, im|ilciiii'iil liir tattiniini;.
Aiiliii kiiiiiiilr Ir Inii, dMii't kill that
(•rcatiiro. (S<i' Imi, which is prolialily
tho saiiii' Word.)
Bai, very (imly used in roiniHiiind words).
Bai/irle or bnilinti, much, many, a great
deal ; grrally. /i UiiUlr le nun ruin,
there is much lilood ahoiit thee. A'
Imiliele If htlioi, there is a grciit deal of
laro. K iKiihle I'iririii, gi'eat is the
heal. Ji tmiliele le niiiir, there are
many women. Ko /mi/icte "n ihiliri,
you are very cross. (Sih; Irle.)
Biiiliiiiikti or /xii/iiiii/, ((i.), very Imd, vile,
Iwse. (.''H'c hiiiikii.)
Biii-ni-kiularii/liirii , a spy-glass (i. e., an
instrument lor causing to sec.)
Biii-ni-kiiiuhiiiii, a razor; (instrument fiir
cutting lieard.)
Oaiiiakii, honored, sncrcd. E Iminitka
iiii/irr, she is honored.
Biiin-uiiiiiii, it". Buiii-pniiiii tin iiiifio
iiir/tiii, till ilinniiio knvniiii iii nun,
il° I dnviin atioiit you to-night, I will
tell you the sub.stance of my dream.
(Sec kniini.)
* Bnieiir, luiskct.
liiiiii [Imiiii, (•.], nose. (See rnkn-lmir.)
Ihiilnr [liiiliiri, (!.|, hololhuria, sea-slug,
hirlio tin iiini-.
Baku \linkn or Ihi/ii], to liill ; to set, as the
sun. Irik nliiii o e Imkn mn nirniiiiiik,
his head turned round and he I'cll in a
lit. Kniin Imkn le kiirii, the rain is
going to Call. I' Imkn lnnik,\\w sun
is setting. (See knlmkii.)
linkn (ti.), to throw. 11 bnka fiiii r ijiii,
throw it to me,
Bnkninr, to slight, contemn. Kn /mkni-
iiiiii, you slight me; (opposed to
inkni.)
* Bnknhiin, a nsh-s|H'ar.
*Jinki, hungry.
liiikiii, greatness. (See Imkin.)
' Bnkini, shark.
• Biiiiiiili, iH-ads.
Binjii ((!.), cannot, know not how. JC
luiim liriliri, he cannot lie angry. II
Ik'iki noun, I don't know how to swim.
(S'-e /Hi/uitKi.)
Jinni ((■.), dirt, dirty. Bnrn in le ni,
ashes (dirt from the fire).
*Barai, a cage for fowls.
*Iiaren (herenk, K., Uiiink, (t.), a canoe-
house.
Bnrik (K.), dirty. (See /mm.)
* Bain [lull, IkI\, house, dwelling. Bnlam,
thy house.
Bauf, to swallow; suhsistence, I'immI. Ban-
tifi, swallow it. Ko aki ln> ma Uui-
tnin, you won't get a livelihood. (See
kniidulia.)
Bainrar, spittle. Diviiinok fmuwarani,
eyv.l your spittle.
T A H A W A.
449
BelHulixi, cookrciadi.
*liriii iir /<r/(", iilcl v\\«- cncdii.niit.
]icn-ll-iniliii (i|ii. I„ii-ii-lr.iiiil,(i '). Hllist-
mill, ciiicliiic.
Hiiii<i/,ti, iiiiillct, '/!■ Ill III hniidliu, iiiiil-
lct-|Minil.
*Bcniiii (//i«H|,ciiiiiitry. Iiiiiil, i^laiul, shorr.
K iiiiii Ir lihiii, the liiiid is liir nil'.
Tiiik> riiko liiniiy we will imt fjn mi
sill ire. * Mm i-lrtiiKi, liuiirs-riiil, I'lid
III' an island,
Bcii/:, In liilp, III liasli'ii ; lo sirivc fur,
seek ; lo urgr, u> indiirr. Miii Uiii
/,« nil ln'iifi aiilioi lit, foiiic nnil Ik'I|i
iiic with lliis ihiiij;. llvnuin, liurry
Willi it! 'IVili liiiiai iiinlii, |hii|i1o
llial sii'k my dcalli. I\ii fmi^ir in
liiiiriir, llinn liasi iirfjc'd us In do wronj;.
Kn lieri^iiii in kiimnliiio, ihoii wilt
mako inc kill lli(i~,
Bttc [lull, /uili], miirli, many. E In /' mm
miiti Una, many arc liis slain. JjU/i
Ir kiirii, ilifi-c is niiicli rain. {See
IhiiI'U.)
*Brti, inniM- pari ol'ilii' |iandniius nnt.
Biliiiti [I'lliiis], adoal ((i.)
Bii!ii!:ii, |ircgnanl.
Bikii [liiun, pik], luaih, sirand, sandy
|ilaco ; sand. Ijliini ii/i Ic /<//../, llir
Ik'HcIi is nol VL'I in sij-lii (or iism).
Bir, lizard.
Biriniiik [liirimar, Ci.], lo run, to linslcn.
Biriimk, lo run nwny, to run lo. A' im 'in
kdtv' ? Akin, Ini lii/inok 'kiiiinimo,
where is your .slavi' .' I don'l know;
he ran away yesterday. Biiiiink r
li lull, run lo Ihe house.
*Hili, iron.
*Bitiliili, knil'u of iron.
Bo or /HI, lo meet, come together ; reneh
to, loueh, allaiii. Tin lii\ we will
meet. Kliiniu Im mn uvunr, I have
nol met with yon. Ko Im mil kurnini
o iiiitiii, yon have reacliiMl Ihe skies
and the subterranean world, la kit-
iniifi n kiiin i Ui iiiu alun, his wound
is great, n-aching lo his liver. Tinkt
ii;t
Im niiiji (hill iiji'). I shall nol riMich iho
laiMl.
7/(1 [i|ii. //H '|, In-Ill, eriK.ked. 11 Im iitiin
liiiii [i\,), his leg is eriHiked. U Im
iiiiiliiiii, you arc rross.pyeil.
' liii, lo Iradi', exriiaiigc (see kiilioliii); |iav-
ineiit, i'i|iiivalMil.
//i)/*;, lo light, kiiiillc. Iiiirii. /l l^ilii li ni
iiiiiiiini' when will ilic I'm' 1m' liyhlcil!
' lliilmi or /iiijiiii, laro, iiruiii csciilciiluin.
Bin, gone (i|ii. {uiddlid oH',' see Imi).
Akfii lilt liiH- Ic ten, indeed ||ie caiKie
is i.'oiie.
Hiii, |iro|ierly, any iliiiii; possessed; thing,
in general. Al,iii Ir Imi run, lie has
no property. Wilin mm Ir lioi, give
me Ihe thing. Aulmi ni,o amim iii,
niinlmi l" ma v lok' ni, tins is mine,
thai is yours, and Ihe rest belongs to
Ihe king. (Hee Imi.)
Iliikiiliik [liiilnliitl. (?.], lo eoiigli.
Iliiki, grealness, size. Ko kmnii^ in /h).
kim III unl, ihon art learl'iil in thy
greatness among spirits. Tin Imkin
n/igm; I am (of) the size of you. (."^ee
Imki, Imlmki.)
• Boil, night: used also fiir Ihe eiiiire day of
Iwenly-llmr hours. Siijtin Ir Imij,
lo-morrow night, (ti.) Tiiiki niniii,
r nihil nil Imii, I shall nol live, my lime
is come.
Bill) [Ikiiih, Iiiiiiii\, to sel, as Ihe sun, E
luitj n lunik [«■ Imii Ini, G.J, the sun is
set. Kiina Ini) n Inaik, ihe sun is
selling.
Jlnii or Imij, a I'lsh-lrap made of willies, an
eel-pot,
Boijri, to liear, bring I'orlli ; iHirii. E lioijii
nii/irr, she has brought forth a child.
Kn Ikiijii nini prim linam iniaijni!
When were you born from your mo-
tlier .' (or lioriie li\ )
JloiiUmii, growing dark, l.ocoming iiighl.
• lliiii or jiiiii, post of a house.
• Hii, spouse; husluinil or wife.
Jill, [jiii. jiiin, liiin], bill, only, merely,
just, Tiiik 'Ihliurn, Im tend, it is not
450
1' 11 I I, O I, oil V.
'I'lilmm, but hi'. Tiak If imiiit c iiiijiii,
hint li mil, she is iiol ii liiiiunii iK'iiii;,
but (I s|iirit. /,' till tin iiKiiiriijiii, I
bnvf jii>l tbcMii-liI 1)1" it. 1! liti lui Im
mil iifi^m; I have just mi't with vdu.
Jhiii li- iiiij iiijsioc, yi'ii iiro only n
shivo. Hint karoun, jiiMt lie (jiiiil.
With idiii ill niiswcr to a c|ii('Stion, it
I'onns a sort ul' an airirnialivc, — as,
r iiti If ini ! is the canoe in si};hl .'
Akca li'iili I'c wi, yes, the oaiKu' is in
sifilil.
Jtii, n. .smell.
* Uiiii, month.
* Hiiiii, lieanl. Kiiiii/iiiiii, to shave.
Jimikii and 'hniikukii, bad, vile. IViia
liiiiikii tna kill, he is had with the
spear, ii ritiiiiiii Ic /,i id, r /niiikakn
le ki iiri, this mat is giKxi, that is
bad. liiiiikn-kanniii, stonily hi ,i-
ther.
liiuiij, luisaltic stones louiid in the roots ol'
trees w hieli are drilled to the islands.
* Jiiiiinni, whale's t(»>lh.
liii/ii/ [/iii/i^, to sprout, to grow. Jliihiin
I'lii, snioko (i. c. product or growth of
the fire).
liii/iii (it,), blunt, not sharp,
* llii/iiioiii/mi, ellmw.
* Hii'iiioiiiinii, knee.
* liiil'iuii. large.
Diifiiiti, deep. E huhuli Ic laira, the clian-
licl is deep.
liiif [f/iic ; /mi, G.] warm, hot ; henlcd,
burnt. Till liiw, I am warm. E Imi-
iinriiiira, it is red-hot. E Imr liiitar,
our house is burnt. (See kiiiin.)
liiif or /mi (( t.) steering-oar, rnilder. (See
;we.)
JiuiMiir [or poi liar] a pnddlc.
Bui f'"""). egg. liiiin limit itiiiir, egg
of the hen.
Jiuia (O.), lofl of a house. (Seo/«(m).
liiiiirnr, to smell sweet ! fragrant.
Biiinai, earth, loam.
]3uir, to <lo wrong, to Ik; in fault ; sin,
fault, error. Tin /mir, I am in fault.
Tiiitiiiiir ill /iiiiinr, snvc lis from our
sins,
•//('»///, to smell bad; fetid.
Iliiiiii/iiiir, fiiilli. hiik r /iiiirnliiiir in te
k'liiiiiiiio, take the froth iVom the
toddy.
liiiki, to throw down with noise. E /mkt
Ir /mi, that thing is thrown down.
liuki or /iiikii [/'Ilk, piikt\, butti«;k, tail,
hinder part.
JSiiki/iiik [or /miki/iiiik] eask, barrel.
liiikin-iitii, na|)C of the neck.
liiiki-ni-iiiii, \w\.
JJiiuii, (k'af E liuiiijii /iiitiii, he is deaf.
* liiiiii-kiiiki, a cutaneous disease, the her-
pes. (.S>e !:ii>ii.)
lliiiii ((!.), good.
liii-iii-iiiiui (K.), n p(xir man (tpi. bun
iiiiiiDi, only a common person '.).
liii-tii-miiliiij ((■.), a chief-judge, a prime
minister.
Iliniiit (ti.), round.
Iliiii'i, chin, llmjiiiii, thy chin.
liinjii/iiiijii, a hole. Biiijii/iinjii iii rinn,
hole of your lips, mouth.
Dupiisa or Itoyii^a, n. word used in entreat-
ing. Ill liiiijiigiim, Tii/iiirrik, we pray
thee, () Tabuerik. E /unjngiim ko
1111 riik iir veil, wo In^g thee to be-
come our chief. Tin /unj'.igami, I
lx>g of you.
liiiok \/iiio/],\\i\t; to fight; hostile; trou-
bled, distracted. Auiinau te /nidk, the
war lasts long. Ivmi /niok ? do ve
fight .' 'Dili /milk, one who fights, a
warrior. E /iiinka kiut inn to up
iikiiiim, all the pi'ople of the land are
opposed to you. E Iniitk a iiaiiu,
my mind is distracted.
Uimknii ikiii [/:uokii)i>/ikiii, /ninsuinyikai,
K., //iiii/.iinikiii, Imimikiii, (J.], woods,
woodland, inlanil country.
* Burr, the ovula-shell.
liiinr, pilar hair ; feathers.
* Buriihurii, fur, hair ol" animals. Buru-
/mrun te kimoa, fur of the rat.
Biita, navel.
T A K A \V A.
451
Untiiii ((!.). riKit ; liiitiin.lr.iii (K.), Inucr
|iiiil nl'ilii' trunk (il'n Irrc, !4liiiii|i.
Jhilii/.iit {{',.) jr),, (Sue Ma/nlc.)
Jhiliini ((i.), I,|«rk.
*7y«/", (IngyiT, asiimll wcaiMni armrcl with
sliiiik's Iccili.
Jiuicii, tlirutt. liuttinii, tliy llirunl.
I)
[Tlic Idler (/ is ni roiii|)nmtiv(;ly rare
oociirrciici', n:ul sii'iiis, in all <-aM.s, to Ix- a
SdllclK'd soniiii ol'llic T.]
JJara, to look. (Sco luid.)
Dr (0.), chilli. (Sco ntai.)
Dekiikii, to cry out. (SVi' Imhi.)
l)itiu\ lie ijnicli.
JJi/iiii:, wash. J\(i /i,in ililiiigiii f havo
villi washed it '.
Diiliitirii, lilK'ral, frriiorons.
Duliri, iliriiliri, cross, irritahlc. (Sec liri-
tiii.)
Di-MiiKui, n native ofMakin ((!.)
J)ii>i(liM, to drop, as rain.
DtiKi, to hilf. JJilluiu, lute it. (So»> ktti/i-
miiliiKi.)
Diiidin, to roast.
Diiiiiimk, to \yp in the act fifronstin;.,'.
Uiriij, to beat, to strike ; to contend with,
opixise. Aiilai (liriijir, don't lx>at us.
Ko ihriij (iliii in lent > Why did you
Ixat the children ? K dirhjir iiiiti/;
our !;od is ai^ainst us. (See ////.)
Djiramik (U.), to lioat. (8ec tiri.)
I)jak->xiin (G.), crippled. (Qu. link Iku,
no legs?)
Dokirr, truly, surely. Dokuv c ko Uilntk
in mil, truly thou art great nniuiig
spirits.
Dun (K.), sacn-d, Uilm. (liu. the I'olyne-
sian aliia f)
E
[By both tlie interpreters, the lou}; c was
fn-cpiently suhstiiuteil li.r the diphthong ui,
and the short i lor «.]
Vi, a leller freipiently introduced by the
inlerprelers iK'tweeri the words of a
si'iiteiire. In some eases it inav Ite
an article; in others, it is prolmlilv a
corrupt pronuiii-ialji>n ol' the last letter
of a Word, — as Uhil' V li- up, llir,
irtata or iilntit Ir up, liiyh in the land.
/v, lire, (.'^ee r/i.)
P., this ; lieri'. (."<ee ui.)
Hii, Hlieri? hii iiiikn mni lO, whence
emnest thou '. (.See in.)
i'.liiiiiiijii, a had smell ; ("elid.
liliii, child. (See iiliii.)
Ijliii.rii or ri/jiii-io, anchor. ((Ju. iitin-ro,
stone ol'iiuietness ?)
Ji/iKii, not yet. (See idiiui.)
Kii'ui, blind. Kiiigi inutiiii, | ,iin blind.
I'iii-iiiiUa ((!.), cToss-eyed.
ICai-iiiimiiu ((i.), coward.
Kkiiniililii, short, low. Ku-ckimol'lu, to
shorten.
Kniiij ((!.), to send liir.
Ihit, spirit. (.See i/;(/i.)
KifiiH ((1.) this niorniii!,'.
AVd or va (or, with siillixes, criiiiu, cni-
tiiiiii, ciii/ioij, nil/nit, \c.), how many.
JCiii liiifiii kii iiiiniiii, how nianv stars
do joii see \ Erulnil am Ixil, or iruiiu
/nittiiii, how many nro your houses?
F.iiimnti iimiiii, how many nionllis '
I'.rdliDijii Ir Ijitij, cit'Miyd tc ijdiii, h.)w
many days, how many nij^hts ? (.>^er'
lIllVil.)
Era ((!.), why, what fiir. Era tar) ungoc,
why do yon cry ? (See kiiera.)
liran, thus, this way; the same: nlMut,
coiiccrniiiir. Kiwra ko aki hiroia
trail, why d<in't ynii do it thus? Ko
letiii rran Ir hunk, do you know about
war ? (see It le iriiii).
Eriiriiti, leaky, dropping water.
Ereru [iriro], black ; dark. E liot-erero
(0. II hiack person. Errnt tinjilini,
vi'ry dark.
Eriiii, side. E miirak cri/;ii, my side is
painliil.
Eri^'in, by the side ol', near. Tia tckatrk
452
I'll I I.O I.O(i V.
rriuiii te /nit, Irt us sii down liy llio
lllMISI',
fymii [iir iiIiim], (.'i'iivi'I.
liti. 111 lirrnk. Aiitiii iliin, iloii'l Imnk il.
i'Jiiil; If mil, ilic .i|ii(lrr-sliill (ilroiii-
I)iim) is brokuii.
G
[This Icltrr is iiMToly n snih-r pruinin-
ciatioii 111' the k, which iirolmhly iiii)>hl in
nil oiiHCs Ix' sulisiiluleil for it wilh pro.
|iri.'ly.|
6'((w(, how ? K S'liia Ihlmrrik in iiiitif
lliiw is 'riiliiii-rik ninoiii; spirits \ Tin
kitiv' iiaixi (nil iilimii), ! am sorry
for it.
iliiiiuii, like. GaijiiiL tc jxho, liko ihr p(M'o.
shi-ll.
(iti/,iik, spnihe or sprout of tho rut-on-
mil.
Gilt or kill, nl, lo. Ko yiiri siii-nui,
thou iirt Inughiiii; at iiii,' (scu n.onin-
fiiii).
(iiiii!: [kihiki], to pinch. Aiifui i:iiiimii,
(loii't pinch inc.
lliii^ii \kiiikiii\, ijravi'l.
G'<>«, to s(pic<.'zc, compress. Ko ^iniini,
you crowil inc. Tin /imi c iiukiiin, I
si|Uccwil your waist.
diiiiiilniiki tc ira, hniil up the canoe on the
beach.
(I'lisii, fiet on my Ihick (see kii!.'iis:ii).
(lii^iini. Ill look lor. A' i'»^'H7(/i'o, looking
lor thee.
(inn ((jii. kiiiii f), skin, bark. O'liinii,
my skin. Ji kntikilik c f:uin ir Ir
Imi, the Imrk ortiio tne is rough.
(liiiit-mnio, !:niii-katki, a disease of the
skin, lier|ies.
(jiiri, to snatch, seizn suddenly. Aiilni
UHriti, don't snatch il.
Giiii, almost. la fiiui iiiul lu ond; I
almost died of sickness.
I
•/, in, nl, to. I Fir II, nt Peru. Ko In-
iiioliiiii i I'nimii Ir ni, climb to the lop
ol' the tree. /-ii, alMHe; i-ii, lielnw;
i-kiii, heri', iVc.
Ill, verlml pri'lix, used inslend of, or wilh,
Ihe pronouns nf the first ami third
pirsiiiii. Ill mnriri, I am culd. In
iiikii >iiii, I am ccime. It ha h iia, hu
is done, it kiiiiiiii; r Imkiii, tearful is
ils gri'atness.
Ill, where ? A'o iiiafiik in, wlieri- were
you hurl .' Ko iiitkn viiii in, whi-ncc
come yiiu f (.Sc(^ in.)
Ill, n kind of dance,
/(/, lielow, under, lo leeward, westward. A
iiiikn ill, go IhIow. Tin /mntiiiiok
in, we will snil lo Ihe we.stwuril. In
ni knrniia, under the sky.
Ill, verbnl nll'ix liir Ihe third |M'rsonal pro-
noun. Wid, strike him. Tin iliriijin,
I ln'al them. 'I\i/nii, cut it.
/(/, allixed possessive pronoun, of the third
[MTson plural. Ilnlnin, their house,
or their houses. Antiiiii tnptiia tain,
whose knives are thesi' f
In, particle used alter niitni, who / to dis-
tinguish il (nimaiilnt, do not. Aiilai
in kiiDinrnkfLiii, who hurt you .' Aiitni
kniiiiintkt\i:o, don't hurt yoursi'If.
Iit/itil, high wati'r. Iiliini ii'inlnit, it is
not yet high water (see Inilmli).
Ini [/( ], there is, there are ; is there, nre
then' .' Ini tr iminl iiiniinn n/Hir,
there art; men wiihin our land. Kniini
ini trnii, if I had a cnnue. Ini ntit
Inp, hi're is thy knile. Ini If ika
ruin > have you any fish ?
*hiiii \ini, ii<iii\, these here (pluml of ni).
Aitia Imtaia inin, whost; are those
houses \
Ini-iiiik, weather-side of island ; eastward.
Ink, not. /i riiiik r Inm, ink, has he
come down or not .' (see akca, tiaki,
ini:.)
Iiiknt, to rcs|)ect, to love. Tia iitknigo,
T A II A W A.
403
»■<• ris|«'rl llici'. Aim, kinni 'kniii '
aki iiikiiii:iiini mini, cliildrfii, why [
(lon'l you liivc nm' umitlirr f I
yr;/Y;wi«»,nlr('iicly, loii;! ngii. {i^-v kmiKiti.) \
hikiinikn (or kiinikii), liw, In-kiinikii Ic
iiiiiiiiiiil, ih'i'i' iiri' liw iMK'Dii-niilM,
•7(1//, under, lifuriilli (liir 11/ iii). |
luiiiiiii, lilt, riir|>ul<'ut, lull, Mitlsrii'il with !
L'liliuH. laniiiii /iiiii, lio is till. Jii |
till innmii, I nin intislictl. |
Iiiijiti, liill, sHiislinI ; tired, [a tiii tn^fii,
I iiin III II, sal ill led. liiijdi inn uiiorin, \
I urn lireil dl' lookiiij;. (iiff knijni.)
Jliir, II scirl nl'f;ii<iHelHrry.
J/nnjil or li/mijil, priesl.
*Jliii, cup miide of 11 eocoa-niil .fliell.
Iiliiiii, not, not yet. li ro nitnuiii n ii/iiai,
is voiir mind ill |H'iiee or not .' hliiiii
ii'liii'it ti- till, tlie crop is not yel ri|)e.
Ukaiii a till, lire you done f 7V
iiliiai, wo lire nut,
*/f, Sllll.
*hlii, hImivo. Aiioko iriii, go nbovo ine.
'Diniliirn iitn/ii, liMik iilmve you.
/»/ii', liigli. litiit I- Ic nji, liiiili is till! land.
li:ii'^i, proud. Kn i^iiui, llioii art proud.
liiiiiii, to understand. Tinki it'iniiw), I
don't iiiKlersland you. Ho i;:iii tin
litiliii, do you undcrslnnd my sjK'eeh I
lilt [liiii], a vein.
Jill, gray Imir. lia /I'litii, my hnir is gray.
Jkii, lisii.
Ikiii, liere, hither. Ill Im ikni, we will
meet lieie. il/d? ikni, ooino hither.
*]kiiiiiiijiii, lately, just now (i. e. ikai
ii'ii/Ki, hero, on this s|)ot.)
*Ikiiki [li'i.i'r/], licnrl ; also hrcnth ; to
hrealhe.
Ikrike \i^ik\, mallet.
Ikidikiilii, to lly. la tcliii ikiUknlri le
viiiii, ean the bird fly! (See kijitii-
kijmi.)
Iki-liiliH, a coward.
*Iki>, here.
*lkii, girdle oC shark's skin.
lliiirii ((i.), how niuiiy \ how much? (See
era, crnun, &.v.)
Ill
* linn, live.
Jiii/di, sharp.|Miiiited eliili, javelin.
In, coral. Vi liki iiiiiii in t'iii, my Tool is
pierced with a hit of coral.
/", 111', ill, at. I'or, vVc„ prolmhly a corrup-
tion ol' //(.
•//(((, that, in order that, to; will, shall.
llkniii knmiiiiiiii inn kniiiiilrni, ye
are deceiving ine in order In kill me.
hill iiiiiiitf shall I drink? lint iiao-
tin, I will set' it (pro|i<'rly ////, which
sop).
*hiiii, mat orciwoa-nut leaves.
IiiiiIhii), lo-iiight.
Imimiii, within, in the inside ol'. Tin rliin
Tin iiiiiiiiin riilmlam, I will break
(all) the boni"S In your body. lai tc
oinitt iiiiiniin n/mr, there are men in
the iiisiik' of (or iK'iiealli) our country
(said ol'thc antipodes), (.^eo niiiiit.)
I>tnt:iiiiin!iii, skill'iil, versed in. l/iiimii-
iin);ii in tc hiiok, skilled in war.
litinijtti, when ! Ku tin kittiii Uttoin
iiiiiiijiii f when sliall you build your
house ?
Iiiinnii, k)W. 71' ni art iitiiiaii, that low
trii".
I unit i, a wart.
* Iijmtnii, ye.
Igiivtio [ij;;i/x/i/, tijf:inlii>ij, U.], last night.
Kn mntii ui iijgilio, whore did you
sleep last night ?
IiiL'iki, (It.), lormerly, long ago.
Iijkani, I do not know ; (only used in an-
swer to a ipicslion.)
Iijkitn [ijkaii, rj;A«//], then-. Aiitai igkiin >
who is there \ Tiiigai igkaii, wait for
me there.
/i>, alxive, up, over, upon. Mai-ii>, to wind-
ward, or south-southwest, Ikilnkithi
If nutn iim Ir Ixit, the bird (lew over
the house. Inn Ir kiv, upon the mat.
A tioko iini, go to windward.
Ira, to steal ; thiol". E diiiijia in trn, I
boat him lor stealing, ii ira Iciiii, he
is n thiol'. Intik ait aijnnt, my axe is
stolen.
J. VI
!• II I I.O I.O(i Y.
//ii (Ci.), girillu wiirii liy men.
•//•((, linir. Irmi atii, liiiir ol'thi' hfml.
Iiiiino or ifiiiiii, lint, liirfiiiiwl, ln^lon' ; in
ciiiiiu lirst, III iin'ccilc, Aiilni luttmi
iriiiiio, wild WON yiiiir lirNl Wll\^^\
A iiok iniiiiiiii, (.'II U liirr iiii'. VV<l
iriiniu ijiii, I iiiii llif lirHl cniiur. (Stf
Jmiiiiii [iiliiiiiiii, K., iiiiiiriii, (■.], lH<liinii,
nlliT, liisi. A/ink irmiiiiiu, conn-
nflcr me. Kit iiamui, joii nn; llic
Insl. (Sci' miii.)
Ill, In j,'i) willi, III !irt'iim|iniiy. IC "" i'Ji'O
liiiii, ln' will (^11 willi lliir. hi> inii,
kit fiik f U'ill villi go w iili inr or stay !
Kit in mil 'iitui, with wliom diil you
coino \
Jriti, iriiik [eiitik, irik], lo lurn round, lo
whirl; 111 pi iiIkiiiI, lo lurk ship, /rin
tr inj, \\v willi! whirls rmiiiil. Irik
atiiii, his hi'iiil Uiniril Miiiiii. Tia
iiiiik ma U ten, wu will jiiil ihc cniiop
iiIhiuI.
liil.ni, iii/iik, [iitilnii, iililmk], lo ilislike,
U' ilispli'iisi'il with. InlniiiiD, I ilon'l
like llu'c. Jri/miii te niiiiti, the mill
ilo lint llki.> liiiii. Ku irilnik, arc you
(li!i|il(;asc(l \
Ir ilia mi, lo ninnure.
Iriiio \tirijjo], (losh, meat. B kugkan r
titiiiit, WHS the nu'ot frofni ?
Ifikak. li ink in iriknk, (ihe title) hos
cniscd (lowing anil is going out.
Inrrp, l<Kit.|mll (the gniiic). Tin rokn
main tiririji, wo coinc Ironi playing
rooi-lmll.
Iiu (CI.), yellow, light-eolnrcd.
Iiua, foreigner. Iruu iiuknki, they nre
foreigners.
It, il)t [tit, <i/j], lightning'. K mittr tr m
ma t'tt, iho tree is killed by lightning.
Iti, straight.
■ ///, seven.
/liUiki (Ct.), hawk's.hill lorlniw.
[tit, the resin which drifts ashore on these
islands ; also, any tiling I'ragrunt, like
resin.
llii or ir/(/, iiMilU". /.' kiikiiitu t'lil'iiii nil
itii, till' |Hiiiil ol niy no'dhi is itlmrp.
K
Kii, pri'lisi cl to n word, has in most I'asrs
n eauwil nigniliealinn ; in sunie in-
stancei its meaning v* doiihlliil.
Kaaii, village, ward ; wnMinii of a kniin or
town.
Kii'ml'iki; In eiilari;''.
Kii/iikii, In 111 fall, drop, thmw dnwn.
Till kiiliika III- iliii-rii ikni, we will
dmp our aiu'lmr hen'. Kiilmkiik,
thrown down.
Kii/itifi ((•.), to ilrop, let tall. Kulnitjiaa
III tr iiiiiiiiip, i\t<'\> it in the well. (Uu.
n mistake Inr kiilmkn '),
Kniiiiiti, In unlp dnwn. Ko iiki kimtiii te
iiiiiiinik. ko kiiliiiitiii, you do not
eliew the IimhI, ynu gulp it down.
Kiitiikoiirii, licaoh, sinind. (Sec liiku.)
Knlioii, In oil, anoint.
Kiiliil'ii, to trade, Imrler.
• Kii/»xi, lo come together, unilp, iroTl. TVn
kiitim, n roininon limn of salutalinn.
Kiilmiliiiii (H, i|Uiiils.
Knliuii, lo eliise, shiil ; requite, take ven-
goance. Ka/>iiii itiuknim, shut your
jaws. Till kiVma mil trim, I will
take vengeance uii him.
Kii/mii, a Imil, sore.
Kii/'ii/i, dull, lilunl. E kiiliuli am tap,
your kiiili- is liliint.
Kniiiir, to make warm, lo heat ; healing,
hni. Mm ikiii ka/nirso rriuiii tc tii,
come hen^ nnd warm yourself by Ihc
(ire. /i kii/'iir tnnik, the sun is hoi,
Kiiliiiiliin, preserved tarn (K.); o kind of
liHid pre|ianil from the par. laniis
nut (Ci.)
Kii/xik [kiiliiiik, kii/iuL'], to burn. Mm
ikiii kiiliukri:ii in trtii, come ond burn
yourself in the tin'. Antm tiiiititii
kaliuk tr lull an, dnn'l prevent that
I house from being burnt.
'I' A U A W A
453
h'lil'iiiiiiiiii, mill wiirii llir ilnsn.
hni/iKiii, II npniii iiiailr nriiiiiniin liiiir.
Kiuliiiiiiliiiii, to liilo iiiiich or hard. E
kiiiliiiiiiliiiii tf miitiiiiiir, tlir imim|ili-
Ii«v4 iiru hiiiii^r wviri'ly.
Kiukiimiliilii, III iiiiiki' sliiirl. Hinkiniiiliitn
titu tftttiit^ iiiiikr ymir s|Hi'rli Ntinrt,
A'iK'ii (iir kiiiiii\, iH'Mr, E knrn c tnui, lii'
IK iii'iir. 7i kiuii If kiiiiii, ilm villii({c
in iii'iir. (TliiMn mny Ijo the luiniu
wiiril; kiiaii, |M'rlinpM, si);iiitir» iici/ili-
A'lii" iir^K/ ((!.)< miliviMil'. Hiun Kiauv
r iiiii, I (III) II iiiilivi- iirKiiiwi',
hiif;iif:ii. III riirry mi tin- Imrk. Tin kn-
guf!ii;:i), I will i-iirry you. (Sco ngii,
fiiifni.)
h'dluiid, kiihi/Mi ((!.), riiiiilMiw, siin-ilnK.
■ hill, Irrc, wikkI, Mlirk, |kisI, rliili. Wnkiiii
l> km, root III' llii^ Irif, IC nimliti
Imiii tc km, lliii wooil Niirkx to my
hniiil. 71 km til Ir Ui/mi, a Ntii'k (or
riKil) ot'lnro. !■! tai kiii Iriia, lie mi-
ilri'HliimlH li^liliii); (or llic ritili), Kain
I'd, |iii,st of till- I'l'tico.
A'lu ( /.('I, iikiii], u'oiinil. /'( kiimaii c
kiiiii, my woiinil is ilri'iiill'iil. Kmm-
main km iii Imiii, \hi: woiinil in my
arm is ^oiii;; to liiiil.
Kill [iikiii\, to, towanU, n^aiiiiit ; than.
Hkiriltii am taka knin, your siKirh
to nil- is I'alsi'. /i In/iiz-i a kniii trim,
III' has tiiki'ii ii|i arms a^airiRt mr. Ji
mini an kiimiiimiii a knin Una, I
havr more molassi's than ho.
Kai, hi-rc. (Sro i-kai.)
Kai-ni-kiilinii, spaile,
• Kai (Tiiiiii), ilo not. • Kai kuriiia, don't
rut ii.
KiiUhiIki, liiimlioo (wliirh soniL'timcs driUs
to ihr iNJauds).
A'k/'w/i, slii|i, (A Nrw Zi'alaiid word in-
Imdiiri'd liy Ihi- whites at 'ra|iul(!inicn.)
Kiiiiok, lo make I'rionils; (Viiiidsliip. (Si'c
«/(ii^.)
■ Kniiiii, till' pandaniis li-ci'.
Kmo, llie li'iivfs ul'llie arum.
K'ii/11, till' liili'i'iil Niipporli aroimil tin liMit
III' till' pllllllllllllH.
A'xif'i, III Ntrlli^llt■'n ; kmltuo, Nlrai^jhten
yoiiriM'ir.
Kmira, ilivinatioii, Nori'iry.
Kak, to pill down, lo wl down ; to lowrr a
sail; lo rrji I'l, iliriiw oil'; lo di scind.
Aii/i c III Ir iimaiak, wlirri' sliali wo
»rt the vii'liials. Ktik r liiiiriilnnr in
Ir kiirniimii, mmovo tlw! I'roih rroin
the liMlily. Aiiliii kiikir, don't throw
IIS oil'. Aii^ liilmi ((i.), roiiie down
a lilllo.
A'^ii^ii ((i.), a pri'iervu inadu ul' the imiida-
IIIIS-IIUl.
Kiikii, llol■^e, oiilrry.
A'iiXvn;i;, sharp ; oppn'ssive (as heat). A'
kiikai/ii mil In/ut > is your knil'e sliar|i '
l\iikiniii li mill, the heal ol llie sun
i8 oppiv»>ive.
Kitkiiija, eaiiiulial. K kakiiija ninink, at
Ihu soiilheasl they an' eiiniiiluiU.
Kakitia, lestivities, — daneing and sin^'ini;.
Kakoiiii, kiikiirri/i ((!.), same as kinn/irjiii.
Kiikii, eoi'oa-niil leal".
Kakiirokiirii, to slreiiythen. Aiilni kitknni-
km It /III nil in, don't raise \oiir vniee.
Kamau, to lerrily; rearl'ul, drcniiriil ; very
(jnal. Kmiuifiai r Una, he riif;lilens
me. Ill ^i(;//(i^' r ^((i/i, his Wdiiiid is
Hieiit. la kmiiHg r kiikni/a Ir nun
III liiiin, the heiit at noon was exeivd-
infjly ^n'lit.
Kamiii, <^isv heri'. Kiiinni am Inji, yive
me Jour knile. Knmai ijair, give us.
Kamaiiiainii, to make white.
Kaiiiiiin, to save, to euro, ii kmiiniinii,
ho .saved my lile.
Kmiiaii, already, long ai;o. In kniiinn
liiniink, lie is liurieil already. In
kainiin rnkn, he is gone loni» ago.
Kaiiiaiiiiji, to make a IIkiI ol'. to deceive.
llkam kiiiHaiiigini, ye are making a
IImiI of me.
Kaniaink,Ut hurl. Aiilai in kmiinrnki^o,
who hurl lliee ?
KamaU \kniiwinal\, to kill. Ku tniigiai
I' .
4A(i
I' II i I. It l.txi V
in kiimiUrfin, llmii will ninki< iim< kill
IIhi', 'I'm Itiiiiiii'iii, I kill iii\M'ir,
KtiDiriiii, II mcvr.
hiiiiirlKlti, III iiiiiki' linn. Knmilitln urn
hiiliii, iiiiiki' linn vmir "iNitli, i. r,
xlirk lo wiml villi hiiy.
Kiiiiiii, to cniiiM' to drink, to mirklc 1-'
kiniiitiii in iiiriiiiim, l>'l it ilrilik rri>ni
your lin'iiil.
Httfmtili^ (n I'ftiiMi' III Miirr/r, l\ kutnitihfii
Ir lull, till' lliiiii; riiii>u» nir In unii/.i',
* Kiiiiiiiiiiiiii [kiiiiimiiiiii, K., I'ikiiiiitii, (l.|,
ilKilaHsi'H niiiilr rrnlli the liijiinr of llii;
i'iM.'1111-init tr«'.
All", |Mii|i|c. ii liiiiiiifiiim II kiiim kiin
i»;i tr lip, till' |iiii|ili> nil oviT till- liiiiil
lii'K iirilirf. (Sit kiiil'i, kiirii.)
* hiiiiii. III i-nl ; I'imhI, 7V</ kniiiini, I niii
i-iiliii); it. hiiiiiik, ciiirn. Kaiiam,
thy limil.
Kiimi [kiDi, /iiiiii], tilmiit 111, |{iiiii){ to.
Till kiiiiii Hill, I mil piiiiK 111 ilriiik.
hiiHii luikn II kiiii, tin: mill i« jfiuii^
111 liill. hiiiiiliokii (liir A((h' riikn)
III mil til riiini'.
Kiitiii (l!.), lo»n. (Sec kmiii.)
h'liiiiii, ir. Hniiiii ko /«»//, //u kniiuitfiii),
il'tliiill Hirikij me, I will kill tliii-. (Si-c
fullii-flililill.)
Kiiiiiliiaii, til lrlii{tl|i'ti. (Si'c iiiiiDiiin,)
Kiiiiiiiii'iiii, 111 fiiitli'r liws. III U' iiiilortii-
liati', /i kiiiiiininiii r h'lin, \\v 18
iiiiiiirluiiiiti'. Till kii III 1 11 nil II, I siitUr
liis.s Iruiii it.
Kitiiiiuii (or kniiiMi), tin,' iiisiilc, contpntK. i
Kiiiiiiiin III iiiiiniiim, the insiili' of
yiiiir liri'iisl. Hium wa ni mm, the
Hiilistaiii'i III' my ilnnin.
Kmiiiuii-iii-innlu, I'yilmll.
Kiiiatriipi, iHirri'n, utilruitriil,
Kiiiiipii, ilrnjtoii-IIy.
•VlV/«<, niCDii.ilut Ini'. K tmliii U- kniii,
lie i^ ciittiiig the trot". ('ix'iin-iiiit
Will II I.
Kiiiiiiii: ('i.). iilli'iiiled.
Kuiiiiii, lit III ilriiik. K kiiiiim the run,
till' w.iiir is c'ikkI til drink.
AdHim, to Mirk, In rniiM' In nilliin'. (S<'<'
til nil HI.)
Siiiiiikii, to ciiiiii' 111 I'liiiir. Kniiiikti mill
I Iniii <i kiiin, Willi liiin lirri' to iiir.
hiiniikn, lo rniiN)' lo fix, to M'nil, In rX|M'l.
Till kiiiiiikii r trim ii kniinn, I wnil
hull 111 iIki'. '/'(■/ kiiniiknvii, I ilri\i'
IJH'c awiiy.
hniitm, rjii'w it,
hiiiilii ((•.), to 11111! lo oni''" M'lr, to hum.
'Ai/ici', 111 lill, iiiaki- liill. hiiiMiiMii, lill
Ihy^iir.
Hiigiif, hair-Klii'k, liair-prirkfr.
* Siittkiiii, iHilatulilr.
hiii)iirnfini, to riiiii**' In laugh.
hiuiiii ((!.), rronx, irritalilr.
hii/'ini. III liiiiiih. 111 roin|il<'li'. 111 ilo nil.
Snjkini, to o|M'n, |im'<o, unlit", hiijuiin
Iniirn, o|ii'n your haml.
Kitpr, lo III-, Till kiijM III I iiukn, I tie it
nniiiiiil my wnint, Kiipf iirorom, lie
your iH'i'k, i. i'. haii(( yourwll'.
hiiji/H, a kiiiil, a way nl'tyin);.
h'lii'niiik, liiwi'r slory nr ;;muiiil flnor of n
hmiiu- uhii'li lias a piini, fir lol).
All/', kiikiir, lo mil, to srrnpo. Mill ikill
kit nil kiiriii, coiik" iiihI riili iiin,
hiira, a ri'lalivc, n'latinn, kimlnil. Tin
kiimmni, iiii kiiiii, I will mivc him,
Ik' is my rrlnliiiii.
hiiriiniii, ilijrr linilli'r nr sister.
Jiiiriiiniii, yniiniicr lirolhrr or sisti-r.
Kiiriipii, lo liiilo, conronl. KitrnjMHii, hiilo
nil', ho nil kiirajDiiii tn, when- will
you hide il ! Jiniii/nik, liiddi'ii.
hiirii/ti/Ki, a kind nf I'inhI |ir<!|Hin'd iVoni
llic I'ruit III' till' |ianilaniis.
* hiiritirii, sky, hrnvcii, wi'ulhi'r. Eniuu
tiitiik I kiirnuii, how many suns in
the sky ? K liuok n knrmra, the sky
is trouliird, or, the wi-nlhcr ia had.
' Kiirnr, .syru|i nr mnlassos of the cocoa-
nut, inixni with water.
' Hiiniiii [kiiinl, K.|, fish-hook of |ienrl,
hioiirn , In liclieve, lio|»', i'X|i<vl.
Knrinii, lo |iiit. Huriint in te Imrea, put
it in tlif caiint'-housc.
f-i"i-r"»iitir ■-
T A K A \V A.
457
Kfint [knioiiii], tn ijiiirt, np|i<"nw ; In I'lx,
iirriiniji', wttlr ; In iniiki'. hinniin,
k<i'|i \nlirwiri|"l"'l. hkiiiKiii'lhlillfiik,
III n|i|H'nM' 'I'liliurrik. hit knm « nit-
iiiini, ImvM you m'tllwl yiiiir mind, nr
piiriHiw f Kiiiv II U iili leiiniia, iiinki-
nnolliiT (iri'-|iliii-u. Tin kiinnn, I will
nrriiii){i' ll.
'Kiiiiiiii [nl Miikiii), lil'i'k ln'iiiU.
Kuril, mill. /•.' /'•ll If knrii, Ihcru ii much
mill.
Karuiik, to cnuw ti> ili'»i-<'iiil. Kuiimk r
Iriiu, M'Uil him down.
Kuriiii, li'ihinK-iH't.
Hni-iioiiio, " UMhIy," — thu ri-rnii'lilud sup of i
Ihr ciH'iia-iiut trw. I
hutuUiii, to iiKiuiiv, u»k (lit. to couto to
tt'll).
• hiiliiiiiii, onl,
KiUitgiy to c'Hiis)' III cry. Antni kulapii,
diiii't iimkr im- cry.
KiUt, til liuild, to iTiM-l, wl up; 111 linisi
Biiil ; to put, pliicc. /(( till ir lull ki)
katiiii, is Ihc! hduw fiiii«h<'d Ihiil you
wen' building I Tin knit Ic /unit tii
le /ml mi, I will put cocon-nut trees
ill tlint hiiuM'.
' Kiittu, to KiiiHi'ze out wilh Torcc; to
shoot ; n (lun, pistol. J\ii kalia te
tdijd, you nhiKit the cuiniss.
hiitikitik, roiinh, prickly.
'Kutirr, to show, li't mv. hiiiiie iriliitnt,
let mc WH' what you have brouyhl.
Kiitoka [kiiliik, kiu/iii;\ to cause to »luy, to
Htop, to Ifiivc behind ; to store up ;
to place, to put ; to cun'. Tin kato-
kill, I will Mtop it. Aiii>l;i>n i knlokiii,
gone and left me liehind. 7!' /hU in
kntiikn le nnwrnk, the lioiw! lor storing
the IoikI. Tin knlnkniin i l'iiliiiiint)n,
I will lokc you on my shnuliler. Tnne
kalnka Ir ornk, a mmi who cures
(stops) sickness.
Kntoka, n landholder; one who Ims ob-
tained land by coni|uest.
*KtUo>i), to set or lay down nny thing, —
hence, to trodu, exchange. Kulor'
115
iijkiiii, -Ml it down there, h'nloio It
nmniiik. In Imrter IikuI.
hnlnkn (Ii.), Irnwxers of matting worn an
a delence, In lighting.
* Kini, to wl|ie, Jxim It iiKtUimii, wi|>e
your eyes.
Kniifi, crab.
* h'lwr, iii-eklace of (lowers.
Kniiii, to cau-w' to ipiarrel, to vex. Ko
kniiuni, you vixeil me. (.Sii' tin.)
Knnoiin, sermid. (From iin, two.)
Kniira, to cut in two. Tin kiiiirngo, 1 will
cut you in two.
Knuritnrii, a light.
hiiiili, to awaken. Kiifra ko knutini,
why did you waki," iiic?
Kinrn \kiit\ knit, fiiv\ pity, sorrow; to
regret, InkiH kaxen ((•.), no pity.
Till kiwii nkt roko trim, I am sorry
he diH's not come. A'lity /.'iigUt '<>
have cause liir sorrow, to regret. (Sec
ii'ii)ii.)
* Hnwii, town. Ap'iiii Ir omiit in te kav/a,
are all the |M'i)ple in the town \
Knirn [/.(((/', kiui], slave.
Knwa, to tish. Tiu noko ina knwa, 1 nm
going a fishing.
'Kiiirni, path, road. Tiitai-iii-kawai,
talking by the way, conversation.
Kiivnikniin, to creep.
Hniiiiir, dirty. (See niaiij.)
hrru (<■.), to sleep.
A'l/, come. Kii iiuii, come here.
A'((//< (K.), ship.
* Kir, mat. Kicti inu, sleeping-mat.
Kief nil Ir un, poles which unite the out-
rigger to the canot.'.
Kikn, kikn, cuttle-lish.
Kiiiiitn, rat ; o thief.
" Ktiio, ant, cminet.
Kino, to dig. Kiiiu te run, dig a taro pit.
* KtjHiikijiin, to puddle ; u paddle. (See
iki/iikn/ii.)
* Kipiiin, net, seine.
*Kiri, dog.
* Kim, annoying, iiurtful, bad.
A'<(((, porpoise.
458
PHILOLOGY.
Kitci, n liornlil, nirssciiger, ncws-hriiij'rr.
Ko iitjii III iiici, do Villi liiiir llio
iiirs.st'iinir ?
AVh;V(/(, IhlMliiHul ; U> lio. li kiiiilni nm
Ink II l.iini, what ymi trll mo is liilsc.
Kn kiinliii, VdU lie.
•A'o or gii, lliou, lliri'. Km in kn kiimii-
iiikcgo, wliy didst tlii>ii hurt tliyselff
Ki>, a virijiii.
Jxmik, tliciii wilt not. lio oi'/, koiik, wilt
tliiiu ri.'tiini, iir not '.
Kii^iii, blow it (as tliroiigh n pijio).
*Koiriki, to scrn|H",
A'li^' or All//, to cause to return, to send for,
to invito again. 'I'ia kvuo, I expect
tlicc back Anliii kogin, don't send
for liini. (Sec og.)
Kiiki) (O.), jealousy.
Kij)ii,a corrupt pronunciation of pA(/»/, yc.
Kv>i (for kii-oii), to fill. Jinn r tc luiiii, till
my hand. Kon c Ic niainig, till the
cup.
Konoii, sonj;, verse. //( linn wiUiil, konon
in iineiic, I have coin|)osi'd a song for
singini;.
' Kuril, cord, string. Kniit >ii jiiii, vein.
Koru, dart, javelin, s|x;ar.
Korokoro, strong. Aiitai ia knrnkoro e
nin V ikaki, who is the strongest
among them ?
Koifiir [i'oi/v//-], to go to, to conic to.
Koiciir am kani, go to your relations.
Mui till kuifiir a IkiIhhi n Iiikiiiu,
come let us go to your other house.
Tia rokoii koirarifin, I have {•onic to
you. Jiiiera kn iiki knnini, wliy did
you not come to ine ?
Kmhiiitiod, yesterilay. Ju mntr Iciiii kiiii'
iiiinoa, he died yesterday.
Kiiira, why ?
A"«ii>i [a^'I"], wood driAcd to tho islands.
* Kumcti-, wooden disli, trencher.
* Kuna or konn, to be able; to endure,
tear, ho kiniii Ir iiniiii, can vou
swim ! Tiiiki kiiiiii U- iiniiii, or linki
kunii tmiui, I cannot swim. Titiki
kuna tc timnntk, I cannot liear food.
Tiiiki koiiiiii kiiHii Ic iimarak, I can-
not liear to eat the food.
* liiiri, ten thousand.
Kuril, to scratch. Antiii kiirilni, don't
scratch me.
• Kuril, to cut. Antiii kiirii'Ui, don't cut it.
Kiiniliiiiii, to shave. (S«! Inuii.)
Kiiruitittii, to cut in pieces. Ti(i kiinii-
latiiLn, I will cut you in pieces (qu.
from kiirii, and IhIc, many f).
Kiiriikiii, to cut wiKid, to hew.
* Kiirukiirii [korokuiu], n cut, a wound.
This letter docs not properly belong to
the language. In a ^ery few words it wos
uschI by the interpreters, probably for some
other letter, — r, u, or t.
Ltiuti, to pluck. Ake' tuUia, has not
pluckeil it.
Li, heard only in th" •single phras"', kana
lUi li iiuti, the I'leHu!"s arc going to
rise,— probably usetl for te.
Liiiii, fish-line.
M
*Ma, with, by, as. Ko iri ma 'ntai, with
whom earnest tlic.; ? Tia iri tna
Iciiii, I cnme with him. Tin uiianau
ma nggnc, I am as tall as tliou.
E mute tc ni ma ttt, the tree is dead
by lightning.
^fll, a fish-weir.
J\[n, front ; licfore. (Sec mo.)
Miiiitj [maiiinji, mnniji, muiij], dirt, litter.
Maiijiin l\ii, dirt of the fire, ashes.
MiUuj, left, sinister, n Ixii maaij, the
left hand, i. e. the dirty hand, — that
w hich is not uncd in eating.
Many, bitter, s-/ir. E mnon Ic run, the
water is bitter. Miunjiu Ic iiuinam.
taro preserved in a sour state.
,
.
T A R A \V A.
459
Mug, nfrniil ; to fear. Tia mtiu, I am
nfniid. Ti(i itiiiuri'ii, I four llico.
*M(ii, liitliLT, conic here. IVilin tiini,
brill;; liitlicr. Mai ikiii, conic hither.
nidi ko nil mo, come thiit you may
drink.
Mill and tiidhi, from. Ko iiiiko niiii in ?
I'roin whi'iice comest tlioii ! Tin. inkn
main liriirji, 1 come from the foot-
hnll playing.
Mai, ovon, heurth, c<H)king-|)lace.
*M(tiii, ro|)c.
Miiiii [iiiniiii, mill,], leeward, westward.
Till jiitrtiii miii miiiii, we have sailed
from the westward.
*Miiiiiki, southeast. E kakapa mitiiiki,
at the southeast there are cannibals.
Maie, necklace.
MaiiKiiiiii, white, bright. E nuiiiiaiiin
tiiitiii i kiiriiuii, the stars ore bright
ill heaven.
Miiiiiiik, northward, or, perhaps, (lorlh-
wcst. Tia kaiia jmrniiiiok i nuii-
mik, we arc going to sail to the
northward.
Mdio, windward. Tia kniia jMinm/iok i
tiiaio, we arc going to sail to wind-
ward (i. e. east, or cast southeast,
see ;<>).
Muion, through, out from. E tiipitinji rin
tc mat tmiioii tint, the dead man'.s
bones arc sticking up through the
ground (from mai and to).
Maipiiia, C(x;oa-niit shell.
Maim, from. Tana tc orak mairv,; keep
sickness I'rom us.
Main [moiti, IJ.], many, much ; more. In
..iittti tc kaiu, there is much rain. E
maita wait a kaiiim, my canoes are
more than yours. E maiti iiijgoe^G.),
you have the most.
Main \mciii, iiuo, iiieia, man, vuiiir], to
live, to heal, to get well ; alive, well ;
good; lilc. Ah main e tciiii, he will
not live. Kanumaiii kiii ni Imiii, the
wound on my arm is going to heal. E
vuiiu iijHir ma ajHimi, our land is as
good as yours. Kaiuiiiaii maiuir,
prolong our lives.
Miik'i, branch of a tree;.
Makai, jaw. Kalmn iiiakaim, shut your
jaws. Miik(ii-li(if>Hrii, a scold (big.
jaw).
*Makai>ja [miikaina^, incxin.
Makr, a small canoe.
*Miikiiko, a wound.
Mam, fresh water. Tb mam in tc tiiaiioj),
water from the well.
*Miima, ashamed.
*Miu)in, breast of woman, pap.
Mama (G.), mother (used only by young
children).
Miimam ((•.), rotten.
Mamiii- [memai], weak, feeble.
Mamitiia, to mfick, make sport of. Ko ma-
moniuii, \.)U arc making sport of me.
*Ma>i, bird. Ara man, our birds.
Man, month. Uainan le man, two months.
(.Set! anian.)
Miunun, a preparation of the arum.
*Mana>ji, dirt, refuse. Manaijin tc ai,
ashes. (See maay.)
Manila, polite, accomplished.
*Maniapa [manfp, nianinji], council-
house. Tia roko mai te maniapa, \
come from the maniapa. ((Ju. ntna ni
II [HI, house of the town, town-house ')
Miintki, footstep, track.
Maninar, muscpiito.
Miuiitjia, foolish.
Manop [maniiip, G.], a well.
*Manrtrc (Makin), much, greatly.
''Mann, brother (of a woman) ; sister (of a
man).
*Miigai-ni-wai, little toe.
Marak, to ho hurt ; hurt, sore, in pain ;
pain. Ko miinik ia, where are you
hurt f E maiiik chgii, my side is
sore.
Mariini/ii >i, slippery.
Mnriuiii, lonesome, lonely, solitary.
Mill II rv, heart of a tree.
Maiiri [nurir, K., mnridi, G.], cold.
Maroro (G.), strong, powerful. Maroro
460
PHILOLOGY.
e pni, I nni strong. T\ig mtiroro,
strung wind.
Munia [or ?noni<i], to lose; lost. Ko
iiufn/ti ani lupu in / wlicrc did you
lose your I nilb ! 7i inii'im nii iiijnni,
my iixi' is lost.
Hiiiri'ti-i:ui, to lorgol. E iiiiinia-^i/iid, I
I'lirjii't it. Ko inufiiii^iiiui, Imsl thou
I'orjiotlcii me ?
Miriint (M.), soil, i|uift.
*M(it<i, eyo. Mdliiii ti/di, my right eye.
Miitdii hkkii), my l<!ll oyc.
Mildki (O.), bhiid.
Mutiimiir ((^.), shnrt-sighti-d.
*Muttiij [;«(//(/ 1, spirit (?)■ liti-iii-mtitinj,
teinpli'. U'li-iii-mtittiij, ship. Miitinj
Anic/icri, whites I'rom Anicricn,
*M<iUtu, fisli-hook.
*Milr, to die ; dond, shiiii ; de«d person ;
death, li male tviut kuanaiimt, he
died yosterdiiy. li mole iuh niitui,
killed by wliotn ? 'tVili /irri^i main,
those who seek my death.
il/((/f (G.), raw, not well cooked.
Milemiil, wood.
Miilolo (H.), hard, solid.
*MnUi (Kuria), to sleep. Ko matu in
i)i(ilin),vi\v.\K shall you sleep to-night :
(See kern.)
MdiKi ((!.), afraid.
Jl/'/«/j(G.),to lal)or, to cultivate the ground.
MiiuiHi ; r iiKiHiia iii miikiihjn, absence
of the moon (U^lbn! the new moon).
Maiiiju, ti> have a disagreeable smell. la
niaioji:, it sniolls bad.
Maiir/ga [man, U.], n cup. lai te maiij/pa
c If nana eriim, have you another cup ?
Mauri, w ieked, bad. E i/irnjia iiia mnuri,
I iK'al him lK'(!ause he is bad.
Maiiriiji, to think of.
Mrauiii, rushes.
il/<^', to dwell, to live, to l)e. Ko mi!; in,
where do you live ? 'I\iiiok a nijgoe
ko mi!! ar ura, for friendship, b»^ thou
our chief
Afri, breailfruit.
Mco [iiieoii], dew ; |)erspiration.
*Mio [wo], Chinese papcr-ti«e.
Metiiro, scuttle, hatch.
MeUiiir [t\\x. nuitttora ?], to be troubled
alwut. Aiitai meUtnria, don't trouble
yourself about him.
Mill, go(Ml. (Si-e main.)
Sill, to dream ; to think ; dream, revery.
Hiiin ftaiiai lia mi}!0 ina'ioj/, tia
i/iiaijuo kaimira iii mill, if I dream
aliout you to-night, 1 will tell you tho
substance of my dream. I'ia luiiu, I
will think of it.
Mi or *mimi, to wonder, to be surprised.
Till mi rum, I am surprised at you.
Mimi, niinger<\
Miiiiti, fat. Minilin Con, fat of the tor-
toise.
* Mirimiri, a babe.
Mo, with, by, as (same as ma).
*31o or moi, to drink.
Mo, tore-part, front, face. Md-ni-piroto,
lore-part of the belly. Thti mom,
wi|)e your face.
Ml) [mil, mon, »«(»], before. Antai nea
e moil teiin, who was king before him I
Aki roko mon, none cnmc before me.
(See irnmn, kariimo.)
Mo, chief, king. Antai m«mi tint^wa,
who was your chief (brmerly ? Mim
te ajxi [moH/jYiy;], chief of the land,
king.
*Moa, domestic fowl. Mo'timdn, cock.
Mo'aiine, hen.
M(x/iii, to sneeze. (Sec kamoi/i.)
Moiti, fat of meat, blubber. E kngkan
moeliii te kiwi, the fat of the porpoise
is g(KKl.
Mog, dog.
Mognr, work, task, labor; to work. E
jHini an mogur, my work is fmishod.
Ttra go na mogiir, what are you going
to do!
Moi, c<x>ked, well done. Ko kaiia te or6ra
o ko kana Ic moi, will you eat it raw
or cooked ?
Moko (G.), rotten. E moko iiin, his teeth
are decayed.
TARAWA.
461
• I
Mnnn (O.), wot.
Moiii (K.), the siiblnrranpnti world (?).
Mill ((J.), to brciik ; bnikoii.
Mol, n fpiilipedr.
Aliii, iin<-r. Aki inho miiiii, none cnnip
nfirr mo. Aiitiii iiiomi e iiiiiin leiia,
who was your king nftcr liiin? (See
iriimiii, karumiii.)
*Muiiniii, viuimntii, ciieoii-niit.
Midiikii III Ihii, fiilliom, — or, length from
lip of finger to opposite shoulder.
Miimiit, to vomit.
Miiriiiiiiri (tJ.), Id Ix' slow, to deliiy.
Uliili, to finish, ho muti le tni litm, have
you finished your gathering, or crop?
Mitligiik, determine, rtsolve. A miilis'ak
takin tcua iiia ktimtUea, they have
determined to kill him.
N
The intprpr(?tcr.s sometimes interchanged |
this letter with /', as, /xiiri and /Kii/ii, nose, '
mariii]) and imniitip, council-house. In
some instances this was prolwibly agreeable
to the practice of the natives, as we find the
/ and r of many I'olynesian and Malay
words changed in Tarawan to n; as, iiidjo,
fly, for luyit, — niiko, to come, lor lako, &c.
We heard, also, nt 'I'apuleouea, kaiiij>n and
lcarfp\ iimaiic and it/iuire, &.c.
*Nii, sign of the future and of the subjunc-
tive. Till mi iiriii, I shall sew it.
Miii ikiii ko na nritii, come here that
you may ti'ach mo.
Naur, used only in the salutation, ko iiimr?
wlr',h means, where are you going!
Nniii-iii, to wiidi.
Naip (G.), Mask or bottle made of a cocoa-
nut.
Nairiinak, " no matter ;" " I don't care," i.Vc.
Naitrar, to stab. A/itai miiiia/iii 'ii W
UijMi, don't stab me with the knife.
Nnkaki, they (fem. oi wiikaki).
*Nako, to come. Nttko mux, come hither.
110
Ko iiako miii la, whence comcsl thou?
Ndko supplies the place of roko, in the
im|H'rative.
yitii [iiitiiii, iiii'ii], the inside, the interior;
the mind; within. I^ iiianik i nami,
there is a |Hiin in my inside. JC ro
naiiiun o iiluai, is your mind nt rest
or not ! / iintian a jmihiijhihu, within
my breast.
*\(ii)0, a dy.
*A'(oj/ or I'll III, cloud,
*j\'il>lillll)li, to go.
*iViniiiiiiko or iiiimnnko, to go or come.
A'aiihiiikool iiiii kiitnniiio, I am com-
ing to oil you. Till ninjimiko, I am
going (salutation at parting).
*\Xinjii, stem of a leal'.
*J\'iti)i'i, to see. ^liii ko im niiorio, come
that you ;nay sw it. Im|irnitive, iiori ;
iiori te Iniiiiiiie, see the shadow. jNa-
iiiioiiii, let mo see.
*Xii/i,s<m. .Y«//«, my son. Xaliii Cuea,
son of the chief.
*Xfin\ tongue. .Vcictw, tliy tongue.
*jSi [ii\ /'((], of, in, at, among, for, from,
with, i'li /ii7><7»/, leaf of arum. i\'«j)j
III kiiiiitni, clouds of the sky. A'rt-
hiiokiiio ill tr ai, burn yourself wi the
fire. Ku /mUik i/i iiiiti, thou art great
among spirits. 7!- /mi ,ii kaiiiik,
sonu'thing to !« eaten. Tuutiiitai in
tc iii-/iiiok, keep me Irom slander.
Aliii «' iiiiiiiiie, man-child ((|u. child
among men f) (See Grammar.)
^Vi, |)ond. liii/i ill te ni iii liciiitik, clay
from the mullet-pond.
Ni, tree.
iVi (for ni III), whence, IPo «i, a canoe
from whence !
yiii, she (when the person s|K)ken of is not
present).
Niin or niyin, she (present).
Niirc or nii/irr, she, that lady (a resjiect-
ful form of expression).
Ni-kail(iiniliirii, wixxlen lieads.
*Xiiiui or ijiiiiii, to drink, hia iiima, let
us drink, or, may I drink .' Akea
462
PHILOLOGY.
hu n I milk, there is none, — it is all
(Inink u|>.
'Niiiiii, fivr.
*yi)iialnii, tilly.
Nimuliini, a kimi of shclUfisli ; the peri-
winkle.
Ximlta, to stick, to ndliere.
yimti, to liok wild the tongue.
^iiiijH), II |)iisie miiilc ortlic nrum.
iVi«j (li.), oiK'on-nul.
Niiii, a IngCNin in the centre oC nn island.
(Sec /li.)
Ni/ii, lilt, liisoioua (used (iiily (if fisli). ii
/liiii tr ikd, the tisli \h liil and (loud.
yiijdliii \>iiijiiilio, K.|, to-morri)W. 'Pin
roko ma te tni iiiijio/m, I will ennie
With the ennot! to-morrow. ^Xii/ii/iii o
tiri o ari, to-morrow and the day after
and the day after.
Nhjdn ((!.), to-morrow, yhjan nri, the
day after to-morrow.
yiii ((!.), Clip made ol'n cocoa-nut shell.
Ait/ill, nil/ire, — (sc«' iitiii, niiie.)
JSb (('■.), surl'. Oruak te ua in tc no, the
canoe is lost in the surf,
Xok, breakers.
'Noko, to go, to proceed, to come. Bain-
ininai yoko te ro, tia iioko inn k<nra,
il" the fine weather comes, I will go
a-fishiny. 'l\u iioko ot, shall 1 come
(or go) to you 1
Noknnoko, to walk, to go. Kiiera ko akia
nokoiioko eriir, why do yon not walk
like us? Antai a nokoiioko, don't go
away.
Noko (li.), to come. E iioko mai e r/iii
run tiimaii, I come from my father.
(See roko.)
Ndii, Morinda citrifolia.
Noiio (K.), surf. (See no.)
Noriii (K.), to see. (See mioriii.)
Nordp(\\.), to see any thing. 'IHiiki nordp,
I don't see any thing
'NtajMki, ornament of shell suspended from
the neck.
JS'uk, middle ; waist. E mcdk te tva i
jiiikan, the canoe is split through the
middle. T\a kaptia i niigu, I lie it
niuiid my waist.
Nmo, wave, hillow.
*iVufV(i, string braided of human hair.
n
riolli Kirby and Grey had much difticulty
in pronouncing this element ; the first fre-
ijiiently substituted for it nn n, and the
latter n k.
•77(1, where? which ? E t/it tritmi, where
are your canoes ! E ffu ko tun, which
do you like?
*/7(i, a hundred.
H<i, a liithom.
n<ilioijilio}ji, to-morrow.
*Hiii, I. nai ma teiia, I and he.
*naiit<i [ijiihi, piii, K., kaina, tl.], day.
Eia/ioija te yiiiifa, how many days ?
(IJu. itjdiga?)
Hainap (K.), to-day, this day.
*naira, we. Hair' n iira bit, we and
our wives. Tia korokoro yair e kaimi,
we are stronger than you.
Hi'i/io, last night. (See iijgebo.)
*II/:ne, thou. (Sec y)j/:oe.)
*nkain, ye (nominative prefixed to verbs).
*nkan, then. (Sec ijjkun.)
*Tloijo, to itch.
Hoifd, to speak. Tiaki iji»j<>, I will not
speak.
*Hieta, spine, horn. Hietan te ika, the
prickly spine of a fish.
lloriijiiri [ijariijari], to laugh.
Hori-gin, to laugh at. Ko yori-ginai,
thou art laughing at me.
o
O, and, or. E ]>d wain o fxiin, his legs
and arms arc struck (with disease). E
rd nanam o idiuti, is your mind nt
rest or not ?
TARAWA.
463
*0, n retire, enclosure. Poll a te o, |H)sI
of the (once.
0, to paddln. O viai, pnddlc this way.
*Oiiiiu, eight. Oitni/iiii, eighty.
Of;, oil/;, or iif;i, to return. 'Ha iig, 1
will return. Ki> iij^i Ko tik, will you
return or not !
Ogiia, tired.
*Ukua, whdie.
*Oaiiiata [oiiiut^, n gentleman, n person
of rank ; n mnn, n liumiin l)eing, a
person. Kinrn jwko te oiaiiiila, why
did the chief strike you ? 'Viak tc
omul' e tiiin, bun le aiiti, she is not
n human being, but a spirit.
Omri (G.), to cook.
Oh, full. On e Ixiiu, my hand is full. (See
kdn.)
*On, tortoise ; tortoise-shell.
On (G.), dew. (See mcon.)
*Ono, six.
Onton (G.), all.
Ora, shallow ; ebb-tide, low water. E ora
te rawa, the channel is shallow. Iduai
n\>r, it is not yet low tide.
Oram (G.), wearied, tired.
*Orak, to be sick; sick; illness, disease.
Ko tia/i orak, have you been sick ?
Ihiia te orak c mairur, keep sickness
from us.
*Ori, see ! (See aori, naori.)
Orora, raw.
Oriiak (G.), to destroy ; destroyed, lost.
Ot, thither, to thee. A'ai/iiioko itt, I am
coming to thee, liji noko ot, shall 1
come where you are f
No distinction is made between /> and p,
and the following words might have been
inserted under the former letter. We have
preferred, however, to retain them as they
were originally written.
Faikara, what is it !
Piini, finished, complete. E juini iiii mo-
isiir, my work is done. (.See iipaiii,
kiijHiiii.)
*l'iinii/)iiiiii [or jmnipiini], breast, hosom.
* I'll III, chin.
Pupil, a. small Ijoard; a float-board. E
lerrki Ic j/iip\ the board is narrow.
Papii, cheek.
' PiijMt, th(! Ik'IIv.
*P(iji(i\]ii, cannot, know not how. Tia
piijiiiija uoiiii, I cannot swim. (See
/mi nil.)
Piijiii (<!.), a preparation of taroand cocoa-
nut.
*Para, cap, helmet ; shell (of lobster).
Paraii [prai)], to sail, to voyage. Tia
pariiii iniii iiiuia, we have eunic from
the leeward.
Paruuiiok, to sail away. Tia kaiia jxi-
rai/nok i iiuiio, we are going to sail to
windward.
*Piiro, jjoro, a box, chest.
Pi or pri (M), to tic ((ju. firm, fast. See
kiipi).
Pik, excrement ; to void excrement.
*I'iri/ti>, sloiiiach, lielly.
Po, to strike, beat, pound. Aiilai p(nr,
don't strike us. Poiti te kurapepa,
pound tlie karapcpa. la tian jxxik,
it is pounded.
Pottiia, steering-oar, rudder, paddle. (Sec
/)«<■.)
*Poijm, a paddle.
* Pni, to give.
*Pii, conch-shell.
Pun, to blow with the mouth.
Puna, voice. Pitiiam, thy voice.
Piirii, loll or garret of a house. (See ka-
puriik.)
*Puriii, hair on the breast. (See bitrc.)
Puriti, to pull. Puriti te »iaia, pull the
rope. Antai puriliai, don't pull me.
R
Tills letter was occasionally confounded
with n and (/.
f
f
i
li.
464
PHILOLOGY.
Rah, a hnskct. I
* Kutmht, IxhIv. I
RiiIkiiiii, col. '
Riti, plunk. E rajMi/m tr mi, ihi- plnnk is
liri 111(1.
R<ii, a iimt used In ccKikinj;.
* R<iiiiii, ciiitri}.');c'r to n ciincH>,
Rdimi, til |iiiilill('.
RiiiiKi (C!.). (i)n'ln'ii(l.
* Run, waliT. Iliiti-in-matti, Ipnrs.
*Rfig, cloud (si>o )iiiiji).
Rag, sinvo ; IIk" slave onslc. 7^/•(^ ko
lai/iii-iii-kiniiii > hiiii le rinj ini^or,
why ilii you lalk f you arr hut a slave.
J{(ip or rn/iii, jjood, rif;ht. 7!' nioin nip,
a giKid danr<'. AV; riij), you arr jjimhI.
ii /■«/)' f tciKi k" ktini c tc till, h(! is
good at making n cnnoc. Ko <di rap
in riHi lak, you an" not uprijiht in
your s|MH'ch.
*J{iifiii/>r, hriiad, wide.
Rum, hl(MHl. /i iHiilKir Ir mm iiiiii,
thrrc is much hlooil about tlicc.
Riimaiok, to swoon; a I'ainling-Cit.
*Uiiri>, I'ar.
Riirii, dcMTt ; lanil without trc<;s.
*R(iii, Ihalih.
Ran, (lask made of a cocoa-nut shell.
*Riii,iriu \mi/ioi, moiri], g.iod.
Ruifd, channel, passage, entrance to a
Ingoon.
*Re/iii or rrpii, thousand.
Rciek, narrow, thin.
Rdiit ((!.), higti. (See ieUit.)
Jitiid, to split. /(/ tiiin rriniin, I have
split it. Revnk (passive), split.
Rrralii (C), heavy.
Ri, to mix. Rink, mixed.
Ri, or riri, to tench. Mai ikiii ko na
ririiii ina rnoiti, come and tench mo
to dance.
'Ri, Imiuc. Ri ii^irtd, shoulder-blade, sca-
pula. Ritii ptireke, clavicle.
•Rui, lip.
* Rill or na, a scoop-net.
Rik, inken captive. K rik in te hitok,
taken captive in the war.
Rin, to go, to onler. Aniai riii in tc hit
art, do not go into that house.
Rin ((!.), to touch,
*Riri, cincture worn by the women.
Ririijii, hot ; heat, rays ol'thi' sun.
Ro, liimiui". H niiilr niikaki in Ir ri>,
they dii'd in the liiininc.
Ro, peace, ipiietiiess ; liiir weather. 7U«
f le ro, ki ep the |H'a<'e. 'IHti ro, a
man of [leace. Jiiiin-f!<itini roko tc
ro, if the line weather comes.
*Roko, to come; to iK'come. Tin roko
niai tr nianiajxi, I come from the
council-house. Tin kntv' inn kiin-
ilriiki) (for kiinn-rokii), I am sorry that
he is coming, linijiii^nm ko nit rok^
ar urn, we pray tliee to become our
chief.
Roko, sprout, shoot, sapling.
Roko-lniin (or rnkn-lmini), to press noses
by wa' of salutation.
Rii, from, by, alKiut, with, among, belong-
ing to. Ho iiniiia e rii, you received
it from me. IC male run anini, slain
by whom \ Tia iayai erOni, I um
done with thee. E riimi, among
yourselves. Ini tr nuinijfui e leimna
eriim, is there anutlicr cup belonging
to thet! !
Run, a taro-bed. A pit or trench in which
the arujn is planted.
*Rua, nine.
Rndk, to come down. Tiaki e riiak,
I will not come down. (Sec karuuk.)
Rnil, the spider-shell (Stn>nd)Us).
Rui-mnin (or |H'rhaps rna-ma/a, two-eyea),
the constellation .Viiiares; hence sum-
mer, which is reckoned from its rising.
*Ruoia, to dance; a dance.
It hns been sometimes impossible to de-
cide whether this letter, when initial, pro-
perly lielongs to the word, or is the prefixed
article te.
TARAWA.
466
*T)i(ii [tmiH; K.], Ilip sun [(|U. tr iii?].
E niariiro liiiii, the sun is sironj;
(hot). E Uikii l<mik, tlic sun is set-
tin};. Eriiiia Iwiik i ktiriiiitt, how
mnny suns in Iho sky !
TUfii, n cup.
*T\utri, salt wntrr; tho srn. 'Ihnti ai,
te itin iii, this is suit wnlcr, this is
fresh. Wuiin tniir, to lH)il salt wntcr.
IWnt, tho iniri|>v fruit of the piiuiianus.
Td/iiui, to tiiko up.
Tiilmlii, tho hnwks-bill tortoise.
*Tiiliunu, tho scull.
Ihliu, a club.
25(//M, a spenr.
IhJmiriki, tho principal deity of some of
the Kingsmill Islands.
Tiibui, to refrain, kwp from ; to spare,
save up. Tiiiki lulmtia IkUu <i kaini,
I will not keep my hand from thee,
Ko ta/iiiiia, are you spnrini; (saving) it.
Tabuna, to prny for, to intercede. Ko
tahioiai, ko kaiimiirai, you praved
for nu', you saved my life.
T\ibuii(mk, praying, intercession, witch-
cralK
"Dilmnak (G.), round.
Ttibutahu. IXibutahu piiniwi, you stut-
ter.
• jfJie, to know. Ko tain, do you know it?
Tut, crop of pandnnus fruit.
Tai ((•.), stop, cease, do not. Tai tc
ttiitai, stop the talking. l\u mot an
iikculit^, don't break his knife. (See
antdi.)
Tiiimaru ((!.), mid-day, noon.
7}iink, evening.
*l'aitai [Uli], tnlk, conversation, speech,
command. Tune u-iti tc tnitai, n
man who carries speech, an ambassa-
dor. Till kuw' (iki laiiak am taitai
i Kiiria i ei-an Oiiaik, wo arc .sorry
that thy commands nro not done in
Kuria as in Oneak. Taitai >ii kaitai,
conversation, talking by tho way.
TYiitai, to cut. Tuiliii tc kuni, he is cut-
ting the tree.
117
Tltitiii, by-anil-bye, presently.
*'l\itlai [>«!/«(, (i.J, to tattix). Aiitai ia
taitaiiio, who latlofied thee ? 'I\ine
lailai or Uiti tuilai, a tattooer. 71
Uii III lailiii, impli'monia lor tutlooing.
Tuilara (<■.), curriMit of the oeenn.
T<ik, talk, speech, saying. Ja tian tuny
am Idk, I have told bim your talk
(what you said). Ko <iki rap in am
tak, you arc not upright in your
s|)eech.
Tiikara (<•.), old, worn out.
Tdkaldkd (<■.), song, to sing.
Tiikdtdii (U.), b«'ads.
Tdki ((!.), wood.
TakilHiUi (ti.), bamboo. (See kaikilia.)
* 'Ihma, father.
Tamanu (I'.), council-house.
* Tamantd, handsome.
Tdiiivtaiii, to climb.
Tdminie [tumrir, K.], shadow, shade,
spirit.
Tiinai, an axe.
Tunc, tan, to love, like. Tia iukaigo o
tia taiiego, I respect thee and love
ihce. E yd ko tan, which dost thou
like?
Taiic, a man engaged in any business.
Tine witi tc taitai, a man who car-
ries speech, an ambassador. Tane
kati tc hit, a man that builds houses,
an architect. Tatic biiok, |>cople that
fight. (Same as tcili.)
Tane-kaiua, a conjuror.
* Taiio, tan, earth, soil, ground. Iim tan,
on the ground,
Tantan, the sea-urchin. Echinus.
* Taija, a beam in a house.
* Taya, a cuirass, coat of armor.
Tdijana (G.), same as ntanam.
Tigata (G.), to want, wish, desire; to
love, like.
*Tipiun,\a\,
* Tiiyi, taiiitaiji, vdap'ndayi, to weep, cry;
lamentation, weeping.
Taiji (M.), to love.
TJijitVi, to weep for, to be sorry for, to pity.
466
P II I I, 1,00 V.
i! i
V I
'Dru ko liigiriii, whnt nro you crying
nlxiul ( 7Vf( tiiijiiifin, I |)ily you.
'l\if)ilii iji , to stirk up. /■,' tiiifititiji riii If
unit iiiiiiini 1(111, lli(! (lend iniin's Imhiis
are slicking up llirougli llu.' >;rimuil.
TiijMi [liip], pinro. All Uiji" in te kaicii,
iny plni'c in llio town.
T}ijKi, a knill- i to cut. Antina tiijiii ai,
whoso kiiilr i« lliis \ Anliim liijmiii
inui, wliosi' knives nn' llicsc f Aiiliti
tiipiiim 'n If liijui, (loii'l fill yours<>lf
with tho knife.
'Dipiiji, n species ol'shurk.
* 'l\irii, biirlioil s|iettr.
Tarn, si(;ht, iip|penrnnce. Tinki kiina
liiriiiii, I can't In'iir your sight.
Tdiiini'iiif, ollcrint; nl' loixl to n pxl.
Tiiiiiliirii, to hH)k, to SCO ; seeing, iiwnko.
Ihiki kiiiian tariiUirago, I cannot
beor to look at you.
T}irincii, a conical cap.
*'Piii, lirolher (of u man); sister (ol' a
wiiuian).
* Tiiii, salislioil, enoufih.
lUii or tiiiiii, to take, keep, take hold ; to
look ulk'r, lake care. Tuu e te mo o
kiijM ia, catch the hen and lie it. Tiiiia
tc oriik e iiuiiriir, keep sickness from us.
Tail (<■.), the game of boxing.
Till, ready. Ia tan jxirau, ready to sail.
(See tawii.)
* Tiiiilicrc, (ly.brush.
Tauhiiki, top, roof, ridge.
Ihiigara, cinder.
Taumi, to l)ury. Ko tniinaia in, where
wilt thou bury him .' Ia tian taunak,
he is buried.
Taut, stingy, penurious.
TUutaii, to keep, protect, preserve, take
hold of. TiiiiUiuir in hiiinir, kec|) us
from bin. Tallinn maiiiar, save our
lives. Tiiutiiii iiiikau, clasp his waist.
Tautaii (G.), spot on the skin.
Tautainiii, to smother, strangle. 'Via tuu-
tanna^o, 1 will smother thee.
l\iiva, ripe, ready for gathering, Iduai
taica tc tai, the crop is not yet ri()C.
'Diwa, to dry. la tian tairiiia, I have
dried it.
* 7I', one; o, an; iho (numeral and article).
'IVInii, to disturb, Iroidilo. Antni tcliiiia,
(liin't disturb it. Ko te/nii, you are
troiiblosoino.
Will, grondpaii'nt.
* 'IMiiiiiiii, ten.
Via, to w ipe. Tl'/rt mnm, wipe your face.
*'Malrka, In sit.
* IVili [lit'fi, '/''vijt a Imy ; n person, one
engaged in any employment, [M-ople,
'IHti kiitm hu, a man who builds
houses. Tkiti Ian c tr rn, one who
keo|is the |)eace. 'Iliti n'aiine, a
gifl-
7)*.>r(C;.), older.
'Ihniiiia, (inc ; another.
* Vh/ij, three.
'Ihiiiniiiinui, a small, young cocoa-nut.
lyiiiknhiiija/iiipa, sca-urohin, echinus.
'IXiiikiularnilaiii, beads (made ol" wood and
shell).
* Trillin II, ton.
* 'Dim, he, that man.
'Ihia, to break. Anoko tii taifuia te
taliii, go and break the club. Ti-icak,
broken.
"n-ifini [ipi. iciiii .'], shooting star.
jfi, to stand. Tin ti o tia tekatika, shall
we stand or sit? i" li c taaik. the
sun is high.
Ti or tii, to resemble, correspond, agree.
Tt te Inikir ajHir ma ajxiiiii, the size
of our land :igrecs with yours. Ti
tuan o tcraii Uitar in raviriii, our
houses are one and the same in great-
ness. Ti te nan pni ma tciia, I am
equal to him. Tt-te-eran, the same,
similar, 0(|ual.
* 7'ia, prefixed to vo'bs and verbal adjec-
tives, is a sign of tho first |iers(>n, sin-
gular or plural. 7Vrt loko vtai It
maiiiapa, I conic from the council-
house. 'I'ia roko ijaiia, we come.
Tiaki (from tia and akea), I will not, I do
not, &LC.
TARAWA.
407
Till, ildiic, liiiislicil. Kii till, nrt lliim dime?
Ill tin trim, he is ddiic.
Till, Willi /( or /)/ aflixcil, is used tooxprosN
|i(i.st time, (ir the complflion of nii
uc'iidii. 'JUAt/iiii, oriisli it; in tiun
tii/iiiiia, I hiivo crushed it. Ko tian
tiitiiniii, hast thou crushed it !
TianiiHiiik, to wash.
TibitUii, lame. K libititd wain, my log is
lame.
'Ti/kiijii, [)riesl.
3VA-, a <|uick, ilarting pain ; to leel a pain.
Tin tik itiniiu, I have a pain in my
inside.
TUiirii {ii.),vhal1
Tiki, pierced, hurt. E tiki triiiu in t'in,
my Coot is pierced with a hit of coral.
(I'<'rha|is the same word with tik. Sec
katikitiki.)
Tiiitiit (O.), pumice.
Tin, the llbrous envelope of the cocoa-nut
tree.
*Tinit, mother.
Tiiiii, a (leet of canoes.
Tiniiliii, Ixitllc.
Tiiiiji, danghler-in-law. 'I'iiiipii, my — .
Tiiiijniiii, thy — .
I'ip ((!.), n mallet.
7'iii>:ii, tiesh, meat. (Sec irii'o.)
Tiritiri, to light; to kill; bo angry.
7\io, paltry, mean, of little value.
7'itiriiii, hair, eipial |K)rlion. (See ti.)
Tiviii, throw it down.
Tiijiiiiii, alhicorc.
7hkii (O.), top, summit.
Tikii [tnk or tiik], to stay, remain, stop; to
reside, settle on land; to he full, as the
moon (i. e. to stop increasing); rest,
remainder. Ko iriii, ko tok, wilt thou
go with me or stay? I'm titka ion tc
mi, I stayed on bf)ard the ship. 3h
tok' itiiiit/iii, when did you get your
land ? (said to a kiiloka,nr landholder.)
Jj lokii III mnkaiija, the full (resting)
of the miKin.
'Ihkoluk, iin old and dry cocoa-nut.
Thinn, to sip, suck up.
7>»iaiiti, nying-fish.
T}/itiiilii, gravel.
7hiiii, noon. IC Inn- titaik in toiiu, the sun
will lie hot at noon.
Totii, a thid"; to steal.
'Jhtim', to crush, scpieeze. Ko tiiiti totonia,
hast thou crushed it ?
• 31/, tii-ni-kiiiiiii, fruit of the pandanus.
Tuiuj, to tell, to inform, la fiiiu tiiaij ■im
i tnk, I have told him your speech.
I * Tiiitiii, star.
I " 'l)i, aged iierson, Tii-iii-iimnne, old
man. 7^-iii-iiiinc, old woman.
Tiintii, frock made of woven sinnet,
u
*P,a fish-trap, an eel-pot.
• Ua, two.
*Uiiiiu or (Hiiiii, eight.
Uaijiiji, very small.
•[/((/•(■;■('/.■, small. 71' miiimot uarirck, a
small cocoa-nut.
• Uii, iiiii, nine (sec lua).
Uni, flower.
•firt, chief. Aiitai nean apami, ytho is
the chief of your land ?
*0i, tooth. Uiii, my tooth.
Ui (Ci.), |ilaco. Uiii frii, place of fire.
Ui-kitkiiijii, cutwater of a canoe (sharp-
tooth).
Ui-kiitik, sarcastic (piercing-tooth).
Ui-)i\iiiti, slander.
Uiniiijiniiij, to whisper in the ear.
*Uki, nail, claw. Uki-ni-bai, finger-
nail.
Ukiini, sni|)e.
Umn (G.), house ; (K.), house without a
loft.
• Uiiuitie, iiniiiri; man ; mule.
Umitiii (O.), to boil.
l/ii, iiiiiiii, tv fight. Aiitai I'lM, atiii, don't
light, children. THli iinun, one who
lights.
Uiiiga, a pillow (qii. iiruija?)
*Uniii, sjiear armed with shark's teeth.
r *
468
P II 1 1, o I, o (i Y.
I!
fTp, i/jw, to lionr. Ko ui/<i tr kitri, ilo you
liPiir Iho lit>mlil f Tilt mi, I hcnr.
Tiiiki injiij), I don't hoar nt nil. (Soc
iiurnp.)
• UijiiiH-, lliiili (sec OA'ff).
Uijisini, Ibrnirrly, Imin ago.
*Ui>iiti, to gwiiii, Ifoiia-iiiiik, 111 Rwim
wull.
Uiiiiik, to llio enstwani,
Uoiag, two nioiitliM.
t;^), n young cucoa-nut, before the pulji is
forincd.
*Urii, red, like (ire, glowing (sec tin-
raura).
Vr, lobster (sjiocics of Palinurun).
Vri, 8pcnr sot with shark's toolh.
*Uta, some, a little. Uta iii uUike, a little
tolmcco.
• Uleiite, grass.
Ud., to rise, a|)|icar, come in sight. Kana
uli lattik, the sun is going to rise.
I>/uai uli te /»k<i, the beuch is not in
sight.
• Uto, cocoa-nut.
Utiia, kitc-llying.
w
• It'll, cnnoo.
IVii'ni'HKittip, ship.
•Il'i, fruit.
♦U'.ii, log, foot.
Wiiiiriii, roi-f.
W'akii, r<H)l. lyukiin te kai, root of the tree.
*\Vakiiki, ihoy, them (masculine. Soc
niikaki).
ir<iMi//i, husk of the cocoa-nut.
tViirigi (i|U. inrikif), to count. IVnrigia
te kiilokii ill ti- kiiiiii, count the land-
holders in tlio town.
Wiitl or witii, to shout, halloo.
Wei, to sew. Tia kiiiiu irrhi, I am going
to sew it.
*Wari, those.
ICi//, to lie down, to repose, Nayinokou
win, I am going to lie down.
Wirarii, rainNiw.
Witin [wHiiia, irii/ia, eti], to carry, bring,
take. Wilia-iiiai te li/ii, bring me
tho noodle. Ko koriikoro in wiliiim,
thou art strong in thy carrying.
NOTES ON THE LANGUAGE OF ROTUMA.
Tub mntrrialM for the following rcmnrks wero obtnini'd, ns hns licon cisnwhoro Htnlr-d,
during a l>rief intercourse with »omr natives of this island, whom we met ot Tongatalni and
at the Feeje<! Ciroup. Although, from Ihc unfavoroblo cireumNtances under whirh the
notes were made, they arc necessarily very inifK^rli'ct, lliey may yet serve to give somo
idea of Ihir nature of the language, and its relations to other idioms.
Great dillicully was rxjierienced in fixing satisfactorily the ortliogropliy of many of the
words, owing partly to the extreme indistinctness of the pronunciation, and partly to
certain changes whi<-h most of them undergo in accordance with n |icculiar system of
euphony. Add to this, that numerous contractions occur, in which vowels are dropped,
and separate words arc confounded in one,
A general law appears to l)o, that when a word stands by itself, not followed by another
on which it depomU, it must terminate in a vowel, — and this appears to Ix- the pro|)er and
original form of most of the words; but when combined, in any way whatsoever, with
other words, an alteration takes place, by which the concluding syllabic is so transposed
or contracted as that the consonant shall be the linal letter. The following examples will
show the eticct of this singular law :
OSIUINAL roiiH,
till III, moon
vhi, yam
layi, wind
olioni, mother
alii, to die
mose, to sleep
cosaTiiucT roimi.
kual riia, two moons
j/A' run, two yams
leaff ma, heavy wind
uliiin -ta, the mother
aV nioiva, dead a long time
po kal nws (or iiiois) ra, I did not sleep.
This altered or construct form of the words is the one in which they are the most com-
monly heard, and many of those given in the vocabula'v are in this state, — a circum-
stance which, in some measure, disguises their similarity to the corresponding Polynesian
terms. The distortions produced by this change, and by contraction, are frequently very
great. Thus, the word for womiiii, which is hoiii or luitii, becomes by this change,
hmaii or hauiii, and by contraction huu and /Uii, in which last form it is most commonly
heard.
lie
I
470
I'llILULUU Y.
Ill writing Iht' liin|pin|iD, iirvrn vuwrl thnrnrtiri ()i, », t, i, n, ii, u) hnvn lirpn iiimI,
uikI lilVi'ii niiiwiiiiiiiN ((, /, /i, k, /, HI, II, I), /I, ;, s, t, i), v, ir), ll in prnlialilo llint two
of tlii'M' vowcU, n mill ", iiiiil twii rniiMiiiiiiiln, ^ iitiil c, will lirri'iilli'r Im' rmiiiil iiiinivi>ii>
anry, tln'ir pliu'rii la'iti^ Mii|i|iliril r<'!<|Mvlivi'ly by », o, < ami r, tliiH rfiliiriri); tlir niiiiibur
llt'rll'IIHillH III HI'VI'lltllMI.
Till' liiw wliirli pri'viiilN ill llir l'iilyiif»iiiii diiiliiMs liy wliicli Iwni-nnioinniilii nrvrr orriir
williiml II vowel Im'Iwii-ii iIiiiii, iIin'n iml ii|>|ily In iIuk tiui^iir. Al llu' 111111)' tiiiH', llii' i-oin-
liiniitioiiH lire iii'illii'r miiiit'niii.s imr liiimli, niul (he gvncrnl muiihI of llii' laiigim^r in mit)
niid iilriimiii;.
T II K A n T I (• I, K.
Tin' nrlii'li' in I'l nr '/«,* wliidi wcins to tie llir siiinr wnril with Iho niimrrnl o/ir, nnd
luiswcrs III ImiIIi till' iiiilrliiiilr iiiiil ili liiiiir iirtii'li'M ill Kii^'lixli. Ill llii' liilli-r I'lisc, il MiiiKi.
linns lllkrt till' |lllli'(' lil'llir ilrlll<i|l'<lrillivr //k//, n|'|M>M<'il to /;, lIll). Until thl'"!' WnriU (III
nnil ti) iirr |KwHi.\i'(l tn llic nouns to whii-li llii'y U'lon;;, — an, hii/it (I'oiis. hiiiil) niotin,
hualila or hmiltn, the mcKiii ; lirOii (rnini. Iirilt) mar, hrithla, thu star ; Oui or Oa, man ;
rrii ihi.lii, Oiiti, not llmt mnn, [liiit| this num.
Till' liiiiil votti'l oi' this |iiirti('li' is sniiii'iiini'a (lro|ipi><l, — M, tM uOttt' On wakai', my
I'utlii'r liis cniioi' tlint, lor, tliiil is Ilic raiim' nl' my liitlifr.
T II K N I' .V.
The (inly real inflti-tion wliicli nouns nmlcrgo in Iho onphonin rharign already men-
tinni'il, (icnilrr, wlirii it I'.vists in iiiitiin', is ilinlin;;iiisli<'<l liy aHixing lu the Hiilistniilivc
thl' woriln !)<ti or i)ii, iniilr, iiml lioni, liiitii, or Inn, li'innli' ; as, /(■«, child, liDui, boy,
lihitiii, (jirl ; 1/ or Im, |iiirriit, iitin, liitlirr, nlnmi or iiliin, motlirr.
Till' (.'rnilivi' is rorincil I'illirr by tlir |ironiiiin mi, his (as in nn oxainple just givrn), or
by till' artix //, whirli is proluibly nn nbbn'vlnted liirmofo prc|Ki8ition (wo or ««). inca'ii'ig
iif; Hs, iiiUiii iUilii, I'alhrr oI'lliHi man.
Tho diitivo mill iiblutivo arr r.vpR'ssod by means of the prepositions se nnil r ; as, sr
Iloliiiiiii, to Uotiinia ; r iilioi, in th<' ship; r Hiiliiiini, I'roin Roiiinm. Si' ap|iearH to lie
ulao cinploM'il to di'iioti' ibc siinplr arriisiilivi', as nn kil \r iiiii, I sit tlic*-.
N'l imiiiflc iiiiirkiiif; tlic pliiriil roiilil In- iliscovrrrd, cxiTpt the word miioi, many; lis,
;i niiiui, iiiaiiy housi.'s, \c. Il'ihe lanu'iiu;;c (lassoss any more direct method ol'exiiress.
ing plurality, it i.s probably seldom used.
A n J K (■ T I V H S AND NUMERALS.
Tlirsi' liillow the noun to wliirli tliry lu'long; os, Oa lelci, goiKl man; hual snijhul,
ten ninnths.
The comparative degree is expresseil by meons of the proposition e, following the
adjective; as, leu (cons, li") cat, iji> li' r Until,, 1 um great by (greater than) that man.
• The (( i» inirily n nofli'iuil iiounil of/, wliicli ini),'lit, with |>roprirtjr, lie nilMtituted for it W« liave
preferred, liDH'ovtT, to leave tJie words M they were originally written.
R O T U M A. 471
The riillowinn arc llio niiiTM'rnla IkiIIi in llicir nimplc ntui in lln'ir conMnirl Ibrm.
■IMPI.X. cnNNTiiifcrr.
ta III (t') iir etea
onn
run riui
two
(hJit Oat
Ihrco
hilkf (htke) hilk
four
lima Mm
Ave
OHO m
■U
hiih, M9
dpvpn
VI Jit (irii/ii) wal
I'igl.t
livn (.«(((•(() .liitti''
niw
ill fill itl u ut ji'itte ('.) tiiijliiil
ton
su>)hul Oiimii telle
eliivcn
siiijhiil Hiimii triir run (?)
twrlvo
Siiiihiil ihimii Irlir lliii
tliirti'i'n
siiiihiil Ihiiiiti hhr link, iV
',
foiirlfirn
riiayhiilu iir riiiii)liiil or /mlie riia
twonly
OiJaijIiiilu or ihJiiiniliiil nr /mlir i
W
Ihirry
luikdi/luilii or liakrinjiiiil or jmlie
link
forty, iVc,
UiroH or litriiu
huiidri'd
tiiroii run
two liiindrej
III mil thil
lliro" liiiii(lr<'d
Inrim link or hfk
lour hiindri'd, dec.
hfjtt'' or kiiintniiiniiii
ono tliciuHiiiid
luf-ruii or kimiiiimnriia
two llinusnnd
liif-Oit/ or kimituniiiDul
tlirct' lliousnnd, dec
kiiit' or kimaniHun.siighul
ten thousand
The numlM-rs above this nro merrly niidti|iloH of Ihn prccpdinj;, and there seemed to
be some uncertainty in the mode of formin)? them. Some of the preceding may not be
entirely corn'Cl, as the natives (hlferrMl Hinon){ Ihenw.'lves with ri'gard to them. It is
|)ossibIe, however, that there may Ite diirerent modes of counting appropriated to ditrerciU
objects. The use of Oiinia in the nuinlxTs lietweon ten and twenty is exactly the same
09 that t>( liima in Hawaiian; thi^ tilie which lullows it was |K>rhaps a mistake, and may
properly U'lonj? only to the number eleven. When these numbers are joined to nouns,
Oitnui is omitted, ond the noun rejieated in its place ; as, Oii-suijhiil ma OtU\ eleven
men ; On senjhut iiui On ma, twelve men, &c.
The particle lie sometimes intervenes lietween the noun an<l the numeral, though the
rule according to which it is inserted or omitted is not apparent ; ns, sen; knife, ser^ he
riia, two knives, ser^ he Ool, three knives ; knkiii eseii, one finger, kakai Ite rua, two
fingcro ; «/ii, yom, vh' ma, two yams, «/»' Ool, three yams.
PRONOUNS.
The personal pronouns, as far as they could be determined, were as follows :
1
■ I
472
PHILOLOGY,
|t'-
•lira,
yn or poll, I
at or ei, thou
hati (?), ho
DDIL.
amia, we two
aua, ye two
erui, they two
ri.viAU
am or amu, we
au or Ri<«, ye
em, they
We were assured by the natives that there was no distinction of exclusive and inclusive
pronouns, as in the P.ilyncsian ; but in one of the wntences which were written down,
we find the word us rendered by mokoi (instead of am), which may bo a corruption of
the Polynesian nuitoii. Tiu're was olso a pronoun of the second person plural, amu,
making in the dual iimiui, but in what it diU'cn-d from iiii we could not ascertain. The
pronoun of the third |>orson singular is doubtful; that which is given was only heard
once, the natives generally using Oata, that man, in its place.
The possessive pronouns are :
tito or otoii, my
i> or oil, thy
on, his
otomui, of us two
011(1 or omiia, of you two
oria, of them two
imiii (?), our
oits or omiis, your
oris, their.
These all precede the substantive to which they belong : there arc no possessive oiRxes.
The alTixed particles tii and ti have been mentioned as answering to the demonstratives
tiitit and lliis. When used sepnriiUly, they would set^m to be changed to tes (or te^) and
tay ; as, nto ri te^, on ri ttnj, this is my house, that is yours. Li was also used, in one
instance, to signify tliis, as, iis-h, this day.
The interrogative pronouns are sci, who or what \ (used only of persons) teste, what?
and his', how many \ as, st-i Oata I who is that man ? on sei rii/a, whose is that bouse 1
Sei oil lis ? what is thy name ? Ftefore a vowel this word is sometimes contracted lo *',
as, s'o« (i.< .' what is thy name? s'on as, what is his name? //iV is |KThaps the con-
struct form of /lisu, from the Polynesian yfaa; — as, haiiiia /»««', how many towns, or
lanus ?
THE VERB.
The number of sentences which were obtained is not sufTicient to enable us to give a
full account of this part of speech. The future lenr<: is denoted generally by the particle
la ; as, i^; /a tsiinlika ai, I will kill Ihi-e ; ijo la nios r jmi/i, I shall sleep to-night. Ma
seems also to be employed to express intention, as, simit ma ijo ln6 se liotiinui, by-and-
bye I will go to Rotuma. No sign of the preterite could be discovered, though it is very
probable that such may exist. Its place wns supplied by some adverb significative of
past time ; n.s, jw /<i' r asa, I went yesterday ; ijo leiim iiiaioa e Itoliima, I come long
ago from Itoluma.
La, Ix'sides its future signification, is olso used to express any kind of contingency,
where we should employ the optative, ! iibjuiiclive, or infinitive moods ; as, po kiim la
krl haniia, I can)o to see the land ; /<io la my la iiaijati^a If urn, go tell the chief to come
(go to tell that the chief come) ; iii la Ian sr Rotuma, ijo la nao le maoi, [if] thou wilt
go to Rotuma, I will give ftbee] many things.
The directive particles mat nnd atu, so frequently used in the Polynesian to signify
respectively motion towards and from the sjieaker, arc found in Kotuman under the
R O T U M A.
473
forms >»' and uto (or aC), siiflixod to the verb. Thus liio or hi, whicli signifies to go, or
move, becomes ItMtn, to go nwny, hum, to come ; from niio or nti, to give, we have,
lutm, give here or give mc, naato or naat\ to give away.
ADVERBS.
The negative adverbs are kat. (or k<il) and ra, the first of which usually precedes the
verb, and the second follows. They are used together, very much as ne pas in French;
as, jw kiU mns ra e piiij'la, I did not sleep last night ; go kal leum ra c kaat, I will not
come to-morrow.
110
- IM
ROTUMAN VOCABULARY.
A, sharp.
A'aro, arum csculentutn.
Afaf, sick.
AfOia, foot.
Alwi, ship (probably from the hail, ship
ahoy !).
Ai or ei, thou.
Ai, tree, wood, stick ; ai-jxluj/a, fighting-
stick, i. c. club.
Aihi, club (probably same as above).
Ala, oT, to die ; dead.
Ala, oT, tooth.
Alele, aid, tongue.
AUlc, snake.
Am, amis, we.
Amia, we two.
Amn ; amua, ye ; ye two.
ApH, mat.
Ajn-oii', priest.
Ar-Ui, foot (>ju. sole?).
Ar-siii, palm of hand.
As^ (qu, tisa?), smoke.
jlsa, ai', name.
.Asa, ai', sun, day ; as-li, to-day ; t asa,
yesterday.
Astia, wliitc men.
AsUOiniols, noon (qu. ai-to Ou nnts, the
sun stands in the middle?).
Ate, to eat; meat.
Atia, dead.
Atmai, generous; wise.
Atua, deity. »
An or aw, ye.
il«a, ye two.
Avdv, weak, sickly.
Awa]} (or doaji), cloud.
E
E, in, at, by, from ; than.
Bay, to tell.
Easa, yesterday. (See asa.)
Eilii (qu. itii ?), town.
£? or clem, near.
£/f/, low.
Esea, one.
Bfi, whence, (See tei.)
EOi, eO\ belly.
Faiapa, faiap, to speak.
Faksisia, stingy, parsimonious.
Fana, low.
Fatfata, breast, chest.
Full, cheek.
Els', white.
Fdo, green.
H
Ha or Iw, to pufT, blow ; to smoke a cigar.
Haareij (!), young.
Hake, hiik, hik, lour.
R O T U M A.
475
(Qu. hafe or afe ?)
(little woman ; see
Hani, lioni, hninn, fioian, hun, hen, wo.
man. (See Notes.)
Hani'Ki, hunoa, land, country, town.
Haii, he. (See Notes.)
HaOii, had\ stone.
Heak'', buttock, nates.
Hiifi, Itef, thousand.
Hen miamea, girl
hani.)
HeOu, IteO or /leiO, star.
Hidphiap, palm of hand. (See ar-siu.)
His', (qu. hisa?), how many?
HiOii, hiO, heid, seven.
Hoam, to bring.
Ho-fak-M, arrow.
Hoi, tortoise.
Huuij, heart.
Hue, flower.
Huhoni, hitOa. (See uluini, u6a.)
Hula, hual, moon, month.
/, day (?) ; I'j, to-day.
la, axe.
Fa, fish.
Imu, torn, to drink,
Inea, to know.
Like, indi, no.
Ini, skin ; feather.
Ihosu, inCis, wife ; married (qu. spouse,
married person?).
loro, shark.
Ipa, pigeon.
Isu, eis, nose.
K
Ka, yes,
Kmit or kilt, to-morrow.
Ktiha, to laugh.
Kaka'c, kakai, kakf, finger or toe ; kakai
maOua, thumb ; kakai tsuts, little fin-
ger (or toe).
Kali, circumcision.
K(Uo£i, egg.
Knmin, dog.
Kata, kaf (kal), not.
Kava, pi|>cr mcthysticum.
Kck, kel, black.
Ktle, kcP, to see.
Kia, hiiiit-kut, neck,
Kimanmana, thousand,
Kiu, ten thousand.
Kok, foolish.
Kokomimcai), friend.
Kumkum, beard; chin.
La, future particle. (See Notes.)
Lu, leg.
Latitliima, lamluin, up ; high.
Laijti, n fly.
Laijhaniia, town.
Xajji, /raj, wind, air ; sky.
Lao, spirit.
L(w, ld\ Iti'liV, to go, move, walk ; laato,
go away, depart.
LausilOjm, below.
Lea, lee or le, child ; lea-rirl, leriri, child
(qu. little child?).
Lehdui, lehoni, daughter,
Leilei or Irlei, good.
LeOdi, son.
Li'um, seed.
Liioii, to come.
i>t'(/, /«(i'', hair, or beard.
Li, tliis(!).
Lima, liam, five.
M
Jlf((, future particle. (See Notes.)
Ma, and.
il/(i, heavy, strong, powerful.
Mahdii, warm.
Mnk, to sing and dance.
Ma' ma', green.
Mamoru, hard, strong.
Mtiiiiiiauu. a bird.
Miwi, iiiaui, many.
476
PHILOLOGY.
i
Mara, n kind of food made of vegetnblos
which linvo undergone fermenlnlion.
MiiriHi, a long time.
Musi, sail.
Mtisimis, hungry.
Mat^iio, an artisan, workman.
Mtilii', cold.
MaOo, niaO'', face, eye.
MtiOiiu, old, full-grown.
MiiOim (m.<i)iiOiia /), elder, councillor.
Maiii'iri, ma'iir\ to live ; alive,
Miamca, small ; young.
Mian-u'n, nail of finger.
Mem, fresh (as water), not salt.
Mi'a, red.
MiUenini, niUsami, morning.
Mai, fowl, hen.
Mokoi, we.
Mose, mns, mots, to sleep.
Motara, forehead.
Mjiira, clay, earth.
Miiri; On-muri, a common man, a man
of low rank.
Mut-seae-rna, halves (qu. divided in two ?).
N
Na {nao), to give ; num, give mc, give
here ; naat or naO', give away, give
thee or him.
Nam, shoulder.
Nr, if, whether.
Ncinei, strong, healthy.
Niii, cocoa-nut.
Nono, pn!sently, by-and-bye.
NiHi, welcome ; ««J ia, the usual salu-
tation.
Noh' nosiio, sit down.
Nolio, leaf.
Niitsit, nouts, mouth.
n
U, yes (a kind of inarticulate murmur or
grunt, the head being, at the same
time, thrown a little upward and back-
ward).
Utitjut^a, f(ii/dt^, chief, noble.
Ho or ijoii, I.
or nil, thy.
Ohoni. (See iihani.)
Oi-hapa, bark of tree. (See (li.)
Oitii. (See aiiii.)
OmtM, of you two (dual pos.)
OiiiHS, your (plu.)
0/1, his.
0)1, of, belonging to (?).
Oiia, drunkenness.
Olio, on, six.
Oga, lightning.
Oiia, of them two.
Oris, their.
Oroie', heaven, residence of the deity. (See
aitu.)
Oti) or ()/<■)« or ontlou, my.
Otoiiiia, of us two.
Oil (or (j), thy.
Oil, to cry.
Oua, of you two.
Pa, grass.
P«, to wish, desire.
Pari, banana.
Pat, to love.
Patpiila, plebeians, common people.
Petii, jiel, to fight.
Pi-piioiits, lip. (See nulsii.)
Perii]icni, yellow.
Pilsa, cat.
Poke, ten.
Poi)i,j>iio>),jmp, night ; epuj/dit, last night
c ymi/t, to-night.
Pom or /mu, very.
Piiaka, pig.
ROTUMA.
477
R
Ra, not.
Rahi, re, fire,
Rttksd, bad.
Ramu, ramo, musquito.
Ran, leaf.
Rei, to see.
Rere, up, above.
Ri, house.
Riamham, yellow.
Riamkau, king, sovereign.
s
Sd, sacred.
Sania, outrigger.
Sayhani, saywaivdni, sister.
Saijhulii, saghiil, ten.
Sdsiugi, sdsipi, brother.
Sau, king.
Se, to.
Scniit, soon, by-and-by.
iSere, ser\ a knife ; to cut.
Seas, salt water.
&i, who?
Siokstko, deceitful.
Sisi, without, outside (?).
SiS, arm.
Stw, siaw\ nine.
SoitsoK, far,
Sm(, bone.
SuiOcap, hip.
Shw, warm, hot,
S«s, breast, pap.
Simin, to burn.
3h, one.
J)j or da, llie, that.
3J/J;, that.
2li;«Hm (qu. damtiral), cemetery, burial-
place.
120
Tan or ton, fresh water.
Ihnoa, bowl for drinking the infusion of
kava.
Tarau, taroii, hundred.
7\ao, spear.
T^drau-a, blue.
7\ffTO, to run.
K or <t, thing.
Tiay, yesterdoy.
Jii, where ; e tei, whence.
ma'a, food.
'Veue Rotuma, people of Rotuma.
Tes or te^, this.
7!v.Ve, v.hat ? what is it ?
llOui, ornament.
!/Im or tiu, great.
Tfime or Zt'tiMe, all.
Ti, this.
2'()/, to carry.
Tblo, whale.
Tbto, blood.
l\dvek, tsdvuka, to strike, to kill.
TMits, tpiti; little.
Out or fld, man ; dd-miiri, common mon ;
one of the lower class.
Oalhja, Odliaij, car.
0umii, to bury.
Oaune or Oor-ni, inside of.
OanOaii, earth, soil.
Oi'-sds, tattooing, marks on the body.
0i/o or Oi/ou, head.
06-ni-ld, toe.
GomaOfia, back.
6>o'/^ sugar-cane.
Oh, to stand.
Oil, the olhow ; the knee.
GiKtijsoh, mountain.
0iii, lliuiulcr.
Oiima, particle used in connecting units
with tens. (See Notes.)
mm
478
PHILOLOGY.
u
l//'a, a hen.
U/ui, native cloth.
Uhani, uhoni, uhen, mother.
Ufii, uh', ynm.
UlC-lei, potato.
Ulu, breadfruit.
T/liipn, up, above.
Tfsa, uas, rain.
POu, lutOa, hnOa, father.
Vat, water.
Vnka, canoe ; vaka-atua, ship.
Viikvaka, side,
Va-fa-sc, get up ! arise !
Vain, ti'ol, eight.
Tawa/', to like, love.
Vavani, husband.
Veko, work.
THE LANGUAGES OF AUSTRALIA.
When tho first imperfect vocabularies of Australian dialects were collected, the great
difTcrences observed between those spoken by trit)es in close vicinity to one another led to
the iinpreasion that a multitude of totiilly dissimilar idioms were spoken in this country.
Further investigations have shown that this belief was not well founded ; and at present,
the opinion of those who have given attention to the subject is, that the tribes of Australia
ore of one slock, and speak languages which, though dilRring in many respects, yet pre-
serve sufficient evidence of a common origin. This opinion, however, is founded rulher
upon the resemblance of a few of tho most common words, and a general similarity of
pronunciation, than upon any careful comparison of tho various languages, more es|)ecinlly
with reference to their grammatical characteristics, on which alone any positive conclu-
sion can be founded.
Our own field of inquiry did not extend beyond tho limits of the colony of New South
Wales: but that, within this region, the dialects of all the native trilx's arc nearly nkin,
cannot be doubted. The following comparative vocabulary, though brief, and compiled
under circumstances unfavorable to entire accuracy, yet shows sufficient evidence of a
general connexion. Morcton Hay, Lake Ma(|Uarie, Sydney, Liverpool, and Muruya, are
the names of places on or near the coast, from lat. 27° to lat. 30° south. Peel River,
Mudgee, Wellington, and Hathnrst, are from one to two hundred miles inland, separated
from the coast line by the ruggid chain of the Blue Mountains. Of the vocabularies, that
of tho trilx! at Lake Maquani is principally from Mr. Threlkcid ; that of the Mudgee
dialect was furnished by Mr. Watson ; the few words from Moreton Boy arc froin an
anonymous vocabulary which Mr. Threlkeld discovered among his papers. The remain-
der were obtained directly from the natives, in most cases from a single individual, with-
out the opportunity of a revision, which might have enabled us to detect some emu's, and
supply deficiencies. The Australians have commonly two or three names fijr an object,
expressing the same general idea willi slight modifications. This will be observed in the
words under the head of Lake .Maqunrie. To form a complete vocabulary, for the pur-
pose of comparison, it would be essential to obtain all these partially synonymous terms,
OS otherwise many jwints of resemblance would be missed.
Morelon Bay
Lake Maquaric wnlor/
HAIR.
ciiIiIkmi en
liitv )), n-i'i-
rOn
EVE. NOSE.
Ill ill moral
yaiktn/,po- nokoro
rotvup
ko ruka
I
i
480
PHILOLOGY.
IIIAD.
nun.
ITK.
NOlI.
MOUTH.
Sydney
kahirii
kiltm
mtlnirai
iiokoro
kdrka
Liver|)ool
kiiUira
gtlnij
milmre
kariika
Muriiya
kiijiua
tiiiiir
miiUira
ta
Perl Uiver
Imra
taikiil
mil
muru
pa nkai
Mudj^ec
ga or Art
lull, {mir,
face)
Wellington
huilyng
11 rail
VI it
mump
pan
Bnthiirst
Uiliig
giiin
mekalait
tiikiti' (1)
ndndarge
Lira.
TKETll.
TOMiUI.
CHIN (or beard)
EAR.
Moreton Bay
dear
dalan
ye ran
liidiie
Lnkc Mni|imrio
tn mbiri, ici-
lira, j/anta-
lidin
vattiu, ya-
purviip, tn
lis
ra
rd
rttkuri
Sydney
piin
yira
dalan
trido, yarin
kiire
Liverpool
ultUj
y\ra
talay
u'ido, ycrnp
kurt
Muruya
u-i/ip
yira
talap
tcfUu, yarin
guri
Peel River
j/tii
yira, yira
talcottolai
iirdi
biua
Mudj;ee
yira
talui
yarei
bina
Wellington
miimlu, Ml'.
iraij
talan
yaran
uta
Batluirst
tlumhirj/i
trap
yaran
bendparei
HtCt OR THROAT
HAND.
BREAST.
THIOH.
LU.
Moreton Bay
morrdii
Imiylio
Lake Maquarie
lcaleirp,u>ord
nuiUira
wapara,
IMiiyil
buloinkoro
pari
Sydney
kurfgd
damn ra
bfrig
dara
Liverpool
kitj/ga
tanuira, bi.
ril
miijMl
dara
Muruya
kami
mil Ha
bitjtil
hiinta
Peel River
nnHfUj/gici
ma
pamura
tara
btiyti
MudgC'i
yurun
mara
biri
tara
buyu
Wellington
kate
mtira
namap, bi-
rip
tarap
biiyii
Bathurst
koflatiji
pabap, diliti
gadar
pari
FOOT (TOM).
■KIN.
BONI.
HAN.
WOMAN.
Moreton Bay
Lake Maquarie
tina
bttkai
tibun
kore
noknp
Sydney
kana (?)
bakai
didra
kvre
dyin
Liverpool
duna
Muruya
dana
u-ardu
yuen
wapen
Peel River
tina
kftiitai
pura
iiirt
inl\r
Mudgce
dina
kiilir
Wellington
di>iat/
yulain
dabal
gibir
inur
Bathurst
dina
yikm
mauup
balan
.
'
'
AUSTRALIA.
48
rATiin.
MnTMIIII.
■UN.
HUON,
WIND,
Moreton Bay
Intfia
gtillan
boran
Lnki! Mti(|Uiirio
bii/aijUii
tdiikan, nai
JMIIIll
ynliina
tvibi
Sydiii^y
Ini/iiij
vaiyinj
gaii or kan
gibiik
Livt'r|>o<)l
tmrlii mij/
uu/iij-iniUla
Muriiyu
jMiptite
meiulii
b/ifiurin
dimara
miriguma
I*wl Uiver
yoktiia
piimpai/i
toni
jmlii
maier
Mii(lg(;o
Imwitlficr
^luiKija
mil Id L
ki/ai
kira
Wellington
lull II n
lint
Balliurst
giiru)i/xU
kiinain
manuuhf
daiilyii
ptulrii
FIRK.
WJTtR.
8Tf)NR.
OOOD.
RAD.
Morclon Hay
(Iiirloo
yeiuo
Lake Miiqunric
koiyvj)
kulig, koko-
titling
miirorog
yarakai
Sydney
kuiyii})
III
kttlcre, Ixitlro
giber
biityiri
Liver|>ool
Muriiya
kiiiiye
j/iit/yii, Itaiiii
bunt
ti/aniitgu
gunina
Peel Uiver
vi
kdj/un
milraina
mdrutta
niii
Miuljjeo
iri
kali
niariibaba
Wellington
tcin
kiUif
wa/ag
miiriig, wa-
luin
Batlmrst
kanbi
nailyu, yu-
ruy
yiiriibuij
vmriimfxig
gadbai
ONE,
TWO.
THIIER.
Moreton Bay
Lake Mnciimric
■wiikol
buloara
■goro
Sydney
Liverjiool
Muriiyn
Peel Uiver
pier
pii/iir
piir/a
Miidfjee
Welliiif;lon
j/itiiltii
hula
biil(i-}jnnl>ai
Batlmrst
Besides the similarity of words, whirh is siiflicicnily shown in tlic foregoing list, it was
considered important to ascertain wliellier an ccjiial degree of resemblance was apparent
in the grammatical striictiire of the different languages. With this view, it was thought
best to select two dialects as widely separated as |x)ssible, and determine, as well as
circumstances woidd allow, their leading characteristics. By the assistance of others,
this object was accomplished with less ditficidty and more satislactorily than had \yixn
anticipated,
Oni- of the dialects selected was that spoken by the natives who wander over the
region Ixirdering on Hunter's Uiver and Lake Maipmrie (or on the coast, in about
lat. "A'A" S). Of this dialect a grammar was published at Sydney, in 1S34, by the
121
482
V II I I. O I, O <! Y.
Hcv. I,. R. Tlirclki'ld, who, for imw nctirly Iwrnly yciirs, hna Ikth Inlioiirint; with
uiiHciiricd imlicncc lor llif funvcrsioii nnil iiislriu'tiuii orilir nl>ori){iiirN. Thin grniiiiniir,
tho only oiin licrdoloro puMislinl of niiy AiiMrnliiiii idiom, cniitniiiH u iiinM of vnliinblo
inllinnaliiin in n^ialion lo ii siihjwl rnliri'ly nrw. Il is not «nrprisin(j thnl the- novelty
and slriin^cni'ss of tlic priiK'ipli'x on uliicli iIk' Nlriiiiiin- of the liin^iiii^r v/an fonnd to
rest, should Imvc rcndi'i-rd a clear arnin^iernenl, nl lirsl, a matter of (iiHii'ulty ; and somo
dejijret' of olisciirily anil inlriraey in this ri's|M'el have eansed the work to Ik.- less appre-
ciated than its merits ileserved. \Vi' were liirtiinalely enabled to visit Mr. Threlkeld at
hiii station, and, in a leu days passed with him, reeeived niuny nsefnl e.Nplanations on
points not sntrieienlly dneiilHted in the jsrammar, lojfether with free nceeHs to his uiipiih-
lislied notes, anil the advaiita;ie of nlireiii'e, mi dunlitliil points, to tlie natives ff.ini w hom
his materials had l«'en derived. The i;r:onMiar of the l\ii>rn/ii><n dialect which follows
is therefore entirely due to Mr. Thnlkeld, the only chaises l)eiii)> in the orthii;iraphy,
tho nrran^cment, and some of the nomenclatiir<<. The name of Jiiimi/iinii, it shoidd he
remarked, is that );iven to the |)eiipli> of this district (or rather, |H'rliaps, lo their laiii,'liayo)
by the natives of Wellinjjion Valley. We are not aware if it is known to llie people
themselves, or if they have nny jienernl word hy which to desijjrnate all those who sjH'ak
their tongue. None is given hy Mr. Threlkeld, to whom it would dmihtless have \»^-n
known.
The other dialed is tlial spoken at the place last-inentioned, — \Vellini;ton Valley, —
situated U'voiid the Itlue Kiil;;e, about two hundred miles nest of Lake Maipiarie, — indeed
on the interior Ixiundary line of the colony. At lliis place a mission of the Church of
Knglnnd had U-en established aUait eii;ht years before our arrival. We have to acknow-
ledge the e.vtrenie kindness of the Ki'V. William Watson, who, during a (iirlnight passed
at his house, not only gave every assistance in oblaiuing a vocnliulary from the natives,
but (hil us the unex|iecteil lavor of drawing up an account of the most im|x>rtant |H'culi-
nrilies of the language, nHMh'lled as nearly as possible on the granunar of .Mr. Threlkeld,
for the purpose of comparison. This is here given, with only some slight change of
form, and mii.st l)e considered as constituting n most valuable contribution on the part of
Mr. \\'atson, to the stores of philological science. The language is known to the natives
who speak it by the name of Wirn-diiiei or Wirtttiirtii.
PII ONl) l-Ot: Y.
The following list comprises all the elementary ^sounds that occur in the Australian
dialects, so far as our observation has extended.
miMinvt socMM.
a
e
o
k
I
m
VtmATIONIk
II ; ,T
i; 7/
u; w
s
A i; S T R A 1, I A.
483
niMiTiri anuNni. vaiiiatiiini,
n
V
p
r
t
b
d
Til ihrsr should |HThiipH 1k> iiildrd twii more (ioiiikIh, tlii> ono Hoincwlint rrsrnililinj; ths
Fri'ncli t, hilt slinhily nnsalisiil. Wliiii Ininlliiiii'd, it lins iii'iuly lln' smiiiil ol' ii slmrt
u, rollinvt'd cliisily liy n sliurl i, iiiul may, iiidroil, lx> only ii rn|ii>l |irniiiniiiiiii <( tliix
di|ihllic)ii!!. Mr. Wiilsoii hii.s wrillrii it <}. Tlic iitlirr iirliciiliitidii in im ;■, ii<jt trilliil, lull
|)rimiiiinc<"d likewise with n tiiiMiil inlniinlinii. Mr. Wiilsdii distin^inislies it somi'tiiiies hy
nn /« preriulini; it i bill in dllicr iiistmii'i's it is lill umimrkcd, mid it seems donliiliil, on
the whole, whether it is not to Ix? regarded lis ii imiv \arialioii ol' ihiMisual trilled or
rolling /■.
Leaving these out of the (|iieslioii, it will lie seen llial the iiniulier ol" elements is Imt
eleven, and that anion); them are no sihilanls, aspirales, or yiiltiinils. The neneriil elm-
raeler of the |)rommeiiitioii is dental and nasal ; the sounds are I'or I |iriiiei|ially in the
fore part of the mouth, and the intonations an- viried and pleasiii);. 'I'lie aeeent, in wordB
of twci syllables, is usually on the liisl, and in wiirds of three or more on the antepenulli.
male; but to this there are many e.veeptioiis. Wcails and syllables always end in a
vowel, or ill one of the eonsoiinnls, /, ;//, //, «, and r.
The most striking |)eeulinrity in the alplmliet is tlii' paiieity of vowel sounds. This
had not been observed by the inissionnries, nor was it brought to our attention until alter
leaving the eountry. On reviewing our notes and voeabiilnries, we were struck by the
eviilent faet that only threi^ distini't vowel sounds were to be recognised. The ii and ",
(he (• and /, and the o and a, are aUvays interidiangeable. Some ilialeels more allict the
first, and others the second variation. In other dialects, some iniliviiliials proiioimc'c the
a, f, and o, and others tlu^ ", /, and ii, — or tlu^ same person uses both indilfcrently. In
three hundred words of the KiuiiiUiidi, written down from tlicr pronunciation ol' a native
(of course lieforc this |ieeulinrity with respect to the vowels had Ix'en obsi.-rved), the letter
is not once used, and the letter e but four times. On the other hand, in two hundred
words of the II V/-«'/»/ri, while the <> is liiiind si.\ty-aeven times, the ii occurs but six;
the r, also, is much more frequent than the i, though the iliMl>rence is not so great, the
latter licing written chiefly in the diphthongs di and ri. In si'veral instani-es, the words
are writt<Mi in two ways, as, lulia and Ultd, /inniiij and ixinntj, show iiig that the pro.
nuiicialion wavered between the two .sounds. Words spelled by Mr. Threlkeld with
u were written by us with o, an pimhitii for Imiiknild; but probably from another native
we should have heard the word agreeably to the latter orthography. This variableness
in the sound of the vowels will account liir the live characters being used by the mission-
aries, where three would be sullieieni, Ii, <l, and if, are, in like mnnni'r, fre(|iiently
used, though their places might always 1h' supplied by the corresponding mules, /), t, and
k. In the following grnmiiiars, the orthography of the missionaries has in general Ixx-n
adhereil to, with the exception of the omission of unnecessary letters, such as double
consonants, and the h, which is employed by them to denote sometimes a iiu.sal and
484
Pii I i.oi,o(i V.
■oinrtiini-N H (Icritiil |>romini'inlii>n o(" ilio ronsonniit which it Bccompnnli'i, Tho short m
in lint is rxiirciwfd by ", Iho iif; by j/, iVc,
E T Y M O I. O G V.
For Hri'iilcr rniivriiicnco in inntitiitinK n rom|)nri»on bolwrrn tho two grammari, it hni
MX-mcil lic»t to givp them in pnrnlli-l rohiinnH, by whirh not only ihf (points of rrst'm-
binni'f iind iliisiniiliirity mny be nciwil nt oncf, but th<' nPO(»aity of re|icnting many
r.\|>linmliotis is nvnidi'd.
KAMI I. A K A I.
N O I' N 8.
There is no inncction of the nonn to
r.\[iri'ss cilhi yrndiT or niimtirr, nnd Ihcso
nrr rnrrly . i.-ilinniiisbrd in T-jx-iikinj;. Or-
cnsidnidly n |iriinoiin is used liir Ibis pur-
pose ; ns, iiKikori), llsh, mii taio iiiiikoro,
those lush.
In the singU' ensi- of piitronyniics, there
is a feminine terniinalion distinct from the
mnsciiline ; — lUi;;l(i)iilk<il, Kni;hshnian ;
EiiiiliiiiilkiUirii, HnKli'ibwcimim.
'I'be ruses nre dislini;iiished by particles
corresponding; to our pn-posilions, but |H)8t-
fixed lo the noun.
There nre two nominiitive cnses, one of
wliich is the simple nominntlve, or ground-
form, nnd tho other is employed lis the
nuenl to verbs, or in answering to the (pies-
tion, who did it ? This lorm always termi-
nates in 0.
The accusative is the same with the
simple nominative, except in pro|)er names
of (K-rsons and in pronouns; no error can
arise from this, ns the simple nominative is
m^ver used in conjunction with a verb.
The viK'ative is Ihe same with the simple
nomijintive, having merely the particle
alii! answeriii); to O! pn>fixed to it.
The genitive of possession (nnsweriii}: to
the (piestion, whose?) always terminates
in hit.
W I K A D U « K I.
N0UN8.
The plural nimilier is not often distin-
guished, but when necessary, it may lio
e.xpresjM-d eilher by a pronoun, or by aflixing
Ihe |mrticli-s ^'i/Aij) and nirUigj as, bagai,
shell, liagai-gnUij/, shulls.
The simple (or neuter) and the activo (or
agent) nominative exist in this language;
the latter always terminates in «.
The accusative is tho same with the
simple nominative, except in the pronouns.
The vocative is distinguished by the por-
licle i/a! prelixed to the simple nominative.
The genitive ends in guna or ,?m/w,
though the linal syllable (/«) is sometimes
omitted. Giiiia is used with proper names,
and nouns relating to human beings ; guba
!■
AUHTRALIA.
480
K A M I I. A It A I.
Tho ilnlivn of rlio olijwl (nnnworinn to,
for irlmiii > for irliiil .') ciiiIh in kii, cxrrpl
for iiniiii'N nl' piTsiiiiH mill inicrni^^nllvi' pro-
nnilll-t, wliii'li liiivr ii'ni.
Till' iliiiivi' III' iiKilinii (luiNwrriii)^ til, /»or
louiiril iihoiii itr iiliii/ f) ciuIm in itkiiut iiihi,
Tlir iililiilivr III' llii' riiiiNi^ (Jrnni, nil iic-
cniiiil III, ID/Ill r III II k) ciicU ill in iir /.<//.
'riiriililiitivi'iiriTiiilioii ( liiiiii,iiiiui//rom)
Icriiiiiiiili's ill ii/iirini iir iiiliirnt).
'I'lir iilil.'itivr III' I'liiijuiU'tiiiil [irilli, illiiiifi
Uil/i) ClllU ill IMl.
Tlio nlilntiveof liK-nlion or n'siilrnri' {nl,
rcmiiiiiiiii; ill or ii illi) rnils in hIhi nr inlii.
Tlirru IlltJ »ix ili'i'lrll!ii(in», III riil'ilin^ 111
which not only iiuiiiis, hut iiiljcctivi'H anil
pnrliripirs iirr ilcrlJncil.
All liiunrN III' prrsdiis tK'l(iii); In thi' first
ili'olrnsiuii. The iictivL' noinlnalivi^ i» liiriiiril
from tho simpli>, hy iiililin){ In; the );i'nilivi!
hy iiililiiit! iiiii^Ki ; till' (ii'ciisiilivr liiiH mni;
till' first iliilivr, mill; the srciinil, kiiiLo; iho
(irst iililiilivi' liiiH hiii ; Ihr mmuiuI, kiiilri.
rnij; ihii lliiril, kiiUui ; iiiiil lli<" Ibiirlh,
kiiilni.
In nil hut the first ilcrlcnsion, tlio ficni-
livo teriniimtioii in IhJhi, nnti the tir»t (hitive,
ko. 'Y\\v ollifr ciisrs arc liirnu'il rrnni tho
active iiiiiiiinalivi' hy chiin;,'iii{{ thi^ liiml o
into iiko, ii/iiriiii, at, ami u/m. It will there.
fore only Ik' necessary to give the terniiilO'
tion iiftho active noniinative.
The active noniinative of the seeunil de.
clensian terminates in to; nl' tho tliirit in
ko; of the limrlh in /o; of tho lillh in n,-
nnil of the sixth in ro.
Nouns eniliiij; in i or hi helong ti> Iho
seconil (li'clension ; those in j;, ii, i; o, ii, to
the thini ; those in / to the liiiirth ; those in
TO, belonging to the fillh, rcipiire the accent
to be shiOeil to the o, ns inukoro, lisli,
active nominiitive, miikuri' Nouna of thriMj
syllables, ending in re, . i: the e to o,
w I n A I) r R K I.
with name* of the hiwir aniinaU and Inani'
mate ohji'cts.
The ilalive of the object terniinntea in
f!ii ; it is HiiiiHstiincs not diHtinguiahvd from
the genitive.
The dative of motion or place (lo, tiilh,
ImiiiriU, ill) alwny^ ends in ii.
There in lint one ablative, answering lo
the prcposilinns /W(;/l, Ay, ilUiill, CUIICllllillg,
(Sue. ; ita lermliiul letter Is i.
Tin.' ilcdinsinns nro distinguished in this
language, according to the mode of forming
the ai'llve nomjnalive.
The first declension comprises .■ II noun*
which terminate in t or ii ; these form the
active nominative us follows :
HIMITE NUM.
ACT. NOM
-*■ makes
(ll/U
III
l/lfit
an
lilt
ill
(i
in
<(
nil
til
ri
iilu
III
atu
dill
1! >ltU
The sciMind declcnKi..n includes those
nouns which end in a, u, or p. and foreign
words in in. '/'he active i niiimlivc is
formed by iiddiiij; fxn I. the sun|.!c| it is
therefore the same with the dative.
The third declension comprehends all
nouns which end in / or r. The active
nominative is formed by .idding u to the
simple.
122
48fi
p II 1 1, o i; O G Y.
K A M I I. A R A I.
as kokcre, hot, koirro; lliosc also belong to
the lilUi ilci'lciisidn. Nmins of liiur sylhi-
bles, cinliii^ in / , are of llic sixth declension.
I'nrtici|iial nouns, used ns agents, change
tlieir linal syllable rii to ;i>, as l>iiii/(ki'ii,
that which is struck ; active iioininativc,
huntiMirt).
The author gives a second declension,
which comprises a lew variniions pvuliar
to names of placi's ; as, Miihiliiiilxikal, a
man of Mululiinlia ; IMiiliibinlKtkoliiy, to
MuUibinba. In the other cases, the words
are declined according to llicir terminations.
Mii/iiIuu/ki is ol'llie third declension.
The following is an examples of a noun
varied aci,..J n^r 'o the tirst declension, or
that appropriated to the names of |icrsons.
lliiii/»i/i, a tnan's name (meaning, pro-
|ierly, lOaglchawk).
>Sim|ile Horn. Jiim/iiui
Act, iioni. Jlirtt/HiHto, 11. dix'.s, did, will,
ic.
Gen. liiialmnumlKi, belonging to
U.
1st Dat. llirii/xiniiiiii, for U.
-d Dat. Jlird/Kiiikhikd, to, toward B.
Ace. Ihniliitiuiinj, Hiralwin
1st Abl. i)'i/v/A(i;//.(((, froni,(maccount
of II.
!Jd Abl. liirii/MDikii/tirinj, awny from
n.
3d Abl. liirulHinkalM, along with H.
4th j\bl. liinihtiiikuilid, remaining
with n.
W I R A D IT R R I.
The same word, when used as a common
noun, signifyiiig an ni^/c-hiiick, is declined
according to ttie second declention.
Simple nom. bimlHtii, a hawk
Act. nom. /lini/Hitilo, a hawk does, d:c.
Gen. iinilmnkolm^ o\' n hawk
1st Dat. /iir(i/iiink<>, for a hawk
2d Dut. hiralinnUikn, to a hawk
llnuiii, a shell or spoon, of the first de-
clension, is thus varied;
Simple nom. Ixifnii, a shell
Act. nom. Ixtiiutii, a shell does, will, dtc.
Gen. iHiiiiiiiiiilHi^ of a shell
1st Dat. Ixtgnif'ii, lor a shell
Ud Dat. Inigaitu, to or with a shell
Ace. Ixrnai
Abl. Ixi^iiii/i-^ by, concerning, &c.,
a shell
ri.URAI..
Simple nom. Ixisni-iiiildij, shells
Act. nom. Ixiiitii-sialdiidii ((\n. -f^u >) '
Gen. lxi;''ii.!:<ilu\)!:Htxi
Isl Dat. /xii;ui-!.'ii/iini;ii
'■id Dat. lxii;(ii-!i(iliiit!:a
Abl. iMigai-palumli
Karnmlamt), a iHHik, of the second de-
clension, is varied as follows:
Siinple nom. karnnilaidi), a book
Act. nom. kdnindanipgu, a book docs.
Gen. kdrdHi/drat/giilxi, of a liook
1st Dat. kdiii/ii/drtnjgd, for a book
2d Dat. karawlnraijga, to or with a
b(H>k
Abl. karii iiddrandi, by, concerning
a book
The plural is kdrdtularaii-galap, de-
clined like that of Ixisui,
AUSTRALIA.
487
K A M I I. A R A I. W I R A n U R E I.
Acc. Iiini/mti, n hnwk I/iar, womnn, and limul, brd, will serve
1st Abl. /liiv/niiitiii, on uccoiint of n as examples of the lliird dccloiision.
Iiawk
2d Abl. Itira/mHtahiriip, away Irom a
hawk
3d AbL /jiriilHi/itoa, along with a hawk
4th Aljl. liirulHinltilia, staying with a
hawk
The other declension can be easily
formed from these.
Simple iiom.
iiiar
hiiriil
Act. nom.
iiitini
hurulii
Gon.
itKiri^tnui
lnn'tili^uUi
1st Dnt.
iiKirgit
hiirtil^n
2d Dat.
imira
Intrtila
Abl.
inari
huriili
AUifrX'TIVKS.
The same word may be adjective, noun,
verb, or adverb, according to the construc-
tion, or the artixed particles. Mirronnj,
good, yarakai, bad, komiii, pretty, with
the particles of agency allixcd, would Ix;-
comc agents, or verbal noniinati>es, and,
consequently nouns, as mirrorotjko, the
gooil ; i/iirnkailn, the bad, etc.
The adjective follows the noun which it
qualities, and agrees with it in case.
Comparison can only 1h> expressed by a
circumlocution ; as, this is very sweet, that
is not, krknl kci uiii kaiiirtilkauu-nl, kea-
wax inimi, lit., sweet is this exceedingly, is
not that.
ADJECTIVES.
Adjcclivcs are declined like nouns, and
generally agree with tliem in case.
Comiiarison is expressed by circundo-
cutions ; as, ifitui ninyini hala iital diUi^
this good truly is with that (<lili being in
the ablative), for, this is belter than that ;
or, ijiiia manoj iji/a iiirui, this good, that
not.
A high or superlative degree is expressed
by the addition of /kiij or hihiij, or IkjIIi, to
the adjective ; as, imuinj, good, imiriiinlniij,
very good, murumbiitj Inliiy, extremely
good.
NUMERALS.
The natives can count no farther than
four, beyond which they use the general
term kaiitcu/kaiaiiil, many.
U'likn/, one
l)ii/o<irii, two
poro, three
• wnran, four
NUMERALS.
The only numerals in use are —
yiinlKii, one
btdii, two
Imlii-tjiitilxii, three
hiitjgii, fi)ur fir many
hinigii-fiiildri, )
Inatj-galiKj S
very many
48S
PHILOLOGY.
KAMILARAI.
WIRADUREI.
These arc declined like nouns, according
to their terminations.
These become ordinals by declining them
so ns to ngrco with the noun to which they
belong; as, ptirpuijku yoroka, on the third
dav.
The following are the ordinal adverbs :
riiin/mta, onco
hiila^n, twice
hitiaijiiiilntta, three times
hiiiijga, biapgunda, many times
PKO.NOUNS.
PRONOUNS.
There nre two classes of personal pro-
nouns in the singular nimiber, corresjwnd-
ing to ihc simple ami active iioniinalivcs of
nouns. Those of one class are used sepa-
rately (ns in answer to the question, who
is il ?), and may be termed absolute pro-
nouns. They rescnilile the moi, tot, liii,
of the French. The others are only used
in conjuiicliiin with the verb, like the je,
III, il, of that langu.ige. In the dual and
plural, however, this distinction is not made.
The absolute pronouns nre irregular in
their declension, —
NOH. (JEN. DAT.
jia/oa cmorim/xi emolnj, I, mine, to
me
yintoa tjiroltin/xi j/iVo'i;;, thou, thine,
&c.
iiimvoa yikolnnfia yZ/.o'i y, he, &c.
Itoli titoa lioli not) nlxi iott noli )iko, she
The other oblique cases arc formed from
the dative (except those of Itomitoii, which
nre formed from the acou.sative lioitnoltii),
according to the first declension ; as, emo-
Dpkhiko, to ttK!, cmoUi/kai, oa account of
me. &.C.
The adjunct pronouns, or tliose which
arc used with verbs, are —
There is but one class of personal pro-
nouns, and in these, with Ihc exception of
the dual, the active nominative is the .same
as the simple. The accusative, however,
is ditlcrent from the nominative. All the
pronouns, when postfi.ved to other words,
undergo contractions. The singular pro-
nouns are itdt/ii or patu, 1; j»'«(/«, thou ;
fill in or yi/i, he, she, or it. Na is some-
times used for the feminine or neuter of the
third person.
These pronouns are thus declined :
FULL FORM.
CONTRACTIO.S.
Nom. p(uli< or pntu
du, til, or dyit
( icn. yui/i or ijati
di, ti, or dyi
1st Dat. ijat/i or g<tti
it u
2d Dat. iiiitiinula
tiiinda
Ace. tjanal
mil
\oc.. ya ijiinal (ah me !)
Abl. yniiiindi
nundi
BKCOND rCKaON.
Nom. -giiidu
indu
Gen. yimt
nu
1st Dat. ijinugu
HllgU
2d Dat. yinyunda
?tyunda
Ace. yinyal
nyal
Voc. ya yindu
Abl. yinyundi
nyundi
AUSTRALIA.
489
KAMILARAI.
bay, I ; tiii, me
hi, thou ; bin, thee
noa, he ; bon, him
boltntoa, she ; noan, her
W 1 R A D U R E I.
TIIIIID PERSON.
Nom.^it'/i or >)i« (contrncteil^a/); Gen.
guy; Dat. yuan; Ace. j)i«v Abl. <ie«.
There nrc three dual pronouns, — bali. The dual pronouns arc, b<di, we two;
we two ; biila, ye two ; biiloara, they two. yintlit-buUt, ye two ; ynin-bula, they two.
They are thus declined— The first is thus declined :
NOM. ACC. OEN. 1 ST DAT.
bali yaliu yntiiilm, yalinhn, &c.
bula biiluH bulunlm buliniko
buloara buloara buIoarakolHi biiloarako
Bnloara, when used as a nominative to
a verb, becomes btiloaro; the others un-
dergo no change.
Bali properly sij;nifies " thou and I ;" to
express "he and I," or "she and 1," the
adjunct pronouns of the third person sin-
gular arc added ; as —
Nom. bali noa, we two, ho and I
Ace. yalin Imii, us two, him and me
Gen. ya/iiilu Utn, of us two
Nom. ba/i Ixjttntoa, she and I
Ace. yalin nolrn, her and me
Gen. yalinba noli H, ot us two
A peculiar kind of dual (if such it may
be called), in which the nominative and
iccusative ore combined, is used in con-
junction with the verb. There are six of
these compound pronouns :
banfty, I — thee
/kinoltn, I — her
biiiuy, thou — him
binoDn, thou — her
bi/oa, he — thee
bintoa, she — thee
They arc used in such expressions as
" I love thee," " thou strikest him," &c.
They make the nearest approach which
Simp. nom. Iiali, we two (thou and I)
Act. nom. yuli, we two do —
Ace. yaligin, us two
Gen. yii/ij:ingiina, of us two
1st Dat. yaligvinii, for us two
2(1 Dat. yaligindi/a, to, or toward us
Abl. yalijjinilifi, from, by, <tc., us
In the pronoun of the second person,
yinilu and bula are both varied ; us —
Simp. nom. yindu biibi, you two
Act. nom. yinihi biilngit,
Gen. yinu bulagu, of you two
1st Dat. " " for you two
2d Dat. yini/unda bidaga, to you two
Ace. yini/al bula, you two
Abl. yini/uudi buladi, from, by you
two
The declension of yain-bida is not given ;
probably only the last word is varied. Bu-
laguol, the other two, is varied according
to the third declension of nouns.
To express " he and I," the pronoun
guin, he, is prefixed, without change, to all
the cases a( Indi ; as, guin-lndi, he and I ;
act. nom. guin-yali ; ucc.guin-yuligin, &c.
The combined dual pronouns do not exist
in this dialect.
123
490
P H I L O L O (1 Y.
K A M I I. A R A I.
occurs in the langimgo to the transitions
of tlio Indian tongues.
The phirnl pronouns nrc pci'n, we; mini,
ye; /tura, tliey. Tliey are declined as fol-
lows :
NOM.
*co.
OEN.
yein
ijciiriTH
ijeani/ilxi, &c.
II lira
niirun
niiniiitxi
bara
biirun
Ixirunlia
By adding bo to the pronouns, we have
an emphatic Ibrm of expression ; as, —
jtotoa -bo, I myself, I only, I indeed (am)
gin/oa -bo, thou, &c.
They are thus declined :
N'OM, AND ACC.
Uhi
vnoa
vntoa
9ll DAT.
unliKo, to
this
untako
untoako
w I R A n u n E 1
There are demonstrative pronouns which
are employed according to the relative dis-
tance of the object. These are —
nni, this, near the speaker.
tinoa, that yonder, at a little distance.
ontoa, that there, near the person addressed.
Tlio plural pronouns are igiani, we;
yiiiildiiir, ye; fiiiinsiidiii or ijhigii/iii, they.
liir, wliioh is luMed to ijinihi, scenis to be
a conlriiilion of the plural sudix girkig;
gii/ia, which is added to giii/i, signilies pro-
perly /ike.
These pronouns are thus declined:
Noin. ijioiii gitii/ii/iir
Ace. ijiiiiiigiii j/iiii/ii/gir
Gen. yidiiigingu yiiiiigirgii
2d Dat. yiiiiiigiiiilya i/ini/iiiu/agir
Abl. ijianigindyi Tgrinyundigiri
Nom. guin-guKa or yiii-gidia
Ace. (qu. Dat.?) paguan-gidiala (or 50-
giKii/i)
Gen. ydgiiiin-gidiiigu
Abl. yagiiiiii-gu/itdi
By adding the words guyiiyim-bul to the
personal pronouns, we have a meaning
similar to that given by self or selves in
English ; as, rfiulii guyii tjan.hul , I myself.
Giiyinjan, with the genitive, has the force
of own; as, ycu/i giiyiipan, my own.
The di-monstralive pronouns are —
3d abl.
irnti/iiruy, from
this
untabirug
untotibiro])
piih/i or yidi, this
pimi, this
yiigii, this (agent)
piu/i, that
j/ana, "
giigu, that (agent)
yih, that one
1'I.UHAL.
piih/i -gidia, these
gi/ia ■giilia "
gugti -giilia
gain •giilia, those
ganaingidia "
gagugidia "
pilii-gidia "
The dual is I'nrmed by changing gulia to
bida; ijiiia-hidu, these two, &c.
These pronouns aroalso used as relatives;
thus, gina dibiluin jfiiHii ijiiidii Ixda-hiini,
this is the bird that thou didst kill ; ijina
A U S T 11 A I, I A.
491
K A M 1 1- A n A I. W I R A n U R E I.
These pronouns nrc only used separately ; iHlrihiin pugu witli/eia, this is the bird that
those which arc employed as nominatives drinlis.
to verba are pa/i, tliis ; pnla, that yonder ;
j/aloa, that by you. From these the otlier
cases are supplied.
ACT. NOM.
yali
"gala
paloa
yalihoba
ualoakoba
IsT DAT.
yaliko
yiilaho
puloako
Til may l)e termed a verbal pronoun. It
resembles somewhat the French viiici,voili,
and niiiy lie translated, U is. In the plural,
it makes tara, they are, whicli, when used
as the nominative to a verb (in conjunction
with another pronoun) becomes taro ; tlius,
Abs. niii ta, this is he, or it is this.
Adj. pili til, this is he who, &c.
Abs. uiii tara, these arc they.
Adj. ijali taro, these are they two.
The interrogative pronouns yan, who? The interrogative pronouns are tjanUi,
mill or mviarig, what ? are thus declined : who ? minyay, what 1 —
S. N. pan
A. N. tjanto
Gen. yaniimha
1st Dat. ijantiiitf
2d " yankiriko
Ace. pannup
1st Abl. pankai
2d " pankinbirap
3d " pankatoa
4th " patikinba
min or minarip S. N
m inaripko
mitiaripkoba
mhiaripkolap
minnup
minariptin.
miiiariy/iirop
minariykoa
minaripkaba
Minnim signifies, how many!
minyap
minyalu
mimjapgu
pandi
A. N. pandii
Gen. paiigii
1st Dat. "
2d Dat. pdniitula mini/apurgit (toward)
Ace. pandi minyap
Abl. panundi mini/ali
mimjala (in, with, on)
Minyapan or minyapain signifieg, how
many?
IXDEFINITK V
vnnta, some
yantiii, all
kamviilkauwul, many
warea, few
INDEFINITE Pi
gtiUrir, some
hiamlml, all, the whole
biap, many or more
biapgul, all, every one
492
PHILOLOGY.
n
K A M I L A R A I.
yitorahiil, some one
tarai, other
W I R A D U R E I.
yainhitoti, any one
giio/, other
l/un/Kiiguol, anotlicr ; hula guol, two others.
ADVERBS.
Adverbs whose significntlons will nimit
of it, nre iloclincd in tho same way ns
nouns ; as —
Nom. vo)i or troiita, where?
Gen. masc. uonUikal, of what place?
Gen. fern, vontahilien, of what ■ lire?
Ist Dut. «'o«^rtAvV<ip, to whati>lace,whi-
Iher!
2d Dat. u-ontariy, toward what place ?
Ace. uoniiu}j, what place?
1st Abl. wnnUili/ilo, at what place ?
2d .Mil. wontahini ij, from whence ?
3d Abl. noiilakcxi, through, by, what
place !
ADVERBS.
The followini; is tho declension of the
adverb lii-gii, where?
Nom. tii-gii, where? what place?
Gen. ^ii-^'H, of what place?
1st Dat. tit-fiii, for what place?
2d Dat. tiigfnjurgu, toward what place?
1st Abl. tiiL'ii/ci (Imijgnia) in what place?
ad Abl. ttuii/a, from whence?
PREPOSITIONS.
These, if we regard their construction,
should be called postpositions, as they are
always appended to the noim. We have
elsewhere treated them as case-endings.
/>a, ko, kohl, of, for
kday, to, towards
till, from, on account of, because of
kai, same as tin, but used with proper
names, and pronouns
liinii), from, away from
katoa, with, in company with
ka, kiiUi, in, at
miifdriti, into
mvriii), within
U'tirai, without
PREPOSITIONS
The particles which are afTi.\ed to nouns
and take llic place of pre|X)sition3 are —
gii, giiiiii, gii/m, of, for
pur, ijiirgit, towards
(/i, from, by, about, concerning
(lamlu, by means of
iliiiri, with, in company with
la, iu, at
iirginiii, in (or, as a verb, to be in)
vruin, through (or to pass through)
yiriage, by (or to pass by)
vomtiimja, upon (to be upon)
The last four are more properly verbs.
CONJUNCTIONS.
CONJUNCTIONS.
These arc rarely used, the construction There are, strictly speaking, no con.
of the language being such as to leave no junctions in this dialect, the construction
' \
AUSTRALIA.
493
K A M I T, A R A I.
necessity for such connectives,
lowing nre sometimes employed:
IKitun, ami
kula, becniisc
ga/iihi, therefore
W I R A D U R E I.
The foU not requiring them. Bii, signifying ami
or a/so, is never used alone, but always as
a 8ufli,\, as, gaitu-lm, I also.
VI'.RBS.
The verb is tlio most peculiar, and at
the srime time the most difficult part of
Austnilinn grammar. It has numerous va-
riations, many of which nre unlike those of
any other Innguaj^cs. These variations
have all reference either to time or to man-
ner, there being no inflections tor either
number or |wrson, which are always ex-
pressed by the pronoun. The root or
ground-form of the verb is usually a word
of one or two syllables, and to this various
particles are oppended, which modify the
signification, and sometimes protract the
word to an extraordinary length. Thus,
from the verbal root bu or biin, to strike,
we have the forms which follow (the nomi-
native pronoun ba^, I, being understood) :
1. Active transitive form : buntan, I strike.
2. Definite or participial : bunkilin, I am
striking.
3. Continuativc : buiikilihn, I am con-
tinually striking (as threshing, beat-
ing, &c.)
4. Reflective: bfmki/ean, I struck myself.
5. Reciprocal : Iritiikilnn, we strike one
another.
6. Optative : buwil, I would strike, or,
that I might strike.
7. Deprecatory : biiiitea kun koa, lest I
should strike.
8. Iterative: btmUa konun,l will strike
again.
9. Ini|)erative : biiva, strike.
10. Infinitive: /wnAiViXo, in order to strike.
VERBS.
The verb in this language is as remark-
able as in the Knmilarai for the number
and peculiarity of its variations. There
are eight or nine forms in common use, to
express the mode of an action, and no less
than fifteen tenses.
The following are the principal modi-
fications :
1. Active transitive : fti/OTaro, I strike.
2. Participial: of this there are two forms,
bi'imalgimaiia, and bumalbiana, I am
striking; the former is the most com-
mon.
3. Continuativc; formed by reduplication:
bumalmmara, I continue beating.
4. Reflective : bumalijidyilinya, I strike
myself.
5. Reciprocal : bumalafia, we strike one
another.
6. Optative : Immali, that I may strike.
7. Iterative : buma/dlitn/a, I strike again.
8. Imperative: btima, strike.
9. Infinitive: bumdligu, in order to strike.
124
404
P H I L O L O G y.
K A M I L A R A I.
I, SuppoNitivc : Immjxi Ihi, if I had
struck.
TENSES.
There arc pijj;ht lenses, though in some
of the forms, only u part of ihcni nre in use ;
1. Present: Imtitdn, I strike.
a. Remote piist : huitluUt, I struck for-
merly.
3. Uecent pnst : Imnhiln, 1 struck Intely.
4. Uecent plu|)erfect : hiinkula -la, I hnd
Intely struck.
5. Hodiernal past : tmiikeun, I struck this
morning (or to-dny).
6. Future norist: hii/iuti, I shall strike.
7. Crastinal future: huiikin, I shall strike
to-morrow (mornin};).
8. Inceptive future : Imnkiti -koldg, I am
going to strike.
Of these tenses the continunlivc form has
but two, viz. : the present and past aorist ;
the usitative and reciprocal have only the
past, and the optative has only one tense,
with a general signification, — himil, that I
might strike. The participial and recipro-
cal forms have all the tenses.
There is no special form for the passive.
It is denoted by suhjoiiiing to the verb a
noun or pronoun in the accusative case,
without a nominative expressed : thus, bun-
tan bag signifies, I strtke, and bini/an tia,
1 am struck ^lit. strike me).
There are various forms of the negative,
W I R A D U R G I.
TENSES.
1. Present: biiiiiura, I strike.
'i. Inslnnt pn-seni: buiiialairana, I am
just now striking.
3. Past aorist : bumf, I struck.
4. Inslnnt pnst : binmilninmi, I was just
now striking.
5. Preterite ; biniinhiiain, I have struck,
fi. Inslnnt preterite : bumiilutca/i, I have
just struck.
7. Kemole pnst: Immalguiiiin, I struck
long ago.
8. Hodiernal pnst: bumahjdriii, I struck
this morning.
9. Hesternal past: bumalgiiraui, I struck
yesterday.
U). Pluperll'ct : biiimitfiiii, I hnd struck.
11. Proximale future: buvialgiii, 1 shall
soon strike.
\'i. Instant future: biimaldicdgiri, I shall
immediately strike.
13. Remote future : bumalijiirisiiri, \ s\\a\\
hen^afler strike.
14. Crnslinul future: biimalgaridwagiri, I
shall strike to-morrow.
15. Future preterite : bumegiri, I shall
havo struck,
Ench mode or form may be varied
through all these tenses.
Some verbs (as those which terminate in
ana and iiiya) have still anothc r tense,
answering to the recent past in Kamilarui ;
as, yiimi, I see ; preterite, yagiiuin, I have
seen ; recent pnst, j)«J/(, 1 saw lately.
iMr. Watson snys nothing of the passive
in his grammar, but some forms are given
in the translated sentences which seem to
indicate its existence. liiimiUi (or biimiiiii)
biila mil, I am struck (wliere ntil is in
the accusative). Nal biwiani i/i/iii, 1 am
struck by him, (where nal is in the occusa-
1
^ j^
AUSTRALIA.
495
W I R A D U R E I.
tivc, and ihjiii, him, in the nblative.) Bu-
mdgiri nijal ijuiii, lest thou bo struck.
K A M I I. A R A I.
the verb being sometimeM only preceded by
keaivaiur kciwdraii, nm\ Hunietinios hnving
after it, in ndditinn, kmicii or />«. Thus,
the negative of Imtitnn is kenwnraii bun-
korieii ; that of hunkcmi is kcaicai biinki-
pa, dec.
CONJrOATIONB. CONJVOATIONS.
Using this word (as in the Latin gram- There are seven conjiigntions, dislin-
mar) to signify dilferent modes of indenting guishcd by the termination of the infinitive,
verbs, there appear to be but four conjugn- Those of the
tions in this language, — though others may
possibly exist. Thf^ are distinguished by
the termination of the infinitive. The verbs
of the
Ist conj. end in (lliko, oliko, and eliko
2d " " ki/iko
3d " " biHko
4th " " riliko and tiliko
Ist conj. end in a/igu
2d
iligu
3d
agigu
4th
'S«A'«
5th
«Vh'if,''t
6tli
ihjgigu
7th
iygigu
These conjugations (lilTer in the forma- The principal tenses are formed in the
tion of the tenses as follows : following manner :
rilES. REH. PAST.
BW;. PAST. PUT.
Dir.
INP.
nti.
PAST. AOR.
PERP.
1.
an
dla
(i a nun
nlm
Oliko
1. ara
e
alguain
an
ahi
a fl turn
Olin
oliko
2. ira
i
ilgunin
ati
dla
a d tinn
tlin
rliko
3. una
uni
aguain
2.
tail
tdla
kula nun
kilin
kUiko
4. inya
ini/i
iguain
3.
bin
bid/a
bia binun
bilin
biliko
5. una
uni
tiyguain
4.
rin
Tdla
rCa riiiun
rilin
riliko
6. ana
7. ipja
PUT.
1. algiri
2. ilgiri
3. agiri
4. igiri
5. ungiri
0. aijgiri
7. iygiri
uni
ipji
PARTIC.
algitnana
ilgunana
agunana
igunana
uygunana
aijgunana
iggunana
ayguain
iygtvain
INFIN.
algigii
ilgigu
agigu
uygigu
"VS'S"
iygigu
496
P H I L O L O O V.
K A M 1 1. A R A I.
PARADIGM OF TUB FIHIT CONJUOATION.
Umdliko, to innko,
Koot, ?/»»« (or uma),
INDRPINITK FORM.
Prcst. iinutn /xnj inii, 1 make this
Rem. I', umii/a, 1 mndo
Rcc. P. iimii, I made lately
Plu|), nmii-tti, I had made
Hod. P. wnalciuii, I have made lo-doy
Fut. A. utni^ntni, I shall make
Cras. F. iitmditi, I shall make to-morrow
Inc. F. iiinii/i-koldi), I am going to make
WIRADUREI.
rARADION or TIIR FIRIT CONJVOATION.
Mdligu, to make.
Uool, ma.
■ .tDiriNITE roiiM,
Pros, miira
Prct. vidlgiinin
Past. A. tiie
Plii|). maUini
Hnd. P. ma/i)ririn
I'rox. F. imi/i'iri
Crns. F. mahjiiriinvafiiri, &c.
[The other tenses may be easily formed
from these.]
rAKTICiriAL OR DKPINITE roRM.
Pres, vmu/in, I am making
Rec. P. iimii/ie/a, I was making lately (?)
Plup. iimiilii/iitu, I hud ln'cn making
Hod. P. iinwliktun, I have been making
to-day
Fut. A. untd/iiinti, I sholl be making
Cras. F. ii»ivHki>i, I shall be making to-
morrow.
Inc. F. nmulikoldg, I am going to bo
making
DEriNITI OR rARTICIrlAL roRM,
Pres. nialguniiiia (3d conjugation)
Pret. imilgHimguain
Plup. malguiiainini
Hod. P. malgiDKDjnrin (or malgutiaigarin)
Prox. F. nia/iiiiiKigiri
Cms. F. niulgiinaj/itridicagiri, &c, &c.
CONTINl'ATIVE FORM.
CONTINl'ATIVE OR INTENSIVE PORH.
Pres. umiililin, I am making constantly, Pres. mamar.:, I make constantly, or ear-
or I keep making nestly
Past, iimuliliiia, 1 was constantly making Pret. mamulgiiain
Past. A. tname, &c. &c.
REPLECTIVE FORM.
Past, umvleun, I have made myself
RECIPRC. a FORH,
Prest. umulaii ball, we are making each
other.
Rem. P. umuldla
Plup, itma/dhita
Hod. P. umnluikeou
Fut. umulontin
C. Fut. umulaikin
Inc. F. umiilai-koldr)
REFLECTIVE FORH.
Pres. malmdyilinya (4th conjugation)
Pret. maltjul;iUiguuin, &c. &c.
RECIPROCAL PORH.
Pres. maldiia (3d conjugation)
Pret. malagiiain
Plup. malaneini
Hod. P. maliigarin
Fut. malagiri
Cras. F. maitiiawagiri, &e.
A U H T K A M A.
497
K A M I f, A R A I.
INI-INt'llVK.
Indie. iimii/iLi), in nnlcr to mnko
Cnntin. iiiiiii/Ui)ti, to cuiiiimu^ mnking
Rocip. umaluikou, to miiku one onothcr
OPTATIVr.
Aorisl, umauwil-krxi , thiit I might mako
lTr.R»TIVl!.
I'rcs, iimfiihiiii, I mil nmkiiig agiiin
Put. ummkutiiiii, I sliiill iiiiike iigain
■I'proitrnvE.
Aor. umapii-Ui, had I made
WIRADUREI,
INriNITIVK.
Indcf. mdlifiit (or iinili)
I'lirlioip. iiiii/i'iiiiiiffifiu (or mnlgunagi)
Uccip. wiiliifiigu (or mnliigi)
llor, mnluliiiigu (or mii/it/igi)
ITKIItTIVI.
Pres. >iia/it/iiii/(i (Itli conjugation)
Flit, malaligiri, &c. Aic,
DRlllDRtlATlVK.
Aor. uDMjia-ta, I noiild that I had made
IMl'RHATIVR,
Indie, iimn/a, make thou
Intcns. iima-iimulu, make diligently
Reflee. itiim/ia, make thysell"
Recip. iimvlii, make one another
Iter, iiminku, make again
InHtant, uiitiikiii, make now, at once
The paradigms of the other conjugations
may be easily formed from this example.
There are two neuter or substantive verbs,
kti or ku, which mokes in the infinitive
knkilikn, and Ui or bit, which makes Ixitiko
(or Ui/iko), The first has a possive signi-
fication, as simply to exist or be in any
state ; the other is active, meaning to be
in the act of doing any thing ; as, teti-ka,
to be dead ; tfti-bti, to be dying, or to die.
The latter, however, seems to bo more
rarely used tlian the former.
The following is the paradigm of the
verb kit, to be, of the second conjugation.
(The a in this word lias an obscure sound,
approaching to u, which is sometimes sub-
stituted for it.)
INOKriNITE FORM.
Prcwnt Tt'iisf.
Oag kvUtn (or kiUdn), I om
hi kirtan, thou art
noa kutan, he is
125
IMrlRATIVI.
Indcf. >mi, make
Intcns. miDiiti, make diligently
Recip. vialaUi, make one another
Iter. vuilaliUi, make again
Particip. malgiiimUi, continue making
There is properly but one substantive
verb, though several other words, particu-
larly Ixila and ivari, are often used in place
of one, but they are indeclinable.
The following is the paradigm given by
Mr. Watson of the verb piginya, to be
(of the fourth conjugation).
INDEFINITE FORM.
Prrst'nt Tense.
patu yipinj/a, I am
pindii yipinya, thou art
yiti j/ij/iiiya, he or she is
II
It-
f!
I!
49S
!• U I L O L O U Y.
K A M I r. A R A I.
INIIKriMtK MUtM.
fioll liliki /.iiliiii, she isl
yiiii kdtiui, HO iim, iVc.
Kcni. Pn»t. kdlit/a, 1 \vn» fDrmerly
Rr.;. I', kiikf'/d, I WH8 lalily
Pliip. hiki'i/iilu, I hnil liilt'ly l)tTn
lloil. 1*. k<i/iit'>i, I WI19 lii.ilny
Fill, Am'. knkiUiiin, I kIhiII 1k'
Cms. 1". ktikiii, 1 sliiill Im' tii-morrow
liK'. F. k(ikili-koluf), I am guiiig to be
iiKiiMTr niim.
I'ros. knkilihii, I am now (or nm being)
I'nst. kitki/ii/ii, I WQs then
l'lii|.. kiikiliiltitit, I [mil llioii beon
Hoil. P. kukilikinn, I was this morning
Fut. A. kiikilitain, I shall llien be, Ato.
CItMINX'ATIVK FORM.
Pros, ktiki/iliii, I continue to Ix), or am
conslnnlly
I'ast Aor. kakUida, I continued to be
RKCirnoC'AL FORM.
Prcs. kakilihxti, wc are, or live, together
Past A. knkilidlii, we were together
I led. P. kakilaikrun, «S:o. &c.
INFINITIVE.
Indie, kahliko, in order to be
Contin. kakilikoa, to continue to bo
Rccip. kakilaikoa, to be with one anotlier
OPTATIVE.
Aor. kauwU km, that I might be, or, I
would be
ITERATIVE.
Prcs. kaUakun, I am again
Fut. kdUakCtnun, 1 shall be again
W I l( A DC l< Kl.
INIIKIIMTK IIIRM.
))iuiii >jii/ini/<i, we are. Ate.
In.st. Pn-s. giiiminn, I om
Past Aor. i/iij;/i, I was
Inst. Past. ifiitu-iiHi, I was just now
Pret, j/ii))!ii'<ii)i, I have luicn
Inst. Pret. iiiiiwiDi, I Imvo just Ix^n
Kfiii. P. iiiiiamiitii, I WHS ji>rint'rly
lloil. P. yitjiirhi, I was this inoriiiiig
I lest. P. tjii)!iiiioiii, I was yesterday
Pliip. ))i]/ihii, I had Ihoii
Prox. Fut. ijii/uiii, I shall soon lie
Inst. Fut. j/iiiwu/;iri, I shall bo imme-
diately
Rem. Kut. piptirigiri, I shall Im> hereafter
C'ras. Fut. i/iijuriuwiigiri, I shall lie to-
morrow
FuttPa>t. i/ij/i/igiri, I shall have been
UEFISITF. niRM.
Pres. ijhjiiiianit, I nm being
Past A. ijingiimini, I was
Pret. i/iiifiiirMgiiilin, I have been
Fut. tfitjgiDiagiri, I shall be, iSiC,
There is nnotlier participial form, j/im-
hiaiia, though the dilleri'iice lietwecn the
two is not explained. The two termina-
tions are sometimes united in the luturt
tense, to express long-continued action or
existence, as, ijimbiitgunagiri, I shall long
continue being.
INFINITIVI.
Indef. pipg'gii (or >ji>igi), to bo
Partio. ijiiigiiiiagi-gii, to continue being
Iter, yiii/igi-gii, to be again
OPTATIVE.
Aor. mtilan pipga, would, could, should be
ITERATIVE.
Prcs. gialinyo, I am again
Fut. tjiuligiri, I shall be again, &c.
AVa T K A L I A.
499
K A M I I. A l( A I.
•t'rr<»irtv> avii Nnurivi.
Aor. hi/ia /'ii, \\' I liiiil Imi'ii
Aor. keituaran kcjiii, 1 luivo not been
IMPtllATIVI.
Indt'f. kii(iiiii, 1k!
Del", kiikiliii, Ik' thtw, rpiimill
Ui't'i|i. kiiki/ii, In" liij{rther
Iter, ktilvdkii, lie iigiiiii
Tlicri) iiri' sovcriil vcrbiil nniins, or nouns
deiivcci (Vi)tii verbs, in tbis lnnij;imijo:
1 . 'I'hi! nj,'ont, or iIikt of an act, \a ex-
pressed by Ibo terniin.itinn kiiii; iis, /nin-
ki/ikiiti, II striker, one who strikes.
8. One wbo hnbitniilly or professionally
performs ony net, is "Xiiressed by the ter-
minati<in i/r; as,hunkiije, a striker, a boxer,
murderer, iVe.
3. 'I"bn thing or object whieli |)i'rforn)s
an act has the termirmtion hiiie; as, limi-
kilikaiie, the thing which strikes, a cudgel.
4. The particular net iierforined is ex-
pressed by ta; ns, Imnkilila, the striking,
Iho fighting (which took place).
5. The act in the abstract is distinguished
by to; as, hiiiikiHto, a blow, or figlit.
0. The place in which an nction takes
place has the termination pi7 or ijeil; ns,
bunkiiii/eil, a place of striking, a pugilistic
ring.
There is nlso n verbal noun or adjective,
with a passive signification, ending in tmra ;
as, hiintixira, that which is struck, umii/i-
tiHtrti, that which is made or done.
The following table of (icrivativcs is from
Mr. 'I hrclkeld's manuscripts. It shows in
a striking light the advantages which the
language derives from this source, both for
discriminating nice shades of meaning, and
for devising names descriptive of new ob-
jects:
W I i( A II I' 11 K I.
[Ilesides the above liirins, others iiiii
given among the examples, whii'h seem to
lie colli rnetioiiM j as, i/iliyit for i/litiiiya;
fiiliiiiiii for giuliyn, itc.\
IMimtTIVK.
Indef. jjiijfid, Ik-
Uef. iiiijgiiiiiitn, l)c thus
Iter. ijiuliUi, bo again
Verbal adjectives are lijrnied from the
porticipic by adding gi'lijul ; as, /xiM^it.
utiiiii, singing, iHiliilgunana-guljiiU giliui,
n singing man.
Verbal nouns, signilying one who habi-
tually iierforms an act, are lijrmed from the
preterite by changing tnuiin to tain; as,
iHiliil^imiii, I sung, Ixi/ii/lai/t, a singer;
i/(tru, to s|)eak, ijit/umiii, I spoke, i/ii/tdt/i,
n siH'akor.
: it
Hh
5 'f-^ ,
= S. a
rl^'^r'l^
i I
IS .^^
1
H .- r- -^ S 5 g
5 1 js
a .5
is -T * ■"
~- ■'5 ~ s"
I -i "i '1
; a 5 R
lee
= -^ 5 .
~S 5 "5
5 =5
s
.3 s
.-§1
— W
<
at
<
- fc = S - 5
Si
~ 3
S 1
R ^
^ ^
_>! s i :^
:i s
11
■I !
S S*. ». JC^
IS ^
"? "3
II
11
11
0. s
-3 <— 3 = -^
^
£ ^ £
■^ ~ I
>- w = .5-
i: ^ '> u
- F 5 ^ o 2
- ■- ^ E C l ^
>. g ^ C ^^ « ?
I- 1 l|' f ■ 11
a S-. » E\. .5 Sk s
u
C I.
SI
i c t. u ii 5
-^ s i" c; o :2
I '5; s J 'E ^^
s :3 5 5 £ -^ ^
^ ^ -^ -S -i ■? "5
1 §>^ 1 1^
t: 5. '-^ "5 ^ ^ ^
u
r s s c &• I
■ C £ ;~' 5 O O . '
■| "§ s "^ rS ^' I
5 to
S •/. ^ .5
S "c -i 3
T3 * 13 «
^. ■£ -^- r^s"
IS ^ -^ s^ a -
t
^ I
d. — p
I^H
60
S '^
C
?.t 9.
'i
a, -S s a,
c
o
trf u X t^-
g S £i -^
. g -
O
3
9.
5^
? "5
^ I,
^ 3
•S s
= C3
s " e 3
^ -§ ^ S.
« "^ "S s'
•ii Si 3 H
o » o —
^ "i "^ ?
1
c
i I
.2
3
I
E
to
l-t
o
I
<= 3
"1
S
Si
«
s
V
^
1
5
«
*
•a
'I
<
§
1.
ft
C
J
^
a;
_5
3
— •
.= S. o
E I s
H|
o — »
to '. "g
.5 .ti a
S 'E
Jr E
c "^
o «
J, o
ii
>» "H.
S ^
.2 %
S t>
E •£
E "
e =
to a
E S,-^
<_ .{ «
o 5 o
tn •? "^
CL -^ T.
J5 *
<5 j= -a
So"
jj — «
u c S
CJ C; O
■■% sr a
"= 8 '3
u c 5
a
.2 J 2
— " -3
a o ^
-0' t,
— i -a J5
E ^
P -c
71
c a
'to ■-
« .2
E -
la
g 1
If
i
a; s^
^ <<
g E
1
il
« -5
o =
■- a
E -f
^
I
S . - .^
5 c „
■^ s-f
;; 3 E
•■5 -^ ,
" -? 3
OJ S* o
-= T3 3
-o ^ g
■3 nJ o
•2. J- E
" § 2
2 s §
■= « *
a ^ •S
.5 i *
E -£ gP
S * 3
.1" i %
£00
■■5 J e §
c :r;
* o c 6
s a, '« cd
AUSTRALIA.
501
K A M I L A R A I.
From what hits been said, it will be evi-
dent that the power of the Australinn lan-
guages resides chiefly in their numerous
inotlifying |iartiolcs. It is often diincult to
determine whether these should be written
as separate words, fir united with the term
which I hey serve to modil'y. It is, likewise,
not always easy to trace the exact shade of
meaning which the pnrficlu is intended to
indicate, owing to the novel and peculiar
principles on which the grammatical system
of these languages is founded.
Besides the particles already mentioned,
some others reipiirc to lie noticed.
KoricH is the word for not; but when
op|)ended to ii noun or adjective it has the
force of -less or iiii- in Knglish j as, inuro-
roff, g(X)d, worthy, mti roroij-koricii, worth-
less, unworthy.
Kilou, like, is used as a suflix, precisely
as in I'jiglisb ; as, iionui-kilwi, v\\\k\\\K.c.
Kci answi'j-s to ish in English ; as, no-
naikei, childish ; uoiikii/kci, foolish.
Yaiili, as, is used in forming compari-
sons ; as, krktitkei (iiii ijanti iinna kilai,
lit. sweet this as that like, i. e. this is sweet
as that. Yanli-lio-la is rendered " so in-
deed it is."
Bo, joined with a pron<inn, has an em-
phatic signification ; as, tjiitna-lm, I myself,
I indeed, iS:c, It is also used with other
words,
Ko ; this particle is of very freipient use
in this language. With some nouns it forms,
as has Ix'cn seen, the active nominative case ;
with all, it forms the dative case, having the
signification of tn ur for, implying purpose
or object; with the same meaning it is ap-
pended to the infinitive of verbs ; as, hnn-
ki/i-ko, in order to strike. In the latter
case it is fivquently omitted in speaking.
Kikt is used with the infinitive instead of
ko, in order to expn?ss continuance of an
Bction. With the form of the verb which
WIRADUREI.
Mo!;ii is nftixed to nouns to signify desti-
tution or privation ; as, imtj, teeth, //«-
mo^ii, toothless (the ;j being dropped before
m for eupliony). Mulxiij has the same
meaning ; as, iiKiiiiij-miilxig, not good,
worthless.
(t'li/ia is suftixed with the sense of like ;
as, uiiijsini-siiilui, childlike. Hut where
similitud<' is intended,. «■«/«;/( must be used;
as, !;i/)ir./:ii/<iiii, like a man.
lUtjidii is used in cimparing; as, yidi/i
maiittj, yilti ijiijia/i, this good that like, i. c.
this is as good as that.
lilt signifies too, or u/so ; as, ijmhi-hii, I
also.
Uii ; all the remarks made respecting
ko in the Kamilarai dialect will apply to this
particle, which is identical in use and nearly
in sound.
lac
502
PHILOLOGY.
KAMILARAI.
we have called deprecatory it has the signi-
fication of lest; ns, Ountra-ku n kfxi lion
Uii), lest [ should strike him. With the
optotivc it signifies that, in order that ; as,
buwil koti bo/i /*;jj, that I moy strike him.
Jia has the sense of irhik, if, uhcn ; as,
huntdii lion Ihiij Iki, while I strike him;
Immpa lion liog Ixi, if 1 had struck him.
Lui) denotes quality ; thus, from pttle,
salt (the noun), we have the adjective, /Jo/e-
lap, salt, saline ; jnile-korien would signify
soilless, without salt, and pulc-koricn-lap,
uusalted, sweet.
Wal is a particle expressing intention or
will ; it is frequently joined with the future
of verbs.
J\e can hardly bt^ translatetl except by
the English neuter verb, though it has not
in reality a verbal signification ; ns, mina-
rig ke inii f what is this .'
Ta seems pro|)erly to mean that ; but in
many cases it cannot be rtMulered into Eng-
lish, and ill some instances it must be
lianslaled by the substantive verb.
lia (besides the meaning given above)
signifies to lie in any net or place. It may
olten lie rendered by the substantive verb,
ie is another prirtideofn similar character;
as, uni U>n ye, who is he }
Ma is used before the im|)erative; ns,
ma biiwa bdn, strike him.
Kfin has the sense of indeed, in fact ;
when appended to interrogalives it has a
negative meaning of n peculiar kind ; ns,
wonen pH'n uuala J where shall wo go \
tvonin kan, I do not know where, — (lit.
where indeed ?).
Kal and kalien are used as patronymics;
Enfilanil-kal, nn Englishman ; EnglaiuU
kalien, an Englishwoman.
WIRADUREI.
Wari is frequently joined with verbs as
n particle of the future.
Bn, ga, hi, tea, Ixihi, nilii, para, nre par-
ticles which, with various shades of mean-
ing, and peculiarities of construction, nre
used in cases where the substantive verb
would be employed in English.
Na signifies it, tluU, and is used like la
in Kamilarai,
liari is used with the third person of the
imix-rative; ns, Iktri yia, let it be; u-inatja-
liiliii kiri, let him believe.
Ga is used with interrogalives to reply
in the negative ; ns, minyay-ga, 1 don't know
what (what indeed !) , t.agu-pa, I don't know
where, &c. It seems to have the general
signification of " indeed."
Glin is used to form patronymics ; as,
England-gan, an English man or woman.
AUSTRALIA.
503
KAMILARAI.
WIRADUREI.
COMPOUNDS.
There are many compound verbs, and
they are frequently employed where in other
languages adverbs and prepositions would
be used. The verbs which most commonly
serve to modify others are the following :
Munhili or hmihili, to permit ; as, bii,
strike, hiimu nhiliko, to permit to strike ;
bumiininn bon Imy, I permit him to strike ;
uvw, to make, umahti iihililio,\o permit to
make (or perhaps, ralhiT, to porniit lo be
made). When binihili is preceded by niar<i
it has n passive signification ; as, bitimira-
biitibili, to permit lo be struck.
Mali or moli, to do, to make, gives a
causal signification ; as, pitui, joy, pitul-
mali, to cause joy, to make joyful, — jntiil-
ma lK»t hill, I made him glad. Kola, secret,
kolamuli, to conceal.
Bunlili has nearly the sume moaning
with mali; as, poai, growing, poai-ki ntili,
to cause to grow.
Bntjuli means to compel, oblige, cause;
as, Uti, dead, Ifti-binjn/i, to cause to bo
dead, to kill ; por-buinili, to compel to drop.
Btirili signilies to cause by some means
or agency ; as, lUr-bmiH, to break by some
means; tHi-burili, to kill by some means
(as poison).
Kuli signifies spontaneous action ; as,
tiir-kti/i, to break of itself. (It is probably
the substantive verb ka, meaning lo be in
any state, — as is also the following):
Kahili is used to convert adjectives into
verbs ; as, pilul-kakili, to be glad ; tiHi-
kakili, to lie dead.
linli, signifying to be in any act, is em-
ployed to form active verbs; as, tilt-bu/i,
to be dying.
Maiiji'li gives to the verb the meaning
of failure or incomplete o|ieralion ; as, na,
to see, iia-maiijuli, to look without observ-
ing; pirti, lo hear, iinni-niaiiinli, lo hear
but not to attend. Du-maiiju Um Ihuj, I
COMPOl'NOS.
Mambili, to permit; as, bumalmambira,
I permit to strike ; biiiiialnuimbiUilinya, I
permit to strike again; biimahumalalimam-
bilnaridaagin, I shall permit to continue
striking again to-morrow !
Mali, to make or cause to be; as, marga,
shield, marga-mali, to ( luse to be a shield,
hence, lo protect, save ; Uipgan, broken,
Ixiggamali, to break.
Biniili has a causative force, (perhaps
from bii, strike,) as, lia/u-biinia, kill, (which
may be, " strike dead.")
Gilinya is used to convert adjectives into
verbs ; as, gntuij, glad, gataij-gilinya.
604
PHILOLOGY.
:li-
r
KAMILARAI.
nearly struck him, or did not quite strike
him.
Yeli (or yali) from tciye/i, to speak, is
used with all terms implying verbal com-
munication ; as, yakoyeli, to lie, deceive;
piye/i, to beg, entrciU ; tiirakaiytii, to con-
vince.
Eili, from uwali, to walk ; as, wij/aiei/i,
to talk and walk, or to converse while
walking ; tateili, to eat and walk.
Several verbs are sometimes united in one
word ; ns, tiir, broken ; tiir^iuyuli, to
break, tiir-hirga-bunbUi, to |>crniit to break.
WIRADUREI.
Ya/i or i/eti signifies to s|)eak, haii/a/i,
to command ; hence yaiialKiiyitli, to tell to
goj iiriimlxiiya/i, to tell to come in; /Hiram-
haiynii, to tell to rise.
Dili<:t is a suffix signifying to obey, or
do wh;it the principal verb commands; it
is correlative with Ikih/ii/i; as, yaiia-Ziiiis^,
to go when told ; yu/hi/iui, to s|)ciik when
told ; taM/ivi, to eat when told.
■f^ij;i, sijjiiities to do any thing for
another; it might, perhaps, have l)een
ranked as a mixliticalion of the verb; as,
gtwililigi, to carry for another (from
g(uia) ; mi/iMigi, to beg for another ;
mi/ifii, to make or do for another ; Aa-
luyeli/si, to die for another.
Numigi gives the signification of liefnre,
prior to (in lime); as, yaiinumigi (for
yidnmnifsi), to speak Ixjfore or sooner;
tan/iiiniisi for lul>iiiiiiif:i), to eat before ;
baliiiii4mi^, to die lic(i)rp.
Gurag is a prefix, having the sense of
completing any act ; as, giiragmali, to
finish doing; giiragayeli, to finish speak-
ing ; futragutcUi, to eat all up, to be done
eating.
Malay and giiiili are independent words,
or particles used in forming the potential
and optative moods. 'I'liey have the par-
ticles gu, gild, yn, yiii, /m, trari, and the
tenses of the verb yiiiyi, to be joined with
them to vary their meaning; as, malay gu
ye, could speak ; yiiidu gild nuiliiy yinya,
thou oughtest to be ; hiimai inalag ya nal
yiyga, I should have lM«n struck. Bumali
yiiidi Im-ilii, 1 wish to strike ; Innnali yimli-
ilyii yiy>/i, I did wish to strike, or would
have struck ; humnli-ilyu yimli yiyguain,
I have wished to strike, &c.
To complete the comparative view of the two languages, we subjoin a collated list of
the most common words, with a collection of sentences rendered as literally as possible.
AUSTRALIA.
505
The former were mostly writlen down from the pronunciation of the natives, while the
latter are from the grammars of Mr. Thrclkeld and Mr. Watson, — circumstances which
will account lor some discrepancies in the orthography of the two.
KAMILARAI.
WIRADUREI.
kenta
gira
afraid
moron
miirun
alive
niiiwara
Uiltii or dalai
angry
wirajjkaji
mdrguii
ankle
tandn
ilainydnana
to approach
kqpa
bdgiir or bokur
orm (upper)
tardy
hi
arm (lower)
pimpi
hiinan
ashes
baibai
burguin
axe (iron)
pako
guingal
axe (stone)
palkd
bira, mar, gdrba
back (different parts of)
kinan
naru
bag
bakai
duraij aldranda
bark (of tree)
worowai
biinuilgidyal (?)
battle, fight
hikili, ball
yiiiija
to be
ttuuiie, paraji
biirldn
belly
tepcn
dibilain
bird
polo-
Imdag
black
tikemdp, woropil
buday
blanket
kdmara
kuain
blood
bUmbili
bumhira
to blow
marinawai, nawai, kataf
wdrgag
boat, canoe
karaidg
viarin
body
mula
mula
boil, sore
tepun
dalnd
bone
tdrama
bargan
boomerang, a missile weapon
teral
biidii, yarain, Mri
bough, branch
koiiug, konarig
galiygati
bowels
kum/iorokdn
kdbuka
brain (see egg)
tiirmali
bapgamdra
to break
■wdpara
pa mug
breast
bigai
gargati
brother, elder
kambal
kdlmu'in
" younger
kand, kiyubvli, wineli
kunana
to burn
baiyagbaiydg
budindmdyd-gUgil
butterfly
tcoloma
ifuliima
calf of leg
karili
bnramara, gana
to carry
knh
tahd
cheek
piriwal
gitiinudtdin (leader)
chief
wanai
ivaggai
137
child
S06
PHILOLOGY.
I '
KAMILARAI.
WIRADURGI.
moHti/o, yari (beard), wo-
ydrdin
chin (or beard)
Uni
yufcil, yura
yiiriig
clouda
kdtara
iita, giidaru, bundi
club, cudgel
ktarapai
mitrrilin
cockatoo (white)
vniila
niaran, bilir
black
tuhtira
Miulam
cold (to be)
nuimarakiin, milkamilka
waljiar
collar-bone, clavicle
mcali
yuiKina
to come (also, to go)
kardknl
puyargir
conjuror, doctor
ivarimvarin
fmrgaubargan, waliwali
crooked, bent, askew
tcakan
witgan
a crow (bird)
koke, u-inM, winup
kiiki
cup (of bork)
burhiyuli, kardkal-umali
giininhiinmara
to cure
kunbuntili
baggabira
to cut
unteli
u'dgana
to dance
yindlkun
ndmur
daughter
gorokdii
piiiiiggal, pdrgan
dawn
teti
UUu
dead
piriko
purambal
deep
mimali
immdra
detain
tetUmli
bdlitna
to die
piitili
mutiiUmngara
to dig
umali
mara, bunmara
to do or make
arekal
miri
dog
ijxiki, ?nuroykai
yiiki
notive dog, male
miri
karingali
" " female
poran
yarudag
dream
pitu/i.
u-iih/ara
to drink
pona
bunan
dust
paropara, i/areap,tarakvn
via
ear
parai
takiin or -lagtm
earth, land
takili, ta
dara or tara
to eat
korotyoy, kanin
kalindulin
eel
yam
kdbiika
egg
jfina
puna
elbow
kotjkordy
piiruin
emu
yaria
gurumbap
evening
mikai/, j/aikay, porowap
mil
eye
ynlknra
peer
eyebrow
woipin
timit
eyelash
garogaro
buiuhnya
to fall down
kij)ai
wamii
fat, grease
peyap, bintunkin
babin
father
AUSTRALIA.
507
KAMILARAI.
WIRADUREI.
bnmili, tuykamati
yamiiiya
to find
viatara
mtira
finger (sec hand)
garakonld
bandyan
" little
tireil
yiilu
finger-nail
koiiig
win
fire
mtikoro
guya
fish
kolabili
Imtamhira
to fish
kalara, molig
ydiiara
fish-spear
tiriki
yalan
flame
karat, pareag
banay
flesh
muraban
gurawin
flower
yala, tvurapkan
burimal
fly
kotiogai, wonkvl
giiiiyguay
fool
yolo, tcna
dinay
foot
yentare
yuliiy
forehead
koffkirj/
giiygalay
frog
yiikili, yu
yuiia
to give
marop, marorop
tiidruy, u-dluin
good
woid
biiguin
grass
tulmvn
tdgun-mdr
grave, (mound.)
kau'dl or kawOl
murawat
great
biirag, ketap
nrtin
hair (of head).
ketay, wuran
kit/yay
hair (of body, fur).
matara
mura
hand
pitul
gaday
happy
piriral
valan
ii.ird, (also heavy)
karakai
Imrabaraiydnana
to hasten
walay or walay
btday or buluy
head
yarali
tiimiydra
to hear
Imlbul
kin or gin
heart
xcinal, yakay
mi lay
hip
kirika, korundy
mini
honey
miparai
kanirj, mdrin
honey-comb
kapiri, turmipiri, yuruyun
yarun, girtigal
hungry
urakiy
wdliii
initiated person
nolkanvlko
girmlxuhi
iron, metal
untay
takal-dalxU (cheek-bone)
jaw (lower)
pdtukaray, kaneiwdy, bol-
baiidar, wamboin, vluma
kanguroo (different kinds of)
buy, moatie
icti-birijali
balubiniira, bdlubiimara
to kill
boinkuli
budarbdna
to kiss
warombay
biiygay
knee
kaliyticlo
gdliijdl
knife
pintili
bindyira, bimdibundira
to knock down
kiiitai
kintana
to laugh
:i
' 11
508
PHILOLOGY.
t
i:i
KAMILARAI.
WIRADUREI.
por«j)d>t
7Hiraga
left (sinistrorsum)
wanban
biiyu or buiu
leg
pinkuH, u-olol
Miki
lightning
weinveir
u'irgana
to limp, lame
tvmhiri
mundu
lip, upper
we/eij
vilip
lip, lower
mimvg
kanap, guralup
liver
kore
gibir
man
pantemai
mabun
messenger
tvilep, kuruka
pS%H
mouth
kvruban
hilubiinulain
murderer
topij/
miigin
musquito
MoTf
muragir
naked
papai
miluula
near
word, kaleai)
urit
neck
tokoi
niiritp
night
nokoro
mump
nose
j/arombai
diriban
old man
paropeen
balagan
old woman
uelai
leiliii
opossum
kirin
i/i'gi, ipgil, bandyabandya
pain
yariyari
pdrapdraibara
to pant
kirakira, kaneta
burain
parrot
yapag
mum
path
turali
dura, dana, durinya
to pierce
nimali
tiimiira
to pinch
■parmcan, warun
icunigal
plain, level
konin
tandar
pretty
tcarekali
warambia
to put up or aside
yerip
buHl
quill
boarij/, koiieon
gudp or guop
rain (or mist)
kdpdra
gtibargubar, gidyi, dirun-
dimp
red
kotabnnbUi
winapaigunana
remember
wiyea, wiyayeli
yaUdinya
repeat
nara
tarar
rib
turoun
bumalgal
right (dextrorsum)
parogaroji
Kottatcada
rough
poroghd
yawai
round
marali, talbuli
bunbatia
to run
puna
karat
sand
naki/i, no,
pana
to see
komara
gild/, dugui, giruman
shadow
koian
gial
shame
j/oitip, ponkop
bungul
short
AUSTRALIA.
509
KAMILARAI.
WIRADUREI.
fMra;
kana
shoulder
mani
mil
sick
kitrirhirp
yiiU (?)
side (of body)
konin, tnupai
tilnum
silent
tneya
kttynn
sinew
witili
baliira
to sing
yalatrnli
■winy a
to sit
biikai
i/iilain
skin
kapara
ttiTMi/, lUitxU (bone)
skull
farabo
yumiwirinya
to sleep
mill, warea
bubai
small
maiyd
ttirug
snake
yinal
iirumaXn
son (used by men)
ffiiluijgal
son (used by women)
kdrakop
murumfian
son, eldest
taiol
umbiih/ap, pilainin
son, youngest
napun
giiiH
song
marai
tiiluliay
soul, spirit
warai
tulii
spear
porelmi (m.), porekanbai (f.) nu/nin.
spouse (husband or wife)
tO/IOIJ
waJag
stone
po/ikek or bdnkili
btiinara
to strike
kiakia, kaigu
u'd/an
strong
vunal
iraibaff
summer
pantU ot panO I
irai
sun
kiiubul
till mill
swan
watpuli
bdmbinya
to swim
porei
pdmirgal, gdinwal
tall
jfiirmali
banmmara
to tear
buloinkoro
daraij
thig.1
koUli
winaydna
to think
kcUearip
kale
throat
wdmara
wdmar
throwing-stick, lever
ti/nkdnbetn
pityar
thumb
mblo
miiriibardi
thunder
Ifirn/i
bdnddra
to tie
pirii
bira
tired
katnl
kdtal
tobacco
takin
tdlain
tongue
tera, punturu
trap or yirap
tooth
koi/og
pump
town or camp
kolai
mdtan
tree, wood
tokol
keri
true
nupi'/i
naltinbira
to try, to measure
pilapai
giilgiin.
valley, pit
tarakcl
bapil
vein
138
510
P il I L O L O O Y.
K A M I I. A R A I.
miiJanuili
ptUro, kokoiii, kaliy, j/ero,
IHitog
tit ml
kiniiy
ircjx, ifibi
korn
fnkdiu
Diiniki
nokag
I'-opara
intirakcen
W I R A D l> R G I.
Kurai, giiip
mu/amuJdp
kulitj
yiiruii
f-nra
kiriir
ilirihhril
/m/mij, Ixiludai
vjiiriiuii
imir
ii/;af, Mfiurpau, iiarmatj
niikigay, inugiijiay
voice, language
to vomit
water
well, not sick
wot
wind
win(lpi|H! (also, reed)
wintLT
wise, skilful
woman
young man (unmarried)
young woman (unmarried)
SENTENCES.
TiiK (blldwing sentences nro from the some aourccs aa the grnnimnrs. Tlioy will scrvi'
to cxcmplily thi) rules which nre given in llin precnding pnges, nnil will illualrnto many
peoiilinrilics oC construction, which cnn only be lenrncd Ironi example. The literal or
interlinear translation of the KAmilnrai is Inkon, with somo olterntions, Irom Mr. Threl-
keld's Grammar ; for that of the VViradurei wo arc responsible, and cnn hardly expoii
that it will be found entirely free from error. Where the meaning of a word has not
been [K'rleclly understood, (or Ix'lieved to be so,) no translation of it is given. Those
connective particlia, nnd similar words, of freipient occurrence in these languages, for
which no corresponding terms exist in English, have an asterisk under them in the literal
version. The importance of these particles in tln! grammatical system of the Australian
dialects, is very evident from the examples which follow.
KAMILARAI.
Piin ke hi? Hatoa, B-
who » thou I
Han ke trtii 1 vnoa ?
who • this that
Kore uni; nuktrp vnoa
man this woman that
Minarig ke iinif
what * this
Warui ta uni
spear * this
Minaripko k' unoa?
what for • that
Turvliko
spcoring lor
W in AOUIl EI.
BIMrLE NOMINATIVK CASK.
niintli va-)ir/it? Utulu, B —
who # thou I
UiuiiU ijiilif yanaj
who this that
Gibir yiili ; iiiar yana
man this woman that
Miiiaij i)ii/i ba!
what this •
Tutu Iki ijan
spear * this
Minatjgu ha yila 1
what for • that
Tiirilifiu
spearing for
Who art thou T It is I,
Who is this? that?
This is a man ; thot is
o woman.
What is this ?
It is a spear.
What is that for f
To s|H.'nr with.
ACTIVR NOMINATIVE.
lianto hill wiya?
who thee told
Nimroa tia iviyii
he mc told
ndndu nyal yi ?
who thee told
Gain nal yi
he me told
Who told thee \
Ho told me.
fil2
PHI LO I.UO Y.
K A M I I. A R A I.
ntili noil tilt trii/ii
thin he me tiilil
/?(//« IkiiiiiIdii till ii-ii/ii
this k\w 1110 told
fhi/i mil II III iiniii
this he thin iimil<>
Miiiiiri]/kii ItiH hunkiilil till
whiit him Hlriick dead
XiiKi' ijkii. Vitiiliiiiiiiko
Wcimnn nicHm.'iigiT
Wiikiinlu mimiiin laluiif
crow what I'ntd
Mimirigko uiikiui tittun
whnt crow cuts
NugUnto till jiitni-iiiaii
song inc gind makes
Kn/iiito till Imiikiilii wokatinto
stick me struck abovc'from
niDiumlni noil inii yiniill
whoso ho this son
ElllOlllll/xt til
mine it
nnlikolxi hm
this - of » ho
HIiii(iri//kij/Ki II III
whnt - of this
Wiiiita-knl liarn f
where • of they
Enfglantl-kal Ixira
England of they
BuiKii-kiil
to-day of
Makorokoba ta irni jfirog
fish's • this blood
Governor-kai kill Imp
governor's of I
Governor-vm/ia baj/
governor's I
W I R A I) II R R I.
Iliili fiibiru iiiil'i/i'
this man nw told
Hiili iiiani mil i/t
this wiimaii mo told
lliili ffuiii tjiiiiii i/iiiii nif
this ho that lliis mailo
Miiiftiitii j/iii Imlii-liuiii Ixi
what him (load struck •
hull II. H'ii/kiiii/h
woman niosstMigor
Miiii/iiij u-iigiiiiitii tiiljiif
what cniw eats
Miiiiliilii tii/iii ivugimf
what oats crow
hii/iiiiiliiii/i/ii/it nil/ fiiiUig-
singing niu gInd
l/i/iiii/ii
niiikos
Miiiliiiiilii hiiiiiliii j^itiau-aJguri
stick struck mv- above
ituriiii II iiiU
hit • mo
OKNITIVI.
riiiijfiu iiriiiiidii 1)11111 bat
whose son this •
Ihiili liinl Ixiiu Hit
mine indoi'd • it
r/i««j.'« /a ijin
this. of « he
Miiiifiiiiffu hi ijiiiii Ixi
what of • this •
Mini/iitj >jiiiii)'iilia piriimUtr).
what thoy country
gun f
of
Iliiinpiliu built Englittul-gan They are English
they • England of
Da/iiiigii hala na
to.day-of • it
lliiiii Ixila fiiidn gm/iigu
this • blotsl fish's
Cioreninr-birag-gii-tii fxipgaigu
governor's of I placc-of
Govenior-gii Ixila-tii
governor's • 1
This nun told mo.
This woman told mo.
This is ho who mado
this.
What killed him ?
Tho woman did. The
messenger did.
What docs the crow eat t
What is it that eats tho
crow t
Tho song doliglits mv.
Tho slick fell from
above, and struck me.
Whose son is this t
It is mine.
Ho is this man's.
To what docs tliis be-
long f
Of what country are
they T
Recent : of the present
day.
This is the bi'xxl of a
fish.
I belong to tho govef'
nor's place.
I belong to the governor.
*
•
•
•
A U H T R A M A.
518
K X M 1 1. A K A I,
W I H A D U R K I.
' Murorojfko/Ki korrMid
Mariii) fiihirnu
llolong lo a good man.
good • of man • uf
giXHl miin-ol'
UATIVK otn.
Mitkoro hi Dutca
Ctiiifit giinfia
Give the fiih.
fiiih thou nivn
(l.sh niv(!
wlinm • lo rlilcf. to
Uiiii^iu III .' (tiiiimiilliiinnH a f
\vhiiiii-lo» lender • lo •
To whom? to the chief?
Krau'iii, ijiiolnj In
Wiriii, ffiii/iiii(in-nii-f;ii
No, for thyself.
no tlittvlor only
no sell', thy • I'or
Karai tin puira rmoii ^ tdki/iko
liaiiiu) li ijiifimi tiiliffii
Give mo flesh lo ml.
flesh mo give inr • for ont • to
lle.sh inn ^Ive ent • lo
Yuriff III tfii/ii iii/iknn i/.kinko
UifiniilKiln, ijiiiiii ijiKin
Bcotf! go to him!
'
awny ihoii k" l>in> ■ 'o
ili'pnrl pp lo him
tlimkinko? Pinintlnkol
Hiinioiilii III > (I'hiiniiUtiiinifit
To whom? to the chief!
whom - to chief, to
whom.to • lender .to
#
Wontanyf
7W^'i/ III liiiyf;iil)<ii >
VVhiihcr?
«* whrn- - lo
whni * plaee . lo
Miiliiliinlm-kako
lJiriniliiiiif;u
ToNVwcnslln(N.a.W.),
lo Xruvitsl/e
to Willui;iliin
lo Wellington Vnllcy,
Engliiiiil-knko
Enuliiii'Ifm
&c.
lo Kngliind
lo I'^ii^lnnd
ACXrUIATIVR CAKK.
naiitn Ikin bmikvla tfti
Uniiilii i)iii /mill hinii?
Who killed him?
who him sniolo dead
who him dead smoto
kiilicun?
sliir
niiniiiipf liirakinnap
TliDiili In 1 Biriilxm
Whom ? nirnbftn.
whom nirnbaii
whom • B —
Hiilod lidn tiira
Tifulii ijin III lit iKiltt
It wns I who speared
I him speared
Turii Imn Ihhj
spcnred him I
Kailiiila lion iioii n. Hannuy 1
call her whom
Onv)) yoij uiiatnu)/ yukur)
there yonder IhnI woman
MiDikii/i kora tnioamnj
lake not that
Mara hi unonnny
take thou that
I him speared •
Hinlii Ijin tuni
I hima|)cnred
Uliiijga-ini. Uandi la ha ?
call . hor whom » •
nana iiiar ganiiin
thot woman there
Karia i'(iiji,;<i ijila
not lake that
nindu pilii gaijiia
thou that take
129
him.
I s|)eared him.
Coll her. Whom?
That woman there.
Do not take that.
Take that.
i ,!
514
PHILOLOGY.
K A M I L A R A I.
Mara unti-kal
tnke this of
Makoro tia yiiica
fish mc give
Ufinirn Immig
give -will I- thee
Puntimdn tia baran
throw mc down
Makoro hi tiirn/a waraito
fish thou s|)car spcar-wiih
Tibin bi btitra muskct-to
bird tliou strike musket-with
Wii/ala fwn
tell him
Wii/a/a bininj
tell thou • him
Biinkula tia. Wonne 1
struck me where
Wolup tia )ioa wirea
head me he hit
Miniiriij bo bali u-ii/ald ?
what indeed we - two sny
Hunto unoanvij umvnvn
who that make - will
£Za / kaai taniin tintiko
Ho! come approach hither
Wau ! kaai ! kaai ! karakai
Ho! come come hasten
BovykalinuH wal bay tcaita
arise-will * I depart
bijiu ijlxiitako cnionytxiko,
father - to my • to,
fOliin u^i/unun wal lion,
and say - will • to him,
Biyuy, yarakai bap umii
father evil I did
mikiin ta morokoka yatun
presence • heaven - to and
piroinjkin
thcc • to
W I R A D U R E I.
Gapga giilbir yidi
take some of this
Gin/a li ijiir/gu
fish me give
Ihulu - 7tti wari pupgiri
I - thee * give-will
Wanaii l>ala nal
thrown • ine
Gw/a turn tiilii • (hiratii
fish s|)oar spear - with
Dibilaiii biriiniba barima-
bird shoot musket -
duratii
with
Hala pin
tell him
nindii j/iw t/ald
thou him tell
Buman bala nal. Vitga Id ?
struck • me where •
Balaijga nal guiii burnt
hend-on me he struck
Mint/aUi li i/ali pali ba ?
what * say we • two #
ndndu wari mara • malgiri
who • make-will (pin
understood.)
VOCATIVE CASE.
Ya ! padii yera tain yatid
Ho ! I say hither come
Ya ! baroharai tain yana I
Ho ! quick hither come
bunlmtiUd !
hasten
Bnrapgari - di/ii wuri yana-
ai 'so -will I * go-
g, 'i - ih/u • bu bal/ifidi/a • ti,
will - I also father • to, my
yalgiri - hu pagieala, Ya
say - will -also him -to O
B<ibi)ii/yi, padu wilidyal
father • my, I before
pi/ii/iinda wamap
thee - to evil
malgiinain
did.
Take some of this.
Give mo fish.
I will give to thee.
I am thrown down.
Spear the fish with the
spear.
Shoot the bird with the
musket.
Tell him.
Tell thou him.
I am struck ' Where ?
He struck mo on the
head.
What shall we two say ?
Who will make thatl
I say, come hither !
Come quickly ; make
haste.
I will arise and will go
to my father, and will
say to him, Father,
I have done evil [be-
fore heaven and] be-
fore thee.
AUSTRALIA.
516
kAmilarai.
Koaktian bara
quarrelling they
ndiikai ?
whom - about 1
Uii/ikai kan !
whom - about indeed
Minaiiijtin 1 Mituiriptin
what ■ about what - about
ktm !
indeed
Makorig yatan koretin
fish - about and man • about
lidnkin-biruy uni pun-
whom - from this mes-
timai 1
senger?
Jckovaka - birap, Piriwola -
Jehovah - from . chief -
biruij
from
Wontaka-hirup noa?
where - from he
Wokaka-birap morokokabirap
above • from heaven - from
Miitarig-Mrvg utwa umii?
what . from that made
Kolaibirup. Brass-birup
wood • from brass - from
Yurig hiwala emoupkin-birop
awny thou go me - fnm
Ye/iiicala bi emoap.katoa
sit thou me - with
Dan-katoa bountxxi,
whom • with she
Nani-katoa ba
Nanny - with *
Woiitii-kaloa noa uwa
whrro-by he went
Kormj-ktxi
bush ' by
WIRADUREI.
ABLATIVE CASX.
naiiigiilia guondiltUaigmiana They are quarrelling.
they quarrelling
ndnundi bai? About whom?
whom - about *
Banundi
ga!
Whom - about ihdeed
Minyali ba ? Miin/ali
ga!
what about » what about indeed
i do not know about
whom.
About what? I know
not.
About the fish and the
men.
Guyadi, gibirbandi or
fisli-about men ■ about
(gibirga/atidi).
nanundi pina walandti
whom - from this messenger
buogi; ?
came
Joba-di, Ginimaltaindi From Jehovah, the King,
Jehovah • from leader - from.
From whom is this mes-
senger ?
7\idi pin tain bapgcdi
whence he here place - from
buoge ?
come
Munibiri patinvahjiiri
heaven - from above - from
Minyali pin hiinmdn ?
what - from that made
Matandi. GunihaUuK
wood - from metal ■ from
BinimlxUd pantindi
depart me - from
Widi/a panunda-durei
sit me - with
Handi-ditrei gara na ba?
whom with » she «
Ntuii-durdta na
Nanny - with she
Widi/mj-purgu pin yanain?
whrro - by he went
Uruin biramali
through bush
Whence did he come ?
From heaven above.
Of what is that made ?
Of wood. Ofmetul, &c.
Go away from me.
Sit with me.
With whom is she ?
She is with Nanny.
Which way did he go ?
Through the bush (fo-
rest).
mlS^^^i^A
516
KAMILARAI.
Kt^irda bay uwa
house - by I came
Wonuy ke wurubilt
where • cloak
Biraliiin-kinba
at Biraban's
Onti-tinto. Onta-tinto
here - from there - from
Minnn koretatuinba?
how - many man come *
Wnkol Ix) ta noa tandti ba
one only # he comes »
KMirdn bo ta
few only *
Til)into noa tatdn
bird he eats
Ha/i noil tihiiito ])it(in
this he bird drinks
Uni tara I'Mn bi bunkula teti
these they bird thou smote dead
Ilintoa bo ta vnoa kore
thou only * that man
Yakmii noa maiijiiko putinun,
how ho snake bite
teti koa kamcil kore ?
dead for may be man
Tirako ijikoumbako
teeth ■ with his - with
PHILOLOGY.
WIRADUREI.
Padu piriage milmadi
I passed house • by
Ti-gara badi/uunj
where cloak
Biratmn-lnrayga
at Biraban's
Hklila IxiggaH.
this place - from
b<ipga/i
place - from
I came by the house.
Where is the skin-cloak?
At Biraban's.
nidiala From this place. From
that that place.
J
Mini/(ir/dn gibrigal buogara How many men are
how -many man -of come coming?
ba?
IJunbai gibrigal bial buogara
one man -of only comes
nunltai-t/unUi bial. [Gulbir'\
few only some
Dibiluntu tdlgi
bird eats (habitually)
/?('«« ilibilain yagu u-uli/era
Ms bird that drinks
ninagului dibilain yana yimlii
these bird that thou
Ixila-buiii
dead - smote
Hint/u gild la gUrir lid bial
thou indeed • man • only
Wifli/iiyiilug turiiygu bcUalgi
how snake bite
halu-biiiitaligu?
dead • strike - to
Iray-giin-durdtu
teeth - his - with
Only one man is coming.
Only a few.
The bird eats.
This is the bird that
drinks.
These are the birds that
you killed.
Thou art the man.
How does the snake bite
in order to kill ?
With his teeth.
Wibi uni kauwol kutan
wind this great is
KauMan, kauwul lay uni
yes, great • this
Kapirdn bay kntdn
hungry I am
THE NEUTER TEKB.
Murowal b<da girar
great # wind
Hd, walanbdy
yes, strong - very
Ginigal Udd-tu
hungry • I
It is a high wind.
Yes, very strong.
I am hungry.
I
K A M I I. A R A I.
Pan unli kutAn
who here lives
Bara bo unli kvtan
they only he live
Kiakia bap kakeii n vni yorokan
conqueror I was this morning
Bvka Img kakvla
angry I was
Kumba hay kaken Sydney-ka
to-morrow I shali-be Sydney-at
Konap. ta vni murorin)
will - be • this good
i?o« ke kiakia kunanl
who * conqueror will - be
AUSTRALIA.
WIRADUREI.
natttli yini hi u-igi
who here * lives
Danaingulia giiyugan-guy
thoy selves - their
pini wigi
here live
Balatit tvari waratiiriiidnHi
# I • con()»('rpd - to - day
Hculu man tvari lalai-biiap
I • ♦ angry - very
Jlatlu Sydney-dya gipaiia-
I Sydney - at shall - be
uagiii
to-morrow
ni?ia gilti wdri marup pipgiria
this * * good will - be
Hundi warnliirulyain pipgiri
who conqueror will - be
ba?
617
Who lives here?
They themselves live
here.
I was conqueror this
morning.
I was angry.
1 shall be at Sydney to-
morrow .
This will be good.
Who will bt! conqueror?
Muka noa teli kunun
perhaps he dead will - be
Kabo Imp kuMin Sydney-ka
soon I shall • be Sydney - at
Kunun bap tarai ta yekna-ka
shall - be I another • moon - in
Kaiyu kan bap
able indeed I
Kaiyu korien bap
able not I
Wirofmlikdti bara pikonmba
followers they him - of
Pirapird bara kakilin unteli-
tired they becoming dancing-
tin
by
Wunul uni kakilin
summer this becoming
Ydmaga balu p\n pipgiri
perhaps dead he will - be
Guoguaiu-tu wari Sydney-dya
soon I • Sydney - at
pipgarigiri
shall - be
Uinibai giiola giwapga-tu wari
one other moon - in - 1 •
pipgiri
shall - be
I^adu walan bala
I strong #
Wirai n-alan liald-tu
not strong # I
Haingulia turu/galtaingalap-
they followers -
gu Id
his •
Wagapiilynlu paingiilui
dancing them
maluhungambira
tires
Yireilxip buogalgunana
summer is - coming
ISO
Perhaps he will be dead.
By-and-bye I shall be in
Sydney.
In another moon I shall
be.
I am powerful.
I am weak.
They are his followers.
The dancing is tiring
them.
Summer is coming.
518
PHILOLOGY.
K A M I L A R A I.
Storc-kaba kakilin liountoa
store -nt is -living she
Kapiri hiy kakiliria
hungry I was
Musket tia katdlti Si/i/nei/-ka
musket me was Sydney - at
Kiiitii l>ay ktUMi, yckita
afraid I was now
ken uai
not
(hita Ixiy kattila ijuraki Eiig-
there I lived formerly Kng-
land-ka
land - in
Mdrtm noa kakilhwn
alive he will-continuc-being,
titi-korien
dead - not
Wild kakilihn varfa
wind is • lieeoming small
Hatai. /h)
I only
Knkillan bali Immtoa
live . toijethcr we . two she
Yaknai binj Mi k(imirnf>iiiini
how I dead let - te ■ shall
/h>/i
him
Kakiliii-kfKi Ixi/i
niay-rernain-that wo-t\vo
mi not
peaceful
Mani noa kaleakan
sick he is -again
Yauoa, minii koa noa kateii-
do -not, sick lest he may -
kini
be
Muni kuntin buy Ihi
sick shall -be I if
Han ke Mi kiihiaiijd
who • dead being • near - was
w I R A I) i; n E I.
Stdr-ra na mfjitnamiiia
store. at she is- living
Ginigal btild-tii ijiiii
hungry * I here
Barirna Imld-dyi Si/ihiei/.di/ii
musket • mine Sydney -at
nrn/it girlf-iaiiigi, wiiai-aiii
I afraid • was, not - 1
yaiitiil
now
Hculu nuin wisiiniigi pant
1 # lived there
Eiighind-tla
England ■ in
Hill miiriiii irigigii yumbul
he alive live -to always
bu wirai lialu-niimigiri
also not dead ? will
Girar hiilxii yitidf/iiiinya
lillle wind growing -is
Iladii giti/iiydn
I indeed
Na yaliguna niiinin-
she us -two -of alive-
yamigiri
stay - together- will
Wiilyii-yiini-lii yina-gulinj
what - by I that - through
muti IkiIii guy
make dead him
niudi-r/i/u gamayga yiili
wish - 1 wo - two
yaliiligu
She is living at the store.
I was hungry.
I had a musket at Syd-
ney.
I used to be afraid, but
am not now.
I used to live in England.
He is going to live for
ever, and not die.
The wind is lessening.
It is I myself.
She and I will live to-
gether (marry).
How shall I cause his
death 1
I wish that you and 1
may be at |>eacc.
He is sick again.
Hin iygil yiiilinya
he sick is - again
Kdria, ya yiu iiigil yiygiri Do not, lest he be ill.
do -not, or he sick will -bo
Ya/itu-tu iygil malay yini If I should be sick.
if I sick should be
Ilandi isara yidaiman /xi/uui Who nearly died !
who almost died
K A MI LARA I.
Titi Ixip knmaiga
dead I Ijeing-ncur- was
Piriwiil M ba kajxi pitol
chief Ihou if hadst-bccn ylnd
paii/a /aij ktijm
then I liad - been
Kapa hi hi vuta yoro-
had-lK'fn Ihou if there this -
k<in III, mijm yiiii/ii /xiinnj
morning* hud-se<?n then I-lhee
Koni II kiiiiwa, tiinkii/e koia
qiiiel lie wail not
Kaki/it nurii jnliil-kiikiliko
continue ye glnd to-be
Muron Ixti: kniiw nbi/d
alive him let -be
Kauirii III teti kakiliko
yes, thou dead to- bo
Kiimiiii/n/iiiu tuiiiinj piriirnl
be - let - will I - thee chief
kakiliko
to - lie
Piiiunl hi kuUiikii
chief thou Ik' - again
I'iriuiil Utii kiimiiiiihiiji kora
chief hiui let • Ik; not
Mimiriijliii hiliki hiiiikula?
what . liir he - thee struck
Oni hiilnii hiinkiila noa
these them • two struck ho
nauninj hiinkiila/
whom struck
IVii/iUa hi till, miipaii/i koni
lell thou mc conceal not
Halt 111)11 tia hiinkiita
this he me struck
Miiiiirii/ko hilod Imnkulii ?
what - with IhiH! • ho struck
AUSTRALIA.
WIRADUREI.
IJ I III II jsiirii iiiilaiman haliini
I almost died
Umitii-vilu pipua pini king
if Ihou been wast
gii'ap fiila-iii pipfia pilinyi
glad then - 1 \wvn
YiuilK-iiilu ijaiiiila pipKii piili/i
if- Ihou there lx;en this
pill ill pitiii Hiiiliii) iiilii tiijah
morning saw should then Ihec-
tii
I
Tilmiip gipga, km in i/itpga
quiet Ih' do -not cry
Dingii piiiilii^irhinj gaiiiapgu
Ik! ye peace - in
Miiriin pin ii-iii haii
alive liini live let
Ha Imliiiigiri vuiii-idi
yes di(^-\vill surely -Ihou
n imii iiihi/i: i ri-ili/ii- II II king
he- let - will- 1 - thee
pipgi
to Ik!
King ijiiiliili/a
be - agiiin
Kariu pin king piiniimhia
noi lu.M let • be
V't/gi
to-be
ACTIVK VKRRa.
Wnrgulniga nyiil giiin hiimf? Why did lie beat you ?
what - for thee he struck
IHiiana hnia puna guin These are the two that
519
I was near dying.
If thou hadst been king,
I should have been
pleased.
If thou hadst been Ihcre
this morning, I should
have seen thee.
He quiet, d(j not cry.
Be at peace you.
Let him live.
Yes you are lo die.
I will permit thee to b<'
king.
Be king again.
Let him not be king.
these they • two that ho
hunii'
struck
Uaiiili giirn Inimdn ?
who struck
Yiilii-nnl, karia gnniip-pa
lell lue do . not conceal
Hind III II Hiigii mil liiinie
this he that me struck
Miniiiitf-iliiintii nijal huinil
what ■ with thee struck
he struck.
Who was struck \
Tell me, do not conceal
it.
This is he that struck
me.
With what did he strike
you !
l!
, \
520
PHILOLOGY.
KAMILARAl.
Miitaro j/ikotrmltako
hand -with his -with
DuwU koa hon kaii/a korien
strike would him nble nut
I
Kotira hi tia yitira hiiwil
cud^rl thiiii nip give may • beat
koa /ion btig
that him I
BumlHi hold lion liaij,
had -struck surely him I,
iionio /Kip Ixi kintii kan
but I * afraid indeed
kttkii/a
was
Bunkeun hon hap
striiok - to-day him I
Biinun hon Imx) kaJio
strike -will I him presently
BunkilailHin kora nura
strike - one ■ another not ye
Biinkilin hon liara yakita
are - boating him they now
Bunkiliilii hon haij tanan
was • bt'titing him I approaching
hi Ihi uwa
thou when came
Buntahi tia bara u-onai liam-ha
beat me they child I •
Bunkililin noa trheat
bf^ating • continually he
Danlio nura hunkiliin
who only ye fight - together
BiiKh'fvila bara ho bara
fought - together they only they
ho
only
WIRAPUREI.
Mara-fiiiratu-pup-f.'u With his hand,
hand- with - his - with
Bumara nudap pln-diju urirai \ would strike him, but
strike Aould him - 1 not am not able.
ba/ii-Zii mal
* I able
/7iif/j viui/iititn) hitmalia-tu Give me a cudgel, thot I
give - me cudgel may - beat - 1 may beat him.
pin
him
Bumf maJay-'jai gin-(/i/u I should certainly have
struck should - have him - 1 struck him, but I was
fiiihi/anii/afu afraid,
afraid - was - but - 1
Bafa pin-flifH humalmrini
* him I struck -to-day
Guaiu-tu pin hitmalgiri
presently - 1 him strike - will
Karia-iulugir hutnii/aigu-
do-not-yc be -striking -one -
nala
another
Bumalaitagunti na pin
are - now - lieating him
guingulia bial
they indeed
Bumalgunani pin-dipi
was l)eating him 1
yantunilu buone
when thou earnest
Gudngulia mil humi yantu-tu
they me beat when - 1
utiijgai pint
child was
Yiira muiiira giiin
wheat threshes he
nandu gara vyunda baJnga
who with -thee *
humalana
fighting- together
riaingulia bumalattgunani
they were fighting together
I have beat him this
morning.
I will strike him by-and-
bye.
Do not be striking one
another.
They ore beating him
now.
I was beating him when
yuu came.
They beat me when I
was a child.
He is threshing wheat.
Who are fighting with
you ?
They fought among
themselves.
A U H T a A I, I A.
531
K A M I L A R A I.
BiinkiUila Ixdi jimi
fought - together we - two I
Biilaiwonai txili noa hi
U — child wo -two 1 when
Buiikilviiun hula
will . fight they
YaiKxi liunkiyi kora
do not strike not
liiDikitiiiktn ball
will - light - to-morrow we - two
Tioa kiiinlHi
he to-morrow
nakouiita kc lutra bunkiliimin
when » thuy fight - will
Kumlxi ken ta
to-morrow
Kumlxi k'llx}
to-morrow presently
Waila - kolai) Ixnj Imiikihko
depart -nbout -to I smite -to
7ni(skrtlo
musket - with
Wii/aUi UiH buivil koa Ixni
tell him mny-bcat that him
Buivil bay PaUij - iitry
would - l)eat I Potty
Yari bi uMinon
not thou wait - will
Imntiaktm koa bin
may - not - l>eat that thee
Blind H noa tia ba turula
shall - strike he me when S(K;ar
yaii/a biniiij
then thou -him
Bumuiijii tia tvonta bay hi
struck • almost mc but I «
mord
ran
Keauanin tia biimba,
not mo had - struck,
kajM bum hi unti-lio
had - been 1 if here - only.
W I R A D U R E I.
YantiiMiiigan yaliuiinn bund-
when M — wo - two chil-
giihiy, bit niaki/aiia ig unain
dron used • to - fight - together
linla gam bainalugiri
they - two will light
Kuria btimd
do- not strike
Birabadiu yin ijaligiina
ho we - two
bnmalaiyiiriaWHgiri
fight - lo-niorrow - will
Widi/injga gitiiilu yaiiigulia
what - in tliey
biinialagiri
fight - will
Dani gunny girola
OlIuT
Giiogiiaiii yiygniiaivagiii
presently it - will - be lo-.norrow
Bmimiiili - ili/ii iiantitl
musket - with - 1 now
biruviliali
to • shoot
Hin >/nla yin biiinali
him tell him In -beat
Palli/ biinidli yindidyu
to - beat wish - 1
Karia iiarainyar yiyga
do - not bo
biimagin ni/ul i/aiii
will - beat thee else
Yantii giiin nal buvudgiri
when he mc shall - strike
diirii ijantii yin
spear then him
Bumai malay - ya nal yina
struck would - hnvc me there
yii ■ tu buidmavani
but • I ran • away
Wirai nuday - ya • nal biimiin
not would ■ have - me struck
yantu-tu wigundn yini
if I hod -dwelt here
131
When — and I were
children, we used to
light together.
They two will fight.
Do not strike.
He and I will fight to-
morrow.
When will they fight?
The day after to-mor-
row.
By-and-bye, to-morrow.
I am going to shoot with
a musket.
Tell him to beat him.
I wish to beat Patty.
Do not wait, lest you be
beaten.
When he strikes me,
spear him.
I should have been struck,
but 1 ran away.
1 should not have been
struck if I had re-
mained here.
: .
■
522
PHILOLOGY.
K A M I L A R A I.
Yurig bin up bunUdka
away thou • him strike - again
yakita
now
Wiijii Imn /xig biimlxi,
say him I had • struck
bumbii yini/d bi tia
had - struck then thou mo
Yari Iwn bunUa-kunirn
not him shall • strike - again
Bumviibia hi tia
let -strike thnu me
Bumrni/rifin lion l>ai)
pcrmiltinif- to -strike him I
Bumu nbiyi kora inm
let -strike not him
Bunwiihila Iri lia h»i
let - strike thou me him
Bunkiln ntira
be -striking -one -another ye
Wakith bitiitt/ hiiwa
once tliiui - him strike
Ma hiinliaka tia
do strike -nijain me
BuiiiinihUa liiiiiti) biitcil
let-strike Ihnu-him mny-striko
kai )ina tin
that he mc
Yakoai, butril koi Ixirun bup
mind ; may-beat that them 1
Kiiita kora hi, kxuraruii bin
afraid nut thou, not thee
hiiiitni
shall - l)oat
Kora-koii hi tia hunttui ?
why - not thou me strikes!
Biiwa biiiin)
strike thou him
Biinkia hiiiuii
strike-to-morrow thou-him
Bunkili-tin noa miira
fighting-from he ran-away
WI R A OUR EI.
Yana bi/idi/ibUiavatii
go strike - again - instontly
yin yantiil
him now
Yantii j/ln-th/n ijii/ga btinu
if him • I lK!cn struck,
gitol gila yindit tial piyfia
again then thou mo been
Karia yin biimtiui/iiiigii
not him to - strike - again
liumaimamhilgiiiin yanal
be- struck -|K!rinitted mo
yinilu
thou
Biimalmamhilsunana yiii-dyu
permitting - lo • strike him • I
Karia bii ni aim am hia
not let -strike
Biima/i yiti-dyii
to - strike him - 1
Buiiia/ainiJiata
be - striking - one - another
Bii ma yiinlnita yin null
strike once him
liiimalaliilija nal
strike - again me
Bumaliiiamhia yin yana nal
let • strike him that mc
tien bnmailiiliyaid-
by-him struck-accordingly-
ligiri
agnin-shalM)o
liiirayisa humnii yiygiilia-tii
away thal-n ,'v-beat them I
Karia fiirla, nirni ni/al
not (vi r, not ihc«
hiimtiii/inc isiiri
Uat-sh.'JI
Jliiinara /mga ti imhi virai I
strikest why me thou nut
Biinia inn
.strike him
Hin hii mill nil riinratn
him strike lo-morrow
Bii m ala yiili/ali bii nbii m Hid n i
fighting - from ran • away
Uo strike him again
now.
If I had struck him, thou
wouldst have struck
me.
IaA him not be struck
again.
Thou didst permit me tu
be struck.
I am permitting him to
strike.
Do not let him strike.
Let mc strike him.
Continue fighting.
Strike, him once.
Strike me again.
Pormil him to strike, that
I may be Iwateii by
him.
Stand aside, that I may
l)eat them.
Fear not, thou shall not
be Ix-'otcn.
Why dost thou not beat
nie .'
Strike him.
Strike him to-morrow.
lie ran away on account
of the fighting.
AUSTRALIA.
K A M I T. A R AI.
Kaitwiil irnoii hunkilikane
great that striking-instnimont
Onmi la noa Imtikilikdn
thfit « lie striker
Halt una buiiki/iku/ito
this hu striker
huiikiila
struck
Hii?ikii/e Intra unoa korc
figliter they that man
W I H A D U R E I.
Ilanain giira mitrnwal Thu is a great thing to
ont that greot
strike with.
mint/ainbul hiomUufiigu-
wliero-by to -strike
ilitnitii
by - means - of
nnmila tnltuin Imla
That is the striker.
that striker •
tid Hhui liillain \jiina mil hume
This is the striker that
me this striker that mc struck
struck me.
nanaingulia /mma/atain-galai/ They are the fighters,
they fighters
liala
Tinmniiigu-tx yanana
hattlc-(iclJ-lo I go
Wtiitii-ko/atj /xt)j Imiikihiitj ill-
depart-about-to 1 fighting-place
kolaff
towards
Buntimra fxtt/ yali-lriruy Imh Nal liiimani dijin
struck I this -by him
Bimkiti-tin Ixlp kiildn initi
fighting-froni I am hero
I am going to the field of
battle.
I was struck by him.
yinnlu I remain here because of
hero the fight.
Mtini ijeeii kajxiii/in hunkili-
sick we sutlering striking-
biruy
from
liali till loa hiiiitoaro Imnkvla
this me he stricken beat
WotiuT) ke bara buntoara?
where ♦ they struck
liiDitnarin Uira teti-
woun(lril-l)eiiig-by they dead-
kakiilii,
l;)ccamc
iiriiin Wo are ill through fight-
through ing.
Bit malapuli/nli-ili/ii
fighting - from I
vi)ii/a
rcmoin
/jji'i/ /lald yinni
sick • wc
biimuliiidyali
fighting
Hina viinjiir aihir ijdviht nal This is the wounded man
this wounded man who me who beat me.
bit me
tent
Til ga yagiiguliabumani? Where are those that
where those struck
Miiijar-milmiili baliitii
wounds - by died
ijfifnigiilia
those
Where are those
were struck f
They died of their
wounds.
Miiiaiiiig a nwim 1 Warai Miiii/atj ga-vi/ii mam 1 Tiilii What dost thou make
what thou makest spear wliat # thou makest s|X!ar A spear.
Hiitiloi'iiiumaf Halt nainlu me yiita! Yugii Who made this? Thii
who this made this - one who made this this -one ]x;rson.
524
I'll I I, O LOO Y.
K A M I I. A It A I.
fjiintn lid miiioii iimi'ntm
will) Mif^ alive will - iniiki<
rhiiili) niKXi Jill mil limit.
will) tliiit SUM in.iilc I
Jiliiivii-kn
.Iclioviili
Mariirojf naa umti
(;no(l lie did
yiittimin u'inlit kakitla, iimii
blind Sdinn wore, miide
mill /hIiiI/i imhilikiin
lit- I hem si'crs
Uiiuibuii/iii/i liorn, liti kixi nun
permil-lD-do not doiul lest lie
kiileiikii n
niny • l)o
Onuiiijiitii Inig "iii yanikai
nenrly-rnnde I this biul
Wiijiilii /mil uiiiauwil-k(>ii iiikhi
tell him miiy-iniike-llmt tliis
Warai Imij it inn /in
sprnr I niii-inukiiig
Miriii /nig upnliii
point I putting
XVoiii'ij kr iiiinii iiirilixiru
where • point • iilFiNed
Uiinitiiiiru kiiiii/Kl-/iiriiij
niude yesterday-lVom
W I K A I) It R R I.
nniiilii mil iiiiiniiifrunrii/ifiri Who will Have mo nlivof
who MIC idive will Have
lliiiiilii ijiiri /iiniiiif ! liiiduu Who inadi' the NuiiT Je-
who NUii made Jehovah liovah.
Jiii/ii 1:11111 iiiiinni /iiiiimf Ilo did good.
• he j;i«iil dill
lliilliir III Hill II L'liiii /ill II nil' pii.iri I lo mndo some who were
some lilind he madi'tosee blind to see.
liaiia ijiii inali iiialmamliiu,
not him to-du permit-to-do
/m/iiijfiiii i)iii i/iiin
will -die he elsi-
Ila/ain-i/ii wi/iii /niiiiH' >)ina
nearly - 1 tliis
Yalii gilt /iitnma/ii^ii
tell liim to-iimi.e
'I'lilu /mlii-lii iliiii/it/ni/ftiimiiiii
spear * I niii - lashioning
ISii/ii-lii gtiiiiiiiiir tiir/Htia
• 1 point shar|H'ning
Tufiiiiii ijdimlti gii?iiinitr-i/iirai
wiiero that (Miint . with
Unnntii i/iiltin ilini/n/Hilfinnin
that yesterday riifhioiied
Do not permit him to do
it, lest ho die.
I nearly siwilod thia.
Tull him to mako it.
I am making a spear.
I am making a point to
it.
Where is that which is
shnriH'iied ?
That which was made
yesterday.
Wuiila-koliiij /li niciiii !
where-towards thou goest
Sydiiey-kolitp
T\ifiit-tjiiri.'u i!tt-)iilti /lat/ualgu Whither arc you going?
where-towards # thou place - to
yiiiiiuM !
going
Si/t/iiri/-pur/!U Towards Sydney.
Whence did you como ?
I started from the camp.
Woiilii-Ziirinj /li mod? 'Ihi/i gimlit //iiijgtiH /luogv
where-from thoucamest whence tliou ploce-lVom earnest
Koii/oi/fin /mij iiwa lliirunt/i yiifiuni-itiiu
camp-lroni I came canip-lrom moved - 1
Wiijn /li Uinan uirnta? Yaimt la-m/it titin yanii<;i Dost thou wish to come ?
say thou approacliing come * thou hither to-come
ijiiii/i f
wishest
Wiifa/ii ttinan wwanvnl Yanui-nihi tain yanagiri?
say thou approaching wilt-come thou hither wilt • come
Will you come ?
AUSTRALIA.
fl25
K A M I r. A R A I.
W7//rt hi viiifa utcala f
nny Ihoudopnrting go
Wii/a hi Pdita uininiin
nay thou ilrpnrtiii^ wilt • go
IVii/ii Inli Hwalii
any wo • two go
Wuitd i/tin utviila wilimnti.
(lepnrting wo go huiiting-
to
IVoni'n j/een iiinihi I
which-woy wo go
niakai
this-way
WoMn kun t
which-woy indeed
Wiiinvil Ixtli hi Pakai
may-go wo-two thou I'akni
kaho
presently
Yanon, uwtinun bo ta Ixip
nut-so will-go alono * I
IVii/a bali hag waimnl
say wu - two I niuy - go
Ee, waila hali
yes, depart we - two
Wnila lag Ixira
departed • they
Yurii) huhi mcald
away you - two go
Uaralxikako Ixig waita
sleep - for I depart
Waitu koa hmj mimaii/i kora
depart that I detain not
Winla hara waita uwrnuti
some they away will . go
Waiia 'triinun 7ioa lia, waita
away go he when away
yaiija geen
then we
W I R A I) II R K I.
Yamu-ndu yanngi ijindi I
thou to • go wilt
Yama-nilu i/ana/;iri
lliou wilt -go
Uri/i yantigi, at yatuini-li
wo-lwo go, go-wo-lwo
Unrawigi gitini
go-hiiiiting wo
Dost thou wish to got
Wilt thou go ?
Let UH two go.
Let us go a hunting.
'Ibf-K-gurgii yuiKiffi giiini f
whcni-towiirds go we
IHiiii i/iiin
here - hy
whither- indrcd
Pdkiiiiiffu giiaiii ijiii(li-</i/u
I'ukui - to presently with - 1
yamaf'.i
to-accompnny
Wirai, giiyugdii-du yana-tu
no myself go -I
mi/igiri
niiidit panutida t/amiigi
thou with - mo accompany
gimli-dyu
wish- 1
/?a, tigunda-tu yamagiri
yes, with - thee - 1 will • go
Yaiidii UUn guingutia
gone • they
Hindu hida yana
thou ye - two go
Yurai wirigigit yanana-tu
going -I
Yanagiri miiii-dyii, karia
will - go necessarily ■ I, not
md niima
me detain
DiDdMii marag wari yanagi
some will - go
Yantu gin yanagiri, giani
when he will - go we
wdri yanagiri
surely will - go
132
\V'hich way shall we
go I
This way,
I don't know which way,
I want thee to go with
me tu i'akai presently.
No. I will go by my.
■elf.
I wish you to go with
mo.
Yes,l will go with you.
They arc gone.
Go away, you two.
I am going away to
sleep,
I must go, do not detain
me.
Some of them will go.
When he goes, we will
go-
k^
# 1^
*.
&2R
pii I i.o i.oa Y.
KAMI I. A It A I.
Wonta jmnul kuknln iiirA
whcn^ lun wn* vomu
(l(/(//rt iiHra Imf
Ihi'n ye when
Uirii/it/a iiiHl /hi, iiiiniinirini
guiii^ • una lio no, iiicl
i/iiii/n /mil iiini
llirn liiiii lie
\\'i)/ii /n iiM'ti/^inii knii/iiii-
soy lliDii wrnl • lii.ilay camii-
koliiiif
lowfirds
Keitiiiii kiim/iii /mi) u-nilit-
no |()-i)K>rriiw I ili'|mrl-|io.
'iiiikiii
lii-iiKiiniw
Ku/k> ii'iiilii 'nil linn /mn
prrspully nwjiy sliiill • gn I
Kiirikiii-knrikiii tii knliiii
(|iil('k - ({iiick * is
/( ii'dlikiijii il-kfdii 11, ken leaia ii
III ■ tio jnii-towiirds, not
tri/ii ijko
rclurnin;,'- l'<r
Pilii/'Hiiijiu /li till /ki,
glad • iiiailc- linil llimi ini' il'
kf'iiinii iinii/ii /huj inijxi
nut thru 1 guiR> ■ liitd
mild /ill) mi nun II !
say I shall . f,'(i
Waninn/ii/a tin Si/i//iii/-kii/iiii
loi . jro mi) lowurda
Wamn >i/ii mi n /ninug
let -go -will I-lhee
Keatcarati wul /li inrninm
not thou xhall - go
Yiiiioa niiiiifi kora
desist go not
Yari /li 'wniiini, U'lieitknii
not thou shalt • go, s|H:ar-iiiay
koa /nil koirko /mra
,lcst Ihcc man they
W I It A II r It K I.
'l\iili fiiiru yiiii i/aiifii-iutit
wlii'ro lun whiui-llioii
/iiiofie /
I'anx'st
Yiiiilii fiiiiii i/niiiiiii/ii/iiiii
when he wai* • walking
/lirii/i/iiiiimf ijiii uiiiii
mrt him ho
Itniiiit-iii/ii i)iiniiii:ii i/iiiiii-
Ihciii eam|>-tc) went-
ijiiiin f
Ill-day
11 1/(1* /hiIii-Ih null Ilium-
no • I go - to-
mtiiiiinmiii iiiiniiiiin/ j/iulil
iiiiirrow nhnll iiioniing I
'Ih/iilit/iiii-lii iiiiri ijiiiiiii;iri
Mimn ■ I shnll - go
Iiii/ilinj /hi/ii iiiiiiliii)iili/iil(t
(■nay • nIiiiI ■ iilacc • In
i/finiifii, teirai /'in/ im/i/dij
III -go not indri'd I'aity
/iiiiif!ii/ii/ii;i
lii-oiimo
Yd III II- mill mil iinniiniHiii,
il'-lhiiii mo hadst • liivi'd
viidi iiid/dii fii/ii-td
mil should • linvo Ihon - 1
1/uiiuiii
gone
Yiima-tii f!iiiiai;iii /hi f
I shall -gii •
Si/i/iiei/-uu ijiimiiiidiii/iid iidl
to l(.'l-gii mo
Ydiidviam/iil^iii iii/dl-tii
lol -go- will Ihco-I
Wirumln /,ial iiiiii i/iiiiiii:iri
niit-lhiiu indood shall -go
Kuriu i/iiiiii
not go
Kdiiii i/diiit, t.iiri<iiri in/ril
nut go ttill-siionr thee
itari ijiriiii-nlf-iri ffi/iri^al-
pass - through ntcn •
galaiidi
by
What limo wni it when
you came ?
A* ho wn* wolking he
met him.
llnvo you iHi'n to thn
<'ani|i this morning f
No, but I shnll go to-
morrow morning.
ny-nn l-hyo I ihnll go,
Il is oasy III go to iht'
jail, liiit not NO onay
to get out again.
If thou hadst lovrd me,
I should not have
gone.
Bhnll I got
Ix'l me go to Sydney.
I will permit thee to go.
Thou shall not go.
Do not go.
Do not go, lest you
should be speared by
the men.
.
•,*
A U 8 T R A I, I A.
fl27
K A M I I. A It A I. Win A l> II It i; I
Vwulit iKKi i/itiili lit jxiiiiil Im (liiiii liimur i/iinlii iiirrt iiriiii- ll« rnrnci wlii'ri tlio aun
cnmi- Ik' IIS • HUH • liu i^iiiiii! when itiiii solliiij; • wns Nutting.
juJiti) kiilrnn H'lui
linking vrna wiix
Kratvariiit iitxt uhi/m ywiti Winii fiiiin ln/ouiiiii i/milu lli; hail imt rcmii! when
nut he hml ■ romo nii n<it he hail • iiiini' when thu Hiin wuh iii'lting.
la piniol tm jmlng kiilenn i/iiri iiniin
• Hiin • HJnking wiih sun piissi'd ■ llinuii^h
'IHiidii II lli
is • broken thin
Tiir.liinia viii
hrdki'H • nmilo this
Haiito II lli liir-hii i/ii /
whi) it briiki'ii • imulo
Wiiri, liir.liiiliiikiin kmi
mind, hrokiMi • shoulil • bo U'st
sjMii/e
spailo
Willi, liir-hinjiiikiin kim.
iniiul, bnikrn - inako - may lest
hi V iiiMi ajKti/e
thou that
Wiiri, liir-hii rfnkiin kixi.
mind, broken • innkc -may b-st
hi II iiiki sjHiile ijiili kiilailii
thdii that that slick'With
'nii-hiiiinpii hiiiiiliii, mi nil II
broken - made - Imd 1 • if what
hniitiu ijaii/ii ham Ma!
done then they mo
Mill nil hill I II Irif
what dning thou
Miniiij /hi hin?
what thee
Miiiuij hiiiiiin pail/a hi/oaf
what will -do then thee - ho
Miinii) hiiliko kef
what to - do
Miniii) hiiti-kol*iij hnintoa
what to-do - for ^ho
■iiwiiniin
will - go
Jllllil lillilizilll /nl/ll
Ibis broken •
Hii/i Imniiiiiniiii
this broken ■ made
H (I mill f)in liiiiiL'iiiiii^
who it broken - made
Hiiiiii, kiiia Imniiiiuiri
do • not, Hjiade broken ■ will ■ \to
This is broken.
This is broken (by some
one).
Who broke it I
Take care! the spade-
will be broken.
Yii 'uiiiganuilfiiri i/indii
broken - make • will thon
i/iinui kiiiii
spnde
Yii kniii i/iiijtii liiiiisiiiiiiiil-
spade broken •make.
fiiii iimiliiiiiliiriilii
will stick • with
Yiiiilii-tii i)iii^a /iiiiif:iiiiir,
if • I had broken - made
miiii/iila iial ijaiii'iulia
what . in mu they
ijiufia f
Ix'on
Miiii/aij irii-nilii mnliiiniiiiiaf
what # thou doing
Wiiliiuij ijttii/a ha ni/iaiilal
how is to • thee
Wiili/inj fniin vi/al ijiiiaiii?
wliat ho to . theo will . bo
Witli/inj muritnaii ijiijgi !
what good - lor to- bo
Miniiiini-it gii mi yanaguiiana
what - for she is - going
viai
'J'ake care, lest you
break lliut spado.
Take care, lest you
break that spade with
tlie stick.
If I had broken it, what
wouUI Ihoy have done
to me?
What art thou doing '
Wliat is the matter with
thee f
What will he do to you !
Of what use is it '
For what is she going ?
528
PHILOLOGY.
K A M I L A R A I.
NanoH boiintoa hiytiylxii
will - SCO she father
bonnoiin lia
her
liti ba-butitnta lion
dend bo - let him
'liti hvgula Utn
dend mnke - to - be him
Tcti Imi-Ihj nliiiiii n baninj
dead to-be-permit-will I-tbcc
2\'ti-bu }ju mt n lianinj
dead-to-be-caiisp-will I-thec
Miiunj hauwil kt>ii Ixili Ixni
what may-do that we-two him
Yanni, teli-Uakini koa noa
desist dcad-may-be lest he
Teti-buriliun liay
dead-to-be-made-myself- I
Uanlo viyan 7
who speaks
na/iko, ya/i-taro
this tliis-they
Wif/axwi/ lii tin yakoai Ixira
may-tell thoi- mc how they
lia irii/a bin
spoke thee
77a Iti/nnj u-ii/d?
thou him told
/?»« (i/iinj uii/alin yoy
who there lalkitif; yonder
Ha mil/ l/i ifiytiH f
whom thou ti-llest
Emolip? Hal :? Barun
me us - two thee
Korekolxi tvii/cla In tia
man-of speak thou lo-mc
WIRADUREI.
Baliiii gup j/iigigu
father her to -see
Baluia ijin hart; balumambia
die hiin let |icrmit-to-dic
ijiii
him
Hin Imliiliitiiia
him dciul- strike
Ni/<i/lu Ixi/Ktmiml/i/gin
thee-l to-die.pormit-will
Buyiihiri Imlutjgi nyat-tu
to - die thee - 1
Wiilyii la U piidn mali
what we-two to-him to-do
Ktiria wilai nuda liahnjifiri
not will - die
lii/i ynin
'.,!>. else
Biiluliiiiiihjulyih.t patlu
dead-struck-myself I
namlii yara 1
who s[M;aks
Yugu-la ; yugii-gulia
this these
Xyal-tii ijinili viilyinjur
thee I wish how
yinyiil-miliii) yi:
thcc-to spoke (subin.Mey)
Yuma la-vilu ijiii ye ?
* thou him told
Hu>i/lii snra yiilgiimniii gila
who talking there
Hainitiila ga-iiilii yara?
to- whom • thou speakest
ndnuiida 1 Ihiligxngn !
to - me to - us - two
Hanoiiiguliala
to - them
nat.unila yiild giayga
to - me speak tongue - in
viaiiigii
native - of
To see her father.
Let him die.
Cause him to die.
1 will permit thee to die.
I will make you to die.
What shall thou and I
do to liim ?
Let him alone, lest he
die.
I have killed myself.
Who speaks ?
This one does ; these do.
I wish thee to tell me
how they spoke to
thee.
Didst thou tell him I
Who is talking there T
To whom dost Ihou
spi ak f
To me? To us two?
To them.
S|)cak to me in the na-
tive language.
AUSTRALIA.
529
i
y
K A M I I, A R A I.
Wiyitika Id tia; kuru tia
tell-ngiiin thou mc slowly mo
ivii/<ila
speak
K(i/>f), kalx), irlijmriijali
presently, presently, tnlk-talk
kon Uiij
thnt I
IVomii /tag wii/irnirn irtii
how I shull ■ sny this
yitera
nniHO
Wiknii iitti Itilod, u-iijii ?
when thcc-he loUl
Wii/nii iHiiit'ir) ijaiokiliko
tell I -thee to -arise
}Vii/iiii')n hiiiiiu hi,
shiill-tell thou-him when
ivii/iinu/i yniyii tia
sImlUidll then me
W I R \ D U R E I.
Nat yahdvbja; indyaif yala Tell mo agnin.
mo tell • agnin gently sixjak slowly.
Speak
Mahulya, vxahvbja, yana-tu Stay, stay, that I tnay
stop stop that I have a little conversa-
biilmi yciltt)jiili/nl tion.
little eonvi'rsiilinn
Miiiyaij gara yiiin ijiii'igit What is the name of this?
what name of. this
WiilyiDji'iisii giii/i nyal ye ? When did he toll Ihcc?
«hcn he thee told
nhiyal /xirinjgi tindii yara
thee to - rise I tell
Nyiil-tii /laratnhtiyaid
thee-I lo-rise-i'omniand
Ihuilii-iiilit iiUi ytilgiri
when -them liim shalt-tell
viiKiyali-ilyii
to -know- 1
I tell thee to arise.
I command thee to arise.
When you toll him, let
mo know.
Pdtiii mli koiivonto
drops this rain
KtJio kn ta tiirnnun yaiya
presently will-spear then
bin
fhee
Bdlkd-kaJm noa fmtikiinkafia
hat'k • on ho lioast - on
Kcntfui kolitt) hiitj vntdn
not about I give
niikih'i ha/i inioa
givo-earh-othcr we-two that
Korti-kod napiil wciin knre-
why - not woman go man-
kai ?
with
Kiilhitlu yiiliara
water drops
Giiaiii ijitiyiil turi<;iri
presently thee will - spear
It rains.
By-and-ljve you will b<,'
speared.
Birnm iranuniim isuiHKinya He is on horseback,
back-on horse-of he sits
Wiiiii Uda-lii tjiiifgi wina- 1 am not about to give.
not * 1 to-givo am-
yana
thinking
Hidi ytiyiktffi
we - two give • enoh • other
Wiirgii inniii-dya wirai
why man - with not
iiiai-^irlKiij yamiigi 7
women accompany
133
Let us two exchange.
Why do not the women
go with the men ?
f
VH'%>'
630
K A M I I- A R A I.
Y<i>io(i, yiriyiri ka kc
desist siicrcil
Piti'l korirn fniii shoe-tin
glail not I Irom
Pnle i)'iiri .koliii
voices siriinyo-of
Uliiinrinlin /it koliin iriitixi-
wlint-lVom lliou lliiiiUrst tlial-
/hi
(Viiiii
Kodtlii/d /mil Mi /nil) /nikapa
Wii-'-lhinkin}' 1 ilcud I slioiild-bc
Tlriip Ihiij kiituii
nwnke 1 iim
Tiiaii /jinjiila Ikin, l>oii ijkii/i
nwiiko m.-ikc-to-bc liiiri nriso
kon nfxi
tli.-it ho
Kt,iiin !ii II iii [picliircj iiaki/iko
pretty this to -see
Tlii/ia lio III (kiij tfii/iiini/i
surely 1 will-s|K'iik
tiilua
slrnij^ht
Miiiariiilin /li lia hrikii
what - rrotn thou inn angry-
l)injnn ?
makest-to-Ix'
Uliiinriij/in Id tin Imka kiitaii ?
what-froin thriu inoan;;ry art
Kiiiniiliilti >ioti Jehova-ko
finished he Jehovah
yantin-liirnt) umuii-lrintij
all - from work - I'roni
Kniiirii wii/dlfitn /xii) itattxi
yes !s|>oke-to-inysi'ir I myself
'in
alone
P II I LO LOO Y.
W 1 U A D U R E 1.
I1aiuif;u miiiynmliul
that -for tiling
yiriifiiimlxiij
sacred
Wirai-i/yii /;<it(ipgilitiya
not -I am -glad
Uisiiniilar-diiriii
shoe • with
Iltmj piiollmg
toiifiiio other
Miiiydij-iiidii (Hill u-iiiayiuiu
what - thou of- that thinkiim
Because it is n sacred, a
forbidden thing.
I am not pleased with
tlic shoe.
A foreign language.
What dost thou think
about that?
Diulii viiiiiyatiHn iHiluni I thought 1 shoir . have
I thought - to - myself die died.
■iiiiiliii)-iiilyu
should • I
Mil'/i tiiir'iiia I am awake.
eycs-iny stand
Jiiirnnibuiiid ijiii /mnii/giuii
awake-strike him lo-ariso
Wake him, that ho may
get up.
Iliiiii daiiilar [picture] ijiigigu
this pretty to -see
Ihiilii iiari kiiri yii/airi
I truly will-spenk
Ikih ijiin
indeed
Wargii-tiilu »al tiilid /iiujiim-
why - thou me angry niakest-
hira ?
to-l)e
Wargii /mlit-tiflii-titiilni pitiyii ?
why ♦ thou-me angry art
Jiivii-flii giiiiliini miihji'lyiili-
.lehovali censed working-from-
giig liiantlml
his all
Yii/ii-/ii ydliligvnnni
truly I was-s|<cakiiig-lci-inyself
This is a pretty picture
to l(X)k at.
I shall certainly speak
the truth.
Why dost thou enrage
Why art thou angry
with me?
Jeliovah rested from all
his work.
Yes, I was talking to
mvself.
*■#•«•■
'^•. -i.
A U S T R A t, I A.
531
K A M I I, A n A I. W I R A D U .1 E I.
Nauwa wiro>>an /loitntoa tia Hiiga yiuitu na vdl
look, follows she mo look when she me
bii gH/>affiiliii/gii}iagiri
Look while she is fol-
lowing mc.
follow-constantly- will
Ua/i ijinjilagiitiana We two nre looking at
we-twoarc-lofiking-nt-oiieh-other cnch other.
rhidii yaijit/i/i/iit huonaiji- I saw myself in the niir-
I saw • myself reflecting- ror.
(hjUiiUja
thiiig-in
Wiifgii Ihi gc ijiii himiiH ? VVhy was he Ixiatcn ?
why him stnii'k
ritaidgit ijii! /ti/iii yigiuiagi Because he is always
that - for he angry to - he angry.
tiirur
always
Kaiia i/ala nidlii
not that. way do
nuniDnidi/a-li ni/ii.
lend mi' that
Hiniiiinin Ixilit na
lent it
ridi/ii iiiaiii giio/gH
1 man another -to
yunttmini
lent
riuiiiaiya bin ani wonto hi Hiini mu/aij-n/ii/uiida, ivirai I would have given it to
ottered I that but thou gave would - to thee not tlicc, hut thou wouldst
Uikeaicai mdivpa iidi-i/aiulu linnime
not wouldst -take but thou didst - lake
Tunut) ittii Tiirheij kolxi niiniu-d/dij Tdrkci/- giilm
this stone " of
Hina lidla Tidiccii • gdit
this * of
HaldiKUi rial kaniiiia
llamc me burns
while
Ndkiinn liali
look-at-each-other wc-two
Niikilinii hdij ijalod, lio
snw-myself I myself alone
Nakilitji/a
seeing-place-in
MinariijttH lion Inuikala 7
what-from him struck
Knia iiod hirka buritj
because he angry always
IJanti hiui koia
so do not
Miimlrila Hn yiiloa
lend mo that
Mumbiioara >im "ni
lent it that
Mumhm Ixiij taidi ktm
lent i another
stone this " of
Korc iJiii Turkey ■ kid
man this of
Tiriko tia vina
red m(' burns
Mdkoro ijiiifd tid,i)dt.tni karai, Thiijga ii giii/d, Imnaij dibin Give me fish, dcsh.
Do not do so.
Lend that to me.
It is lent.
1 have lent it to another
person.
not take it.
This is a stone of Tur-
key.
This is a Turk.
The (lame burns me.
fish give me and llosh
pitun tibin ^iitun kokoiii
and bird and water
taiiicU konlniii, pitdiiiii/
may -cat that I may -drink
give inc fish, flesh, bird,
kii/iiii - till yaiiii - III td/giii,
water -and, that - 1 will -cat
vidi/dlgiri - bii
will - drink - and
fowl, and water, that
I may cat and drink.
kmi buy
that I
Md tdiiira I'liti ■ I. id
this
.if
Kidiidi/d gii/bir yiiudii tiilit
bc'An some of this eat
Eat some of this,
THE
LANGUAGES OF NOKTIIWESTEIIN AMERICX.
The langungn.s of tlio tribes west of tlio Rocky Mountnins mny Ix" divided into two
clnssps, which diU'cr very strikingly in llieir vocid cleinents nnd pronunciation. These
classes mny l)e denominated the northern and southern, the latter lieirii,' found chiefly
south of the Cohnnliin, and the former, with one or two exceptions, on the north of that
river. To the northern belong the Tahkali-l'mqun, the Stdish, the Tshinuk, and the
lakon languages, with all on the " Northwest Coast" of which we have any knowledge.
The southern division comprehends the .Sahaptiu, the Shoshoni, the Kalapuya, Saste,
Lutuami, and all the Caliliirnian idioms, so liir as w<' are acquainted with them. Those
of the norlliern class are remarkable for their extraordinary harshness, which in some is
so great as almost to surpass Ixlief. The C'hinooks, C'hikailish, and Killamuks, appear
actually to labor in speaking, — an illusion which proceeds, no donbt, fiom the ollect
produced on th(^ car of the listener by the harsh elements with which liicir languages
abound, as well as by the generally rough and dissonant style of pronunciation. The /
is, in these tongues, a somewhat deeper guttural than the Spanish ./"''''• The a is an
extraordinary sound, resembling the hawking noise produced by an ellfirt to expj'l phlegm
from the throat. A similar element (as we are assured on good authority) in the
Quio'huan or Peruvian language, is called by the Spanish grammarians the cc aistii-
fiitc/iis, and is com|)ared to the somid made in cracking nuts with the teeth, — from which,
of course, we can only iiiler its extreme harshness, 7'/./ is a combination ntleii'd by
forcing out the breath at the side of llie mouth, iKlween the tongue and the palate. The
vocabularies, and the remarks upon them, will exhibit some otlier peculiarities of these
languages. They are all indistinct as well as har>h. The same tientent in the Tshinidi
nnd other tongues is heard at one time as a *', at another as a h, and again as an iii, —
the latter being jn'obably the most accurate ifpresentalion. So the ii and r/arc in several
imdisliiiguishable, and wc were constantly in doubt whelher certain short vowels shoidd
be written or omilled.
'I'be southern l.iM.^uages are, on the other hand, no less distinguished for solhiess and
harmonv. The Liultmals are lliund in two or three, into which tliey seem to have been
introduced by communication with the northern tribes. Tin? rest want this class of
letters, anrl have, in their place, the labial/, the liquid /■, nnd the nasal ;;, nil of which
?
034
PHILOLOGY.
are unknown in the Cornier. Difficult combinations of consonants rarely occur, and the
many vowels make th? pronunciation clear and sonorous. There is, however, n gcxid
deal of variety in this respect, some of the lanj^uagcs, as the Lutuami, Sastc, and
I'alnilinik, being smooth and agreeable to the ear, while the Shoshoni and Kahipuya,
though sol^, arc na.sal and indistinct.
In their grammatical characteristics, so far as these were determined, the languages of
Oregon belong to the same class as the other obnriginal idioms of America. An exu-
berance of inflections, oiid a great aptitude for coiiipnsilion, is every where apparent.
Man}' of the forms are precisely the same as those which occur in the languages of the
eastern and southern triln'S of our continent. The system of " transitions," or, in other
words, the principle of expressing the pronouns, both of the subject and the object, by on
inflection of the verb, is followed by all. In like manner, those modifications of an idea
which in other languages arc expressed by separate words, are in these denoted by
aflixcs and inflections. The facility with which any other purl of speech may Ix) trans-
formed to a verb is no less remarkable.
The distinction made in some of the eastern tongues Irctween the names of animate and
inanimate objects has not l)een found to exist in the Oregon languages. The missionaries
had not met with it in any instance.
The dual of the pronoun is found in the Tshinuk and Waiilatpu, but not in the
Sahaptin, Selish, or Kalnpuya. The double plural of the first person (including and ex-
cluding the person addressed), is also found in the Tshinuk. In the Sahaptin it occurs,
not in the pronoun itself, but in a very singular class of words, termed by the mission-
aries " declinable conjunctions," — words whi<'h do the office of conjunctions, but only in
connexion with verbs, and are varied for number and |K'rson.
A very simple, and what might, with some propriety, Ix; termed a natural method of
forming the plural, prevails in many of these languages. It is by a r('|ietition of the first
syllable, or n portion of it, sometimes with a slight change of the vowel ; as, llUius,
lather, in Selish, p\. /ii/(Uiits ; tana, ear, \i\. titiilaiia ; kclii;, hand, \i\. kilkeli^ ; skal.
taiiti/.o, man, pi. skiilkultamiy.o. So in the Sahaptin, jritiii, girl, pi. pijiitin ; and in
Netela, ^•l^;, house, \t\. kikit^-. In most of these languages, the ndjectivi- has also its
plural, which is generally formed in the same way as that of the substantive, but is
sometimes very irregular.
1. THE TAHKAI.I.UMKWA FAMILY.
(A. Tiy.kvli. B. Tliitskanai [a. Tldtshmai ,• b. Kiriifyidkua.'\ C. (hiikua.)
The words of the Tahkali language were furnished by Mr. A. Anderson, of the
Hudson's Bay Company, who had been liir several years in charge of a trading post in
New Caledonia. Their general correctness may be relied upon, but the minor shades oC
sound are probably not always distinguished. A few terms have been added (in paren-
theses), from the Appendix to Harmon's .lournal of Travels in the Interior of North
America, a work of the l)est authority on this subject. The words of the Tlatskanai
and I'mkwa were obtained from individuals of those tribes.
The languages of this family belong to what we have called the northern division, and
are as remarkable as the rest for the harshness of their sounds. The Umkwa forms a
partial exception, being much softer than the others, with some peculiar elements, os the
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
535
p nnd r. This diflcrcnco may have arisen from the intercourse of the Umkwa people
with tl,o neighbouring trilx'S of the southern division.
The little that is known of the grammatical characteristics of those three languages
serves to confirm the opinion of their affinity, deduced from a comparison of the vocabu-
laries. In all three, Ui is the word for hand. In the first «V« is, my hand, and «V«,
thy hand. In the second the forms are precisely the same. In the third, jVd is my
hand, and iianlu, thy hand. Other points of resemblance, of a similar kind, will be
observed in the vocabularies.
9. K I TUN A II A.
(D. Kitunii/.a.)
These words were obtained from a ('ree (or Knislrneaii) Indian, who had been much
with the Kilunaha, or (.'oulanies, and spoke their language with fluency. Full reliance,
however, can never be placed upon information respecting n language derived from any
[Kjrson to whom it is not the native tongue, — at least as regards its mii\ute peculiarities.
3. TSIHAIM.BEMSH FAMILY.
(E. QupnipuiiKj. F. S(7<s' [(;. Kiilesjiclin ; d. Tlsc Kndsitlin ; e. S/.oauil/./j>i.]
G. S/cilsiii^. H. Piskuiiiis. I. Sktivle. J. 7i:/.ai/ig [f. Ts/iiilii^ ; g. Kwainnt/.l ;
h. KwcmiiwityJ.'l K. Kmirlilsk, L. Nsiel^uiclis.)
All these vocabularies (with the exception of the Skwale, which was received from an
interpreter) were obtained from natives of the respective; tril)cs, generally under favour-
able circumstances. For the Scliii, Skitsuish, and Piskwaus, .vc are indebted to the
kindness of Messrs. Walker and Eels, missionaries of the American Board at Tshania-
kain, near the Spokan lliver. It wn' :ii, ugh the interpretation of these grntlcmen, and
the explanations which their knowledge ol the Selish enabled them to give, that the words
of nil three languages, nnd the numerous sentences in the Relish illustrative of the gram-
malieal peculiarities of that tongue, were correctly written.
The languages of this Ihniily are all harsh, guttural, and indistinct. It is to the latter
(pialily that many of the variations in the vocabularies are owing. In other cases, these
proceed from dialectical dill'erenies, almost every clan or sept in a tribe having some
peculiarity of pronunciation. In the Selish, three dialects have been noted, and more
might have iK'cn given, had it not Ix-en considered superfluous. These three are first,
the Kullespelm, spoken by a tribe who live upon a river and alxmt a lake known by that
name ; — they are called by the Canadians PeniloirillcSy which has been corrupted to
Ponderays; secondly, that of the pro[)er Selish, or Flathcads, as they are called, and^f
the Si)okan Indians ; and that of the Soaiatlpi, Okinakain, and other tribes upon the
Coluudiin.
Of the Tsihailish, also, three dialects are given, which diller considerably from one
another. The (iuaiantl reside upon a river of the same name, north of the Tsihailish (or
636
PHILOLOGY.
Chikailish) proper, and (he KwenaiwitI, in like manner, are north of the KwaiantI, not
far from the entrance to the Straits of Kuca.
Atorc attention was given to the grammatical |KM:uliaritie8 of this extensive lamily of
languages, than to those of any other, and the result was to place the affinities which
prevail between them in a much clearer light than cuuld have been ctrccted by the more
comparison of words. This will appear from the following table of pronominal affixes,
in several of the most dissimilar idioms :
t^■itu)^
(situ/.
house
tUfitii/.
hitsi/ii/.
my house
atttplii/L*
antsilii/*
thy house
tjlltll/.S
tSltll/.S
his house
kuy.t^ituy^s
kiielsitii/s
our house
t^itii/.nmp
tsilii/.nnip
your house
t^iitiiy.s
IIIIAILItll.
tsiUii/.s
NaiETSIIAWUS,
their house
M<i
siirniiuen
house
Wnti/.n(
to tis>ie?tthnn
my house
t»m
txsvenittven
thy house
te)i.<i^s
tdsnriiaurnns
his house
te^ti^l^ity^l
l(tstieiiaurtiini/il
our house
te/M^i/irp
tasiie/iau'fllt
your house
tc/.ii^s
tasiiciiavenus
their bouse
It is evident that the t which commencrs the word in the Inst two is not an integral
part of the pronoun : it may therefore be omitted in the comporisnn. The affixes will
then be as follows :
SHUSIIWAP.
SKLISII.
T8IIIAILISH.
NsirrsiiAWus.
n —
in —
unit —
nn —
my
a» (or (() —
an (or «) —
u —
i —
thy
.V
— s
— s
— ns
his
ku/. —
kite —
— li-it/l
— int/l
our
— vmp
— timp
— ilrrp
— hi
your
— s
— s
— s
— IIS
their
The N'sietsbawus did'crs more widely, in its vocabulary, from what may 1x3 called the
general type of the family, Ibnn any of the others. One of the most striking |)oints of
diirerciicc is its rijoition of all the liiliial articulations. Sometimes it adopts peculiar
words, insicad nf those wbirh oontiiin llicsc nliincnls ; but freipiently it supplies the place
of m or A by a u\ and that of/j by an /(, as in ilic following examples :
* The an tecomes a before a consonant ; as, astit/.lam, thy canoe.
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
537
TIIHAILIIH, iXWALE, ITO.
NIICTBHAWUI.
minuin
nuwnn
son
mos
t/.la-vot
lUco
miiqsnn
u-iiqsnn
nose
IKiiilnlnkam
lui>itf.lal^iwot
spring
jxinsiUiitf^i
iMnsiiMt^i
winter
tOmfiy.
tawef.
earth
mulsiits
tmvfitsai
snake
nikUf.1
anitvat)i.l
wc
ptuiult^s
t/.la-h(intfi»
ten
Tlio f()llowin;j; lire the most importiint grnnimiiticnl peculiarities of tlie Selish tongue,
from whicli it is probable that the other huiguuges of tliis family do not materially
differ :
1. 'I'here ire various modes of forming the plural. Thnt which may be termed the
regular method, is by prefixing the syllable iil/l, — or as it is sometimes pronounced,
mit// or lit/./; MM, hit^/ds, bmlhcr, pi. iil/.llMl(;lds ; tio/.oiin/Jis, will', pi. iit/liiof.nno/Ms.
Anolliir rommiiM mode, which has been already mentioned, is by the duplication of the
first part of the word, with sometimes u change of the vowel ; os, utt/.t('ilt, infant, pi.
va/.u\t/.lnll ; stiiiiikiHilt, (laughter, pi. stiimlu iiikaalt ; stU/.lam, canoe, pi. stit/Mit/Mni.
Sometimes the plural is (iirnied ap|inrently aHer this principle, but in a very irregular
fashion; as ^■iii(/iiiii, girl, pi. ^itiiritinii; sldkiinfi/iisttui, eye, pi. skikintt/MiUii,i:liistan;
titoil, boy, pi. Iiloif. In some cases the plural is a peculiar word, entirely dillercnl from
the singular; as, sinuiiiuii, woman, pi. jiel/.lpil/lkui, jirolmbly derived I'rom jwl/./ki, the
word for woman in Kitima/a; but sut/isii/iidam, is sometimes used. Some nouns have
a double plural, ns, i/liiin out, K-hii-l', ]^i. iit//i/iliimi/.om. All these variations must,
of course, be larned by pmclicf, as they depend upon no general principles.
2. The plurals of .iilj< ciives nn" formed in the same way as those of nouns; as, iaidt,
strong, pi. lU/liaim; uiest, nmWi^ y,\. /ns/aest ; tiii(ii\,hat\, \)\. titmiiii. liut there arc
several which have ihe plural .ntirely dillerent from the singular; ,\s, kviitiinl, ^rcaX,
f\. j)iislji./ft ; k'liii-diviini, small, pi. tsitsimet,
i. A diminutive of some words is formed in idl ; as, skokosuii, boy or sun, s/cokosiui/t,
IMe boy; stumt^dd, daughter, siumtfjddll, little daughter, (^'uiitum, girl, has ^epitirm
for its diminutive.
No cases have been distinguished in the languoge.
4. The personal pronouns are —
koida, I
annul or dndi, thou
tsaiut/.lls, \u)
kaetipild, we
»pilnpstump, ye
tsuniU/./ts, they
NVither the dual nor the exclusive plural has been found to exist in the language. To
express " I and thou," a speaker would say kaoutmrm, lit. we-thou. So " I and .lohn''
would l)c kafii-Juh/i, we-.lohn. K<ic or ka,'H is nn abbreviated Ibrm of the first person
plural, used as a prolix.
135
538
PHILOLOGY.
8. Thn ponsrssivp nflixps hiivo bf'rn iilo'ncly ^ivon. The rollowing PXnmplos will ahow
the milliner in which they iirr Juinrcl with nniuiH, ll will tiv oliaorvcil that tho not' the
first ami socund ihtsoms is (Ircipiu'd Ix'fort' iin s:
Ifiiiit or /(!««, fiithcr
in/niiii, my CiUliiT
lui/iiiiii, thy ruthiT
/nulls, lii.s liillitr
kititiHiii, our liithrr
liiniKimji, ymir rntlicr
/(iiiitus, their liilher
, /n/iuiii, fnlhors
iii/iiliiiiii, my PnlhiTS
iin/ii/iiiiii, thy liith'TS
/ii/iiiiiix, his llithers
/.III /(I /mi II, our Ihlhcrs
III /nil II II III l>, your liithers
/n/niiiins, their tiilhers
sttt/lim, eiiniio
istil/iiim, my eiinoc
<islif//iiiii, lliy oiiiiiK'
slit/./iiiiis, his oiinui'
k<irslit//um, our cnmio
ililf/iniip (irrej;.), ymir cntioo
stii///iii/is, their eiiniH!
pi. .tlil//lif//iiiii, ennooa
ii,lil/llil/liiii, my eiUKx-s
imlil/ lilt //mil, thy eiiiioos
ilil/llilfliims, his cniioes
liaislilf/lttf./iim, our onnocs
si it /It'll //limp, your eniux's
slit/lliit//'iiiis, lh( ir ciiiuios
The tliiril |xrsiiii pliiriil, it will 1k' seen, (lillirs iVdm the thinl person sinjinlnr, not in
the allix, luit in the (lupliciition ol" the vowel of the suhsliiiilive. 'I'his peeuliitrily runs
thriiu;ih the whole lnii|j:un);e, (mil will lie ohservoil in ih iiijii)j;iition ol'ihe verb.
When III/./ lit Hill//, is used to lorni tho phirni of n word, it is prefixed to these pro-
nniins i lis, /;iilrlii, brother, inkiit^/^i, my hrolher, iil/liiiKiili,/ii, my hrolhiTs ; iin/diii)/,
wile, iit/lhiidin/Diin/ , our wives.
(I. liiii sigiiities tlm; i-iiii (or jv/j), //,v( tind it/In, l/iat, neoordini; to the distnnco of
tiie ohjeet to wliiili lliey relir. (,'iui may li.ive the tense si),'ns u (or o) and mn lM>forc
it ; as, in answer to the i|iiestion, who did it f a unlive would say, M-('(<i(, that miiu did;
who will ^'o ' alls, iiin-i^iiii, llint one will.
(^'iiil is the inlerroijalive who? In the plural it makes i;iniaiet? Stfm sijjnilies what '
7. The exact iiiiiiilier of lenses and modes in Welish is not yet deieriiiined. Past time
is expressed by prefixing ii (or e) and l//iim, the llirmer liiivini; ii general si^iiifiealion,
the latter relerrini! to an action as just completed. Then; are also two future sii,'iis, m (or
mn) and iinin, the first expressing simple futurity, and tho latter apparently liaving u
signilicatiipn of will or inlenlioii. All the lenses have two forms, thn one indelinito, as, I
sleep, I slept, — the oilier definite, as, I am sleeping, I was sleeping, &c. This form is
made by prelixiiii; nts or fls to the verb, and sulHxiiig J; or h ; as, tlhilsiil, lie laughs,
(Jts:ti>ilsiitir, he is laughing; ii/,uiiUntsiil, I laughed, ii/,iiils:Uhlsiitir, I was laughing.
By prefixing uliS or n/c.s to a verb with (> suflixed, a liirm is oblaiiiod signifying wish
or desire ; as, iil/Jin, he eats, ii/isiit/./inir, he wants to ent.
Suits prefixed gives the signification of ought or should; as, lrtti;<iiijir/tim, to pray for,
Aiieli;ili,iiiij>i/iii'i, we pray for liini, /ciirsiiilstrrtraujH/iim, we ought to pray l()r him.
The negative form is made by prefi.\iiig to or /«?« to the verb; the interrogative by
prefixing /.«.
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA. S39
8, The following pnradigm rIiowi some of the variations of nn introniitivo verb:
INUEriNITK I'dHN.
Aj'w-jl/j', I slcpp
kwtt-iiff;, thou Hlprpnst
iltr, hn «lro|>s
kar-iilr, wo sleep
7)(/-j|/j', ye sleep
ilti; (it'i^) thoy sleep
u-ki>i-iil(;, I slept
ti-ku'ii-ii/r, thou didst sleep
li-iit^-, ho slept, «ko.
t/.laiii-kiH-iit(;, I have slept
mkiniit^, I shall sleep
namktuiiti^, I will sleep
DlriNITB roNM,
rSUENT.
ki-atsiitpi;, I nm sleeping
kti-al.tiili-ir, thou art sleeping
(itfiilrir, he is Hlcepiiig
k(ir-(i/siitrir, we are sIcH'piiig
])ii.alsiiti^ir, ye are sleeping
aUixt^ii;, thoy oro sleeping
miTERITC,
ii-ki-ii/siifi'ii,', I was sleeping
u-kii-(ihiitf;ii^', tli(ru wast sleeping
ii-alsiiliji^', ho was sleeping, &o.
rERrKT.
t//aiit-ki-(ilsii/rir, I have hcen sleeping
riHST KUTUHE.
7nki(itsiiti^i(', 1 shall ki sleeping
RECONU FUTl'RE.
tiiiiiikiiitsiilrir, I will be sleeping
kiaksiitrir, I want to sleep
ki'.-nksiilrir, tlmu wishest to sleep
iiksii/ri'\ he wants to sleep
k(iiiksii/'^ii^\ VIP. woidd sleep
poksiifrii;, yo would sleep
('ksiil<;i';, Ihcy would sleep
kiniifknsiilrir, \ am wanting to slee|)
kin/skir.siit'^ii^, thcui art wanting to sleep
c/sk(isiitri(^', ho is wanting to sleep
kdclskiisiitrir, we are wanting to sle(>|i
jinctskdsiilij^-, ye are wanting to sleep
elskdsii/rn;, they are wanting to sleep
OPTATIVE PAST.
u-kiaUiit^ii;, I did want to sleep, &c.
DECESTIAU
kisaitsiil^ig, I ought to sleep
ktctisaitiiit^i^, thou oughtest, tfco. (Sec.
There is still another form in i^aus, signifying, to go away to do any thinij ; as,
kiit'auiiitp^, I nm going away to sleep
kwosiiaiisii^i^, thou art going away, iic.
vkisir(iusiil{;i^\ I went away, iVe.
namkisuatmit^, I will go, &c.
^,
^^^
.0^. \^^
,^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
4^
^
1.0
lii|21 12^
■tt Ui2 122
u
I.I
£ liS 12.0
IL25 nil 1.4
IJi&
Nyi^i
1.6
Hiotographic
Sciences
Corporation
- ^
'^%''^'
^.V'
33 \MIST MAIN STRUT
WItSTIR.N.Y. USM
(7l6)t72-4S03
'^
fe^ A
^ A
^
^
'*%^>^
^i^
V
ftiO
P il I L O L o a Y.
9. The fedective rorm ia denoted by the termination ItOt,- as in tapenttit, to kill one's
self:
Sing, kinlaptnttit, I kill myself Plu. kartapentsM, wo kill ourselves
kvatapeHltut, thou killcst thyself piiUijieiiUut, yc kill yourselves
liiprntsmt, be kills himself taajientaut, they kill themselves
This form rerrives the same affixes for mood nnil tense ns the simple verb,
10. The reciprocal form terminates in iiaf.ii ; us, from jio/istum, to kill :
kiifpn/isttiwu/.ii, wc kill one another
piipii/istinni/.ii, yc kill one uiiothor
pulistiitvu/1.11, they kill one another
11. A form sipiifying to do any thing for or concerning another is made by the addi-
tion cfjx/a or pc/f to the verb ; as,
trct^niijiflam, to pray (or
kuikl^cl^aiijif/iim, I will (or would) pray for thee
koli^rl^itiipel»iiUf.u, thou proycst for me
kMjK-lani, to b<>ar witness ajjainst, accuse
kiukMjteUntum, we accuse him
Vi. The following is the present tense of u transitive verb varied through oil its
transitions :
uit^in or tti'ff t>i, to see.
tiilpntsin, I see thee
uit',in, I sec him
riRiT TSANaiTION,
uikitjt.lman (or uikalyJainen), I see you
uiil^in (or iiit^in), I see them
kointfintu/., thou seest me
uUfimtifi, thou sccst him
■ICOSD TSASSITIOM.
kanvit^il/.lp, thou seest us
uiit^intu/., thou seest them
imritffis, he aers me
uitritomas, he sees thee
uitfis, be sees him
THUD TSANSITION.
kaeu-it^itf.lis, he sees us
V)
uiitfis, he sees them
i
Ml
uitfiiut, we see thee
kanctl^iHtom, we see him
fOnSTH TRANflTION.
uiti,il/.lanwt, we see you
kactvHti^intum, we see them
kalauU^inUr/., ye see me
rilTH 'nUNSITION.
kaeUuilfU/.lp, ye see us, iic.
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
541
koUui/^iiitum, they see me
•IXTH TIIANIITIOII,
ktietsuU^itjf./ii, Ihcy see us, iic.
UCirROCAL roRM.
kaei)tptaiva/.u, wn sec one another
put^Uawa/1.11, ye sec one another
ut^ilairri/.u, ihoy see one another
Verbs, like nouns and adjectives, somvlimes have a plural entirely dilTorcnt from their
singular; thus, iiiiilsiil, to Inugh, has in the plural, /.ira/.iauii ; tiifi/k;, to stand, has
ttipip.
13. The imi)erntive tcrniinates in the singular in iV, in the plural in iri ; a% siistif;,
drink thou ; siistiwi, drink ye.
14. There arc some particles in frecpicnt use, the exact meaning of which it is dilTicult
to defwic :
T/.iu, perhaps from the demonstrative ?>/./«, that, seems to Iw used ns a kind of article.
It is prefixed to both subslaulivi's ami adjwtivos ; as, 1^11/1 l/./a Indus l/.lu 'l\:3n J where
is the father of John ? T/.lu /<ie&l l/.lii sLii//(imi/o, l\v man is good.
E/)l/l (or before a word In-ginning with s, c/m) has a possessive signification; as,
f]it/.l iio/o/io/., having a wife; f])t/.l iiiiilritiiiin, having a knife; rps s/a)/iii, having a
husband, .loined with the pronominal prefixes of the word it changes Ihrm to possessive
pronouns ; ns, paipil/.l (for pii-cpl/.l) liiliidu, your fathers, j}iiips slil/Jam, your canoe.
//( or n is a pre|)osition signifying /o, tit, in. I'retixed to pronouns (and perhaps to
nouns) it supplies the place of a dative case; as, kiiikskwn!ol;iiucllii^ ndnt'vi, I wish to
talk to thee; kicitkskirii/okirtirllii; iikoiiid, thou wisliest to talk to me.
.Spj is an adverb which expresses present and continued existence ; as, liijxiis, it
rains ; spislstt/M u-liijmis, it rained yesterday ; spislstt/U ii-scs-tiijxiis, it rained yes-
terday and is still raining.
l.'i. A noun, pronoun, or adverb which commences a sentence, frequently has t or M
prefixed to it, apparently for emphasis ; as, iMeri ukoliiitnm u aintsiitir, Mary caused
him to laugh; Isiift opitlislnrn ? who killeil him P tkoiiUi opolislum, I killed him; tntriin
tf.lu kirnk/itii^ ! whei-e art thou going \
10. Almost any word may Ijecome a verb with very little variation. Thus, from
/.acst, good, we have kin/arsl, I am gotnl, kwii/.aest, thou art good, fiiesl, he is giKid,
&o. ; mimkin/.acst, I will be good ; kaks/.aestif, we wish to be good ; kaesaits/.acsti^,
we ought to be gcMnl, tie.
From ^aii, that, or so, we have tn; aiit;, it is not so.
From cstlf/iii, two houses, are formed, kinesi/f/.n, I have two houses; kinicstlrfu, thou
hast two lu)us<;s, iStc.
A termination in li/w/f, signifies Vj desire an object ; as,
ino/oiin/u-ti/'iii;, to want a wife, from iio/oiin/.
iiiikinl/.lf.iiiii<ilisi(;, to want a ho'ise, from siiiiit/l/n
kinumiiiii/.U'<i/isii; to want tobacco, from s'lmiin/n
Other parts of speech, also, may be formed from verbs ; as, from iiti;, to sleep, we
have siitsuni, a blanket, and sniiiitisli'ti, a bed.
130
fi42
I'll I I. () l.()(i Y.
1 :
Olio noun mny Ih' fDrniod frnni another ; u»,
from sinimu/ii, lolmi'co, In lormiMl yiniiin/iitiiii, \n\H-
from siiinlf.lkuii, wattT, siiiiiiu-ilf.1, a lisli, or nny iininiiil llml livcN in the wiitcr
from Mil/.<iii, the niiinc of n plttcc, Smuil/uiii^, ihp |m>o|>I(! of Mil/uii.
IT. Tlx* SclJHh, liko other Iniliiin Inn^na^i'H, ihmhokm'm in ii \»^\i ilc);ni' the ixmcr of
r<iiii|Hisiiinn,<ir, iiH it hiis Ihi'M ciiIIimI, a^^lutiMllti(■ll, liy which our or Iwosyllahlcs iirc liikon
from (lilli'rriil wonls, mul I'cimliirii'il to form a new trrm. Thus, I'rom jxtfjxt/nt, ohl, and
ti^rsiis, ii^ly, is mailo thi- wonl /xiiiis, mcaiiin;; " u;{ly from .ijjp;" from .vi/.t, now, and
siiiul/le/ II, house, i.s niadi' sils/i/ii, now houw. The sumo word liir house, eomhined
with the numerals ««•/, two, kri/.lis, three, make* esi/r/'i, two honiH-8, krt/.Mr/.u, three
houses. I'roin kiinluiit, j.'reat, and .s/«)o.v, hi'art, is derived kiitrsjmm, a hrave man, a
warrior; from sintiil/lsiiskii/n, a horse, and ///i>I//ih<siihi, to look l<>r any Ihinj;, is
formed the verh l/laikit/.n, to Idnk liir horses, whieh is n'litdnrly varied, — as, kiiks///iis-
ku/iit/lip, we mean to lisik liir our horses; mnkhiiutiislfln/n, I shall go to look for my
horse.
These ohservalions, though necessarily imperlect, will servi; to give some idea of the
character of the Selish language, and of the others which Ix'long to this family. Some
notes, of a similar kind, which wen- made on the •Shushwa|i,'rsihailish, and Nsietsliawus,
ore omitted, as they show no |)eculiarilies dillering, ui any im|M)rtant |R)iiit, from the fore-
going.
4. 8 A H A P T I N F A M I f. V.
(M. Sahaptin. N. Witlimula [i. I\lus; j. Uutkema; k. 7>7i *«/«/] ).
These vooahularies an- from various sources, — hut wi- are |irinci|>nlly indehted for them
to the assistance of Dr. M. Whitman, Missionary of the American lloard, at Waiilntpu,
through whose nieiliation we were enabled to ohtr.'n the words from the natives with
greater accuracy than wouhl otherwise have Is-en [Ktssihle. To the same gentleman,
who has Iss'ii six years a n'sident at that station, wc owe much valuahle information on
various suhjecis connecti-il with the character and customs of the natives.
We had also the go<Hl fortune to m^-t at Astoria the Ilev. A. H. Smith, who had resided
three years in the same lril»\ near the Kooskooske<! Kiver. During that time he had
applied himself, with singular success, to the study of their language, and the elucidation
of its very (leculiar and complex structure. We are indehted to him for a copy of his
grammar, or, as ho has modiwtly enlilleil it, " Kemarks on the Peeuliaritio"" of this lan-
guage, together with many additional explanations on the same subject. In the summary
which Ibllows, the only changes that have been made an- the omission of nnim|Mirtant
details, anil some alteratiim in the arrangement. As the words given in our v(K-abulary
will be found to diiri'r somewhat in orthography from those contained in this grammar, it
will lie proper to explain the cause of the iliscn-pancy.
To the vowels r, i, o, «, the missionaries give the same sounds as they have in our
system; but they employ the a to repn'sent, Isvsides the sounds heard in father and tiian,
those of the « in ha/l and what, and the ii in Imt, In our vocabulary, thiise sounds are
written with peculiar characters, a, and ". The propriety of separating these elements is
I
N O R T II W K S T R R N A M K II I C A.
543
cviilciil rriiiii iIm' fuel Ihnl two dl'lhr nuHlific-nliniis i>l' Iho vrri) rliin-r only i" lli« s'>unil» «
nnd n, whiili ilisliMclion tlir missiomirirs arc nlilignl tn li'iivf iiiiinnrki'il. In snnir wiirds
it n|i|K-nn'il to iim Ihiit llii- a of tin- iiiisNioiiiirics iiii^lit !«• Ix-ttrr rt'iin'sciitcd by rii, as
U'fdliir, land, I'or irtilm^- ; liiit this iiiny havi- Im'cii a diali'diral diHrn'iicr, mm the Indiaiifi
iifar Waiilalpu 8|K'iik n iMilois varying n lilllc Innn lliat of llii' IkiiuJ!! alxHit tlii! Koos.
kiK).sk('c.
Thn cnnwinnntH used in tlic grammar an; nine, viz, : /i, /••, /, ni, », p, a, I, ir. No
distiiirlion ix llicri' made iH'tuicn /.' ami '/; in liu't, ilin lallcr dilliTH (rum tin- liirmcr oidy
in a niDO' fjullnral, or Imllow nltrranrc, and lias liy no nirans llic as|>i! .ifd riiUfjlniiHs of
tlip .same U'llcr in the Tsjiiniik. Tlii' |iro|KT I'.n^ilish A docs not exist in llw lanfjuap';
wliom rmploycd, Ixith in the vocalMilary and llii' ^ranmiar, it should iiavn tlii^ same
sound as the /.
A dilli'ri'nci- of opinion rxists among llu' missionarii's with n>gnrd to tlic pro|)cr mode
of writing rcrtaiu words, in uliirli Kom<- lirar only tlin sound of s, while others distin-
guish a preceding t. The worils usually olli-red as a test art! t(ili», giH>d, and knskiis,
small. Tho ipiestion is, whiMher they are to Ih' pronounced, as hi'ri' written, or rather
tuts and kiitskiils. The li in tii/ix is intenileil, as we weri' told, to repri'sent a sort of
hiatus, or indistinct hreathing alter the vowel a. AHer hearing these two words pro.
nounced jiorhaps a hundn'd times hy several natives, we were still in doubt as to the In-st
mode of writing them. The Sahaptin Indians about Waiilatpu, and tlio.se of other tribes
who had learned to speak their language (such as Ihi' t'ayuse and Wallawallas), pro-
nounced the ts very distinctly, while the natives I'riun the inli'rior toiicheil so lightly upon
the / as to leave it hardly, if at idl, nialible. On the whole, we weri' inclined to lielieve
that till! full orthography of Is was the most correct. This opinion ri'sts chiefly on the
fact llin those who n'joct the t do so only when the sound in question occur.s at the
liegiiniing or end of words, — ns in si/iikt (or tsiliikHI), Unly, silisilt (tsi/.tsi)'.), grass,
hamitlis /anutlils), hniuLsonic; but in the middle of words nil agree in writing it, as in
ttuitsaiii, ear, hitsiii, star, &c. The hiatus above mentioned, represented by li in liilis, is
nicnMy the shor l>, which sound freipienlly occurs liel'ore tin; 's; w<! have therefore
written 'nuts, good, kuDtskitltts, small, miunts (for 7>iias), child, i-tc.
The soil s and the i; nrc freipiently confounded in this Inngnnge, as nrc the / nnd // ,-
the latter, however, is rather a dialectical dillerence.
The general sound of the langunge is very pleasing to the ear,— clear, smooth, and
sonorous, — more resi'mbling, in its general ipiality and intimations, the Spanish, than
any other of the Kuropean languages which we have heard spoken.
The following is an abstract of Mr. Smith's grammar of the Sahaptin language:
1. The number of letters noi-essarily used to e.\pre.ss the sounds of this language is
rourtwn, — five vowels nnd nine consonants. Seven other consonants are occasionally
employed in foreign words intrmluced hy the missionaries in their translations.
3, The following is the arrangement of the alphal)ct :
A pronounced ns a m father
E " " a in hate
I " " i in machine
O " " o in note
U " •■•■ oo in mam
P II I I. O I, O O Y.
//, k, I, m, n,j}, s, I, w, are pmnounred aa in BnglUh. B, d,f, g, r, v, :, are i rad
only in wunls of foreign origin.
3. The vowoU hnvc somuliinos other xoiiniis bmiiloi IhoMC given above, A i« lined
with the most latitude, iind n'pruseiitH niso the Hound iif a in fiUl (4), of a in what {H),
and II in hut (ii). li hns nUo the Hound of «■ in mrl; i thiit oft In pin, and of 1/ in i/ou,
4. The most roinmon diplithoiigs are «i, pronoiineed like 1 in jiiiie, an, like ou in
loulli^ mill iu, like ru' in tinr.
Ti, (i. The cninliiiintions of ccins<innnt.s nn; iiiiuiy of them dilTerent from Ihoae which
oceur in Kuro|KNiii liingunge.s, nnd n'lider it dillieiilt fiir fon-igners to nequire the exnct
proiiiiiiciiition of the words. Some of the oomhiniilions lire — Ik, as in alk, kt, ns in
si/iikl, III (If), ns III kokalli, hi {/!), ns in hlnphlnji, iht (';/), ns in pishi, ih (//), ns in
silh (the It not comhiiiing with the t ns in Kn;;lisli, liiil usi'd only ns nn iispjrnle), iiih, ns
in shmiih, iim ns in Hlnkaiiiii, knh, an in tuksh, hsh (/j), us in miihsh, xlil, ns in knshl,
mill (ml/), lis in kiimlh, <.Vr,
7, A"^ nnd / nro freijiiently used iiiliri'li«nj;enlily, L is more eiimimin niiiimg some
bands of Nez-I'erces Ihnn others. The woineii nnd ehildn'n niniost invnrinbly use /
instead of n.
8. There nre other chnngi's of letters mnde (or the snke of eii|)hony ; ns, h iH-eomes A:
belbre a word or ntlixed syllnble coniiiienring with n vowel ; /. is changed to h lu'lort^ a
syllable commencing with ",
O F T II K F It M A T I <» .V OF W O K D S.
!i. The rndieni form-i nf words c insist usually of one, two, or three syllables, but rnn-ly
more than that. 'I'o these rndieni liirnis syllnliles niny Is' pn'fixeil nnd sulli.xed to nlmost
any extent, varying the sigiiil'icntion, nnd leiigtbeniiig the word to nine, nnd sometimes
even to twelve or more syllnbles. Words are eiim|«niiided nlmost indelinitely. The
various eircuinslnnces nr iiKsles of nn nctioii are in genernl not expressed by separate
particles or qualifying words, os in most lMiro|iean languages, hut nlmost every thing of
the kind is brought into the verb itself, nnd makes a part of the word. For instance,
till/Ill II II ill is nn ndjective terminntion, signifying intensity ; ns, luhnliimaiiniii, very good.
This pnrlirle is com|M)Uii(led with the verb, and gives it the same additional sigiiilienlicin ;
as, hiirakiildiiuiiisii, it ruins very niueb. Several eireumstnnces nn? thus sometimes
brought into the same word ; ns, for exnniple, in lii-tnii-lii-iil-ii-icih-ii(iii-kiiu-iia, whirh
will be found, on nnnlysis, to be corn|iounded of two verbal roots, preceded by two
insepnrable particles, each of which aihls to its signification, liesldes a prefix which
determines the numlx<r and [lorson, nnd n sulfix which determines the mode, tense, and
direction. Hi is the prefix of the third |>erson singular numlier ; Uni hns reft-rence to
any thing done in the night, — tiinin to nn nrtioii |ierliiriiied in the rain. These two are
never used alone, and are not derived, so liir us is known, from any verlml root. Wihiiiin
is from the simple verb icihiiuxa, to travel on loot. The verbal noun, which is the
simplest form of the root, is uihiiu. The last ti seems to be added for the sake of
euphony. Kaii is from the verb kokaiimi, ro<ii kokuiin, to pass liy. Ka is the suffix
of the indicative mixle, aorist tense, direction from the speaker. The whole word
signifies, " he travelled by in n rainy night."
lU. To this other particles may be prefixed and suffixed, lengthening the word and
N () K T II \V K S T K H N A M K K I •: A.
645
chan^iiiK its mrtiniii);, — n», hi-sluip-d-tiiii-hi-nl.u.iiili-iiiiii-kiiii-iiim-ii. Mure the sha{>
)(iv(>H n rniiNiitivc si^juiticiilion likit tlii^ llclircw lli|iliil ; llioa uliirh rollowH it ix merely
for I'liphiiny. The .siilVix niiiiii Ih i<( the aiimc iiichIi' iiiiiI teiiHe na the prccctlin;;, but
chnn^cM the liircctiiiii louiinls the s[M'iiker.
II. As ill othiT hiiiniiiines, ihiTe lue rrt(|iiriilly wiirils nl' ditliTi'iil siyiiilicMilieii wliiuu;
cirthiijiriiphy niiisl Im' the siiiiie. In eoiiversMiliiui, Imwiver, these wurds im' iisuiilly (lis.
tin}.'nishecl hy n variiilioii in |iiiiiinni'iiiticin lurn plililc to llie ear, Imt ineiipalile cil' heing
exprrsseil liy the alphaliet. | A Inure ediiiplite aiphalH t than that adopted hy the mis-
siiinaries, (i>r one in whieli the vriwels a anil ii wi're I'liiployed,) vvnuhl in many enw^a
eiialilc Ihrm to make the iieeessary disliiictinii in tin' (irlliMjiiaphy. Si'e the remarks on
the \'ocahnhiry.|
\'i. h"ew ;^eii(rie terms an' I'omid in the Inii^na:;! , Imt speeille terms arc^ exinniely
imine rolls.
(I V V II i: I' A It IS II I' s I' K i; (• II.
i:l. The parts of s|Hi'eh are ihi' noun, adirciivi, piMiioiiii, and verli, ileilinalile ; the
nilverh, eoiijiinelion, and inlerjeeliiiii, iiidei liiialilr. To Ihise may Im' addeil iiiiollicr,
which sei'iiis to he a dislini'l purl of speeidi. Ii is iimcI in coiinrvion with Mrhs, Imt has
nsiiallv some propcrlies ol' the i-oiijiiiielioli. To disliiii;iiish it, it uill lie eallrd \\v (livliiiii-
l)ie votljitmtum.
II. I'roperlv spriikiii};, there are no prepositions in lln' laiij;iia;;c'. I'reposilioiis are
only snlhxi's lo lli.' nouns, fiiriiiiii); a pari ol' lln' wonl ilscll', ninl pirhaps ihisi' siiilix
Ibriiis may In' mori' pro|Mrly termed eases.
O F T 11 i: .NO I' N.
15. Nouns are varied liir iiiimlier ami ease, hiii seldom lor pir^on. There is somelimes
n variation liir the second |H'rsoii in words (ksi^rnaliiiij relalionsliip, — as, iix/:iij>. joiiiifjer
lirother, iis/^ii, second |H'rson, or liirm ol'nd<iress. This llirm, however, in many cases, is
mi enlirelv dilli'rent word, — as, /;/.<///, liither, liitu, second person, or lliriii ol'addrcss.
l(i. The niimlH'rs are two, siii!;nlar and plural. The pliir.il is usually formed iVoin Ihi"
sini!iiliir hy u reduplieution oCllie first syllahle; as, piliii, f^irl, pi. jiijiili//.
17. When the noun commenci's with n vowel, instead of ii con.soiiHiit, the vowel is
somelimes douhled ; as, iitiriii, an old woman, pi. iiiifitui.
l>*. To this mode of formiiij; tlii' plural there is an exception of one whole class of
words, which in this lanituafie is uiieommonly full, — vi/., those expressing the various
fnniilj relations. In this class the plural is formi'd hy siilUxiiifj ma to the sinirular, — ns,
jiikd, mother, pi. pil«t»iii. When the siiif;ular ends in y), tliis letter is dropped, — ns,
aski'p, pi. iixk<i»i<(.
1!>. The gender of nouns is to some extent distinguished, — only, however, hy n dis-
tinct name liir each sex, and never hy o variation of the same word; as, /id.sini/, hoy,
piliii. girl ; nnirnhui, male elk, f<ix/iij>, female elk. \\ lienever there are not distinct
names liir the two sexe.'*, the words /itliiiii, nude, and aiiU, I'emalo, are used.
20. Nouns arc deeliiied by n change in their termination, or hy snUixing prepositions
which Ik'i'oiiio a part of the word itself, changing sometimes the orthography, and fre-
546
I'll I l.o I. OU Y.
qiicnily llinittin;; llio nrrnil ii|)<in n dilfi'ri'iit sylliiM"'. Ilrnco iho niiiiilwr of rniici muil
lie nuiiicniiis, if, iniliN'd, it Is pri>|NT In rail nil llicw sullix Ibriiiii i'aM.>ii.
31. Tlic iiinin 1//1V, n Inxisf, i.i tliiH ilirlincil:
Noiii. iiiil, liiiiisc
(irn. /«(//;//, dCii lioiisr
Aro. iiiiiKi, lniii«'
1st Dill, ihilph. III ur liir a \m\i»a,
"A Dal. iiii//>ii, in, mi, or u|>im n Iioiiho
Isl Alii, iiii/ki, willi n Ihuim' (iiislruint'nt)
'Jil Al)l. iiiif/i/,iiiili, rriiin a limisi!
M .Mil, hiiltiiii, liir llic |iiir|i<M(' ol'ii lioiiso
(TliP |iri)iiiinrinlicin cIik's ntii slmw cli-irly thai ihi-n- is 11 ilitrcrfnt form of thin word for
till' |iliiral ; it wiiiild |irii|Mrly In- linit.)
Then' are nlliiT .siillixi's wliirli may Ih' Cdiisidrri'il iidjcclive or advcrbiul, ns:
iiiifiish, the |i!(ic(' urn ln>ii'«'
iiiit/iiiiiia, Mon^imji In a hmiao
iiiiiinl, xiiliiiiit (or dcstiliilo of) a house
inilin, liaviii;; n luiusu
iiiifiili, like a luvuse
itiilsiiii, iiiilv n hnii.se
I
'J'Z. Noiiim cndin!; in n. /, o, ami 11, make the ^'iiitive by miiliii); nm ; ns liiiinn,
linmiiiiin ; hnlsii, IkiIsiiiiiii. Th<iM' eniliii^' in '/', ks in, nnd .1, iiy iiddin); niiii, aa.
Iii/uii,lii/i<tiiiim ; irM,vililiiiiiii (see§^); sliikmii, sliHnm/iini, Tlinse endiiif; in /and
X, expi|it it lie ill in, liy ndilinu in, as linsini/, Imsmilin ; tiliikini, lilakdiim, TIiosk'
cndiiii; in in eliaiiije llie 11 In sliiiiin, as, liiiiiiii, liiiiiis/iniiii. Those in ji add iin, as,
]iiii/i, jiiiijiiin. 'rimse in nl add iiin, ns iiiiiihut. mnJiiiliiiii. Thow in (/ ehnnf{e Iho I
to mil, ns, iskil, iskiiim. Tlmse in kt dni|i llie / and lake iini with a vowel pR'Ocdiii(j.
ns, Idii/ikt, taiilikiiim ; niikt, niikinim.
an. The nceusalivc is liirmed from the itmitive liy dropping the m (nnil / when it pre-
ecdes it) ami adillii'i a ; or if the wi is not preceded by 11, by adding /)", ns, iskiiini,
iskiiia ; witihnim, icitilma ; mniliatniii, intoliatna,
F T II K .\ !» J K. t T I V E,
'<!4. The adjective is declined in tlic snme wny ns the noun : as —
SIMJ,
\om, tiihn \Utnu]
Gen, tii/i.siiim
Aeo. Iiilimiit
Isl DnI. lulisph
8d Dm. UilisiHi
1st Abl. Itihiki
2d Abl. tttlispkinih
3d Abl. tuhsain
good
n.eit.
titiilis
tiltilisiiim
liliihsmi
Itlahsjilt
ti/it/isjia
tilahski
tilahipkinih
tiUilisnin
N ( » H T 11 \V K H T K 11 N A M K H I (' A. f)47
9A. Thu ilc-|{rtfa of coiiiparii«)ii iin< llum cxpri-HNcd :
I'cwilivi', liilit, (JcmmI
('(im|>iiriilivr, liiha kiiiniiukdiiiii, licllcr
Su|K>rliitiv(', liilia/ii, U'sl.
Then- nro oilier iiiimIiw of <'X|irf>i»inj( ihc »ii|KTlnlivi' cirjjnv, n» lnhslnmauni", very
go<xl, Arc,
Un. T)H'rc in niMo ii iikkIc of fxpmoiinf; iiiiy lliiiig timt \» \imffn'*»\n^ tiiwiirdti a super-
Intivo |Mijiil, wlii<-li ix liy dDiililing ii Hylliibic or piirt cifd sylliilili'; iix, lainl, i-lcar, piniii :
laimiiit, iiicn.>ui«iii)j;ly clvar.
i> !•■ I' It (» N <i I' N S.
'.J7. I'ronoiins miiy 1»" diviilcil into |mtsiiiiiiI, iidjcclivi', iiiiil inlfrmgnlivr. Thi" |ior-
KonnI prniiiiiins iirr in, I, iiii, iIhhi ; ijn, ]»• or she ; ;///«, wr ; ////(/, ye ; iiiiiiiti, lliry.
(Tlic priiliiiiiiis (if llic s nil and third pirMHis plural mv (lisi|iiu''ii'<li<'d in wrilini: lor
the .'•aki' III' |K'i>pii'iiily ; liiil in pnuiniicialidii iin dilliri'iin' «lial»'»vir i-aii U- disccriifil
iR'tHi'cii lliciii, Ittilli arr siiiiiidc'd iiiiii, with llic ai'i'ciit dii ihi' last syllalilr.)
liH. IVimouns an' dcidiiii'd in ilii! saiiii^ way ns nouns and adjiiiivis. /« nial»os in
the genitive iiiini, aci'. inn ; iin niakeii iniim, imiiiin ; i/n, ijiiiiiii, i/nui : miii.
liunini. Ilium, iiiin, iiiiniii, iiiii/iin, iniiiiii, iiniiiniii, i in inn nil,
'UK 'I'lio |ii'rsi>nal pniminns arc variimsly lonipdundcd, or ri'ciivc various sulVixfs
which olmnge their gignilicalion : as —
in/nil, I inysi'll'; ininili, ihoii ihyscH'; i/iinili, hi' liiniscir
iiisiinit, I alone; iinsinn/, thou alone; ijkiiiiiI, he alone
inkii, I also; i/iiLn, ijiinika
inkii, inikii, iiiinl,ii.
Thin termination (kii) ia useil to signily assent. It is sullixed not only to pronouns,
but to verlw and ol\en to other words in giving an airinnnlive answer.
i/ikai, I lirst
iniiiltniikm, I myself first
inliinii, I instead of another
inlit, I the suinc
iiiikds, i/iinikia
inmiliniiLiis, vVe,
iiiiliiiiii ; ipinhirni
iiiilit, ipiiilil
All these are declined like the simple forms.
30. The genitive ease of personal pronouns is olten eom|xninded with nouns, forming
one contrncted word instead of two; as, inin/wn, insteail of inini iiinlii'i, my com-
panion ; illiiiiliuit for iniiH liiiiliira, my friend ; nniii/nnliun liir Hiinini /iiiitiirii, fif,
31. There nro only two adjective pronouns, and these are demonstrative, viz. : ki, this,
pi. kimti ; inli, that, pi. inkniiia,
32. Ki makes in the geintivc kinm, ace. kinui ; kiiiui makes kinimam, kinimaiia:
048
Pil I i.ni.oti v.
i >»
1:
loh hnii Ihr it« genitive linfcninr, kunim, i kiinin; nnd in Ihn plumi kuitimam,
ktnittiiitmi,
!1M. Ih'HJilrH iIk- ordiimry "iillix "ir I'ltw-rdrnw ihrri- i« oiii- nnirli iiwil with llirw Iwci
pruiiiiiinii, vi/. : kiiiim, HJn^., nnti kiniiiiiiiit/i, \<\. ; kimiiti niiii kiiniiiintnii, — NJ^iiiryin){
with, ill ciiiniHiiiii iiilli, thn i>r lliiit, TIh' suiinc Millix (iii) In oOrn iilliiclii'ij In |ini|i<<r
nninc'N, iiml Nuriii'tinii'M In (■inninoii uiirs, U hiiiivrr iIiIh lliriii \» iisi'il, llic mtIi in
cniiiirxiiiii ulili il it iilwiiys |i|iiril, lliiiii){li iN iiMiiiiiiiilivi' Ik' Hingular ; oh, kiiiiiiii
kiiilii^li, I inn nnm^i willi iliiil oiii' (III. uilli lliiil one wr ^in).
Till' llilji rtlvr |>riiilcilins lin- riilll|liillllilril llki' lllr |H'rNli|ll|l,
S\. 'I'liirt' iiri' llirif inlrrnij^nlive |iri>iiiiiiii», vi/.. :
mA/, who f |il. i»liiiiiii, ri'laliii^ In iktsihih mily
ilii, uliiil f |il. i/iiiiiii, rrlaliii^ mily <» lliiiii;>, iinil
Mil, uliicli I iisi'il iiI'IkiIIi iM'rHiiiis iiikI ||iiii;:s
Va/ij Ikin, ill llio );c'niliv<- liill^'>llll^, ia/iiiiiii, ni'i'. ixliind; jjiii. |il. iahiiiiuiii, aci',
Uihimiiiia. Itii liiiK, III llio uniltlvr Miiigular, Hiiinii, i\r\\ iliiini ; |il. iliimnin, iliiiiniiiii.
Mil iniikra III )jrn. iniiiin, iicc. iiiiiiiii.
Jx/iii'iii, iliiiiiii, itiijuiiiiii, iiiiiiiiii, iiiiiiiii/iiiiiiii, iVr., iiir liiriiis in iVt'qilcnl use,
:<•). 'I'liin' nil' |iri<|iri'ly im nlalivr |ir<>ii<Miiis In ilils hm^'iiap' ; liiil a I'nniliinatlon Is
uscil uliicji aiiswrr.s llir |iiir|K)M', |l Is lliriiinl liy usliii; a |K'rsiinal nr ailjrcllvi' |ir<iniuin
ill <'(innf\liin wllli kuli, a |iarli<'l(< lx-loii>;ln^ In tin- i-Iiisk rallnl ijrrlini Iilo ninjiinrtinna.
Till" iisi's of lliis |i,irlick' iirr varinus. It i» i'iii|iliiyi'il with a |iartli'iil»r liiriii nf the
vorli, «lil('li iK-rlmii-* may U' ralli'il a illnlliirt iiiikIi', wIii'II il has llii' sl^niricalinii nf fliiif,
ill iiiilcr lli'il, lliiil I null/, \i\ Willi till' NaiiH' liiriii aUn, linl iinl i|i'|h'|i<Ii'IiI nil a
prevlniis iiiilii'iillvi' iiinnil, as In llic lliniirr case, it lias the siiisi' nl' /(/,' us, kiili kiis/i,
let nil' yo.
Wlicn used In ('(injuiu'tiuii ullli a |H'rsiiiial nr ailjrclivi: |irniioiiii, to siipply ihi' place
of a ri'lativc, il' It n'latcs In |N'rsons, the pronoun Inllnws the parliclr; If to thing's, the
prniiniiii prci'i'ili'S ; as, miks liiLiilntuslia ka i/ii ini/isii Inirusli, niii' is almiit to gn who
Is skilliil. lull kali tiikiikii ikiiiii liiicmli, that which I have s|H)ken is triii.'.
O K I) i: (• 1, I N A 11 I, K V () N J V N C T I () N S.
30. 'I'lio class of words called, lor the sake ordlsllncllnn, dccjinaliic cnniiinctlnns.havo
usually snnic prn|«'rlli'S ol' coiijuni'tloiis, yd ihcy arc nol simple cmincclives. Some itf
thciii have merely an Intensive force, while nilicrs serve as I'nnnecllves Ixitwcen sciilences.
37, This class is varied according lo nunil<<;r and person ; thus —
mviULAR. ri.rKtu
1st |K'rson, kiih, that Imh or kiiiim
■Jd person, kum kiijxim
3d |ierson, kii ka
hull, if, perhaps, (used with a supposition.)
N () II T II W K S T K K N AM K H I C A.
049
IhI imtmiii, kiih
'it\ IHTHIIII, klllll
M(J |H'riuiii, kn
ri.i'iiAt..
kiih or kiDiniim
kii/xiiii
kii
3H, III till! Cirsl |HT"oii pliirnl uriHilli llu'w wnriln \\v'tf nm Iwd (iirin", wliirli :irc iiwil
„.j(lrr iliMi'rriil ciriMiiii-iliiMrcs. Wlicii llic s|iciikrr, liis iis-iiiciiilcH, iiilil ll«! |«'r«in or
IXTHolls ii(l(lr>>!«(l iin- till iiii'liidi'd, Ilic liilliT liirin, l.iiiiui i>\- kiiiuiinii, is iimiI. IT llii'
s|M'iikcr uiiil hit iissihIiiIis only iiri- iinliiilid, iiml iinl Ihciw iiililriswil, 111'' ollii r Icpriii in
^1
iisiil, /,(//( iir kiili
ill). Wlii'ii IIiIh cIiins III' uiirils is iimiI ill roiiiiixion uilli an iiclivi' iraiiHitivi . ..
wliirli liiiH lor lis uliji-t't n mvoiid ihtnoii Nin){iihir or |iliiriil, llini' is still anolhir varii
lion i UN —
\<rli,
Siiifj. or I'lii.
Isi |H rson, kiiiiiiili
3tl iiersoii, kiiM
Isl iKTMin, k"/n'iii<ili
'M IKTMUI, kll/llllll
(Olijcrl, yd iMTsoii sill);.)
(Olijc'ci, '.M |Krsiin plural.)
• Illirr Words ol' lliis class ari' n/dli, kniimli, inkuli, tnkn/i, \i\, all varied in llic -ainr
maiintr,
I If" T II i; V i; K II.
40. In llic vorlironsislscinplinlirnlly the power ol'lhi' Saliii|ilin liingun^. 'I'lic various
particles anil auxiliaries wliiili lnlp lo form oilier lan);iia;;es, and render tlie variations of
the vcrli more simple ami I'oni-ise, are, to a ^renl i xlent, wantinu in lliis. Hence the
varialions ol' the verli are cxtreinely miiiierons, and llii'V may lie increased to an almost
indcliiiitc extent liy composition.
41. Verbs inny be divided into three classes, — neuter, active inlransilive, ami nclive
Irnnsitivp.
4'J. There are two nenler verbs, inis/i, to !«■, sigliilyin)! simple existence, and irilsdsliii,
to iK'coine. 'I'he llirmer is wiintini; in all the Inliiro teiisi's, or, il'lliey exist, they are the
smile with those ol' irifsii.\/iii, and liiriiied Ironi it.
43. Tin; active intransitive verlw ari' thosi' which do not admit an accusative nller
llirin. They an' similar in their variations to the neuler verbs.
44. Roth lhe.se classes present a striking peindiarily in one respect. There is one Inrin
of the verb lo agree with the noiniiialive, and nnotlii'r lo ai;ri'e with the genitive when
possession is implied. In the first ami second |K'rsons, however, the form is the same in
each i thus, —
WITH TlIK NtlMINATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1st person, in iiitsh Jiiin unsliih
Ud person, im itiinsh inui atlnrasliih
3d |)ersoii, ipi hinitsh imma hiiis/iili
138
*,
1
;i
I
SAO
I* II I I.O l.tHi V.
WITH Till IIKKITIVI.
Hlhtfiilar.
Int iM'rxoli, iiilin until
■Jil inrsiiii, iiiiiiu iiiiii.ih
Mil iHTmill, i/iniiii iit/i
I'liiril.
Hiinim iriuhih
lllitltii titlili'iislnh
till mil III II II thill
Tlicw lliriiii u(\\\r villi iiri' sill clrliiiilc thai ullrn it JH mil iicicH'.iirN tn ii-i' llir {iriiiiiiiiii,
iinil in ronvcriinlion it in iVi'iinrnlly uinjitiil. I''iir iimliiiui', il' I iink wliiiw ii iliini; ix which
ln'liin^D III till' iHiiiilr, Ihi' iiiiiui'i' hIII I>' "ihisIiiIi," tlir |iliiml l'>riii nrtlir vrrli iiii|ilyinf(
Imuhw'H'Oiiii, (iMriiiiinu, " il ii tin iri.")
I.'i, I'll!' iii'iiM' iiiii'iiiiHiiiM' li.is Mill' I'lirin to ii^rii' »iili lln' iiiuniiiiilivr, iiiiil iiiiiilliiT to
iijirii' Hilli till' i^riiiliM', till' -null' iii tlir iH'iitiT. I''iir iii^tiiihi', « Siilin|iliii »ill mjiv, Ijmim
iiiuilii iiliiiiliiiii, iiiKli'.'iil 'A' i/iiiiHi iiiiiiliM lii/iiiilimi, lim rliilil iliiil.
in, 'I'll!- iii'ti\f iriiiisili*!' virli |iri>i«iitM n inm-h iimri- Hlrikiiiy |»-riiliarily. 'I'liin is
nlwayii <-n|mlil<- <il° ttikiii;.' an iii-iMinntlvo iiI^it il. Iml |H'rhii|iH as rrri{iii'iilly tnki-ii a iinini-
imtivr iilirr it mh its iilijcrt M" an ai'riioalivi'. Wlini a inrimi |iiTliirin'< an ai'lioii li>r him-
wir, llic iiliji'i't 111' llif vrrli in iKiially ill llli' liiiliiilialin', ami is pn ili <l liy a nniiiiiiativi'
rxim-isiil iir iiiiplitii in all i-aws.* 'I'lir liiriii nl' llic vi-rli, li"', is iliMinni f'nmi lliat wlirn
liillnui'il liy an ai'i'iisaiivn. Il' iuh' s|h aks nl' an ai'tmii wliirli is |stI<<miii'iI, »illi<iiit any
iiilinmliiin liir wliiun it is {Mrliiriiiiil, iln' vitIi lakrs an arriisativr aDir il, — in wini'li r:iM>,
il'il Im' in Ihi' third |ii'rs<in it laki'sa uinilivi' Uliiri' il instrail nl'a miiiiinalivr. U Inn lhi>
vurli takfM iin in'i-iisativr aDrr il, iIk* vrrli i» varini ihrnniihiint its whnli- iliflrnsimi,
III riinliiiu' t'l Ihi' niinilii'r ami |H'r>iin i>rilii' arnisativi', llniri' ihiri' ap' six \arialiiiiis nl'
thr M rli ai-riinlinj; In iIh' minil»r ami ixMsnn nl' its nlijiTi. I'l'liisi' variaiimis an' what
IIP' II' ■» liTimvl liy ;^raiinmirians Inimi'iniis, — a wnnl lirst i'ni|il<iyi'il liy Ihi' S|iaiiish
inissiiiiiarirs, ami iiilnHlurnl into ^ri'iH'ral nsr liy Mr, lMi|>iim'i'an.|
•J7. ir nn nrliiin in iM-rrnrini'iJ liir ainithiT, iho vrrli, inslcml iil' ln'iii^r variiil in ihrlnn-
sinii III ili-nolc it, asKiMiM's a ih'W ^miimlliirni. i<r in thrnun intn amilhrr i'iinjii<;atiiiii, whniir
(Jirlciisi'in in very siiiiilar In thai ol'llw sinipli' liiriii, ami ri|iially I'lill. This liinii ;,;"Vcriis
twii riis"s, ihr ari'ifaiiM' nl' a |H'rsiiii ami iiiiiiiinativi' nl' a llnn^. IliiLisn is ihc Miin|itp
|5iriii, and linliiiniisli'i nr linhiiiiisliii, arrnriliiiv; tn Ihr dlalifl, is ihi' liirin sii;iiiryiii}! the
|K!r|iiriiiam'(' nl'ihi' artimi llir aimlhiT.
'IVi this may Ih' aildrd tun iiiIht rniijii^'niinns diTivril iniimiliati'ly I'min thi' prrrrdiiig,
— thi' "III" sii^niryiii^t 'h'" K"'"f{ '" P'Tliirm im arlii a at a distain'i-, ami thi" niliir ihr 'Jfnn^
III iH'rliinii an aclinii Inr aiinlhir, as ImLhisu, tn ^w in kit any lliilii,' at a disianr)', and
IkiIiiiiiiiIiimi (nr linliiiiii/iiMi), tn yo In S11' ijir iiimihrr.
Thi'se iirr all di rliiird, ill f.'iiii'ral. likr thr siin|ilo lorni, with snmr li'W dilfi'n'ni'i's in
snilll' nl'lhl' inildrs allll Irnsi's.
•I". As yi'l no pnssivi^ I'orm oflhi' vitIi has liccii discnvi'P-d, and »'<• nn- Uil In con.
rliidr that il does not i-xist. The vi-rlml adjrctivi' nr |mrtici|ili- rndiiif! in ih, v»hirh is
rrcqiii-ntly itsi'd uilh Ihi' vitIi orrxislrnrr, hnx nilhi'r Ihi' si^inilii'iition ol'a iiktii niljrrtivc,
or of till' (irosi'iit parliri|ili' in I'jiL'lish, than orthi" past partiripir whirh roriiis Ihi' passive
in our lan^naj;i'. Il may, Imwivir, in soiin' rasis, havr a passivr sij!niliralinii. An
* Thin M'Hti'iirt' in rutluT iilineurc, ami it in tn In; nj^rrlU'il tti:it no I'xniiiplr is givi'ii in tlir {rniiniiiar to
illuntrnlj' till' iMTuliarity in qucaliun.
N U II T II W K H T K K N A M K II I C A
M\
imiwrtiiiml Uinn iil' I'xpriiixiini U n\*» iixnl, niniiliir in ilir l)iiuli-li " iIh y «iy," I'nr " il
i« "fill!.'*
• II. A iiir:;'' iiiiiiil< r iirvrrlm iirr rimlriirtKl iil)( r llir iniinnir of lln' linik rmilr'iflK.
Tliii i'<'iilrii('iiiin, liiiui'ti r,<M'('iirN mily in ihc ihinl ihtmih nm^iihir iiml |iliiriil ihniiiuliiiiil
nil llir IlliKHJM nllil IrM-UN ; ||4, hliitsiLihil liir lili' Itxlullil,
.'(0, Vcrlw III!' viiriril iu-c(irilitid In liK'aliiiii, diro'licui, iiichIi', Ii'ii«', iiiiiiilicr, mid
IMTMIII.
fli. Ai ri'jiiiiU liMMiliiiii, wlicii iIh' nrlidii nriaiimli'" IVmim llir pliiri' wjii-ri- llii' ii|Kiil4<»r
in, the iiiinil liuiii iil'llii' xrii is iiicci ; liiil hIhh iIic ii'lhin nri^iiiiilcs 1111111 n pliid' ill 11
iliHiiiiii'i' I'niiii till' spiMki'i', u ililli rriit lliriii i^ ii-uil ; ii», linliini, imri"! Iiihi', I'liiiiinim
(nnn,/iiihiiii/.i/,i/>ii,thf miiih' Iiiim', uIhii iIh' in'licni nri^iiinli'i ill 11 ijisliiliri'. In llir
I'lirni Hi^mryiiu ilini'linii liiMiiriU llir ii|i('iiki'r, il' 110 iiiliTiiiiiliiili' |Hiiiil nr plnri' in N|Hik<!ll
• ■r in iIk' |iri>^ri'»M »{' llic iiiiinn, llic rnniinini Inriii is ii«<'il ; liiil wlii'ii llii- iirlinn in
|irii;;ri'HH in -iiKiki'ii iil'nH riiniiiiK rmin lliiil iiili'riiiiiliali- |iliii-i', ihi' oilier |i>rin \n iiwil.
fi'J, IhriTiioii. JArrv virli y* viiricci 11 iliii'j »■* llir iiiiinii or nil! riioii, or ivin
Ix'in.', Imvi' 11 ilir>'<iioii loutinU or iVoiii llii' •<|»Mkrr,— «•<, Imki^iiy ttinn iIh' miioii i>
//')//' till' n|Hiiki'r, .'Mill liiiKsiiiii, whin il is louinr/s; miil in llir liiriii "i^nilyinti nil iirlioii
ori^'lll'iltli;{ III 11 i\\^Uwrr, liiil,:<ii>ll,i, lioiii, nui\ /iii/,Miiil,iU>ii, /Diiiiiih. Il i" ilill'n ult In
ciiliri'lvo 111' (lin'rtion ill llif vrrli <'X|in'>«iiin Niiii|ili' tAislinro, Iml hero Ihe two tonus iire
in loiiiinon iiw ; iis, liiimsli, iVom, iiinl liii'inn, lounnls,
n:). The iiiiu/rs lire inori' niiinerons limn iisiml in other liiii;iiiii;,'es. 'I'liin' iire iil
Ic-ist si\ ilisiiiiit moili-., mill |Hrhii|>s one nmri' oiiu'lil lo he reekom il. Tin y .ire iisi
lollows :
(1.) Iiiiliiitliii, liinini; lln- siiiiie Kiiiiiiliiiition 11^ 111 Ijii'lisli.
('J.) UsiUilivr, Ni^iiilyinH "" ni'tion lliiit is eiisluiniiry or Imliitiiiil ; iis, in tMhuik'uui,
I Useil to siiy.
(!).) Sii/ijxiMliir, iiii)ilyiii); 11 eoniliiioii or iloiihi.
(I.) ■S'«/i/(///(7/rr, sifiiiilyiiiL^ nil iielion Willi h ili'|Miiils im 11 previous supposition; iis,
^1/ iilKI /lllltlt'i/l, 1,1111(1 III il/,Mliiilli, il'he Were here, then I sholllil see hilll,
(.'i.) linfuiiitiir, IIS ill other liinijimnes, \\ hen proliihitioii i< expressed, the I'litiirc
fnrni ol'llie verh is iisi'il, insleml ol'the ini|i<'nilive, with the iie:,'iiiive irnimrt prel'iMil.
(d.) lii/i/iiHir, Hifjiiilyin;; llie piiriMiM' I'or wliieli an iielion in iMMMoriiieil ; nil, hiiliiiii»h
klllllil, I IlllVl.' eoliie to >ti'.
The iitlier liiriii of evpression, hinteil ill as liein^ an aililltional iiinile, is similar in il5
Kif^nilii'iition lo the intinilive. It lollows a vcrli in oiii' ol the oilier nioiles in the same
manner iis the inlinilive, iinil is prereileil hy ihe parlii'Ie kuli in the sense ol' llnil. This
t'orin ol'lhe verli is varied aeeordiiiu' lo luimln'r ami |«'rHon, hill is iiol varied iiiTonhiin lo
lime ; as, hulsii iii/Hiii/nm knli iiliksli, hrin;; nie some wihhI, thai I iiiiiy iiiiike a lire.
r>l. The lenses as well as iiiiHJes iiie iiiiioiiinionly niiiiieroiis. Then' are no less than
nine, llioii^di they are not all used in nny Iml lliu indicative mode.
(I.) I'ri'senl, siynilyini; an aetioii wliieli is passinj; at Ihe iime the assertion is made ;
as, /// fniiiisii, I iini wrilin^,
{'■!.) I'erleel, denotiiij.; an action jii.st completed j as, in liiildn, I hnve jii.st scon.
w
Ml
662
PHILOLOGY.
(3.) Recent Pnsl, reprcscnling nn nrlion which took pince wi:hin n recent jwrioil, — it
mny lie, in the rnrly part of the snnic iliiy , or within n few dnys ; ns, haksaka, hnvc seen.
(4.) Remote Pnsl, denoting Ihni the iii'lion look pincc nt n more remote jicriiKl, iisiiiilly
n lon^ lime ngo ; as, IkUhuiki, I siiw.
(5.) Aorial, or I'nsl Indeliiiile, n-presenting iin nclion ns pnst, without relercnco to Ihe
precise lime ; it mny W' rt-ccnl or reiiiole ; n», IkiIiiki.
(0.) I'icseni Fiilim-, repri'senting nn nclion which is nboiit to tnke pInce; as, liakta-
his/iii, nlioiil lo see.
(7.) I'"iiluri', representinj; nn nclion which will liike pince nl nny future time; ns,
hdliHii, will sfv.
("*.) Recent Pnst Future — nn n<Micin whidi was nlmul to lake pIncc nl n recent iM-riod ;
as, litiklii/((sli<i/.<i, hnvi; Urn nboul lo lie seen.
(!l.) RcMicili' Past Fiihire, — au nclion which wns nlxiul to tnke place nl n ri'moto
IHTidd ; ns, liiikloliislitiiKi, wns ahoul In see.
">"). Kach verli has usiinlly two vcrhiil adjectives or participles. Thouyh their pro|)er-
lies are sonicwlint diircrciil iVoui those ol'parliciiilcs in oilier languajies. One is allirin-
nlive, and the other negnlive ; ns, luiliiiin, the alFirmntivc participle of hiikisa, and liit/i/iui,
the neijalive.
56. 'I'liere are nlso ihii'c verhal nouns Irom encli verb, having dilFerent significations;
ns, liiikiii, having a signilicali'in siinilar lo Ihi^ Lnlin gerund; lidkiniisli, v,\\\r\\ has
rt'li'rcMcc lo iho uhjcci or purpose to which a thing is upplii'd. The names given lo tiHijs
or inslrumenis previously unknown lo Ihe people are in this form. Thi' oilier noun
signifies the dixT of nn nclion ; ns, Inniidiral, mnker, from lianisha, lo make.
57. There is, nlso, in some cases, nn ndverhinl form, used in connexion willi oilier
words expressing Ihe ninnncr of an aclion ; ns, h<ikmniili liikiisliii, lie gin's seeing.
S"*. In Ihe active inlrnnsilive veil) there is often a dilliTinl li>rm slill. It is Ihe simplest
form of ihe word, Ihe root ilsill', and is iiMd in cnniiexion wilh kiishiiy lo go; ns, liiii
hikii^li, il lins gone dry, or, il has drieil up, ns n founlniii or slreniu of waler.
•")'J. If coiijug.-ilion is defined, as in Ih'lirew, as having reference to diU'erent forms of
the same verb, there may Ix; .sniil lo U' many eonjugalions in this language. 'I'lw^ active
inlransiiive and the active transitive, while lliey dill'er widely in llieir deelensions, have
nlso dilferent conjugnlions. The form terminating in oslm or iislm lielongs exclusively
lo Ihe liirmer, while Ihe u>(lecliv<^ lu'longs exclusively lo llie Intler.
00. 'I'he lliri'c firms mcnlioiicd in ^ 47 ns eonjugalions nr<' (l(Tived immedintely from
the ground-form luikisa ; und encli of Ihe eonjugalions lo lie nienlioued are similar to the
original ground-form, innsmuch ns they each have these three forms derived from them in
the snnie mnnner.
01. Tlie eonjiigntions nre ns follows :
OF THE ACTIVE INTRANSITIVE CljiSS.
Hisnmsd, is the ground-firm, which means, to he nngry; from this is formed,
Ifisamruks/ui, to lie angry townrds or ut, — which is nclive trnnsilivc, und may govern
an accus,itive.
N () irr 1 1 W K, S T K U N A M K KM" A.
/ir):}
i)K l-IIK ACIIVK niANSITlVK I'lA-iS.
ITiikisd, is the jiriuiiiil-liirm, rnmi wlii.li «<• hnvr i1m' liillnuiii^ :
rUiiiksik (|ilii.) iC(i|Huc;il ; — to src iMuh oilier. 'I'liis lonn is rrci|iirnlly used in the
8iiij;iiliir, striinyi' iis il in.iy seem. Il is i<( iimvl iVrijiicii! iK-cnrn'iicc in llii' wiml iiiisliti,
lo givi', mill tlidsc ()(' a siiiiiliir ini'iiiiiiii;, mid mciiis Io ri'i'i>i.'niso ii |iriiii'i|ili' of nrlioii
amoiiK llio |)c(i|)lc, wliicli is iihviiys Id cxpci-t ii riinin wliiii they uivo any lliiii}». They
know of fjivini.' ill nn Dllicr sense. When mie s|ie,ii<s Id anoiher ahoul any Ihini; which
he lias ;;ivcn him, il is, mli hmii jiiiiiiim, iiisli ail n{' (liiniini, •Mlial wliiili ymi fiave me."
liiii/>Sii, relleelive; 1 sei^ iny.seir. 'I'liis linin is iiiaile hy |ireli.\ins^ llie personal pro-
nouns, — as :
Dim,
hidk.vi
l.st person,
8il person, imaksa
3il person, ipniiLsn
PLr.
iiiimiiksih
imiiimikfih
imiitamaksih
S/iiij)tik.iii, cmisalivo; — lo cause lo see. In show.
M'liiksii, successive; — lo sn- in successimi, or one thini; after miolher.
Tiikiikm, lo see suililenly, or li>r a slmrl lime.
02. There is anolher li'rin which some words are enpalile nriakini;, which is also causa-
tive, hul it always has rell'rence lo an ellecl pruihicid hy language, — as, siikmisti, to
k/inir (llie groiind-rorin) ; /(i.snkii(i.sa, lo cause lo know liy liilkiiig to, &c.
63. 'J'here a— siane other preli.ves which are nlladied to some verhs in the same way,
and also some siMixes, — as, kiiliiiipnsiiishu, lo desire to see. Hut most of the sufli.\es
arc fragments of other verhs, which aii- sullixeil lo li>rni compounds almost without
numU-r.
01. There is one striking peculiarity in respect to the change ol" the verh, and other
words also, in giving an atrirmalive answer to a i|neslion. Instead ol' using an nllirma-
tive particle, it is 'jsual to re|ieat the verb belonging le the iiuestion in a ilill'eront form,
which makes a form ol assent throughnut the whole declension of the verb ; or, should
the word re|)ealed lie a noun, pronoun, or other part of speech, it also receives the same
variation. It is merely a change in the lermiiialion, or a syllable sutrixcd, the terminating
vowel lieing always ii. For instance, to the ipiesiion, init iikiildliisha! are yon not about
to go ] the aflirmalive answer will lie, kiitnttisliii ; so, iiiil akin .' nns. hiitkii.
Or». Almost any noun or adjective may iMcome a verb by changing its form or adding
a verluil snfli.x ; as, niisliiit, a chief, ipiioinioliiiliikalni,, he makes himself a eliief, or con-
ducts himself like a chief. Jliiiiiikiisli, great, — liimakaxliiri^/id, lo lie great, &c.
CO. .V paradigm of the verb is given, from which an idea may Ix' formed of the extent
of its variations. .Most of the conjugaliolis are declined in the same manner as the one
given. Some of them, especially the reciprocal and relleelive, dilier in some respects.
OF THE A n V E R n.
67. Adverbs are not numerous in this language. The manner nf the action is so fre-
quently expressed by the verb itself, that il supersedes the necessity of the frequent us<'
of the adverb.
130
554
I'll I I. () I.P(i Y.
69. One class orndvorlis is ilorivcil .iircolly IVdin vrrlw, nnd when this nclverb is used,
il is <lop"iMl<-nl on a vrrli. iiiid o ; ii'sscs the iimiiricr ol' tin- acti(.n ; lis if I nsk a nnlivc,
" minuiiiii/i tikuiiin '" "in wliiit wiiy did yiiii ('dini' !" ln' will iinswcr, "ifiliiitinih
kunt'i," '• I rniiK' on fi«il." Wiliiiniiih is iVntn llu' v<tI) iiihinixii, In wnlk.
6!». Then' an- also adverbs of time, !is, «■((/■«, now; imkrjxi, long ago; — of place, as,
tiiKi, herp; kumi, llioiv, nnd many ollicrs.
70. Thorx- are also those wliieli are used ns inierrogatives, nnd llieso all have the \)e-
ctiiiarity of eomniencing with iii, prolmMy from tin- interiogntive pronoun iiui ; as, Diana,
when? minii, wImtc? mas, how much? malahuiii, how many times? mti/uil, how
long 1 mii/oi/ius, how many hundreds .' d:<'.
OF r O N J II .N C^ T I O N S.
71. The simple conjiinelions are few in nnnil)er. Wiih, and, is used only to eonnect
words togollH-r, usually nouns. Kaiia is used to ennnert penlenres, hut seems also to
have n-lcrem-o to lime, or order of events, in the sense of" then," " and then." It receives
also some adjective terminations, as do also some of the adverbs, — as, kaiiama, bt^long-
ina to that time ; kitiuiJit, nt that same time.
Other conjunctions are, met, kiiiiel, but ; kit or Isaltivi, if; iiia/i, inaki, though,
although ; muin, notwithstanding, &.C,
OF INTERJECTIONS.
I'i. .\s in all liarbarous languages, interjections arc numerous, and frequently used to
express strong and sudden emotion. I-ia-a-a-iah is an expression of despondency or
Hes|Kiir, ic. A;c.
S Y \ T A X.
73. The following arc a few of the most important rules, concisely stated :
(I.) .\djcctives agree with their nouns in numlnT and case.
(2.) Vertis ugre»- with llieir noniiniilives in ninnlKr ainl jierson.
(3.) \euiir and ac-live inlraiisiiivc verbs, when possession is implied, take Ix'fore them
u genitive instead of a noniinnlive.
(4.) Active tnnsiiive verbs, when I'ollowi'd by an uccusative, always take a genitive
hrtbre them in lh<' third person, instead of a nominative.
(5.) The conjugation which signifies to perform an action for another, or in reference
to another, always lakes aOcr il an accusative of a persdu with a noininalive of a lliiiig.
(6.) As to the relative posiliun of words in a senlence, no very precisi' rules can be
aiven. The language admits of greater laliliule in trinsposilinn lliaii the lOnglish. The
lorm of wonls is so definite that the? gr.iniiiialical eouslriu'liou is easily determined without
reference to the n'lative |Kisitioii.
(7.) The adjective usually precedes the noun, and the verb is usually throwii into the
N O R T H W E S T K R N AMERICA.
555
latter part of the sentence, having the accusative before if.
last in the sentence.
Sometimes the nominative is
"The foregoing f^marks (says Mr. S.) arc siiUicicnl to give some idea of the language
of the Nez Perces. It cannot be o.\|>c(!t<'(l thut ii full grammar of it should Ix- given.
As yet our knowledge of it is limited, und res|)ecting some of the forms there is .still some
doubt. That other forms exist of which we arc ignorant there is almost a certainty."
Mr. Smith gives a paradigm of the s.inple vnrb htikisu, to see, conjugated through
all the modes and tenses, as well as in the directive and locative forms. Some idea may
be formed of the extent of the variations, and of the labour required in educing them,
from the fact that they occupy, in his essay, no less than liirly-six pages of manuscript.
And it is to be recollected that neither llu: six derived conjugations, nor the thrt,* forms
mentioned in § 47, of which they are all suscepliltle, are included in this parodigm.
A few of the variations will be given, to illustrate the preceding remarks; they have
been thrown into an order somewhat dilU'rcnt from that adnpled in the original, in order
to show more distinctly the system of transitions, or the mode in which the pronouns ore
combined with the verb, both as subjects and objects of the action.
Tho following paradigm of the substantive verb was written out by Mr. S. at my
reijucst, as likely to be a subject of some interest. It is in frequent use, with precisely
the force of the Knglish " to be," ns is evident from the example given in another part of
the grammar — ioh kali tsekukii ikiiin iiiwasii, — that which I have said is true. In the
third |)erson, singular and plural, two forms are given, the latter of which is used with
the genitive of possession (sec § 44).
DIRECTION TOWARDS.
im a* uriin
ipi liiivam
ima nik* vashinm
imtiM hiushinm
DIRECTION FROM.
in viish
im a* wash
ipi liiirash ; ipniin ush
It II II nil skill
ill! (I iilli* iiiishik
I am
thou art
he is ; it is his
we are
you are
imma liiiisliih ; iinmam they are; it is theirs
aiisliili
tcaiiika
a tciimka
Imvdiiikn
wasliiiiiiikii
iilli inis/iiiiiiikn
hiushi/iiiikti
RKcr.NT I'AST r-ENSK.
viikii ( pro. ^rnkn)^
a trnkit
liiiriikii ; awnka
viislirka
nth inislicka
liiiisltekii. ; iiiishekii
I have just been
thou hast, &c. &c.
RKMOTK PAST TKNSE.
ir'ik'i (|in). iriikii)^
I was
* 'I'lif [wrliclrs a and alh (or itth)^ wliich ;irt' the siijns of the sccuiu) jwrsim, fjinirul.ir and plural, are
hcrr (,'ivrn si'paratc troin thi' verh, as in tliot, iiistanceg occur where otiier wnrils are intrwlueed between
theni and the verb.
t These words will illuslrntc what has heen said (§ 11) of the advisability of introducing otlier vi>\vcl
sijrns iiit') the al|>hal>et.
HI
566
OIIIKITIDN TOWAIIIIS.
(J I'vinin
hi in I III It
unihiii'iin
iilli triislihiiiiii
hiiisliiniiKi
mrukam
hiirakam
p in L o L o a Y.
IIIKKtTIIIN KHOn.
RF.nnrE PAIT TENaE.
a iriikn
liitfiikii ; iiiiaka
iriishiiia
atli irashiiia
hiiisliiiiii ; misldna
LOCATIVE FOHM. (Scc§51.)
Iraki
awaki
liitfiiki
icnshiiiki
alh iriisliinki
hiiisit iiiki
RECENT PAST TEN8K.
tviikdkii (proii. nK-kaka)
It mikiikd
fiiirakaka
viisliinkitkn
ath iiiisliiiikiika
hiiisliiiiknka
RKMt>TE PAST TINBR,
irakikii
a wiikikii
liiviikikii
inisliiiikikn
Dill viifliiiikika
hiiisliinkika
The substantive verb is defective in the other tenses and modes, and they are supplied
from the verb witsashn, signifyinji lo bcrome, which is inflected as follows:
\\'i/siiiliii, to lx>come.
DIRECTION TOWARDS.
a witsnshnm
hiiilsiisluim
ath witsaMnm
hiulsr^hinm
DIKEITION FHOM.
PRRRRNT TENSE.
jril.1ll.shll
a uitmxlui
hiiiliii.shii ; nuistuha
irilsiishih
ath, irilsdnhih
hiiilS'ifliih ; 'litis —
I become
thou becomes!, &c
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
667
IIIRRCTION TOWARD*.
UlRKt^TlnN FROM.
rKurCOT TENIB.
tvilMsh
a witsnak
hitcilsush
jHiu-itsttsh
alh ptnvitsash
fiipiiicitiuuih
I hove become, or been
witsashamka
a u-it.mshnmka
hiiilsashumka
witiiuihiiimka
alh tiitsashinmka
liiiitsasliinntka
KECiNT r*aT Tixn.
witsiislidkn
aici/siis/uika
hiii/sinilidka
vilsHshrka
nllt vifxiixlirka
hiuts-vi/ieka
I have just become
mtsa$h(inia
icilmsliinnui
REMOTE PAST TINSE.
mlsashinia
witnasliimi
I (lid Ixx^ome
we did become
trilsama
pautsama
u-ilmiii
pautsaia
I became or was
we became or were
■witsaiukum
pautmiukum
PI.'TURK I.IDF.FINITI.
vitsain
pantsdiu
I shall become, or bo
we shall become, or be
witsatatnsham
witsatiUashinm
PREHENT rUTURK.
witsalaldsha
nit.iatii/iishih
I am abodt to become
we are about to become
tvitsdlafashamka
u'itsaUUashinmka
RECEXT PAST FUTURE.
mtsatnlashdka
%1-itsatHtdshcka
I wa^i just about to become
we were just about lo become
witsaldlashama
uitsatalasliinma
REMOTE PAST FUTURE.
uitsdfdtashana
witsatataskina
140
I was about to become
we were about to become
008
P H I L O L O U V.
Paradigm oftho verb hahnash, to see.
niRKCTln:< TOWARDS.
OIREt-riON FROM.
rRElONT TEN».
First Tr:in>Uion.
in a hiiki.m imana
in uki.iii iptia
in atli /iiikisa imutia
in annsluiksa immnna
I soe theo
1 wh; liim
I si'(! you
I sec I hem
im a hnksam ina
im a nksitm ijina
ill' itnaxluiksam niina
Socond Trnniiitioii.
im It akisa ipna
ihnii sccst mo
tliou scest him
thoii spcst ua
im anas/uiksam immuna im a minshaksa immnna tliuu scest them
w
Tliinl Transition.
ipuim hiiksnm ina hn srcs mo
ipiiim n luiksani imana ipiiim a linkisii imnna he sees thee
ijiiiim jMiksam ipna ipiiim jxiksa ijni'i ho sees him
ipnim hiiKishitkmin iiuiia lie sws us
ipiiim atli liiik.111111 imiina ipiiiiii alh Imkisii imiaia ho sees you
ipnim hinasluiksiim im- ipnim hiinishaksa immnna ho sees them
miina
Fourlli Transition.
nun II liiiksih iimina
nun (ik.sili ipna
mm iilli hiiksili iiiiunii
nun iiksi/i iininiina
Fifth Transition.
ima ath Imksinm ina
ima atk nksiiiiii ipna ima <ilk iiksili ipnii
iiiiu allt nashiiksiiim nuiia
inui atk aksinm immuna ima atk iiksili immumi
wc .see lliee
wc sec iiim
we si'o you
we see them
ye sec mo
ye see him
yo see us
ye see tliem
Sixth I'ransition.
immam haksinm ina tiiey sec me
immniii n haksinm imana iinmnm u liaksih imana they si'e theo
tmmiim jmksiiim ipna immain puk^ili ipna tliey see him
immam Uiiiashiiksinm nuna they see us
immam nth haksinm imiina immam nth hnk.sih iiiiuna they sec! you
immain paksinm immuna immam jniksih immuna they sec Ihem
^.JSam.
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
559
DIRECTION TOWARD!.
t/i a hnhnim imana
in iihnim ipiia
in aiMsluihnim iinmnna
DIRECTION TROM.
rMi'rcT TK.xar.
in a hakin imana
ill aluikin ijma
in anasliakin immnna
I hnvo seen thco
I have sccM liim
I linvo scfjii tliuin, Azc.
a haksamka
aksamka
anualuiksamka
RKCEMT rAIT TIM».
a haksaka
aksakn
anasluiksaka
I have just srcn theo
I Imvo just scH'ii him
I huvc just scon thorn
a haksama
aksama
anas/uikstuna
REMOTIt rA«T T«N«I.
a hnksiiiia
aksiniii
a/iashtiksa/ia
I (lid sro tlieo
I (lid soo him
I did sec ihom
a hahiiima
alitiiiiiii
anaslininui
toRIST TBNSI!.
a hdhna
aliti/i III!
anas/ia/i na
I snw lli(?c
I siiw liini
I 8IIW thi.'m
a haktatiisham
akiiihisliiim
anaihaktalasham
niKFKNT rrTl'RK TSNSB.
a hakliiliisha
akiuliit-ha
anashaklaliisha
I nm nlxiul to sec ihcc
I am alKiut to sec him
I am about to sec them
a hiihtiiikiim
ahiiiikinii.
aiiasliuhiiiikum
mvHK TINaK,
a hall nil
ah II II
anasliahnn
I shall see thee
I shall sec him
I shut! sec thorn
a liiiktafiishitmka
aktatasliiimka
aniislmlUulaslutmka
RKTENT PAST Ft'TL'RK.
« hiikliiliisliiika
aktiiliisliakii
(masltuhtiiliishaka
I was just nlmut to sec thoc
I was just alK)Ut to see hitn
I was just about to see them
a liiiklii/iishiima
nkt at II sill I III I
anusliaktatashama
RKMOl-E TAST PUTURK.
a hiiktii/iishana
aktal(i.\liiiiia
a/iasliiiktatashatia
I was alxiiit to see thre
I was abinit to sec liim
I was about to see them
in aksaiikikim ipna
ahmikikiiii
aksiiiikikimka
LOCATIVE FORM.
t« aksiiiiki ipna
ahiiiiki
aksaiikaka
I ace him (yonder ?)
I have seen him
I huvc just seen him
060
DIIir<'TIOM TOWABIM.
aksdtikikiimi
ahiiiikikikiniii
aktaUishdiikikim
aktiitinlintikikimka
<iktiititsluinkikiina
in olimiktim ipnn
ahiiiikiinikti
iihiKikdiiiti
nhiinkiiiiiikiiiii
I'll 1 I.OI.OU Y.
DIRECTION raoM.
tiksiitikikii
tihiiiikikikii
iikliUitalianki
I did M^ him
I Miw him
I am about to we him
(no IIRNKHtl. ri'TUHIC Tixn.)
aktiiliisliniikdka I wns just about to sco him
aktiitiisliiinkika I was about to we him
1-.4ITATIVK MODK.
nil mill
nil iKikiikii
nhnakniin
iilimikiiiin
I am wont to sn- him
I hnvc lately biM'ii wont to sec
hiiM
I wns formerly wont to sco him
I shall sec him occasionally
nhnnkankikim
iihiuiUiiii k ik i III kit
nliiiiikniikikima
kiik ill akinainh ipna
kum ill! iikiiiitmh
kit ijiiiiiii jmkiiiiimh
kiili iiiiii iijHikiiinmh
kiijxiin iiiiii ii/xikiiiiimh
kii iiiimii piiksiiiiiimh
kumak in hiikiiiamh
kum ipna "
kiipniiiiik in "
kupiim ijiiiim "
VIITATIVE MOni, Loctl'IVE FORM.
(iliiiiikiinki
iiliiinktinkiikii
ahnnkiiiikikii
■I'rroSITIVK MODI.
kiik ill iikiiiiih ipna
akinnh
piikiiiali
n/xikiikiiiali
njKikinnli
piiksiiniili
liakinali
I om wont to soo him yonder
I have lately, iVc.
I was formerly, &c.
if I SCO him
if thou sees! him
if he s«es him
if wo siv. him
if ye see him
if they see him
if I sec thee
if lie se»>s thee
if I see you
if he sees you, &c. &c.
Aomar nsac.
kuk ill ahnokunka ipnn aliiwhi
kuk in aksnnamh ipna
kum iin aksminmh
ku ijiiiiiii ptiksiiiinmh
knit mm iiksiiinmh
kupain imn nksinnmh
ku iniina jiaksinamh
SmJlNCTIVI MODI.
iiksntiah
aksannli
pakuniuili
aksiniili
aksinali
piiksinnh
if I saw him
I might or should see him
thou mightest sec him
he might sec him
we might see him
yc might sec him
they might sec him
aksanokumka
aksanoku
I might have seen him
f
N O R T 11 W E H T E K N AMERICA.
561
UIRKCTION TOWARUI.
akuuoihanamh
aktatoshanokumka
akiiiktiiniimk
aksiiktanokiimkn
akliiUi.sliiiklaiiamh
iiktaUtsliukUmokumka
halinim ina
haJmimth ina
ntiiliaiinim niina
nailiiihiiimth nuna
nlmim ipnim
ahninuh ipna
UIRKITIIIN FHOM.
KMICNT rUTUM.
aktiUatlmiiiih
MIT rVTUIII.
aklatdshaiinka
LOCATIVE romi,
iikaaktana
iik.itiktiiiinka
aklatiisluiklaniih
uktiilitskiikta nokii
IMrUATIVB MODI.
ii/iakim ipna
akilh ipna
mriNiTivi MODI.
luihnash
I may soon wo him
I might hnve seen him
I miijhl SCO him yonder
(Aorisi)
(l'^('^M•nt Future)
(I'uat l-'ulurt')
i(xil( (thou) at me
look (yr) nt mc
look (thuu) at us
l(K)k (yo) at us
look (thou) at him
look (yc) at him
to see
ll
5. THE WAIILATPU FAMILY.
(O. Waiilutpu. P. MoMe.)
The first of these vocabulorics was taken under the supervision of Dr. Whitman, and
is undoubtedly correct j the sc<'c)n(l wns obtained from a iiotive during a single interview,
and [xissibly contains some errors.
From the long and close companionship of this tribe with the Nrz-Perces, some words
of the iSahaptin language appear to hnve l)ccn adopted into their own. This may, per-
haps, account for the similarity which will be obscr>cd in the niimomis and the prjnouns,
while in all other respects the Inngungcs seem to be |)erfectly distinct. We hal no time
to obtain any particular information rcs|)ccting the structure of tin- Waiilntpii, but were
assured that it diflcred radically from that of the Sahaptin. The following examples of
plural adjectives arc given in the vocabulary :
yiiumua, great
sitaitt, good
ludsfu, bad
pi. yit/tmu
pi. sasuatii
pi. laluiistu
There is also a dual of the second person, nkimi^, which does not exist in the Sa-
haptin.
141
562
P II I L O L O O Y.
6. THE T 8 H I N ir K FAMILY.
((^ Walf^lula [1. Wutf.ltdii; m. Sipiloilif]. II. 'I\i>nik,[\\. Tliniik; o. Tf/dtsiip;
p. Wdkiiikiiiu.])
Tlio niimi'roiw vnrialinim in iIh'ho vooiibiilnrics, Ix-xidcs llmsi^ which "|>rin;i frcini
(liiiii'cliral ilitli'n'riccs, niiiNl lie iiscrilicil, in part, to the cxIri'Mic iiiiliNtiiictiii'ss in (he
pruiiiinriation, in which <; and t, k and i:, d and I, an<i even /// anil />, nrc cniiNlantly
ronlc>undo<l, and in pari to grannnntical chan)2r.s in the llirin of word.'*, indicating auine
dilTenMico ol' incaning, ns in iiikp/'it, mouth, il^kii^/ii/, my month, iic.
So cxtri'incly dilViciilt \k the pronnnciation ol' many of the sounds and cnmliinationii of
oiomonts in this lnii^na;;c, that liirci^ncrH seldom atlr'mpt to acipiin' it, NotwilhHtaiiding
the closi' intercourse whii'h has lieen iimintained with this peoph." hy traders and settlers
lor more than thirty years, only one instance is known of a whilo man having lenrneil to
s|M>ak the laniiuajie with (liiency. This man was n Cimadian, who went to the country
in Mr. Astor's first expedition, and has remained there eviT since. In the course of a
long iMness, during which he was nursed by the natives, he chose to occupy himself in
ncipiiring n knowledge of their tongue, and hy so doing olitaiiied no little celebrity among
both foreigners ami Indians. The extreme dilliculty of learning this speech has proludily
iK-en one of the causes which have given rise to th(! curious "jargon," which hih for
many years liirmed the usual medium of communication lietween the traders and the
natives, and of which an account is given in another place.
The consonant sounds in the language are r (or s), k (or p), /., I, m (or /<), «, /), 7, t,
and (/•.
So liir as our knowledge extends, the Tshinuk seems to lie still more remarkable for
the variety of its forms than either the Selish or the Sahnptin. In the pronouns, for
exainple, it has not only the dual, but also, in the first person, both of the dual and
the plural, a twofold form, one excluding, and the other including, the parly addressed.
We find also, in one dialect (if not in all), two pronouns of the third person singular,
masculine and leminine, a distinction which is not made in many of the Indian tongues.
The following arc the i)crsonal pronouns in the language of the l'pi)er Chinooks, or,
Watlalas.
•INOI'LAR.
nitikit, I
iiiiiikd, Ihou
iii/kii, ho
DUAL
tuliiikii, we two (ex.)
t/.nik(i, we two (inc.)
»iiliiik<(, ye two
i^ld/.kii, they two
tili^dikii, we (exc.)
til/aika, we (inc.)
niriiikd, ye
t/.ldili^kii, they
The possessive pronouns are, as in Selish, particles joined lo the nouns. They are the
same, except for the first person, as the two or throe first letters of the |)ersonnl pronouns.
With itiikiil/U or iliikuut/lv, house, they make —
SI\aCI.AH,
kukiriU/l or kiiki'it/l, my house
DUAI.. ri.VTIAI..
>idnkwit/.l nt^iiknil/./, our house (cxc.)
^aiM«*i.n'm
NOR T II W K H T K UN A M K R I C A.
063
mi'tikwilfl, lliy hmiiw
iakivil/t, liJM I1UU80
ni'ti.. ri.iiii«t.
i/»kiiii/l iil/iikwii/l, our hniiiio (inc.)
milakiril/l tii^iikinl//, ymn liimw;
ii-lakiril/l t/Mikwit/.l, llieir liouso
Tlio lirst iM'rHiiii '\H Hiimclinii'ii I'xpn'HMi'il by iVy, niiil tim iiccond by imi ; an. il^gil^,
my iiiwc, iiiiiiti/^, lliy ii<>»p, iiinili^, \\\* rmsc, iVr,
In llio Nnnii! wny v<>rlHi nml vcrUil iiiljccrivr-i Inki- ttii'si! prrCixon, to fcirni tho vurious
inni'ctliins (iir niiiiibiT iiiid ihtmiii. TIiih IVdiii /'.m, cold, wllli Afii/., which lecinit to be
UHcd U!< lui iiu.xiliury, ur |iorhu|is u aubiilantivi' v(tI), uru luniu.'d —
iKiikii li'inii/kriif , I mil rdld
tmiika Irirtimkiii/., llmii art cold
iii/kii (rikatji., he is n>lil
Diinl.
niltiika l^irtnilkcn/.
lyjiikii Irirlkea/.
vutaikii ti,imi'ki'iif.
i^ta/.ku t^ii;lkm/.
riiiral.
nti/tikn li^i^n iili;keuf., wii nro oold (nxc.)
o//.(iikii li^iliikraf., wn aro cold (inc.)
tmiiikii ti^iriimrkiii/ , ye arc cold
l/.lail^ka t^i^ul/.lkeaf., they ore cold
titkni/.l naika ti;iiiiitkiii/, yi'Hlrrdny I was cold
Uiknt/l nlraikd tt^iriiiilrlkru/, yistirday we were cold (exc.)
Uikiit/.l ulf.aika l^itintkni/., yesterday wo were cold (inc.)
(It will bo seen that this tense ditfors from the present merely in the insertion o( at
before toi/..)
ruTi)»«.
at/./ki- vtiika t^iijnn/Mlkn, liy ami live I shall lie cold
iit/.lkr mliiikii tririnnl/iitkn, liy and liyc we two shall \yc cold (cxc.)
iit/./ki- t/aikit t^i^iiZ/iilkii, by and bye we two shall lie cold (inc.)
Ill /Ike mdiiika t^ii^iiinfMtkit, by and bye y(! two will Ixi cold
tit/lkc iiii^tiikii Irirnmr/dlka, by and byr ye (pi.) will lie cold
nl/.lki' lf.lnili,kii /(,i(;iit/.//iitkii, by and bye they will Ik) cold
In all the preceding words, tlii- ^<«'; may Ijo st'pnratcd and placed at the end ; as,
naika viir/iilka l(;i^, I shall lie culd, clr.
The traiisilivc inflections arc as ilisliiict in this lani;imi'c ns in the Sclish, and more
numerous, inasmuch as lln'y comprise iho iliial, ami llie double plural of the first person.
The following examples will sullice to show the existence of these forms :
P II I L O L O O V.
iiminotrii/tuii, I kill thee
I^Dimriifiiia, I kill hi in
iimtkimmiigiiti, I kill yrni two
Vi,lkiiiouOiiuii, I kill Ihrin two
um^kiiimrnnim, I kill ymi (pi.)
ot]i.lkinoirnitiiii, I kill Ihcm
iimfkiiruf:iiii, ye kill him
nl/./kiwiif!Uii, yc kill lliccn.
Tho Ix>wcr or pni|H'r Txliiniik wi'in« to ilillir I'rnm llip lYl"'' ("r Wallnln) ralhcr in
words llinii in Krniiiirinliciil |ii-dili>irilipt. In lh<> ilialrrt of U'liknikrim, Iho pronouns
nm ni'iirly llir hiiiiii- hh in llint of Wntlnla. I'nr lir, howovrr, wim ^ivpn iii/i', nnil lor
tlir, icii/''.
Of ninny «f lh<' noiin* no pliiriil form coiilil lie iliurovcrrd. Soinc of iIms name* of
living Ix'ingn lind ii plural trrniinnlioii in uk$ or uk^, but thin wan not iinivrmal :
tflikula, man, (vir)
kiittdti, lioriie
t}<tkamokt, dog
pi. Iflikalatvukt
kiiiliinukf
tkiimoktukt
Some of tho plumU wore nltogclher irrrgulnr : ns —
knlfli'liktim, man (homo)
t/laktl, woman
tj^lkutkut, boy
pi. Uleknm
tiinnmtiks
tktuotinoks
7. A K A t. A P Y A.
This vocobnlsry wnii oblainod from two nntivcn of the tribe, one of whom wn» a youth
oduriited by Ihf missionarii's at the Wullnnnm'l station. The language is roD and har-
monioiiH. The 7 r.nd ^ iMTur, but not very often, and the Inllcr is frequently softened
to an /(. The other ronsonants nro f (or i),f,j, k, I, m, n, f, p (or b), t or il, and ir.
The Kalapuya \» i-hiedy remarkable fiir the gn-nl changes whioh its words undergo in
their grnminatieal variations, — leaving often very little Iraee of tho root or ground-form.
This is so<-n, in some degree, in the noun, but mon' partieularly in the verb, the form*
of which ap|M-ar to lie not less numerous than in ibe Snbnptin.
Tho dun! and double plural do not exist in this tongue. The personal pronouns arc —
«{•« or /f li, I
niiilia or man, thou
kokit or kak, he
solo, we
miti, yo
ktniik, they
The following examples will show the jMssessive adjuncts, and the manner in which
they arc combined with the noun :
N O l( T II W y. H T K II S A M K III C A.
6M
^^^^ rimnn, my fnlhrr
mnliii liiihtii.'i, lliy I'allirr
kok tutjum. Ilia I'lithur
l^i riiiiii, my iiiuiliir
niiiliit kiiiiiii, til}' iiiiitlirr
knti iniiiiiim, hit niollKT
tnti) tii/iiDi, our fiilhflr
;;/!/» lifiitii, ymir liilhrr
ktiiiik iiiifiim, their liithcr
.i(rf(/ fun mm
iiiiti Imiiiin
kiiiiik iiiiiiiiiiii
/('i tiikira/iik, my I'vo
w/(i/«/ jiiikini/iiL, thy i>yo
Xi'A iiiliiKiiiiliil,, Ills eye
l/V(//( likiriiliik, iiiir ryi'K
iiiitiii lihiiiildk, yniir rym
kiiiiik iiii/.iiii/iik, their eyPM
((i IHtiimiti or liiiiiitiiii, my lioiisn
niiiliii jiiiiMiiiiii, thy hoiiHi!
^')A° iiiimmiii, hix liouw
»«/« liiniiiKii, oiir lioii*o
>////( liiitniiii, your lioietn
kiiiiik iiiiniMiii, their hnii*
No iiilleetion or li^'ii to iiidicnlo pltirnlity eoiilil Im' ijiscovered lither in Iho noun or the
idjeelive.
Thi^ I'ollowini! !•< the eonjuniilinn ol'the im liter Mil) illniin, to W siek ;
/ji Hfiiliii^ I inn sii'k
»«/l/ illiiliii, thou iirt nick
i/liihn, he in nii'k
/';|V» l//';/i we lire siek
iiiti^ij) illiij, ye II rr! niek
kiiiiik ill i/li'l, lliev iiri" siek
ilfntiii li,i kiii/i, I WHS sicL yeilenliiy
iiiikii i/liiliii, llioii w.isi ^iik
//(/ i/liiliii, he was siek
lii/i ill'ij, «e uiro sii k
iiiikiiji ilfiijs ye were siek
kiin lll'ij, thev were siek
miilji liiillit Irii, lo-inurrow I shnll lie siek hfi ilfil, we slinll lio siek
" liiill'il inaliii, " thoii will iK'sii'k /((/</' (//(V, VI' will Im' siek
" kiillil, " lie will lie siek kiiiiik in ilfit, thev will ls> siek
imgk /(,//. iljiilit, I mil mil siek
irnf)k iiiiiiik ilfnlil, limn iirl mil siek
" illiiliii kiik, he is imt siek
xrnilk SDliik liil/nf, we uro not sick
vniik nii/iiik fiii/fiif, ye nrc not sick
" kiiiiik itiii/lnf', thev nre not siek
Akini, liiiii, has the liillowin" vnrtnlions:
ktnlit, it rains
riikii \lil, ilis's il mill !
iiniik kinlil, il docs not min
Ixikinlil kitiili,ikiiii, it rained last ninhl
his kihiiiiknil. presently it will rain
ir.iiik liis kniiii/iiktrit, il will not rain sikhi
Ilia kiliikwiuntil, presently it will tease mining
112
566
PHILOLOGY.
The following oxnmples will give some i<lpn of the syslom of transitions in this lan-
guage, and of the cxtriiordinnry chnngrs which the words iindorgo. It certainly would
not be supposed, without such evidence, that himkunUi and ttiUtat were merely inflec-
tions of the same verb.
tfill^Mit^itfip malia, I love thee
t^itnphil^iio kok, I love him
hbnlJpinli^iiciilit t^ii kak, ho loves ino
hiiiii^itapint^iifala tpi, dost thou love me ?
trihotairop trii, I see thee
« chotn/i trii, I ice him
lihiiki/liiilon kok, dost thou see him ?
hi/iikii/iiiM^itfon f>;ii, dost thou see rnc?
Iihiikiihoinn kiniik, dost Ihou see Ihom ?
kinuk himkuiihotuii, do they see thee?
sif kok, give him
jf'/i/o soto, give us
^ini/i kiiiiik, give them
eia piitctip nui/in kiiska keiitaii ? w ho gave thee that horse ?
i^imma tnitu kolvtat trii, my fathi'r gave it to me
mei/Ji tikiiMfi, to-morrow I will give it to him
" fdkiimti rimiiKi, thou wilt give it to my father
kitii.rt ho will give it to me
tatititt Ihou wilt give it to me
tiMip I will give thee
kihliiip he will give thee
eia hitiikimi/i, to whom didst thou give it?
hiiii/i i^iiiniia, I gave il to my father
wit]/k trii keck tiiiii/ili, I do not wish to give it to thee?
Of the remaining voonlinlarics little can be said beyond what may be gathered from
the vocabularies. In the langii.igos of Klj and Xctela a few examples of plural and
pronominal forms were obtained, which may bo worlh preserving.
uoiDit, man
klt(, house
hai/., mountain
i^-of, wolf
tihfiiuait, good
l^inui, small
yup%/.a, black
pi. iroroiot
pi. /.//./>'/
1)1. /iiiliiii/.
pi. I'lOlt
pi. til iirait
pi. t'jiriniii
pi. II II pi nut
KI J.
toki'tr, woman
jiait/.tiiii; bcw
icusi, (log
pi. lutokor
pi. jHipait/.iiar
pi. iraiisi (qu. wdtcasi ?)
iiinlmi, bad |)1. ninmn/iai
iiriiinitiii, white pi. rnuiinot
kfvaiio/a, red pi. kiiuii/.dnat
ninak, my father
ayoiuak, our father
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
567
monak, thy fnlhor
anuk, his liitl— .
nikin, my house
miikiii, thy house
tiki)j<i, his house
siiol, star
N E T E L A.
asoinak, your father
?
ei/okw, our house
tisnkiju (I), your house
jmmokitii, their house
pi, siilitm
The following words apponr to bo nlso in the pUiral, with the possessive tin/ prefixed :
Jiopii/ii III, cyvs (my); vaiiakdiii, cars; nikUialtim, cheelts ; ;/«/a/i«/o»i, hands ; iieti-
mrliim, l(necs.
wj'Xi, my house
om aki, thy liouse
jwki, his house
110/., my boat
om onii/., thy l)oat
onqmmif. (qu. jmni/.), his boat
trnniki, our house
nmniii oniki, your liousc
oiiipomki, their liousc
tt;oiin/., our boat
omimi onii/, your boat
omjx))ii)/., their bout
The similarity which exists Iwtween many words in these two lanj;ungcs, and in the
Shoshoni, is evident ouougli iVoin a comparison of the vorabulaiies. The resemblance
is too great to be attribute:! to mere casual iulercouise ; but it is iloubil'ul whether the
evidence whicli it ati;)rdswill justify us in classing them tog(-thcr as Iranchcs of the :faine
fumily. The fact that the; Conianclies of Texas spcaU a language closely allied to, if not
identical with that of the Shoshonees, is supported by testimony from so many sources,
that it can hardly be doubted.
REMARKS ON THE V O ( A B U I, A R I E S.
The list of words was intended to be the same as that adopted by Mr. Gallalin, in his
Synopsis of the Indian Tril)es of .North .\nierica; but some omissions and varialifms have
been made for dill'erent reasons. Among others, the words for (iml and l",vil ."Spirit have
l)cen omitted, because it was lound that lliesi' languages (at least, the lirst ten of which
vocabularies were made) possessed no proper indigenous terms llir Ihcse ideas. Since
they have been taught by the whites to speak of a good and evil principle, lliey desi nate
them by compound terms, drawn usually from the relative situalious which they have
learned to a.ssign to them, — in the heavens above and in the internal egioiis. Thus, in
the Selish language, dod is expressed h\ Xiii-slv-jm/jm/o/, ot "the Old .Man above,'"
and the evil spirit liy /aid. nirot, the " bad Ix'low." In tlii^ Hahaplin they have, in like
manner, (iki'ini-kiiiikit and hii/iikiiiiku, meaning, the one i.liove, and the one Ik'Iow.
As has been liefon^ ii'marked, all the vocafailari s are not to e regarded a.s eipially
authentic and accurate. Those of the S<'lish, Skitsuish, I'iskwaus, Sahaptin, W'alawala,
nnd W'aiilatpu, may be looked upon as correct, having IxHin taken down with the assistance
56S
I'lrr i-o L()(i Y.
ol'iho mi^sioimrirs. The Tsihailish, Nsictslmwus, Tshinuk, niul Knlnptiyn niny nlso, wo
think, lie <lc|>i'nil«l ii|Min. The others wore mostly received (rom single iiidividuiils of the
sovenil Irilies, or ("rom iiitcrprt'tcrs, mid have iiol iherel'ore hiul those iidvanlnj^es of com-
pnri^in nnd ri'visnl which aluiie iiisiir<! iicrlci't acciiracy, ilut the great mass of words in
all has |ir«t>:ibly Utn rightly understood and wrillen.
TlR'r<- an' certain words, however, in all llie vocahidaries, whieh are not exact transla-
tions oI'iIh' Kii^llsh words under which they stand. This is es|ieeially the case with nil
generic di'iioniinnlions. 'l"|ie words yiven liir tiri\ siinhc, /lin/, Jis/i, si^nil'y in most cases
mervly si>me s|>eeii's l>elon);inj; to these classes, — as, j)ine, riitz/i'siiakr, jiifteo/i, sii/iiioti,
Arc. In many instaiiiis, where the natives were made to iiiiderstaiid the meaning ol' the
English word, they dirlan'd that there was no corri'spondiii;; term in tlieir own dialects.
The \v..rd "liven in the .S'lisli V(Kaliulary llir lish, viz., siiniiuil/l, eom|ireliends all ani-
mals which inhaliit the water, IkJii;; derived from siiinf/hra, which means water. ir<//'«-
tUUrti, the Sahaptin word liir W/v/, means properly " the winded animal." The terms
loirn, irnrrinr, fiirnil, must nlso Ik' reckonc^l amoli;; those whose va;;ue or generic cha-
racter Mkikes it dillicult to obtain an exact translation into the Indian languages,
li". as souH-times h.iii|ii'iis. there exist two terms for man (answering to vir and lionio),
thi'y will usually Ix' found, the liirmer imder iikiii or /iiis/miii/, and the latter luider " In-
dian, native." In iii'iieral, however, there was no means of ascertaining with precision
IIk' existence of this ilisiindion.
For llic words /«//«•/■, iiioIIk r, sister, hroflicr, there will he observed n profusion r>f cor-
respfinding term* in the Indian languages. This arises from three circumstances well
kniiwn to philologists : — lirstly, the fact that the sexes use dill! rent terms to designate
these ndatiiins; schouiIIv, that the vocative, or the word used in addressing a relation, is
otlen entirely ditti-reul iVom thai employed on oilier iMVasioiis; and, thirdly, thai the
Iniiians an; accustomed to designate the elder brother and sisti'r by dillirent terms iVom
ilh>se iw<l for the younger.
Tlie words given lor spriiiSs siiiiimrr,iiiiliiiiiii, trhiter, t\i) not ot'len correspond exactly
with the Knglish terms. They are sometiun's properly iIk; names of certain months
in th"S«> seasons; in other cases, they signify merely intnii and cu/i/. Mniiiiin: and
frrniisu have in every language, as in iMiglish (moniiiig, daybreak, dawn, sunrise), so
many corn»s|v>ndiiig expressions of slightly dillirent iiieanings, thai ill general it was a
matter of chance if exactly the same translation was olitained in any two allied dialects.
TIh* same may lie said oC f/i/fri/, the Indian words lorwhicli signify rivrr-liottnin, riiriiie,
(kll, and sometimes ilni rratir-coiirsr.
The distinction of o/'/, as ii'^cil nni\ as tiol iinr, is generally made in tlu- Indian Inn-
guaiies, and is somelimes pointed out in the vocabiilariis. Hut (iir i/oiai^, in many cases,
no word was lout; I but that signifying sniiill. This was the case in the iSahaplin, where,
had any such word existed, it would uni|uestionably have been known to the mission-
It is remarkable that, in several of the languages, the samewiird is employed to signify
both iirstrrilaii and in-mormrr. The meaning is determined by the construction, usually
by ihe tens*" of the verb.
The third jx-rsonal pronoun was, in general, dilTicult to obtain, nnd the word by which
it is remfc-red in some of the vocabularies, prolwhly means rather tluU or litis.
The numbers aliove five could not, in several instances, b<! obtained with certainty,
.nnd in some not at all. This w»s the case in many of the southern dialects.
SYNOPSIS.
FAMILIES.
1, Tahkali-Umkwa
2. Kitunaha
LANGUAOES.
A. Tnhkali (Carriers)
B. TInlskanai ....
DIALECTS.
C. Utnkwtt (Umpqim)
D. Kiliinnlin (Coiilanirs, I'lut-bows)
hu Shusliwnpunisli (Shiisliwnps, Ainnhs)
r
Northern Brnnch .
3. Tsilmili-Sclish
4. Sahaptin
6. Tshinuk
7. Kalapuya
8. lakon .
9. Lutuami
10. Sasic .
11. Pnlaihnih
12. Shoshoni
13. Satsikna
14. Nootka
16. 1
10. Kizh .
17. Nctcia .
F. Selish (Flathcntls)
r>. Skitsuisli (CuMir d'nlfene)
. II. I'iskwniis (I'isrnus)
Midille Branch . I. Skwalc (Nusqually)
t J. Tsihnilish (Chicknilis, Chills) .
Western Branch <
' K. Kawclilsk (Cowelils)
L Southern Branch L. Nsici.shawus (Killninuks)
M. Sahnptiit (Ncz-l'crfes)
' N. U'ulawala(VVallawallas) . .
5. Waiilatpu j °- .Y""'"'''" (^^'"1"^°"^. C^yuse)
Q. Watlala (Upper Chinooks)
U. Tshinuk (Chinooks) . . .
S. Kalapuya
T. lakon (Lower Killamuks)
U. Lutuami (Tlamiitl, Clamets)
V'. Waste (SImsties)
VV. Palaihnih (Pnlaiks)
X. Shoshoni (Shoshonees, Snakes)
Y. Wihinasht (Western Shoshonees)
Z. Satsikaa (Blackfect)
Kwoneatshiitkn (Newittee)
San Kapliael
San tinl)ri(!l
San Juan Capcstrano
14S
a. TIatsknnai
h. Kwnlhioqua
c. ICullespelm (Ponderays)
d. Tsakailsitliu (Spokan liids.)
e. Soaiatlpi (Kettle-falls, <.V:e.)
f. Tsihnilish
jr. Kwaiantl
h. Kwi'iiuiwitl
i. Pclus (Pclooses)
j. .Iiiakrnin (Yakcnias)
k. TIakatat (Klikatats)
1. Watlala (Cascade Inds.)
in. Xihaloilih (Ucheloots)
n. Tshinuk
o. TIntaap (Clatsops)
|). Wakaikain (Wahkyecums)
(|. Kalapuya
r. Tuhwalati (Follaties)
570
PHILOLOGY.
MAN.
WOMAN,
BOT.
I
A.
(lliii (temiee)
<f(7.o (s7i«j'a)
i/iiii<is
B.
]/.aiuine; Uiiitsen
Isitikciii; (b.) tMit, (n)
tsi'iike
Itiiiii; (b) skiyi; (a) a^t-
kira-tiitsin
C.
titsaii; tune
i/.e
s/.(iie/.e
2
D.
lltqurl; vajin
ptl/Jki
nn(/al/./ndna
3
i;.
knhiiii/.; skaelenni/.
siiiiiiit/Jitfk
/iiiinrtviU ; y^i^'.'nritin
p.
skalUimvy.o ; skult(tmiy.n
snmtiiim; (c) takut]f.li-
mtlifM
skoknsta ; tetoit
G.
skiiiltcmu)!.
suinicin
kokivdasa
11.
skalOnniy.o
suiiiiinu
tiiiiii
I.
SlUDir
sl/liiilai
Sllllll/i^
.1.
slii/.ii ; slfipt
skiiKjIrnl/.l; (h) staksc
yaiiq
K.
iiuiir//./iii>i<i/.; sit^tamay. h'lvilf.l
kiriii'il/.l
L.
taiilalio; taiklf.6)^.
sitit/Jdts; tsiiil/.Mts
tasika-kn nuu-in ; rrnsti.
has.siil/.l
4.
M.
hiuiia
ui'it
hit.sual
N.
won-; irin^;
Itlaki; (k) aiat
tti]f.twt^amiit ; (k) aswan ;
(isit-al
5.
O.
yiiinit
pi?U/./kniu ; wat/.l(Hi
Idiitlmj
1".
uii, idi
luijil/lai
miiidts, kw'vytn
6.
u.
tf.kkuUi, t/lkiila
t/.lkiikilak
t/./kaskirs; iut/.lku
K.
l/./tkii/a; kotf^kliktim
t/.lakcl
tf.lkiiskiis; (o) Ikaskui
7,
S.
titi^iUjgo
piiiniudike
mlinlim
8.
T.
knh
t/.Liks
tyMm-f.ato
e.
U.
hi^uuUas
ipuurats
kitskanii^o
10.
V.
MCdlikoti
taritsi
atoku'tayi.
u.
W.
yaliu
UllltluitSCH
ialiiitsin, yaitUsa
12.
X.
tiika
kiri' If
tiiitsi, tiiwitsi
Y.
nana; ndl
moyoni, luqaqa
niilsi
13.
Z.
ninito
akiiia
pnkuo
14.
tfJeti'u/Momak
15.
lamantiya
kii/aij
16.
uoroil
tokor
kiviti
17.
yiits
SUfflcul
anuiitckc/a
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
571
1. A.
B.
C.
•i. D.
3. E.
F.
O.
n.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
5. O.
P.
6. (i.
U.
aiRL, ixrANT; child,
<j'(7.(V(s bci/r (i;hutun)
tscki'slc; itiit; (b) skiyete astixjice
ill
}iaiik)id)ia
kaio ; mir^/.e
tsiikoHunii/.l-kiimo
PATIIXR.
apa (ajijid)
mama; (b) stda; {a)ivata
or ta
stauli ; itta ; ^tan/i
titiinis ; my — katito
f.n f.nf.oUmi tsnkt/.lmila kiilsa, kiiti^n
^aiilinii ; fif;iitam; (e) a./.tiill; d/.teli; (e)oa/.ti/i liiuiis (by mon) ; miistu-
stvKjititnif.
^iiitiim o(i/.tell or a,/.taU ;
kiaiina wa/trll
sl/.hit/.Ui'lai sy,uqrt/.l
■/.tiiiq sqaiiail/.l
Isktcaiil/.l ; t^it.ikwaiil/.l kiciiiinit/.l
sika kfi itinviii ; itqdUilj^ keiudis, kcawdis
pitin viidnts ; miapkauip
to/.anct; (k) putiniks tniditu^- ; n-aptai
stnii/Jinj; stuMip
kirCiiiiisa
lid/eq
skill/la
kiiUikiila; kuqdsa
t/./ahiild(lik{;
iiiirs (by women)
pijiii.s ; maalfimiis
liiniis ; inmeii^tuni
Ikui
kd/lcns ; (h) teulis
komd ; lamdiiawe
Iliad (by men); nti^oii (by
women) ; tawoivds
])i^t ; nalot
Pi'il ; (k) ti'itas ; natiita
J>illt<t ; tilra
2)uttih-a ; tutUg
t/.hr/.ldm ; winam ; (m)
t^iinidma ; tvindmie
//./dliij; (o) okoskas; (p) ct^amiks; (p)ska/.akeik6/. t^liamdma ; (p) cmam
tikdskas
7. S. api/iiia awejx, awiijx
8. T. t/Janksaiva vinhaitc
0. U. kitskdni^naicats kistka
10. V. tiiritsik tii/.ea/.
11. W, iimtaidltsin ; mimaiiitsa tsdiikdlii
12. X.
y.
miintsats ; naia
tsid
ira
oltd
13. Z. kdkwa
ennksllsipokao
sima; kdkam (ihy)
stnitd
kauktigap
waii, katsiiaii (my)
upiii
uiid
iiiiid (my)
14.
15.
16.
taf.ai
17.
iKiiritinal
yokeko
api
andk
572
PHILOLOGY.
1. A.
B.
C.
(iiiiiiinigcool)
fiaa; (b),«Hdwa; (n)
mill
tinlu ; fkdka
wa-
(eki)
sikskiiii ; (b) itittine
d/.kiiiin
fhd)j(t ; s/.('n
•(a)
bdat (<iijei/e)
sikuteS'dt ; (a) iiadt
S'at.-f\U:0)
2. D.
iiiaiiis; kama
ka>iitit/.ldkna
kalit/.lndmu
3. E.
F.
G.
[(.
1.
.1.
K.
L.
kt/.a
skiiis (by inon); tfimtrs
(l)y woiiien)
askiirrs; timika
^kiii
SOfJO
kuj^s
kiitii, stanawe
ullUi ; l/./niit^6in„t; t)t./a-
liiiriis
s/m/iic
I'/.iiiliii
i]f.ailikira
(^d/iii
sh-islifu
(i)itis ; (h) listqwennjms
S/Jifl
Umsiiotia; titsuon
siindum ; snmdiim
mA/.OHH,/. ! (e) ndf.onof.
iioy.oiiof.0
fsiiku-ug
(;iniis
krivilfJ or kmrity.!
t/Minsikas, ((^ugds; nl^i
kds
4. M.
N.
jiikd ; iiiUs; ilsrt lianm ; my — intrm-dm
pii\;d; (k) itfla; nditj^/as um
itriipna
5. O.
1'.
]irtiin; nitl^a
iptks; iia
i/idiii
idty^lam
int/L/kuio
lugit/lni
6. (1.
R.
H'niiik; dk/.o; (m)
H(ik<;
t/.lianda; (p) t^dmci
wd
kf.
it^ikikal
itsa/. rkal ; tjtcdp ;
akukekal
(P)
kakilak ; vknkekat
uiaj~ck(il
7. .S.
sixiii; kanni (thy)
leil
put
8. T.
t/la
SUIISlt
sint/.ldks (my)
0. U.
nnkompkisvp
10. V.
iiii/dt/t.i
11. W
tatii
iluidiii, katsuidiii (
my?
lume, katsidiirne
12. X.
Y.
13. Z.
pia
pia
idkistsa
kiiiiia
iktimd
nummi (my)
uipui
norikwe
nUu/.kman
14.
15.
10.
17.
una
imk
tlOIJO
diL
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
673
1. A. (n/aze)
B. tikaU-Uintstl Husla ; (b)
j/aase ; (n) tie
C. ^d^ai ; jijie or ^ie
2. D. a^kdlj^Uis
3. B. skiisail
V. skoAosai ; nkokosudlt
G. tiskosdd
II. df;kiisa.i
I. niiniida; tiilxula
J, kulon f Uinumdt; (h)
nvmiut
tuniiivCin; tnladkat/.l
/uistrafdmiats ; midots
tdUt ; (k)Wto; iwtf'ji
vdi
train; gii^atfici
it{i)Ldn ; imif.an ; (m)
it^'f.dn
ets/>/.a ; et^O^na ; (p)
ilsuft.dn
{edchi) (echill)
siku-tsvkaida; (\i)tzee suskdtte/. ; (b) dietze;
(a) slsee .limine (a) sonaka
ite ; ji* itlHlc ! (it/.le
kdiue (my)
A-aM/t (my)
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
6. O.
P.
6. Q.
R.
7. S.
8. T,
9. U.
10. V.
u. \\.
12. X.
Y.
ttiinikildlt kati^ki ; ^i/it^a (younger)
sttnnl^dall ; (e) stum, kd/^ki (elder) ; sintsii
ka< (yoiint^cr)
stimkiui knkaifski ; isusiiilsuu
stuinkas, kiajudna kalijii ; ^inl^a
nilmda tska ; naii/alg
lf.UHst{invmdt ; komeitfl tCnnUi^; nti^eU^ ; (h) a«/f i
tsuniiindn nusk
l)^luiiiiw(iii ; tf.lnvw(ina tiin.six/p; u?ntfkits [e\dcT)
pitiniiiiiat.s ; isUi piup ; rtsAff/) (younger)
il«; (V.) ]>utiniks ; ujd nijxi ; mka ; I'is/.tip
mil
puitia ; pena
pndktin ; pinidtap
piindka ; pitndt
irkd/.dn ; (m) uk/.dn
tt^o/.dif. ; emamaf.if. ;
(m) aid ; dpf^u,
okw6y.a; asa ; (p) oAvr. kap/.i< ; an; tf.lkawaf.
f.dn
tawdijai
sinmddts (my)
yauitsa
natsi
Hue
t^iUipinna
13. Z. tio/.kda
lumauitsa
tianai, naiu
taudy.ki
titdni
(p) ilso/itce/L
^ipi ; (Ut (younger)
sutmkutimi (my)
kautapivp
yapdtsi
ajMwi, katfu^tUunwi
tami/e ; tsakai
isalamdtkviait (?)
14.
15.
at
le.
dikok
17.
nakdm
tti
aiarok
nipilts
ntisiidm
napas
144
I
574
P H 1 1. L O Y.
i>
(. i
I
aim*. inoun; rnru.
1. A. {ptazr) tii/.kiie, Ui}.kOli
B. tivkskaetsn-jf^i (\i)dietse; /.amine
(a) svlUdslse
C. stct^e tune; miihane
a. D. ktitsa
ttk ii/Uta mdkanik
3. E. ki/i ; I^Cit^n sktti/ekdrm
F. t/./kikee f t/.ltsitsuopus skdi/i/u
G. yiikwii ; tsiitsia skint
\l. kii /. ; tsaiddus ; sintu/iis t^kint
I, tska ; tsokwa (Usitf.l-tilme/.o
}. kopfis niipiihiii(^
K. posun ?iawit/./amafL ; elama/.
L. t/lansoqe kuslmat. ; t/laatcewe
4. M, kSnis; priiet; asip; nani titokini
N. cUs ; ]>et ; isip ; (k) ats ; tuilitaili; (k) tinma ;
nil^d Id lien
6. O. pandtiap; pamcaiuq
P. pukaini tcitstp ; icit^p
6. Q. ukot/iy^; ememdt/.iyi ; natitanoc; tile/Lam
at(i
R. t/.lidu; ats tOle/.am
7. S.
ititt
m&nami
8. T.
kitslam
0. U.
totidk^ip
10. V.
n. w.
tcapiqu-i ; wenumci
(younger)
iji or is
12. X.
Y,
tuimei; jmUsx
sum (!)
takumuikwas (7)
13. Z.
tiiskOti
mafipewak
■HAD.
f)it.ia (jnlMi)
jLoiti^nut; (h)ntn; (a)
stsie
sufa; ri
akldm
skdpi/iin
spit/.liikdin
i/dmiikan
qiimiikun, qdiiwkon
.i/.aius
mdiit
qdmnt
tatjen ; n/dfyal
hiifiis ; hi'n'Uf
tUpi; (V) pdl/lka ; tr.ldm-
til/
talf ; tdalg
Idiri
kdqstaq ; kdkstnq
t/likhVkatOka; (o)ebi-
kataka; (p) t/Ucdkitak
tdmut/l
t/lukia
nus
iiiak
lah, UHie
pampi ; pimpi
tsojnn
dtakdn
14.
16.
16.
nipiits
17.
nekeis
to/.otset
mdlit
apodn
nuyu
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
876
HAia,
WkOt.
rotm*D.
1.
A.
(otezega)
B.
f.oU(i$ea! (\>) »oaf.tkint ;
(n) tunte
foneiitsunv
/.ontiimaiei (b) konase;
(a) sntn
C.
zuya; sola
itiii
trko I enimaU
2.
D.
(ujoklum,
akukanis
3.
E,
Hduitirn
stjutfUa
niqamoi
F.
tjomkan ; (e) qOmnkun
Miiiitf.los ; (e) sqwutfliis
ski//.lkimdsgin
G.
kipiiknin
st/.losomin
skilf.lti;imilUgin
II.
sf/viukan
st/.Uisomun
nkatkamilf
I.
st/iit-so
<ldlom
J.
f/ilikodt; stgus; (h) sildte
moot
»Uf.lt(a
K.
kifskus
ntsiimoi
tf.lo/.<a ; ty.laf.6se
L.
tf.lu<U]in ; vmkkin
t/./auos; t/.linau!os
siimidlus; tflantsinddlts
4.
M.
kiiku/.
mrlgtai
giu-a
N.
liitaiiiki
(k) dtf;as
pid
6.
0.
t/Llokomot
liequkg
]>etidtf.lif
P.
tdt/.tim
logdnui
tdkui
6.
Q.
trka^fu ; (m) natf.lf.ut
ami^ ; wdmiy.;
(m)tcai7
ami('j6 ; teal/La/.; (m)
nkfgico
R.
tf.likMkso; t/.liOkio; (o]
tfl-afi (p)</tttf«o
sid/^os
obttspo/.; (o) obey.; (p)
ebif.
7.
S.
i-mutfl
tampan
8.
T.
sinnt/.ldsin (my)
hams
kwoli
9.
U.
lak
tdlig
laqe
10.
V.
inay.
oi
tsaruf. (D)
11.
W
liyi
dsv
id
12.
X.
tupia ; tiupia
kuivif
motdka
Y.
ikud
kovd or kaibd
Id
13. Z. odsi
ostukis
14.
16.
16.
17.
apsatup
-J
676
PHILOLOOY.
tA>. ITI.
I. A. otto (oiho) btnUoHar, jA.)
( ftanin^hu)
tUd/.ai
jtai (my)
C.
tpue; t^nit
ltd ye
mi«<j«y ; (if
3
D.
jHikwand ; nkiikuat
akiikle/.l
akiinikak
3
E.
t/Uniti
/.iikiii/Zostan
s/iiiMika
F.
tdna
skikm/Zos/aii ; (e) sifii-
ffiri/t/hattin
ijtiiaiiks
0.
Una
si/it//iKV>i>iin
sf Hid melt ks
H.
lann
31)1111/ /i>^omirii
tniiksiii
I.
fjolniir.
</d/oin
nidknsiii
J.
r/Mn; (h) iftreluH
miHis or mdt; (h) /.oulo-
kira
miikns; mOki's; (h) mO-
k(i sill
K.
qnaldn
moi
fii/lkiisirii ; mdksnn
L.
tuni ; (pi.) ntonWnt
f...-,(j///; .st/i.itlqat/1.1
tiud'/isnn ; tunutfd(/snn ;
luwdksiin
4.
M.
mntmiu
iih,
niii^nii
N.
mitsiu/i. ; (It) mi^iuh
■liii; (k) alias
ni(nu ; (k) nu^nu
5.
0.
taki
hdkamirf
pit^ldken
P.
taops
tuiils
pit/.lls
6.
Q.
amemtga; (m) amt)Lld/i.e
idy.ot ; ifyd)Lol ; tme)i.os
(m) sia/.os
imiktfif (m) igiti; ; efyd-
R.
lieiilf ks: miutsaks; (o)
sid/.os ; (o) ^ebi/LOlt ; (p)
elir)i.dls}i.at ; (o) ebikdl(/. ;
tehe.. j7 ; {^)akal«iUa
skunos
(p) e/>ekost
7.
S.
pokla
ku-dlak/.
vndn, tanon
8.
T.
ku'd/kiftrtsa
skikha
tusina
9.
U.
mumotttf
•
loliip
K'f
10.
V.
isak
oi, ui (D)
iri, cit (D)
11.
vv.
kamumuaU ; ifut
asu
iami
12.
X.
titl gkatca
put
miii
Y.
inakd
W/f
moai
13. Z. o/.tokis
oajis
tc(^sit
14.
jKi/Mi'sis
kadifsis
timiU/.Uam
IS.
alof.
[uta
hukf
16.
annua, najas
at^dt^on, isdtson
ami pin, mupin
17.
variakum
nopulum
nomuiium
N O R T II \V E H T E H N A M E R I C A.
577
HOUTH. TOMIUI, TtlTH.
I. A. {/sim/il) (iiliMOOi 1>1.)
B. /.okivail^iuile ,• wiinayu pili;t^l/.ll^il/ltiuilui ; (\)) /.otsiukatol/luin; (b)
uiilua ; (n) itijimiktil koiilc
C, hi Idtom ! uinl/bt no; cii jii
a, D. iikfil/lina
tiat/liiiirk
iikiiminu
3. v.. spaliitsin li/.iruUk
V. a/ii/imiilsnii li/iitski
U. II tt^ii tail lain li/iilski
II. si/iiiiii^iii i si/nmiilsin iiiilik
I. kuiiiif. t/liiliili
J. kuiii'i ; k'luoa ; (li) ^d- Ir/ii/lml/l
in/u
K. kfniif. ti/iilsi'/l
L. ^iiiiiithiiis ; liitttnn
/.nlr/.u
•f.utlr/.it
l»u tits
yinliics
yitiia
ti/ilsris; imiiJiiii/iii ; l//(imwiii ,• liii;iUt
iiini/iii
4. M. hm
N. im ; (k) lim ; vtn
jtiiiii^ lit
tiilu(^ ; (k) iiilei^ ; mclai^ iliti ; (k) etei ,■ tUtf
5. O. sdiiit/iikij
P. Sim ilk
Pi'i
tenif
tiiiiif; tttlii/.
6. (J. emikitr/.dt ; (m) iiik^i- nKtn/iilktmiima ,■ (in) l/.t/iektit( ; {m) l/.l/.akdl^
/.III; ilf^kii^/iit niii/ii, '..iiii/umiil
R. elMiiijiit/.l ; (\t) eUkiis/.a emuiniiikonuliii; {o)flie. t/./Uiil.i/. ; (yi) t/.lebrktttt
iKinkoniivii ; (p) ebi-
lKiii/.ulkirdnulia
7. S.
ntanili,
lant
nuiiiUi-n
tfl
piili ; timli
8. T.
qui
in/i/u
sIcUtliki
0. u.
film
jxiiii's
tut
10. V.
ail, «i/(D)
eliniii
ilsiiii
11. w.
<;;)
ipili
Usii
12. X.
timpii
akii
tdijuii
Y.
liipd
e)o
liiiiiii
13. Z.
(Mil
niatsimsti
oji.pikiii
14.
t^aiipie
l^il^;ilpe
IS.
lakiini
iiiilip
kill
16.
uloijin
anoijiii
alolnm
17.
nolo
H
145
ft7H
i> II I r.o i.oc. V.
xin'R
I. A.
B.
V.
a. I).
:). K.
F.
u.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
ft. O.
P.
(1. Ci.
K.
7. S.
8. T.
0. U.
10. V.
U. W,
12. X.
Y.
/Ofaiiia/llif ; »lnmit\(lir /utismr; (\i) iiniiif:i'iii ; /ulnn ; (li) kuiint, (a)
kliiii- ; rllioat/il kllilil ; kdllt
(ikiial
ohiiLiKi
It/ 1/ Ink
I (I I, III! Ill /111 in >/. '«(/ 'IH
Ini.s/iiii; (i\) klitjiin ; (v) JA '*(/'"•
/i, i.i/iii>
t^iln/iiu atsiiikiiil
kiU;/)in Knii/.
ti,(s/iin li'iiliu;
/Siiji«l.i/,iiii, (li) Itrrjm/skii.s >',h/i, ''/'«/' .' (h) ti^rajmn /nonml^
Iriiiml.iis l.iisjiiiii kiili/
ko/iDtsin-i ; kwiiioli'in l/lnlriiyt; sluli^afinvnt t^alua
.sHii/infi^iti
siHijintfiti ; ilijHipiul
siinni/iiittiii
rini/ifain
S/ lltll/iillllS
liimli>h
riill ! (k) I'l/O
riiiiki miij,'
/luskaiiiilJi
iil'iiit litim
tiiiiiin lit ; (k) tiitiliillr (■/'<(/'
iiljiii/>
til /ill/
liiiij/iii/ii
ifinemiiikro ; temtiik^o rUtitk/. ,• eiitelok/L ; (m) cmi/o; t/id ; (tii) i<j/
iti.tmi ; rfokip
teMieflkso; ttiniksn U/nk/ ; r/iiluk
IIIUIIlU
Slunk
iiliiiltiilsok
leiikd
iiiiilifru
niitsiii
13. Z. nkiriis
14.
15.
16.
17.
ajMiksam
iyjiia
iwii, piheti
niniius
mdiiihuki
tso/.a
naokniiok.1
hiikaka-iruma
viijiiili
kiiril
kiilii
okokini
aliike
agin,pa/.on
napatnkonom
(my)
liejiitlitiik ; (|i) elx/.o
jiutnkiii, Uintukwi
jiiiksailiisUi
VUlJi
hiilsiil
III pi I II
piiiiil
ijiutii or putd
okfi nUtsu
noun pi
Ulik
aniiiti, man
nama
NOIIT II \\ KNI" KIIN A M Kill »' A.
ftTII
I, A.
B.
C.
«. I),
a, K.
F.
G.
II.
I.
J.
K.
I-.
4. M.
N.
s. o.
. I*.
fl. (i.
R.
III; iny — n/ii; thy — n/ii (r/iiki)
f.olun; i/ii l/.lii/n/iiliiiii ; (li) />«. /iKiisiilUi)t/e ,• (!>) ^(i/ro
/.iiiihini
^/iitiii iir
rkilililiok ; klfltiiii
iiMjiaii
III f nil iilal la/iiUnktl
krlii; ; kittii; ; (n) kclif nlnaiikniiiiksl ; ki/i/.
itiiitki.1t itiiiKikitt
kiili/ kiilif.
t<,ii/ii'; ti;»liii;
^iHiiiinlr sil/iiiii//its, si/ini/iinliiitii tinia/iili; ; /m/iiiitr
lii/iiiiika; stitiika /n/iiniku ; stulikn iiiijiiiinkii ; slnliLa
triiliia ktikdlmt^tu y'vi'j,*
/. 'l/kiiinikst
Ln/knuiikit
Liin/kninikH
lsn//iiiiikal
i/n/i/rii
I /III/); (k) iijiiiji ; iit/.lii r/Jii/i
'J"l'
laj'iiitnki
fii.ia
itsis ! (k) am ; iisii
siik.i
lii.iiikri ; (m) it/./kiii;iii tiiiitrkri; (m) it/.lkiii'iii iil/nnie ; (m) /.o/.u-a/tifi-
iiiii/it
tehfksi^ii ; teiiukio ; (o) teliiksiga
lrlnki;ra
idiikira
kuol/l
kojKi
(l/.diik (D)
a
nut^/t
mai
ul^istris
kakiitsiduk
7.
,s.
iliiktia
8.
T.
0.
II.
nii/i
lU.
V.
ii/ikii
11.
W.
1/
12.
X.
Y.
imui or mai
13.
Z.
Illrisl^lS
14.
IS.
akiie
le.
(iiiiun
n.
iiutiikalom
t/lltit/M>/.otitvk I (p) lelh-
1/ 1/ wale
miinHii
kilii
stiiks
era/i.a
ililsd
imi^ilu
okiilp^'
t^alf-iit^i
wut^kvt
580
V II I L O L O G Y.
1. A.
B.
C.
2. D.
kiit^iii (o^a^/iiti, pi.) (ofrt)
/.OHUstea; (b) onaste ; )i.O(jiva\rt/.a ; {h)stsdtc; /.i.u/.dstlsukai, tiukat/.
(n) siinvsie (n) sts(tf.a
3. E. suwanijf.u
F. skailtiitj^i ; (d) skailtiki ;
skailtnku
G. skiiilliki
H. skdi/likn
!. ts(tUil-f.-tulumi/.o
i. naiits
K. niiwit/ltse
L. Uisiwst iiriit ; titsiws
4. M. siliikt ; tsiUiknt
N. uwiiiak^iir
5. O. ^iliimiJi^
P. pitf.Uin
6. Q. cmilf.lqa; (m) wefyut/.lk
R. eUt/.l.ii ; (p) rltit^lka
sqmi /. Im^in
stsixH'in ; (e) tsuo/.iii stjiiHKjvi
stsiiinin
sUoohin
tSlMjljf.1
tsodt/.l
slsmhiii
tii'i^in
tsitjorn III ; sUikg
Isol/.t ; slnld^in
t/.U^On,i^isnns; ntsakfl/.l iii/ci^ans; siinakei^in
viiiii
vo/.u ; (k) M'n/d
maiiwut
tiuiiiit
(i^iiu
u-o/d ; (k) waj'.d
tic;
tailaks
7. S. lukajiia
8. T.
0. U.
10. V.
11. W, /itiii/,i/sf
teUijoft ; emekujut ; (m) luiiup^ ; (m) idil/.dp^ ;
t/.//Mkwait ; ektcait '/'/■"' f
tidirr; {») tc/jediiue; (p) ty-lekhtijis ; (o) tumliai})^ ;
(P) '/'"*<■«
chikwuit
jmlouin, al&tei
sid
tsoks
luilmcai, hatif; (D)
atctcird
2>uiif
JHl/S
aktces
/siko
12. X.
Y.
13. Z.
14.
15.
10.
17.
rildlilitr
ill ill ill
yun
omakiioki
t/liii;li^ina
htncul
anif, nentv
net
iiamjMi
kiiki
koio
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
581
1. A.
B.
8. D.
3. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
•nUM, ■ONE. IIIART.
bilsi {ogee)
)ioa/.dt/^ltgane ,- nukat/. /.otsrlne ; (h) t^dmu^ho ; )i.ot/.lnainuksate,- (h)stsiie
(a) tart ne
^/.Hsiine (Hani; kog ^'{i
aket)i.lui
kwokioOwilf.1 jmsimin
istiimpn ; (e) .shim/.iii sts/t?n ; st6m; (e) stsam sjioiis ; spuiis
filamiiiin !<tdm spiiii.i
stsofswihin (pi.) ^tsdm skait ; stt;iipd6s
s(pra/.6noi.i; siju-filwohuti^ lecq skifdlnm
hi/.aii.i/(.in ; imptii^iii ^dirir skifdlum
niisqakitsii^ifu tsuwela, tsmrila Hyinokds ; tihikds
a/.u<atdlam pipii, P'Pi' tiniimi
no/.d ; (k) way.atyi.ld. pijx; ; (k) pij)^- ; </ofyl timiiih ; (k) Wmud
5. O.
P.
6. Q.
R.
7. S.
8. T.
9. U.
10. V.
tyla ; watikaivds
liyin/du
lylakywailotyt
tiimept; ; iililydjn'
tylekhtSps
jmitf
kojM
pdpat
piipt
tanu.lp
ilimp
. I
(■70/50 ; (m) ymjirdl<;o c/viiaii ; (m) gicdmu nity.l
iaotso ; (p) tukotso tbcUuan ; (p) ebebayU
potii
i/trai
kago
ak
jmmhuupin
hidltsu
stainas
hiwasori
11. W.
12. X.
Y.
tsiko
kuki
dlat
aoho
etainag
piv
pitee
13. Z.
oskitsi
14.
15.
16.
17.
papdVg
Mlom
aent, ean
nohuksen
146
teteitgdn
iriski
ohiiry, sun
*i>
582
PHILOLOGY.
■LOOD.
town; VII.I.AUE.
ciiiEr,
1. A. skiii (sko)
mii'iti (meutee)
B. tatjil; (b)oUlle
(b) kwunhtiHt/Lkot
k^iskai; (b) skuske ; (a)
koske
C. fUiU
mamdsan ; t/.laiie
/rtj/c
2. D. odiiiimo
akikluis
nasoiikin
a. h. metiqra
kdkiipe ; kokpe
F. sane/Loui; sanapil.
(<=)
idpirkpt ; satsqaiif
iUini/.om ; (c) iliimi]Lom
mity.lkia
G. milil^ana
ilitmi/om
H. mit/t./kaia
i/iiiii/om
\. slii/iktcan
ist)i.ldt/.lil
sidiii.
J. skoU/.l; sktcaUlf.1
sUil/iluni;
stnlUiq ; (xh or dVUs
K. skiraitf.1
aiitkt-fd/.
li/is
L. skiuo
tasUirinutvin ; nustn^i-
iiuwun
ta^dtsuH ; ^atsin
4. M. kikH
piut^umokin
mio}.iit
N. i/«A ,■ (k) tuniicdn
ikokea ; (k) (/.laknit
into/.; (k) mid/.; midua/.
5. O. /iKfrtf
iatoiaij
P. d///p
iaknnl
6. Q. tulkdirulkt ;
(m) kawtl-
t/.lkdkamdna ; i^tdmy.
likit
R. tyilaiciilkt ;
(p) <;ctt;d.
tU/.am ; (p) ele/.am
t/.lkdkamdnan ; (f)ty.lku
u-alkt
kabdna
7. S. meenu
suihdmih
aU^Ompaki
8. T. /»«to
itsdis
kidwilsa
9. U. iwt^te
lake
10. V, inie
awalikiiea
11. W. n//a/t"
winiaki
U'ihelii
12. X. pdape
kiiti
taiira
Y. «/)»!
nosiu-e
jiunuiniMmicit/. (our
elder brother)
13. Z.
aketiipiu-a
14. l/M/ldwdkabas
15. kil^o
16. a/oin
17. nod
t^almta
hoipiis
toviir, tomi&r
not
t
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
583
WARRIOR, rRIXNU. II0U9I.
1. A. k>i^ (W^O
B. {h) /iocitseite; (a) Itika- tf.Uu)i ; nsone-kanane kdntu/.; {h)k6ta/
tntkcisse
C. t/.fyai^ ; ktvetayiilne ^l/ilai ; tqunficle ma, man
2. D. kastsumakakdiu
kusuo
akit<^nt/ilanum,akit/.lanis
3. E. /.ukistpJlsa nwjiiai tf;itu/.
F. kiUespMs,- likilikil; {c) islsiikai ; intimltn ; ti- Isilii/. ; suidt/.l/.u
ilikUukU vuilis
G. Ia.li;iliti;U istim tsatii/.
H. nqrii^iliwd^ »S""t" (^) stiilM
I. tiisiela/. /i.at/.UumUsin ulutf.1
J. iiuUnut to/.iis nappit^u; f.a^
K. y.cU/.likwu II t.o/.us; aiyalittoui /.a/.
L. Ic/.a/.u ; nasia/.a/.(i nikasty.ldtana ; Ui^kds hisneiidwin; nasinendifin
4. M. piwapsidunat ; hawdlii- ^ih-liira i/iit
N. pUf.liauif.t/.lam ; {V) t^d- ialipt ; (V.) sid^.tumnd init
tawe
\
5. O.
P.
lotiwa
kiliikulai
enldjxrit
hclim
6. (1.
R.
ito/Licedl
at-f.ldkauka%i
tudHa/.n
tkurit/.le; itukw6ty.le
tdoty.1; (p) t/.lkwtlt!i.le
7. S.
t^cl/i.lidqa
tankwu
hdmmeih ( — firo)
8. T.
sinuki7id/.ait
tsitsaiskia
9. U.
sawdlinds
latsOg
10. V,
6ma
11. VV
iUiyi
tokdm
tiluts
12. X.
Y.
top
naini
pdoi
itced
uinkdn
notti
13. Z.
konatdpasu
nit6katvau
ndpiicis
14.
16.
16.
IT.
mhiifis
knitoya
kit^, kin
niH
1 '
.1- '
I
584
PHILOLOGY.
■rrTLE.
■ow.
Amiow.
1. A.
Ofa
{allung)
(kd)
B.
(b) UukundUkas
Mty-Uohua; (h) tstftlte ,•
(q) sajHimDne
suptimOn; tu/i.Ud)rice (1)
C.
ncfylmioyia ; tutt/.lme-
/.disa
aU/.i; tit/.lki
a}i.irs
a. D.
eitikimi
lawo ; tavois
dka
3. E.
^ibukwan
tpkurnnk
(it(;ikirel
F.
ty^lti^cep ; (d) tyilkeep
Iskuent^; fsktcint^; (e)
tpikwitiik
tupumin ; (e) tapmin
G.
t)i./ti;ip
alsikin
tdpumin
H.
tj^lkdp
halsikin
tsqailin
I.
siiil/./t
tfstin
J.
tsfi ktsnktn
takvdt/./en
qotaiks
K.
Udkslnkfin
stirr/ii ; stiqa
sit/.l
L.
sqiuin ; wftitskaiisin
f/i.lii/.ielsan ; t/i.laj^il^in
(/.Ittlotsi,- ulatse
4. M.
hikai
tinu'nii
tsaj)
N.
tkusci ; (k) qapot)t.l
tuinhif^ ; (k) tuinpa^
wajLandtat; (k) kaiasti
widlpas
5. O.
t/./ipanif
hifoit
laJjL
P.
idqiit ; tigai
ifdt/.lak
wai^l
6. Q.
trtcat
at/.ld/t.et
tkdmatgy.
R.
knlk6t/.leU ,■ (p) akaiko-
opI/Jcke ; optyJike ; (o)
tkaUiitdnam; (o)6bdU-f.r
tf.lcle
o/.Ui/.aitk; {f) at/i.d/.ai
(p) tkdboU
7. S.
ateieati
opSsqe; opofqa
eniik
8. T.
ooia
mokwaUvm
tsitsikia
0. U.
poko
taif
kais
10. V.
iapoko
imakidi, ahan (D)
dkidi
11. w.
papiika
intes
legtsik
12. X.
uilua
tUga
uiuna
Y.
ttitld
ati
pogos
13. Z.
hinka
ndmai
dpsu
14.
opdiiak
mosWtf
tsejudtf
la.
kono
lata
16.
pait/Loar, paito/.
tguar, nikun
17.
kutupg
hul
NORTHWESTKRN AMERICA.
586
AXC; HATCHIT. KNIFX.
1. A. {(Iiafhill) iti^ (glestay)
B. katUun ; {h) kusity-lmaiu tiyi.e ; {h) t^ulio
C. senatl ; se/.utl natlmi
2. D. dkotatf.1
akutsdmat/.!
3. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
5. O.
P.
6. Q.
R.
7. S.
8. T.
0. U.
10. V.
11. W.
12. X.
Y.
13. Z.
14.
15.
16.
17.
OtNOi; BOAT.
tsi; (wooden) Uintti
tse or isei
iuksdmit
tsahiwil/.l
t/.lumtn /.ut/.lakst
^ilmen ; giliimin ; (e) nint^amun ; (e) ninku- t/.lia or t/-liye (bark);
/.ilmin , min stil/.lam (wood); (e)
iitiit/.l<ini
^Alumin tvuhmlem tiida
ijawisqan nii/nmirn sWI/.lam
ijamiUn snot/ ,■ t/.lqaf.an t/lui
(/.luail^eptir /.oaif/^l net/ 1; givityit
qtlsln, uvqOstin kuii/.iimun uii/.l
t/ilakutstun ; naqulsten Ui)i.au)l/.l ; ta/.6ktun ; alsdLit/.l ; tsats(ikit/.l
vauvidna^ vals, n-dlits
watsokte ; (\<.)qdistUH y.d}iitf.lmi
yepgoking
iutf.ludkains
fckt
(/.Ikoinla
qOeslirn , qatveqe
ekahil/Jeba ; (p) ekdstan oputsdy. ; akewek/iai
qOeftan
pd/.tiu
lakotkig
aniakidi
glakolku
huhiihtcan
wiiwidni
kuksdkin
isiak
hckcmistdh
kidi
teate
atsirai
■ gdti/.
htvihi
u'ihi
istodn
kakaiak
147
ling; liec;
u-dsus ; (k) wdsas
t/.ldap
t/.lap
ekduim
ekditem ; ekabolelml
humpo, iMmpau
hoi
wonlg
ikhiti
idpi
gake
saki
a)i.sdts
t(^aptits
sukd
traiH/.e, nikin
u-a/.et
686
PHILOLOGY.
HHOKS,
pire.
TO»ACOO.
.
1.
A.
B.
C.
keskiit
kv ; (b) milsiai
f.e ; t/.lsus
tekafsi (rhkdtesai/)
U'ck(ifS(UsiUiiva ; (b) tsa-
jiiiki'S
at^e ; titled,
lekii (tilled)
Ittt^dne
sel/.lii>
2.
D.
t/i./u>ii.i
kits or kos
iiikait
3.
E.
F.
ijaipii, yaivpii ; (c)
suiivmttiiy.ulen ; si/ii-
m<ln/.i/k'H, (o) Sinn,
min/.ulan
sumanif.
siimanyLU ;
(e) samifi/.u
G.
H.
1.
J.
K.
L.
sqair^ia
srjiiidhin
id/^iii
nui^imisfitun ; tyjatm-
Indian, tuili^atcn
si>iimc)ii/.itn
f;hit/ill<it/din
tridZ/./u
kou.i(/o)(.ut
takulh
■nt^iisltol-f.klewin
sumrle/.u
^cindii)i.u
siiidiliij
sl/t.lusoqwa
kua/emot/.lin
sii ji^diit/.lil ; tsot./(.lit)t.l
4.
M.
N.
ildpkiit
tj^lii/dm
kelemut, kdlamet
t^eldmat ; (k) ti^aldmat
toll or to]f.
to/ ; (k) tdwa/i.
5.
O.
P.
tdily.lo
j)ii/kdii(,-
iptny.ldn^
we/iukf ; iveabikf
han^
fiimip
6.
Q.
R.
tkail/!jja
tuk(tit/M)a
ka/dmut
Ircldinul ; (p) akaldba
kainiit/.l
kaiiiot/.l; (j[>)kus/idloMttrk
7.
S.
iilumof, alumauf
anl ; utiimpg (?)
kamiit/.l
8.
T.
skanaiksealiusta
t/.lku!d7ie
kimisa
9.
U.
u'akipia
paks .
katskal
.
10.
V.
dlsn/., luUsayi (D)
?iopiri
hopiriki.
11.
W
kelala
skot
up
•
12.
X.
Y.
jiatsa
mokd
piiu
toi^a
paynii
jmmii oT pahtnuh
13.
Z.
atsikin
u/.ku-enimdn
pastdkan
14.
15.
16.
IT.
aiUs-tsntf.liak
koijiak^ak
nuhukop
koifd
piuot
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
597
1. A.
B.
C.
9Kr; IIRAVIN.
2. D. nkit/Jmoiat
flUN. MfXlN,
fart (sd) tsa (^/ido/^KSsd)
taOse; [h) ii;laf.alaf.a Uifise
nataiiilc ; natdnika ti^itfJmoiat-natdtiik
8. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
6. O.
P.
6. Q.
U.
7. S.
8. T.
0. U.
10. V.
11. W.
12. X.
Y.
13. Z.
14.
15,
16.
17.
sl/.lnujtil skicotinilis ma/ru
stgitgnmaskait; it(^it^u- sjimjniif ; splikane; (e) (c) skokoits-spnqanc ; (d)
me2>! (c)skikumasqiit y,aiut/.lna^ sotjdtim; (e) skoku'oats-
/.niHt/./na/.
sti/^imdskftit ut/.l(ldratiiqi ul/Zi/druiiiiji
qv inomldsqut qo^rrm, kotisum siiin/dam
t/.twinty.l st/.liikwalum
sqdtt/l skiviUns tiniiltm
l/.ltd/a/.u t/Jt>(/iral/.l t/./oijini//.l
tasqfi /.ir n f tjiltdtije}.!! ; taldn/.liin, }na)(.ai ; Jia- tuqit^dlun ; kwo^ilan
iilldt^k tu/.lliin
lidikKt luif/jmnia higamtuks
y^ii/ji'/ (clouds); (k)sKdtof an
ndjS laicaia ; tipjiap
tajdnup; hucilp
koi,a/.
kosa/.
uniidnk
laa
%rfikwi
useheld
tiikiim
piitSskia
kirseistsOkHt
(/./eseokak
was
kdtji.l<t/.
siktii/pama-hiiamtuks
a//.ui/.
httt/lldp
hutU/.l
ukty.li) men ; ukukt/./iimi:/i
6dt^lay ; (p) akdt]f.af. 6kui/.lamen ; (p) akdyim
Ampin n; OmpiOn tttap ; utop
jritskom
6/.on
sdpas
uvkdiikof
tsoare
ap/.dtsu
ttul
tsiil
tava or talia
viiiyd
tavd or tuud or taM
mit^/td
7iaU>sit
kokwina tdsin
oput}.lak
ndakeak
hi
piilitluk
tdmct
nuldr
temet
moil
588
PHILOLOGY.
1
A.
(f /mot, pi.)
(janeiu)
{al^heese)
B.
y^aiU/lkdnte
kleakut ! qUakdte
C.
)idllatfe
^aiillli ; yfttf.lf.A
/.aUi; kliak
2
D.
nkit/.ltio/ios
kaliiiiuiiU ; kiokieit
tfit/Llmuit
3
E.
siiko^int
jHi/idiiif.
jnutfitfdi
F.
kiikiisvm; (A) skukiiMvnt s/.alf.iilt
sqoijofts, skitkw&its
O.
slikilsi-f.ontsut
sitiikiit
tiiiiikiriits
M.
jiiii/jiiKjuiduit
s-f.dl/tilt
gtsiHH
I.
»^(IJ«.V
s/i.la/.el
tr.hif.
.1.
•sy. iiiik/ iia
SljMI/.l
stii/i/oils ; S])dtak/.o
K,
ktisc ; l/Mitpiis
si/iiiij. ; sije/.
kirairi/
L.
wr/i.i/Luii/.ia, nt^snkr
hfi n 11 iriis ; hatiau-O s
hiiltcl; hantol
4.
M.
/.(lit mi II
hald/.p
sikait ; sikit
N.
f.aslu ; (k) ifL(U}.lu
pdtiiic ; (k) lyilikwe ;
//./kici
^tsdt ; {y)tsat; sdtpa
5.
O.
t/ht/lii
etrein
fialp
P.
kiiki
wasnd ; t/.ldka
iskdi; miika
6.
Q.
lf.liie/.d llama
inlfdkliy; (m) it^okdidi/.
aiikdp ; (m) /.dbiy.
R.
ijekaiiiip; (\t) eyekdnap-
p!)/.ka
ctsoktet ; ekelsokte
nojMimm ; (p) /.api^i
7.
S.
atiiininank
(1 iiipilt n ; Ampin n
atili^ikim
8.
T.
t/lalt
kaehe
9.
U.
liol
Piiii
10.
V.
ap/.a
11.
vv.
tsnmi/.
nuUijutsi
maliiktsa
12.
X.
piitsihwa
ta^On
tukwOn ottuguOH
Y.
piUuzitva
taaino
tokdtio
13.
Z.
kiikatoiiu
kifestsakH
kokoi
14.
t/./isiakakak, tastltfvtfa
atf-eti^idak, huntOla
18.
hiti(
hi
ivaJai/iita
16.
smit
oroga
yaukel
17.
siiol
feme
tiikmut
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
589
UOMT,
DAHKNKtll.
■ORNINO.
1. A.
B.
C.
hiit/iUn
Ud/iolkus
[punetd)
kaimcvf. ; iatca/.
amdntii ; /.asmut/.ltan
a. D.
t^itf.lmuiatni
wil/.li4am
3. E.
F.
0.
H.
J.
K.
L.
ku/pa/.iduit
o/.fll
piiahu
tsioji.wat/.l
ske/.eican
hirntsihdk, nefktiiio
/.iitlnwan
ilf&m; rUfumpil/iba; sqtrikiiite ; t/.lkokwist
(e) qem
(Ufiim Idiifo
iqftm ikuku-dst
t^.l(y/.lpa
pdtak'f.o tifJuii/M-ilyl
squiy^nltun ; skwimwan kin/nio/.u
kaiolsiiia himto/idttrg ; ntonuts
4. M.
N.
lakaiiit
la^aief.in
gdktit
itsdt
nidiin; niaimi
iqxvipa ; (k) maitski;
/.aiai/.
5. 0.
P.
notawdnm
(ilimlij/k
letji./piota
pdkasl
6. Q.
R.
ua/. ; (p) ua^ef.
xoponam
kairil/. ; (tn) kailu/.
kaue/.
7. S.
hdlultn
8. T.
kahinnk
0. U.
10. V.
n. w
. wimikaiki
intmmelta
matiktsa
12. X.
Y.
kutduifo
tokdno
itgukii
awdmiidgii
13. Z.
pi;kindtsi
apnakus
w
14.
15.
16.
17.
148
temek
.t:W
090
Pll I I.O l,0(i Y.
1. A.
C. /.n'ij/iuaa
'■i. D. irct/i.lkamiiit
3. K. /.astikoktraiikii
F. skiiikiUf t^tlu/. ! (e)
kiiksh
G. piiliik
H. halfttf.1 ! piitdkai.i
I. U«itk(ip
i. oliis
K. skunsdwiin
L. >itii/t/limn/.ii ; hnnidi-
kil/.l
4. M. kii/ihrit ; kii/rwit
\. iji/i/airit
J). O, irn/iiia
P. mii'iimp
0. (i. /(itrfska; (m) /fi/y«j7t'/.
I{. tS(Jios!r ; tsitiostc ,■ (p)
7. S. //«//,
8. T. kuits/.a
0. U.
10. V.
11. W. wiiitsrimeha
12. X. viii^ipar
Y. inmtiia
13. Z. ti^ulakui
14. atpt(^it/.l
15.
16.
17.
■rniNu.
•UHHn,
Aijwr? ,• /«(>)<<< (past)
^•ikiipn/s skiilkiilltim
skt piilsti ot skarpvtsa siUiiitfJke ; (c) quijuina
silnkiijis
piiiiik//i'is
/liiii/ii/K)/
pniU/ldkiiin
t/.liikiiiii.
idliislk
paatxiii/oti
I'llliilllh
jMiiikteum ; panmmtUui
pmifinfitylini
trnira/p
inncii/iiii
taiiim ; hititm
tii/Cim ; Ilium; (litiin ,
(k) /.mam
^iKitoliniiilntiy ; kititim ^fjiiiilim
tahink wiisam
kawn/riniti)/ V^akteai ; tsngwaii/.
tsiiipai; {p)kau-a/.tfmtek tsdkoie; (p) t^dkwai/^
niiiiialliiit
kattui
yivdno or yibdno
tf.lopeil/.a(Uik
ni^ndlkiit, nirkini
jmeskomiskia
2)uld
atdhi
dliii
tdlsu
tazd ; miiiju
atii/ii
t/hjifi/^/.a
tl'd/dllllu
ororine
vdnat
r
[4 ^
N () 11 'I' II W K a T K R N AMERICA.
091
AIJTUHS.
WINri!«.
WIND.
1. A.
tiikele ; Uikelii
yiili; /.lUa
B.
tfitii/iitt ; f.lokwti
■f-mtiil
ndiUehi ; naslsie
C.
ydiiioydl/au
/.nitir, f.intiU
t^i ; mi^i^e
2. D.
a/.kdmi
3. K. l/.fiMt/itstiiH i;iistikii
F. .«/;■<'<•« ; ti;h'i ; (e) qiuti sitsltili-i ; (o) fintakili/i. stindimil ; (o) niu-il
or 5iy<i(i(
(!. sliji'i'U sil.sitiikit ititiiwut
11, pas/i)mp puiiii,lkica ^ii^iimiii;; ; it/.lapul/.tkun
I. pttiitrhnl jhUilas ^i/oiii
J. paniiloirdiiii/. ; puitiilo. /i<iiiM>t(i!(^i tt/.hyf.
A'"""/
K. pa iirii/ soman jhuUo/os s/.ii/. or s/.o/.
L. kisldo-kislwjd! /loniikaln Immotut^i, liansdtt/t^i sigo ; pgo; jikU
4. M,
N.
5. O.
P.
6. Q.
K.
spam ; (k) tidm
lug
naiump
em III ;
anim
dim III
; (k) dnm
wU
P
hdlia
/.lilt ; (k) kiOt
hiinlil/.p
hdif.lkiii^p
t^dmal/.Hy t^ai^riln/Jy.U-f!. ik/Mi
tsdbatf.1; (p) t^dbalji.li/L tsa/.ri/itkt/.le; {p)tia/.ri. its/.d^; (p) j*/d/a
luklif.
7. S.
8. T.
0. U.
10. V.
11. w.
12. X.
Y.
qop
nvama/t.
kompios;
knmpiaus
airiip ; yanan
gu-ut-tahau
fiurl
Idllum
slaifis
xcakvi
aska
astsiii
wehiimd
tumit
Ji/trtr
tOIIIll
hikicd
13. Z.
u-ukici
sapiu
14.
15.
16.
17.
kait/.l/.at/.l
ifdlasilumka
oti^oli-ine
sou out
vciiksean
un/tilieua
ahikaiii, dlidken
hiigd
692
P in I, O I, O G Y.
TMUNDKR.
I.KIIITNINO,
B«M
1
A.
Mtnik
(nininn)
B.
tfiilHitika
f/Mtif.vii/ilsii
tiiitkay. ; viilatilkailt
C.
rtiii ; Ullne
nifgiii-t/iikn^ ; /.wapa
natfthika ; /.Iff A
•i
D.
iniwkokinitf.1
3.
K.
tfiulf^ieulaktonm
lf.Uakstiim
kliikitnm ; Uiltualurint
F.
tltilliiliium ; ((I)
stiirln-
skumkiimfiitiin
slri/irh or iteipdit ; (p)
niiim; (o) atsiiijntsdtjam
xinit
G.
.itnrtnrtem
t$Utt/l/ll
tf/i>piit
H.
^tapnm
fiiiiiiiiiiiifum
slit II
I.
/.iri'ktratle
.v/ii/nm
J.
s/iini.i
.il^ii/mn
slij/.n or tliiltlii
K.
sft>t/u
XtlM/ll
sDkini
L.
ttilttlfl-f.<in ; nnf.iy.fino
l/.lnt.iinrvl, tfliilsualo
l/liisihil/l
4.
M.
hiiiimAt
ilkiisniohta
uiikiil ; Vftikel
N.
iiairinat/.ltt
(k) nliii; nnmra
f/^iiiiilif;a; (k) td/.lo/.
ft.
O.
tiijtiiliiliile^in
piikliiirii/lig
ti^lkilflmiliij
P.
timinii
liil/llUkoit
kiiaiiuost ; kiuua^m
6.
Q.
kanawdk^dmaf;
(m) ^-(j.
U'dtol/1.1
iikilf.lli
R.
rkiinnirakioha
rkelikst
»ey.lf.ttt^st ; ntukwitflte
7.
S.
fimjuikwi
a mpiihri
iikini
8.
T.
(/.lllllOS
0.
V.
kiitot^ns
10.
V.
utiik
11.
w.
til
valah mlsi
rmearttd
13.
X.
tiinuint
pamtkii^ii
utrfi r
Y.
iiinidiia
atsmriziaho
tomoa
13. Z.
iota
14.
IS.
16.
17.
tutatf
nf/tikljd(lakifidtfl
bU/.ldad
valtiiipa
aku-dkit, ^rakoro
ku-asi
■ il
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
503
1. A.
n.
c.
•Nnw,
jriVi (yiilh)
yay.> ! i<^/.u$
tat/./itjil/i.l ! ilia
3. I). n/it/i./u
8. K.
K.
O.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
HAM..
tivUin
vnlduna ; ituoie, i/u
pioh/in I kijiinunui
mni/ii
snmai./vot ; stimuptp ,■ mime / hii.ii/iim ; (c)
((>) .somakteiikwu sl.iitsitsi/iim
smu/ol
^tnuijiil
mtu/o
S/./UIJII
sjt.Mi/iru
t]i./asij'> nil n
latiaitusa
tsutnluia
t/.lff.inliif.$
t}.lasti;<it ; t/.luiv6//.
tiimiil ; tdmitil
4. M, niAka ; minku
N. piiui ! (k) ;»«' .• tuanaia tomyu ; (k) tumku-ikwi
riRi.
kirini (knne)
t/i/kiitie ; /-tdnt
/.OD, /Wtif/
akinakdko
ti'rkuii I Mkiru
(c.) .in/^itstn ; (d) sure-
ji^i/u, (e) a»riiiljxi
slkiidi/tikop
^ti'iutkiip
hilt
ml) t^iip
mok.iip
tf.ltisf.on, IflasiMjua
dla
ilukfja
6. O.
P.
6. tl.
R.
7. 8.
8. T.
9. U.
10. V.
U. W.
12. X.
Y.
ptigini
p(Uf.liwd> ; patliwds
tfhitkd ! (m) i/f./tikd mUaojitsop ; (m) atsa.
pvtsop
tflkdpa; (p) tf/tukd
nukptik, alupaik
kimis
kuis
ijae
ti
niuiHu-i
uiudici
13. Z. konis
14.
15.
16.
17.
yamim
yo:t, toiit
yuU
tflkfikfuil ! (\)}dkolf.i
aldiu
tnhali
pdiiffp
patiuonodt
kats6biui
tut
tats
ifdtdtf.1
o/pitski ; (p) dtotfl
hammiih or hdmai
kilita
UMs
imi
malts
kuna
kotd
iftft
addk
woik
t^duot, Idina
mufat
149
694
PHILOLOGY.
f I <
WITEII.
ICK.
ukth; land.
1. A.
Ill (too)
ttrn (gltiiii or ton)
kiia (otcluss)
B.
to
k~wnlo; id /.OS
nee
C.
tji^o or to
hwnthaij
lidme ; nOe
2. D.
uo6, «i
akouit; dkiwit
ainak
3. E.
f;<ii)il/./i:ivu
H"lt
t/L/oka/ii/.
F.
sdiril/i/kiri ;
siiit^lkivi ;
(c) s/.uiiimt ; (il) s/hj-
slole/iu ; (e) tamu/uk/ii
(o) siiiit/^/kifU
lint ; (o) s/.iiiii mttkivir
G.
sikirir
s/wliiit
tiniiif.idlimu)!.
H.
^iiiiit/./kifa
s/Liiintk
iimauniit
I.
,J0
si/a/io
siiatiii/.tin
J.
kiili/ii, ktU
stgio
tdmpmig
K.
kal
tolotguH
tOmtt/.
L.
t^taqio, t/./aq6
nistgCi tut, t/.lastgtl t
tau-e/.
4. M.
kii^-
tiiling
ifiitog
N.
tm-' (k)'i
a wag
takauk ; (k) to/.
titgum
5. O.
i^kiihii^
tok
fhs
P.
oki»til.s
I/l/its
laijks
6. (i.
ty.lti;okua
kiipa ; (m) ikdba
wefy ; iiili/.
R.
t/.llsok ira ;
Iti^iiko
(o) Itgfike,
ikdpa
elci ; (p) ilcji.
7. S.
maiiipifka ;
dmpke
am/is
Iiii tuialop, dno
8. T.
ki/o
kimsrn/iari
miitstah
9. U.
timjM
uus
kaela
10. V.
utsa
tdrak
11. vv
, as
Uijats
kill
\i. X.
pa
pahikfip
titcip
Y.
pa
]>atsi)iop
dip
13. Z.
of.ki
kokwOtaia
sd/.ktci
14.
tgdnk
ko-f.6
15.
kilk
jMloi
y6wa
16.
Uir, akuidken
toudya
17.
pill
N () II T 11 W K S T K R N AMERICA.
695
1. A.
B.
C.
MEA.
nn/makiit
2. D. aknsuok
RIVER.
iikoy.
tasike ; mitoivdka
/.diuf ; f.dniii
akiii-iiiilok
iJkKE.
j)h ijkiil ; ( iVi >zeii ) — tn ykat
mil iikiit
miiijkiik
akiiokirK lies
3. E.
F.
G.
II.
1.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
5. O.
P.
6. Q.
U.
paisilflkini li,iiir/. ; riliilktl'ii juiini/kini
ski/jiif/i/eiiiiitrkii ; (o) 7i^iiilikiiii ,■ ii^tdlk ; (e) sl/.//MUkwii ; tril/.li/iUf
iiki/jiil/./iimitukt0i' iii/.iilnkwii
skcljiiitam fikini. ; ii/.iiiji.iU
skiitolska
hoiii/li;
lii/iiitiin
skiiiiril)i./ko
ntsiidi^i
itrdkiif
atdt^ug
yamiii-i^katni^
vjiiikinilkirt
stiiliikirii
7umil/Jti;i
sktiril/./ko
tiisiiliiiiri, lus/.d/.
pikiiii ; iiilii
U'diia ; (k) /.atnt;
/iipiii
tab
//^/ir/.oiiit ; tcinuit;.!
tfi iiiat/Ll
■iiekdii-d; (p) tunMtjul ici /«(//./ ,• (motf.l
III ilai.
7. S.
8. T.
0. U.
10. V.
11. W. iimjiokdni
12. X.
Y.
cirijm
piiiiiiiat^
13, Z. omay-kwiuki
14.
15.
16.
17.
ti>jm//.l
/ilia
mdiilsal ; anhwiio
tiaiu
kokiii
asiirahdtta
(ilsiiiiia
ptojia
anahiikiea
nihituhta
(poiul) ; (e) liijiit
kiiilijii/ii
liiiiijiit
iMlllltll
tsiilil/.t or Udliliye
Isvlf.
l/.llsaldl/.li, tsaliU/J
hiiciitiiiii
Will dm
finj-;
ki/aiji
it/i.ld/a
ikako/Ul/. ; (p) il/./dla
miimpdlde ; mampat/./
atras
ij>)i.diia
neu-nks
jiikdu
jHitsiin
omuksikimi
596
PHILOLOGY.
TALLBf.
■■ill; hountain.
■•LAND.
1. A.
(ihea)
B.
tafukilUOte
tvtf snstaf.
noquaikutf.
C.
llomi; nuiUlntaf
ndnlsa; udatsap
nohilawa^f. ; kiog
8. D.
akUtUajLkti
akiuotf.U
niskakdn
3. B.
^ilcatri
t^kom
t^isiinekivum
F.
etsantaqolf/LU ;
ItUnus
(e) an-
etsimrnjwa; yi.uts6t ; (e)
Ui/. nmp
t^isiinekwa; (e) kisuntkietr
G.
etsilaatiieis
etsilif;
etskclaqoilvkwa
H.
ai^dq
luiiaiit
k^iinitk
I.
skdtutf
stvl^i
J.
sU/i.atgi
smaanitg ; kais
sputcitf
K.
t^lajM-lis
smof. ; snta/.o
statin
L.
tf-lusat^h; nift/ild; qo-
ty^ldastutq ; slutdfina
ti^init^indks
lokt
4. M.
po^ol
hdiUikam ; ma}i.fam
(itna
N.
poftei; /.awigt
tiau tit^am
(k)mi.
tdpof; pitd/.anuk; (k)
nl^itdk
umd, imd; (k) umdui
5. O.
panidkp
tiit
li^tkaili
P.
iakap
yd j/int
6. Q.
iaqomel
Ipokdyiutnaji. ; ibdkal
aka^etk; {m)ag(ipt)^lf.ti)a'
iay.
R.
naiaqe
ipdk/.dl; (/.Ipakdhma ,•
(p) natspOkei/.
tf-lof. ; (p) kokwfilak
7. S.
tiekuxi
amefo
atiii/kei
8. T.
ktrots
9. U.
iaitia
aicdloicirs
10. V.
wdkwe
11. W
ikoi
ago
iui^ta
12. X.
pdun
tiiidtci
pahdrnur
Y.
ti)d/a
kdiua or kdiba
padiwa
13. Z.
aksUskoi
mastdki
tntni
14.
ndotje
opOt^ukt
IS.
tuk
paiis
1».
half.
17.
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
597
■TONt.
1. A. tse (Isay)
B. t^ctte
C. seh; se
2. D. nookie
3. E. j-/(i«(/
ndtkatve
tlejtap; titK^t^e
t^UtiHt
F. «?<■»?,• i;ieni( ; (e)/i/- kitu^t^inl; its&ra ; (e)
G. f-a/oi ntsora
H. /.iit/./ot; itf.lot sol
I. tgct./.lti
J. sputdln ; kail qud-f.
K. tu kalis qtvd/.
L. ta^Sn^ ; ta^en^; t/.h^iliii^ ni^ifntj
N. /jjMd
5. O. ri/M7
P. A«n<
7. S. Sndi
H. T. kilih
9. U. Aotoi
10. V. itsa
11. W. wftf«
12. X. timpi
Y. <i>t
13. Z. o/^kotokia
14. tenctfuk
15. /«;»!'»
16. <o<a
17. tot
katuiriuia^
katualos
kamtipmpen
6. Q. qaldmat; utqana^ l-^lupi-f.
R. toAdno^s ; (p) ebigdn t^lupiy.
kdltis
taplalsdi
wavi or waW
piinaiiiimwaidkin
(ikstaij)
Uf.e
ndtlmi
nit/.lko
^iihpiliildlam
ololim ; idiilim ; (e) xoiil-
tpulim
li'iiliriiliiii
(;tej)dkin
siiotj
/.irait/.l
say.ols6tf.Un
tkulki'i to
kisiii
/.a/aiuk ; (k) tuks
qaii(jauit)t.fiinik
keweuke; keweuqe
ekeivek/.e
atskwafunt
tadtikidwhi
mate
atfiralii
sat ; uuhculim
tumpiu
piiitcd'if;
mikskimi
150
098
PHILOLOGY.
mn.
WOOD.
LEAf.
1. A.
B.
(liiahin)
tukHn; tsolf.
tsa^
tsuts
iduke
C.
sintpmdta; sint^o
/.ondl^i
,- Mt/us
mdsnah
2. D.
tsahal/.li akokmut/.le
t/ldkini
aktcat/lakupiak
«. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
ets^ita ; (e) etsgiip
etsuhnl
^itopt ; cUspdty^la
iiaiitsdfjMi ,• nt^iirdkf
id milts
t/.faasqd ; t/ilaiistp'si
i^likat^dsum
lotfwa ; liiqu'U ; (e) «-
lipa
silipii
fu/dp
o/io/l
tsiapiiitiip
l/lasqd
tst/iit/lp
pilstpt/l ; (d) pitskit/l
tqanui
jmiskit/l
pit^kil
stfot/lja
pOtstiH/l
kdle/.
t/last^dqa
4. M.
N.
taitlikt
"Hit; {V)pdp^
hddsu ;
ilukas ;
/.ens
htetsu
pisko ; pHqo
dpt/ldpt/l ; (k) paldtoi
5. 0.
P.
laiiik
mos or niM
hiiti^
kii/.
ijaisos
ihikum
6. Q.
R.
tkamoiiak
i/.te/)d/.ast/.a
igkdn ;
e//dds/. ;
itkdmnnak
(o) txil^/
akdsa/. ; (m) tktcd/.a
tfipso
7. S.
hCt tilawat/Ll
avdtiki
heyhreik
8. T.
hi/.
ihikum
9. U.
anko
pdputkv
10. V.
dwa
11. W
tsaiia^ta
hau
ttaldfuipi
12. X.
Y.
^mri
wdpi
kund
najfka
puhi
13. Z.
miiUis
mutts
nipists
14.
15.
tumai
16.
•
kuta
NORTH WESTERN AMERICA.
599
riNK.
tapsaltemnnijf.
Ui^indta; Mj'fe
akitsla
qiima
lAHK. atiKS*.
1. A. la t/.ld(ilo)
B. tf;i/afiiiilsa ; skeit/.u I/.I0; qlii/.o
C. pnle; iUat^e t/.lo
2. D. Uahat/.l
3. E. ijiisat/.lj) e/r/iit/^l])
F. Ipi/ile/.ii; {e)fjttilile)Lii $op6k/.u; siipiitaf.u; (c) saatakint)i./pa ; tsketnlpii
stii
G. tqialai tMa siiUakiiafyl
H. puldn skoiiilamu/. ; stia ijo/.<jo/.ti:in ; atsjidt/.l
I. stiiilntiirts $(jiirkini/e st,;umtiumem<ts
J. snliindk^a jXttstiiit/.l skdqoimitf.1
K. jHilen yidsitn/tpn idimrls
L. tipuidntt; //.lastiUfju tiasdiity.ltasqd
4. M. pukt ; jiiakt si/si/. ; tsif.tsif. ; pa!c<; laka; papi, kimila; iai<;ai
N. piiih; {ytwaqCilinwy. titsiji ; uastjo paj>^ ,■ kimila ; ilkwas
5. O. prlimi
P.
t)i.left ; q(^i^t
paliiks6m/.te
6. Q. aiaqilpitepiq ; itiqwd- ut^kitc ; wati^kuti^
mihiq
R. okwotdty^la
7. S. atdkirt/.le
■ 8. T.
9. U. kandwitse
10. V. itska
11. W. imitk
13. X. okutsay 01 oguUan
Y. apod
13. Z.
14. tsakdbus
Wpso
uliqa, tiloqo
palaks(imf.U
)t.dtsiri
hagti; tsal6)Lte
niihwa; hwdwa
puhi ; sondira
lauikfi
MM
itgdokg
iakaitahdtuka
hOntawat},l
saikeitdhOmke
asuna (D)
wafopi
600
PHILOLOGY.
ruBH;
MtAT.
uoo.
■urrAiA
1. A.
(uUon)
t)i/i (i/ing)
(gi'ldy)
B.
tgvtsfin
t/.lin
C.
isap; isap
tf.li; t/.lige
8. D.
akot/Llak
/.aiU/.ltsin
tf.l6kup6! yiUik
■.\. E.
V\
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
tgie
skiii/talgi
skailtuki
shtllk
maiats
Uuituf.a ; tsaweti/.
kos
tatse
skiiy.a
^.tili/llsin ; tiii/iiqaiumi-
kiiigiii; (e) kiikiwejM
eskike
skolnii
st/^/iisii mpt^l
kaj.a
tf-iisfptfca
slumdltig ; (
stvmdllaviig
t(nyi.a, styMp
/.ateUduis
4. M.
N.
nukt
nikiite ; (k) tifiku'iit
sikiinikan
(/usif/iisi
5. O.
P.
pit/.li
ndwit
ndapag
witkui
6. Q.
R.
ip/.aleu'a
qob/U ; qoatqoat ;
kill/an
tjulkdmokuie
(m)
mitsmtisqe
musmus
7. S.
nmhok
mdnlai
8. T.
tske/.
». U.
watsak
yoho
10. V.
htipso
n. vv
mifuts
vatsdqa
12. X.
Y.
a^ihru, fiuru
atiiku
gari
soyoiiuk
13, Z. eksikinfi
\mUdo
emua
14.
IS.
16.
17.
kaiditjLl
tfUtfU
wausi, woii
afwal
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
601
|KA«. WOLF. ORR.
I. A. s(is(sus3) ye* (large) yeatf;i ; {reindeer) /.oJni
B. tulsdnu nalf-leUi l^esle
C. fWtpt/jw (black )i nM«. »»i<dtonf ; seyi (small) tn/jt
diji^iin (white)
wi/^Jltto (block) ; A<//<i- /;t/a«6 (large) ; itoutoi tsijmka, fMtpukai
%vU/.la (while) (small) ; kahkin
jA(f»i;«ra (black); »/«- stiia/.o/.cli</. ; malem- i/.uh/.kan
/urjus (white) st/.lie
Iilf.l4imka; siim/.aUpn f ntsfilsin ; siiit^ilep ; {(•) /soi>k/.u ; sinetf;illsn ; [^)
2. D.
3. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
5. O.
P.
6. Q.
R.
7. S.
8. T.
9. U.
10. V.
U. W.
12. X.
Y.
(e) skiim/.iti;t siiiiqtilijt
nt/.ldmukfii simu}.aiikin qaiiiUm/.ii ; sinuii/iu
mi/.al/.l ; stuintumil nti/aua ; t^mlaii
st^ity.on
tatont^icsho
iaka; Ari/i«/« (while)
idka ; wapdnt/.la
Umeaki^ ; nokoluo
natdm
iqwdijva
ets/.ol
alotufan
kotiiniamo
toktinks
haiikidai
loqoa; u-u/. (white)
uira; uitsitsi
padua ; tokdkwiM
13. Z. kiio
14.
15.
16.
17.
kiilai
hunar
hiiiiot
tdlujxis
taiisaluilo
hemin ; tsaifya
/.alii;; sjiilia
t/./aiu ; !s6i/a/.S
kasii/i
isko/ea ; (m) i^kihiki;
ileaijiim
dvtelitU
mit ill
was
ktidtak
titkntiips
tsiyit
t^atiiili
/.watdq
t/.lalus
taldjiai
tipi
aitfJcwa
mitsims
lala/.
imdsun
atdlim
l/ltiheta
tsitiiii ; tsemul (small) tosi
flinCnci
I'ju ,■ i:d
nuiknii
kwaifilsuk
omoliii
i}(rf, tsot
isot
151
mil rd I si
sufus
hepasto
miikuCitt;
kasuin
^ukdt
sfikot,, sukmal
602
1. A.
B.
C.
iitdkalak
a. D. kity.lukailf.lta
3. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
5. O.
P.
6. Q.
R.
Ii/.als
s/.nsilaks
/Ldsiaks
^inakU^a
k/ielnt
Inldstir
ta^ipka
yutit/^
miijii
molak
imolak
7.
S.
dntoqn
8.
T.
?i It tits
9.
U.
wun
10.
V.
hatdka
11.
W
pau
12.
X.
parfti
Y.
patit
18. Z. ponokdo
14.
18.
kekaia
16.
IT.
pilut
PHILOLOGY.
UATKR.
ti-a (t/«l)
aknipi
kaatsildwa
piim
taieai
piim
kohi
kikstakeik*
teaf-aiK
titnis
t/.loktrait/.o
nnthctf.1; ally as
skill an
sjmhfwdkus
skiMu ; (o) stunif.li
spiiliii/u'dkas ; (c) aresi
kii'ii ; spii rii kwdkii s
niiiiuli^iiiika
sjMiriikivflliikus
skiildu
iira^ikwa
uliti^ek
tf.ld/.ittf.lit^
wuliU^iutcntut^i
wetfldfo
tiitniu-oso
ni^uqnn
Uifc;pul
aUijL
td/.^j>iil
ala^ik
jHekd
atsik
piismisiiis
Ikdmat
kdiioij
etf.hif.%ra
et/.ld/.ica
fUdkut/.fe
yatamt
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
603
rw.
HUHqUITO.
•NAH.
1. A.
B.
C.
tsi/.
naiai '
mtlsna; pnn^t^o
tsi/.
Uiiliiakaili^i ; t^idse
2>i^ii^lf.li; piitsilie
tiinnne
iiydft^o ; t/i.luwdn^tf.le
8. D.
ootia
ooiia
3. E.
F.
G.
H.
1.
J.
K.
L.
kiraknska kirn iirnuU/J
/.amdiifihin ; (o) mamila se/dkim ; smi/dkiis ;
Uiisilnkiii
/i.amut/.ltii III stiitsdliikui
mtU/.ttcmiih ttOsulnks
tsetsmkiis
pakwalit Uqii
/.waio/M-aio matiikd/it/./in
tatjajonlaewa ^//o/h^m/ nt^ikiii
tsafi/t
(o) esliiif ; piiiUi/u ; (p) »yaw
ijairilif.il
/.iiiimrmii/. ; tlldMUi;
skmwjii
milt silts
olii
srkiilekaiu
tawCitsui
4, M.
N.
/d/^/itvi
md]f^nuii maf.uli; (k)
irdmi
uuiwd
trd/pii^
ird/.piti; ; (k) piil^kwai
8. O.
P.
miimus
pipkii
laitiks
iraiimafi
kird/ai
6. Q.
R.
eqaHdjLwe/.v!e
opomitsoklsak
aponnt^rikt^tik
otanCikst
kauelf. ; (m) kdwilii/.
itsdiaii
7. S.
atikadnc
lamul^iik/fiuk
I'ltimiikwa
8. T.
kakdia
kinak
tf. U.
10. V.
11. W
kalasiia
wlehd
hiuta
18. X.
Y.
mupu
mipUa
muani
mopoij
tiiqua
toyokwe
13. Z.
kineksil
14.
mdtchcuii
/.Hi
I
604
P H I L O L O Q y.
■mB.
no.
rltTHMI.
. A.
(ogme)
ta
B.
I^iuie; If idle
xcnskaidke
tfUDt; UMtaju
C.
midke
ifOre; €j.a
nakitca
■i. D.
akiiikott
a.
E.
F.
G.
il.
I.
J.
K.
L.
spida
flii/iirii/i.tatdf ; tts^wad
lUiil
huhiiiiil
t/.lil/.iuilkum
smaiko
1 f-hutqiKia
odati; iiiiia
aiisd
(KM
ikof.it umaitf.1
ikwii/.stuiiiit/i.l
t/iluuiiHut ; t/LluO*aUfi
fij'.ii/.pulst
ipum
tpiim
fpiil/ilt
UiUiit
tlai/dluq
Isolsijii
t/.lii.si/di/a
4.
M.
waiiUiliken
tdmum
kolkot
N.
jiiiipiu ; jtaieliit ,
kill; /«//«<
(k) kd.
tamtim; {k) ttimdm
udplus
s.
O.
P.
tiiiiiiyiira
Iril^a
lopitjil
lulu
tiaqaifnutf.1
e.
Q.
R.
ikdlakiddlHi^ ; Uikalii
kaJakuMma ; tidln/i.
t/.lkoldwaUnviiks
tkoliiwuldwuks
lupeak
tupie
7.
S.
pokaJ/m na, tuit^
atimp
atuwdniwan
8.
T.
knkuaia
hit/.ldopiu
U.
U.
Idliik
napdl
la*
10.
V.
Uirard/i.
Oppa
11.
w
laiiitta
isd
imuh
12.
X.
Y.
pdgi/ia
kiiiiida
niqxihtci
ano/ui
wnfia
apilii
13. Z. piksiu
14.
okiitop
15.
knkalis
pula
paJa
16.
amd^arot
altdf.ne)ie, akdkan
amdgan, apthan
17.
eheymat
jnpdn
pdnwg
NORTIIWE8TERN AMERICA.
005
1. A.
B.
C.
3. D.
8. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
6. O.
P.
6. Q.
R.
7. S.
8. T.
0. U,
10. V.
11. W.
12. X.
Y.
13. Z.
14.
inatitiitkote
tkod/.an
skapiisifut ; (e) stiiqii.
peutin
kitMiifimi^in
stdkiifm^in
k<yp
tpdne
sii/.(Ual, tmtaal
u'faplag, wtlpbt(;
hi/.aUif. ; (k) fll(if.uhif.
hap
hep
tinriwiokg ; tutciiikf ;
(m) idiapiuk
aioko
alaku>a
ttakic(it/.link
teak
(Usari
td/.e
kasa
huzikia
qby.1
naktft/.K
kituintf.Unina
maiko
ltstj^l/.om ; (e) listj-ln. /Lott/.dtsiim ; (e) /.oUum-
jL&m /.ottnm
f.wdtji.01 f.6lau/.aU
iif.atf.at /.oliumf.6tsirm
fatf.at
t/liikwau/o ^nminm
/.at/ tit
t/laia/ia/ t/lakokoi
kalknt kiiinu ; ti-ittlu
/dt/at ,• (k) /.wai/ivai kakia
t/hip/asupato
m'imt/l
nrst
okwe/kve/
okwfktre
rtmpiiik
apOatsa
wiaqos
kfua
kola ; gala
tfiga
put
oksOp
auuku
kd/atnau
tsxucipu
ihoi'i
159
606
I" II I I. () I. OO V.
ri»ii.
air.MiiN.
iTuionii.
A.
II.
C.
l/liik {i^laiaii)
Inlii
nthtkva
tf.lH
• l/U\kiin
If li. ili;o
1 f liikiiii\lt,n
l/Mrll<^i ; tf.letl^o
3. n. ijivilil
i
3.
i:.
^miiiiiilyl
K.
siiiiiiiiil/l
(i.
kilt/ ulii.
II.
1.
tiw,uiiil/lkwu
.1.
K.
I..
4.
M.
hniiti;n;
N.
tkiranaitil
r*.
O.
1'.
u-iaiir
vnilxilj'
«.
»1.
R.
7.
S.
s.
T.
0.
U.
10.
V.
11.
W.
ali{
12.
X.
jMiyHtsi (?)
Y.
ayni
nknliilitiin
miininh
tlllilt/hir • (o) ulillf
ISli fll/l s
niiiitilii^riiikn
miniiilfl'iik
iililiii/
Milyl
tpAfiniiuntf.1
liist/.liiiko
Uikiit^al
fiaUo/.
liosnjL
mihu/li
Imif
ti'ghai
iHtiiiitt
iniu/ifoH
ikiriinn
inai/fon
idiiiii'i'k
Omtok
tsiitnii-
U'oqiont
lijifihs
Ifopkiif
kiliiri
tsidlni
akiii or agdi
ayai
\
13. Z. namiit
14.
16.
16.
kirnittf
17.
muj/ul
nkicnk
kasi
koikoif
N () tt T ir W K H T K R N A M E R I r A.
607
I. A.
H. 1/iiH.v, Dour
(', orii
a. D. kiipri kiUiiHH;\)
3. E. ikinul
F. ikuist ; ((') .ikirisl
II. Stllll'lllltl^ltl
I, A////.*f
J. .siiik/u
K. i/limlnmu/.
L. Iiiitsm^
4. M. iiiiiiikt
N. uiiiiikt
,5, O. y«|/>
I*. Iiaistnk
6. (], (ttf.iileu
R. i<i;(a/
7. S. ./</*
9, T. tjn/dni
t>. U. II .SUA
10. V. AtAwai
11. W, tiliqdtaki
12. X. «(;«•»
Y. «««a (?)
13. Z. ' otiistau
14.
16, /(iii'j,'
16. Iniiian
17.
AKmrnoN,
WIIITK.
///mill (i/rll)
irfi/lfj/HfUl
iltsiiin 1 l^(iiiu»li>\r
flft///illf/ /
luilii /■ (i 1
kiiiiiii.ikiiiitfh
/oiiii/in
l""'l
/tiiiiiiili,iiit
; ((■) n/tin'iii-
IIHHI/
kiiiit
/iiiiiiiiik
11/11 III/
i/t/ifniiiiiik
/•■mil/
s/iil/Zii
fnk/i"/
s/.illliil^ill ;
hmfM/iiiliii
ksi/mif.
/.laiiint
hiliiii/i
lititii II
''/"/ >' C*) fli/ii/»ii
(iliiij) ; lii^kta^eHtluiigko
mdt/./kiist
tijiiie/.
tkuit/. I qdleneaf.vl
t^ukiinlfi^
tuyutiimi
nigiwa
pi)dsiipikia
takomiuintan
/'"/"If-
kiiik ; ji/ii^ ; (k; kmu/.
l/hikl/Mko
l/l.,ki,
Ijoj) ; totqop
Ikop
kommou
kiidf.iUt
]>il/jHll
itaiii
tiuilsi
Uii^uiri
loliukuitya
apiii
trulisuk
pikii
aruiin/ai, /.osie)i.u
hicaiy.not
U:
it I
608 PHILOLOGY.
■LIOB. KU),
1. A. dolkifs tluUcdn
B. lnhdne; niaktt-tvlukOie t/i.lts6htce ; t^iiltsiuke
C. holdji tin/.l
enlsiisr
halso
2. D.
kanitkoat
3. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
kwaioquuiit
iayu-in ; (e) inkuiaiu
oqwiul, or/wardd
qwaii
/iaintetq
tfsif/itiijn ; U^sindka
ksnnqii ; ksqxre/.
tsiiwoli'i iji
tfiaqtcir
ikwil
uku'il
kuU
/aikwit^lu
tctseuij ,• tekf/iiffuj)
uktsrtiqn
t/laki'il; sulowaii
<io6
iuktcai
apvad
f-aitots
tekejLiit^nj)
kiiqwtf.
t^sM k ; qld^v n
4. M.
N.
tsimiif-lsimit/.
tpniik
ilpi/j)
lilted
JfH/i'l't iosios
lamt ; {k) musmusu mak
xvitf.1
5. 0.
P.
^kujtqkiipu
mokimoki
lakait/akailu
t^akt^dktce
yotsyots
Uuildtwe
6. Q.
R.
ly^lul, taty.M
t/ldlii/.
tf.lpdl; tuty^lpdl
tjilplilpul
pti'i/- ; (m) tuputsdjt.
span
7. S.
maieam
l<;al
8. T.
kait(t
pahdlat
9. U.
pospmli
t4ikldkali
10. V.
epy.otdra/.e
td/.li
11. W
hakutfi
td/.ldqe
metiiqati
12. X.
Y.
titwit
tuhiikuityd
dfkawit
atsdkteitiid
i^aku'dkar
ikwitsktcityd
13. Z. sikimiu
mikio; asOn (red paint)
14.
topiikoOs
I/.U/.0OS
IS.
nwliita
tfupula
16.
yujny^a, yonm/.j>e
kwaMf.a, rdure
17.
yuiidt/^nol
koiakuiet
lofdsfa
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
609
1. A.
B.
C.
2. D.
3. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
TII.LOW.
{datleese)
i(ne(dats/.u
hralt
ikxfdli; (d)ku!areit; (e)
ku-alHt
ajwnrmik
ku^aiak
tsqu'tlt/.l; kleitflint/.l
skwequ
mukimukf
maqO^ ; (k) maf.6^ ;
tkenOe
URKIN.
thilkllij
kate ; soicaldts/.u
)ialso
pom
iu/.waiil
(xjwiid
skuniitsa
/.trakwdls
f^sktceuka
kuipve/.
yitf;i/ii( ; IsikUihedkuii
tsiiktsiik-wdkut/.l
OIIHT.
wane; selookwa
mint^d^e
kuml-f.l-kaane
)^ai6m
r/wotunt, kutunt ; (e) sili-
/.aiit/.avM
kwutiint
heqwo
tddwntyi.1 ; Idagivvty^l
tilled t/.
t/latan; tatan
himaka^, pi. titilu
nt^i ; (k) nlsie ; 7it(ie
5. O.
P.
6. Q.
R.
qiigijUfU
kuskiiswe
ir^-im/. ; (m) tagdij
itakdukaudka
7. S. t&pkt^-im
8. T.
9. U.
10. V.
11. W.
12. X.
Y.
13. Z.
14.
18.
16.
17.
tdjUtag
wapit
ohuktcityd
paijfi-UKi
yotsyots
tupiitf;d/i.
pittsfi}.
mesuqaii
iakvauit
kiimuni (?)
yaiimua ; pi. yiyimu
nosa; nu^a
idkaityi.1; (m) idgait/.l
idkunit)i.l
pul, pal
haihaiat
mobnis
kempe
piap
paaaiii or pawaiu
amtiksim
ii]f.wais
uniini
yoit, uariajeren
obiiloo
103
61
PHILOLOGY.
SMALL.
STIONO,
OLD.
1.
A.
VMSul
liOs
(ltd (long ago)
B.
asUkwn
ntf.lOtse
Isitpniin ; satdtik (long
ngo) ; isaidkote
C.
stsol/.lit/.le
f/Utdi
nuistsdne
a.
D.
tsakwuninea
kaestsumkakdne (he is)
nliiiakanca
3.
E.
kiraiyima
iaiat
t^ikdwil/ ; ^ilclea
F.
qiiqwaioma ; kuknioma
iaiAt; yaiiyaiit
2>o/.po/.tyut (aged) ; t^aiilif ;
itiiq ; (e) i/.lat/.lay.d])
G.
kii/itina
ilaUltiUiU'dt
Mmcm ; tiqittiqitt
H.
Uwma; taoma
kwflt(kivtrt(t
yfimem
F.
meiman
'SOula/LO
Idloly.Ui
J.
y.oa]HU
tsupnka
sf.oy. (aged); toyd (not new)
K.
/.Idle
tSVJ)
t^(rndtcit/.l ; maqtl (not
new)
L.
t/l/fituse ; tsOtnse
IsiiikOs ; l/a/di
sisin
4.
M.
kuskits ; kiitskiits
kujtskirps ; kii])gk}iji^
u-akema ; kewtiti '
N.
tcajKtai ; (k) ik$iks
qoltfj) ; qot]f.UCip; (k)
/(itetiif. ; tau-dtt
/.osaniU/. ; {k) /dsat
5.
O.
etsapiia
ntdloa; naantaloti
kiiidtsu
P.
kosa; kli^a
t/.lifoe
tiaiwe
6.
Q.
ioktcaits ; (m) iagails
tidt/l/.etcOl; (m) idia-
l/.lwilu/
iakaidkt ; itjedqut
R.
iaiiokiist ; it/ldnuksi
tiatyjcivti I ; to)(.aial
iakaUKjwat ; iiit/lbaiit
7.
S.
pamalioq ; titjitk
USlktako
iiifioyit ; yuhaiyim
8.
T.
nadtohut
ykOl/as
maluiii
0.
U.
kitskdn
kalis
mot(duntka
10.
V.
oto/Lia/.
kilotsdma
yumaf.d
11.
W
tsoktsa
ipatse
tolitca
12.
X.
titntii
jigUH
tlllqi'ipilisi
Y.
tiitsin
naziti
moitup
13.
Z.
pistakwiu (?)
punattips
apiu
14.
ktc&anita
nthfukwa^
itfup
15.
yokai
16.
tpnui
apOsterot
era/po
17.
olutdkald
p&dltoitf
ma/.duinal
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
611
TOUNO. OOOD,
1. A. t«; sii/jwi
B. tfjik ; qdnqute (now) ; nuson ; t^u^e
teneuai (young)
C. t/.lemas/.ai j'o
nikahitay.
latsOte
2. D.
kisiiks-tsumkakane (ho is) salmni
3. E. /.duitum Ida
F. skokoemolt ; sits (new) ii.dest ; (e) ji.ast
G. skokivdsad ; a)i.aiivtilyl )f.aest
H. U'af.Udt /-"(t
I. t^dl^ii^ lf.ldm
J. ntf.kA-fJ.^ixuti ; t^dus t/.ld<ju
K. (new)
/.u-ell ; maiien (new) iye ; die
gest
taia ; (e) qaest or qant
giaigit
kai^t or qv^t
qaluni or qdlub
'/.asd^ ; l-f.uasd/.icit]f.l
y.vg
L. )i.Otuse-dwus
tas)i.olsun ; tay^otsune t^ is or stfis ; total
4. M. kutskuts ■ tdits, tdnts ku]>gii
N. icajietai ; (k) ittgiu-itif; iii/. ; ieiy ; (k) qui/. ; mild ; (k) tgailuU
tsiiilam
6. 0.
P.
itsdyu
kusdijfwe
sitaiH ; pi. sasudiu
bdsii-e, pdstvi
litastu ; pi. laludstu
ndinai ; nOma
6. Q.
R.
kiiirlipy
ikwalds, katsaet/.ldbutet
tokte ; itokutc
ctokvte; tokte
idmiila; ma^dtgi
idkcUycU
7. S.
amuii
tenna
kOsqe, kagq
8. T.
f.iiet-f.lkuta
sdnuqu
9. U.
titse
qdits
10. V.
karesd
karikwitsi
11. W
tsoktsa
tusi
lehaiiqain
12. X.
Y.
diwiinisi
titsiu
tsdiiti or tsaant
pijiyu
tup
gitdyu
13. Z. sakompiu
lidsiu
purkd])s
14.
*
tylotylimg
weqOsetj
16.
taiiis, tat
till
16.
'moriuaiis
tihn raet, tiliorivait
mohiridi, mohai
17.
keMt
poloii
hitoigutu
612
PHILOLOGY.
HANnOHl,
uaLT.
AUVI.
1. A. nzu (nezo)
B.
C. niwdfi]t.e
{ne(liay)
ni-tif)iwdif
{ann&)
natydidle
nindstsa
8. D.
tA'}.aki-s6k
3. E. laa-kisunUdilf
F. )^aest; itdnis;
G. ts(U/.tt
H. y-a^t
I. y^atyil
J. f.as)i.6spUf.l
K. aie
L. tashotstiut
qest-lognlmiif.
(e) 9V/a« {fcjiis ; (e) kaiiis
giaigius
koft
qdlom
/.dspUj^l
itisttut
mukiik
yi.wila]nwiU; (e) }.wUtt-
/.welt
astqintvm
atsf.wut-/t.l/.watyi.U
Itho/
pisi/.o
net/.l
tatsokul, kaskotsidq
4. M. hamdlits
N. fii;c
^ajupitits
wdquf
icaqdf
fi. 0. hapiitsu; main
P.
hudsttt
wioko
kest
6. Q. i(9d»
R. katsfiikta
idmala
eiakdtf.a
padla; iaku)dmunil)i.l
t/lakandie ; ni/tdpat/l
7. S. tina-tekwdlak
kagq takwdlak
idlei; idlai
8. T.
Modlas/LOmst
0. U.
10. V.
n. w. ft«f/«w
vUtdttqai
hawaqt
18. X. nasuntu
Y. ;w;Vy.«
tirk6
ktcatsiyeu
kieu
torfietii}/a
13. Z.
U.
16.
16.
hdnagi
yait
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
HI.)
DEAD. COLD. WARM.
1. A. liil.sdi hin/kaz hiimil
B. i^isle ; (lyaiittoie kiiat$a/.6towa; koskalse t/.lukwfitie ; ivuld
C. ^t^tetik skats hoszut/J.
'i. D. ipil/.lani
kiikoone
3.
E.
kiriitrdk
tijirdt/il
kiriidls
F.
qulil
tsidl ; (d) Isarel ; kisfsi-
kiiadts ; kitkivadts ;
t]f.l^in ;
(e) kiiiiiijdit
kinoqivcuUs
G.
Itl/.Of.
if. iimiis
skwiils
II.
I.
lo/nf.
t(IS
fkirdtg
tiiS'/mi/c/
.1.
liluni ; si/oolsai/Jit
j>(i md.s ; s
/.Me/.tvit/.l
st/i'd/til/.l; •iLolda
K.
■miiijiit
ly.lai
/.lid /a
L.
ls(wts/.at
Uilsuiiiiii ,
tatsy.mUf.li
Uilski'i lo
4.
M.
tixiii/.nin
• helniikin
id nils
luitr/vts ; idijii^
N.
ii/.kduii^(i
,• (k) i^miota
qusil; (k)
tsiKiia
Ui/.o(-f. ; (k) ildt)i.Hkia
iy.
O.
iiwiia
fHJKI
iokoia
1'.
uiiuiina ;
anint
firaita ; J'atdsnm
piildkenc; mOka
ti.
li.
t/hinmcliist
tsdmetiy ;
(tn) it^etfinj
iot(;kiiiti)/ ; (in) agdt/.!.
R.
tf.lonmkt ;
t/.lmimeliisl
fo'H.S ,• ^,"5
noskoit
7.
S.
fiiii, foo
pdijkafili
maimci7i
H.
T.
likidis
k'rHlitiiy.C
nu
jjiitsiihCit
t).
V.
sj)ino
kdtaks
soiilkas
10.
V.
kinki
isikdlo
ketUsdkatna
11.
W
uimiiniii
vstsi
irsldijai
li.
X.
tiijv
ut^i'i in
tunitH
Y.
i/ci
iztis
yiii
I.M.
Z.
istiiijen
14.
kdyi//./
l^iti'ispr/^l
t/loimt/.l
15.
miiili;
M!.
(tutt'i/a
O^JO
oro
154
•^■'
^'i*-
if--
614
1. A.
B.
C.
SI
sik
'i. D. ^-affiin
PHIIjOLOGY.
TUOV.
r/»« («ff or ye)
tidnuk
na or nat)
idnnk ; tvtmie
haUike
iiiiilittis
3.
E.
ntfutt;
Id ; iifsutsmi
aniiwi ;
gUJIUi ;
i (III III
nninhs or iniis
F.
koiad
■ (o) intri'i
unntvi.
(Inui; (o)
(UWlri
tsiiiiU/.ll$ ; (e) tsinit^lta
G.
ants
dnugivvd
tsunal
H.
int^d
inui or innwi
tsunil
I.
litsa
(l/if^ive
U(init/.l
J.
fi nttis
■ rinti
iifiwa;
tu'i idwa,
Ili'ifUCIi
tsuntii ; Idltti
K.
fintsa
nOu-e
tsfine
L.
niitsd
vnaikc ,
• nike
tsvnit/.l; tdat/.la (that)
4.
M.
in
im
ipi
N.
in,- (k) inttk
iin ; (k
iiiKfk
2>in ; pun; {V) p<inttk
5.
0.
iniij
niki
nip
P.
ina
ki
nut
0.
Q.
natka
iniiikii
id/.ka ; aj.ka
R.
iiaikri
or naik/.ii
maikii
id/.ka ; /.ei/.eik ; (p) id/.e
7.
S.
tin
mdha
kak, koka
8.
T.
kone, ku'one
nif.
ktcoutii
9.
U.
)10
i
hat
10.
V.
ida
mai
hina
11.
vv.
it
pi/.kd
pif.ka
12.
X.
ktcan
emOe
ton, tan
Y.
ni
i
00, oco (?)
13. Z. nistoa
15.
kani
16.
noma
17.
no
kistoa
ezemazt
oma
om
teutot
ahf, paima
wandl
TMi
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
615
1. A.
n.
c.
WE.
tuiidkwa
niyd
Tl.
nd}.onek
nohni
TH«V.
yini/i ; /wioti'i k
a/.io
2. D.
kamcndt/.la
ninkdnnm
ninkoii
3. E.
F.
G.
li.
(I.
J.
K.
I-.
lit/./ nil is
kiiciipi/a, kntipilii
kilijiiisl, f^e/rpiist
HUMvnimil
nibal-f.1
uiieiii
eiifm
uniwat/.l
nt/^lniiiump
npiliipstrjinji
kopi/ipnst ; L
liipildpst
kiildjm
a/dp
eldpa
kultiknla
opc/ipiist
niii'is
tsiimit/./ts ; (e) tsiniit/^/U
/ipnst ; u/itsaniU
teintsinU
tsm/it.f.1
tsuntr ; gwdtir^
tt^i>iidi>mi'y.
tsirntsiint^ ; l/./undt/./<i
(those)
4. M.
N.
nil, imit
noma; (k) iiiipinik ;
nil mi
imit
puma ; emit .
(k)
iiiiiiii/K
iniil
kiima; (k) ktvunmi;
jiinik
S. O.
P.
mimuk
kimt
mki/ni^ ; (dual)
kCimug; /cilniti
ukiniir
nipik
divi
6. (i.
R.
nusaika ; al/.aikii ; (tn)
nti-aika
niimika ; (p) Htr/.aika
mvsnika ; (m) n
musaika
i;aika
t/.laiti;ka
t/./dska ; (p) tf.laiUka
7. S.
sdfo ; sata ; pitol
miti
kinnuk
8. T.
kuonahdt/lha
nihvpst
kairdtatju/lia
9. U.
nat
at
put
10. V.
iaa
midwut
11. VV
itiiig
mio
kiimelie
la. X.
V.
tami
iii, (?)
imui (?)
13. Z.
kesUmdno
kettuwdwa
wistudica
14.
15.
10.
IT.
netctr
maiko
aydhin, et/imtoma
t^am
asoin, omoma
omom
niko
pdmiimde
wanalam
616
PHILOLOGY.
Tina.
THAT.
Al.l..
1.
A.
(intee)
tsia {cheuir)
B.
titik; tete
ieii<
iidl/J
C.
idti
iuyi
tdhiii
•J_
D.
nusninu
ntaji.d
kujii
3.
H.
iuii nil
yiiiyi
y.iriiy.ivinit
F.
iiui I ((■) /.ai, iauUi
it/Ju, iisi, ^aii or jtt
cl.iid or ctsida ; (o) atsiiiii
G.
/.wii
t/ilii
ctsiiuiii
H.
aijii
alf.hi, itsa
i/.ii/iit, ijaycUo
1.
tsii/i^c
il/.lilii
mi'iijiiir
J.
tea lie, Hjji
tiii/ie, lat^id»t/./tii
/.mikiiti
K.
tsiiiic; tpiii
/.wiiko
L.
to III ; t/ilUi
tlllil/./iH
tviilninitdtyl ; yiilyulit-
katf.l
4.
.M.
kl
10)1.
uyikdia
N.
/<;i ; (k) ,lfi
ink ; (k) ikwa
l/./npK'; t/.la)i.wik ; (k)
tl/id/io
5.
0.
ije or r/a or ke
ijii or kd
nayindo
1'.
11 mi
kiiwe
ndijkiii
(>.
u.
liiia/. ; (m) iluwtii/.
iiif-ka
saijii ; (in) kanawea
u.
okok ; jf,ei/.eik
ijid ; iii/.i
; {v)M-
ia^ia/. ; id/.tau ; id/.kii
kiuiawe ; (p) kanairaiukt
7.
s.
/umkii, huska.
luikiij^H
koifan
jmkolfan
t
T.
kawd
U
u.
hot
luiniik
10.
V.
inii
uiiraii
11.
w
JJIU
j)i)f.ku
Idlu
IJ
X.
mainu nlu^
Y.
ill
IKI
noiomi
lli '/,. mud
U.
IS.
16.
17.
uiindl
ilulm,
oe
^luMiimn
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
«17
M*N» C»"JCII).
WHO,
NCm.
A.
//./«» {i/yiir)
mpiln
nil^tttk
B.
tf.ldn
Uaiemi ,
irtiek
/.iDivt ; jinkiUi
C.
zont-f.te
tiiliU
ij()/.n-tulf.le
'i. D. yuinakttiU
katf.tu
(ikulak
3. E.
iisisi/a
luH
kikiiln
F.
0.
H.
/.icaiit, takotoqwut
tuiiiwe, niiliie
hiiiit
suet; audi
suguet
^iiiit
tiiiti^et ; (d) kiket
kikita
kiikita
1.
J.
K.
L.
qa or ka
kitf.utf.l
aiitkti
ty.lanily.1
kiriit
nut, gwnt
wa
t^laa-ut/.li)i ; kiito-kuitfl
t^il(;ute
/.misidn ti;
iiikdiiin/.
hotxdji
4. M.
N.
ilaf.i<e
Utif. ; (k) y.Uik
jirt ,• (k) iiiitma
kiml'tm
tsiwes ; (k) Isdjia
5. O.
P.
yiphea
tarn
it
twi
puiji
iduhwe
•I. (1.
U.
tyLliapalu; {m)a(hUH}.l/.i
o/.oirc; (p) tf.lkaj»iUili,k.
^ani;aii ; (m) hiiitan
• t/.ldksla 1 (|)) tf.laii
qiodpi/. ; ({iruhi}.
kwapkuti ; kviijm/.
7. S.
siiiwi, ^iiioi
ein, aid
piinuj/k
8. T.
Iwl
kid/.at-i/)t/.l/.u
aut/.l
9. U.
ilomi
10. V.
oktfdri
II. W
kam or kiim
kihi
iiiJifuya
Vi. X.
Y.
ntaniiku
iwaiu
iluua
tayi
13. Z.
akaiim
sikd
iistsi
14.
15.
vkyiuk
at^akul/.l
mariti
adetwtf.1
16.
17.
ayinn, aioen
Hiuiokom
tiakt
1.15
momoa
fil8
P H I L C L O a Y.
TO-DAT.
rUTKRDAV.
TlkMORIIOW.
1. A.
dntil (now) (unlit)
(huUA)
{pHHtaij)
n.
tiktsin i iiuju'diUe
kanin H
tflttkdii
c.
litii
inw
ahmu
a. D.
iiaoMtnitkin-kidkutk
vrl/.lkm
kaiimtM'iU
3. E.
ki^Uqat
pisUit/.U
pn/.iduit ; t^iij'.uiuhlf. ;
/.It ill II it '
F.
ctsiasqnt; t$inanoi»i (o)
spitMlf.lt
/.iihp ; (e) piit/ialip
G.
iim/iKjiiiiii/a
irsjHi/iii/
Inayio
H.
iaidiit
pildkiil
aikviisl
1.
ateets.li/iil
lodilfhUit
ddr/ai/ii
J.
t:t</(listri ,• qOestnp
lijiittqiit ; t^ili^
elii
K.
Ms/.r/t.
ids
qel
L.
tikaka ; tnlkikot^'hahd^
kawttshts; lilitfcU/./
kmrfskus
4. M.
taks
watii;/.
U'dln/.
N.
mane; i}.icdnca
watt HI
mrisii/i. ; mdisf.
6. 0.
jHimitg
UHn
tetjify
P.
mmkitwaii
tdtim
tdtim
0. (i.
Hkotrif. ; (m) i^ailmka-
tfla/.
tnkvtfJ ; fdkot/./
kaiif. i (m) itwi/ni'a
R.
akikil/la
tadntf.lkU
U-e^e ; u-U)i.e
7. S.
hnska mdntifo
k6yi
miitf, kiH
8. T.
6niki{\)
isis-kvhiftak
dniki (?•)
0. U.
onattdlka
OfM
10. V.
kima
11. W
pdla
liuiame
numloqomi
12. X.
vyilii
tuma
Utu
Y.
iydsii
moa
m6v$
13. Z.
anicjf.ka tsUtsikoi
matiini
apvndktta
14.
16.
le.
miuma
ftodna
hidmte
17.
piikala
tukof
potdku'ola
N () II T II W E 8 T R R N A M K II I C A.
01!)
1. A.
II.
C.
vn,
ii/iii i atf^Uulini
aiiik
cite
3. D. hiiUa}.a
K.
G.
H.
iniia
una, /(da
ai)iit/il
a
J.
K.
L.
e
a •
a, a
cid
4. M.
N.
(I
0. 0.
p.
t
ia
0. (J.
u.
a
rkiid ; {[i)ka
7. S.
lif, tiave
n. T.
miihokitskiu
9. U.
kodak
10. V.
ya
11. vv
jiultna
\i. X.
Y.
"i
alia
13. Z.
e-mania
14.
If).
16.
17.
ode
(Ull/tU
rlf.la
bMs
Iflii
to
ail fin
u-iha ; miiali
oke, koke
lait
tiijo ; mik»
ta, lam
inuijo, iitiju ; {v) lUlks
ht
iidifU'ti
let
ndk(
hue
iWt^o or nvdjii
mr/M
paii,2><igu
me/.lta
ots
ku.i, kui\
tiiheike
tcCitu ; mill
links
wal; (k) 1(110
>M/.s ; (k) la/.t 1 nak^
Uehu
ua
pUa
ndijiT ; mga
akwuskii ; (ni) kuut
ip.
kc or ije ; nekst ; iiktvtix-
iM
ka ; ija
Kdyk
tcd&tt
UfJa
yium
Uk
tidt^ik
ma
l(idmu
Utiu
0mi*
Hard mot
fimutsi
kaii
sii/tfeiu, tipvdiu
wikisi
tokskvm
tsakiiBdk
kinai
pitku
puku
(MO
I'll! 1.0 1,0(1 Y.
TWO
Til KM.
rtM'H.
1. A.
niii/kti/^
la, Inki
hpffi (linffkiti/)
n.
iialoke
ld<^
ti) iil^i;
c.
ndkhuk
tak
tOiit^ik
■i. 1).
III, iimin
kilhii ; ktUy,lut
kiiltd, /.uattti
:t. i:.
siaeln
ktl/iku
nun
F.
nrt, tuti ;
(o) aji/
l^rl/^ln ! ketlf.lii
kdtilf.la
; (p) iiim or miis
0.
dtet
kit/.lr.i
III in
II.
ii/iiuni
k<il/./r.i
1)1111^111
1.
mi/e
Ifllf^O
iiion
J.
ml
ti^iiilfl
mot
K,
mlf
kdlf.le
1110.1
L.
I^ImAU
tfjandt
f/./tiu>os
4. M.
lupit
mildt
piltlpt
N.
nupil; (k)
lUiplu) ;
iiepl mitiU ; (k) mitdl ;
mitao pinitpt ! (V.) pini'pt ; pt
tidpho
ft. O.
kplin
main in
liipig
P.
lupku
pnHku
pijHl
6. d.
mdkuft
t/.lon or f-lon
Idket
K.
nidkiut
IpciM
Utkel
7. S.
kefm
itpsin
Idopc, tap
8. T.
t»6f.wa/.wa
piii>int/.l/.u
ttaiki/jit»o/.icdkin
1». U.
Idjiit
Htani
WOHip
10. V.
hoka
hdUki
ira/iaia
11. W
hdki, luii/i
UKiti
luitdma
la. X.
hwal
maniigit (\)
hwdt^iwit ( f)
Y.
waMiii, tcaiieyu
jmlitiiu
wafsikweyu
13. Z.
iiiitokiim
nilwktkum
iiesoi or nitoi
14.
lU/il
wiyu
mtn
16.
dza
til Idka
wiag
16.
velte
palie
waltd
17.
Willi
pake
u-atsd
k:
N O R T H W K H T K R N AMERICA.
621
I I
nvi.
1. A. ikiinlni
B. Uiiku'iMe
C. iu^nliik
iilkilnke
kwiinlimahe
wutthune
»TIN.
Iiikiiftr (ttkulli)
i^ial^ita
hmliihi
•i. 1). yi/^ko
nmitn
viaUitfla
3. E. /itlikst
V, hi/; IHlUiiitii; Mhkial'i
(J. hilikiUn
II. I(,ilikiil
1, liiliils
.1. Isrlnl^s
K. <JfA»/l
L. tii<i/.Da, tf.laU}.(it
liiijiimiikU
Iiii/iih; tiii/ii nl^Utii ; III-
ijiinikslii
Utirii;aikslii
hot\;imdktl
Isilnli^e
mill ^j'
tu/nm
tfiilii/nit^i
li^Hhil/lkii
lispiil ; iiiiipiillf;e ; litpiil-
kill ; (<') ^npii/kii
isii/iikislinn
honks
lllHtpilS
hops
liiti;oos
4. M. p«/n<
N. y«i/«/ ; (U) 7«i/.'i' >' /"i-
oi/iiku
oilu/.n {k) piitd/ iiiiii
oindpt
niniipt or iiiniipt ; luskas
/.mm
5. O. ^iicii
P. pika
iiinmi
niipUka
noilip
liipitka
0. (J. Awriwnm
U. kinniam
luf.iim
Uipim
snnumdkiitt
siiniimdkust
7. S. hiitmn
I/If, taf
/i^viimiia
H. T. h6lal/.l)La
0. V. tonnpni
nakakiguptane
lapki^upldne
10. V. f/jn
takaia
twkaikinis
11. VV, mo/6si
12. X. fiiimumif; (i)
Y. napiiiu
natakskueifu
13. Z. niJt/.n
nado
kitsikvm
14. s«/f"
15. kenekiis
niipo
patirak
i)lf.lp
semUwi
16.
17.
mahdr
pavdke
ayivohuit^, w(Uidkaoia
156
}t
622
1. A.
B.
C.
EIOIIT.
ulkitiygi {alketinga)
li^nniwaha
nakdtUi
'i. D. u/.dtsa ; wa-f.atsa
a. E.
F.
G.
H.
1.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
o. O.
1'.
«. (1.
U.
iikoDjis
liadnirtit ; (o) Umit/./
haeiii'iit
tuuin
takiit^c
tsdamos
ti^dmas
tiikdl^i
oimalat
PHILOLOGY.
NINE,
lanizi-elif.lahula
ty^lHveet
aitfJanli
kaikilu
liniit/^lhikokvmu
/aji.aiiuiit ; /.a/iaitot
pi/.aiidt
f.(if.aiidt
/.oD n
taiiii/., tdiigii/
t6o/.u
t/.kw
qoils
uimCital; (k) pu/iatuiimt tsirins!; tanmrst; (\i)t$a-
iicid /.simkii
noiiiidi
miifpi/kit
ta/idiiiiiii;i/iip//i
/ugiiLstiidlkcs
ksd/kiii ; (m) kol/lknl k trios ; (m) kiri'i.s
kiistd/.tkin kuaiUst
7. S. kei'miui
8. T.
9. U
10. V
u. w.
U'. X.
Y.
13. Z. imiiisd
ndtmeki^uptdne
hatsikikiri
wdnwuhtt
natskaiaki^
kirihariki-ikiriii
lanizi
kumnffin
huiinrza ,
ilu
dpiikst
dpun ; optmt^st ; {c)dpu-
niksl
opuiiikst
y.Otf.ly.utfM
panulfs
pdtiut^s ,,
(/.huiluiiUp
pulimpt
puUinpl ; (k) pulumpt
iiii/ifr/j)
niwilspu ; Idkenti
tdl)(.Mikaiii ; lat'/.lilam
fdl^f.lelam
tiiiijia
saiiitu'lir
taiinip
etsch&ioi
liaiiii^-
paimanvf (?)
sigica/ui/u
14.
16.
16.
17.
at]f.lkwatyil
tvusuya
ire)ttsicatsd, siiileija
piuksiu
tsaiidktcot/./
finiuiask
kiiipdi
ty.ld)i.wa
kitps
pehelega, maJidrkauia uehkun-mafidr
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
623
ELEVEN.
1. A. lanizi-oal-elf-la
B.
V C. aity^le-ataij .
2. D. t/.la-oke
3. E. 6}nikst-ety.lcnik6
F. opmitpl el/.lenikoo ; (c) etji^lesil
— cly.ltiniq6
' G. opaiiikst /((/.liiakua
H. Y.ul-f.ljf.ut^lt-alnttks
^ 1.
. J. Ud-jmu, t^il-jyign
K. pa/iiit^-kullotsiis
L. t/,Uuilianti^s-to-lmkc
4. M. piitimt-tca)(.-7ia/.s jmtiiiit-way.-UipU limptit
N. iiiiiciui/.^: (k)iciHald/.sl iniie>i(ipt ; {\i) ui/iampt miptit ; (V) neptil
TWKl-VK.
TWENTV.
tanizi-oat-miykay
nat-la7iizi
juit-kwane^e
nakaidt/.h
natahwena
t)Lla-is
asaUiiwu; aiwo
6j)iikst-ct/.lxisclu
sit/.li6pukst
etfiksil
esclidpanikst
opaniksl iil<isH
aseltt opanikst
ji.ut/.//.iit/M-ti/-trj(iiis
i^iiUfOt flit fit
stiUt^r
htl-sdl
tmim-toomui^
pannt^-katlsiilc
t^um-lomuf.
. lo-sd/c
tasale-tas/.el/il
5. O. \idiitely.k
leplin-ntet/.le
Icpiiik
/(ipuitsjio ; tapimlakeiiuii
Q. UiifMikam ikima-ift tdt/Mikam iknud-niakufl >iiciki/sl-t/./k<ityJ
R. tdl/^lelam-konc-if.l ldt/.letam-kimc-mukusl makiis/.t/Mtt/-/
7. S. tinifi-no-wdn
tinifi-no-kefm
keim-tinifia
8. T.
9. U.
nasgidian
10. V.
11. W.
12. X.
Y.
wahdwalotju
13. Z.
naUsipiu
'.4.
15.
%-kitpi^
694
PHILOLOGY.
1. A.
B.
C.
tat-hinizi
I Utkt-kiranei^e
tatahtrena
3. D, katsamia
3. E. kit/.lidpiikst
F. t^ii/.Midpn tiiksl
G. kct/Jf/l) opa n iksl
H. ka>/^lay^dkst
\, s/.lif.oat^e
i. t^ani^ UimjnnU^
K. kanif. tomv/.
L. l'-aita-tus/.ft}.l
4. M. mitaaptit
N. mildptU ; (k) mtaptit
5. O. mdtiiik
P. vuUuitspu ; matimlake-
ONE lltTNURED.
laniii-tlanizi
kwan"ian-tkwanise
etiiunno
ONE THOUSANK.
kiu!it/.lit/.li-tu un uo
/.at^iUjikst
iiqakain ; >iuqo6kain iiopirwkstuqOn
jLotsitsdkist aopu nikstaijfi n
vlnakskain ; hutsiitsakst. /.iil/.lji.uf/.ltkam
simqmit^e pu iiccs-sir mqcxit^e
2>d nU^-tit/.l-ti'i mpmii' piinit^-tal/.l(^-panit^-tit/.l-
lOmpmi^
]Hiiuks-t}.l-t6mu/.
ttutlui ntp-tasijd
putdptit
jmtdptit
nii/ilaipiiik
putmufnf
«. Q.
R.
l~f.lon-t/.lkatyLl
tf.lon-t/.hit^l
7. S. ppn tinifia
K T.
9. V.
10. V.
11. w.
ntanpatan
tdqamcmak
itdkamimak
tuitipc
siitdatst
idty:.tikam ikarmmak
tinifi-tumpe
18. X.
Y.
13. Z.
pahimanotfu
nihepi
It
kipipi
kil^ig-kitp;
kipipoi
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
6-25
1. A.
B.
C.
aii/e
iat/.l
imhja
tanttrna
thoutna
TO RUN.
kiif/.lkai
trll/./d
/liggook
2, D. iki or eke
3. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4. M.
N.
5. O.
P.
{•//./in sta nauilitf.
ityJin siist ; {c) siust ki'ictsr/^; ; kuetseKi^
il^lin okwns iuikwinum
it)L/iH kdiiiiwUukudtkwi iiaiiih/
ct/i.lui kof.wo titdwi
ic//.t sko sktU/./dka
kiiit/.li< id ; tsahido qakviyM kanaikdi
hipii^a i]>iiukii(-(i ivi/ukdikga
tikwuta^a ; (k) tku-dtata it'.u^'i ; indt^ti ; (k) /;«- icmpi^a ; uaiapii^a ; (k)
laild wmif.lUa
pitdxjti
pddsl
piisi/i/>is/d>/(i
okiiiia
jupiltllql
llllHISt
6. U. itf.l/.nliim; {m)iia/.il/.- iint/Miko,ni^l(i; {m) un- spaknmiiklc
R.
7. S.
8. T.
9. U.
10. V.
11. W.
l/.i'ilohaf.
alHil;f.//.d/clxi
kiiiiinapfo
ki/iHHsaimi
j>H)i at pun
itskuk
yiima
l/.ltti(jriinirt.ii/,ii
(/.li'ik/iihst
rikiiilninnipka
kiniikiitsimi
])oniii
kitsik
liaf.i\iieko
milltriri
kiiit/./ukeimi
i/ay.oine
12. X.
likarii
mipi
llOHlflii,
Y.
tikd
VJi
pi:iiinid/.o
13. Z.
tauo/iip
jtokaie
14.
/.ii ikii
yintaksirt/^l
iitsntt^iatfJ
15.
yoltun
"&■'••
16.
kirii/., kifoa
pd/., pan
17.
nilti./nll
ptic
157
686
PHILOLOGY.
TO DANCE.
TO »INU.
TO si.Ftr.
1.
A.
I>d/.t(in
{iitii/i)
[iiamUtee)
B.
tiiii/iiiii
■/.r/kiile
C.
i^aiina
tiiii/i/i
luiilld
8.
D.
?taianit/lnam
kwomn&nc
3.
E.
mili/.am
p/riiinm
nti/ii
F.
qtvaimitUsol ; (/U'aii)iiiit-
Sllf
iikiiiiem ; u/iifkirnmii/i
lliirc ; ((■) iti/.
a.
qiitiimintsot
ii/inkiriiiim
till/, (ir iti't.
H.
(/innili)^
iikirunktiuiit^iiitim
kiitit/lilif.
I.
S(I/.II1H
i/iit
.1.
Sf/i/l'UJIIS</il
maifrhidt ; smnicntnat
Isihjini
K.
L.
knh'iikoi
iipostisnkonn
l/hihiiiaoi
4.
M.
piiliomsu, »('«.«( j»
irciijiirii
piiimik(^<i
N.
iua^u^a ; (k) tijliupn-
niti; tkopiuiik
tiutqii''(i ; (li) Itdnj/iiij
liiiiiii;(i ; (k) )ilri)l(
5.
0.
iokseak
tinjsciit//
'Jinriijijl
1'.
fiifalki
Ottjsfis
ji/iis/ .
0.
Q.
tiiiiit^' ; iil/.oiiitrkiia
lalaniii/;{^m)nl'^nliiln»lii kiinin .• anckoplel
R.
Ixt tfii Isk ; »iii ici'i tsk
iunskalaliuii ; oqcwaiu-
t/J,JO
(ikijitc ; aiiuiptc
7.
.s.
iatnmpiiih
I'iiqdUl
pirei, tiiuci
8.
T.
kinnkitilaiini
l/.lii/.riviisialu
ki/Kilskiaimi
9.
10.
U.
V.
sko/uk
iUnitisi
11.
\V
iidhrkali
ynsn
ildmati
13.
X.
nikar
liiiikiniii
lijmi
V.
una
oviitllm
ant or abi
13. Z.
iiiokdu
14.
13.
16.
17.
/.oidt/.l
irl itr
aiik
yatdmkoa
kOji/ii
1
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
627
TO BPKAK.
rii sF.K.
TO LOVE.
1. A.
B.
C.
(/I'isiii (yiilUii^k)
uHuil/.llmJne
ydllhik
aiiii (iicel/en)
/.aiin
iintti
(rpiiscc or kane^liei)
niU/.Udl/.l
2. D.
ko6j))i.a
kols/./dkit/.l
3. K.
K.
G.
H.
1.
.f.
K.
I-.
hnkidiita
kirn 1(1 kirde/t
kuddfjifiifil
vkiiriiaiii/iki'm/.
/ot/ot
to'lifnl/.lii.
kali'i /.ii'i II ; talapina
wiiiklni. ; iiikfgiii
inli^iii ; iiikiii
ijiriki/iiin
ulsiils/fislDiimii/.
Idptiim
t/.ldurjiril/.l ; a/.d niti'
iakiuscivi'i sa
y^uiipieslat ; }.oy.(iisti;iti
/.imienlr ,• /jimdiiiki
y.amiiiiki
n/.iiiiidiiik
s/.ullii or sy.adlii
/jtdiili^iii
/.isairiisi
4. M.
N.
ilsiiiksa
siituira ; (Ic) /ut/Jikra
hiikisa ; pi-li ksii
itiiki;a ; paliiksa ; (q)
(itjt'/iiiftuk
llllldlliril
tiiipy ; (k) tqeqnaira
5. O.
I'.
ii/i/ikin
so nasi.
miskalciiiitiil
piilslaliiiike
ktdro
ilia komdiy.lkas
0. Q.
n.
piilninilii ; p(Mlca/ir/
ki/Hi/diiiil
?ii(y/i)i)iil ; ikija
huk/.ikst ; ianidk/.aw
lip-f.edmii/.t (I love thee
tllqi/.id
7. S.
ril/ill
sli^cpulont
li^vkdiihele
8. T.
ill sill iaty.ti
l/.lyaidnia
tkaioUy.ul
9. U.
/null k Ilk
sle
10. V.
kitiisi
kimd
11. vv
. Iiwiri
uiimdki
yaqiitvii
12. X.
Y.
iiiiipitkiin
yiulua, tikwi
puniiii
jiimi
13. Z.
ipiii/ca
iiiteniia (I see him)
'
14.
15.
16.
17.
IscnktSiDk
ndsut)i.l
wikimdks
»
tellu-t
628
PHILOLOGY.
TO KILL.
1. A.
B. ninntt/.l/.icaa
C. yalehi
'i. D. kiiepit/,1
3. E. piilisia
F. piihtii/ii; jm/iskai/enii :
(f) piil'stnm
G, piihit/tlsa
H. y-filijUiiliim '
I. kiildllnm
J. S(<>^« ,• tiri/jio/s
K.
L. txii iihiii^ ; kakai^tin
4. M. wapsiiiini
N. ityilinwia
5. O. /till ) it / It i I)
P. ;)(■»« 4<
6. (J. <a/iiiaklxi ; iomaknt
R. Diiil/.liiu'd
7. S. .sVd//^
8. T. kinnl/.lin
9. U. «///(
10. V. ?/i^i^-
11. VV. yiiiKitiia
siutd
)i int. lilt
iiiiilsiik
(iiuitld
t/Mikiili^ ; tdlnktea
dmi^
aslflukaUy.kin
fsoriliii
l^ii'mipmiityl
t/.l(tki/a
trir/.^iisd
niekiiike; aJiinawi; (k)
(I ilk
ifiii'/l ; i/iiikta
liiijiitkc
mCil/liiit ; (m) (iniitf.la-
vhi ; idyiviit
miil/.luit
si fill, pint
kaidnitsa
ti;ii/kiin
sdu
1/(11/ H
^ mn
12.
X.
kirririiiinir
kd III nil
Y.
irnlsd
kuli
13.
Z.
< nild
apiii
14.
kii/rii/l
tiki'iil/l
nilkirs
iiihi/iikufj
tut/.li/.a
turili; ; tii^ilif ; (c) td/.i-
tsiilir ; tdpilig (plu-)
kiinti^i/i/.
t)i.ljiMr/f;
tfJdhiika
ieliitetii ; iclntsftsii
aii<,dtii
ipili^ikiiiki ; (k) liilii;a
laiitsii)
rcitdki
mfit/riil; (ni) anulf.v\ila
nti'i t/.iii' ; Id tf.<x
tdpiili ; f;it6p
ptit/./in/.(l
kak
tyMaf;
yntsdua
U'i'i iiinii
u-ini
t/.l<iki^it/l
i
mmtnm
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
629
1. A.
B.
C.
TO OO.
tvusli^ian
tanas
natat/.l, i6kj.o
2. D. t/.lami/.am
a VI,
ndnas
yoku'o
tiikam
8. E.
F.
G.
[I.
I.
nasit./.la
hid ; /.iiif; ; (c) )^v^](.
nu/laliii^
o/.im/.u
tiif-udnta
ti/.ilif, Ishiiifl ; {c) Istr/.iii/L
ts/.'Hiit/.l
tpiiii/.ta
dl/.la
.1.
ivakum
esi
K.
L.
(iyMly.lun
Isid/.a
4. M.
kii<;a ; kiii
kiim ; iirdkiam
N.
icmti<;a ; (k) toinatn
viiiiun ; (k) wiua
5. O.
P.
vintiikstaya ; vdnUiql (imp.)
tila
nhiUikum
tiUtm
6. Q.
R.
mi^a; dfyoia
maid ; alf-oyi/.
mi'ite: mfipa
mfitc or I'ltte
7. S.
tgak
pndk
8. T.
kiniiiimi
aut/./i/.a
9. r.
ken
kdpkc
10. V.
kala
kalak
n. w
i/aplr
timo .
12. X.
Y.
midktri
jiaiki
kimd
i:). Z.
isuipot
jwksnpvt
14.
u-(il/Mitf.lli;i
Iu7>siii<it/.l .
ir>.
10.
opoi
men, taiikomoko
iiiii
kii/ni, kitim
17.
Italtc o
nkiiiit(,:iim
15S
It
MISCELLANEOUS VOCABULAKIES.
BKSfDKs till- words oflhf Shosly liingimgo licforc mentioned, Mr. Dnnii rollcrtcd voca-
liiilnrics ol" sovirni dialeds s|Mikcn im Itio fiiii'rnniPiil<i, wliicli lire of C'spccinl value, as
lK>ing the only infi)rninlion wliicli »c possess relative to the c'lhiiograpliy "I that refjion.
'Phi! I'ollowing are a lew words ol'lhe laiiL'iiaue spoken by the Indians on that river, alH)nt
two hnndrcd nnd t'lliy miles above its mouth. The name of the tribe was not usecrtained.
(I.) D P P !•; H .*< A <• K A M I'. N T O.
hair, tonioi
eye, tininit
nose, Isiino
month, /..t/, /,sr/o
ehin, kintikiit
forehead, Iri
arm, hiijr
fmjiers, /scmiit
leg, to/r
/(Mil, h'tdinoso
knee, hiiiiik
knil'e (oi iron), ki/ekfle
snn, s.ls
fire, jin
water, iiiriiii, 7iiriniu
di'er, nop
salmon, iiioiink
grape, iii/iiht
rush, ISO
eat, I HI or lins
see, or lot me see, ivila, I'lfr
go, kfffa
At the residenec of Cai.iain Snter, a respectalili' settli'r, who hud estalilished himself
aJHiiit .'I hundred miles np tin' .Sacramento, Mr. Dana learmd that all the Indians of that
vicinity, who were dividid into mnnerons Irilx's or bands, mi;;lit U- referred to two raees.
one i>f which dwelt chielly on the east side of the river, and the otlu'r on the west, or on
the banks of Feather llivcr, a tributary to the Saeraincnlo on the enstem side, about
twenty miles further up. Tliese raeis reseudiled fine another in every respert but lan-
guage. To the Ibrmer lielong the Tuliiliii trilx;, of whicli a vocabulary was obtained, as
well as the following bands, ibe names of which were furnished by Captain Siiter, viz.;
th<; Ochccamiics, .'scivusbamucs, ('h'ipiiiimcs, Oiiiulchuiuncs, .*sicumncs, \\ alagumnes,
Cosiunnes, Sololiiuincs, Turealeiunes, .Say waniines, Ncvii biinmes, Malchennies, .Sagayn-
yumncs, Mutheleinncs, and Lopolatinmes. In the dialccis of all these tribes the word for
water is kik, while in those of the other race it is luviiii.
•
■^w<»w«iw n m nniifiiwi p ii ipii < «i n inii mn jj n
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
(S.) T A I, A T U I.
631
A tribe living on the Kossima River, a tributary to iho Sncrnmento, on the eastern
side, obout eighty miles from its mouth.
man, smre
woman, csie or esnti
child, time
daughter, tele
brolhir, aili
fnllior, /(ita
hcnd, tikit
hair, ntimti
car, n/ok
eye, ui/iii
nosi', u/c
mouth, hii/ie
neck, Hirmit
arm, taicii
hand, ikii
fingers, kiiljnhu
leg, koli)
foot, si'bei
toe, ti
housr, ko'/Jd
how, oli
arrow, h'tulo
shoos, lok, loka
sky, irii^irk
sun. III
dny, liifimii
nighr, hmcil
dnrli, /uniulki
lire, Hike
water, kik
river, tvakat^i
niDunliiin, irrpa
sliine. saifii
trrr, ii/iiira
woikI, limber, kawil
griipns, mute
deer, "ifia
bird, /line, ti
fish, y(/<
salmon, tii>iUH
name, itc'ik
beads, limciit
good, wilcwil
bod, mi'/c
old, iiilntniti-e
new, I'y.vfr
s«(?el, li:iiiti^ni
sour, siksik
quieli, urazdk
go quick, fow weaznk
run, /'(/^'c
walk, /»/»
swiiri, n/«c
talk, hiDiiii
sing, hukik
dance, linmk
cat, Ipiiniik
one, keiKilc
two, iii/oki)
three, ^/./.•o
/bur, oiri'iko
five, kcusdko
six, tcniclx)
seven, kiinikuk
eight, /!■ iiiinda
nine, *)/
ten, ('/,();/«
twenty, //««
thirty, iii/iini
(3.) P UJ 11 N I. (4.) S E K t! M \ K. (.^. T S A M A K.
or the second race, or that iidiabiting the western Imtdv ol' the Sacramento, Mr. Dana
iiblained the name of the li)ll(Avuig trilies, viz. : — Rushuiniies (<ir Piijiini), Secumnos (or
SekCimtie), Yasunines, Nemshaw, Ki.sky, Yalesunmes, Huk, and Yukal. The following
632
PHILOLOGY.
vornbiilnricH Mong to Iho iwo first nicnlioncil, nnd tn n third, thi; iinriii' dl' which wns not
dixtiiiotly uiidurslciod, l>'it socincd to be Uh<imtik, ut T^uiiuik.
tvtvut.
KlrUMNI.
TIAM^K.
iniili
(line
viitilik
muilik
H'oman
kele
kele
kale
child
imiiilummiai
dnii|{htrr
eli
hfud
l^iiti^iit
Istol
liutful
hiiir
oi
lino
ni
cnr
mill
hnto
ono
pyp
iriili^il
il
hi I
n(i8e
hriikit
S'fl/lll
month
mnUt
sim
neck
tokoldk
kiii
kiiliit
nrm
vm
link
kaliil
hnnd
t^apai
mil
lamsiill or Intiit^iil
finycrs
tfikikiip
hili
l^ikikiip
Ic).'
jini
JHnlo
bimpi
foot
kiilii/i
pat
pat
tiie
tup
liiti
hmiso
III'
ht
bow
III 11 mi
nrrow
liiiiii
»hoP8
mill m
bends
liawiit
s'vv
hihi
sill)
okn
oko
dny
oko
eki
nijiht
/«
fire
;"
sa
''"
Hntei-
iiiniiii, mop
moji
momi
river
Itikolok
miimdi
viiimti
stone
n
tree
tfa
tSIl
gmpps
miili
dej'r
vil
hi.l
kill
bird
nil
lish
paid
snlmnn
mill
niiii
name
ill nil
good
luk
III line
hiik
ba<l
-■
''>'",
mniilik
old
liaiiil
new
■j!
!„■
sweet
sialnk
N O R T II \V K 8 T E R N AMERICA.
ess
«nur
hnston
run
wnik
Nwim
talk
sing
(liincc
onn
IHCI
llirci'
I'm II'
(ivc
f\\
sfvrn
<inlii
niiii'
ten
rrjUNi.
MKKL'MNI.
oho
mm
t^d
//ewa
ii/e
ni
uiyi
iriliiiiil
riiirm
t.sri/
/Kiio
ti
11 Ikle
/&tic
lien
t"/"'»
xiijiui
jieKel
Isi
iiiiistik
mil Ilk
tiiii, n
Inn. a
/it /mi
/iiiisi (?)
/"■'',<'
Iiipiii (!)
mn/^iini
iiii'Isiiin
trdpilnilkll
iitliik
(0.) t, A SOI. r. DAI). (7.J SAN M I IJ I' R I,.
I Ik'^jiiii liikiiiH down-, n\ llic siinu' lime, vocaliuliirics (jI' Hvd lniii;iiii;.'i's IVnm Indian'
lic'idiiijiii!,' Ill llicsc missions, hut was unliirluimtcly inlrrniplnl in my task, and had no
ii|i|«iruinity nl'minpletliig ll. Tlio \vw words which were (li)t(iiiif'd will serve nt Irast In
shnw that these hiiij;iui^'es are independi nl ril'eaeh other, and uf all the rest ronlained in
this work.
«i
m
one
two
thron
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
ten
man
woninn
father
mother
son
daughter
head
i.A sni.niiAn,
ll iiii ilaa
Hire
kiij'/ii
iil/ii
imnitii'
hiiiiii'ikrrl
iiili'i hi^a
lailemi
iriif.so
llllllSOSO
mill'
riirirmr
iiikiipa
nikiiiia
tiikini^
lit kit
159
•IAN Mli.lTKI.,
loki
k'la.iit
till Ml i
kisa
ftlih'iilij
piniilr. t
lepii
sriitel
lii/ilriij'
Iriipii
/otti, liiai, lo^uai
lloii'
latti
(ipai
/laser, pasii
jiiiSi:r, pasrl
tdliuko
@
■&■
® *'
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
I.I
■tt liU 12.2
m m
u
itt
u
140
1^ i^ U4
Hiotographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WIST MAIN STRBIT
WItSTIR.N.Y. MSn
(716)I73-4S03
fe
684
PllILOLOU Y.
LA M>I.IDAD.
SAN moDti.
uvro/.
teasd^o
i$SO
Itnt/.ilo
«1
ICHinto
Aijn
trugeiUo
hai
triliko
H A 1 I, T S A.
hair
cars
nose
eyes
mouth
(8.J
Mr. A. Anderson, to wliom I nm indolrted Ibr the- Carrier vocabulnry, niso giivi-
me the following words of the language spoken by (lie Inuinns on Milbank Sound, in
latitude 52° 20' north.
man, tiiimiis, trisin
woman, kdnitm
child, hajik
child, my, hitnuk
boy, hitmikir/.
head, kete
hand, liaitisi
chief, f.dimas
slave, kiikii
Europeans, kdmpk^wii
house, koiika
blanket, kv//.sirm
scissors, ka/,.kiiit/./i)i
black silk handkerchief. /<dti/kml/./i'
twine, Isuii/'.
beads, khiaUif. {t/t.laiala/. i
canoe, kilwii
knife, Itainum
shoes, kaiiui/.
shot, ti^ulsa/.aio
iron, kiliy.
stone n<lze, kiii/.-kaul
sun, t/./ik^iiulit
moon, ?iiisi)i.
wind, ioiila
thunder, jiijcfl/
rain, yii/^k-ua
snow, kitispi^
hail, ketpti;
fire, ti^ullilii
water, v-di) m
dog, vats
wolf, ku-a^ilts
deer, kiijumila
deer-skin, ku-atsa/.
gout, <j7/;(
Ix'avrr, kt>i>liin
goose, /(Uiakaitk
salmon, ima/i.
grvat, kaikias
small, jMiiio/a
strong, If-hiiruk
dead, ///"/
1, II Ilka
thou, ksii
we, iiiikiniiiak
many, kitinuri
lew, liuna
yes, /a
no, /•'i»ji
one, iiUDiiuk
lw(i, mii/iiik
three, ifu/.tiik
four, «/(>hA-
five, skiiiiik
six, kti/Ziiiiik
seven, nuil/.tiiis or mti /.simii.\
eight, i/n/Jii/.iiiniis
nine, mnmisknmin
ten, hiifliuskum
drink (lo), nukay.
see, /()/. i/v(At
say, kimloy.
\\v, tell falsehood, kaiiku
walk, /<W(i
go, >i>inina
come, hiiinan
trade, A7irt;t
understand, haomilt
THE "JARGON,"
OR
T R A I) E - L A N G U A G E OF OREGON.
A vKitv siliiiiiliir plienonn'iioii in |)liil(ili>ny is ihi- lrii(l<'-lnni;iiiin<', or, ns il is gciifrnllj
collcil, tlic J((/-^'o;/, ill use mi llic N'iirlliwrst (Vuist, niicl in ihn Orcpm Territory. Tin
circiiinstiinccs to wliii-h it owes its orii;in arc iirolmlily ns li)llow.s : Wlicn Ihr lirilisli
and Ainrrirnn lrii(liiii;-slii|)s first npiwaictl on tin' const, iiIhiuI sixty yrars «};<>, tliey
liiiinil tlirn- ninny irilx's s|H'iikin^ distiiK-l lnn;.Min;;('s. Ilml it ('linnrcii llinl nny one ol'
tliosi- Imd Urn oi" rnsy uc(|iiisiiion, nnd very {icnorally dilliisuil, like the ('lii|)|>(!Wny
nmony tin; I'listi-rn trilirs, the Mnlny in tlio Inilinn Arclii|i<'lnjjo, nnd llin Itnlinn in tin
Mcditrrrnncan, it would no doiilit linvi- Ihtii iido{iti'd ns tlic nicdiiim of oominiinirntion
lic'twrcn llir whiles and the unlives. I iilortiiiinlely, nil these langunjies, — the NiMitkn.
Niisiinnle, Tshinuk, Tsihailish, \',\, — wen; alike hai>h in proniineialioii, einiiphx in
striieture, and s|iokeii over a viry liniiled space. 'I'lie liinij;iiers, thereliire, tixik no
pains lo lieconie actpiaiiiled with any of them. Hut ns the liarlHUir of Nootkn was, at
tlint time, the head-ipinilers or principal dc|Mil of tlio tinde, it was necessarily the cas<
that some words ol" the dialect then- spoken liccnmc known to the traders, nnd thnt the
Indians, on the other hand, wen< maile liimiliar with a lew l')ii<;lish words. 'I'hese, with
the assistance ol" si(.'iis, were siiHicient liir the slight interc-oiirsu that was then innin-
laiiied. .Mli'rwards, the traders iK^iran to lrec|iient the ("oliimliin Kiver, and naliirnlly
attempted to comiiiiinicate witli the unlives there liy iiienns ol" the words which they hnd
found intelligihlc nt Nootka. The ChiiiiHiks, who are ipiick in catchinjj sounds, soon
acquiri-d lliew words, Inith Notitka ami I''.iiglish, and we find ihiit tliny were in use
among them as early as the visil of Lewis and Clarke, in IH04.
But when, at a later |)oriod, the whites eslahlished themselves in Oregon, it was soon
foiinil that the .scnnly list of nouns, verlis, and ndji'ctives, then in use, wa.s not siifriciont
for the pur|iose8 of the more cimslant and general intercourse thnt iH'gan lo take place.
A real Inngunge, complete in nil its parts, however limited in extent, was required ! and
it was formed by drawing uikiii the Tshinuk for siicii words as were necessary to odd to
636
l> II I L O L U U Y.
the skclrtnn whirh Ihpy iilrriiily |io8m<)is<-<I, the HincWR and trndonii, thn rnnnrcting li|;n-
inciilH, ns it were, of n s|«hi'Ii. Tlirw consiMnl iifllu" niimcriils (ihc ten iligils niid tho
»<ir(l tor humlrrtl), Iwrlvc pDinoiiiis (/, llimi, lie, i<r, ;/r, tliri/, litis, ollirr, all, /kiIIi, irhn,
m7w^), niid iiboul twriity iitlvcrlw niiil prr|>osilioiiM (such ns umi; llirti, fhimrrlf/, $ijon,
itrmsi, ashore, oji'-tliore, iiilaml, iilmre, Mitir, to, &<•.) Ilnviiig a|i|in>|irinlr<l thcw, niicl
n li'w other words of the siiiik" liinannjio, thi? " Jnryon" iissiimrd a r('f>idur sha|i<', and
iHfatiH' of ^'rciit service as a medium of couimuiiii'iilion ; — for it is remarkalile that for
many years no lon'i^ner li'arned the |)ro|ier 'I'shiiiiik suflicieiitly well to he of u».' as on
inlerpreter.
Hut the new lanjiiiafji' nriMveil ndditions from otluT sources. The Ciinndian rni/iif;eiirs,
as they an' called, who enlisted in the srTvice of the American and llrilish lur coinpa.
niifi, were hrou^ht more closely in enntact with the Indians than any ntherx of Iho
fon'ijjners. Thi'V ilid not merely trade, they travelled, hunted, ale, and in short lived with
them on ti-rms of liuniliarily. The consc(|uence was, that several words of the I'reneh
lanj'uai'e were added to the slender stock of the .lnr;;on. These were only such terms
as did not pn'viously lielong to it, — such as the names of various articles of IIhmI and
clothing in use amoni; the Canadians (hreml, flmir, laril, oven/Ml/, lull), some implements
and articles of furnilun- {ii.Te, /n/ii; mill, lalje, lior), severnl of the parts ef the bcnly
[liriiil, moHlh, toiijiiie, Irrlli, imk', liiiml, J'mt), and the verlis to rini, -litig, and itnuvf.
A single conjunction, jmix, corrupted to jii, and used in the s<'nse of iiml, was also
derived from this source.
Kijjht or ten words wei-e made liy what granunarians term oliomatopcria, — that is,
were formed liy a rude attempt to imitate .sound, and are therefore the sole mid original
pro|KTty of the .largon. (Vaisidering its mixlc of formation, one is rather surprised that
the numlier of these words is not greater. Ki/ilip is inten(h'<l to express the .soinid of
lioiliiig water, and means, to /««/ .• liDlii} {itr liiiliii) is th<' ringing of a liell ; />« is the
re|n)rt of a gim ; liklik is lor a inthli ; liimlum is the word lor luiiil, and is inlenili-d to
reprisent its liealing; the word tuiii, pronounced with great liirce, dwelling u|Hin the
concluding m, is the nearest approach which the natives can make to thi^ iioiso of a
cataract: hut they usually join with it the I'jiglish word /'v//c/-, making /i.;;/.</-ii^i, the
name which they give to the lidls of a river. Minli* repri'sents the soimd of any thing
falling or thrown down (like the Knglish niiish and s/iuisli) ; kink is the sound of a
ro|)e sialdenly looseil from its liistenings, or " let go."
All the words thus lirought together and comliined in this singularly constructed
sfiecch are alsiul two hundred and filly in number. 'I'he llillowing list may hi' regarded
ns very nearly complete.
NOOTK A.
htims, grnnt, very
hntii, much, many
kakcul, to strike, hurt, kill, destroy
kliitiiira, to go
klosh, gnral
klutshiiiun, womnn
* The « and the (A arc cniplnycd in Uiii paper, in which a •Uictly aciuntific orthography ia unnooea.
aary, inilead of Uie u and r which have Imen oicd rlKwhvrc.
NORTIIWEHTF. RN AMERICA.
637
kum&takt, tii know, uncloratund, hcnr
mnkiik, lo lrnik>, buy, m-II
miimiik, tn make, cauto
iiiaiiitth, ilcor
jmtliUsh, lo givo
pttlink, bad
lair, cliiol'
luiita, litilc, young, o child
ttJinko, U) como
ti/iikamiii, iron
ink ur ift'A-, no, not
F. \ (i I. I H II.
Umiuii, .Xmcrionn
lull, IniiiI
/iiikii/fliiiiii, Imndkorvliicr
llllllS, hl.llM!
/■Vi//. lo cry
/./</*, JilllSM
Hiiilsliitlsh, ICngli'li, EiigllHlinimi
/.///, kflllr
^•»/, I'olll
/i/,, lako
/i.w, lii/.y
/»/», null
man. iii.'iii
»/»/', IIKHUI
itiiiski/, iiiiiskct
111 HI, inline
tins, iiosc!
oliiiiiaii, iild man, fiiilicr
puiii, fire
jK'jMi, paper
ymi, Miip|Hi9c
utiiiuii, salmon
.«)'/, sail, raiivas.s, rritlon-cloth
.<r//«.«, sIkk's, iiiuccasilis
shiil, Mhirt
.«//., sli-k
.«/.//>, skin
siiiiik, siiiiikc
.«//<>, snow
««//, sail
slik, stick, wimhI, lrr<"
.</«», sldiir, iHinr, any tiling solid
stiilsliin, sliir^ron
sun, sun, day
tala, dollar, silver
//'(/, dry
Isliakfl, jacki-l
liiiiiold, Id-morrow
Hum, warm
M(i/<(, water
iriii, wind
T9H I ND K.
H, yes
lilkr, JHion
«//(/, now, then, tlioreiipon
liiKikali or it/ikali, tbniiorly
a/s, younger sister
ail, yoiinger brother
r/i/i, Is'toTi!
iiiinti, river
liaJoiiiia, other, dilFerent
iiiluilr, iinme
iulika, lie, she, it
iiikso, hair
iiikira, this way, on this sido
iri//(/, that way, on that side
ikala, ikta, what, why
i/r/ii, earth, land
iiiatiii, lieyond, across
iiUso, Isinf'
iiik, paddle
islii, now, iininediolely
itmliul, hluck Iwnr
ill/kill, lont;
Xi///, where ?
kaiiiiitl, tolmcco
kiilailaii, arrow, shot, bullet
kaliikala, bird
ISO
0)38
I'UII-OI.OO Y.
kiimuks, ilo);
l.tllUIIII»kst, lM>tll
/•timiiri; all
kiiiii III, ciinoc
A(/«/*/ii(i/l, liixv much? how many t wh<'n!
/,iiji-liii, or kiijiii/iH, eldiT brother
A'((f(/, what
kikiiili, liclow, low, (IdWii
ki/iimi, to turn, n-turn
ki/i/uiii. Hint, ^'liisH
Lilil.-ul, Uittli!
k until, JM-hiud
kiiitiin, ImrM."
kliiliiuiiiiiii, to salute, tu sympathise with
A/iii/, lilnok
klitkilii, who
k/ii>kii, ihi'V
X7( fki'rsk. Mint
k/i/hiil, r<)|R', string, thn-ai)
A/;//, sour
kmii/i, sky
kiid/iiii, ear
kiraiiisiiiii, always
ki'iis, alVaiil, tiiniJ
ki'ilikinli, ilurk
likini/iii, or /i/.7>i>, older sister
iiiiiikii, thou, lliy
Hiaimi, down stn'am
mu/kiii/i, (or tiiiUJkiriti), ashore, away
IroMi the river, inland
iiinlliiii, to or near the river
miiiirliisl, dead, to die
iiiislshhiiui, slave
iiiilkoi, to stand, be still
millait, to sit, reside, remain
inuMikii, »r, our
musiiiiis, bullhlo, cattle
iirt / interrogative particle
/Kir/, mother
tiiiika, thou, thine
tiiiiiiiiiiiiks, other
iiiiuiis, oll'-shori', on lh<! strram •
tiiiiiifikii, suri'ly, certainly
iiiis'iikii, ye, your
ii/iij)it.\ki, (in-
ojiikuii, liiisket, tin kettle
ojiillki, Ikiw
iijii/.sii, knili'
(>/«</*//, slern of vessel
ol/ii/i, sun, day
jitlj'tl, red, IiIikmI
]>il\lnlt, i;ii-en
siihii/i, mikii/i, hifih, up
.siniim, the brown b(<ar
siii/ii», eve
.v(7i.v, I'lielid
syiii/., Iiluc^
mikiiiiliil, ^iMi, musket
tiiiiii/iki, yesterday
tdiiiit/ilsli, cask, liarrcl
/inn it, U'fi.
til or /«/, heavy ; tired
tilikuiii, men, |H>op|e
tilikiiiii-miiinii, lather
Isliikr, dire<'tly, instantly, soon
/.v/(/.«, colli
ti'liiiiii, paint, painted
^vo^, water •
tiikili, to wish
tiikiip, W'hili!
vdki, to-morrow
wi'Xv, again j more
inkiit, road, path, trail
tni.iijti, by iind bye, presently
('I'he numerals ore given elsewhere.)
F R K N C H.
Ayi/w, (capot) coat, frock
<y/j<-^ (ciissettt) Ikjx
A'u/j (coiirir) to run
I'dltiisJi (lit Imtclir), mouth
Miuali {/it liiirlir), axe
/ujl-/!fs (//( graisse), grease, lard
la/an (la Irtn^ur), tongue
Inmrstiii (la iiirilecine), medicine, doctor
laiiiiiiiliii (la iiioiita^ne), mountain
liijitj) (III jii/x), pipe
lasHin (la .soie), silk
latiipl (ta liUJe), table
•
N O R T II VV E 8 T E R N A M E R I (' A.
639
Mttl (In l(li), liinil
l<tirrsl (la ii>lr), wninlri>nl
liiuv (lit lirilli), iilil wii nun
Mihkiii (le liiiiiiil), L/lHL-iiit
IniiiitiiH, sliccii
Ifpir (le pint), \\m\
liku (Ir coil), iiii-k
Hill (Ir li)ii/i). Weill"
liiiiiiii (Ir iiiiiin), liiind
lihlii (Irs ilriil.s), tcclli
lu-mnnui (loiij) iiiariii), seal
iiiiilii (iimiiliii), inlll
jiiijMi, liilhiT
J'lisiiiiiks ( Fill II f II in), I'Vinchninn
jm.srxr (friiiifiiisrs I) cliilli, bliiiikct
puliili (/loiiilir), )(iin|inwik'r
.sii/nlil (III III line I), (lc)iii', bnmd
siiiiii.sli (sitiivifir), Iniliiin
iiliiiiilr (rhiiii/rr). Id siii);
siiijHil, Mii/iiil (rliii/ifitii), hut
ti>ti!,r (iliiiinei), Ici dnnco
n Y ONO M ATI) !• (i: 1 A.
Iiiiii .' hull I liiirrii .' Iinstcn ! i|iiirk !
/;(//(■, 111 liiii^li
/./«/.-, iinlifd, Id |i«>s«)
lijiHli, 1(1 IhiII
miisli, liillni. cniNlicd, broken
TN), III shool, iioImv ol'n gun
lil.iil:, n iviilili
/in'iii, ti Ik'II
Iiiiii, n hciivy iiiiisc J liiiii-iralii, cMntncX
(u ml II III, lii-iirt
(j)i/lnii, liHilisli)
DOUBTKI' I..
Till- liillcminj;, wild oik; or two rxcqiliiins, must lie i iilirr Tsliiiiiik or N'ooika ; but il
is um-crlniii Id whicli ol'lhu two lliov urc to Im- rcli'rri'd.
Iiiitnl;, i|iiii'k
Itriil, llDIll'
iklit, iiomIs, |irD|iorty
inn, lit-nvcr
isknm, to liikf, get
kiikirn, so, thus, like
kullit», mrrfly, Id no |iurposo
kniiiii.iiik, lioiids
kan, tied, ninde I'list
knjisliiiiiln, to stt.il
kuijtnl, (qu. aii!iiille d peau ?) needle
kliiiiriifkifit, to lie
klimiiiklimin, snnd, fine, ground fine,
broken to |iicces
kill mis, perhniiK ; I do not know
kusliiskusliis, rtockings
kirajHi, to, toward, at, of, about, con-
coming
kua]>rl, no more, no longer ; stop
Itle, long time
Uilo, Id curry
miikiiiiiiik, to eat, drink, swallow, inhole
niiisiilsi, luid
vinsaiii. Id li<! down, to idcop
tiiiiiii/iilxli, or iiaiiilsli, to sea
okiik. Ibis, tbnt
olrlr, iK'rrics, fruit
oil), bun^TV, thirsty
]M>lnkli, night, dark
sniu, fur
siikiiliiks, trottsers
sdleks, nngry ; to quarrel, fight
sukiiiii, half
skiikiiiii, strong, powerlul ; Icarful
suns, ruin
siipiiia, to jump
tillil, tsliillsliil, a button ; a star
titiisli, milk
ttoli). Id lose one's way, to mistake
vau-a, to speak, to tell
640
P II I L O L O O Y.
It may appear hiiiKulnr thai kitop Knitlinh word* tliould bo omplnycd (hiicIi an man,
mm, nxKiii, siirk, miow, »ann, \r.), ahM-h, it »<hiIiI i>n-m, nii^lit linvii Ut-n xiippliitl,
likf llif oiIht Kjiiijlnr ti-rm*, froni thr Jmlinii l.iii){ua);<-«. TIm' n-nwm in prulinhly lu In'
roiiiiil ill iIh' tiiot ihni ihf ri>rrrs|ii>iHliii){ trriiin in iImmc lan^uiigi'H arc m) i'.\C4filiii|;ly
ru^itril ill Miiinil in t« In' ini|>nii-lM*nl>h- !•• i\fu KiifiUnU iiri;nn!< ol' h|iitcIi, 'I'Ih' 'r><liiiuik
trniiNliiliKii ol' till' nlirivi'-iiMnlHiOitI linnt wixilil In' k'i///i like ill, «///(//, oki'l/lannii,
i/O/m/iist/ii, l//l.it/'ii, ami imiil/Ztb/. In wmi"- cnitcK, when" tlic Txliiniik trrin in less
ililliriilt, loth thai and iIm' Kn;:li'>h an- in ux; anil Wjually ui'll iiniliTKtiHHl ; aM, lu)k and
irnla, liir watiT, — /';m and L)J, (i>t ctM,—*>liipittki and imni, lor fin", TIk' word /ii//«r
lias tlini- HMionynii il<Ti»"l I'niii tlin-"' laii^na^c!<, /<»/»(, (roiii lli<" I'lH'lirti, i>/H»iiin
(old man), t'miii iIk' Kiii{Ii'>Ii. and lilikniii.iiiumtt I'dhii iIii- Tsliinnk ; (llic pr<>|M'r wurd
ill till' l.ilirr ii I'laiihi, lint ni ihii i^ I'lHind In !■' aiiilii^iiiiiiiN, iVniii ili ilillrrint iiiriiiiiii;' in
l'!lij^li>li mil I'ri'iii'li. iIh' »i>ril lilikum. nun, it pn rix'-il). W'- arr rrniiiiiird mI' mir nwii
lan^na^i', in wliirli »r lia»i- iIm* i-omiiimhi n-rni <///</ (nr ilmlilii) ilrrivcil iVniii Ihi' W I'i-li
or am'iint llrili'<li, th«' word hillnr, <>r Snx<>n oriijin, and tlir won! /xi/xi, wliidi wr, likr
till' Cliinooki), have lii>rn>«r<il I'roni tin- pr»-iH-h.
'riio ori'^in ol* •«imn ol" th<- «<iriU i* railiiT wliinisii-nl. 'I'lic Ainrriraiis, Itrilish, and
Fo'iuli nri' ili^tiiiLMiislNil liy the li'riii« lUfJun (or llosioii), Kiid^holsli (Kiii)> (i>'or^i'),
mill l'iis'iiiil.>, Mhii'li »!■ pntiiiiw tn !>•• iIh' word I'minuis, rxrniplril to I'lixiii (lis niiihrr
/, I, imr iIm' natal /' imii Ik' pnniiMiiH-i'd liy tli*' liuliaiit), uilli ilir 'rNliiiiiik pliinil Irrnii-
lialion 11/.S ailili'd. The »<>ril lor Maiiki-t is prii|ial>ly Ironi llii' saiiir soiirri' ( /;v/hjv;/.v.«,
Frriirh uoimIs, or rliiihin)!). FimJi^/i i> «xpn-»Mil liy JVlun, wliirli Hat tlii.' name of a
Ciiii.idian who lnTamo ik-rnni-fd at Fort V«in-ouvcr; In; wiit ihp lirnl |ioriioii whom llii!
lialivi's had ivit M'<'n in that Mali-, niiil hit Mniiii><' ap|i<-ariiiiri' and arlioiit iiiadr Hindi
an iiiipnssion ii|>on tl11m.ll1.1l thiii<i'l<>r«ard any mii' hIio rondiii'lril in iiii alisiird or
irratioiiiil iiiaiiiiir was said to a<-t LnLun J'l/foii, "like I'illon ;" liiit llii- word is now
coinniiiiiiy iishiI Hilhoiit tlie pr«T<diMu' |>aftirli\
In thi' phonMJiii'y of iIh- lani;iiau<' oim- point it |iis-iiliarly intrn'stinir, a.t illiislralin<; llio
usual rrtiill 01° iIh' t'lition ot' two or iiHirv laiitiiia^it. As tlir .lar;:oii is to Is- spiikrn liy
Cliiliookt, r'nulithiiH'n, and Fr>'fi<-hiiH'n, so hit to Ik- aliko easy and iiiti<llii;il>lii to all, il
miitt acliiiil no * Hind wliii-h cannot In- nadily pniiioiiiiritl lij all tliri'r. Tlir nultiiralt
of ilir 'r-liiiiiik (/ and '/) an* mOIiikiI to h and k : i/l IsTomi's Wat tlir iH-^iniiiii); ol' a
word, and '/ at tin- iiid : and sihih- ol' iIh- h.ir«li roiiiliinalions orroutonants ari' Niniplilii'd
by oiiiitiiiiy one or two ol' iIh- ••lcin<iit«. Thus wf liavi- tukth liir /(lyiy , klill (iir t/lil/l,
klosli lor tfliiiiili, lM>k tor tfliMnjiin, iVo. (In iIk- othor hand, tin- il,J, f;, r, r, z of the
I^n;>lish and FrriK'h iK-ronn- m the mouth of a Chiiinnk, t, ji, k, I, ir and s. 'I'ho
l'jij;lish / (</:/i) it ■'h'in;!iil to r\h ; tin- Fn-inh nasal >i is dnip|H'd, or is nMainrd without
its nasal toiiiid. KxampUii ••)' all ihtf. and ol' oilii'r rhanui's, will Is' stvu in tlir viH'a-
iMilary ; and wr- may roinj>ar<> th<-in with iIh' siniilar cllit't pnHlured liy that conibiualiiin
ol'I^aMin and Fninh whi>h I'oruHil our moli-rii l-'nulish loiiijui'.
In llir pronunciation of a (iw wordt thi-ro arr- sonio slij-lit variations. The short vowel
H (or ") is frffpirntly iittcrrd like a short 1, and sometimes liko a slinrl '/ ,- siiiiuiiiiikxl
^.siiiiiiiiiiik.tt) srven, is prorxsimiil by tome [ktsihis Arj»i»iii/,.«/, by others .\i'imii)iiikst ;
kutiiiiiiii, livi', is rhan^"il to linnuni and knniiuiii ; liil, heavy or tired, is iil'ten pro-
nounriil fi/, \i\ In man\ w..rdt it it impovsilile to deride whether n or i< should be
written ; as, mamuk or mamnk, to make, — mrmr/iisl or mrmrlml, to die, — tuok or iMik,
11
N «» It T II \V K S T K K N A M K It I V A.
nil
wnlcr, — niomini or iiiiisiim. In hIi'i'il A ••iiniliir dilliriiliy Miuiu'liiiir^ iH-nint with llii^ r
mill i, Ht, kiiiiiiin (ir X(/«i/»i, nil, — In lit i\r Inlii, \v\\»\ N h iHTiisiuiiiilly |ir<iiiiiiiiir('il
iiki* .«//, mill virr viTNii ; ii Irlirr i>r nvIIhIiIi' i» wiinrtiiiK'M ilr<i|i|H'il, iis iiiitiiiiiil!ili nr miiiilnh,
III Ml', — t^H/ir nr <X/'<, u li.il .' All llii'M- Miriiilioii'i, liiiHi'viT, iiri' iiiiiiii|><irliiiil, iiiiil in
Ki'iii-ral il limy In' hiiiiI llml llir liiii)>iin<;i' \* iiHiki'ii with )!ri-ril iiniliiniiily IIimii^IiimiI iIh*
wliolc I'Niitil (ir<'(iiiiilry «liin' il |ir"Viiil-i.
Till' ui'iiiiiiiiiilii III mill nri' »rry >iiii|ilr. Iiilli rlii'iis ilirri' iirr iiniii'. Tlir mily
iii>liiii<'i' ill ttliirli 11 Mni'ij SI I'liii'il III Ik' viirii'il ill liinii, uiis tlmi nl' IJH' iiilirni'^iilivi' |ir<i-
iiiiiiii liiihi, uliiii, i>r ujiirh ikaiii »iiM iHTa^iiiniilly ii-^iil in iiii oliliijiir nisi, us, miikn
l.imiirl kiiiiiiiliiks ikiilii miiika iiiwii iiiiikii,\ hiivi' (iiruolii'ii (im Inii^rr kiiiiu) uliiil
yiiM siiiti III nil'. Iliil ikiilii Im nlwi n-wii in Ihr sinw' uC" liir wiml V nr " why '"
'I'lirri' is iin iirlirli' in lln' liin^iiii);i-, 'I'lii' ilriiinnslnilivi- |irnniiiin oknk, lliis, ixrii-
sinlllilly sii|i|i||(s llii jiliirr nl'llii' laiilllsli /In.
rill' ;;i'iiili\i 111' iiuiiiis is ili'liriiiini'il iii'rrly liy lln' rnii^liiirlinii ; iis, kiilti mm iiiiiikii
jiiipii > uliiil is ilii' Miiini' 111' thy Uillirr I
'I'lir |illll'.'il is ill )>i'ni'i'lll linl ilislinfjillsliril III s|M'nliiiij; ; sniiii'liinrs, //(//», llillliy, is
rin|ilnyril liy uiiy iirriii|i|iiisis.
Till' iiilji'i'liM' I'mi'ili's llii' iiniiii, :is in 'rsliuiuli ninl l'ji;;lisli ; w*. Iiisinn liiikiilslmiii .
silk liiiiidkiii'liii'r; iiiiiMiIsi lOiLnw, luiil |iiii|ilc'.
( 'iiin|iiirisnii is r\|in'ssril liv ii |M'ri|i|iriisis ■■ I mil slrnlivrr lliaii llinii," Uniilil Im',
ink iiiiiikii sknkiDii knkiin iinihn, lii., llimi iml slmiiy iis I. 'I'lir sii|irrlalivi' ik'nrrr is
indiciili'il liy mlvi'ilis ; n-t,liiihix kIhiiiiiii nkitk kaiiiin, n ry nlil lli;il niiinr ; mini iliiiikilli
vi'ry iinrii'iil (lil. IJir ii«n). A (jri'iil ilcil is cNpri'ssi'il liy ilir imrr stnss nl' llir vniri' ;
lidiitf" (ilwi'llin;; Imiy nil till' liisi .sylliilili') iiic.-iiis vrry, i'M'n'iliiii.'ly uniil ; iiii'itkiili,
H'illi I III' lirsl s\ lialilr itrmi II niit, siu'iiilii-s, \i'rv loiiij aL'n : 'oi lniitik'\ lniiii'\ In mis" . \'i*.
Till' iiniiii'iiils air rrniii ilir 'rsliiniik. 'I'luv an —
ikl nr (///
/links/ nr niiikiisl
klitii or /.'(///
Iitkri nr Ink/
one
IWd
lliris'
fiiiir
kini/iiiiii. kinniini, nr knnmim live
/akiiiii nr /iilinin six
XII II II milks/, Mtiiniiiks/, siimi/niiks/ .srvcn
uliililkiii nr s/iili/kin ri^hl
kiiniis/ nr kiriiii/s/ nine
/il/lilnm ten
/iik'iinoHiik nr /iikiiiiiiimik linndrrd
•Sniiir id' llii> variiiliniis ill |irniiiiiii'iiilinn wliirli ii|i|K'ar in Ilir rnri'){iiiii^ linvc Ihtii
ain'ailv rx|ilaiii<'il : llir ollirrs |iri«Trd rrniii ijii' ^'rialrr or Irss ii|i|irnxiiiialiiin »ll('in|ilrd
liv llii' s|H'aki'r In llii' nri^inal liriiis in 'I'sliiiiiik ; liiil all llu' liiriiis mmld Im i'i|iially
ui'll iiiidi'rsliHiil,
'I'lir cnlilliillalinlls nj' llir IlllMlirMls am llli' IllnsI silll|ili' |iosNilili'. I'lU'Vrll is /il/hlillil
pi ik/, Icn and niii- ; Iwi-lvi- is /n/lrlnm pi mnks/, \r. 'r»riily is mitks/ liillilnm ;
lliirly, klon InlMnm. TlioliKiind Is Inlliiiim /iikniiiiiHiik, or Irii liiiiidrrd, l%ij;lilrrn hull-
ilrcd and fiirlv-lwn wniild ln' liillrUint pi s/ohtkiii liikiinionnk, Inkrl /iillrliim, pi mnks/.
Till' |M'rsnim! iirniiniins (in- —
miikn, I
iiniikn, llioii
iiilika, he
mfisnika, wo
niisiiikfi, yn
k/tiska, they
101
643
l> II I I. () l,0(i Y.
MutiiHii, in 'I'lliiiiiik, iiiiiiii!t " wr Imic," fxi'lmliiin ilir |Hrii>ii iiililri«s<il ; in iIh' .Iiitkoh
it i* ummI in n mop' gcni'rni Hcnw, iIhhikIi nlliiiikn, wliji'ti miiiii'i "' nil (inrliiiliiiK th<
{N'r«in niMr>"4'Hil) in mmwlinirn i'iii|ili>yril hy llmw ulin iiiiclirNliinil tlii' niitivc iiliiiin,
'I'll.' |i.r-.HiiHl |ininiMin» Ih'ciiiih' [uwHcs-iivi' nMTily liy ln'iii;j pri'lixi')! lo nmin*; n^,
iiiiiLii li:iii.\, iiiv liniiw; iiiiiikii iiliiiiiiiii, lliy liillirr; mlihi kiiixi, \\\* rniil.
'I'll'' iiilrrr'ifiiillvi' |inpiiiiiiMH iin- /■/((/,»/'/,« Im f /.'/'i/ nr //"/>/, wli.il .' I,iiii/sliiiili, \\i>*
iiiiirli, Imu iiniiiy f 'I'ln' ImiI is iilso iiv <l liij- «liiii' i.e. ||i>u imik li liiii<', cr linu
iniiiiN il.'iyx !
'I'lii' ri'liilivi' |iriiniiiin?i iihkI in ynirriil Ik' iiihIi iv| I; t\^, l.nh nhil miiiiiiii iihiikii
trairii kii'i/iii iiiiUn, wliiri' i-< lli.it MiiliiMin |iil' »liii'li| ymi -.ipuld' Id iiH' ' SdimlinirM,
hiiwcMT, ihi' iiilrrriii'iiiivc (irmi'iiins tii|)|ily ilirir |ilnii', ii-i In ICii;;lisli ; — iim, iiik iiiiikii
kuiiiiitiikf ikiild iiiiiikii ifiiiiii, I i|ci lint ihiiIi'I'-'I'iimI «IiiiI llion kiivi si,
Ok'ik, this nr tlnit, in llir mily ili'iiiiiiisir.ilivi' |iri>ii'iiiii,
TIm' inili'finitc |ir<>iiiiuns iirr Kniiinimki'i, Ixilli, Inlny iiiuii', kniiiin,, nil, Imiii, inii -li it
iinny, timnx, Irw nr lilllr, linloi/iid, cilliir.
In iimiTnl, till' liiisL- i>\' the vitIi \h Irll in I"' iiilcip il rrnin iIim cintcvt. \\ lien il i>
iilisiiliili ly Mrn-s.iry t.i ili«tiiii.'iiis|i ijir lime, iirt.iiii ihImtIis iiri' riii|ili.yfil, iis, islii, nnu.
iillii, iiiiw, jiisl now. NtriiiL'lilHiiv . iri/iijii, priM litis , iilkr, kihmi, t.iliiki , dinctlx , iiislnntly :
iiniik'iti, liirincrlv, nkuk-Miii, to.ilav, liiiiioln or iiiihi, lo-niorrosv, /iitiii/iki, yrstcnliiy.
I'lii' I'litiiri', in III " s<'iis<' 111" " iilmiii 111, " " ri'nciv to," is sonii'tiiiiis t\|in'ssiil liv liil.ih.
which inrnna pro|HTly to triilt or ilnirr, — im, nniku inijui liikili miiin/nfl, my liiiliir i-
ni'iir liyin:.'. or niHiiil to die,
A coiiililionul or sii|i|>iisiiivr simiilii-riliuii is ;;lvrii lo Ihc nrli liy |in lixiiij llir wonN
l./'iiiiif, |Mrlii|ii, mikI /««, i|cri\iil I'roin ihc llnylisli sii/>/>'tsi\ Imt iiscil riillnr iiKJiiiiiiti ly :
IIS, iinih'i kiiiir, ii'iil.ri lili'.iiiii-iiiiiiiiii IJiiiiii.i iiifiiii iiiiist, I Hill .irriilil lli'il my liitln r will
ili'" (III. I iilVdid my rmlu'r |K'rh^i|>s die). Xiikii liikili jua mnikn iiiitiniik k/i»li imikn
liiliusli, I wish >oii Would imnd my iixc (iil., I wish sii|i|)osc you rnnkc -lood my iixi).
/1m maikii klalnirn iuliirn, pi miikii tslinko knkira, if you will ^o yonder, I will liillow
(lit., HU|i|)os<- yon L'o Ihiit way, llii-n I coiiii' Ihi- siimo).
All iiitcrrounlni' llinii is siiiiii'limis u.-iilr liy ln-i'rtiii'4 llio imrliclc nil ; iis, iiinikn im
lukili iiiiiKnk iiiiiikii ki'iiiiii kiiiijiii iinikn, do yoii wish to sell your horse to me '
The siilisiHiitive vorli iniisl nlwnys Im' iiiidirsli««d iVoin tin- loriii ol' ihe senti-iire: us.
inaikii jiilli»i,\\v<\\ art fiM.li.sh; sik mnikn nn .' is thy lirolher >\'\i f Ihiiiis olnniai'
mnikn knmm, very old is thy e:iiioe.
The adverh usually |irec(ilea the ndjeelive or verli wliic li it i|iialilies, lhnii;:li il iiia\
someliiiies fiillnw the latter; as, Imin.s klufli. vi ry (.'iiod; knlfns imikn iiiiisinii, I am
only sli{|)iii;i ; iinikn lininx tiikili kiiiiinliiks. I very miiili wish In know ; irik> ikl nun.
one inuri' day, or au'ain one day ; pnllnlih inkt, yive more, or a;!aiii.
There is hut one |ire|Misiti(iii, vi/., kiiii/m or kiin/m, which is used in various sinsr.s,
Bs, to, for, at, in, tiiiinnu, lininnls, iVr. jtiil even this may fiencrally lie omitted, and Ihe
sentence remain inlelli;;ilile. Snikn klnlnun imikn linns, can oiilv mean, '• I am (joinf;
to my house." Ktkirili, down, is used in the sinse ol' IkhhiiIi. and snknli, hij;li, up, in
the sense Ki\' iilinrf.
Only two coiijiini'tions, pro|HTly s|.eakin;;, are linmd in thi- lnnj;tia){e; — /n, from the
French word ;)«i.v, is used to mean ami, or, llien, &o, ; pot, from suppoM", menus i/; in
case /lull, proriiled titat, and serves in nennrnl ns n sign of the snhjiinctive or conditional
mood.
N O U T n W K M 'I' K K N A M K UK A
64:i
All \h
iimo rxi'lMMiiiliKiH wliiili iirr ill"' iiiiliinil i\(irissiiiii>i cil' liiliii:; mi'l iiiKtimi iiiiiy
In> NiMil lit iM'Inii:
l»>
, '.' Illt'JIIII', III llljs liljiilll
I'hl
Illy nil'' rr.iily |i< riili.ir In il (mill llml
Ullll'll
111 |i;irlly Innii llir i'lii^ilisli) In |||ii i'«|iri'»iiiiii '• hmi I /</
iwil III iiryi' iir IiiihIi'Ii a |iiirly in iiiiy work.
it limy MH'iii (It I'irxl HiKht iiiriitii|ir<'li<'ii«ilil)' ili:ii ii luiiuiiu'^i', ii
<'iiiii|iii>i'il III' Hii ll'W Wiiiiji, lliiis iiiiii'litii'iiiliy riiiiililni i|, ■>liiiii|il Ik' r\ti ii-inly n-ui
till' siili' iiii'iljiiiii III' iiiliTi'iiiiiiiiiiliiriiliiiii iiiiiiili;; liriliv ill
I'll il
II V III
iilli'il.
lilHIIIIll IlllllMi
liialx. Viiriiiiin
riri'lllll-lilliri'K lll'r, IliiUi'ViT, In In' liiiriH' ill lllillil, ill I'nlillllllill'^ ill ViillH' IIH slli'll II
iiHiliiiiii, III till' lir.Hl |iliiri', II i;<iiiil iliiil |x i'\|irr^'<i'il liy llir liiiH iil' viiirr, i|ii> liMik, mill
Xi'Mliiri' III' till' ii|H-iiki-r. 'i'lir liiiliiiiii, ill ({I'nrriil, rniiiniry In wliiil la, W(i Ix'lii'vr, tin
I'liiiiiiinii ii|iiiiiiiii, uri> very N|>iiriii<,; i<( llnir ;ji^iii'iiliitiiiiiii. Nii liili^ilti'^cH, |iriiliiililv.
ri'iiiiiri' lr»i iisiiiiiiiilid' I'rniii lliis siiiiri r lliiiii llnirs. lln
ry riri'iiliiKtiitli'r iiliil i|iiiilitirii-
till
liiHi 111 llnir iiliiiM M i'\|irr-«'il III llii'ir .s|ic'irli «ii|i u niiiiiiiriii sx hIihIi in iliiiv iircin.
Ililllnl only I'l llir llllli;illl;;i s lil' I'llirnl"' ll|i|irlll'l r\il;/fji|iili'il llllil illlr, — li'< llllU'll NII Oil
till' liiriMi III' till' liiriiiiiii mill i.riliii inny miiii In llir I 'liilii'M'. W'l' rri'i|iiriilly liiiil iktii-
Hiiill til iili-urvr till' siiilili'ii i'li:iii;^r |iriiili|ir(l ulii'll II |iiil'ly iil' iiiiliM x, W lin llllil Imi'II rnii-
viirniiin in tlirir nwii liiii)(iii', wrrc joincil by a Inri'ijriiiT, «itli wlinin il wan ncci'smiry in
.H|i<'uk ill till' .larjjun. 'I'lir rniiiili'iimirrs wliicli lii'liiO' liiiil Ihtii (jrivr, stnliil, miil iiii x-
|irrssivi', wrri' iimlniilly li^lilril up \\ illi iiiiiiiialiiiii ; llir Inn , iiiniinlniinns Iniii' lii'riiiiir
lively mill iiiniliiliiliil ; I'vi'ry fi iliiri' uiis iiiilvi'; ihr In ml, llir iitins, nml llir wlmli' Imily
Hrri' ill iiinlinii, mill rvrry Innk miil iji'stiirr liirmiii' iiisiimi uiili iiiiiiiiiii):, Oiirwlin
ktlcW lllrri'ly till' nlllljl'Ct lll' llli' llisi'nlirsi' llli;;lll nllill hllM' rii||l|irr||i mlril, ri'iilM tins
Koiiri'r ainiii', till' ({I'lirral |iiir|Hirl nl'llii' iniiMTsatinii.
Il »liniilil riirthiT U' (iIwitmhI timl inmiy 'il' llii' wmili li.ivr ii vrr\ ;!i m ml si nii', miil
may rririvi- .sever ll llillerelll llimi^ll lllllril si'^llilii'litiiills, lli'i'iinlill'.' In llii' I'nIlll'.VI. 'riiiin
utiilii'h \^ III ti'iiili\ liiii/^ \tl/^ nr Ittiihi ; stiktili^ m* snlntii^ r\yvvs'<vH ti^itn'f, /lyi, ovtr.
A/y/;, ^///.• a'//i' il .iHr/,, iirji>il\ /ht, JuiTtt, i/iil>, ni/ii', \r.; .«//(/,.« is iim^ri/, Jio.\li/e, In
i/iiiini/, li^lil ; tiiillitil is to il/, iisii/r, irmiihi, siti/i ; iiiiikiiniiil; is to lake mi\ thing
luln iIh' iihiiiiIi, — luiiri' milkiiiiiiik niniiii/i, In iiil ".iliiimi ; uiiikunKil; Iso/,, In iliiiik
wilier ; iinikiliiink kiiiiiiill. In simike tnliarcn.
Iliil il is in till' I'aeiiliy of eniiiliiiiiii^ ami rniii{>niiiiillii:.' ils siiii|ili' vm-alili's, — a |iu\m i
Wllii'll il llrl'ivrs, lln (liilllit, rrillll IN inllllevinll uilji tlir llnlimi ln|li;lll'S, llllil llli' .Illl'^nU
limls lis s|il'i'ial ailll{illllinll In Ihe |ilir|inM'> In uliii'li il is ii|>|iliril. 'I'nn or lliri'i' llUllilri'll
wnrils may lie Irarinil willmiil ilillinilly in a iliiy, miil a miv slmil liiiii' will make llie
learner I'miiiliar willi tin ir miliiiary use ami nuisiriiilinii. lie will linn have nn ilill'i-
ciiltv ill imilerslaiiiliii;; the iiumeniiis enmiHiimiU vtliieh, il' tiny hail lueii siiii|ili' wnnls.
wiiiilil liiive ensi him min'li ailililiniial lahniir. Aliimsl every verb imil ailjei'live may
rwiiM' a new siu'iiiliealinii hy |iri'li\iii!,' the word niiuiiiik. In make or eaiise. Thus
ninniiik Isliiiko (In make In eniil''), In liriiin ; iiiniiiiik kliilmiii (make In i;n), In seiiil nr
drive awav; iiiiiiiiiik iiiiif/i. In llirnw ilnwii, In smash; iiianiiik /hi, In lire 'i yiin :
iiiuiiiiik X/oi//, tn repair, pill in order, arraiiiie, eiire; iiininiik kikiri/i,Ut put down, tn
lower. In hiirv ; iiiaiiiiik k/iiiiiii, to make line, like saiiil, hence to ({rind ; iiiniiiiik jii pii.
In write; iiiiiiiiiik kiiiinitaks, to make In know. In leneli, itc.
The liillo\vin,<; inslanees will .slmw the usual innde iirinrminj; ('onipniind terms. From
the I'lnijlish words iiuai, ship, slik, sloii, .m/, Ikiiis, skin, are I'oriiied shipntaii, a sailor:
sliipslik, a spur; slikskin, hark; si/liiiiii, a lent; slik^ton, n piifo of iietrified wtnid.
\'\
nil
l>il I i.o i.(>(i V.
'ril<> lilllcr Irrill yn\* iimhI l>y h nillitr hIhi hii» iIh' fruln^iM I'olllH-tillX ll|MM-illM'n» i>r llllll
ilrncniiliciii; ulirdiir il uii- ri>iii|Hi<M'il mi ilir n|H>i, i>r hiih iilniiily in «■•<', h lint known.
//fiiH. //.(».« (iimiiy liiiniM») h iIh' roiiiiiiini lirm t'nr lnwii; iiJ-i/ilii, 1111111.1/1I41, (iiilil
ri>iiiilr\ , uiiriii ciiiiiiry,) iiii'iin mimmir iinil innlif ; Miok-iriiiiink (inlil »ii km-*'* wiiriii
•ifkiirst) |iri>M<iiiiir<'>l iia iiiii' wuril, \* tin- liTiii I'or /< /iv itiid iiiiiir ; kniiiitl-kiiiiitiliil,s (nil
liin^rr kiiiiw) iiH'iinit \n J'orurl, Viikih.iiuiii (lilili' man) ix ilirli'mi l<ir/<Hy ,■ liiHiif-klulnh-
iiiiiH, liir a/;/. Till) liiiiiil i\|iri'««iiin liir <i'i*/ i> ■mkuli-l itr, lit., iilKi^crliiff, or Itir rliii l'
nil lii^li. 7V/;/, iM'iny iini-x-, mil Hiiiir, iimki' liun-inil 1, h i-.ilnrml ; tul-lnok (luiivy
Wiilir) i> lit.
riir |ilai'i' III uliM'li llii' .liiruoii is iiin-l in ii«r I-. a: i'nrl \ aiirniivrr. Al llii" i'-lalili'<b-
nii'iil ri\i' laii<<iiap'4 iin- s|iiiki'ii liy alHuii i'im' liiiiiilr<>il iMrmiim, — iiaiiK'ly. iIk' Isii'^^liili.
till' Ciiiiailian l-'niirli, ilic 'I'liliiiiuk, lhi< ( 'n'r <ir Kiiinlrnraii, iiiiil Iin- Hawaiian. 'I'lii'
tlinr llinnrr an' uln'aily niTonntril liir; tho ('n'c in tlir laii;!iiM;><' Kioikin in tlic laniilii'K
•>r many ulTiriT^ ami iihii ln'Inii^inK In tlir IliiiUinrs Hay ('iiiii|iiiiiy, ulm liavi' iiiarriril
hall-lii'iiil »i\i'i al llii' iiKsIs ra'.t nl' llir K'>< Ky MhhiiIiimio, TIh' Ihinaiinii is in iiw
aniiiii:; aluiiil a liiiinlrril iiaiiti's nl' ihi' Sainlwiili Kliiml^ ulm arr • iii|<IiimiI as lalHiiinTH
almiil till' liirl. Ikshlrs ihrsi' livr lai)i;il:ip's, llii rr arr iniiliy hIIicin, — llir 'I'^iliaillHli,
Waiawiila, Kala|>iiya, N'askwaIr, i\r., — wlili-li iiri' daily liranl rmiii iintlvrN who visit th<>
liirt liir iIh' |iiir|sisi' nl" Irailiii'.'. Aiiinii); all thrw imliviiliials, tjirri' iin- vrry ti'W who
iiiulrrslaiiil Minri' than mn laii^iia^i !<, iiml iniiiiy whn N|i4'iik only Itii'ir nwn. 'I'Im'
){riii-ral I'lMiiiiiiHiiialiiiii is, ihiTrliiri-, inainlaiiii il iliirlly hy im aiis nl llm .l.iriinii, »liirh
may Im' s:iji| 111 Ih' till' |iri'\ailiiiu iiliMin. 'I'lKri' un' I aiiailiaiis ainl liiir-lirisils mariii'il
'n Chinnnk uniiii'ii, » Im I'aii niilj rnnvcrw' wilh llnir wins m this H|sirh, — ami il is the
liiot, slraiip'r as il may st'ciii, that iii'iny ynini;: rliiMrrii arc ^rnuiii){ ii|i inwlinin this
rnrlilioiis lanuiiajjf is really thr mnlhi'r Inii^nc, anil whn s|K'ak it with innn' rrailax'Ks
aiiii jsrlt I'linii lliaii any nlhrr. ( 'oiilil llm siair ol' lliinus uhirli now ixisls ihirr Ik'
>iilli'ri .1 In ri'iiiani liir n rinlnry InnifiT, llic n "iill iiii;ilil U llir liirnialinii nl'a rail' ami
iilinin ul alliiMlK s uniilil Is' a |>u/.yli' In rlliiin_<ra|ihi rs. 'I'ln' liilr ul' |ui|iiil.ill"ii, Imw.
I'vrr, wliK'h IS iinu tiirnin;^ in thai ilin'rlmn, will sisui nMrnhnliii ami iihsnrli all ihisc
iM'alU'rcil IriiinirntK of jHt'iilinr linragn iiml N|Hs-i'h, h aviii); im trarc iH'himl hut kiii'Ii ns
may exist on thi* written |>a);i'. It has, tlnri'liin', soi'nicil ailvisnhli', nl this liinr. In
(iri'MTVi' iIk s<> ill tails ill n-j^ard In n siihjirt orsniiic intrn'sl in ilsnll', rrnin its sinu"larily,
ami uliii'h may Ih' nf im sliiiht value rmiii lis Isarin^ nii cerliiin |Miints nl |iliilnln;;lriil
invo.sli^iiion.
P
In aildilinii In the ixaiii|ile> ol' eonslriiclinti yi\rii in the liirej;ninjj |iaj;es, ilm Inllnwinn
rn|liK|iiiiil jihrascs. wrillen dnwii as they were heard Irniii the natives ami nlhers verwil
in the iiliniii.VIII ~linu ihe niaiiiier in vtlmh il is eiii|i|nyi'd n.s a iiH'diiini of nrilinarv
inlercniirM'.
.1-.
♦■^
•V-'
I
Xi, siks >
KfiiJiinrenm
huh tiinikit /iiiii.t '
Kiih iiiiukit kUtliiirti .'
Mo! Irieiid I
llnw- do you (In? (the i-ominon unlulnlioii.)
Where is thy Imiis*' \
Wliire art llmu gning ?
N o K T ir W K H T K It \ A M K II I C A.
iU^
'
Vf/
htih irtkiil /./iildiiii ll'iikiiikum '
hull inntkii Itlinkn '
Kanlnhiiik iiititkii kliiUniii mniku lmu$ f
l'iil/iil»Ji Imik
Hums iji) tstik miikii
iifilti,\ fi/o nittknniiik
Siiikn k/iiliiirii ki'iipn kiiHfMt
hiiti/nt iriiiiii f
W'l k niiiku utiniinit^ili
hil nfihiiik iiiiiikil li/lkliiii '
'l\il/i/ii/>i />i k/iiii lidiit kilimirr
.\*itkti tuki/t tintkiittiiik uniiti/xh
hiiiilihiiik Minim iiiiiikit iiiiikitk l.tlmk'i '
hiilii iikiik inn '
lliiiii.\ iiiii, Ihlii II in,
likiik mill litiiim iiiiiii
OktJi iiiiiikii liiiiin '
(ikiik ulik k/iitiiirii ililii
Hiiiifshiiik ts/uiko iiiiiikit iititi ,'
Sik iiiiiikii /Ill/Ill '
S'liinlik'i /iiiiiii kitihitiiitiiii inlik"
Xiiikii koksliiiil ii/iil/ki
hiiknliiill iiiiikii /i/iir
Miiikii lilt kuiiiiiliik' iifki sliiiim
lliiiiiM IIIIISIII.M iiiiiikii kniii III
Mki kliitiiini ki/.iii/i
h'ifii iiiliiilr htiiik'i /xi/ni, <»r \
hiilii III III iiiiiikii li/ikiiiii-iiiiiiiiii, iir >
Kiilii III lit iiiiiikii vliiiiuiii ? *
Siiikit hiiiiislukilt kiiiiialiikf iiiitmiik /H/n
Antikitli liiiiiis iiiiikii kiiiiiiitiiks kiiimltii-
ii/ii, — 11//11 ki/ii/Kii iiiiikii luiiiliiiii
S'linlikii limns iiilikii kiiiiiiitiik.i siijiiiiii
Ikillii iiitiikii iirk kliiliiiiii kiiksliiill mil,
itlkf iiiiiikti iiniknk iiniskit '
Siiintikii kiiiiiiirf nusnikn hlikiiiit iiiiiiic-
liisl
Hiiiits klimli tiknk iiiiilii ; linink iikok ma-
milk kliiiiriikliiiint nknk mi/ki/iI
IVrk iiiiMiikit kiiiiiiitiiks iiiknt
hiiii/iii ill III klalitiiii sliiji
Ihlii lnok
Iliiiiis II ill
Kiiksliiill ; kliiiirii ttlmko
Atta liliji hikiiili If ok
I Imvr linl my wiiy.
\\ hlTr 11 llir Mil) III |{ii In Wilkniklllll '
WiMllrc I'liini'nl ihlHI P
^^ Inn iirl ihiiii \iii\n\i in ihy hoiiM.- f
(live IIM' MMIN- MllllT.
I IIIII very lliirp«ly.
Vrry hiiiiKry.
I mil ^l>lllK ill II I'liiiiif,
l>M llMl llllk, nr, xlnji iiilkiiix!
I iln iini Ml', liii\i' mil wen, iVi*.
Iliiw iiiiiny iiri' lliy |k'ii|iIi' f
'riilrlii'ii liiHiM'ii in nil.
I Hiiiil III I III siiini' \i'iii4iin.
I liiw iiiiiiiy n.'iliiKiii 1I111I lliiiii liniitj In tr.iili' '
lliiw uiit ilir »inil ' (ttliiil llml Hiiiil ')
A nlriiii^' Hiiiil. No »iiiil.
'I'll!' Miiii (or (liiy) will viTV wiirm.
I" lliii lliy liiin»r !
'I'lir Ircc li'll III III!' i^riiiiliil.
^^ lirn 11 lliy iiiiillicr coining '■
U ili\ liiilur !-ii'k f
Truly III' IS ilillrjl III Ik' |lili('ll,
I liiivr hriikril my Ihih.
My Ic'n is liriiki'ii.
IIiihI ihiiii llijnk It Mil! ruin '
Thy (•iiiiiit' in vrry IhiiI.
lly iiiiii liyi' il mil »iiik.
NVhiil is till' iiiiiiii' III' lliy liillirr '
I wish vrry iniirli In Iriirn to write.
Knriiirrly I iisnl In (lit., klii'W to) strni
iiiiirli, — now my liriirt is cliiiMucil.
Truly licciiii jiiiii|i well (lil., kiinws Injiiini)).
, \\ liy iliiNl llmii iiiii ^n iiiiil kill Ix'nvcr, nml
liny n )i\m f
. Truly nil niir |h'ii|iIc nrc di'nil.
• ViTV )i<HMl is timt mill ; (jnirkly it ^riniN
tlio cnrn.
\Vf iliil nnl kiiiiw the ohniinrl.
Tho sliiji Mint n^roiind.
Then- wns no wiilcr.
The wind wns hi){li.
Pcrishtil i Willi 111 (liiTps.
Then sunk down into the water.
1A9
"■^^IMAtaaMMa^
646
Pill I, O l,0(i Y.
U'rk k/iikslii nuiiir/iisl,- -{iDiitiir ktulmrii NdImkIv wiin ilroHiinl ; nil (jol iislinn'.
niiilkirili
Xiisiiikii siifrks )iiiisatsi-tilikum W'r Iciii^lil llir iiuiiiy (Imil |M'ci|)Ii').
AViiH tiiisdikii kiiksliiill W'v killrd lliri'i'.
Mnkiist kakirti limii iiiisiiika Thfy were Iwii'c iis iniuiy ris we.
All ///*/• «;/■ iiiiistiikii ! How iiiiiiiy wire llinr of you f
Miikiist litlif/iim j)i kirumim Twonty-livr.
I '!
il
V ()(■ A III [. A II Y.
The rullcwini; list i-nnliiiiis nil ilir «iiii|>lr uonlN nl' llic Inidi'.lniifiimjjr, nml sonic ol
the coiniioiirid Icrins ; l)iit In Imvc inclmlt'il all the liillfr aoiilil liavr -wrllcil lln' vnciilm-
lary to imiliy limes its preseiil extrrit. Imlrcd » sclcrlidii nC sevi'ral llioiisjiiid l''.ii};li.s|i
words mighl Ik> iniule lor Hliieli eorres|kindiiif,' cxiiri'ssiiuis roidd Ih- IouikI or liirmcil In
this lanjjiinge, ueeordinj} lo the |)rilli'i|ilrs iM'I'ore r.\|daiiii(l. Il uiidd. however, Im> ii
work ol' some lalnoir and very Mltle use. What is here ^ivin hII! Iw ^iiHiricnl lo ■.alisl'y
any eiiriosiiy which may he I'elt cMineernin}; ihis sinjjnlar spei'ili.
Ahoul, eonrerinn<;, kirii/xi.
\Im)uI lo, liiLiii.
Aloive, Miliiili or siikiiJi.
\eross (a river), iiiiiliii.
MVaid, liniiil, kirns.
All, kdiKiiii , kiiiimri.
Always, kiriiiiisiiiti.
Anierieaii. liosluil.
And. j)i.
\nii, Ii until.
Arrive al, iiii/iiiiiil.ih (to se«"),
.\rrow, kdlniltiii.
.Vshore, iimlkwili.
As, kokini.
At, klril/xl.
.\xe, /iJiusli.
B
Itud, tna.ialii ur vuudlnhi ;
jHshiik.
Iturrcl, UnmduUih or tamolUs.
pisliak or
Itaskel, iipikun.
Heads, kiommik.
Hear, lilai'k, itahiilin) lirown. .wii/w/.
It.al. kiikshiill.
Iteaver, im;
lleliire, ih/i.
Ileliind, kiiiilii.
Ill II, liii!!li»!i or liiiliii.
lieneath, kikin/i.
Ilerries, o/iVf,
Bird, kiilakiih.
ihsiMiil. Iihiskiit.
lilaek, /./.Ii/.
lilanket, jiiisinr, jxuisi.
HlcKiil, ptipil (i. e. red).
Iloal, /«>/.
Hoi I, liplip.
Ifcilie, sloii.
Ilolh, kiniiiiiiiik.sl.
Uotlle, kililsiit ; kiliktin (lliiil).
Row, upiliki, or itjii/ki.
Ilox, kiistt.
Hoy, /iitiii.s-m'iii.
Hrnridy, iiliipi/skilr.k (firr.wntrr).
Brond, sajieiil.
N O R T I! \V K S '!• K K N A M E R I C A.
fi47
Kii'iik, knkshiitl ; iiiamiik musli.
Hriiii;, inn III Ilk tshiiko.
llrotlMT, rliliT, kii]i<>, kiijiiiltu.
linillii'r, y»iiii)tcr, mi.
P'.illi'l, kn/iiitiiii.
Iliilirr, iiiiisiiiiix-/iik/is (oi)W.)»mi«").
Hiilinn, /»///'/, c.r Islii/ls/ii/.
Hiiy, miikiik, or iiiiikiik.
llv unci liy<', irnii/ii, n/ki .
Ciiniip, kniitiii.
Clip, siii/Hil, nr sinpiil.
< 'iirr\, liilii.
Ciilllr, iiiiismiis.
( 'liirl', tiiir.
( 'liilil, luiiiis.
l/'liilli, wiKillni, y/(/.vc.«' ; colloii, jic/.
font, kii/io,
Ciild, tslii.i ; kol.
( 'oiiir, tshiiko.
CiMik, iiiiiiiiiik juiiii.
( 'di'ii, sii/h/i/.
("rv, k/iii.
■■'Ik, mnlak.
I'ji)jlislimiiii, hiiitsholsli.
I'\l-, illlllilS.
P
Pnlls (iifii rivrr), lum-trutn.
I*'iir, M/m.
I'lillirr, /HI/HI, oliiiiiiiii, tilikum-iiinimi.
l""fliil, hum ; jiu/i.
l-'rvrr niiil 'ijiiu', kn/sik-inimsik.
Kinlil, sii/rkii ; kiiks/nit/.
Fin-, /*/ii/.
■■'lint, kiliklin
{•'ihmI, iiiiikiiniiik.
lAuilisli, pilliiii.
\'\»t\, /r/iie.
I'liriirl, kiiii/K/-kiiiiiiliiks.
l-'orincrly, aniikiili.
Fri-iii'lini!iii, juiMiinks.
l-'iiiiiiis, sika.
G
D
Diilirc, liitit.^f.
Diirk, jh.l,ikli (uIkIh) i klitU (lilnrk).
Diiy, sun.
l)oi>r, iiiiiuih/i.
nil', (lead, viiiikIiisI, inimlusl.
|)rN-l(ir, liiiiiiisiii.
Kii;;, kiiiiiuks.
Idilliir, lutd.
Itciwii, kikiiili.
DdWii-slri'iiiii, iiiiitiiini, or mniini.
Dry, ^/ri«.
Duck, ki'i/ikiirli.
(iri, i.ikiiiii.
i iirl, Ittims-khilt'hiititH,
liivr, iHilliitsli.
(illISS, klll.s.
(to, k/a/inni.
i iimI, sitkiili'tiiu'.
( mmhI, khmh .
(.JcmhIs, inrn'liiiiiilin', ikntii, or iXm.
(Ini'ii, iiilslnsli.
(iriiiil, iiiiiiiiiik k/imenktinifH.
( inn, iiiuskit
H
E
I'iir, kirnlini.
I'iirlli, liinci, i7«7ii, or ii(//i
ICiit, iiiiikniiiiik.
Iliiir, i(U.v) or ynksn.
Iliilf, silkiiiii.
Iliiiiil, /iiiiaii or lima.
I InnilkiTcliicr, luikiit.tliu in .
Hal, siajxtt.
648
P H I L O L O U Y.
He, she, his, hers, iahka or yitkka.
Heod, lattt.
Hear, kiinuUnks or kumtaks.
Heart, tumtiim or timthii.
Heavy, tul or til.
Here, okok (this) ; idkicn (ih. j way).
High, siiha/i.
Horse, kiiitan.
Hot, huiai wiim.
House, haus.
How much, how many, kdnUhmk, kdiitsek.
Hungry, oh.
Hiirrv ! " /uiu ! hait ! kurm /"
Leg, liiiu-U ; lepie.
Lie, (hxM'ive, kliminfkivit,
Lv', repose, immim or miisiim.
Lightning, xiihii/i-o/apil.ski, (fire above).
Like, similar, kakini.
Like, love, tiikeli.
Little, tuiKis.
Long, iii/knt or yiilkat
Long lime, Itlr.
IxM)k, mindiiilsh or nanitsh.
M
!: ■
I, naika.
Ice, tiit-tsok (heavy water).
Immediately, Ishike.
In, kwajxi.
Interrogative particle, ««.
Iron, tshikiimin.
.Facket tsliuket.
.lump, siipimi.
K
Kettle, kit/.
Kill, kuk.i/ia/l ; mamuk mtmelust.
Knife, oputnah.
Know, kiimatdks ; — I do not, kliituis.
Make, mdniiik or mumok.
Man, man.
Many, much, hiiii.
Mat, kli'skicfsk ; for sleeping, ilkotet.
Mwlieine, /unictsin.
Men, |)eople, tilikum.
.Merely, only, ktiltas.
Middle, si/kitm.
Milk, tiliisli.
.Mill, miila.
.Mirror, k/n.i.
Mistake, l.tn/o.
Money, lii/n,.
.Moon, tiiiitt.
More, iiikl.
Morning, tiiiins-xtiii.
.Mother, iiiui.
Mountain, lamo/it'ii.
Mouth, I'lhiisli or I'ipiish.
Musket, muskk.
Mv, ntiikn.
N
Lake, lik.
Land, iUlii.
Large, liaias.
Laugh, hthe.
Lazy, Itsi.
Name, /«/(«/« / iiim.
Neck, Irku.
Ni^dle, kiapol.
Night, jmlakk or puinkli.
No, lick, or tcik.
No more, no longer, kieajiet ; to no pur-
pose, kalUts.
NORTHWESTERN AMERICA.
649
None, luh or lulu.
Niion, iilkuin-sun.
Nose, Hos.
Itofic, slriii){, ihrriul, k/ijxitt.
Rnlton, CuM, j)uli,
Kuiii, /um,
Klin, kii/i.
Obliiin, iskiim ; iiiiiitiiiitsli.
OH-sliorc, in thu slrcnni, iiuuita.
Old, iild innn, tJuman.
Old womoii, lavie or biicie.
On, kitajxi.
Other, diircrent, haloima.
Oiler, nnndmuks.
Our, nusutka.
I'nddic, ixti.
I'uint, to, mdiiiuk tshum.
Pn|)or, book, jk'pa.
People, tilikum.
Perhaps, kiiimis.
Pi|K', /(tpip.
PInte, pnn, iiidlnk.
Pot, npikfin.
Powder, (i^iin,) jHi/ti/i or i>ultdi.
Pro|ierty, goods, tkdla or iA'<'<.
(juick, haulk.
R
Uiiiii, slimis or .«««.«.
Receive, ixkiini.
Red, ;)('•/))(•/ or p(7/»»V.
Remnin, reside, milltiil.
Return, ki/apai.
Ring, ku-iiikirio.
River, <•/»«// or niMt.
Road, trail, iciia/ or oikat.
s
Sail, w/.
Sailor, shipmait.
Salmon, sdm'in.
Salt, so/t.
Sand, klimen,
Sny, fraira.
Sea, ivikoma, haitus Isok.
Seal, lii-mardii, wnlhwaiu.
See, ndniinitsh or nanitsh.
Sew, mnmiik kuijmt.
She, iri/ito (1).
Sheep, lemiiloH.
Ship, »'A//J.
Shirt, .«Au/.
Shoot, mumiik jm.
Shoes, «Ai/.v.
Sick, Jt'A-.
Silk, liuiiiai.
Silver, /<«/<*.
Sink, kldUiirii kikirili; ti/ip kikirili.
Sing, shiiiitc.
Sister, elder, /Uyxf or likpiihn.
" younger, a<«.
Sit, millnil.
Skin, «Ai».
Sky, ktmtJi or kiisuli.
Slave, mistshimii.s.
Sle<>p, iiUtsiiin or iniiiuim.
Small, tanas.
Smoke, smok.
Smoke tobacco, iiuikamak kaiiiutl.
Snow, snn.
So, thus, knkwa.
S<Hiii, dlk(\ tshike.
Sour, kill I.
Spar, miist, shipstik.
Speak, uiiirii.
Stand, Hiitkoi.
IflS
650
PHI LOLOO V.
Slnr, ti/li/ or hfiiMii/ {huUon).
Steal, knjisliiiiila.
Slern (ol'vcsspl), ojxtlili.
Stiickiiiijs, kiisliisl,u.iliis.
Stoiir, ston,
Sto|i, kirajirl ; mil/aif.
Strong;, nkokoiii or skiikiini.
Sturgoon, ttutshiii or stiitsliin,
Siinimcr, iram-iUhi.
Sun, »M/' ,• !>//(///.
Surely, nniritikn.
Sweet, SI.
Svvoril, sa/eks-itpiitsiih.
u
llndorstand, kunitUaks.
Untie, let go (as a ro|ie), mamuk klak.
Very, limns.
Vest, lairtst.
\\\\ngi\ liiDii-haiis.
w
Table, /«/«/)/.
Take, iskam.
Talk, iraira.
Teeth, /«/«/(.
Tent, sr/haiis.
That, this, thoiv, Ate, okok or u^m^.
That wny, iawa.
Then, (i/te.
They, klaskti.
Thirsty, o/o tsfJc.
This, «)AoA', iikuk.
This wny, iiikun.
Thread, klijuiit.
Throw down, mamuk mash.
Tied, kao ; to tie, miimiik kao.
Tired, < / or tU.
To, toward, kirnpii.
Tobacco, ktiiiiutl.
To-diiy, okok-suii.
Toniu Imw k , so/eks-f'ihii.s/i .
To-morrow, tiimoln : intki.
Tongue, hJitti.
Trade, miikuk or maknk.
Tre<'. .«///t.
Trowsers, sakiilnk.'i.
Turn, kiUipai.
\Vnler, inita ; tsuk, tsitk, Uhok.
Woy, path, trikat.
We, misaika.
What, kiitn, ikiila.
When, kanlslwik or kdntsek,
^^'here, Xn//.
White, liikoj).
Who, klaksta.
Why, lAiUrt or iXto.
Wind, wi« ,• itsttl.
Winter, hU-iUhi.
Wish, /uX-«7j or Uikek.
Wolf, /i/« / talajnis.
Woman, klotshman or kluUthman.
\N'ood, stik.
Work, mtimiik.
Write, mamuk jwpn ; mamuk Is/turn.
Vellow, kaukauvak.
Ye, you, your, musaika.
Yes, (i.
Yesterday, taanliki. '
r A T A G N I A.
The following vocahiilnries were obtninnl iit Iho town of Cnrmon, a sninll froiilicr
sclllrmcnt of Buenos Ay res, Kitimtcd iilioul filtirn miles from the nioutli of llir KioNc^ro,
which (liviilos llic tprrilory of llml K<'pulilic' from the ind<'|HMi(lrnt or rullior ilio desert
region of Pntngoniii. The Indians who iiro ner'iistomod to visit this spltlcnieiit for the
purpose's of trade lire known to the inhiihitiiiils by llie designations of Aiiaijirs, Puiiijmis
Indians, IVhuiliclirs (or 'liltiie/clus), and C'hi/onos. Tlie first two nri' snid to ooeupy
the extensive plains which stretch from the Ilio Negro northward as far as \lw Kio Colo-
rn(li>. The Tehniliches and ('hilenos dwell sonlh of the Uio Negro, the tiirmi-r holding
the connlry east of the Andes, and the latter Ix'longing properly to the west of that chain,
though they freipiently moke incursions into the territory of their neighlioiirs.
The natives whom we saw pre8<'nted the usual characteristics of the American abo.
rigines, — a medium stature, with w<.ll-formed limbs, a brownish copper complexion,
coarse, straight black hair, growing low on the forehead, small, black, and deep-set eyes,
and a wide face, with the zygomatic arches prominent. One of them bad a physiognomy
of the true Mongolian ty|>e, with the opening of the eyes narrow and obli(]uo. In their
character and mode of life they resemble the Indians on our western prairies, spending
much of tlH'ir time on horselmck, engaged in hunting or warlike exjieditions. They are
the same haughty, fierce, stubborn, taciturn, unintellecttial race as, with some partial
and local exceptions, all the tribes of this continent have been found to be. Their num.
IxTs are necessarily small, as their means of subsistence mv limited to the chase and
to fishery, ill a region not very favorable to either; but <iii this |K)int no exact information
was obtained.
LANGUAGES.
Of the tribe called Aiicase.i, nothing was learned further than that they lived north of
the others, were of infiTior stature, and ,s|Mike a |)eculiar idiom.
The C/iiietios, or Chilian Indians, are, without doubt, the same jicople us the well-
known Aril lira 1111.1. A few words of their siM^'cb, which were obtained, established this
fact. The Araiicano tongue is well known through the works of Molina, Faulkner, and
es|)ecially Febres, who, in his " Arte i/c In /ruifiia general ile Chili" has given us one of
thosi- complete manuals of the laiiL'u.ige liir which the Jesuit missionaries were distin-
guislied. The only |Miints on which it will Ik> of any use to touch are some |)eculiarilics
in the pronunciation, which reciuin' to Ih- explained.
652
P H 1 I, O I, O (i Y.
" The g," says Fcbn-s, " hn» n very »in(jiilar proniiiu-mlinii, nnd is of such fiT(|ucnl
occiirreiu'o tlinl it may Ik; con.Midrrcil cliiiriu-U'rislic ol'tliis langun^c. Il is proiiuiinccd in
tho iiinrrinost \mrt oClhr niuutli, o|K'iiiii}; il ii little, niiil tdiidiiiij? the point of the ton^iio
to the lower gum." He then ronipnres it to the w in the Latin wonl S(imlii.i, nnd in the
Catnlonian liiu-h, much. In the pronuiicialion of the native at ("arnien, this element
had the sound of the iij! in our words siniier, htin/:, which is n-presented in this volume
by the character j;.
Another peculiar sound is the th, — so written by Febres, hccauso his printer had no
types of the letter t with a diacritical mark. " This sound," ho says, " is produced by
touching; the |>oint of the tongue to the r(K)f of the mouth." As we heard it, the sound
siH'itied to b<> that of/ liillowcd by an r not trilled, nnd so sligbtlv touched as io Ik' hardly
audible as a distinct clement. It was a little softer than that uhicli we generally fjive to
this combination in the words /;//, liensnn, and the like.
The only other sound which the Spanish grammarian notices as |>eculiar, is one which
he designates by u with a grave accent (iJ). In pronouncing it he observes that " the lips
are held a little o|M'n and without motion." This we found to be the French rii in jieur,
or, more exactly, our own « in purr, which we have denoted by the character ".
Bearing in mind these dillerences in orthography, the resemblance, or rather identity,
in the following lists, will be evident. In the .\rnucaniaii, the n and //have the S|>aiiish
pronunciation (»// and /'/). It should also Ix- noticed that, according to Febres, the natives
an- accustomed to interchange certain letters, as i) and /, o and w, v and /, — and it would
ap|icar that their enunciation is, in general, rather indistinct.
4tAlTCANf1.
itntH
cHyrii
Hua/iten
ctt
ciUhnI
hunthii
ihmo
chao
huijiie
piheh
yw
udn
voro
payum
pel
cHu
cfuitiH//
pUno/iiie
pivi/ue
i/uiiK
epu
(Hia
cini.Km.
titiin
kien
iraijilen
ka
kilt rale
hurittni
Onrno
tfUII
ni/iike
piniif
li*
ill
ix'in
font
ImiiriiH
jitt
koiiv
ti^ni)iliia
/mntttiT
jiiiike
kiiiiit
CJIU
ke/ii
sun
moon
star
water
lire
man
woman
Ihther
mother
child
eye
nuse
mouth
teeth
beard
neck
arm
finger
foot
heart
one
two
three
P A T A (! O N I A.
r.53
AKAIICANO.
mrii
1111/11
t/iirvliu
rr/ulie
jiiirii
iiyllii
mini
vuiri-i/iiiiii/e
»iiiri-ijiii
r/iii-m<iri
cHlii-mari
IHilaiii
nilLXNO.
iiifli
kit f/o
/i '/}!;'
rrlhr
pi/iii
tiiliiii
mini
iiiiin-kini/r
iiiiin-p/m
rpii-miiii
kitlit-mtin
/iii/ii/.ii (?)
Idiir
live
si.N
sovcn
riylil
niiio
ten
clcvni
IWI'IVf!
iHi'lity
ihirly
liiiiiili'i'il
IM'KI, CIIKS r A M I' A S AND T K II T I I. I ( II i: S.)
FniilkiKT, in \m nccotint of I'nln^nnin, (Ifscrilics \\v: whole cnuiitry Kuiilh of ilii> l.ililiiilr
of llio Kit) lie III PIntii, mid cnsl oC llin ('(irilillcras, ns inlmhilrtl hy n sini-li' nnlioii of
Iniliiins, s|>enking onn lniii;iiiii;c', iiiul known liy llic >;('ncriil nnnic \i\' Vi'rlihm. DIHiTcnt
Irilx's iind Ixinds have piirlii'iilnr d<'sij;iiiilii>ns, .such ns Ihr Moniiliiiiiccis, Ihi' KiviT |«nplc,
&ip., nrrordinH lo their liwiilily. Thosi' to the north o!" Ihi- liiii Colorndo iiii' I'oiiimoiily
known ns tlio " I'liinp.'is indiiiiis," from the prairirs ovor Hhicli thi'V wnndir. 'I'hosc
south of this rivrr ari^ ti'rnicd 'JUini/Jiiis or Ulhui'/ilirx, (proiKHinccd hy the inhuliilnnts
ol'CarnH-n, Tiliiii/icliis.) Thry inhiihit thf plains and Ihf tahlc-laiiii iMtwrcn the Audi's
and till' coast. Thcsi' arc the people so celehraled lor their f;ii;antii- stature, lhon<2h this
ap|)ears not lo )»• a nineral characteristic. Ol' the natives whom we saw at the \{m
.Nejjro, none were six Hit tall ; hut we were assiiivd hy respectahle residents that aiiionj;
the more southern triln's who cM'cnsionally visited that settlement, it was not uncommon
to set- individiiiils who exceeded thai measure.
The lollowiiif; words were ohtained I'rom an Indian of the Pampas who had resided at
the .selllement loiii; enoujih lo aci|uire soi'ie knowledge of the Spanish language. The
general sound ol" the S|«"ech is extremely Inrsh and giilliinil. The other Indians s|Hiku
nfit as very dillicult (111111/ Ini/mjmo) to acipiire. It alionnds in I'onsoiiants ami guttural
sounds, lorniing u strong contrast, in this res[i<'cl, to the Chilciio. 'I'he snttiiral / iVe-
iiuenlly cH-eiirs; and the slhilanls * and c are oflen heard, as well as the harsh combina-
tions ts, f(, sk, ^^7l■, //(qii. tjiJ ?), iic. But the most peculiar sound in the language is a
very deep guttural, resenihling prohalily the 'iiiii ol'lhe S<'inilic tongues. It is pronounced
deep in the throat, with a contrai'lion ol'lhe organs like that made in an Inetleclual attempt
to swallow. Various methods of representing this elenu nt in Itoman ohamcters have
iM-en employed hy Arabic and Hebrew grammarians; one ol" these is hy an inverted
comma (') placed lielore the vowel which follows the sound, — and this has Ik'cii adopted
in the present case.*
* 'Die viio:ibuliiry Iiuh Imimi IvH jih 4)ri{riimlly written ; hut it Kt'cint) prril)nl)1e tlint tlii!< !U)utid in tlio sainr
as that for which, in wrilinif iIh- Orc^nii tonpncx, three ycnr« nt\cr\var(lK, the IcUcr 7 was aiioptrd. It
will bt> wen that it is trcfjueiiily coinliiiied with tlie k anfl /s,
lli-l
054
I' II I I.OI.OI; Y.
;!
Alive, ahdliiik.
All, kahuka.
Arm, irtk'np.
Arm-pit, kakat.
Arrow, ^1/.
Rail, koimilra Iclnvtkntn (').
licnril, ia-iiriek' 11 $k .
Itcnutiriil, ii'iitttiJuiUku,
nelly, iat.iiitk.
nini, tsiypf.
RInck, eyiguntii.
ninod, ^ino.
Bliii', n/iUhiil.
Holly, a-lii/l.
Rone, nhit.
How, dr/iti (qu. iirro ').
Hrcnd, Uihin.
Brother, ojfiaUum.
Cnnoc, atigf)rk, a/>/t<i/.
Cap, or hat, kiihc.
Child, it'iUske.
f'lothing, ef.lupyditii.
Cold, kia.
Cume, maften.
Cook, mokomnk.
Danre, t/iiiluark.
Dead, akamakn.
Dojj, dnse.
Drink, frikognk.
Duck, tueik.
Ear, iaUfisk.
Eat, t^■igo kfiniiku.
Esd, uignixk.
Evil. spirit, itnau-kii.ii>aH.
Kye, iatcUke or iiUi'tikf.
Eyebrow, iakaUki'isk.
Far, i-i/Cv/.
Father, iugunikla.
Find, u-'haii'okun.
Finder, la-gO/..
Fin;;<T-n(iil, iii-pf$.
Fire, niiikiik.
F'esh, iTHiit, j)fli-ua.
Fool, iitpgil (^anie as le^).
ForeliJ-nd, iakniski'tfk.
Go, miltnk.
(ind, aniiii-kaiiUiiii
(.iikmI (lie is), iciirsiiikiim.
4tiio!ic, kilhii.
<ir<Nit, niMri.
Had, imil^iii.
Hand, iisk'np (mine as arm).
Mead (alsii) hair), ttt'rtr.
Heart, iiitii/i.Oa,
Hot, '(i/i.
House, ti/ioikr.
Uurrivtim; riii-gilsii.
Husband, piitriukia.
Ii'e, snow, iiiliiiitit.
Iron, iiiiriik.
Kill, IrikulHikam.
King, iiniiu-kenilfne (see God).
Land, »/»X'.
Leaf, <i;((i/.
Leg, itipgil
Lijihinin);, ag'Ask.
Lip, iapelk.
)lan, Xi//«', 7<a//-e (?).
Moon, iipi/.uk.
.Mother, mamfikla.
.Mountain, (p/i«.
Mouth, iaptilk (mx lip).
Much, many, ln/ipu.
Near, ka/ait^e.
Neck, ia-ktcal.
No, /xi^.
Nose, t'u/itV.
Old, «uba (same as great).
One-eyed, akta/fka.
Partridge, tsngu (se<> bird).
People {genie), iifii/ ia kiiir.
Pine-tnv, /.ilsa.
Pipe, fliiiU.
Rain, ^iiignp.
Red, r.lisa.
River, iugiip (i. e. water).
Sea, rttlita (or kali/a ').
Shoulders, iilsllop.
Sing, U^iko-melimk.
Sky, "/«/l.
Sleep, tf.apy.lo.
Small, agi^t^.
u
PATAGONIA.
6S0
Hmokc (».), nflyiimuk.
Hrnold' (v.), trikoiirl.
Spring (».), keakanonnkn.
'Si|iiirrL'l, ia!it^\a.
^tar, tsnkaletti.
Stone, t^iimma.
Summer, isoii.
Sun, l^iajt.a//> /.nl.
Thunder, a/.ulnkn.
Throat, iii'it/.et.
Tobacco, iaujie.
To-day, intknm.
To-morrow, ka/aima.
Tongue, iu-tcOnuk.
To itli, ia-hai.
'I'owii, diek (hoc land).
To'c, (iftiik.
I'gly, kniiml^iii ojiinskum (sec bod).
Walk, s/iili;i/.usl^ii.
Water, iiit-iiji.
White, Ilk' din.
Wind, (lift.
Winter, kta.
Woir, k<ima)il(i(i-/o])iii (qu. /olio?).
Woman, iamiikhamrk.
Yc8, «'««•«.
Yesterday, kiimniifiini.
Young, ial>Ols.
Nf
MK
It A 1,
s.
ti-i
one
/'''i,;*-'v»
goven
]»''ii
two
jxtsa
eight
got
three
ti;ilxi
nmo
mala
four
tsuiiiiil.ska
ten
Uitike
five
,
lsamalska-l(j;i
eleven
tnimdii
six
/siiimilikii-pftii
twelve
He knew no word for twenty, or any higher ntimlior.
8 E N T E N r K »•
He in n good man.
She is a good woman,
Thou art a man.
My dog.
Thy dog.
Two dogs,
Give nic meat,
Ciive me water.
Give me the dog,
I gave it to him.
He gave it to me,
I know him,
I love her,
I love my lather,
I will marrv her.
]Milre ydtke.
mii/i.d>U/.a yidtpi.
jmlraikila.
ilnse-ki.
linsf-kita.
pet^i iln.se.
mitiiiikr pitpia,
mitaiike lisiip.
mitaiikia dnse,
mu/'jiii tdkia.
kill tiikiii.
kii-i/limitd mdlkiim.
kniapi gitsay.lalkum.
komiuti^e nagiitsd/.Ud.
t^iiikinatfdkum.
" Tlii-sc sentenwR are given as tlicy were written down at firat, ond sume of them are no doubt incor-
rect Tlii'y do not al«iiy» ngrtr with the vocahidary.
656
HII 1 I,0 l,0«i V,
I wto him,
I struck him,
I Hlrucl< him wilh lh<- IihiI,
I Hiruck him with Ihr hiitrhi'l,
lie sings wfll,
lie siii){s ill,
III' I'limc iiri fiH)!,
Ill' riiiiic III! hiirNclmck,
III" cMini' hv wiitiT,
He rainr l>y liiiiil,
Mrliii; inr Ihi' rhilil.
kiratsiiin liln^kti-ak.
kinmiiiit li/ii'kti^iik nhailrkn'i.
iitriitk'iiii tilnktrok IniiklLn ill.
hiiiiiki;i/timu lunil.
ii'iiiiliimmi Irirnl.
yiikaiiii (■«(• uilkliiiii.
kinniluiimi in/klniii (i|ii. irnm mUMi
iiii;iijik<iiiii inikliiliiiii,
III' 1/^11 iriini/jiiiifni.
kdiiiiilii'iitsa i/im.
T K H r I I, I <• II K.
A few words of till' siinlhrni I'lU'lohi,' wi've nlimimil Irom 11 Trhuilii'lii' Imliaii, hIui'Ii
ihiitt siitiic diflbrcnce nl' iliiilril.
Arm, iiisk'o/i.
Itennl, in/i Ikn.
Hird, kduiii.
lioiie, oliiitsk.
Kgg, fill HI'.
l''.yfN iatrlk.
Kiither (my), iii-ifjii'i/.i.
Fiiiner, iiif.'11/./i.
I'"irr, huKiiknk.
(iod, sirs.
Head, iitfuihu.
Ilcnrt, u1ltnf.11. ■
Lug, iaUk.
Man, kinn.
Mother, viiimi'ki.
Mouth, inpiilk.
Nerk, ui II /Ills.
Nose, iiiiiiils,
lUiii, lltniii;i.
Sky, siikiil.
•Siiii, a'liil'i.
Star, ty.altla.
Sun, aphifk.
T«?th, ia/inii.
Twe, iijai.
Water, iii^iip.
Woman, inmiikiiiiiki
y 1
M K U A 1. S.
tfie
line
kiiiiiiilskii
ten
pfiffii
two
t^a-kamnlskii-lri
eleven
gntsk
three
h-n-knmnl.skii-iM'ili.i
twelve
mala
tour
jH'l^nt.in Miitska
twenty
tanka
live
uilra.iii mulskii
thirty
trnnuin or t-inmaii
six
ma/iis'i mntskii
forty
kdtsipiis
seven
la/ikuxn iitalskii
lifty, iVc
puasa
ei^!ht
jiatiika (?)
hundred
tfiffn
nine
The last word is, perhaps, borrowed from the Araurano, hut its origin in Ixith Ian-
j5uag&s is uncertain. In Spanish, it is the imiiie of a coin.
S U T II K R X A V W I C A.
DlKlMO uiir Htny iit Itio J.im.'iro, tin o|i|Hirtiiiiily ullrrcd iil'oliliiliiin^ Iniiii the imlivcn nf
Afrion, who art! tii lie round llirrr, viH-nliiiliirici* oi' mwrml lnii);iiiigcii siHikcn in Ihe
sonllirrn purl of lliiit nmlincnl. Sdiiii' of Ihrsc wcri', Irinn llic rirciinistiiiircH niider
whicli llicy wcrr liikrn, ncccssiirily liricriind iin|i«'rli'rl ; ollicrs, for wliicli we liiicl bcltiT
lldvllntn^t'l<, W(-rt' orconxidrriilili- Icii^tli. It was iit lirst iiili'iidrd li> |>iililisli iIicmi cnliri';
IiiiMIm! ncPf'Haity of cdiiipri'ssin^ our iiintcriiils, and tlic cxpcrlatinii that (lie lalKnirN nf
tlio niisKioniirics who arc now rstalilislii'd in tlial ipiarli'r will sjiorlly sii|H'rsi'du all oilier
sdiin'rs of liifDrnialion on llils siilijcct, have dt'liTinincil us In imiil llir ^iralcr portion,
and to ({ivc nii'ri'ly a coniparalivi- list of llio principal wiirds,HutIicii>iil to show the general
siniilarily wliicli prevails ainonu llic lan^ua^cs of this rcniou.
I'roni a I'oinparisou of our vocaliuliiri<'s wjili hiIiits alri'ndy published, two itillrcucrs
may Ik' deduced, one of wliicli is already familiar to cllino;;raplii'rs, while the second has
not, so far as we are inforinrd, lieeii as yet ihstiin'tly staleil. The first is, that from the
cijualor lo latitude '.W south, the conlinent of Africa is occupied liy a Mingle jK'opIn,
s|H'akini; dialects of one jieneral lannua(,'i'. St-condly, it appears that this ^'eneral Ian-
);ua<;i', or rather liiniily ol' i-o;;iiate lan^iia^es, lias two distinct sulHlivisions, which may
Ik! eiitilled (I) the r'«/ij,'«-.1/(M//((,aiid (-') the C'iiffri(iiiiii,riii\i inciudinjj under it Severn!
dialects, or minor divisions.
Of the viH-nhiilarics which we );ive, all hut the first Im<Ioii^ to triln's livini; south of
the eijuator. The /-'//<> or Ad^'ii laii)j;uaj;e is spoken liy a numerous [M'ople, who inhabit
lli}< coast of Guinea, in aliout latitude 5° north, not fur from the m<iulh of iIk' ({uorra or
Nij;er. They prolmhiy liorder iininediately upon llie norlhi'rnmost Iriln's of the South-
African stock, and the vocalmlary of their language is valunhle as showing the distinct-
ness of the two rac-cs.
Of the r(;nnainin); vocaliiilaries, all but one IxMong to the Coiiuo-Miikiii branch of the
fwHtth-African family. The exception is the JSi/iiniUitia, which is a Cnllre dialect. We
proceed to give some e.xplanation of the iianics here used.
llndcr the term C'oiigo,wv include all tlie nations who inhabit what is sumetinies called
105
6as
II I I. (I l.iHI Y
J.imrr tiiiiiiiii, — th'il k, iIh' wr«liTli rimii iil" Alrii'ii, iViiin llif •■ijiiiilcir In llir nmnlrv ol"
iIh' llciliiiiliil!!. 'I'lii- |iriii<'i|iiil iiri', — lii'i;iiitiiMH rrcini llir imrlh, — (I) iIh' hiimf'ini/n, hIih
livi- iiiirlh i.r III!' Xiiirc iir Chiiko K vi-r, U'lwi'i'ii llii- t'luiiilnr iiiiil laliliiili' I' wuitlii ('i)
the MiiHiljiilii, II miviiKi- irilm in ihn inlpriiir, wi'il «iC tin' Kiiniliinilii i (!•) Ihi' I'lDigii
|iri>|K>r, or II urrm niiij.in cKTiipyiim « <''"ieilry wliJrh ixlrmU iiIhiiiI Iwn ImiiilriMJ inili'x
rniiii iKirtli 111 •tiMilh, Ixlmiii ihr Ziiirc ninl lliimli' Hivrrt; (I) \\v AiiitJit nr Ai/inw//,
wliii ililialiil II mirnm >.lri|i xl'liiiiil mi llir riiii.<l, IkIwci'ii ;t ' iiiiil It" iil\cpnlli liililiiili', wlirn-
lliiy iiri' niilijiv I til III)' I'lirliiyiirtr, liiit ill III!' iiilrriiir iirr N|ir<iiil hut ii liirui" li'rnlnry,
ruriniii;{ nil iiiili'iuiKlnii iiii,| iuiwitIiiI |Mn|ilfj niid (.'i) llir Ihiifsiiaor lliiiu"'/<i, *i>"
l>i«<c>ti i||i> ri.iiiilry miiiiIi uI" iIh- Aii)(iiIii, I'xii'iiiliiix In llir Hiinily iji'wrl mIiIcIi iii'|mriilc»
llii'in rriiiii Ih)' llolii'iitiiU,
Tin- Miikiiii iin, 111! ihr I'llMli'rn i-onxl, Hlinl llir ('mi;;.! luilinii in on llir writ, — llii- iiiiiHt
lliinicriiiH iiiiil iBiwirliil ("oplr kiiimii In iih ; iiml llifir iiaiiir lias ilirriliirr Nrii iimiI, in
till' xamr iiiailiirr, In iji-sigiiati' all llir Iriln's s|M'al\ilit{ rn^jnali' liill;.'iia)(rii, tViaii tlir
Siiwairl nr Snwniili, iirar iIh' ri|iiatiir, In llii- Siil'iila, in laliliiili- 'H^ smiili. 'I'lir |iriiiri|ial
III llii'«> an' (1) llir MiiKiin |irn|M'r, wlm iK'nipy an <'Xlrn»ivi' ri'ifinii Im-Iwii'II iIim lulilinJcN
10" niiJ 'Jd-" wiiiili; {'.') ilii' Mh'/jii/iii, wlin an' K|in'ail n\rr llir inlrriiir ol' llir ninlinrnl,
to lh«' niirili niiil nortliwi'si nrihc Mitkim ; (Jl) iIm' Makomlr, uImi iiii jnlrrior irilip, whnw
rniinlry stn'tcln-s inwariN llir li-rrilnry nl' lIu' Ifc-iiu'rra mi lliii H<'<ili'rii I'oasl. Tin'
'IhkiriDii, MiisDiii, anil Siitii/ii ilialrciN, nrwlin li viHaliiilan''i( arr ninii, an' M|iciki'n liy
IrilK'* nl'ilir <tnullii'rn Makiia, wlm iiilialiil iIk' n'^'imi wairnil liy llir ({rrat rivrr /ainln'/.r.
Till' Irriii Ciilln' nr Katir is nl' Aniliir ilrrivalinn, iiicaiiiii},' infiihl. Il wan riii|ilnyi'il
liy thr Ariili wlllrrson llir I'aslrrn niii«l of Al'rira In ili'si^nalr all tlir [iiiKaii uiiil liarlui-
mus nolivrx. Fnnn llicni, tlir l'ortii|2iirw iHirniUi'il the a|i|H'llatliiii, wliii'li.nH tlir |>M|H'r
mill purliciilar nnnii'M nt° iIk' variniiN iriln's lirrnnir kimwii, )(raiiiiaMy IimI its ^nirral
xiunitii'atinn, anil is iinw n'strii-tnl to a iliHlinrt riass nl' irilicH who inlialiit llie i-oiinlry
lii'tHrrii llir Makiia mi llir iinrlll iiliil tlir ilnllriitolN mi the miiiIIi, iiiiiI who ililU'r siilli-
rirntly I'min llir nllirr alxirii;inrs In ilrwrvr a s|H'i'ial ili'Hiijnalinn, Thi'y arc ^rnrrnliy
•ilrnilcr ami wrlUniuilr, with liiri'M |Nirtnkin|^' sli^hiiy of iho Moorish rust. Tlirir rnlor
is a yrilowish-hniwii, Im-iwii'Ii that oflhr miilattu mid tht^ trui* iM'Kru. Tim iniiiv im no:
iniirh ilr|irrsiNil, Ihr lips arr ratlirr tliii'k, llir ryr lur);r, hliirk, unit hrii^ht, uiiil tlir hair
woolly.
Srvrrai trilM-s nl" ihis |H'o|iIi' an' known lo iin Trnni thr aiToiinls of Iravrllrrs atiil mis-
Minnaries. Thr mnst nntnl an' thr Mii-liiiana, in llir iiitrrinr, iinrlli nl'ihr lloiirntols, anil
thr Koossus or CalFn's prnpiT, with thr Snohihs or Zulu, ililiahiliiiH tin" I'oast Ix.'twrrn thr
cohinial si'ttlrnirnts nnil Iwijjna Hay, in Intiluilr 'Jlf south. Of thr |i<'n|ilr who oi'('ii|iy Ihr
I'ounlry lirtwiiii Ihis hay anil ihr I'ortiiL'iirsr sraport ol" Soralii, »r havr hilhrrlo hail no
(ircoiiiit. Tli'V arr rallnl .\'i/ii»iIkihii, or, as ihr I'orlii^iirsr writr il, lii/uimlm/ir, anil
il is of ^lirir laii;{iiair<' that a s|,r<iinrii is imw (jivrn. A viK-nhiilary ol" srvrrai liiiliiln><l
words was nhtaitlnl, — hut, I'nr Ihr rra.ons U'liirr iiirntionrd, il is ninillrd. Thr Ainrriran
inissiiKiarirs, who havr ri'crntly rniniiirni'rd tlirir lalxirs in Ihr Zulu rniintry, havr
nlnNiily liirmrd a ^ranimnr and dirtioiiary nl' that lnn^llagr, whirh it is In Im! Iio|x'i| will
b<' |)ublishiil. Thr Zulu wnnls whirh nn' (jivrn lo show thr similarity iK'twcrii thai
toniiur and thr .Nyamhann, arr takm I'nmi a vix'aliiilary rompilnl hy thr |{iv. II. J.
Vpnablo, and now in the possi'«.sir> if tlio Missionary Xoaril, to whoso liivor wr owr llir
j.jn-iim' -j- j«. <
H OUT UK R.N AFRICA.
nft!)
ii|i|xirinniiy iil' cint'iiltin;: ii. 'I'll" llirhiiiiiiii «iiril« iirii |inr(ly (Venn the mmr «<iiir<'<', Imi
|iriiici|inllv rniiii lliiri'lic>ll'« 'rriivrln.
II Mill Ih' m'I'ii iIiiiI th<' ('iiirniriiiii Innuurn iljllir I'roin llxixi' ut' thr I 'on|{<>>Miil(iin ilivi-
moll, mil iiiily jii iiiiiii) wonlo, liiil in llif ki'MitiiI rlniriirlrr nf llii' prMiiuiii'lnlinii, Tlir
fiiriiKT linvi' Hi'vcriil hiir'<li I'li'iiirnlH nnil rninliiiKitiiniK wliic |i lur iiiikiiouii In tlii' liilttr.
Amiiii^ tlic'M' Ih iIic t/l, uliirli wi' (irMl Iwiinl IVcimi iIhwi' niiiivi», niid wliicli wiin iilli'r-
wnrili liiiiiicl Hii I'diiiiiinii ill llii' liiiiijiiiiKi'x cil' NcirlliHi'ulirii Aimru'ii.
It 14 nut iiii|>ri'luil>l<' lliiit till' iH'i'iilliiritii'x, Imlli in llii> liiiiuiiii;;rs iiiiil In tlii' |iliyMii'iil
clinraclrrixlirH nl'llii' ('iillVr irilnH, iii'iy Iji- (liii' In mii.n' iiiliriiilMiiri' v»illi tlic ni inlilxiriii«
llotlmtolit. 'I'liii liittrr an* miiil III hnvi! liiriiH'rly >M'i'ii|>ii'>l niiicli nl' tlir miintry mm in
liiMiu'NHiiin III' till' liiriniT. UhIiiIimI liiniilits iiml IiiiiiiIh nl' thi'ni iiri' slill ((iiiiiil liy inivil.
Irrt in lliiH rrKiiiii. '""I "f Mii|i|«iM'ii In Ih- llif ri'inniinli mI' ihc iiri;!iii!il |iii|iiiliiliiiii, nC
mIiii'Ii ill)' ^ri'iiliT (iiirl liiii Ih-iii rillirr iili^nrlN li i> ilrivrii HoiilliunriU liv llir iiilvniii'in|r
licinli'" III < 'all'rrH.
III till' liill'mliiu viH'iilMiliirIrN, many nl' iIh' unriU iirr iml civin in lliiir siinpli' nr
ItriHiiiil-rnnii, lull liiivi' II |iiirtirli' jirrfixi'il. This ii|i|H'iirH in itimc i'iiw'n In uliicli llii- Iwn
nmnlwTH an- (jivin. 'I'liim llir |iriip<T wnnl liir nir, in llic ('nniiii nnd (iIIiit lanuimHi'i, is
tu, nlllkin^ in lli uisiriirt li>rin of llif ninj^iilar kulii, iiiiil in llii> plnrnl vialii. Ah Ihrir
pri-rivil |iarliili'» nrim liiki' llir an rnl, Il is, in many ciim'h, inipiiNNlliji' In ilislinunlsli Ihrm
rrniii llii' ro'l, uillimit u iiiiiri' arriiriilr kliiivtli'il);i' nl' tlir lnii;:iia);<'H than wr havr the
iiH'iint nl'iiri|iilrin;;. OIiIh' ('1111^11 anil Annnlii lnnt.'iii's, (jraiiiniar'. Iiavr Ihi'Ii imlilnhril
Ity iho I'atliiilir inisHiniiarirK; Iml tln'V iiri' imt In Iw rmiiiil in iIh- llhraricH nriliis rniintry.
ami iinr I'liili'avnri in nlilain ihrin I'miii Kiirii|N' Imvi' Imi'ii iinsin HNfiil, Tlii' |Ki)isi>H»i(in
nrihfw- wiiiilil linvi' rnuhli'il uh tn cnrrccl any I'rnirH which may cxixl in onr vncaliularicN
(if tliiwi' lannnii)!!'* i Iml llii'V arr iK'lirvi'il ihil In Ik: viiry iiiimrrniiH nr iin|i(irtanl. Snnio
allnwanri'H kIiiuiIiI Ih' iniiilc liir llii' ilitli'rcni'rN of ilialrrt whiih iniiHt lie I'uuild in a ru^inii
ol'mirh I'Xicnt n« that imcii|iIi'iI liy iIh'w iwn niilliuiK.
lino.
aiiviiii.
Mll<l.
••
Hyc.
iilili,<l, nliuiiit)
itlniiiii) (')
nkiim'
•1
Kamliinila
iiidinhi.iimiwii
JII
Zulu
iiikn/ii
•A.
Miinilinia
iiilii
nk%tn
luiiii, /huh
4.
Ciiii^n
ziiml'i
iiixriiy :ulu
i/iikit/a ; zuMru
5.
.\nijnla
tt:iiin/n.iitiipiini:r4
it/ii
ilinln
It.
ll.iij;i'm
,l,<
l/u
iiniiiir ; i4iuHw.
1 .
Makiia
III II Ink II
miinmu
lllll/o/lOilllil
H.
Mniljann
lllllluil)>ll
kiiiiiiDir
Dill u nil
11.
Miiknnilo
III III. sit III II II a II
ihkunii
iiimiliinir
111.
'I'akwaiii
iiiii/unffi
11:11/11
tiiiiMioilHii, niiMi-
muiia
II
.Masma
iizimii (f)
tizimii
mmmiiiin
12.
i^njiilli
miihinu"
It 11 III II
iiioiDiiiinii
13.
Nyaiiilmna
jiikiffiiifn', froiii/m
ilt/ii, rt'inuiHii
U'lllltltllt
(a.)
Zi'ilii
Slllllll, llli/ll
I'Zu/ll
iiidinlii., umtu
(1..)
Itlcliiiana
miiniiiii
l)i)i;oriino, nnuiro
IHOHIIIIU
660
liyo
Knmbindn
Mundiolii
Congo
Angola
BpngL-rn
Makua
Miuljana
Mnkondc
Tiikwnni
Mnscna
Solala
Nynnibnna
Zulu
Bicliuana
Eyo
KandiinHa
Minidjola
Congo
Angola
B<'ng<ra
Maknn
Miidjnna
Makondc
T.'ikuani
Mascna
Sofula
PUILOLOU Y.
WOMAN.
obioie
iikitu, nk&nW
miikahu
miikftu
mu/iflit
ukdgi
miitiala
tiiiikitiifiiii
miikongOe
mkazi
iikitzi
viknri
iiaiisate
sckazi
masari
tt/a
mama ,
ntuiiKi
nuiiiia, /igrximi
monia, njiniii
mtii
iniiniti, niiii
itmttit
Vlll/ll
ni^mii
muu
'.".■jwa
Cllll.l'.
FATIIKK.
avui-kekeri
Imlid
moaiHi
tiltu
moana
UUti.
moana
Mi, sdme
modna
tula, at; -i
vmdne ; mndle
tdU
maitia
till
motindt^i
atdti
nindtKi
a/aIr
modna
IhiIxi
miMina
tdUi, /mba
moaijono
lata, Ixtba
ntopwaf/dna ardra
umtuiina bal>o, uitf.lo
nant/adnii, ijuana ia/.o, luiia
aba
HEAD.
oruo
funUxntsi lu
miDiuo molur
soma, pitDilKi-sumlHi mii/ituc
mi/ctie/i^i niiiliie
osoma iiliic
ohiimii-moe/ii iiiiini
msiviic-kiiiaiiilKi mutni'
mulienga iiiii/iir
mafumii miisom
mfiimu, mdm/ju soro or so/o
grimi-ku/iiimandtn .soro, msolro
Nvanibnna
iiiatnam, rnyin
iliimsi
ifloko
Ziilii
ma, itii/oha, nnenn
iijkosi
rkiiiita
Biclmnna
tna, nia/.o
khiisi
ko/.n, l/.lof.o
HAIR.
KVE — EVEfl.
EAR— EAHS.
Kyo
Fniij
iiilifd
cU
Katnlilnda
Isiiki
tbsil — VDSU
kulii — miilit
Miindjola
Vlfll
— milt II
— matijUi
Congo
tsiiki, mit.\i>iL'ii
i/.sii — mimi
kiifu — tnatii
Angola
zindemlxi
lisu — maltsu
ihtui — matiii
Bengera
kisdme
tsu — odsu
okiiliii — oattii
Makua
kdrdrii ; milti
Itlu — mitu
maiit — mdru
Mudjana
iim/jo
dizit — mrzii
ilikulii
SOUTHERN AFRICA.
6G1
luia.
r.tE— Kres.
rAK— KARS.
Mjikoiulc
oliiiln
— iiirho
kulii — iiiiikiilii
Takwiini
mitlili
di/ii — iiirtii
— miini
Mnsoiin
msiiiisi, tstsi
dixii — muau
— iiiiikiilii
SolHIn
iMsi
diiiii — iiiiilsii
n ; it lie — iiiukiiliw
Nyninbnna
inlsiiii
r/i/.lii — emii/.lii
iisi IT — liiikivr
Xiilii
ifSiicli
lino — amet/.h
iiit/.lilic
Bielitiaim
miirir, morin
lit/Jo
Ixr'f
Nme.
MnlTll.
rEETll.
Eyo
OIIIUI)
fIlUt)
•pi
Kainbinda
mlmngo
una
HUH II
Mumljoln
niai/idu
nlfHlHlXIIU
III III II
Coiigi)
>Niii/u/u
HI II mill, ome/a
lllt'lll'
Angola
moziilii
kniioa
iiui : II
Bi'iigora
ctuftnj
omtra
')ii-»ii/ii
.Miikiin
jnila
laiio, mnlakii
miiiii
Mudjnna
hlpiila
jHikuHoa
ininu
Mnkoiidc
cmiila
kaijirit
menu
Tnkwaiii
miilii
miiliniiii
menu
.Miiscnu
mp'hitnH
iiiidiiiiiii
iiunii
Sufiila
biihuna
nioiomo
munii
Xynmtjann
iiiofo, iiioijfi)
'■/»»««
••minyii, mutiiiu
Zulu
impiiDiiilo
inoloiiin, itiithniifi
iziiiio
Hicliuuna
iinko
iiio/oiiio, kuaiiu
menu, mi no
TONGUI.
BEARD.
xrCK OR THROAT.
Eyo
iigo
uraliii
llllllll
Kiunhinda
kizH-n
fiiiiao
Mtiniljolii
lilimii
iidtlii
iiktii
Congo
luka, itdakti
'htvii, miuzi
frmao
Angola
/iiiii, iliiiii
iiiiiivii, tiiiiizi
;iiigo
litMigcra
ilimi, ekkah
OiiMuiiie
■isingo
Mokua
hmi
'■rori
••siko
Mudjnna
III I nut
iideii
liikozi
Mnkondo
dn-ii, crtlii
i;u/u
'l\ik\vnni
iin/iimi
diiidilm
■•koti
Mast-nn
II hmi
tidev' or iidevf
kosiii
.Sofala
ilidiiiiii
.kv'
kozi
Nyanitjana
diniim
iirdirju
II kit/ II
Zi'ilu
iiilrvii, isilevii
iiithimo
Dicliuana
tuUme
levu
166
ihainn
662
PHI J. O LOGY.
Eyo
IIAXD.
tm
Kiimbinda
kaiiiliise
kaht
Mumljola
niion!!i>
hik,
liilnniii
( 'orij^o
mo'iionito, miionsjola
liikakii
omai
Angola
ittionfio
kiioku
kimiimi
BiMigera
oni/tiiia
rka
oriijmi, oniiiialii
Mnkua
etuli
iitata
tij/aii, iiifa, u6
Mudjana
nwaoiign, kiimtiima
iliadsa
liikoyi)
Mnkonde
tllOlliiO
tllOIIII
tiicilo
Takwaiii
oiluni
koiiH
m'llii
Ma.«cna
kntsii/t
M;,' (!)
iiiuleii»r
Sorala
Uii/sii/f
Irillltll
fiimiiila
Nyambann
i/./iiiia, ciii/i/nkii
iivkn, iiiainkiii
vcn^e
Zulu
uiiilfjiinn
esiiiil/.lii.
inytio, loin/no
Bichuana
mokiit)l/li
iitf.lii
loiiait
llnnT.
IIOKB.
BLOOD.
Eyo
aija
egu
egV*
Kambiiida
MiMidjola
makila
Congo
iiCti^imas iithuiido
tliii^i
snnii, me null
Angola
tnii^iiiiii
ijiij'iiii
meiia
Bt'iigera
iitimu
ekipii
Miikiia
tiniiiiiiii
uikura
pomi, nikiimi
Miiiijaim
III III} mil
miitzi
Makomie
hintllllil
tnairofifrou
tiiiailt
Tnkwani
tiliiiiii, miidi/ii
tiinfiiWo
muJovu
Mnsona
III lit i Dill , iiioio
Jiijiii
molofm
Sofala
utiiriiiiii
/«P«
niolnjHi
Nynnibnnn
rliii^ixi
niarambu
ii^ati
Zulu
flizii'
rill III pi 1
inkiisi
Bichuana
julll
/fSll/IO
man'
HKN.
fjin — (uua.
»VAKF.
Eyo
edi/f
fpe
f'lh/ii
Kambinda
Mundjola
titrilhll
In
Congo
tSll/tll
ilin/i — iiuif.i
tii/okii
Angola
siiii/i-iiiiikii/i
rill — iiiiii
m/okii
Bungcra
iiili — miiiidii
Makua
/flkii, liliuilftkn
/I lit/ III — iiioli/i
niHi
Mudjana
l/iilllliknlo
iiiitziia
(lii/okii
SOUTHERN AFRICA.
fifi3
IIKX,
Eiiii — r.cifl».
flNAKE.
Mnkondo
ei/iikii
tfjiika
Tiikn'nni
Mascnii
iihiikii
tizae — nwc
nzoka
So (hill
Nyiinibana
ihukii-yfnua
nut nth a — imiiii iitla
iiii/oku
Zulu
iijknkii-kiizi
ii/iiiilti
iin/okn
nicluiana
koki<
Isai
tw/.a
ox.
TRKF..
■I'.N.
liyo
amjii
ei/i, ij-i
oil nil
Kuinbindn
miiiiii
Miindjola
mpnJui
w/ii/ji
mui
Congo
iiiiomlii
mi'iti
imiim/i, kiiniln
Angola
iiiidnilri
«JH/jI
muani/a, kumlii
Bcngcra
on/:onihi
uli
iitdiii/u
Makua
eijnmpi, nari
iiiiin
iiSua, fulji'Ki
MuHjnna
ndijali
vMrii
/iutra, diiiira
Mnkondo
l/6mbi
iitera
didulm
Takwnni
liziia
Masoiia
j/OHllli
tntili
dziia
Sofoln
tiztia
Nyombana
timlriire, tihtima
dinhi, cntji.Uiri
amuiitii
Zulu
inko/ir
imiti
i/aiika
Bicliunna
koiiio
iMka, sel/ilara
ktsatse
MOON.
STAR.
OAV.
Eyo
U^u
rras')
orsdij, edyii
Knmliinda
tigoamle
Mundjola
>it^-i'ii
gKiDjHn
knram&i
Congo
ns&nife, mbrji
tdenilriihi
kiliimhi
Angola
mhji
ttilemlkm
kizua
Hcngprn
ixKii, iitfke
olomlmii!;iilti
Makun
mi(Ori
ntoiilfxi, ileiifri
ohiisd, otuiiii
Mudjana
miirti
mionifmi
mmzi, kuntai'i
Makonde
nifk'/fi
dinotigoe
Tnkwani
mofri
maliilo
Mnsona
twxzui
sigati
Sofala
mofzi
Nyambana
goentle
rliaisitrdi
et/Jikimri
Zulu
iiii/apka
inkiiin/tsi
asiiko
nii'luinna
ngiieri
iinlcri
moty^la, iimisi
664
P II I L O I. O G V.
Byo
NIfillT. RAIN*
tie
Kninbiiida
t6tO
Miiiuljohi
mpulii
mvola
Wf»
Congo
taiigOfu
mvfild, hiild
imiiitio
Angoln
itsuku
mviila
mdva
Bengnru
(>jt, eur
Miikua
ohiu/tt, ohi'i/ii
cpfila
eld id
Miidjaim
Lira, t^ilo
ilia
(lildka
AInkondc
tpra
m'liigii
p6hi
Tnkwiini
Imla
vati
Masenn
nyctiytzui
mviira
mdhvii, pdtisi
Sofnin
jMiisi
NyaiiilMina
vasikii, mtiliii
mfiiia, nifii/a
iiicsdira
Zulu
ubiisiikii
imviiUi, lieta
eliziii, lepitfisc
Bichunnn
lxisi/.o
piila, ana
leliatsi
WATKR.
nil.
aTONE.
Eyo
omi
imoij
okiitd
Knml>inila
mnzii
tuia
Mundjola
nuijd
mid
Congo
mdza
tOia
Uili
Angola
mfui
fdia
diinrc
Bcngera
mcimit
nmldlu
futce
Makna
imifi, »i(iri
mom, tnttdnt
mnala, nldkii
Mudjana
mfsi
motii
rlii'dnaa
Makondc
mtti
inotii
mayanga
Takwani
mdsi
mdlu
Masena
mddzi
miidto, muli/o
hutve
Sofa In
mdtsi
nioto
Nyambnna
iiuili
iizih, iii/iro
maribuv
Zulu
■imanzt
muli/o
'>
Richuann
iiir/xi
mulrln
leiicli III'
PATH.
HOUIK.
DKAII.
Eyo
litta
•/fe
uka
Kambinda
fon,/iiuli
Mundjola
njd
odkda
Congo
iinjiUi
md
OdftMl
Angola
miim/ji/ti
iizd, ii/izii
onfoa
Bengera
ondjila
niifljo, xnilio
Makua
iipini-mpati
'»ij)d, niipn
nkwa
Mudjana
(liUtla
injiim/jo
atrile, attire
SOUTHERN AFRICA.
665
I
MM.
II0U8K.
MUD.
Mnkoiido
epiindi
ndiifa
Tukwnni
tii/iimlia
Maarna
iizira
in/fimlm
kii/a, iiJ'Oa
Sofala
nijumlm
Nyambona
tigflii
i>it/.la, ingii, iingio
kufa, v/ile
Zulu
iiil/.Ma
int/.la
oftiy liiila
Bichuaoa
tselu
ontyu, einl^la
■shiia, liiirlii
TO KAT,
TO DBINK.
ost
Eyo
ounilidU
Oti
€11 11/
Knmbinda
mini
Mun<ljola
into
( 'lingo
itUa
iiioa
itwsi
A ngola
kutlia, ki'illa
nkoloa, yiigoii
Viori
Bcngcrii
mosi
Mnkun
tititnidgi
idinpahi/a
mnt/i/a
Mucljann
iukiili
kiiijmi
ifiiiio, liimo
Mnkonilu
kulia
numlnrv
moi/i, vioji
Tnkwniii
wmi, tniifi
Mnsona
kiifh'i
kiiina
pnsi
Sofnin
fHisi
Nyiimbnnn
taf/ia, Idgia
tnnon
fii litre
y.nUi
flla
vatd, puza
koeiiye
Bichuana
ya or xn
110(1
mangehrla, iiioesi
TWO.
TllHEK.
FOl'R.
Eyo
tgi
ita
eli
Kambinda
u>/i
tutu
tyn
Mundjola
bieie
liitfdit
Una
Congo
Villi
tutu
kirana
Angola
kiadi, tali
tutu
iriiiia
Flcngeru
Villi
tutu
ktvntia
Makua
nUili, jii/i
viarnru
mapfje
Mudjana
^'rtl■i/•^ eviri
sntdtii
mutyetyc
Makondc
ividi
itiit.a
ilyetye
Takwoni
mili, vtri
virarii
vinai
Mascna
piri
tiitu
kiiia
iSofula
1)1 ri
talu
?iai
Nyambana
pirire
ftiiiiiro, tinhiiio
giiniinc
Zulu
miihini
VKiChatii (?)
ine, vtani
Bichuana
peri
Iitrii
167
ini, niie
666
I' n 1 1, o L o r. Y.
rivE.
•i>.
•ITtfC.
Eyo
filup
>'"/"
eihjf
Kainbinda
tliHU
samlMtHU
siiin/)iiiila
Mundjola
hituiiu
bisieiimii
til^iimu
Congo
tiiiiii
nmsamlHttiii
lltSlllll/uMtlli
Angola
til II II
samaiiH
samlHMiiH
Rongera
taint
piiiiilii
]Hiiiiliiii/i
Makua
tnatnnu
vuUdnii tin iii tiioilya
iiiatiiHii nil id m
Muiijnnu
miaanu
mzanai/i mo iiinli
mziiimzimri
Miikondo
tihi/aiiu
vitiinu nil iiinsi
vitiinii na viri
Tukuani
vilunii
iihi/uiiii nil iiioji
nhi/iiiiii mi iviili
Mnsenu
Sllllll
iiiiholu
kinoiiie
Kiilnln
j(Ih;<
titnlintii
ti^inoiiii'
Nynmhiimi
nkiiiio
ukiiitai/una
nkitnntivrre
Zulu
t/./niiu
isitiipn
kiimlrini
Kiohimna
t/.hii), t^anii
yatarii
iujxt
ElUHT.
NINK.
T«.V.
Eyo
eili/o
esiiy
nrii
Kainl>iii(Ju
IIUIIII
twd
kit mi
Miitidjnia
mpiio
WMrci
kiimi
Congo
iimitiu
avoa
kii'ni, ktnni
Angola
iiiiki
ivoa
kiimi
Reiigera
kir/iiiiiii
kirkiii
km
Mukiia
miUanii iKiiii nuiraru nuUiinii iiii ni mni^v^e muloka
Mudjana
mzanazitiUu
tnz(iiiaiiiti/iti/e
i/iktimi
Mukondo
vitaiiu Ml virArii
vilaiiii nil vi/ini
miikfwii
Tukwani
tihi/iDiii mi itiilii
nhyaiiii iiii iti/iti/e
kuini
Ma.'w'na
sire
fimlKi
kiimi
Hiilula
ifre
ftlll/nl
kiimi
Nyumbanri
iikiimUiiiaro
nkaimmune
ikumi
Zulu
/muiHifto'ia meiiim-
tolni no mont/i
/.limr ( ')
Bichuana
liina
hem mriioiimt iiielicri hira mnnoana tnon- /.iimr, ^iiiiie
aehria
T II K EN I).